DECEMBER 2012 VOLUME 27, NUMBER 6
Incorporating SciTech Book News
The Bibliography of New Scholarly Books
MUSEUMS
AM7 978-1-84383-727-5
Museums and biographies; stories, objects, identities.
Title main entry. Ed. by Kate Hill (Heritage matters)
Boydell & Brewer, ©2012 338 p. $99.00
The latest entry in this excellent series from the International Centre For
Cultural & Heritage Studies at Newcastle University, this collection of
essays about museums is edited by Kate Hill (history, U. of Lincoln, UK).
Its central theme is the idea of museums as tellers of stories. Therefore,
the essays investigate the connection between museums and biographies.
In her introduction, Hill identifies three basic types of biographies: of
people, of things, and of relationships. The book’s first section looks at
relationships between individual people’s biographies and the histories of
museums they’re associated with. The second looks at hidden or ques-
tioned biographies: women of influence in museums, and an interesting
anonymized study of curators at the Victoria and Albert Museum. The
third sections look at institutional biographies: the stories of museum
buildings. The fourth looks at biographies of objects: a set of Buddhist
bronzes, a set of racial type portrait sculptures, the history of a red
feather cape. The fifth looks at museums which function biographically:
houses of famous writers, Alexandre Lenoir’s Museum of French
Monuments. And the final section looks at autobiography: autobio-
graphical museums, how individual autobiographies are used to tell
history in museums, and biographies that communities create of them-
selves for museum display. The book ends with a reflective essay in a
postmodernist tradition. Its style is different from the scholarly but acces-
sible tone of the rest of the book, where the writing style of academic
history is leavened by direct conversation with the reader, photographs,
and, of course, a focus on telling stories.
AM139 2012-452168 978-1-84334-637-1
Records management for museums and galleries; an
introduction.
Brunskill, Charlotte and Sarah R. Demb. (Chandos information profes-
sional series)
Chandos Publishing, ©2012 259 p. $85.00 (pa)
Brunskill (Paul Mellon Centre) and Demb (Museum of London) explain
the reasons to conduct a records survey in the museum environment,
describe the different survey methods, and outline the steps for devel-
oping a file plan and record retention schedule. The opening chapters
review the history of recordkeeping in British museums, records man-
agement concepts, the business case for records management, and legis-
lation. A risk assessment template, business case examples, and sample
data protection policies are provided in the appendices. Distributed in the
U.S. by Neal-Schuman.
PHILOSOPHY
B20 99-066878 978-1-889680-88-0
Selected papers from the XXII World Congress of
Philosophy; proceedings.
World Congress of Philosophy (22d: 2008: Seoul, Korea) Ed. by Tian Yu
Cao. (Journal of Philosophical Research; special supplement)
Philosophy Documentation Ctr., ©2012 426 p. $35.00 (pa)
This collection offers three dozen essays which are selections from the
XXII World Congress of Philosophy, also known as “the Olympic Games
of Philosophy.” Well over a thousand philosophers participated, allowing
for a great diversity of topics: rethinking moral, social and political
–1–
ISSN 0887-3763
philosophy; rethinking metaphysics and aesthetics; rethinking
epistemology, philosophy of science, and technology; rethinking history
of philosophy and comparative philosophy; bioethics, environmental
ethics, and future generations; globalization and cosmopolitanism;
conflict and tolerance; eastern and western perspectives on tradition,
modernity, and post-modernity; and philosophy in Korea. It was an
international conference organized in part by the Fédération Internationle
des Sociétés de Philosophie, so most sections have at least one essay in
French. There is no index.
B29 2012-007912 978-1-60384-743-8
Classics of Western philosophy, 8th ed.
Title main entry. Ed. by Steven M. Cahn.
Hackett Publishing Co., ©2012 1366 p. $48.00 (pa)
This volume collects dozens of complete philosophical texts and many
substantial selections from other texts. It is a very efficient collection,
with 60 authors (all of them men) representing 2,500 years of Western
philosophy. At the beginning of each author’s section is a page of intro-
duction. The collection contains several intellectual moments and pre-
occupations. Represented are classical Greek and roman philosophers
(Plato and Aristotle), Roman stoics and skeptics (e.g. Epictetus and Sextus
Empiricus), neoplatonists and scholastics (e.g. Plotinus and Aquinas),
rationalists and empiricists (e.g. Spinoza and Hobbes), German Idealists
(e.g. Hegel and Kant), utilitarians and pragmatists (e.g. Mill and James),
phenomenologists (e.g. Husserl, existentialists (Kierkegaard and Sartre)
and philosophers of language (Wittgenstein and Austin). The text is
organized more like a reference rather than a pedagogic text, though foot-
notes at the bottom do help with references non-introduced ideas and his-
torical particulars. There is no index.
B52 2011-046918 978-1-4411-9360-5
Why think?; philosophical play from 3 to 11.
Stanley, Sara.
Continuum Publishing Group, ©2012 244 p. $32.95 (pa)
Sara Stanley, a teacher at Sparhawk Infant and Nursery School, offers an
innovative approach to incorporating philosophy into the curriculum of
early childhood education. This program she calls Philosophy for
Children (P4C). She advocates focusing on fine tuning listening and
speaking skills, asking questions and challenge answers, exploring both
sides of arguments, turning statements into questions, and more. She
explains how to cultivate a resource bank of toys that will be good for
philosophical play, while also arguing for the importance of play in child
learning. She introduces concepts in structuring a learning environment
for philosophical exploration. She uses case-studies and dialogs and sto-
ryboards throughout the text. Online resources (e.g. templates of mate-
rials described in the book) extend the usefulness of this text.
B105 2011-501199 978-1-4411-5272-5
Philosophy and the return of violence; studies from this
widening gyre.
Title main entry. Ed. by Nathan Eckstrand and Christopher Yates.
Continuum Publishing Group, ©2011 221 p. $110.00
This collection of 13 essays presents recent philosophical scholarship on
questions of violence, political order, ethics, identity, and language. They
are organized into three sections that begin by examining the intersection
of philosophical vigilance and political necessity. The second section
examines the roots of violence along borders of identity, otherness,
friendship and enmity. The last section considers what’s at stake in the
violence/non-violence distinction and how this structures political action
and resistance. Specific essays explore how “anarchist politics can counter
the deadlocked drift toward passivity in the face of systemic violence and
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
political antagonism,” formulating an existential anthropology of vio-
lence, violence and the language of human rights, a Foucauldian analysis
of “how power kills,” and Kant’s notion of the perpetual peace. The con-
tributors are professors of philosophy from the United States and Europe.
Notable authors include Simon Critchley and Paul Ricoeur.
B132 2012-013366 978-90-04-22260-1
Duty, language and exegesis in Prabhakara Mimamsa;
including an edition and translation of Ramanujacarya’s
Tantrarahasya, Sastraprameyapariccheda.
Freschi, Elisa. (Jerusalem studies in religion and culture; v.17)
BRILL, ©2012 407 p. $182.00
Freschi (Sanskrit, Sapienza U. , Rome) explains that her translation is not
an attempt to create an independent text, but to offer a path through the
original, a common approach when translating Indian texts. Her com-
mentary does not follow the order of paragraphs, which modern Western
readers may find confusing, but is arranged topically, so that one article
might discuss paragraphs very distant from each other. On the other
hand, the commentary is more useful as a handbook of terms and con-
cepts. The overall themes of the commentary are exhortation, exhortation
and duty, the hermeneutics of sacrifice, prescriptions and apurva, desire
and contrary-to-duty obligations, and grammar and exegesis. The
Sanskrit is in Roman script.
B316 2011-050523 978-1-61186-054-2
The sacrifice of Socrates; Athens, Plato, Girard.
Tyrrell, Wm. Blake. (Studies in violence, mimesis, and culture series)
Michigan State U. Press, ©2012 189 p. $29.95 (pa)
Tyrrell (classics, Michigan State U.) looks at Plato’s Apology of Socrates
from the perspective and methodology of French historian and social
critic Rene Girard’s mimetic mechanism. He covers mimesis, conflict,
and crisis; Plato’s victimary culture; Aristophanes’ ready victim; and
foundation murder.
B395 2011-045894 978-0-8264-3535-4
The Continuum companion to Plato.
Title main entry. Ed. by Gerald A. Press. (Continuum companions)
Continuum Publishing Group, ©2012 356 p. $170.00
This companion to Plato boasts a wide range of topics and orientations
on the life, work and influence of Plato. There are over 140 entries, a pre-
ponderance of which are represented in the section on topics and themes
treated in the dialogues. Some of those include: appearance and reality,
the allegory of the cave, dialectic, Eros, law, incontinence, madness and
possession, weakness of will, pleasure, and nomos. The other sections
include entries about Plato’s life and intellectual context; each of the dia-
logues; important features of the dialogues; and the reception, interpre-
tation and influence of Plato and the dialogues. The contributors are
professors of philosophy, classics, political science and history from
around the world. Translations for all the entries, unless otherwise indi-
cated, are from J.M. Cooper’s Plato: Complete Works.
B395 2012-015970 978-0-8014-4974-1
Philosophers in the Republic; Plato’s two paradigms.
Weiss, Roslyn.
Cornell U. Press, ©2012 236 p. $49.95
Weiss (philosophy, Leigh U.) offers a close reading of Plato’s Republic that
focuses on the role philosophers play in the ideal state. She argues that
Plato presents two visions of the philosopher in Books 6 and 7. Some
philosophers are soothsayers who “rather than pursue as their first
concern the improvement of the moral condition of their subjects,
[instead] seek to secure the city’s efficiency or “happiness.” They are not
naturally drawn to truth like natural philosophers are, but even those
naturally inclined do not necessarily live up to their potential. Weiss
argues that Socrates is a third kind of philosopher still, whose nature
Plato scarcely hints at in the Republic, but whose “healthy philoso-
phizing” with no option of a just life haunts the text.
B398 2011-501486 978-0-8264-3475-3
Philosopher-kings of antiquity.
Desmond, William.
Continuum Publishing Group, ©2011 256 p. $120.00
Irish philosopher Desmond explores the notion and depiction of wise
rulers from earliest times to the present. He covers kingship and wisdom,
Plato’s dream, from Plato to Plutarch, Marcus Aurelius, Julian the
Apostate, and from Moses to modernity. Among more specific topics are
functions of ancient kings, the direct rule of God in Plato’s Statesman,
Alexander and the Hellenistic age, the stoicism of Marcus’ Meditations,
Julian’s education, and Thomas Jefferson as philosopher-president.
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
B689 2012-017637 978-90-04-20948-0
Philo of Alexandria; a thinker in the Jewish diaspora.
Hadas-Lebel, Mireille. Trans. by Robyn Fréchet. (Studies in Philo of
Alexandria; v.7)
BRILL, ©2012 241 p. $140.00
Philosopher Philo (20 BC-AD 50) recorded little about his own life in his
many works, but Hadas-Lebel (emeritus, Judaism and Hebrew, The
Sorbonne) combines his few autobiographical references with the orien-
tations and interests in the rest of his work to provide a glimpse into his
inner soul. She explains his personality in the context of the first major
synthesis of Hellenism and Judaism, part of a brilliant diaspora, she
says, unaware that it was even then drawing to a close. The original
Philon d’Alexandrie; un penseur en diaspora was published by Librarie
Arthème Fayard in 2003.
B755 978-1-61811-160-9
Jewish philosophy; perspectives and retrospectives.
Title main entry. Ed. by Raphael Jospe and Dov Schwartz. (Emunot;
Jewish philosophy and Kabbahah)
Academic Studies Press, ©2012 327 p. $105.00
This collection of 20 essays represents two symposiums held by the con-
tributors on the renaissance in Jewish philosophy, and “Maimonides on
the Eternity of the World.” For this reason they are organized in two
parts. In the first, the contributors consider the impact that American life
has had on the dogmatism of Jewish philosophers, rejecting it for “a
faithful, intellectual, but non-dogmatic or superstitious Judaism.” They
also take into account American pragmatist hermeneutic take on
scripture, the Holocaust and the problems of historicity, philosophical
theology vs. mystical anti-philosophical theology, medieval Judaism’s
philosophical engagement with science in contemporary America, neg-
ative theology and the American ideal of responsible liberty, and the
tension between Jerusalem and Athens in Jewish philosophy. Part one
concludes with two responses from the perspective of contemporary
American politics and intellectual history. The second part contains more
specialized essays on Mose Maimonides, the near-ancient Jewish
philosopher, regarding Maimonides “true opinion” about philosophical
and theological questions. They touch on creation, the identity of the
Sabians, epistemology and natural science, the phenomenology of faith,
and more. The contributors are mostly Jewish philosophers and aca-
demics with backgrounds in philosophy.
B765 2011-031453 978-1-4411-3210-9
Duns Scotus and the problem of universals. (reprint 2010)
Bates, Todd. (Continuum studies in philosophy)
Continuum Publishing Group, ©2012 166 p. $44.95 (pa)
Having been revising his 2003 dissertation to incorporate his subsequent
research, Bates (religion and philosophy, Bethune Cookman U., US) now
unveils his argument that the problem of universals can be resolved by
combining a realism about universals with a mereology that pictures uni-
versals as proper parts of things, where the realism and mereological
picture in play are those of Scotus. He is satisfied that Scotus was right,
so spends no time trying to disprove competing theories by his near con-
temporaries Aquinas and Ockham. His perspectives include the structure
of material substance in Scotus’ metaphysics, substantial natures: neither
singular nor universal but common, and individuation by the haecceity.
B783 978-90-420-3555-3
Giordano Bruno; an introduction.
Blum, Paul Richard. (Value inquiry book series; v.254)
Editions Rodopi, ©2012 128 p. $39.00 (pa)
Volume number 254 in this series on ethics and philosophy describes the
life and philosophy of Giordiano Bruno. The author, Paul Richard Blum,
wrote in German in an academic style; the translation by Peter
Henneveld cleaves to the literal. This is true of sentence structure as well
as word choice, so the translation is accurate rather than easy. Bruno was
a prodigal and eccentric visionary who became famous for believing in
atoms and life on other planets, for confronting the Catholic church as a
theologian (he was hardly more popular with Protestants), for defending
Copernicus, and ultimately for being burned at the stake as a heretic in
1600. (He could use a popular biographer.) Blum serves a different
purpose, creating a scholarly volume whose goal is to help the reader
understand Bruno’s faith and philosophy. As the author points out,
Bruno’s ideas are not easy to pigeonhole, and they can be difficult to
understand; he made a name for himself by demolishing the neat,
scholastic, Aristotelian solutions of his era, and chewing on complexity
with prophetic relish. The book also gives an outline of the history of
Bruno’s travels across Europe. Unlike most working intellectuals of his
era, Bruno came from a poor background and never found a lasting
home or patron. He had the misfortune to live in an era of conflict
between Catholics and Protestants. Unwilling to keep silent, and unable
to fit his beliefs to the acceptable party line of either side, he stayed
–2–
mostly in motion. Blum’s book works hard to keep up with him. It will
be of most use to students and specialist scholarly readers in the history
of philosophy.
B803 2011-031451 978-1-4411-5968-7
Idealism and existentialism; Hegel and nineteenth- and
twentieth-century European philosophy. (reprint, 2010)
Stewart, Jon. (Continuum studies in philosophy)
Continuum Publishing Group, ©2012 282 p. $49.95 (pa)
Stewart (U. of Copenhagen, Denmark) collects 11 of his previously pub-
lished papers on the history of continental philosophy (presenting some
in English for the first time), which are united in their general theme by
a challenge to the common notion that existentialism marked some form
of radical break with earlier German idealism and an assertion that the
idealist works of Hegel (and to a lesser extent, Kant) have had an
enduring influence on European philosophy, including the later 20th-
century existentialists who are frequently seen as far removed from the
philosophy of Hegel. The first 3 chapters focus on the contributions of
Hegel’s Phenomenology of the Spirit. The next five examine points of
contact between Hegel and the intermediate philosophers seen as critics
of idealism and forerunners of existentialism: Schopenhauer,
Kierkegaard, and Nietzsche. The final three essays address existentialist
ethics and the writings of Merleau-Ponty and Sartre on consciousness,
bad faith, and freedom.
B828 2012-937744 978-1-937561-08-6
Biogea.
Serres, Michel. Trans. by Randolph Burks.
Univocal, ©2012 200 p. $22.95 (pa)
Michel Serres is a renowned French philosopher known for thinking
hard about the intersections between science and the humanities. In this
short text Serres sings the praises of what he calls Biogeo, the earth-
system, while reflecting on the history and interconnections of life, the
human condition, death, ecological consciousness, and scientific
progress. His style is contemplative rather than analytic, blending phi-
losophy, poetry, biography, and natural history. Distributed in North
America by the University of Minnesota Press.
B832 2011-294505 978-0-7456-4664-0
Pragmatism; an introduction.
Bacon, Michael.
Polity Press, ©2012 221 p. $69.95
Bacon (political theory, U. of London) presents a comprehensive, but not
altogether exhaustive introduction to pragmatism. He argues that prag-
matism is a living tradition that strikes a middle way between con-
testable metaphysical claims and unthinking relativism. For Bacon,as for
Cheryl Misak, pragmatists are committed to a historical understanding
of objectivity, knowledge without foundations, the importance of con-
necting concepts to everyday life. He surveys pragmatists from Pierce
clear up to the ostensibly postmodernist New Pragmatists and beyond,
but the text over-all is not organized chronologically or as a singular nar-
rative. Instead, his chapters focus on themes and key thinkers such as
the birth of pragmatism between Charles Sanders Pierce and William
James; John Dewey’s pragamatism and thoughts on democracy; the prag-
matic analytical philosophy of Quine, Sellars and Davidson; Neo-
Pragmatism between Rorty and Putnam; European pragmatists like
Habermas; renewed interest in Pierce; the rationalist pragmatism of
Robert Brandom and the pragmatic naturalism of Huw Price. The
chapters are fairly self-contained and could be read on their own as
short, supplementary readings. Distributed by Wiley.
B945 2012-035490 978-0-8126-9798-8
Ayn Rand explained; from tyranny to Tea Party.
Merrill, Ronald E. (Ideas explained; v.10)
Open Court Publishing, ©2013 225 p. $19.95 (pa)
Enright, president of the Reason, Individualism, Freedom Institute,
updates Ronald Merrill’s classic study of Ayn Rand, The Ideas of Ayn
Rand. The text interrogates Ayn Rand, known for her strident defense of
capitalism, and all aspects of her writing and thought. We learn about
Rand as a young Neitzschean, as a philosopher and political theorist,
how Atlas Shrugged changed the world, who John Galt is, how
Objectivism compares to libertarianism, and the legacy she leaves. The
text is highly sympathetic and only brings in critical views from other
would-be capitalist apologists.
This consolodated bimonthly bibliography contains all of the content formerly
split between Reference and Research Book News and SciTech Book News.
–3–
B945 2011-043951 978-0-8232-4269-6
Loyalty to loyalty; Josiah Royce and the genuine moral
life.
Foust, Mathew A. (American philosophy)
Fordham University Press, ©2012 212 p. $50.00
Foust (philosophy, Lander U.) explores the sometimes treacherous and
ambiguous nature of loyalty, centering on Royce’s (1855-1916) The
Philosophy of Loyalty and other texts by him. He opens with a chapter on
contemporary debates around justice and virtue, and ends with a chapter
on contemporary applications in disaster and business. Between he dis-
cusses the nature of loyalty, being loyal to loyalty, learning it, loyalty and
community, and disloyalty.
B1019 978-90-420-3550-8
The revolt of unreason; Miguel de Unamuno and Antonio
Caso on the crisis of modernity.
Candelaria, Michael. (Value inquiry book series; v.253)
Editions Rodopi, ©2012 193 p. $57.20 (pa)
Candelaria (philosophy and religious studies, U. of New Mexico,
Albuquerque) examines two inter-related sets of philosophical issues in
the work of Spanish and Mexican philosophers, Miguel de Unamuno and
Antonio Caso. Writing around the turn of the 20th century, these philoso-
phers grappled with the seeming irreconcilability of scientific rationality
and value claims of art, morality and religion, as well as the altruistic
morality and the psychological ego. Written in two parts devoted to each
thinker, part one considers Unamuno’s Catholic concern for the personal
immortality and eschatological hope as the basis of philosophy. Part two
introduces Caso’s solution to the rationalist/irrationalist divide, his
defense of Christian altruism as the only antidote to egoism, but also the
seeming impossibility of morality. A conclusion compares Unamuno and
Caso on faith, freedom, necessity, altruism, and skepticism.
B1498 2011-043044 978-1-84706-530-8
Starting with Hume.
Brown, Charlotte Randall and William Edward Morris. (Starting with ...
series)
Continuum Publishing Group, ©2012 184 p. $19.95 (pa)
Brown and Morris (philosophy, Wesleyan U.) present a comprehensive,
introduction to 18th-century Scottish philosopher, David Hume. They
chronicle his life, influences, and briefly outline his major contributions
to and interests in philosophy. The chapters that follow consider Hume’s
empiricist account of the mind, his doubts about causation and his
solution to locate the idea of necessary connection in our minds, the con-
nection between liberty and necessity, his opposition to moral ration-
alism and advocacy of sentimentalism, the tension between duty and
spontaneous natural motivations in his conception of justice, and finally
his thoughts on religion.
B1532 978-1-84540-160-3
Thomas Reid; selected philosophical writings.
Reid, Thomas. Ed. by Giovanni B. Grandi (The Library of Scottish
Philosophy)
Imprint Academic, ©2012 350 p. $29.90 (pa)
Reid (1710-96) is the main representative of the Scottish “common sense”
school of philosophy, says Grandi (philosophy, U. of British Columbia,
Canada), and his work was popular until the middle 19th century, espe-
cially in Britain, France, and North America. He presents extracts from
Reid’s main philosophical works: An Inquiry into the Human Mind on the
Principles of Common Sense (1764), Essays on the Intellectual Powers of
Man (1785), and Essays on the Active Powers of Man (1785). Explanatory
footnotes are included, along with an introduction to Reid and his work,
and a chronology of his life and career.
B2421 2011-294504 978-0-7456-4805-7
The new French philosophy.
James, Ian.
Polity Press, ©2012 221 p. $60.95
James (French, U. of Cambridge, UK) presents a collection of seven mini-
monographs of some of the rising stars of French philosophy. He con-
siders the phenomenology of Jean-Luc Marion, Jean-Luc Nancy’s
post-deconstructive musings on our shared finite existence, Bernard
Stiegler’s critique of capitalist technicity, Catherine Malabou’s recurring
interest in plasticity, Ranciére’s distribution of the sensible, Alain
Badiou’s science of the real, and Francois Laruelle’s non-philosophy.
Bracketing those seven chapters are an introduction and a conclusion
where he argues “all these philosophies seek in various ways to move
beyond the anti-foundationalist or deconstructive moment and do so in
the name of what might be called the groundless or non-foundational
ground of the real, conceived variably as givenness, sense, technicity,
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
plasticity, the sensible, the multiple or the One.” A detailed bibliography
of each author’s works, as well as those in English, appears in the back.
Distributed by Wiley.
B2430 2011-037081 978-1-4411-3404-2
Castoriadis, Foucault, and autonomy; new approaches to
subjectivity, society, and social change.
Tovar-Restrepo, Marcela. (Continuum studies in Continental philosophy)
Continuum Publishing Group, ©2012 165 p. $130.00
Tovar-Restrepo (Latin American and Latino studies and anthropology,
City U. of New York-Queens College) compares and contrasts the social
theories of French philosopher Michel Foucault (1926-84) with those of
Cornelius Castoriadis (1922-97) who left Greece for France when he was
20. They were both influenced by the modernist milieu of post-war
France, she says, but responded to it differently and have left different
legacies. Among her topics are Castoriades’ ontology of creation, Foucault
and the game of power and resistance, and society over the subject.
B2430 2011-049275 978-1-4411-1560-7
Deleuze and the diagram; aesthetic threads in visual
organization.
Zdebik, Jakub. (Continuum studies in Continental philosophy)
Continuum Publishing Group, ©2012 240 p. $120.00
Zdebik (visual arts, U. Ottowa, Canada) explores Gilles Deleuze’s sys-
tematic interest in diagrams. The diagram is defined by pure function
and “dissolves substances that qualify matter.” She argues that this
interest was sparked by Michel Foucault’s philosophical cartography, and
specifically his notion of the panopticon. She considers the crucial ele-
ments of diagrammatic operations and suggests the possibility of using
the diagram as a method. She holds that the text/image dyad “is more
materially and hermeneutically accessible and helps us see a representa-
tional manifestation of the diagram.” Strangely, not one diagram appears
in the text. She compares Deleuze’s diagram to Kant’s schema, but argues
that Kant’s schema is unlike the nomadic diagram. In the last chapters,
she looks at how Deleuze contracts geographic images into anatomical
ones, focusing on skin and incarnation in the final chapter.
B2430 2012-019265 978-0-8166-7803-7
In search of a new image of thought; Gilles Deleuze and
philosophical expressionism.
Lambert, Gregg.
U. of Minnesota Press, ©2012 241 p. $25.00 (pa)
From Proust and Signs (1964) onwards through his collaborative works
with psychoanalyst Félix Guattari, philosopher Gilles Deleuze was cen-
trally concerned with finding a new means of philosophical expression,
argues Lambert (humanities, Syracuse U.), who selects Deleuze’s concept
of “the image of thought” as a central theme for his investigation into
Deleuze’s conceptualization of philosophy. The argument places special
emphasis on the role played by modern literature, with the writers
Proust, Kafka, Kleist, and Melville playing especially significant parts, in
providing new means of philosophical expression mined by Deleuze,
which is particularly illustrated by Deleuze and Guattari’s A Thousand
Plateaus (1980). The goal is to connect the way the “image of thought”
runs through Deleuze’s entire corpus to outstanding issues concerning
how philosophy should be expressed.
B2430 2011-031386 978-1-4411-3361-8
Jacques Ranciére and the contemporary scene; the
philosophy of radical equality.
Title main entry. Ed. by Jean-Philippe Deranty and Alison Ross.
Continuum Publishing Group, ©2012 269 p. $120.00
Scholars of philosophy almost all from the anglophone world, explore the
notion of equality in the work of Rancière (emeritus, philosophy, Paris 8
U.). They cover the evidence of equality and the practice of writing,
movies as the great democratic art form of the modern world, Godard
and Rancière, the names in his new historical poetics, the Hegelian back-
ground to his aesthetic revolution, The Ignorant Schoolmaster and con-
temporary work on pedagogy, anarchism, his utopian politics, Hannah
Arendt and the philosophical repression of politics, his many interpreta-
tions of Marx, work, and identity and subject.
B2430 2011-043042 978-1-4411-3447-9
Kant, Deleuze, and architectonics. (reprint, 2010)
Willatt, Edward. (Continuum studies in Continental philosophy)
Continuum Publishing Group, ©2012 174 p. $29.95 (pa)
Given the way that Gilles Deleuze himself selectively utilized different
parts of Immanuel Kant’s Critique of Pure Reason in support of Deleuze’s
account of experience regardless of their wider role in Kant’s system, it
may be tempting to ignore the value of unitary treatments of the Critique
for interpreting and understanding Deleuze and his relationship to Kant’s
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
thought, but such an approach would be wrong, argues Willatt (PhD, U.
of Greenwich, UK). In particular, he argues that while the forms of con-
ceptual possibility that Kant put forward in his Table of Categories were
rejected by Deleuze, the ways in which Kant argues for such conditions
of experience is highly relevant to Deleuze studies, particularly the
analysis of Deleuze’s Difference and Repetition. He further argues that the
unity of Kantian thought in the Critique of Pure Reason can only be
unearthed through a study of Kant’s “architectonic” (i.e., systematic)
method employed in the text and that it is such an architectonic investi-
gation that will allow for investigation of the full implications of the
account of experience in both Kant and Deleuze. This is a paperbound
edition of work first published in 2010.
B2430 2011-036466 978-1-4411-4523-9
Michel Henry; the affects of thought.
Title main entry. Ed. by Jeffrey Hanson and Michael R. Kelly.
(Continuum studies in Continental philosophy)
Continuum Publishing Group, ©2012 182 p. $120.00
Continental European, Australian, and US scholars of philosophy explore
the thought of French philosopher and novelist Michel Henry (1922-2002).
In sections on phenomenology, Christianity, and theory and practice,
they discuss the invisible and the phenomenon, the essence of life, The
Idea of Phenomenology, inward life, phenomenology and soteriology in his
Christian trilogy, truth as the originary intelligibility of life, and towards
a radical phenomenology of social life.
B2430 2011-046836 978-1-4411-9718-4
The restoration of Albert Schweitzer’s ethical vision.
Cicovacki, Predrag.
Continuum Publishing Group, ©2012 212 p. $120.00
Against the idea that Albert Schweitzer’s ethical practice outpaced his
moral vision and thinking, Cicovacki (philosophy, College of the Holy
Cross) resurrects Schweitzer as a moral philosopher and religious
thinker. He offers a systematic exposition of his “reverence for life” ethics
and argues that it can “guide us in our morally disoriented world.” To
that end, the text is organized into three sections on “our age of irrev-
erence,” “ethics of reverence,” and “reverence as a way of life.” In eight
highly structured chapters he considers the decay of culture, rationality
and mysticism, the will to live and reverence for life, moral principles
and ethical vision, ethical personality and community, and the ethical
religion of love.
B2430 2011-030285 978-1-4411-1793-9
Selfhood and sacrifice; René Girard and Charles Taylor on
the crisis of modernity. (reprint, 2010)
O’Shea, Andrew.
Continuum Publishing Group, ©2012 267 p. $34.95 (pa)
Constructing a dialogue between two contemporary thinkers who occupy
quite distinct realms of discourse, O’Shea (philosophy and human devel-
opment, Dublin City U.) looks first at the work of literary critic and
social anthropologist Girard from perspectives of division and unity in
literary space: the romantic fallacy, division and unity in cultural space:
the scapegoat mechanism, and negating subjectivity and history:
problems with Girardian theory. Then he turns to academic philosopher
Taylor and discusses the early modern period: transposing the old cosmic
order; rethinking division and unity: subjectivity, religion, and the
current of life; and crisis and unity in moral space: identity and the good.
The juxtaposition of views, he says, reveals very different visions of the
crisis of modernity.
B2430 2011-036464 978-1-84706-280-2
Starting with Merleau-Ponty.
Morris, Katherine J. (Starting with—)
Continuum Publishing Group, ©2012 192 p. $75.00
Morris (philosophy, Mansfield College, UK) offers an introduction to the
phenomenology of Maurice Merleau-Ponty. In this text, she focuses on
and even broadly follows the structure of his seminal work
Phenomenology of Perception with occasional references to other books.
The text is intended for an anglophone audience reading Ponty in trans-
lation. She considers the existential phenomenology of Martin Heidegger
as a backdrop to Merleau-Ponty’s work, his relationship to gestalt psy-
chology, intellectual prejudices that get in the way of doing phenome-
nology, what the body is in Merleau-Ponty’s phenomenology, perception
of the world, the problem of other minds, speech and gestures, as well
as Merleau-Ponty’s legacy in the study of women, animals and other
topics.
We're always delighted to hear from our readers.
Contact us at (503) 281-9230 or booknews@booknews.com.
–4–
B2430 2011945799 978-1-937561-01-7
Two lessons on animal and man.
Simondon, Gilbert. Trans. by Drew S. Burk.
Univocal, ©2011 88 p. $19.95 (pa)
This slim volume contains material from two lessons that French
philosopher Gilbert Simondon prepared for psychology courses he was
teaching in 1967. They interrogate what Jean-Yves Chateau identifies, in
his introduction to the text, the problem of life as posed by psychology’s
twin concern for intelligence and instinct. These concepts are integral to
psychology, but also to millennia old debates about humans and animals,
morality and autonomy. Simondon traces their intellectual history. The
first lesson focuses on ancient Greek philosophers and how they asso-
ciated certain activities with intelligence or instinct, while the second
focuses on theologians and early modern philosophers. Distributed in
North America by the University of Minnesota Press.
B2430 2012-026841 978-1-58367-292-1
The work of Sartre; search for freedom and the challenge
of history, expanded ed.
Mészáros, István.
Monthly Review Press, ©2012 380 p. $28.95 (pa)
Hungarian-British philosopher and critic Mészáros (emeritus, U. of
Sussex) analyzes the thought of French philosopher Jean-Paul Sartre
(1905-80) and places it in the context of the 20th century. He intended the
1979 first edition to be followed by a second volume on the challenge of
history, but other projects intervened, so that material is added here.
Among his perspectives are the writer and his situation, the search for
the individual, the world of Being and Nothingness, Lévi-Strauss against
Sartre, and the role of scarcity in historical conceptions.
B2433 2012946068 978-1-937561-05-5
Struggle and utopia at the end times of philosophy.
Laruelle, François. Trans. by Drew S. Burk and Anthony Paul Smith.
Univocal, ©2012 250 p. $24.95 (pa)
The inventor of the science of philosophy, nonphilosophy, Laruelle
(emeritus, U. of Paris-West Nanterre la Défence) sets out his thinking in
terms of man as ultimatum and as testament, summary of non-phi-
losophy, clarification on the three axioms, philosophizability and prac-
ticity, making a tabula rasa out of the future or of utopia as method,
outline for a non-institutional utopia L’organisation Non-Philososphique
Internationale (ONPHI), the right and left of non-philosophy, and rebel in
the soul: a theory of future struggle. La lutte et l’Utopie à la fin des temps
philosophiques was published in 2004 by Éditions Kimé. 2004. Cultural
theorist and translator of contemporary French philosopher Burk and
Smith (religion, La Salle U., Philadelphia) have not provided an index.
Distributed in North America by University of Minnesota Press.
B2798 2012-011919 978-3-11-020403-2
Kant’s philosophy of the unconscious.
Title main entry. Ed. by Piero Giordanetti et al.
De Gruyter, ©2012 329 p. $95.00
This collection of over a dozen essays aims to fulfill a gap in Immanuel
Kant scholarship on the place of the unconscious in his writing, philo-
sophical and anthropological. The essays introduce their topics, but
quickly rely on an audience otherwise acquainted with Kant’s work.
They consider the role and implications the unconscious has in Kant’s
theory of knowledge, formulating a unity of consciousness and the
notion of a transcendental self, determinate and indeterminate judg-
ments, aesthetic judgment, illusions and strategies of reason, and finally
its implications for moral philosophy in defining irrational aspects of
human being. Most essays make extensive use of foot-notes and the index
focuses on concepts.
B2949 2012-002429 978-90-04-22618-0
Hegel’s philosophy of the historical religions.
Title main entry. Ed. by Bart Labuschagne and Timo Slootweg. (Critical
studies in German idealism; v.6)
BRILL, ©2012 281 p. $144.00
Beginning in 1821, philosopher G.W.F. Hegel began a sustained inquiry
into the philosophy of world historical religions (contained in the Lectures
on the Philosophy of Religion), in which he sought to systematize the
world’s religions from the African “religion of nature” to Christianity,
which for Hegel was the only true religion, all other religions being
“determinate religions.” In this volume, the editors (professors of phi-
losophy at Leiden U., the Netherlands) present 11 chapters that collec-
tively follow the same structural schema presented by Hegel in the
Lectures in their examinations of his discussion of each form of religion.
Each chapter combines a purely textual analysis of Hegel’s thought with
a critical engagement from the perspective of the religion discussed.
–5–
B3051 2012-450730 978-1-4426-4302-4
Herder’s political thought; a study of language, culture,
and community.
Spencer, Vicki A.
U. of Toronto Press, ©2012 354 p. $65.00
Spencer (politics, U. of Otago, New Zealand) orchestrates a conversation
between recent Anglo-American political theory and the political thought
of German philosopher Johann Gottfried Herder (1744-1803). She situates
Herder’s ideas about the ways in which language and culture influenced
individual identity in relation to contemporary questions of justice while
simultaneously challenging longstanding conceptions of him as a
“counter-Enlightenment” philosopher and proponent of centralized “cul-
tural nationalism,” arguing that he in fact was a defender of the
autonomy of different cultural groups and of a bottom-up communal
approach to the formation of government.
B3245 2011-040932 978-0-8264-8763-6
Frege; a guide for the perplexed.
Kanterian, Edward. (Continuum guides for the perplexed)
Continuum Publishing Group, ©2012 248 p. $90.00
Though Gottlob Frege (1848-1925) is considered the greatest logician since
Aristotle, says Kanterian (philosophy, U. of Kent, UK), he was mainly con-
cerned with mathematics, particularly in setting it, and especially arith-
metic, on a firm scientific foundation. He summarizes the main elements
of Frege’s thinking with an emphasis on his concept-script (Begriffsschift).
Among his topics are the epistemological dimension of logic, condition-
ality, functions and functional analysis, the challenge of contingent
thought, and concept and object.
B3279 2011-031452 978-1-4411-4624-3
Epistemology, archaeology, ethics; current investigations
of Husserl’s corpus. (reprint, 2010)
Title main entry. Ed. by Pol Vandevelde and Sebastian Luft.
(Continuum issues in phenomenology and hermeneutics )
Continuum Publishing Group, ©2012 240 p. $44.95 (pa)
The 13 essays were presented as papers at the 38th Annual Meeting of
the Husserl Circle, held at Marquette University in June 2008, selected for
the volume, and rewritten for publication. Pivoting on the work of Czech-
born German philosopher Edmund Husserl (1859-1938) they discuss
toward a broadened epistemology, toward an archaeology of constitution,
and ethics and the philosophical life. The topics include the body as noe-
matic bridge between nature and culture, an aporetic approach to his
reflections on time, the constitutive and reconstructive building-up of
horizons, his categorical imperative and related critique of Kant, and
attempts by Husserl and Rawls to free moral imperatives form their
empirical origin.
B3279 2011-034819 978-1-84706-463-9
The Husserl dictionary.
Moran, Dermot and Joseph Cohen. (Continuum philosophy dictionaries)
Continuum Publishing Group, ©2012 376 p. $32.95 (pa)
Moran and Cohen (philosophy, University College Dublin, Ireland) have
compiled hundreds of concepts, people, historical moments and move-
ments associated with the work of Edmund Husserl and the phenome-
nological method he advocated. Some are original terms while others are
phrases that gained a particular meaning when used by Husserl, like
language. Entries are organized alphabetically and frequently refer to one
another. When they do the authors have bolded the text. Sample entries
include: multiplicity, ontic meaning, Martin Heidegger, eidetics, the prin-
ciple of all principles, and giveness. In addition to the entries, the authors
provide an introduction and chronology of Husserl’s life and work, as
well as several bibliographies and suggestions for further study.
B3305 2011-031472 978-1-4411-8508-2
Marx through post-structuralism; Lyotard, Derrida,
Foucault, Deleuze. (reprint, 2010)
Choat, Simon. (Continuum studies in Continental philosophy)
Continuum Publishing Group, ©2012 207 p. $44.95 (pa)
Choat (politics, U. of London, Queen Mary) examines the critical
engagement of four key post-structuralists with Karl Marx. He focuses on
Lyotard, Derrida, Foucault, and Deleuze, presenting an accumulating per-
spective on the limits and possibilities of Marx’s materialist philosophy.
It’s his contention that these four post-structuralists are also materialists
and that they enable us to distinguish in Marx what he uncritically
inherits from Hegelian idealism and his own materialist breakthroughs.
Chapter one is an extended introduction that provides background and
context for understanding post-structuralism, but also Marx in mid 20th-
century French philosophy. To that end, he focuses on Louis Althusser’s
structuralist verging on post-structuralist understanding of him. The core
chapters are devoted to each of the post-structuralists and focus on their
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
engagement with Marx rather than Marxism generally. A final chapter
synthesizes these insights and reflects on reading Marx through post-
structuralism rather than some kind of post-structuralist marxism.
B3973 2012-023265 978-1-60419-056-4
The essence of Spinoza’s Ethics.
Spinoza, Benedictus de. Ed. by Hunter Lewis. (The essence of series)
Axios Press, ©2012 219 p. $12.00 (pa)
This edition of the Baruch Spinoza’s Ethics is edited and introduced by
Hunter Lewis, a global investment entrepreneur and former employee of
the World Bank. Spinoza’s Ethics is a classic of rationalist philosophy and
one which many return to for ontological and ethical alternatives to top-
down models. This edition includes two separate sections, on the
improvement of understanding and letters from Spinoza to friends. The
notes and introduction are negligible aides.
B3998 2012-021710 978-90-04-23137-5
Spinoza past and present; essays on Spinoza, Spinozism,
and Spinoza scholarship.
Bunge, Wiep van. (Brill’s studies in intellectual history; v.215)
BRILL, ©2012 256 p. $146.00
Even the name of the excommunicated Jewish-Dutch philosopher is con-
troversial: should Spinoza (1632-1677) be referred to as Baruch or
Benedict? In this valuable contribution to Spinoza scholarship, Bunge
(history of philosophy, Erasmus U. Rotterdam) compiles chapters based
largely on his previously published material from 1995-2012—some trans-
lated from the Dutch. Based on readings of Tractatus theologico-politicus
and other works, he addresses issues of the extent to which the
Enlightenment philosopher can be considered to be a materialist
philosopher or even a ‘Spinozist.’ Insights are presented on the core
issues of his scientific moral philosophy and their interpretations, in the
contexts of censorship in the 17th-century Dutch Republic, later Dutch
reactions to his radical ideas, and current European debates on the
Enlightenment.
BD21 2010-938086 978-1-111-29808-1
Philosophy; an introduction to the art of wondering, 11th
ed.
Christian, James L.
Wadsworth Publishing Co., ©2012 696 p. $147.95 (pa)
Christian (philosophy, Santa Ana College) offers in this introductory text
an approach to philosophy as a synoptic endeavor in which particular
issues or situations are contextualized into larger and more profound
meanings. It is about “big questions” and is organized into eight major
sections covering the fine art of wondering, the meaning of conditioned
existence, knowing the real world, our understanding of inner realities,
the human condition and human sciences, biology and the context of life
on earth and in the cosmos, the nature of the cosmos, and questions “of
ultimate concern.” This book has been revised 11 times and in this
edition we see new or revised material on cultural determinism, the
origins of life on Earth, evolution of the eye, suffering and the arms race,
and our chances of communicating with extra-terrestrials. Each chapter
ends with a mini-biography on influential, though not all strictly philo-
sophical, thinkers like Sigmund Freud, Ayn Rand, Albert Camus, The
Buddha, Nelson Mandela, etc. This is an unconventional approach to
teaching philosophy, both global and multicultural, but one that avails
itself of more readily accessible and meaningful material.
BD31 2011-034919 978-1-4411-9874-7
The philosophy skills book; exercises in critical reading,
writing and thinking.
Title main entry. Ed. by Stephen J. Finn et al.
Continuum Publishing Group, ©2012 225 p. $75.00
Rather than taking a historical approach to introducing philosophy, Finn
(philosophy, Center for Teaching Excellence, United States Military
Academy, West Point) takes an approach that allows students to actively
do philosophy rather than only study a body of knowledge. Selected pas-
sages with exercises cover the areas of metaphysics, epistemology, ethics,
political philosophy, and the philosophy of religion. The text includes tips
on evaluating and justifying positions, author and topic matrices to fea-
tured passages, an answer key to selected exercises, and glossary.
BD111 2011-045892 978-0-8264-4061-7
The Continuum companion to metaphysics.
Title main entry. Ed. by Neil A. Manson and Robert W. Barnard.
(Continuum companions)
Continuum Publishing Group, ©2012 535 p. $170.00
Scholars of philosophy in the US, Britain, and Australia examine the
major themes of metaphysics that taken together provide the syllabus for
a survey course on contemporary work in the branch of philosophy. They
cover research problems and methods, modality, universals and abstract
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
objects, naturalism and physicalism, mind, material constitution,
endurantism and perdurantism, personal identity, free will, god, and
new directions in metaphysics.
BD161 2012-005918 978-0-451-23481-0
The DIM hypothesis; why the lights of the West are going
out.
Peikoff, Leonard.
New American Library, ©2012 378 p. $27.95
Peikoff, Ayn Rand scholar, author, and former educator, discusses human
thought, how it leads to understanding, and unveils his DIM Hypothesis—
three methods used to decode and understand information— and how
they have influenced the West. He describes them as integration
(rational), misintegration (irrational), and disintegration, or nihilism. He
illustrates the strength of those methods by examining literature, edu-
cation, physics, and politics to point out that historical trends throughout
Western culture have been influenced by one of the three—and that they
can be used to predict the future of the country. Readers may disagree,
but they probably will not be bored.
BD161 2011-031388 978-1-4411-0345-1
Epistemology; the key thinkers.
Title main entry. Ed. by Stephen Hetherington. (Key thinkers)
Continuum Publishing Group, ©2012 253 p. $110.00
This collection of a dozen essays surveys key thinkers and intellectual
movements from Western philosophy and latterly science on the issue of
epistemology, what knowledge is and how we know. After an editorial
introduction, each chapter is a self-contained study of classical thinkers
like Plato and Aristotle, ancient and modern skepticism, Anglo-Scottish
empiricism, Kant and German transcendentalism, American prag-
matism, two ways of naturalizing epistemology between Quine and
Goldman, Edmund Gettier’s 1963 challenge to the epistemological status
quo of “justified true belief,” and a final chapter exploring current and
developing ideas epistemologists are discussing.
BD222 2012-014196 978-1-59451-902-4
Subjects in process; diversity, mobility, and the politics of
subjectivity in the 21st century.
Title main entry. Ed. by Michael A. Peters and Alicia De Alba.
(Interventions; education, philosophy & culture)
Paradigm Publishers, ©2012 214 p. $98.00
Edited by Peters (education, U. of Waikato, New Zealand) and de Alba
(Institute of Research about University and Education, National
Autonomous U. of Mexico), this book presents an international range of
interrogations of the question of contemporary subjectivity that approach
the question from a variety of (generally post-modern) theoretical back-
grounds. Eleven chapters address such topics as the Bakhtinian and
Derridean consideration of the subject in the margins, “psychologizing
adolescence” and “sociologizing youth” as two paradigms of the subjec-
tivity of youth culture, collective biography as a methodology for investi-
gating becoming selves across borders and with/in landscapes, Laclau’s
theoretical work as applied to the notion of subject and subjectivity, the
interrelation between culture and subject and its pedagogical conse-
quences as informed by the philosophical perspective of Hönigswald, and
diasporic philosophy and counter-education as a possbility/impossibility
for a new critical language in education.
BD241 978-0-227-17381-7
The hermeneutical self and an ethical difference;
intercivilizational engagement.
Chung, Paul S.
James Clarke & Co., ©2012 287 p. $50.00 (pa)
Chung (mission and world Christianity, Luther Seminary) compares the
contemporary age of global capitalism, both highly integrated and yet
marked by Samuel Huntington’s notion of civilizational clash, to the First
Axial Age, when Confucius wrote and taught how to restore social
harmony during the “warring states period” of China. On this basis,
Chung makes the case for a revitalized engagement with Confucian
ethics outside of its “Sinitic mode.” The text is organized into four parts.
First, he maps out the Western hermeneutic tradition, from
Schleirmarcher to Heidegger and Gadamer, noting its appreciation of the
inter-religious context of moral self-formation, as well as mediating a
theory of interpretation with a moral theory of virtue. In part two he
goes back to the Axial Age, and reads Aristotle on the golden mean in
light of Confucius’ own “ethics of mean.” He further compares St.
Aquinas’ virtue ethics to Mengzi’s political ethics. Part three turns to post-
Gadamerian theories of interpretation, communicative rationality, and
postmodern aesthetic ethics. The last part deals with global critical
inquiry in the aftermath of colonialism, looking to ancient parables
(Zhuangzi’s butterfly and Plato’s cave) for insights into intercivizational
reconstruction. Distributed in North America by The David Brown Book
Co.
–6–
BD435 2012-013186 978-0-465-02138-3
Answers for Aristotle; how science and philosophy can
lead us to a more meaningful life.
Pigliucci, Massimo.
Basic Books, ©2012 312 p. $27.99
Pigliucci, a philosophy professor at the CUNY Graduate Center and
former biology professor at Stony Brook University, argues for a pro-
ductive relationship with science and philosophy that leads to the kind
of well-being Aristotle indicates in his writings on “eudaimonia.” He
holds science and philosophy apart though and insists on avoiding the
naturalistic fallacy of equivocating what is with what ought to be. This
is supposed to affect how we live our lives and so the major themes of
the book are of practical matters like how we decide between right and
wrong and the evolution of morality, how we know what we do and the
cognitive science behind intuition, self-knowledge and the psychological
limits of willpower, politics and our sense of fairness, the brain and reli-
gious experience. A final section takes a stab at human nature and the
meaning of life, where Pigliucci offers a hopeful prognosis about our
baser nature’s influence over the rest of us. In the end is a thematic
guide for further reading.
BD443 2012-006346 978-0-8232-3921-4
The metamorphosis of finitude; an essay on birth and
resurrection.
Falque, Emmanuel. Trans. by George Hughes. (Perspectives in
Continental philosophy)
Fordham University Press, ©2012 193 p. $28.00 (pa)
Méamorphose de la finitude published in 2004 by Les Éditions du Cerf is
the final volume of a trilogy in which Falque (philosophy, Catholic
Institute of Paris) argues that the truths of the Easter Triduum—the
Passion, the Resurrection, and the Eucharist—need to be examined in the
light of philosophical experience of agony, birth, and the body. Among
his perspectives are impassable immanence, whether there is a drama of
atheist humanism, the incorporation of the human being, the world
become other, and a flesh for rebirth.
BD450 2011-034918 978-1-4411-0742-8
Beyond human; from animality to transhumanism.
Title main entry. Ed. by Charlie Blake et al.
Continuum Publishing Group, ©2012 288 p. $120.00
Edited by two philosophers and a critical theorist, this book of specu-
lative essays is loosely tied together by explorations of abstract ideas of
animality, humanness, and transhumanism. The essays are written in
the academic impersonal voice. If they had been written in the first
person, these would be reflective essays by educated people musing on
what it means to be human, offering personal thoughts and feelings
inspired by the popular news stories that crossed their paths on animals,
animal-human relations, or new medical technologies. They offer com-
mentary on many issues, often within the same essay, based on contrib-
utors’ academic specializations in how people socially conceptualize
non-human animals. They tend to avoid passing judgment on groups of
people or engaging with policy issues. Some readers may not be attracted
to a book that discusses animals as ideas, or whether people who use
medical support devices are fully human; however, these essays are
scholastic in nature, intended only to inspire academic thought. The
engagement here is with philosophy rather than critical theory; the
authors muse on a reality rather than indict it. The philosophers cited
are postmodern (Bataille, Derrida). The book will appeal to educated
readers who love ideas.
PSYCHOLOGY
BF76 2011-942688 978-1-133-04967-8
Careers in psychology; opportunities in a changing world,
4th ed.
Kuther, Tara L. and Robert D. Morgan.
Wadsworth Publishing Co., ©2013 218 p. $42.95 (pa)
Kuther (Western Connecticut State U.) and Morgan (Texas Tech U.) outline
careers in psychology for undergraduate and graduate students. They
discuss the nature of psychology and careers available, as well as
choosing a major, the benefits of a psychology major, and succeeding as
a student, then careers for baccalaureate and graduate degree holders in
clinical, counseling, school, health, sport, experimental, cognitive, quanti-
tative, social, consumer, and developmental psychology; law and psy-
chology; biopsychology, cognitive neuroscience, and clinical
neuropsychology; and industrial/organizational psychology and human
factors. They end with chapters on getting a job after graduation, careers
for graduate degree holders in academic, research, and applied settings,
and how to apply to graduate school. This edition adds career profiles
–7–
and updated salary and career information. It has been reorganized to
emphasize the interests of undergraduates. Each chapter has a table of
courses, applied experiences, and research experiences, and a checklist to
evaluate interest and aptitude.
BF76 2012-018330 978-1-4129-9760-7
Decoding the ethics code; a practical guide for
psychologists, 3d ed.
Fisher, Celia B.
Sage Publications, ©2013 423 p. $66.00 (pa)
This work for graduate students and new and seasoned psychologists is
also accessible to consumers of psychological services. It discusses the
rationale behind each American Psychological Association (APA) ethical
standard. Appendices list the ethical principles of the APA and present
case studies in ethical decision making. This third edition is updated to
reflect the most recent APA ethical principles and codes of conduct as of
June 2010. This edition incorporates insights from about 200 articles and
chapters published since the first edition. It includes ten new, more
complex case studies, and contains new boxes on applying the Ethics
Code to traditional and new arenas of practice. There is new content on
the use of the Internet in practice and research, multicultural compe-
tence, genetic testing, and neuropsychological assessment in forensics
cases. Fisher is affiliated with the Center for Ethics Education at
Fordham University.
BF76 2012-008888 978-1-4129-8817-9
Doing collaborative research in psychology; a team-based
guide.
Detweiler-Bedell, Jerusha B. and Brian Detweiler-Bedell.
Sage Publications, ©2013 271 p. $40.00 (pa)
This supplementary text is aimed at psychology undergraduates in
beginning or advanced courses in research methodology, as well as stu-
dents enrolled in courses requiring independent or collaborative research
theses. It will also be useful for undergraduate research assistants, for
graduate students, and for students in other areas such as public health,
education, and behavioral economics. Featuring stand-alone chapters and
in-depth classic and contemporary research examples, the text covers
every step of the collaborative research process, from generating research
ideas through analyzing results and giving formal presentations. Of
special note is a chapter devoted to piloting an experiment, a topic often
overlooked in traditional texts. There is also detailed practical guidance
on successful literature searches using databases, plus a primer on sta-
tistics and coverage of ethical issues. Final chapters give advice on men-
toring relationships and marketing yourself to employers and graduate
programs. An appendix collects web links and pages numbers for other
resources throughout the book. The authors are affiliated with Lewis &
Clark College.
BF76 2012-014780 978-0-415-87928-6
Principles of research in behavioral science, 3d ed.
Whitley, Bernard E. Jr. and Mary E. Kite.
Routledge, ©2013 754 p. $104.95
This textbook for Master’s-level students in psychology and related fields
provides an overview of research methods and is structured in largely
independent chapters to encourage flexibility within the classroom. Part
one introduces overviews of behavioral science and research strategies,
while part two explores ethical treatment of research participants, pro-
fessional and social responsibilities of scientists, formulating research
questions, developing measurement strategies, and internal and external
validity of research. The third part, which has been heavily restructured
and expanded, examines research design and covers field research, cor-
relation designs, analysis and modeling, survey research, and other
topics. Part four is concerned with the collection and interpretation of
data, while part five explores evaluation research, literature reviewing,
and writing research reports. This third edition is reordered and
expanded and now includes a glossary as well as exercises, outlines,
summaries, and discussion questions to further student comprehension.
BF77 2012-012576 978-1-4338-1210-1
Internships in psychology; the APAGS workbook for
writing successful applications and finding the right fit,
3d ed.
Williams-Nickelson, Carol et al.
American Psychological Assn., ©2013 120 p. $27.95 (pa)
Williams-Nickelson, a counseling psychologist, et al. offer a handbook for
doctoral-level psychology students that explains how to navigate the
internship application process. Including examples throughout, they
address understanding the process; completing the Association of
Psychology Postdoctoral and Internship Centers Application; goals,
essays, and the cover letter; curriculum vitae and letters of
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
recommendation; the interview; the match process; and frequently asked
questions. This edition has updated and expanded information to address
changes in the process and a new chapter for directors of clinical training
with suggestions of how to assist students. No index is included.
BF109 2011-051347 978-0-8232-4315-0
The singularity of being; Lacan and the immortal within.
Ruti, Mari. (Psychoanalytic interventions)
Fordham University Press, ©2012 260 p. $27.00 (pa)
Ruti (critical theory, U. of Toronto) elaborates on the assertion by French
psychiatrist Jacques Lacan (1901-81) that the singular self emerges from
the real, one of the three registers of being, just as the subject emerges
from the symbolic and the person from the imaginary. Looking in turn
at the call of the immortal and the echo of the thing, she discusses such
aspects as the rewriting of destiny, the possibility of the impossible, the
dignity of the thing, and the sublimity of love.
BF121 978-1-84872-115-9
AS level psychology, 5th ed.
Eysenck, Michael W.
Psychology Press, ©2012 326 p. $39.95 (pa)
Eysenck (psychology, Roehampton U., UK) offers students in the UK a text
on the topics covered in the AS Level Psychology syllabus, focusing on
memory, early social development, research methods, stress, social
influence, and psychopathology. The first chapter discusses how to
prepare for the exam. This edition has been updated and revised to
match the requirements of the latest AQA-A (Assessment and
Qualifications Alliance) specification. It includes access to online
resources like flashcards, chapter summaries, and glossaries. Psychology
Press is an imprint of the Taylor & Francis Group.
BF121 2011-940901 978-0-618-18550-4
Discovering psychology; the science of mind.
Cacioppo, John T. and Laura A. Freberg.
Wadsworth Publishing Co., ©2013 913 p. $142.95
Rather than presenting psychology as an isolated discipline as traditional
introductory texts do, Cacioppo (cognitive and social neuroscience, U. of
Chicago) and Freberg (psychology, California State U., San Luis Obispo)
treat psychology as a “hub science” in an integrative, multidisciplinary
approach to the field. Integrative perspectives on the mind include the
evolutionary, social, cognitive, biological, developmental, clinical, and
individual differences/personality. The text concludes with a section on
the recent branch of positive psychology. Chapters include “thinking sci-
entifically” and “connecting to research” features, examples intended to
be relevant to college students’ experience, self-assessments, media
resources, and color illustrations.
BF121 2012-034099 978-0-07-803525-8
Essentials of understanding psychology, 10th ed.
Feldman, Robert S.
McGraw-Hill, ©2013 567 p. $141.67 (pa)
Feldman (psychology, U. of Massachusetts Amherst) uses a modular
approach to teach students about psychology in this condensed version
of his text Understanding Psychology, which omits the chapters on sexu-
ality and gender and the appendix on statistics, and omits or shortens
modules on key issues and controversies in the field, problem solving,
variations in intellectual ability, group differences in intelligence, and
prenatal development. This edition has updates to information on neu-
roscience, the brain and behavior, cognition, emotions, and cultural
approaches to psychological aspects, including social networking tech-
nology; revised chapters on neuroscience and behavior, learning,
memory, and health psychology; and new and revised topics, such as
social media, economic problems and stress and health, the limitations
of bystander intervention, hormone replacement therapy, dangers related
to steroid use, the role of mirror neurons in speech perception and lan-
guage, sex differences in brain development speed, communication via
thought, blindsight, statistics of chronic pain sufferers, human tears and
chemosignals, failure dreams, gender differences in dreaming, the legal-
ization of marijuana in different states, insomnia and the use of tech-
nologies, psychological dependence on social networking and email,
behavioral approaches to rewarding drivers, the positive outcomes of
playing prosocial video games, taste aversion, adaptive learning, neural
communication in Alzheimer’s disease, the value of forgetting, inter-
ference and eyewitness recall, and the familiarity heuristic.
BF121 2012-032473 978-0-07-803534-0
Experience psychology, 2d ed.
King, Laura A.
McGraw-Hill, ©2012 543 p. $141.33 (pa)
King (psychology, U. of Missouri, Columbia) acquaints students with the
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
impact of psychology on daily life, introducing function before dys-
function and explaining typical, everyday behavior before less common
and abnormal behavior. The textbook emphasizes critical thinking and
active engagement through various features and a website that includes
videos, assessments, simulations, and other resources. This edition has
revised, updated, and expanded topics like the nature of scientific
research, hemispheric differences in brain functioning, neurogenesis,
subliminal perception, sleep and sleep disorders, drug use among teens,
alcohol, hypnosis, avoidance and insight learning, the role of attention in
memory encoding, the use of mental imagery, the influence of the
Internet on memory, autobiographical memory retrieval, reasoning and
decision making, intellectual disability, gender development, physical
development and cognitive processes in adulthood, socioemotional devel-
opment in late adulthood, obesity, sexual behavior and orientation, the
role of neurotransmitters in personality, sex differences in aggression,
models of close relationships, the fifth edition of the Diagnostic and
Statistical Manual of Mental Disorders, the etiology of panic disorder, and
safe sex.
BF121 2012-028904 978-0-07-803521-0
Understanding psychology, 11th ed.
Feldman, Robert S.
McGraw-Hill, ©2013 633 p. $189.33
Feldman (psychology, U. of Massachusetts Amherst) introduces students
to the theories, research, and applications of psychology, with coverage
of both traditional areas and applied topics of gender and sexuality and
health psychology. Information is presented in modules and includes
diversity issues. For this edition, he clarifies some material; updates
material on advances in neuroscience, the brain and behavior, cognition,
emotions, and cultural approaches to psychological phenomenon,
including social networking technology; revises chapters on neuroscience
and behavior, learning, memory, and health psychology; and adds new
and revised topics, such as social media, economic problems and stress
and health, the limitations of bystander intervention, hormone
replacement therapy, dangers related to steroid use, the role of mirror
neurons in speech perception and language, sex differences in brain
development speed, communication via thought, blindsight, chronic pain
statistics, human tears and chemosignals, failure dreams, gender differ-
ences in dreaming, the legalization of marijuana in different states,
insomnia and the use of technologies, psychological dependence on social
networking and email, behavioral approaches to rewarding drivers, the
positive outcomes of playing prosocial video games, taste aversion,
adaptive learning, neural communication in Alzheimer’s disease, the
value of forgetting, interference and eyewitness recall, and the familiarity
heuristic. Other new topics include the advantages of bilingualism in cog-
nitive development, brain structure and creativity, computer-mediated
problem solving, the relationship between internet use and intelligence,
self-regulation in people with bulimia, binge eating in males, obesity,
computer facial expression recognition, sexting, female orgasm during
intercourse, cloning, emotion recognition in infancy, risk-taking behavior,
literacy skills and compliance, resilience, therapy through teleconfer-
encing, and moral decisions and brain activity. The companion website
features videos, assessments, simulations, study plans, and other
resources.
BF161 2012-014863 978-0-393-70747-2
8 keys to brain-body balance.
Scaer, Robert.
W.W. Norton, ©2012 160 p. $19.95 (pa)
Dr. Scaer, a Colorado-based neurologist, has observed his share of the
“healing of trauma,” i.e., somatic manifestations of trauma. In this acces-
sible self-help/clinicians’ guide, he explains the basics and applications
of neurophysiology, e.g, a dissociation model to understand and treat
posttraumatic stress disorder, irritable bowel syndrome, and other bodily
responses to trauma and stress. The book includes a foreword by the
series editor who is a psychotherapist, basic illustrations of the brain,
and recommended reading.
BF175 2012-007350 978-1-4411-7833-6
Beyond discontent; “sublimation” from Goethe to Lacan.
Goebel, Eckart. Trans. by James C. Wagner. (New directions in German
studies; v.4)
Continuum Publishing Group, ©2012 259 p. $34.95 (pa)
Goebel (German, New York U.) investigates the phenomena of subli-
mation, or the delaying of instinctual gratification for higher goals or
desires, in the history of Western and especially German thought. He
explores Goethe’s Trilogy of Passion poems for their unwitting addition to
the theory of sublimation, and then swerves into Schopenhauer’s pes-
simistic metaphysics of renunciation, renunciation’s transfiguration in
Nietzsche, Freud’s theorizing of it in terms of civilizational development
–8–
and self-control, its trace in the brooding fiction of Thomas Mann, and
the importance of transcending of both subject and nature for Adorno.
Finally, he argues that Lacan’s reading of Martin Luther and Lacan oth-
erwise read alongside Luther show that he found “sublimation is not
renunciation of the world but rather the via regia to its discovery.”
BF199 2012-007754 978-0-674-04851-5
Curious behavior; yawning, laughing, hiccupping, and
beyond.
Provine, Robert R.
Belknap Press, ©2012 271 p. $24.95
The kinds of reflexive behaviors people rarely think about, and are often
embarassed by, are the topic of this entertaining popular book by Robert
R. Provine (psychology and neuroscience, U. of Maryland, Baltimore
County). Provine devotes a chapter to each behavior: yawning, laughing,
crying out loud, tearing up, coughing, sneezing, hiccupping, vomiting,
tickling, itching and scratching, and farting and belching. He throws in
a couple of other categories: the fact that humans have visible whites to
our eyes (most mammals do not), and the behavior of fetuses in the
womb. The primary goal of the book is to entertain readers with facts
about human biology. However, Provine has a basic neuroscientific
interest, which he defines as “the behavioral keyboard.” By looking at
reaction times for these reflexive behaviors, whether we can perform
them on command, and how long it takes us to do so, he hopes to under-
stand more about the basic instinctual range of human behavior.
Similarly, he hopes to learn more about instinctual human behaviors by
looking at fetal behavior. General readers interested in life science, and
readers who enjoy books on strange customs or outré stories (La
Petomaine, the famous French farting performer), will find this book an
entertaining read. Belknap Press is an imprint of Harvard U. Press.
BF311 2012-010309 978-1-4338-1204-0
Handbook of spatial cognition.
Title main entry. Ed. by David Waller and Lynn Nadel.
American Psychological Assn., ©2013 309 p. $99.95
Mostly psychologists, but also geographers explore the study of people
knowing where they are, where resources are, how to get to safety, and
other matters with a spatial dimension. They cover neuroscientific
dimensions of spatial cognition; the acquisition and maintenance of
spatial information in online systems; encoding, storing, and retrieving
spatial information; and interpersonal dimensions of spatial cognition.
BF311 2012-006276 978-1-84872-997-1
Seven views of mind.
Wallach, Lise and Michael A. Wallach.
Psychology Press, ©2013 112 p. $52.95
Lise and Michael Wallach (psychology, Duke U.) present an introduction
to several approaches to understanding and talking about the mind that
have emerged as alternatives to mind-body dualism. The thin volume is
intended for a non-specialist audience and is jargon-free except where
terms are explained. They review scientific as well as more traditionally
philosophy perspectives. After the brief introduction, the first chapter
describes the perspective that mind is distinct from the physical world.
The remaining chapters consider “mind as” a manner of speaking,
behavior, software in the head, brain, scientific and social construct. A
concluding chapter reviews and synthesizes these strategies for talking
about mind into a final reflection on “doing without dualism.”
BF316 2012-013891 978-1-4128-4949-4
Self-observation in the social sciences.
Title main entry. Ed. by Joshua W. Clegg.
Transaction Publishers, ©2013 295 p. $49.95
Clegg (psychology, John Jay College of Criminal Justice, City U. of New
York) contends that psychologists cannot ignore the role of self-obser-
vation in the field and that there is a need for more adequate theories
and practices related to the practice. For psychologists and students, he
brings together 14 chapters by psychologists in the US and UK who
address the evolution of self-observation, including myths surrounding
the introspectionist tradition, the early history of self-report measures in
psychology, and the three-stage myth of movement from introspection to
behaviorism to cognitivism; the theory and practice of contemporary self-
observation, including its use as a linguistic and social practice, prin-
ciples for conducting self-observation research, and a multi-modal
introspection theory; and history, theory, and practice in the phenome-
nological and narrative traditions, including ethnographic perspectives.
–9–
BF318 2011-046701 978-0-674-06572-7
Trusting what you’re told; how children learn from
others.
Harris, Paul L.
Belknap Press, ©2012 253 p. $26.95
Noting a longstanding emphasis on children’s autonomous learning in
the field of education, Harris (education, Harvard U.) argues that there
has been too little reflection on how children make use of knowledge that
they gain from others by listening to claims about unobserved events,
forming mental representations of those events, and working out impli-
cations. He reviews children’s learning behaviors in these contexts,
describing how they gain information from others, how they receive
information that contradicts previously held conceptions, how they
choose informants, how they make moral judgments, and how they
regard the reality of different phenomenon described by others (e.g.,
invisible scientific phenomena versus historical events). Belknap Press is
an imprint of Harvard U. Press.
BF353 2012-022710 978-0-313-39731-8
Living in an environmentally traumatized world; healing
ourselves and our planet.
Title main entry. Ed. by Darlyne G. Nemeth et al. (Practical and
applied psychology)
Praeger, ©2012 239 p. $48.00
In this unique book for psychologists and other helping professionals,
Nemeth (Neuropsychology Center of Louisiana) is aided by two co-
editors—an environmental consultant and a clinical psychologist—along
with contributors in natural sciences as well as psychology. They explain
current environmental issues for non-experts and give suggestions for
helping people cope psychologically with natural and manmade disasters
and the effects of climate change. The first part of the book examines the
current status of water, the atmosphere, and flora and fauna and
describes the latest efforts in conservation, sustainable development, and
preparation for future climate change, offering the case of Mata Atlantica
Biosphere Reserve in Brazil. The second section outlines a framework of
six stages of coping with environmental trauma and presents a four-step
problem-solving method. Some areas discussed include community
healing, spirituality, and lessons from indigenous peoples.
BF441 2012-025663 978-0-13-309256-1
30 days to better thinking and better living through
critical thinking; a guide for improving every aspect of
your life, rev. ed.
Elder, Linda and Richard Paul.
FT Press, ©2013 222 p. $24.99 (pa)
This revised and expanded guide presents a 30-day plan to help readers
learn how to think critically to improve all areas of life. The authors
introduce a conception of critical thinking drawn from their work over
the past three decades, then offer 30 fundamental ideas that serve as the
basis for the 30-day plan, to help readers uncover the extent of their igno-
rance. These include look for hypocrisy in oneself and others; empathize
with others; think for oneself; clarify thinking; be reasonable; distinguish
among fact, preference, and judgment, and between inferences and
assumptions; look underneath people’s words to unspoken realities; be
fair and not selfish; get control of emotions and desires; avoid being
brainwashed by the media or politicians; make the world better; educate
oneself; and other ideas. Elder, an educational psychologist, and Paul, an
author who specializes in critical thinking, are associated with organi-
zation focused on critical thinking. FT Press is an imprint of Pearson
Education.
BF441 2012-023390 978-1-61614-634-4
Bullspotting; finding facts in the age of misinformation.
Collins, Loren.
Prometheus Books, ©2012 267 p. $19.00 (pa)
Collins, an attorney who created a website that debunks fallacies about
the citizenship of President Obama, shows readers how to apply the tools
of critical thinking to identify common features and trends in misinfor-
mation campaigns. He uses examples of various types of conspiracy the-
orists and reality deniers, such as Holocaust deniers, birthers,
moon-landing denialists, 9/11 and JFK assassination conspiracy theorists,
false quotations, hoaxes, UFOs, homeopathic medicine, tax protestors,
and vaccine denialists, to show how rumors are started and the types of
rhetorical techniques and logical fallacies found in misleading or false
claims.
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
BF441 2011-534152 978-1-4411-5750-8
Critical thinking and language; the challenge of generic
skills and disciplinary discourses.
Moore, Tim John.
Continuum Publishing Group, ©2011 247 p. $140.00
Finding the term critical thinking being used both more often and more
widely in academic and political discourse, Moore (applied linguistics,
Swinburne U. of Technology, Australia) investigates what it means to
individual academics who are teaching in different disciplines, whether
there are disciplinary variations, and what the implications may be for
teaching critical thinking in the university. The disciplines he examines
are the ones of particular relevance to his own teaching: philosophy,
history, and literary/cultural studies. He combines interviews with textual
analysis to look at how the term is talked about by academics and how
it is constructed in a range of texts used in teaching.
BF441 2011-410324 978-1-4441-1718-9
Straight and crooked thinking, 5th ed.
Thouless, R.H. and C.R. Thouless.
Hodder, ©2011 174 p. $16.95 (pa)
The first edition published over 80 years ago, Straight and Crooked
Thinking is a field-guide to linguistic manipulations, logical fallacies and
other ways that people’s thinking is led astray (by themselves or others).
Thouless considers different ways of using language, words and facts,
definitions and their difficulties, rhetorical underhandedness, prejudice,
pitfalls of analogy, oratory and suggestion. The final chapters turn to an
examination of what straight thinking is and the future of it in a world
of persuasion and simulation. Then two appendixes present “37 dis-
honest tricks commonly used in argument, with the method of over-
coming them” and a discussion that illustrates crooked thinking. Robert
Thouless was C.R. Thouless’s grandfather, as well as a psychologist who
specialized in logic and rationality. C.R.’s changes are largely with regard
to historical examples, which still date back to the late ‘70s. This is
intended for a lay audience. Distributed by Trafalgar.
BF481 2012-026295 978-1-118-21658-3
Practice perfect; 42 rules for getting better at getting
better.
Lemov, Doug et al.
Jossey-Bass, ©2012 263 p. $26.95
Lemov, who directs a teaching practice project at a nonprofit school man-
agement organization, et al. identify 42 rules teachers, parents, managers,
coaches, mentors, and leaders can use to help others get better at any-
thing by improving how they practice. They draw on their experiences
in responding to the achievement gap between children of privilege and
those in poverty, and use examples from schools and teacher training.
The rules relate to rethinking practice and common assumptions,
including unlocking creativity with repetition and correcting instead of
critiquing; how to practice, such as by analyzing the game, isolating the
skill, and making a plan; using role modeling; using feedback; the
culture of practice, such as making it fun and praising the work; and
post-practice. Jossey-Bass is an imprint of Wiley.
BF511 2012-018457 978-1-61614-658-0
Radical distortion; how emotions warp what we hear.
Reich, John W.
Prometheus Books, ©2012 248 p. $19.00 (pa)
Aiming to bring awareness to research on the mental forces that drive
people apart, especially in today’s splintered society, Reich (psychology,
Arizona State U.) illustrates how rational and intelligent people lose their
ability to understand and appreciate each other when their attitudes and
emotions become involved, showing that emotions and their effects on
thinking and judgment processes breed narrow-mindedness, prejudice,
and polarization in American society. He presents research on aspects of
how divisive relationships occur and function and outlines the social psy-
chology of radicalism and research on psychological principles about the
way the human mind processes information, particularly the social envi-
ronment. He describes examples of radical speech, and discusses scien-
tific research on human judgment processes; studies of how the
principles occur in social, political, and religious beliefs; principles that
categorize radical hearing in everyday lives; how intergroup relations
contain seeds of polarization; principles that people can use to reduce or
eliminate the influences of extremist rhetoric and selective hearing; and
why people might not change their patterns of radical hearing.
All books cited here are new, and all are in print and available.
We prepare entries from bound books only, never galleys.
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
BF531 2012-018455 978-1-61614-664-1
Second that emotion; how decisions, trends, and
movements are shaped.
Holden, Jeremy D.
Prometheus Books, ©2012 287 p. $25.00
Holden, a branding and research strategist who consults with organiza-
tions around the world, draws on stories from history, politics, sports,
popular culture, and business and branding to show businesspeople how
emotion drives decisions, trends, and movements, and often create
illogical leaps to ideas. He discusses how emotion affects how people
form social contracts with public figures and brands; the roles of zealots,
disciples, and the congregation in viral movements, and how to identify
which a leader is and their effectiveness; and the psychology of illogical
leaps made by people to support a cause, brand, or personality. He also
discusses how social media can unleash emotion and create illogical
leaps; the role of certainty and minimizing choice; how signs, symbols,
and iconography shape social contracts and create movements; how
breaking a social contract can be terminal to a movement or person; and
creating a culture shift that draws on these elements.
BF575 2012-019448 978-0-07-352972-1
Comprehensive stress management, 13th ed.
Greenberg, Jerrold S.
McGraw-Hill, ©2013 444 p. $132.67 (pa)
Greenberg (emeritus, U. of Maryland) integrates scientific and statistical
data with anecdotes and personal experiences to help college students
identify stressful situations, understand human responses to them, and
choose ways of dealing with the emotional and psychological arousal of
stress. The 13th edition moves the chapter on college life to an earlier
position, removes the chapter on the elderly, and adds sections on spiri-
tuality and emotional intelligence.
BF636 2012-001661 978-0-415-87253-9
Handbook of counseling and psychotherapy in an
international context.
Title main entry. Ed. by Roy Moodley et al.
Routledge, ©2013 435 p. $59.95 (pa)
This reference for practictioners, students, and researchers is divided into
regional sections on Africa, the Americas, Asia, Europe, and the Middle
East. Within the regional sections are a total of 35 individual country
chapters. Each country chapter offers a brief history of counseling and
psychotherapy in the country, then outlines educational programs and
details licensure and certification rules. Country chapters review current
theories and trends, look at traditional and indigenous healing methods,
consider research and supervision, and overview the strengths, weak-
nesses, opportunities, and challenges of the field of counseling and psy-
chotherapy in the country. Each country chapter closes with a look at
future directions and a summary, making it easy for readers to compare
countries. Editor Moodley teaches counseling at the University of Toronto,
Canada.
BF636 2012-019140 978-0-398-08834-7
Personal counseling skills; an integrative approach, rev.ed.
Geldard, Kathryn and David Geldard.
C.C. Thomas, ©2012 331 p. $45.95 (pa)
Kathryn Geldard, a child, adolescent, and family therapist working in
mental health settings and private practice and teaching at the U. of the
Sunshine Coast in Australia, and David Geldard, a counseling psychol-
ogist, introduce professional and volunteer counselors, those who train
them, and those in the helping professions to personal counseling skills.
They outline an integrative approach to counseling that culls skills from
major counseling approaches, and discuss the counseling relationship;
basic principles and skills like listening, paraphrasing, reflection of
feelings, questions, summarizing, and creating closure; promoting
change through the integrative approach, which draws from psychody-
namic, humanistic/existentialist, cognitive-behavioral, and behavioral tra-
ditions; additional skills for promoting change, such as confrontation,
reframing, challenging self-destructive beliefs, and enabling clients to
make use of their strengths; and practical, professional, and ethical
issues like records, the influence of values and beliefs, confidentiality,
and supervision. Training group exercises are provided for all skills
chapters in this edition.
BF637 2012-033762 978-81-321-0720-0
Body language; a guide for professionals, 3d ed.
Lewis, Hedwig.
Sage Publications, ©2012 239 p. $35.95 (pa)
Lewis, an author, Jesuit priest, and educationist who has been a lecturer
and principal in India, offers a volume meant to help general readers
improve their skills at reading body language, demonstrate how people
–10–
communicate non-verbally, and identify major sources of non-verbal mes-
sages. It begins with a preliminary test and background information on
the characteristics of body language and approaches to interpretation,
then deals with individual gestures and gesture clusters, zones and
spaces, traits and attitudes, and the use of body language in dealing with
difficult people, in presentations, and elevator etiquette. B&w illustra-
tions are included. This edition includes recent developments in non-
verbal communication, added details, modern-day observations of
human behavior and body-talk, a new section on body language in sleep,
and more practical tips and suggestions. It incorporates typical Indian
gestures where relevant.
BF637 2012-032414 978-1-936320-53-0
Contours of privacy; the ethnography of a social and
aesthetic concept.
Roth, Marty.
Academica Press, LLC, ©2013 135 p. $79.95
Marty Roth presents a concise survey of privacy as a topic in literature,
science, and public life. In his introduction, he briefly explains how the
book responds to a flood of concern about privacy in an era of public
narcissism, where the personal is political and information technology is
ubiquitous. He describes his approach as intellectual ethnography, where
he presents an idea (what is privacy?) and reflects on it through a survey
of influential writing. It is more of a survey than a genealogy though,
and draws on fiction as well as nonfiction. It is a thought-provoking read
about privacy in the surveillance era.
BF637 2008-005756 978-90-04-23390-4
The expert negotiator; strategy, tactics, motivation,
behaviour, leadership, 4th ed.
Saner, Raymond.
Martinus Nijhoff Publishers, ©2012 299 p. $63.00 (pa)
In this update of the 2008 edition, Saner (organization and international
management, U. of Basel, Switzerland; World Trade Institute, Berne)
makes a valuable contribution to elucidating the theory and practice of
newer forms of state vs. non-state multiple stakeholder interactions in the
international policy sphere: economic, business, commercial, and non-
governmental organization diplomacy. In the contexts of distributive and
integrative bargaining, he discusses the tactics of reframing, agenda
setting, standard setting, playing watchdog, and whistle-blowing. The
work includes supporting examples, tables and figures, and a list of
related books by the author. Translated from the original titled
Verhandlungstechnik.
BF637 2012-006273 978-0-415-52033-1
The self under siege; a therapeutic model for
differentiation.
Firestone, Robert W. et al.
Routledge, ©2013 272 p. $40.95
Clinical psychologists Robert and Lisa Firestone, and their associate Joyce
Catlett, argue for a new perspective on processes of self-differentiation
and advocate a method for liberating oneself from self-limiting and
interpersonally aggra0vating behaviors. They describe a developmental
perspective and outline factors that resist differentiation in various forms
of social life, showing how behaviors that were adaptive as children are
maladaptive as adults. They advance a concept of a fantasy bond with
mother, family, country, religion people invoke to stave off emotional
pain and anxiety associated with separation and death. They outline a
program of therapeutic engagement with self-limiting thoughts, addictive
habit patterns, and fantasy processes. It stresses the use of voice, a
cognitive-affective-behavioral methodology, and the findings of
neuroscience, attachment research and terror management theory. To
that end, in their final chapter they describe “the ideally differentiated
person, the therapeutic value of friendship, and the special significance
of depth psychology.”
BF639 2012-018465 978-0-87785-348-0
The history of New Thought; from mind cure to positive
thinking and the prosperity gospel.
Haller, John S. Jr. (Swedenborg studies; 21)
Swedenborg Foundation Pub., ©2012 389 p. $29.95
Haller (history and medical humanities, Southern Illinois U.) presents a
history of “New Thought,” from colonial days to the present, which
attends to its relationship with scientific discourse and worldly “success.”
He explores the early foundations of New Thought in a rejection of pes-
simistic Calvinism in favor of self-directed theologies of emotion and intu-
ition that tried to revive a spiritual core to Christianity that was hopeful
of over-coming the “failings” of materiality. These traditions are
grounded in Christianity and so East Asian religions in the west only
–11–
figure as influences rather than developments. While he finds these tra-
ditions start out in earnest, they develop into various forms of spiritual
hucksterism in the 20th century. To this end he considers the rise of
Oprah, positive psychology’s assault on the failings of market society, and
alternative forms of medicine. Since he focuses on ideas more than his-
torical actors, two appendices list organizations and individuals affiliated
with New Thought. This text is published by Swedenborg Foundation
Press. Emmanuel Swedenborg is a prominent figure in this history.
BF692 2011-035010 978-0-8139-3241-5
Brothers born of one mother; British-Native American
relations in the colonial Southeast.
LeMaster, Michelle.
U. of Virginia Press, ©2012 292 p. $39.50
LeMaster (history, Lehigh U.) explores how cultural attitudes toward
gender affected Anglo-Indian relations in the Southeast colonies after the
arrival of the British in the late 1600s. The British and Native Americans,
of course, had different ideas about kinship and gender which could
either help or hurt alliance building between the two groups. The book
is an interesting study of cultural differences and how attitudes toward
gender became a part of the strategy for the European conquest of North
America.
BF692 2012-018789 978-1-4408-0406-9
She-Q; why women should mentor men and change the
world.
Takei, Michele.
Praeger, ©2012 315 p. $58.00
Focusing on a feminine-based consciousness, Takei (women’s studies,
Union Institute) uses science and experience to illustrate the need to
value, celebrate, and focus on the qualities of women to create a more
balanced and better world. In her provocative hypothesis, she examines
the ways the female brain differs from the male brain and suggests that
women are the more superior sex, out-performing males on multiple
levels. By taking a critical look at our male dominated culture, Takei
demonstrates the ways women can use their knowledge to mentor men
and change the world. This is an engaging read for anyone interested in
a revolutionary approach to feminism and equality.
BF698 2012-012305 978-0-7494-6645-9
Coaching for resilience; a practical guide to using positive
psychology.
Green, Adrienne and John Humphrey.
Kogan Page, ©2012 223 p. $39.95 (pa)
This guide shows coaches, trainers, and consultants how to help clients
build better resilience through seven keys, such as letting go of the need
to be liked and in control, understanding that change is the only con-
stant, understanding that life is difficult, and living in the present. They
combine their ideas with those of individuals like Steven Covey, Daryl
Conner, and Eckhart Tolle, and explain the principles of positive psy-
chology; resilience and its origins and qualities; stress and how it
undermines resilience; why it is important to build resilience; and under-
lying psychological dynamics that cause stress. Each chapter has exer-
cises and case studies. Green, who has been a psychotherapist, counselor
and therapist supervisor, and lecturer, and Humphrey, who advises
employers on health and employment issues, work together at a UK con-
sultancy specializing in workplace psychology and employee well-being.
BF698 2012-029677 978-0-393-91311-8
The personality puzzle, 6th ed.
Funder, David C.
W.W. Norton, ©2013 823 p. $98.00
The sixth edition of this undergraduate text incorporates recent research
and new exercises, as well as new online components, including 60
videos demonstrating concepts, an instructor’s manual, lecture slides, an
online study space, and an ebook. While the text covers classic theories
of personality and the intellectual connections between them, just as
important is its coverage of current research, including recent work in
biology, cross-cultural psychology, and cognitive processes. After an
introduction to research methods, sections cover the trait approach, bio-
logical approaches to personality, the psychoanalytical approach, human-
istic and cross-cultural psychology, and learning, thinking, feeling, and
knowing. Pedagogical features include chapter summaries, discussion
questions, and annotated suggested readings. The text contains b&w
photos, illustrations, and New Yorker cartoons in a two-color layout.
Funder teaches psychology at the University of California-Riverside.
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
BF698 2012-028313 978-1-4338-1200-2
The Rorschach Inkblot Test; an interpretive guide for
clinicians.
Choca, James P.
American Psychological Assn., ©2013 281 p. $79.95
The Rorschach Inkblot Test is the best device currently available to
measure some specific personality attributes, says Choca (psychology,
Roosevelt U., Chicago), though expectations of it must be limited and it
must be used in conjunction with other assessment tools. He explains to
fellow mental health professionals what it can and cannot measure, and
how to use it to best effect. His topics include administration, global
scores, the psychogram, form quality and special scores, interpretive
process, and the psychological test report.
BF698 2012-015592 978-0-393-08318-7
Surviving survival; the art and science of resilience.
Gonzales, Laurence.
W.W. Norton, ©2012 257 p. $26.95
Gonzales, author of Deep Survival: Who Lives, Who Dies, and Why, now
addresses the aftermath of life-threatening experiences, such as war,
illness, accidents, natural disasters, and abusive relationships. Recounting
real-life stories of 15 people, he integrates the latest research from neu-
roscience and psychology on how the brain and the mind cope with
danger and extreme situations. While the scientific facts are explained in
terms accessible to general readers, sensationalized stories are given
precedence over scientific information. The book concludes with recom-
mended steps for survival after a near-death situation. The author is
winner of two National Magazine awards.
BF713 2012-935020 978-0-85702-757-3
Developmental psychology; revisiting the classic studies.
Slater, Alan M. and Paul C. Quinn. (Psychology; revisiting the classic
studies)
Sage Publications, ©2012 230 p. $100.00
Fully understanding a subject often involves gaining an overview of the
most important past experiments and how they have impacted subse-
quent research. Slater (psychology, U. of Exeter) and Quinn (psychology,
U. of Delaware), have attempted to do that in this work designed for an
upper-undergraduate course in developmental psychology. The submitted
papers mostly follow the same pattern: background, description of the
experiment, impact, a critique and a conclusion, with references at times
going back to the 1960s. Students will hopefully then leave with a good
introduction to 14 of the historically most important papers, along with
subsequent developments and occasional unsettled conflicts.
BF721 2010-934027 978-0-495-09563-7
Child & adolescent development; an integrated approach.
Bjorklund, David F. and Carlos Hernández Blasi.
Wadsworth Publishing Co., ©2012 768 p. $158.95
Bjorklund (psychology, Florida Atlantic U.) and Blasi (developmental psy-
chology, U. Jaume I, Spain) offer a textbook on child and adolescent
development that focuses on three overarching perspectives that guide
researchers and developmental psychology practitioners—developmental
contextualism, a sociocultural perspective, and evolutionary theory—
which they argue need to be integrated to understand development. They
incorporate applied topics to connect theory and research to the real
world throughout the text, along with discussion of cultural diversity.
BF721 2012-021137 978-0-07-803551-7
Child. (online access included)
Martorell, Gabriela.
McGraw-Hill, ©2013 386 p. $92.67 (pa)
Martorell (developmental and evolutionary psychology, Virginia Wesleyan
College) integrates critical thinking and real-life applications into her dis-
cussion of the biological, psychological, and social forces that influence
child and adolescent development. She leads students through the five
stages of development, from birth to adolescence. Accompanying the
book are online interactive assessments, personalized study plans,
reports of student progress, chapter quizzes, and a video-based program
tracking infants and children through major milestones.
BF723 2011-041636 978-0-674-05546-9
Born together—reared apart; the landmark Minnesota twin
study.
Segal, Nancy L.
Harvard University Press, ©2012 410 p. $49.95
Detailing the discoveries and controversies associated with the Minnesota
Study Of Twins Reared Apart, Segal (humanities, twin studies, California
State U.) provides a compelling overview of her experience with the
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
MISTRA and its scientific contributions to twin research and the nature-
nurture debate. Chapters in this comprehensive account include twins’
life stories, the history of twin research, and the findings of genetic
influence on physiological characteristics. Contains extensive notes, a
glossary, and detailed summaries of research funds awarded to the
MISTRA.
BF723 2011-048262 978-0-393-08102-2
Difficult mothers; understanding and overcoming their
power.
Apter, Terri.
W.W. Norton, ©2012 238 p. $25.95
In this self-help book for general readers, Apter, a psychologist affiliated
with Cambridge University, describes common emotional behavior pat-
terns of five types of difficult mothers: angry, controlling, narcissistic,
envious, and emotionally unavailable. Writing in plain language, she
looks at recent research in attachment, developmental psychology, and
neuroscience that helps explain how children form emotional bonds with
their mothers and why a mother’s role remains central in our emotional
makeup, even as adults. Each chapter contains ‘emotional audits’ to
evaluate the reader’s assumptions and feelings. There is also a chapter on
how to tell if you are a difficult mother, with a useful list of common
mental and emotional tactics for maintaining lack of insight. The final
chapter offers advice on overcoming a difficult mother’s power. The
author has written other self-help books.
BF723 2012-019414 978-0-415-67765-3
How the child’s mind develops, 2d ed.
Cohen, David.
Routledge, ©2013 213 p. $70.00
This brief, accessible text uses plain language to survey key research in
cognitive development, making it appropriate for all those who work
with children, including parents, teachers, doctors, social workers, child
care workers, and students of developmental psychology. Early chapters
cover the developing brain, Piaget’s theory of cognitive development, and
the work of Vygotsky. Later chapters chart the development of moral
sense and memory and look at intelligence testing and other ways of
measuring children’s cognitive development. The book also overviews the
nature versus nurture debate on the development of intelligence and per-
sonality, and explores cognitive development in action in the classroom.
New to this edition is a final chapter on the role of computers, mobile
communication devices, and the child as consumer, raising the question
of whether children are getting smarter. The text includes discussion and
reflection questions, along with b&w photos. Information on the author
is not given.
BF724 2012-022967 978-1-59363-960-0
If I’m so smart, why aren’t the answers easy?; advice
from teens on growing up gifted.
Schultz, Robert A. and James R. Delisle.
Prufrock Press Inc., ©2013 190 p. $14.95 (pa)
Schultz (gifted education and curriculum studies, U. of Toledo) and
Delisle, who works with gifted teens as a teacher and counselor, detail
the experiences of gifted teens and young adults, who share their stories,
insights, advice, anxieties, and successes for other gifted teens. Along
with summaries from the authors, they discuss what giftedness is, its
pros and cons, and finding internal drive; issues with friends, peers, and
fitting in; dealing with expectations, achievement, and perfectionism;
school experiences; family life; thinking about the future; and common
questions related to topics like college and loneliness. There is no index.
BF789 2012-023271 978-1-4338-1181-4
Humanity’s dark side; evil, destructive experience, and
psychotherapy.
Title main entry. Ed. by Arthur C. Bohart et al.
American Psychological Assn., ©2013 291 p. $69.95
Is the potential for evil innate or situational? Are there evil persons or
only evil acts? Bobart (emeritus, California State U., Dominguez Hills) and
fellow psychologists introduce a dozen contributed chapters that address
philosophical and theological conceptualizations of humanity’s “shadow”
aspect and their implications for the practice of psychotherapy. Drawing
on the thinking of Carl Jung, Albert Ellis, Rollo May, Carl Rogers, and
other psychologists, contributors also treat the role of intention in the
degree to which victims of evil are traumatized. For example, psy-
chotherapy from a Buddhist perspective of “dependent origination,” takes
into account circumstances, which may make healing from acts of evil
easier.
–12–
BF798 2012-003562 978-1-4625-0648-4
Handbook of temperament.
Title main entry. Ed. by Marcel Zentner and Rebecca L. Shiner.
Guilford Pr., ©2012 750 p. $125.00
Research into temperament has grown from a minor niche within per-
sonality research into a cross-disciplinary focus on individual differences.
Psychologists Zentner (U. of York, UK) and Shiner (Colgate U., Hamilton,
NY) trace developments that have led to this new approach. International
contributors discuss advances in the field; the basis of positive and neg-
ative emotionality; measures of temperament; developmental, social and
cultural contexts; and applications in clinical and classroom settings. The
handbook concludes with a synthesis of the text’s major themes,
findings, and challenges, and a look ahead to further research on the
links between epigenetics and temperament, between early and adult
temperament, and prevention and new intervention options.
BF1045 2012-019954 978-1-60163-237-1
The world’s weirdest places.
Redfern, Nick.
New Page Books, ©2012 223 p. $15.99 (pa)
From the Bermuda Triangle to Taushida, Guyana’s version of Bigfoot,
Redfern, a British author who writes about unsolved mysteries (e.g., The
Pyramids and the Pentagon), shares his top 25 paranormal-themed locales
worldwide. U.S. sites haunted with strange creatures include Death
Valley, Roswell, New Mexico, and the New York subway. The book
includes images and a bibliography.
BF1171 2012-035341 978-0-7864-6470-8
The thought reader craze; Victorian science at the
enchanted boundary.
Wiley, Barry H.
McFarland & Co., ©2012 228 p. $45.00 (pa)
In Victorian England, claims of thought-reading and mediums were
taken seriously. Wiley (Order of Merlin of the International Brotherhood
of Magicians), a retired high-tech executive living in southern California,
presents a history of the second sight craze from c. 1870-1909, reveals
techniques used, and reprints period and recent articles on the phe-
nomenon. Illustrations include photos of, and ads for, noted thought
readers, and drawings of items mentally “sent.” The author recounts
what he believes was his sole genuine telepathic experience while
working as a mentalist.
BF1434 978-3-643-90183-5
Exploring the occult and paranormal in West Africa.
Title main entry. Ed. by Josephat Obi Oguejiofor and Tobias Wendl.
(African studies; v.47)
LIT Verlag, ©2012 262 p. $44.95 (pa)
Making critical surveys, scholars of humanities and social sciences from
Nigeria, Ivory Coast, Benin, and Burkina Faso examine the emergence,
circulation, and social significance of occult and paranormal phenomena
in West Africa, which have mushroomed with socio-economic global-
ization and economic neoliberalism. The topics include a linguistic per-
spective on the psychopathology of communication in occult and
paranormal phenomena, the search for justice through the occult and
paranormal in Nigeria, the logic and magic of life-affirmation in Africa,
the value of indigenous knowledge, and establishing a new rapport with
the invisible world. There is no index. Distributed in the US by ISBS.
AESTHETICS & ETHICS
BH21 2011-031387 978-1-84706-370-0
The Continuum companion to aesthetics.
Title main entry. Ed. by Anna Christina Ribeiro. (Continuum com-
panions to philosophy)
Continuum Publishing Group, ©2012 355 p. $170.00
This collection of essays is devoted to contemporary issues in aesthetics
within the domain of analytic philosophy, meaning a focus on concepts
in methodology and a naturalistic-scientific approach. After an intro-
duction and section on methodology, the bulk of the chapters focus on
core issues and art forms, which proceed from general to particular con-
cerns. Topics include defining art and the ontology of artwork, aesthetic
experience and artistic value, music, literature, dance, theater, visual art,
film, architecture, and popular art. The last few of these core chapters
turn to the environment, cultivating a global perspective on aesthetics, as
well as other new directions in the field. A final section devoted to
resources offers a chronology of writing on aesthetics or the philosophy
of art, as well as more contemporary resources for aesthetic research. The
contributors are mostly philosophy professors from North America and
Europe with backgrounds in aesthetics and analytic philosophy.
–13–
BH39 2012-012171 978-0-8133-4719-6
Philosophy of art; aesthetic theory and practice.
Boersema, David.
Westview Press, ©2013 360 p. $42.00 (pa)
Boersema (philosophy, Pacific U.) presents a hybrid anthology of
readings in philosophy of art that goes further than others in presenting
context and commentary. He addresses issues in the philosophy of art
through three lenses: metaphysics, epistemology, and axiology. Each
chapter is organized around three readings under the heading of some
element of art or aesthetic experience. He considers just what art is and
what it means to philosophize about it, what it means to be an artist, the
nature of audiences, the relationship between art and society as well as
art and science, and specific forms of art including: dance, theater,
music, painting, photography, architecture, and literary art. More general
concerns with the artist, audience and nature of art are brought to bear
on investigations of specific art forms in later chapters. The text is
designed for use in a course and offers discussion questions at the end
of each chapter.
BH81 2011-028614 978-1-4411-9878-5
Aesthetics; the key thinkers.
Title main entry. Ed. by Alessandro Giovannelli. (Key thinkers)
Continuum Publishing Group, ©2012 244 p. $100.00
This collection of 18 essays presents several monographs of key thinkers
in Western philosophy known for their contributions to aesthetics. The
exciting thing about aesthetics, Giovannelli (philosophy, LaFayette U.) inti-
mates in his editorial introduction, is the non-linguistic routes to truth
and knowledge it opens for philosophers to analyze. In the spirit of inde-
pendent study the essays are self-contained and can be read alone. For
those interested in reading the whole book, the essays are organized
roughly chronologically, covering: Plato, Aristotle, medieval aesthetics,
David Hume, Immanuel Kant, Hegel, Schopenhauer and Nietzsche,
Heidegger, Benjamin and Adorno, and several Anglophobe aesthetic
philosophers, including John Dewey, Nelson Goodman and Kendall
Walton. Two special chapters focus on medieval aesthetics (3) and con-
temporary developments (18). The contributors, mostly all professors of
philosophy or humanities from Europe and North America, make the
most of their academic training while writing for a non-specialist
audience. This text could serve as a secondary source for one of the par-
ticular thinkers it covers or an introduction to Western aesthetic phi-
losophy in general.
BH201 2011-031711 978-1-4411-9820-4
Introducing aesthetics and the philosophy of art.
Hick, Darren Hudson.
Continuum Publishing Group, ©2012 230 p. $110.00
Hick (philosophy, Susquhenna U., Pennsylvania) introduces the concepts
and processes of aesthetics as a branch of philosophy, anchoring each
chapter to a representative painting or photograph. He covers defining
art, the ontology of art, interpretation and intention, aesthetic properties
and evaluation, emotions and the arts, art and morality, and aesthetics
without art.
BJ977 2012-019251 978-90-04-21808-6
Meaning and morality; essays on the philosophy of Julius
Kovesi.
Title main entry. Ed. by Alan Tapper and T. Brian Mooney. (Studies in
moral philosophy; v.3)
BRILL, ©2012 222 p. $140.00
Affiliated with the Journal of Moral Philosophy, the series explores all
areas of normative philosophy. In this volume, scholars of philosophy,
law, and politics from Australia, Europe, North America, and Singapore
reintroduce the thought of Hungarian-born Australian philosopher
Kovesi (1930-89) some 20 years after his death and 40 years after the pub-
lication of his only book, Moral Notions. Their topics include his refu-
tation of Hume, connaturality and the metaphysics and epistemology of
virtues, MacIntyre and Kovesi on the nature of moral concepts, legal rea-
soning, and Kovesi on natural world concepts and the theory of meaning.
BJ1012 2012-017370 978-0-393-91928-8
Doing ethics; moral reasoning and contemporary issues,
3d ed.
Vaughn, Lewis.
W.W. Norton, ©2013 775 p. $72.00 (pa)
This textbook combines explanatory text, cases, and readings in order to
introduce the field of ethics in society to undergraduate students,
covering the key concepts, the background issues underlying
contemporary moral problems, and critical reasoning for applying and
evaluating moral theories. This third edition has been expanded to
include new chapters on bioethical issues of genetic science, including
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
cloning; same-sex marriage; and political violence (i.e. war, terrorism,
and torture). The first seven chapters address foundational issues and
specific schools of moral thought. The remaining chapters explore
specific issue topics, including (in addition to those new topics
mentioned above) abortion, euthanasia and physician-assisted suicide,
capital punishment, sexual morality, environmental ethics, animal rights,
and global economic justice. Each of these issues chapters includes some
five to seven readings
BJ1012 2011-031700 978-1-4411-4403-4
Ethics; an overview.
Attfield, Robin.
Continuum Publishing Group, ©2012 262 p. $130.00
Attfield (philosophy, U. of Cardiff, Wales) presents a textbook for under-
graduate students in their second or third year that introduces ethics
from the perspectives of the history of ethics, value theory and the good
life, normative ethics, applied ethics, meta-ethics, and free will and
responsibility. Some of her students and former students have provided
feedback on the material. Her goal is not to cover every facet of ethics,
but to introduce ways of thinking in the field so readers can practice it
themselves.
BJ1012 978-1-74286-063-3
Teaching ethics in schools; a new approach to moral
education.
Cam, Philip.
ACER Press, ©2012 160 p. $39.95 (pa)
Rather than telling students what to think, Cam (U. of New South Wales,
Australia) shows educators how to teach them how to think about moral
matters using a collaborative inquiry approach. He describes the nature
of morality, the beginnings of children’s moral life, and moral education
within broader society, then provides a critique of conventional
approaches to moral education, such as traditional moral instruction,
rewards and punishments, and character training. He discusses the use
of philosophical tools to explore ethics through collaborative inquiry,
introduces ethics, and explains how to use collaborative inquiry to teach
ethics and construct exercises and activities. Distributed in the US by
ISBS.
BJ1031 2011-045893 978-1-4411-5308-1
Reasons.
Wiland, Eric. (Continuum ethics)
Continuum Publishing Group, ©2012 184 p. $29.95 (pa)
Wiland (philosophy, U. of Missouri- St. Louis) offers a philosophical
account of how people take actions because of reasons. He assumes
readers have not read any of the previous literature on reasons for
actions, to make his study accessible to beginners and to specialists from
other fields. His perspectives are what a reason is; psychologism: desires
and beliefs; deontic, value-based, and primitivist accounts; hybrid the-
ories; constitutivism; and Anscombean views.
BJ1401 2012-002889 978-1-4411-3855-2
Goodness, God, and evil.
Alexander, David E. (Continuum studies in philosophy of religion)
Continuum Publishing Group, ©2012 155 p. $110.00
Alexander (philosophy, Huntington U., Indiana) develops an account of
goodness that makes sense of the variety of goodness observed in people,
places, and things. In a version of moral realism that relies on theses in
the philosophy of language and metaphysics, he ties together the varieties
of goodness by arguing that all goodness points to God. He covers con-
temporary moral realism, P.T. Geach’s claim that good and bad are
always attributive adjectives, some meta-ethical implications of the
attributive account of good, the function of good and good functions, and
from the attributive account to God.
BJ1461 2012-023822 978-1-4331-2067-1
Free will in Montaigne, Pascal, Diderot, Rousseau, Voltaire
and Sartre.
Gregory, Mary Efrosini. (Currents in comparative romance languages
and literatures; v.209)
Peter Lang Publishing Inc, ©2012 298 p. $88.95
Mary Gregory, an author of many books about religion and science,
explores the intellectual history of free-will, from its biblical roots
through a line of French thinkers that includes Montaigne, Pascal,
Diderot, Rousseau, Voltaire, and Sartre. She argues for the importance of
these French thinkers on the grounds that the formation of the French
republic has been highly influential in modern relations between indi-
vidual and extra-individual forms of will. The last few chapters turn to
Freud, Edward Bernays (the public relations guru), and developments in
neuroscience. Gregory explores three dominant ways of conceiving the
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
relationship between free-will and its anti-thesis, determinism: compati-
blism, incompatiblism, and libertarianism. She considers habit in
Montaigne, predestination in Pascal, Diderot’s study of the deleterious
effects of monastic life in The Nun, natural man and its constraints in
Rousseau, Voltaire’s criticism of equality, bad faith and the abdication of
free-will in Sartre, the tyranny of unconscious desire in Freud, the manip-
ulations of public opinion in Bernays, and the neuronal processes that
neuroscientists say initiate decisions before we are fully conscious of
them.
BJ1589 2012-006645 978-0-393-33942-0
Would you eat your cat?; key ethical conundrums and
what they tell you about yourself. (reprint, 2010)
Stangroom, Jeremy.
W.W. Norton, ©2012 144 p. $15.95 (pa)
Strangroom, cofounder of The Philosopher’s Magazine, presents several
classical and innovative ethical conundrums that take the form of sce-
narios like “would you eat your cat?”, “are you a closet imperialist?”,
“should we have sex when drunk?”, and “whose body is it anyway?”
Giving two pages to each, Strangroom reflects on what seems important
in making decisions about the situations he constructs. In the second half
of the book, he presents further analysis of issues raised in the scenarios,
but pursued more broadly and with regard to situating them in aca-
demic philosophy. It is an entertaining, but not scholarly or rigorous
book, and would serve better as casual reading material than in a
classroom setting.
RELIGION
BL48 2012-015183 978-1-57075-997-0
Introduction to the study of religion, 2d ed.
Ring, Nancy C. et al.
Orbis Books, ©2012 411 p. $35.00 (pa)
This is a college level textbook for an introduction to religion course. Its
authors are all professors in the religion department of Le Moyne College,
a Jesuit school in New York. They introduce religion broadly though sys-
tematically, drawing on world and indigenous religions. They examine
the Judeo-Christian tradition the most extensively, but are concerned with
religious experience and activity in general. Almost a dozen chapters are
organized into five sections on human experience and religion, religious
action, religious language, religious change, and religious authenticity.
Each chapter ends with a summary and a list of further reading
resources, while boasting break-away sections that bring a scholarly
concept or perspective into an everyday situation.
BL51 2012-032490 978-0-8207-0457-9
Reexamining deconstruction and determinate religion;
toward a religion with religion.
Title main entry. Ed. by J. Aaron Simmons and Stephen Minister.
Duquesne University Press, ©2012 409 p. $30.00 (pa)
Within the framework of that branch of the philosophy of religion that
draws primarily and explicitly on the phenomenological tradition
ranging from Heidegger to Derrida, American scholars of philosophy and
religion explore alternatives to the religion-without-religion paradigm that
dominates the deconstructive and phenomenological philosophy of
religion. They cover the philosophical basis for religion with religion,
religion with religion in practice, and responses to religion with religion.
BL65 2011-038478 978-0-89503-411-3
Spiritual resiliency and aging; hope, relationality, and the
creative self.
Ramsey, Janet L. and Rosemary Blieszner. (Society and aging)
Baywood Publishing Co., ©2013 266 p. $59.95 (pa)
Ramsey (pastoral theology and ministry, Lutheran Seminary, St. Paul,
Minnesota) and Blieszner (gerontology and family studies, Virginia
Polytechnic Institute and State U., Blacksburg) aim to replace unhealthy
and unbalanced visions of aging with hopeful, yet realistic ones by
relating the stories of 16 Lutheran women and men aged 65 and older
and how they exhibit spiritual resiliency, focusing on the challenges and
promises of aging, especially as it intersects with questions of meaning
and purpose. The stories are part of a research project undertaken
between 1994 and 2003 in the US and Germany to understand the ways
these individuals have been empowered by their religious faith to survive
losses and crises. They use narrative theory to illustrate how spiritually
resilient older adults tell optimistic stories that also reveal a coming-to-
terms with the limitations and suffering of human life; how they tell rela-
tional stories, but have developed a mature sense of personal agency; and
how they tell imaginative stories of personal growth and transformation,
–14–
but also reveal a sense of self that is centered and rooted. The book is
aimed at students, clinicians, and professionals in gerontology and other
fields.
BL80 2012-031030 978-0-7864-6531-6
Mysticism and alchemy through the ages; the quest for
transformation.
Edson, Gary.
McFarland & Co., ©2012 298 p. $40.00 (pa)
Edson, retired from directing the museum at Texas Tech University, has
written two previous books on masks and shamanism. He sees this book
as the third in a connected set examining the roles of shamanism, mys-
ticism, and alchemy in cultures around the world. Considering psycho-
logical motivations for alchemy and mysticism, he describes the beliefs
and practices of ancient alchemists and mystics from many religious and
spiritual traditions around the world. The book gives attention to the idea
of transformation though different practices, the notion of direct contact
with the Absolute, the search for the elixir of immortality, and the quest
for the philosopher’s stone. The book includes a wealth of b&w historical
illustrations, frontispiece illustrations from historical books, and b&w
photos of significant objects; notes on the source of each illustration are
also provided.
BL312 2012-931636 978-0-500-51615-7
Mythology; the complete guide to our imagined worlds.
Dell, Christopher.
Thames & Hudson, ©2012 352 p. $40.00
With its color historical art illustrations and photos throughout, this
attractive 9x9.5” coffee table/reference book will keep students and
general readers captivated with page after page of supernatural beings,
battles, monsters, gods, and goddesses. The book looks at mythology
around the world primarily through the art of many periods, but also
contains accessible overviews and captions. Because many of the major
mythological traditions had contact with each other, the book considers
them side-by-side in thematic chapters rather than chronologically,
allowing the reader to make comparisons of recurring motifs. An intro-
duction overviews the study of mythology over the years and asks
readers to consider the possibility of modern-day myths. There is also a
section offering an overview of 11 global traditions. Author Dell is an art
historian.
BL410 2011-294510 978-90-420-3488-4
Hospitality—a paradigm of interreligious and intercultural
encounter.
Title main entry. Ed. by Friedrich Reiterer et al. (Intercultural theology
and study of religions; 4)
Editions Rodopi, ©2012 258 p. $74.25 (pa)
This collection of essays considers hospitality from the point of view of
the inter-religious or inter-cultural character. Indicative here is the
cognition that hospitality has to do with a factor which is proven in
almost all religions and cultures of the world. Topics covered include:
multiculturalism and hospitality in the Canadian experience, queering
hospitality, Islamic hospitality, cosmopolitanism and hospitality in
Derrida, hospitality in Christian theology and the Old Testament. A
number of the essays are in German. Price is converted from euros and
subject to fluctuation.
BL473 2012-009877 978-0-8028-6689-9
Do we worship the same God?; Jews, Christians, and
Muslims in dialogue.
Title main entry. Ed. by Miroslav Volf.
W.B. Eerdmans, ©2012 166 p. $20.00 (pa)
Under the auspices of the “God and Human Flourishing Program” at Yale
University, two consultations were held on whether Muslims and
Christians worship the same god. Only Christians were invited to the
first, to hammer out a position. Jews, Muslim, and Christians were
invited to the second. Six papers selected from the presentations are pub-
lished here. They are not indexed.
BL580 2012-035403 978-1-933253-72-5
From the Holy Land to Graceland; sacred people, places
and things in our lives.
Vikan, Gary.
Am. Assoc. of Museums, ©2012 201 p. $34.95 (pa)
Author Gary Vikan is the former director of the Walters Art Museum in
Baltimore, and a recognized authority on medieval European and
Byzantine art. Here, he unexpectedly applies his expertise on religious art
and pilgrimage to our own society, and produces a smart book about the
sacred in popular culture. Vikan’s writing offers readers an easy,
learned, informal style. It evokes the best of the museum world: the
–15–
pleasure of honest interest, without ironic or demeaning posturing. Here,
medieval pilgrim fairs and Elvis impersonator conventions occupy the
same footing. Shrines to Princess Diana, the Virgin of Guadalupe, and
the dead of the Twin Towers are equally important examples of locus
sancti, and sales are comparable whether the product is splinters of the
True Cross or vials of Elvis sweat. With insight and humor, Vikan con-
jures an authentic sense of the deep powers at work behind lacquered
pompadours and plastic plants, and the lively circuses at play around
objects and traditions we imagine as entirely serious and holy. The book
is fully illustrated with good color photographs of the people, places, and
events in the text. He does not write in the first person, but Vikan is
clearly taking readers to visit landscapes and people he knows from expe-
rience, and he often lets the faithful explain their encounters with the
sacred in their own words. Though the book’s touchstone is Graceland
and The King (and by extension, Christian metaphors), it will interest a
wide range of readers. The author points out that what makes Elvis such
a good example of the sacred in our daily lives is that his cult survives,
instantly familiar to believers, agnostics, and jokers alike, drawing new
faithful to Graceland long after the original life, death, and community
that created it. The book is filled with profound respect for human faith,
feelings, and follies, and for customs past and present. A treat for general
and specialist readers, regardless of their personal feelings about
Gracelands or Kings.
BL586 92-62138 978-0-500-81050-7
The temple. (reprint, 1993)
Lundquist, John M. (Art and imagination; from alchemy to Zen)
Thames & Hudson, ©2012 128 p. $14.95 (pa)
Lundquist (religious studies, Pace U.) presents a short introduction to
temples and their significance around the world. He argues that the
temple “incorporates within itself most of the ideas that make up our
concept of religion.” His examination therefore focuses on religious
themes of sacred space, sacred geometry, mandalas, ritual, heavenly con-
duits, and dwelling. Every page is illustrated with a photo or plate of
temples and other sacred architecture from around the world, though
there is a focus on Western religion and iconography. This reprint of the
1993 publication has been redesigned and reformatted.
BL600 2011-033552 978-1-59460-973-2
Pictures making beliefs; a cognitive technological model
for ritual efficacy.
Wingo, Camille. (Ritual studies monograph series)
Carolina Academic Press, ©2012 238 p. $30.00 (pa)
This book deals with a highly techical topic, but a subject of general
interest: what makes rituals work? What convinces people that a ritual is
effective? Rituals here range from highly codified religious rituals like
Eastern Orthodox baptism to more everyday rituals like fasting at
Ramadan, having afternoon tea, white dresses for weddings, or painting
eyes on a figure of the Buddha. Author Camille Wingo takes an unusual
tack on the question; she’s an information systems analyst. Drawing on
a remarkable range of erudition from philosophy to sociology to cog-
nitive science, Wingo hopes to analyze what makes rituals work in terms
of information processing. The book depends on explaining two actions
she describes as parallel to ritual: making pictures, and make-believe.
The author writes in a skillful and fluid style, and the book is
remarkably accessible given its level of technical and scholarly infor-
mation. This is not a book about debunking religious faith; it attempts
to explain how rituals work, not why they do. Its goal is to describe how
people’s minds operate on levels from neurobiology to group social
behavior. The book is interesting, unusual, strongly researched, and well
written. Wingo’s ultimate proposal is that ritual works to create cultural
objects (an American cookie or English tea biscuit is given as an
example) whose identity is fuzzy enough that they remain flexible and
mysterious, and therefore able to contain much meaning. Paradoxically,
what makes these objects work inside a ritual makes their value and use
debatable outside of it.
BL603 2012-029525 978-0-8232-3946-7
Things; religion and the question of materiality.
Title main entry. Ed. by Dick Houtman and Birgit Meyer. (The future
of the religious past)
Fordham University Press, ©2012 482 p. $35.00 (pa)
As part of the research program The Future of the Religious Past, the
international conference Things: Material Religion and the Topography of
Divine Spaces was held in Amsterdam during June 2007. In 21 essays
from that gathering, social scientists and scholars of religion and phi-
losophy cover anxieties about things, images and incarnations, sacred
artifacts, bodily fluids, public space, and digital technologies. Among
their topics are one African genealogy of dangerous things, deus ex
machina and other theatrical interventions of the supernatural, how the
common practice of counting one’s beads reveals its secrets in the
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
Muslim communities of North Cameroon, the affective power of the face
veil between disgust and fascination, and online gaming between spir-
itual experience and commodity fetishism.
BL625 2012-032459 978-1-4331-1738-1
After spirituality; studies in mystical traditions.
Title main entry. Ed. by Philip Wexler and Jonathan Garb. (After spiri-
tuality; studies in mystical traditions; v.1)
Peter Lang Publishing Inc, ©2012 197 p. $139.95 (pa)
This collection of eight essays explores contemporary and recent forms of
mysticism. The essays are organized in two sections on Jewish mysticism
and the dyad of Buddhist and Christian mysticism. Many of them are
interested in the interplay between mysticism and sociology, which leads
editor Philip Wexler (sociology of education, Hebrew U. of Jerusalem) to
write about society and mysticism. For the authors, including Buddhist
scholar and Zen teacher David Loy (ethics/religion and society, Xavier
U.), spirituality is best thought of in terms of “the commodity fetish of
religion.” To that end, many of the essays are concerned with the
political economy associated with spirituality. This book inaugurates
what looks to be a promising series of studies into the social ramifica-
tions of mystical traditions.
BL1105 2009-023320 978-90-04-17893-9
Brill’s encyclopedia of Hinduism; v.2: Sacred texts, ritual
traditions, arts, concepts.
Title main entry. Ed. by Knut A. Jacobsen. (Handbook of Oriental
studies. Section two, India; v.22/2)
BRILL, ©2010 887 p. $346.00
Written by impressively credentialed scholars in Europe, North America,
and Australia, the second volume of this major reference (five volumes
are planned) offers lengthy entries on sacred texts and languages, ritual
traditions, arts, and concepts in Hinduism, with each entry concluding
with a selected bibliography. Sacred texts and languages are discussed in
tandem, with 21 entries on topics that include the major languages and
religious works as well as vernacular languages and literatures of North
and South India. The section on ritual traditions includes lengthy articles
on the temple rituals of North and South India, as well as domestic
rituals, rituals connected to food, and death and the afterlife. Articles on
Bollywood and Tamil cinema, iconography, music, dance, and martial
arts are among the 16 topics on arts. Articles on concepts central to
Hinduism include those on Bhakti, body, dharma, gift and gift giving,
and untouchability. The essays are clearly written and organized, acces-
sible to advanced undergraduates as well as researchers, and include
cross-reference to other articles in the work. A glossary is provided.
BL1215 2012-017348 978-81-321-0740-8
Public Hinduisms.
Title main entry. Ed. by John Zavos et al.
Sage Publications, ©2012 507 p. $70.00
Developed form a series of seminars associated with a research network
investigating “the public representation of a religion called Hinduism” in
different contexts in India, the UK, and the US, this volume contains 32
papers exploring the topic in thematically ordered sections, each of which
includes discussions focused both on India and the diaspora and most
of which also include consideration of Hindu nationalism alongside
Hindu public contexts and ideas that are manifestly not part of the
Hindu nationalist project. The thematic sections address the role of the
scholar and practitioner in representing Hinduism, corporate forms of
Hinduism that have become prominent in the diaspora but have also had
an impact on India, developments in particular traditions of Hinduism,
issues of Hindu community mobilization, and mediations of Hinduism
in differing contexts.
BL1226 2012-465346 978-3-447-06743-0
Anecdotes in the Varakari Kirtana folk tradition of
Maharastra.
Dadhe, Kasturi. (Beiträge zur Indologie; band 47)
Harrassowitz, ©2012 292 p. $86.74 (pa)
In a doctoral dissertation in Indiology at the Johannes-Gutenberg
University, Mainz, Germany (no date noted), Dadhe analyzes in detail the
content of a typical Varakari kirtana religious folk music performance,
with a special focus on the anecdotes narrated during it. He has com-
piled, translated, and analyzed 180 anecdotes to provide a perspective on
how a philosophical discourse/performance can function, and the tools
that it uses for effective communication with the audience. They are
arranged in thematic sections, such as public and average life, religious
didactics, nature, the human body, and kings and legends. Distributed in
North America by The David Brown Book Co.
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
BL1283 83-072972 978-0-500-81048-4
Tantra (reprint, 1973)
Rawson, Philip. (Art and imagination)
Thames & Hudson, ©2012 128 p. $14.95 (pa)
Philip Rawson, with a background in tantra and museum curation,
presents a short, thematic guide to tantric sexual practice and philosophy.
He describes tantra as a cult of ecstasy that uses human sexual union as
a cosmic metaphor for the nature of reality that emphasizes the interplay
of unity and differences. The guide is richly illustrated with photos of
cosmic and bodily diagrams, classical images depicting sexual positions
and explaining their significance, as well as related sacred objects. In
addition to the imagery, he explores ritual and devotional aspects, the
sexual ontology, Krishna, death and fire, the subtle body, and the
approach to unity. This reprint of a 1973 publication has been redesigned
and reformatted.
BL2050 978-1-921867-28-6
Old myths and new approaches; interpreting ancient
religious sites in Southeast Asia.
Title main entry. Ed. by Alexandra Haendel.
Monash University Press, ©2012 301 p. $49.95 (pa)
Contributors whose disciplines are not identified place ancient Southeast
Asian temples within their general cultural and geographic sur-
roundings, complementing the many studies of their art and archi-
tecture. They consider how the people who inhabited the religious sites
adapted to the local environments, the inter-relationship between the
temples and the environment, and the functionality of sacred sites in the
region. The 16 studies are from a conference of the same name, for
which neither date nor location is cited. They are not indexed. Distributed
in the US by ISBS.
BL2370 978-90-77922-92-7
Genealogies of shamanism; struggles for power, charisma
and authority.
Boekhoven, Jeroen W.
Barkhuis, ©2011 383 p. $52.00 (pa)
Boekhoven has slightly revised his PhD dissertation in theology and reli-
gious studies at the University of Groningen, the Netherlands. He sets out
a genealogy of thinking about shamanism in the West that includes both
scholars and practitioners. His topics are approaching shamanism, inter-
pretations in the 18th and 19th centuries, early 20th-century American
interpretations, 20th-century European constructions, the Bollingen con-
nection from the 1930 to the 1960s, a post-war American vision, the
genesis of a field of shamanism in America from the 1960s to the 1990s,
and a case study of shamanisms in the Netherlands. Distributed in North
America by The David Brown Book Co.
BL2530 978-0-7748-2265-7
Reasonable accommodation; managing religious diversity.
Title main entry. Ed. by Lori G. Beaman.
U. of British Columbia Press, ©2012 239 p. $94.00
With the concept of “reasonable accommodation” increasingly heard in
Canada’s public discourse about the treatment of religious minority prac-
tices, the eight papers presented here by Beaman (classics and religious
studies, U. of Ottawa, Canada) consider the language of “reasonable
accommodation” as measured against the principle of equality rights and
in light of power relations implicit in giving and receiving of rights in
Canada and in other countries. Topics include the ways in which the
very foundation of “reasonable accommodation” fails scrutiny as bound-
aries between majority and minority become blurred and as the idea that
it is newcomers that need to be accommodated is undermined by dis-
crimination against native minorities, the tensions between liberal indi-
vidualism and religious freedom that allows for adherence to illiberal
religious commitments, the hostility towards Muslim women wearing the
Niqab in western countries, issues of religious diversity and practice in
prisons in France and England, the general contours of the management
of religious diversity in Australia, and the ways in which religiously
based normative standards are implicated in court decisions in Canada.
Distributed in the US by the U. of Washington Press and in Canada by
the U. of Toronto Press.
BL2532 2011-047655 978-0-8263-5075-6
Yoruba traditions and African American religious
nationalism.
Hucks, Tracey E. (Religions of the Americas)
U. of New Mexico Press, ©2012 438 p. $60.00
Hucks (religion, Haverford College, Pennsylvania) shares not only her
findings on Yoruba religious traditions, but also the experience of her 15
years of research in the US, Cuba, and Kenya among practitioners of
Africa and African descent. She concentrates on Africa as a religious
–16–
symbol, and examines it within the historical context of an extra-church
black-nationalist tradition that chose to revitalize it as an effective
strategy for mobilizing in the second half of the 20th century. Many
voices provide alternative interpretations of Yoruba in the US as religious
practice, cultural appropriation, and distinct diasporic racial ontologies.
BL2540 2012-014909 978-1-58826-852-5
Politics, religion & society in Latin America.
Levine, Daniel H. (Religion in politics and society; dynamics and devel-
opments)
Lynne Rienner Publishers, Inc., ©2012 321 p. $65.00
Levine (emeritus, political science, U. of Michigan) explores the evolving
relationship between politics and religion in Latin America over the past
50 years. While providing particularistic historical context throughout the
discussion, he also attends to overarching general theoretical issues.
Thematically, chapters address transformations in Catholicism and
Protestantism; democracy, pluralism, and religion; social movements and
civil society; religion and violence; rights and reconciliation; comparative
perspectives; and future trends.
BL2747 2012-020449 978-1-61233-118-8
How to prove God does not exist; the complete guide to
validating atheism.
Treharne, Trevor.
Universal Publishers, ©2012 321 p. $25.95 (pa)
This is a guide for atheists who want to argue or be ready to argue with
theists about many common questions theists throw at atheists. Treharne
has selected the most common questions that confront the atheist stance,
question the moral character of atheists, doubt the explanations gen-
erated by empirical science, and defend religion. He answers questions
like “isn’t atheism a religion too?” and “why would you bother acting
morally without a god?” He also considers the rationale people provide
for religion. These are not dense philosophical arguments, but questions
that usually arise from what Treharne argues are common missteps in
thinking. The book closes with a penultimate chapter devoted to five
arguments for atheism from lack of evidence, human nature, evil, silence
and personal reflection, and religious diversity. The final chapter, on
closing considerations, takes up miscellaneous questions and quibbles.
BL2747 2012-018238 978-1-59884-978-3
Voices of unbelief; documents from atheists and
agnostics.
Title main entry. Ed. by Dale McGowan.
Greenwood Press, ©2012 278 p. $100.00
Created especially for high school and college students, this anthology col-
lects letters, essays, diary entries, book excerpts, blogs, and other brief
readings by atheists and agnostics from ancient times to the present,
from well-known philosophers to ordinary people. After a chronology
and a brief definition and explanation of atheism and agnosticism, the
selections are organized chronologically from the ancient world to the
20th century, with additional sections on humorists and contemporary
voices of the period 1998-2009. Authors include Carl Sagan, Elizabeth
Cady Stanton, Charles Darwin, and Albert Einstein. Each reading begins
with a contextual introduction and suggests things to keep in mind as
you read. Readings also provide notes on the author, discussion ques-
tions, activities and exercises, and websites for more info. Many entries
also include boxes of historical background, definitions, or profiles of
key figures. Editor McGowan is executive director of Foundation Beyond
Belief.
BL2747 2012016785 978-0-9852815-2-6
Why are you atheists so angry?; 99 things that piss off
the godless.
Christina, Greta.
Pitchstone Publishing, ©2012 182 p. $14.95 (pa)
Greta Christina, a blogger and atheist activist, defends the anger and
incisive positions atheists take regarding religion. She does so to both
equip and inspire fellow atheists and to answer sincere but sometimes
naive questions raised by the religious. She argues that atheist anger is
grounded in a more authentic concern for justice and compassion
because it’s often directed at how believers treat other believers. She
explains just why moderate or progressive religion is not exempt from
the critique of religion, but also makes the case for atheist activism and
offers a set of actions atheists can take. A final chapter collects dozens
of Internet, print, and organizational resources for the atheist activist.
–17–
BM535 2011-049622 978-0-8028-6704-9
Covenant and hope; Christian and Jewish reflections.
Title main entry. Ed. by Robert W. Jenson & Eugene Korn.
W.B. Eerdmans, ©2012 294 p. $38.00 (pa)
Christian and Jewish writers come together in this book to offer intel-
lectual reflections on two themes. The first is the concept of covenant, the
idea of being a covenanted people, and how that concept affects rela-
tionships with people from different faiths and traditions than those of
the covenant. The second is the concept of hope in a religious context:
ideologies of hope, the responsibility or calling of those who consider
themselves covenanted peoples to bring hope to humanity, the forms
hope-bringing should take, and shared ideas of a better future. The
editors are co-directors of the Institute for Theological Inquiry. The book’s
goal is to focus on shared agreements and attitudes between Jews and
Christians, so these are highlighted and differences are minimized.
Contributors take up such questions as Jewish-Christian relations without
the idea that Christianity supersedes the Jewish covenant. Some readers
will be convinced by the idea of shared Jewish-Christian witness to
humanity; others will see it as a concept fundamentally based on a
Christian ideal of evangelical mission, and accept or dismiss it on this
basis.
BM729 2012-022618 978-90-04-23483-3
Between feminism and Orthodox Judaism; resistance,
identity, and religious change in Israel.
Israel-Cohen, Yael. (Jewish identities in a changing world; v.20)
BRILL, ©2012 149 p. $133.00
Yael Israel-Cohen has produced a thoughtful, well-researched, and
extremely readable book on a neglected subject: women and feminism in
conservative religious tradition. The author conducted interviews with
forty-five women and men leading radical changes in religious norms
around women’s status in contemporary Orthodox Jewish communities
in Israel, and the book derives from her PhD research. It is most
remarkable for its accessible, engaging, first-person voice, and for its
attention to the voices we usually do not hear in discussions of women
in conservative religion: those of the women themselves. As a female
Orthodox Jewish researcher and the daughter of a female Conservative
Jewish rabbi, Israel-Cohen is uniquely situated to reach her interviewees.
Part one of the book looks at sociology of religion and relationships
between the changing status of women and conservative religions in
general, then considers the specifics of Israeli Jewish Orthodoxy. Part two
looks at how the women interviewed perceive and define their own
activism on changes in ritual structure and movement toward the ordi-
nation of women rabbis. The author argues that the literature of Jewish
Orthodoxy tends to define women’s roles in terms of passive resistance;
negotiating change by avoiding confrontation. Part three looks at how
women who identify as Orthodox feminists develop and maintain an
identity that most others would define as contradictory. The last part of
the book looks at ramifications beyond gender dynamics; the author
helpfully brings up the concept of hybridity, and locates the core tension
in the question of whether the hybridity evoked by ideas of pluralism
and change is a hybridity within conservative traditions, or between the
tradition and foreign ideas. Jewish Orthodoxy in Israel is a powerful
exemplar of this tension, since both faith and nationhood depend on
great acceptance of diversity within groups combined with a core value
of separation and rejection of hybridity between groups. In such situa-
tions, everything depends on the question of who and what belongs
within the lines. Israel-Cohen’s study resonates far beyond the subject of
Orthodox feminism, to consider the question of how change can come
peacefully in conservative, change-resistant settings. It will be of interest
to a variety of academic and general readers.
BM729 2011-449168 978-3-11-026205-6
Many pious women; edition and translation.
Fox, Harry and Justin Jaron Lewis. (Studia Judaica; bd. 62)
De Gruyter, ©2011 337 p. $147.00
Did the Renaissance affect Ashkenazi Jewish women in Venice (site of the
first Jewish ghetto in Europe)? This annotated English translation,
opposite the original Yiddish text, of one of three sections of the 16th
century manuscript likely published in Venice, Seder Nashim, (“Women”),
is a lively, often funny, occasionally bawdy work in “didactic poetry” of
male advice relating to women’s issues. Informed by gender theory and
postmodern approaches, University of Manitoba professors Fox (arts)
and Lewis (religion/Judaic studies) present a chronology and intro-
ductory essays to this unique hagiography of biblical heroines in the
context of medieval women’s lives. They address challenges in translating
a largely defunct Old Yiddish dialect spiced with Italian loan words. The
work includes a facsimile of folios.
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
BM755 2011-043861 978-1-904113-89-8
Rashi.
Grossman, Avraham. Trans. by Joel Linsider.
Littman Libr./Jewish Civiliz., ©2012 327 p. $64.50
Grossman (Jewish history, Hebrew U. of Jerusalem) contributes to the
Zalman Shazer Center’s series “Great Minds in Jewish Thought and
Creativity” with a volume devoted to the life and work of the 11th-century
French scholar Rabbi Shelomoh Yitshaki, known as Rashi. He charac-
terizes Rashi’s commentary on the Bible and the Talmud as the most
influential in Jewish history since the completion of the Talmud itself. He
addresses the often-asked but enduring questions whether Rashi had a
fully developed conceptual intellectual doctrine, and whether he was a
revolutionary or a conservative. First published as Emunot ve-de’ot be-
ólamo shel Rashi by the Zalman Shazar Center in 2000. Distributed in the
US by ISBS.
BM755 978-1-936235-57-5
Zohar Harakia.
Duran, Rabbi Shimon Ben Zemach. Trans. by Philip J. Caplan.
(Judaism and Jewish life)
Academic Studies Press, ©2012 465 p. $75.00
Phillip J. Caplan, author of a popular book on Jewish law for Jewish lay
readers, has produced a new translation of the Zohar HaRakia. The
original text was written by Rabbi Shimon ben Zemach Duran in the
early sixteenth century, and functions to enumerate and comment on
what became the classic 613 religious commandments for Jewish life.
Caplan has done meticulous research to create an accurate text as well as
correct errors that crept into some historical editions. This translation is
dominated by a laudable concern for accuracy. When sentences are par-
ticularly incomprehensible in direct translation, the author avoids
revising structure to create a meaningful English sentence, but may add
the actual subject or object of the sentence in brackets so readers are not
wholly lost. Occasional footnotes mark places in the text where the trans-
lator was confused by what the author meant, or there were possible
errors in the original manuscript. There is a short glossary and a long
citations index. Readers whose interest is in technical scholarship will be
grateful.
BP172 2012-008599 978-90-04-22803-0
Orthodox Christians and Islam in the postmodern age.
Sharp, Andrew. (History of Christian-Muslim relations; v.16)
BRILL, ©2012 258 p. $149.00
Many consider Eastern Orthodox Christianity to be a bridge between
Western Christianity and Islam, says Sharp (Virginia Commonwealth U.),
but there has been no extensive study of the theological aspects of that
relationship. He illuminates what might be considered a distinctive
Eastern Orthodox approach to Islam and the Muslim-Christian relations
from the perspective of Orthodox Christians themselves, while also con-
veying the variety of attitude and nuances on these and related matters
within the broader Orthodox tradition. He covers the historical back-
ground; Orthodox theological perspectives on the religions; dialogue and
declarations; Orthodox Christians, Muslims, and identity; and changing
attitudes following the event of 9/11.
BP605 2011-038959 978-1-4411-6523-7
Classical spirituality in contemporary America; the
confluence and contribution of G.I. Gurdjieff and Sufism.
Pittman, Michael S.
Continuum Publishing Group, ©2012 249 p. $120.00
Pittman (humanities and world religions, Albany College of Pharmacy
and Health Sciences, New York) explores how teachings by Caucasian
dance teacher Gurdjieff (1872-1949) are linked to classical Sufi thought,
and how the similar schools have influenced esoteric and eastern reli-
gious thought in the US. He covers the creation of a discourse, Beelzebub’s
Tales and Sufism, J.G. Bennett and the gospel of Gurdjieff and Sufism,
American style Gurdjieff at Sherborne House and Claymont Court, and
Gurdjieff and the continuing influence of Sufism in America.
BQ7185 2012-019930 978-0-8248-3673-3
Theravada Buddhism; the view of the elders.
Tilakaratne, Asanga. (Dimensions of Asian spirituality)
U. of Hawai’i Press, ©2012 186 p. $17.00 (pa)
Tilakaratne (Pali and Buddhist studies, U. of Columbo, Sri Lanka)
explains the views of one of the two main branches of Buddhism on the
teachings of the Buddha and how believers manifest them in their lives.
Among his topics are the beginning of Buddhism, the basic teachings of
the Buddha, karma and its results, the traditional Theravada practice,
and Theravada in wider perspective.
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
BQ8514 2012-007446 978-0-8248-3590-3
Luminous bliss; a religious history of Pure Land literature
in Tibet.
Halkias, Georgios T. (Pure Land Buddhist studies)
U. of Hawai’i Press, ©2013 335 p. $49.00
A specialist in Tibetan and Himalayan religions and history, Halkia has
held academic posts in Britain, Germany, and Japan. Here he anticipates
some historical aspects in the constitution of Tibetan Pure Land liter-
ature, and signals when possible the dynamic relation between soteri-
ology and contemplation and their impending synthesis in Buddhist
orthopraxy. The religious literature was inspired by an impressive solar
deity, he says, which emerged from a Mahayana polytheistic universe
and attained over the centuries, trans-local eminence and unequivocal
soteriological authority. He includes an annotated English translation
with critical analysis of the Orgyan-gling gold manuscript of the short
Sukhavativyuha-sutra.
BR65 2012-003854 978-0-19-975129-7
Christ meets me everywhere; Augustine’s early figurative
exegesis.
Cameron, Michael. (Oxford studies in historical theology)
Oxford U. Press, ©2012 410 p. $74.00
Much of the passion and impetus of Augustine’s early writings, as is
well-known, stemmed from his previous belief in Manichaeism. In this
notable and substantial study, Cameron (historic theology, U. of Portland,
Oregon) presents an in-depth analysis of On Genesis, Against the
Manichees and Augustine’s early responses to the writings of Paul, as
expressed in his Expositions of the Psalms, demonstrating in careful detail
the development of Augustine’s exegetical approach through the use of
figurative reading of Biblical texts, particularly the interpretation of the
Old Testament. Subsequent chapters continue the analysis in close
readings of On Christian Teaching, On Instructing Beginners, and Against
Faustus the Manichee. The result is a multi-faceted analysis of how
Augustine read Scripture and by extension, how he believed it should be
interpreted and taught.
BR65 2012-004209 978-90-04-22533-6
Grace and the will according to Augustine.
Karfíková, Lenka. Trans. by Markéta Janebová. (Supplements to Vigiliae
Christianae; texts and studies of early Christian live and language;
v.115)
BRILL, ©2012 428 p. $220.00
KartÍková (philosophy, Charles U.) presents a fascinating, critical study of
St. Augustine’s ideas about grace and will. At stake is Augustine’s under-
standing of how human will relates to God’s will in terms of Augustine’s
disagreement with Pelagians over salvation, but also what KartÍková calls
the unacceptable implications of this controversy, including “double pre-
destination, inherited guilt which deserves eternal punishment and its
transmission through libidinous procreation”. She considers the whole of
his work chronologically, but focuses on what Augustine recommended
himself, limiting her use of his sermons and correspondences. After an
introductory essay, the text is organized in three parts. The first is from
Augustine’s earliest writing on God, the cosmic order, the origin of evil
in the will, and St. Paul’s notion of the will split against itself. The second
part starts with his response to Simplicianus about Paul’s Letters to
Romans and then selects from The Confessions, his anti-Donatist and anti-
Manichean polemics, and considers issues of grace and violence. The
third part focuses on his debate with the Pelagians, Julian of Eclanum,
the sexual-affective transfer of sin, and the dialectic of grace and will. A
conclusion restates her defense of Julian and the Pelagians as welcome
revisions while showing how they still owe much to Augustine.
BR115 2011-051002 978-1-60606-116-9
Discourse on sacred and profane images.
Paleotti, Gabriele. Trans. by William McCuaig. (Texts & documents)
Getty Publications, ©2012 353 p. $60.00 (pa)
Cardinal Paleotti (1522-97) completed two of the five volumes he had
planned for Discorso intorno alle imagini sacre e profane and had them
published in 1582. There was a Latin translation in 1594, a new edition
of the original in 1961, and a recent translation into modern Italian, but
this is the first English edition. Historians and art historians have written
much about the work, says Paolo Prodi in the introduction, because it
foregrounds the relation between art history and religious, cultural, and
political history and between images and the use made of them. He says
it also compels scholars to rethink an entire epoch conventionally denoted
by the sequence Renaissance, Reformation, and Counter-Reformation.
–18–
BR127 2012-009347 978-1-4331-1940-8
Welcoming the interfaith future; religious pluralism in a
global age.
Quinn, Frederick. (Studies in Episcopal and Anglican theology; v.6)
Peter Lang Publishing Inc, ©2012 190 p. $79.95
An Episcopal priest, retired US diplomat, and voluminous writer, Quinn
presents a snapshot of the current Western Christian perceptions of other
religions, how they have or have not changed over the centuries, and how
practitioners might explore the controversial issue. Among his topics are
what the Bible says about other religions, the 20th century’s expanding
horizons, Catholic and Protestant strains since 1945, the Asian contri-
bution goes global, and interfatih encounters in the prismatic present.
BR128 2012-372039 978-90-420-3478-5
Thinking the divine in interreligious encounter.
Title main entry. Ed. by Norbert Hintersteiner. (Currents of encounter:
studies on the contact between Christianity and other religions, beliefs,
and cultures; v.44)
Editions Rodopi, ©2012 321 p. $86.40 (pa)
Advanced graduate students of theology and religious studies at
European universities, their professors, and other specialists explore chal-
lenges and practices of naming and thinking the Divine in Europe
through the lenses of post-colonial culture and power struggles, and inter-
religious encounter and global dialogue. Among the perspectives are
Catholic tradition and transmission in crisis, Protestants and Jews after
the Shoah, unity and trinity of God in early Christian-Muslim dialogue,
exploring the Hindu universe and coming home, and God and the cult
of nothingness in Buddhist-Christian dialogue. This is one of three
volumes generated by the project. It is not indexed. The price is converted
from the euro, so subject to fluctuation.
BR735 2011-501501 978-3-11-026752-5
Forgetting faith?; negotiating confessional conflict in early
modern Europe.
Title main entry. Ed. by Isabel Karremann et al. (Pluralisierung &
Autorität; v.29)
De Gruyter, ©2012 287 p. $126.00
Contributors identified only by name explore the accommodation people
made when given the choice between fighting—perhaps dying—for their
faith and just keeping quiet until the regime changed again. Among the
topics are forgetting Henri IV’s past after the French wars of religion, the
historical sublime in Shakespeare’s Richard II, forgotten religions and
religions that cause forgetting, the Renaissance musician and theorist
confronted with religious fragmentation, religious conflict and com-
mercial interests in early modern Spain, and remembering Westphalia in
a post-secular age.
BR1156 2012-013683 978-0-85745-595-6
A matter of belief; Christian conversion and healing in
north-east India.
Joshi, Vibha.
Berghahn Books, ©2012 298 p. $95.00
Joshi (social and cultural anthropology, Oxford U.) has been studying the
Naga people of northeastern India since 1985. Over the past two or three
generations, she says, many have converted from their animist beliefs to
Christianity. She examines that process and its significance, especially in
matters of sickness and health. Her topics are a mountainous state, clas-
sifying spirit and sickness, religion of practice, traditional healers, a brief
history of Christian evangelization in the Naga Hills, contemporary
Christianity and the healing spirit, and church and healing.
BR1644 2012-356554 978-3-8329-7049-9
Religion and attitudes towards life in South Africa;
Pentecostals, charismatics and reborns.
Dickow, Helga. (Studien zu ethnizitat, religion und demokratie; bd.13)
Nomos, ©2012 211 p. $49.00 (pa)
Dickow presents a study based on a countrywide representative survey
on questions of religion, society, economics, and politics in South Africa,
a supplemental survey of members of the Grace Bible Church in Soweto,
and in-depth interviews with leading ministers of charismatic/Pentecostal
churches and representatives of mainline churches. Her goal is to
establish the social profile of the different religious communities and the
types of responses to questions about attitude. Her findings cover iden-
tities, perceptions of differences and coexistence, social and economic per-
ceptions, psychosocial attitudes, political orientations, opinions on the
political order, and a comparison between the different churches. The
study is not indexed. Distributed in the US by ISBS.
–19–
BS417 2012-007734 978-0-8028-6720-9
A cultural handbook to the Bible.
Pilch, John J.
W.B. Eerdmans, ©2012 307 p. $26.00 (pa)
From 1993 to 2006, Pilch (Johns Hopkins U.) wrote a bimonthly article in
The Bible Today discussing how modern social science research into the
Middle East can illuminate aspects of the Bible. The articles from 1993
to 1997 were published as The Cultural Dictionary of the Bible by the
Liturgical Press in 1999, and were favorably received. The rest of the
articles—from 1998 to 2006—are presented here, arranged thematically in
sections on the cosmos, Earth, persons, family, language, human con-
sciousness, God and the spirit world, and entertainment. Names, sub-
jects, and passages are indexed.
BS1225 2011-008431 978-90-04-20250-4
Pentateuch, Hexateuch, or Enneateuch; identifying literary
works in Genesis through Kings.
Title main entry. Ed. by Thomas Dozeman et al. (Society of Biblical
Literature: ancient Israel and its literature; v.8)
BRILL, ©2012 313 p. $166.00
Biblical scholars synthesize the current thinking and controversies about
the number and role of works of literature embedded in the Hebrew
Bible. A recent complication has been the emergence of redaction crit-
icism, which sees the compilers and editors of the Bible as authors them-
selves to some degree or another, so that the boundaries between
component works—so carefully charted and fiercely defended in source
criticism and the tradition-historical approach—weaken and in places
threaten to evaporate altogether. Four methodological studies are followed
by seven case studies. The topics include the emergence and disap-
pearance of the separation between the Pentateuch and the
Deuteronomistic history in biblical studies, the empirical comparison and
the analysis of the relationship of the Pentateuch and the Former
Prophets, the cohesion and separation of books within the Enneateuch,
reading Genesis 2-4 as a paradigmatic narrative, and possible literary
connections between the Egyptian bondage in Exodus 1-15 and Solomon’s
forced labor in 1 Kings 1-12.
BS1465 2012-012871 978-3-11-027548-3
The pillar function of the speeches of wisdom; Proverbs
1:20-33, 8:1-36, and 9:1-6 in the structural framework of
Proverbs 1-9.
Zabán, Bálint Károly. (Beihefte zür Zeitschrift für die alttestamentliche
Wissenschaft; v.429)
De Gruyter, ©2012 377 p. $168.00
Elaborating on his PhD dissertation, for which he notes neither date nor
institution, Zabán, a minister in the Hungarian Reformed Church, ana-
lyzes passages in Proverbs that are widely known as the three speeches
of wisdom, as a starting point from which to examine, evaluate, and
interpret the structure of the first nine chapters of the Old Testament
book. After surveying previous research, he considers building and
house-filling; a new chiastic structure of Proverbs 1:20-33; close readings
of 8:1-36 and 9:1-6; the Gattung definition of the three speeches of
wisdom; poetic imagery as a unifying element of structure; and the gra-
dation of enticement, temptation, and desirability in wisdom’s speech.
BS1705 2011-038967 978-0-567-20551-3
Persepolis and Jerusalem; Iranian influence on the
apocalyptic hermeneutic.
Silverman, Jason M. (The library of Hebrew Bible/Old Testament
studies; 558)
T&T Clark, ©2012 301 p. $140.00
In a revision of his 2010 doctoral dissertation at Trinity College Dublin,
Silverman (religion, Leiden U.) explores possible Iranian influence on the
apocalyptic writings that play such a large role in Judaism and
Christianity. They are generally dated to the period between the writings
of the Hebrew Bible and the New Testament, and he investigates potential
influence from either of the relevant Iranian empires that the Judaeans
came into contact with: the Achaemenid about 550-330 BCE and the
Parthian about 250 BCE to 224 CE. He covers sources in Iranian religion
and royal ideology; the Achaemenid context; orality, literacy, and cultural
interaction as media of influence; textual analysis of Biblical literature
and Enochic literature; and an apocalyptic hermeneutic.
BS2330 2012-013171 978-0-664-25592-3
An introduction to the New Testament; history, literature,
theology.
Boring, M. Eugene.
Westminster John Knox Press, ©2012 722 p. $50.00 (pa)
The New Testament is a book of history that narrates and interprets the
events in the life of Jesus and his followers who became the early
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
Christian community, proclaims Boring (emeritus, New Testament, Texas
Christian U.), and not a book of ideas, ideals, and inspirational religious
principles. From that perspective, he discusses such aspects as the New
Testament within the Hellenistic World, Jesus within Judaism, Paul’s last
letters, Mark and the origin of the gospel form, and interpreting the
Gospel of John.
BS2485 2012-003804 978-0-19-989842-8
Looking for Mary Magdalene; alternative pilgrimage and
ritual creativity at Catholic shrines in France.
Fedele, Anna. (Oxford ritual studies)
Oxford U. Press, ©2013 320 p. $35.00 (pa)
In this revision of her dissertation of 2008 (in anthropology, from the
École des Hautes Études en Sciences Sociales in Paris and the Universidad
Autónoma in Barcelona), Fedele describes the ritual practices performed
during three organized pilgrimages and on individual pilgrimages by
women holding pointedly non-Catholic beliefs, who look to the Mary
Magdalene as a powerful spiritual symbol. Fedele describes how the
women, who subscribe to neopagan, feminist, neoshamanist, and other
New Age beliefs, re-appropriate sites sacred to Catholics, as well as other
sites they associate with the life of Mary Magdalene. As an anthropol-
ogist, Fedele accompanied the pilgrims and describes in detail the rituals
they perform, interspersing her account frequently with the words of the
participants themselves. Attitudes towards gender, nature, and the
Catholic Church are prominent themes. Some b&w images, maps, and a
lengthy list of references are provided.
BS2545 2012-009874 978-0-8028-6724-7
The New Testament on sexuality.
Loader, William. (Attitudes towards sexuality in Judaism and
Christianity in the Hellenistic Greco-Roman era)
W.B. Eerdmans, ©2012 565 p. $65.00 (pa)
Loader (New Testament studies, Murdoch U., Australia) presents a com-
prehensive survey of the treatment of sexuality in the New Testament and
its contexts. It is the last of a five-part series examining sexuality in the
Judeo-Christian tradition. He starts off with two chapters intended to
provide context but not comprehensive background on sexuality in both
the Jewish and Greco-Roman worlds early Christians lived in. It is a
survey of both what the Bible itself says and enduring interpretations.
Each chapter is structured numerically with sub-headings on specific
people (e.g. St. Paul or Plato), practices, rules and the meaning of their
transgression, sexual power, rights and responsibilities. After the first
two, further chapters explore sexuality in the gospel tradition, sexuality
in St. Paul’s writing and beyond, divorce, homosexuality, men and
women’s roles in the Christian community, and celibacy.
BS2555 2012-013135 978-90-04-23106-1
Prayer in the Gospels; a theological exegesis of the ideal
pray-er.
Nygaard, Mathias. (Biblical interpretation series; v.114)
BRILL, ©2012 283 p. $171.00
In a revision of his 2010 PhD dissertation at the University of Aberdeen,
Scotland, Nygaard (biblical studies, Fjellhaug International U. College,
Norway) proposes that it is possible to describe the experience of prayer
to a non-believer by identifying patterns in the text of the New Testament.
Traditionally religious experience has been held to be inaccessible outside
of belief. Working through the gospels in turn, he considers such topics
as the ministry narrative in Matthew, the passion narrative in Mark, the
infancy and travel narratives in Luke, and the signs narrative in John.
BS2860 2012-027760 978-0-8028-6748-3
Thomas and the Gospels; the case for Thomas’s
familiarity with the Synoptics.
Goodacre, Mark S.
W.B. Eerdmans, ©2012 226 p. $39.00 (pa)
Goodacre (New Testament, Duke U., North Carolina) makes a case that
the author of the apocryphal Gospel of Thomas was familiar with the
canonical synoptic gospels of Matthew, Mark, and Luke. The study
requires some detailed discussion of all four works, he says, but the con-
clusion may cast light on the synoptic gospels as well as on Thomas.
Among his topics are verbatim agreement between Thomas and the syn-
optics, Matthewan and Lukan redaction in Thomas, Thomas 79 and Luke
as a special case, the missing middle in Thomas, and dating Thomas and
the gospels.
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
BS2900 2012-016075 978-90-04-22805-4
The apocryphal epistle to the Laodiceans; an epistolary
and rhetorical analysis.
Tite, Philip L. (Texts and editions for New Testament study; v.7)
BRILL, ©2012 158 p. $99.00
Tite (comparative religion, U. of Washington) has long been intrigued by
the little letter written in Paul’s name that New Testament scholars and
church historians dismiss as a poorly constructed forgery based on the
authentic letters in the New Testament. He presents an epistolary analysis
of the prescript, the thanksgiving period, the letter body the paraenesis,
and the letter closing. Then he offers a theological synthesis, encom-
passing Pauline eschatology, ecclesiology, Christology, pneumatology, and
trinitarian theology. His conclusions explore pseudo-historical letters, Paul
as cultural hero, the relationship of Laodiceans to other Pauline letters,
and the social currents of the second century.
BT30 978-3-643-90190-3
Worshipping at the feet of our ancestors; Hendrik
Kraemer and the making of contextual theology in South
Asia.
Niles, Damayanthi. (Contactzone; explorations in intercultural theology;
v.12)
LIT Verlag, ©2012 95 p. $29.95 (pa)
Niles (constructive theology, Eden Theological Seminary, St. Louis,
Missouri) explains the recent concept of four theological orientations, or
zones: orthodox, liberal, neo-orthodox, and revisionist. She looks at the
shift from the neo-orthodox zone to the revisionist zone, beginning with
a theology articulated by Hendrick Kraemer (1888-1965) in the West, then
theological figures outside the Western Christian centers. In particular,
she focuses on the 1938 International Missionary Conference in
Tambaram, South India. There is no index. Distributed in the US by ISBS.
BT732 2012-018109 978-0-8028-6602-8
Disability in the Christian tradition; a reader.
Title main entry. Ed. by Brian Brock & John Swinton.
W.B. Eerdmans, ©2012 564 p. $45.00 (pa)
Scholars of theology and ethics in the US and Europe offer Christian per-
spectives on what should be considered normal for humans, and on
approaches to people who are deemed deficient. Their topics include
Augustine’s hierarchies of human wholeness and their healing, seeing
with Julian of Norwich, Kierkegaard and the abilities and disabilities of
subjectivity, Bonhoeffer and the war over disabled life, and Stanley
Hauerwas on disability.
BV225 2012-010301 978-1-4625-0695-8
The psychology of prayer; a scientific approach.
Spilka, Bernard and Kevin L. Ladd.
Guilford Pr., ©2013 226 p. $40.00
This is a book about the psychology rather than theology of prayer.
Following an introduction to definitions of prayer, psychologists Spilka
(emeritus, U. of Denver) and Ladd (Indiana U. South Bend; a former min-
ister) review scientific studies on the purposes, multiple dimensions, and
mind-body health consequences of prayer. They present a balanced dis-
cussion of the controversial research on intercessory prayer directed
toward healing others, and recommendations for further empirical
studies.
BX1158 2010-036361 978-0-465-03144-3
The abacus and the cross; the story of the Pope who
brought the light of science to the Dark Ages. (reprint,
2010)
Brown, Nancy Marie.
Basic Books, ©2012 310 p. $16.99 (pa)
Science writer Brown tells the life story of Gerbert d’Aurillac, better
known as Pope Sylvester II, the pope of the year 1000. She dwells on his
mathematical and scientific ability but does not ignore the political
intrigue that often put him out of favor with kings and earlier popes. Her
explanation of his scientific knowledge corrects many long held myths,
such as that everyone believed the world would end in AD 1000 and that
everyone thought the earth was flat. However, she creates new ones in
the process. The reader is left to think that, after Gerbert’s brief light, the
“Dark Ages” closed in again and no more science was accomplished until
the “Renaissance.” Too much of her story is told in scientific “either/or”
terms when history is much more “and/also.” Her effort is laudable but
her background understanding incomplete. This is a paperback reprint
of a book first published in 2010.
–20–
BX1905 2012-030760 978-1-61248-072-5
Episcopal reform and politics in early modern Europe.
Title main entry. Ed. by Jennifer Mara DeSilva. (Early modern studies;
10)
Truman State University Press, ©2012 226 p. $44.95 (pa)
Historians specializing in religion and the church in early modern
Europe explore the crisis and reform involving Catholic bishops during
the 16th and 17th centuries. Among their topics are episcopal promotion
during the reign of Mary I (1553-58) and the roots of episcopal resistance
to the Elizabethan religious settlement, bishops in the Habsburg
Netherlands on the eve of the Catholic renewal 1515-59, office and
patronage in mid-16th-century Tortona (Italy), Sébastien Zamet’s rela-
tionships with nuns 1615-55, and challenges to episcopal authority in
17th-century Padua.
BX2347 2012-014317 978-1-57075-975-8
Faith and struggle in Smokey Mountain; hope for a planet
in peril.
Beltran, Benigno P.
Orbis Books, ©2012 203 p. $25.00 (pa)
Benigno Beltran is a Society of the Divine Word priest in the Philippines.
He lived for decades on a mountain of trash in the center of Manila, the
capital of the Philippines, known as Smokey Mountain. In this short
account of his time there, he focuses on his intense religious experiences
within himself and in interacting with other scavengers and mountain-
dwellers. He is a devout believer in God and sees Smokey Mountain as
a blight and source of reflection for our blighted culture of scientific
materialism.
BX4827 2012-014496 978-1-4331-1796-1
The term “person” in the Trinitarian theology of Wolfhart
Pannenberg.
Whapham, Theodore James. (American University studies series VII;
theology and religion; v.321)
Peter Lang Publishing Inc, ©2012 168 p. $70.95
Whapham (theology and ministry, St. Thomas U.) analyzes and evaluates
Pannenberg’s contribution to the current debate over the best translation
of the Greek term hypostasis, which the Greek fathers used to describe
the distinctions within the Godhead. In his three-volume Systematic
Theology he argues that the term person must be retained in the Christian
doctrine of the Trinity, Whapham says, and promotes an understanding
of personhood that incorporates many of the changes that modern phi-
losophy has introduced into its meaning.
BX8611 2012-013677 978-0-87062-416-2
Dale Morgan on the Mormons; collected works part 1,
1939-1951
Morgan, Dale. Ed. by Richard L. Saunders (Kingdom in the West series;
v.14)
The Arthur H. Clark Co., ©2012 511 p. $45.00
Volume 14 in the series, this book looks at the Mormon-related work of
historian Dale Morgan. Better known as a historian of the North
American fur trade, Morgan also wrote extensively on Mormon history.
This book, the first volume of a two-volume set, collects Morgan’s pub-
lished and unpublished writing on the Mormons. This volume includes
Morgan’s bibliography of Latter Day Saints materials, his introduction to
the book The State of Deseret, an unpublished manuscript on the
Kingdom of God, several essays, book reviews, contract writing, and
material from the Works Progress Administration guide to the state of
Utah. Editor Richard L. Saunders (history, U. of Tennessee, Martin) is a
Dale Morgan specialist. He has edited and provided annotation for the
material in this volume.
HISTORY OF CIVILIZATION, ARCHAEOLOGY,
BIOGRAPHY
CB475 978-3-643-90113-2
Ritual, images, and daily life; the medieval perspective.
Title main entry. Ed. by Gerhard Jaritz. (History: Research and Science;
v.39)
LIT Verlag, ©2012 247 p. $39.95 (pa)
Medievalists and art historians explore the function, construction, space,
and messages of images; the rituals associated with them; and the pos-
sible influences of these phenomena on the daily life of the image pro-
ducers, users, and recipients. Among their topics are working with
pictures in elaborated systems, audience and image in the Grand’ Salle
of the palace at Paris, prayers and gesture in late medieval Transylvania,
Seder Eve in 15th-century Ashkenaz, and the structure of medieval
–21–
images and the birth of polyphony. The 13 essays are revised from pre-
sentations at a December 2008 conference at the Austrian Academy of
Sciences. Distributed in North America by ISBS.
CC79 2012-397017 978-1-55407-992-6
Written in bones; how human remains unlock the secrets
of the dead, 2d ed.
Title main entry. Ed. by Paul Bahn.
Firefly Books Ltd., ©2012 224 p. $24.95 (pa)
Bahn, an archaeologist, shows general readers how the study of human
remains reveals things about the lives, cultures, and beliefs of ancient
people from around the world. He provides a glimpse into the study of
archeology through specific illustrative cases in periods ranging from
fossil hominids to Napoleonic troops. They describe the dietary habits
and behavior of early humans, natural and deliberate deaths, burials,
and mummies, and include many color photos and illustrations. This
edition has been revised and updated to include recent discoveries and
theories and seven new cases, such as early European farmers, mummies
and modern medicine, and infant deaths in a Roman brothel.
CC135 978-1-907132-41-4
EuroMed 2012; 4th international conference; progress in
cultural heritage preservation; short papers.
EuroMed International Conference (4th: 2012: Lyssi, Cyprus) Ed. by
Marinos Ioannides, Dieter Fritsch, Johanna Leissner, Rob David, Fabio
Remondino and Rosa Caffo.
Multi-Science Publishing Co., ©2012 378 p. $95.00 (pa)
The 62 papers in this collection, averaging about six pages in length,
discuss such areas as digital data acquisition technologies and on-site and
remotely sensed data collection in cultural heritage, novel Internet-based
cultural heritage applications, the economics of cultural informatics and
tourism, diagnosis and monitoring for the preventive conservation and
maintenance of cultural heritage, non-destructive diagnosis technologies
for the safe conservation and traceability of cultural assets, and pro-
tecting submerged cultural heritage. The proceedings are not indexed.
CJ89 978-0-7948-3687-0
Grading coins by photographs, 2d ed.
Bowers, Q. David.
Whitman Publishing, ©2012 363 p. $19.95 (pa)
In this update of the 2008 edition, Bowers, a professional numismatist,
provides insights into changing trends and nuances in grading U.S.
coins—from half cents to gold double eagles (e.g., a coin’s obverse and
reverse may be graded differently). The spiral-bound guide includes tips
for collectors, color illustrations, a case study of the effect grades can
have on coins in the marketplace, and a few advertisements.
CJ1826 978-0-7948-3662-7
Guide book of United States currency, 5th ed.
Bressett, Kenneth.
Whitman Publishing, ©2012 335 p. $19.95 (pa)
In this update of the 2009 edition, Bressett, an American numismatist
well-known as the author of guidebooks on coins, describes and grades
large size, small size, and fractional U.S. paper currency (e.g., silver cer-
tificates, Treasury notes, Federal Reserve notes). Bressett advises novice
collectors to specialize, and provides tips on housing a collection,
inventory, and detecting counterfeits. Rich with color photos, the guide
book includes tables of currency series, a section on error (misprinted)
notes, glossary, and bibliography.
CS71 2012-018468 978-0-7864-6810-2
Ancestors of Jimmy and Rosalynn Carter.
Carter, Jeff.
McFarland & Co., ©2012 216 p. $49.95
Jeff Carter (conflict resolution, Carter Center, Emory U., Atlanta), the son
of former President Jimmy Carter and Rosalynn Carter, traces the
family’s ancestral lineage. To complement a genealogy that traced their
forebears back to England and Ireland, his quest focuses on ancestors
who reached American shores by the early 17th century. Several fought
in the Revolutionary War. The book includes a foreword by President
Carter, historical context, genealogical research tips, acknowledgment of
still-to-be solved mysteries, previously unpublished photographs, the wills
of several ancestors, and a bibliography.
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
CT21 978-0-404-63423-0
Lifewriting annual biographical and autobiographical
studies; v.3.
Title main entry. Ed. by Thomas R. Smith. (Lifewriting annual)
AMS Press, ©2012 306 p. $155.00
For the first special section in the series, five essays go beyond single
texts or individual writers to explore autobiographical theory. Among the
topics are Karl Marx as theorist autobiographer, engaging Latin
American testimonio, and gatekeeping and the cross-cultural travel of life
stories. Six general essays include discussions of such matters as layers
of narrative in Frances Burney’s Court Journals, the greatness of Mary
Moody Emerson, and individual and collective autobiography in Judith
Ortiz Cofer’s The Latin Deli.
CT275 2010-004929 978-0-8061-4326-2
Bound like grass; a memoir from the western high plains.
McLaughlin, Ruth.
U. of Oklahoma Press, ©2012 184 p. $16.95 (pa)
McLaughlin’s memoir is often bleak, about a childhood of poverty and
isolation, both physical and psychological. Born on a farm in Montana
settled by her grandparents, the land gives little more than subsistence.
Her parents have learned not to show emotion. They don’t think of
hugging. Yet McLaughlin remembers them with love. She looks back on
the beauty of the land and their connection to it. Her most difficult mem-
ories concern her older sister Rosemary, who had a learning disability
and was tormented at school. Her imagery of the Montana farm is
striking and the sparse prose contributes to the sense of deprivation and
loss. McLaughlin left the farm, went to college, married and had children
but, as she describes, she is still “bound like grass” to the land her family
tried to tame. This is a paperbound reprint of the 2010 clothbound
edition.
CT862 978-1-85607-763-7
Fr John Fahy (1893-1969); radical republican & agrarian
activist.
Madden, Jim.
The Columba Press, ©2012 272 p. $34.95 (pa)
This is the first full-length biography of Irish priest Fr John Fahy, an
opinionated agrarian activist known as a ‘rebel priest.’ His biography
sheds light on the contradictions that pervade Irish attitudes to the ‘land
question’ and the role of the agitator in movements of social protest on
behalf of the underdog. Appendices offer facsimile documents including
pamphlets, letters, newspaper articles, and personal and public letters.
B&w historical photos are also included. Author Madden, who holds a
degree from University College Dublin, was born and raised in the area
where Fahy lived and personally knows many of Fahy’s associates. The
book is distributed in the US by Dufour Editions.
HISTORY (GENERAL)
D21 2012-032889 978-1-57859-372-9
The handy history answer book, 3d ed.
Hudson, David L. Jr.
Visible Ink Press, ©2013 552 p. $21.95 (pa)
Blending trivia with historical review, David L. Hudson Jr. presents a the-
matic glossary of various factoids major and minor, including: historical
eras, religion, war, politics, law, economics, social movements, disasters,
medicine, philosophy, science, and recreation. In each chapter he
presents several questions, such as “when was money introduced?” or
“what were Pasteur’s discoveries on disease?”, which he answers in less
than a page. It offers cursory answers, but next to no citations. Hudson
Jr. is a lawyer and First Amendment scholar at Vanderbilt U.
D24 2012-031717 978-0-7864-7142-3
The age of catastrophe; disaster and humanity in modern
times.
Ebert, John David.
McFarland & Co., ©2012 222 p. $40.00 (pa)
As author and scholar Ebert notes in his introduction, one cannot turn
on the TV or read a newspaper without accounts of one catastrophe after
another occurring somewhere in the world, whether it’s a tsunami,
earthquake, hurricane, a nuclear plant meltdown or some other techno-
logical failure, or a terrorist attack. He describes that seemingly unending
series of disasters, both manmade and natural, as “the new norm for civ-
ilization” and he contends that while catastrophes can never be entirely
eliminated, they can be kept to a minimum—and that ignoring them can
only lead to repeating them.
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
D101 978-2-87386-765-2
Anthology; Museum of Letters and Manuscripts of
Brussells.
Title main entry.
Lannoo Publishers, ©2011 335 p. $60.00
Created with beautiful production values, this book is an anthology of
selected short manuscripts from the Museum of Letters and Manuscripts
of Brussels. There are drawings, printed books, and musical scores, but
most are personal letters, well-reproduced in facsimilie. Facing-page
accounts describe the people and circumstances; the original text is
quoted in colored ink. The book is organized with an alphabetical list of
authors at the back. Instead of a table of contents or introduction, it pro-
vides two fulsome inspirational pages written by the director of the
museum and a minister of state. The book needs no such sales pitching.
Here is an original edition of Andreas Vesalius, whose gorgeously-etched
anatomical models politely display their own parts to the viewer. Here is
a letter-inside-a-letter by Rene Magritte, with a little sketch of a pie-keeper
with a painting of a slice of pie inside. Picasso sends a postcard to
Guillaume Apollinaire: a drawing of a woman and the word “Hello.”
Sigmund Freud, meanwhile, reports in agitated handwriting that he’s
talked with Albert Einstein, and the man knows nothing about psycho-
analysis. (Einstein’s theory of relativity is here too, but he doesn’t
mention Freud.) Edith Piaf has just signed a contract. General de Gaulle’s
purple seal, in the style of a “this book belongs to” stamp, informs you
that the French military is his. Beethoven is composing the
Hammerklavier (bold, minimalist), Wagner is disgusted (rotund, accents
shaped like exclamation points). Voltaire (exquisite handwriting), would
beg to know what has happened to Tallyrand. Isaac Newton is consid-
ering alchemy (use every square inch of available paper) and Marcel
Proust is trying to describe a madeline (loopy, crossing things out a lot).
Charles Darwin is almost embarrassed at so generous a gift; he’d like to
let you know you’re welcome to any book in his library. We know just
how he feels.
D121 2011-043230 978-1-4094-2709-4
Visions of community in the post-Roman world; the West,
Byzantium and the Islamic world, 300-1100.
Title main entry. Ed. by Walter Pohl et al.
Ashgate Publishing Co., ©2012 575 p. $154.95
When the Roman Empire disintegrated, many far-flung and ethnically
distinct regions experienced the return of local autonomy in different
ways, shaped by pre-roman local custom and the influence of roman
culture. This volume considers the varieties of community and political
culture that proliferated from 300 to 1100 in the Latin West, Byzantium,
the Islamic world and the Slavic periphery. The text is organized into
three sections that are further divided into regional and thematic sub-sec-
tions. The major sections interrogate what difference ethnicity makes for
post-roman life, how different regions integrated as communities and
formed identities, and how ethnic difference was perceived in these new
communities. Specific essays include Roman identity in a border region,
regional identities and military power in Byzantium and Islam, diaspora
Jewish communities in early medieval Europe, Vikings through the Arab
eyes, the use of monsters in representations of ethnic others. A handful
of the essays are in German, though most are in English.
D134 978-1-61811-234-7
Gone to Pitchipoï; a boy’s desperate fight for survival in
wartime.
Katz, Rubin. (Jews of Poland)
Academic Studies Press, ©2012 326 p. $65.00
Rubin Katz was born in a small town in Poland where his father ran a
factory. In this memoir he recounts the life changing conflicts of WWII
and how he escaped Nazi persecution as a child, surviving almost the
entire period of Nazi occupation in Poland. Beginning at age eight, Katz
was forced to fend for himself, hiding out in confinement and living
alone in the woods near places where his family members were held in
labor camps and ghettoes. The book includes b&w historical photos and
personal photos, as well as b&w contemporary photos of sites taken
when the author returned to Poland as an adult.
D160 2012-018009 978-0-8014-5097-6
To follow in their footsteps; the Crusades and family
memory in the high Middle Ages.
Paul, Nicholas L.
Cornell U. Press, ©2012 350 p. $55.00
Paul (history, Fordham U.) explores two dimensions of family partici-
pation in crusading. The first is the impact on the home and family of
a crusader, and the common practice of family members—brothers or
cousins—going together or agreeing who was going to watch over whom
at home. The other dimension was the increasing call—after the first
–22–
crusade—for men to follow in the glorious footsteps of their ancestors
who had gone crusading before them. Henry II of England and Alfonso,
king of Aragón and count of Barcelona, serve as case studies.
D163 2012-450519 978-1-84383-662-9
The history of the Holy War; Ambroise’s Estoire de la
Guerre Sainte . (reprint 2003)
Ambroise. Trans. by Marianne Ailes
The Boydell Press, ©2011 214 p. $45.00 (pa)
Ambroise, known only by this work and what he tells of himself in it,
offers an account of his participation in what is now known as The Third
Crusade 1187-92, in which the primary protagonists were Richard I the
Lion Hearted, and Saladin. A specialist in medieval literature, Ailes
(French, U. of Bristol) presents a translation from the Old French verse.
Malcolm Barber (emeritus, history, U. of Reading), a specialist in the
Crusades, provides historical notes. The Boydell Press is an imprint of
Boydell & Brewer.
D650 2011-926815 978-0-7643-3761-1
In a strange land; the American occupation of Germany,
1918-1923.
Barnes, Alexander.
Schiffer Publishing Ltd., ©2011 336 p. $79.99
This history of the American Doughboys, who served in the first
American occupation of Germany during WWI, is illustrated throughout
with b&w historical photos and color photos of uniforms, medals, and
other memorabilia. The book presents the occupation chronologically,
but also devotes chapters to major themes and complex issues such as
the Americans’ relationship with other occupying forces, their rela-
tionship with German citizens, and the impact of the US Congress’s
failure to ratify the Treaty of Versailles. Although the book emphasizes
how well the Doughboys served and what they accomplished, primary
sources, such as diaries, letters, and newspaper articles, also reveal par-
ticipants’ opinions of foolish regulations, unfair practices, and inadequate
leadership. Barnes is affiliated with the Combined Arms Support
Command at Fort Lee, Virginia.
D743 2012-014149 978-1-61069-101-7
World War II; the essential reference guide.
Title main entry. Ed. by Priscilla Roberts.
ABC-CLIO, ©2012 411 p. $89.00
Intended as a student encyclopedia, this is the third reference book of its
type by editor Priscilla Roberts (history, U. of Hong Kong). This one
focuses on the history of World War II. The book is competently written
throughout. Most entries are short and designed for general-knowledge
readers with no particular background. The book begins with an
overview of events of the war, an essay on the causes of the war, and
another essay on its consequences. The next 300 pages are alphabetical
entries on the people, places, groups, and events of the war. There are
another sixty pages of primary source documents, which range from the
Wannsee Protocol and Hitler’s decision to invade Russia to a Roosevelt
Fireside Chat, popular articles, and oral accounts by soldiers and
civilians on all sides of the war. These last are carefully chosen, and
include the goodbye letter of a kamikaze pilot, the account of a horrified
German pilot attempting to report a massacre of Jews, and a poem by
W.H. Auden. The book ends with a short section of historical dilemmas:
questions about conduct in specific issues of the war, such as whether
the use of the atomic bomb against Japan was justifiable. In each, a short
narrative section gives background on the problem, and then two or
three contributors argue on various sides. Afterwards, the book offers a
full chronology of the war and an index.
D756 978-0-306-82029-8
Dog Company; the boys of Pointe Du Hoc — the rangers
who accomplished D-Day’s toughest mission and led the
way across Europe.
O’Donnell, Patrick K.
Da Capo Press, ©2012 305 p. $26.00
This narrative of the WWII battles of the US Army’s 2nd Ranger
Battalion, D Company, draws on interviews and firsthand accounts with
surviving members of the company. Written in a dramatic narrative style
for general readers and WWII history buffs, the book emphasizes the
roles and relationships of individual members of the company. It is illus-
trated with b&w historical photos from personal collections and from the
National Archives. O’Donnell is a military historian who has written
seven previous books.
–23–
D757 2012-931453 978-0-7643-4034-5
Belgians in the Waffen-SS.
Michaelis, Rolf.
Schiffer Publishing Ltd., ©2012 128 p. $35.00
Between 1940 and 1945, about 12,500 Belgians served in the Waffen-SS,
deployed in three formations: the 5th SS Panzer Division and the 27th
and 28th SS Volunteer Grenadier Divisions. This illustrated history of
Belgian SS volunteers explains how volunteers were assigned to one of the
three combat units based on their political associations and describes the
battles they fought. Appendices list division commanders, recipients of
high decorations, and military postal numbers, and also provide a speech
by an SS commander and tables of organization of various divisions. The
book contains many b&w historical photos, plus color and b&w photos
of documents and maps. There is no subject index and information on
the author is not given.
D759 2012-010929 978-1-84519-439-0
A very British experience; coalition, defence and strategy
in the Second World War.
Stewart, Andrew.
Sussex Academic Press, ©2012 247 p. $74.95
For this study of WWII’s coalition warfare and what it meant for Britain,
Stewart (defense studies, King’s College London) draws on archival
research conducted in and outside of Britain. He examines three central
themes—the importance of coalitions, the degree to which Africa played
a vital role in the overall war effort, and the impact of 1940 and the
decision to keep fighting—and looks at how these three factors influenced
the country’s wartime experience. There is much focus on the role of
Winston Churchill. The book contains b&w historical photos and is dis-
tributed in the US by ISBS.
D762 2012-016282 978-0-465-02399-8
The blood of free men; the liberation of Paris, 1944.
Neiberg, Michael.
Basic Books, ©2012 309 p. $28.99
Writing in a narrative style for general readers, Neiberg (history, US
Army War College) chronicles the struggle to free Paris from four years
of Nazi occupation forces during WWII, focusing in depth on the events
of the second half of August 1944. He describes the roles of the various
factions involved, including the Germans, the Allied Armies, the collabo-
rationists, the many groups that made up the French Resistance, and
ordinary citizens who took to the streets. The author shows that liber-
ation and peace were not forgone conclusions, and that many Parisians
and onlookers were worried that liberation would lead to more political
strife and bloodshed. The book includes b&w historical photos.
D763 978-1-84102-306-9
Fight for the fjords; the battle for Norway 1940.
Title main entry. (Britannia naval histories of World War II)
University of Plymouth Press, ©2012 387 p. $27.50 (pa)
This work presents two naval staff histories, both produced under the
auspices of the British Admiralty, describing the naval operations
involved in the WWII German campaign to invade Norway in the spring
of 1940. The first report, Battle Summary No. 17, “The Conjunct
Expeditions to Norway,” draws on German and British records. When it
was originally written in 1942, it was mainly concerned with the
landings and inshore operations. The March 1950 report was renamed
“Naval Operations of the Campaign in Norway;” its emphasis became
deep sea operations rather than the amphibious operations on the
Norwegian coast. The report’s accounts of various landings and with-
drawals are primarily kept as originally written, but have been amended
in light of information derived from German and other sources which
have now become available. The report includes a new final chapter of
comments and reflections. The second report, first issued in November
1948, was written by a German naval historian and is based mainly on
the captured German naval records in the custody of the admiralty.
D767 2011-276243 978-1-4411-5250-3
Burma, 1942; the road from Rangoon to Mandalay.
Warren, Alan.
Continuum Publishing Group, ©2011 283 p. $34.95
The study details the battles of the Burma campaign of 1942 and how it
determined the shape of the war in Southeast Asia through battles won
on land, sea, and air. Warren (politics, international relations, Monash
University, Australia) draws on primary sources and first-hand accounts.
The book includes 13 detailed b&w maps and eight b&w historical
photos.
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
D767 2011-048382 978-0-8264-1068-9
Indomitable will; turning defeat into victory from Pearl
Harbor to Midway.
Kupfer, Charles.
Continuum Publishing Group, ©2012 440 p. $34.95
This work of journalism history takes an interdisciplinary approach, inte-
grating analysis of military, political, and cultural factors in a study of
the role of the media in how Americans reacted to news of the shocking
Pearl Harbor attack and the next six months of defeats and disappoint-
ments. A background chapter chronicles events and factors leading up to
the Pearl Harbor attack and its immediate aftermath up through
December 8, 1941. Month-to-month chapters cover the period from
December 1941 through June 1942. Kupfer teaches American studies and
history at Pennsylvania State-Harrisburg.
D767 2012-027795 978-0-7864-6849-2
Operation Goodtime and the Battle of the Treasury
Islands, 1943; the World War II invasion by United States
and New Zealand forces.
Newell, Reg.
McFarland & Co., ©2012 241 p. $39.95
The Treasury Islands in the South Pacific were reclaimed from the
Japanese in October 1943 by New Zealand and American forces working
together. This is the first complete narrative account of the operation,
which received little publicity at the time due to security restrictions. The
account is based on records contained in Archives New Zealand-
Wellington, diaries of commanders, and on interviews with veterans con-
ducted by the author. Appendices give information on brigade members,
orders of battle, weapons, uniforms, and operations vessels. The book
also includes a chronology and glossary, plus a wealth of b&w historical
photos . Newell is a historian of the Pacific War.
D772 2012-020768 978-1-59114-148-8
Athenia torpedoed; the U-boat attack that ignited the
Battle of the Atlantic.
Carroll, Francis M.
Naval Institute Press, ©2012 218 p. $29.95
The British ocean liner Athenia was attacked by a German submarine in
early September 1939, killing 112 people. In this study of the attack,
Carroll (University of Manitoba, Canada) analyzes the impact of the
incident on US, British, and Canadian policy. He shows how the attack
served to rally public support for Britain and Canada to join the war
against Germany and how it contributed to the US decision to amend its
neutrality laws to allow the US to sell munitions and supplies to Britain
and France. The book is illustrated with b&w historical photos.
D788 2012-027965 978-1-61251-111-5
Unflinching zeal; the air battles over France and Britain,
May-October 1940.
Higham, Robin.
Naval Institute Press, ©2012 317 p. $39.95
Seeking an explanation for the paradox of the French defeat amid the sta-
tistical success of the French air force, this study offers a comparative
view of the three major European air forces of 1940: Britain, Germany,
and France. The first part of the book gives background on the three air
forces: the Armée de l’Air, the Luftwaffe, and the Royal Air Force. Part 2
compares the Battle of France to two other overlapping periods of the
Battle of Britain. The book includes a glossary, maps, data tables, and
b&w historical photos. Author Higham, a former RAF pilot, has written
other books on aviation history.
D790 978-1-61200-157-9
Bailout over Normandy; a flyboy’s adventures with the
French resistance and other escapades in occupied France.
Fahrenwald, Ted.
Casemate Publishing, ©2012 286 p. $29.95 (pa)
Get to know one of the more rambunctious members of the Greatest
Generation with this memoir by Ted Fahrenwald, a young daredevil
fighter pilot of the 352nd Fighter Group. The memoir was written imme-
diately after WWII when Fahrenwald, an aspiring journalist, was only 24
years old, and was only recently discovered by his daughter after
Fahrenwald died in 2004. The gregarious flyboy describes getting shot
down on his 100th mission two days after D-Day and being helped by
French resistance fighters. Between bouts of drinking and carousing,
Fahrenwald participated in raids with the French resistance until he was
captured by Germans. His adventures are written in a lively, conversa-
tional style with a hearty dose of humor, with politically incorrect ver-
nacular preserved as written. The book is illustrated with b&w historical
photos from personal collections.
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
D799 2011-535197 978-1-55365-949-5
The fog of war; censorship of Canada’s media in World
War Two.
Bourrie, Mark.
Douglas & McIntyre, ©2011 334 p. $32.95
This is the first study of Canadian media censorship during the war to
draw on the files of the censors. Journalist Bourrie stresses that the
Canadian government censored the news to keep military and economic
secrets out of enemy hands and to prevent civilian morale from breaking
down. He agues that on paper, the Canadian censorship system (backed
by the War Measures Act) was among the most draconian media-control
mechanisms of the Allied countries, but in practice it was not enforced
as harshly, except in the case of the Communist Party and the ethnic
presses. Early chapters overview of the creation and implementation of
the censoring system and investigate the relationship between censorship
and military intelligence. Later chapters describe specific incidents and
profile the key figures behind censorship efforts. The book includes b&w
historical photos and political cartoons. It is distributed in the US by
PGW/Perseus.
D804 978-1-936235-88-9
Granddaughters of the Holocaust; never forgetting what
they didn’t experience.
Pisano, Nirit Gradwohl. (Psychoanalysis and Jewish life)
Academic Studies Press, ©2012 202 p. $79.00
An extensive body of literature exists on how the Holocaust affects
children of survivors. Pisano (PhD, clinical psychology, Adelphi U.), an
Israeli-born, American-raised third generation Jew, explores the question
of whether this traumatic historical experience still plays a central role
in the identities of women of her generation. In her (psycho)analyses of
interviews with ten granddaughters of Holocaust survivors, in which she
kept a log of her own associations and reactions to the interviews, she
found diverse responses to shared themes of loss, secrets, fear, and soli-
darity with an ever-present past and the possibility of change upon con-
fronting such a history.
D804 2011-052128 978-0-85745-492-8
The Holocaust and historical methodology.
Title main entry. Ed. by Dan Stone. (Making sense of history; v.16)
Berghahn Books, ©2012 323 p. $95.00
Fourteen chapters, presented by Stone (modern history, U. of London,
England), grapple with issues of historical method and methodology in
consideration of the Holocaust. That is, they consider the intertwined
issues the of practicality issues of acquiring and evaluating sources in
order to produce a synthetic narrative as well as theoretical issues on the
nature of method and the various social, economic, intellectual, cultural,
diplomatic, and other “schools” of history in relation to our under-
standing of the Holocaust. Major topics addressed by individual contri-
butions include the politics of memory and postwar representation of the
Holocaust; the relationships between Nazism, the Holocaust, and ecology;
theological responses towards a secular morality; methodological
problems in Holocaust testimony; Holocaust history as commemoration;
and how to place the Holocaust in relation to European and world
history.
D804 2012-005330 978-0-425-25273-4
Human game; the true story of the ‘great escape’ murders
and the hunt for the Gestapo gunmen.
Read, Simon.
Berkley Caliber, ©2012 330 p. $26.95
Although 76 men escaped from the German POW camp Stalag Luft III,
50 were re-captured by the Germans and shot in March and April 1944.
This study recounts the three-year manhunt through postwar Germany,
ordered by Winston Churchill, for the 21 Gestapo gunmen who shot the
POWs, and describes the final conclusion of the case 20 years later. The
book includes a list of all 50 POWs shot and basic facts on where they
were captured and where and when they died or were last seen alive. It
is illustrated with b&w historical photos, along with contemporary
photos of historical sites and memorials. Read, a journalist, has written
other historical works.
D805 2012-029281 978-0-7864-7057-0
Shavelings in death camps; a Polish priest’s memoir of
imprisonment by the Nazis, 1939-1945.
Malak, Henryk Maria. Trans. by Bozenna J. Tucker and Thomas R.
Tucker.
McFarland & Co., ©2012 410 p. $39.95 (pa)
Fr. Henryk Maria Malak (1912-1987) was just one of many priests
rounded up and arrested when Germany invaded Poland early in World
War II. In his memoir, he shares his grim account of day to day living
–24–
conditions in the concentration camp at Dachau, day after day of bru-
tality, acute hunger, disease, and hardship. What gives his account addi-
tional impact is that it is told in the first-person and conversationally,
which makes the scenes he describes more immediate. Translators are
Bozenna J. Tucker, an acquaintance of Malak and retired U.S.
Department of Defense analyst, and Thomas R. Tucker, also a retired
Defense Department analyst.
D810 2011-933826 978-0-7643-3949-3
Collector’s guide to U.S. military war dogs of WW II; v.1.
Rosenkrans, Robert. (Schiffer military history)
Schiffer Publishing Ltd., ©2011 143 p. $49.99
This attractive, 9x11.25”, color-illustrated guide for historians and col-
lectors identifies WWII-era War Dog equipment and memorabilia. Many
of the items pictured are rare. The first part of the book presents b&w
historical War Dog photos. Later chapters offer a catalog of color photos
of items from collections, grouped in sections on War Dog equipment,
books and manuals, miscellaneous War Dog-related items, paper items,
and first-day-of-issue envelopes and post cards. Author Rosenkrans, a col-
lector of military items, was also a law enforcement K9 handler.
D843 978-9966-25-838-0
End of arrogance; Africa and the West — understanding
their differences.
Danner, Helmut.
East African Educational Publishers, ©2012 170 p. $26.95 (pa)
Having worked in Africa for years with the Hanns Seidel Foundation (an
NGO involved in political education work), Danner here shares his
thoughts on the development relationship between Africa and the West.
He presents three major theses: that the relationship between and the
encounter of the West and Africa is disturbed due to their common
history; that better knowledge of each other is pertinent to a relationship
that is based on mutual respect; and that the approach to reflect on these
issues has to be a mutual understanding that can overcome both colonial
attitudes and anti-colonial resentments while remaining cognizant of the
ways different cultures approach things. Distributed in the US by African
Books Collective.
GREAT BRITAIN, EUROPE, FORMER USSR
DA152 2012-374030 978-1-84384-319-1
Writing power in Anglo-Saxon England; texts, hierarchies,
economies.
Clarke, Catherine A.M. (Anglo-Saxon studies; 17)
D.S. Brewer, ©2012 191 p. $90.00
Using close textual analysis, a range of theoretical frameworks, and his-
torical and cultural contexts, Clarke (English, U. of Southampton)
examines how power is imagined, represented, and shaped in later
Anglo-Saxon written sources. In particular, she shows how the texts
present structures of hierarchical or vertical relationship alongside pat-
terns of reciprocity and economies of interaction and obligation between
individuals and groups. The texts, both Latin and the vernacular,
encompass a range of genres, readerships, and modes of circulation to
illustrate diversity and nuance in the conceptions and depictions of
power. The Boydell Press is an imprint of Boydell & Brewer.
DA330 978-0-900952-52-4
The great wardrobe accounts of Henry VII and Henry
VIII.
Title main entry. Ed. by Maria Hayward.
The Boydell Press, ©2012 335 p. $45.00
This book presents calendars of two complete Great Wardrobe accounts
and one partial account dating from the reigns of King Henry VII and
Henry VIII. An introduction explains the role of livery and the structure
of the royal household, followed by an overview of the Early Tudor Great
Wardrobe, the documentation it produced, and the individuals who sup-
plied it with goods and services. Appendix 1 presents documents related
to the Great Wardrobe from the reigns of Henry VII and Henry VIII.
Appendix 2 lists recipients of clothing, livery, furnishings, and other
goods named in the wardrobe accounts. Appendix 3 names recipients in
the warrants subsidiary to the accounts of the Great Wardrobe from the
period. The book includes a detailed glossary; an index of names,
household offices, and places; and an index of textiles, clothing, and
other material. Hawyard teaches history at the University of
Southampton. The Boydell Press is an imprint of Boydell & Brewer.
–25–
DA333 978-1-84868-329-7
Anne of Cleves; Henry VIII’s discarded bride.
Norton, Elizabeth.
Amberley Publishing, ©2009 191 p. $29.95
Anne of Cleves, King Henry VIII’s fourth wife, was one of the few wives
who survived her marriage to the king. The king declared himself
impotent in order to get a divorce, and Anne received one of the biggest
divorce settlements in British history. This biography emphasizes her
intelligence and shrewdness in her dealings with Henry VIII. The book
includes b&w and color historical illustrations, plus color photos of loca-
tions. Newly available in the US, it is distributed in the by Casemate.
Norton holds a Master’s degree from the University of Oxford.
DA391 2011-456131 978-1-4411-1636-9
Shakespeare’s patron; William Herbert, third Earl of
Pembroke, 1580-1630; politics, patronage and power.
O’Farrell, Brian.
Continuum Publishing Group, ©2011 274 p. $120.00
O’Farrell, who is not further identified, offers a biography of a
prominent courtier of three reigns who was also a good minor poet and
the most important patron of the arts during his lifetime. He was almost
certainly the patron to whom Shakespeare dedicated his sonnets, and to
him that Heminge and Condell posthumously dedicated Shakespeare’s
collected works, because he had shown the author such favor. This is the
first biography of Pembroke, which O’Farrell attributes to a disastrous
fire in 1648 that destroyed almost all of the family manuscripts, making
the gathering of evidence very difficult. The topics include formative
influences 1580-97, exile 1601-03, the rise of the favourites 1612-21, par-
liaments and politics, 1621-25, aristocratic entrepreneur, and the Lord
Steward 1627-30.
DA419 978-0-7864-7269-7
A journal of the English Civil War; the letter book of Sir
William Brereton, spring 1646.
Brereton, William. Ed. by Joseph McKenna.
McFarland & Co., ©2012 313 p. $45.00 (pa)
Parliamentary General Sir William Brereton collected letters he sent and
received during the period from April 4 to May 29, 1646, describing
various battles of the English Civil War. The letters also offer insight on
daily life during the war, with details on supplies, armaments, and
mutinies. Editor McKenna, who has written many articles on
Birmingham history and archaeology, explains the history of the letter
book, which is now in the collection of the Birmingham Public Libraries.
He overviews the history of the English Civil War, traces the early life and
military career of Sir William Brereton, and describes tactics of siege
warfare during the period. His conclusion describes the end of the war
and its impact.
DA670 978-1-85936-025-5
The Lancashire witch-craze; Jennet Preston and the
Lancashire witches, 1612. (reprint, 1995)
Lumby, Jonathan.
Carnegie Publishing, ©2011 213 p. $12.95 (pa)
Relying mainly on a short booklet about the hanging of Jennet Preston
for witchcraft published fifteen years after the fact, Lumby presents a
modern interpretation the story of the Pendle Witches, seven women and
two men hanged for witchcraft shortly after Preston’s own condemnation
and hanging in 1612. Many quotes from transcribed proceedings are scat-
tered throughout the book. Lumby also places the story in the wider
context of concurrent events in Europe, adding important information
and interpretation to the events of the witch craze, including information
about major players, religion—including a section discussing the overlap
between spells and prayers—and politics of the day. The book includes a
chronology, illustrations and portraits, family trees, and maps.
Distributed by International Publishers Marketing.
DA959 978-1-84889-157-9
Ghosts of the faithful departed. (reprint 2011)
Creedon, David.
The Collins Press, ©2012 160 p. $34.95 (pa)
Ireland is the only country in modern times to have sustained more than
100 years of population decline. Many people in rural areas were left
behind by family and friends moving to cities in Ireland, and to England,
the US and elsewhere. When they passed away, they left empty homes.
Through a series of some 70 evocative, full-page, full-color images taken
between 2005 and 2007, Irish photographer Creedon documents an array
of these abandoned, dilapidated houses and objects left behind by their
inhabitants. Originally published in hardback in 2011, the 2012 edition
now makes the work available in paperback. Distributed in the US by
Dufour Editions.
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
DA959 2012-024086 978-0-313-38703-6
The IRA; the Irish Republican Army.
Dingley, James. (PSI guides to terrorists, insurgents, and armed groups)
Praeger, ©2012 242 p. $52.00
Written for an academic audience with an interest in Irish culture,
history, and politics, and with the goal of understanding the Irish
Republican Army (IRA) in a sociopolitical context, this book examines the
history, philosophy, and purpose behind one of the world’s most noto-
rious terrorist groups. The book begins by outlining the philosophy and
theology behind Irish Republicanism, exploring the strong influence of
Catholic values and Romanticism, including the view of violence as its
own end. It then moves into the general history of the IRA before
addressing more specifically the organization’s modern-day strategies,
weapons, targets, and organization. Dingley (political sociology, Queen’s
U., U. Leeds, and U. Ulster, Ireland and UK) has lectured and published
widely on terrorism and political violence.
DA965 978-1-908308-20-7
Peter Paul Galligan; ‘one of the most dangerous men to
the rebel movement’.
Galligan, Kevin.
Liffey Press, ©2012 202 p. $29.95
Peter Paul Galligan was one of the leaders of Ireland’s Easter Rising in
1916, acting in the small town of Enniscorthy. For his role in the uprising,
he was imprisoned on a diet of bread and water. He later became a
member of Dáil Eireann, yet remained neutral during the Civil War. This
biography, written by Peter Paul Galligan’s grandson Kevin Galligan, is
based on Peter Paul Galligan’s letters and on files found at the UK
National Archives, the Bureau of Military History in Dublin, the National
Archives of Dublin, and the archives of University College Dublin. The
book includes about 70 pages of appendices compiling letters to and
from Peter Paul Galligan, plus other records. Distributed by Dufour.
DA995.B5 978-0-85640-888-5
Belfast taxi; a drive through history, one fare at a time.
Lee, Henry
Blackstaff Press, ©2012 150 p. $21.95 (pa)
Through the stories of Belfast taxi drivers, spanning decades and
including the voices of taxi drivers of varying ages and experience, male
and female, locals or not, Henry presents the history of the taxi in Belfast,
from the late 19th century to present day. Those interviewed are quoted
directly, and the reader will learn of the differences between public and
private, bus and individual taxis and the particulars of the Belfast taxi
system as differentiated from those of other cities. The varying forms of
competition and difficulties over the years are covered, including the reli-
gious and political tension for which Belfast is known. The book has no
index or bibliography.
DD240 2012-006248 978-1-4094-2761-2
The Pan-German League and radical nationalist politics in
interwar Germany, 1918-39.
Jackisch, Barry A.
Ashgate Publishing Co., ©2012 212 p. $119.95
Jackish (history, U. of St. Francis) presents a study of the activities of the
Pan-German League and argues that tensions they helped foment in the
German right contributed to Hitler’s success. The League was a group
analogous to today’s political action committees that pushed for German
expansion abroad, authoritarian monarchy at home, and was paranoid
about the pernicious influence of foreigners on German culture. This
study focuses on the period between the two World Wars in Germany
and the Pan-German’s role in the broader context of the German right-
wing. Jackish considers the acrimonious relationship they had with other
right-wing extremist organizations, particularly the German People’s
Freedom Party, their role in the rise of the Nazi Party in particular, and
their paradoxical resistance to and use of parliamentary politics to press
a nationalist agenda. The study is based on archival research and draws
on resources from the German National Archive and other local archives
in Dresden.
DD247 2011-040773 978-0-85745-462-1
Hitler’s plans for global domination; Nazi architecture
and ultimate war aims.
Thies, Jochen. Trans. by Ian Cooke and Mary-Beth Friedrich.
Berghahn Books, ©2012 205 p. $39.95
This translation brings historian and journalist Jochen Thies’ book on the
goals of Adolph Hitler into English. Though the translation, by Ian Cooke
and Mary-Beth Friedrich, is unlikely to be as eloquent as the original
German (Thies was a long-time speechwriter for Helmut Schmidt), Thies’
meaning is clear throughout. The goal of the book is to prove that Hitler
did not merely intend to rule Europe. He was actively planning to
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
conquer the world in a messianic racial program to end history, and his
specific goals before 1941 included forcing terms of alliance on Britain
and military conquest of the United States. Thies offers evidence from
extensively researched primary sources; along the way he gives opin-
ionated and strongly argued analysis of major schools of German
thought about Hitler. He wants readers to understand that the Russian
defense in 1941 prevented a major catastrophe for the world, and united
international military force to crush Hitler at any cost was not only jus-
tified but necessary. Thies also argues that understanding Nazi archi-
tecture is vital to understanding Hitler’s aims. The book shows how
isolating the history of art and architecture from general history can
distort our understanding; Thies found much of his primary data about
Hitler’s specific goals in drawings of, and recorded conversations and
documents about, planned building projects. Where these projects seem
merely grandiose fantasies, Thies reminds us of the equally grandiose
fantasies of roads, bridges, stadiums, and extermination camps that
Hitler actually produced.
DD256 2012-029408 978-0-7864-6966-6
New images of Nazi Germany; a photographic collection.
Title main entry. Ed. by Paul Garson.
McFarland & Co., ©2012 488 p. $55.00 (pa)
Most of the 500 b&w photos in this fascinating collection have never been
published before. They were taken by German civilians, soldiers, and
professional propagandists during the period 1933-1946 and show
shocking images of stacked corpses in death camps and soldiers frozen
to death in mid-stride, as well as officers’ families at home and at play,
chilling images of children in Nazi youth groups, and the ever-popular
toddlers posing in Nazi regalia. Other images include public demonstra-
tions and hangings, military equipment and weapons, and various inva-
sions and battles. The photos come with detailed captions, and there is
background information at the start of each section. The book also
includes period posters from Germany and Russia and an appendix on
cameras used during the period. Editor Garson has written extensively
on WWII.
DD256 2012-014297 978-0-8047-8356-9
Was Hitler a riddle?; western democracies and national
socialism.
Ascher, Abraham.
Stanford U. Press, ©2012 243 p. $29.95 (pa)
Ascher (history, Graduate School CUNY) considers why American, British
and French governments did not take Hitler more seriously as a menace
to the world when diplomats to Germany were doing their job
“remarkably well,” which is to “report as fully as possibly on conditions
in the countries to which they are assigned.” In this book, organized
simply around the reports of diplomats from those countries, Ascher
pays special attention to Hitler’s personal traits as well as policy and
beliefs. In the end he argues, along with Winston Churchill, that WWII
was an unnecessary war in the sense that it was preventable if govern-
ments had listened to their diplomats’ warnings. To this end, he lays
more blame on US isolationism than pacifism.
DD901 2012-019287 978-1-60384-841-1
Augsburg during the Reformation era; an anthology of
sources.
Title main entry. Ed. and trans. by B. Ann Tlusty.
Hackett Publishing Co., ©2012 324 p. $14.95 (pa)
Tlusty (history, Bucknell U., US) presents the life of the people of one city
through a collection of rare documents of social history. She includes a
few excerpts from published sources to set the context, but in general she
avoids works widely available elsewhere in English. The nearly 120 texts
are in sections on popular responses to reform 1520-54; enforcing the
peace of Augsburg; a society of orders; marriage, household, and sexu-
ality; work and trade; sports, entertainments, and the control of leisure;
ethnicity; ritual and ceremony; and magic and popular religion.
DE7 2012-023888 978-1-60384-846-6
Plutarch; lives that made Greek history.
Plutarch. Trans. by Pamela Mensch. Ed. by James Romm.
Hackett Publishing Co., ©2012 295 p. $12.95 (pa)
Romm (classics, Bard College) presents a new edition of Plutarch’s (46-
120 AD) Parallel Lives of the Greeks and Romans that excludes certain
Greek lives in order to create a unified narrative for teaching. Among the
15 figures that remain are Theseus, Lycurgus, Solon, Pericles, Alcibiades,
Lysander, and Alexander. Among the scholarly paraphernalia are life
spans of the subjects, maps, and a glossary.
–26–
DF89 2012-024992 978-1-61069-069-0
Greek warfare; from the Battle of Marathon to the
conquests of Alexander the Great.
Title main entry. Ed. by Lee L. Brice.
ABC-CLIO, ©2012 308 p. $58.00
This reference book looks at ancient Greek (490-323 BCE) military
history, up to and including the battles of Alexander the Great. It is
edited by Lee L. Brice (history, Western Illinois U.). The book is organized
in two major sections. The first is an alphabetical encyclopedia of
persons, places, groups, battles, and tactical terms. Each ends with ref-
erences and a “see also” section. Accounts of persons (Alexander) and
places (Sicily) are given in relation to warfare, with accounts of politics
and society as a background to understanding wars, in the style of 19th
century European history instruction. Many entries are written by the
editor. The second section is a compilation of ancient accounts of specific
Classical Greek battles. It includes material from Herotodus, Thucydides,
Xenophon, Diodorus Siculus and Polyaenus, and Arrian. The translations
are in plain language from the Victorian era or the early 20th century.
The book includes some small black and white photographs and a
number of tables. There is a chronology, a glossary, a bibliography, a
contributor’s list, and a categorical index.
DF229 2012-019948 978-0-8014-5063-1
The mind of Thucydides.
de Romilly, Jacqueline. Trans. by Elizabeth Trapnell Rawlings. (Cornell
studies in classical philology)
Cornell U. Press, ©2012 195 p. $35.00
The first woman Professor of the Collége de France and in 1989 the
second woman elected to the Académie Française, de Romilly (1913-2010)
wrote over 30 books on the literature and history of ancient Greece.
Histoire et raison chez Thucydide was published in 1967 by Les Belles
Lettres, and transformed modern scholarship on Greece’s most admired
historian by shifting the focus from what he thought to how he thought.
Veteran translator Rawlings presents the first English edition with help
and additional material from classicists Hunter R. Rawlings and Jeffrey
Rusten (both Cornell U.).
DF552 2012936462 978-1-4094-3206-7
Byzantium and the other; relations and exchanges.
Laiou, Angeliki E. Ed. by Cécil Morrisson and Rowan Dorin. (Variorum
collected studies)
Ashgate Publishing Co., ©2012 686 p. $144.95
The celebrated Byzantine historian Laiou (d.2008, she was professor of
history at Harvard) was a trailblazer in her focus on a ruling empire’s
attitudes towards women and foreigners, in this case, those of the
Byzantine empire. This collection, one of three thematic collections the
editors have compiled of her articles, contains 14 articles. The Crusades
and Byzantium are the subject of five articles, with topics that include
just war, the Fourth Crusade, and the presence and activities of the
Venetians and Genoese in the Byzantine world. Economic history also
figures prominently, with articles on trade networks, monopolies and
privileges. This collection is a valuable addition to the scholarship of the
Crusades, Byzantium, and attitudes towards the other in the medieval
Mediterranean world.
DG70 2012-012303 978-1-60606-115-2
The last days of Pompeii; decadence, apocalypse,
resurrection.
Gardner Coates, Victoria C. et al
Getty Publications, ©2012 264 p. $39.95
This brilliantly illustrated text presents images from the modern memory
of Pompeii that focus on its decadence, its unexpectedness, and the sense
that maybe cosmic justice had been served. Different authors wrote and
selected images for the chapters that look at Pompeii on display in
museums, cutting edge archaeological analyses, Edward Bulwer-Lytton’s
The Last Days of Pompeii, Pompeiian erotica, and three separate galleries
of additional images of art and archeology.
DG250 2012-007861 978-90-04-22911-2
Processes of integration and identity formation in the
Roman Republic.
Title main entry. Ed. by S.T. Roselaar. (Mnemosyne supplements;
history and archaeology of classical antiquity; v.342)
BRILL, ©2012 406 p. $182.00
This collection of 20 essays, bracketed by an introductory and concluding
essays by Roselaar (classics, U. of Nottingham), is the result of a con-
ference head in 2010 that focused on issues of integration and identity in
the Roman Republic. The entries emphasize that the integration of what
is now Italy under Roman rule, was a complex process with local and
regional variations, though they maintain that Romanization didn’t
–27–
simply mean erasure of local identity. They investigate the actual contact
between natives of the region and the expanding Roman population for
cultural and linguistic change. Specific sites of contact in this sense
include commerce, armies, pirates, and religion. Several essays explore
regional specific issues. The contributors are mostly European and
American academics with backgrounds in classics.
DG676 2012-005304 978-0-670-02542-8
Venice; a new history.
Madden, Thomas F.
Viking, ©2012 446 p. $35.00
Accessible to anyone with an interest in Venice and the product of over
two decades of research and study, this popular history details the varied
and important roles of Venice throughout the centuries, from its
inception in middle of the fifth century to its present-day incarnation.
Madden (history and medieval and renaissance studies, St. Louis U.)
presents a finely-wrought history of a city known for its beauty, as the
birthplace of modern capitalism and the world’s oldest republic. With
special attention to the people of Venice, Madden explores the city’s
assorted expansions and falls, its varied religious history, times of both
peace and unrest, wealth and poverty and reforms, and its life as a
tourist destination in recent centuries.
DG811 2012-017175 978-90-04-22528-2
Rome re-imagined; twelfth-century Jews, Christians and
Muslims encounter the Eternal City.
Title main entry. Ed. by Louis I. Hamilton and Stefano Riccioni.
(Special offprint of Medieval Encounters; v.17/4-5 (2011))
BRILL, ©2011 159 p. $109.00 (pa)
A special edition of the journal Medieval Encounters explores a dimension
of the Gregorian Reform and Renaissance of the 12th century that the
many other studies of the era have missed or downplayed. Essays cover
liturgy and mythic history in The Marvels of Rome; the identity of the
Eternal City through visual art, monumental inscription, and the
Mirabilia; the Jewish experience of Rome in the 12th century; an
assessment of the political symbolism of the City of Rome in the writing
of John of Salisbury; Rome in Arabic and Persian Medieval literature;
and an imagined city.
DJK49 2010-016816 978-0-465-03147-4
Bloodlands; Europe between Hitler and Stalin. (reprint
2010)
Snyder, Timothy.
Basic Books, ©2012 524 p. $18.99 (pa)
Noting that concentration camps were not where most of the victims of
Nazism and Stalinism died, Snyder (history, Yale U.) investigates the
murder of 14 million people by Nazi and Soviet regimes at killing sites
in the “bloodlands,” the geographic region between Hitler’s Germany and
Stalin’s Soviet Union, encompassing the Ukraine, Poland, Belarus, the
Baltics, and western Russia between 1933 and 1945. These killings were
part of political mass murder and Soviet and Nazi policy but were not
casualties of the war between them, and many occurred before World
War II began. These include killings Stalin directed at Soviet Ukraine and
during the Great Terror; the shooting and gassing of Jews in the Soviet
Union, Poland, and the Baltic States; and the mass starvation of Soviet
prisoners of war and the inhabitants of Leningrad. This is a paperbound
reprint of the 2010 clothbound edition.
DK34 2012-013685 978-0-85745-667-0
Bridging divides; ethno-political leadership among the
Russian Sámi.
Overland, Indra and Mikkel Berg-Nordlie.
Berghahn Books, ©2012 149 p. $49.95
Based on the PhD thesis of Overland (currently at the Russian and
Eurasian studies, Norwegian Institute of International Affairs) and
fieldwork of Berg-Nordlie, a Sámi from Norway, (Russian Sámi politics,
U. of Tromsø), this book is a case study of a cultural-political revival by
indigenous ‘Northern peoples’ in Russia following the collapse of the
Soviet Union. Includes maps, a glossary, population estimates, supporting
tables and figures, and commentary about little-acknowledged nuclear
bomb testing on the Kola peninsula, anti-Sámi prejudice, other social
problems, ethnic identity, and language.
DK675 978-3-8329-7221-9
Constructing identities in Europe; German and Russian
perspectives.
Title main entry. Ed. by Reinhard Krumm et al. (Internationale politik
und sicherheit; 66)
Nomos, ©2012 250 p. $48.00 (pa)
Social scientists and historians, all but one from Germany or Russia,
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
ponder the current manifestation of the eternal question of whether or
not Russia is part of Europe. The context is that the Berlin Wall is 20
years in the dust, and the quick integration of post-Soviet Russia into a
Greater Europe displays no sign of imminence. In sections on theoretical
frameworks, comparative studies, and policy implications, they consider
such topics as normative disagreements between Russia and the
European Union, historical perceptions of Germany in Russia, Germany’s
perception of Russia from Gorbachev to Medvedev, and the peculiarities
of the German-Russian partnership. There is no index. Distributed in the
US by ISBS.
DL65 2002-153197 978-1-84383-728-2
The Scandinavians from the Vendel period to the tenth
century; an ethnographic perspective. (reprint 2002)
Title main entry. Ed. by Judith Jesch. (Studies in historical archaeoeth-
nology; v.5)
Boydell & Brewer, ©2012 374 p. $45.00 (pa)
As an ethnographic study of pre-modern Europeans, this book looks at
an area usually considered from the perspectives of history, literature, or
archeology. It is suitable for readers educated in any of these fields, and
covers Scandinavian peoples from the Vendal period to the tenth century.
The editor, Judith Jesch, is a professor of Viking studies (U. of
Nottingham, UK). The book begins with using archeological evidence to
determine dwelling types and settlement patterns, and proceeds to a
study of kinship. A variety of evidence, from graveyard DNA to Norse
epic poetry, is taken into consideration. Next are sections on law and
legal customs, rural economy, urban economy in the second half of the
first millennium A.D., and Vikings in the British Isles. A miscellany of
special topics are also considered (the book derives from a symposium),
from the iconography of wolves and ravens to a historical attempt to
make Harald Bluetooth a saint. The editor emphasizes that this book
considers Scandinavian cultural change and continuity using materials
from before, during, and after the Viking Age, and not simply the
Vikings. The editor gives each paper two appendices: a reference bibli-
ography, and a transcribed interview discussing the paper’s points of
interest or controversy with the author(s). This feature makes the book
extremely suitable for student readers and for general readers interested
in the relationship between research, opinion, and conclusions in print.
DR431 978-1-4783-4358-5
Innocents return abroad; exploring ancient sites in
western Turkey.
Tucker, Jack.
CreateSpace, ©2012 364 p. $29.00 (pa)
This book for travelers, whether traveling on the ground or in cyber-
space, describes about 60 popular and less-well-known ancient historical
sites in Western Turkey, which were active during the thousand years
from 200 BCE through 800 CE. In chapters on 11 ancient regions and the
city of Constantinople, entries describe structures and their historical sig-
nificance and give directions relying on GPS. Sidebars provide factual his-
torical references and background on theological significance and
miraculous stories associated with the sites. Appendices explain the roles
of classical deities and historical figures of the region. Also included is a
list of university and museum websites. The book is illustrated with
small-format, sometimes blurry b&w photos and aerial shots. It is the
first of an intended set of five books. Tucker has traveled in the Middle
East and Central Asia as a diplomat.
DR603 978-0-86372-426-8
The day Turkey stood still; Merve Kavakci’s walk into the
Turkish Parliament.
Peres, Richard.
Ithaca Press, ©2012 278 p. $74.95
Elected to the Turkish Parliament on the ticket of the Islamist Virtue
Party in 1999, Merve Kavakçi was prevented from taking the oath of
office when she arrived at the Turkish Grand National Assembly dressed
in a headscarf, in a direct symbolic challenge to Turkey’s longstanding
secularization policy. This volume, based in large part on in-depth inter-
views with Kavakçi, presents a sympathetic account of her political
career, with a particular focus on the events surrounding the headscarf
controversy, framing Kavakçi’s story as one defined by the struggle for
human, political, and women’s rights in Turkey. Distributed in the US by
ISBS.
Prices are U.S. "list." They may vary outside the U.S. Bookstores, jobbers,
or the presses will fill orders. Do not order books from Book News Inc.
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
THE MIDDLE EAST, ASIA
DS61 2012-027778 978-1-4331-1382-6
Pedagogy of the other; Edward Said, postcolonial theory,
and strategies for critique.
Burney, Shehla. (Counterpoints: studies in the postmodern theory of
education; v.417)
Peter Lang Publishing Inc, ©2012 230 p. $37.95 (pa)
Drawing on the critiques of influential Palestinian-American post-colonial
theorist Said (d. 2003) of the Western study of Eastern cultures, French
poststructuralists, and others, Burney—a self-described “postcolonial
subject” (cultural studies, Queens U., Kingston, Ontario, Canada) treats
the pedagogy of the Other/oppressed through the lens of knowledge as
imperial power. She compares Said and Brazilian educator Paulo Freire,
who declared that “education is a political act,” and concludes with a dis-
cussion of ‘the Obama effect,’ a paradigm shift to viewing the Other as
protestor rather than terrorist in light of the Arab Spring.
DS62 2012-014709 978-1-934309-42-1
The Middle East; its history and culture.
Title main entry. Ed. by Jason Tatlock.
University Press of Maryland, ©2012 329 p. $35.00 (pa)
As editor Tatlock (history, Armstrong Atlantic State U.) notes in his intro-
duction, the combination of the contemporary political environment in
the Middle East and its wealth of cultural history are fascinating even to
the most casual observer. This book explores the religious history and
beliefs of the region as well as numerous conflicts, specifically devel-
opment and growth of Islam and its culture, the Ottoman Empire, British
and French imperialism, society and politics, and dictatorship and
democracy.
DS63 978-1-896440-69-9
Raids to regulations; the continuing struggle to disrupt
illicit hawala channels.
Johnson, Heidi C. (New issues in security; no.7)
Ctr/Foreign Policy Studies, ©2012 228 p. $20.00 (pa)
Hawala is a system for moving money through an informal value
transfer system, bypassing formal financial institutions thus avoiding
reporting requirements and monitoring. Johnson, a specialist in terrorist
financing, looks at US government efforts to curtail the practice in
chapters on the first strike on terrorism, breaking wild horses, our own
worst enemies, and the way forward. There is no index. The Centre for
Foreign Policy Studies is at Dalhousie University, Canada.
DS79 2012-024746 978-0-307-37722-7
The endgame; the inside story of the struggle for Iraq,
from George W. Bush to Barack Obama.
Gordon, Michael R. and Bernard E. Trainor
Pantheon Books, ©2012 779 p. $35.00
Building their narrative largely on interviews with US military and gov-
ernment personnel and US government documents (with a smattering of
Iraqi interview sources), Gordon (chief military correspondent for The
New York Times) and Trainor (a retired Marine Corps lieutenant general
who has coauthored two other books with Gordon) reconstruct the events
of the US invasion and occupation of Iraq. The focus of the authors is
upon military engagements and the decision-making apparatuses in
Baghdad and Washington, and the nexus between the two. As one of the
quintessential examples of the practitioners of Pentagon “access jour-
nalism,” readers may want to caution themselves as to the objectivity and
transparency of Gordon’s journalism.
DS87 978-1-85964-307-5
Years of resistance; the mandate of Émile Lahood, the
former President of Lebanon.
Pakradouni, Karim.
Garnet Publishing, ©2012 390 p. $24.95
As a key figure and one-time president of the Lebanese Kataeb Party
(better known in the US as the Phalange) until his resignation in 2008,
the author engaged in weekly meetings to discuss Lebanese political
developments with Émile Lahood during the latter’s tenure as Lebanon’s
President (1998-2007). Those conversations provide the basis for
Pakradouni’s review and friendly assessment of Lahood’s tenure in
office, which he divides into three distinct periods: a strong beginning in
which he committed to reform and the protection of Hezbollah and was
instrumental in the withdrawal of Israel from southern Lebanon (1998-
2001); a period marked by stability in security but tempestuous domestic
political relations with Prime Minister Rafiq Hariri (2001-2004); and the
period following the 2005 assassination of Hariri, which witnessed the
–28–
withdrawal of Syrian troops from Lebanon, the re-invasion of Israeli
forces, and numerous assassination attempts directed at Lahood.
Distributed in the US by International Publishers Marketing.
DS117 2011-032331 978-1-4128-4614-1
The state of the Jews; a critical appraisal.
Alexander, Edward.
Transaction Publishers, ©2012 248 p. $34.95
Given that much of the present ideological assault on Israel and Zionism
comes from liberals, Alexander (emeritus, English, U. of Washington,
Seattle) begins this collection of his essays with an examination of the
anti- and philo-semitic attitudes of influential Victorian liberals Matthew
Arnold, his father Dr. Thomas Arnold, and John Stuart Mill. Then he
explores this theme in more contemporary history, politics, and liter-
ature. The new anti-Zionism on campus is traced to academics who legit-
imized antisemitism in Hitler’s Germany, the political incorrectness of
criticizing antisemitic liberals, and Jewish Israel-haters such as those por-
trayed in Howard Jacobson’s novel, The Finkler Question.
DS119 2011-038259 978-1-4128-4749-0
British miscalculations; the rise of Muslim nationalism,
1918-1925.
Friedman, Isaiah.
Transaction Publishers, ©2012 378 p. $49.95
Friedman (emeritus, history, Ben-Gurion U. of the Negev, Israel) argues
that British policy in the wake of World War I played a key role in
stirring up “Islamic nationalism” in the Middle East. He points particu-
larly to British approval of the Greek invasion of Smyrna as prompting
the Turks, feeling betrayed by Lloyd George, to work towards promoting
nationalisms that would create Mesopotamian, Syrian, and Palestinian
states free from British domination. He further argues that the British
undermined what was a fair chance of mutual coexistence and good
neighborly relations between Arabs and Jews in Palestine because of
Britain’s imposition of military administration and appointment of Hajj
Amin al-Husseini to the post of grand mufti of Jerusalem and subse-
quently the presidency of the Supreme Muslim Council of the
Palestinians.
DS119 2012-001137 978-1-84467-450-3
The case for sanctions against Israel.
Title main entry. Ed. by Audrea Lim.
Verso, ©2012 237 p. $14.95 (pa)
This volume gather materials that promote and defend the boycott,
divestment, and sanctions (BDS) movement that aims to punish and deter
Israel with regards to its policies towards Palestinians. Some of the con-
tributions are descriptive of the nature of the BDS movement, its goals,
and its activities, while others provide the rationale for believing the
movement can achieve success. Still others consider the BDS movement
in the context of related topics, including the Holocaust and the similar
movement against South African apartheid in the 1980s.
DS119 2012-404564 978-0-7453-3213-0
The Palestine-Israel conflict; a basic introduction, 3d ed.
Harms, Gregory.
Pluto Press, ©2012 264 p. $22.00 (pa)
This is a primer on the politics of the Palestinian-Israeli conflict that is
geared towards complete neophytes and is presented in an almost an
FAQ (frequently asked questions) style. It discusses the history of the
region prior to the mid-20th century history in order to put to rest myths
about the conflict going back thousands of years and also presents dis-
cussions of global contextual issues, including the history of Palestine
under the Ottomans, the European persecution of the Jews and the
growth of Zionism, and the geopolitical context of the World Wars. It then
provides a historical narrative of the conflict from Israel’s declaration of
independence that strives to take into account the perspectives of all inter-
ested parties, including the US (which has served as a patron to the
Israeli state). This reviewer judges the result as remarkably balanced, but
considering the imbalance generally provided towards the Zionist nar-
rative in contemporary American political and media culture, one can
probably expect complaints of pro-Palestinian bias regarding the mate-
rials presented. Distributed in the US by Palgrave Macmillan.
DS121 2010-008041 978-90-04-17798-7
Israel in the Persian period; the fifth and fourth centuries
B.C.E..
Gerstenberger, Erhard S. (Society of Biblical Literature biblical encyclo-
pedia series; no.8)
BRILL, ©2012 575 p. $243.00
The direct background and context for the emergent Old Testament, says
Gerstenberger (Old Testament, Philipps-U. Marburg), was the Persian
–29–
Empire, an immense global, multinational state with its cultures and reli-
gions, politics and economy and intellectual climate. He teases out con-
nections in terms of the biblical portrait of the period, the known history,
biblical literature of the period, and the theological contribution. His
topics include the provincial structure of Judah, artifacts and archi-
tecture, the Diaspora in Babylon and Egypt, revisions of older writings,
the genesis of ecclesial structures, and the ethos of brotherliness in the
community of faith. Israel in der Perserzeit: 5 und 4 Jahrhundert v. Chr.
was published in 2005, and has been translated by Siegfied S.
Schatzmann.
DS126 2012-003865 978-0-374-28104-5
Fortress Israel; the inside story of the military elite who
run the country—and why they can’t make peace.
Tyler, Patrick.
Farrar, Straus & Giroux, ©2012 562 p. $35.00
Beginning with an example of an Israeli state-directed assassination
against Iranian nuclear scientists, Tyler, a former military analyst and
chief correspondent with The New York Times, offers insights into the mil-
itary culture that has shaped Israeli policy, and covers the major conflicts
and peace efforts. The book includes a map and photographs.
DS134 2011-042351 978-1-4331-1386-4
In search of Polin; chasing Jewish ghosts in today’s
Poland.
Schiff, Gary S. (Washington College studies in religion, politics, and
culture; v.2)
Peter Lang Publishing Inc, ©2012 286 p. $85.95
Volume two in Washington College studies in religion, politics, and
culture, this book investigates the history of Polish Jewry. Author Gary S.
Schiff (history, Washington College, Chestertown, MD) identifies himself
as the child of Polish-Jewish Holocaust survivors who went to Poland
searching for his roots, and hopes to combine here the genres of travel
guide and scholarly history. In practice this is a history book, largely in
the impersonal voice, targeted to American Jewish readers with little
knowledge of European history. Occasionally Shiff brings in his own
history as a useful example; his family names, for instance, form a
springboard for explaining the movement of Jewish identities and pro-
fessions through multiple languages and cultures. His central point is a
valuable one: for more than two centuries, most of the world’s Jews lived
in Poland. Because this culture was exterminated in the Holocaust, most
Jews have refused to return to it consciously. But rediscovering Polish
history creates a much clearer understanding of contemporary Jewish life
and politics. As Poland re-emerges in the eyes of the West, readers may
find the same lesson applies to many peoples. Shiff surveys the country,
giving readers capsule descriptions of local Jewish history and contem-
porary developments, such as the rise of Polish gentiles performing as
Jews for historical reenactment and tourism.
DS135 2012-017959 978-90-04-23374-4
The Jews in Calabria.
Colafemmina, Cesare. (Studia post biblica; v.49)
BRILL, ©2012 700 p. $282.00
In this 33rd of the volumes of his monumental Documentary History of
the Jews in Italy, Colafemmina (formerly, Jewish literature, Calabria U.)
covers the years c. 300 to 1541—the year of the departure of the last Jew
living there—of their presence in Calabria at the “toe” of the Italian
peninsula. His introduction provides extensive background on archeo-
logical evidence of Jews’ presence in southern Italy back to late antiquity,
their shifting economic situation under various rulers, scholarly writings,
pressures for conversion, and expulsion in 1510 by the Spanish rulers.
The documentary history features 586 Italian legal documents of com-
munal and personal import annotated in English. The volume, also v. 184
of the Publications of the Goldstein-Goren Diaspora Research Institute
(Tel Aviv U.), includes person, geographical location, and subject indexes.
DS149 2012-370865 978-1-936235-71-1
Creating the chupah; the Zionist movement and the drive
for Jewish communal unity in Canada, 1898-1921.
Srebrnik, Henry. (Jewish identity in post-modern society)
Academic Studies Press, ©2011 268 p. $69.00
It has been said that: “Canadian Jews are not, and never were, a
northern franchise of the American Jewish experience.” Strebrnik
(political studies, U. of Prince Edward Island, Canada) examines the
Canadian Jewish community in the early 20th century. Represented by
the Federation of Zionist Societies of Canada and Poale Zion (Yiddishist),
these divisions were along class and organizational rather than Zionist
vs. anti-Zionist ideological lines as in the US. Strebrnik also situates the
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
community’s Zionist activity in the broader framework of Canadian
Jewish life in Montreal and other cities. This volume includes archival
photographs.
DS328 2011035226 978-1-906876-23-4
The Silk Road key papers; part 1: The pre-Islamic period;
2v.
Title main entry. Ed. by Valerie Hansen.
Global Oriental, ©2012 679 p. $419.00
This terrific resource brings together recent articles which provide a sub-
stantial overview in the growing field of Central Asian studies, particu-
larly with regard to the transmission of Buddhism, the basis and
connections of ancient languages, and the meaning and locations of art
and architecture. Hansen (Yale U., she also lives and teaches in China)
has selected 29 full-length articles by historians that include Jason Neelis,
Irene Good, Nicholas Sims-Williams, Christopher Atwood, John Brough,
Eric Trombert and Helen Wang. Following an initial section of four
chapters on the beginning of the Silk Road, the material is grouped by
geographic area, featuring the history of research of the area’s languages,
archaeology, history of trade and economy, and transmission of
Buddhism. Among other topics, multiple chapters are included on the
Sogdians, the finds at the Turfan Oasis, and the well-known site of
Dunhuang, with individual articles devoted to silk, paper, and money in
these areas. Names are often given in both English and Chinese char-
acters. The b&w illustrations are serviceable and there are frequent
maps. Global Oriental is an imprint of Brill.
DS341 978-81-7708-319-4
Foreign policy and strategic issues; think tanks in US and
South Asia (India, Pakistan, Afghanistan, Bangladesh,
Nepal, and Sri Lanka).
Hasan, Rahat.
New Century Pub. (New Delhi), ©2012 195 p. $42.50
Hasan (Academy of International Studies, Jamia Millia Islamia, New
Delhi, India) analyzes the growing involvement of think tanks in the
policy making process worldwide and their unique role shaping
American public policy since World War II. The promises offered by
think tanks for helping India, Pakistan, Afghanistan, Bangladesh, Nepal,
and Sri Lanka establish political stability and economic growth are con-
sidered in separate sections. Distributed in North America by ISBS.
DS371 2012-026125 978-1-61251-022-4
From Kabul to Baghdad and back; the U.S. at war in
Afghanistan and Iraq.
Ballard, John R. et al.
Naval Institute Press, ©2012 369 p. $42.95
The aim of this book is to compare and contrast two very different U.S.
military campaigns, Iraq and Afghanistan, through the lens of national
strategic interests. It also offers a concluding assessment of the con-
current fighting of two wars. Topics include: the 9/11 attacks and the
decision to go to war in Afghanistan, Iraq and the Iraqi Freedom
Campaign, the Afghan campaign as a secondary theater, the Casey
strategy in Iraq, the 2007 Baghdad surge, and the end of combat in Iraq.
Authors are Ballard (National War College) and Lamm and Wood (Near
East South Asia Center for Strategic Studies at the National Defense U.).
DS371 2012-005721 978-0-425-25269-7
Gentlemen bastards; on the ground in Afghanistan with
America’s elite special forces.
Maurer, Kevin.
Berkley Caliber, ©2012 242 p. $26.95
Maurer, an award-winning journalist, has been embedded with US
Special Forces in the Middle East and Africa. Here, he attempts a con-
temporary version of Robin Moore’s book Green Berets, describing today’s
Special Forces in Afghanistan in 2010. His first-hand account of the lives
of individual members, their training, and their teamwork portrays
Special Forces as not only the strongest, fastest soldiers but also the
smartest, as they cope with danger and terrorists as well as boredom and
internal conflicts among units. The book is illustrated with b&w photos
of the team, from the author’s collection.
DS383 2011-277028 978-0-7453-3207-9
Pakistan: The US, geopolitics and grand strategies.
Title main entry. Ed. by Usama Butt and Julian Schofield.
Pluto Press, ©2012 272 p. $33.00 (pa)
While Pakistan’s relationship with the United States and its ongoing war
in Afghanistan are of indubitably key importance, they are by no means
sufficient for understanding the complexity of Pakistan’s foreign policies.
Furthermore, failure to understand the wider context of Pakistani foreign
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
relations has led to an inability of many in the US to understand
Pakistani behavior beyond simple denunciations of Pakistani “recalci-
trance.” This book aims to provide a more balanced perspective by
inviting contributors of varying perspectives to comment on a range of
issues that shed light on Pakistan’s orientation towards the world and
how complications from other relationships influence its longstanding
relationship with the United States. In other words, the US-Pakistani rela-
tionship remains at the heart of the book, but contributors address key
contextual issues that are sometimes overlooked in evaluating that rela-
tionship. Eleven chapters discuss: the role of the Islamic orientation of
the state and the populace on the conduct of the “war on terror,” dif-
fering threat perceptions between the US and Pakistani governments, the
influence of domestic politics, Pakistani security considerations in the
“war on terror,” Pakistan-China strategic relations and their relevance for
Pakistani energy security, Pakistani relations with Saudi Arabia and Iran,
and nuclear security concerns. The lack of a chapter dealing specifically
with the conflict-ridden relationship with India is a bit surprising and
disappointing, as that relationship plays an undeniably key role in
Pakistani security and regional concerns. Distributed in the US by
Palgrave Macmillan.
DS449 2012-020976 978-0-313-39586-4
Global security watch; India.
Gupta, Amit. (Global security watch)
Praeger, ©2012 194 p. $37.00
Gupta (international security studies, US Air Force Air War College)
reviews the contours of contemporary India’s foreign and security
policies and their relationship to India’s place in the international system.
Chapters address Indian arms acquisition and production; the enduring
conflict between India and Pakistan; relations with China, the United
States, and Russia; and the impact of the Indian-American diaspora on
politics and foreign policy.
DS475 2012-026715 978-0-85728-517-1
Britain in India, 1858-1947.
Knight, Lionel. (Anthem perspectives in history)
Anthem Press, ©2012 214 p. $22.95 (pa)
This chronological account of 90 years of British rule in India progresses
through liberal imperialism, the consequences of Lord Curzon, WWI,
diarchy and depression, the impact of WWII, and independence in 1946-
47. The book contains 30 pages of appendices, including a glossary, notes,
and questions. Knight is retired from the City of London School. The
book is published in the US by Anthem Press and is distributed in the
US by Books International, Inc.
DS485 2012-027009 978-81-321-0511-4
Questions of identity in Assam; location, migration,
hybridity.
Dutta, Nandana. (Sage studies on India’s North East)
Sage Publications, ©2012 269 p. $49.95
Since its 1947 incorporation into the Union of India, Assam has been an
underdeveloped and marginal state given little voice in either academic
attention or the national imagination, according to Dutta (English,
Gauhati U., India) who engages with questions of Assamese identity
through an investigation of migration and hybridity in Assam of the last
three decades as revealed through analysis of a broad variety of texts that
include personal accounts of the recent past, newspaper reports, articles,
and other documents. She particularly focuses on incidents of violence
surrounding migration and the ways in which the anti-immigration
Assam Movement responded to such violence as they shed light on the
nature of identity in relation to migration and hybridity.
DS485 978-81-321-0900-6
The Southasian sensibility; a HIMAL reader.
Title main entry. Ed. by Kanak Mani Dixit.
Sage Publications, ©2012 336 p. $49.95
Dixit is the founding editor of Himal Southasian, a magazine “focused on
helping to generate a new way to conceptualize the Southasian region
and its identity.” Defining South Asia as including Afghanistan,
Bangladesh, Bhutan, Burma, India, the Maldives, Nepal, Pakistan, Sri
Lanka, and Tibet, he presents 22 selections from the magazine that
reflect the magazine’s vision of promoting South Asian regionalism.
Beyond that general theme, the selections address a wide range of topics,
including the Kashmir conflict, the “fractured image” of Muslim League
founder and first Governor-General of Pakistan Muhammad Ali Jinnah,
the South Asian Association for Regional Cooperation and the question
of sovereignty, the Indian state of Gujarat as a fascist realm, the nature
of “terrorism,” and the dubious status of Pakistan as a nation.
–30–
DS525 2012-330133 978-9971-69-506-4
Contestations of memory in Southeast Asia.
Title main entry. Ed. by Roxana Waterson and Kwok Kian-Woon.
NUS Press (Singapore), ©2012 300 p. $32.00 (pa)
Both drawing from and contributing to the newly expanded literature on
social memory, sociologists, anthropologists, and historians present case
studies in social memory from a wide range of historical contexts in dif-
ferent Southeast Asian countries. After contextualizing the region within
the field of memory studies, they consider nationalisms and the con-
struction of destinies, and traumatic memories: interpenetrations of col-
lective and personal experience. Among the topics are ethnic minorities
and the struggle for national independence in Laos, narrating Viet Nam,
the Philippine experience of the Second World War, and traumatic expe-
riences among wives of former political prisoners of the “1965 Event” in
Indonesia.
DS730 978-1-84464-213-7
Minority rights in China.
Title main entry. Ed. by Li Lin et al. (Social change in China series)
Paths International, ©2012 578 p. $125.00
From a May 2008 conference in Beijing on the theories and practices of
the International Covenant on Civil and Political Rights, 26 papers by
Chinese and foreign legal scholars explore such topics as the role of the
Venice Commission and the European Court of Human Rights in guar-
anteeing international standards of minority rights, equality of education
of minority nationalities from the perspective of constitution law, social
rights of the disabled and their realization, protecting women’s right to
health by international human rights law, and language discrimination
and minority protection. There is no index.
DS779 2011-277693 978-0-7453-3230-7
The accidental capitalist; a people’s story of the new
China.
Yaghmaian, Behzad.
Pluto Press, ©2012 173 p. $29.00 (pa)
China’s economic transformation could not have come about without
mass-scale internal migration, yet the voices of these internal migrants
that have fueled China’s growth have been left largely out of the liter-
ature, a situation that Yaghmaian (political economy, Ramapo College)
redresses by presenting this examination of China’s economic and social
transformations as seen through the personal biographies of internal
migrants (including successful capitalists). The biographies he recounts
provide glimpses into how individuals personally experienced such
events as the Chinese revolution, the Great Leap Forward, the implosion
of state-owned enterprises as the government moved to privatization,
farm-to-metropolis migration of young women, the decline of the low-
wage export-processing industries, and the economic boom of the 21st
century. Distributed in the US by Palgrave Macmillan.
DS779 2012-004360 978-981-4350-02-0
Hu Jintao; China’s silent ruler.
Brown, Kerry.
World Scientific, ©2012 230 p. $45.00
Brown (executive director, China Studies Centre, University of Sydney)
presents an analysis of the leadership of Hu Jintao, Secretary General of
the Chinese Communist Party and President of the People’s Republic
during the last decade. Coming to power in 2002, and slated to step down
late 2012 to early 13, his era has been marked by dedication to Party
rules, but little is known of his position on policy issues, says Brown, due
to China’s political culture of nontransparency. The study covers Hu
Jinto’s early life, politics and internal affairs during his tenure, the
Chinese economy, China’s international face, ideology in the Hu Jintao
era, and his relationship to the Chinese Communist Party. A conclusion
offers a provisional assessment of his time in office. A bibliography and
map of China are included.
DS881 2012-016444 978-0-8133-4694-6
Modern Japan; a historical survey, 5th ed.
Hane, Mikiso and Louis G. Perez.
Westview Press, ©2013 596 p. $50.00 (pa)
The fifth edition of this reference on Japan contains updated material on
domestic politics, foreign relations, and the March 2011 disasters, as well
as an updated list of leaders. After an introduction on the early history
of the country, the book charts developments from the Tokugawa period
to the present. It contains a detailed chronology from 1600 through 2011,
plus an appendix of briefly annotated websites, in categories of scholarly
links, ‘labors of love’ sites, commercial ad-driven sites, travel-based sites,
sites of special interest groups, and Japanese history sites. Of special note
is a 43-page bibliography in categories of historical and biographical dic-
tionaries and encyclopedias, geographical works, various aspects of the
–31–
Tokugawa period, and other historical periods, in addition to general his-
tories of modern Japan, modern history and culture, modern social and
political topics, economics, women, military history and WWII, the
postwar period, Japan today, literature, theater, film, modern fiction, fine
arts, and religion. The book includes a few b&w maps. Hane taught
history at Knox College. Perez teaches history at Illinois State University.
DS897 2012-020501 978-1-60384-836-7
A pioneer in Yokohama; a Dutchman’s adventures in the
new treaty port; from Ontmoetingen ter Zee and te Land/.
Assendelft de Coningh, C.T. Ed and trans. by Martha Chaiklin.
Hackett Publishing Co., ©2012 162 p. $14.95 (pa)
In this memoir, Dutch merchant sailor C.T. Assendelft de Coningh, an
employee of the Dutch East India Company, offers an account of his life
on the island of Deshima, where the Japanese government required
Dutch traders to live, and in the port of Yokohama in the late 1850s. The
memoir sheds light on trade and life in Japan before and after the
‘opening’ of Japan to trade to the West. An introduction offers historical
and cultural context and a brief overview of Assendelft de Coningh’s life.
Footnotes to the manuscript explain terms and references for modern
readers. The book includes a chronology and b&w historical photos and
illustrations. Translator and editor Chaiklin teaches history at the
University of Pittsburgh.
DS935 2011-500275 978-0-7453-3162-1
Crisis in Korea; America, China and the risk of war.
Beal, Tim.
Pluto Press, ©2011 268 p. $32.00 (pa)
Beal, retired from Victoria University of Wellington, New Zealand, ana-
lyzes the international repercussions of the sinking of the South Korean
warship Cheonan in March 2010, with special attention to their impact on
relationships between North and South Korea, and the US concerns the
sinking raised about China’s power. The book begins with in-depth back-
ground on the political history of Korea from the post-WWII era to the
present. The author then examines official and unofficial accounts from
both Koreas and Russia and sets the incident within its wider historical
and geopolitical context. A companion website offers a timeline, statistical
appendix, and reports on the incident. The book is distributed in the US
by Palgrave Macmillan.
AFRICA, OCEANIA, ROMANIES
DT19 2011-378382 978-0-7453-3105-8
Inventing Africa; history, archaeology and ideas.
Derricourt, Robin.
Pluto Press, ©2011 183 p. $28.00 (pa)
Derricourt (history, U. of New South Wales) explores narratives of Africa’s
past, especially its deep past, and how they have been created, used, and
misused. All such narratives are products of place and time, he says, and
are limited by context and intent as much as by available knowledge.
Though there are links and cross-references, the chapters are inde-
pendent and can be read in any order. Among his topics are the
changing shape and perception of Africa, mythic and mystic Africa,
human ancestors from Africa to the wider world, ancient Egypt and
African sources of civilizations, and the present of the past. Distributed
in the US by Palgrave Macmillan.
DT236 2012-023248 978-0-9852710-6-0
The illegal war on Libya.
Title main entry. Ed. by Cynthia McKinney. (A DIGNITY project)
Clarity Press, Inc., ©2012 312 p. $19.95 (pa)
This collection of 19 critical essays considers how the recent NATO
invasion of Libya arose from a combination of war propaganda, delib-
erate media deception, and plutocratic control of military power. Edited
by former Green Party presidential candidate and peace advocate,
Cynthia McKinney, they examine issues like why Qaddafi was targeted,
petroleum countries in Northern Africa, the “clash of civilizations” in
Libya’s racialized war, the humanitarian cause legitimating war, and
black genocide in Libya. A detailed chronology of the NATO-led assault
on Libya is included. End-notes and citations appear at the end of most
chapters, often relying on Internet-journalism sources. The contributors
are journalists, activists, and social scientists from around the world.
We're always delighted to hear from our readers.
Contact us at (503) 281-9230 or booknews@booknews.com.
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
DT317 2012-003769 978-90-04-20893-3
Crossing the Strait; Morocco, Gibraltar and Great Britain
in the 18th and 19th centuries.
Brown, James A.O.C. (Studies in the history and society of the Maghrib;
v.2)
BRILL, ©2012 211 p. $96.00
Challenging the conventional account of Morocco as isolationist and
backward, Brown (history of Morocco, U. of Cambridge) argues that the
Moroccan sultanate actively encouraged trade and communications with
the wider world through its links with Gibraltar. He considers the
century between the accession of Sidi Muhammad b. ‘Abd Allah in 1757
and the signing of the Anglo-Moroccan Treaty of 1856, but focuses par-
ticularly on the reign of Mawlay Suleyman from 1792 to 1822, under
whom Morocco’s isolationism is generally believed to have reached its
height. He covers Moroccan trade and foreign policy before and after
1790, the Moroccan consulate at Gibraltar, trade between Gibraltar and
the Gharb ports, Jewish and Muslim intermediaries between the Gharb
and Gibraltar, and British Gibraltar and the politics of the Gharb.
DT326 2011-039340 978-0-415-69546-6
Contemporary Morocco; state, politics and society under
Mohammmed VI.
Title main entry. Ed. by Bruce Maddy-Weitzman and Daniel Zisenwine.
(Routledge studies in Middle Eastern politics; 43)
Routledge, ©2013 202 p. $135.00
The editors (both of the Moshe Dayan Center for Middle Eastern and
African Studies, Tel Aviv U., Israel) present a multidisciplinary collection
examining the political, social, and cultural evolution of contemporary
Morocco under the current monarch, King Mohammed VI, who acceded
to the throne in 1999. The first six contributions directly address the state
and the political system, with individual chapters discussing develop-
ments with political parties, the relationship between the monarchy and
Islamism, the politics of language, foreign policy, and economic policy.
The remaining six contributions change focus to civil society and
informal politics, addressing press developments, Berber social move-
ments, human rights organizations, feminism and Islamism, and youth
political culture.
DT351 2012-002562 978-0-393-07966-1
A labyrinth of kingdoms; 10,000 miles through Islamic
Africa.
Kemper, Steve.
W.W. Norton, ©2012 415 p. $28.95
Like most Victorian explorers of Africa, Heinrich Barth was a difficult
man. Proud, awkward, and brilliant, Barth spent more than five years
in North and Central Africa, travelling more than 10,000 miles: from
Tripoli to Timbuktu, with views of the Nile, the Niger, and Lake Chad.
With a cheerless self-discipline reminiscent of T. E. Lawrence, he was also
utterly dedicated to seeing new places, learning the facts, and under-
standing the world’s peoples. Like Lawrence, he was most flexible and
at home in far places, where his courage and strict moral code earned
respect. Unlike more famous Victorian explorers, Barth learned African
languages. He could talk with local people, study local governors’
accounts of their history in Arabic, and he worked entirely as a scientist.
Neither a soldier nor a slaver, neither merchant nor missionary, Barth
refused to participate in colonial speculation, studied landscapes and cul-
tures, and treated Africans as a diverse range of people with many ways
of life: individuals wise and foolish, brave and cowardly, repulsive and
noble, ignorant and learned. For these reasons, he is almost forgotten
today. As a German funded by the British, and a scientist in the era when
exploration turned to exploitation, his determination to write scholarly
accounts for scientists of many nations, rather than produce financial
opportunities or heroic potboilers about the savages, did not make him
popular. Steve Kemper has remedied this neglect with a well-written
popular book recounting Barth’s travels and the story of the man who
made them. With luck, it will do what Barth himself was never able to
do; capture the public’s imagination with an account of a complex and
human Victorian European discovering an Africa which is equally
complex and human.
DT449 2012-004955 978-0-8214-2001-0
Taifa; making nation and race in urban Tanzania.
Brennan, James R. (New African histories)
Ohio University Press, ©2012 292 p. $32.95 (pa)
This book’s title, Taifa, is a Swahili word that has been variously trans-
lated into English as “nation,” or “race.” The author, James R. Brennan
(history, U. of Illinois at Urbana-Champaign), argues convincingly that
we should understand it on its own terms. His book looks at the history
of taifa in Tanzania, an African country whose culture has long been
shaped by African majorities and Indian minorities. While most Western
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
scholars see ideas of race and nation as imposed on Africans by
European colonialism and the European and Arab slave trades, Brennan
and his Tanzanian informants point out that taifa is an African idea,
shaped by relationships between Africans and Indians. Brennan docu-
ments how colonial ideas of nation and race interacted with existing
ideas of taifa to create modern Dar es Salaam. This book helps Western
readers reimagine Africa not as a blank slate onto which slavery and
colonialism projected European visions of race and nation, but as groups
of people dealing with their own pre-existing visions of otherness:
European visions of black Africans, black African visions of Indians,
Afro-Indian visions of both others. The book is divided into five chapters:
Native and Non-Native, identity and social structure in Dar es Salaam
between the wars, the creation of urban entitlement, racial thought and
the intellectual foundations of Tanzanian African nationalism, and
Nationalist thought, racial caricature, and urban citizenship in post-
colonal Tanzania.
DT1348 2012-007361 978-90-04-22261-8
Sure road? Nationalisms in Angola, Guinea-Bissau and
Mozambique.
Title main entry. Ed. by Eric Morier-Genoud. (African social studies
series; v.28)
BRILL, ©2012 270 p. $95.00 (pa)
The latest offering from Brill’s African Social Studies Series, this volume
brings together scholars from various European countries (one is South
African) to discuss three African countries: Angola, Guinea-Bissau, and
Mozambique. The topic is nationalism. Most of the authors are from
nations with former colonial interests in the area; some have taken aca-
demic degrees in Africa or lived for a time in the nations in question.
The editor, Eric Morier-Genoud (Queen’s U., Belfast, IE) studies mission-
aries and other contemporary topics in Mozambique. Lacking the voices
of scholars from the nations themselves, he has made the choice to widen
the book’s perspective by including scholars from many disciplines.
Contributors are historians, sociologists, political scientists, postcolonial
specialists, interdisciplinary scholars, a journalist, an anthropologist, and
a specialist on agriculture. Most but not all are academics. They ask
varied questions: whether nationhood is defined by politics, culture,
faith, economics, land, war, or other factors, how language succeeds and
fails to define the existence of a nation in both literature and political
talk, the social factors behind good and bad governance, whether soldiers
and artists are equal influences in the formation of national identity in
the region. The book concludes with a thematic biography including
works in French, English, German, and Portugese.
DT1974 978-0-86486-726-1
Mandela and America.
Smith, Charlene.
David Philip, ©2012 142 p. $44.95
Famed activist and political leader Nelson Mandela served 27 years in
prison as direct result of his militant anti-apartheid organizing in South
Africa, but was the country’s first democratically elected president in
1994, following his release. In this book, Smith outlines and celebrates
the relationship between Mandela and the United States over the course
of several decades. The book focuses on personal interactions between
Mandela and other political leaders, as well as interactions with world
leaders, the media, and several American celebrities. Includes many color
and b&w photographs. Distributed by International Publishers
Marketing.
DT3398 978-1-77022-150-5
Memories at low altitude; the autobiography of a
Mozambican security chief.
Veloso, Jacinto.
Zebra Press, ©2013 254 p. $27.00 (pa)
Pilot Jacinto Veloso, born in present-day Maputo, became a member of
the Mozambique Liberation Front at the beginning of the struggle for
independence. Since the independence of Mozambique, he has held the
highest positions in intelligence, national defense, state security, and eco-
nomic affairs in his country. His autobiography is also the story of the
struggle for an independent Mozambique over the past 50 years. He
emphasizes the negative impact of the Cold War on developing nations,
especially African nations. The book includes many b&w historical and
personal photos from the author’s collection. It is distributed in the US
by International Publishers Marketing (IPM).
Books reported NYP? Call Book News for publication dates. (503) 281-9230
–32–
DU82 978-1-921719-53-0
William Cox; Blue Mountains road builder and pastoralist.
Cox, Richard.
Rosenberg Publishing, ©2012 312 p. $29.95 (pa)
William Cox used convicts to build a road across Australia’s Blue
Mountains in 1814. He also contributed to the wool industry and helped
found the country’s first agricultural society. In this biography, Richard
Cox details his great-great-grandfather’s career, personal life, and inter-
actions with Aborigines, and examines the controversies surrounding his
dismissal from the New South Wales Corps. The book includes b&w and
color historical illustrations and contemporary photos. It is distributed in
the US by ISBS.
DU111 978-1-921719-51-6
The Edgeworth David women.
Horsfield, Jennifer.
Rosenberg Publishing, ©2012 304 p. $29.95 (pa)
T.W. Edgeworth David was a mining surveyor in New South Wales and
a geology professor at Sydney University. He and his wife Cara Millet
David had two daughters. In this book, historian Horsfield concentrates
on the lives of Cara Millet David and her daughters. Cara Millet David
was a leader in the temperance movement; she also went on scientific
expeditions with her husband, ran a home for injured soldiers during
WWI, and was a leader in the Girl Guides movement. Her daughters
were active in politics and environmentalism; they were some of the ear-
liest female graduates of the University of Sydney. The book contains
b&w historical photos. Distribution in the US is by ISBS.
DU115 978-1-921719-50-9
Catherine McMahon; a remarkable convict woman.
King, Damian and Liz Schroeder.
Rosenberg Publishing, ©2012 320 p. $29.95 (pa)
Catherine McMahon, born in Ireland in 1827, was sentenced to Van
Damien’s Land in Australia. This biography covers her life before,
during, and after this watershed event. Author King, Catherine
McMahon’s great-great-granddaughter, gives a wealth of background
information on Catherine’s two husbands and their business and agri-
cultural efforts together. The book is illustrated with b&w and color his-
torical illustrations and contemporary photos. King is a retired history
teacher and Schroeder is a historical researcher. Distributed in the US by
ISBS.
DU420 2011-047162 978-1-59460-814-8
National days and the politics of indigenous and local
identities in Australia and New Zealand.
McAllister, Patrick A.
Carolina Academic Press, ©2012 230 p. $38.00 (pa)
McAllister (anthropology, U. of Canterbury, New Zealand) examines rela-
tions between natives and descendants of settlers in celebrations of
Waitangi Day in New Zealand and Australia Day in Australia, comparing
the events at two sites in each country and between the two countries.
He discusses New Zealand’s national day and the Treaty of Waitangi,
Waitangi Day as dramatic cultural performance, Waitangi Day at Okains
Bay, Indigenous responses to Australia Day, redefining the nation at
Lismore in northern New South Wales, and reconciliation flourishes then
dies.
DU472 978-1-921867-30-9
Reading Robinson; companion essays to George Augustus
Robinson's Friendly Mission .
Title main entry. Ed. by Anna Johnston and Mitchell Rolls.
Monash University Press, ©2012 238 p. $34.95 (pa)
In this collection of 15 essays, Australian and other historians examine
Friendly Mission: the Tasmanian Journals and Papers of George Augustus
Robinson 1829-1834, which was edited by N.J.B. Plomley and republished
in 2008. Robinson’s work, which offers a firsthand account of Tasmanian
Aboriginal genocide, is examined not only in the local context of Van
Dieman’s Land, but also within the context of colonial settlers’ narratives
of their encounters with indigenous peoples. The book opens with an
essay on reading Friendly Mission in the 21st century, then deals with
issues such as Robinson and imperial networks, race and religion in Van
Dieman’s Land, and colonial knowledge production in 19th-century
Tasmania. Three brief ‘community voices’ chapters offer perspectives by
Tasmanian Aboriginals. The book includes a few b&w photos and maps.
Johnston is affiliated with the University of Tasmania’s Center for
Colonialism and Its Aftermath. Rolls is affiliated with the Center for
Aboriginal Studies at the University of Tasmania. The book is distributed
in the US by ISBS.
–33–
DU710 2011-943248 978-1-111-83384-8
Bravo for the Marshallese; regaining control in a post-
nuclear, post-colonial world, 2d ed.
Barker, Holly M. (Case studies on contemporary social issues)
Wadsworth Publishing Co., ©2013 189 p. $56.95 (pa)
Between 1946 and 1958, the United States government performed atmos-
pheric nuclear testing above the Marshall Islands. In this second edition
of the case study, Barker (anthropology, U. Washington) explores the
impacts of these tests on the health, environment, language, economy,
politics, and social organization of the Marshall Islands and the
Marshallese people, who have fought the US government’s attempts at
minimizing its responsibility for the damages and injuries sustained by
the people and ecosystem during and since the testing. Barker also
addresses the global context and references related case studies. Some
b&w photos are included. The work is appropriate for those in the field
of anthropology as well as anyone with an interest in the history of the
Marshall Islands.
DX145 2012-024431 978-1-61770-059-0
Roma in Europe; migration, education, representation.
Title main entry. Ed. by Anca Pusca.
Int’l. Debate Educ. Assn. Pr., ©2012 209 p. $25.95 (pa)
Europe’s current economic crisis has exacerbated intolerance of mar-
ginalized ethnic groups. In a volume building on East European Roma in
the EU: Mobility, Discrimination, Solutions, Pusca (international studies,
Goldsmiths U. of London) introduces this anthology of case studies exam-
ining how stereotypes foster societal and official discrimination and
backlash. In historical, theoretical, and legal contexts, contributors treat
issues of identity, power, diversity, immigration, racism, and gender
relating to the “gypsy question.” Distributed in the US by Books
International.
NORTH AMERICAN INDIANS, U.S. HISTORY
E49 2011-456682 978-0-8063-5546-7
The French in the Americas, 1620-1820.
Dobson, David.
Clearfield Company, ©2011 101 p. $16.00 (pa)
Following a short introduction outlining the locations where French
colonies were established in the Americas, along with the estimated
times, the work presents brief entries on Frenchmen who spent time in
what was to become the United States and Canada between 1620 and
1820. Dobson relied entirely on material in the British archives and pro-
vides the exact location in the archival source with each entry.
E59 2012-010624 978-0-8173-5715-3
Enduring motives; the archaeology of tradition and
religion in Native America.
Title main entry. Ed. by Linea Sundstrom and Warren DeBoer.
U. of Alabama Press, ©2012 337 p. $39.95 (pa)
Except Coln McEwen, at the British Museum, all the contributing anthro-
pologists are in the US. They explore Native American culture from per-
spectives of creating continuity through structure, iconography, and
sacred stories; encoding tradition in place and object; balancing stability
and change; and recognizing deep-time traditions. Among their topics are
the roots of Plains Indian views of the cosmos, Hopi clan traditions and
the pedigree of ceremonial objects, theme and trajectory in Mississippian
iconography, landscapes of memory and presence in the Canadian
Shield, and resolving contradictions as a methodology for investigating
Maya calendar history and its cosmological association.
E77 2012-013201 978-0-313-38222-2
American Indian history day by day; a reference guide to
events.
Carpenter, Roger M.
Greenwood Press, ©2012 429 p. $89.00
Carpenter (history, U. of Louisiana at Monroe) has written a reference of
events in American Indian history spanning the past 500 years. The
guide, primarily intended for students, covers less well-known and mis-
interpreted events as well as those more familiar occurrences pertaining
to interactions with European explorers and colonists, Indian and
American government policy, and contemporary events. Entries include
descriptions of the events as well as books and Web sites that offer addi-
tional related information.
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
E78 2011-050489 978-1-61186-045-0
Contested territories; Native Americans and non-natives in
the lower Great Lakes, 1700-1850.
Title main entry. Ed. by Charles Beatty-Medina and Melissa Rinehart.
Michigan State U. Press, ©2012 223 p. $39.95
The essays in this collection examine the cultural evolution of Native
American tribes in the Old Northwest as well as interactions with other
cultures such as the French and the Quakers. They delve into the devel-
opment of Native American identity, political activities and involvement,
land, and religion. The book would be suitable as a text or supplement
for courses in Native American history of the Lower Great Lakes. Editors
are Beatty-Medina (history, U. of Toledo) and Rinehart (anthropology,
Miami U.-Middletown).
E78 2011-050507 978-1-61186-051-1
The geoarchaeology of Lake Michigan coastal dunes.
Lovis, William A. et al. (Environmental research series; v. 2)
Michigan State U. Press, ©2012 235 p. $35.95 (pa)
Lovis (anthropology), Alan F. Arbogast, (geology, both Michigan State U.),
and G. William Monaghan (archaeology, Indiana U.) discuss the geology,
the archaeology, and the connection between them, in an area of sand
dunes along the east coast of Lake Michigan, primarily the northern half.
Their topics include a perspective from coastal dunes on the archaeology
of the coastal zone; Middle and Late Holocene lake-level variation, iso-
static rebound, and environmental changes in the Upper Great Lakes;
and archaeological sites in dune contexts. A guide is also provided to
archaeological site along a stretch of US Highway 31 from Torch Bay to
South Point.
E78 2012-001807 978-0-8165-2960-5
Matrons and maids; regulating Indian domestic service in
Tucson, 1914-1934.
Haskins, Victoria K.
U. of Arizona Press, ©2012 231 p. $50.00
During the period under discussion, the girls from Indian boarding
schools were sent to work as domestic servants in white households in
Tucson, Arizona, in an effort to “uplift” or “civilize” Native American
women. This study focuses on the role and perceptions of the “outing
matrons” who oversaw the young women’s employment. Haskins
(history, University of Newcastle, Australia) examines the extensive
records kept by the outing matrons to reveal their perspectives on
Indians and race relations as they managed problems caused by the
girls’ sexuality and romantic relationships, drinking, and conflicts with
employers.
E78 2012-014111 978-0-8061-4288-3
Mound builders and monument makers of the northern
Great Lakes, 1200-1600.
Howey, Meghan C.L.
U. of Oklahoma Press, ©2012 220 p. $45.00
A specialist in the archaeology of the North American Great Lakes
region, Howey (anthropology, U. of New Hampshire) explores a series of
mounds and earthworks in northern Michigan that date to about AD
1200-1600. She reviews past interpretations and presents new data to
support the current understanding of the impressive projects as part of
an actively constructed regional ritual landscape. Her topics are perspec-
tives on egalitarian societies, modeling late prehistory in the region, mon-
uments and tribal ritual organization, mounds as intratribal ceremonial
monuments, the Missaukee earthworks and Bear’s journey, contextual-
izing the regional ritual landscape of late prehistory, and breaking out of
the savage slot.
E78 2012-001794 978-0-8061-4281-4
Native performers in wild west shows; from Buffalo Bill
to Euro Disney.
McNenly, Linda Scarangella.
U. of Oklahoma Press, ©2012 254 p. $34.95
In this study of Native performers in Wild West shows in the US and
around the world, author McNenly, who holds a PhD in anthropology,
moves away from focusing on exploitation to show how Native per-
formers actively engaged with white society while performing in Wild
West shows. Through comparative case studies and interviews with
current performers and descendants of past performers, McNenly
explains the reasons that Native Americans chose work in such shows,
looking at Native performers with the top Wild West shows of 1885-1930,
three Mohawk families who performed in a variety of shows in the early
20th century, and contemporary Native performers in shows at
Disneyland Paris and Buffalo Bill Days in Sheridan, Wyoming. The book
draws on material from several different archives and includes b&w his-
torical and contemporary photos.
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
E78 978-0-7748-2384-5
Standing up with Ga’axsta’las; Jane Constance Cook and
the politics of memory, church, and custom.
Robertson, Leslie A. and Kwagu’l Gixsam Clan.
U. of British Columbia Press, ©2012 569 p. $90.00
Jane Constance Cook (1870-1951) was a Christian Kwakwaka’wakw
activist of British Columbia. This biography analyzes her controversial
stance in favor of banning potlatches and other traditional Native prac-
tices. The authors seek to contextualize her activities within village life
and within the wider political sphere. The book is framed by a 21st
century ceremony to reincorporate her descendents into the potlatch
system and other sites of Kwakwaka’wakw identity. The book also
includes interviews with two family chiefs about the potlatches they
hosted in 2005 and 2006, and an edited transcript of a 2007 feast in
which traditional names were bestowed to Jane Constance Cook’s descen-
dents. The book is illustrated with a total of 56 b&w historical photos,
plus three descent charts, and a map of Kwakwaka tribes and villages in
British Columbia. Author Robertson teaches anthropology at the
University of British Columbia. Co-authors are members of the Kwagu’l
Gixsam Clan. The book is distributed in the US by the University of
Washington Press and in Canada by the University of Toronto Press.
E83 2011-045267 978-0-8061-4266-1
Deliverance from the Little Big Horn; Doctor Henry Porter
and Custer’s Seventh Cavalry.
Stevenson, Joan Nabseth.
U. of Oklahoma Press, ©2012 213 p. $24.95
Dr. Henry Porter was only 28 years old when he became one of three sur-
geons assigned to Custer’s Seventh Cavalry in 1876. Porter was the only
one of the three surgeons to survive the Battle of the Little Bighorn on
June 25, 1876. This descriptive narrative recounts Porter’s struggle to stay
alive and to save the lives of others as he transported some of the
wounded 700 miles by river to the nearest hospital. The narrative also
sheds light on the development of battlefield medicine. The book
includes b&w historical photos. Author Stevenson is an independent
scholar.
E83 2011-050178 978-0-87062-414-8
Terrible justice; Sioux chiefs and U.S. soldiers on the
upper Missouri, 1854-1868.
Chaky, Doreen.
The Arthur H. Clark Co., ©2012 408 p. $39.95
This volume reconstructs the history of conflict between the Sioux
Indians and American soldiers along the Upper Missouri river between
the Grattan Affair of 1854, in which soldiers dispatched to arrest a Sioux
who had shot a calf were killed, and the Fort Laramie Treaty of 1868,
which created the Great Sioux Reservation. The author’s goal is to go
beyond merely narrating events to seeking to understand the motivations
and perceptions of the key actors of the conflict (the Sioux chiefs and the
soldiers they confronted), in particular their contestations over the
meaning of justice. The author is a freelance journalist and independent
scholar. The Arthur H. Clark Co. is an imprint of the U. of Oklahoma
Press.
E90 2012-011943 978-1-59143-133-6
The voice of Rolling Thunder; a medicine man’s wisdom
for walking the red road.
Jones, Sidian Morning Star and Stanley Krippner.
Bear & Company, ©2012 358 p. $20.00 (pa)
Medicine man Rolling Thunder was a healer, a visionary, and an
advocate for environmental change. He was known in the ‘60s and ‘70s
for his friendships with rock stars such as Bob Dylan and members of
the Grateful Dead. This book, written by Rolling Thunder’s grandson and
a longtime student and friend, presents Rolling Thunder’s teachings in
his own words, along with interviews with a psychologist, a medical
anthropologist, and famous personalities, all personally acquainted with
Rolling Thunder. Their eyewitness stories, anecdotes, and factual
accounts, many never before published, are interspersed with comments
by the authors. The book includes a wealth of color photos. Sidian
Morning Star Jones is founder of Open Source Religion. Krippner (psy-
chology, Saybrook University) has written other books on shamanism.
E91 978-0-7748-2244-2
An ethic of mutual respect; the covenant chain and
aboriginal-crown relations.
Morito, Bruce
U. of British Columbia Press, ©2012 222 p. $99.00
Until the late 1700s, relations between the British Crown and Canadian
Native Americans, and in particular the Iroquois, proceeded through a
–34–
series of negotiations known as the Covenant Chain. In this densely
researched book, Morito (philosophy, Athabasca U.) explores this meeting
of cultures through a moral lens, while thoroughly relying on the his-
torical record. A lengthy bibliography appears at the end which includes
six archival documents held at the Library and Archives Canada (LAC).
E97 2012-015113 978-0-87071-693-5
The Indian school on Magnolia Avenue; voices and
images from the Sherman Institute.
Title main entry. Ed. by Clifford E. Trafzer et al. (First Peoples; new
directions in indigenous studies)
Oregon State U. Press, ©2012 224 p. $24.95 (pa)
This is the story of the Sherman Institute, a federal government-sup-
ported school founded in 1902 in Riverside, California, to educate their
American Indian students in carpentry, nursing, cooking, sewing, and
homemaking. The authors describe the school’s operations, construction,
architecture, and special programs. While the Indian boarding schools
were often guilty of “cultural genocide” in that students were frequently
forbidden from speaking their own language or practicing their religions,
the authors say most students learned to write, read, and speak English
and were later able to benefit themselves and their people. A pictorial
essay is included. Editors are Trafzer (history, U. of California, Riverside),
Gilbert (American Indian studies, U. of Illinois at Urbana-Champaign,
and Sisquoc (curator, Sherman Indian School Museum, and Native
American traditions, Sherman Indian High School).
E98 2012-018339 978-1-61205-047-8
American Indians and the American imaginary; cultural
representation across the centuries.
Strong, Pauline Turner.
Paradigm Publishers, ©2012 233 p. $99.00
While American Indians have received recognition and a degree of
prominence for their intellectual, artistic, and activist achievements, it
may surprise many that at least in some instances American Indians
remain saddled with representations that have persisted through colonial
times: redskins, tepees, tomahawks, tom-toms. Strong (anthropology and
gender studies, U. of Texas at Austin) explores the phenomenon, how it
came to be, its use, and how representations have changed through social
life. In addition to examining the topic in depth, the author also under-
scores the importance of the study of representations in disciplines such
as humanities and the social sciences as well as cultural studies.
E98 2011-276005 978-1-55407-902-5
Arts & crafts of the Native American tribes.
Johnson, Michael G. and Bill Yenne.
Firefly Books Ltd., ©2011 256 p. $49.95
A general encyclopedia of historical Native American (US and Canada)
craft arts, this book was written by Michael G. Johnson and Bill Yenne,
authors experienced in collecting Native American objects. While it
assembles a diverse archive of historical images of people across North
America wearing or working in traditional crafts, the book focuses on
photographs that give historical references, rather than showcasing the
beauty and skill of fine craft. It is strongest on clothing, and provides
some technical details, but is not designed as a technical reference for
craft artists or costumers. Pictures of contemporary people making and
wearing the types of work discussed are included, but the book’s text
does not consider contemporary Native American craft arts or artists.
This is wholly a historical encyclopedia. It does a good job of covering
the continent, and offers maps of a variety of tribal groups in each
region. Given the size of the book, it can only touch on art forms larger
tribal groups are most known for. The text is written for adult readers
by popular writers using academic style. The focus here is on textile arts:
clothing, basketry, beadwork, ceremonial costume, blankets. Often each
person in a historical photograph is identified by name. The authors
understand that people dress differently for the weather or the occasion,
and that dress and craft traditions changed over time. Influential his-
torical figures in the adoption or evolution of a craft tradition are also
identified by name. Tribes are named in their own languages. The
authors have chosen historical photographs to show how people dressed
every day or for particular events, and actual objects they used and
made, rather than how they were dressed or posed by commercial pho-
tographers. Oversize: 11.9x9.4”
E98 2012-021551 978-0-313-39713-4
Health and social issues of Native American women.
Title main entry. Ed. by Jennie R. Joe and Francine C. Gachupin.
Praeger, ©2012 289 p. $48.00
Although it mentions in the preface that there is a diversity of Native
American communities across North America, there is one common
element: the women have higher rates than non-natives of the five
–35–
leading causes of female death, as well as larger incidents of depression
and obesity-related diseases. This collection of papers by women scholars
views these issues through a social lens, looking at subjects ranging from
food security to domestic violence. In addition to being the editors, Joe
(family and community medicine, U. of California, Berkeley) and
Gachupin (Human Resource Protection Office, U. of New Mexico,
Albuquerque) are also the authors of two respective chapters.
E98 978-0-8061-4323-1
The peyote road; religious freedom and the Native
American church. (reprint, 2010)
Maroukis, Thomas Constantine. (Civilization of the American Indian;
v.265)
U. of Oklahoma Press, ©2012 281 p. $19.95 (pa)
Maroukis (History at Capital U. in Columbus, Ohio) presents this history
of the Native American Church (NAC) and its controversial use of the hal-
lucinogenic cactus peyote. Native Americans have been using peyote as
an aid in religious ceremonies for centuries, but it wasn’t until the
federal government’s prohibition of the cactus that the NAC was formed.
This book follows the history and traditions associated with Native
American peyote use as well as the legal struggles endured by the people
of this ancient culture as they fight to maintain their First Amendment
rights. This book is of interest to those studying Native American history,
Law, and Anthropology. This is a paperbound reprint of the 2010 cloth-
bound edition.
E99 2012-011115 978-0-8061-4287-6
Blackfoot redemption; a Blood Indian’s story of murder,
confinement, and imperfect justice.
Farr, William E.
U. of Oklahoma Press, ©2012 288 p. $29.95
Farr makes use of extensive archival research to reconstruct the story of
Spopee, a Blackfoot Indian who spent 32 years in an insane asylum after
shooting a white man in 1879, and in so doing examines the larger social
and racial history of the last days before the confinement of the
American Blackfeet to a reservation. Spopee’s story is remarkable in that
it is one of the many, mostly unknown, stories of Native Americans who
disappeared toward the end of the 19th century. When Spopee left his
homeland he was part of a nomadic tribe hunting buffalo in what was
to become lower Alberta, Canada and when he emerged in 1914 not only
had he lost his identity and been relocated to Washington D.C., but the
world outside the asylum had changed dramatically. His perspective is
one not often seen. Well written and thoroughly notated, this book will
prove valuable to general readers as well as students of North American
history and Native American studies. Farr is a Senior Fellow at O’Connor
Center for the Rocky Mountain West and Professor Emeritus of History,
University of Montana.
E99 2012-034199 978-0-915703-79-1
The Cherokees of Tuckaleechee Cove.
Marcoux, Jon. (Museum of anthropology, University of Michigan
memoirs; no.52)
U. of Mich. Mus./Anthropology, ©2012 284 p. $33.00 (pa)
Marcoux (Auburn U.-Montgomery) pens the report on the analysis and
interpretation of Cherokee remains recovered from the Townsend sites by
archaeologists from the University of Tennessee between February 1999
and December 2001. The first synthesis of archaeological data associated
with Cherokee lifeways during the late 17th and early 18th centuries, it
discusses the political, economic, and social landscape within which the
Cherokees of Tuckaleechee Cove lived. Detailed descriptions and quanti-
tative analysis are also provided for architecture, archaeological features,
pottery, lithic artifacts, glass trade beads, and ethnobotanical and faunal
remains. There is no index.
E99 2012-019929 978-0-8203-4347-1
An empire of small places; mapping the southeastern
anglo-Indian trade, 1732-1795.
Paulett, Robert. (Early American places)
U. of Georgia Press, ©2012 259 p. $24.95 (pa)
Examining the geographical spaces of the Anglo-Indian deerskin trade
along colonial North America’s Savannah River between 1732 and 1774,
Paulett (history, Southern Illinois U. Edwardsville) investigates how con-
tending conceptualizations of place and space among European, Indian,
and African-American populations shaped cultural conflict along the
routes of the Savannah deerskin trade. Chapters examine conflict
between imperial administrators’ technocratic understandings of space in
the Southeast versus the point-to-point network understanding of the
European traders and the Indians; the adaptation of enslaved boatmen
to the exigencies of the Savannah and the consequent creation of a dis-
tinctly African American space within the networks of the deerskin
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
trade; the role of the trade in the evolution of the town planning ideas
of British traders in Augusta, Georgia; the role of the trading houses that
were located in Indian villages; and the impact of the American
Revolution over spatial ideas in the southeastern interior.
E99 978-0-7748-2346-3
Living indigenous leadership; Native narratives on
building strong communities.
Title main entry. Ed. by Carolyn Kenny and Tina Ngaroimata Fraser.
U. of British Columbia Press, ©2012 238 p. $99.00
Inspired by the International Leadership Association Conference, held in
Vancouver, British Columbia, Kenny (human development, Antioch U.)
and Fraser (Maori scholar, U. of Northern B.C.) celebrate the thoughts,
perspectives, and leadership concepts of Aboriginal communities. This
collection of case studies and stories written by Indigenous female
scholars across Canada, New Zealand and the United States explores the
power that they and others have in building strong communities while
offering a different perspective on leadership. Academic in nature, this
volume is an engaging read for those interested in indigenous studies,
feminism, and community leadership.
E99 2012938434 978-1-58985-217-4
Nanise’; a Navajo Herbal
Mayes, Vernon O. and Barbra Bayless Lacy
Five Star Publications, Inc, ©2012 154 p. $19.95 (pa)
In this compilation of information from the Navajo Ethnobotany Project,
Mayes (a range-conservation instructor) and Lacy (formerly with the
Navajo Health Authority) present an overview of Navajo history, land,
and plant use. Profiles of 100 plants grown on the Navajo Reservation
include scientific, common English, and Navajo names; description and
distribution notes; Navajo medicinal/ceremonial/ household uses; refer-
ences; and illustrations by Navajo artists Jack Ahasteen and Jason Chee.
The work also features a map, color plates, nutritional tables, and
recipes.
E99 2011-922949 978-0-7643-3808-3
Neil David’s Hopi world.
Pecina, Ron and Bob Pecina. Illustrated by Neil David.
Schiffer Publishing Ltd., ©2011 123 p. $29.99
This 12.25x9.25” history of Hopi Indian culture is illustrated with more
than 50 color and b&w drawings by Hopi-Tewa artist and kachina doll
carver Neil David. The illustrations portray important events in Hopi
history from the Pueblo Rebellion through the present. Each image is
paired with a brief historical essay on factors impacting Hopi culture,
and on David’s life. The drawings are grouped in sections on migration
and upheaval, ethnologists and missionaries, Hopi traders, outside obser-
vations of Hopi culture, and Hopi life. A glossary of Hopi terms is
included. The book’s audience includes general readers, historians, and
those interested in Hopi culture. Illustrator David received the Arizona
Indian Living Treasures Award in 2005.
E99 2010-942624 978-0-7643-3708-6
Quincy Tahoma; the life and legacy of a Navajo artist.
Havens, Charnell and Vera Marie Badert
Schiffer Publishing Ltd., ©2011 238 p. $50.00
As a biography of the painter Quincy Tahoma, this book is based on
extensive interviews by the authors, Charnell Havens and Vera Marie
Badertscher. It is fully illustrated and designed as a collected works of
the artist. Havens has assembled a full catalogue of images of Tahoma’s
paintings. Badertscher has written the text in an informal voice, with
footnotes documenting the sources of the book’s information. Tahoma
was Navajo, part of the generation removed from their families and
trained for assimilation into white society as industrial or agricultural
labor. He became a major figure at the beginning of the transitional
period between early school painting and contemporary art, mixing tra-
ditional subjects and styles with innovative uses of motion, color, and
perspective. The authors are enthusiastic and hard-working amateurs.
They focus the text on providing a respectful account of the artist’s dif-
ficult life and making his paintings fully available to popular and
scholarly audiences. They leave it to others to offer analysis of his work
and the context it occupies in contemporary conversations about Native
American artists and art. The paintings documented here range from
very early Indian school sketches to his last painting, and are well repro-
duced at good size, often with additional images of details. They show
an artist of considerable power negotiating both personal interests and
mid-century market demands for “Western” subjects and “Indian”
paintings. The book will be important for students of Tahoma’s work, a
joy for fans of this era’s painting, and useful for scholars of Native
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
American topics and for visual artists (graphic, comics and pop-influ-
enced artists in particular have much to learn from Tahoma’s graphic
lyricism).
E99 2012-934797 978-0-9826907-5-8
Records of the Moravians among the Cherokees; the Anna
Rosina years, pt. 2; warfare on the horizon.
(Records of the Moravians among the Cherokees; v.4 1810-1816)
Cherokee National Press, ©2012 614 p. $50.00
The series compiles diaries, minutes, reports, and correspondence in the
Moravian Archives in North Carolina to provide a rare account of daily
life among the Cherokees throughout the 19th century. This fourth
volume covers a period of upheaval that began with earthquakes and
saw Cherokee involvement in the Creek War, Métis battles in Canada, and
Napoleon’s conquests in Europe. Meanwhile the Moravian mission added
new members and the care and education work continued.
E99 2011-027209 978-0-8165-0398-8
Religious transformation in the late pre-Hispanic Pueblo
world.
Title main entry. Ed. by Donna M. Glowacki and Scott Van Keuren.
(Amerind studies in archaeology.)
U. of Arizona Press, ©2012 310 p. $60.00
US and Canadian anthropologists use novel analytical and interpretive
frameworks to investigate how religious expression and practice were
enmeshed in the social, political, and historical processes of the Pueblo
people during AD 1275-1540, the final centuries before contact with
Europeans. Their topics include Pueblo religion and the Mesoamerican
connection, the role of religion in the depopulation of the central Mesa
Verde region, a history of Tewa community metaphors, spectatorship and
performance in mural painting AD 1250-1500, and the materiality of reli-
gious belief in east-central Arizona.
E99 2011-030383 978-0-8165-2973-5
Southwestern pithouse communities, AD 200-900.
Title main entry. Ed. by Lisa C. Young and Sarah A. Herr.
U. of Arizona Press, ©2012 315 p. $55.00
Based on a symposium held in 2007 at the Amerind Foundation, this
volume treats the first-millennium roots of second-millennium Native
American communities such as Chaco Canyon and Mesa Verde. Young
(Museum of Anthropology, U. of Michigan) and Herr (Desert Archeology,
Inc.) introduce the legacy of these sites in the Southwest with residential
structures known as pithouses. Contributors discuss the social, economic,
and political systems of these pithouse settlements in various periods and
regions; the relationship between architecture and household organi-
zation; and resource crises leading to the Neolithic Demographic
Transition. Appendices include summary tables of major excavated
project sites by region, with map numbers keyed to featured maps.
E99 2012-018052 978-0-8061-4286-9
Speculators in empire; Iroquoia and the 1768 treaty of
Fort Stanwix.
Campbell, William J. (New directions in Native American studies; v.7)
U. of Oklahoma Press, ©2012 278 p. $39.95
Campbell (history, California State University-Chico) takes on an incident
not well documented by historians: the Stanwix Treaty between the
British and Native American tribes. The study draws attention to how
localized relations bound the interests of British-sympathizing Iroquois
(largely guided by the Mohawks) and British officials. The book begins
with details on the evolution of two importance places central to the
study of the treaty: the Oneida Carry and the Ohio Country. The study
then looks at how Sir William Johnson and his Iroquois backers sought
to project an image of unity to the indigenous representatives of the
Grand Council of the Iroquois Confederacy, as they negotiated a
boundary that would secure the interests of the eastern Iroquois. The
events at the Oneida Carry in the fall of 1768 are detailed, and the
eventual collapse of relations between Native Americans and settlers is
analyzed. A small number of historical maps support the text.
E99 2011-045474 978-0-8165-0246-2
We will secure our future; empowering the Navajo nation.
Zah, Peterson and Peter Iverson.
U. of Arizona Press, ©2012 196 p. $40.00
Peterson Zah, the Navajo nation’s first president and its last chairman,
has made a number of important contributions toward helping
American Indians have more control over their lives and their lands. He
also has been extremely active in increasing the number of American
Indian students enrolled in colleges and universities. In a book that is an
–36–
autobiography, an interview, and a conversation combined, Iverson
(emeritus, history, Arizona State U.) shares Peterson’s accomplishments,
vision, and motivations.
E125 2011-036686 978-0-8263-5134-0
Documents of the Coronado expedition, 1539-1542; “they
were not familiar with His Majesty, nor did they wish to
be his subjects”. (reprint, 2005)
Title main entry. Ed. by Richard Flint and Shirley Cushing Flint.
U. of New Mexico Press, ©2012 746 p. $65.00 (pa)
Flint and Cushing Flint, who co-edited other books on the Coronado expe-
dition, offer this reprint from 2005, which presents 34 original docu-
ments from the expedition. The documents provide the first written
record of the people, environment, and flora and fauna of what is now
northwestern Mexico and the southwestern US and concern events; the
motives, attitudes, and strategies of Spain’s conquest; and attempts to
extend economic, religious, and political dominance in general. Aiming
to remedy inadequacies and inaccuracies in other editions and provide a
comprehensive collection of primary sources, they present new tran-
scriptions based on the manuscripts and translate and annotate them
with background information. They include seven previously unpub-
lished documents and seven that were previously unavailable in English.
They are presented in chronological order and include explanatory notes
and an introduction to the expedition, research, other document editions,
and their approach.
E169 2012-001647 978-0-85745-231-3
Journey through America.
Koeppen, Wolfgang. Trans. by Michael Kimmage. (Transatlantic per-
spectives; v.1)
Berghahn Books, ©2012 159 p. $29.95
Presenting European views on America and American views on Europe,
Trans Atlantic Perspectives explores the European and North American
cultural exchanges and interactions across the Atlantic. First in the series,
Kimmage (history, Catholic U. of America) presents an introduction and
translation of Wolfgang Koeppen’s, Amerikafahrt. Based on his 1958 trip
to America and published in 1959, Koeppen’s modernist travelogue is
considered a German masterpiece of analysis and observation. The text
examines America’s major cities, literary culture, race relations, multi-
culturalism, and alienation. Intended for students and readers interested
in globalism and cultural studies.
E175 2012-019607 978-0-8166-8059-7
Debating the end of history; the marketplace, utopia, and
the fragmentation of intellectual life.
Noble, David W. (Critical American studies series)
U. of Minnesota Press, ©2012 204 p. $25.00 (pa)
In this critique of bourgeois economics, Noble (American studies, U. of
Minnesota) makes a compelling case against the idea of infinite economic
growth existing in a finite earth. Claiming that this notion, though in
accord with Newtonian science, comes up against the physics of Einstein,
Noble examines the segregation of physical sciences from social sciences;
revealing how a single global marketplace has forced various academic
disciplines into anomalous positions while demonstrating the need for
humanity to move toward a more ecological view of an interconnected
world. The material is intended for scholars of American studies.
E175 2012-017592 978-1-59558-678-0
Howard Zinn; a life on the left.
Duberman, Martin.
The New Press, ©2012 365 p. $26.95
Martin Duberman (distinguished professor emeritus, history, CUNY) has
more than twenty books to his credit, is a highly experienced biographer,
and has been a finalist for both the National Book Award and the
Pulitzer Prize. He has written the first major biography of Howard Zinn,
one of the most famous 20th century American historians and a core
figure in the history of the modern political left. In this detailed account
of Zinn’s life and work, Duberman finds much to admire, as well as
helping the reader understand the complex social and political currents
that surrounded him. The book is not a work of hero worship, however.
Duberman is too good a historian, and too skillful a writer, for that. He
is also the founder of CUNY’s Center for Gay and Lesbian Studies, and
he takes Zinn to task for deleting both the women’s and the GLBT move-
ments from his most influential book, A People’s History of the United
States. Duberman has the background and experience to understand the
important factors in Zinn’s life and history: that he was the child of
Polish Jews, the connections between poverty and labor politics, the
effects of teaching in a southern black college in the 1950s and 60s, and
the relationships between radical teaching and conservative academic
administration. Equally important, the author was given full access to
–37–
Zinn’s papers, and he knew how to use them. When he found Zinn had
screened out much of his personal life, the author also searched the
archives of friends and colleagues, conducted interviews, and got Zinn’s
friends and family to talk honestly with him. Detailed and readable, this
book is a major publication in the field of American history. It will be a
core book for any scholarly or general reader interested in biography, the
American left, or 20th century US history.
E176 2012-009380 978-1-4128-4770-4
Critics and crusaders; political economy and the
American quest for freedom. (reprint 1947)
Madison, Charles A.
Transaction Publishers, ©2012 534 p. $39.95 (pa)
Originally published in 1947, this work by the late Madison (1895-1985)
profiles 18 “frontiersmen of freedom” who have struggled to advance
social and economic freedom in the United States. Each chapter examines
a thematically connected trio of individuals, including: the abolitionists
William Lloyd Garrison, John Brown, and Wendell Phillips; the utopian
writers Margaret Fuller, Albert Brisbane, and Edward Bellamy; the anar-
chistic thinkers Henry David Thoreau, Benjamin R. Tucker, and Emma
Goldman; the dissident economists Henry George, Brooks Adams; and
Thorstein Veblen; the militant liberals John Peter Altgeld, Lincoln
Steffens, and Randolph Bourne; and the socialists Daniel De Leon, Eugene
V. Debs, and John Reed.
E178 2012-018532 978-0-393-91955-4
Give me liberty!; an American history, AP 3d ed.
Foner, Eric..
W.W. Norton, ©2013 1310 p. $103.00
Designed as a textbook for high school students taking the Advanced
Placement test in history, this comprehensive history of the United States
would be suitable for regular high school and freshman college US
history survey courses. This is the third edition; earlier editions have
been widely used in two- and four-year colleges as well as high schools.
The text is written in clear, uncomplicated prose that will be easy for
general high school students to understand. The book is strong in eco-
nomic history. The coverage of US history provides excellent depth for a
general survey. It avoids the politically-motivated deletions of information
that have marred many recent K-12 textbooks in the US. When speaking
of painful historical realities such as slavery or smallpox, the author
adopts neutral and quiet language in the main text to help readers under-
stand the various perspectives of the time, and allows specific, accurate
historical data given in inset texts to speak for themselves about the mag-
nitude of suffering. The book uses a contemporary tone when speaking
of the politics of the past, without historicism or gimmicks; readers are
alerted to the election of President Polk or the votes-for-women question
as fresh news and a live issue for people of that time, exactly as our elec-
tions and issues are now. The book offers detail on recent history, ending
with the Obama election. It begins with a helpful overview of both North
America and Europe just before the start of US history, which gives
context for early US history and the contemporary meanings of
Constitutional terms like “citizen” and “liberties,” which are often quite
different from our own. The book is clearly organized, and well illus-
trated with modern maps and images from the era under study. A short
section at the beginning provides an orientation to the AP history exam.
Within the book, each chapter begins with a timeline and ends with a
bibliography of suggested reading and websites, review questions and
essay questions, key terms, and a review table. Appendices include a
variety of important documents such as the Constitution, as well as tables
and figures, a glossary, and an index.
E181 2012-013902 978-0-8014-4867-6
Memories of war; visiting battlegrounds and bonefields in
the early American republic.
Chambers, Thomas A.
Cornell U. Press, ©2012 232 p. $29.95
Thomas A. Chambers (history, Niagara U.) has written an account of the
rise of historical consciousness and historical preservation in the US; as
he deals with the War of 1812, Canadian attitudes are also discussed. His
basic premise is that both the idea and the fact of preserving US history
came from early battlefield tourism. The author documents a contrast
between how Americans treated Revolutionary War and Civil War battle-
fields. The first were forgotten until the 1820’s, when people began to be
interested in their history. By the 1860s, Civil War battlefields were being
identified and designated as historical sites and locations to visit even
while the Civil War was still going on. The introduction deals with the
changing nature of battlefield tourism and commemoration. The first
chapter looks at accidental tourism in the early post-Revolution era. The
second looks at the emergence of memory on the Northern Tour. The
third looks at Lafayette in Yorktown. The fourth looks at memorials and
antiquities of the War of 1812, and the last looks at commemorations of
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
Union and using war histories to foster sectarian hostility in the years
leading up to the Civil War. The book is written in a style accessible to
general readers with an interest in US history and historic preservation
(it is less a military history book than a book about history), and pro-
vides full scholarly endnotes and an index.
E183 2012-003068 978-1-60871-910-5
Guide to U.S. foreign policy; a diplomatic history; 2v.
Title main entry. Ed. by Robert J. McMahon and Thomas W. Zeiler.
CQ Press, ©2012 681 p. $400.00
This two-volume reference contains 40 essays, offering a broad-based ref-
erence to American power—its rise and current global status. The aim is
to present a balanced interpretive overview of each topic based on
current scholarship. After an introduction to the history and role of
American foreign relations, coverage encompasses various aspects of the
development and growth of American foreign policy, the international
stage, diplomacy and foreign policy between the wars, the early Cold War
era, the end of the Cold War, new thresholds of diplomacy, and
dilemmas in the post- 9/11 world. The uniform structuring of the essays
helps make the contents accessible to a wide readership that includes the
general public and students high school level and above. Each essay con-
tains an analytical narrative, an important primary source, a brief biog-
raphy of a leading figure, a summary of key concepts, and a critical
examination of an important event or turning point. Appended material
includes a handbook of diplomatic terms, events, and organizations;
acronyms and initialisms; and listings of top government officials and
their terms of service. The two editors are affiliated as follows: Robert J.
McMahon (history, The Ohio State U.) and Thomas W. Zeiler (history and
international affairs, U. of Colorado at Boulder). CQ Press is an imprint
of SAGE Publications.
E184 2012-019469 978-1-58765-860-0
Asian and Pacific Islander Americans; 3v.
Title main entry. Ed. by Gary Y. Okihiro. (Great lives from history)
Salem Press, ©2013 956 p. $395.00
Salem Press adds to its Great Lives from History series and database with
this three-volume reference. Like others in the series, it will serve as a
first-stop source of information for high school level students and general
readers. Editor Okihiro (Columbia U.) provides an introduction
explaining the scope and noting that for the purposes of this reference
the region under consideration includes East Asia (Japan, Korea, and
China) at one end, and West Asia, including Syria, Lebanon, and Turkey
at the other end. The 667 entries profile more than 667 people (some
entries profile more than one person), most of whom have not been
included in previous works in the series. Entries range in length from
1,000 to 2,000 words and were written specifically for this publication fol-
lowing a standardized format: succinct introduction, basic biographical
data, synopsis of importance, an essay on early life and life’s work, sig-
nificance, and annotated further reading list). Some include a b&w
photo, and some entries include a boxed sidebar with additional infor-
mation. Appendices include a chronological list of entries (by year of
birth), mediagraphy, literary works, organizations and societies, libraries
and research centers, a bibliography, and website directory. A category
index (area of achievement) and a geographical index accompany the
comprehensive index. Online access to the contents is included with pur-
chase of the print edition.
E184 2012-021388 978-1-59332-522-0
Asian Indian professionals; the culture of success.
Sandhu, Sabeen. (The new Americans)
LFB Scholarly Publishing, LLC, ©2012 163 p. $65.00
This is an ethnographic study of high-skilled immigrants from India to
the United States. Sandhu (sociology, Santa Clara U.) selected two sites of
study for his ethnography: the Indian Professional Skilled Speakers club
in Southern California and the Indian Communicators club in
California’s Silicon Valley. His research was guided by three main ques-
tions: how Indians adapt to economic and social life in the United States,
what barriers they face in the US labor market, and the roles that medi-
ating organizations and social and cultural capital play in the adaptation
and assimilation of high-skilled Indian immigrants.
E184 978-1-78052-344-6
Hispanic migration and urban development; studies from
Washington DC.
Title main entry. Ed. by Enrique S. Pumar. (Research in race and
ethnic relations; v.17)
Emerald Group Publishing, ©2012 240 p. $114.95
Editor Pumar (sociology, The Catholic University of America) unites con-
tributors mainly from The Catholic University of America in Washington,
DC, in one of the few compilations of studies on Hispanics in the
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
Washington, DC, region. Section 1 addresses conceptual issues, with
material on topics such as DC as a new immigrant gateway, and the
segmented assimilation of Hispanics in DC. Section 2 reports on demo-
graphics, and section 3 focuses on major issues such as residential pat-
terns and discrimination in the greater DC area, Hispanic
entrepreneurship, Latino organizations and immigrant integration, and
helping Latino and African American families. There is no subject index.
The book is distributed in North America by Turpin Distribution.
E184 2012-010104 978-1-4331-1846-3
A land bright with promise; a refugee of World War II
reflects on his life in America.
Milac, Metod M.
Peter Lang Publishing Inc, ©2013 195 p. $79.95
A native of Slovenia, Milac immigrated to the US in 1950 under the 1948
Displaced Persons Act. He became a librarian at Syracuse University, and
since his retirement in 1992 has spent a lot of time writing his memoirs
of resistance, imprisonment, and forced labor in Europe during World
War II. Here however, he tells of his life in the US, describing such
matters as uncomfortable and lost in New York City, the Slovene com-
munity in Cleveland, the School of Library Science at Western Reserve
University, library references services, and the year of student strike.
E184 978-1-61811-163-0
Living Jewishly; a snapshot of a generation.
Title main entry. Ed. by Stefanie Pervos Bregman. (Jewish identity in
post modern society)
Academic Studies Press, ©2012 155 p. $49.00
From submissions to this anthology, Bregman (MA, Spertus Institute of
Jewish Studies; Jewish United Fund/Jewish Federation of Metropolitan
Chicago) compiles a collection of personal essays that explore the identity
issues raised by US Jews of the millennial generation. From pictured
rabbis (female as well as male) to converts and others redefining
Judaism, contributors discuss topics including memories of growing up,
exploring traditions, dating, intermarriage, and the diversity of Jewish
communities today.
E184 2012-001644 978-0-85745-512-3
Women of two countries; German-American women,
women’s rights, and nativism 1848-1890.
Bank, Michaela. (Transatlantic perspectives; v.2)
Berghahn Books, ©2012 216 p. $70.00
Presenting European views on America and American views on Europe,
Trans Atlantic Perspectives explores the European and North American
cultural exchanges and interactions across the Atlantic. Second in this
series, Bank (American studies, Goethe U. of Frankfurt, Germany)
examines the roles German-American woman played in the US women’s
rights movement in the mid-late 1800’s. Focusing on three key figures
(Mathilde Wendt, Mathilde Franziska Anneke, and Clara Neyman) this
study of ethnicity and gender examines why these women’s voices were
excluded and how the concept of “universal sisterhood” often just applied
to native-born white women. Despite these limitations, Bank celebrates
the ways these “women of two countries” were regarded as powerful
messengers, critics, and translators of the movement and the ways they
advanced women’s rights as well as cultural/ethnic interests. Intended
for students and readers interested in gender and cultural studies.
E185 2012-006083 978-1-59884-360-6
African American history day by day; a reference guide
to events.
Carrillo, Karen Juanita.
ABC-CLIO, ©2012 420 p. $89.00
Carrillo, a writer and photographer who specializes in African American
and Afro-Latina history, proceeds day by day through the calendar
describing key events in African American history. Entries are accom-
panied by an excerpt from a relevant book or newspaper presented in
boxed text and include lists of books and websites for further study. A
lengthy bibliography is provided.
E185 2011-283840 978-1-935618-94-2
Black woman redefined; dispelling myths and discovering
fulfillment in the age of Michelle Obama.
Nelson, Sophia A.
BenBella Books, ©2011 358 p. $24.95
Written in a conversational tone by a black woman for black women,
this self-help book explains how successful black women can find
happiness in spite of the stereotypes of successful black women as angry,
emasculating, and alone. Michelle Obama is taken as a role model for
her combination of strength plus warmth, intelligence, confidence, grace,
and compassion. The book offers advice for friendships and romantic
–38–
relationships, satisfying careers, balancing work and home life, and
emotional and physical health. There is special emphasis on the church
and sexuality, and on the importance of addressing the hidden wound
of sexual abuse and sexual trauma. The book is peppered with quotes
by well-known African American writers, historical figures, and
celebrities, and also includes about 60 pages of essays and excerpts by
distinguished African Americans. Nelson is a political columnist for Jet
magazine and has appeared on major news outlets.
E185 2012-007988 978-1-4128-4939-5
Charting the range of Black politics.
Title main entry. Ed. by Michael Mitchell and David Covin. (National
political science review; v.14)
Transaction Publishers, ©2012 130 p. $29.95 (pa)
The primary question addressed in this collection is if the election of
Barack Obama to the presidency will lead to a “deracialization” of
American politics, or its opposite. The collection includes presentations
selected from the 2011 meeting of the National Conference of Black
Political Scientists, two scholarly essays, and a section of book reviews
reflecting the works that interest scholars committed to continuing dis-
cussions on the study of Black politics.
E185 2011-047006 978-0-8232-3950-4
From slave ship to Harvard; Yarrow Mamout and the
history of an African American family.
Johnston, James H.
Fordham University Press, ©2012 302 p. $29.95
Author Johnston, an attorney and journalist, follows an African-
American family in Maryland through six generations and 275 years.
Focus is on the patriarch of the family, Yarrow Mamout, an educated
Muslim from Guinea who was taken into slavery more than 100 years
before the Civil War. Following decades of slavery, Mamout was freed
after the death of his master as a reward for faithful service, and later
became a well-known figure in Georgetown. His great-great-grandson
Robert Turner Ford graduated from Harvard in 1927. The book high-
lights the complexities of relationships between blacks and whites in
colonial and slavery times. It includes b&w historical illustrations and
maps, plus contemporary b&w photos of locations, and a family tree
chart.
E185 2012-011963 978-1-58046-421-5
Interconnections; gender and race in American history.
Title main entry. Ed. by Carol Faulkner and Alison M. Parker. (Gender
and race in American history; v.3)
U. of Rochester Press, ©2012 292 p. $75.00
A collection of articles and essays largely by professors of history and
gender studies, this first book of a new series offers a foundational exam-
ination of the intersection of gender and racial identity in American
history, with special attention paid to historical contexts such as
westward expansion, civil rights movements, economic depression, mar-
riage, citizenship, and sexual mores. The first section examines the inter-
section of history, theory, and practice and acts as a foundation for the
more particular discussions which follow. The second section discusses
citizenship, with a focus on antebellum New Orleans and Indian
Territory. The third section explores gender and race in civil rights and
the legal system and the fourth explores sexuality, class, and morality.
The epilogue offers a brief discourse on black women in politics. Chapter
specific bibliographies are included as well as a more general bibliog-
raphy and index at the end. Some b&w photos are found throughout.
E185 2012-030092 978-1-4331-1283-6
The performative sustainability of race; reflections on
black culture and the politics of identity.
Alexander, Bryant Keith. (Black studies and critical thinking; v.19)
Peter Lang Publishing Inc, ©2012 218 p. $37.95 (pa)
Using autoethnographic and autopoetic methods based on analysis of his
own experiences of growing up black in Louisiana and then working his
way through the “White Ivory Tower,” Alexander (communication
studies, Loyola Marymount U.) explores intersections between per-
formance, performativity, race, and culture in six interconnected essays
that address such topics as the performativity of whiteness across
borders of race and ethnicity, the notion of “southern hospitality” as per-
formatively enacting nostalgia in relation to a subjugated black expe-
rience, constructions and investments in racial identities in higher
education, the plays of Tyler Perry as a source for sustaining a particular
construction of black culture and performativity, the intersection of race
and black queer identity, and the question of racial performativity in the
context of the democratization of education.
–39–
E185 2009-023610 978-0-8166-4496-4
Those about him remained silent; the battle over W.E.B.
Du Bois. (reprint 2009)
Bass, Amy.
U. of Minnesota Press, ©2012 198 p. $20.00 (pa)
Bass (history, The College of New Rochelle) tells the story of NAACP co-
founder W.E.B. Du Bois (1868-1973), the controversy and animosity sur-
rounding an attempt to recognize his legacy in the Massachusetts town
where he was born, and his early life there. Some in Great Barrington
had proposed a memorial park to be built where his childhood home
had stood. The proposal generated a firestorm of animosity largely fueled
by anti-communist sentiments and racist bias. This is a paperbound
reprint of the 2009 clothbound edition.
E206 2007-045151 978-0-465-03148-1
Friends of liberty; Thomas Jefferson, Tadeusz Kosciuszko,
and Agrippa Hull; a tale of three patriots, two
revolutions, and a tragic betrayal of freedom in the new
nation. (reprint, 2008)
Nash, Gary B. and Graham Russell Gao Hodges.
Basic Books, ©2012 328 p. $19.99 (pa)
Nash (history, UCLA), and Hodges examine the complex evolution of deci-
sions made on slavery and freedom following the American Revolution
from the perspective of the intertwined lives of three very different indi-
viduals: author of the Declaration of Independence and the country’s
third president Thomas Jefferson, Polish nobleman and prominent figure
in the Revolution Tadeusz Kosciuszko, and freeborn black Continental
Army soldier and Kosciuszko orderly Agrippa Hull. The nobleman
became close friends with Jefferson and Hull. While Jefferson agreed to
free his own slaves on Kosciuszko’s death in honor of their shared com-
mitment to freedom, he failed to live up to his promise. The authors
explain how Jefferson’s failure was a betrayal to his close friend and his
country.
E207 2012-017570 978-0-8061-4294-4
George Rogers Clark; “I glory in war”.
Nester, William R.
U. of Oklahoma Press, ©2012 386 p. $39.95
George Rogers Clark was a military leader during the Revolutionary War
in the Ohio Valley. This book focuses on his role in the 18-day campaign
at Fort Sackville in 1779. Although Clark won the campaign at Fort
Sackville, he failed repeatedly in his goal to capture Detroit. This is the
first biography of George Rogers Clark to appear in 50 years. Written in
narrative style, the account reveals his character flaws as well as his tri-
umphs. The book contains b&w historical illustrations. Nester has
written other works on history of the military
E241 2012-015257 978-0-8061-4276-0
No turning point; the Saratoga campaign in perspective.
Corbett, Theodore. (Campaigns and commanders; v32)
U. of Oklahoma Press, ©2012 436 p. $39.95
This study investigates the impact of the 1777 Battle of Saratoga, when
British forces surrendered to American rebels, within the context of the
ethnic and religious disputes between settlers of New York, Vermont, and
Canada. In addition to describing the battle, the study traces the roots of
conflict back to the 1760s, when whites first arrived in the region, and
also looks at the parts played by landowners, farmers, American Indians,
and African Americans. The book includes b&w historical illustrations
and maps. Corbett has written other books on history.
E302 2012-018460 978-1-61614-670-2
That’s not what they meant!; reclaiming the Founding
Fathers from America’s right wing.
Austin, Michael.
Prometheus Books, ©2012 253 p. $19.00 (pa)
Michael Austin, a literary critic by trade, offers this interrogation of right-
wing revisionist history as a concerned American citizen. He straightfor-
wardly considers several “myths” and areas of controversy: the fallacy of
original intent, the Founders on religion and liberty, how the right appro-
priated federalism, the Jeffersonian myth, attacks on the Federal judi-
ciary, Grover Norquist and the Tax Pledge, and more. Austin makes it
clear that he is a moderate who slightly leans to the left on social issues
and to the right on economic issues, but is more concerned with right-
wing lunacy than the silliness of liberals.
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
E332 2012-004392 978-1-60938-120-2
Jefferson in his own time; a biographical chronicle of his
life, drawn from recollections, interviews, and memoirs
by family, friends, and associates.
Title main entry. Ed. by Kevin J. Hayes. (Writers in their own time)
Univ. of Iowa Press, ©2012 210 p. $32.50 (pa)
Editor Hayes (English, University of Central Oklahoma) collects 30
excerpts from primary sources that offer insight on Jefferson as known
by his contemporaries, from acquaintances to close relatives. The sources
show what Jefferson was like as a father and grandfather, as a student,
and even as a slave master. The many accounts of his wit and humor go
against previous impressions created by Jefferson biographers. Most of
the selections come from their earliest published versions, edited for
clarity to modern readers. Each selection includes head notes placing it
in context of Jefferson’s life and the time period, plus bibliographic info.
An introduction to the book offers an overview of Jefferson’s life. The
book includes historical photos.
E338 2012-034105 978-0-7864-6654-2
Sex and manifest destiny; the urge that drove Americans
westward.
Naparsteck, Martin.
McFarland & Co., ©2012 230 p. $40.00 (pa)
Naparsteck, a New York-based writer, argues that sex played an unac-
knowledged role in Western expansion. Among the motivations he
explores are President Jefferson’s interest in Indian habits, missionaries’
drive to change Indians’ ways, the lure of Indian women for white men,
fear of white women’s rape by Indians as a justification for killing them,
and the love lives of Sam Houston and President Andrew Jackson.
Documents appended include one with the first mention of “manifest
destiny,” Jefferson’s letter of instructions to Lewis (of the Lewis & Clark
expedition), the petition to Congress of a white woman who had been
kept captive by Indians, and Mormon positions on polygamy.
E342 2012-012172 978-0-8133-4759-2
Dolley Madison; the problem of national unity.
Allgor, Catherine. (Lives of American women)
Westview Press, ©2013 175 p. $20.00 (pa)
Writing for undergraduate students, Allgor (history, U. of California
Riverside) offers a biography of first lady Dolley Madison that focuses on
her role in fostering US national unity and identity. Allgor illustrates how
her actions and what people said about them show her and her
husband’s commitment to unity, tracing their journey to Washington;
their background and relationship; her contributions during his years as
Secretary of State; how she interacted with the diplomatic corps; her ren-
ovation of the White House; her use of the drawing room to hold events
and gatherings; her public persona, charm, and empathy; her role in the
War of 1812; her work for Unity Under Fire; and the legacy of the
Madisons.
E354 978-1-61200-101-2
When Washington burned; an illustrated history of the
War of 1812.
Blumberg, Arnold.
Casemate Publishing, ©2012 206 p. $39.95
Blumberg, a retired lawyer and contributor to military history publica-
tions, commemorates the bicentennial of the War of 1812 with this richly
illustrated and detailed story of the conflict between the U.S. and Great
Britain. The illustrations include period paintings, sketches, photographs,
and a few other images of land and sea battles and the key personalities
of the war.
E404 2012-032450 978-1-85109-853-8
The encyclopedia of the Mexican-American War; a
political, social, and military history; 3v.
Title main entry. Ed. by Spencer C. Tucker et al.
ABC-CLIO, ©2013 1084 p. $310.00
This three-volume set for general readers and students in high school and
up consists of 800 entries and 146 primary source documents, revealing
both American and Mexican perspectives of the war. From Abolitionism
to Zacatecas, the alphabetical entries in Volumes 1 and 2 cover people,
events, and places of the war, along with ships and battalions, military
and other organizations, battles, and treaties; also covered are political
developments, social movements, literature, and the arts of the period.
These volumes include b&w historical illustrations and contemporary
battle maps on most pages, plus tables of facts and statistics. Volume 3
(not illustrated) compiles 46 documents from many primary sources,
such as letters, treaties, legislation, military orders, speeches, diaries and
memoirs, songs, and war reporters’ dispatches. Each document includes
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
a brief overview offering background on the author, the document, and
its importance in the war. This volume also includes appendices of
medals and decorations, military honors, and military ranks, plus a
glossary and a detailed chronology. Editor Tucker is retired from
teaching military history at the Virginia Military Institute.
E441 2012-009318 978-0-8070-1441-7
Gather at the table; the healing journey of a daughter of
slavery and a son of the slave trade.
DeWolf, Thomas Norman and Sharon Leslie Morgan.
Beacon Press, ©2012 212 p. $25.95
In this journey through American race relations for general readers,
DeWolf, a white man descended from slave traders, teams with Morgan,
a black woman descended from slaves, in an effort to heal from the
wounds of slavery and racism. Over the course of three years, they travel
around the US and abroad, visiting sites of personal and historical sig-
nificance and spending time in each other’s worlds with families and
friends. Their alternating perspectives throughout the book reveal their
often conflicting feelings and impressions at each step of the journey, as
they move through discomfort and fear to understanding and friendship.
DeWolf is a public speaker who has appeared on film and TV. Morgan
is a genealogist and founder of the National Black Public Relations
Society. There is no subject index.
E457 2011-050441 978-0-8232-4344-0
Lincoln and leadership; military, political, and religious
decision making.
Title main entry. Ed. by Randall M. Miller. (The North’s Civil War)
Fordham University Press, ©2012 135 p. $18.00 (pa)
The 28 papers in this collection originated from a conference on Lincoln
and Leadership sponsored by the Abraham Lincoln Foundation of the
Union League of Philadelphia and held in Philadelphia, Pennsylvania, in
April 2009. The three principal presentations have been revised and
expanded. Topics include: emancipation, military strategy, party politics,
Lincoln’s re-election, and other issues that contributed to his leadership
and defined both the man and his role as commander in chief. Editor is
Miller (history, St. Joseph’s U.).
E457 2012-010382 978-0-87351-875-8
Lincoln and the Indians; Civil War policy and politics.
(reprint 1978)
Nichols, David A.
Minnesota Historical Soc.Press, ©2012 223 p. $16.95 (pa)
The Minnesota Historical Society Press has returned this book to print; it
was originally published in 1978. The book’s treatment of Indian affairs
under the presidency of Abraham Lincoln has stood the test of time. Its
facts are carefully researched, it fills an important gap in the history of
the era, and its analysis is still very relevant. In a thoughtful preface,
author David Nichols writes that the book’s purpose is to look from a
white man’s perspective at how and why white men acted as they did in
some of the more terrible chapters of US history. He also notes that this
book comes from an unusual perspective on US history: that American
history, Black history, Civil War history, and so on can’t be understood
as separate from Native American history. All these groups interacted
together to create situations and events. In this book, Nichols reveals the
Indian Affairs system as a network of open profiteering and political
patronage, which survived because it was vitally important as a career-
maker for national politicians. The system also documents Civil War-era
definitions of race and citizenship. The book shows the interactions of
the Indian Affairs system with whites who fostered it, tried to stop it, and
were driven to compromise with it by the expediencies of politics and the
desperation of war. First among them was President Lincoln, who simul-
taneously prevented and allowed the largest mass execution in US history.
The accused were Dakota people starved into rebellion by a corrupt and
incompetent goods-distribution system first encountering the actual
needs of the US in wartime.
E468 2012-023685 978-1-62087-052-5
Brady’s Civil War journal; photographing the war 1861-65.
(reprint, 2008)
Savas, Theodore P.
Skyhorse Pub. Co., ©2012 256 p. $24.95
This heavily illustrated, 10.5x11.5” book for general readers, students, and
history and photography buffs features a total of 250 b&w historical
photos, along with detailed captions, highlighting the work of Civil War
photographer Mathew Brady and his crew. Brief introductions on Brady
and on the war emphasize that although Brady created an amazing pho-
tographic record of the war, with tools unheard of until his time, his
images shocked the nation and he died penniless and unacknowledged.
The photos are grouped in sections on personalities and leaders, fighting
–40–
men, artillery, army life, battlefields, prisoners, and hospitals, as well as
fortifications, fighting ships, African Americans, wonders of engineering,
trains and transportation, and ruins caused by war. Savas has written
other books on history
E468 978-0-7864-6658-0
“This terrible struggle for life”; the Civil War letters of a
Union regimental surgeon.
Hawley, Thomas S.
McFarland & Co., ©2012 254 p. $45.00 (pa)
For readers interested in the battlefield reality of the Civil War cam-
paigns, this collection of letters by Union Army surgeon Thomas S.
Hawley (1837-1918) offers first-hand descriptions of the campaigns,
notably the Vicksburg, Tupelo, and Nashville campaigns, as well as the
duties and responsibilities of an Army surgeon. In his letters, Hawley
also described his interactions with Confederate soldiers, freed soldiers,
and others he encountered during his four-and-a-half year tour of varied
assignments. In doing so, Hawley also revealed much of himself: a com-
passionate, ethical man dedicated to his duties and his country.
E474 2012-001585 978-1-4214-0631-2
To Antietam Creek; the Maryland Campaign of September
1862.
Hartwig, D. Scott.
Johns Hopkins U. Press, ©2012 794 p. $49.95
Hartwig (supervisory park historian, Gettysburg National Military Park)
provides the first of what will be a two-volume set on the Maryland
Campaign and battle of September 1862 commemorating the sesquicen-
tennial of Antietam and the campaign. While the battle between the
forces of Confederate General Robert E. Lee and returned Army of the
Potomac General George B. McClellan lasted just two weeks, it has been
considered pivotal to the course of the Civil War.
E475 2012-033906 978-0-7864-6281-0
The fight for the Yazoo, August 1862-July 1864; swamps,
forts and fleets on Vicksburg’s northern flank.
Smith, Myron J.
McFarland & Co., ©2012 452 p. $55.00 (pa)
The Yazoo River, strategically important during the Civil War because it
bounded Vicksburg, Mississippi, was difficult for the North to capture
due to its swampland terrain. Drawing on diaries and newspaper
articles, author Smith (Tusculum College) looks at the roles of military
and civilian figures in the fight for the Yazoo country during a two-year
period of the Civil War. Emphasis is on the nautical and amphibious
aspects of the expeditions and campaigns, rather than just another
history of the Vicksburg siege. The book includes b&w historical photos
and illustrations.
E475 2012-026772 978-1-57233-916-3
The Knoxville Campaign; Burnside and Longstreet in east
Tennessee.
Hess, Earl J.
U. of Tennessee Press, ©2012 402 p. $39.95
In the winter of 1863, the city of Knoxville was under siege for 18 days,
as Union General Ambrose Burnside fought Confederate General James
Longstreet to control Knoxville and its important railroad routes. Author
Hess (humanities, history, Lincoln Memorial University) offers a narrative
and analysis of the Civil War’s Knoxville Campaign in this book for
general readers, scholars, and Civil War buffs. The book is illustrated
with numerous b&w historical photos and illustrations, contemporary
b&w photos of locations, and contemporary maps. It also includes orders
of battle, appendices on forts of Knoxville, and information on the city’s
Civil War monuments, sites, buildings, and art.
E512 978-0-9842135-1-1
Maryland’s Civil War photographs; the sesquicentennial
collection.
Kelbaugh, Ross J.
Maryland Historical Society, ©2012 307 p. $30.00 (pa)
Kelbaugh, a collector, interpreter, and educator who has assembled the
largest private collection of vintage Maryland photos and related material
in the state, collects Maryland-related Civil War photos, many of which
were included in the Maryland Historical Society’s 2006 exhibition, “The
Civil War in Maryland: An Exhibit of Rare Photographs.” The book adds
many photos that could not be included in the exhibit catalogue, as well
as recent discoveries. They show outdoor views, interiors, and studio por-
traits within historical context, which includes explanation of photog-
raphy during the period, photographic formats and sizes, and the events
of the war. Dist. by Johns Hopkins University Press.
–41–
E523 2012-031012 978-0-7864-6697-9
The 124th New York State Volunteers in the Civil War; a
history and roster.
LaRocca, Charles J.
McFarland & Co., ©2012 394 p. $45.00 (pa)
This dramatic narrative account of the 124th New York State Volunteers,
a Civil War regiment, uses the words of soldiers as much as possible, as
found in primary sources such as diaries and letters. The book also
includes a roster of all members of the regiment. It is illustrated with
b&w historical photos and original contemporary battlefield maps.
LaRocca, a retired history teacher, is founder of a reenactment group
based on the 124th New York.
E525 2012-008952 978-0-8040-1139-6
The untried life; the Twenty-Ninth Ohio Volunteer
Infantry in the Civil War.
Fritsch, James T.
Swallow Press, ©2012 501 p. $34.95 (pa)
Author Fritsch, who has been researching the 29th Ohio Volunteer
Infantry for 15 years, offers a detailed narrative account of the regiment,
which was also known as the Giddings Regiment or the Abolition
Regiment. This regiment is of special interest because its members all
came from a tiny town in Ohio that was home to two famous antislavery
politicians: Ben Wade and Joshua Giddings. The author investigates
whether the soldiers of the regiment actually held antislavery beliefs, or
whether, like most other Union soldiers, they were indifferent to the issue
of emancipation. He draws on letters, diaries, newspaper articles, and
military reports to describe the regiment’s battles throughout the war.
The book includes numerous b&w historical photos and illustrations.
E609 2012-019595 978-0-313-34727-6
Civil War journalism.
Risley, Ford. (Reflections on the Civil War era)
Praeger, ©2012 154 p. $37.00
Examining the role of the press during the Civil War, Risley (communi-
cations, journalism, Penn State U.) details how war journalism came of
age during this turbulent time and the ways in which the war was
reported, editorialized, photographed, illustrated, and censored. Included
in this study are contributions from Horace Greeley, John M. Daniel,
George Smalley, Peter W. Alexander, Matthew Brady, Alexander Gardner,
Alfred Waud, and Thomas Nast. Intended for Civil War buffs and those
interested in journalism, this engaging account of the impact war played
on the press also features a brief overview of journalism in the North
and the South during the eve of the war.
E746 2011-032394 978-0-316-09784-0
The admirals; Nimitz, Halsey, Leahy, and King—the 5-star
admirals who won the war at sea.
Borneman, Walter R.
Little, Brown, ©2012 559 p. $29.99
Borneman, a Colorado-based author of books about American history,
begins this collective biography of four U.S. admirals who led successful
World War II campaigns in the Pacific against Japan by tracing their
early lives and first commands. His accounts of battles include the Battle
of the Coral Sea (1942), and the Battle of Leyte Gulf (1944). The well-
researched book includes maps of the Pacific Theater, photographs, and
appendices on the officers’ ranks, U.S. Navy ships, chiefs of Naval
Operations, commanders in chief, battleships, aircraft carriers, and
major World War II conferences and operations with code names.
E814 2012-025583 978-0-465-03120-7
Citizen soldier; a life of Harry S. Truman.
Donald, Aida D.
Basic Books, ©2012 265 p. $26.99
Harry Truman’s capabilities as president have been debated since he left
office in 1953 for a variety of reasons: his decision to drop the atomic
bomb on Japan and his role in succeeding wars, his “accidental” presi-
dency, and the corruption scandals that marked the end of his term.
However, Donald (author, former educator, and editor) found much in
her research to support the declaration that Truman was not a failed
president, and deserves more credit than he has received for, among
other things, his efforts to rebuild after World War II and his tough
stance against the Soviet Union.
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
E815 2012-020593 978-0-7006-1866-8
Truman’s triumphs; the 1948 election and the making of
postwar America.
Busch, Andrew E. (American presidential elections.)
University Press of Kansas, ©2012 280 p. $37.50
In a book accessible to anyone with an interest in American politics,
Busch (government, Claremont McKenna College) examines the implica-
tions of the 1948 presidential race in the larger sociopolitical context of
postwar America, with a focus on the Democratic takeover of large
swaths of the American government and Truman’s successful divisive
strategies. Chapter one examines the national and international context
of the election, setting the stage to detail the candidates, the divided
parties, the four conventions of the summer of 1948, general election
campaigns, congressional and state elections, and the legacy in American
politics and policy. Hardcover.
E840 978-1-84540-312-6
Beyond patriotism; from Truman to Obama.
Flynn, James R.
Imprint Academic, ©2012 234 p. $29.90 (pa)
Seeing an approaching tipping point in which millions of Americans will
think of themselves as world citizens first and as US nationals second,
Flynn (emeritus, political studies, U. of Otago, New Zealand) applauds
such a development and seeks to encourage the development of interna-
tional humanists who will hold their government to moral account for
its wars and other harmful policies. He describes a transition from tra-
ditional patriotism to increasing moral questioning of government that
accelerated with the Vietnam War and is continuing with criticism of
Middle East policy and support for Israel. He then lays out a framework
for how Americans can forge a post-national era that will steer the United
States onto a more moral path as it encounters the world.
E841 2012-010557 978-1-59884-538-9
Encyclopedia of the Kennedys; the people and events that
shaped America; 3v.
Siracusa, Joseph M.
ABC-CLIO, ©2012 1103 p. $294.00
The publication of this multi-volume encyclopedia for general readers
and students coincides with the 50th anniversary of the presidency of
John F. Kennedy. From Ralph Abernathy through the women’s liberation
movement, the encyclopedia covers key political leaders, rebels, and
martyrs, as well as events, organizations, scandals, movements, and
flashpoints of the Kennedy era, illustrated with b&w historical photos on
most pages. An introductory essay in the first volume reviews events of
the era from the presidential election of 1960 through Kennedy’s assas-
sination in 1963, and also offers a day-to-day chronology of the same
period. The final volume presents 15 primary documents (a total of 137
pages), such as the text of the Nixon-Kennedy debates and the report of
the Warren Commission. There is also an extensive list of officeholders
during the Kennedy administration. Siracusa teaches at the Royal
Melbourne Institute of Technology, Australia.
E886 2011-041302 978-0-8090-9465-3
Bill and Hillary; the politics of the personal.
Chafe, William H.
Farrar, Straus & Giroux, ©2012 387 p. $28.00
A scholar who studies issues of gender and racial equality introduces this
tracing of Bill and Hillary Clinton’s personal and political lives with a
slogan of the women’s liberation movement: the personal is political.
Chafe (history, Duke U.) analyzes how the future president was shaped
by his difficult family dynamics and later tests of character, and Bill and
Hilary’s relationship from Yale to the White House. He concludes by
arguing that Bill and Hillary were partners who needed each other for
both personal and political reasons despite scandals and other political
matters.
E907 2012-011253 978-1-60980-450-3
The book of O(bama); from hope and change to the age
of revolt.
Rall, Ted.
Seven Stories Press, ©2012 234 p. $14.95 (pa)
In a book that today’s conservatives would find bizarre, Rall (political
cartoonist and journalist) convincingly argues that Obama has governed
from the center-right, yet is also the most liberal and well-intentioned
politician that could possibly be elected today. Rall sees little way out and
notes the emergence of both the Tea Party and Occupy movements as
expressions of electorate frustration. There is no doubt of which side he
consistently comes down on as he explores Obama’s minor changes in
domestic policies and quiet continuation of Bush’s anti-terrorism
measures.
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
U.S. LOCAL HISTORY, LATIN AMERICA, CANADA
F106 2012-011783 978-1-935778-19-6
Fips, bots, doggeries, and more; explorations of Henry
Rogers’ 1838 journal of travel from southwestern Ohio to
New York City.
Lawson, Tracy.
McDonald & Woodward Pub., ©2012 146 p. $19.95 (pa)
An intelligent and detailed personal journal can provide an excellent
picture of life over 150 years ago. At the time of his journey, Henry
Rogers had his own milling business and this is reflected in his obser-
vations of mills and the agricultural landscape. But he also regularly
describes canals and bridges, towns and their businesses, and the general
social and religious environment in which they pass. Regular descrip-
tions of the family he travels with (and visits along the way) also appear.
Although Lawson is the fifth generation descendant of Rogers, this
volume is much more than a simple reprint of his journal. Regular
sidebars appear, providing more information, along with extensive foot-
notes and later photographs and postcards. Then she summarizes her
own detailed research in a section entitled “Expansions,” along with a 23
page autobiographical account of her retracing of Roger’s journey.
F125 2012-025927 978-1-62087-200-0
Journal of the plague year; an insider’s chronicle of Eliot
Spitzer’s short and tragic reign. (reprint 2010)
Constantine, Lloyd.
Skyhorse Pub. Co., ©2012 306 p. $14.95 (pa)
In this revelatory book, Constantine, the former senior advisor to and
decades-long friend of New York Governor Eliot Spitzer, outlines the story
of Spitzer’s entanglement with prostitutes and the ensuing collapse of his
promising political career when that information was made public in
March of 2008. Constantine writes with candor about what he saw in the
17 months prior to the resignation, including Spitzer’s difficulties in the
position and personality changes as well as a thoughtful consideration of
the strengths and weaknesses of Spitzer’s administration and an account
of the 61 hours prior to the governor’s resignation in which Constantine,
as well as Spitzer’s wife, tried to convince him not to resign.
F129 2011-935021 978-0-7643-3852-6
Greetings from Brooklyn.
Gabrielan, Randall.
Schiffer Publishing Ltd., ©2011 123 p. $29.99
In this collection of vintage postcards and other images, Gabrielan, a
native Brookynite with the Monmouth County Historical Commission
(the New Jersey county is within the New York metropolitan area), pays
tribute to this iconic New York borough. With commentary on its history,
changing demographics, and commercial aspects, he tours Old Brooklyn,
the diverse neighborhoods, ending up at Coney Island. Includes a bibli-
ography. In landscape format.
F132 978-1-59237-924-8
Profiles of New Jersey, 2012, 3d ed.
Title main entry.
Grey House Pub., Inc., ©2012 482 p. $149.00 (pa)
Alphabetically organized by county, this reference compiles statistical
profiles of all 884 Census-recognized communities in the state of New
Jersey. The profiles summarize geography, history, ancestral and racial
makeup, economy, housing, transportation, industry, education, health,
religion, and climate. The 100 largest communities are compared by 15
data points. Hispanic origins are defined in terms of 24 background cat-
egories while Asians are divided into 23 groups. The third edition con-
tains a new “About New Jersey” section offering color photos and
information on the state’s government, natural resources, and demo-
graphics.
F187 2012-020591 978-1-57233-851-7
Archaeology, narrative, and the politics of the past; the
view from southern Maryland.
King, Julia A.
U. of Tennessee Press, ©2012 272 p. $57.00
Author Julia King (anthropology, St. Mary’s College of Maryland) has an
excellent background for writing this book; she is coordinator of a
museum studies program, co-editor of a book on historical European-
Native American contact in her region, and former director of the
SlackWater Center for landscape interpretation (of the places and cultures
of the Chesapeake bay area). She writes here both as a regional historian
and as a working archeologist. The book’s subject is how we create
stories of history out of landscapes, how those stories do and do not
reflect what actually happened there, and how professionals in
–42–
museums, archeology, and history support and challenge those stories
through their work. The essays themselves have the reflective tone of cre-
ative nonfiction, with a historian’s emphasis on telling factual stories of
individuals from other times, and an archeologist’s interest in revealing
lives and places in ways that encourage fuller understanding rather than
final judgment. The landscape she explores in this book is southern
Maryland, with its complex legacy of life, work, war, and religion on the
border between Puritan New England and the American South. The
importance of what she has to say will appeal to thoughtful readers
living in any landscape who care about the presence of the past in our
lives.
F209 2012-021713 978-1-61163-104-3
Southern culture; an introduction, 3d ed.
Beck, John et al.
Carolina Academic Press, ©2012 539 p. $50.00 (pa)
This well-written and thoughtful book introduces the history of Southern
US cultures. It succeeds in several complex tasks. Non-Southern readers
will gain an idea of the region’s identity and the pressures that have
shaped it, while Southern readers will find information and ideas that
respect their intelligence and identity. Scholarly readers will be satisfied
by the book’s research and integration of details into larger concepts;
popular readers will also be satisfied by its expression of those ideas in
an easy, elegant prose. The book avoids political polemics, and seeks
neither to praise nor condemn; it affirms that the history of slavery and
the dynamics of gender, race, religion, and politics are all key to
Southern identities. It provides enough breadth to function as a survey,
with enough depth to not seem rushed or sketchy. It respects the integrity
of black cultures beyond white views of them, without simplifying the
complex dynamics of relationship both within and between groups. It
will be of interest to a wide range of readers, and useful for introductory
college courses in the social sciences and humanities.
F319 2011-042575 978-0-8173-1747-8
The Cana sanctuary; history, diplomacy, and black
Catholic marriage in antebellum St. Augustine, Florida.
Marotti, Frank.
U. of Alabama Press, ©2012 229 p. $39.95
In the early 1840s, many white St. Augustinians still clung to the golden
age of Spain’s rule; in their minds, local black Catholic militiamen were
heroic defenders of Spain. African American Catholics made use of these
attitudes in their campaign to protect their families from slavery. This
study of African American diplomacy in antebellum St. Augustine high-
lights conflicts between the law of the South and the law of the Catholic
Church in Florida. The first five chapters of the book are based on East
Florida claims cases of the Patriot War of 1812. While most of the tes-
timony in these chapters comes from white witnesses, black voices are
also incorporated. The last two chapters of the book are case studies
demonstrating how black diplomats used history in order to negotiate
their freedom. Marotti is a historian who has taught at Florida
International University.
F390 2011-050067 978-0-316-05374-7
The blood of heroes; the 13-day struggle for the Alamo—
and the sacrifice that forged a nation.
Donovan, Jiames.
Little, Brown, ©2012 500 p. $0.00
While a number of books have been written about the Alamo, one of the
most familiar battles in American history, history author Donovan com-
bines brisk storytelling and detailed research with fresh primary sources
in both U.S. and Mexican archives, to tell the story of one of America’s
epic historic battles. He also puts the battle into historical perspective,
setting it against the cultural trends and politics of the era as well as con-
flicts with Native American tribes.
F390 2012-016309 978-1-57441-469-1
Women and the Texas Revolution.
Title main entry. Ed. by Mary L. Scheer.
Univ. of North Texas Press, ©2012 244 p. $24.95
Scholarship on the Texas Revolution, 1835-36, rarely focuses specifically
on the women affected by the conflict. Noting that it was hardly revolu-
tionary in changing the patriarchal, gendered society, Scheer (history,
Lamar U., Beaumont, Texas) compiles eight contributions that feature
stories examining the Revolution’s impact on Native American, Mexican,
Anglo, and black slave and free women who lived on the Texas border
and survived the Alamo. Includes photographs.
–43–
F391 978-0-8061-4293-7
C.C. Slaughter; rancher, banker, Baptist. (reprint, 1981)
Murrah, David J. (M.K. Brown range life series)
U. of Oklahoma Press, ©2012 173 p. $19.95 (pa)
Hailed as the Cattle King of Texas, C. C. Slaughter (1837-1919) was also a
Texas Ranger, banker, and philanthropist. In addition to his business
activities, this biography covers Slaughter’s contributions to the mission
of the Baptist Church and his other philanthropic work. The book con-
tains b&w historical and a few contemporary photos. Murrah is retired
from the Texas Technical Institute.
F587 2012-002694 978-0-87020-502-6
The Bark River chronicles; stories from a Wisconsin
watershed.
Bates, Milton J.
Wisconsin Historical Society Press, ©2012 293 p. $18.95 (pa)
The canoe journey recounted here is actually a composite of numerous
trips on the Bark River in southeastern Wisconsin that the author and
his wife have taken since 1982. Author Bates (retired from Marquette
University) describes a hypothetical journey on the river between spring
and fall, integrating scientific and historical information on the river’s
geological history, its role in Native American life and white settlements,
its later uses by industry, and current efforts to remove dams and restore
the river. While some facts are presented through imagined dialog, other
conversations are from taped interviews with real people of the region.
The book is illustrated with b&w historical and contemporary photos
and contemporary maps.
F587 2012-018868 978-0-87020-492-0
Life, death, and archaeology at Fort Blue Mounds; a
settlers’ fortification of the Black Hawk War.
Birmingham, Robert A.
Wisconsin Historical Society Press, ©2012 146 p. $14.95 (pa)
Previously Wisconsin State Archaeologist, Birmingham (U. of Wisconsin-
Waukesha) has written about Indian mounds in the state. Here he
recounts how settlers at a site that was then in Michigan Territory
formed a volunteer militia and built a fort where they lived for three
months during the 1832 Black Hawk War, enduring anxiety, deprivations,
and violent death. He also tells of the 20th century search for the site, its
excavation, and what the artifacts and remains reveal about the people
and their lives.
F591 2011-051823 978-0-8165-2850-9
Hell of a vision; regionalism and the modern American
West.
Dorman, Robert L.
U. of Arizona Press, ©2012 256 p. $50.00
Dorman (Oklahoma State U.) explores constructions of Western regional
identity in the United States from the late 19th century to the present. He
proceeds roughly chronologically, examining agrarian identities of the
1890s to the early 1930s; counter-identities of wilderness, urban,
Hispanic, and Native American regionalisms; regionalism as a vehicle for
western social criticism in the Great Depression years; the impact of
World War II and the Cold War on conceptualizations of western region-
alism; the renewed regionalisms that emerged out of the environmental
movement and the identity politics of the 1960s and 1970s; and western
regionalisms in the present.
F592 2012-013134 978-0-87062-413-1
The Indianization of Lewis and Clark; 2v.
Swagerty, William R.
The Arthur H. Clark Co., ©2012 778 p. $90.00
In his interpretation of the Lewis and Clark Corps of Discovery
Expedition across the continent, 1804-1806), Swagerty (history, U. of the
Pacific), author of numerous articles on the fur trade, argues that the
expedition’s success was due largely to Corps members’ adoption of
Indian ways (e.g., diet, dress, transportation, diplomatic protocols
including women’s role in mediation). This “Indianization” led to their
greater awareness of differences among native tribes, and helped shape
subsequent white-Indian relations. The two-volume set includes maps,
color plates, other illustrations, excerpts from the journals and other sup-
porting information. The Arthur H. Clark Co. is an imprint of the
University of Oklahoma Press.
F592 2012-003087 978-0-87062-412-4
Weapons of the Lewis and Clark expedition.
Garry, Jim.
The Arthur H. Clark Co., ©2012 208 p. $32.95
This work draws on expedition journals plus the author’s own field-
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
testing of the weapons used by Meriwether Lewis and his Corps of
Discovery in their 1804-06 expedition into the West. Each chapter focuses
on one type of weapon: the Model 1795 musket, swivel gun and blun-
derbusses, short rifles, personal weapons, pistols, air rifle, edged
weapons, and ammunition. There is also a chapter on John Shields, the
blacksmith and gunsmith to the expedition. The book contains a glossary
and b&w photos of weapons. Garry has written other books on the
history of the West. The Arthur H. Clark Company is an imprint of the
University of Oklahoma Press.
F593 2012-008720 978-0-8061-4284-5
With golden visions bright before them; trails to the
mining West, 1849-1852.
Bagley, Will. (Overland west; The story of the Oregon and California
trails; v.2; 1849-1852)
U. of Oklahoma Press, ©2012 464 p. $45.00
Bagley, author and editor specializing in the American West, provides a
second volume in his series Overland West. This volume spans the period
1849-1852 as travelers headed west hoping to cash in on discoveries of
gold in California or to stake their claim on farmland in Oregon. While
the period has frequently and persistently been described as some heroic
trek toward treasure and the advance of civilization, the author draws
from previously unpublished recollections, letters, and diaries to relate
the journey as often one of extreme hardship, disillusionment, and total
disruption of native cultures.
F594 2012-017569 978-0-8061-4285-2
When law was in the holster; the frontier life of Bob
Paul.
Boessenecker, John.
U. of Oklahoma Press, ©2012 484 p. $34.95
This is the first full-length biography of the adventurous life of Old West
lawman Bob Paul (1830-1901), who battled lynch mobs, captured train
robbers, and fought in the showdown at the OK Corral. Bob Paul not
only fought bad guys; he also performed investigative work, prepared
cases for prosecution in court, and managed political campaigns. The
biography traces his roots in whaling to his appointment as US Marshall
of Arizona Territory, telling his story in the context of vigilantism in the
Old West, ethnic violence, and relations between the US and Mexico. The
book contains a wealth of b&w historical photos. Author Boessenecker
has written other books on the Old West for general readers and has
appeared on TV as a history commentator.
F596 2012-000094 978-0-393-07239-6
Prairie fever; British aristocrats in the American West,
1830-1890.
Pagnamenta, Peter.
W.W. Norton, ©2012 338 p. $27.95
During the mid to late 19th century, young British aristocrats attempted
to replicate their lifestyles and social hierarchies in the American West,
hunting coyotes on horseback as they hunted wolves in England and
playing tennis on the prairie. After they bought up large tracts of land
and built cattle empires, they were vilified as land grabbers, which led
to a law preventing foreigners from buying land. This book looks at
social and economic conditions in England, such as inheritance laws and
the rise of the middle class, that led British aristocrats to encourage their
youngest sons to go to America, and describes how they were received
by American fur traders, hunting guides, and outfitters. The book con-
tains b&w historical photos and illustrations. Pagnamenta is head of
current affairs for BBC Television.
F641 2012-943445 978-0-9834059-2-4
For the love of North Dakota and other essays; Sundays
with Clay in the Bismarck Tribune.
Jenkinson, Clay S.
The Dakota Institute Press, ©2012 364 p. $29.95 (pa)
Columnist Jenkinson has made a commitment to describing the land-
scape and spirit of North Dakota. This collection of essays, most of them
published in the Sunday edition of the Bismarck Tribune but sprinkled
with new pieces, make it clear why the author refers to them as his “love
songs to Dakota.” While he does address social and political issues and
share his concern regarding what the future might bring, he primarily
describes a sense of place, and a sense of the people who live there.
Distributed in the U.S. by University of Oklahoma Press.
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
F659 2012-017487 978-0-9846505-1-4
North of Twelfth Street; the changing face of Sioux Falls
neighborhoods.
Dempster, Tom.
South Dakota State Historical Society Pr., ©2012 98 p. $34.95
In this 11x9” collection of color photos for general readers, Dempster, a
regional photographer, gazes with fondness at the neighborhoods of
Sioux Falls, South Dakota. While the photographer’s focus is on three his-
toric districts—Downtown, the Old Courthouse and Warehouse District,
and the Cathedral Historic District—the book also includes a section on
the North End neighborhoods beyond the historic districts. In addition to
architecture, parks, street scenes, and other sites of historical or archi-
tectural interest, small business owners, factory workers, and neigh-
borhood houses of worship are also portrayed. The book includes a
historical overview of Sioux Falls by Gary D. Olson, former professor of
history at Augustana College in Sioux Falls, and is illustrated with sepia-
toned historical photos. Author and photographer Dempster has served
as a county commissioner and a South Dakota State Senator.
F796 2011-044955 978-0-8263-5192-0
The great Taos bank robbery and other true stories.
(reprint, 1973)
Hillerman, Tony.
U. of New Mexico Press, ©2012 150 p. $15.95 (pa)
For those who find New Mexico intriguing, there is no better source than
Hillerman, who was best known for his suite of mystery novels taking
place in the Navajo Nation. Although these stories are non-fiction, they
are just as fascinating. This new edition of a 1973 publication includes a
four page foreword by his daughter, Anne Hillerman. Seventeen black
and white photographs illustrating some feature in each of the stories are
also provided.
F799 2011-044548 978-0-8263-5115-9
Juan Domínguez de Mendoza; soldier and frontiersman of
the Spanish Southwest, 1627-1693.
Title main entry. Ed. by France V. Scholes et al. (Coronado historical
series; VII)
U. of New Mexico Press, ©2012 455 p. $65.00
This work collects military service records and supplemental documents
on Juan Dominguez de Mendoza, a soldier-colonist who was a key figure
in the founding of New Mexico. The documents, discovered by editor
Scholes in 1928, come from archives in Spain and Mexico and demon-
strate that there was more cooperation between Spaniards and Pueblo
Indians than previously thought. The book also provides extensive back-
ground on the fates of various branches of the family of Juan Dominguez
de Mendoza in New Spain and New Mexico. It includes b&w historical
and contemporary photos, maps, and illustrations. Editor Scholes was a
historian.
F817 2012-020077 978-0-8263-5247-7
Gila; the life and death of an American river, rev.ed.
McNamee, Gregory.
U. of New Mexico Press, ©2012 232 p. $19.95 (pa)
Arizona writer and photographer McNamee profiles a river that within
living memory formed, along with its tributaries, the most important
river system in the southwest US, draining an area of 88,000 square
miles—a little larger than England and Scotland combined. He covers
genesis, the transit of Eden, mountain people and desert people, the first
conquest, gathering storms, the tightening noose, death knell, disap-
pearing waters, and regaining paradise. He has added an afterword to
the 1998 first edition.
F819 2012-014484 978-0-7864-6287-2
An illustrated history of Mayer, Arizona; stagecoaches,
mining, ranching and the railroad.
Burgess, Nancy.
McFarland & Co., ©2012 264 p. $45.00 (pa)
This is an in-depth history of Mayer, a small community in Yavapai
County, Arizona, and its pioneering families. Burgess’s main focus is on
the century between the town’s 1882 founding, and the 1980s. She dis-
cusses schools, hospitals, railroads, mining, and ranching. The book is
illustrated with many black and white historic photos including school
photos, family photos, old advertisements, images of the town, maps, and
other documents. This book would be useful to someone interested in the
history of central Arizona, its industries (ranching, farming, railroads),
and its pioneer families.
–44–
F826 2012-015313 978-0-87062-415-5
Edward Hunter Snow; pioneer—educator—statesman.
Alexander, Thomas G.
The Arthur H. Clark Co., ©2012 392 p. $34.95
Edward Hunter Snow, son of Mormon apostle Erastus Snow, was a leader
of Mormon Utah. This biography sheds light on the development of the
Mormon Church and its place in Utah during the late 19th and early 20th
centuries. It describes Edward Hunter Snow’s role in founding several
educational institutions and in facilitating economic development in the
state. The book includes many b&w historical photos. Alexander has
written other works on the history of Mormonism. The Arthur H. Clark
Company is an imprint of the University of Oklahoma Press.
F859 2012-006501 978-1-61035-053-2
An artist and a writer travel Highway 1 north.
Hunter, Pat and Janice Stevens.
Craven Street Books, ©2012 136 p. $21.95 (pa)
Hunter is one of California’s most recognized artists, best known for her
watercolors of historical landmarks. With Stevens (English, State Center
Community College District), she co-owns an art gallery in Fresno, and
together they have also produced several books on California architecture
and history. They provide residents and visitors with an enjoyable
account of their recent trip from Big Sur’s Bixby Creek, at the midpoint
of the state’s coast, north to the end of Highway 1 at Leggett, and along
Highway 101 to the Oregon border. Illustrated with 100-plus watercolors,
the memoir invites readers to reacquaint themselves with familiar
favorites or discover for the first time, as did they, remarkable sites off
the well-traveled road. The authors are currently working on a com-
panion book volume in which they explore Highway 1 South.
F869 2012-012592 978-0-87286-540-2
San Francisco Chinatown; a guide to its history and its
architecture.
Choy, Philip P.
City Lights Books, ©2012 224 p. $15.95 (pa)
Retired architect, educator (San Francisco State U.), and renowned
Chinese American historian Choy offers an insightful guidebook to one
of San Francisco’s most popular tourist destinations, which will appeal
to both tourists and Bay Area residents alike. Choy’s book differs from
similar guides in its in-depth look at how the existence of this fascinating
community is interwoven with the history of San Francisco, and in its
aim to place the evolution of the Chinese community in the context of the
US/China relationship. The text includes an overall history of the com-
munity from the late 18th to 21st centuries; building-by-building descrip-
tions of the various sections of Chinatown; and a selection of walking
tours. Illustrated with b&w photographs and maps. No subject index is
provided.
F914 2012-013827 978-0-8061-4280-7
“That fiend in hell”; Soapy Smith in legend.
Spude, Catherine Holder.
U. of Oklahoma Press, ©2012 276 p. $29.95
Soapy Smith was the leader of a gang of conmen and robbers in
Skagway, Alaska, in the late 19th century. But he also gave to the poor,
and he even led the Independence Day parade in 1898, just days before
he was killed over a card game. This account of Soapy Smith’s life and
death recasts him as a petty criminal rather than as the hero or evil
villain who appeared in accounts shortly after his death. In reading the
primary source accounts about Soapy Smith, the author unveils an effort
to reinforce a morality tale about the redemption of a lawless town at the
expense of a more complicated story of town formation and the creation
of law and order. An appendix offers a chronological list of primary and
secondary accounts. The book is illustrated with b&w historical photos.
Spude is an independent historian and has written other books on
history.
F915 978-1-60223-139-9
To Russia with love; an Alaskan’s journey.
Fischer, Victor and Charles Wohlforth.
U. of Alaska Press, ©2012 405 p. $27.95
In Stalin’s Russia, Victor Fischer’s father, American journalist Louis
Fischer, and his mother, Russian writer Markoosha Fischer, were perse-
cuted as political activists and lived under threat of arrest until Eleanor
Roosevelt helped them escape Russia. Victor Fischer grew up to serve in
the US Army during WWII and later was a delegate to the Alaska
Constitutional Convention. He served in the Territorial House of
Representatives and the Alaska State Senate, and also held government
positions in Washington, DC. During his return to Russia in recent times,
he rekindled old friendships, including the brother of a childhood friend,
who wrote about Fischer’s childhood in The Troika: The Story of an
–45–
Unmade Film. Fischer has also been mentioned in his mother’s and
fathers’ autobiographies. In Fischer’s own autobiography, he reflects on
his early his years, his career, and his personal life with a sense of
humor, drawing on his parents’ memoirs, correspondence, and other
papers, as well as other archives. The book includes a wealth of b&w
historical photos and color contemporary photos. Fischer is former
director of the Institute for Social and Economic Research at the
University of Alaska. Wohlforth has written other books about Alaska.
F1219 2011-041144 978-1-85759-741-7
Children of the plumed serpent; the legacy of Quetzalcoatl
in ancient Mexico.
Fields, Virginia M.
Scala Publishers, ©2012 256 p. $65.00
A collaboration of the late Virginia M. Fields (1952-2011; Latin American
art, LA County Museum of Art), Pohl (art history, UCLA) and Lyall (Latin
American art, LACMA), this catalogue accompanies an exhibition held at
the LACMA April through June of 2012, and at the Dallas Museum of Art
from late-July through November of 2012. Examining the social and cul-
tural complexities of late pre-Columbian and early colonial eras as
expressed in the art of the period—and their relevance in contemporary
Mesoamerican societies—the materials trace the history of Quetzalcoatl’s
life and subsequent role as founder and benefactor of the Nahua-, Mixtec-
, and Zapotec-dominated kingdoms of southern Mexico, which success-
fully resisted Aztec and Spanish subjugation and flourished during the
Postclassic (AD 950-1521) period. The book is illustrated throughout with
full-color photographs. Oversize: 10x11.75”. Distributed in North America
by ACC Distribution.
F1219 2012-017367 978-0-8263-5220-0
Conflict in colonial Sonora; Indians, priests, and settlers.
Yetman, David.
U. of New Mexico Press, ©2012 280 p. $45.00
Yetman, a social science researcher at the University of Arizona’s
Southwest Center, studies conflict among and within Indian tribes, Jesuit
and other priests, settlers, and military personnel during northwestern
Mexico’s Indian Wars of the 17th and 18th centuries. The author con-
centrates on seven incidents over a period of 130 years, beginning in the
1640s. Each chapter is based on a manuscript or a group of manuscripts
that sheds light on the social evolution of Mexico’s Northwest, especially
the state of Sonora. Specific subjects discussed include sorcery in Eastern
Sonora, and a priest and Indian united against the vecinos. An appendix
gives background on the Tuape Indians’ legal struggle to regain their
land.
F1219 2012-002017 978-0-8061-4235-7
Mesoamerican memory; enduring systems of
remembrance.
Title main entry. Ed. by Amos Megged and Stephanie Wood.
U. of Oklahoma Press, ©2012 320 p. $55.00
Contributors who are identified only by name—presumably anthropolo-
gists—identify elements and practices that combined to create systems of
remembrance within Mesoamerican communities. Among the topics are
recollection and emotion in Nahua conquest pictorials, the transfor-
mation of historical memory as revealed in two Zapotec primordial titles,
reshaping indigenous history in Oaxaca, the 1539 trial of Don Carlos
Ometochtli and the scramble for Mount Tlaloc, and weaving history and
cartography to preserve native domination in the early colonial Mixteca
of Oaxaca.
F1221 2012-017572 978-0-8061-4292-0
Maya exodus; indigenous struggle for citizenship in
Chiapas.
Moksnes, Heidi.
U. of Oklahoma Press, ©2012 339 p. $26.95 (pa)
Moksnes (Uppsala Center for Sustainable Development, Uppsala
University, Sweden) has done extensive fieldwork among the Mayan
Catholic villagers of San Pedro Chenalho in the highlands of Chiapas.
Here, she describes the consequences of their struggle for better living
conditions and an improved political status in the Mexican nation-state.
The book focuses on one group of Catholics and their political associ-
ation, called Las Abejas, and its connections to regional Catholic dioceses.
There is also much material on the 1997 paramilitary massacre of 45
people, including women and children, in the village of Acteal. The book
includes a chronology from 1960 to 2009, plus many b&w photos, most
from the past 5 years.
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
F1231 2007-012428 978-0-8061-4325-5
Indian conquistadors; indigenous allies in the conquest of
Mesoamerica. (reprint, 2007)
Title main entry. Ed. by Laura E. Matthew and Michel R. Oudijk.
U. of Oklahoma Press, ©2012 350 p. $24.95 (pa)
Containing several excellent maps and derived from research of primary
sources, the nine essays of this collection offer a detailed examination of
a little acknowledged aspect of the Spanish conquest of Mesoamerica,
namely, the role of native fighters. The essays include several specific
cases; the accounts of Aztec conquistadors; a more general overview by
Oudijk (Universidad Nacional Autónoma, Mexico City) and Matthew
Restall (history, Pennsylvania State U.); and related subjects, including an
essay by Robinson A. Herrera (history, Florida State U.) on Spanish sexual
relations with native women in 16th-century Guatemala. Together, the
studies make a valuable addition to Mesoamerican conquest history. A
glossary is provided. This is a paperbound reprint of the 2007 cloth-
bound edition.
F1314 2012-018873 978-0-8263-5217-0
Frontier naturalist; Jean Louis Berlandier and the
exploration of northern Mexico and Texas.
Lawson, Russell M.
U. of New Mexico Press, ©2012 262 p. $45.00
This study describes the life’s work of French botanist and zoologist Jean
Louis Berlandier, who was part of a multinational team sent to inves-
tigate northern Mexico and Texas by the Mexican Boundary Commission
during the 19th century, when the region was occupied by competing
groups of Native American tribes, US colonists, Mestizo settlers, and
American and Mexican soldiers. Berlandier’s notes, sketches, and
paintings were the first Western scientific observations of the area. The
book includes b&w historical maps and illustrations by Berlandier and
others. Lawson teaches history at Bacone College.
F1391 2012-023754 978-0-8263-5252-1
Knowing history in Mexico; an ethnography of
citizenship.
Stack, Trevor.
U. of New Mexico Press, ©2012 168 p. $45.00
In fieldwork he conducted near Guadalajara, anthropologist Stack
(Center for Citizenship, Civil Society and Rule of Law, University of
Aberdeen) asked ordinary people how they feel about the teaching of
history, how important it is, and why it is important to know local and
regional urban history. In this anthropological approach to history as
public knowledge, he resists the idea that history is intrinsically valuable
and instead looks at how and why we value history and what people do
with their knowledge of history. The book is illustrated with b&w photos
of historical sites and contemporary life in Mexico.
F1799 2011-022556 978-0-8173-1762-1
Old Havana; spirit of the living city.
Cooper, Chip and Néstor Marti.
U. of Alabama Press, ©2012 208 p. $49.95
Photographers Chip Cooper and Nestor Martí turned their cameras on
Havana to capture the spirit of the city. In a variety of color photographs,
they document a spirit that is vibrant, watchful, colorful, falling apart,
energetic, multiracial, and multigenerational. The pictures mix people
and urban landscapes in striking color that is both saturated and subtle.
The photographers reveal a telling eye for detail and echoes of color and
shape, and their work blends seamlessly. Photographs are printed either
in full-page or alternating full- and half-page formats. Reproduction
quality is fine. Captured with high shutter speeds, each image seems
either caught in an unrepeatable moment of time or a timeless, medi-
tative waiting; in the best images, both at once. The book includes for-
wards by Eusebio Leal Spengler and Robert F. Olin, and essays by Magda
Resik Aguirre and Phillip D. Beidler. The text is given in both English
and Spanish in a two-column format. The design by Michele Myatt Quinn
for the U of Alabama Press gives subtle and attentive use to color and
the details of production that make a beautiful book. Oversize: 11x13”.
F3429 978-0-500-51656-0
Wari; lords of the ancient Andes
Title main entry. Ed. by Susan E. Bergh
Thames & Hudson, ©2012 p. $60.00
This book accompanies the first North American exhibit of the arts of
the Wari, organized by the Cleveland Museum of Art. The Wari were the
ancestors of the better-known Incas, cultural cousins to the people who
built Tiahuanaco, and may be the first empire in the Americas. The book
is well illustrated with photographs of exhibition objects, mostly painted
ceramics and textiles of astonishingly brilliant color and complexity, all
dating from 600-1100 AD and preserved by the deserts of coastal Peru.
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
The book’s text is very well written. It is suitable for both general and
specialist readers with an interest in craft arts, archeology, anthropology,
social and political history, or the history of the Americas. Susan E.
Bergh, curator of Pre-Columbian and Native North American art at the
Cleveland Museum, is the organizing writer, with chapters contributed by
specialists on each area in the text. The writers convincingly argue from
the evidence that European historians didn’t notice the Wari Empire for
two reasons: their power was sustained by large-scale cultural and eco-
nomic rather than military takeover, and their ostentatious displays of
power were “crafts,” (ceramics, fiber) made on a small scale designed to
be carried or worn. The book showcases breathtaking large-scale engi-
neering and building works, and small art objects. The book is particu-
larly strong in its photographs of the extraordinary Wari textiles, and its
clear explanations of the language meanings coded in woven clothes and
featherwork and how they were used for social communication and
control. This is a finely produced art book, and a fascinating view of a
different kind of empire, which used the control of water, food, and the
mummies of important people as weapons of choice, built monumental
architecture without metal, money, or draft animals, and communicated
by weaving rather than writing. Oversize: 11x13”.
FC104 978-0-88755-737-8
Ethnic elites and Canadian identity; Japanese, Ukrainians,
and Scots, 1919-1971.
Fujiwara, Aya. (Studies in immigration and culture)
Univ. of Manitoba Pr., ©2012 256 p. $31.95 (pa)
Fujiwara (U. of Alberta, Canada) investigates the ways in which ethnic
elites among the Scottish, Ukrainian, and Japanese communities of
Canada contributed to ethnic community building and maintenance, as
well as the transformation of Canadian identity as it moved from unof-
ficial “Anglo-conformity” to official multiculturalism. Her examination,
which focuses on the ways in which ethnic elites served as intermediaries
between their groups and the wider society, explores the changing
dynamics of ethnic-national negotiation from World War II to the push
for official recognition of multiculturalism that began in the 1960s. It
also analyzes the ways in which the different cultural and racial posi-
tioning of the three chosen groups in relation to the wider society influ-
enced their construction of community and the notion of
multiculturalism. Distributed in the US by Michigan State U. Press.
FC3396 978-0-88755-735-4
Imagining Winnipeg; history through the photographs of
L.B. Foote.
Jones, Esyllt W.
Univ. of Manitoba Pr., ©2012 154 p. $44.95 (pa)
Jones (history, U. of Manitoba, Canada) collects the photographs of com-
mercial photographer Lewis Benjamin Foote, who documented the city
life of Winnipeg, Canada, over a period of about 45 years. Jones compiles
his best-known photos from the Archives of Manitoba from 1906 to 1950,
which include private parties, family reunions, sporting events, factories
and businesses, royal visits, the construction of landmarks, workers,
celebrities, community groups, weddings, parades, funerals, and the 1919
General Strike. He includes brief descriptions and an introduction to
Foote’s life and career. Distributed in the US by Michigan State U. Press.
FC3400 978-0-7748-1915-2
The way of the bachelor; early Chinese settlement in
Manitoba.
Marshall, Alison R. (Asian religions and society series)
U. of British Columbia Press, ©2011 266 p. $94.00
Focusing on the years between 1911 and 1949, this study of the Chinese
settlement of Manitoba examines the complicated roles of religion, the
laundry, and the restaurant in the lives of Chinese immigrants, with
special consideration given to Christianity, Confucianism, Sun Yat-sen
and the KMT, and food and identity in the lives of the men who had to
live as bachelors while they formed new lives in Canada. Due to the
absence of Chinese women in western Manitoba for over three decades,
traditional relationship roles had to be reimagined, which resulted in
new social, political, and economic identities. The book includes b&w
photographs and is distributed by UTP distribution.
FC3824 2012-9041653 978-0-7748-2388-3
Boundless optimism; Richard McBride’s British Columbia.
Roy, Patricia E.
U. of British Columbia Press, ©2012 411 p. $99.00
In the works since 1958, this carefully researched biography explores
McBride’s major influence on British Columbia, especially during its
formative period around the turn of the 20th century, when he served
four terms as BC’s premier. McBride was an important political figure
due in part to his proud identification as both Canadian and as a British
–46–
subject, and was heavily involved in the politics of both countries with a
focus on strengthening the relationship between the two, an outlook
which led to a knighthood. He also worked to expand and improve
British Columbia’s industrial development and infrastructure, especially
its railroads, in order to take full advantage of the province’s natural
resources. Widely recognized for his good looks and charming demeanor,
McBride balanced popular socially conservative views with more liberal
political policies.
GEOGRAPHY
G70 978-0-12-385954-9
Advanced remote sensing; terrestrial information
extraction and applications.
Title main entry. Ed. by Shunlin Liang et al.
Academic Press, ©2012 799 p. $149.95
Selected research scientists were asked to contribute to a reference on the
advanced methods and algorithms that are now being used for extracting
information from the huge volume of remotely sensed data. Much of the
data is publicly available, but methods for making practical sense of it
tend to be buried in specialist journals. The treatment here is highly
quantitative and rigorously technical, but also accessible to students at
the upper undergraduate and first-year graduate levels. After an
overview of remote sensing, it covers data processing methods and tech-
niques, estimating surface radiation budget components, estimating bio-
physical and biochemical variables, estimating water balance
components, and production generation and application demonstrations.
Academic Press is an imprint of Elsevier.
G70 2012-005383 978-1-4666-1924-1
Geographic information analysis for sustainable
development and economic planning; new technologies.
Title main entry. Ed. by Giuseppe Borruso et al.
Information Science Reference, ©2013 408 p. $180.00
Primarily Italian researchers apply spatial-economic analysis techniques
to estimating urban sprawl in Salerno and Benevento, land degradation
in Southern Italy, green spaces in Catania, non-native resident popula-
tions, and the effect of rail accessibility on real estate prices. A pair of
papers from Canada compare component-based multivariate regression
models of cardiac disease with variable-based models and measure the
spatial accessibility to healthcare services among Aboriginal peoples in
Alberta. Other topics of the 23 papers include NASA datasets as inputs
to hydrological models, a density-based algorithm for spatial data
mining, mobile phone network data, and cultural heritage management
at the local level.
G70 2010-932633 978-1-4129-4645-2
The Sage handbook of GIS and society.
Title main entry. Ed. by Timothy L. Nyerges et al.
Sage Publications, ©2011 559 p. $150.00
Who would have forecast when the Geographical Information System
(GIS) emerged in the 1960s as a software program for plugging map
coordinates into a computer, that a handbook would be needed to
address the impact of GIS on society? Nyerges (U. of Washington) and
other geography scholars introduce 26 chapters by international contrib-
utors that treat the social, political, technical, and ethical issues relating
to GIS use. An overview examines the theoretical perspectives applied to
and debates that have arisen over the GIS-society relationship, including
whether an alternative spatial data model is needed because of the lack
of public representation in applications such as studying community
health and emergency preparedness planning. Privacy and land own-
ership determinations are other concerns. The work includes supporting
case studies, maps, and figures.
G155 978-1-84564-618-9
Island sustainability II; proceedings.
International Conference on Island Sustainability (2d: 2012: Brac,
Croatia) Ed. by S. Favro and C.A. Brebbia. (WIT transactions on ecology
and the environment; v.166)
WIT Press, ©2012 211 p. $198.00
The concern here is not so much environmental sustainability as eco-
nomic growth, and contributors are from such fields as tourism, devel-
opment, and banking. In 17 papers, they discuss planning and
development, tourism impact and strategies, socio-economic issues, and
infrastructure. Among the topics are the design of a transportation
system for workers in a Cuban resort area, the effects of government
fiscal policy measures to enhance the economic sustainability of Croatian
islands with an emphasis on tourism, integrating small island sustain-
ability, development and infrastructure of the Federated States of
–47–
Micronesia, and beach degradation and sustainable management of the
sandy Yilan coast in northeastern Taiwan. Only authors are indexed. The
US office of WIT Press is Computational Mechanics.
G155 2012-027011 978-81-321-0699-9
Performing heritage; art of exhibit walks.
Jafa, Navina.
Sage Publications, ©2012 216 p. $32.95 (pa)
Navina Jafa is the Director of Indian Cultural Heritage Research, a con-
sortium of South Asian cultural researchers putting together information
on cultural heritage in the region. She is also a working Kathak per-
former. Both Jafa’s subject and cultural perspective make this book an
interesting and useful take on interpretive education, heritage interpre-
tation, museums, and how people talk about, present, and experience
culture. In this book, Jafa discusses exhibit walks, in which the equiv-
alent of audiences or museum visitors walk through an area or event. An
interpretive educator may lead the tour, the walk may be self-guided, per-
formative elements may guide the walk, the community which inhabits
the space may guide the interpretation themselves. As an interpreter in
India, the author works with a level of interpenetration between expert
authority and subject that is often present but rarely talked about in the
US. She deals with tourism, but also with situations where individuals or
groups quietly take over a heritage site and re-interpret it for their own
political, religious, or artistic purposes. As a performer, the author brings
a perspective to interpretation where subject and object are not rigidly
separated, and the viewer’s gaze is as likely to give the subject authority
and represent shared experience as to take it away and represent oth-
ering. The book is illustrated with line drawings of the sites described.
The book is divided into five chapters: debating and speculating heritage,
designing and executing functional walking tours, the making of a study
leader, aspects of the economics and culture of walking tours, and
walking exhibits as brokering culture. The book offers awareness of the
complexities of culture and authority in a direct style focused on prac-
tical experience and interested in fostering unique practical possibilities
for cultural performance, teaching, and learning.
G155 2012-025865 978-1-4665-0726-5
Policing global movement; tourism, migration, human
trafficking, and terrorism.
Title main entry. Ed. by S. Caroline Taylor et al. (International police
executive symposium co-publications)
CRC Press, ©2013 260 p. $129.95
People have been moving across borders with rapidly increasing fre-
quency. And while much of that movement is for legitimate reasons,
some of it (human trafficking and terrorism, for example) is not. That
trend has handed governments major challenges in policing and securing
their borders from unwanted visitors like criminals and terrorists. The
discussions in this book originated from an International Police Executive
Symposium (IPES) held in Malta in 2010. The 13 papers included address
a variety of topics, including: policing tourism, strategic locations, and
protests; policing organized crime and terrorism, and policing immi-
gration and human trafficking. Concluding commentary on the con-
tinuing challenges for policing crime in a global community also is
included. Editors are Taylor (social justice, Edith Cowan, U., Australia),
Torpy (clinical psychologist, Australia), and Das (founding president,
IPES, and former police executive).
G156 2012930567 978-1-84844-867-4
Nature-based tourism and conservation; new economic
insights and case studies.
Tisdell, Clem and Clevo Wilson.
Edward Elgar Publishing, ©2012 506 p. $199.95
Authors Tisdell (emeritus, economics, U. of Queensland, Australia) and
Wilson (economics, Queensland U. of Technology, Australia) tackle some
tricky questions, such as what are the consequences of nature-based
tourism on the conservation of nature? And, is tourism contributing to
conservation or accelerating its destruction? They provide answers to
those questions based on their research and a variety of case studies.
They begin with an overview of nature-based tourism and conservation,
and follow with discussions of discussions of specific locations, economic
value, NGO conservation efforts based on ecotourism, and specific
wildlife species and groups of species as tourist attractions. The book will
interest both academics and professionals in tourism and related fields.
G156 2011-276047 978-1-4411-5044-8
Spiritual tourism; travel and religious practice in western
society.
Norman, Alex. (Continuum advances in religious studies)
Continuum Publishing Group, ©2011 239 p. $120.00
Of all the intersections between travel and religion, pilgrimage being the
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
most obvious, Norman (religion, U. of Sydney) focuses on tourism to par-
ticular places to engage in religious practice that the tourist does not nec-
essarily have any other affiliation with. An example would be Westerners
going to India for a meditation retreat but not considering themselves
Hindu. Among his topics are the Camino de Santiago as a spiritual work-
place, theories of leisured travel, contemporary forms of religious life,
and India in the mind of the spiritual tourist.
G156 2012-010368 978-1-4496-2823-9
Sustainable tourism and the millennium development
goals; effecting positive change.
Title main entry. Ed. by Kelly S. Bricker et al.
Jones & Bartlett, ©2013 349 p. $82.95 (pa)
Aiming to bring more awareness to the United Nations Millennium
Development Goals and inspire the tourism industry to contribute to
them, Bricker (parks, recreation, and tourism, U. of Utah) et al. collect
13 chapters and 10 case studies that demonstrate how ecotourism and
sustainable tourism can help support and meet the goals. Researchers of
tourism and related fields from across the globe examine how the goals
are addressed generally, then the relationship of ecotourism and
sustainable tourism to each one. These include poverty reduction,
education, women’s empowerment, building community capacity,
disease prevention, community well-being, preserving natural areas and
biodiversity, ensuring environmental sustainability in marine
environments, climate change, the role of volunteer tourism, and
partnerships in certification and accreditation, ecotourism, and
sustainable tourism programs.
G530 2012-030013 978-0-8166-8081-8
Mighty Fitz; the sinking of the Edmund Fitzgerald.
(reprint 2005)
Schumacher, Michael. (The Fesler-Lampert Minnesota heritage book
series)
U. of Minnesota Press, ©2012 243 p. $16.95 (pa)
The Edmund Fitzgerald, often called the Titanic of the Great Lakes, sank
on November 10, 1975, with no survivors. Because the ship never radioed
for help, the exact cause and circumstances of the disaster remain a
mystery. Written in narrative style, this account gives background on the
ship’s previous history and describes the sinking, search efforts, and the
investigation. There is special emphasis on the controversy over the Coast
Guard report released after the investigation into the accident.
Appendices offer a list of the crew members, the lyrics to the commem-
orative song by Gordon Lightfoot, and a glossary of ship terms.
Schumacher has written other historical works. The book was originally
published in 2005 by Bloomsbury.
G585 2012-012126 978-0-306-82067-0
The last Viking; the life of Roald Amundsen.
Bown, Stephen R.
Da Capo Press, ©2012 357 p. $27.50
This biography of larger-than-life Norwegian polar explorer Roald
Amundsen is geared toward general readers. Author Bown, who has
written other books on exploration and science for general readers,
describes Amundsen’s approach to expeditions as military operations
and portrays his gift for flamboyant self-promotion and publicity seeking
on the lecture circuit. The book is illustrated with many b&w historical
photos and a few b&w maps.
G1021 2012-008352 978-1-4262-0995-6
National Geographic compact atlas of the world.
National Geographic Maps.
National Geographic Society, ©2012 256 p. $14.95 (pa)
This third edition pocket-sized, full-color atlas presents an updated,
detailed look at the geopolitical boundaries of the world. Information
about each continent, as well as the Earth as a whole, includes geo-
graphic extremes, political boundaries, physical boundaries, population
density and change, natural hazards, land cover, climate, and water avail-
ability. Regions as well as countries are presented, and a detailed index
is included. Color-coded for ease of use as a reference, the book contains
over 450 easy-to-read maps, charts, and graphs.
Assume that all books contain appropriate scholarly paraphernalia. We note if
the book should contain, but lacks, a subject index and/or a bibliography.
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
HYDROLOGY, OCEANOGRAPHY
GB400 2012-006660 978-1-118-12276-1
Remote sensing and actuation using networked
unmanned vehicles.
Chao, Haiyang and YangQuan Chen. (IEEE Press series on systems
science and engineering)
IEEE/Wiley, ©2012 198 p. $99.95
Chao (mechanical and aerospace engineering, West Virginia U.) and Chen
(electrical and computer engineering, Utah State U.) explain how to
design and employ unmanned vehicles for remote sensing and dis-
tributed control purposes in the current information-rich world. They
emphasize environmental and agricultural applications such as surveil-
lance of rivers and reservoirs, wind profiling, monitoring and controlling
chemical leaks, and so on. They begin with single aircraft, including real
flight experiments with AggieAir, a small and low-cost unmanned air-
craft system designed for environmental monitoring missions. Then they
turn to ground tests and simulations of networked unmanned vehicles
for future sensing and control missions such as formation control, mon-
itoring wind profile, and neutralizing control.
GB428 2011-937489 978-0-7643-3931-8
Faces of the Susquehanna; a photographic study of
natural reflections.
Pidcock, Stephen W.
Schiffer Publishing Ltd., ©2011 128 p. $29.99
Photographer Stephen W. Pidcock offers readers a book of unusual por-
traits of the Susquehanna River. It focuses almost entirely on the photo-
graphs and has almost no text. While some of the photographs are
traditional landscape pictures of places on the river, most are photos of
natural features, usually rock formations, reflected in the water. The pic-
tures are printed sideways, so the line of reflection runs vertically down
the center of the printed photograph. The book’s conceit is that the
resulting images resemble faces, revealing the personality of the river in
its many moods. While most readers will have to look for a while to see
the “faces,” what is obvious in these photographs is the beauty of the
river. Readers who enjoy the book’s conceit will value the book, and so
will those who wish to turn the book ninety degrees and enjoy the
changes rung on a single theme in landscape photography by a skillful
amateur photographer who knows the Susquehanna well. Oversize:
8.6x11.3”
GB451 2011-534758 978-981-4304-25-2
A guide to modeling coastal morphology.
Roelvink, Dano and Ad Reniers. (Advances in coastal and ocean engi-
neering; v.12)
World Scientific, ©2012 274 p. $112.00
Roelvink (UNESCO-IHE and Deltares, the Netherlands) and Reniers (U. of
Miami) offer a guide to coastal morphodynamic modeling to provide
coastal engineers and scientists with an understanding of some of the
more important processes of the technique. It also is intended to help
practitioners quickly assess significant processes, choose an appropriate
model as determined by a specific situation, validate assumptions, create
models, and interpret their results. Topics include wind waves, currents,
sediment transport, morphological processes, types of models, and pro-
cedures. The book contains a bibliography but no index.
GB656 2012-023062 978-0-470-71427-0
Fluvial remote sensing for science and management.
Carbonneau, Patrice and Hervé and Piégay. (Advancing river
restoration and management)
John Wiley & Sons, ©2012 440 p. $99.95
Geographers and other social, earth, and environmental scientists survey
the current status of using remote sensing as part of managing rivers
and river systems. Among the topics are management applications of
optical remote sensing in the active river channel, the use of radar
imagery in riverine flood inundation studies, studying and managing
riparian vegetation, monitoring rivers with ground-based videography,
and using photo-questionnaires to evaluate river management strategies.
GB1001 2001-98016 978-0-12-384705-8
Groundwater science, 2d ed.
Fitts, Charles R.
Academic Press, ©2013 672 p. $109.95
Fitts (civil engineering, U. of Southern Maine) corrects and updates his
2002 primary textbook for a first course in groundwater principles, for
students of geoscience, environmental science, geological engineering,
and civil engineering. The topics include the place of groundwater in the
hydrological cycle, principles of flow, hydrology and geology, modeling
–48–
transient well hydraulics and mounding, groundwater chemistry, and
subsurface heat flow and geothermal energy. Academic Press is an
imprint of Elsevier.
GB2601 2012-021904 978-0-8156-1004-5
Lake effect; tales of large lakes, arctic winds, and
recurrent snows.
Monmonier, Mark.
Syracuse U. Press, ©2012 2416 p. $24.95
Monmonier (geography, Syracuse U.) provides an understanding as well
as a meteorological and scientific cartography-based history of the
weather phenomenon known as lake-effect snow, in which snows falls
heavily for anywhere from minutes to days. He also addresses its societal
impacts, how it was identified, and how communities in lake-effect areas
have adapted to the intense and abrupt disruptions. Despite what one
might expect to be a heavily technical book, the writing is clear and
accessible and numerous explanatory descriptions are included.
GC11 2012-027546 978-1-4496-8643-7
Essential invitation to oceanography. (online access
included)
Pinet, Paul R.
Jones & Bartlett, ©2014 481 p. $150.95 (pa)
Pinet (Colgate U.) introduces non-science majors in short courses to
oceanographic concepts, discussing the dynamic processes that affect the
ocean’s water, seafloor, and life forms, leaving out advanced topics some
courses do not require. The text covers the history of ocean exploration
and research; the fundamental structure of the earth’s interior and
exterior ocean basins; the geology, chemistry, physics, and biology of the
sea; coastal environments; open water and deep-sea ecosystems; environ-
mental stresses from human activity; and climate change. To help those
unfamiliar with science, scientific concepts are introduced and summa-
rized in each chapter, and boxes on the process of science are included.
This edition has new photos and new and updated material. A com-
panion website has learning tools and study aids, such as chapter out-
lines, crosswords, and quizzes.
GC41 2012-025490 978-1-84821-379-1
Instrumentation and metrology in oceanography.
Le Menn, Marc. (Instrumentation and measurement series)
ISTE/Wiley, ©2012 393 p. $165.00
Le Menn runs the metrology-chemistry laboratory of the French Naval
Hydrographic and Oceanographic Service in Brest. He describes the
oceanographic instrumentation used to determine the physical properties
of the ocean through in situ measurements. Satellite imagery has inau-
gurated an entirely new discipline of space oceanography, but he does
not consider that here. His emphasis is on the instruments and tech-
niques, not on information they might reveal about the ocean. He covers
what is measured and what is processed, measurement systems in
practice, measurements at sea, and evolutions and other measurement
concepts.
GC220 2010-939990 978-0-309-13753-9
Tsunami warning and preparedness; an assessment of the
U.S. tsunami program and the nation’s preparedness
efforts.
National Research Council.
National Academies Press, ©2011 284 p. $64.00 (pa)
Many coastal areas of the U.S. are at risk for tsunamis. This report by
The National Research Council’s Committee on the Review of the
Tsunami Warning and Forecast System, concludes that while progress
has been made since Congress passed laws in 2004 (in response to the
Indian Ocean tsunami) to increase efforts to detect and minimize the
impact of such events, preparedness challenges remain. Report recom-
mendations include national risk assessment. Included are maps of the
Deep-Ocean Assessment and Reporting of Tsunamis (DART) network, a
list of committee and staff members, tsunami sources, and a case study
of Hawaii’s response to the 2010 Chilean earthquake-generated tsunami.
ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCE, ECOLOGY
GE25 2012-015922 978-1-61233-115-7
Modern nature; essays in environmental communication.
Strongman, Luke.
Universal Publishers, ©2012 271 p. $27.95 (pa)
Running from essays on anthropocentrism to pieces on expert witnesses
in the courtroom, this collection of writings by Strongman (communi-
cation and humanities, Open Polytechnic of New Zealand) brings
–49–
together environmentalism and communication theory. At the close of
this collection there is a brief note saying that some of them originated
as journal articles or conference proceedings, which could explain the
variety of subjects treated and the notes on the back cover describing a
broad range of possible audiences. Some of the chapters, such as ones on
organizational communication or ambiguity tolerance, also seem to be a
little distant from the book’s main subject. Nevertheless, this book is well-
written and researched, while provided a strong philosophical treatment.
No index is provided.
GE25 2012-026571 978-1-4331-1790-9
Talking green; exploring contemporary issues in
environmental communications.
Title main entry. Ed. by Lee Ahern and Denise Sevick Bortree.
Peter Lang Publishing Inc, ©2012 233 p. $38.95 (pa)
This collection of 9 essays examines the contemporary use of rhetoric,
marketing, advertising, and psychology of persuasion in advocating for
environmentally friendly behaviors and attitudes. Reprinted as the first
chapter, they take Tom Crompton’s 2008 essay “Weathercocks &
Signposts: the environmental movement at a crossroads” as their
touching point, which makes a case for values over market-based com-
munication strategies. Many of the essays challenge or at least respond
to Crompton’s initial skepticism, but also look at unintended conse-
quences of marketing-campaigns. Other angles pursued by the contrib-
utors include right-to-know campaigns, the ethics of greenwashing, and
how to build an effective corporate environmental campaign. The con-
tributors are mostly professors of communications and advertising,
mostly from across the United States.
GE42 2012-021122 978-0-8133-4741-7
Doing environmental ethics, 2d ed.
Traer, Robert.
Westview Press, ©2013 383 p. $40.00 (pa)
For this interdisciplinary text, author Tracer (Dominican University of
California) draws on areas such as philosophy and religion, as well as
environmental science, economics, and international law. The first part
of the book looks at how scientific and economic reasoning affects
ethical reasoning, especially in arguments about our responsibility for
the environment. Chapter topics include moral philosophy, and ethics,
economics, and the common good. Part 2 delves into constructing and
testing ethical presumptions, with material on nature and the duty to
future generations, ecological virtues, and human and animal rights. Part
3 begins with material on sustainable consumption and government
policy on corporations, then offers chapters on the current state of air
and water, land and food, public land, urban ecology, and global
warming. Chapter discussion and analysis questions are included. This
second edition reflects current developments.
GE70 2012-028652 978-0-393-93072-6
Humans in the landscape; an introduction to
environmental studies.
Lee, Kai N. et al.
W.W. Norton, ©2013 432 p. $40.00 (pa)
This undergraduate textbook is intended as an introduction to the
primary disciplines that make up the field of environmental studies. The
authors discuss scientific approaches and problem solving, environmen-
talism, ethics, market and economic issues, natural selection, human
domination of ecosystems, climate change, human populations and
urbanization issues, strategies, technologies, and much more. Authors are
Lee (emeritus, environmental studies, Williams College), Freudenburg
(late, environmental studies, U. of California), and Howarth (environ-
mental studies, Dartmouth College).
GE70 2012-029818 978-1-4331-1966-8
Occupy education; learning and living sustainability.
Evans, Tina Lynn. (Global studies in education; v. 22)
Peter Lang Publishing Inc, ©2012 330 p. $39.95 (pa)
Evans (sustainability studies, Colorado Mountain College) presents a
critical approach to sustainability pedagogy that draws on critical peda-
gogues like Paulo Freire, but also Antonio Gramsci’s theories of
hegemony and political activity. Her focus is on higher education and is
praxis oriented. She develops theories about the meaning of sustain-
ability-oriented social change in the first chapter, which informs her
critical social theory of sustainability and her tacit critique of globalized
political economy. She argues for local food sustainability as “a strategy
for resisting enforced dependency and for promoting personal and com-
munity autonomy.” In later chapters she provides examples of how she
implemented her pedagogy with students and community-members
outside the classroom.
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
GE160 2012-000982 978-0-8165-0249-3
Land between waters; environmental histories of modern
Mexico.
Title main entry. Ed. by Christopher R. Boyer. (Latin American land-
scapes)
U. of Arizona Press, ©2012 307 p. $55.00
According to the acknowledgements, this study is the first transnational
collection of environmental histories about modern Mexico—a landmark
in a relatively new field. Topics include: the cycles of Mexican environ-
mental history, the influence of soil degradation and pesticides on agri-
culture through the 20th century, forests, water, ecological change, the oil
industry, contradictory conservation in modern Mexico, water infra-
structure in cities, and more. Editor is Boyer (history, Latin American
and Latino studies, U. of Illinois at Chicago).
GE160 978-1-77007-585-6
The story of life & the environment; an African
perspective.
van As, Jo et al.
Random House Struik, ©2012 456 p. $33.00 (pa)
With full color photographs on nearly every page, as well as some maps
and charts, this book presents the diversity of life on Earth, with a focus
on Africa. The book begins with a general overview of the evolution,
diversity, and structure of various systems of life on Earth before moving
into populations and communities, fresh water life, ocean life, land life,
human life, and finally thoughts about preservation. A glossary, index,
and bibliography are included. Though widely accessible, it is most
appropriate for students of ecology and related fields. Distributed by
International Publishers Marketing.
GE170 978-1-61205-133-8
On environmental governance; sustainability, efficiency,
and equity.
Young, Oran R. (On politics)
Paradigm Publishers, ©2013 196 p. $24.95 (pa)
Young (institutional and international governance and environmental
institutions, U. of California Santa Barbara) offers thoughtful analysis of
the issues of environmental governance and explains how various aspects
of governance work and the possibilities for beneficial outcomes and con-
sequences. He also delves into the options available for achieving gover-
nance and the challenges from both theoretical and empirical
perspectives.
GE195 2012-005321 978-1-59079-233-9
The sustainability generation; the politics of change &
why personal accountability is essential now!
Coleman, Mark C.
SelectBooks, ©2012 268 p. $17.95 (pa)
Coleman (senior researcher, AHC Group) makes a point in his book on
sustainability of going beyond the problems our culture of consumption
has caused to argue that curbing the urge for more and more things
requires a commitment to personal responsibility if we are to leave a sus-
tainable world to future generations. The bonus for what he refers to as
the sustainability generation is that personal responsibility will lead to a
more empowered, fuller, and happier life.
GE300 2012-012416 978-1-4129-8150-7
Environmental leadership; a reference handbook; 2v.
Title main entry. Ed. by Deborah Rigling Gallagher.
Sage Publications, ©2012 972 p. $295.00
The SAGE Reference Series on Leadership has been developed as a
resource for the relatively new and exceptionally multidisciplinary field
of leadership studies. This two-volume set addresses leadership in the
wide range of contexts—businesses, government agencies, educational
institutions—where the environment has come to the forefront of concern.
The two volumes focus, respectively, on Perspectives on Environmental
Leadership and Environmental Leadership Challenges. A total of 94 signed
chapters—each structured with sub-headings, a summary, and refer-
ences—address various aspects of political and government, private
sector, and nonprofit leadership; grassroots activism; journalism, liter-
ature, and the arts; education; taking action in the face of scientific
uncertainty; promoting international cooperation in the face of con-
flicting agendas; economic progress and environmental protection;
complex management challenges; and environmental injustices, among
other broad themes. Editor Gallagher (environmental policy, Duke U.)
has shepherded the work of a long list of expert contributors.
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
ANTHROPOLOGY
GF90 2012-001637 978-0-85745-671-7
Landscapes beyond land; routes, aesthetics, narratives.
Title main entry. Ed. by Arnar Árnason et al. (EASA series; v.19)
Berghahn Books, ©2012 215 p. $65.00
Social anthropologists examine landscapes that involve relations between
people, animals, and plants—between beings and ways of being—in a
variety of locales. Their topics include walking the past in the present,
two centuries of stories from the Saint Elias Mountains in northwestern
North America, the Arizona Hopi, narrating the landscapes of life in the
Isle of Man, folk liturgies and narratives of Ireland’s holy wells, and the
shape of the land. The 11 papers are from a series of three two-day sem-
inars. They are not indexed.
GF551 2012-009924 978-1-119-96293-9
The visualization of spatial social structure.
Dorling, Daniel. (Wiley series in computational and quantitative social
science)
John Wiley & Sons, ©2012 331 p. $45.00
Dorling (geography, U. of Sheffield, UK) introduces a new way of looking
at social statistics, particularly those about people in places, and how
those different ways of looking can lead to different ways of thinking
about how people’s lives have come to be socially organized. The great
deal of data available about Britain during the 1980s—when data first
began to be put in computer form routinely—serves as a database to
demonstrate the graphical techniques. Among his topics are human
cartography, envisioning information, artificial reality, transforming the
mosaic, cobweb of flows, the wood and the trees, and volume
visualization.
GN25 72-821360 978-0-8243-1941-0
Annual review of anthropology; v.41, 2012.
Title main entry. Ed. by Donald Brenneis and Peter T. Ellison.
Annual Reviews, ©2012 647 p. $83.00
Appropriate not only for professional anthropologists but for anyone with
an interest in the field, this 41st volume focuses on the two main themes
of materiality and climate change within recent anthropology articles.
This volume also introduces the new feature of pairing articles with
opposing perspectives on issues of interest, in this case the reconstruction
of the last common ancestor of apes and humans. Articles included are
presented in themed sections: archaeology, biological anthropology, lin-
guistics and communicative practices, international anthropology and
regional studies, sociocultural anthropology, materiality, and climate
change. A list of related articles and two cumulative indexes are included.
GN69 2012-025213 978-1-4398-1646-2
Forensic anthropology; an introduction.
Title main entry. Ed. by MariaTeresa A. Tersigni-Tarrant and Natalie R.
Shirley.
CRC Press, ©2013 462 p. $99.95
This text for undergraduate and master’s level students presents an intro-
duction to the most significant issues in contemporary forensic anthro-
pology. The authors cover both the basics of the subject and current
research. Topics include a brief history, human osteology, crime scene
methodology, age and stature estimations, basic gunshot trauma inter-
pretation and low-velocity trauma, animal scavenging, personal identifi-
cation methods, and forensic anthropology in mass disasters. Editors are
Tersigni-Tarrant (forensic anthropologist, Joint POW/MIA Accounting
Command’s Central Identification Laboratory) and Shirley (anatomy,
LMU DeBusk College of Osteopathic Medicine).
GN281 2012-026268 978-1-60497-821-6
Human evolution and male aggression; debunking the
myth of man and ape.
Dagg, Anne Innis and Lee E. Harding
Cambria Press, ©2012 256 p. $109.99
With much of the popular literature on human evolution maintaining a
view of the importance of male aggression in the evolution of humans
(through “survival of the fittest” modes of evolution), this text reviews the
evidence from archaeological investigations of our human ancestors and
the biology and behavior of our close primate relatives and finds that
various biases have distorted the scientific picture and have erroneously
pushed to the fore male aggressiveness as a primary trait and evolu-
tionary driver of early hominids. They offer counter-evidence in the form
of a range of primate behaviors witnessed in the wild, including
appeasement behaviors to forestall aggression, nuclear families as a form
of social organization, male affection towards infants, male friendship
–50–
with other males, and infanticide by females, all of which undermine the
“survival of the fittest” understanding of the evolution of human pri-
mates.
GN407 2011-046313 978-0-85745-335-8
Who owns the stock?; collective and multiple property
rights in animals.
Title main entry. Ed. by Anatoly M. Khazanov and Günther Schlee.
(Integration and conflict studies; v.5)
Berghahn Books, ©2012 332 p. $95.00
This collection explores different forms of property rights in livestock in
pastoralist societies. Editors Khazanov (emeritus, anthropology, U. of
Wisconsin-Madison, US) and Schlee (director, Max Planck Institute for
Social Anthropology, Germany) present 12 contributions that provide a
cross-cultural and comparative perspective on multiple forms of rights in
livestock and the changes they are undergoing under the influence of
modernization and globalization processes across three major regions:
The Far North and Siberia including the Chinese taiga, the Eurasian
steppes, and Africa (this also allows for comparisons across types of
stock, respectively reindeer, multispecies stock, and cattle). Papers offer
not only descriptive discussion of the types of stock ownership arrange-
ments that typify specific societies, but also analyze the role of stock
ownership in relation to various anthropological questions of economic,
social, and symbolic significance.
GN497 2012-012905 978-1-56549-548-7
Practicing military anthropology; beyond expectations and
traditional boundaries.
Title main entry. Ed. by Robert A. Rubinstein et al.
Kumarian Press, ©2013 153 p. $24.95 (pa)
This collection of seven essays surveys issues, habits, and other topics of
interest among several military anthropologists who either practice or
teach anthropology in the military. They were all participants in a 2008
symposium “Anthropology and the Military.” The collection rises as a
defense against accusations in the anthropological community of com-
plicity with imperialism and advocates for anthropologists in the mil-
itary. The essays do this by offering first-hand, ethnographic accounts of
working in the military. They explore day-to-day issues and the impor-
tance of cultural experts in the military. Kumarian Press is an imprint of
Stylus Publishing.
GN635 2012-021807 978-0-85728-529-4
Becoming; an anthropological approach to understandings
of the person in Java.
Retsikas, Konstantinos. (Anthem southeast Asian studies)
Anthem Press, ©2012 217 p. $99.00
Retsikas (anthropology and sociology, U. of London) seeks to do justice
to his ethnographic encounters with the people in the town of
Probolinggo during 18 months of fieldwork in 1998-2000 and subsequent
visits to East Java, Indonesia up to the summer of 2010. He explains that
this requires questioning the Western metaphysical construction of the
individual as an autonomous figure, self-identical, indivisible, and natu-
rally given entity. Drawing on the ideas of Gilles Deleuze, he discusses
the becoming of place, the perception of difference, the blood of affinity,
matters of scale, a pulsating universe, and the marital and the martial.
GN635 2012-009925 978-0-295-99204-4
The Buddha on Mecca’s verandah; encounters, mobilities,
and histories along the Malaysian-Thai border.
Johnson, Irving Chan. (Critical dialogues in Southeast Asian studies)
U. of Washington Press, ©2012 223 p. $30.00 (pa)
This ethnographic study examines the politics of social and collective
identification in a small ethnic Thai Buddhist village in Malaysia’s north-
eastern state of Kelantan, near the border with Thailand. Johnson
(Southeast Asian studies, National U. of Singapore), having conducted her
field work in the village of Ban Bor On in 2001-2002, reflects through
vignettes on how the villagers navigate questions of political allegiance,
Thai identity in a Muslim state, cultural and political marginality, and
religious identity.
GN635 2012-023520 978-1-59884-659-1
Ethnic groups of South Asia and the Pacific; an
encyclopedia.
Minahan, James B. (Ethnic groups of the world)
ABC-CLIO, ©2012 402 p. $89.00
Minahan has written several reference books on international statehood
and identity, including Greenwood’s Encyclopedia of the Stateless Nations;
One Europe, Many Nations; and Miniature Empires. His latest work pro-
vides students and general readers with an easy-to-use and up-to-date
guide to the 150-plus diverse ethnic groups located in the territories
–51–
ranging from the subcontinent of South Asia through Southeast Asia to
the islands of the Pacific Ocean region. The groups range from the pow-
erful and diverse groups dominating the region’s nation-states, to small,
virtually unknown groups rarely mentioned in books about the region.
Each entry includes the name and alternate names of the group; major
population areas; estimated populations; linguistic and religious affilia-
tions; history before the 19th century; cultural traits; history from the
19th century to the present; and a brief bibliography.
GN635 2012-001645 978-0-85745-524-6
Ogata-mura; sowing dissent and reclaiming identity in a
Japanese farming village.
Wood, Donald C. (Asian anthropologies; v.7)
Berghahn Books, ©2012 247 p. $90.00
Ogata-mura is a village founded in 1964 upon farmland reclaimed from
a lagoon in Japan’s Akita prefecture that was intended to serve as a
model for efficient and highly mechanized agriculture. In this work,
Wood (Akita U., Japan) explores the process of Ogata-mura’s development
from the planning stages to the present, focusing on the ways in which
village planning and settlement affected social and economic devel-
opment, the impact of the central government’s agricultural and regional
policies on the community, and the ways in which Ogata-mura can (or
cannot) serve as model for the future of Japanese agriculture.
GN635 2012-012507 978-0-85745-740-0
Wind over water; migration in an east Asian context.
Title main entry. Ed. by David W. Haines, Keiko Yamanaka and Shinji
Yamashita. (Asian anthropologies; v.8)
Berghahn Books, ©2012 270 p. $95.00
Anthropologists, geographers, and sociologists, many but not all from
Asia, take contemporary migration in East Asia as a valuable
opportunity to rethink a mass of migration research and theory that has
tended to be dominated by North American and European data, and by
North American and European scholars. Having sifted their perspectives
through panels, workshops, and conferences around the Pacific Rim
from 2006 to 2009, they present essays on migrants, states, and cities;
family, gender, lifestyles, and culture; and work, ethnicity, and
nationality.
GN663 2010-526314 978-90-6832-752-6
Oceania at the Tropenmuseum.
Duuren, David van.
Royal Tropical Inst./Tropenmus, ©2011 216 p. $45.00
Beautifully illustrated with both color and b&w photographs, this book
acts as a chronological overview of the history of the Oceania collection
at the Tropenmuseum with a focus on why the collection has become
internationally important and who has been involved in acquisition and
presentation. Compiled by a recent curator of the Oceania exhibits in the
Tropenmuseum, the book focuses on the main pieces in the collection,
which is comprised mainly of artifacts from the Netherlands’ colonial
past in New Guinea, and largely ignores the minor side exhibits.
Distributed in the US by Stylus Publishing.
GN666 978-1-921719-49-3
Australian plants as Aboriginal tools.
Clarke, Philip A.
Rosenberg Publishing, ©2012 374 p. $49.95
Australian consultant anthropologist Clarke focuses here on material
culture, a people’s beliefs and traditions concerning their tangible
belongings. He shows how hunter-gatherers lived by making objects-
fromplants, and investigates similarities and differences of plant uses
across Aboriginal Australia and their distinctiveness in relation to anal-
ogous practices elsewhere in the world. In sections on Aboriginal hunter-
gatherers and their tools, plant materials for making artifacts, and
changing plant uses, he discuss such aspects as the Australian Aboriginal
toolkit, camp life ephemera, working with green timber, from fiber to
object, plants to decorate, and the new material culture. Distributed in
the US by ISBS.
GN667 2012-001674 978-0-85745-508-6
Performing place, practising memories; aboriginal
Australians, hippies and the state.
Henry, Rosita. (Space and place series)
Berghahn Books, ©2012 275 p. $75.00
Focusing on the local Aboriginal community and a wave of countercul-
tural settlers in the rural town of Kuranda, this ethnographic study
examines the ways political identities are produced within the
framework of a bureaucratic state order. Henry (anthropology, James
Cook U., Australia) details a number of conflicts this Australian com-
munity faced due to public and private spaces and how these conflicts
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
inspired theatrical performances. Through these performances, the com-
munity resisted state projects but also contributed to the cultivation of
state effects. Volume 8 in the Space & Place series, this is intended for
students and professionals in the fields of social science and anthro-
pology.
GN751 91-67306 978-0-500-81051-4
Atlantis
Ashe, Geoffrey (Art and imagination)
Thames & Hudson, ©2012 128 p. $14.95 (pa)
This colorful guide introduces the ongoing interest in the mythical land
of Atlantis. The book is divided into a long first half that gives a broad
overview of the story and its legacy, while the second half hones in on
specific themes in two-page glosses. In over two dozen chapters , Ashe,
a medievalist and cultural historian, explores the occult meaning of
Atlantis, possible extraterrestrial founding and other attempts to explain
its origin, Atlantis in Plato’s imagination, the East Asian corollary of
Shambhala, and cultural influence.
GN799 90-43611 978-0-8133-7920-3
Ceramic production and distribution; an integrated
approach.
Title main entry. Ed. by George J. Bey III and Christopher A. Pool
(Westview special studies in archaeological research)
Westview Press, ©1992 341 p. $65.00
An introduction to the study of pottery economics, focusing on pro-
duction and distribution as interrelated processes. It is designed to
emphasize the fact that ceramic production and distribution are not only
interactive subsystems, but are dependent on each other for their exis-
tence.
FOLKLORE, MANNERS & CUSTOMS
GR166 2012-012523 978-0-8143-3481-2
Transgressive tales; queering the Grimms.
Title main entry. Ed. by Kay Turner and Pauline Greenhill. (Series in
fairy-tale studies)
Wayne State Univ. Press, ©2012 358 p. $29.95 (pa)
This compilation of essays is inspired by individual Grimm’s fairy tales
as seen through current academic identity-studies definitions of
queerness. As a result, the collection is about womens’ identity. Most of
the essays celebrate the trangressiveness and bravery of women who
enjoy reading about same-sex interaction, gender play, and sex change.
The presence of gay or transsexual people isn’t required for this
approach, so it allows a collection to be flexible and transgressive, but
tends to fetishize minorities who aren’t present. Scholarly writers from
lesbian backgrounds are present here. Some write about readers or char-
acters who love other women. Other contributors are very excited by the
gender of garments and spoons. The collection begins with a quote from
Michel Foucault, but most of the essays that follow are in more accessible
prose. There are pieces featuring quotes from Freud and Barthes in
which the purpose of fairy tales is to display partriarchial hatred of
women. There are also joyful accounts of beloved fairy tales as guides to
the young academic feminist. In between are a range of feminist
approaches to reading individual stories, in both personal and imper-
sonal voice. The gem of the collection is a humorous cautionary tale
about a feminist academic who sets out to study the gender attitudes of
male storytellers in survival cultures. They tell her a humorous cau-
tionary tale about a patriarchial male ethnographer who sets out to study
the gender attitudes of women; she queers the story’s gender but fails to
notice she’s the man.
GR203 2012-004220 978-0-8143-3466-9
The Russian folktale.
Propp, Vladimir Yakolevich. Ed. and trans. by Sibelan Forrester. (Series
in fairy-tale studies)
Wayne State Univ. Press, ©2012 387 p. $29.95 (pa)
In this never-before-translated book, Propp, a well-known expert on and
contributor to the study of folklore with a special emphasis on the
Russian tradition, examines the history and theories behind Russian folk-
tales in general, summarizing and expounding upon his earlier works in
the subject. By dividing the book by folktale type, Propp is able to delve
deeply into each one, as well as comparing them to classical myths and
tales from other cultures. Appropriate for academic audiences of folklore
and narrative studies, the book examines wonder tales, novellistic tales,
cumulative tales, and animal tales in great detail. It culminates with a
discussion of the life of a folktale.
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
GR265 2012-029671 978-0-7864-7218-5
Tracking the weretiger; supernatural man-eaters of India,
China and southeast Asia.
Newman, Patrick.
McFarland & Co., ©2012 208 p. $40.00 (pa)
With a focus on British India and Malaya, this book explores the folklore
and mythology surrounding man-eating tigers and leopards in British
colonial Asia. Newman considers the legends and the fear that made
them seem real from the perspectives of those terrorized, most often
marginalized groups whose poverty and lifestyles made them nearly
defenseless against man-eating cats. The first chapter details stories of
attacks in Indian jungles while the British government built railways
there. The second describes stories of the intertwining of human and
tiger spirits and chapter three addresses appeasement and propitiation.
The fourth chapter details stories of men, focusing on British colonials,
killing the man-eating cats. Chapter five examines the links between
shapeshifting legends such as werewolves with similar ideas about tigers,
while chapters six and seven go into further detail about specific people
being accused of such shifting. The final chapter details the story of one
leopard who was a particular terror, and his ultimate demise at the
hands of Jim Corbett. Some b&w pictures are included.
GR830 978-1-60163-229-6
American vampires; their true bloody history from New
York to California.
Curran, Bob.
New Page Books, ©2013 253 p. $15.99 (pa)
Curran, who lectures on folklore and historical subjects in Ireland,
explores vampire legends in 12 American states. The book walks the fine
line between entertaining and scholarly, with references to journal
articles or other publications embedded within the text. The chapter for
each state includes a black and white drawing depicting one of the vam-
piric beings discussed. New Page Books is a division of The Career Press,
Inc.
GT76 2012-933143 978-1-133-60359-7
Gender roles; a cross-cultural perspective. (online access
included)
Title main entry. (National Geographic learning reader)
Wadsworth Publishing Co., ©2013 121 p. $29.95 (pa)
In this collection of 11 articles edited especially for high school and
beginning community college students, National Geographic’s photogra-
phers and photojournalists offer insight on the social and cultural influ-
ences that shape gender roles and behavior in various countries around
the world. The magazine’s compelling color photos and illustrations will
generate interest in topics including male monasteries in Greece, women
of Saudi Arabia, seafaring men of Italy, female astronauts, African
women’s tribal rituals, and women’s wrestling in Bolivia. Pedagogical
features include chapter-opening thought questions, chapter-ending dis-
cussion questions, writing activities, and collaborative activities. The com-
panion website provides an e-book plus access to a media library of
images, videos, and other content.
GT518 978-0-7566-9835-5
Fashion; the definitive history of costume and style.
Title main entry. Ed. by Kathryn Hennessy et al.
DK Publishing, Inc., ©2012 480 p. $50.00
Exquisitely illustrated with original archive images, commissioned pho-
tographs, fashion plates and informative text, this comprehensive
treasury from the Smithsonian Institution covers the most important
fashions and trends through the ages. Over 1,500 costumes are illustrated
and cover everything from the beaded dresses and black wigs worn by
ancient Egyptians to the impeccable tailoring and provocative couture of
Alexander McQueen. This collection is stunning in its range and would
be a welcome addition in the library of costume designers, fashionistas,
stylists, and those interested in the evolution of fashion.
GT525 2012-002772 978-0-8166-7807-5
Exchanging clothes.
Title main entry. Ed. by Cristina Giorcelli and Paula Rabinowitz,
editors (Habits of being; 2)
U. of Minnesota Press, ©2012 265 p. $25.00 (pa)
Clothing helps shape one’s identity. In this sequel to Accessorizing the
Body: Habits of Being—part two of a four-volume series, Giorcelli
(American literature, U. of Rome Three) and Rabinowitz (English, U. of
Minnesota) compile selected essays from the ongoing editions Abito e
Identità. Fashion designers, art historians, psychoanalysts, film and lit-
erary critics, and others bring to the English-speaking audience the sig-
nificant work being published in fashionable Italy on this subject,
addressing the cultural and economic meanings of clothing different
–52–
parts of the body. Giorcelli treats the meanings of luxury lingerie exem-
plified in Kate Chopin’s A Pair of Silk Stockings. Illustrations support the
text.
GT1460 2012-015141 978-81-321-0735-4
Khadi; Gandhi’s mega symbol of subversion.
Gonsalves, Peter.
Sage Publications, ©2012 290 p. $50.00
Perhaps the most powerful symbol in Gandhi’s movement toward Indian
independence was the return to a traditional style of dress, thereby ques-
tioning the underlying acceptance of British superiority. However this
was complicated by India’s own adherence to the caste system and
untouchability. Gonsalves (social communication, Salesian Pontifical U.,
Italy) describes Gandhi’s careful steering of the independence movement
through both this problem and the underlying tension between Hindus
and Muslims. The approach is broader than a focus on clothing, of
course, and considers key aspects of Gandhi’s philosophy and their man-
ifestation in the Satyagraha movement. The volume contains five appen-
dixes outlining subjects like the economic damage to India caused by
British imperialism and a list of Gandhi’s arrests and imprisonments.
GT1710 978-0-500-51631-7
The perfect gentleman; the pursuit of timeless elegance
and style in London.
Sherwood, James.
Thames & Hudson, ©2012 224 p. $65.00
A love letter to a particular vision of a gentleman’s style, this book
informs the reader immediately of its universe, starting with full-page
portraits: Lord Byron in profile, the Duke of Windsor in a tux, Prince
Francis of Teck of the Royal Dragoons in a stiff wing collar with gold
studs, Fred Astaire with thirty-four pairs of bespoke dancing shoes. Given
equal space are the shoe lasts of Esquires Astaire and Gable and Sir
Charles Chaplin, silver-headed canes, stacks of pinstriped Egyptian cotton
shirts, the finest wool suiting cloth, a hand-engraved big-game hunting
rifle, and a suite of hand-woven small-paisley silk ties. The gentlemen are
in black-and-white, the accoutrements are in color. His Majesty Charles
II, as founding genius, is allowed the luxury of chromography. The book
is divided into six chapters, each on a different era in London (there is
nowhere else worth mention). This allows the reader to also enjoy
doeskin trousers. The qualifications of author James Sherwood include
books on bespoke tailoring and Royal Ascot, archivist at Henry Poole &
Co., consultant for the Savoy Hotel, editor of the Louis Vuitton guide to
London, editor-at-large for The Rake, and royal style and fashion critic for
the BBC. The text casually marks the perfection of its aim in the photo
captions; Pablo Picasso is explained as ordering “lurid silk georgette and
spotted cotton”: so much for him. In full-page spreads of St. James’ shops
by photographers Andy Barnham and Guy Hills, the pornography of
empire has never been more alluring. The bodies of beautiful men are
nowhere present and everywhere evoked. And we, too, could be beautiful
and rise if we were only perfectly tailored. The forward, fittingly, is by
actor Terrence Stamp, whose Neanderthal right middle toe was first
salved and concealed in the year he starred in Modesty Blaise by
handmade shoes from Cleverly’s of Cork Street, and who never looked
back. Oversize: 11.5x14”.
GT2073 2011-940331 978-0-7643-3930-1
Irresistible; the art of lingerie 1920s - 1980s.
Smith, Desire.
Schiffer Publishing Ltd., ©2011 170 p. $39.99
Drawing from her own and others’ collections of vintage clothing, Smith
(history of costume, Antoinette Westphal College of Media Arts & Design,
Drexel U., Philadelphia) presents a tour of lingerie and other undergar-
ments from the 1920s to 1980s, with designer to Frederick’s of Hollywood
labels. The book includes entertaining quotes (e.g., “A lady is one who
never shows her underwear unintentionally.”), a glossary, bibliography,
suggested reading and resources.
GT2853 978-1-897009-77-2
French taste in Atlantic Canada 1604-1758; a gastronomic
history.
Jonah, Anne Marie Lane and Chantal Véchambre.
Cape Breton University Press, ©2012 251 p. $29.95
Published in conjunction with the 300th anniversary of Canada’s Fortress
Louisbourg National Historic Site in 2013, this book explores food and
food preparation, along with agriculture and the art of gardens, in the
daily life in Louisbourg, on what is now known as Cape Breton Island.
Recipes, menus, and background are provided in side-by-side English
and French on every page. Color photos on every page depict food and
–53–
historical reenactments at the site. The book also includes a glossary.
Jonah is staff historian and Véchambre conducts workshops in historical
cuisine at the Fortress Louisbourg National Historic Site.
GT3242 2003-028038 978-1-84383-731-2
Dying and death in later Anglo-Saxon England. (reprint
2004)
Thompson, Victoria. (Anglo-Saxon studies; 4)
The Boydell Press, ©2012 236 p. $34.95 (pa)
Thompson (Centre for Nordic Studies, U. of the Highlands and Islands,
Scotland) addresses the attitudes of the Anglo-Saxon era regarding dying
and the dead. She explores their thinking and beliefs on how the dead
were buried, how they were remembered, how they thought of their own
mortality and the soul, and how they envisioned the dead once buried.
It is an interesting examination of a topic that affects every element of
culture, society, and religion of the period. The book should interest a
variety of readers, including scholars and students, who want to know
more about the Anglo-Saxon culture, medieval history, and social
structure. Boydell Press is an imprint of Boydell & Brewer.
GT5856 978-1-85936-157-3
Our hunting fathers; field sports in England since 1850.
Title main entry. Ed. by R.W. Hoyle.
Carnegie Publishing, ©2013 320 p. $29.95
This illustrated collection of essays by historians examines the history of
hunting, shooting, and fishing in England. Royalty and field sports, fox-
hunting and yeomanry, and the development of salmon angling in the
19th century are some areas explored. Other subjects include sport and
the survival of landed society in late Victorian Suffolk, and otter hunting
1850-1939. The book contains b&w historical photos and illustrations. It
is distributed in the US by International Publishers Marketing.
RECREATION, LEISURE, SPORT, DANCE
GV171 2012-943073 978-0-87822-674-0
Family ties; a family-based intervention to complement
Prepare, ART, and TIES youth groups. (CD-ROM included)
Calame, Robert and Kim Parker.
Research Press, ©2013 168 p. $28.95 (pa)
Calame, a social worker who coordinated an Aggression Replacement
Training program in Canada, and Parker, a consultant and trainer in
Canada who has also worked with these groups, outline an 11-session
family skills program for family members of delinquent youth enrolled
in Prepare, Aggression Replacement Training (ART), and Training in
Essential Skills (TIES) instruction to learn social skills, anger control tech-
niques, moral reasoning, empathy, problem-solving/conflict resolution,
and other competencies. The group program allows family members and
their children the opportunity to learn and work together to resolve con-
flicts and other issues and build trust. They outline the process for social
workers, teachers, probation officers, youth care workers, family preser-
vation workers, and other professionals providing services for preventing
and reducing youth aggression, and explain how to implement the
program, and the goals, materials, procedures, and facilitator tasks of
each session, which include handouts and a session teaching parents
how to be coaches. Other forms like checklists, exercises, and skill cards
are provided in the appendices. No index is provided.
GV199 2012-008490 978-0-393-07988-3
Buried in the sky; the extraordinary story of the Sherpa
climbers on K2’s deadliest day.
Zuckerman, Peter and Amanda Padoan.
W.W. Norton, ©2012 285 p. $26.95
A collaboration between journalist Peter Zuckerman and mountaineer
Amanda Padoan, this book tells the story of two Sherpa mountaineers,
Chhiring Dorje Sherpa and Pasang Lama, who survived a catastrophic
expedition up K2 in which eleven climbers lost their lives. The book is
based on interviews with the two climbers. It has two goals. One is to
recreate the expedition step by step in a journalistic story of the expe-
dition, the accident, and the two men’s survival. The other is to give the
readers biographies of the lives of two Sherpa mountaineers, and
through them, a window into the lives and motives of “the other moun-
taineers,” who join Western climbers to carry their gear and support
their expeditions up the most dangerous peaks in the world. Other expe-
ditions, such as the one that first put Tenzig Norgay and Edmund Hillary
on the top of Mount Everest, are discussed. The book has a central
section of photographs. It is well-written in a journalistic style for general
readers, and offers much insight into the practical and social realities of
mountain-climbing in the Himalayas.
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
GV200 978-0-86571-721-3
Unlearn, rewild.
Olson, Miles.
New Society Publishers Ltd., ©2012 225 p. $15.95 (pa)
Miles Olson offers a philosophical inquiry into and criticism of industrial
civilization and attempts to reform it, while pointing to the way to a truly
sustainable future. He describes this strategy as “re-wilding,” which
focuses on preserving wild food, hunting and processing of game, birth-
control, fire and light, eating bugs, getting to know nuts and other
uncommonly foragable foods. The text is organized into two parts, the
first dealing with ideas and the latter with practical strategies. Among
the ideas he raises in the first part are a critique of the sustainability of
veganism in a post-civilizational context, technology and ethics, how to
walk away from civilization, racism and being white in the post-civi-
lizational context, and just what re-wilding is. Distributed by Consortium
Books Sales and Distribution.
GV346 2012-019057 978-1-61163-107-4
Risk management in sport; issues and strategies, 3d ed.
Title main entry. Ed. by Herb Appenzeller.
Carolina Academic Press, ©2012 529 p. $55.00 (pa)
Thirty-four academics and practitioners in sport law and risk man-
agement contribute 39 chapters designed to assist sport administrators
overseeing sports programs at all level—from youth sport to school and
college programs, professional teams and leagues—in developing risk
management plans and procedures to make the sport industry safer. Also
suitable for use in sport management classes, the text is a revised edition
of the 2003 Managing Sport and Risk Management Strategies. It features
updated material throughout and 11 new chapters reflecting changes in
the field over the past decade. Opening chapters provide an introduction
to risk management in sport, the legal system, and a glossary of legal
words and phrases. Subsequent sections address tort liability issues; risk
management issues; medical issues; event and facility management; risk
management concerns; risk management forms, checklists and surveys;
and trends in risk management.
GV361 978-1-78052-296-8
Qualitative research on sport and physical culture.
Title main entry. Ed. by Kevin Young and Michael Atkinson. (Research
in the sociology of sport; v.6)
Emerald Group Publishing, ©2012 252 p. $114.95
Scholars of kinesiology, physical education, and education in general
explain some approaches and techniques for conducting qualitative
research in sports and related activities. Their topics include doing realist
ethnography, narrative analysis in sport and physical culture, visual
methods and body culture exhibition, critical feminist and queer
methodologies, and situating personal sporting narratives in socio-cul-
tural context. There is no index. Distributed in North America by Turpin
Distribution.
GV362 2012-011058 978-1-4504-1199-8
Survive and thrive as a physical educator; strategies for
the first year and beyond.
James, Alisa R.
Human Kinetics Pub., ©2013 213 p. $29.00 (pa)
With this guide, James (physical education teacher education, College of
Brockport, State U. of New York) helps new physical education teachers
survive their first year. She shows them how to transfer what they
learned in college to the teaching setting and adds information and
resources they did not learn in their undergraduate preparation. She
describes strategies related to fitting in and being active in the school
community, the beginning of the year, preparing unit and lesson plans,
student assessment and evaluation, classroom and behavior man-
agement, motivating students, diversity, the school as a workplace, rela-
tionships with parents, and professional development. Templates such as
assessments and letters appear in each chapter, and frequently asked
questions are answered in an appendix.
GV705 2012-002352 978-0-415-57895-0
Mental toughness; the mindset behind sporting
achievement, 2d ed.
Sheard, Michael.
Routledge, ©2013 264 p. $130.00
This work will be of interest to those in sport psychology, sport studies,
and coaching, as well as those in occupational psychology, social psy-
chology, and health psychology. Sheard, a consultant in sport and
exercise psychology, reveals latest research on the concept of mental
toughness both as a personality style and as a mindset, and explains how
it is defined and measured and how it can be developed in athletes. The
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
author recommends that mental toughness should be included in the
goals of positive psychological health. Updated since 2009, this second
edition contains new case stories.
GV706 2012-003763 978-1-84467-859-4
Barbaric sport; a global plague.
Perelman, Marc.
Verso, ©2012 134 p. $14.95 (pa)
By examining the development of modern international sporting compe-
titions, like the Olympics, French journalist Marc Perelman argues we
can see in capitalist globalization, with its emphasis on competition and
the ruthless pursuit of success, an emerging kind of barbarism. Written
as an extended essay, Perelman considers the reactionary foundations of
the Olympic Games in early 20th-century national chauvinism, stadiums
and the culture of spectatorship, sporting as a mode of production and
academic discipline, sexuality and sport, standardized aesthetics, and
doping and addiction. Two appendixes present 21 theses on sport and a
demand to stop building stadiums in Europe immediately.
GV706 2012-005936 978-1-59451-960-4
Immortality in sports; a sociology of media, fame, and
infamy.
Leonard, Wib.
Paradigm Publishers, ©2012 147 p. $92.00
The importance of sports in today’s society cannot be overestimated.
Leonard (sociology, Illinois State U.) explores the interconnections
between sociology and sports—the sociology of sport—one of the newest
subfields in the social sciences. Topics include sport in the social and
behavioral sciences, theoretical background, sport as a social world, fos-
tering the postself (the self image and projected image of athletes who
have ended their sports careers), and a theoretical view of the future of
immortality in sports.
GV711 2012-014408 978-0-7360-7981-5
Applying educational psychology in coaching athletes.
Huber, Jeffrey J.
Human Kinetics Pub., ©2013 423 p. $64.00
Huber, a coach and professor of counseling and educational psychology
and kinesiology at Indiana U. at Bloomington, explains how to apply the
principles and theories of educational psychology to coaching athletes.
Focusing on how athletes learn and how coaches teach, he notes simi-
larities between teaching in the classroom setting and coaching, and
details the principles of psychology that affect factors such as emotions,
motivation, expectations, self-worth, and relationships, and applications
to the motor learning and coaching process. He discusses the roles of
coaches; theories of motivation, behaviorism, cognitivism, and
humanism, and guidelines for their application; and applications for
determining coaching effectiveness, success, and satisfaction, including
using theories to apply preventive and corrective strategies for managing
practice and athlete behaviors and having a coaching philosophy. Each
chapter begins with a story of an athlete or coach that illustrates the sig-
nificance of the theory.
GV713 978-1-4129-2841-0
Key concepts in sport management.
Byers, Terri et al. (Sage key concepts)
Sage Publications, ©2012 203 p. $121.00
Byers (sport management, Coventry Business School, UK) et al. provide a
reference guide to key concepts in sport management, to help under-
graduate and graduate students, academics, and practitioners in the field
identify appropriate research topics and understand how past research is
important in the development of current research. Concepts are drawn
from organization theory and disciplines like media/broadcasting, sport
law, and funding. Topics discussed include change, commercialization,
conflict, corporate social responsibility, critical theory and critical man-
agement studies, decision making, demand, employability, ethics, global-
ization, leadership, mega events, organizational culture, performance
management, power, sponsorship, sport development, marketing, partic-
ipation, sport tourism, strategy, and technology. For each, they present a
definition, the research, criticisms of the work, and where future
research might focus (without a full literature review).
GV863 2012-024869 978-0-7864-6895-9
Baseball state by state; major and Negro league players,
ballparks, museums and historical sites.
Jensen, Chris.
McFarland & Co., ©2012 376 p. $55.00 (pa)
Based on extensive research, this book examines professional baseball
players by the state of birth and puts together a possible all-time greatest
team, the best nicknames, and all-time leaders in categories such as
–54–
stolen bases. It goes beyond player statistics to show a list of historic
baseball places within the state and offers a more detailed two to ten
page historical account. The first appendix shows the same type of data
for Canada, while the second delivers a list of the “100 greatest players
of all time.” Unfortunately players who were not born in the US, such as
Roberto Clemente, are left out of the book. Jensen, who is a member of
the Society for American Baseball Research (SABR), also writes baseball
articles for a variety of publications.
GV865 2012-031770 978-0-7864-6138-7
Arlie Latham; a baseball biography of the freshest man
on earth.
Sutter, L.M.
McFarland & Co., ©2012 272 p. $29.95 (pa)
Author Sutter (Society for American Baseball Research) traces the life of
the multi-talented Arlie Latham, one of the earliest baseball stars. After
his career with the St. Louis Browns at the end of the 19th century,
Latham became a vaudeville performer and later worked as the first
major league coach. He also worked for the Yankees in later life. This
biography details his life and career milestones and describes his rela-
tionships with many famous people of the era. The book includes b&w
historical photos and appendices of statistics.
GV865 2012-034490 978-0-7864-6999-4
Big Klu; the baseball life of Ted Kluszewski.
Cook, William A.
McFarland & Co., ©2012 186 p. $29.95 (pa)
Ted Kluszewski, who started his sports career as a college football player,
held the homerun record from 1953 to 1956 when he played for the
Cincinnati Reds. This bio traces his early years through the 1956 injury
that ended his baseball career and also details his life as a restaurant
owner, a sportscaster, and as a hitting coach for the Reds in the 1970s.
The book contains statistics from Kluszewski’s football and baseball
careers, plus b&w historical photos. Cook has written other books on
baseball history.
GV865 978-0-7864-6066-3
Deacon Bill McKechnie; a baseball biography.
Stinson, Mitchell Conrad.
McFarland & Co., ©2012 238 p. $29.95 (pa)
Four of the baseball teams managed by Bill McKechnie played in the
World Series, in three different cities. Drawing on interviews with
McKechnie’s daughter, author Stinson, a sports reporter, details
McKechnie’s early years through his career as a baseball player and
manager, his retirement in Florida, and his death at the hands of home
robbers. A final chapter describes tributes and memorials to McKechnie.
The book is illustrated with b&w historical and personal photos.
GV865 2012-032479 978-0-7864-6885-0
Hazen “Kiki” Cuyler; a baseball biography.
Waldo, Ronald T.
McFarland & Co., ©2012 278 p. $29.95 (pa)
Hazen ‘Kiki’ Cuyler rose from auto plant worker to the Baseball Hall of
Fame for his role as an outfielder for the Pittsburgh Pirates and the
Chicago Cubs. In this biography, Waldo (Society for American Baseball
Research) charts Cuyler’s life from his early years through his career and
the end of his life. The book is illustrated with b&w historical photos.
GV865 2012-022245 978-0-7864-3927-0
Rube Foster in his time; on the field and in the papers
with black baseball’s greatest visionary.
Lester, Larry.
McFarland & Co., ©2012 256 p. $40.00 (pa)
Early African-American baseball pitcher Andrew ‘Rube’ Foster was the
founder and president of the Negro National League, the first all-black,
black-owned, and black-operated league that played for a full season. He
was also founder and operator of the Chicago American Giants, another
black baseball team. In this biography, author Lester (chairman, the
Society for American Baseball Research’s Negro Leagues Research
Committee) integrates primary source newspaper editorials and letters,
written both by and about Foster, into a narrative of Foster’s life; often
the primary source material is given in its entirety. Foster is presented as
a man of his era who confronted racism but also had flaws of his own.
The book is illustrated with b&w historical photos and includes appen-
dices of Foster’s statistics and records, lists of teammates, a list of Foster
baseball collectibles, and court and medical documents.
–55–
GV867 2012-025344 978-0-7864-6071-7
Reasoning with sabermetrics; applying statistical science
to baseball’s tough questions.
Costa, Gabriel B. et al.
McFarland & Co., ©2012 212 p. $29.95 (pa)
Dedicated baseball fans (and fanatics) should enjoy this book by three
mathematicians who statistically analyze the game to answer questions
such as the best teams throughout baseball’s history, the greatest players
in various positions, and other elements that stir up debate among long-
time fans. Costa (mathematical sciences, U.S. Military Academy at West
Point), Huber (mathematics, Muhlenberg College), and Saccoman (math-
ematics and computer science, Seton Hall U.) contribute a by the
numbers but very readable account of how to employ sabermetrics to
evaluate teams and players.
GV875 2012-034634 978-0-7864-7028-0
Occasional glory; the history of the Philadelphia Phillies,
2d ed.
Jordan, David M.
McFarland & Co., ©2012 246 p. $35.00 (pa)
This history charts the finest hours and as well as the disappointments
of Philadelphia’s baseball team, from 1883 to 2012, describing the team’s
well-known and less-known players and exploring the city’s relationship
with the Phillies. The book is illustrated with a wealth of b&w photos.
Author Jordan has written previous books on baseball.
GV880 2012-037644 978-0-7864-6867-6
Making it in the minors; a team owner’s lessons in the
business of baseball.
Solomon, Arthur P. adn Allyn I. Freeman.
McFarland & Co., ©2012 197 p. $29.95 (pa)
Solomon, owner of two minor league baseball teams, describes the joys
and challenges of baseball team ownership in this behind-the-scenes look
at the business aspects of baseball, written for sports fans, those working
in sports, and sports management students. The author discusses aspects
such as building the brand, creating partnerships, customizing adver-
tising, hiring and training professional staff, and the economics of pro-
fessional baseball. Real-world examples from minor league baseball can
be applied to all sports and even to retail businesses. The book includes
b&w historical photos. Freeman has written other books about sports.
GV943
Ajax, the Dutch, the war; soccer in Europe during the
Second World War.
Kuper, Simon.
Nation Books, ©2012 274 p. $15.99 (pa)
Though its primary focus is on the famous soccer club Ajax during
WWII, this work questions the perception that the Netherlands were
wholly benevolent to its Jewish population during the German occu-
pation of WWII. Kuper, previous author of a number of books on soccer,
makes use here of interviews with surviving soccer players and fans, as
well as the surprisingly large collection of material found in the
Rotterdam archives. It is intended, however, for the non-scholarly reader
and provides a number of individual stories and quotes. Although there
are no actual footnotes, a list of sources appears at the end.
GV956 2011-032902 978-1-61233-048-8
On coaching football; a resource and guide for coaches.
Dean, Thomas A. and Paul J. Emrick.
Universal Publishers, ©2012 245 p. $25.95 (pa)
Dean, a former football player and head coach and current head coach
consultant, and Emrick, a former player for Dean, show high school
football coaches the concepts of a complete football program. They cover
organization, including administration, the employment agreement, com-
petition and scheduling, the elements of a program, a coaching staff
model, and hiring assistant coaches; the depth chart, including varsity
and pre-varsity squads and grading player execution and squad per-
formance; the game plan structure (offense and defense); curriculum; the
game plan model; practice design; game management, debriefing, and
quality control; and preseason activities. There is no index.
GV959 2012-020029 978-0-7864-4867-8
College football awards; all national and conference
winners through 2010.
Blevins, David.
McFarland & Co., ©2012 513 p. $65.00 (pa)
The 575 awards gathered in this reference are organized into sections on
NCAA Division I, Division II, Division III, NAIA, NCCAA, and com-
munity college sport conferences. The opening section alphabetically lists
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
major football awards that are open to players in all conferences, most
of which are named for a prominent player or coach. A concise history
and description are provided for each award followed by a list of the
annual winners and their school.
GV1147 978-0-900785-43-6
The noble art of the sword; fashion and fencing in
Renaissance Europe, 1520-1630.
Capwell, Tobias. (The Wallace Collection)
Paul Holberton Publishing, ©2012 256 p. $65.00 (pa)
As a treatise on the development of European fencing and fashion in
Renaissance Europe from 1520-1630, this book would appear to have a
limited audience. Its short textual sections are well-written and will be
very useful to specialists in its subject. But the remarkable thing about
this book is the way it convinces the reader of its thesis by sheer force
of beauty: a wavelike basket hilt, the austere triumph of a blacksmith’s
art, is printed in a symphony of grays that would do justice to a Japanese
print. A page later, a damascene of breathtaking floral elaboration is
applied to a form as comical as a Mack Sennett policeman; it’s the hilt
of an Italian rapier. Here is a beautifully-reproduced portrait of an oth-
erworldly child, golden curls floating above a scarlet doublet. Here are
fencing-manual prints in which men dance with rapiers, artists show off
their mastery of the effects of diagonal motion, and a diagram appears
which could be a navigational map of the world, but for the half-skeleton
occupying the center, and the shadow of a man completing his body. It’s
an analysis of fencing maneuvers. Da Vinci’s unforgettable image of man
as microcosm turns out to be a standard-issue fencing-manual position.
The embroidered parade costume of the Elector of Saxony, precisely the
color of a peacock’s tail, is enough to drive one to tears. In its lavish and
careful choice of beautifully-reproduced photographs of original
Renaissance paintings, prints, costumes, and blades, this book evokes a
world in which men’s bodies and accessories were the centers of fasci-
nation, beauty, and danger that our own society evokes on the bodies of
women with Paris couture. A vital look into a funhouse mirror: the
world that somehow became our own. Distributed by Casemate Athena.
GV1312 2012-025613 978-0-7864-6797-6
Eurogames; the design, culture and play of modern
European board games.
Woods, Stewart.
McFarland & Co., ©2012 262 p. $40.00 (pa)
Woods (communication studies, University of Western Australia) catego-
rizes types of eurogames (German-style board games or tabletop card
games) and describes the culture surrounding them, emphasizing social
as well as strategic aspects of play. After a review of the history of Anglo-
American hobby board games from 1960 to 1995, chapters are devoted
to gaming in Germany, the eurogame genre, and hobby games such as
war games, role-playing games, collectible card games, and eurogames.
The book includes b&w photos.
GV1617 2012-028775 978-0-7864-6594-1
The revival of banned dances; a worldwide study.
Lyons, Reneé Critcher.
McFarland & Co., ©2012 219 p. $45.00 (pa)
Outlining the oppression of dance culture, Lyons examines various
dances banned around the world and celebrates the advocates that
revived them. Broken into three parts (ritual, revival, revelry) and
focusing on sixteen case studies, each chapter details the history, rituals,
technical steps, fashions and meanings of these dances while empha-
sizing the cultural role they played in creating flourishing sociological
and political climates. This is a fascinating read for dancers and anyone
interested in the important role dance plays in our collective pursuit of
happiness. Contains 58 illustrations.
GV1746 2012-027893 978-0-7864-6700-6
High school prom; marketing, morals and the American
teen.
Anderson, Ann.
McFarland & Co., ©2012 218 p. $35.00 (pa)
Anderson, a freelance writer, teacher, actor, and director, traces the
history and development, marketing, and popular culture presence of
high school proms and their relationship to money, sex, fashion, youth,
dance, music, transportation, communication, and war. Within the
context of the American teenager and high school, she considers the
social and economic trends related to the prom throughout its history; its
meaning; the prom industry and how the event has grown from an inex-
pensive party into a professional, pricy event; and how it is represented
in film, television, and literature. B&w advertisements and photos are
included throughout.
Reference & Research Book News December 2012 –56–
SOCIAL SCIENCES (GENERAL), STATISTICS
H41 2012-021425 978-0-7656-8292-5
Global social issues; an encyclopedia; 3v.
Title main entry. Ed. by Christopher G. Bates and James Ciment.
M.E. Sharpe, Inc., ©2013 1100 p. $349.00
For high school students and above and for general readers, this three-
volume reference presents discussion of problems that affect societies
around the world along with efforts being made to address the problems.
Editors Bates (California State Polytechnic Institute at Pomona) and James
Ciment (author/editor) have aimed for a geographical balance, with cov-
erage of both the developed and developing worlds. The 136 entries are
alphabetically arranged, signed essays balancing historical and contem-
porary aspects and including references (print and internet resources)
and cross references. They range in length from 2,000 to 4,000 words—
depending on the topic. A topic finder in the front matter groups entries
according to the following themes: crime and violence; cultural preser-
vation and ethnic heritage; economic, financial, and trade issues; energy
and energy-related issues; environmental and habitat issues; family,
domestic and gender issues; government, politics, and international rela-
tions; health and medicine issues; labor and employment; law and law
enforcement; rights; science and technology; and war and military.
H61 978-1-78190-034-5
Theorizing modern society as a dynamic process.
Title main entry. Ed. by Harry F. Dahms and Lawrence Hazelrigg.
(Current perspectives in social theory; v.30)
Emerald Group Publishing, ©2012 284 p. $124.95
Mostly US sociologists demonstrate some of the problems and potentials
of theorizing society as an interplay of processes rather than as the
outcome of those processes. The overall themes are between analytics and
dialectics, linking Americans and European perspectives, and political
dynamics in modern societies. The topics include non-ergodic processes
and turning points in dynamic models of social change with illustrations
from labor movement history, developments of analytical logic and
dialectical logic with regard to the study of process dynamics, the
explanatory strategy of Günter Dux’s historico-genetic theory, civil society
and the state in the neoliberal era, and the social construction of the
European society. The volume is no indexed. Distributed in North
America by Turpin Distribution.
H62 2011-024276 978-1-4411-7144-3
Challenging the qualitative-quantitative divide;
explorations in case-focused causal analysis.
Cooper, Barry et al.
Continuum Publishing Group, ©2012 272 p. $140.00
A team of social scientists identify problems with quantitative and qual-
itative research as strict categories, and explore case-focused approaches
to causal analysis. They cover what is wrong with quantitative research,
the problem of inference from outcomes to opportunities, grounded the-
orizing and the qualitative survey, ethnic inequalities in educational
achievement as an example of qualitative causal analysis and the fallacies
of composition and division, analytic induction versus qualitative com-
parative analysis, set theory versus correlation methods as exemplified
by ability and educational achievement, and comparing fuzzy qualitative
comparative analysis with fuzzy cluster analysis.
H62 2012-010971 978-1-59451-737-2
Conceptual foundations of social research methods, 2d ed.
Baronov, David.
Paradigm Publishers, ©2012 215 p. $110.00
Baronov (sociology, St. John Fisher College, Rochester, New York)
addresses unexplored assumptions and hidden ideologies that underlie
college education. While he focuses on the social sciences generally and
sociology in particular, he suggests that students in the physical sciences
and the humanities could also learn much about unspoken premises in
their own discipline. He covers embryonic positivism, logical positivism,
postpositivism, structuralism, hermeneutics, pragmatism, anti-founda-
tionalism, and what next. The pragmatics chapter is new, but generally
he has merely supplemented the material in the 2004 first edition and
updated the bibliographies.
H62 978-1-78052-878-6
Ethics in social research.
Title main entry. Ed. by Kevin Love. (Studies in qualitative method-
ology; v.12)
Emerald Group Publishing, ©2012 230 p. $124.95
Contributors mostly from Nottingham Trent University in Britain, but
also from elsewhere in Europe and from Australia, elaborate key
arguments and issues regarding ethics in and the ethics of social
research; engage with empirical encounters of social research; and extend
and intensify ethical theory with potential consequences for the mode,
nature, and role of social research. Among the topics are the rise of
ethical regulation in the social sciences, a framework for social research
involving ethics and social conflict, researching marginalized groups, an
ethics of entanglement, and the agency of ethical objects. The essays are
not indexed. Distributed in North America by Turpin Distribution.
H62 2012-037044 978-1-4522-0292-1
Methods of randomization in experimental design.
Alferes, Valentim R. (Quantitative applications in the social sciences;
171)
Sage Publications, ©2012 183 p. $18.00 (pa)
Alferes (psychology, U. of Coimbra, Portugal) presents a guide to ran-
domization in experimental design, “the devices required for an
unbiased and efficient estimation of treatment causal effects.” The text is
written for undergraduates, graduates and professionals in the social,
educational, behavioral and health science. It attends more to “internal
validity and some specific aspects of statistical conclusion validity and
only tangentially to data analysis or statistical testing.” The author intro-
duces the nature and structure of randomized experiments, examines the
limits imposed on random assignment, and reviews the structural prop-
erties of within-subject designs. A final section also offers considerations
for planning, monitoring, analyzing and reporting a randomized exper-
iment. There are appendices on random-number tables, permutations
and Latin squares.
H62 2011-929897 978-0-7386-0955-3
Praxis II social studies content knowledge (0081), 2d ed.
(CD-ROM included)
Bowlan, Jeanne M.
Research & Education Assn, ©2012 528 p. $34.95 (pa)
Bowlan, who has taught social studies at the high school and college
levels, supplies education students preparing to become secondary social
studies teachers with a study guide for the Praxis II Social Studies
Content Knowledge 0081 test, which measures skills and knowledge in
US history, world history, government/civics/political science, geography,
economics, and the behavioral sciences of anthropology, sociology, and
psychology. She provides information on the certification test and its
format, gives study tips, and reviews each of the content areas. The CD-
ROM contains two full-length practice exams (also in the book with
answers and explanations).
H62 2012-017341 978-1-4522-4201-9
Reading social research; studies in inequalities and
deviance.
Title main entry. Ed. by Jeffrey C. Dixon and Royce A. Singleton, Jr.
Sage Publications, ©2013 245 p. $35.00 (pa)
Dixon and Singleton (sociology, College of the Holy Cross) provide under-
graduate students in introductory research methods courses with 20
recent research studies (abridged from articles and books) that represent
different approaches and methods of contemporary social research. The
studies illustrate the theory-research relationship, ethics and politics,
measurement, sampling, experiments, surveys, qualitative field research
and interviews, existing data analysis, multiple methods, and quantitative
and qualitative data analysis. They focus on empirical research
(excluding literature reviews, strictly theoretical papers, commentaries,
and pieces on how to conduct research) and the sociological areas of
race/ethnicity, class, gender/sexuality, deviance, and crime.
H62 2012-019283 978-1-4666-2178-7
Social software and the evolution of user expertise; future
trends in knowledge creation and dissemination.
Title main entry. Ed. by Tatjana Takseva.
Information Science Reference, ©2013 395 p. $175.00
Contributors from a wide range of disciplines look at how digital tech-
nologies have changed the production, dissemination, and definition of
knowledge, and where this might lead to. They cover expertise and the
changing nature of knowledge creation and dissemination in the web 2.0
environment, changing expert environments in the university and in the
areas of research and scholarship, reimagining pedagogical expertise,
and case studies of collective or decentralized expertise. Among the topics
are Wikipedia’s success and the rise of the amateur expert, Google
scholar as the co-producer of scholarly knowledge, teaching political
science students to find and evaluate information in the social media
flow, faculty and undergraduate perceptions of expertise within social
media, and interaction and expertise in an Appalachian music archive.
–57–
H62 2011-044604 978-0-674-06574-1
Working knowledge; making the human sciences from
Parsons to Kuhn.
Isaac, Joel.
Harvard University Press, ©2012 314 p. $49.95
A love letter to Harvard from Harvard University Press, this book looks
at the development of the social sciences (anthropology, sociology, history
and philosophy of science) in the mid-twentieth century, and a variety of
famous names of that era, as all products of a unique environment at
Harvard. Joel Isaac (history of modern political thought, U. of Cambridge,
UK) documents the way these disciplines fell outside the institutional
boundaries of American universities at the time, and found a home at
Harvard through an informal network of clubs and other refuges of intel-
lectual and teaching culture. There, thinkers from different backgrounds
and disciplines were able to talk together, or work together on collabo-
rative projects. Isaac joins a growing number of voices drawing attention
to the way that unclaimed spaces and open-ended opportunities for
interdisciplinary contact foster intellectual innovation. While other
articles have focused on the kinds of physical spaces that foster such out-
pourings of new work, Isaac focuses intensive research on the social
space that created this one. He notes that while innovators from Talcott
Parsons to B. F. Skinner to Thomas Kuhn have been treated separately by
historians and scholars, they all were crossing paths in the same social
setting at the same time, interacting through non-professional teaching
programs and faculty philosophical conversations outside of the usual
departmental structures at Harvard. The book is well written in an aca-
demic intellectual style, supported with extensive endnotes. While the
author focuses the book on the history of the mid-century Harvard
example of informal networking in extreme detail, he offers the hope that
it can serve as a model for greater tolerance of different outlooks, and
more cross-fertilization between disciplines, in an era where fierce
defense of increasingly tiny and uniform intellectual fiefdoms, and the
death of informal teaching-community networks, is the rule. If enough
academic administrators read this book, his hope may come true.
HA29 2011-040925 978-1-60871-677-7
Essential statistics for public managers and policy
analysts, 3d ed.
Berman, Evan M. and XiaoHu Wang.
CQ Press, ©2012 369 p. $79.00 (pa)
Heavily sub-sectioned and employing many graphs, charts, and figures,
this third edition textbook for statistics students, public managers, and
policy analysts offers additional material on descriptive analysis, ANOVA,
and performance management in particular while maintaining a
structure appropriate for flexibility and ease of use in a variety of
classroom settings. The book moves from research methods to descriptive
statistics, inferential statistics, and further. To aid study, objectives are
introduced at the beginning of each chapter and a summary, list of key
terms, and appendices are included at the end of the chapter. Additional
resources for professors are available online. A student workbook which
includes application exercises and a CD is available separately. CQ Press
is an imprint of SAGE Publications.
HA29 2012-020266 978-0-470-40507-9
Methods and applications of statistics in the social and
behavioral sciences.
Title main entry. Ed. by Balakrishnan, N. (Wiley series in methods and
applications)
John Wiley & Sons, ©2012 560 p. $195.00
Social scientists and statisticians in academia, government, and business
present a handbook and reference guide to various statistical methods,
techniques, strategies, and applications that are now being used to inves-
tigate issues pertaining to behavioral and social sciences. Among the
topics are current population survey, election projections, medico-actu-
arial investigation, scoring systems in sports, statistics in childhood
obesity, and utility theory.
HA32 2012-019423 978-1-4666-2172-5
Online instruments, data collection, and electronic
measurements; organizational advancements.
Title main entry. Ed. by Mihai C. Bocarnea et al.
Information Science Reference, ©2013 377 p. $175.00
Education specialists and other contributors identify Internet resources
relating to organizational leadership, particularly applications of evi-
dence to leadership approaches and processes. In sections on method-
ological issues, analysis of established measures, new measurements,
and uses and comparisons they consider such topics as using mixed
methods in organizational communication research, measurement
instruments for fatalism, seven scales to measure the seven beatitudes in
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
leaders, the inventory of learner persistence, and preferred features of
course management systems in post-secondary and corporate online
learning.
HA34 2012-015785 978-1-119-97815-2
Statistical disclosure control.
Hundepool, Anco et al. (Wiley series in survey methodology)
John Wiley & Sons, ©2012 286 p. $99.95
Seven European statisticians explore the problem that modern statistics
techniques and resources can disclose sensitive information about indi-
viduals or entities, and what measure can be taken to prevent unwanted
disclosure. They cover a general background of ethics, principles, guide-
lines, and regulations; microdata; magnitude tabular data; frequency
tables; and data access issues.
HA431 978-1-59237-928-6
Profiles of Massachusetts; 2012, 3d ed.
Title main entry.
Grey House Pub., Inc., ©2012 430 p. $149.00 (pa)
In this reference book, facts, figures, and statistics are provided for 618
places in Massachusetts, based on the chapter on the state in Profiles in
America. Organized by county, profiles use 2010 Census data and data
from the American Community Survey, and give information on geog-
raphy; economy, income, and taxes; housing and transportation;
industry; health and vital statistics; religion; education, including schools,
students, and drop-out rates; ancestry (ethnic categories); educational
attainment, median age, home value, and other statistics for Hispanic
and Asian populations; and weather. The third edition has a new “About
Massachusetts” section offering color photos and information on the
state’s government, natural resources, and demographics.
ECONOMICS
HB74 2012-012484 978-1-60871-711-8
International political economy in context; individual
choices, global effects, 2d ed.
Sobel, Andrew C.
CQ Press, ©2013 592 p. $85.00 (pa)
This text for a course in analytical political science emphasizes
explanatory frameworks for social behavior that are based on a rational
choice approach to political economy. The text is designed to be accessible
to beginning students, with limited use of footnotes, less emphasis on his-
torical background, and more emphasis on theories and frameworks.
The author includes micro approaches, with special focus on liberalism
and realism, as a means of demonstrating the weaknesses of micro
approaches. The first part of the text introduces the intersection of
political economy, rationality, and social science and offers an overview
of structure, nation-states, power, and order in an international context.
It also looks at economic liberalism and market exchange in the global
arena. Part 2 delves into micro level conditions and mechanisms that
influence political and economic outcomes, and Part 3 examines changes
in the global political economy over the past 200 years. In addition to the
book’s chapter key concepts and exercises, the student website contains
chapter summaries, quizzes, and flashcards. The text can be used as a
core text for a range of courses in international political economy, and as
a core or supplementary text in an introductory international politics
course. This second edition offers new chapters on the role of hegemonic
leadership and its micro foundations, and political and economic market
failures and threats to globalization. Sobel teaches at Washington
University in St. Louis. CQ Press is an imprint of SAGE Publications.
HB135 2012-935313 978-1-78100-043-4
Mathematics and modern economics.
Title main entry. Ed. by Geoffrey M. Hodgson. (The international
library of critical writings in economics)
Edward Elgar Publishing, ©2012 2012 p. $345.00
Hodgson (U. of Herfordshire Business School, UK) has selected 46 articles
and excerpts for facsimile reproduction. He provides an introductory
essay, and the articles follow, arranged according to the following
themes: from the formalist revolution to the AEA Commission; mathe-
matics, fin de siècle (1991-1999), millennial mathematics—methodology
and ontology; and mathematical economics and the great crash of 2008.
Selections are from such sources as the Journal of Political Economy,
Review of Economics and Statistics, American Economic Review, and Theory
and Decision. The compendium is not indexed.
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
HB145 2009-941257 978-1-84844-993-0
The concept of equilibrium in different economic
traditions; an historical investigation.
Tieben, Bert.
Edward Elgar Publishing, ©2012 682 p. $210.00
Tieben (SEO Economic Research, the Netherlands) provides a history of
equilibrium economics to answer a number of questions that have arisen
in the field as a result of disagreements among economists from dif-
fering traditions. Among the topics he discusses are a definition of equi-
librium, methodological assessment, origins, the circular flow of goods
and money, statics and dynamics in classical economics, monetary equi-
librium, the impact of uncertainty, creative entrepreneurship, evolu-
tionary economics, and disequilibrium foundations of equilibrium
analysis. The book should interest postgraduate students and scholars in
the history of economic thought and economic methodology.
HB171 1941-1383 978-0-8243-4604-1
Annual review of economics; v.4, 2012.
Title main entry. Ed. by Kenneth J. Arrow and Timothy F. Bresnahan.
Annual Reviews, ©2012 670 p. $83.00
This year’s volume, compiled by Arrow and Bresnahan (both at Stanford
U., California), begins with a tribute to Paul Samuelson with a brief biog-
raphical sketch and summary of his contributions to areas including con-
sumer theory, international trade, capital and growth theory, the history
of economics, popular writing and public involvement. Other articles
cover topics ranging from how to improve the productivity of US health
care spending, to the pitfalls of the emerging field of genoeconomics. The
volume includes supporting figures and tables, and cumulative indexes
of contributing authors and chapter titles, volumes 1-4.
HB171 2012-938049 978-1-78100-903-1
Microeconomics of interactive economies; evolutionary,
institutional, and complexity perspectives; a ‘non-toxic’
intermediate textbook.
Elsner, Wolfram.
Edward Elgar Publishing, ©2012 240 p. $40.00 (pa)
Mainstream neoliberal economics has not only failed to adequately
explain the actual workings of the global and national economies, sug-
gests Elsner (economics, U. of Bremen, Germany), but has also, as far as
an academic discipline can, actively contributed to such problem as the
global financial crisis of 2008. In response to these failures, this textbook
aims to rebuild basic microeconomic modeling and teaching on the basis
of the “complexity economics” of the past three decades that reaches
beyond a pure focus on markets to treat a broader set of coordination
problems and potential coordination forms treated in complexity eco-
nomics and in the legacy of the evolutionary and institutional economic
thinking that complexity economics builds upon.
HB172 2011-931951 978-0-7386-0972-0
AP microeconomics crash course. (online access
included)
Mayer, David. (Crash course)
Research & Education Assn, ©2012 198 p. $11.95 (pa)
Drawing on a study of questions from previous exams, Mayer, an AP eco-
nomics teacher, AP economics consultant for the College Board, and AP
economics reader and table leader for the Educational Testing Service,
offers high school students a review guide for the Advanced Placement
microeconomics exam that focuses on the information needed to succeed.
It covers how to score well; key terms, graphs, and formulas; key content
review (in an outline format); and test-taking strategies. A full-length
practice exam that includes every topic and type of question on the AP
exam is available online.
HB172 2012-935325 978-1-78100-409-8
Microfoundations reconsidered; the relationship of micro
and macroeconomics in historical perspective.
Title main entry. Ed. by Pedro Garcia Duarte and Gilberto Tadeu Lima.
Edward Elgar Publishing, ©2012 246 p. $125.00
Duarte and Lima (economics, University of Sao Paulo, Brazil) gather his-
torians of macroeconomics to examine the roots of the central dogma of
current macroeconomics and to investigate issues surrounding the rela-
tionship between macro and microeconomics. Some chapter topics
include the rise and fall of Walrasian microeconomics and the Keynesian
effect, the Cowles Commission as an anti-Keynesian stronghold 1943-
1954, the dividing line between Keynesian and new classical macroeco-
nomics, and the ideas of Oskar Morgenstern. The book’s final chapter
explores the potential of microfoundations in the making of a new con-
sensus in macroeconomics.
–58–
HB238 2012-024106 978-0-85728-460-0
Competitiveness and development; myth and realities.
Shafaeddin, Mehdi. (The Anthem other canon series)
Anthem Press, ©2012 318 p. $99.00
Criticizing orthodox neoclassical theory of international trade as stressing
static comparative cost advantage (the philosophical and ideological basis
of the “Washington Consensus” and the activities of the WTO) without
taking into account significant factors relevant to the case of developing
countries that require greater state involvement to address rather than
relying on market forces alone, this volume presents an alternative
approach to development. This approach recognizes that achieving com-
petitiveness at a high rate of development requires creating supply
capacity in high-value-added activities, making the established capacity
efficient, and continuously upgrading industrial structure. This calls for
proactive government policies and strategies for the development of
indigenous capabilities of national enterprise and therefore a more open
policy space for developing countries ideally accompanied by changes in
the international trade rules and practices of the international financial
institutions and developed countries in their bilateral and regional trade
agreements with developing countries. Distributed in the US by Books
International, Inc.
HB501 2011-277743 978-0-7456-4733-3
Cognitive capitalism.
Boutang, Yann Moulier.
Polity Press, ©2011 240 p. $24.95 (pa)
Boutang (economics, U. de Technologie de Compiégne) examines the rev-
olution in capitalist extractive processes that’s become known as “cog-
nitive capitalism.” Boutang characterizes the last 35 years as a new age
of capitalism, a “new great transformation” as Karl Polyani put it, in
much the same way that industrial capitalism broke away with
Renaissance mercantilism. This capitalism is focused on intellectual and
otherwise immaterial labor rather than manual labor performed in fac-
tories. Rather than explicit hierarchies and markets, cognitive capitalism
operates through digital networks. A close critical study of the open-
source and free-software movement is included. In the end, Boutang
argues that a Keynesian intervention in to the economy is possible and
necessary to over-come the necessities of capital accumulation.
Distributed by Wiley.
HB501 2012-021925 978-1-58367-313-3
The endless crisis; how monopoly-finance capital produces
stagnation and upheaval from the USA to China.
Foster, John Bellamy and Robert W. McChesney.
Monthly Review Press, ©2012 227 p. $24.95
In this collection of chapter-length articles from the Monthly Review,
Foster, editor of the Monthly Review, and McChesney (communication,
University of Illinois) claim that economic stagnation is the normal state
of a mature capitalist economy that is dominated by a handful of giant
monopolistic corporations. They provide an evidence-based explanation
for stagnation and argue that changing the downward spiral will require
radical change in the economic system (although they don’t recommend
how). Some subjects explored include the internationalization of
monopoly capital, the global reserve army of labor and the new imperi-
alism, and the great stagnation and China. The book’s readership
includes those of all political values. Foster teaches sociology at the
University of Oregon.
HB501 2011-046771 978-1-61205-038-6
Global capitalism and the future of agrarian society.
Title main entry. Ed. by Arif Dirlik et al.
Paradigm Publishers, ©2012 323 p. $33.95 (pa)
Prompted in large part by an interest in the vast changes that have
occurred with agrarian society in China in recent years, the editors (of
the U. of British Columbia, Canada, and the U. of Oregon, US) present 15
papers that grapple with three key issues: the long-term relationship
between capitalism and agrarian society, the city and the countryside in
the analysis of agrarian society, and the question of the peasant as a
social category. Opening chapters review world-historical trends and con-
sider what the “end of the peasantry” scenario would mean for world
social systems (with influential world-systems theorist Immanuel
Wallerstein contributing one chapter). Six chapters then focus on China
as a paradigmatic example of the issue, examining the transformation of
the peasantry, the political economy of spatial inequality, the use of
farmland, processes of urban village redevelopment in coastal urban
China, and changing conditions of property regulation. Five chapters
than provide more international perspectives, with discussions of experi-
ences in India, Indonesia, Zimbabwe, and Ecuador and an examination
of the issue in relation to food security and sustainability in Latin
America. An epilogue considers lessons from the 2008 world food crisis.
–59–
HB501 978-0-85793-863-3
The limits of regulation; a critical analysis of capitalist
development.
Mavroudeas, Stavros.
Edward Elgar Publishing, ©2012 221 p. $110.00
This is a critical survey of the influential theoretical school known as the
Regulation School, which arose in the mid-1970s out of the neo-Marxist
and radical political economy traditions and which utilized the concepts
of the “regime of accumulation” (the form of distribution of surplus
between capital and labor required in each historical period to coordinate
the dynamics of production with social demand) and the “mode of reg-
ulation” (the necessary institutional forms and social compromises for
the reproduction of the regime of accumulation). Mavroudeas (U. of
Macedonia, Greece) criticizes the Regulation School as resorting to his-
toricism and institutionalism and adopting a middle-range methodology
unsuitable for assessing broad aspects of historical evolution. This
general criticism is then elaborated for two key areas of Regulation
theory. The first is periodization theory and its inaccurate hypotheses
that mass production only became dominant only in the inter-war period
and that capitalist products dominated workers’ consumption only after
World War II. The second is Regulation theory’s trajectory from value to
monetary concepts in its macroeconomic modeling, which Mavroudeas
argues weakens its analytical ability and leads to an inefficient modeling
of the macrodynamics of capitalism.
HB501 2012-021104 978-1-84467-742-9
The making of global capitalism; the political economy of
American empire.
Panitch, Leo and Sam Gindin.
Verso, ©2012 456 p. $29.95
Panitch (political economy, York U.) and Gindin, a former unionist with
the Canadian wing of the United Auto Workers, examine the construction
of global capitalism through the American State. They focus on America
as an economic empire, where nation-building campaigns are about cul-
tivating economic dependencies on markets. They organize a dozen
chapters into six two-chapter sections that lay out the conceptual
framework and historical backdrop. They describe how the New Deal
was internationalized, how the Bretton Woods system fell apart, the crisis
in American capitalism during the 1960s that sent Capital searching for
new sources of cheap-labor, the material base of empire, the legal regime
governing capitalist globalization, and how various sectors of the global
economy were integrated in the last quarter of the 20th century to the
present. Writing in the wake of the Occupy movement, they argue that
confronting the economic empire requires a confrontation with financial
institutions as financial institutions that must be re-created as instru-
ments of economic coordination and social welfare.
HB615 978-1-78100-046-5
Entrepreneurial opportunities.
Title main entry. Ed. by Dean A. Shepherd and Denis A. Grégoire. (The
international library of entrepreneurship; v.25)
Edward Elgar Publishing, ©2012 833 p. $465.00
This volume reprints 38 papers originally published in the Academy of
Management Review, Journal of Business Venturing, Journal of Management
Studies, Small Business Economics, and other journals. The authors
explore the nature and origins of entrepreneurial opportunities, the dis-
covery and creation of entrepreneurial opportunities, cognitive processes
for opportunity identification, the role of human and social capital, eval-
uation of opportunities, and the pursuit of entrepreneurial opportunities
in different contexts. The last two papers focus on methodological
strategies for measuring opportunity recognition beliefs and idea sets.
HB615 2012930625 978-1-78100-472-2
Entrepreneurial processes in a changing economy;
frontiers in European entrepreneurship research.
Title main entry. Ed. by Friederike Welter et al.
Edward Elgar Publishing, ©2012 214 p. $110.00
Welter (Jönköping International Business School, Sweden), Smallbone
(Small Business Research Centre, Kingston U., England), and Van Gils
(Maaastricht U. School of Business and Economics, the Netherlands)
present nine papers from a November 2010 conference on entrepre-
neurship and small business in Europe. Topics include the links between
entrepreneurial mobility, resource orchestration, and different facts of
context; the effects of neighborhoods on firm success; the role of the
entrepreneur in determining growth; the moderating effect of market
intelligence, cross-functional integration, and internal commitment on the
relationship between pioneering and new product performance; the use
of financial bootstrapping in small and medium-sized ventures and its
impact on venture growth; a model of knowledge acquisition through
strategic networks for franchising companies; the roles of openness and
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
innovativeness within science-based entrepreneurial firms; the behavioral
components of corporate entrepreneurship within a large company; and
the current state of research in entrepreneurship as reflected in the past
ten years of the major academic journals. Co-published with ECSB.
HB615 2012-003199 978-1-4221-6194-4
Heart, smarts, guts, and luck; what it takes to be an
entrepreneur and build a great business.
Tjan, Anthony K. et al.
Harvard Bus. School Press, ©2012 236 p. $25.00
Business professionals Tjan, Harrington (both with the venture capital
firm, Cue Ball Capital, Boston), and management consultant Hsieh
(McKinsey and Company) present a practical text to inspire and inform
entrepreneurs and business builders. Based on interviewing and
researching hundreds of business-builders worldwide, the authors
identify four qualities that occur in the experiences of successful business
leaders and entrepreneurs. Using their “Entrepreneurial Aptitude Test”
readers can create their own profiles to understand which of the traits
they possess or lack, and learn how to use the traits most effectively to
achieve their business goals.
HB615 2012-935306 978-0-85793-893-0
The shift to the entrepreneurial society; a built economy
in education, sustainability and regulation.
Title main entry. Ed. by Jean Bonnet et al.
Edward Elgar Publishing, ©2012 286 p. $125.00
Collecting original contributions from scholars in economics, man-
agement, and sociology, this volume addresses how advanced economies
can encourage the emergence of entrepreneurial firms through policies
associated with education, sustainability, and regulation. The 19 papers
collected are presented by editors Bonnet (U. of Caen, France), Bejardin
(U. of Namur and U. Catholique de Louvain, Belgium), and Madrid-
Guijarro (U. Politécnica de Cartagena, Spain) in four sections that
examine, in turn, education and human capital, including education in
entrepreneurship within the educational system; issues of sustainability
and innovation, including the barriers to innovation among small and
medium enterprises in developing countries, determinants of innovation
assessment, the relationship between innovation and creativity, and the
links between innovation and sustainability; entrepreneurship and
finance, as well as entrepreneurial responses to financial crisis; and the
roles of moral, cultural, and legal norms in determining entrepreneurial
motives and behaviors.
HB3717 2012-935333 978-1-78100-629-0
Global economic crisis; impacts, transmission and
recovery.
Title main entry. Ed. by Maurice Obstfeld et al. (KDI/EWC series on
economic policy)
Edward Elgar Publishing, ©2012 278 p. $125.00
Presented by Obstfeld (economics, U. of California, US), Cho (KDI School
of Public Policy and Management, South Korea), and Mason (economics,
U. of Hawaii, US), this volume contains ten papers from an eponymous
2010 conference organized by the East-West Center and the Korea
Development Institute on issues raised by the 2008 global economic
crisis. The contributions consist of paired chapters in which the first
addresses a general issue of the crisis while the second then considers
specific South Korean aspects of the same topic. Topics include com-
parison to earlier crises, international financial markets and trans-
mission of the crisis, imbalances in international trade, macroeconomic
and financial policy responses to the crisis, and the impact of the crisis
on emerging markets.
HB3717 2012-016538 978-981-4282-27-7
Global financial crisis and challenges for China.
Yang, Mu and Michael Heng Siam-Heng.
World Scientific, ©2012 133 p. $54.00
Authors Mu and Siam-Heng (East Asian Institute, National U. of
Singapore) examine the Chinese economy, certainly one of the fastest
growing economies in the world. But as the authors note, the economic
course China set for itself has had both positive and negative conse-
quences. Several questions are discussed, among them the effects the
2008 global financial crisis have had and can have on its economy and
those of its neighbors, the not always smooth relationship with Japan,
Chinese currency exchange rates, and the mutual dependence between
China and its Southeast Asia economic allies.
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
HB3717 2012-028624 978-0-13-704798-7
Paying the price; ending the great recession and
beginning a new American century.
Zandi, Mark.
Pearson Education, ©2013 254 p. $29.99
Zandi, chief economist at Moody’s Analytics, offers what many will con-
sider a surprising assessment of the U.S. economy after the financial col-
lapse of 2008. In spite of the serious problems that remain, like high
unemployment and growing government debt, he contends that the
financial system is strong, largely because of government policy. While
the bailouts and the federal stimulus program are still topics for heated
debate, they did prevent a much worse outcome. He covers all the bases
in a clear, straight-forward style to justify his contention that, to para-
phrase, the optimists will ultimately be proven right.
HC59 2012-012065 978-1-60358-421-0
2052; a global forecast for the next forty years.
Randers, Jorgan.
Chelsea Green Publ. Co., ©2012 392 p. $24.95 (pa)
In The Limits of Growth (1972), coauthor Randers (climate strategy, BI
Norwegian Business School) cautioned that unless humanity changed its
ways, the planet’s future looked unsustainable. In this report to the Club
on Rome commemorating the 40th anniversary of this landmark book,
he and a new group of prognosticators forecast scenarios about popu-
lation, consumption, production, energy use, and a counter-globalization
trend for the next 40 years for the US, China, and other regions.
Supporting figures and maps are drawn from a statistical database, com-
puter models, and other tools.
HC59 978-0-8243-4704-8
Annual review of resource economics; v.4, 2012.
Title main entry. Ed. by Gordon C. Rausser et al.
Annual Reviews, ©2012 403 p. $83.00
The series highlights and evaluates the most significant research devel-
opments in resource economics, broadly defined to encompass the eco-
nomics of agricultural, development, energy, and renewable and
nonrenewable resources. This year’s themes are environmental eco-
nomics and public policy; the impact of agriculture and natural resource
management on global warming; agricultural risks, markets, and trade;
and resource economics. The topics include behavioral economics and
environmental policy, carbon sequestration in forests and soils, the value
of agricultural biodiversity, the origins and ideals of water resource eco-
nomics in the US, and new fisheries economics. The series tend to
acquire an index at their fifth volume. The price is for individual buyers;
institutions must buy the four-volume Economics Site License.
HC59 2012-372404 978-0-7453-3198-0
Eradicating extreme poverty; democracy, globalisation and
human rights.
Title main entry. Ed. by Xavier Godinot. Trans. by Angela Cady and
Andrew Hayes.
Pluto Press, ©2012 256 p. $99.00
This book promotes a grassroots and human-rights based approach to
extreme poverty that is modeled by the activities of the nonprofit
International Movement ATD Fourth World, founded in France in 1957.
As the organization’s approach insists on the necessity of a participatory
approach that both involves and is informed by the experiences of those
actually experiencing extreme poverty, the issues guiding the topic are
first addressed in four life stories drawn up in collaboration with people
experiencing extreme poverty in Europe, Asia, Africa, and Latin America.
Two chapters then synthesize and analyze the issues raised in the life
stories. Distributed in the US by Palgrave Macmillan.
HC59 978-0-8213-8991-1
Information and communications for development 2012;
maximizing mobile.
Title main entry.
The World Bank, ©2012 221 p. $45.00 (pa)
In this third report in the World Bank’s series on Information and
Communication Technologies for Development, which is aimed at policy
makers, regulators, and investors, individuals associated with the World
Bank’s Information and Communication Technologies Sector Unit and
infoDev focus on mobile applications and their use in promoting devel-
opment in agriculture, health, financial services, entrepreneurship and
employment, and government, as well as the policy changes affected by
the shift from narrowband to broadband. They analyze the growth and
evolution of mobile telephony, and the rise of data-based services; the
consequences for development of the emerging “app economy”; and the
–60–
debate on the use of mobile phones for development. They include com-
parative data for 152 economies and tables for the mobile sector. No
index is provided.
HC59 2012-930610 978-1-78100-137-0
Institutions, economic performance and the visible hand;
theory and evidence.
Chakravarti, Ashok.
Edward Elgar Publishing, ©2012 245 p. $125.00
With the “invisible hand” of neoclassical orthodoxy leading to crisis in
the developed world and poor growth performance in developing
nations, perhaps it’s time to reconsider the importance of the “visible
hand” of institutions in economic development, suggests Chakravarti
(economics, U. of Zimbabwe), who reviews major themes, issues, and evi-
dence from the economic development literature in order to draw con-
clusions about the theoretical importance of institutions in
understanding economic development and the factors that allow for the
emergence of institutions that underlie successful economic performance.
Following a review of neoclassical and institutionalist theory, he
examines the empirical evidence available in cross-country studies from
the past two decades; more detailed case studies of institutional transi-
tions in Japan, India, and Botswana; and his own studies of South
Sudan’s institutional development over the past decade.
HC59 978-0-8213-9575-2
World development report 2013; jobs.
Title main entry.
The World Bank, ©2013 401 p. $35.00 (pa)
Which should come first in the development process—creating jobs or
building skills? Adopting a cross-sectoral and multidisciplinary
approach, this report looks at why some jobs do more for development
than others. Introductory chapters explore development through jobs and
changes in demographics and job markets. Part 1 considers the trans-
formative power of jobs to improve living standards, increase produc-
tivity, and foster social cohesion. Part 2 looks at the diverse job agendas
in agrarian economies, conflict-affected countries, urbanizing countries,
resource-rich countries, small island nations, and countries with high
youth unemployment. Part 3 examines labor policies and active labor
market programs and gives recommendations for setting policy priorities
for job creation. Numerous case boxes in each chapter address topics
such as the garment industry boom in Bangladesh and new forms of col-
lective bargaining in China. The report is designed to be readable, with
boxes defining basic concepts such as drivers of economic growth, plus
chapter discussion questions, a glossary, and a wealth of color photos,
charts, tables, and maps. The companion web site for the complete set of
World Development reports offers translations, background papers, and
data files, plus a free iPad app that aids in navigating the report.
HC60 978-94-6091-735-6
Volunteers of America.
Carlson, Dennis L. (Transgressions; cultural studies and education; v.79)
Sense Publishers, ©2012 195 p. $39.00 (pa)
While serving as a Peace Corps volunteer teaching in Libya between the
fall of 1968 and the fall of 1969, the author witnessed firsthand the rev-
olution that brought the late Muammar Qaddafi to power. In this
memoir of that year, he reflects on his personal relation to the political
and social processes in the United States that brought him to Libya,
including his developing anti-war politics and his coming to grips with
his own sexuality, as well as the politics of the Libyan revolution as it
impacted the presence of the Peace Corps, which was accused by the
Qaddafi regime of harboring CIA agents.
HC79 2012-009817 978-1-4666-1972-2
Green technologies and business practices; an IT
approach.
Title main entry. Ed. by Patricia Ordonez de Pablos.
Information Science Reference, ©2013 271 p. $180.00
International contributors to this book are researchers, practitioners, and
policy makers in informatics, information systems, technology, business,
economics, and marketing. They present the latest research and case
studies on green business issues and the role of information technologies
in supporting green methods in areas such as green manufacturing, bio-
based air purification systems, green chemistry, energy sources, biofuels,
and sustainable agriculture. After outlining a conceptual framework for
the alignment of information technology and corporate sustainability
strategy, chapters address topics such as the green paradigm shift in
architecture, green computing, avoiding software-induced hardware obso-
lescence, and web-based digital habitat ecosystems for sustainable built
environments. Country case studies examine environmental pollution in
China and factors which influence the adoption of green IT in Ireland.
–61–
The book’s readership includes researchers, practitioners, students, gov-
ernment officials, and CEOs. Ordonez de Pablos teaches business admin-
istration at the University of Oviedo, Spain.
HC79 2012-011415 978-981-4401-68-5
Growth with inequality; an international comparison on
income distribution.
Title main entry. Ed. by Jinjun Xue.
World Scientific, ©2012 383 p. $139.00
According to the Kuznets Curve theory, high income growth in a country,
will at first increase income inequality and then gradually reduce it.
However, in actuality, this is rarely true. Through 11 case studies of coun-
tries around the world, as well as specialized papers on subjects like agri-
culture profitability and income distribution, the subject of economic
growth and inequality is fully explored. Editior Xue (economics, Nagoya
U.) provides a forward.
HC79 2012-009818 978-1-4666-1978-4
Industrial dynamics, innovation policy, and economic
growth through technological advancements.
Title main entry. Ed. by I. Hakan Yetkiner et al.
Information Science Reference, ©2013 417 p. $185.00
Half of the 19 papers in this collection were written by Turkish aca-
demics and are focused on the role of research and development expen-
ditures, innovation, and foreign direct investment in growing the Turkish
manufacturing base and overall economy. Other contributors analyze the
relationship between corporate cash flow and R&D expenditures, track
the transfer of academic patents to European invention, assess the effec-
tiveness of science and technology parks in Poland, and identify factors
hindering the adoption of small stationary fuel cells for home energy
supply.
HC79 978-1-78190-170-0
Inequality, mobility and segregation; essays in honor of
Jacques Silber.
Title main entry. Ed. by John A. Bishop and Rafael Salas. (Research on
economic inequality; v.20)
Emerald Group Publishing, ©2012 422 p. $154.95
Economists mostly from Europe but also the US continue the series’
exploration of the causes, measure, nature, and effects of economic
inequality at scales from the local to the global around the world. Their
topics include the occupational segregation of Afro-Latinos, influence
functions for policy impact analysis, the earning distribution across the
European Union, variable equivalence scales and trends in German
income inequality, and estimates from a new dataset on educational
inequality in the world 1950-2010. Distributed in North America by
Turpin Distribution.
HC79 2012-935302 978-0-85793-747-6
Local climate change law; environmental regulation in
cities and other localities.
Title main entry. Ed. by Benjamin J. Richardson. (The IUCN Academy
of Environmental Law series)
Edward Elgar Publishing, ©2012 401 p. $175.00
With many national governments retreating from domestic and interna-
tional commitments to reduce greenhouse gas emissions and develop
climate change adaptation strategies, this book provides a comparative
examination of the activities of local governments to mitigate and adapt
to climate change. Presented by Richardson (environmental law and sus-
tainability, U. of British Columbia, Canada), 13 chapters examine climate
governance at the municipal level with a focus on the US and Canada,
although a global perspective is also provided in chapters considering
municipal climate governance in the European Union, China, Australia,
and South Africa.
HC79 2012-452365 978-0-86571-707-7
The resilience imperative; cooperative transitions to a
steady-state economy.
Lewis, Michael and Pat Conaty.
New Society Publishers Ltd., ©2012 389 p. $26.95 (pa)
Lewis (Canadian Center for Community Renewal) and Conaty argue for
a transformative move away from a global growth economy toward a
more local economy and offer an agenda for the Occupy movement. They
propose interest-free lending, community land trusts, carbon taxes, a cur-
rency trader tax, and the democratization of corporations. Distributed in
the U.S. by Consortium Books Sales and Distribution.
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
HC79 2012-009690 978-0-674-06641-0
Strength in numbers; the political power of weak
interests.
Trumbull, Gunnar.
Harvard University Press, ©2012 256 p. $49.95
When engaging in the public policy arena, diffuse interests face an uphill
battle against concentrated interests that can dictate policy through a
combination of industry lobbying, campaign finance, and other mecha-
nisms. Such anyway, is the conventional view, according to Trumbull
(business administration, Harvard Business School), who argues in con-
trast that diffuse interests (such as retirees, patients, and consumers)
have historically enjoyed strong protection in the public sphere. He finds
explanation for this contrast in expected outcomes in the question of legit-
imacy, contending that when groups of diffuse interests manage to
mobilize an activist membership, they enjoy a level of legitimacy that
concentrated interests groups cannot achieve, thus placing significant
constraints on the influence of powerful economic actors over public
policy. In presenting this more complex view of the nature of public
policy influence, he analyzes five sets of comparative cross-country case
studies exploring the ways in which concentrated and diffuse interests
interact in the context of new government regulation. The cases include
instances in which diffuse interests have been successful, such as the
general consumer protection legislation passed during the 1960s and
1970s, and those in which concentrated interests have been more influ-
ential, such as in pharmaceutical and agricultural regulation, although
in the latter cases he finds important constraints on producer influence
that he argues have been unrecognized in standard treatments of public
policy formulation (the more mixed cases of retailing and consumer
credit regulation are also considered).
HC79 2012935311 978-1-78100-009-0
Technology market transactions; auctions, intermediaries
and innovation.
Tietze, Frank.
Edward Elgar Publishing, ©2012 382 p. $150.00
This study will help optimize the design of models for transactions
between technology owners and technology acquirers. Tietze (European
Institute of Technology and Innovation Management) finds that tech-
nology auctions are suitable as a transaction model primarily for tech-
nologies with moderate market values. The study is the result of a joint
research project between the Hamburg University of Technology in
Germany and Chalmers University of Technology in Sweden and will be
of interest to business economists, academics, practitioners, and policy
makers in innovation and intellectual property. The study is especially
relevant to firms, universities, independent inventors, and their support
institutions for its explanations of technology transaction processes in
general and auctions in particular.
HC79 978-1-78100-332-9
Valuing climate change mitigation; applying stated
preferences in the presence of uncertainty.
Akter, Sonia and Jeff Bennett.
Edward Elgar Publishing, ©2012 176 p. $110.00
Akter (economics, Helmholtz Center for Environmental Research,
Germany) and Bennett (environmental management, The Australian
National U.) assess the impact of introducing the issue of uncertainty into
stated-preference valuations of climate change mitigation (mainly efforts
involving carbon taxes or carbon emissions trading schemes). They assess
the influence of three types of uncertainty—scenario uncertainty, policy
uncertainty, and preference uncertainty—on stated preference value esti-
mates and seek to identify the sources of preference uncertainty for
climate change mitigation. Their research findings are tested against the
case of Australia, which has just recently legislated a carbon tax.
HC105 2012-014805 978-0-674-04748-8
Freaks of fortune; the emerging world of capitalism and
risk in America.
Levy, Jonathan.
Harvard University Press, ©2012 414 p. $35.00
Levy (history, Princeton U.) presents a history of 19th century American
capitalist development. He focuses on the development of risk as a com-
moditization of the many insecurities that capitalist markets engendered.
He considers the formation of corporate finance, the explosion of booms
and busts, free-laborers anxieties over slavery and debtor’s prison, and
by the end the question of trust-busting. He argues that this assessment
of 19th century capitalism in terms of risk is relevant the 21st century
because “by the end of the nineteenth century the freaks [booms and
busts] had exposed the limits of the moral idea?resurgent by the end of
the 20th?that by taking risks everyone got what they deserved in a cap-
italist economy.” What’s more is that “not only did the new ethos invite
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
Americans to take risks. It also promised that by offloading personal risk
onto a new corporate financial-system self-owning Americans could
acquire economic security.”
HC105 2012-009430 978-0-7656-2255-6
Industrialization and the transformation of American life;
a brief introduction.
Rees, Jonathan.
M.E. Sharpe, Inc., ©2013 138 p. $79.95
This volume grew out of the experience of Rees (history, Colorado State
U.) in teaching a survey course on American history in the post-
Reconstruction era (lasting until WWI). Rather than take a strictly chrono-
logical approach, Rees provides a thematic analysis that is grounded in
his conviction that “industrialization and its effects are the one under-
lying development from this period that affected everything else that hap-
pened.” He expands upon and defends that thesis in separate chapters
examining varieties of industrialization, labor, immigration, urban-
ization, the development of the West, environmental issues, trans-
portation, and the politics of industrialization and reform. Each theme is
developed both in its general contours and in relation to specific organi-
zations, movements, pieces of legislation, and other illustrative topics.
HC106 2011-044130 978-1-59079-230-8
Buying America back; a real-deal blueprint for restoring
American prosperity.
Uke, Alan.
SelectBooks, ©2012 163 p. $16.95 (pa)
This work details the importance of bringing manufacturing back to the
US and explores how countries with solid trade balances are succeeding.
Most of the focus, however, is on the need for complete and accurate
labeling of consumer products. Part two of the book consists of a seven
page country table providing key information, such as the trade ratio
with the US, followed by more extensive information on 59 countries. Uke
(underwater kinetics) also holds over 40 patents and has won the
Entrepreneur of the Year Award for Consumer Products. No index is
included.
HC106 2012-006793 978-0-87286-567-9
Occupy the economy; challenging capitalism.
Wolff, Richard and David Barsamian. (Open media series)
City Lights Books, ©2012 186 p. $14.95 (pa)
Although aspects of our economy are vigorously debated, what remains
unquestioned is the validity of capitalism itself. The Occupy movement
brought this matter to the fore and this book explores a series of ques-
tions that then arise. So what’s a possible solution? In a closing mani-
festo this book advocates economic democracy, achieved in a large part
through democracy in the workplace. Barsamian, well known for his
weekly program Alternative Radio, presents here in print a series of inter-
views with Wolff (economics, U. of Massachusetts) that took place in
2011.
HC106 978-1-61925-007-9
This is who we were; a companion to the 1940 census.
Derks, Scott.
Grey House Pub., Inc., ©2012 458 p. $150.00
In this encyclopedic companion to the recently-released data from the
1940 U.S. Census, Derks, the editor of The Working Americans series,
enlivens the statistics with profiles of American families who lived
between the Great Depression and World War II. Background material
and articles from newspapers and other sources on the years right before
and after the 1940 Census are followed by tables ranking states on demo-
graphic variables, and presenting comparative data from the 1940 and
2010 Census. Chronologies include firsts and turning points in the early,
mid and late 1930s, and 1940. Subsequent sections provide year-by-year
information on how much things cost and their worth in today’s dollars.
Original pieces reveal what people were reading, writing, watching, and
listening to in that era.
HC107 2012-003242 978-1-4128-4839-8
Economic growth and fiscal planning in New York.
(reprint, 1991)
Bahl, Roy and William Duncombe.
Transaction Publishers, ©2013 335 p. $39.95 (pa)
Having spent many years studying the relationships among the national
economy, the New York economy, and the finances of New York state and
local governments, Bahl (Georgia State U.) and Duncombe (public admin-
istration and policy research, Syracuse U.) pull together a conclusion, and
suggest how the mistakes and successes of the past can teach leaders
today some important policy lessons for the future. They look at New
York’s economy during the 1980s in terms of population, employment,
–62–
and personal income. Taking up New York’s fiscal performance and
health, they consider the public sector in the 1980s, explaining gov-
ernment growth, and fiscal health and responsiveness. The 1991 edition
was published by Rutgers University Press.
HC110 2012-006692 978-1-4128-4847-3
The high-tech potential; economic development in rural
America. (reprint, 1991)
Glasmeier, Amy K.
Transaction Publishers, ©2012 225 p. $29.95 (pa)
Originally published in 1991 by the Center for Urban Policy Research,
this unabridged reprint tracks changes in high-tech employment from
1972 to 1987 and describes the regional distribution of high-tech jobs in
rural counties between 1972 and 1982. Glasmeier (MIT) attempts to
understand why the majority of high-tech jobs in rural areas were
located in counties immediately adjacent to cities and identifies factors
governing the spatial distribution of high-tech plants among cities and
rural communities.
HC110 2012-017240 978-0-88285-149-5
Stemming middle-class decline; the challenges to
economic development planning. (reprint, 1994)
Leigh, Nancey Green.
Ctr. for Urban Policy Research, ©2012 218 p. $24.95 (pa)
Leigh (city and regional planning, Georgia Tech) describes changes to
and ultimately the decline of the middle-class from the perspective of
individual earnings. This is a reprint of the 1994 original, and the period
she studies is focused on the late postwar boom to 1987. She considers
income decreases between 1967 and 1987, economic geography and
uneven development, race/gender as a factor in economic restructuring,
cost-of-living trends, and what should be done to stem middle-class
decline. She argues that industrial restructuring rather than demo-
graphic restructuring goes further in explaining declining middle-class
earnings. Tables and statistics are used extensively. There is no index.
HC117 978-0-7748-2291-6
Investing in place; economic renewal in Northern British
Columbia.
Markey, Sean et al.
U. of British Columbia Press, ©2012 338 p. $99.00
Markey (Center for Sustainable Community Development, Simon Fraser
University) presents a rationale for economic renewal in the region,
based in part on a survey of residents, and advocates place-based eco-
nomic development for the rural areas and small towns of Northern
British Columbia. There is special focus on problems related to the fact
that global and technological changes have not yet been fully incorpo-
rated into regional development. The first part of the study overviews
development and settlement patterns and offers a socio-economic and
demographic profile of the region. Part 2 traces the development of the
resource-extraction economy in the region and probes the reasons for its
breakdown, then recommends ways to transition from an approach
based on hinterlands resources towards one driven by place-based oppor-
tunities. Part 3 gives suggestions for change in the public, private, and
civil society sectors and considers potential challenges related to the
region’s industry, labor, NGOs, and local and tribal government. Part 4
details intervention approaches. The book includes case boxes and b&w
maps. Distributed in the US by the University of Washington Press and
in Canada by the University of Toronto Press.
HC240 978-3-8329-7096-3
The formation of support for the European Union in
Central and Eastern Europe; the role of national attitudes
as cognitive heuristics.
Wagner, Bettina. (Studien zur Wahl- und Einstellungsforshung; v.21)
Nomos, ©2012 295 p. $61.00 (pa)
Wagner (U. Darmstadt, Germany) presents her 2010 PhD dissertation in
political science at the Johannes Gutenberg University, Germany. In it she
analyzes the opinion formation and the attitude structure of Central and
Eastern European citizens that underlie support for the European Union.
Emphasizing the role of cognitive heuristics, she combines standard
research on the European Union with cognitive psychology research in
order to construct a new model explaining support for the intern atonal
body in the region during the period around the accession of eight
Central and Eastern European countries into the European Union in
2004. There is no index. Distributed in the US by ISBS.
–63–
HC244 2012007508 978-0-8014-7815-4
Capitalist diversity on Europe’s periphery.
Bohle, Dorothee and Béla Greskovits. (Cornell studies in political
economy)
Cornell U. Press, ©2012 287 p. $26.95 (pa)
Bohle (politcal science, Central European U.) and Greskovits (interna-
tional relations and European studies, Central European U.) examine the
political and economic conditions surrounding the transition from
socialist to capitalist economies in Eastern Europe. They draw on Karl
Polyani to create a typology of emergent capitalist forms in former
socialist countries, which they compare to the great transformation from
agrarian to market-industrial societies. They consider neocorporatism,
welfare states, manufacturing booms, balkanization, the relationship
between markets and democracy, and international forces.
HC258 2011-507462 978-1-85936-179-5
Waterfront blues; the rise and fall of Liverpool’s
dockland.
Towers, Brian.
Carnegie Publishing, ©2011 362 p. $23.95 (pa)
This well-illustrated book tells the story of the Liverpool waterfront and
those who worked on its docks and lived on its densely crowded streets,
from 1911 through 1998. It describes the dangerous working conditions,
poverty, and public health problems of the docklands, as well as labor
strikes against the casual labor system and the violent responses from
government and industry. The book also examines the impact of both
World Wars and describes technological changes that eventually led to
Liverpool’s docklands becoming obsolete. The book contains b&w his-
torical photos on every page. Towers taught at Strathclyde University in
Glasgow. The book is distributed by International Publishers Marketing.
HC270 978-1-78190-216-5
Experts and epistemic monopolies.
Title main entry. Ed. by Roger Koppl et al. (Advances in Austrian eco-
nomics; v.17)
Emerald Group Publishing, ©2012 272 p. $134.95
Putting Austrian economists in dialogue with other traditions, this
volume collects 11 papers on the problem of experts and monopolies of
knowledge. Topics discussed in the papers presented by Koppl (Institute
for Forensic Science Administration, Fairleigh Dickinson U., US), Horwitz
(economics, St. Lawrence U., US), and Dobuzinskis (political science,
Simon Fraser U.) include the problem of commodified knowledge in the
realm of science, the role of monetary policy expertise in the Federal
Reserve System, the epistemic differences between being embedded in a
system versus being above the system as illustrated by the greater ability
of expert traders to master the complexities of the economies they live in
as compared to the abilities of development experts who study those
economies, the epistemology of entrepreneurship, the ways in which epis-
temic monopolies held by forensic labs undermine the court system, and
the ethical implications of pluralism in economic methodology.
Distributed in North America by Turpin Distribution.
HC412 2012-935324 978-1-78100-390-9
Asian responses to the global financial crisis; the impact
of regionalism and the role of the G20.
Title main entry. Ed. by Jehoon Park et al.
Edward Elgar Publishing, ©2012 292 p. $135.00
The product of the November 2010 conference of the Asia Economic
Community Forum, this volume contains selected papers from among
the presentations of the conference relevant to Asian responses to the
global financial aspects, as well as to the related themes of regionalism
in Asia and the place of Asia in the G20 (The Group of 20 Finance
Ministers and Central Bank Governors). Presented by editors Park (U. of
Inchon, South Korea), Pempel (U. of California, US), and Xiao (Fung
Global Institute, Hong Kong, China), the 10 essays include contributions
from both Asian and Western scholars. Topics include Northeast Asia in
the multipolar world system, the Beijing Consensus as an economic
development model for the 21st century, the debate over the value of the
renminbi, the Chinese government’s response to global financial crisis,
the G20 and Asian monetary cooperation, and the ASEAN economic com-
munity and East Asian economic integration.
HC415 2012-020241 978-1-4666-2220-3
Cases on enterprise information systems and
implementation stages; learning from the Gulf region.
Title main entry. Ed. by Fayez Ahmad Albadri.
Business Science Reference, ©2013 346 p. $185.00
Researchers and practitioners in business, information, and computers
describe how businesses around the Persian Gulf have been using enter-
prise information systems (EIS). The case studies could be used in a
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
graduate or undergraduate course or as a reference for analysts, con-
sultants, managers and others interested in setting up or using such a
system. The topics include EIS implementation in a major United Arab
Emirates oil producing company, a structured approach to designing and
implementing a paperless medical system for an offshore operating
company, an implementation project manager’s tips for success, elec-
tronic government and EIS change management and critical success
factors in Oman, and managing the replacement of legacy human
resource systems.
HC424 2011-410314 978-0-7453-2171-4
The political economy of NGOs; state formation in Sri
Lanka and Bangladesh.
Fernando, Jude L.
Pluto Press, ©2011 338 p. $30.00 (pa)
With non-governmental organizations (NGOs) often uncritically viewed
as agents of progressive transformation in the development literature,
Fernando (international development, Clark U.) offers a contrary view
through this critical, Marxist-influenced examination of the role of NGOs
in processes of state formation in Bangladesh and Sri Lanka from pre-
colonial times to the present. Theorizing NGOS and the state as co-
evolving institutional formations within the context of capitalist
development, he seeks to demonstrate that whatever the ideologies
espoused by NGOs, they are ultimately embedded within the same social,
cultural, economic, and political processes operating in society at large
and thus often become complicit in the reproduction of state power.
Distributed in the US by Palgrave Macmillan.
HC427 2011-942551 978-0-85793-680-6
China’s economic miracle; does FDI matter?
Tang, Sumei et al.
Edward Elgar Publishing, ©2012 p. $110.00
The authors (of Griffith U., Australia, and the Australian government’s
Department of Education, Employment and Workplace) provide an
assessment of the impact of foreign direct investment (FDI) on China’s
economic development growth over the period 1978 to 2005. They offer
empirical analysis of FDI location-specific determinants using a Vector
Auto Regression model that investigates the roles of infrastructure,
openness, labor costs, market demand, and labor quality on advancing
FDI in China. They also investigate the impact of FDI on domestic
investment, income distribution, consumption, and tourism.
HC430 2012-015049 978-1-4221-8705-0
The $10 trillion prize; captivating the newly affluent in
China and India.
Silverstein, Michael J. et al.
Harvard Business Review Press, ©2012 314 p. $30.00
Almost everyone knows that China and India are on the way to
becoming the largest markets in the world and thus a potential source
of great profit. But what many businesses need is a guide to their con-
sumer tastes and preferences, and this book supplies that—with examples
of successful businesses, along with the stories of individual consumers.
Much of it rests upon interviews with people in both categories, although
the book also cites articles in magazines and on websites. The first
appendix touches on the diversity by region of both countries, while the
second presents the caveats to Chinese and Indian investment, such as
potential social unrest and environmental pollution. The authors are all
employees of Boston Consulting Group.
HC433 978-3-03785-417-4
Natural resources and sustainable development;
proceedings; 4v.
Int’l Conference on Energy and Environmental Protection (2012:
Hohhot, China) Ed. by Jianguo Wu et al. (Advanced materials research;
vs.524-527)
Trans Tech Publications, ©2011 3956 p. $483.00 (pa)
This four-volume set collects 740 papers from the 2012 International
Conference on Energy and Environmental Protection (ICEEP 2012), held
in June in Hohhot, China, which brought together engineering and other
specialists working mainly in China to discuss problems and solutions,
new issues, and future directions in research in natural resources and
sustainable development. Papers are organized into sections on mineral
prospecting and exploration, mining engineering and coal mining,
mining machinery engineering, mineral process engineering, oil and gas
well development projects, petrochemical and chemical engineering,
metallurgical engineering, forestry engineering, the storage and
processing of agricultural products, energy saving and low-carbon ideas,
urban and regional planning, development and management of the
energy industry, environmental protection and the circular economy,
ecological civilization and t he low-carbon economy, the
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
theory and practice of sustainable development, computer-aided
design/engineering, and other topics.
HC462 978-0-85793-821-3
Japan’s great stagnation; forging ahead, falling behind.
Garside, W.R.
Edward Elgar Publishing, ©2012 219 p. $110.00
The distinctive structures of the post-war economy in Japan led to
extraordinarily high rates of growth, allowing it play catch-up with the
rest of the industrialized world, but undue attachment to those same
structures are often blamed for ensuing periods of recession and then
stagnation. Garside (economics and economic history, Waseda U., Japan)
investigates how the legacies of the post-war political economy influenced
later Japanese economic performance into the new millennium.
HC800 978-3-8329-7151-9
Conflicting strategies to enhance foreign aid efficacy in
Africa; The Millennium Villages, randomized trials and
free trade.
Dunsch, Felipe Alexander.
Nomos, ©2012 160 p. $33.00 (pa)
Noting that sub-Saharan Africa faces the largest obstacles for devel-
opment, Duncsh (who is not further identified in English) classifies the
many different explanations for the inefficiency of aid in the past, then
clusters arguments for three specific strands of thought that aim to
overhaul current aid practices. He looks at Jeffrey Sachs as hopeful,
William Easterly as skeptic, and Dambiso Moyo as radical. As strategies
of alleviation, he looks at massive scale up of aid flows, rigorous evalu-
ations, freeing up markets, and unexpected similarities. There is no
index. Distributed in the US by ISBS.
HC1060 978-9988-647-36-0
Globalization, trade and poverty in Ghana.
Title main entry. Ed. by Charles Ackah and Ernest Aryeetey.
Int. Dev. Research Centre, ©2012 250 p. $32.95 (pa)
Citing a paucity of empirical evidence on the poverty and distributional
impacts of trade policy reform in Ghana as the main motivation for this
volume, the editors (both of the Institute of Statistical, Social and
Economic Research at the U. of Ghana) present eleven papers that
combine theory and econometric analysis in an effort to assess linkages
between globalization, trade, and poverty (including gendered aspects).
Specific topics examined include manufacturing employment and wage
effects of trade liberalization; the influence of education on trade liber-
alization impacts on household welfare; trade liberalization and manu-
facturing firm productivity; the impact of elimination of trade taxes on
poverty and income distribution; food prices, tax reforms, and consumer
welfare under trade liberalization; impacts on tariff revenues; and
impacts on cash cropping, gender, and household welfare; Distributed
in the US by Stylus.
PRODUCTION, INDUSTRY, LABOR
HD30 2012-026463 978-1-4666-2199-2
Aligning enterprise, system, and software architectures.
Title main entry. Ed. by Ivan Mistrik et al.
Business Science Reference, ©2013 327 p. $185.00
International contributors in computer science, software engineering, and
information systems extol the benefits of aligning business processes
with IT through the use of enterprise architecture as a collaboration
platform between aspects of business planning, business operations, and
automation. The first part of the book clarifies relationships among dif-
ferent kinds of architectures and discusses the role of various approaches
in helping to capture these architectures. Section 2 examines ways of
crossing enterprise, system, and software boundaries, such as the use of
RESTful architecture to tackle software diversity in mobile web systems,
and the use of genetic algorithms to search for key stakeholders. Section
3 gives examples and case studies on architecture processes, tools, and
techniques, and Section 4 presents industrial case studies in areas such
as architecture practice in an agile environment and adoption of cloud
computing. Mistrik is a systems engineering consultant.
HD30 2012-023254 978-1-4666-2527-3
Applying principles from IT architecture to strategic
business planning.
McKee, James.
Business Science Reference, ©2013 228 p. $175.00
Australian researcher McKee introduces the pertinent aspects of strategic
planning, information systems alignment and architecture, their inter-
action, and the importance of that interaction. His topics include research
–64–
methodology, whether it is necessary to plan strategically, approaches to
strategy development, improving strategic plan documentation, the why
and the benefits of architecture, a structure for strategic planning infor-
mation, and using the information architecture model.
HD30 2012-014682 978-0-12-415934-1
Collaborative enterprise architecture; enriching EA with
lean, agile, and Enterprise 2.0 practices.
Bente, Stefan. et al.
Morgan Kaufmann Pub., Inc., ©2012 310 p. $49.95 (pa)
This work for IT practitioners and managers uses a conversational style
and a sense of humor as it penetrates the shroud of mystery surrounding
enterprise architecture (EA). Part 1 defines EA, explains what enterprise
architects do, describes well-known frameworks for structuring EA tasks
and organizing an EA practice, and offers an overview of EA maturity
models. Part 2 sets out foundations and guidelines for collaborative EA,
discusses how EA can benefit from integration with Lean and Agile prin-
ciples, and reveals how to enrich traditional EA methodology with col-
laborative Enterprise 2.0 mechanisms. The guide concludes with advice
and next steps for enterprise architects who want to implement these
ideas in daily work. The book is illustrated with b&w photos, newspaper
cartoons, and many process diagrams and summary tables. Bente is a
consultant.
HD30 2012-028866 978-1-4398-6735-8
A comprehensive guide to enterprise mobility.
Sathyan, Jithesh et al. (Infosys Press series)
CRC Press, ©2013 527 p. $79.95
The concept of enterprise mobility has increasingly attracted attention in
a business ecosystem now taking tremendous advantage of advances in
mobility-related devices, solutions, platforms, and vendors. The authors
explain the basics from defining strategy to deployment and all stops in
between, explore the contributions mobility can make, and offer use
cases and implementation examples to allow readers to understand it in
practice. A random selection of topics includes: enterprise mobility land-
scape, mobility layers, application testing, solutions for retail and many
other diverse industries, mobile application design, and much more.
Authors Sathyan, Navin, Anoop, and Vallathai are professionals in
mobility project delivery.
HD30 2011934958 978-1-84720-044-0
Handbook of research on competitive strategy.
Title main entry. Ed. by Giovanni Battista Dagnino.
Edward Elgar Publishing, ©2012 597 p. $280.00
Similar to other research handbooks, this volume represents an effort to
survey the state of the art in competitive strategy research, however editor
Dagnino (U. of Catania, Italy) has also striven in his selections to uncover
and shed light on minor branches of the field of competitive strategy
research that have larger relevance for the overarching field of strategy.
A range of conceptual approaches are represented, including resource-
based theory, the network perspective, the social-cognitive perspective,
the competitive dynamics view, and the strategy-as-practice perspective.
Thematically and topically, it addresses governance, entrepreneurship,
family business, multinational enterprises, strategic alliances, innovation
and technology management, mergers and acquisitions, business-model
competition, trust-based strategies, the bridge between finance and
strategy, the relationship between ownership structure and strategy, and
“coopetition” (i.e., cooperative competition) strategy and impact on
business practice. It is also methodologically varied, including such
cutting-edge topics as quantitative methods, semiotic analysis, and com-
puter simulation modeling.
HD30 978-1-78190-024-6
History and strategy.
Title main entry. Ed. by Steven J. Kahl et al. (Advances in strategic
management; v.29)
Emerald Group Publishing, ©2012 350 p. $134.95
This work examines how history and strategy research can inform each
other and how historical analysis can be done within the field of strategy.
Chapter-length studies apply theoretical frameworks including institu-
tional entrepreneurship, industrial organization, political theory, and
business models. The studies use a range of empirical methods, from
single cases through large-sample statistical estimation. The first part of
the book looks at innovation, with chapters on the development of wi-fi
and licensing strategies in the absence of regulation. Part 2 explores
history and industry evolution, with material on the legitimization of the
universal credit card industry and introducing the M-Form in two Dutch
banks. Part 3 presents analytical narratives on the failure of institutional
–65–
entrepreneurship and the long-run success of Depression-era cultural
products. Kahl teaches business at Dartmouth College. There is no subject
index. The book is distributed in North America by Turpin Distribution.
HD30 2012-005391 978-1-4666-1873-2
Intelligence methods and systems advancements for
knowledge-based business.
Title main entry. Ed. by John Wang.
Information Science Reference, ©2013 367 p. $175.00
This volume reprints 17 papers originally published in the Journal of
Knowledge-based Organizations by IGI Publishing in 2011. The authors
explore knowledge-based decision making and management in clinical
practice, cloud computing, financial markets, product development,
urban planning, business strategy, workflow, and data mining. Topics
include ontologies for drug prescription, modeling operational robustness
with Petri nets, query optimization with rule mining, outsourcing among
knowledge-based service firms, and negotiating knowledge gaps in dis-
persed knowledge work.
HD30 2012-027468 978-0-85728-535-5
Knowledge governance; reasserting the public interest.
Title main entry. Ed. by Leonardo Burlamaqu et al. (The Anthem other
canon series)
Anthem Press, ©2012 269 p. $99.00
Economists argue that in order for policymaking to be effective, an inclu-
sionary knowledge governance approach is needed to supersede the
exclusionary nature of the existing intellectual property regime, and that
such an approach requires policymakers to counteract the globally pro-
duced and corporate sponsored exclusionary rules and regulations.
Among their topics are an analytical approach to knowledge governance
and its policy implications, catching up and knowledge governance, the
politics of pharmaceutical patent examination in Brazil, an interoper-
ability principle for knowledge creation and governance and the role of
emerging institutions in it, and the search for alternatives to patents in
the 21st century. No index is provided. Distributed in the US by Books
International, Incorporated.
HD30 2012-022421 978-1-4398-7702-9
The mastery of innovation; a field guide to lean product
development.
Radeka, Katherine.
CRC Press, ©2013 245 p. $49.95
This book details successful product development and marketing and is
appropriate for any business leader or developer. Each chapter delineates
ways in which specific companies have made successful use of one or
more aspects of the Lean strategy. Section one presents the definition of
Lean product development, explores value and waste, and introduces the
benchmarking study discussed in the book. Section two focuses on pio-
neers in Lean thinking, while section three focuses on successful
products and markets, and section four focuses on better, faster, and
cheaper production strategies. Section five examines transformation of
development methods and section six focuses on the application of the
presented strategies and tools. Format includes diagrams, bullet-points,
and brief sections to aid in comprehension, in addition to four appen-
dices which include materials for study groups and further research.
HD30 2011-046726 978-0-470-69514-2
Modelling under risk and uncertainty; an introduction to
statistical, phenomenological, and computational methods.
Rocquigny, Etienne de. (Wiley series in probability and statistics)
John Wiley & Sons, ©2012 434 p. $115.00
Rocquigny (U. of Paris-Saclay, France) explores modeling in general as a
support for decision making in artificial systems and in relation to life
and the natural environment, and uncertainty which he considers inti-
mately connected with modeling. Concentrating on quantitative models
and quantifiable uncertainty or risk indicators, he considers such aspects
as a general modeling framework; understanding the natures of uncer-
tainty, risk margins, and time bases for probabilistic decision-making;
combined model estimation through inverse techniques; computational
methods for risk and uncertainty propagation; and prospects of mod-
eling in the context of risk and uncertainty and further research.
HD30 2012-017234 978-1-4398-7865-1
The right measures; the story of a company’s journey to
find the true indicators of its success and values.
Nash, Mark A. and Sheila R. Poling.
CRC Press, ©2013 213 p. $49.95 (pa)
A narrated story follows the journey of a college graduate recently hired
by a manufacturer as he navigates the maze of metrics currently used
by the company to measure success and explores why the company
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
continues to lose money. The story focuses on the importance of defining
key performance indicators without going into the details of developing
a metrics program. A glossary is provided but no index.
HD30 2012-031354 978-1-4665-0449-3
Run grow transform; integrating business and lean IT.
Bell, Steven et al.
CRC Press, ©2013 336 p. $49.95 (pa)
Bell, who teaches at the Lean Enterprise Institute, presents workshops,
leads gemba walks, and advises clients on applying Lean information
technology principles and practices, shows leaders and senior managers
in all areas of a business how to integrate Lean principles into infor-
mation technology capabilities, to maximize customer value by reducing
waste and invest gains to create additional value through continuous
improvement and innovation. He describes principles and practices like
value streams, cross-functional teams, resource constraints, Lean-Agile
software development and IT service management, how to measure per-
formance, and Lean leadership and management, followed by a section
in which leaders in various IT areas (enterprise architecture, business
process management, service management, enterprise resource planning
and commercial off-the-shelf software, Lean-Agile software development,
integration and data management, and business intelligence) share their
perspectives on Lean thinking.
HD30 978-94-90947-71-2
Solving complex problems; professional group decision-
making support in highly complex situations. (online
access included)
de Haan, Alexander and Pauline de Heer.
Eleven International Publishing, ©2012 178 p. $52.50
De Haan, a teacher, and de Heer, a public sector consultant, present a
guide to solving complex problems. They contend that all too often solu-
tions are hastily demanded and the results show poor understanding of
the complexities inherent to the problems involved. They present a
method of complex-problem solving that focuses first on effective con-
ceptualization of problems that makes them explicit. They explain the
next step in their process as rationalizing, where the explicit criteria of a
problem are compared so alternatives can be imagined. Within these
major steps are a series of sub-steps that include stating the problem and
one’s goals, and identifying and diagramming causal relationships
among problem factors. To that end, the text advocates (and makes use
of) extensive diagramming and other mind-mapping techniques. The
book is intended for anyone interested in solving complex problems, but
is not explicitly scholarly. No index has been provided. Distributed in
North America by ISBS.
HD30 2011-053437 978-1-118-13426-9
Understanding business research.
Weathington, Bart L. et al.
John Wiley & Sons, ©2012 490 p. $130.00
Weathington (psychology), Christopher J. L. Cunningham (industrial-orga-
nizational and occupational health psychology and internal medicine,
both U. of Tennessee-Chattanooga), and David J. Pittenger (Marshall U.,
West Virginia) explain how business professionals can use research tech-
niques from the social and behavioral sciences to understand and work
with complex human processes in business and the workplace. They
assume readers have completed at least a general introduction to statistics
course, and so are profligate with such basic concepts as measures of
central tendency, measures of dispersion, and standard scores. An
overview is followed by sections on the nut and bolts of research,
common research designs, and special research designs.
HD31 2012-015768 978-1-4665-0949-8
Amoeba management; the dynamic management system
for rapid market response.
Inamori, Kazuo.
CRC Press, ©2013 150 p. $49.95
Managing a company that is much larger than 100 employees can be dif-
ficult, and Inamori, the original founder of Kyoto Ceramics, relates how
he first came up with the concepts of amoeba management and con-
tinued to develop them. The narrative is presented through the story of
Kyocera, the large multi-faceted company that developed from Kyoto
Ceramics, and explores the benefits of breaking the company into
smaller units, each of which maintains its own self-supporting
accounting. The book closes with five questions that came up during
Seiwajyuku Seminars (established to train heads of small to medium
companies in the principles of amoeba management) and Inamori’s
answers.
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
HD31 2011-410370 978-981-4335-97-3
Improving competitiveness of industry.
Bierman, Harold, Jr.
World Scientific, ©2011 134 p. $45.00
Bierman (Cornell U.) believes capital gains are a double tax on corporate
income, managers should be paid according to department performance,
and lower minimum wages will lead to more hourly wage jobs. He also
questions the value of discounted cash flow calculation for making
capital investment decisions and suggests encouraging stock ownership
among employees to boost productivity, ignoring the fact that stock prices
are volatile and rarely move in sync with company performance.
HD38 2012-026808 978-0-13-310102-7
Analysis without paralysis; 12 tools to make better
strategic decisions, 2d ed.
Bensoussan, Babette E. and Craig S. Fleisher.
FT Press, ©2013 273 p. $34.99
Intended for businesspeople, this book describes 12 of the most well-
known and commonly used techniques for analyzing a business’s market
and competitive environment, such as five forces industry, product life
cycle, SWOT, and value chain analysis. Each chapter defines the purpose
of a specific technique, evaluates its strengths and weaknesses, outlines
the steps for implementing the process, and provides at least one example
application. FT Press is an imprint of Pearson Education.
HD38 2012-024235 978-0-13-303943-6
Enterprise analytics; optimize performance, process, and
decisions through big data.
Title main entry. Ed. by Thomas H. Davenport.
Financial Times Prentice Hall, ©2012 268 p. $44.99
Members of the International Institute of Analytics (IIA) explain the pos-
sible benefits of analyzing a company’s proprietary data and describe the
different strategies and tools available for implementing analytics in both
small and large organizations. The 18 chapters discuss web data, online
engagement, analytics at production scale, analytics in the cloud,
placement of analysts within the organizational structure, and gover-
nance. Case studies share analytical experiences at Providers HealthCare,
Sears Holding, Merck, and Bernard Chaus.
HD38 2012-015725 978-1-4665-1034-0
Modeling of responsive supply chain.
Tiwari, M.K. et al. (IIT Kharagpur research monograph series)
CRC Press, ©2013 195 p. $139.95
Tiwari, who works in computational intelligence and its applications in
manufacturing and operations management, and coauthors who are
associated with the Indian Institute of Technology Kharagpur, offer this
guide for graduate students, scholars, and practitioners to aspects of
supply chain management that focuses on a responsive supply chain
approach to market forces. They address this approach through chapters
on domain interfaces and the importance of solving the optimization
problem; the importance of coordination through contracts in enhancing
responsiveness; system dynamics methodology to achieve responsiveness
while combining management principles, control theory, and computer
simulation; the use of different types of technologies; and building a
better supply chain targeted to achieve higher responsiveness.
HD38 2012-026272 978-1-4398-1640-0
Open source data warehousing and business intelligence.
Bulusu, Lakshman.
CRC Press, ©2013 398 p. $79.95
A 20-year veteran of information technology based in New Jersey,
Lakshman highlights the practical aspects of using open source data
warehousing and business intelligence technologies from an end-to-end
lifecycle perspective: from concepts through implementation to cus-
tomization. He concentrates on deciding factors, key design criteria and
methodologies, expert techniques, and best practices. The material could
be useful for any person or team involved in creating, implementing, or
operating open source systems but could also be interesting to
researchers, students, and instructors.
HD38 2012-012451 978-1-4221-6267-5
The outsiders; eight unconventional CEOs and their
radically rational blueprint for success.
Thorndike, William N., Jr.
Harvard Business Review Press, ©2012 251 p. $27.00
Thorndike, the managing director of an investment firm, examines eight
CEOs from the last several decades who succeeded in maximizing the
value of shareholder investment. He considers Tom Murphy of Capital
Cities Broadcasting, Henry Singleton of Teledyne, Bill Anders of General
–66–
Dynamics, John Malone of TCI, Katharine Graham of The Washington
Post Company, Bill Siritz of Ralston Purina, Dick Smith of General
Cinema, and Warren Buffet of Berkshire Hathaway. These CEOs, he
argues, understood that capital allocation is the CEO’s most important
job, that cash flow and now reported earnings are what determine long-
term value, that decentralization helps keep cost and “rancor” down, too
many advisers compromise independent thinking, and sometimes it
makes sense to buy your own stock. Each chapter studies these indi-
viduals’ rise and the rise of their companies. The final two chapters
develop winning character that Thorndike sees each of these CEOs
embodying.
HD38 2012-020293 978-1-4666-2098-8
Production and manufacturing system management;
coordination approaches and multi-site planning.
Title main entry. Ed. by Paolo Renna.
Engineering Science Reference, ©2013 357 p. $195.00
Fourteen contributions apply multi-agent methods to distributed archi-
tectures for production planning and supply chain management, the
design of distributed organizations, and general network interactions.
The studies compare approaches to auction trading by consortia in multi-
agent systems, assess distributed coordination in dynamic assignment of
time-critical entities among multiple sites, and model the production and
transportation decisions of a chemical company with two manufacturing
facilities. Other topics include a fuzzy hierarchical production planning
technique, small and medium enterprise project coordination, the rede-
fined role of consumer as prosumer, and e-learning with the Second Life
virtual world website.
HD38 2012-031946 978-1-4398-1198-6
Supply chain engineering; models and applications.
Ravindran, A. Ravi and Donald P. Warsing, jr. (The operations research
series)
CRC Press, ©2013 521 p. $129.95
Ravindran (industrial and manufacturing engineering, Pennsylvania
State Y.) and Warsing (operations and supply chain management, North
Carolina State U.) present a quantitative approach to solving problems
related to designing and operating supply chains that incorporates the
larger business context without letting it overwhelm the detailed tactical
problems. The book can be used in graduate or advanced undergraduate
courses in industrial engineering, in advanced graduate management
courses, or for technical professionals and researchers. They begin with
the first principles of establishing a quantitative toolkit for tactical
decision making in such areas as demand forecasting, inventory man-
agement, and transportation management. Mathematical precision and
optimization is emphasized throughout.
HD38 2012-025251 978-0-07-178082-7
Visualizing data with Microsoft Power View. (DVD-ROM
included)
Larson, Brian et al.
McGraw-Hill, ©2012 306 p. $30.00 (pa)
Microsoft’s Power View is a new report-authoring product designed as
an end user-friendly tool for data exploration—an offshoot of the
reporting environment developed by Microsoft’s Reporting Services team.
Larson, who was a member of that team, and fellow consultants
introduce the tabular BI Semantic Model that serves as a layer between
the data and report, and the related PowerPivot model. The book
includes learn by doing exercises; appendices covering installing and
configuring the sample data, and creating a virtual learning envi-
ronment; and a DVD with video demos, the sample data, completed
reports, and the Model.
HD41 2012-930626 978-1-78100-568-2
Recent advances in the analysis of competition policy and
regulation.
Title main entry. Ed. by Joseph E. Harrington and Yannis Katsoulacos.
Edward Elgar Publishing, ©2012 390 p. $160.00
This work presents selected papers from the July 2011 Sixth Annual
Conference of the Competition and Regulation European Summer School,
written by international contributors in management, finance, and eco-
nomics. Part 1 delves into competition policy and antitrust, with papers
on switching costs and network effects in competition policy and the eco-
nomics of pending patents. Part 2 considers online search, advertising,
and two-sided markets, with discussion of topics such as online adver-
tising and competition policy and unilateral merger effects in the Dutch
daily newspaper market. Part 3 addresses regulation, with chapters on
bargaining and collusion in a regulatory model and understanding the
electricity wholesale market in Spain using structural models. The final
section covers financial regulation, looking at areas such as rebuilding
–67–
international financial regulation and Basel III. Harrington teaches eco-
nomics at Johns Hopkins University. Katsoulacos teaches economics at
Athens University of Economics and Business, Greece.
HD42 2012-019654 978-81-321-0943-3
Peace is everybody’s business; a strategy for conflict
prevention.
Ray, Arjun.
Sage Publications, ©2012 233 p. $33.00
As a General with the Indian Army (now retired), Ray was assigned
command of the Army’s 14 Corps in North Kashmir in June of 2000,
where he helped oversee a program of “Sadbhavna” focused on human
development in militancy-prone areas in an effort to win over alienated
communities. Here he provides a step-by-step account of how the ideas
of “Sadbhavna” were developed within the Indian military, how the
program was implemented and evolved over time, and the lessons he
drew from the experience, which he judges to have been “a successful
sociopolitical strategy in conflict-prevention in one of India’s most sen-
sitive and remote regions.”
HD42 2005-027351 978-1-4331-1798-5
Problematic relationships in the workplace; v.2.
Title main entry. Ed. by Becky L. Omdahl and Janie M. Harden Fritz.
Peter Lang Publishing Inc, ©2012 346 p. $39.95 (pa)
This collection of essays looks at identifying and dealing with prob-
lematic behaviors in the workplace, as well as the consequences of letting
them persist. This new volume builds off Fritz (communication and
rhetorical studies, Duquesne U.) and Omdahl’s (arts & sciences,
Metropolitan State U.) earlier volume by the same name. This volume
presents a very similar book, but with new research and reviews. The
first couple chapters are by the editors. They introduce the concepts
developed in the first volume to think about problematic workplace rela-
tionships, as well as the five roles emotions play in these relationships.
The rest of the chapters are organized into three sections on problematic
behaviors, frameworks for understanding them, and ways to maintain or
restore effective relationships. Specific essays look at hostility, bullying,
incivility, ostracism and isolation, remote work tactics, the rise of bureau-
cracy, diversity in the workplace, tokenism, forgiveness, productivity
through healthy relationships, and professional civility. The contributors
include a preponderance of professors and scholars of communications,
but also of organizational psychology and rhetoric.
HD45 2012-027008 978-81-321-0722-4
Innovation management; strategies, concepts and tools for
growth and profit, 2d ed.
Maital, Shlomo and D.V.R. Seshadri.
Sage Publications, ©2012 523 p. $35.95 (pa)
The second edition of this case-based text/reference contains many new
mini-cases from 2007-2012, and a new emphasis on the consequences of
failing to innovate. Also new are action learning exercises, most related
to specific case studies. Part 1 of the book looks at strategies and con-
cepts for innovation, with chapters on reasons to innovate, deciding what
to innovate, identifying innovation opportunities, and how to innovate.
Part 2 examines tools for profit and growth, with material on price-cost-
value, hidden costs and benefits, trade-offs, markets and demand-driven
innovation, calculating risks, and collaboration. The book’s many cases
touch on diverse areas such as banking, restaurants, drug companies,
technology companies, manufacturing, and toys. Other learning features
include margin notes and key terms boxes. Maital is affiliated with the
Samuel Neaman Institute for National Policy Research, Israel. Seshadri
teaches marketing at the Indian Institute of Management, India.
HD45 2102-935312 978-1-78100-020-5
Managing open innovation; connecting the firm to
external knowledge.
Spithoven, André et al.
Edward Elgar Publishing, ©2012 327 p. $150.00
Open innovation has been loosely defined as “the use of purposive
inflows and outflows of knowledge to accelerate internal innovation, and
expand the markets for external use of innovation, respectively.” As the
authors (all of Vrije U. Brussel, Belgium) of this work note, the definition
is a bit fuzzy, but that is because the theory of open innovation has yet
to be fully fleshed out. They seek to expand the theoretical and empirical
understanding of open innovation by focusing on four key areas:
addressing firm heterogeneity in innovation performance due to the rel-
ative fixation on firm-level analysis in general and large firms in general;
stressing the role of government in shaping corporate open innovation
practices (especially in terms of networking); examining the implications
for internal research and innovation activity of the growing tendency
towards research and development outsourcings; and highlighting the
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
role of internal research and development personnel in a firm’s decision
to engage in open innovation practices. The empirical materials are
drawn primarily from the case of Belgium.
HD45 2012-005377 978-1-84816-899-2
Perspectives on supplier innovation; theories, concepts
and empirical insights on open innovation and the
integration of suppliers.
Title main entry. Ed. by Alexander Brem and Joe Tidd. (Series on tech-
nology management; v.18)
Imperial College Press, ©2012 692 p. $175.00
While open innovation is not considered new today, there are areas that
have not been sufficiently researched. As the editors note, more research
on how companies deal with suppliers has not been conducted because
the traditional focus over the last few years has been on customer
linkages. The editors and authors here address theories as well as
empirical insights and concepts of open innovation and integrating sup-
pliers. Topics include: collaborative product development, supplier inno-
vativeness and pricing, supplier strategies, procurement procedures,
managing offshore development, and more. Editors are Brem (U. of
Erlangen-Nuremberg, Germany) and Tidd (U. of Sussex, UK). Distributed
by World Scientific.
HD49 2011-020301 978-0-398-08681-7
Mega-crises; understanding the prospects, nature,
characteristics, and the effects of cataclysmic events.
Title main entry. Ed. by Ira Helsloot et al.
C.C. Thomas, ©2012 370 p. $79.95
The number of both natural disasters like earthquakes and tsunamis and
manmade catastrophes such as terrorist attacks and massive corporate
failures directly underscore the importance of crisis management, from
prevention and preparation to response and recovery. The authors here
analyze a variety of what they term mega-crises and offer a variety of
recommendations. The contents are grouped in four main topics: the
concept of mega-crisis and mega-crisis management, crisis management
of mega-natural disasters, management of man-made mega-crises, and
identifying mega-threats and vulnerabilities. Editors are Boin (public gov-
ernance and crisis management, Utrecht School of Governance, the
Netherlands), Comfort (public and international affairs, U. of Pittsburgh),
Helsloot (crisis management and politics of safety, the Netherlands), and
Jacobs (researcher, community resilience and urban crisis management).
HD56 2012-025211 978-1-4665-1073-9
Cross-functional productivity improvement.
Blank, Ronald.
CRC Press, ©2013 156 p. $49.95
Blank (aerospace industry professional, author, and former consultant)
offers what he describes simply as “what to do and what not to do in all
aspects of company operations” to maximize productivity through a
“cross-functional” approach to productivity management. He address tra-
ditional productivity improvement methods, productivity and human
resources, quality management systems, manufacturing, waste pre-
vention, motivation, process and manufacturing equipment reliability,
and more. A helpful glossary is included.
HD57 2012-012381 978-1-4221-8670-1
Indispensable; when leaders really matter.
Mukunda, Gautam.
Harvard Business Review Press, ©2012 301 p. $28.00
Mukunda (organizational behavior, Harvard Business School) states in
his preface that his book is an answer to the question: Can a person truly
be indispensable?” As a consequence, he offers a new way to determine
how and when leaders can actually make a difference, whether it’s a
president, military official, or company CEO. He analyzes the not so
obvious patterns of their careers as well as the environments and systems
that steered them to power.
HD57 2012-010371 978-0-7494-6619-0
Leading through leaders; driving strategy, execution and
change.
Tozer, Jeremy.
Kogan Page, ©2012 498 p. $39.95 (pa)
Tozer (leadership, strategy, and performance consultant) provides a guide
to improving business success by breaking down and solving internal
roadblocks. He advocates collective leadership as a solid strategy and
addresses in detail the principles, procedures, and behavior needed for
effective individual leadership and to create the environment needed for
that success. The author also illustrates his points through case studies
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
with clients such as Cisco and Best Western. The principles and tools he
discusses are intended to be adapted for any leader and a variety of lead-
ership environments.
HD57 2012-007735 978-0-7494-6692-3
Leadership transitions; how business leaders take charge
in new roles.
Elsner, Richard and Bridget Farrands.
Kogan Page, ©2012 196 p. $39.95 (pa)
Written for current or hopeful business leaders and focusing on tran-
sition, this book explores leadership roles within the corporate business
world, moving from common myths into realities, tensions, leadership
qualities, and tools, while the conclusion addresses how best to apply the
lessons of the book. Relying largely on bullet-points and lists for clear
delivery, the book includes real-world case studies and quotes from suc-
cessful leaders, as well as some checklists and diagrams. Elsner and
Farrands are both consultants and teachers and demonstrate a thorough
understanding of the subject matter.
HD57 2012-016291 978-1-4129-9426-2
Leading with communication; a practical approach to
leadership communication.
Gamble, Teri Kwal and Michael W. Gamble.
Sage Publications, ©2013 303 p. $58.00 (pa)
This introductory text acquaints students with leadership communication
and emphasizes theory and skill acquisition, application, and
enhancement to meet the leadership challenges of the development of a
global perspective, the aptitude to think and act like a leader to foster
change and innovation, and using technology to lead from a distance,
enhance leader visibility, and demonstrate credibility. The authors
define leadership and why it is tied to communicating, and discuss
ethical responsibilities, the leader/follower relationship, developing skills
like listening and storytelling, and using skills like leading through con-
flict, sharing power, promoting collaborative problem solving, and influ-
encing and inspiring others, as well as meeting the challenges of
diversity and culture, innovation, and social networking. Teri Gamble
(College of New Rochelle) and Michael Gamble (New York Institute of
Technology) are consultants for business and professional organizations
who write education and training materials, textbooks, and trade books.
HD57.7 978-1-84920-588-7
Key concepts in leadership.
Gosling, Johathan, et al. (Sage key concepts)
Sage Publications, ©2012 164 p. $100.00
Gosling (Center for Leadership Studies, University of Exeter, UK) outlines
the strengths and weaknesses of a wide range of intentional or voluntary
and temporary or permanent leadership styles. The leadership styles are
not presented as good or bad, but simply as appropriate for different sit-
uations. After an introduction charting the development of the field of
leadership styles, each brief chapter contrasts two types of leadership,
such as authoritarian and participative leadership; employee leading and
volunteer leading; Eastern-style and Western-style leadership; and interim
leadership and tenured leadership. Each entry describes leadership con-
cepts and options and gives practical examples in the form of real-life
first-person stories.
HD59 2011-932343 978-0-534-63706-4
Strategic public relations; an audience-focused approach.
Diggs-Brown, Barbara.
Wadsworth Publishing Co., ©2012 498 p. $126.95 (pa)
This comprehensive textbook for undergraduate majors and non-majors
is based on the premise that public relations is a management function
that must be coordinated with an organization’s other management divi-
sions. There is an emphasis on audience diversity throughout. After a
review of the roles of PR practitioners and strategy in public relations,
sections cover foundations of the field and the implementation and eval-
uation of strategic public relations campaigns. One section is devoted to
written, spoken, visual media, and interactive media PR tactics. A final
section considers public relations practice in contexts such as the cor-
porate and nonprofit sectors, politics and government, and international
contexts. The book’s two-color layout offers b&w photos and examples of
documents, advertisements, and web sites. Other learning features
include brief cases, ethics boxes, personal comments by real-life profes-
sionals, review and discussion questions, and web links. Appendices
present various ethics codes. An instructor website is available. Diggs-
Brown is founding executive director of American University’s Institute
for Strategic Communication for Nonprofits.
–68–
HD60 2012-935283 978-1-84980-840-8
Community co-production; social enterprise in remote and
rural communities.
Title main entry. Ed. by Jane Farmer et al.
Edward Elgar Publishing, ©2012 178 p. $99.95
Farmer (rural health management and policy, La Trobe University,
Australia) brings together international contributors in areas such as
social gerontology, health and social policy, and social anthropology. They
report on Older People for Older People (O4O), a project to involve older
people in the design and delivery of services for elders in Scotland,
Northern Ireland, Greenland, Sweden, and Finland. The case study of the
O4O project sheds light on community social enterprise in rural areas,
but also has implications for other settings. Some areas discussed include
organizational processes, sustaining social organizations in rural areas,
and measuring the value of social organizations as rural service
providers. The book will be of interest to community members, planners,
service providers, and policymakers.
HD60 2011-942541 978-1-84844-965-7
Handbook of research methods on social
entrepreneurship.
Title main entry. Ed. by Richard G. Seymour.
Edward Elgar Publishing, ©2012 261 p. $169.95
Edited by Seymour (U. of Sydney Business School, Australia), this
research handbook, written with early career researchers in mind,
explores research methods with particular relevance for the context and
phenomena of social entrepreneurship. The ten included chapters are
organized around four broad themes (although specific methods and
approaches are addressed in each chapter): “curiosity,” with discussion
of the general contours of social entrepreneurship and the philosophies
of science that impact its study; “posture,” meaning the research strategy
or position that helps determine associated research methods whether
they be with regards to sources of data, participation or involvement in
the project, and scope of study; “gathering” of data for such research
activities as social network analysis, discourse analysis, and the quanti-
tative methods associated with large data sets; and “voice” of the
researcher.
HD62 2012-014946 978-0-07-179742-9
The entrepreneurial instinct; how everyone has the innate
ability to start a successful small business.
Mehta, Monica.
McGraw-Hill, ©2013 205 p. $25.00
Inspired by the success of her parents, Mehta explores what makes some
people naturally better at starting a business and suggests strategies for
adopting those traits. The physiology that gives natural risk takers their
edge shows up in the regions of the brain driving fear and motivation,
and brain chemistry allows entrepreneurs to find inspiration for new
products and services all around them. Stories from successful entre-
preneurs illustrate how to get new products to market quickly with
minimal capital, incorporate customer feedback, and turn belief into
reality.
HD62 2012-935253 978-1-84542-830-3
Family business dynamics; a role and identity based
perspective.
Hall, Annika.
Edward Elgar Publishing, ©2012 172 p. $99.95
Hall (Jönköping International Business School, Sweden) examines how
and why family relations influence the dynamics of family owned busi-
nesses. Her main argument is that family relations result in an inherent
dynamic that can help provide a continuous advantageous to business
development if the family is able to meet the inherent challenges of role
transition as individuals exit and enter roles in the family business over
time. This argument is presented on the basis of a role- and identity-
based perspective and is supported by analysis of in-depth case studies
of three family firms (only one of which is explicitly discussed as illus-
tration of the theory presented).
HD62 2012-930795 978-1-4354-6012-6
From passion to execution; how to start and grow an
effective nonprofit organization.
Scott, Lyn.
Course Technology PTR, ©2013 316 p. $29.99 (pa)
Lyn, The vice president/CFO of a social service organization explains all
aspects of actualizing one’s passion for service through a 501©(3) non-
profit organization, including research, legal issues, managing, training
–69–
volunteers, funding, and communicating with audiences. The guide
includes inspirational quotes, case studies, sample bylaws and forms,
and information on filing the nonprofit with the IRS and one’s state.
HD62 2012-024326 978-1-4665-6328-5
Implementing standardized work; measuring operators’
performance.
Patchong, Alain. (The one day expert)
CRC Press, ©2013 85 p. $19.95 (pa)
Each volume in the series will focus on a single aspect of standardized
work with the goal of allowing readers to understand it and be able to
implement it in one day. This first volume explains how to measure the
performance of operators and how to monitor their improvement over
time. The method can be automated easily and so require no labor con-
sumption, Patchong says, and is grounded in the mastery of variability,
one of the basic laws of factory physics.
HD62 2009-008462 978-1-4398-5987-2
Leading the lean enterprise transformation, 2d ed.
Koenigsaecker, George.
CRC Press, ©2013 121 p. $49.95
Author Koenigsaecker, a principal investor in many Lean enterprises who
has held senior management positions in finance, marketing, and oper-
ations, offers a second edition of his book on Lean business transfor-
mation with a specific focus on the three “critical to success” elements.
He provides insights through his experiences with corporate transforma-
tions, a detailed definition of Lean, understanding measurement in terms
of quality improvement and human development (and more), the impor-
tance of value stream analysis, tactical and strategic practices, and
building a Lean culture. Additional information is included in a number
of appendices.
HD62 2012-001416 978-1-4516-0846-5
Managing a nonprofit organization; updated twenty-first-
century ed.
Wolf, Thomas.
Free Press, ©2012 386 p. $18.00 (pa)
Wolf, an international consultant associated with a firm that serves the
nonprofit and philanthropic sector, assists nonprofit administrators and
managers in managing their organizations. Incorporating case examples
throughout, he discusses understanding nonprofits, the board, assem-
bling the workforce, personnel policies, marketing, financial man-
agement, financial statements and fiscal procedures, fundraising,
planning, leadership, and improvement in operations and programs.
This edition incorporates material on the challenges faced by nonprofit
managers that are a result of the legislative and policy changes enacted
after 9/11 and the economic collapse of 2008, as well as changes to the
field in relation to the impact of technology, increased accountability and
transparency, and renewed emphasis on sustainability.
HD62 2012-015719 978-1-4398-8505-5
Total quality management for project management.
Pries, Kim H. and Jon M. Quigley.
CRC Press, ©2013 270 p. $69.95
Product development consultants explain the role of metrics and
requirements in project management and the purpose of Pareto charts,
scatter plots, control charts, flow charts, bar graphs, checklists, project
estimation techniques, scheduling, communication, risk management,
and controlled termination. At the beginning of each chapter, a project
manager scenario illustrates when to use work breakdown structures, a
statement of work, failure modes and effects analysis, and maturity
models. Appendices provide a sample test and evaluation master plan,
test and inspection master plan, and product verification.
HD66 2012-035016 978-1-4398-5543-0
Team planning for project managers and business
analysts.
Levitt, Gail. (ESI international project management series)
CRC Press, ©2013 207 p. $69.95
Levitt (president, Levitt Communications Inc., and former marketing
administrator and business development strategist) provides recommen-
dations and insights into developing teams able to prosper in today’s
global marketplace. The author addresses a variety of relevant topics,
including: team planning in a project environment, team evaluation and
transformation, succession planning, and the future of teams as it relates
to the necessity for team development planning, coaching, managing
upward, career resiliency, managing relationships, and more.
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
HD69 978-81-7708-315-6
Advertising and brand building; principles and case
studies.
Title main entry. Ed. by K. Pongiannan.
New Century Pub. (New Delhi), ©2012 194 p. $38.25
Editor Pongiannan (Commerce-Government Arts College, India) presents
14 papers on the elements of advertising and brand development. Topics
include: the importance of sensory branding in marketing, the role of
brand equity and brand preference, celebrity advertising, television
advertising, service quality and customer satisfaction, customer rela-
tionship management in manufacturing, and case studies on integrated
marketing communications, customer satisfaction, and customer
behavior. Distributed in North America by ISBS.
HD69 2012-034568 978-0-13-335285-6
Attack your day!; before it attacks you.
Woods, Mark and Trapper Woods.
Financial Times Prentice Hall, ©2013 200 p. $19.99 (pa)
Mark Woods, an entrepreneur and the late Trapper Woods, a corporate
consultant, business owner, and speaker who specialized in time man-
agement, work-life balance, and customer service, help readers manage
their time and become more productive. They argue that activities are
more important than the clock and detail how to become an activity
manager. They explain how each person has the gift of time, energy, and
choice and can maximize these gifts by implementing the skills of
choosing, tracking, arranging, and focusing on activities, and adapting to
changes. They end with 101 productivity strategies. The book lacks an
index.
HD69 2012-024766 978-1-935589-56-3
Contextualization of project management practice and
best practice.
Besner, Claude and Brian Hobbs.
Project Management Institute, ©2012 127 p. $34.95 (pa)
This book contributes to the understanding of project management
practice via a large-scale survey study of 108 common project man-
agement practices, tools, and techniques. After discussion of the study’s
objectives and organization, the book moves into detailed examination of
project management practice, methodology, contextual variables and per-
formance measurement, generic and contextual variation in project man-
agement practices, and best practices. Engineering and construction
projects, IT and telecommunication, software development, and financial
and business services are examined, with a focus on cluster analysis. The
study reveals no correlation between best and common practices.
Includes extensive appendices, including nineteen toolsets.
HD69 2012-935268 978-1-84844-535-2
Current issues in project analysis for development.
Title main entry. Ed. by John Weiss and David Potts.
Edward Elgar Publishing, ©2012 290 p. $125.00
Project analysis techniques have been used to assess development projects
for more than five decades, and the authors recognize that those tech-
niques can yield badly designed projects that waste resources. Their
study looks at the relevance of those techniques today and examines
developments that have occurred and current problems that result from
applying them. Some issues addressed include: estimating a shadow
exchange rate, environmental valuation, assessing the benefits of new or
improved roads, cost effectiveness in health, measuring benefits in edu-
cation, and European Union regional policy. Editors are Weiss (devel-
opment economics, U. of Bradford, UK) and Potts (lecturer, Bradford
Centre for International Development, U. of Bradford).
HD69 2012-010762 978-1-4398-9651-8
Determining project requirements; mastering the BABOK
and the CBAP exam, 2d ed.
Jonasson, Hans. (ESI international project management series)
CRC Press, ©2013 385 p. $69.95
Jonasson (Project Management Professional and member, Project
Management Institute) has written an updated second edition of his self-
study guide to preparing for the Certified Business Analysis Professional
(CBAP) examination, and covers the latest version of the Business
Analysis Body of Knowledge 2.0 (BABOK). New CBAP preparatory sec-
tions include 300 questions. He also includes best practices, tools, and
techniques on requirements gathering processes in their organizations
and includes a case study, sample solutions, and exercises to describe sit-
uations that may occur during the requirements gathering process.
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
HD69 2012-016879 978-1-60427-060-0
Enterprise project portfolio management; building
competencies for R&D and IT investment success.
Bayney, Richard M.
J. Ross Publishing, ©2012 356 p. $69.95
Stressing the need to embed active and prescriptive portfolio man-
agement in the organization, Bayney, a business consultant, provides an
orientation to strategic planning and enterprise project portfolio man-
agement for new and seasoned project portfolio management practi-
tioners, financial managers, resource managers, and strategists who are
responsible for advising executives. The book is also useful for graduate
students and for entrepreneurs in traditional and innovative areas. After
a review of basic concepts, one section is devoted to scenario analysis,
strategic planning, decision framing, and data integrity as pre-requisites
for enterprise project portfolio management. Part 3 presents a complete
framework for enterprise project portfolio management, covering ele-
ments such as project categorization, risk analysis, and portfolio opti-
mization. Two case studies follow an R&D portfolio from drug discovery
to market, and an IT portfolio with discovery, project, and asset phases.
Appendices offer primers in decision analysis and mathematical pro-
gramming. The book includes summary charts and process diagrams.
HD69 2012-012383 978-1-4221-8711-1
HBR guide to getting the right work done.
Title main entry.
Harvard Business Review Press, ©2012 184 p. $19.95 (pa)
From trying to construct a useful to-do list to handling email overload,
many people experience the sense of being overwhelmed in the
workplace. The 26 pieces presented here, plus additional recommended
productivity books, tools and apps are all designed to help today’s
employee prioritize and accomplish more—without increasing their time
at the office or their stress levels. Most of the short articles are
adaptations of online postings or excerpts from other Harvard Business
Review publications.
HD69 2012-019964 978-1-60427-079-2
Managing business analysis services; a framework for
sustainable projects and corporate strategy success.
Davis, Barbara.
J. Ross Publishing, ©2012 232 p. $54.95
Written as a reference for CIOs, business analysis managers, consulting
firms, recruiters, business analysts, and project managers, this book
seeks to enact positive change within challenging business and tech-
nology projects by teaching the reader how to effectively manage
resources and processes in business analysis. The book focuses on fiscal
responsibility especially regarding technology, as well as planning, man-
aging, delivering, and sustaining effective business analysis services and
practices. Section one compares business analysis theories to practices
and discusses optimizing stewardship. Section two examines aspects of
resource, structural, and performance management. Section three
explores service delivery and engagement models. The fourth section dis-
cusses transition strategies and implementation. Each section includes a
conclusion and figures to aid comprehension.
HD69 2012-935255 978-1-84720-910-8
Management consulting; 2v.
Title main entry. Ed. by Stephanos Avakian and Timothy Clark. (The
international library of critical writings on business and management;
v.20)
Edward Elgar Publishing, ©2012 1229 p. $720.00
To make their selections for this two-volume compendium of previously
published articles and excerpts, editors Avakian (U. of Brighton, UK) and
Clark (Durham U., UK) asked researchers in the field to identify publi-
cations they regarded as “essential reading,” and they tapped into elec-
tronic journal databases to identify citation counts. Combining these two
approaches they assembled a long list, and then winnowed that list,
coming up with a selection of 58 writings. Organization is in sections on
the history of the field of management consulting; organizational devel-
opment and critical perspectives on management consulting work;
industry dynamics and the management of knowledge; organizational
learning and knowledge management; and the client-consultant rela-
tionship. Sources include such publications as Research Policy, Asia Pacific
Business Review, Sociological Review, and International Studies of
Management and Organization, among others. There is no indexing.
–70–
HD69 2012-015149 978-81-321-0757-6
Management consulting in India; practice and experiences
for business excellence.
Title main entry. Ed. by Srivatava, U.K. and Pramila Srivatava
Sage Publications, ©2012 472 p. $36.00 (pa)
Citing a need for more sharing of experience in various functional and
educational areas of management consulting in India, particularly
among small and individual consultants who have largely had to learn
the process through trial and error, the editors (the chairman and exec-
utive director of P.S. Software Services Private Limited, Ahmedabad,
India) present 20 chapters that review experiences and lessons from
Indian management consultants across a range of subject areas,
including strategic marketing, international marketing, brand man-
agement, human resources development, executive search, mergers and
acquisitions, project finance, e-governance, corporate governance, insti-
tution building, mentoring in entrepreneurship, and information tech-
nology consulting.
HD69 2012-014271 978-1-935589-58-7
Managing conflict in projects; applying mindfulness and
analysis for optimal results.
Pitagorsky, George.
Project Management Institute, ©2012 132 p. $29.95 (pa)
Appropriate for any member of a project team, this guide encourages
project managers to define common objectives and values, remain open-
minded during conflict, and recognize the need for adaptability in the
face of complex interpersonal relationships. The seven-step approach
incorporates conflict analysis, the Thomas-Kilman conflict mode model,
emotional intelligence, cultural awareness, and techniques for building
rapport. No index is provided.
HD69 2012-022038 978-1-4665-0383-0
The PMP certification exam study guide. (CD-ROM
included)
Nocera, Rosaldo de Jesus.
CRC Press, ©2013 716 p. $79.95 (pa)
Nocera, an author and consultant in Brazil who has worked in the
project management field and as a civil engineer, supplies project man-
agement professionals with a study guide for the Project Management
Institute’s Project Management Professional certification exam that covers
its nine knowledge areas and 42 processes, as well as ethics and profes-
sional responsibility. It includes a pre-test, description of concepts, about
500 questions with answers and explanations, exercises, memorization
games, study tips, equations, flowcharts and graphs, and a CD with
exercise questions and two posters for process visualization.
HD69 2012-024639 978-1-4665-1687-8
Program management; a life cycle approach.
Title main entry. Ed. by Ginger Levin. (Best practices and advances in
program management)
CRC Press, ©2013 541 p. $79.95
How do strategic goals get translated into actions? This is the role of
program management, and this collection of articles by 23 international
contributors outlines some of the key ideas. It is appropriate for both the
established program manager or those seeking the Program Management
Professional (PgMP) credential. The papers regularly reference the The
Standard for Program Management prepared by the Project Management
Institute (PMI). Levin is a consultant in portfolio, program, and project
management and holds adjunct positions at University of Wisconsin—
Platteville, SKEMA (France) and RMIT (Australia).
HD75 2012935292 978-0-85793-327-0
Furthering environmental impact assessment; towards a
seamless connection between EIA and EMS.
Title main entry. Ed. by Anastássios Perdicoúlis et al.
Edward Elgar Publishing, ©2012 245 p. $120.00
Noting a doubled and disconnected perspective in assessing environ-
mental impacts of investment projects between before-project environ-
mental impact assessments (EIA) and post-project environmental
management systems (EMS), Perdicoúlis (U. of Trá-os-Montes and Alto
Douro, Portugal), Durning (Oxford Brookes U., England), and Palframan
(U. of Hertfordshire, England) seek a greater harmony between the two
approaches at the project level continuum by presenting 12 chapters that
explore the current state of EIA-EMS integration through case studies of
current practice in a range of sectors. Chapters discuss the relationship
between project environmental planning and management and the con-
tribution of information and knowledge management; the documents
and tasks in EIA and EMS processes; current usages of the concept of the
environmental management plan; frameworks for linking EIA and EMS
in the varying contexts of the Vietnamese industrial sector, Iran’s oil
–71–
sector, a wind farm in Scotland, waste management infrastructure in the
UK, and flood risk management in England and Wales; a proposal for a
“Sustainability Management System” (SMS) that integrates consideration
of environmental and societally issues at all stages of project planning
and delivery; and application of such an SMS approach to transport
sector cases in Australia and the UK.
HD76 2012-027006 978-81-321-0905-1
Media, communication and development; three
approaches.
Manyozo, Linje.
Sage Publications, ©2012 258 p. $33.00 (pa)
In this work for policymakers, practitioners, academics, and students,
author Manyozo (media and communications, London School of
Economics and Political Science) examines the work of Nora C. Quebral,
a pioneering thinker in the field of development communication, and her
division of the field into three approaches: media for development, media
development, and participatory and community communication. The
author describes the nature of each approach, noting that while the first
two approaches are more media-oriented, the third relies more on inter-
personal communication, and cites examples from around the world. In
the final chapter, the author reconfigures the approaches in terms of
Robin Mansell’s typology of participation, power, and policy. The book is
illustrated with b&w photos and screenshots.
HD79 2012935280 978-1-84980-452-3
Globalization and inequality.
Title main entry. Ed. by Branko Milanovic. (Globalization of the world
economy; v.25)
Edward Elgar Publishing, ©2012 624 p. $365.00
The 22 readings collected here by Milanovic (lead economist at The World
Bank Research Department in Washington, DC) offer empirical analyses
of issues of globalization and income inequality. Opening articles
examine “Globalization I” (the period between 1870 and 1914, charac-
terized by greater movements of labor than “Globalization II”) and
changes in national and global inequality. Attention then shifts to the
contemporary period of neoliberal ascendancy, with readings reviewing
and analyzing within-national inequalities in developed countries as well
as in China, Russia, India, and Latin America. The next set of articles
considers more specifically the questions of how trade, direct foreign
investment, and/or outsourcing have impacted within-national income
inequalities. The final set of papers shift from discussing within-country
inequality to a look at the impact of recent globalization trends on broad
global inequality.
HD79 978-3-8329-7299-8
Sustainable development—how to bridge the knowledge-
action gap?; Exploring the Added Value of Social and
Culture Perspectives.
Title main entry. Ed. by Michael Meimeth and John D. Robertson.
(Denkart Europa; schriften zur europäischen politik, wirtschaft und
kultur; v.18)
Nomos, ©2012 185 p. $31.00 (pa)
Contributors from the humanities and social sciences explore the chal-
lenges of integrating social and cultural discourses and strategies with
policy objectives regarding sustainable development and with the data
gathered by the natural sciences. Among the perspectives are sustain-
ability and self-referentiality in social and cultural systems, towards a
sustainable energy policy in Europe, sustainable development as part of
security policy in the US and in Europe, and the American dilemma over
global warming. The seven studies are from an October 2009 symposium
at Texas A&M University. They are not indexed. Distributed in the US by
ISBS.
HD87 2012-935328 978-1-78100-503-3
The economics of Edwin Chadwick; incentives matter.
Ekelund, Robert B. Jr., and Edward O. Price III.
Edward Elgar Publishing, ©2012 246 p. $99.95
Primarily known for his work in England to improve sanitation and
reform the Poor Laws, Chadwick labored in relative obscurity in his
efforts to both add to and revise economic thinking. Ekelund, Jr. (eco-
nomics, Auburn U.) and Price III (economics and legal studies,
Oklahoma State U.) make the case here that he was actually well ahead
of his time in his writings, anticipating developments at the intersection
of economics and law that would only be considered by others in the late
20th century.
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
HD111 2011-048308 978-0-8070-0324-4
The land grabbers; the new fight over who owns the
Earth.
Pearce, Fred.
Beacon Press, ©2012 326 p. $27.95
Experienced ecological journalist Fred Pearce documents vast illegal and
quasi-legal international land sales. The scale and grotesqueness of the
land-theft situations he encounters is staggering. Though the book is
packaged to preach to the choir, its style is journalistic and based on
extensive investigative research. In a globetrotting book, Pearce some-
times relies on the reader to understand situations behind the facts on
the ground. Experienced readers will understand relationships between
the dilemmas of African ecotourism, national management of wildlife
refuges in inhabited areas, and corrupt billionaires carving out fiefdoms
from which to steal resources, for instance. While chapters focus on
Brazillian land theft in South America and Chinese land theft in Asia,
most of the book is about land theft in Africa by groups from the US,
Europe, Russia, and oil-producing Arab nations. Between the lines, a
picture of land grabs emerges: systems that depend on writing encounter
oral cultures with land. Local people have no documents of ownership of
public lands, and profiteers and con artists converge from all sides.
Pierce focuses on international “investors” or “saviors” who make short-
term private profits by taking over farmland and destroying public wild
lands in developing countries. Readers in industrialized countries may
recognize similar situations domestically with traditional and public
lands. The book ends by opposing the biofuels industry and supporting
the practicality of subsistence farming.
HD131 2011-934811 978-1-84376-404-5
Handbook of knowledge and economics.
Title main entry. Ed. by Richard Arena et al.
Edward Elgar Publishing, ©2012 530 p. $260.00
The editors (all of the U. of Nice Sophia Antipolis, France) present a col-
lection of 21 papers examining both foundational and cutting-edge
approaches and concepts concerning the role of knowledge in economics.
Opening chapters examine the role of knowledge in economics history,
revisiting ideas from Vilfredo Pareto, Alfred Marshall, Carl Menger,
Friedrich von Wieser, Kenneth Boulding, Friedrich von Hayek, and
Herbert Simon, among others. The next set of papers explore the con-
ceptions, role, and use of knowledge in economics in general and include
discussions of cognitive explanations of economic behavior, the theory of
the generation and utilization of knowledge, models of adaptive learning
in game theory, the fragility of experiential knowledge, and the value of
knowledge in finance. The last set of contributions shift focus more
explicitly to the role of knowledge in organizations and includes discus-
sions of the notion of embodied cognition in networks, an evolutionary
conceptualization of the role of knowledge in economics, the concept of
tacit knowledge, knowledge shared by communities of practice, modeling
the organization of knowledge, and the implications of distributed
knowledge for organizations.
HD1289 978-81-7708-320-0
Common property resources and human rights; politics
of water struggles in India.
George, Rose Mary.
New Century Pub. (New Delhi), ©2012 271 p. $52.50
George (political science, Providence Women’s College, India) explores the
impact of globalization, privatization, and liberalization on common
property resources, particularly surface and ground water, through the
analysis of two India-based case studies: the Plachimada water rights
movement battling the monopolization of water resources by Coca-Cola
in the state of Kerala and the struggles against the privatization of the
Sheonath river in the state of Chhattisgarh. Her analysis utilizes elements
of human rights and social movement theory in order to assess how local
peoples strategize and mobilize against industrial monopolies over water
rights. Distributed in North America by ISBS.
HD1531 2012-022350 978-0-8263-5172-2
The roots of conservatism in Mexico; Catholicism, society,
and politics in the Mixteca Baja, 1750-1962.
Smith, Benjamin T.
U. of New Mexico Press, ©2012 432 p. $34.95 (pa)
This ethno-historical study asks why, over a period of 200 years, Mexican
peasants seeking greater rights have been aligned with conservative reli-
gious groups rather than radical political groups. Smith (Michigan State
University) explains how the peasants of the Mixteca Baja have under-
stood their relationship to their community and the broader Mexican
nation for the past 200 years. Much of the book is comprised of a careful
reconstruction of the Mixteca Baja’s social relations and religious culture,
drawing on the region’s parish records as well as writings by priests who
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
were ordered by the bishop of the Mixteca Baja to keep diaries. The book
is also concerned with the political interaction between local actors, oppo-
sition parties, and national governments. The first chapter outlines the
regional moral economy during the colonial period, and later chapters
continue the chronological narrative through the armed religious
uprisings against communist influences in the early 1960s.
HD2072 978-81-7708-324-8
Agriculture, rural banking and micro finance in India.
Title main entry. Ed. by Rais Ahmad.
New Century Pub. (New Delhi), ©2012 236 p. $47.95
Twelve papers explore how access to financial services in rural Indian
markets can be expanded through strategic alliances between financial
intermediaries and other commercial and developmental institutions.
Indian academics assess the state of food security in India, describe the
role of NGOs in funding entrepreneurs, summarize the financial
inclusion measures recommended by the Reserve Bank of India, and
report the performance of regional rural banks. Distributed in North
America by ISBS.
HD2321 2012-001793 978-0-8133-4729-5
The industrial revolution in world history, 4th ed.
Stearns, Peter N.
Westview Press, ©2013 318 p. $40.00 (pa)
Placing the roots of the industrial revolution in Britain in the 1770s,
Stearns (history, George Mason U.) from there seeks to provide global
perspective on the causes and consequences of industrial revolution(s)
around the world. His treatment considers consequences for social,
political, economic, and cultural structures in different settings; provides
analysis of the dynamics of the industrial revolution as it played out in
early and later centers of development around the world; and addresses
major issues arising from the contemporary globalization of
industrialism.
HD2341 2012-935301 978-0-85793-703-2
Tax evasion and the shadow economy.
Title main entry. Ed. by Michael Pickhardt and Aloys Prinz.
Edward Elgar Publishing, ©2012 200 p. $110.00
Pickhardt (Brandenburg U. of Technology, Germany) and Prinz (U. of
Münster, Germany) present eight papers selected from presentations orig-
inally given at a July 2009 international conference on “The Shadow
Economy, Tax Evasion and Social Norms.” Following the keynote address
on the design of alternative strategies to reduce tax evasion, papers
discuss such topics as an estimate by taxpayer type of personal income
tax evasion in Italy, female versus male attitudes towards tax fraud in
Spain, estimates of the non-observed economy in the European Union
countries, the shadow economy and systemic transformation in Poland,
the impact of the shadow economy on the Country Risk Index, and
lessons on criminal networks from the Bernard Madoff case in the
United States.
HD2346 2012-005128 978-981-4317-85-6
Leverage innovation capability; application of total
innovation management in China’s SMEs’ study.
Title main entry. Ed. by Qingrui Xu et al.
World Scientific, ©2012 507 p. $128.00
The editors (of the Chinese Academy of Engineering and Zhejiang U.,
China) present the results of a research project dedicated to the investi-
gation of ways to leverage indigenous innovative capabilities and com-
petitiveness of Chinese small and medium enterprises in Zhegiang and
other provinces via application of total innovation management (TIM)
theory. After introducing the theoretical background and framework of
total innovation management, chapters address mechanisms of lever-
aging innovation capability via: vision and strategy, technology inno-
vation and its management, organizational innovation, market
orientation and related elements, corporate culture and all-involvement
innovation, entrepreneurs in small and medium enterprises, networks
and all time-space innovation, and cluster innovation systems. A final
chapter addresses policy recommendations and ten case studies are pre-
sented in an appendix.
HD2346 2012-935332 978-1-78100-627-6
Market platforms, industrial clusters and small business
dynamics; specialized markets in China.
Ke, Ding.
Edward Elgar Publishing, ©2012 238 p. $125.00
Ke (research, East Asian Studies Group, IDE-JETRO, Japan) examines the
phenomenon of specialized markets and their effects on market access,
value chains, and the business environment for small businesses in the
developing world. Specific topics addressed include: special markets and
–72–
small business dynamics in China, local government and platform gov-
ernance in Yiwu (a city in the province of Zhejiang, China), producer-dis-
tributor relationships in the Yiwu market, overseas linkages and
specialized markets, local government and inter-platform competition,
and the typology of apparel clusters in China. End of chapter notes and
an extensive bibliography are included.
HD2365 2012-009688 978-1-4666-2008-7
Outsourcing management for supply chain operations and
logistics services.
Title main entry. Ed. by Dimitris Folinas.
Business Science Reference, ©2013 562 p. $185.00
Logistics and supply chain management has been an important part of
all economies and business, and both sciences have become well-
regarded areas of research over the past few years. The studies and dis-
cussions in the book, and the focus on the major players involved in
logistics outsourcing to outside companies, are intended to analyze
logistics outsourcing services from the perspective of providers and their
clients, promote best practices, offer final results of research on the
deployment of outsourcing practice, define industry trends, and define
outsourcing and its primary parameters. Editor is Folinas (logistics, ATEI-
TH, Greece.
HD2785 2011-048739 978-0-8070-0094-6
Ethical chic; the inside story of the companies we think
we love.
Hawthorne, Fran.
Beacon Press, ©2012 181 p. $25.95
New York City-based journalist Hawthorne has been a writer or editor for
a number of publications, including Fortune, BusinessWeek, and
Institutional Investor. Incorporating input from consumer, labor, environ-
mental, human rights, and animal-welfare activists, and business and
ethics experts, she investigates the trend of consumer interest in “cool”
and “hip” companies that are believed to embrace corporate social
responsibility. Hawthorne critically examines six popular businesses—
Tom’s of Maine, Timberland, Starbucks, Apple, Trader Joe’s, and
American Apparel—to discover how they operate, what customers and
activists say about them, why they are viewed as ethical and cool, and
what they do to try to achieve those images. Her concluding assessments
of how “ethically chic” each of the companies actually is—or is not—may
surprise some readers. No subject index has been provided.
HD3612 978-0-8213-9615-5
Doing business 2013; smarter regulations for small and
medium-size enterprises, 10th ed.
Title main entry.
The World Bank, ©2013 270 p. $35.00 (pa)
This report/reference for policymakers and researchers uses 11 indicator
sets to measure current business regulations in 185 countries. The report
points to important trends in regulatory reform and identifies the regions
and economies making the biggest improvements for local entrepreneurs.
It also reviews research on which regulatory reforms have worked and
how. The book begins with an executive summary, then presents case
studies on Colombia, Latvia, and Rwanda. A regional case study of Asia-
Pacific Economic Cooperation (APEC) focuses on peer-to-peer learning.
New to this edition are thematic case studies on foreign direct investment
and transparency in business regulation. Subsequent chapters present
quantitative measures of regulations for tasks such as starting a business,
dealing with construction permits, getting credit, employing workers,
trading across borders, and resolving insolvency. The three-color layout
offers numerous tables and charts, plus appendices of data tables and a
section of brief country summaries of reforms in 2011-2012. A com-
panion web site contains examples and research.
HD3616 2012-006694 978-1-4128-4838-1
Competitive manufacturing; new strategies for regional
development. (reprint, 1992)
Rosenfeld, Stuart A.
Transaction Publishers, ©2012 400 p. $49.95 (pa)
Worried that few companies in rural America are striving to become
high-performance work organizations, Rosenfeld analyzes the problems
the rural South faces as it adjusts from economies based on natural
resources and goods-producing processes to economies whose success
depends mainly on the quality of human resources and high-per-
formance, market-oriented organizations. The Transaction Publishers
edition is an unabridged reprint of the work published by the Center for
Urban Policy Research in 1992.
–73–
HD3857 2012-016280 978-0-12-391946-5
Project finance in theory and practice; designing,
structuring, and financing private and public projects, 2d
ed.
Gatti, Stefano.
Academic Press, ©2013 464 p. $89.95
The first edition was completed in June 2007, just before banking crimes
plunged the world into a financial disaster that is still working its way
through poorer countries. The result is that the approach to finding and
structuring a deal to finance a large construction project is very different
now for all parties: project sponsors, banks, investors in infrastructure,
project bondholders, and public authorities. Gatti (banking and finance,
Bocconi U., Milan) takes all this into account in the second edition of his
guide for researchers, practitioners, and students in finance. Academic
Press is an imprint of Elsevier.
HD4294 978-81-7708-310-1
Industrial policy and economic development in India;
1947-2012.
Chatterjee, Anup.
New Century Pub. (New Delhi), ©2012 585 p. $139.50
Economic liberalization in India began in 1985 with a number of
measures designed to remove bureaucracy, deregulate industry, and step
back from protectionism. This continued with the 1991 government
Industrial Policy Statement. Chatterjee (economics, U. of Delhi, India)
explores the in-depth details of India’s industrial policy, with an eye
toward what will make it more economically successful. Five lengthy
appendices include a year-wise review of industrial developments,
extracts from India’s five year plans, and a 36 page glossary of indus-
trial terms. Distributed in North America by ISBS.
HD4318 2011-046525 978-0-8144-3170-2
In the shadow of the dragon; the global expansion of
Chinese companies—how it will change business forever.
Nie, Winter and William Dowell.
AMACOM, ©2012 290 p. $27.95
It may come as a surprise to many readers that the brief phrase “Made
in China” no longer represents cheap products like toys and plastics. The
country has undertaken massive initiatives to create a large and skilled
workforce, an effort that is reflected in the country’s growing presence
in world markets like energy, electronics, financial services, and more.
Authors Nie (business consultant and professor, IMD, Switzerland) and
Dowell (freelance writer and correspondent, Switzerland) translate that
growing dominance into a message for business communities in the U.S.,
Canada, and Europe. As Nie writes, “The Western companies that will
find themselves increasingly challenged by this new situation have the
choice of competing head on or forming new alliance with Chinese
partners.”
HD4904 2011-028116 978-1-933147-78-9
Vital ideas; work.
Title main entry. Ed. by Christina Boufis. (Vital ideas)
The Great Books Foundation , ©2011 172 p. $14.95 (pa)
In keeping with the previous volumes in the Great Ideas series, this one
follows the philosophy of giving students interesting content to read and
discuss in the form of autobiographical essays or short pieces of fiction,
rather than just focusing on the development of language skills. Each
chapter closes with questions for discussion or further reflection. In
addition there are six comparison questions at the end of the book to
encourage discussion and writing about the similarity or differences
between two or more selected articles.
HD4965 2012-930576 978-1-84980-396-0
Research handbook on executive pay.
Title main entry. Ed. by Randall S. Thomas and Jennifer G. Hill.
(Research handbooks in corporate law and governance)
Edward Elgar Publishing, ©2012 543 p. $255.00
Executive compensation became a controversial topic in the 1990s when
self-regulation became the norm, and even more so in light of recent
corporate scandals and the global financial crisis. In this collection of
essays, corporate governance scholars address four primary issues: the
history and theory of executive compensation, the structure of executive
pay, corporate governance and executive compensation, and international
perspectives on executive pay. The authors examine the two most
prominent theoretical methods for determining executive pay, the
managerial power theory and the optimal contracting theory, and their
effect on compensation and related issues. They also address government
regulation of pay and international pay practices in Australia, China,
Europe, India, Japan, and the United States. The book will interest
students, scholars, lawyers, and other professionals in accounting,
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
business, and finance. Editors are Thomas (law and business, Vanderbilt
Law School) and Hill (corporate law, U. of Sydney, Australia).
HD5106 2012-406221 978-0-7456-5426-3
Work time; conflict, control, and change.
Negrey, Cynthia L.
Polity Press, ©2012 235 p. $22.95 (pa)
Negrey (sociology, U. of Louisville) presents an overview of the evolution
and current state of work-time mostly in the United States. She argues
that work-time is highly relevant because of the way it structures our
lives. She argues that work-time is socially constructed and attends to
how a number of technological and political factors have shaped why
people work the times they do. She also argues that work-time currently
is massively ill-distributed, leading to various forms of insecurity and
inequality, and in this Great Recession can be a lightning rod for social
change. After her introduction, she considers the evolution of time before
and after the development of the modern clock, the question of work-
time reduction in US history, current trends in annual and weekly hours,
nonstandard work, work-family and work-life balance schemes, examples
of work-time outside of the US, and finally a chapter arguing for a new
political economy of work-time. Distributed by Wiley.
HD5650 978-1-78190-220-2
Advances in the economic analysis of participatory and
labor-managed firms.
Title main entry. Ed. by Alex Bryson. (Series: title; v.13)
Emerald Group Publishing, ©2012 360 p. $144.95
This collection of 12 essays explores new research into the financial per-
formance of worker-owned cooperatives or “labor-managed firms.” They
are organized in four sections on cooperatives, the effects of worker par-
ticipation on firm performance, the diffusion of high involvement man-
agement, and workers’ own experience and satisfaction. One essay
proposes a “Coopindex” for measuring the integrity of cooperatives with
regard to their stated values or mission. Another looks at the relationship
between ownership structures and business performance, but finds no
appreciable differences before and after implementing a worker-own-
ership scheme. The contributors are academics from Europe and the US,
with backgrounds in economics, sociology, social policy, and business.
Distributed in North America by Turpin Distribution.
HD5708 2012-013340 978-0-8014-5105-8
Welfare through work; conservative ideas, partisan
dynamics, and social protection in Japan.
Miura, Mari.
Cornell U. Press, ©2012 206 p. $39.95
In order to understand the shattered perception of egalitarian Japanese
society and the sudden appearance of the working poor in the middle of
the new century’s first decade, Miura (political science, Sophia U., Tokyo)
analyzes the characteristics of the Japanese social protection system, its
historical development, and the political mechanisms that produced it.
She finds that in the Japanese social protection system, employment pro-
tection has functionally substituted for income maintenance, and when
global market conditions led to massive unemployment, there were no
government programs in place to help people.
HD5709 2012017750 978-1-61205-250-2
The surplus American; how the 1% is making us
redundant.
Derber, Charles and Yale Magrass.
Paradigm Publishers, ©2012 227 p. $19.95 (pa)
Derber (sociology, Boston College)and Magrass (sociology, UMass
Dartmouth) critically examine the production of surplus Americans.
They explain what they mean by surplus in terms of jobs and unem-
ployment, but side with Keynes over Marx in terms of class-relations. The
material is organized into three parts with the first part non-fiction and
the latter two, two versions of the same play. In the first part, they
explains what surplus people are, how money is made off the creation
of surplus populations, how capitalism has created surplus people from
its beginning, how industrial countries manage their surplus populations
with workhouses and workfare, and a whirl-wind history of 20th-century
American economic and social policies. The next two parts are versions
of a play (one performed at Boston College) they wrote called “I Like
Firing People” which is a didactic play about producing surplus popula-
tions that invokes dozens of political and intellectual figures.
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
HD5713 2011-930933 978-1-59562-055-2
The coming jobs war; what every leader must know
about the future of job creation.
Clifton, Jim.
Gallup Press, ©2011 225 p. $24.95
Writing for policy makers, politicians, those in business and government,
and general readers, Clifton, chairman and CEO of the Gallup polling
organization, argues that the global war for jobs will determine the next
leader of the free world. He looks at what countries and their leaders are
doing wrong in job creation and recommends ways to support job cre-
ation at every level, from lowering high-school dropout rates to tripling
exports in the next five years. Entire chapters are devoted to K-12 schools
and the failing US healthcare industry. There is no subject index.
HD5715 2012-021071 978-1-4398-7895-8
Skill training in multimodal virtual environments.
Title main entry. Ed. by Massimo Bergamasco et al. (Human factors
and ergonomics)
CRC Press, ©2013 291 p. $109.95
The five-year European research program SKILLS (Multimodal Interfaces
for Capturing and Transfer of Skills) was conducted to evaluate and
exploit robotic and virtual environment technologies for training specific
skills. It set aside conventional common computer-assisted training sim-
ulators and developed a novel approach that generates new training sce-
narios in which users can have new experience in performing the
devised task. This volume presents the scientific background, research
outcomes, engineering developments, and evaluation studies from the
project. The topics include developing training platforms in multimodal
virtual reality environments, motion capture technologies for pose esti-
mation, the digital representation and modeling of human skill, a design
and evaluation of a multimodal virtual reality platform for rowing
training, training platforms for industrial maintenance and assembly,
and requirements and challenges for skill training in virtual reality.
HD5724 2012-034390 978-0-88099-406-4
Reconnecting to work; policies to mitigate long-term
unemployment and its consequences.
Title main entry. Ed. by Lauren D. Appelbaum.
W.E. Upjohn Institute, ©2012 177 p. $20.00 (pa)
This collection of essays explores topics in unemployment, labor-market
volatility, public health, and possible responses. They are written by
attendees of the 2011 Reconnecting To Work conference. Richard Freeman
(economics, Harvard U.) writes a forward that uses the work of Dr. Seuss
as a literary device for telling a story about the financial crisis and the
more ongoing fact of unemployment. His narration suggests the stakes of
the essays to come, among which is economic growth. Specific essay
topics include an examination of German and Danish labor-market
resilience, the relationship between unemployment and mental health,
cooperative work-models from the Netherlands and other work-sharing.
The contributors are professors and researchers, from Europe and the
United States, of economics, labor-markets, and social and urban policy.
HD5854 2011-036936 978-1-61233-063-1
The temp factor for job seekers; the job seeker’s guide to
temporary employment.
Reilly, Cathy A.
Universal Publishers, ©2012 155 p. $21.95 (pa)
Reilly, who has experience in human resources and management and
currently works in the financial services sector at a private equity firm,
helps job seekers find temporary employment. She describes the basics
of temping, including characteristics of employees, payment, benefits,
key terms, and unemployment; its advantages and challenges, temp-to-
perm positions, and job searching; staffing services, testing, and back-
ground and reference checks; finding, applying, and interviewing with a
service; client companies; assignments; how to be an excellent temp; and
perspectives from staffing services on challenges and success. No index
is provided.
HD5854 2011-036937 978-1-61233-061-7
The temp factor; the complete guide to temporary
employment for staffing services, clients and temps.
Reilly, Cathy A.
Universal Publishers, ©2012 514 p. $39.95 (pa)
Reilly, who works in financial services at a private equity firm and has
worked in human resources and management, supplies staffing services,
clients, and temps with a guide to temporary employment. For those in
staffing services, she discusses the relationship between the service and
clients and temps, taking inventory of services and products, gathering
key information, filling temp assignments, coaching temps, the business
card strategy, customer service and marketing, new ideas and methods
–74–
for building relationships, and handling problems. The next section
covers the client and partnering with the staffing service, assessing needs
and priorities, establishing a temp strategy, interviewing and using a
staffing service, performance, job descriptions, and agreements, checks,
balances, and policies. The next section examines what temp employees
should know, including understanding the staffing service; finding,
applying, and interviewing with one; clients; finding a job; benefits; key
terms; challenges; and characteristics of temps. Information from this
section is also detailed in her book The Temp Factor: The Job Seeker’s
Guide to Temporary Employment. She ends with discussion of types of
contacts between the three groups and quotes from staffing services and
human resource professionals on challenges and success. There is no
index.
HD6971 2010-934958 978-1-84920-722-5
International and comparative employment relations;
globalisation and change, 5th ed.
Title main entry. Ed. by Greg J. Bamber et al.
Sage Publications, ©2011 418 p. $158.00
Thirteen chapters, presented by Bamber (management, Monash U.,
Australia), Lansbury (work and organizational studies, U. of Sydney,
Australia), and Wailes (work and organizational studies, U. of Sydney),
summarize traditions and issues in international economies. Each
country study is presented using a similar format, proceeding through
an examination of economic, historical, political, legal, and social con-
texts; consideration of the characteristics of the major interest groups;
summary of the main processes of employment relations; and explo-
ration of contemporary employment relations issues and challenges. The
previous edition’s chapters on the United Kingdom, the United States,
Canada, Australia, Italy, France, Germany, Japan, and South Korea have
been revised and updated and new chapters have been presented on
China, India, and Denmark.
HD6971 2012-019958 978-1-60163-235-7
Stand up for yourself without getting fired; resolve
workplace crises before you quit, get axed, or sue the
bastards.
Ballman, Donna.
Career Press, ©2012 253 p. $15.99 (pa)
Ballman provides a guide in plain English for workers in all stages of
employment, from applying and interviewing to termination and
prospective references. Each chapter presents a series of possible sce-
narios and her choice of the best response, along with broken out
“Donna’s tips.” Although it’s written in a casual style, the list of relevant
statutes and regulations that appear in a bibliography show that solid
legal knowledge lies behind the writing. Ballman, who has been prac-
ticing employment law since 1986, also maintains a well regarded blog
on legal issues for employees.
HD7125 2012-019925 978-0-13-296303-9
Saving for retirement (without living like a pauper or
winning the lottery). rev. ed.
MarksJarvis, Gail.
FT Press, ©2013 261 p. $23.99 (pa)
In this update of the 2007 edition, MarksJarvis, personal finance
columnist for the Chicago Tribune, offers reassurance and straight-
forward advice on navigating the insider language of Wall Street to invest
and save toward a comfortable retirement. She covers basic investing con-
cepts and mix-and-match strategies for people at all phases in the process,
and advises caution in seeking the help of a financial adviser. FT Press
is an imprint of Pearson Education.
HD8039 2012-034900 978-0-7864-6960-4
Hot zone; memoir of a professional firefighter.
Howes, Christopher Teale.
McFarland & Co., ©2012 244 p. $29.95 (pa)
From his 1976 start in the Del-Trail Fire Department to his retirement as
district chief of Palm Beach County Fire-Rescue, this memoir covers both
his personal experiences and provides an inside look at some of the local
politics. Details are alternately grisly and light, ranging from recovery of
body parts to their yearly Country Jam. And a middle chapter provides
the heartfelt accounts of eight local women firefighters. The book
includes a useful glossary of firefighting terms, along with nine appen-
dixes that are specific to his county or the overall situation in Florida.
–75–
HD8039 978-87-630-0246-2
Landlubbers and sea dogs; the case of labour mobility in
the Danish maritime sector in a time of accelerating
globalisation.
Sornn-Friese, Henrik and Carsten Ørts Hansen.
Copenhagen Business School Pr., ©2012 292 p. $42.00 (pa)
Sornn-Friese (economics, Copenhagen Business School) and Hansen (eco-
nomics and sociology, Copenhagen Business School) offer an empirical
analysis the way that labor in Danish maritime industries moves and
what that means for the supply of “maritime competence.” They focus on
shipping in particular, which they analyze in the context of national
policy and globalization to show evidence of job-pooling and knowledge-
spillover. They lay out the conceptual foundations for their empirical
analyses of labor market dynamics, extensively overview the Danish mar-
itime sector with a focus on shipping, review the evidence on inter-
industry mobility in the maritime sector, consider the characteristics of
sea-faring and land-based industries and their implications for this labor-
market analysis, and examine the consequences of globalization on
shipping services. This book offers an interesting glimpse into labor-
market dynamics in terms of both economic advantage, but also indus-
trial knowledge and organization. Distributed in the US by ISBS.
HD8039 2012-023731 978-0-321-82203-1
Managing the unmanageable; rules, tools, and insights for
managing software people and teams.
Mantle, Mickey W. and Ron Lichty.
Addison-Wesley, ©2013 422 p. $39.99 (pa)
Programmers are notoriously difficult to manage. Without placing them
all into one basket, this guidebook provides tips ranging from making
good hiring decisions to following the motivational guidelines of job
enrichment theorists like Frederick Herzberg. An 83 page section in the
middle provides quotations from the realms of software development
and management, along with a few general ones from superstars like
Michael Jordan and Wayne Gretzky. A final section refers the reader to
some useful online tools. Mantle has recently retired from senior position
at Gracenote and Lichty currently works as a consultant in software engi-
neering management.
HD8039 978-1-907593-46-8
The trade union pint; the unlikely union of Guinness and
the Larkins.
Duffy, Martin.
Liberties Press, ©2012 199 p. $29.95 (pa)
Martin Duffy, an award-winning Irish filmmaker and writer, examines
the post-war history of labor-relations of the Guinness family breweries.
The family was known for “cradle-to-grave paternalism” and otherwise
treating their employees well, but nonetheless marginalized those doing
the most basic labor—the non-tradesmen. Duffy follows the co-evolution
of the unions that represented workers at Guinness and the company
itself, up until the 1970s when organized labor became to seem passé.
Distributed in the US by Dufour Editions.
HD8242 2012-424480 978-976-637-405-1
Labour pains; resistance and protest in Barbados 1838-
1904.
Carter, Henderson. (Forgotten histories of the Caribbean)
Ian Randle Publishers, ©2012 256 p. $24.95 (pa)
Appropriate for scholars of comparative studies in addition to those with
an interest in Caribbean history, this book in the Forgotten Histories of
the Caribbean series seeks to remedy the under-representation of
Barbados in abolition and post-slavery restructuring literature. Carter
(history, U. West Indies) examines the actions of freedmen following the
1838 emancipation of slaves in Barbados; these often violent reactions
against and political responses to exclusionary and oppressive gover-
nance policies directly resulted in agrarian reform as well as societal and
governmental restructuring. Divided into nine chapters, the book ana-
lyzes forms of institutional oppression and violent protests, workers’
industrial action at the time of emancipation, poverty and its effects,
withdrawal of workers from plantations, and working class alliances
with politics.
HD8375 2012-020410 978-90-04-23143-6
Worthy effforts; attitudes to work and workers in pre-
industrial Europe.
Lis, Catharina and Hugo Soly. (Studies in global social history; v.10)
BRILL, ©2012 664 p. $193.00
Lis and Soly (history, Vrije U., Amsterdam) present an ambitious social
history of European attitudes toward work and workers in the two
thousand years prior to the industrial revolution. Their main questions
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
are: who in pre-industrial Europe counted what as work and how did
that affect those who had to perform it in terms of political power and
social identity? They observe that a polyphony rather than cacophony of
definitions and attitudes defined how work and workers were valorized
and devalorized. Two major periods define their study, classical
antiquity and from roughly 1300 to 1800, and they limit themselves to
farmers, merchants, craftsmen and wage-workers in Western and
Southern Europe. Key to their method is distinguishing attitudes toward
work and attitudes toward workers. They consider how ancients viewed
work and workers differently from the early Church Fathers and the role
Christian ideologies of work played in revolutionizing ancient elite atti-
tudes toward work, the merging of occupation and identity, how debates
over knowledge vs. manual work go back centuries, aristocratic
resistance to the legal emancipation of peasants and rise of market
society, collective worker-action, the ideal of a commercial society, the
patriarchal household and rural work, women artists, and worker
autonomy. The absence/presence of a work-ethic in the distant past is
also at times reviewed in light of the possibility of a low-work society
advocated by the likes of André Gorz and Paul LeFargue.
HD9000 2012-936539 978-1-61219-127-0
Stuffed and starved; the hidden battle for the world food
system, 2d ed.
Patel, Raj.
Melville House Publishing, ©2012 418 p. $19.95 (pa)
Patel, a research fellow at Food First, demonstrates that the global food
system actually encourages poles of obesity and malnourishment
worldwide, and looks at international movements seeking to change the
food system. With its conversational tone, sense of humor, and real-life
vignettes from the author’s travels around the world, the book is acces-
sible to general readers and will be as classroom-friendly as Michael
Pollan’s Omnivore’s Dilemma. Once an insider at the World Bank, WTO,
and the UN, Patel now boasts that he has been tear-gassed on four con-
tinents for protesting his former employers. He links trade treaties and
food aid to the destruction of rural communities around the world and
scrutinizes agribusiness corporations’ control over seeds and agriculture.
A case study of soybeans shows how all these forces come together. This
second edition takes on current issues such as land grabbing in Africa,
rising diabetes rates, climate change, and international food riots.
HD9000 2012-406283 978-0-309-22263-1
A sustainability challenge: food security for all; report of
two workshops.
National Research Council
National Academies Press, ©2012 251 p. $52.00 (pa)
This volume reproduces the results of two workshops organized by the
National Research Council’s Roundtable on Science and Technology for
Sustainability on the question of the interrelationship between
sustainability and global food security. The first workshop examined the
empirical evidence for measuring food insecurity and assessing the
sustainability of global food systems in the past, present, and future. The
second explored key issues for achieving sustainable food security
together with political, economic, and institutional opportunities and
barriers.
HD9004 2012-000326 978-1-4398-4885-2
Valorization of food processing by-products.
Title main entry. Ed. by M. Chandrasekaran. (Fermented foods and
beverages series)
CRC Press, ©2013 808 p. $169.95
Biotechnology, food science, and microbiology are among the perspectives
from which contributors explore ways of turning waste from food pro-
cessing into salable commodities. Introductory chapters look at the food
processing business, its by-products, regulatory issues and concerns of
valorizing by-products, and the need for such valorization. The main
themes are principles of waste recycling, valorizing by-products from
plant-based food and animal-based food, environmental concerns, and
future prospects. Among the topics are process engineering and eco-
nomics, fermenting food processing by-products, oil seeds, bakeries and
confectioneries, seafood, and sustainable development.
HD9058 2012-012520 978-0-8263-5146-3
Bakers and Basques; a social history of bread in Mexico.
Weis, Robert.
U. of New Mexico Press, ©2012 217 p. $29.95 (pa)
During the 1870s through 1930, Spanish Basque immigrants owned the
bakeries of Mexico City, while Mexican laborers baked the bread. Weis
(history, University of Northern Colorado) asks why some immigrant
groups like the Basques were able to establish monopolies, and why gov-
ernment supported these monopolies, which eventually led to labor
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
strikes and bread riots. The study traces the interests that linked owners,
workers, agents of the state, and consumers in the political and class
struggle that contributed to the formation of the market for bread. The
book includes five historical photos.
HD9235 978-3-643-90234-4
Marketing and market queens; a study of tomato farmers
in the Upper East region of Ghana.
Awo, Martha A. (ZEF development studies; v.21)
LIT Verlag, ©2012 175 p. $44.95 (pa)
Awo (statistical social and economic research, U. of Ghana, Legon)
examines the damage to the tomato sector in the region caused by the
1981 World Bank and 2001 International Monetary Fund Structural
Adjustment Programs. Imported tomato paste flooded the market so that
local processors went out of business, leaving tomato growers no buyers.
Local traders now dominate the market, she says, and manipulate it to
their advantage over the farmers. She places the risks and power rela-
tions of local growing and trade in the context of the larger economy of
Ghana and global trade policies. There is no index. Distributed in the US
by ISBS.
HD9560 2012-009946 978-1-4666-2002-5
Integrated operations in the oil and gas industry;
sustainability and capability development.
Title main entry. Ed. by Tom Rosendahl and Vidar Hepso.
Information Science Reference, ©2013 427 p. $185.00
This reference on the capability development approach to integrated oper-
ations in the oil industry describes the variety of operations and
processes, technologies, and planning and design. Primary topics include
leadership, learning and governance, and a key focus, the “ICT revo-
lution” (information and communications technologies). A section on
case studies also is included. Integrated operations are addressed in a
variety of contexts and environments, from managing teams to imple-
menting multidisciplinary work processes. The book would be useful for
an audience of industry of management and technical professionals.
HD9560 2012-016532 978-981-4390-67-5
Oil price uncertainty.
Serletis, Apostolos.
World Scientific, ©2012 142 p. $62.00
Serletis (U. of Calgary) explores transmission channels through which oil
price innovations affect real output and applies multivariate volatility
models to the relationship between the price of oil and the level of eco-
nomic activity. The fully specified bivariate framework is based on both
structural and reduced form vector autoregressions that have been mod-
ified to accommodate GARCH-in-Mean errors. Three of the chapters are
new and three are reprints of previously published articles.
HD9577 978-1-61635-376-6
Oil wealth in central Africa; policies for inclusive growth.
Title main entry. Ed. by Bernardin Akitoby and Sharmini Coorey
Intl. Monetary Fund, ©2012 226 p. $25.00 (pa)
Produced largely through the efforts of people associated with the Africa
Department of the International Monetary Fund, this publication reviews
issues of oil and economic management in the CEMAC (Economic and
Monetary Community of Central Africa) region of Africa. Opening
chapters address macroeconomic and growth challenges, and include dis-
cussions of determinants of non-oil growth and lack of infrastructure.
The next set of chapters addresses management of oil wealth and poverty
reduction. Finally, case studies of oil wealth management are presented
for Cameroon, Chad, Congo, and Gabon.
HD9581 978-2-7108-1016-2
After the US shale gas revolution.
Bros, Thierry.
Editions Technip, ©2012 165 p. $40.00 (pa)
Bros, affiliated with Société Générale bank, provides an analysis of
today’s gas markets, focusing on Asia, Europe, and the US. The first part
of the book explains fundamentals of the gas industry, from resource
extraction to pricing mechanisms. Coverage encompasses gas reserves,
production, exporters and importers, pipe transport, the liquid natural
gas chain, uses of natural gas, and storage. There is also material on
markets and prices, costs, and energy polices in the EU. The second part
of the book predicts the future of the global gas situation and describes
the competition between various markets and producers. This section
reviews shale gas in the US, looks at China’s hold on the largest uncon-
ventional gas reserves, considers Europe’s gas supply in Poland, and
examines gas supplies in Russia and Norway. A glossary is included.
There is no subject index. The book is distributed in the US by Atlas
Books.
–76–
HD9725 2012-015530 978-1-4221-6268-2
Producing prosperity; why America needs a
manufacturing renaissance.
Pisano, Gary P. and Willy C. Shih.
Harvard Business Review Press, ©2012 166 p. $27.00
Pisano and Shih, both affiliated with Harvard Business School, explain
reasons for the rise and decline of the American industrial commons and
recommend steps toward reinvigorating America’s manufacturing sector
with a new national economic strategy for manufacturing and recom-
mendations for how government should support scientific research. In
an effort to clarify distortions on both sides of the debate, the authors’
argument is framed in the broader debate about competitiveness. The
framework they describe is designed to help readers understand the con-
nections between manufacturing, innovation, and the links between dif-
ferent industries. The book’s readership includes business executives,
government policymakers, academics, and entrepreneurs.
HD9940 2012-020099 978-0-7494-6446-2
Fashion brands; branding style from Armani to Zara, 3d
ed.
Tungate, Mark.
Kogan Page, ©2012 228 p. $39.95 (pa)
Tungate, a journalist specializing in media, marketing, and communi-
cation, examines the world of fashion from a brand perspective. He
draws on interviews with individuals working in fashion to detail the
history of fashion brands; the creation of successful brands like Burberry
and Diesel; the growing connection between haute couture and high
street, with examples like H&M, Zara, and Uniqlo; designers as brands;
stores as the keys to brands; the creation of trends; fashion advertising;
the influence of photographers, models, celebrities, and magazines; col-
lections and fashion shows; new products like accessories and fra-
grances; retro brands that have been retooled, such as Gucci; increased
marketing towards men; sports brands; the influence of bloggers; the rise
of fakes; vintage clothing; and sweatshops and labor issues. Updated, this
edition includes information on topics like social media and technology,
and the increasing importance of children’s fashion.
HD9940 2011-047039 978-0-89672-735-9
A perfect fit; the garment industry and American Jewry
1860-1960.
Title main entry. Ed. by Gabriel M. Goldstein and Elizabeth E.
Greenberg. (Costume Society of America series)
Texas Tech U. Press, ©2012 237 p. $49.95
This volume is based on research for the namesake Yeshiva University
Museum exhibition in 2005. Goldstein (specialist in Jewish art and
material culture) and Greenberg (Siena College, Loudonville, New York),
who were curators of the “A Perfect Fit” exhibit, trace the contributions
of Jewish immigrants to the U.S. garment industry and American society
from the Civil War to the 1960s and how these in turn shaped their
identity. Essays provide perspectives on the historical role of European
Jews in the “rag trade,” and their participation in the industry from New
York to Hollywood. Includes period photographs, fashion advertisements,
sketches, movie stills, and clothing production data tables.
HD9980 2012-017890 978-1-4398-6734-1
Decision making in service industries; a practical
approach.
Title main entry. Ed. by Javier Faulin et al.
CRC Press, ©2013 431 p. $119.95
For researchers, practitioners and managers, graduate students, con-
sultants, and government officials and policy makers, Faulin (operations
research and statistics, U. of Navarre, Spain) et al. assemble 16 chapters
that detail practical and methodological issues related to decision-making
processes under uncertainty in service industries. The volume examines
current and future trends about how these processes can be performed
for better design of a service system by using probabilistic algorithms
and simulation-based approaches. Chapters address global information
technology services delivery providers, simulation-based studies for
supply chains with random disruptions at the supplier and retailers, a
model for how the consumer builds a perception of service quality, and
application of data mining in the service industry among other topics.
The contributors are researchers working in economics, computer
science, engineering, management, business, statistics, and other areas
around the world.
–77–
HD9980 2012-011056 978-0-7360-9641-6
Leisure services financial management. (online access
included)
Emanuelson, David.
Human Kinetics Pub., ©2013 239 p. $59.00
Emanuelson, who served as a park district executive director in Illinois
for 20 years, introduces basic accounting concepts and the financial tools
for measuring the performance of private businesses, government
agencies, and nonprofit organizations that offer leisure services. The
undergraduate textbook describes the standard components of a
financial statement and explains the differences between governmental
accounting methods and financial accounting methods. B&w photos and
a glossary are provided.
HD9993 2012-018220 978-1-62087-054-9
A million little bricks; the unofficial illustrated history of
the LEGO phenomenon.
Herman, Sarah.
Skyhorse Pub. Co., ©2012 303 p. $24.95
This colorful volume by Herman (editor, Lab Magazine) traces the history
of the LEGO company from its origins in Denmark in 1932 with wooden
blocks, to today’s forays into LEGO watches and digital design. Printed
on high quality glossy paper with many color photographs, the book is
of sturdy quality. A small bibliography and a larger directory of useful
websites are included.
HD9999 2012-008027 978-0-7494-6491-2
The luxury strategy; break the rules of marketing to build
luxury brands, 2d ed.
Kapferer, Jean-Noël and Vincent Bastien.
Kogan Page, ©2012 395 p. $49.95
In the marketing of luxury brands, many of the traditional rules go out
the window. In what other situation, for instance, would a company
deliberately leave some flaws in the product? Or make it difficult to buy?
This comprehensive work is a solid guidebook to the marketing of luxury
brands that is filled with both guidelines and a wealth of examples.
Kapferer (marketing, HEC Paris) also sits on the board of several major
brands while Bastien (Strategy in Luxury, HEC Paris) has extensive expe-
rience as an MD (managing director) of companies in the industry. This
second edition is updated to take digital opportunities into consideration.
TRANSPORTATION AND COMMUNICATIONS
HE147 978-1-84980-020-4
Transport, the environment and security; making the
connection.
Zimmerman, Rae.
Edward Elgar Publishing, ©2012 267 p. $120.00
Zimmerman (planning and public administration, New York U.) investi-
gates topical confluences between road and rail transport in the United
States, environmental concerns, and security from terrorism and other
extreme events, utilizing the concept of networks as a framework for inte-
grating the three themes. Eight chapters are presented on the networked
nature of transport and how it impacts environmental and security
issues, the relationship between transport and climate change, more tra-
ditional environmental concerns that potentially influence transport,
network-based solutions to environmental problems, natural hazards and
accidents that disrupt transport, security threats to transport and federal
government responses, and future directions of network thinking about
these issues.
HE194 2012-016178 978-1-4398-4576-9
Introduction to transport security.
Edwards, Frances L. and Daniel C. Goodrich.
CRC Press, ©2013 360 p. $69.95
Edwards (political science and emergency management, San Jose State
U.) and Goodrich (security for transportation managers and public
administration, San Jose State U.) offer guidance for transportation man-
agers responsible for transportation security. They address all forms of
transportation and related security: ground, air, and maritime. Subjects
include security and emergency management theory and practice, federal
security agencies, threats and strategies, and transportation security,
supply chain, and critical infrastructure.
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
HE206 978-3-8329-7253-0
The 1990-91 Congressional hearings on America’s
infrastructure.
Balabkins, Nicolas W. (Karlsruhe papers in economic policy research;
v.32)
Nomos, ©2012 127 p. $40.00 (pa)
Balabkins (economics, Lehigh U.) has read the 3,000 pages of testimony
before the US Congress on all types of transportation programs, water
resources, and other infrastructure components. He reports on the con-
ditions of the infrastructure and the spirit then prevailing in the US.
Economists rarely pay attention to congressional hearings, he says, but
he has found them to be gold mines for information concerning the
country’s public capital stock facilities, and their condition and impact
on the private sector of the US economy. There is no index. Distributed
in the US by ISBS.
HE271 2012-025597 978-0-85728-448-8
Communication and colonialism in Eastern India; Bihar,
1760s-1880s.
Sinha, Nitin.
Anthem Press, ©2012 272 p. $99.00
Examining the history of communication in colonial India, focusing on
the northeastern state of Bihar in 1760-1880, Sinha (Zentrum Moderner
Orient, Germany) considers communication both as a site in and of itself,
as well as a link to shifting networks of economic structures of trade and
travel and to ideologies and discourses of colonial rule. His principle
goals in this study are to describe the shifting policies and discourses of
the colonial state in the realm of communication; to explore the role of
communication in trading and mercantile networks and their impact on
trade, transport, and mobility; and to analyze the nature of forms of
colonial knowledge as communicated through the practices of travel,
tours, and surveys. Distributed in the US by Books International, Inc.
HE336 2012-359417 978-1-932364-96-5
The high cost of free parking, 2d ed.
Shoup, Donald C.
American Planning Assoc., ©2011 765 p. $34.95 (pa)
This second edition of a critique of free parking contains new material
reporting on progress over the past six years in parking reforms related
to setting the right price for curb parking, returning parking revenue to
pay for local public services, and removing minimum parking
requirements. Shoup (urban planning, University of California-Los
Angeles) suggests how planners can frame an economic, social, and
environmental argument for new ways to plan for parking. Criticizing
the current approach to planning for parking as a “pseudoscience,” he
shows how cities inadvertently create the economic incentive to cruise for
curb parking when they charge too low a price for it, surveying studies
of cruising in 12 major global cities and presenting a case study of
Westwood Village, California. He recommends prices that vary by time
and day, based on principles of market pricing. The book contains b&w
photos, plus about 80 pages of survey results and parking cost
calculations.
HE395 2012-357036 978-0-8214-1979-3
Ohio Canal era; a case study of government and the
economy, 1820-1861. (reprint, 1968)
Scheiber, Harry N.
Ohio University Press, ©2012 430 p. $34.95 (pa)
The development of the Ohio Canal before the Civil War is used here as
a case study of the role of state government in economic development
and the day-to-day bureaucratic functioning of a public enterprise. The
study also offers insight on the intersection of political and adminis-
trative history with economic development. Appendices give data on
sources of capital, tolls on the Ohio canals, tonnage of canal commerce,
and estimation of indirect returns. The book includes b&w historical
maps. It was first published in 1969. This new paperback edition con-
tains a new foreword and an updated bibliographic note by the author.
Scheiber taught law at the University of California-Berkeley.
HE1779 2011-048389 978-1-4214-0590-2
Train wreck; the forensics of rail disasters.
Bibel, George.
Johns Hopkins U. Press, ©2012 355 p. $29.95
Turning to science and eyewitness accounts, Bibel (engineering, U. of
North Dakota) examines the reasons trains crash, what happens when
they do, and what safety improvements have been implemented from
these railroad disasters. Detailing seventeen crashes with more than two
hundred casualties, these intriguing tales of science and tragedy explore
runaway trains, bearing failures, metal fatigue, crash testing, collision
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
dynamics, and bad rails. The book contains illustrations, an epilogue
about safety in the modern era, and extensive notes and is intended for
general readers and those interested in engineering.
HE2771 2012-026051 978-1-60949-727-9
Railroad wars of New York State.
Starr, Timothy.
History Press, ©2012 158 p. $19.99 (pa)
Independent history scholar Starr is the author of several nonfiction
books, including works on the railroad and other industries and signif-
icant inventors in his native New York State. His latest book examines the
development of New York’s railroads during the mid- to late 1800s and
the powerful capitalists—Cornelius Vanderbilt, Jay Gould, Daniel Drew,
Jim Fisk—who financially backed the growing industry. Individual
chapters examine the rivalry between canal and rail transportation; rate
wars between rail companies; battles over specific lines including the
Hudson River, New York Central, Susquehanna, and Erie Railway; and
labor wars. The work is academic in tone yet accessible to the general
reader.
HE3298 2012-018810 978-90-04-23003-3
India’s railway history; a research handbook.
Hurd, John and Ian J. Kerr. (Handbook of oriental studies. Section 2,
South Asia; v.27)
BRILL, ©2012 336 p. $151.00
This is a research handbook addressing the past, present, and future of
the railways of India. The goal of authors Hurd (emeritus, economics,
Norwich U., US) and Kerr (history, U. of Manitoba, Canada), was not to
achieve any illusory attempt at completeness but instead to provide illus-
trative entry points into the sizeable body of primary and secondary
sources as well as illustrative examples based on original research of the
ways in which sources can be utilized to study India’s railways. The offer
a brief survey of India’s railway history from 1830 to 2010, review sec-
ondary and primary sources available for research, demonstrate the use
of sources in a discussion of cultural dimensions of the railways, and
offer guidance on the use of statistics and maps.
HE8699 978-1-84701-061-2
Radio in Africa; publics, cultures, communities.
Title main entry. Ed. by Liz Gunner et al.
James Currey Publishers, ©2011 320 p. $80.00
This collection of essays on radio in Africa comes from several different
conferences on different aspects of the topic. Two of the editors are
academics: Liz Gunner (Wits Institute for Social and Economic Research,
U. of the Witwatersrand, Johannesburg, SA) and Dina Ligaga (media
studies, U. of the Witwatersrand, Johannesburg, SA). The third, Dumisani
Moyo, is research and publications manager at the Open Society Initiative
for South Africa. The book is organized in three parts. Part one looks at
radio, popular democracy, and new publics: talk radio in Ghana, female
Muslim radio preachers in Mali, FM radio in Kenya, and clandestine
radio in the Zimbabwe crisis. Part two looks at the everyday cultures of
radio in Africa (often South Africa). Part three looks at voices of change
in radio and community: Congolese Radio Okapi, 567MW in Cape Town,
ANC radio under apartheid, radio and religion, radio in Angola,
broadcasting language policy in Uganda, and radio in zones of conflict.
The book looks successfully at a wide range of radio uses, including
public service announcements, politics, drama, music, and the setting
and disputing of social norms. Some contributors are African academics,
some are Western academics specializing in African studies, some are
radio professionals in Africa. Taken as a whole, the book speaks of radio
as the public voice of African communities, and an audible marker of
dreams, plans, danger, continuity, and change in swiftly-evolving
situations.
HE9782 2012-012382 978-1-60427-071-6
Aircraft finance; strategies for managing capital costs in a
turbulent industry.
Vasigh, Bijan et al.
J. Ross Publishing, ©2012 384 p. $99.95
Vasigh (economics and finance, Embry-Riddle Aeronautical University)
lays out the dynamics between manufacturers, airlines, and financing
vehicles in the industry and presents a framework for evaluating an
airline’s aircraft assets and financing options and determining whether
leasing an aircraft is cheaper and more advantageous than purchasing.
The valuation framework can be used by manufacturers, airlines, leasing
companies, and insurance companies. The book begins with historical
case studies, then explains basics of airline finance, corporate capital
structure, leasing concepts, aspects of aircraft value, and management
decisions that affect value creation. The book highlights the financial
issues that contribute to the volatility of the industry and gives insight on
–78–
financing alternatives. Appendices list top airline leasing and manufac-
turing companies and airlines. The book is for professionals and students
of aircraft finance.
COMMERCE, FINANCE
HF352 2012-014911 978-0-7656-2354-6
The world that trade created; society, culture, and the
world economy, 1400 to the present, 3d ed.
Pomeranz, Kenneth and Steven Topik.
M.E. Sharpe, Inc., ©2013 329 p. $74.95
Pomeranz (history, U. of Chicago) and Topik (history, UC Irvine) present
a thematically driven history of the world economy for the last 600 years.
They eschew the Eurocentric tendency in economic history, adopting a
world-systems approach and beginning with an examination of “the
making of market conventions” in 15th-century China. Each chapter
begins with a jointly written introductory section and then includes
several independently written case studies. They examine tactics of
transport; the economic culture of drugs, from chocolate to opium; the
“social lives” of commodities; economic violence and the economics of
violent culture; the making of modern markets; and finally modern
industrialization and deindustrialization. Many of the stories started as
articles for World Trade, but the authors take a de-naturalized and
socially-constructed view of markets. This third edition has been edited
for more geographic breadth and up-to-date articles: two on Africa, one
on China, two on Latin America, one on Europe, two that span the
United States and Europe, and one that involves the United States and
Asia. Other changes include condensed articles, several excised articles,
and a revised epilogue.
HF1359 2012-937934 978-1-84376-728-2
Key concepts in the new global economy; 2v.
Title main entry. Ed. by David A. Baldwin. (The international library of
writings on the new global economy; v.7)
Edward Elgar Publishing, ©2012 1342 p. $735.00
In his introduction to this anthology, Baldwin (political science, Princeton
U.; emeritus, Columbia, U.) explains that he has selected articles per-
taining to nine themes but recognizes that although these themes are
“key,” he does not mean to imply that they are the only relevant concepts.
He also explains that although the phrase “the new global economy” is
useful, not everything about the global economy is new. Forty-seven pre-
viously published articles and excerpts, presented in two volumes, are
grouped under the following headings: governance, diffusion,
democracy, domestic, immigration, conflict, sanctions, trade, and
finance. Among the sources: American Economic Review, World Politics
and American Political Science Review, among many others. The collection
is not indexed.
HF1359 978-0-9843974-2-6
Robert Gilpin and international relations; reflections.
Title main entry. Ed. by Wolfgang Danspeckgruber. (Liechtenstein collo-
quium report; v.2)
Liechtenstein Inst. on Self-Determination, ©2012 173 p. $22.00 (pa)
This volume is the product of the 2005 Liechtenstein Colloquium on
European and International Affairs, which was dedicated to honoring the
work of Princeton University’s emeritus professor of public and interna-
tional affairs, Robert Gilpin, “one of the most influential realist scholars
in US and international academia,” in the words of editor
Danspeckgruber (founding director, Liechtenstein Institute on Self
Determination, Princeton U.). Nine chapters offer encomiums to Gilpin’s
work, ranging from personal reflections on how Gilpin steered their
authors’ intellectual careers to more collegial, but not uncritical, assess-
ments of Gilpin’s realist contributions to the field of international rela-
tions. Distributed in the US by Lynne Rienner Publishers.
HF1455 2012-418437 978-0-7453-2643-6
The fall of the US empire; global fault-lines and the
shifting imperial order.
Fouskas, Vassilis K. and Bülent Gökay.
Pluto Press, ©2012 196 p. $28.00 (pa)
Offering the theoretical concept of “global fault lines” as a more heuristic
and all-encompassing concept than the earlier, Eurocentric notion of
“combined and uneven development,” Fouskas (international relations,
Richmond U., England) and Gökay (international relations, Keele U.
England) provide a theoretical analysis of the global decline of the US
empire. They argue that the US, unable to escape the structural crises of
over-accumulation and the fall of the rate of profit theorized by Marx in
Capital, has been in continuous decline since the late 1960s and that the
responses to this decline—globalization/financialization and
–79–
neoliberalism or “financial statecraft I (1971-91) and II (1991-2011)”—has
failed to arrest this decline, as they have just led to increased dependence
on consumer debt and speculative bubbles. Meanwhile, the operations of
the “constantly shifting tectonic plates of historical and social
development” (the aforementioned “global fault lines”) is leading to a
massive shift of economic power and activities to the East. Distributed
in the US by Palgrave Macmillan.
HF1456 2012-002892 978-1-4411-8669-0
America’s blind spot; Chávez, oil, and US security.
Cala, Andrés and Michael Economides.
Continuum Publishing Group, ©2012 203 p. $24.95
Immediately setting the discussion within the context of the struggles of
the United States “to maintain its reigning global superpower status,” the
authors (a Colombian journalist and columnist and a petroleum and
geopolitics consultant) argue that the US is not paying enough attention
to Latin America and what they see as its crucial role in ensuring
(petroleum-based) energy security. They consider the oft-hyped role of
Venezuelan president Hugo Chávez as a particular potential threat in the
region, given the ability of Venezuela to greatly increase or reduce the
production of oil, but argue that recent policy attempting to isolate
Chávez has largely backfired and instead recommend a policy of broad
regional engagement rather than ideological confrontation narrowly
focused on Chávez. Such engagement would be geared towards mini-
mizing investment risk through a realist engagement with the region that
aimed for stability over ideological confrontation (or confrontation over
such domestic interests as the drug war, immigration, and neoliberal free
trade), which would have the simultaneous effect, they argue, of
improving the regional standing of the US and undermining the power
of Chávez, both with salubrious impacts for future energy security.
HF1456 2012-015638 978-0-88132-645-1
Transatlantic economic challenges in an era of growing
multipolarity.
Title main entry. Ed. by Jacob Funk Kirkegaard et al. (Special report;
22)
Peterson Inst. Int’l Economics, ©2012 354 p. $28.95 (pa)
The editors (variously associated with the Washington-based Peterson
Institute for International Economics and the Brussels-based economic
think-tank, Bruegel) present the proceedings of a pair of policy confer-
ences jointly organized by their respective institutions in October 2010
and September 2011. The conferences were organized to address two key
issues: the conduct of policy by the European Union and the United States
towards new rising economic poles around the world and the substantive
contents of the EU-US bilateral economic and political relationship.
Specific topics include divergence between European and US macroeco-
nomic policy, climate change policy, the transatlantic relationship and
reform of the global financial architecture, the international monetary
system and the euro, challenges to economic growth in the US and
Europe, and government debt.
HF3756 2012-011816 978-90-04-22517-6
Ottoman and Dutch merchants in the eighteenth century;
competition and cooperation in Ankara, Izmir, and
Amsterdam.
Kadi, Ismail Hakki. (The Ottoman Empire and its heritage; v.50)
BRILL, ©2012 352 p. $175.00
Kadi (Ottoman history, Istanbul Medeniyet U.) examines the economic
position of the non-Muslim merchant elite of the 18th-century Ottoman
Empire in relation to the Ottoman central administration and its eco-
nomic policies; to local economic, social, and administrative actors and
structures within the empire; and to the Dutch authorities and merchants
engaged in the Levant trade. By fleshing out the study of matters that
have only been described in passing before, he re-evaluates the role of
Ottoman merchants in the social and economic system of the empire and
its interaction with western Europe. His case studies are the penetration
of the Dutch into the mohair trade in Ankara and local resistance to it;
and non-Muslim Ottoman merchant penetration of the Dutch trade with
the Levant, and the Dutch resistance to that.
HF5381 2012-015758 978-0-7494-6592-6
The careerist; over 100 ways to get ahead at work.
Rigby, Rhymer.
Kogan Page, ©2012 234 p. $19.95 (pa)
Rigby, an author and journalist for financial and business publications,
draws from “The Careerist” column he writes for the Financial Times to
offer professionals a guide to about 100 ways to improve their careers.
Derived from interviews with career coaches, business psychologists,
headhunters, academics, and others, the ideas relate to looking for a new
job, working from home, keeping up appearances, mixing business and
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
pleasure, career planning, presentations, delegating, marketing oneself,
firing someone, being more ambitious, changing job fields, making a
good impression, asking for a raise, prioritizing, finding a mentor,
dealing with stress, setting goals, managing former colleagues, and
dealing with criticism, among other topics. No index is included.
HF5381 2012-011859 978-0-7494-6590-2
Mash-up!; how to use your multiple skills to give you an
edge, earn more money and be happier.
Sanders, Ian and David Sloly.
Kogan Page, ©2012 246 p. $19.95 (pa)
Mashing up skills rather than following a traditional career plan or job
description is what is needed in the contemporary workplace, according
to these UK consultants. Starting with their personal stories, they offer
behavioral insights and tips to manage a multidimensional life. The
guide includes their ‘mashifesto’ (e.g., “ ‘think plural’ to embrace all your
talents”), Twitter bios of examples of persons living a mashed-up life,
and references.
HF5384 2012-010201 978-0-415-80495-0
Mid and late career issues; an integrative perspective.
Wang, Mo et al. (Series in applied psychology; 49)
Routledge, ©2013 218 p. $62.95
The authors have conducted extensive reviews of over 40 years of
research and organizational practice to create a better understanding of
the specific challenges to improving mid to late life careers. While
research on careers has grown significantly over the last many decades,
little detailed study has been conducted on middle and late career stages,
the authors note. Subjects addressed include: the evolution of career
theory, unique issues in middle and late stage careers, opportunities and
challenges, transition to retirement, and training, development, and men-
toring. Authors are Wang (Warrington College of Business
Administration), Olson (management and leadership, U. of La Verne),
and Shultz (psychology, California State U., San Bernardino).
HF5386 2012-004919 978-1-55753-615-0
Become the CEO of You, Inc.; a pioneering executive
shares her secrets for career success, 2d ed.
Butler, Susan Bulkeley.
Purdue University Press, ©2012 153 p. $16.95 (pa)
Particularly oriented toward young women who want to strategically
plan for success in the business world, this book delivers advice on
taking charge of one’s career using the analogy of becoming a CEO. Each
chapter ends with both action items and things to ponder and record in
a journal. Butler (Susan Bulkeley Butler Institute for the Development of
Women Leaders) also weaves 34 lessons throughout the text and closes
with 12 important guidelines. This updated edition includes coverage of
how social media changes networking, women and philanthropy, and
the importance of executive presence.
HF5386 2012-015757 978-0-7494-6469-1
The growing business handbook; inspiration & advice
from successful entrepreneurs & fast growing UK
companies, 14th ed.
Title main entry. Ed. by Adam Jolly.
Kogan Page, ©2012 232 p. $55.00
Senior managers of small and medium-sized enterprises (SMEs) that are
looking to grow during these times of economic turbulence can use a
guidebook of relevant (and relatively short) pieces. This 14th edition is
broken up into ten parts ranging from growth planning to securing the
needed capital. Many of the 41 papers can be used by businesses located
anywhere, but some are on subjects like patents, taxes or utility bills, and
thus of limited usefulness outside of the UK. Jolly is a business writer
and consultant editor on a number of Kogan Page titles. No index is
provided.
HF5386 2012-027956 978-0-07-179561-6
The laws of subtraction; six simple rules for winning in
the age of excess everything.
May, Matthew E.
McGraw-Hill, ©2013 224 p. $24.00
May, an author, speaker, creativity coach, and innovation advisor,
explains the art of subtraction: removing anything excessive, confusing,
wasteful, unnatural, hazardous, hard to use, or ugly, so that business-
people can produce better results by using less. He draws from his expe-
riences and research to identify six rules of subtraction: what isn’t there
can often trump what is; the simplest rules create the most effective expe-
rience; limiting information engages the imagination; creativity thrives
under intelligent constraints; break is the important part of the concept
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
of breakthrough; and doing something isn’t always better than doing
nothing. He uses examples to illustrate each, draws on Eastern phi-
losophy and Western science to explain the rules’ effectiveness, and
presents the stories of business leaders who have used them. References
are online only.
HF5386 2012-013050 978-0-7494-6637-4
Soul trader; putting the heart back into your business.
Ogunlaru, Rasheed.
Kogan Page, ©2012 257 p. $19.95 (pa)
Ogunlaru, a life, business, and corporate coach and motivational speaker
who is the business coach partner to the British Library’s Business and
Intellectual Property Centre, helps readers connect with their personal
values, missions, and passions to create a unique business that will
enrich them professionally and personally. He explains how to bring the
head and the heart together to create a successful business and identifies
seven principles to do so: developing self-insight and a vision or mission;
understanding customers; discovering courage; tapping into existing net-
works for help, support, suppliers, staff, and contacts; having successful
customer conversations; being creative; having compassion; and
embracing change.
HF5386 2012-023253 978-1-60163-242-5
The young professional’s guide to the working world;
savvy strategies to get in, get ahead, and rise to the top.
McDaniel, Aaron.
Career Press, ©2013 223 p. $14.99 (pa)
McDaniel, a corporate manager, entrepreneur, public speaker, and com-
munity leader who has held management roles in various business areas,
presents millennial-generation young professionals with a guide to the
first years of their corporate career. He draws from his six years of career
experience to outline 25 attributes of successful young professionals, such
as being flexible, resourceful, customer-focused, professional, a fast
learner, and part of a team; dealing with positive and negative outcomes;
building self-awareness; developing decision-making skills; thinking cre-
atively; multitasking; communicating effectively; having a positive
attitude; networking; and having integrity; ending with their application
to a career plan.
HF5387 978-1-78052-988-2
Applied ethics; remembering Patrick Primeaux.
Title main entry. Ed. by Michael Schwartz and Howard Harris.
(Research in ethical issues in organizations; v.8)
Emerald Group Publishing, ©2012 157 p. $114.95
Some of the essays on highly regarded business ethics teacher and
scholar Patrick Primeaux (1947-2008) were written by colleagues, and
others came from a conference on professional and applied ethics held
in 2011. Primeaux was an editor of the series this book is a part of. While
some of the essays are tributes and accolades, others address topics at
the core of his teaching and other work. Essays address the demise of
ethics, the social value of business, strengthening business ethics
teaching, and more. Editors are Harris (management, U. of South
Australia) and Schwartz (business ethics, Royal Melbourne Institute of
Technology, Australia). Distributed in North America by Turpin
Distribution.
HF5415 978-3-03785-450-1
Advances in product development and reliability III;
proceedings.
International Conference on Advances in Product Development and
Reliability (PDR 2012) (3d: 2012: Wuhan, China) Ed. by L. Gao et al.
(Advanced materials research; v.544 )
Trans Tech Publications, ©2012 310 p. $138.00 (pa)
The 51 peer-reviewed papers in this collection explore the development
and reliability of consumer products and the science and engineering
that underlies the processes. The topics include the strength and relia-
bility analysis of hydraulic support, predicting wear life for a large
diameter spool valve, simulating the ship production design process
based on a hierarchical timed Petri net, a multi-objective oriented product
design method for machine tools, and failure analysis on bearing of
railway freight cars with radial bogle.
HF5415 2012-027025 978-1-59184-487-7
The commitment engine; making work worth it.
Jantsch, John.
Portfolio Pub. Co., ©2012 244 p. $26.95
In this follow up to his previous work, The Referral Engine, author
Jantsch, founder of the Duct Tape Marketing Consultant Network,
encourages readers to toss out preconceived notions on employee and cus-
tomer loyalty and commitment. He offers guidelines on building a
–80–
company around a shared purpose and creating a healthy company
culture that values staff as much as the customer is valued. Examples are
given of real-life businesses of all sizes.
HF5415 2012-023464 978-0-13-301142-5
Creating breakthrough products; revealing the secrets that
drive global innovation, 2d ed.
Cagan, Jonathan and Craig M. Vogel.
FT Press, ©2013 379 p. $39.99
Cagan (Carnegie Mellon University) and Vogel (the University of
Cincinnati) describe new ideas and best practices in product devel-
opment at small and large companies. The ideas and practices are inte-
grated into a framework that covers the entire product development
process, from planning to program approval. In the first part of the
book, the authors argue that the best new products are designed by
merging style and technology in a way that connects with the lifestyle
and values of intended customers. Part 2 describes a comprehensive
approach to user-centered, integrated, new-product development, and
part 3 presents case studies in areas such as electric vehicle innovation,
green packaging, the first major Chinese global brand, and partnerships
between companies and universities. This second edition incorporates
recent case studies and examples, with new discussions on service design
and interaction design, and on product design in the US and other coun-
tries. The book includes b&w photos and illustrations, summary points,
and summary charts. FT Press is an imprint of Pearson Education.
HF5415 2012-008073 978-0-7494-6614-5
Creating the strategy; winning and keeping customers in
B2B markets.
Gould, Rennie.
Kogan Page, ©2012 238 p. $44.95 (pa)
Gould, a consultant and professional practitioner in business-to-business
(B2B) sales, customer strategy, and sales management in the UK, offers a
guide for leaders and managers in small and large organizations, as well
as graduate students, to winning and keeping customers in B2B markets
by creating and managing a sales and customer strategy. He describes
how strategy is created through strategic direction, customer strategy, the
value proposition, and the sales process; new ways of looking at lead-
ership, organization structure, development and motivation, and per-
formance management; the role of management during each step of
strategy creation and implementation and the importance of the direct
sales role and highly-skilled sales professionals; and creating a high-per-
forming organization by learning from lessons from consultancy and
organizational change. He argues that the implementation of sales and
customer strategy should provide the organizing rationale and opera-
tional plan for the entire organization. The book is based on man-
agement theory and his consultancy experience with various
organizations.
HF5415 2012-930572 978-1-84980-244-4
Handbook of developments in consumer behaviour.
Title main entry. Ed. by Victoria Wells and Gordon Foxall.
Edward Elgar Publishing, ©2012 602 p. $280.00
In putting together this handbook of consumer behavior research, Wells
(Durham U. Business School, England) and Foxall (Cardiff U. Business
School, Wales) have sought to avoid being steered by the mere instru-
mental, managerial concerns that sometimes characterizes the field and
to instead include writings that investigate consumer behavior as such.
The 15 selected papers are organized into thematic sections that consider
consumers and culture, specific contexts of consumerism (e.g. spatial
context and the context of social interactions), consumer impulsiveness
and compulsiveness, neuroscientific explanations of consumer choice,
and evolutionary and ecological perspectives on consumer behavior.
HF5415 2012-027307 978-1-59184-490-7
The impact equation; are you making things happen or
just making noise?
Brogan, Chris and Julien Smith.
Portfolio Pub. Co., ©2012 271 p. $26.95
Consultants Brogan and Smith, authors of Trust Agents, offer guidelines
for getting customer attention and building community online through
social media and social networks. Rather than offering technical details
on how to use social media, the authors instead explain how to build
ideas, how to move the ideas through a platform so they will be seen and
discussed, and how to build a strong human element around those ideas
so that people know you care about their participation. Their ‘impact
equation’ can be used to measure the impact of an organization’s blog,
tweets, videos, or mainstream-media advertising campaign.
–81–
HF5415 978-1-78190-016-1
Interdisciplinary approaches to product design,
innovation, & branding in international marketing.
Title main entry. Ed. by K. Scott Swan and Shaoming Zou. (Advances
in international marketing; v.23)
Emerald Group Publishing, ©2012 339 p. $134.95
In putting together this volume of the Advances in International
Marketing series, editors Swan (College of William and Mary) and Zou
(U. of Missouri-Columbia) hope to promote “lateral thinking” about
design, innovation, and branding by seeking a broadly interdisciplinary
group of contributors that approach the topic from the fields of strategy,
industrial design, operations, technology, and marketing. Fifteen papers
are presented, addressing such topics as transferring corporate brand
image to local markets, the impact of luxury brand-retailer co-branding
strategy on consumers’ evaluation of luxury brand image in Taiwan,
global brand manager response to an ambiguous product harm crisis,
using emotional design for service innovation in the experience economy,
impact of incentive preference on contribution behavior for social inno-
vation, the role of patent protection in encouraging or discouraging inno-
vation, and a conceptual model for understanding cross-cultural
consumption. Distributed in North America by Turpin Distribution.
HF5415 2012-018023 978-1-59184-388-7
Judgment on the front line; how smart companies win by
trusting their people.
DeRose, Chris and Noel M. Tichy.
Portfolio Pub. Co., ©2012 274 p. $26.95
Despite routine assertions by their management that companies value
people throughout the organization and encourage initiative, few actually
allow true innovation and empowerment on the front line, say the
authors. DeRose and Tichy, both with extensive consulting experience
and currently in the Business School at the University of Michigan,
outline a five step process for changing an organization into one that
does. This easily read book is full of case studies and examples that can
show a company how to truly make this transformation.
HF5415 978-81-7708-323-1
Marketing; forms and strategies.
Title main entry. Ed. by K. Pongiannan.
New Century Pub. (New Delhi), ©2012 173 p. $36.75
This collection of 11 research papers by Indian marketing experts inter-
rogates forms of marketing (such as viral marketing, Internet marketing,
and ambush marketing)and marketing strategies largely explored in
India. To that end, other topics include e-marketing in India, the Indian
retail industry, green marketing in India, and the marketing of IT and
IT-enabled services. Distributed in North America by ISBS.
HF5415 2011-048158 978-0-415-52317-2
Marketing management in Asia.
Title main entry. Ed. by Stan Paliwoda et al. (Routledge studies in inter-
national business and the world economy; 55)
Routledge, ©2013 189 p. $125.00
Declaring that “the future belongs to Asia,” the editors present 11
chapters that explore issues of marketing management in the fast
growing markets of Asia. The first four contributions focus on China,
specifically examining issues of distribution channels, consumer
behavior, consumer attitudes towards celebrity endorsements, and brand
management in the wake of the recent baby milk contamination scandal.
Next, chapters consider such topics as the relationship between culture
and consumer behavior in India, general cultural marketing issues in
Japan and Vietnam, real estate and relationship marketing in Thailand,
and risk-taking in international marketing by businessmen in Turkey.
HF5415 2012-029784 978-0-7897-4992-5
Pinterest for business; how to pin your company to the
top of the hottest social media network.
Loren, Jess and Edward Swiderski.
Que Publishing, ©2013 222 p. $21.99 (pa)
Loren, a consultant, strategist, speaker, and entrepreneur who is asso-
ciated with a social media marketing company, and Swiderski, a social
media specialist and consultant, show businesses how to use Pinterest to
heighten their social media exposure. They explain what it is, its features
and lingo, setting up an account, and how to pin photos, use boards,
integrate Pinterest in a business, find an audience, and pinpoint the
industry, with examples of successful and unsuccessful companies. They
detail how to get the most out of each pin through data analysis, tags,
and email marketing; what it takes to improve the reach of pins; inte-
grating Pinterest with other social media platforms; how to make pins
stand out; and etiquette.
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
HF5415 2012-026354 978-0-7897-4969-7
The rebel’s guide to email marketing; grow your list,
break the rules, and win.
Waldow, D.J. and Jason Falls.
Que Publishing, ©2013 265 p. $24.99 (pa)
Countering premature pronouncements that “email is dead,” Waldow
and Falls, the CEOs of companies that provide consulting on digital mar-
keting, explain how to harness the advantages of online marketing by
growing a customer list through implementing marketing strategies com-
bining the power of email and social media (characterized as the
dynamic duo of Batman and Robin). They also forecast future trends in
such marketing. The guide includes screenshots, chapter endnotes, and
trial access to the online edition.
HF5415 2012-012175 978-1-119-99320-9
Statistical methods in customer relationship management.
Kumar, V. and J. Andrew Peterson.
John Wiley & Sons, ©2012 272 p. $99.95
Traditional marketing theory and practice tend to focus on acquiring
new customers, but Kumar (Georgia State U.) and Peterson (U. of North
Carolina-Chapel Hill) explore measures to retain customers, keep them
from drifting to competitors, and win them back if they do. They explore
quantitative and modeling aspects, looking at models for customer acqui-
sition, models for customer retention, integrated models for acquiring
and retaining customers, models for customer churn, and models for cus-
tomer win-back. A chapter also suggests how to implement the models.
HF5415 2012-024976 978-1-4129-9868-0
Sustainable enterprise; a macromarketing approach.
Peterson, Mark.
Sage Publications, ©2013 535 p. $60.00 (pa)
In this text for courses in sustainable marketing and business, Peterson
(marketing, University of Wyoming) explains how businesses can benefit
by taking a more holistic approach to the marketplace. His advice on
how to achieve profits while operating with a social conscience will be
of interest to those in business, as well as students and teachers. The
theme of entrepreneurship is woven throughout the text. The first part
of the book presents macromarketing as a framework for understanding
sustainable enterprise. Part 2 examines factors contributing to market
dynamism, such as empowered consumers and globalization. Later sec-
tions cover enterprise with the environment and equity in mind. The
final section looks at the future of market-based sustainability. A sup-
porting website includes an actual business plan (not merely a checklist)
from a real entrepreneur. Other learning features in the text include
chapter-opening vignettes, chapter-ending questions, and boxes on his-
torical and modern-day mavericks who made it.
HF5438 2012-030708 978-0-7494-6657-2
Principled selling; how to win more business without
selling your soul.
Tovey, David.
Kogan Page, ©2012 243 p. $19.95 (pa)
Tovey, a consultant, writer, and speaker in the UK who helps clients
implement the principled selling approach, outlines this approach, which
salespeople can use to build a more profitable business in a natural and
comfortable way for both sellers and buyers. He illustrates how sales-
people, business owners, sales managers, business development execu-
tives, and others in business can sell ethically with integrity and
conscience, and be trusted and earn respect. He explains how lack of
trust and the Internet are influencing buyers; the five principles of his
approach; and how to sustain long-term sales growth, motivate potential
customers and clients to buy, maintain customer loyalty, create opportu-
nities for more business with key clients, differentiate the business by the
approach to selling, become a trusted supplier and advisor, use social
media, and build an overall business development culture.
HF5547 2011-942387 978-1-111-57586-1
Procedures & theory for administrative professionals, 7th
ed.
Stulz, Karin M. et al.
South-Western, ©2013 460 p. $55.75
Stulz (business, Northern Michigan U.) et al. provide a textbook for
administrative professionals that addresses the workplace; professional
image; behaviors like self-management and leadership; written and
verbal communication; records and financial management; and profes-
sional responsibilities and growth, including meeting and event
planning, travel, workplace mail and copying, and job search and
advancement. This edition has been reorganized to include more on
topics like the changing workplace, personal finance, teams, applied
ethics, and customer service; updates on new technologies, processes, and
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
global communication; emphasis on twenty-first century skills; dis-
cussion of emerging technologies; and a web access to an ebook, activ-
ities, quizzes, games, videos, and other tools.
HF5548 2011-052736 978-0-7494-5966-6
Understanding CBT; develop your own toolkit to reduce
stress, enhance performance and increase well-being.
Szymanska, Kasia and Stephen Palmer.
Kogan Page, ©2012 174 p. $19.95 (pa)
This guide to using cognitive behavioral therapy (CBT) explains how CBT
can be used effectively in any area of life. The resource covers a whole
suite of concerns, from basic worry and stress to managing workplace
bullying. It includes nine appendixes with forms to use in facing one’s
own problems.
HF5549 2012-027671 978-1-60163-243-2
100 ways to motivate others; how great leaders can
produce insane results without driving people crazy, 3d
ed.
Chandler, Steve and Scott Richardson.
Career Press, ©2012 221 p. $15.99 (pa)
Chandler, a speaker, trainer, consultant, leadership coach, and author,
and Richardson, a lawyer and business coach to lawyers and profes-
sionals, delineate 100 ways leaders can motivate others, along with 10
new ways in this edition. They describe how to know where motivation
comes from, teach self-discipline, stop criticizing upper management,
give feedback, get input, accelerate change, manage superiors, know one’s
purpose, hire motivated people, learn to experiment, communicate con-
sciously, motivate by doing, know people’s strengths, use positive rein-
forcement, lead with enthusiasm, keep learning, use the power of
deadlines, take responsibility, create a vision, make requests, create a
routine, encourage testing, master problem solving, and other strategies.
This edition has information on communication and rapid decision
making, the importance of personal self-leadership and physical energy,
and new methods for enrolling clients and selling to customers in service-
oriented ways.
HF5549 2012-021432 978-81-321-0896-2
Designing human resource management systems; a
leader’s guide.
Mukherjee, Jayant.
Sage Publications, ©2012 314 p. $36.00 (pa)
Mukherjee, a human resources consultant and advisor and former uni-
versity lecturer in India, provides a framework for leaders, decision
makers, senior managers, human resources practitioners, and con-
sultants for designing and implementing human resources management
systems in different kinds of organizations. He presents tools, question-
naires, inventories, forms, policies, and other aspects, and theory, con-
cepts, research, and guidelines, including key components and
considerations, in each practice area: job analysis, human resource
planning, recruitment and selection, performance management systems,
training and development, 360-degree feedback, mentoring and executive
coaching, reward management, and human resources policies and pro-
cedures. He does not address legal issues.
HF5549 2012-008813 978-1-84872-949-0
Emotional labor in the 21st century; diverse perspectives
on the psychology of emotion regulation at work.
Title main entry. Ed. by Alicia Grandey et al. (Organization and man-
agement series; 48)
Routledge, ©2013 323 p. $73.95
This book is a specialist anthology on emotional labor, the systems of
social rules that organize and define how people regulate their feelings
in the workplace. The book builds on the school founded by Arlie
Hochschild with the 1983 book The Managed Heart: Commericalization of
Human Feelings. The three editors are all professors of
Industrial/Organizational Psychology (at The Pennsylvania State U., U. of
Akron, and Purdue). The book has an author and a subject index, and
is divided into five parts: an overview, person perspectives (within,
between, dyadic, and group), occupational perspectives (customer service,
call center, caring professionals), contextual perspectives (organization,
gender, culture), and multidisciplinary perspectives, a set of essays by
pioneers in the field. The contributions vary in style from accessible for
any reader with an interest in social science or behavior, to technical and
designed to maintain boundaries of separation from sociology and other
related fields.
–82–
HF5549 978-1-84980-918-4
Handbook of research in international human resource
management, 2d ed.
Title main entry. Ed. by Günter K. Stahl et al.
Edward Elgar Publishing, ©2012 593 p. $295.00
Twenty-six chapters review different approaches to understanding the
role of international human resource management in organizational per-
formance, addressing the competing pressures a global corporation faces
when embracing both global integration and local responsiveness.
Academics from American and European universities examine
knowledge transfer mechanisms, compensation strategies, talent man-
agement, leadership development, and the motives for deploying expa-
triate assignees to staff the foreign operations of multinational
enterprises. Three of the papers tackle the challenges posed by global
virtual team dynamics, complex joint ventures, and cross-border acquisi-
tions. The last section applies economic, institutional, and behavioral the-
ories to international human resource management.
HF5549 2012-017153 978-0-7494-6106-5
International human resource development; learning,
education and training for individuals and organizations,
3d ed.
Title main entry. Ed. by John P. Wilson.
Kogan Page, ©2012 502 p. $70.00 (pa)
Wilson, a researcher and consultant who teaches at the U. of Oxford and
the U. of Sheffield, UK, assembles 24 essays by an international group of
human resources development specialists who explore international
human resource development (HRD). The text aims to bridge theory and
practice and discuss the meaning of training, education, development,
and learning, and the nature of HRD and international HRD; the strategic
organizational context; the process of learning from different perspec-
tives; change management, organization development, and knowledge
management; national systems of education; vocational education and
training in various countries and through the European Training
Foundation and a United Nations Development Programme; the training
cycle and its components, including coaching and mentoring, assessing
and evaluating the intervention, and working in multicultural and mul-
tilingual environments; and leadership and management and their appli-
cation to the HRD function. Chapters align with the Chartered Institute
of Personnel and Development standards.
HF5549 2005-296676 978-1-889150-59-8
The safe hiring manual; the complete guide to
employment screening background checks for employers,
recruiters, and job seekers, 2d ed.
Rosen, Lester S.
Facts on Demand Press, ©2012 724 p. $24.95 (pa)
Rosen, an attorney who runs a pre-employment background screening
firm, offers a resource for employers, human resources and security pro-
fessionals, private investigators, employment law attorneys, background
screening firms, and job applicants that outlines the process of
employment screening background checks. He addresses legal consider-
ations like due diligence and negligent hiring, privacy and discrimination
laws, the Fair Credit Reporting Act, and state laws, then outlines a safe
hiring program and system. He also discusses the application-interview-
reference process; pre-employment screening, the background screening
industry, and selecting and working with a company; criminal records
and their legal use; and tools like credit reports and Social Security
number traces. Coverage also includes information on educational and
credentials verifications, social media and international background
checks, terrorist database searches, and drug testing; managing issues
like fraud, embezzlement, honesty, workplace violence, issues with IDs,
ID theft, and privacy, and Form I-9, E-Verify, and after-hire issues;
screening temps, vendors, consultants, independent contractors, and vol-
unteers; and what job seekers should know. Online sources are cited.
HF5549 2012-020505 978-0-13-309044-4
The truth about managing people, 3d ed.
Robbins, Stephen P.
Financial Times Prentice Hall, ©2013 258 p. $22.99 (pa)
Robbins (management, San Diego State U.) offers a concise guide to the
“truths of managing people.” Each chapter is an explanation about this
or that “truth” about human behavior in a management context—age
stereotypes, the motivating effect of recognition, team building, etc. He
provides detailed citations for each of these truths, arguing that too much
popular nonfiction about management is based on flimsy if any
evidence. The material is divided into nine sections with 2-10 chapters
each. New to this edition are topic-areas on ethical leadership, virtual
leadership, the dark side of charisma, organizational citizenship
behavior, age stereotypes, organizational politics, digital distractions at
–83–
work, and layoff-survivor sickness. No index has been provided.
HF5549 978-1-84619-495-5
Work-based learning in clinical settings; insights from
socio-cultural perspectives.
Title main entry. Ed. by Viv Cook et al.
Radcliffe Publishing, ©2012 224 p. $69.95 (pa)
Work-based learning is an approach to studying clinician education that
reframes the relationship between learning and practice in socio-eco-
logical terms. Cook (medical education, Barts and the London School of
Medicine and Dentistry, Queen Mary) and others at the University of
London compile discussions in this framework. In the context of calls for
reform in the National Health Service, mostly UK contributors present
theoretically and empirically-based discussions of “communities of
practice” as a type of medical apprenticeship, and what is being learned
in face-to-face and online settings. Perspectives drawn from include social
constructivist, activity, social semiotic, and actor-network theory.
Distributed in the US by BookMasters.
HF5616 2012-935271 978-1-84844-816-2
Handbook of accounting and development.
Title main entry. Ed. by Trevor Hopper et al.
Edward Elgar Publishing, ©2012 321 p. $195.00
Frustrated by their inability to publish in journals, a group of British
academics put together this collection exploring how accounting practices
intertwine with political and social issues in less developed countries,
largely blaming the corruption, capital shortages, and environmental
degradation common in less developed countries on the financial policies
and practices of rich countries. Topics of the 15 papers include adoption
of international financial reporting standards, the accountability of non-
governmental organizations, the dangers of microfinance institutions,
and the failure of financial management reforms in African central
governments.
HF5616 978-81-7708-306-4
International financial reporting standards (IFRS) and
Indian accounting practices.
Raiyani, Jagadish R. and Gaurav Lodha.
New Century Pub. (New Delhi), ©2012 169 p. $34.75
Raiyani (Shree Maharshi Dayanand Saraswati MBA College, India) and
Lodha (Jodhpur National U., Rajasthan) explain the benefits of adopting
international financial reporting standards (IFRS) and identify require-
ments for successfully implementing IFRS in India. Intended for cor-
porate financial officers, the book describes the convergence of
accounting standards issued by the ICAI and the IASB and reviews the
history of bookkeeping practices. Distributed in North America by ISBS.
HF5625 978-1-78052-760-4
Research on professional responsibility and ethics in
accounting.
Title main entry. Ed. by Cynthia Jeffrey. (Research on professional
responsibility and ethics in accounting; v.16)
Emerald Group Publishing, ©2012 231 p. $114.95
Business scholars report the results of their research into ethics in
accounting. They cover anatomy of an enrollment fraud, ethical predis-
position of certified public accountants: a study of gender differences,
enhanced enforcement of the Foreign Corrupt Practices Act: improving
the ethics of US business practices abroad, promoting professionalism:
lessons from the medical and legal professions, ethics prompts and their
effects on the individual’s evaluation of acceptable business practices:
considerations for accountants, executive/chair duality in the Sarbanes-
Oxley era: board independence versus unity of command, the impact of
accounting students’ professional skepticism on their ethical perception
of earnings management, and classroom cheating: reasons not to whistle-
blow and the probability of whistle-blowing. Distributed in North
America by Turpin Distribution.
HF5630 2010-931634 978-1-84920-796-6
Research methods in accounting, 2d ed.
Smith, Malcolm.
Sage Publications, ©2011 223 p. $146.00
Focusing on the actual choices made in conducting accounting research
projects, Smith (accounting, Edith Cowan U., Western Australia) explains
the research process. He emphasizes the importance of planning and
preparation in order to have a realistic perception of what might go
wrong so that appropriate corrective action can be taken. Most of his
own research is archive-based rather than field-based, and his account
reflects that bias. Among his topics are developing the research idea, col-
lecting data, research ethics in accounting, experimental research,
fieldwork, and turning research into publications.
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
HF5635 978-1-78052-756-7
Advances in accounting education; teaching and
curriculum innovations.
Title main entry. Ed. by Dorothy Feldmann and Timothy J. Rupert.
(Advances in accounting education; teaching and curriculum innova-
tions; v.13)
Emerald Group Publishing, ©2012 444 p. $174.95
In this collection of 13 empirical and non-empirical articles, practitioners
and researchers explain methods for how college and university faculty
members can improve instruction in their accounting classrooms. The
non-empirical papers discuss the institutional context of a course or
program, as well as any relevant tradeoffs or policy issues, while the
empirical reports include literature reviews. This volume of the annual
publication contains five articles on the impact of the International
Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS) on accounting education, exam-
ining topics such as teaching IFRS with online videos and webcasts.
Other chapter topics include assessment based on student learning out-
comes and alternative pedagogies, integrating managerial accounting
concepts into a chemistry course, role playing in an entity tax course, and
exercise-based video podcasts as learning aids for introductory financial
accounting students. Feldmann is affiliated with Bentley University.
Rupert is affiliated with Northeastern University. The book is distributed
in North America by Turpin Distribution.
HF5635 2012-357035 978-0-470-61631-4
Intermediate accounting; v.2, IFRS ed.
Kieso, Donald E. et al.
John Wiley & Sons, ©2011 1383+ p. $84.49
This version of Intermediate Accounting, 13th edition, a well-established
textbook in the field, presents accounting from the perspective of the
International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS) rather than US gen-
erally accepted accounting principles. Kieso (PhD, CPA, emeritus,
accountancy, Northern Illinois U.) and fellow US accounting academics
cover topics from the growth of global equity markets and controversies
over whether companies should report financial instruments such as
share options as an equity or liability, to concepts for analysis. The text
includes chapter exercises, a “using your judgment” feature, professional
research assignments, a map of the global accounting landscape, and an
online resource that includes homework.
HF5636 2011-924230 978-1-111-53522-3
Financial & managerial accounting; using Excel for
success. (online access included)
Reeve, James M. et al.
South-Western, ©2012 1283+ p. $212.95
The 11th edition of a time-tested text takes accounting into the 21st
century and gives students the tools needed to thrive in the real world.
Warren (emeritus, U. of Georgia), Reeve (emeritus, U. of Tennessee) and
Duchac (Wake Forest U.) introduce all phases of business accounting and
explain how to post transactions, classify receivables, report inventories,
depreciate assets, evaluate budgetary performance, price product, and
allocate cost. Color photos and Excel exercises are provided.
HF5657 978-1-78190-104-5
Advances in management accounting.
Title main entry. Ed. by Marc J. Epstein and John Y. Lee. (Advances in
management accounting; v.21)
Emerald Group Publishing, ©2012 231 p. $124.95
Epstein (administration, Rice U.) and Lee (business, Pace U.) present the
21st volume of an annual publication collecting applied research in man-
agement accounting, which they define as “all systems designed to
provide information for management decision making.” Topics
addressed by the nine papers selected for this volume include the impact
of framed information and project importance on capital budgeting deci-
sions; the impact of adverse selection and risk propensity on managers’
project evaluation decisions; relative hedonic utility and budgetary con-
flict resolution; industrial relations, budgetary participation, and budget
use; corporate strategy, employee’s attitudes towards the balanced
scorecard, and corporate performance; and cost-control systems and the
effects of information technology integration on manufacturing financial
performance. Distributed in North America by Turpin Distribution.
HF5657 2011-275618 978-0-471-69960-6
Managerial accounting.
Davis, Charles E. and Elizabeth Davis.
John Wiley & Sons, ©2012 705+ p. $173.04
Two accounting professors at Baylor University introduce the components
of the internal accounting reports prepared by companies to assist in
decision making activities. Intended for non-majors, the textbook
describes the master budget, product costing for manufacturing com-
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
panies, activity-based costing, capital budgeting, performance evaluation,
financial statement analysis, and the statement of cash flows. Color
images and a fictional case study are provided.
HF5668 2012-020821 978-0-87389-844-7
How to audit the process-based QMS, 2d ed.
Arter, Dennis R. et al.
ASQ Quality Press, ©2013 189 p. $69.00
For people managing and conducting audits to ISO 9001:2008, quality
professionals Arter, Charles A. Cianfrani, and John E. West present a
guide to establishing a new audit program or revitalize one that has been
operational for some time. They focus on achieving an audit program
that produces value-added results for the organization, covering process-
based auditing, managing an audit program, the process of auditing,
and aids for implementing an audit program.
HF5679 2011-941184 978-1-111-97214-1
Accounting information systems, 8th ed.
Hall, James A.
South-Western, ©2013 798 p. $273.95
Hall (business and economics, Lehigh U.) offers this textbook for intro-
ductory, advanced, and graduate-level accounting information systems
courses that is written from the perspective of the managers’ and
accountants’ responsibilities under the Sarbanes Oxley Act. It is meant
for accounting majors, but can be used by general business, industrial
engineering, and computer science students. It focuses on the profes-
sional and legal responsibility of accountants, auditors, and management
for the design, operation, and control of accounting information systems
for financial transactions. It emphasizes internal controls based on the
Committee of Sponsoring Organizations of the Treadway Commission
framework, and discusses approaches and methodologies used in
systems analysis and design and documentation techniques. This edition
has new and revised homework assignments and updated content, as
well as several reorganized chapters. It includes more on types of audit
services, information technology application controls, and tests of infor-
mation technology application controls and substantive testing among
many other topic expansions.
HF5679 978-1-936420-31-5
SAP ERP financials quick reference guide; SAP ECC 6.0.
Padhi, Surya.
Mercury Learning and Information, ©2013 504 p. $49.95 (pa)
This book is designed as a quick reference on the SAP module known as
mySAP ERP Financials 6.0. Coverage encompasses configurations and
end user transactions for validation. After an overview of the SAP
Business Suite and SAP ERP Financials, chapters cover these submodels:
SAP Financial Accounting and Controlling, SAP General Ledger, and
Financial Supply Chain Management. Also covered are business
processes and practices, and reporting. The book’s multiple choice ques-
tions can be used as preparation for certification tests. B&w screenshots
are included. Padhi is an SAP consultant. The book is distributed in the
US by International Publishers Marketing.
HF5691 2012-007001 978-0-470-71058-6
Financial statistics and mathematical finance; methods,
models and applications.
Steland, Ansgar.
John Wiley & Sons, ©2012 415 p. $90.00
In a textbook for graduate students, researchers, and practitioners,
Steland (statistics and economics, Aachen U., Germany) introduces the
mathematical topics required for understanding financial markets and
the quantitative methods used there. He treats mathematics finance in
the narrow sense of arbitrage theory for pricing contingent claims such
as options and the related mathematical machinery, as well as statistical
models and methods to analyze data from financial markets. He keeps
the mathematical formalism as elementary and conventional as possible
so newcomers can focus on the derivations and calculations.
HF5718 2012-028257 978-0-85728-514-0
The complete guide to business school presenting; what
your professors don’t tell you... what you absolutely must
know.
Ridgley, Stanley K.
Anthem Press, ©2012 258 p. $29.95 (pa)
Ridgley (management, Drexel U.) identifies the presentation skills needed
by students in business school. He argues that professors often omit these
skills and covers the characteristics of the twenty-first century presenter;
the basics of a talk (structure, content, and audience); the key skills of
stance, voice, gesture, expression, movement, appearance, and passion;
the use of storytelling; and group presentations, analysis tools like SWOT
–84–
(strengths, weaknesses, opportunities, and threats) and value chain
analysis, and business case competitions. Distributed by Books
International, Inc.
HF5718 2012-019634 978-1-4221-8710-4
HBR guide to persuasive presentations.
Duarte, Nancy.
Harvard Business Review Press, ©2012 229 p. $19.95 (pa)
Duarte, who teaches workshops on presenting, helps those in business
gain the confidence and skills needed to make persuasive presentations.
She explains how to know the audience and build empathy, develop a
persuasive message, use storytelling principles and structure to engage
the audience, identify the best modes for communicating the message,
use slides to display information, deliver the presentation, and measure
and increase the impact on the audience.
HF5718 2012-020102 978-0-7494-6543-8
Writing skills for public relations; style and technique for
mainstream and social media. 5th ed.
Foster, John.
Kogan Page, ©2012 266 p. $37.50 (pa)
This is the fifth edtion of a textbook of public relations writing by John
Foster. It is recommended for students of the Chartered Institute of
Public Relations Diploma, and was designed for the British media
industry and British English usage. Foster writes in a matter-of-fact style
that will remind American readers of an etiquette manual. He focuses on
precise cultural details, such as using gilt-edged stationery for business
invitations; the standards here are those of office culture and media pro-
fessions in the UK. For more general rules, he generally focuses on what
not to do. While the book is targeted to readers who may not know how
to write a business letter or speak in front of a group, additional
classroom curriculum is implied; readers are told they will fail utterly as
professionals if they do X, but what to do instead is often not explained
here. For this reason, beginning writers will also need a writer’s style
manual. This book is strongest in the details of how public relations
firms and media businesses work, for instance the specific duties of a
subeditor (and the qualities a text needs before it will be considered
news). The book has chapters covering everything from business email
conventions to libel laws, advertising codes to annual reports to social
media to how to speak in person with an educated accent. Much of this
information is specific to the laws, practices, and cultures of the UK, and
will be useful for readers doing business there; readers doing business
in the US should consult a US text.
HF5821 978-0-500-51626-3
Goodvertising; creative advertising that cares.
Kolster, Thomas.
Thames & Hudson, ©2012 256 p. $50.00
Danish media and advertising strategist Kolster is the founder of the cre-
ative agency Inkognito. He has 12-plus years of experience in the com-
munications industry working with a diverse range of clients, from
McDonalds to Amnesty International. Recognizing that modern con-
sumers are as interested in the ethical and social-responsibility aspects of
businesses as they are in the quality of the products and services, he
presents a survey of some 120 campaigns from around the world that
have used the creative tools of advertising to promote positive social and
behavioral changes, and to empower consumers and citizens who receive
advertising’s messages. Kolster’s provocative text offers food for thought
for advertising and branding professionals as well as general readers. No
subject index has been provided. Oversize: 9.75x11.25”.
HF5841 2011-047322 978-1-4214-0494-3
Signs, streets, and storefronts; a history of architecture
and graphics along America’s commercial corridors.
Treu, Martin.
Johns Hopkins U. Press, ©2012 384 p. $49.95
Examining more than 200 years of signs along America’s passageways,
Treu (architect, environmental designer) puts a spotlight on the creative
commercial designs of the past and the design developments of the
present, focusing on the need for historical preservation. This compelling
history of signage and architecture presents a comprehensive view of the
American commercial landscape and how customer needs, corporate
interest, municipal mandates, and technological advancements have
influenced its design. Of interest to architects, city planners, designers,
armchair-historians, and Americana enthusiasts, this volume contains
173 illustrations, extensive notes, and an essay on sources.
–85–
HF6146 2011-052595 978-1-4398-8191-0
Machine-to-machine marketing (M3) via anonymous
advertising apps anywhere anytime (A5).
Mena, Jesus.
CRC Press, ©2012 418 p. $69.95 (pa)
Monitoring a consumer’s use of devices such as laptops and iphones is
shaping up to be the most effective tool in advertising and marketing.
This technical book brings together data mining, coupled with “obser-
vation” of consumer use of social media and mobile devices, as tools to
facilitate machine-to-machine marketing. The largest part of the book
consists of 216 pages of short case studies, illustrating the experience of
over 100 companies working with new software to enhance their inter-
actions with customers.
HF6146 2012-013049 978-0-7494-6604-6
Pioneers of digital; success stories from leaders in
advertising, marketing, search and social media.
Springer, Paul and Mel Carson.
Kogan Page, ©2012 224 p. $34.95 (pa)
Through telling the stories of 20 digital entrepreneurs, Springer (com-
munications, Buckinghamshire New U.) and Carson (Delightful
Communications, Ltd.) present a wellspring of interesting accounts, and
perhaps inspiration to others. Some of the paragraph-long quotes stem
from from personal interviews while others are extracts from articles,
books or Internet sites. Each chapter closes with three “Sound bytes,”
summarizing the key points. The book ends with an overall summary of
key lessons learned by digital marketing pioneers, and a six page “jargon
buster”—or dictionary for those of us not up on the latest terminology.
HF6182 2011-926064 978-0-7624-4090-0
The real mad men; the renegades of Madison Avenue and
the golden age of advertising.
Cracknell, Andrew.
Running Press, ©2011 224 p. $28.00
Since the beginning of his career in advertising in the 1960s, UK-based
Cracknell has worked in various capacities for a variety of agencies on
both sides of the Atlantic. He offers readers a historical account of the
transformation of the advertising industry during the late 1950s and
1960s, that began in New York City and spread across the newspapers,
magazines, and TV screens of the US and beyond. Incorporating infor-
mation acquired from interviews with veterans of the era, Cracknell pro-
vides the real-life details and contrasts to the Mad Men storyline.
Illustrated with b&w and color photographs, the text will interest stu-
dents, academics, and professionals in business and advertising as well
as general readers fascinated by this period in advertising and American
history.
HG106 2012-002912 978-0-470-89081-3
An introduction to analysis of financial data with R.
Tsay, Ruey S. (Wiley series in probability and statistics)
John Wiley & Sons, ©2012 390 p. $130.00
Tsay (econometrics and statistics, U. of Chicago) offers students an intro-
duction to analyzing financial data using methods that are simpler than
those he describes in Analysis of Financial Time Series. All the analysis is
in the R programming language, he says, because it is free and widely
available, and easy to adapt once the fundamentals are known. He covers
financial data and their properties, linear models for financial time
series, case studies of linear time series, asset volatility and volatility
models, applications of volatility models, high frequency financial data,
and value at risk.
HG106 2011-007717 978-0-470-64184-2
Mathematical finance.
Alhabeeb, M.J.
John Wiley & Sons, ©2012 536 p. $115.00
Aware of the frustration that many students experience with standard
mathematical texts fixed on technical details, Alhabeeb (economics and
finance, U. of Massachusetts Amherst) emphasizes problem solving of
real-world financial issues (e.g., How much life insurance should a
couple buy given their circumstances?) using mathematical methods/for-
mulas to illustrate and clarify the underlying principles. Following an
introduction to basic concepts, he covers the math involved in banking,
credit, mortgage debt, capital budgeting and depreciation, investment,
and insurance. Examples, exercises, and statistical tables are included.
The text is intended for upper-level undergraduate and first-year graduate
majors in business, public administration, economics, and related fields.
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
HG149 978-1-921719-54-7
Undies to equities; from refugee to financial guru, the
remarkable life of Henri Aram.
Aram, Henri and Michael Visontay.
Rosenberg Publishing, ©2012 240 p. $29.95 (pa)
Henri Aram was a teenager when his family escaped Nazi Germany and
settled in Australia. Aram now serves in local Australian politics and acts
as a public advocate for small investors, in addition to giving advice on
personal finance via the radio, newspaper columns, and books. Here, he
recounts his rise from unwelcome immigrant to successful businessman.
The book includes many b&w and color personal photos. Co-author
Michael Visontay is a journalist. The book is distributed in the US by
ISBS.
HG179 2012-022092 978-0-13-311529-1
Are you a stock or a bond?; identify your own human
capital for a secure financial future, rev. ed.
Milevsky, Moshe A.
FT Press, ©2013 231 p. $29.99
Milevsky (business and mathematics and statistics, York U., Canada)
argues that readers must be aware of the value, return, and risk classi-
fication of their job or career and that all financial decisions should be
balanced with the economic characteristics of human capital. He con-
tends that people’s careers, houses, investment portfolios, and marriages
should be diversified just as their investment accounts are, and that all
of these aspects are financial assets. He explains the importance of this
holistic diversification and how to do diversify by moving from short-
term to long-term investing. He discusses personal financial risk man-
agement early in life and how to think about risk and return over long
periods and understand the role of hedging vs. investing or speculating
in managing human capital. He addresses life insurance, debt, inflation
and personal cost of living, the risk associated with longevity, retirement,
annuities, and how to convert and manage the risk of going from a
401(k) or IRA plan to a personal pension. This edition has updated and
revised tables, charts, and graphs to better illustrate the economy after
the financial crisis. FT Press is an imprint of Pearson Education.
HG179 2012-026638 978-1-936303-34-2
Estate and financial planning for people living with
COPD.
Shenkman, Martin M.
Demos Health, ©2013 202 p. $21.95 (pa)
In this guide for general readers, attorney Shenkman gives special estate
and financial planning guidelines for those facing chronic obstructive
pulmonary disease (COPD), which affects people in mid to later life. The
book begins with an overview of nine general steps of estate and
financial planning, then reviews special issues for those with COPD, such
as competency issues resulting from the medical consequences of COPD.
The book offers step-by-step directions for tasks such as organizing legal,
financial, and other information, ensuring access to medical records,
drawing up a health care proxy, distributing assets through a will, and
creating a revocable living trust. The author also gives advice on hiring
an attorney and getting the most out of attorney office visits. Sample
forms, examples, and checklists are included.
HG179 978-94-6091-916-9
Financial literacy education; neoliberalism, the consumer
and the citizen.
Arthur, Chris. (Educational futures; rethinking theory and practice;
v.53)
Sense Publishers, ©2012 138 p. $39.00 (pa)
The economic elite tell working people to become financially literate in
order to improve their position in the economy, but Arthur argues that
real financial literacy entails understanding and accepting the responsi-
bility to create and maintain a just economic system. The topics include
financial literacy education, liberal and neoliberal subjectivity, sign value
and the production of financial literacy education, and critical financial
literacy education.
We're always delighted to hear from our readers.
Contact us at (503) 281-9230 or booknews@booknews.com.
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
HG179 2012-030548 978-0-13-301790-8
The financial professional’s guide to communication; how
to strengthen client relationships and build new ones.
Finder, Robert L., Jr.
Financial Times Prentice Hall, ©2013 196 p. $39.99
Finder, who is associated with a national financial services firm that
develops wealth management solutions for high net worth individuals
and their families, businesses, institutions, and retirement funds, shows
financial professionals how to improve their communication with clients.
He explains the role of critical listening and how to improve it, specific
communication techniques, and how to ask questions, speak critically,
avoid ineffective words, use eye contact, present effectively, and other
skills.
HG179 2012-010355 978-0-7494-6489-9
The handbook of personal wealth management, 8th ed.
Title main entry. Ed. by Jonathan Reuvid.
Kogan Page, ©2012 257 p. $100.00
Like the US economy, the UK’s is in the doldrums. Former
economist/investment banker Reuvid introduces approaches for high net
worth individuals to grow and protect their wealth despite the volatile
markets. Following an introduction to investment risk, contributors
discuss investment strategies including tax restructuring and commodity
exchange traded products, and investment opportunities in precious
stones and metals, arts and antiquities, wine, and socially responsible
investing. The book includes a directory of investing managers and inde-
pendent financial managers in the UK, and several advertisements.
HG230 978-81-7708-322-4
Global recession in historical and recent perspectives.
Sambandhan, D. and M.B. Mohandas.
New Century Pub. (New Delhi), ©2012 188 p. $36.75
Sambandhan (politics and international studies, Pondicherry U., India)
and Mohandas (manager of imports and logistics, Indian Farmers
Fertiliser Cooperative Limited) provide an Indian perspective on the
history and current era of economic and financial crises in the world
capitalist system. They review the causes of the Great Depression, the
European sovereign debt crisis, the Asian economic collapse of the late
1990s, and the US sub-prime crisis. They then offer a general theoretical
consideration of the nature of current account crises, balance of sheet
crises, and bank-run currency crises. Finally, they distill lessons for con-
temporary policy-makers in relation to macroeconomic imbalances
between the US and Asia, premature capital account convertibility and
pegged exchange rates, global dependence on the dollar, the state versus
market debate in managing financial markets, and new policy initiatives
by the International Monetary Fund. Distributed in North America by
ISBS.
HG230 2012-935281 978-1-84980-735-7
Monetary policy and central banking; new directions in
post-Keynesian theory.
Title main entry. Ed. by Louis-Philippe Rochon and Salewa ‘Yinka
Olawoye.
Edward Elgar Publishing, ©2012 250 p. $115.00
Edited by Rochon (director, International Economic Policy Institute,
Laurentian U., Canada) and Olawoye (a doctoral student at the U. of
Missouri, US), this volume is the result of a May 2009 conference
bringing together leading post-Keynesian economists to focus on the pos-
sible causes of the preceding year’s global economic crisis and challenges
posed by the crisis for current global monetary policy and central
banking. Eleven chapters are presented on such topics as stabilization
policy with an endogenous commercial bank; post-Keynesian proposals
for the banking system and the US government’s financial institutions;
the experience of developing economies with financial market organiza-
tions, central banks, and credits; central bank responses to financial
crises; financial crisis, state of confidence, and economic policies in a
post-Keynesian stock-flow consistent model; the political economy of the
Bank of Canada in a period of financial chaos; financial stability and the
euro; and quantitative easing in the United States after the crisis.
HG925 2012-028882 978-0-85728-548-5
Europe’s unfinished currency; the political economics of
the euro.
Mayer, Thomas.
Anthem Press, ©2012 262 p. $26.95
The Economic and Monetary Union (EMU) of the European Union is only
the latest in a series of failed experiments in monetary union of sovereign
states. Will it survive? Mayer, former chief economist of the Deutsche
Bank Group, believes the euro currency can work, but only if its faulty
architecture is repaired. He argues that a new framework for the euro
–86–
must be based on two principles: the euro must be a nonpolitical cur-
rency, and sovereignty and liability in essential fiscal policy matters must
be firmly aligned at the national level. The book begins with an overview
of the origins of the euro and its role in the unification of Europe, then
charts the early years of the euro and its more recent crises of legitimacy
and how they have been addressed. The author recommends going back
to the original design of the EMU where each country is responsible for
its government finances. Beyond the color illustration on the cover, some
effort has been made to make the material accessible to the general
reader. Mayer is affiliated with Goethe University Frankfurt. The book is
distributed by Books International, Inc.
HG2040 2012-017594 978-1-59332-534-3
White collar crime in housing; mortgage fraud in the
United States.
Koller, Cynthia. (Criminal justice; recent scholarship)
LFB Scholarly Publishing, LLC, ©2012 175 p. $65.00
In this study, Koller (criminal justice, Shippensburg University) uses dif-
fusion theory to understand the growing incidence of lending fraud in
the subprime mortgage market and uses interviews with financial and
mortgage industry practitioners to glean insights on the subprime oppor-
tunity structure. The author also applies criminological theory to explain
white collar crime in this area.
HG2051 2012-018812 978-0-8014-5062-4
Prosper or perish; credit and fiscal systems in rural
China.
Ong, Lynette H.
Cornell U. Press, ©2012 212 p. $39.95
The track record and practices of banks that serve rural China, rural
credit cooperatives (RCCs) are the focus of this examination of China’s
complicated and changing political economy. Ong (political science, U. of
Toronto) explains that while the RCCs originated to provide support for
agricultural development at the household level, they gradually moved to
larger enterprises, such as those in and run by townships and villages.
She notes that half of all RCC loans were in default or close to it,
requiring an infusion of money from China’s central bank. Her explo-
ration of that uneven development and case studies searches out the
causes and sources.
HG3852 2012-025158 978-0-88132-623-9
Devaluing to prosperity; misaligned currencies and their
growth consequences.
Bhalla, Surjit S.
Peterson Inst. Int’l Economics, ©2012 263 p. $19.95 (pa)
Bhalla (chairman of Oxus Investments, a market advisory firm based in
New Delhi, India) seeks to demonstrate the neglected role of currency
undervaluation in economic (export-led) growth and to consider its impli-
cations for global economics. He explains the mechanisms by which cur-
rency valuation effects growth (largely through investment); offers
evidence in defense of the hypothesis that policies promoting cheap cur-
rency lead to higher growth, as well as the stronger hypothesis that a
large proportion of growth accelerations and decelerations can be
explained in terms of currency valuation; and considers the issues of
whether the Chinese renminbi has been substantially undervalued. He
also considers the pitfalls of widespread reliance on currency devalu-
ation, arguing that such practice eventually can be understood as mer-
cantilism if widespread and long-term and will inevitably lead to
financial and/or currency crisis, thus necessitating more collaborative
currency arrangements in the pursuit of a more stable globalized future.
HG3881 2011-932867 978-1-84980-293-2
Research handbook on international banking and
governance.
Title main entry. Ed. by James R. Barth et al.
Edward Elgar Publishing, ©2013 738 p. $295.00
The recent international financial collapse is at the core of this volume’s
investigations. Researchers and students of financial institutions, and per-
sonnel involved with private financial institutions and public regulatory
agencies are the audience. Editors James R. Barth (Auburn U), Lin
(Chinese U. of Hong Kong), and Clas Wihlborg (Chapman U.) provide an
introductory essay, which is followed by 36 contributed chapters per-
taining to the following broad themes: ownership, efficiency, and sta-
bility; compensation, performance, and risk; market discipline;
governance, regulation, and supervision; governance, strategy, and social
responsibility; governance in non-bank financial institutions; and
regional and country studies (New Zealand, Japan, Korea, China,
Thailand, India, Europe).
–87–
HG4026 2012-011120 978-0-7656-2726-1
Entrepreneurial financial management; an applied
approach, 3d ed.
Cornwall, Jeffrey R. et al.
M.E. Sharpe, Inc., ©2013 302 p. $79.95 (pa)
This text is specially designed for use with applied and experientially
based teaching strategies. Employing concepts from entrepreneurship,
finance, and accounting, coverage follows the entrepreneurial business
cycle. In an effort to convey the real world of entrepreneurial finance,
there is less emphasis on venture capital and public offerings and more
emphasis on the types of financing more realistically available to today’s
new entrepreneurs. Sections cover building a financial forecast, man-
aging the financial resources of a venture, internal and external sources
of financing, and business valuation and exit planning. The book
includes a financial spreadsheet template available for download. This
Excel tool allows readers to apply the book’s concepts to actual businesses
and can be used to help develop a business model and to create a formal
business plan. The financial spreadsheet template includes product,
service, and nonprofit alternatives for social entrepreneurship business
models. Learning features include chapter discussion questions and
application exercises. Updated to reflect current regulations and investor
expectations since the recession of 2008, this third edition contains addi-
tional material explaining how to use the financial templates, plus
excerpts from interviews with funding sources. Cornwall directs Belmont
University’s Center for Entrepreneurship.
HG4026 2012-026162 978-1-4221-8730-2
HBR guide to finance basics for managers.
Title main entry. (Harvard Business Review guides)
Harvard Business Review Press, ©2012 174 p. $19.95 (pa)
From the Harvard Business Review, this guide presents 13 articles to help
managers understand finance basics, including speaking the language of
finance by understanding financial statements and the laws of business;
comparing a firm’s financials with rivals’; using assets efficiently; exam-
ining vulnerability to industry downturns; shifting a unit’s focus from
revenues to profits; using financial data to defend budget requests;
avoiding running out of cash and going out of business; keeping costs
from killing the bottom line; investing smartly through cost-benefit
analysis; selling ideas with return on investment; and avoiding relying
too much on numbers. Articles are drawn from other Harvard Business
Review publications and were written by business writers and business
and management specialists from the US and Europe.
HG4027 2012-011026 978-1-60871-693-7
Budgeting and financial management for nonprofit
organizations; using money to drive mission success.
Weikart, Lynne A. and Greg G. Chen, Ed Sermier.
CQ Press, ©2013 376 p. $66.00 (pa)
Scholars of public affairs at the City University of New York’s Baruch
College pool their experience teaching and their experience doing finance
and budgeting for non-profit organizations to prepare a textbook on the
practice. Their goal is to train the next generation of non-profit managers
by providing a financial grounding. They begin by emphasizing the link
between money and mission, then cover planning and budgeting,
financial analysis in nonprofit organizations, and financial management.
CQ Press in an imprint of SAGE Publications.
HG4027 2012-018038 978-1-59184-529-4
The launch pad; inside Y Combinator, Silicon Valley’s
most exclusive school for startups.
Stross, Randall E.
Portfolio Pub. Co., ©2012 280 p. $26.95
Stross (business, San Jose State U.), who writes the “Digital Domain”
column for The New York Times, presents a balanced portrait of Y
Combinator, an entrepreneurial outfit that has seeded successful start-
ups in Silicon Valley. He depicts its hacker mentality (“software is eating
the world”), personalities, and investments. Includes a list of the
software, apps and other products coming out of its summer 2011
“batch” (session).
HG4028 978-3-8329-7166-3
IPOs and venture backed IPOs; a theoretical and practical
code of practice plus implication.
Ghadri, F. Philipp.
Nomos, ©2012 190 p. $45.00 (pa)
A business and finance consultant in Austria, Ghadri introduces a sci-
entific approach toward initial public offering (IPO) underpricing. He
touches on the practical side of an IPO to illustrate the method of sig-
naling within the initial public offering process and addresses one of the
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
most basic questions: the theory behind signal-induced mispricings.
Three successive and coordinated theories of game theory are part of his
effort. Distributed in the US by ISBS.
HG4028 2012-428162 978-0-7355-1037-1
Structuring mergers & acquisitions; a guide to creating
shareholder value, 5th ed.
Hunt, Peter A.
Wolters Kluwer Law & Business, ©2011 768 p. $316.00
This book is not a definitive treatise and it is not intended for seasoned
investment bankers. Rather, the goals of this fifth-edition text, like its
predecessors, are to convey basic knowledge, inspire confidence, and
provide a framework for analysis—for readers who might be on the
periphery of such transactions but have reasons for wanting to under-
stand the intricacies. Each topic is treated with eyes on the benefits to
shareholders—a focus that is sometimes lost in the flurry of activity—and
plenty of examples are incorporated throughout. After an extensive intro-
ductory essay giving background and historical context, coverage is in
sections on a shareholder value framework; mergers & acquisitions
accounting; transaction types; restructuring alternatives; legal aspects;
and structuring, negotiating, and executing the deal. Hunt has extensive
experience in the field and currently works for a San Francisco-based
investment banking firm. Aspen Publishers in now Wolters Kluwer Law
& Business.
HG4521 2011-277222 978-1-4516-0648-5
The Warren Buffett stock portfolio; Warren Buffett stock
picks, why and when he is investing in them.
Buffett, Mary and David Clark.
Free Press, ©2011 225 p. $25.00
Easily accessible and written for anyone with an interest in investing in
the stock market, this book explains the reasons behind successful
investor Warren Buffett’s interest in the stocks of seventeen large com-
panies, including American Express, Coca-Cola, Johnson & Johnson,
Kraft Foods, and Wal-Mart. The first six chapters offer a history and brief
examination of Buffett’s long-term investment strategies as well as a basic
approach to investing, introducing how to interpret per share earnings
and per share book value histories. The ensuing chapters offer case
studies of specific companies and illustrate how to valuate their stock.
HG4529 2012-026299 978-0-13-309260-8
Study guide for the second edition of Technical Analysis ;
the complete resource for financial market technicians.
Kirkpatrick, Charles D. and Julie R. Dahlquist.
Pearson Education, ©2013 272 p. $39.99 (pa)
In this companion workbook to the latest edition of their Technical
Analysis text, Kirkpatrick (head of a company specializing in technical
research) and Dahlquist (finance, U. of Texas at San Antonio College of
Business) offer an aid for students studying for college coursework or
professional examinations in the field. They cover all aspects from the
debate over whether markets follow a ‘random walk’ and market psy-
chology, to how to construct charts and use cycles to forecast future price
trends. Chapters feature key concepts and vocabulary, graphs, and
review questions (some using market data) and self-tests. The workbook
includes a primer on basic statistics.
HG4529 2012-028203 978-0-13-273438-7
The trading methodologies of W.D. Gann; a guide to
building your technical analysis toolbox.
Reddy, Hima.
FT Press, ©2013 199 p. $35.99
Reddy, an independent trader who writes about financial markets and
was a technical analyst at an independent financial research firm,
explains the trading methodologies of W.D. Gann. She aims to aid readers
in grasping the complex concepts quickly and incorporate them into their
investing or trading. She expands his examples to include securities and
applies the trading rules and ideas to modern charts. She outlines his
publications and trading principles and methods, which are interpreted
and applied through diagrams and chart examples, and illustrates how
Gann combined these tools. FT Press is an imprint of Pearson Education.
HG4534 2012-022210 978-0-12-415820-7
Investment banks, hedge funds, and private equity, 2d ed.
Stowell, David P.
Academic Press, ©2013 645 p. $79.95
Written for MBA, MSF, and Executive MBA students, as well as upper-
level undergraduates focused on finance and investments, this text
explains investment banks, hedge funds, and private equity firms. The
author includes chapters on the regulation of the securities industry;
financings; mergers and acquisitions; trading; asset management, wealth
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
management, and research; credit rating agencies, exchanges, and
clearing and settlement; international banking; convertible securities and
Wall Street innovation; investment banking careers and related issues;
hedge and investment strategies; shareholder activism and impact on
corporations; risk, regulation, and hedge fund organizational structure;
hedge fund performance and issues; the LBO financial model; private
equity impact on corporations; and private equity organization,
compensation, regulation, and limited partners. Ten case studies are
included illustrating the how the discussed topics operate in the real
world. Academic Press is an imprint of Elsevier.
HG4636 2012-015741 978-981-4417-45-7
Calendar anomalies and arbitrage.
Ziemba, William T. (World Scientific series in finance; v. 2)
World Scientific, ©2012 586 p. $49.95 (pa)
Ziemba (emeritus, U. of British Columbia and finance U. of Reading,
Britain) collects and in some cases updates 24 articles on seasonal or cal-
endar anomalies, focusing on the US stock market. Among the topics are
arbitrage strategies for cross-track betting on major horse races, land and
stock prices in Japan, the turn-of-the-month effect in the world’s stock
markets from January 1988 to January 1990, and the dosage breeding
theory for predicting horse races.
HG4930 2012-017593 978-1-59332-516-9
White collar crime in the mutual fund industry.
Peterson, Andrew. (Criminal justice; recent scholarship)
LFB Scholarly Publishing, LLC, ©2012 163 p. $65.00
Peterson, a former stockbroker, now holds a PhD in white collar crime
research. In this book, he analyzes the causes of the late trading and
market timing scandal, examines the scandal’s effects on investors, and
explores the regulatory response by the New York Attorney General, the
SEC, and NASD/FINRA. The book includes background on the mutual
fund industry, a literature review, and an aggregate examination of
market timing and late trading cases. It concludes with lessons learned
and a discussion of how and if the financial and regulatory landscapes
have changed since the scandal. The author works on federal sentencing
policy for the US Sentencing Commission.
HG6024 2012-017892 978-1-4398-2957-8
Computational methods in finance.
Hirsa, Ali. (Financial mathematics series)
CRC Press, ©2013 413 p. $89.95
An analytical trading strategist at a capital management company, as
well as a part-time teacher, Hirsa presents a textbook on computational
methods in finance, bringing together a full-spectrum of methods and
schemes for pricing derivatives contracts and related products, simu-
lation, model calibration, and estimating parameters with many practical
examples. It is for students of financial engineering or the mathematics
of finance in their first or second year of graduate school, and for
researchers and practitioners in those professions. He is more concerned
with practical computation than with underlying theory. Among his
topics are stochastic processes and risk-neutral pricing, pricing deriva-
tives with transform techniques, finite differences, simulation methods
for pricing derivatives, and model calibration.
HG6024 2011-945841 978-1-133-19019-6
An introduction to derivatives and risk management, 9th
ed.
Chance, Don M. and Robert Brooks.
South-Western, ©2013 667 p. $302.95
This ninth edition on financial derivatives and risk management has
been updated to cover new developments in a rapidly growing and
evolving field. Intended for students, professionals, and those considering
derivatives as a career choice, the book is an extensive treatment of the
topic. Subjects include: derivative markets and instruments, options
market structures, option pricing models and strategies, the structure of
forward and futures markets, futures arbitrage strategies, swaps,
financial risk management techniques and applications, and managing
risk in organizations. End-of-chapter sections include summaries, key
terms, and selections for further reading. Authors are Chance (finance,
Louisiana State U.) and Brooks (finance, U. of Alabama).
HG6024 2012-014667 978-981-4366-54-0
Market practice in financial modelling.
Tan, Chia Chiang.
World Scientific, ©2012 414 p. $94.00
Although clearly mathematically oriented, with a focus on topics like the
Fokker-Planck equation and the Craig-Sneyd PDE, this book is never-
theless described as being most useful for the actual practitioner. It is
specifically devoted to the modeling of financial derivatives and assumes
–88–
that the reader is familiar with stochastic calculus. Tan (DBAnalytics,
Deutsche Bank) closes each chapter with mathematical exercises, making
the work appropriate for both practitioners and students. An eight page
bibliography, along with a 15 page glossary, appear at the end of the
book, although the author notes that terms in the glossary are also
defined when they first appear in the text.
HJ261 2012-014006 978-0-674-06692-2
The founders and finance; how Hamilton, Gallatin, and
other immigrants forged a new economy.
McCraw, Thomas K.
Belknap Press, ©2012 485 p. $35.00
The Revolutionary War impoverished the US and brought about the deep
depression of the 1780s. McCraw (emeritus, business history, Harvard
Business School) profiles the work of several individuals of the period
who put the US on sound institutional footing to manage its finances; he
demonstrates that it was not entirely by coincidence that four of the first
six secretaries of the treasury were born outside of North America. He
also explores the strengths and weaknesses of major US founders who
were born in North America and asks why they depended on financial
policies designed by recent arrivals. Part 1 is devoted to Alexander
Hamilton, who was born in the Danish West Indies, while part 2 profiles
Albert Gallatin, a native of Geneva who was secretary of the treasury
under presidents Thomas Jefferson and James Madison. Part 3 compares
their competing ideas on political economy and follows their legacies.
The book is illustrated with b&w historical and contemporary illustra-
tions and photos, and includes a color historical illustration on the cover.
Belknap Press is an imprint of Harvard University Press.
HJ1213 2012014475 978-0-8014-7824-6
Capital, coercion, and postcommunist states.
Easter, Gerald M.
Cornell U. Press, ©2012 241 p. $26.95 (pa)
Operating within a realist tradition that sees the state as a non-neutral
actor in competition with other societal actors over the power resources
of capital and coercion, this work of fiscal sociology by Easter (political
science, Boston College) presents a comparative study of postcommunist
Poland and Russia that analyzes the cumulative results of state-society
revenue battles in terms of their ultimate shaping of macrolevel institu-
tional forms. His analysis contrasts Poland as having developed into a
“contractual state” where the power resources of the old regime were
redistributed and reconsolidated, and the boundary lines between state
society regarding coercion and capital were clearly marked, versus
Russia as a “predatory state” with unchecked access to coercive resources,
capital vulnerable to state predation, fewer constraints on political power,
and a tendency towards authoritarianism.
HJ2053 2011-052062 978-1-58901-924-9
Memos to the governor; an introduction to state
budgeting, 3d ed.
Forsythe, Dall W. and Donald J. Boyd.
Georgetown U. Press, ©2012 118 p. $19.95 (pa)
Forsythe (public service, New York U.) and Boyd (Nelson A. Rockefeller
Institute of Government) draw on their experience as budget director and
chief revenue forecaster for the state of New York under governor Cuomo
to point out some practical aspects of creating a budget for a state gov-
ernment that the existing literature does not mention. Chief among these
are the influence of the economic cycle on state budgets, the necessity to
maintain a long-term strategic perspective in budgeting, and the tactical
problem of persuading legislatures to adopt sound budgets. The memo
format allows them to present eight fairly independent essays on various
aspects.
SOCIOLOGY
HM51 75-648500 978-0-8243-2238-0
Annual review of sociology; v.38, 2012.
Title main entry. Ed. by Karen S. Cook and Douglas S. Massey.
Annual Reviews, ©2012 562 p. $83.00
This work collects 25 definitive articles published in 2012 on
contemporary subjects in sociology. Chapters are grouped in sections on
theory and methods, social processes, formal organizations, political and
economic sociology, differentiation and stratification, demography, urban
and rural community sociology, and sociology and world regions. Some
specific subjects explored include empirical research on rational choice
theory, youth political participation, the cultural sociology of religion,
and development NGOs as organizations. Other topics include social and
economic returns on college education in the US, causes and
consequences of skewed sex ratios, marital instability and female labor
–89–
supply, and urbanization and the southern US. Cook is affiliated with
Stanford University. Massey is affiliated with Princeton University.
HM258 978-81-7000-661-9
Information, communication and society.
Mukherjee, Bhaskar.
Ess Ess Publications, ©2012 422 p. $64.00
Mukherjee offers a coursebook in information science that provides a
conceptual and historical background in recent information science. Each
chapter follows pedagogically from an introduction to a critical dis-
cussion of several sub-topics, a conclusion, and references. In the course
of 14 such chapters, he presents that conceptual background, including
characteristics and usages of information. He defines information com-
munication, takes a disciplinary as well as systematic perspective on the
foundations of information science, considers management information
systems and expert systems, decision support systems, the information
profession in the post-industrial economy, a special section on methods,
and then the last chapter turns toward a social and industrial perspective
on information and intellectual property. Distributed in the US by ISBS.
HM435 2012-031491 978-1-4522-0344-7
Contemporary sociological theory.
Turner, Jonathan H.
Sage Publications, ©2013 749 p. $95.00
Turner (sociology, UC Riverside) presents a comprehensive survey of
major currents in and otherwise relevant to contemporary sociological
theory. His opening chapter introduces concepts and variables in the con-
struction of theories and considers science in terms of a belief-system.
The bulk of the text is organized around seven theoretical umbrellas that
include functionalism, evolutionary and ecological, conflict, interac-
tionism, exchange theorizing, structuralist and cultural theorizing, and
critical theory. Individual chapters hone in on particular sub-movements
and their key thinkers. Examples include early exchange theories of
Homans and Blau, symbolic interactionist theories of identity, Herbert
Spencer’s contribution to evolutionary sociology, dramaturgical theories,
actor-network theories, critical theories of the Frankfurt School and more.
This text is geared toward classroom use and includes numerous tables
summarizing key terms and conclusions for most chapters.
HM445 2012-003286 978-1-4129-9243-5
Explorations in classical sociological theory; seeing the
social world, 3d ed.
Allan, Kenneth.
Sage Publications, ©2013 379 p. $85.00 (pa)
In a textbook on sociology theory, Allan (sociology, U. of North Carolina-
Greensboro) begins with the classical thinkers: Herbert Spencer, Karl
Marx, Émile Durkheim, and Max Weber. Then he introduces another set
of theorists that comprise an alternative core to the discipline. He con-
siders the modern person and George Herbert Mead and Georg Simmel,
seeing gender with Harriett Martineau and Charlotte Perkins Gilman,
seeing race with Frederick Douglass and W.E.B. Du Bois, defining
moments in 20th-century theory with Talcott Parsons and the Frankurt
School.
HM479 2012-013691 978-0-85745-549-9
A Durkheimian quest; solidarity and the sacred.
Watts Miller, William.
Berghahn Books, ©2012 257 p. $90.00
This study provides an assessment and analysis of the intellectual career
of founding sociological figure, Émile Durkheim (1858-1917), as well as a
consideration of the enduring relevance of Durkheim’s ideas for con-
temporary problems. Miller (editor of the journal Durkheimian Studies)
focuses in particular on “his search for solidarity in The Divisions of
Labour and quest for the sacred in The Elemental Forms,” portraying the
differences between the two works as the result of an intellectual crisis
that undermined Durkheimian’s old core views and led him to a new
sociological world in The Elemental Forms.
HM480 2011-038965 978-1-4411-1626-0
Critical theory and contemporary Europe.
Outhwaite, William. (Critical theory and contemporary society)
Continuum Publishing Group, ©2012 170 p. $120.00
Taking a broad view of both critical theory and contemporary Europe,
Outhwaite (sociology, Newcastle U., Britain) discusses theorizing the
European crisis of 1914-45; late capitalism from the post-war boom to the
crises of the 1970s: the 1968 years and the tendenzwende; state socialism
and its crises; the post-communist transition; the turn of the 21st century;
the European Union; and the continuing relevance of critical theory in
Germany, Europe, and North America.
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
HM499 978-1-78190-056-7
Studies in symbolic interaction.
Title main entry. Ed. by Norman K. Denzin. (Studies in symbolic inter-
action; v.37)
Emerald Group Publishing, ©2012 284 p. $114.95
Nine essays by sociologists, criminologists, other social scientists, and
scholars from the humanities explore symbolic interaction in terms of
theoretical openings, social construction, and interpretive interventions.
Among the topics are the mesodomain of welfare reform: renegotiating
the order of economic inequality, historical and emergent stories of self-
hood in a deindustrializing community, compliance dramas in alcoholic
anonymous films: an interactionist reading of The Days of Wine and
Roses, imagining imagination, and intimate deception in everyday life.
There is no index. Distributed in North America by Turpin Distribution.
HM511 2011-046724 978-0-470-71174-3
Agent-based computational sociology.
Squazzoni, Flaminio.
John Wiley & Sons, ©2012 238 p. $89.95
Sociology is not part of the humanities, contends Squazzoni (U. of
Brescia, Italy), but a rigorous science devoted to explaining social puzzles
by reducing reality to recurrent and simple patterns. He shows how this
goal can benefit from formalization, modeling, and computer simulation
in sociology no less than in physics and evolutionary biology. His per-
spectives are what an agent-based computational sociology is all about;
cooperation, coordination, and social norms; social influence; and the
methodology.
HM585 2012-003113 978-1-61205-205-2
Rethinking sociological theory; introducing and explaining
a scientific theoretical sociology.
Sanderson, Stephen K.
Paradigm Publishers, ©2012 267 p. $119.00
Sanderson (sociology, UC Riverside) presents a survey of theoretical tra-
ditions in contemporary sociology, with each being evaluated in terms of
its “scientificity.” The text is somewhat polemical against overly abstract
and untestable “theory,” privileging empirical testability as well as logical
coherence and explanatory power. Each chapter covers a tradition, with
a lengthy exposition of its basic principles, “exemplars” of the tradition
and their particular contributions, and a critical assessment in the end
that inquires into the number and productivity of the research programs
the tradition has generated. The traditions covered include: function-
alism, Marxian and Weberian conflict theories, world-systems analysis,
exchange and rational choice theory, cultural materialism, social evolu-
tionism, sociobiology, and eclecticism. An epilogue advocates for a syn-
thesis of sociobiology, rational choice theory, conflict theory, cultural
materialism, and social evolutionism.
HM585 2012-018329 978-1-4129-9210-7
Sociology; exploring the architecture of everyday life; brief
edition, 3d ed.
Title main entry. Ed. by David M. Newman.
Sage Publications, ©2013 302 p. $54.00 (pa)
Newman (sociology, DePauw U.) offers an undergraduate sociology
textbook that takes an everyday approach to the topic by using real
examples and personal, everyday experiences to understand the rela-
tionship between individuals and society. This edition has updated sta-
tistics and examples and more information and examples about social
networking sites. It incorporates contemporary events and trends such as
the global economic recession, the presidency of Barack Obama, and the
growth of communication technology, especially social networking sites.
HM636 2011-938976 978-0-85702-532-6
The body and social theory, 3d ed.
Shilling, Chris. (Theory, culture & society)
Sage Publications, ©2012 313 p. $120.00
This is Shilling’s (sociology, U. of Kent, Canterbury) third edition of the
book he wrote in 1993 on various issues with how bodies are understood
as purely physical or socially constructed things. The text acts as a cor-
rective against “inverted Cartesianism” and shines light on the turn
toward “embodiment” in sociological, psychological and organizational
studies. He argues that the body is an under-appreciated and misunder-
stood source of society. To this end, he considers renewed interest in
physicality by those who look to the Human Genome Project “as
revealing the genetic constitution of identity and destiny,” while also
defending a constructive engagement between neuroscience and “socio-
logical perspectives on the relationship between the thinking, sensing,
feeling body, on the one hand, and the networks, figurations and soci-
eties in which we live, on the other.” He takes up Actor-Network Theory,
too, noting that it views people as assemblages of “human and non-
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
human ‘actants’.” His afterward reflects on developments since the pre-
vious editions, emphasizing how “the ‘absent-presence’ of the body in
social theory, the relationship between body and self-identity, and the
question of how to advance theoretically the study of the body are linked
issues.”
HM636 978-1-84920-472-9
Immaterial bodies; affect, embodiment, mediation.
Blackman, Lisa. (Theory, culture and society)
Sage Publications, ©2012 209 p. $130.00
Blackman (media and communications, U. of London at Goldsmith) the-
orizes “the thorny question of the body’s potential for mediation.” She
does so “within the context of increasing evidence that suggests bodies
cannot be reduced to materiality” while returning to “nineteenth- and
early twentieth-century debates which primarily concerned the nature of
perception, selfhood and embodiment.” To this end, she explores affect
in the contexts of spiritualism, cybernetics and contemporary media cul-
tures attending to experiences like suggestion, voice-hearing and telepathy
“which are always already open the subject to the other.” She introduces
the subject of affect, crowds and the problem of personality, media tech-
nologies and the problem of telepathy, new materialisms, affect and
energy in rhythm and transmission, the problem with automatism, and
what neuroscience has shown us about the bicameral brain and our
apparent double consciousness.
HM636 978-1-84787-543-3
Key concepts in body and society.
Cregan, Kate. (The Sage key concepts series)
Sage Publications, ©2012 213 p. $100.00
Through 43 short articles and overviews, each about 4 pages, this text
provides a broad survey of the main themes that run through and
inform the varied work around the sociology of the body. Written to be
accessible to all, the text can be used by students in cultural studies,
social sciences, literary studies, anthropology, politics, theater studies,
nursing, and allied health studies. Each overview begins with a defi-
nition box and includes cross-references and suggested readings.
Organization is alphabetical, from ageing and anorexia through genetics,
psychoanalysis, queer, work, and youth. Some entries are in the socio-
logical tradition, while others offer cultural and historical context. The
glossary defines commonly used theoretical and conceptual terms.
Cregan is affiliated with Monash University, Australia.
HM665 2012-406300 978-1-133-04996-8
Morality in practice, 8th ed.
Title main entry. Ed. by James P. Sterba and Peter Bornschein.
Wadsworth Publishing Co., ©2013 736 p. $167.95 (pa)
This reader in moral problems presents dozens of radically divergent
perspectives on thirteen topic areas: distribution of wealth, punishment
and responsibility, war and terrorism, animal liberation and environ-
mental justice, gay and lesbian rights, sexual harassment, affirmative
action, pornography, gender roles and discrimination against men,
human enhancement, abortion and euthanasia, sex equality, distant
people and future generations. They aim to provide alternative views on
controversial topics and draw from contemporary and classical readings.
Notable contributors include John Rawls and Charles Mills, Peter Singer,
Pope John Paul II, Martha Nussbaum, Michael Pollan, C.S. Lewis, and
Sam Harris. James Sterba (philosophy, Notre Dame U.), one of the editors,
provides numerous entries in nearly every topic area. The essays are
organized into teachable units bracketed by a short introduction of main
concepts relevant to the readings and examples of practical applications
of the ideas explored—from law-cases to philosophical explorations. New
to this 8th edition are 29 new readings; new sections on human
enhancement and discrimination against men; revised affirmative action,
income and wealth, distant people and future generations, and pornog-
raphy sections. This text is not indexed.
HM716 2012-005623 978-1-84872-872-1
Group processes.
Title main entry. Ed. by John M. Levine. (Frontiers of social psychology;
18)
Psychology Press, ©2013 364 p. $73.95
Researchers in psychology provide a comprehensive overview of classic
and contemporary work on group processes for upper-level and graduate
students and for scholars who want a snapshot of the field today. The
topics include composition and diversity, social dilemmas, majority and
minority influence, decision making, creativity, evolution and groups,
and intergroup relations. Psychology Press is an imprint of the Taylor &
Francis Group.
–90–
HM741 2012-017900 978-1-4398-8043-2
Enterprise 2.0; social networking tools to transform your
organization.
Keyes, Jessica.
CRC Press, ©2013 411 p. $79.95
Keyes, who heads a high-technology and management consultancy and
development firm, details social media and activities that can transform
businesses in areas such as human resources, risk management, opera-
tions, and project management, as well as legal, privacy, security, and
performance and measurement issues. She covers wikis, meaning-based
computing, the semantic web, virtual worlds, knowledge management
tools, and mashups; managing knowledge through social enterprising;
issues in integrating the documentation required by a typical work
process or project in a social enterprising framework; productivity and
creativity aspects; the use of social enterprising for various business pur-
poses; and mobile social enterprising. More than half the book is devoted
to appendices of tools, a practitioner’s guide, knowledge discovery tech-
niques, behavioral competencies, balanced scorecard metrics, a computer
use policy, a best practice security checklist, and other resources.
HM742 2012-013506 978-0-910965-99-6
Face2Face; using Facebook, Twitter, and other social
media tools to create great customer connections.
King, David Lee.
CyberAge Books, ©2012 194 p. $24.95 (pa)
King (digital services director, Topeka & Shawnee County Public Library)
explain the keys to making social media work for your organization.
They are listening, authentic communication, and joining in on social
networks beyond your own website. Writing in a casual style, he recom-
mends that organizations also use a casual style, coupled with quick and
honest responses. Some of the examples relate to work in libraries or
events in Topeka, Kansas.
HM761 2011-050506 978-1-61186-048-1
Chippewa Lake; a community in search of an identity.
Hull, Cindy L.
Michigan State U. Press, ©2012 203 p. $29.95 (pa)
Hull (anthropology, Grand Valley State U.) offers an intimate and complex
portrayal of Chippewa Lake and how this Michigan small town has been
affected by economic and demographic changes. The chapters in this
ethnographic study examine the difficult transformation the area is
facing as it shifts from an agriculture-based economy to one relying on
wage labor. As a resident for nearly 30 years, Hull focuses on the family
as the unit for analysis and gives a comprehensive look at the ways local
residents have adapted to new economic structures while having their
rural cultural values challenged by newcomers. Intended for students
and those interested in rural sociology and cultural anthropology.
HM841 978-3-643-90184-2
The mundialization of home in the age of globalization;
towards a transcultural ethics.
Cha, In-Suk. (Philosophy in international context; v.6)
LIT Verlag, ©2012 100 p. $29.95 (pa)
Cha (emeritus, philosophy education for democracy, Seoul National U.,
South Korea) uses the phrase mundialization of home to describe the
process by which one’s home-world has absorbed and adapted view-
points of the broader world into their own. In 11 essays, he shows how,
through shared transcultural elements, the values and theories associated
with 17th-century Anglo/European philosophers can and do resonate in
virtually all societies. His themes are mundialization towards the great
community, hermeneutics and subjectivity, and renascent liberalism in
the global age. He has not indexed the collection. Distributed in the US
by ISBS.
HM851 2012-026086 978-1-59448-820-7
Future perfect; the case for progress in a networked age.
Johnson, Steven.
Riverhead Books, ©2012 233 p. $26.95
Johnson, author of the bestseller Everything Bad is Good for You, describes
a new social and political movement he calls the peer progressive
movement, which relies on peer networks made possible by digital
telecommunications. The members of this new group of political activists
and public sector entrepreneurs are not free-market libertarians, Johnson
argues. Going beyond the traditional dichotomy of liberal versus conser-
vative, members of the peer progressive movement are equally suspicious
of big government and big corporations; they believe in the power of
competition but they also believe that some of society’s most important
achievements can’t be measured by economic reward. Johnson takes
stock of this new political vision, making the case that it is indeed an
–91–
original, unified philosophy, and gives examples of political transfor-
mation in areas such as community activism, journalism, technology,
govnernance, and corporations. An extensive section of notes is included.
HM881 2012-006256 978-1-59558-827-2
From Cairo to Wall Street; voices from the global spring.
Title main entry. Ed. by Anya Schiffrin and Eamon Kircher-Allen.
The New Press, ©2012 244 p. $16.95 (pa)
Suggesting that the protest movements that toppled dictators in Tunisia
and Egypt, the anti-austerity protesters of Europe, and the “We are the
99%” protestors that occupied Zuccotti Park in New York City and other
urban spaces across the United States are all representative of the emer-
gence of a new global progressive movement, this work gathers voices
that were actually involved in the various strands of protest across the
world in order to comment on the significance, goals, and struggles of
the groups of the “Global Spring” (although with little information pro-
vided about the contributors, the average reader in the US may have
some difficulty assessing how well each particular writer actually repre-
sents his or her milieu). Contributors discuss the “Arab Spring” in Egypt,
Tunisia, Syria, and Bahrain; the Indignados and other social movements
in Spain; student activism in Chile; anti-austerity activism in Greece; and
the Occupy movements of the US and the UK.
HM881 2012003127 978-1-61205-238-0
Social movements 1768-2012; 3d ed.
Tilly, Charles and Lesley J. Wood.
Paradigm Publishers, ©2013 204 p. $35.95 (pa)
Wood (sociology, York U., Canada) and the late Tilly (formerly, social
science, Columbia U., US) explore the emergence, growth, and common
features of social movements around the world. They present a historical
analysis that shows that social movements, emerging in the 18th century,
should be seen as interactive campaigns in which connected (and often
shifting) groups of claimants interact with the objects of their claims and
with third parties such as constituents, allies, rival claimants, enemies,
authorities, and various publics. They also argue that social movements
combine three kinds of claims—program, identity, and standing—and the
relative salience of these claims varies significantly among social move-
ments, among claimants within movements, and among phases of move-
ments. Social movements, they contend, assert popular sovereignty and
are more likely to arise in situations of democratization. They also con-
sider social movements as a form of political entrepreneurship; the way
social movements spread through communication and collaboration; and
the ways in which the forms and claims of social movements vary and
evolve historically. This edition has been updated to include discussion of
social movements that have arisen in response to the global economic
crisis, as well as the prodemocracy social movements that succeeded in
recently overthrowing dictators in Tunisia and Egypt.
HM1111 2012-406222 978-0-7456-5218-4
Land of strangers.
Amin, Ash.
Polity Press, ©2012 205 p. $22.95 (pa)
Amin (geography, U. of Cambridge) proposes that the stranger is neither
friend nor foe in Western culture, but constitutive. Focusing on the gap
between narratives and practices of societal singularity and of pluralism,
he argues that the fate of the stranger lies in the play between hybrid
and singular performances and projections of the social. He covers the
freight of social ties, collaborating strangers, strangers in the city,
remainders of race, imagined community, and a possibly calamitous
end. Distributed in the US by Wiley.
HM1111 2011-275472 978-0-7456-4685-5
The plural actor.
Lahire, Bernard. Trans. by David Fernbach.
Polity Press, ©2011 271 p. $26.95 (pa)
Lahire (sociology, École Normale Supérieure, Lyon, France) reflects on
Pierre Bourdieu’s theory of habitus and different forms of reflexivity in
action. He offers a scientific programme for sociological study that takes
into account embodied dispositions, while not reducing the present to
“simply a terrain of expression of actualization of this embodied past
that can be synthesized in the form of a matrix of formula.” The material
is organized into four major acts and in the first he presents an outline
of the plural actor that considers the illusion of a single self and how the
plural actor operates across time. In part two he turns to logics of action
with an emphasis on writing. Part three explores embodiment and the
place of language. Part four presents debates and trajectories for further
research, including “psychological sociology.” Distributed by Wiley.
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
HM1116 2012-015286 978-1-4398-9217-6
Concepts and case studies in threat management.
Calhoun, Frederick S. and Stephen W. Weston.
CRC Press, ©2013 237 p. $79.95 (pa)
Aimed at threat managers, this volume identifies and defines key con-
cepts in threat management, illustrating them with case studies,
examples, and lessons learned. The authors do not go into detail about
the threat management process, but instead highlight basic issues in the
process: case dynamics and intervention synergy, need-to-knows,
inhibitors and their impacts, differences among the various venues of
violence, and cutbacks, silos, bunkers, and myopic management
strategies that managers should avoid. A glossary of terms prepared in
association with the U. of Nebraska’s Public Policy Center is included,
which aims to help standardize terminology.
HM1116 2012-003925 978-0-7656-3255-5
Handbook of unethical work behavior; implications for
individual well-being.
Title main entry. Ed. by Robert A. Giacalone and Mark D. Promislo.
M.E. Sharpe, Inc., ©2013 348 p. $99.95
Giacalone (human resources management, Temple University) and
Promislo (management, Rider University) advocate a human-centered
approach to unethical behavior in the workplace, focusing on the impact
of unethical behavior on individuals and on the well-being of the organ-
ization as a whole. Contributors in areas such as social epidemiology,
organizational behavior and psychology, and human resource man-
agement look at a broad range of behaviors, such as sexual harassment,
age and racial discrimination, violence, and fraud. Major themes are
attacks on others, work stress, individual differences, and organizational
and societal perspectives. Some specific subjects addressed include the
impact of ostracism on well-being in organizations, organizational justice
and cardiovascular health, and a model of a virtuous business cycle.
HM1121 2011-036468 978-1-4411-5973-1
From Ricoeur to action; the socio-political significance of
Ricoeur’s thinking.
Title main entry. Ed. by Todd S. Mei and David Lewin. (Continuum
studies in Continental philosophy)
Continuum Publishing Group, ©2012 265 p. $120.00 (pa)
Inspired by a June 2009 conference in Canterbury, Britain, scholars of
philosophy suggest implementations of French philosopher Paul
Ricoeur’s (1913-2005) thinking on social and political questions. The
topics include his metaphoric subjectivity, Ricoeur and the capability of
modern technology, to think utopia with and beyond Ricoeur, the ethics
of forgiveness in his work, and the exceptionalism of his hermeneutics
and the bid for an ethical canon.
HM1126 2012-024104 978-1-60994-490-2
Transformative scenario planning; working together to
change the future.
Kahane, Adam.
Berrett-Koehler Publishers, ©2012 126 p. $17.95 (pa)
Kahane, who leads transformative scenario planning projects around the
world, provides individuals wanting to create change in various areas
with a guide to transformative scenario planning, to enable them to
change the future collaboratively and transform, rather than adapt to, a
situation, and construct scenarios of possible futures for the situation and
understand and influence it. He gives an example of scenario planning
in South Africa, and details when to use it and how it works by trans-
forming understandings, relationships, intentions, and actions as well as
its components and steps: convening a team from across the whole
system, observing what is happening, constructing stories about what
could happen, discovering what can and must be done, and acting to
transform the system. He provides examples drawn from his experiences
for each step, then ends with a generalized set of process instructions.
HM1131 2012-006082 978-1-4331-1850-0
Vulnerability and courage; a pastoral theology of poverty
and the alienated self.
Shin, Hyon-Uk. (Practical theology; v.3)
Peter Lang Publishing Inc, ©2012 161 p. $74.95
Theological studies of poverty and alienation have tended to be very
abstract, says Shin (Soongsil U. and Seoul Women’s U., Korea), looking
for root causes of the problems and for societal changes and intellectual
shifts necessary to alleviate them. By contrast, he is concerned with the
issues on the pastoral level, how individuals and families experience and
respond to poverty and alienation, and how their suffering can be
relieved. He covers the missing individual in theological discussions of
economic vulnerability, a new framework for understanding alienation
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
and its relation to poverty, Fromm on alienation, alienation interpreted
by a macro-social lens, Erikson on alienation and self, and a Tillichian
and pastoral response to alienation.
HM1196 2012-017340 978-1-4129-8313-6
The SAGE handbook of persuasion; developments in
theory and practice, 2d ed.
Title main entry. Ed. by James Price Dillard and Lijiang Shen.
Sage Publications, ©2013 447 p. $150.00
Dillard (communication arts, Pennsylvania State U.) and Shen (commu-
nication studies, U. of Georgia) provide interpersonal and mass commu-
nication researchers, psychologists, and public health practitioners with
a 23-chapter handbook, which has a reformatted structure that focuses
on fundamental issues, theoretical perspectives, and contexts and appli-
cations related to persuasion. Communication, psychology, marketing
and other scholars from the US and Germany discuss persuasion in the
rhetorical tradition; the effects of message features; media influence as
persuasion; behavioral, cognitive, and social outcomes of persuasion;
being persuaded; theories, including discrepancy models of belief
change, functional attitude theory, reasoned action theory, the elabo-
ration likelihood model, reactance theory, and inoculation theory; and
contexts like political persuasion, mass media and drug prevention, mar-
keting and advertising, the legal setting, and technology. Along with
updated content, this edition has 17 new chapters, including those on fear
appeals, narrative persuasion, and health campaigns.
HM1206 2012-006309 978-0-415-88256-9
The power of writing in organizations; from letters to
online interactions.
Fayard, Anne-Laure and Anca Metiu. (Organization and management
series)
Routledge, ©2013 226 p. $54.95
This book demonstrates the power of informal and formal writing in
organizations in the past and the present. Fayard (Polytechnic Institute of
New York University) and Metiu (ESSEC Business School) recommend a
focus on writing as a mode of communication in any technology, rather
than obsession with the features of the technologies themselves. They
draw on the literature in diverse fields such as literacy studies, psy-
chology, communication, organizational studies, and management. The
first part of the book examines the role of written letters in knowledge
development and community building, using case studies from the past.
Part 2 uses contemporary case studies and interviews to highlight
modern communication practices in online media, with cases on the
open-source software development community and the OpenIDEO
platform, and interviews with professionals in architecture, media, and
publishing. The book’s readership includes managers and other profes-
sionals, as well as scholars and students of organizational studies, orga-
nizational communication, and information systems.
HM1261 2012-017655 978-0-7494-6572-8
The unknown leader; discover the leader in you.
Al-Banawi, Hussein A.
Kogan Page, ©2012 268 p. $29.95 (pa)
Al-Banawi, chairman and CEO of a large manufacturing group in Saudi
Arabia, offers detailed profiles and shorter vignettes celebrating leaders
who work behind the scenes in areas such as medicine, education,
business, and manufacturing in the Middle East. Discussion of cultural
issues between the Middle East and the West is integrated throughout the
book. The author sets out six qualities of true leaders and presents a new
model of leadership geared toward contributing to a better society, taking
risks, and living a satisfying life, rather than merely accumulating
wealth. Some special topics addressed are the role of faith, female lead-
ership, and the challenge of the Arab Spring and an entrepreneurial
Middle East. The book’s readership includes students, professionals, and
entrepreneurs. The author is affiliated with Rice University in Texas.
HN13 2012-005996 978-1-59451-978-9
Uncertain worlds; world-systems analysis in changing
times.
Wallerstein, Immanuel et al.
Paradigm Publishers, ©2012 233 p. $102.00
This book offers both interviews with and commentary on the work and
thinking of noted sociologist, social scientist, world-systems analyst and
research scholar Immanuel Wallerstein (sociology, Yale U.)—and also
includes a contribution from Wallerstein. As the title suggests, the
primary topic is world-systems analysis and related issues such as the
reorganization of the social sciences, a subject on which Wallerstein is
outspoken. Author interviewers are Lemert (sociologist, Center for
Comparative Research, Yale U.) and Rojas (social scientist and researcher,
National Autonomous U. of Mexico).
–92–
HN18 2012-017855 978-1-58826-855-6
Making sense of social problems; new images, new issues.
Best, Joel and Scott R. Harris. (Social problems, social constructions)
Lynne Rienner Publishers, Inc., ©2013 335 p. $68.00
This collection of 16 essays presents examples of social constructionist
analysis when considering social problems. The editors, Best (sociology,
U. of Delaware) and Harris (sociology, St. Louis U.), have organized the
contributions into five sections that focus on different dimensions of the
social construction process: claims, claims-makers, experts, the media,
and policy outcomes. The essays themselves examine some sort of social
problem, from pet grief exploitation to linking autism to vaccines to
getting trans-fats noticed by policy makers. The editors claim that the
social construction method can help readers interpret the competing
claims of various people about social problems, their causes, and solu-
tions. They reinforce the analytic categories with an introduction to each
of the major sections and a final “three questions for constructionism,”
which include: is constructionism dangerous, is it trivial and impractical,
and can it really offer a distinct approach to social problems?
HN49 978-1-78052-866-3
Political power and social theory.
Title main entry. Ed. by Julian Go. (Political power and social theory;
v.23)
Emerald Group Publishing, ©2012 334 p. $134.95
This collection of a dozen essays aims to provoke reflection on global
political issues concerning capitalism and economic crisis, the neoliber-
alization of the state, localism and identity politics, racism in the age of
America’s first black president, and the World Health Organization in
the face of economic pressure. The essays are organized around the three
themes of transformation and politics, politics and identity, and a final
“controversy” section focusing on an essay by Fred Block on whether cap-
italism is a useful concept anymore in “naming the system.” In that final
section, three responses take issue with Block in terms of capital accu-
mulation, Karl Polyani’s economic anthropology. The contributors are
sociology professors from the United States and Europe. Distributed in
North America by Turpin Distribution.
HN59 91-45182 978-0-88285-139-6
The metropolis in black & white; place, power and
polarization. (reprint, 1992)
Title main entry. Ed. by George C. Galster and Edward W. Hill
Transaction Publishers, ©2012 386 p. $34.95 (pa)
This collection of 19 papers, first presented by editors Galster (urban
affairs, Wayne State U.) and Hill (urban affairs, Cleveland State U.) in
1992 and merely reprinted in paperbound format here, contains reflec-
tions by urban studies scholars on the complexities of race and the city
in the United States, with the focus (as the title indicates) being on the
social, economic, and political realities of life for African-Americans in
the American city. Thematically, the volume as a whole is guided by the
concepts of “place,” or the location and isolation of African-American
communities; “power,” encompassing questions of personal empow-
erment, moves towards collective power, and institutions of political and
economic power; and “polarization” in economic and social disparities.
Descriptive analysis and policy prescriptions are given equal weight.
HN65 2012-015787 978-0-8133-4505-5
Rural communities; legacy and change, 4th ed.
Flora, Cornelia Butler and Jan L. Flora
Westview Press, ©2013 414 p. $45.00 (pa)
Originally conceived as a companion textbook to the eponymous series
on PBS, but much revised over the course leading to the current fourth
edition, this volume examines contemporary rural community issues in
the United States. The authors (professors of sociology at Iowa State U.)
have arranged the discussion around the concept of community forms of
capital and thus first present eight chapters exploring the nature of rural
community change in relation to natural capital, cultural capital, human
capital, social capital, political capital, financial capital, and built capital.
Additional chapters discuss consumption in rural America, the rela-
tionship between rural areas and the global economy, rural governance,
and mobilizing community capitals for social change.
HN90 2011-051271 978-0-8090-9502-5
All in the family; the realignment of American democracy
since the 1960s.
Self, Robert O.
Hill and Wang, ©2012 518 p. $30.00
Robert O. Self (history, Brown U.) has written a clear, carefully-reasoned
history of US culture since the 1960s that moves beyond either liberal or
conservative versions of history; the purpose of the book is to explore
how those particular oppositional contemporary cultural visions came
–93–
about. Self’s basic premise is that the civil rights movements of the 1960s
and 70s (here, feminism and the gay rights movement) demanded fun-
damental shifts in how Americans defined and thought about family,
and that “family values” conservatism was a response. The author makes
valuable points: that negative rights (the right to be left alone) aid only
people not in need, but positive rights (legal recognition or support) upset
the structures that exist; that the Great Society ideal of a suburban
nuclear-family-only household with one male breadwinner never literally
represented most US families; the trend in American liberalism toward
increasing alienation from working-class and heterosexual men, and in
American conservatism toward increasing alienation from working
women.
HN163 2012-018396 978-0-8165-0241-7
Gendered scenarios of revolution; making new men and
new women in Nicaragua, 1975-2000.
Montoya, Rosario.
U. of Arizona Press, ©2012 227 p. $55.00
Montoya, an anthropologist and historian who has been working in
Nicaragua since 1989, considers how patriarchal gender-dynamics were
reproduced after the Sandinista revolution. She begins her analysis in the
late 19th century, where she traces “the relationship between the consti-
tution and transformation of community and processes of state for-
mation.” She examines the formation of the revolutionary scenario in El
Tule, where some Sandinistas lived from 1975-79, and how the coopera-
tives and collectives they helped found “became an arena for the consti-
tution of the state’s patriarchal and vanguardist relationship to [ordinary]
men”. To that end, she interrogates the ethico-political ideal of the New
Men, but also argues that the Sandinista effort to integrate women “as
class and national subjects into their nation-building project destabilized
El Tule’s local patriarchy”. Her final chapter examines “the dynamics
between women’s gender transgressions and male violence against
women” from 1975-2000, finding that the way the state handled domestic
abuse sanctioned male domination “even as it offered women new
visions of themselves as subjects of rights and provided avenues (albeit
limited) for them to fight against male oppression.” This text is an
excellent example of feminist methodology in social science and history.
HN385 2012-374424 978-1-4391-1290-8
The time traveler’s guide to medieval England; a
handbook for visitors to the fourteenth century. (reprint,
2008)
Mortimer, Ian.
Simon & Schuster, ©2011 342 p. $15.00 (pa)
It is said that the past is another country; therefore, the wise traveler
begins with a comprehensive guide. That is the theory behind historian
and author Mortimer’s travelogue of fourteenth-century England. Along
the way, he keeps the traveler from making social gaffes, like not
washing his hands before meals, and also attempts to explain a mindset
that may superficially seem strange, but is really little different from that
of people today. The book is organized much like a standard travel guide:
points of interest, where to stay, what to wear, manners, food, customs,
the law, and many small points of difference that a stranger should be
aware of. Unlike many other popularizers, Mortimer sticks to primary
information from the fourteenth century, rather than assuming that the
Middle Ages were a uniform, static block. He dispels many of the per-
sistent negative myths about the time, although still assuming that the
reader will be shocked by some things taken for granted by natives.
While medievalists might quibble with some of Mortimer’s statements,
the analogy holds in that the modern native of a third world country
could have the same reaction to a guide to his land intended for British
tourists. This is a paperback reprint of a book first published in 2008.
HN682 978-81-7708-317-0
Co-operatives in India; history, problems and reforms.
Agrawal, Babita.
New Century Pub. (New Delhi), ©2012 316 p. $60.50
First introduced to India with the Cooperative Credit Societies Act of
1904, co-operatives as instruments of economic development for the dis-
advantaged have received considerable emphasis in India’s successive
five-year plans following independence and, over the decades, have both
expanded in size and assumed a greater diversity of functions. In this
work, Agrawal (economics, Arya Kanya Postgraduate College, India)
presents a historical account of these developments, with particular
attention to the changes introduced by the present era of liberalization
and privatization. Distributed in North America by ISBS.
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
HN730 2012-013137 978-90-04-22434-6
Change in democratic Mongolia; social relations, health,
mobile pastoralism, and mining.
Title main entry. Ed. by Julian Dierkes. (Brill’s Inner Asian library;
v.25)
BRILL, ©2012 382 p. $156.00
Dierkes (Institute of Asian Research, U. of British Columbia) presents
papers from a November 2008 conference dedicated to cutting-edge social
science research on contemporary Mongolia that focuses on Mongolian’s
interactions with the grasslands, with mineral resources, and with each
other. The 13 included papers are grouped into four distinct thematic
clusters: social relations, challenges to the Mongolian health system, the
state of mobile pastoralism, and the social context of mining. Examples
of specific topics include: youth, identity, and narrative in the revival of
Mongolian Buddhism; formal and informal networks in post-socialist
Mongolia; Mongolian perspectives on democracy and risk; evidence from
mortality trends on the influence of social and economic transition on
health outcomes; occupational safety and the health of miners as chal-
lenge to policy-making; changes in pastoral land use and their effects on
rangeland vegetation indices; the cultural logics of illegality in the
Mongolian gold mines; and mining controversies and the politics of
place.
HN960 2011-042482 978-1-4128-4601-1
Negotiating normality; everyday lives in socialist
institutions.
Title main entry. Ed. by Daniela Koleva.
Transaction Publishers, ©2012 236 p. $49.95
Ten case studies, presented by Koleva (history and theory of culture, St.
Kliment Ohridski U. of Sofia, Bulgaria), explore everyday life in the old
European communist (or socialist) countries in order to investigate how
the countries’ ruling ideological perspectives translated into life at street
level. Grouped around the three common themes of socialist labor, the
new socialist man, and the socialist way of life, they seek to understand
how socialist norms were negotiated through heterogeneity and ambiva-
lence in everyday routine. Sites of investigation include Polish state-
owned farms, a textile factory in Slovenia, a school in Bulgaria, the
Yugoslav People’s Army, and housing in Czechoslovakia.
HQ18 2012-016344 978-1-61608-419-6
The sex habits of Americans; the inside story about what
everyone else is doing behind closed doors.
Winter, Amy.
Skyhorse Pub. Co., ©2012 215 p. $12.95 (pa)
Amy Winters, an independent sex scholar, presents several chapters of
facts and comparisons culled from polls about Americans’ sexual
behaviors and preferences. She surveys attitudes and practices around
sexual education, communicating sexual desire, orgasms, birth control
and safe sex, sexual positions, toys, fantasies and more. The text contains
suggestive but non-explicit images, and every factoid is written as a single
paragraph separated by three center-aligned dots. There is no index nor
bibliography, and many of the polls referenced are from popular maga-
zines like Cosmopolitan and Men’s Health or Internet dating sites.
HQ21 2012-027980 978-0-07-803531-9
Human sexuality; diversity in contemporary America, 8th
ed.
Yarber, William L. and Barbara W. Sayad.
McGraw-Hill, ©2013 626 p. $174.33 (pa)
In this update of the 2010 edition of a textbook first published in 1996,
Yarber (Kinsey Institute for Research in Sex, Gender, and Reproduction;
applied health science and gender studies, Indiana U., Bloomington) and
Sayad (California State U., Monterey Bay) continue their nonjudgmental
approach to all aspects of human sexuality including physiological, psy-
chological, medical, and legal. Chapters include new/updated features on
current issues, discussion questions, supporting illustrations, and sug-
gested websites and reading. For example, the introductory chapter offers
new perspectives on social networking and on teens “coming out.” The
text includes a companion website and glossary.
HQ73 2012-001659 978-0-415-89074-8
Responsive school practices to support lesbian, gay,
bisexual, transgender, and questioning students and
families. (CD-ROM included)
Fisher, Emily S. and Kelly S. Kennedy. (School-based practice in action
series)
Routledge, ©2012 162 p. $39.95 (pa)
In this guide for school-based mental health professionals, Fisher (psy-
chology, Loyola Marymount University) and Kennedy (school psychology
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
and school counseling, Chapman University) give background on the
development of sexuality and gender identity and offer practical sugges-
tions for creating a safe, inclusive school environment for lesbian, gay,
bisexual, transgender, and questioning (LGBTQ) students and their fam-
ilies. Throughout the book, four ongoing case studies of students in
urban and rural schools are used to illustrate principles and practices for
addressing problems such as bullying, violence, and discrimination.
There is also material on understanding legal issues, supporting families,
and accessing community resources. The CD-ROM contains handouts,
letters, and case studies. Although the guide is aimed at mental health
professionals, it is also accessible to teachers, administrators, and
parents.
HQ76 2012-019603 978-0-8166-7645-3
Land of 10,000 loves; a history of queer Minnesota.
Van Cleve, Stewart.
U. of Minnesota Press, ©2012 323 p. $24.95 (pa)
Van Cleve, former assistant curator of what he describes as “one of the
most comprehensive archives of international queer history in the
world,” presents a concise historical survey of LGBTQ life in Minnesota.
He argues that bars and spaces with an element of sexual debauchery
are over-represented in the popular imagination of queer space. Against
this he shows how “nonalcoholic dance parties, parade routes, book-
stores, theaters, community centers, office buildings, and the great out-
doors have all accommodated queerness.” Van Cleve uses archival
material, oral histories, and scholarship to present seven thematic
chapters about early queer history, activism, queer publicity, art and edu-
cation, sexuality, and racial and economic struggle. High quality photos
and a section of color plates complement the text.
HQ76 2012-023606 978-0-14-310696-8
On being different; what it means to be a homosexual.
(reprint, 1971)
Miller, Merle. (Penguin classics)
Penguin Books, ©2012 74 p. $13.00 (pa)
This updated reprint of the book that resulted from Miller’s essay “What
It Means to Be a Homosexual,” first printed in The New York Times
Magazine in 1971, includes the original essay, an afterword by the author,
a foreword by Dan Savage, who initiated the It Gets Better Project, an
afterword by Charles Kaiser, excerpts from personal letters and a never
completed forward, and an obituary for Miller, all of which serve to
emphasize the essay’s importance to the gay rights movement. The essay
was a response not only to a particular homophobic article, but to pre-
vailing homophobia in American society, and Miller discusses the social
consequences of his identification as a gay man, as well as his hopes and
fears about the future. Though first published over forty years ago, the
essay remains pertinent and powerful today.
HQ503 2011-277742 978-0-7456-4779-1
A sociology of family life; change and diversity in
intimate relations.
Chambers, Deborah.
Polity Press, ©2012 240 p. $24.95 (pa)
For students in the social sciences, Chambers (media and cultural
studies, Newcastle U., UK) explores the changing nature of families and
contemporary methods of commitment, focusing on the increase in
family diversity and negative responses to it and families through a
global perspective. She considers whether the idea of the democratization
of family and intimate relationships is supported by research or whether
gender inequalities persist, whether a growing diversity in intimate rela-
tionships is leading to a crisis of commitment and care, whether research
on same-sex intimacies requires a reconsideration of the concept of
family, and whether sociological debates about family life are ethno-
centric. Chapters cover the historical roots of concepts of kinship and
family in sociology; theories and debates from the 1990s about changes
in intimate relationships; changing parenting values and practices;
changes in the nature of childhood; how family relationships are being
changed within the life course, including gender differences among older
people, same-sex relationships, and how families care for the elderly;
family migration and the globalization of intimate relations; the impact
of population policies on fertility patterns; and the use of new repro-
ductive technologies to create the ?perfect? family. These global chapters
emphasize family structures and relations in developing and under-
developed countries, including how family life has been influenced by
arranged marriages and marriage migration. Distributed by Wiley.
–94–
HQ519 978-1-78052-978-3
Economic stress and the family.
Title main entry. Ed. by Sampson Lee Blair. (Contemporary perspectives
in family research; v.6)
Emerald Group Publishing, ©2012 323 p. $114.95
Editor Blair (The State University of New York-Buffalo) gathers interna-
tional contributors in sociology, psychology, applied economics, and
public health to investigate how economic stress affects family members
and families as a whole. Some specific topics explored are the persistent
economic consequences of single motherhood, economic hardship and
marital quality in Croatia, the use of mixed methods to understand fam-
ilies’ financial stress and child care costs, and structural and psy-
chosocial factors related to family financial stress and adolescent
substance abuse. The book is distributed in North America by Turpin
Distribution.
HQ755 2012-021786 978-1-936303-39-7
The 5 simple truths of raising kids; how to deal with
modern problems facing your tweens and teens.
Snyder, Bradley R.
Demos Health, ©2013 173 p. $16.95 (pa)
Author Snyder, a marketing executive at Cartoon Network who conducts
focus groups with kids, has worked in direct service programs for kids
and as a middle school mental health counselor, and has also worked for
Marvel Comics and the US Justice Department, interviewing kids about
what they want, what they do, and why they do it. In this readable guide
for parents, Snyder stresses that, in spite of the fact that they are sur-
rounded by media and telecommunications technology, today’s kids are
still kids. He recommends three key parenting skills—presence, per-
sistence, and patience—and reminds readers that kids need parents,
adults, and communities. Chapters devoted to TV, social networks,
texting, videogames, and bullying explain teen and tween behavior and
give simple advice on promoting positive behavior. The book’s many
vignettes are based on real kids the author has worked with. The book
closes with a list of organizations.
HQ756 2012-009735 978-1-84872-948-3
Fathers in cultural context.
Title main entry. Ed. by David W. Shwalb et al.
Routledge, ©2013 419 p. $59.95 (pa)
This collection provides reviews of the most current research in fathering
and covers cultures that represent more than 50 percent of the world’s
population. The countries and regions addressed include Japan,
Malaysia, China, India, East Africa, the Arab region, the Caribbean,
Russia, the UK, and more. In addition to topics such as the internation-
alization of fatherhood research, changes in social conditions throughout
the world and other subjects, the book cites almost 900 studies of fathers
and fatherhood previously unavailable in English. The intended audience
is practitioners and scholars with an interest in fathers, families, and cul-
tures—as well as students in behavioral and social sciences. Editors are
David W. Schwalb (psychology, Southern Utah U.), Barbara J. Schwalb
(psychology, retired, Southern Utah U.), and Lamb (psychology, U. of
Cambridge, UK).
HQ756 978-3-86649-375-9
Fatherhood in late modernity; cultural images, social
practices, structural frames.
Title main entry. Ed. by Mechtild Oechsle et al.
Barbara Budrich Publishers, ©2012 323 p. $47.95 (pa)
This collection of over a dozen critical essays explores the changing dis-
course, imagery, affects and practices surrounding fatherhood in late
modernity. The essays are organized around three sub-headings: cultural
images and representations of fatherhood, life courses and social prac-
tices, and the impact of organizations and institutional regulations. Most
of the essays are written by European and American academics in family
studies, with a focus on European fathers. The essays consider transfor-
mations in masculinity, the division of housework, consequences of post-
Soviet changes in bureaucratic culture on fathers, fathers in literature at
the turn of this century, pedagogic images of the father and more.
Distributed by ISBS.
HQ756 978-1-74286-058-9
What happens now?; the essential book for first-time
fathers.
Carr, Nick.
ACER Press, ©2012 94 p. $24.95 (pa)
Carr, a father, parenting specialist, and general practitioner who has
worked in pediatrics in Australia, offers first-time fathers a short guide
to fatherhood and forming strong, meaningful attachments with their
children. He describes the concept of the nurturing father; the father’s
–95–
role during pregnancy and delivery; dealing with advice from others;
dealing with crying, sleeping, and feeding the baby; time management;
sex after pregnancy; answers to various health questions about babies;
how to avoid traps with older kids; and other topics. There is no index.
Distributed in the US by ISBS.
HQ767 2011-007243 978-1-84706-025-9
Education and constructions of childhood; contemporary
issues in education studies.
Blundell, David. (Contemporary issues in education studies)
Continuum Publishing Group, ©2012 205 p. $39.95 (pa)
Writing for undergraduate and graduate students in education studies
and related fields, as well as policy makers and practitioners, Blundell
(education studies, London Metropolitan U., UK) considers how society
has come to think about children, the attached meanings, and the child-
hoods children experience in educational settings, with an emphasis on
the UK and its legislation. Contending that childhood is socially con-
structed, he explores how school has become a place where social ten-
sions and anxieties about national economic competitiveness and
underperformance impinge upon children’s lives and suggests that
understanding childhood might help explain why many children are not
happy, secure, and confident. He traces the history of ideas related to the
child and examines the way they have become translated into impera-
tives, practices, professional identities, and educational institutions that
identify a normal childhood, and explores the historical construction of
schooling as a response to industrialization and to regulate societies. He
considers the combination of the ideas of the child created by an intel-
lectual elite and childhoods constructed by schooling and how this
process culminated in the attempt to construct a system of child-centered,
progressive schooling in the 1960s and 1970s, but how this undermined
the idea of the universal child. He discusses the link between ideas about
childhood and moralization and human nature; the roles of theoretical
notions and the influence of Christian doctrine in the construction of
Western childhood institutions; how the progressive ideals of the intel-
lectual and social elite served as philanthropic goals and self-interests; the
contemporary connection between education, health, and social care;
whether the requirements of schooling can be reconciled with universal
ideals of childhood and the reality presented by real children in con-
temporary multicultural and globalized Western societies; and whether
an emphasis on discourses of “childhood as futurity” burden children
with expectation, so that education becomes the remedy for all social ills
and childhood is constructed as a stage of redemption.
HQ777 2012-008204 978-0-8166-7918-8
Troubling the family; the promise of personhood and the
rise of multiracialism.
Ibrahim, Habiba. (Difference incorporated)
U. of Minnesota Press, ©2012 218 p. $25.00 (pa)
Ibrahim (U. of Washington) conducts a feminist genealogy of the political
and cultural logics of multiracialism in the United Sates between 1997
and 2007. She argues that, although it is not widely acknowledged,
gender provided the foundational logic for what she identifies as a shift
from blackness to multiracialism in the ways in which multiracialism
privileged the sanctity of the heteronormative family, the labor of child
rearing, and more precise forms of racial tabulation.
HQ778 2012-025633 978-1-60554-084-9
Activities for responsive caregiving; infants, toddlers, and
twos.
Barbre, Jean.
Redleaf Press, ©2013 221 p. $24.95 (pa)
Barbre, who has been a marriage and family therapist, preschool
director, teacher, college instructor, and speaker, applies that principles
she discusses in Foundations of Responsive Caregiving to 101 play activities
that help infants, toddlers, and two-year-olds develop the skills needed to
become lifelong learners. She demonstrates how to use the book’s prin-
ciples and theories as underpinnings for activities that promote learning
across the four learning domains: social-emotional, physical, cognitive,
and language development. Each activity includes information on the
recommended age, learning outcomes, materials, the procedure, modifi-
cations for toddlers and twos, expansions, and tips for building language
skills, as well as a list of suggested books and a song or chant.
HQ778 2012-025632 978-1-60554-085-6
Foundations of responsive caregiving; infants, toddlers,
and twos.
Barbre, Jean.
Redleaf Press, ©2013 126 p. $34.95 (pa)
Barbre, who has worked as a marriage and family therapist, preschool
director, teacher, college instructor, and speaker, argues that responsive
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
caregiving is essential to children’s growth and development, that
children are ready and eager to learn, that play is central to learning, and
that responsive caregivers collaborate with families to support growth
and development, and stresses the importance of trust in healthy rela-
tionships and the need for stable, secure early care and learning envi-
ronments. She helps those who work in early childhood education and
care understand the theories of child development, the components of
high-quality care and responsive learning environments, best practices in
teaching and caregiving, and how children grow and develop from birth
to age three in the social-emotional, physical, cognitive, and language
domains, as well as how to support children with special needs.
HQ778 2011-035233 978-0-8264-9004-9
Good practice in the early years, 3d ed.
Title main entry. Ed. by Janet Kay.
Continuum Publishing Group, ©2012 282 p. $34.95 (pa)
Kay (early childhood studies, Sheffield Hallam U., UK) provides early
childhood education students and practitioners with a guide to the ele-
ments of good practice with children ages zero to eight. In nine chapters,
early childhood specialists in the UK address play, children’s rights and
participation, reflective practice, diversity and inclusion, growth and
development, health promotion, child protection and safeguarding,
working with parents and families, and multi-agency working. The text
emphasizes legislation and agencies in the UK. Case studies and activities
are included.
HQ783 978-1-78052-876-2
Disputes in everyday life; social and moral orders of
children and young people.
Title main entry. Ed. by Susan Danby and Maryanne Theobald.
(Sociological studies of children and youth; v.15)
Emerald Group Publishing, ©2012 413 p. $174.95
For this volume in the series, sociologists and education scholars extend
current understandings of children’s disputes by examining how, in the
various arenas and social worlds of children and young people, matters
of ownership, alignment, and social and moral order are always at play.
They show how disputes can offer analytic opportunities to examine and
make visible typically unseen social and moral orders. The topics include
disputes during family mealtime, children’s production of authority and
subordinance in their pretended play interaction during disputes, some
categorical resources for accomplishing disputes in a correctional youth
facility, challenging and orienting to monolingual school norms in
Turkish American children’s peer disputes and classroom negotiations at
a US Turkish Saturday school, when verbal disputes get physical, and
facing death in computer gaming. There is no index. Distributed in North
America by Turpin Distribution.
HQ799 2012-014095 978-1-933478-84-5
Civic youth work; cocreating democratic youth spaces.
Title main entry. Ed. by Ross VeLure Roholt et al.
Lyceum Books, ©2013 205 p. $49.95 (pa)
This collection of 12 essays offers stories about encouraging civic partic-
ipation among youth in countries as diverse as Ireland, Korea, Africa,
and Mississippi. In an age routinely exasperated with political parties
and therefore described as politically apathetic, they show a different
vision of civic engagement that makes that charge hard to take seriously.
The essays are organized into four chapters of 2-4 essays each on who
are civic youth workers, how does is it represented in comparison to
other forms of youth work, policies supporting and challenging civic
youth work, and developing spaces and practices for cultivating civic
youth workers. Each essay ends with reflection questions intended to
stimulate discussion and reflection. The contributors write from the per-
spective of their actual experience with civic youth workers and include
activists, social workers, political scientists, education and youth studies
scholars.
HQ1061 2012-022315 978-0-313-38173-7
Handbook of families and aging, 2d ed.
Title main entry. Ed. by Rosemary Blieszner and Victoria Hilkevitch
Bedford.
Praeger, ©2012 616 p. $85.00
Blieszner (human development, Virginia Tech) and Bedford (psychology,
U. of Indianapolis) bring together 23 essays in this handbook on family
gerontology for advanced undergraduate and graduate students,
researchers, and gerontology practitioners. Researchers in public health,
psychology, gerontology, sociology, human development and family
studies, and human ecology in the US, Canada, and Switzerland address
traditional and new family structures as they relate to aging. They
examine demographic trends, theoretical directions, and new research
methods; marital and partner, sibling, and intergenerational
relationships, as well as discretionary and fictive kin; ethnic and cultural,
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
rural location, policy, and legal influences; retirement, illness and
caregiving, grief and bereavement, and divorce and widowhood (new to
this edition); and emerging research themes. This edition integrates
recent legal issues and topics like step-family relationships, immigration,
peripheral family ties, and new contexts like gender, race, class, elder
abuse, and technology.
HQ1064 978-3-643-90176-7
Aging, performance, and stardom; doing age on the stage
of consumerist culture.
Title main entry. Ed. by Aagje Swinnen and John A. Stotesbury.
(Aging studies in Europe; v.2)
LIT Verlag, ©2012 201 p. $39.95 (pa)
This second volume in the Aging Studies in Europe series focuses on age
as it is experienced and portrayed in dance, drama, film, and television.
The book is a collection of critical essays divided into three parts: the
first part discusses performances which address issues around percep-
tions of age and aging, the second part addresses how specific stars
(mostly American female stars) have dealt with aging and with percep-
tions of age, and the final part shows how European consumerist culture
affects perceptions of age and aging. Distributed in North America by
ISBS.
HQ1090 2012-013072 978-0-8263-2905-9
Masculinity and sexuality in modern Mexico.
Title main entry. Ed. by Víctor M. Macías-González and Anne
Rubenstein. (Diálogos series)
U. of New Mexico Press, ©2012 280 p. $31.95 (pa)
Edited by Victor M. Macias-Gonzalez (history and women’s, gender, and
sexuality studies, U. of Wisconsin-La Crosse) and Anne Rubenstein
(history, York U., Toronto, CA), this anthology is a Latin-inflected look on
masculinity and gender studies. Its Mexican outlook runs much deeper
than the specific subjects of the essays, which all deal with masculinity
and sexuality in modern and contemporary Mexico. The book is struc-
tured and written in a quite different way than most American books in
gender studies. First, the text is accessible for general readers. The intro-
duction, for instance, defines sex, gender, and sexual orientation, which
not only orients inexperienced readers but makes explicit this anthology’s
particular outlook and definitions, an important task rarely done in
gender studies books that depend on a readership of insiders with iden-
tical social politics. The editors are historians, and in a helpful intro-
duction, they locate differences in Mexican concepts of gender study in a
history where conservative views were rooted in nationalism or
Freudianism, and most contemporary academic study of gender and sex-
uality in culture has been done by anthropologists. They point out this
profession focuses both on how people experience everyday life, and on
the difference between myth and everyday life (a distinction American
gender studies still finds difficult in the study of masculinity). Most
essays in this book focus on how ordinary people in contemporary
Mexico negotiate the relationships between myth and everyday life in
practice when the subject is what is masculine and feminine sexuality,
and what behavior in general is expected of men. The authors are histo-
rians, Latin American studies scholars, and scholars of gender and ethnic
studies. Part one of the book describes individual experiences, part two
looks at representations in film and media and how people respond to
them. The essays are uniformly informative and well written, and the
book will be broadly interesting to general readers as well as useful for
readers in history, gender or sexuality studies, anthropology, sociology,
and Latin American cultures.
HQ1090 2012-028519 978-0-674-05982-5
Triumphs of experience; the men of the Harvard Grant
Study.
Vaillant, George E.
Belknap Press, ©2012 457 p. $27.95
Based on his landmark longitudinal study of male Harvard alumni now
officially known as the Harvard Study of Adult Development, Vaillant
(psychiatry, Harvard Medical School) presents the study’s history, theo-
retical underpinnings (including Erikson’s stages of development),
insights drawn from interviews, and narratives of selected participants
with their scores on rewarding late-life outcomes. The interview protocol,
childhood and adult personality and adjustment scales, and a study bib-
liography are appended. Belknap Press is an imprint of Harvard U. Press.
HQ1111 2012-029430 978-1-4331-0646-0
Wish to live; the hip-hop feminism pedagogy reader.
Title main entry. Ed. by Edited by Ruth Nicole Brown and Chamara
Jewel Kwakye. (Educational psychology; critical pedagogical perspec-
tives; v.3)
Peter Lang Publishing Inc, ©2012 271 p. $42.95 (pa)
Brown (political science, U. of Michigan) and Kwakye (educational policy
–96–
studies, U. of Illinois) have combined a collection of poems, essays,
scholarly papers and performances to express how hip-hop feminist
awareness can advise educational practices and inspire the lives of young
women. Focusing on hip-hop as a center for activism, art, and pedagogy,
these chapters are recommended to be read aloud or performed and
feature contributions from professors and graduates that are making the
practice of hip-hop feminism a practical approach to facing the intri-
cacies of social and gender identity. This interdisciplinary reader is an
excellent resource for educators, young women, and hip-hop enthusiasts.
HQ1190 2012-003590 978-1-4411-6830-6
Feminist theory; the intellectual traditions, 4th ed.
Donovan, Josephine.
Continuum Publishing Group, ©2012 287 p. $29.95
Writing for students and scholars, Donovan (emerita, English, University
of Maine) traces the ideological traditions and philosophical strains that
make up the intellectual heritage of modern American feminism.
Coverage encompasses the different branches of feminist theory, from
enlightenment liberal feminism through 19th and 20th century cultural
feminism, feminism and Marxism, feminism and existentialism,
Freudian feminism, and radical feminist theory. This fourth edition
incorporates recent views on feminist theory since the third edition was
published in 2000, with a new chapter on ecofeminism, postmodernism,
and global feminism in the 21st century.
HQ1236 2011-456423 978-1-84383-681-0
Elite women and polite society in eighteenth-century
Scotland.
Glover, Katharine. (St Andrews studies in Scottish history series)
The Boydell Press, ©2011 217 p. $95.00
Glover (economics, U. of Edinburgh, Scotland) examines the impact
fashion and education had on elite women’s lives and how women
exploited these as opportunities to gain new kinds of respect and political
power in Scottish society. Focusing on the 50 year period between 1720
and 1770, she draws on the personal writings of women from gentry
families, aristocrats, sisters of socially ambitious architects for her
sources. She provides background on the kind of society elite women
inhabited in 18th century Scotland and then surveys the broad areas of
activity women were occupying: education and upbringing, reading and
print culture, polite sociability, politics, and travel. She observes in her
conclusion that toward the end of the century the promotion of women
in public spheres was seen as a sign of social decay. An imprint of
Boydell & Brewer.
HQ1236 978-81-7708-328-6
Rural women workers in India’s unorganized sector.
Agrawal, Meenu.
New Century Pub. (New Delhi), ©2012 197 p. $39.25
Most of the rural workforce in India is in the unorganized (or informal)
sector, where they have no job or income security. This study reports on
the conditions of rural women workers in this sector and examines gov-
ernment programs to alleviate their poverty. Early chapters describe the
unorganized sector and review the literature on socioeconomic conditions
of women. Later chapters go into more detail on the growth and com-
ponents of the unorganized sector, problems of unorganized women
workers, government policies and programs for unorganized sector
women workers, and the goals and operational strategies of the 2001
National Policy for Empowerment of Women. An appendix offers a case
study. Agrawal teaches economics at Ginni Devi Modi Girls (Post-
graduate) College, Modinagar. The book is distributed in the US by ISBS.
HQ1236 978-81-7708-325-5
Self-help groups (SHGs) and women empowerment in
India.
Pangannavar, Arjun Yallappa.
New Century Pub. (New Delhi), ©2012 187 p. $38.75
Pangannavar (economics, J.S.S. Arts, Science and Commerce College,
Gotak, Karnataka, India) presents a study on the role of micro-credit self-
help groups (SHGs) in empowering rural Indian women. The study looks
at the benefits and drawbacks of SHGs, such as husbands using their
wives’ funds with no responsibility for repayment, and estimates the
impact of the SHG program on the socioeconomic life of rural women.
The book opens with background and statistics on poverty in rural India,
then charts the origins, growth, and functioning of SHGs, and examines
implementation problems at the beneficiary, unit, and institutional level.
The final chapter makes recommendations for governments, banks, and
NGOs regarding the implementation of the SHG program. An appendix
offers a case study of one rural district. The book is distributed by ISBS.
–97–
HQ1237 2012-014249 978-0-8213-8686-6
New century, old disparities; gender and ethnic earnings
gaps in Latin America and the Caribbean.
Nopo, Hugo . (Latin American development forum series)
The World Bank, ©2012 323 p. $30.00 (pa)
Ñopo (research economist, Inter-American Development Bank, Colombia)
offers a study of socioeconomic inequality in Latin America and the
Caribbean, a region well-suited as a focus because of its persistent gender
and ethnic inequalities and the variety of its extent and likely causes.
Concentrating primarily on earnings inequality, the author addresses
education issues, changes in women’s participation and unemployment
rates, gender segregation, differences in overtime between men and
women, indigenous populations, job availability, policy, and more.
HQ1413 2012-032769 978-0-8133-4761-5
Alice Paul; equality for women.
Lunardini, Christine. (Lives of American women)
Westview Press, ©2013 202 p. $20.00 (pa)
Lunardini, an independent women’s studies scholar, examines the role of
the little-credited Paul (1885-1977), an American Quaker social
worker/activist in the fight for women’s suffrage and gender equality.
The biography relates her treatment as part of the movement in England
and strategies in America, and sheds light on divisions on goals and
tactics within women’s groups, and the national politics of the times.
Includes an annotated bibliography.
HQ1413 978-0-8133-4763-9
Lillian Gilbreth; redefining domesticity.
Des Jardins, Julie. (Lives of American women)
Westview Press, ©2013 176 p. $20.00 (pa)
Lillian Gilbreth is perhaps best known as the mother of a large family
in the book and film Cheaper By the Dozen, and also as the partner of
her husband Frank Gilbreth, who produced many studies of time and
motion in the household, the factory, and the workplace. In this biog-
raphy, Des Jardins (history, Baruch College) portrays Gilbreth as a
pioneer of industrial psychology in her own right with the belief that
employers must consider the human needs of workers. Gilbreth’s story
illustrates the opportunities and barriers facing women who wanted both
professional careers and a family on the late 19th century and in the
decades before the modern feminist movement. The book concludes with
primary sources, such as a Gilbreth management desk brochure, and
study questions.
HQ1727 2012-019822 978-0-8156-3299-3
Making do in Damascus; navigating a generation of
change in family and work.
Gallagher, Sally K. (Contemporary issues in the Middle East)
Syracuse U. Press, ©2012 335 p. $45.00
Gallagher (sociology, Oregon State University) synthesizes her partic-
ipant/observer research of the past 20 years to describe family life for
women in conservative Sunni Muslim households in Damascus, Syria.
She goes beyond the Western image of Arab women as terrorists or as
victims of patriarchal Arab traditions, in favor of a more nuanced per-
spective. The women’s decisions on education, marriage partners,
children, jobs, and the use of new information technologies offer insight
on the social construction of gender in a society in which gender is less
individually negotiable, allowing researchers to refocus gender theory
toward an approach that integrates both creative individual action and
the affects of social structure.
HQ1742 978-81-7708-313-2
Women status and empowerment in India.
Mishra, Shyam Kartik and Pradeep Kumar Pandey.
New Century Pub. (New Delhi), ©2012 276 p. $79.75
This work for researchers, scholars, and policymakers overviews
problems of disadvantaged Indian women and describes government
programs and policies aimed at their social and political empowerment.
The book begins with a look at women’s’ place in the family, the con-
nections between gender equality and development, and issues related to
armed conflict and globalization. Later chapters describe the constitu-
tional and legal safeguards for women in India and examine national
and international mechanisms for the advancement of women, including
the 2011 National Policy for Empowerment of Women. Several chapters
are devoted to categories of vulnerable groups, such as adolescent girls,
women with AIDS, and women workers. The book includes an appendix
of documents. Mishra teaches economics at Post-graduate College,
Sakaldiha, Chandauli (Varanasi), Uttar Pradesh. Pandey teaches eco-
nomics at M. G. Kashi Vidyapeeth, Uttar Pradesh. The book is distributed
in North America by ISBS.
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
HQ1793 2012-018985 978-0-8156-3293-1
Unveiling the harem; elite women and the paradox of
seclusion in eighteenth-century Cairo.
Fay, Mary Ann. (Middle East studies beyond dominant paradigms)
Syracuse U. Press, ©2012 331 p. $45.00
In this study of women in wealthy households in Cairo, Fay (history,
Morgan State University) shows that some Middle Eastern women were
able to become property owners under Islamic law and to achieve eco-
nomic, social, and political influence during the Mamluk revival period.
After an overview of harem history and the history of the Mamluk
revival, the rest of the book follows the stages of a woman’s life and the
transitions she makes as she becomes integrated into the household as a
concubine or wife. The author describes how elite women gained power
from their own wealth, from their control over others’ property as
administrators of religious endowments, and from their role in the
kinship construction of the Mamluks. She also highlights the architecture
of seclusion, with b&w photos of women’s spaces.
HQ1870 978-0-8156-3305-1
Globalization and third world women; exploitation,
coping and resistance (reprint, 2009).
Title main entry. Ed. by Ligaya Lindio-McGovern and Isidor Wallimann.
Syracuse U. Press, ©2012 214 p. $19.95 (pa)
Lindio-McGovern (sociology, Indiana U.) and Wallimann (Maxwell School
of Citizenship and Public Affairs, Syracuse U.) present 11 papers that
explore experiences of Third World women with the gendered nature of
neoliberal capitalist globalization, with most of the essays highlighting
themes of resistance. Topics include Filipina migrant workers’ transna-
tional struggles for protection and social justice, confronting empire in
Filipina-American feminist thought, feminist thought in Kikuyu struggles
for land and food sovereignty in Kenya, solidarity economic organizing
by Mexican women, Third World women’s global actions in response to
oil exploitation, sex trafficking migration in South Asia, and dynamics of
gender and development in Africa in the case of the United Nations
Development Fund for Women. This is a paperbound reprint of a work
first published in 2009.
HT119 2012-020577 978-0-8213-9581-3
Eurasian cities; new realities along the Silk Road.
Coulibaly, Souleymane et al.
The World Bank, ©2012 244 p. $29.95 (pa)
Economics and urban planning are the focus of this book, which was
developed as a continuation of the World Development Report 2009:
Reshaping Economic Geography. The authors note that Eurasian cities
were a grand experiment in large-scale regional planning, designed from
a centralized power base and implemented at speed. The power base in
question was the Soviet Union, and the unifying plan was global com-
munism. The authors explain that since large-scale, high-speed regional
planning from a centralized power base with an inflexible, ideologically-
driven agenda does not work, this World Bank central plan for the quick
redevelopment of cities all across Eurasia to fit global capitalism will
work better. The book is divided into five sections: Rethinking Cities,
Planning Cities, Connecting Cities, Greening Cities, and Financing Cities.
Interspersed with the text are a variety of Boxes, Exhibits, Figures, and
Tables.
HT151 2011-052021 978-0-85745-510-9
Post-cosmopolitan cities; explorations of urban coexistence.
Title main entry. Ed. by Caroline Humphrey and Vera Skvirskaja.
(Space and place; v.9)
Berghahn Books, ©2012 250 p. $70.00
Many of the essays in this book are about the city of Odessa; an equal
number are not. Most but not all of them are about cities in the former
Soviet Union. What unites all the essays in this thoughtful volume is that
the cities they describe were once part of cosmopolitan empires which
have now disappeared, leaving diverse communities to redefine for them-
selves and the world who they are. Though the topic could be the subject
of a highly theoretical book, most of the essays here are highly accessible
to general readers; they describe Jews, Iranians, Arabs, and Pakistanis in
Odessa, Muslims in Tbilisi, struggles to figure out appropriate building
styles for one’s city, the public face of Venice created for the Venice
Bienniale. The book will be of interest to both scholarly and general
readers who care about how diverse cities define themselves in terms of
what they look like, what events happen there, and who belongs there.
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
HT167 978-1-59237-874-6
America’s top-rated smaller cities; a statistical handbook,
2012/13, 9th ed.; 2v.
Title main entry.
Grey House Pub., Inc., ©2012 2500 p. $195.00 (pa)
This extensive directory provides statistical profiles of 124 top US cities
with populations between 25,000 and 125,000. Most, but not all, of the
cities profiled lie adjacent to major metropolitan areas. Each profile
begins with background on the city’s history, then summarizes rankings
compiled from American magazines and newspapers, health organiza-
tions, business groups, and research reports. Statistical tables supply
data on demographics, income, bankruptcy rates, employment, housing
costs, education, and recreation. Arranged alphabetically by state,
volume one covers Alabama to New Hampshire and volume two covers
New Jersey through Wyoming. Appendices list contacts for chambers of
commerce, economic development organizations, and state departments
of labor and employment. The ninth edition adds 35 cities.
HT167 2012-003496 978-1-4128-4861-9
Planning theory; a search for future directions. (reprint
1978)
Title main entry. Ed. by Robert W. Burchell and George Sternlieb.
Transaction Publishers, ©2013 365 p. $39.95 (pa)
This is a reprint of the collection originally published as Planning Theory
in the 1980’s by Rutgers University in 1978. The 23 essays predicted the
directions physical, social, public policy, and economic planning would
take in the field of urban planning and how the role of the city planner
might change in the “advanced capitalist state.” No index is provided.
HT169 2012-021605 978-81-321-0697-5
Urban and regional planning in India; a handbook for
professional practice.
Kulshrestha, S.K.
Sage Publications, ©2012 299 p. $36.00 (pa)
This reference handbook was developed by the author to meet the needs
of teaching postgraduate students of urban and regional planning at the
School of Planning and Architecture in New Delhi, India. It covers tradi-
tional issues of spatial planning and development activities, as well as
such topics as development management; real estate development; advice,
arbitration, and legal services; education and training; and research.
Although it was written for Indian students of urban and regional
planning, it also covers relevant topics associated with the General
Agreement on Trade in Services under the World Trade Organization.
HT170 978-3-643-90114-9
Gentrification and resistance; cultural criminology,
control, and the commodification of urban protest in
Hamburg.
Naegler, Laura. (Hamburger studien zur kriminologie und krimi-
nalpolitik; v.50)
LIT Verlag, ©2012 181 p. $44.95 (pa)
Naegler (criminology, U. of Applied Sciences, Düsseldorf, Germany)
examines the struggle over the Sternschanze neighborhood of Hamburg
as left-wing activists, residents, and subcultural actors resisted gentrifi-
cation. Her ethnographic study asks whether there is a connection
between the process of gentrification, the increase of urban control, and
the criminalization of urban cultures of resistance. She also investigates
the extent to which anti-gentrification resistance plays a role in the
process of urban revaluation. There is no index. Distributed in the US by
ISBS.
HT170 978-1-84564-578-6
The sustainable city VIII; urban regeneration and
sustainability; proceedings; 2v.
International Conference on Urban Regeneration and Sustainability
(7th: 2012: Ancona, Italy) Ed. by M. Pacetti et al. (WIT transactions on
ecology and the environment; v.155)
WIT Press, ©2012 1248 p. $1,100.00
The first conference was held in 2000, and subsequent conferences have
been held very two years. This two-volume set houses the proceeding of
the seventh, held in 2012, in Acona Italy; and since the process of urban-
ization has not abated, the challenges of effectively managing resources
continue. The editors point out in the preface that big cities are indeed
an efficient habitat for the Earth’s human population, but maintaining a
good quality of life is essential and not easily achievable. One hundred-
plus selected papers address urban strategies, eco-town planning, urban
conservation and regeneration, landscape planning and design, environ-
mental management, intelligent environments and emerging tech-
nologies, sustainable energy, waterfront developments, the community,
quality of life, cultural heritage, transportation, risk planning, waste
–98–
management, and safety and security, among other topics. Three of the
four editors—M. Pacetti, G. Passerini, and G. Latini—are affiliated with the
Universita Politecnica delle Marche, Italy; the fourth, C.A. Brebbia, with
the Wessex Institute of Technology, UK. The list of contributors is splen-
didly international.Indexing is by author, but not by topic.
HT241 978-1-78190-036-9
Urban areas and global climate change.
Title main entry. Ed. by William G. Holt. (Research in urban sociology;
v.12)
Emerald Group Publishing, ©2012 356 p. $134.95
With 14 papers in total, the first six papers in this collection identify the
factors driving sustainable urban development in U.S. and European
cities, and the second set of papers describes initiatives being taken by
cities in the southern hemisphere to mitigate damage caused by climate
change. The contributors assess the clash between the environmental
justice movement and emissions trading, explain the Indian media’s role
in the climate change discourse, and consider the gender dimensions of
climatic impacts on Ugandan urban areas. Distributed in North America
by Turpin Distribution.
HT330 2012-911035 978-0-85709-046-1
Metropolitan sustainability; understanding and improving
the urban environment.
Title main entry. Ed. by Frank Zeman. (Woodhead Publishing series in
energy; no.34)
Woodhead Publishing, ©2012 739 p. $325.00
Environmental and earth scientists, physical and biological scientists,
and urban planners and civil engineers go back to the ancient Greeks to
find the elements that make sense in talking about sustainable urban
living today: earth, air, water, and fire. After an introductory section, they
cover urban land use and the environmental impact of the built envi-
ronment; urban air pollution and emissions control; urban water
resources, reuse, and management; and urban energy supply and man-
agement. Among the topics are using urban metabolism analysis to view
cities as life forms, opportunities and constraints of urban agriculture,
passive systems to improve air quality and reduce heat retention in the
urban environment, modeling watershed and treatment facilities, and
powering the sustainable city with solar energy.
HT334 2012-014644 978-1-4128-4837-4
Sources of metropolitan growth. (reprint, 1992)
Title main entry. Ed. by Edwin S. Mills and John F. McDonald.
Transaction Publishers, ©2012 307 p. $49.95 (pa)
Edited by Mills (emeritus, real estate and finance, Northwestern U.) and
McDonald (emeritus, economics and finance, U. of Illinois at Chicago),
this volume examines economic growth and development in metro-
politan areas and is based on papers delivered at a 1989 symposium
jointly organized by the Economic Development Administration of the US
Department of Commerce and NCI research in Evanston, Illinois.
Although originally published in 1992, the spatial turn, which would
become more prevalent in later years, is evident in much of the work,
with papers focusing on such topics as spatial associations among indus-
tries, location patterns of producer services firms, the emergence of sub-
urban business centers, enterprise zones, and efforts to promote specific
new businesses in an area. Later chapters also consider the relationship
between metropolitan growth and development and urban social
problems of poverty and differential ethnic impacts. This is a paper-
bound edition of a work first published in 1992.
HT361 2012-358371 978-1-84102-291-8
City as a political idea.
Nawratek, Krzysztof.
University of Plymouth Press, ©2011 168 p. $27.50 (pa)
Nawratek (architecture, Plymouth U.) revives the idea that cities can
organize the political life of their subjects directly, rather than collapsing
state or national governments. He interrogates issues of citizenship,
immigration, dispersed forms of power, “the lost myth of the socialist
city,” and the rebuilding of the polis. Nawratek explores the subjective as
well as objective aspects of how a city is organized. He advocates city-
level organizing as an alternative he’d prefer to all out social upheaval or
revolution.
HT361 2012-025247 978-1-55844-245-0
Planet of cities.
Angel, Shlomo.
Lincoln Institute of Land Policy, ©2012 340 p. $40.00 (pa)
Drawing on the scientific idea that studying a large sample of something
can reveal general traits, Angel (urban planning, New York U.) looks at
what the nearly 4,000 cities in the world with populations of 100,000 or
–99–
more have in common. The information is designed to help government
officials, academics, activists, and interested citizens identify and address
common ailments and seek common cures. He begins by setting out four
propositions: inevitable expansion, sustainable densities, decent housing,
and public works. Other topics include the geography of world urban-
ization, the global hierarchy of cities, the persistent decline in urban den-
sities, and urban land cover projections 2000-50.
HT395 978-1-4665-7186-0
Sustainable coastal management and climate adaptation;
global lessons from regional approaches in Australia.
Kenchington, Richard and Laura Stocker, David Wood.
CRC Press, ©2012 222 p. $99.95
With a focus on climate change adaptation and predicated on research
by Australia’s Coastal Collaboration Cluster, this book explores the impli-
cations of lessons learned in contemporary Australian coastal man-
agement. The book synthesizes sciences and governance policies and
outlines important aspects of the Australian coast before examining his-
torical approaches and a theoretical framework for contemporary
approaches, international responses, the evolution of sustainable
Australian coastal management, the history of Great Barrier Reef man-
agement, and regional studies of the Derwent Huon estuaries, SEQ, and
Ningaloo. Charts, maps, and figures are included.
HT1096 978-976-640-269-3
Abolition and plantation management in Jamaica 1807-
1838.
St. Aubyn Gosse, Dave.
U. of the West Indies Press, ©2012 236 p. $30.00 (pa)
St. Aubyn Gosse (history, University of the West Indies, Jamaica) explores
early 19th century plantation management in Jamaica within the larger
context of ameliorative reforms leading up to the final abolition of
slavery in Jamaica and British colonies in 1833, plus reforms after abo-
lition, such as the apprenticeship period and the actual emancipation of
slaves in 1838. The book begins with an overview of the economic,
political, and social contexts of the period, then examines plantation man-
agement structure in Jamaica and looks at Jamaican planters’ resistance
to amelioration reforms. A case study of one plantation demonstrates
how management practices affected the population and how planters
diversified their operations in response to reforms. Brief appendices
review injustices in the Jamaican legal system. The book is distributed in
the US by Longleaf Services, Inc.
HT1163 2012-007352 978-0-8014-5108-9
Freedom burning; anti-slavery and empire in Victorian
Britain.
Huzzey, Richard.
Cornell U. Press, ©2012 303 p. $29.95
Huzzey (history, University of Liverpool) looks at Britain’s crusade to sup-
press the slave trade around the world after it abolished the slave trade
in its own empire in 1834. The book investigates the philanthropic,
imperial, and economic motivations behind the abolitionist campaigns of
William Wilberforce and Thomas Clarkson, exploring the impact of anti-
slavery policies favoring imperial expansion and questioning why anti-
slavery ideologies failed to halt hardening attitudes toward Africans.
B&w historical illustrations are included.
HT1521 2011-043474 978-0-674-05981-8
Seeing through race.
Mitchell, W. J. T.
Harvard University Press, ©2012 231 p. $24.95
Within the rubric of academic cultural studies, this book attempts to
change the way readers think about race. It consists of three W.E.B.
DuBois lectures offered at Harvard University, and four related essays on
visual culture. The book is designed for readers who find metaphor and
meditative modes of literature, particularly the personal essay, are
helpful guides to thought, but are most comfortable with the academic
impersonal voice. The author, W. J. T. Mitchell (Gaylord Donnely
Distinguished Service Professor, U. of Chicago) is a scholar equally com-
fortable alluding to Slavoj Zizek and Willam Blake, Edward Said and
Thomas Hobbes, often on the same page. His essays consider the deep
resonances of Israeli Garbage Pail Kids cards, offer diagrams of Lacanian
theory, and compare the landscape aesthetics of Christo’s Gates in
Central Park with the Gilo Wall dividing Palestinians from Israeli sec-
tions of Jerusalem. (Distance from the subject is required.) However, this
is also one of the few recent books to attempt two important tasks. One
is to “speak postmodernism” intelligibly, in personally relevant ways as
part of a conversation among human beings. Mitchell is very much
helped here by beginning with the spoken word. The other is to identify
and talk about ways that race—as white, black, and Semitic (Jewish,
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
Arab)—operates in US society and world politics right now. Mitchell, an
Irish-American, usefully reframes the conversation about race away from
dualistic stereotypes of black and white. On the one hand, the book’s
power depends on an erudite, highly educated scholar speaking honestly
with an equally erudite, highly educated audience about a subject of
global importance, with the goal of changing how we all think. On the
other hand, this goal can only be accomplished by such deep conver-
sation among precisely the publics excluded by the style exemplified
here. In many ways, the dilemma has not changed since DuBois. Mitchell
takes the approach at hand, and hopes, as great poets before him have
done, that the rest does not matter as long as your work reaches the right
five hundred readers. To do more would require another book, one about
race and class as thoughtful as this book is about race and Semitism.
HT1581 2012-005497 978-1-61132-181-4
W.E.B Du Bois on Africa.
Du Bois, W. E. B. Ed. by Eugene F. Provenzo, Jr. and Edmund Abaka.
Left Coast Press, Inc., ©2012 287 p. $34.95 (pa)
While W.E.B. Dou Bois’s writings focused on the plight of African
Americans in the United States, he spent a great deal of time examining
questions of Africa and the African diaspora and their role in world
history. The editors (professors of education and history at the U. of
Miami) pay tribute to Du Bois “as one of the most remarkable Africanists
and Pan-Africanists in history” by collecting 40 examples of Du Bois’s
writings on African and Pan-African issues. They also include a bibliog-
raphy of his works related to Africa.
SOCIAL WORK, CRIMINOLOGY
HV10 2012-358600 978-1-55130-401-4
Implementing evidence-informed practice; international
perspectives.
Title main entry. Ed. by Katharine Dill and Wes Shera.
Canadian Scholars’ Press, ©2012 241 p. $39.95 (pa)
Papers from an April 2010 conference, presented here, were submitted by
14 teams from the UK, Scotland, Ireland, Finland, Sweden, Australia, the
US, and Canada. They share best practices in implementing evidence-
informed social work areas such as child welfare and mental health.
Detailed case examples offer insight on the design, implementation, and
evaluation of an evidence-informed initiative at all levels. Section 1 looks
at conceptualizing evidence-informed practice, and section 2 gives
examples of efforts to implement such practice at the direct service level.
Section 3 details system-level efforts to use evidence-informed approaches
in policy development, interagency collaboration, and research unit devel-
opment. Section 4 focuses on participatory, multi-professional partner-
ships for implementing evidence-informed practice. A concluding chapter
summarizes lessons learned and puts forth an agenda for international
collaborative research. The book is intended for academics and policy
makers. Dill is executive director of a research firm. Shera is affiliated
with the University of Toronto.
HV11 2010-920553 978-0-8400-3280-5
The social work skills workbook, 6th ed.
Cournoyer, Barry. R.
Brooks/Cole Publishing, ©2011 580 p. $132.95 (pa)
Designed primarily as a practical application textbook, especially for
foundational laboratory courses spanning two semesters, for students of
social work, this sixth edition is divided into two parts and 13 chapters,
each chapter including extensive examples and exercises to aid study and
comprehension. It is also appropriate for more advanced students and
those already in practice. The shorter first section introduces readers to
the values, culture, and context of social work, while the second section
explores practical skill development. The focus is on interpersonal skills,
professionalism, and appropriate application of all aspects of social
work, including assessing, evaluating, advocating, engaging diversity,
and otherwise working with a variety of individuals and groups. Found
at the end are 16 appendices, references, and an index. The entire book
is punched for a 3-ring binder.
HV40 2012-020332 978-1-935871-25-5
Human behavior for social work practice; a
developmental-ecological framework, 2d ed.
Haight, Wendy L. and Edward H. Taylor.
Lyceum Books, ©2013 438 p. $54.95 (pa)
In this core text for social work students, Haight (child welfare and youth
policy, University of Minnesota) and Taylor (social work, University of
British Columbia-Okanagan) use a developmental-ecological systems
framework to show how evidence on human development can be used
to enhance social work practice. Chapters are devoted to specific
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
populations, including infants and young children, middle childhood,
adolescents, young adults, midlife, and older adults. There is also
material on racism and gender. The text features profiles of practitioners
and boxes on current social issues such as substance abuse. This second
edition offers a new instructor’s manual and new material introducing
concepts of brain science applicable to social work. This edition also
contains new chapters on evidence-informed practice and social justice.
HV40 978-1-905541-83-6
Social work models, methods and theories; a framework
for practice, 2d ed.
Title main entry. Ed. by Paul Stepney and Deirdre Ford.
Russell House Publishing, ©2012 305 p. $34.95 (pa)
In this work for practitioners and advanced students, Stepney (social
work, University of Tampere, Finland) and Ford (social work, Exeter
University, UK) unite UK contributors to explore the practice of social
work in a global context. Now organized in three parts, this second
edition reflects the latest evidence and the current legislative and policy
environment, with a new emphasis on diversity and a new chapter on
group work. The first part of the book establishes a contextual
framework, while the second part examines various methods, models,
and theories, covering standard as well as hybrid models. Part 3 con-
siders critical social work, research-minded practice, and the future of
practice in a global context. The book is distributed in the US by ISBS
HV41 978-1-889102-03-0
The fundraisers’s guide to irresistible communications;
real-world, field-tested strategies for raising more money.
Brooks, Jeff.
Emerson & Church Publishers, ©2012 143 p. $24.95 (pa)
Brooks, who has worked as a copywriter and creative director for non-
profits, provides a fundraising guide that explains writing style, how to
create a sense of urgency, how to make messages easy to read, how to
make long messages effective, and grammar tips; the content, including
avoiding statistics, telling a story, keeping it simple, making statements
about the donors, describing the solution to the problem, and having a
clear call to action; design aspects like fonts, colors, emphasis, and
images; and how to translate thinking into action, including myths,
things to avoid, and facts about donors. There is no index.
HV91 2012-382612 978-1-4128-4586-1
The dilemma of American social welfare. (reprint, 1993)
Epstein, William M.
Transaction Publishers, ©2012 241 p. $29.96 (pa)
“The conflict between the resources needed to address contemporary
social problems in the United States and the political unwillingness to
come up with those resources defines the current dilemma of American
social policy,” wrote Epstein (social work, U. of Nevada) in 1993 (and he
presumably thinks little has changed), blaming the social services liter-
ature for contributing to the problem by failing to adequately confront
power through a serious critical assessment the efficiency and effec-
tiveness of social policies. His study represents an effort to begin such an
assessment, as he interrogates the literature in key areas of social pro-
vision: psychotherapy, welfare initiatives, programs to deal with juvenile
delinquency and drug abuses, and other social work interventions across
the range of social services. This is a paperbound reprint of a work first
published in 1993
HV547 2012-019653 978-81-321-0964-8
Banking on self-help groups; twenty years on.
Tankha, Ajay.
Sage Publications, ©2012 295 p. $36.00 (pa)
In 1992 the first linkage between the larger financial system and the
small, predominately rural self-help groups (SHGs) took place in the
Udaipur district of Rajasthan State in India. This work provides a 20-year
review of these micro-finance arrangements, along with attention to the
roles of nongovernmental organizations (NGOs) and the government.
Matters such as the sustainability of SHGs are also considered, along with
presentation of a well-referenced impact assessment. As the text is filled
with initialisms, a useful six page list appears at the beginning of the
book. Ten appendixes at the close provide additional detailed infor-
mation. Tankha has 35 years of experience as an economist, including
participation in the initial micro-finance developments. He currently
works as an independent consultant based in New Delhi.
–100–
HV551 2012-028551 978-1-4665-0464-6
Catastrophic impact and loss; the capstone of impact
assessment.
Burton, Kevin D.
CRC Press, ©2013 331 p. $59.95
A veteran practitioner of disaster recovery for business, Burton augments
his Managing Emerging Risks by introducing a whole new lexicon of
terms and a solid prescription for conducting impact assessment that is
unique in the field. At the heart of his approach are the five principles
of establishing the impact horizon, aligning impact measures to core
values, considering and aligning national and state laws and regulations,
applying rigorous data, and document deviations and overrides.
HV551 2012-000156 978-0-7656-2419-2
Crisis, disaster, and risk; institutional response and
emergence.
Farmbry, Kyle.
M.E. Sharpe, Inc., ©2013 195 p. $79.95
Farmbry (public administration, Rutgers U.) describes a sociologically
and institutionally informed framework for understanding crisis and dis-
aster for students in public administration, public affairs, and related dis-
ciplines. He addresses the role of administrators in conceptualizing risk
factors and management/mitigation strategies in relation to natural dis-
asters, crises of public health, and crises arising from human technology
(such as the Love Canal disaster of the 1970s or the Bhopal disaster of
the 1980s). Writing for prospective administrators, he assumes a more
turbulent world than the past as well as a more globally connected world
as key contextual factors that future administrators will have to cope with
in responding to disasters.
HV551 978-94-6091-871-1
Disaster education; ‘race’, equity and pedagogy.
Preston, John.
Sense Publishers, ©2012 120 p. $39.00 (pa)
Preston (U. of East London, UK) explores disaster education as it has
developed from 1945 to the present. Some examples will be familiar—
instructing school children to hide under their desks as protection
against nuclear attacks—and more recent efforts such as education cam-
paigns to warn the public about flu epidemics, other diseases, and
related threats. An unsettling aspect is the author’s contention that dis-
aster information has always been delivered in a way that prioritized spe-
cific elements of the population over others. Critical race theory and
whiteness studies are employed to argue that disturbing point. The book
will interest historians, sociologists, educators, and cultural theorists as
well as professionals in emergency planning and public health.
HV640 2012-007386 978-1-59403-633-0
Escape from North Korea; the untold story of Asia’s
underground railroad.
Kirkpatrick, Melanie.
Encounter Books, ©2012 350 p. $25.99
Kirkpatrick, a journalist and a senior fellow of the Hudson Institute,
investigates the new underground railroad transporting escapees from
repressive North Korea into China and then on to other countries. She
draws on interviews with North Korean refugees to tell the stories of
those who flee even under penalty of death, and on interviews with the
humanitarian organizations and Christian missionaries who help them.
She also interviews government and military officials in many countries
who deal with the refugee crisis, and describes the efforts of North
Korean fugitives to help their countrymen by bringing them information
and news. In her discussion of the impact of policies that have affected
the North Korean refugees, she concentrates on China’s strict repatriation
policies. The book includes b&w photos.
HV689 2012-014684 978-1-935871-23-1
The recovery philosophy and direct social work practice.
Walsh, Joseph.
Lyceum Books, ©2013 304 p. $37.95 (pa)
Walsh (social work, Virginia Commonwealth University) outlines the
benefits of applying the ideas of the recovery movement to social work
with people with severe mental illness. He describes the recovery phi-
losophy, discusses controversial issues in recovery, and sets out the fun-
damental values and definitions of recovery and of direct social work
practice. Consumer empowerment, multiculturalism, and spirituality in
recovery practice are also explored, and one chapter is devoted to spir-
itual concerns of recovering consumers. The author, who has been a
direct services practitioner in psychiatric hospitals and community metal
health centers since 1974, presents recovery interventions for four specific
mental disorders: bipolar disorder, schizophrenia, autism, and
depression. Chapter summaries and discussion questions are included.
–101–
HV1421 2011-944300 978-0-8400-2859-4
At risk youth; a comprehensive response; for counselors,
teachers, psychologists, and human service professionals,
5th ed.
McWhirter, J. Jeffries et al.
Brooks/Cole Publishing, ©2013 428 p. $177.95 (pa)
For graduate and undergraduate students in counseling, psychology,
social work, human services, and education, McWhirter (counseling and
counseling psychology, Arizona State U.) et al. outline information and
research on problems experienced by at-risk youth and educational, psy-
chological, and counseling interventions for their prevention and
treatment. They discuss key background factors and legal and ethical
concerns; family, school, and individual characteristics that influence
youth; at-risk categories and treatment and prevention for each (school
dropouts, substance use and addiction, teen pregnancy, STDs, and risky
sexual behavior, juvenile delinquency and youth violence, and suicide);
and family, school, peer group, and individual prevention strategies.
Revised, this edition reflects current information and statistics and inte-
grates coverage of new human service material in light of the recent
revision of standards by the Council for Standards in Human Service
Education. It adds new information on approaches and lesbian, gay,
bisexual, transgendered, and queer youth; more on stages of change,
motivational interviewing, the Race to the Top act, charter schools,
English as a second language, Travis Hirsch’s control theory, and the
family check-up, including the ecofit; clarified material on empowerment
and Bronfenbrenner’s ecological model; revised and updated information
on No Child Left Behind; discussion of the positive educational benefits
of electronic media, positive action, functional family therapy, commu-
nities that care, the 40 assets framework from the Search Institute, and
the good behavior game; sections on incarcerated families, child abuse,
intimate partner violence, dating violence, and nonsuicidal self-injury;
expanded discussion of cyber and digital technology, including an
expanded section on media influence to include cyberbullying; and
added features on the companion website.
HV1451 2011-293197 978-1-4411-1254-5
Communication in elderly care; cross-cultural
perspectives.
Title main entry. Ed. by Peter Backhaus.
Continuum Publishing Group, ©2011 226 p. $40.00
Researchers and practitioners in language and communications who
work with the elderly, share insights and practical suggestions for the
care of the elderly with respect to communications and social relations.
Among the topics are elderspeak in institutional care for older adults,
creating a positive communication environment in long-term care, a case
study on dinner conversations in a migrant-in-the-family household in
Germany, institutional role-play in a Japanese caring facility, and using
narrative arts to foster personhood in dementia.
HV1457 94-660686 978-1-59237-867-8
Older Americans information directory, 9th ed.
2013/2014.
Title main entry.
Grey House Pub., Inc., ©2012 1237 p. $165.00 (pa)
Several essays from the National Institute of Aging open this hefty
directory, including those on Alzheimer’s, sleeping, forgetfulness, hip
replacement, and mourning the death of a spouse. The remainder of the
book contains the directory of people and resources, divided into 12 cat-
egories: national organizations and federal agencies; state organizations
and government agencies; awards, honors & prizes; continuing edu-
cation; disability aids & assistive devices; resources for specific health
conditions; assisted living facilities, independent living centers, legal aid
resources, and libraries (each by state); publishers of works for older
Americans; and travel. Glossaries of medical and legal terms are
included. The entries for each person or resource lists the name of the
organization, personnel, contact information, and a description of the
services they provide. Three indexes are provided: by entry name, geo-
graphic area, and grouped by subject area.
HV1553 978-1-59237-872-2
The complete directory for people with disabilities; a
comprehensive source book for individuals and
professionals; 2013, 21st ed.
Title main entry.
Grey House Pub., Inc., ©2012 1046 p. $165.00 (pa)
Appropriate for both family caregivers and professionals, this directory
compiles companies and non-profits that provide products and services
for assisting people living with disabilities. The 9,009 entries are grouped
into 27 categories such as computers, education, government agencies,
independent living centers, rehabilitation facilities, vocational programs,
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
hearing, and mobility. Each entry lists the organization’s address, phone
number, email address, website, key personnel, and year founded.
Associations, camps, books, magazines, newsletters, video, and support
groups are identified for specific disabilities. Recommended for all
public libraries.
HV1553 2012-014236 978-0-8070-2202-3
A disability history of the United States.
Nielsen, Kim E. (Revisioning American history)
Beacon Press, ©2012 216 p. $26.95
Drawing on primary source documents, Nielsen (disability studies,
University of Toledo) explores familiar themes and periods of American
history, such as immigration, slavery, labor, and gender discrimination,
as seen through the lens of the concept of disability and through the
experiences of people with physical and mental disabilities. Coverage
encompasses not only individual stories, but also mass movements and
trends. The author suggests that US capitalism and industrialization both
literally and conceptually contributed to the creation of the concept of dis-
ability. She intends the book as an example of disability studies as a
means of historical inquiry and understanding.
HV1553 978-94-6091-847-6
Inclusive communities; a critical reader
Title main entry. Ed. by Andrew Azzopardi and Shaun Grech. (Studies
in inclusive education; v.16)
Sense Publishers, ©2012 232 p. $39.00 (pa)
The 14 readings introduce the notion of inclusive communities as it is
used in a range of disciplines, among them education, anthropology,
sociology, psychology, and philosophy. The topics include community
development’s radical agenda of social justice and environmental sus-
tainability, negotiating stigmatized identities and overcoming barriers to
inclusion in the transition to adulthood, Latin American women and
inclusion in public and private communities, the value of mutual support
through client communities in designing psychiatric treatment and reha-
bilitation programs, and disabled children as research managers and
participant ethnographers. There is no index.
HV1568 2012-032446 978-1-4331-1506-6
Earth, animal, and disability liberation; the rise of the
eco-ability movement.
Title main entry. Ed. by Anthony J. Nocella II et al.
Peter Lang Publishing Inc, ©2012 257 p. $0.00 (pa)
The contributors to this collection of 15 essays critically examine inter-
sections between ecological exploitation, normalcy, able-ism, and
specieism. They interrogate these fields as sites for the manifestation of
oppression and domination. They take “the natural world” and “dis-
ability” to be social constructions. By explaining these othering processes
as they reflect and re-enforce one another, the contributions aim to con-
tribute to interventions in the reproduction of social domination. Some of
the essays are critical of civilization as such. They are organized into five
sections on pedagogy, identity construction, challenging oppressive rela-
tionships, policy and practice, and building a more inclusive world. The
contributors are scholars of disability, ecocritics, urban planners, and
social activists.
HV1597 2012-022984 978-1-56368-535-4
Deaf-blind reality; living the life.
Title main entry. Ed. by Scott M. Stoffel.
Gallaudet University Pr., ©2012 275 p. $49.95 (pa)
Aiming to present the reality of the lives of deaf-blind individuals to
people who interact with them, Stoffel, a retired systems engineer and
freelance writer, draws on interviews with 12 deaf-blind individuals,
including himself, from the US, UK, New Zealand, and South Africa to
illustrate what life is like for them, rather than providing stories of inspi-
ration that can often be the focus of books. They describe their families’
reactions and support they received; experiences in school and entering
adulthood; how they coped with degeneration, ineffective treatments, and
rehabilitation; their adult education, daily lives, careers, relationships,
and communication; and the use of cochlear implants. There is no index.
HV1701 2012-028120 978-1-4398-7153-9
Assistive technology for blindness and low vision.
Title main entry. Ed. by Roberto Manduchi and Sri Kurniawan.
(Rehabilitation science in practice series)
CRC Press, ©2013 423 p. $119.95
Written by experts in a variety of related fields, this collection of essays
explores aspects of assistive technology for the visually impaired, focusing
on the problems which need to be solved, how they have been and are
being solved, which of those solutions are most effective, and why.
Chapters examine in detail topics such as types of vision loss and
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
implications thereof, sensory substitution including tactile response,
levels of effectiveness of various technologies, travel assistance, and
computer assistance tools. Recent history, contemporary advances, and
implications for future advancements are discussed. Case studies are also
incorporated.
HV2391 2012-022375 978-1-56368-537-8
Amy signs; a mother, her deaf daughter, and their
stories.
Gernon, Rebecca Willman and Amy Willman.
Gallaudet University Pr., ©2012 320 p. $29.95 (pa)
Gernon, a writer, and her deaf daughter Willman (special education and
communication disorders, U. of Nebraska, Lincoln) relate the story of
Willman’s childhood through a narrative that interweaves accounts from
each of them. They describe her testing and diagnosis, hearing aids and
language therapy, attendance at a school for the deaf and Gallaudet U.,
the deaf culture, being deaf in a hearing world, communicating with
sign language, and other experiences.
HV2471 2012-017445 978-1-56368-529-3
Bilingual deaf and hearing families; narrative interviews.
Bodner-Johnson, Barbara and Beth Sonnenstrahl Benedict.
Gallaudet University Pr., ©2012 258 p. $75.00
Through interviews with families with at least one deaf family member
who are bilingual in American Sign Language and English, Gallaudet
University professors Bodner-Johnson (emeritus, education) and Benedict
(communication studies) offer new insights on the developmental and
educational needs of deaf children, their exposure to early bilingual
signed and spoken language, and parental choices regarding the use of
spoken language. Based on the theoretical framework of the person-in-
the-environment, they conclude that bilingual family support is crucial to
a child’s development and relationships. The book includes a foreword
by a researcher with Gallaudet’s Science of Learning Center, discussion
questions, methodological notes, and resources.
HV4493 2012-406325 978-1-4426-4328-4
Invisible victims; homelessness and the growing security
gap.
Huey, Laura.
U. of Toronto Press, ©2012 174 p. $55.00
Homeless people are invisible victims, with rates of criminal victim-
ization at a frequency that would not be tolerated amongst the wider
population, argues Huey (sociology, U. of Western Ontario), who delin-
eates the security gap that homeless citizens of contemporary liberal
democracies face and considers the implications for the stratified nature
of citizenship and civil rights. Building her analysis upon fieldwork con-
ducted amongst homeless people in major Canadian cities, as well as
Edinburgh, Scotland, and San Francisco in the US, she considers
homeless access to state-based and private security and, finding those
resources to be unevenly distributed to the detriment of homeless popu-
lations, explores individually- and communally-based survival strategies
of homeless people. She then explores the notion of unevenly distributed
security as it relates to the question of lesser-status citizenship and con-
siders ways in which security can be redistributed.
HV4746 2012-024260 978-1-61620-045-9
Comet’s tale; how the dog I rescued saved my life.
Wolf, Steven D. and Lynette Padwa.
Algonquin Books, ©2012 257 p. $23.95
Wolf, a former attorney and now a greyhound advocate, tells the story of
how he got involved in rescuing racing greyhounds when he adopted
Comet and taught him how relate to humans as caretakers and com-
panions rather than abusers. Comet proves to be an excellent service dog
as well as a loyal companion when Wolf’s spinal condition makes him
disabled. Comet eventually wins the Nebraska Humane Society’s award
for Service Dog of the Year in 2010. Co-author Padwa has written and col-
laborated on many books.
HV5260 978-0-7748-2428-6
Intoxicating Manchuria; alcohol, opium, and culture in
China’s northeast.
Smith, Norman. (Contemporary Chinese studies)
U. of British Columbia Press, ©2012 298 p. $99.00
Smith (history, U. of Guelph, Canada) fills a lacuna in English-language
scholarship on alcohol culture in China in this focused study on its
prominence in Northeast China. He analyzes alcohol narratives alongside
more well-known opium narratives, asking: how were intoxicants and
addiction popularly understood and characterized, how were intoxicant
industries impacted by the Japanese occupation, and were serious efforts
made to reduce intoxicant consumption? The study is comprised of eight
–102–
chapters that examine the history of alcohol and opium in China to the
mid-20th century, major business and state developments in Manchuria’s
intoxicant industries, the appearance of alcohol in 1930s and ‘40s news-
papers and journals, selling alcohol as the ticket to modernity, the
influence of the intoxicants on fiction of the period, debates over women
in the opium trade, attempts to define and treat addiction, and a special
focused study of an 1942 Chinese text on opium addiction. U.S. distri-
bution by U. of Washington Press; Canadian by U. of Toronto Press.
HV5801 2012-012677 978-0-415-58383-1
Cultural ecstasies; drugs, gender and the social
imaginary.
Mountian, Ilana. (Concepts for critical psychology: disciplinary bound-
aries re-thought)
Routledge, ©2013 160 p. $135.00
This slim text takes a critical psychological and deconstructionist
approach to the intersecting discourses of drug-use/abuse and gender,
but also race, sexuality, class and age. After the introduction, Mountain
(discourse, Manchester Metropolitan U., UK) sets up her conceptual
framework, borrowing from both Foucauldian critiques of otherness and
Lacanian understandings of the symbolic order and social imaginary, as
well as queer-studies, post-colonial studies and feminist research. She his-
toricizes social meanings of drugs, critically analyzes current definitions
of drugs and addictions, surveys images of the drug-user, focuses on dis-
courses surrounding female drug-users, analyzes of the association
between women and drugs, and considers the impact of the social imag-
inary on drug policies.
HV5840 2012-027094 978-1-935308-88-1
The fire next door; Mexico’s drug violence and the danger
to America.
Carpenter, Ted Galen.
Cato Institute, ©2012 307 p. $24.95
In 2011 alone, 13,000 people fell victim to the violence perpetrated by
Mexico’s drug cartels. Author Carpenter, a scholar in foreign policy,
makes a surprising recommendation to stop the cartels. He argues that
“the US could substantially defund the cartels through the full legal-
ization (including manufacture and sale) of currently illegal drugs.”
Further, he claims that by abandoning the prohibition model, the US
could inspire other members of the national community to do the same.
Much of the book is given over to background on the Mexican drug
cartels and their leaders, the sources and extent of their power, and
examples of their ruthless violence and terrorism. The author highlights
the problem as a major threat to America as the cartels push northward
and analyzes Washington’s failed efforts to stop them. The author
presents Colombia and Portugal as models of success in combating the
cartels and reforming drug policy; he recommends beginning in the US
with making marijuana legal. Carpenter is a senior fellow at the Cato
Institute, a public-policy research foundation dedicated to traditional
American principles of limited government.
HV6024 2011-410638 978-1-4128-1481-2
Measuring crime and criminality.
Title main entry. Ed. by John MacDonald. (Advances in criminological
theory; v.17)
Transaction Publishers, ©2011 387 p. $59.95
The authors concentrate on how different ways of measuring crime and
criminality are used to test existing theories. Chapters spotlight specific
approaches and address their strengths and weaknesses. A sampling of
subjects addressed includes: the measurement of crime and estimating
treatment effects in criminology, measuring the severity of crimes, genet-
ically informed research and what it can reveal about the causes of
crime, growth modeling approaches, and meta-analysis and the relative
support for various criminological theories. Editor is MacDonald (crimi-
nology, U. of Pennsylvania).
HV6025 978-1-4557-3010-0
Criminology; explaining crime and its context, 8th ed.
Brown, Stephen E. et al.
Anderson Publishing Co., ©2013 578 p. $84.95 (pa)
The eighth edition of this undergrad text features a revised chapter on
the biosocial perspective and new material on life-course criminology.
The text is updated with recent examples and contains new chapter objec-
tives and discussion questions. A companion website contains videos and
lecture slides. Learning features retained from the previous edition
include chapter-ending key terms and key figures, case citations, and dis-
cussion questions. Part 1 examines foundations of crime, with chapters
on crime and criminology, the relativity of law and crime, production of
crime statistics, and distribution of crime. Part 2 delves into theories of
crime, covering deterrence and rational choice theory, individual theories
–103–
and the biosocial perspective, the life-course perspective, and social
structure, social processes, and social reaction theories. The final section
of the text covers types of crime: violent crime, economic crime, and vic-
timless crime. The book is illustrated with color photos in a clean layout.
Brown teaches criminology at Western Carolina University. Anderson
Publishing is an imprint of Elsevier.
HV6025 2012-015401 978-1-61163-082-4
Dimensions of crime as a social problem.
Title main entry. Ed. by Robert Hartmann McNamara and Keith Bell.
Carolina Academic Press, ©2012 368 p. $40.00 (pa)
The intent of this collection of writings is to establish the relationship
between a specific problem such as crime and the broad variety of larger
social problems in American society. And there are issues and
approaches to them as one can see from the topics addressed, which
include: juvenile fire starters, drugs, poverty and inequalities, racial
inequalities, Arizona’s new immigration law, racial profiling, school bul-
lying and dropouts, and gender violence, as well as hate and sex crimes.
Editors are McNamara (undergraduate studies, The Citadel) and Bell
(criminal justice, West Liberty U.).
HV6030 978-3-643-90186-6
The politics of criminology; critical studies on deviance
and social control.
Georgoulas, Stratos. (Deviance and social control; v.1)
LIT Verlag, ©2012 363 p. $59.95 (pa)
This collection of over twenty critical essays addresses several topics and
political issues in modern and historical criminology. The essays are
organized into three major sections, the first focusing on the past of crim-
inology and just what it could or ultimately can’t mean for criminologists
to be politically progressive forces. The second and largest section offers
case-studies in contemporary critical criminology that include the
Lehman Brothers, public order policing in the UK, and the criminal-
ization of migration policy. The last is a special section devoted to crim-
inological thought coming out of the University of the Aegean’s “Lab for
the Sociology of Youth, Leisure and Sports.” Topics explored in that
section include the 2008 Greek youth-rebellions, LGBT movements and
biopolitics, participant observation on Greek police culture, and an
analysis of the free software movement and the social construction of
crime. Most of the contributors are Greek or European criminologists,
sociologists and political scientists. Distributed in the US by ISBS.
HV6074 2012-028772 978-1-4200-8834-2
Lee and Gaensslen’s advances in fingerprint technology,
3d ed.
Title main entry. Ed. by Robert S. Ramotowski.
CRC Press, ©2013 512 p. $129.95
This third edition provides new material as well as removing out-of-date
information, and is newly structured into two parts, the first providing
a detailed account of current popular development techniques and the
second describing more recent advances and emerging technologies.
Chapters in the first section cover powder methods, amino acid reagents,
metal deposition methods, lipid reagents, vapor and fuming methods,
blood reagents, and an assortment of other methods. The first chapter of
the second section discusses in detail and provides fresh perspective
about work done by the UK Home Office regarding powders and
brushes. The section then moves into discussion of fingerprints in blood,
vacuum metal deposition, the cyanoacrylate fuming method, ninhydrin
and ninhydrin analogues, nanoparticles, friction ridge detection, statistics
and probability, and digital imaging.
HV6250 2012-014227 978-0-7637-2859-5
Elder crimes, elder justice.
Snyder, David R.
Jones & Bartlett, ©2014 253 p. $58.95 (pa)
Snyder helps law enforcement officers address the special needs of older
people and understand the aging process, communication, their fears,
how to develop crime prevention strategies, and how to respond to the
older perpetrator. He also details the demographics of the older popu-
lation, the sociology of aging, physical changes that occur, psychological
issues, the needs of older victims, and the issue of abuse, providing case
studies in each chapter.
HV6250 978-1-4496-8493-8
Victimology; theories and applications, 2d ed. (online
access included)
Burgess, Ann Wolbert et al.
Jones & Bartlett, ©2013 590 p. $78.95 (pa)
Burgess (psychiatric mental health nursing, Boston College) et al.
introduce students to the study of victimization, crime typologies, and the
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
impact of crime on victims, offenders, and society. The text emphasizes
data from North America on the scope of the problem, victim impact
statements, policies, services, and future research areas. It addresses the-
ories, victim rights, and justice systems, and provides separate chapters
on victims of child abuse and neglect, school violence, intimate partner
violence, stalking, rape and sexual assault, elder abuse, homicide, hate
crimes, and other forms of victimization. This edition has new case
studies, including on IMF chief Dominique Strauss-Kahn, Oprah Winfrey,
and Senator Scott Brown; analysis of the Casey Anthony case from the
perspective of the jury; and a new chapter on measurements in victi-
mology that includes discussion of domestic and international databases
and studies. There is also a new chapter on child abduction and
exploitation, including discussion of child trafficking and updated tables
and figures. Access to a study tools on a companion website is included.
HV6251 2012-029424 978-1-61219-166-9
The right way to do wrong.
Houdini, Harry. (The neversink library)
Melville House Publishing, ©2012 150 p. $15.00 (pa)
Harry Houdini didn’t go to school past the 6th Grade, but when he
became older and successful as an escape-artist and criminal he became
a voracious reader. He also wrote books and various periodicals. This col-
lection of essays offers choice selections of what Joseph Teller, a famous
magician who provides the introduction, calls the “raw Houdini.” The
essays range in length from just a few pages to over a dozen, covering
magical effects, cryptography and other trickery. They sometimes show
sympathy with the art of master criminals, showing admiration for tax-
fraud and burglary. Houdini is a witty writer and writes unselfcon-
sciously about subjects that surely would have scandalized his
contemporaries. There is no index to this text.
HV6431 2012-011855 978-1-4496-4860-2
Counterterrorism.
Maras, Marie-Helen.
Jones & Bartlett, ©2013 415 p. $74.95 (pa)
In this comprehensive textbook appropriate not only for graduate-level
students but for a broader audience of writers and researchers in fields
such as criminal justice, history, and political science, Maras (criminal
justice, State U. New York-Farmingdale) presents a global perspective on
terrorism, examining domestic terrorist groups and anti-terrorism
responses in Europe, Asia, Africa, the Middle East, South America, and
North America. The book is divided into three parts and explores the ter-
rorist mindset, driving forces behind counterterrorism policies, and the
effectiveness of a variety of those policies. An appendix of selected ter-
rorism incidents is included, as well as a name index and subject index.
The text is footnoted throughout.
HV6432 2012-000108 978-0-393-08145-9
Hunting in the shadows; the pursuit of Al Qa’ida since
9/11.
Jones, Seth G.
W.W. Norton, ©2012 534 p. $27.95
Seth G. Jones, a RAND analyst, teacher for the U.S. Navy, and former
senior U.S Special Operations Command advisor, has written a book
about Al Qa’ida that is highly readable. In all such books there is a con-
flict between the premise of reporting the secret facts, and the reality that
authors with professional military or intelligence connections cannot be
reporters; they are in the business of keeping secret facts secret. This
author’s analysis of Al Qa’ida, however carefully researched, cannot
reveal privileged information, or tell readers any facts that might seem
politically embarrassing, however basic or proven (Al Qa’ida is primar-
ially supported by Saudi Arabia, a key US ally). Jones therefore is limited
in his ability to present a “big picture” of Al Qa’ida. Within the frame he
is allowed, however, the book is thoughtful and carefully researched. At
the end, Jones provides his analysis. He looks at the history of the con-
flict between the US and Al Qa’ida, and interestingly defines it as a war
in which the side that kills the most civilians loses. His recommenda-
tions: avoid large military operations (they kill civilians and radicalize
populations), rely on strategic strikes and secret intelligence operations to
destroy leaders and groups deemed friendly to Al Qa’ida, and support
“strong” governments (violence and civil unrest radicalize populations).
Jones is particularly worried about the Arab Spring, but does not say
how to define the kind of friendship to an unstructured, non-state
movement that should lead the US to intervene in a foreign country.
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
HV6432 2011-283603 978-0-7453-3101-0
Inside Al-Qaeda and the Taliban; beyond Bin Laden and
9/11.
Shahzad, Syed Saleem.
Pluto Press, ©2011 260 p. $26.00 (pa)
The Pakistan Bureau chief of Asia Times Online, who was killed by the
Taliban in 2011, provides rare inside, historical views on al-Qaeda’s aim
of Muslim world dominance, strategies, leaders, and theater of war.
Shahzad makes a compelling case that the U.S. pullout from Afghanistan
will not end the West’s war on terrorism. The book includes maps and
backstory on the 2008 Mumbai attack. Distributed in the US by Palgrave
Macmillan.
HV6432 2012-907805 978-0-9698840-2-6
Roadmap to resilience; a guide for military, trauma
victims and their families.
Meichenbaum, Donald.
Institute Press, ©2012 211 p. $39.95 (pa)
Meichenbaum, a clinical psychologist who works with trauma victims,
taught at the U. of Waterloo, Canada, and co-founded cognitive behavior
therapy, draws on his clinical experience and research findings to
present military personnel and their families with a roadmap for
improving resilience in physical, interpersonal, emotional, cognitive,
behavioral, and spiritual domains. He discusses the concept of resilience,
and research evidence on the adjustment capacity of returning service
members, family members, and civilians to adapt to adversity, then spe-
cific actions to improve resilience. No index is provided. Distributed by
Crown House Publishing Limited.
HV6437 2012-028356 978-1-84872-083-1
Crime and crime reduction; the importance of group
processes.
Title main entry. Ed. by Jane L. Wood and Theresa A. Gannon.
Routledge, ©2013 206 p. $75.00
In this text for students and professionals, contributors in psychology,
psychiatry, and criminal justice train a social psychology lens on group
criminal activity to understand the impact of group membership on a
person’s likelihood of committing a crime and the potential positive role
of group membership in the treatment of criminals. The book explains
the psychology of groups and group crime, then analyzes group
processes within criminal networks such as in terrorist groups,
organized crime, and street and prison gangs. There is special emphasis
on features of treatment delivery and group processes that maximize the
effects of offender programs, looking at the influence of positive religious
or ethnic group affiliation in treating offenders. Editors Wood and
Gannon teach at the University of Kent’s Center for Research and
Education in Forensic Psychology.
HV6439 2012-015545 978-1-61163-071-8
North American criminal gangs; street, prison, outlaw
motorcycle, and drug trafficking organizations.
Title main entry. Ed. by Tom Barker.
Carolina Academic Press, ©2012 324 p. $40.00 (pa)
In remarkable detail, this volume manages to cover a variety of gangs
(including ones operating in prisons) in Canada, the U.S. and Mexico,
with occasional dips into Central America. Barker (criminal justice,
Eastern Kentucky U.) starts off each chapter with history and a delin-
eation of operating gangs. He then assembles readings which are gen-
erally reprints of articles that have appeared in academic journals or as
publications of organizations like the Southern Poverty Law Center. For
many of the gangs, photographs are provided which show their symbols
and tattoos.
HV6441 2012-032462 978-0-7864-6580-4
Deconstructing organized crime; an historical and
theoretical study.
Albini, Joseph L. and Jeffrey Scott McIllwain.
McFarland & Co., ©2012 209 p. $40.00 (pa)
In this book for students and general readers, Albini (emeritus, Wayne
State University) and McIllwain (criminal justice, San Diego State
University) go beyond the mythology of the Mafia to offer a detailed, his-
torical account of what the Mafia really consisted of and how it origi-
nated. They also survey organized crime scholarship over the past 60
years and provide new theoretical lenses to view organized crime. The
book presents case studies of the unique nature of organized crime as
manifested in select criminal enterprises and in the former Soviet Union
and in the city of Las Vegas. A final chapter describes the transnational
system of organized criminal activity and the intersection of terrorist and
other irregular warfare networks with organized crime.
–104–
HV6534 2012-035019 978-1-61035-129-4
Hands through stone; how Clarence Ray Allen
masterminded murder from behind Folsom’s prison
walls.
Ardaiz, James A.
Craven Street Books, ©2012 350 p. $24.95
Clarence Ray Allen, the last man executed in California, orchestrated the
murders at Fran’s Market in Fresno in 1980, all while already behind
bars in Folsom Prison for a previous murder. During the time period
when these events took place, author Ardaiz was a prosecutor for the
Fresno County District Attorney’s office. He was one of the first investi-
gators at the scene of the crime and was also the prosecutor in the case
against Allen. In this true-crime investigation, written in narrative style,
he brings general readers along as he builds his case piece by piece from
the investigation to the eventual trial.
HV6534 2012-040184 978-0-7864-7078-5
“Rich Georgian strangely shot”; Eugene Grace, “Daisy of
the Leopard Spots” and the Great Atlanta Shooting of
1912.
Hughes, Tom.
McFarland & Co., ©2012 194 p. $45.00 (pa)
Wealthy Atlanta businessman Eugene Grace was found shot in his home,
and his wife Daisy was accused of the attack. State law did not allow
Eugene Grace to testify against his wife, requiring prosecutors to bring in
circumstantial evidence to prove their case. In this study, Hughes, a
member of the Georgia Radio Hall of Fame, examines the local and
national newspapers’ sensationalistic coverage of the case and the trial,
and explains the mystery of what actually happened between Eugene and
Daisy. The book includes b&w historical photos.
HV6545 2012-944819 978-0-88937-436-2
Suicide and culture; understanding the context.
Title main entry. Ed. by Erminia Colucci et al.
Hogrefe Publishing, ©2013 269 p. $49.00 (pa)
Researchers in psychology, health sciences, and sociology plead for the
role of culture in the study of suicide, which has been dominated by bio-
logical models. After theoretical perspectives, they report on research into
suicide in Australia, India, and Italy; Kuwait and the US; sati in India;
and South Korea. There is no index.
HV6558 2012-012878 978-1-55778-898-6
Rape; weapon of war and genocide.
Title main entry. Ed. by Carol Rittner and John K. Roth.
Paragon House, ©2012 263 p. $21.95 (pa)
Rape often happens as a by-product of armed conflict, but too often it
serves a larger purpose: as a social/political tool that plays a role in
genocide or ethnic cleansing. The papers in this work explore this type
of rape by combining essays with existing documents, whether they are
accounts of rape victims or transcripts of genocide-related trials. The
editors, Rittner (holocaust and genocide studies, Richard Stockton College)
and Roth (philosophy, Claremont McKenna College) start off the book
with a 30 page human rights chronology and each also contribute a
chapter. The inclusion of discussion questions at the end of each chapter
make this appropriate for use as a textbook. The bibliography includes
relevant websites, films, and video clips.
HV6658 2012-029901 978-1-4665-1245-0
Cargo crime; security and theft prevention.
Coughlin, John J.
CRC Press, ©2013 247 p. $69.95
A specialist in transportation security, Coughlin shares insights from his
experience as a law enforcement detective and supervisor with people
responsible for the security of supply chains and for investigating people
who prey on them. After analyzing cargo crime trends and patterns, he
uses the information derived to identify methods of operation of
organized and opportunistic criminals who target supply chains. He
covers the definition of cargo crime and its trends, modes of freight
transportation, perpetrators of cargo crime, business responses, law
enforcement responses, prevention and awareness, and moving forward.
HV6762 2012-031868 978-1-4398-6063-2
Investigating missing children cases; a guide for first
responders and investigators.
Sprague, Donald F.
CRC Press, ©2013 294 p. $69.95 (pa)
Sprague, a retired police lieutenant and police instructor who volunteers
his time reviewing cold cases of missing children and educates parents
and children on child safety and missing and exploited children, provides
–105–
first responders and investigators with a guide to investigating missing
and runaway children, and how to take quick, decisive action when a
report is first called in. He notes that most law enforcement officers lack
this training and helps them learn how to evaluate the situation, conduct
an endangerment risk assessment of the child, and conduct a thorough
investigation. He draws on personal police experience and statistical evi-
dence from research and studies of runaway and missing children cases
to detail the characteristics of the victim and offender; federal and state
statutes; abduction motives, lures, and tactics; response and the initial
interview; crime scenes and neighborhood canvassing; communicating
with other law enforcement agencies, the media, and community; the
incident command center and civilian volunteers; long-term and cold
cases; reunification; false police reports; types of missing cases or
episodes, including family child abduction and other abductions; human
sex trafficking; and missing children resources.
HV6768 978-82-7477-567-1
White-collar criminals; cases and theories of financial
crime.
Gottschalk, Petter.
Akademika Publishing, ©2012 242 p. $45.00 (pa)
Gottschalk (information systems, knowledge management, BI Norwegian
Business School) identified 179 convicted white-collar criminals in
Norway by reviewing data from articles in Norwegian financial news-
papers from 2009 to 2011. Based on this research, he describes charac-
teristics of white-collar crime and white-collar criminals, looking
especially at the differences between occupational crime and corporate
crime, the differences between leaders and followers in white-collar
crime, and the differences between ‘rotten apples’ and members of entire
‘rotten barrels.’ He reviews managerial, market, and behavioral theories
of white-collar crime, and discusses corporate reputation and responsi-
bility. The book’s final three chapters examine corporate strategies related
to knowledge management, information intelligence, and information
systems. There is no subject index. The book is distributed in the US by
ISBS.
HV6771 978-0-7748-2359-3
Still dying for a living; corporate criminal liability after
the Westray Mine disaster.
Bittle, Steven. (Law and society)
U. of British Columbia Press, ©2012 237 p. $99.00
Bittle (criminology, University of Ottawa) examines an emerging issue in
criminology and socio-legal studies: the analysis of work-related accidents
and injuries as a type of crime perpetrated by corporations. He critically
examines Canada’s corporate criminal liability legislation introduced in
2004, known as the Westray Bill in memory of the deaths of two workers
at the Westray Mine in Nova Scotia in 1992, which was intended to
strengthen corporate liability and encourage corporate responsibility for
safety. The author charts the factors leading to the law’s enactment and
explains why it is rarely enforced. His analysis draws theoretical inspi-
ration from Foucauldian and neo-Marxist literatures, as well as in-depth
interviews and parliamentary transcripts. Appendices list data sources
and interviewees. The book is distributed in the US by the University of
Washington Press and in Canada by the University of Toronto Press.
HV6773 2011-051019 978-1-58901-918-8
Cyberspace and national security; threats, opportunities,
and power in a virtual world.
Title main entry. Ed. by Derek S. Reveron.
Georgetown U. Press, ©2012 246 p. $29.95 (pa)
Editor Reveron (national security affairs, US Naval War College) unites
contributors in computer science, telecommunications, space and cyber-
space strategy, international relations, and political science to explore
current and future threats in cyberspace and offer a framework for
understanding how cyberspace fits within US national security. Part 1
overviews cyberspace and national security issues and looks at opera-
tional considerations in cyber attack and cyber exploitation. One chapter
in this section uses science fiction scenarios in order to anticipate cyber-
crime and cyberterrorism threats. Part 2 considers the law of armed con-
flict and cyber conflict, the emerging structures of cyber offense and
cyber defense, and cyber deterrence with cyber militias. Part 3 sets out
national approaches to cyber security and cyber war and looks at
Russia’s and China’s cyber capabilities.
HV6779 2012-012418 978-1-4129-8876-6
The social history of crime and punishment in America;
an encyclopedia; 5v.
Title main entry. Ed. by Wilbur R. Miller.
Sage Publications, ©2012 2606 p. $560.00
This five-volume set constitutes an accessible reference for students of
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
criminal justice and police and law enforcement history as well as
general readers. The scope is broad, encompassing entries on courts, cor-
rections, and punishments; the media; the context of American society;
the history of the American criminal justice system; and state and federal
court cases, among other topics. Biographies of famous criminals and
justice system participants and reformers are included as are entries for
each state and for a selection of the most dangerous American cities. A
Reader’s Guide in the front matter groups entries by theme, and a
chronology briefly annotates significant dates beginning with the year
1275, when the Statute of Westminster in England began regulation of
bail, and ending with laws passed in 2012 permitting gay marriage.
Entries are arranged alphabetically in four volumes. Each entry is signed
and includes references and cross references. The fifth volume contains
the index as well as primary documents arranged in chronological sec-
tions, each section introduced with a substantial essay. Editor Wilbur is
affiliated with the State U. of New York at Stony Brook.
HV7415 2012015761 978-1-4496-8860-8
Statistics in criminology and criminal justice; analysis
and interpretation, 4th ed. (online access included)
Walker, Jeffery T. and Sean Maddan.
Jones & Bartlett, ©2013 590 p. $137.95 (pa)
Walker (criminal justice and criminology, U. of Arkansas-Little Rock) and
Maddan (criminology and criminal justice, U. of Tampa) substantially
revise their textbook, moving all inferential analysis chapters to before
multivariate descriptive analysis, based on feedback from instructors
who use the book. The focus remains on understanding data, knowing
what analysis procedures are best matched for that data, and interpreting
the results. They still rely on statistical output, but add more formulas
for those who use them in their courses. The breadth is broad, so the text
can be used from undergraduate well into graduate levels. Associated
web sites are provided for both students and instructors.
HV7419 2012-014487 978-1-60885-034-1
Contemporary issues in criminal justice; a research-based
introduction.
Title main entry. Ed. by Carolyn D’Argenio et al.
Looseleaf Law Publications, ©2013 304 p. $29.95 (pa)
In this textbook designed to introduce research to lower division criminal
justice and criminology students, editor D’Argenio (criminal justice,
Mohawk Valley Community College) presents many cases on topics of
interest to students, such as sexting, risky sexual behavior, and nonsocial
reinforcement on Facebook. The text encourages students to think criti-
cally about crime theory and policy development and can be used as a
companion text. Most chapters are conference papers; by design, there is
no material drawn from news reports. Section 1 describes the role of the
police research consultant and offers a beginner’s guide to reading
research articles. The rest of the book presents case studies and reviews
of the literature in sections on researching criminological theory,
researching policing issues, researching legal issues in the criminal
justice system, and researching corrections issues. Learning features
include chapter discussion questions and a glossary. Instructor’s guide on
CD including test bank - available upon adoption.
HV7419 2012-022214 978-1-4557-2589-2
World criminal justice systems; a comparative survey, 8th
ed.
Terrill, Richard J.
Anderson Publishing Co., ©2013 723 p. $84.95 (pa)
To enhance American students’ understanding of foreign systems, Terrill
(criminal justice, Georgia State U.) takes a comparative approach to
criminal justice systems around the world by examining those of
England, France, Japan, South Africa (a new chapter), Russia, and China,
ending with a chapter on Islamic law that uses Saudi Arabia, Iran, and
Turkey as examples. For each country, he analyzes government, police,
judiciary, law, corrections, juvenile justice, and other issues. This edition
has an expanded introduction, updates material, and eliminates coverage
of Sweden (the chapter is now online). Anderson Publishing is an
imprint of Elsevier.
HV7436 2011-043970 978-1-4411-0650-6
Gun policy in the United States and Canada; the impact
of mass murders and assassinations on gun control.
Fleming, Anthony K.
Continuum Publishing Group, ©2012 159 p. $120.00
In this comparative analysis of the development of gun control policy in
the United States and Canada, Fleming (political science, U. of West
Georgia) analyzes the relative impact of “firearms-related focusing
events” (e.g., mass shootings) on policy outcomes in each country.
Finding that such events usually lead to new policy being placed on the
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
agenda in both countries, he finds differences in outcome in each
country that are further accentuated by party control. In the US political
system, he suggests that policy initiatives tend to stall before the formu-
lation stage even when the Democrats are in control due to the diffuse
nature of the political system and the lobbying power of the National
Rifle Association (and fare less well, as might be expected, under
Republican-led governments). In contrast, he finds that the centralized
power of the Canadian Parliament and the minimization of status quo
interest group influence in the wake of “focusing events” allows for gun
control agenda setting and policy reformulation, particularly under left-
of-center governments.
HV7935 2010-934269 978-1-4354-8807-6
Paradoxes of leadership in police management.
Perez, Douglas W. and Michael Barkhurst.
Delmar, ©2012 372 p. $44.95 (pa)
This volume draws on research in organizational theory and leadership
and communication studies to help current and future police leaders.
The authors note the unique situation in leading police officers, who are
leaders themselves, and the paradoxes involved in the management of an
organization, the job police officers have, and police management specif-
ically, and how these are intertwined. They discuss some of the para-
doxes in police leading and the principles of organization theory; how
police systems are organized and how they should be organized, the
paradoxes of police work, the importance of specific goals, and types of
police organization and their strengths and weaknesses; operating prin-
ciples, including communication, motivating subordinates, and evalu-
ating performance; officer behavior (ethics, police review, and
misconduct); and leadership challenges for different tiers.
HV7936 978-94-90947-65-1
Crime, security and surveillance; effects for the surveillant
and the surveilled.
Title main entry. Ed. by Gudrun Vande Walle et al. (The green grass)
Eleven International Publishing, ©2012 232 p. $59.50 (pa)
The 13 papers in this collection reflect on the dichotomy of surveillance
in the domain of crime control and security, and on the consequences of
technologies employed in the course of a particular surveillance or
security practice. The first section creates the word “responsibilisation”
to describe the shift in security and surveillance duties from the police
to shop owners. Later sections question nodal policing techniques, the
policing of public spaces, DNA testing of criminals, and workplace sur-
veillance. No index is provided. Distributed in North America by ISBS.
HV7936 2012-005403 978-1-4398-8416-4
Global community policing; problems and challenges.
Title main entry. Ed. by Arvind Verma et al. (International police exec-
utive symposium co-publications)
CRC Press, ©2013 268 p. $129.95
Thirteen papers from a 2010 symposium explore the design and imple-
mentation of community policing programs in various cities and coun-
tries, the need for community policing in Nigeria, the Japanese crime
reduction plan enacted in 2002, and the Friends of Police movement in
India. Two employees of the United Nations Development Program
describe a pilot project launched in Kabul to promote public confidence
in the police. Updates on community policing initiatives in Sweden, South
Korea, South Africa, and the Netherlands round out the book.
HV7936 2012-035492 978-1-60885-052-5
Inside internal affairs; an in-depth look at the people,
process & politics.
Hein, John F.
Looseleaf Law Publications, ©2013 243 p. $24.95 (pa)
Writing primarily for other security professionals, Hein (a member of
ASIS International with 35 years of military and civilian law enforcement
experience) takes the reader on a tour of key issues and processes of the
internal affairs investigation. Topics include the evolution of internal
investigations in different American military and law enforcement edu-
cations, the processes of investigation, the role of leadership, hiring
policies as a preemptive to requiring investigations, rights of investigated
officers, management of the investigation, qualifications of the investi-
gator, and investigation openness. Case studies for illustrative purposes
are included in each chapter. Instructor’s Guide on CD including test
bank & PowerPoint available upon adoption.
–106–
HV7936 2012-019860 978-1-4398-3946-1
Police performance appraisals; a comparative perspective.
Gul, Serdar Kenan and Paul E. O’Connell. (Advances in police theory
and practice series )
CRC Press, ©2013 161 p. $89.95
For police scholars and managers, former police officers Gul (human
resources management, public administration, and police management,
Security Management Research Center, Turkish National Police Academy)
and O’Connell (criminal justice, Iona College) examine best practices in
the development and use of personal performance appraisals by police
organizations through an evaluation of systems in Ankara, Turkey, and
Toledo, Ohio. They discuss the organizational structures of the two
systems and compare the departments, which were studied in 2001 and
2006, to generate universal best practices in performance appraisal that
are not culturally specific and can help any police organization. They
consider differences in practices and the perceptions of individuals
appraising performance and those being appraised, and explore whether
the appraisal system matters in terms of affecting officers’ satisfaction
with the system, as well as the relationship between the officer’s per-
ception and rank, and the factors of education, gender, age, and years of
service. They also present an overview of performance appraisal and ele-
ments of effective appraisals.
HV8073 2012-019296 978-1-4129-8308-2
Criminal and behavioral profiling.
Bartol, Curt R. and Anne M. Bartol.
Sage Publications, ©2013 346 p. $43.00 (pa)
Intended for use in criminal justice and psychology courses, this under-
graduate text treats the theory and real-life practice of criminal profiling
and behavioral investigative analysis, emphasizing the importance of
gathering information about the victim. The authors are skeptical about
profiling approaches that rely too heavily on typologies of crimes and
offenders, and instead support approaches that promote both actuarial
and clinical methods. The first chapter contrasts the crime scene pro-
filing methods of the FBI with the actuarial or database approaches used
in the UK, Canada, and Australia. Later chapters examine five types of
profiling: crime scene, geographic, psychological, and suspect-based pro-
filing, and reconstructive psychological evaluation analysis. There is also
coverage of profiling applied to specific crimes and profiling in court.
Curt Bartol edits the journals Criminal Justice and Behavior. Anne Bartol
has written other books on criminal justice.
HV8073 2012-021097 978-1-4398-1704-9
Fisher’s techniques of crime scene investigation; first
international edition.
Tilstone, William J. et al.
CRC Press, ©2013 477 p. $99.95
Aimed at both students and working crime scene investigators, this text
provides a comprehensive guide to all aspects of the practice. Eight edi-
tions prepared by Fisher (forensic science, Los Angeles County Sheriff’s
Department) have previously been published for a US audience, but this
is the first edition reconfigured for an international (primarily European)
one. In addition, the first part of the book, describing the forensic
process, has also been greatly expanded, and a ten page appendix on
digital evidence has been added. There are no references per se, but the
book closes with a 23 page bibliography. The authors note that despite
its size, it still omits relevant information of a highly technical nature.
HV8073 2012-008003 978-0-398-08809-5
Managing the investigative unit, 2d ed.
McDevitt, Daniel S.
C.C. Thomas, ©2012 222 p. $34.95
This guide for managers of police investigative units emphasizes the
importance of understanding the traits that make investigators different
from patrol officers. Early chapters review criminal investigation basics
and the role of patrol officers in the investigative process, while later
chapters deal with organizing the investigative unit, rank and status of
investigators, and pay differentials and duty hours. Several chapters are
devoted to selecting, developing, and supervising investigators, while
others give practical details on managing confidential source programs,
supervision of undercover personnel, and raid and arrest planning.
There is also advice on evaluating the performance of investigative per-
sonnel and dealing with marginal performers. The book includes about
35 pages of checklists, sample forms, applications, letters, and policies.
This second edition is updated to reflect changes in the field since the
first edition was published in 2005. McDevitt, retired from the Lansing,
Illinois police department, holds an MS in criminology.
–107–
HV8073 2012-011542 978-0-12-386464-2
The science of crime scenes.
Houck, Max M. et al.
Academic Press, ©2012 392 p. $99.95
Houck, a forensic and intelligence consultant, brings together two inter-
national co-authors to explain the technical details as well as the phi-
losophy of crime scene investigation and the theory of crime scene
science. While the text is primarily intended for students in forensics, it
will also be useful as a reference for practitioners and crime scene tech-
nicians. Sections cover the science of crime scene investigation; personnel
and procedures; detection and reconstruction; and special crime scenes,
such as terrorist attacks and natural and manmade disasters. The book
contains color photos and illustrations and margin key terms in a color
layout. The text assumes that the reader already has some knowledge of
forensic science and an understanding of the scientific method.
Academic Press is an imprint of Elsevier.
HV8079 2012-021317 978-1-61163-176-0
Child death investigations; interdisciplinary techniques
from cradle to court, 2d ed.
Mayhew, Lisa.
Carolina Academic Press, ©2012 154 p. $24.00 (pa)
Intended for law enforcement, this book explains the physical evidence
to consider when investigating child death by natural causes, accident, or
homicide, providing investigation checklists and sample cases to help
develop professional skills. The second edition adds guidelines for suicide
investigation and closing chapters on interviewing families and recon-
structing the death scene.
HV8079 2012-026273 978-1-4398-9877-2
Digital forensics for handheld devices.
Doherty, Eamon P.
CRC Press, ©2013 303 p. $69.95
Doherty (cybercrime, Fairleigh Dickinson U., New Jersey) outlines legal,
technical, academic, and social aspects of mobile device forensics so that
readers will know how to use a variety of digital forensic tools to
examine flash drives, cell phones, personal data assistants, digital
cameras, and netbooks. He emphasizes the difference between corporate
and criminal investigations, explores issues regarding privacy and the
Fourth Amendment, and identifies education and certification opportu-
nities for someone thinking of entering the field.
HV8079 2012-017920 978-1-4496-4869-5
Investigating sexual assault cases.
Chancellor, Arthur S. (Jones and Bartlett guides to law enforcement
investigation series)
Jones & Bartlett, ©2014 412 p. $42.95 (pa)
This reference/text for law enforcement first responders, detectives,
supervisors, and students explains how sexual assault cases should be
investigated. After a historical perspective and a review of common rape
myths, the book focuses on types of victims, such as female and male
victims and elderly victims, and gives advice for minimizing further
trauma to the victim during the victim interview. A chapter reviewing
concepts of human sexuality separates the victim material from the
chapters on types of offenders and the offender interview. Later chapters
cover the crime scene and evidence, the investigation, and prosecution
issues such as drug- and alcohol-facilitated sexual assaults, false rape
allegations, working with prosecutors, and common investigative mis-
takes. Chancellor, a graduate of the FBI National Academy, now works
with the US Army as a supervisor special agent.
HV8130 978-94-90947-66-8
Weaving social networks; tips for police officers and other
professionals about building and maintaining networks in
a multi-ethnic society.
Janssen, Janine.
Eleven International Publishing, ©2012 165 p. $37.50 (pa)
Janssen (criminal law and criminology, VU U., Amsterdam) provides tips
on building networks (both on and off the Internet) and how to maintain
them in multi-ethnic societies. Chapters examine culture, taboos, and
socializing, and contain helpful text boxes describing practical examples.
Originally published as a training manual for Dutch police and other
professionals, this book has now been translated for the international
community and is intended reading for police officers and other profes-
sionals working in the field of security. Distributed in North America by
ISBS.
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
HV8141 2012-015482 978-0-398-08823-1
Effective police management; striving for accountability
and competence.
More, Harry W. and Terry L. More.
C.C. Thomas, ©2012 58.95 p. $58.95
Featuring an easy-read layout with many headings, bullet points, and
summary tables, this resource for law enforcement professionals and
policy makers offers guidelines on developing performance-based police
management. The book begins with a historical overview focusing on
community policing. Subsequent chapters cover managing people, cre-
ating an environment of achievement, and holding people and programs
accountable. There is special attention to acquiring data to assess per-
formance, developing a process for data evaluation, and models for
describing program effectiveness. The book also covers the goal-oriented
strategic management process, proactive problem solving, and mapping
crime. Information on the authors is not given.
HV8141 2011-046871 978-1-60885-032-7
Positive police leadership; problem-solving planning.
Baker, Thomas E.
Looseleaf Law Publications, ©2012 234 p. $29.95 (pa)
Positive leadership combines positive psychology with the techniques of
leadership, often resulting in much more effective results. This book
takes this combination into the realm of police management, exploring
ways to incorporate it into planning, communication and coaching.
Throughout it makes use of the concepts of emotional intelligence, which
are generally found in the top ten percentage of leaders. Baker (criminal
justice, U. of Scranton) also spent years in the U.S. Army Reserve Military
Police Corps. The book closes with ten grids for rating one’s own positive
police leadership knowledge and traits. PowerPoint presentation on CD
available upon adoption.
HV8141 2012-021332 978-1-59460-911-4
Why law enforcement organizations fail; mapping the
organizational fault lines in policing, 2d ed.
O’Hara, Patrick.
Carolina Academic Press, ©2012 283 p. $38.00 (pa)
O’Hara (public administration, City University New York) presents a
study of law-enforcement agencies from the perspective of organizational
pathology. Failure in this context occurs when some element of the organ-
ization, an employee or policy or operation, deviates from expectations in
substantial and disruptive ways. O’Hara argues against over-simplistic
diagnoses of police abuse as either bungling bureaucracy or class
oppression. Armed with an understanding of organizational pathology
that those perspectives foreclose, O’Hara insists we are better able to
address them. The text is organized around the analysis of cases, with
minimal editorial interjections and commentary saved for afterward.
These cases include terrorism investigations, sexual predation and indis-
cretion, and good-old-boy networks. He considers “normal accidents,”
how to diagnose organizational dysfunction, structural failures of law
enforcement in terms of hierarchy and department size, the failure of
oversight, cultural deviation, institutionalization, and resource diversion.
New to this second edition are additional case-studies that were not
closed before the finalization of the first edition.
HV8148 2012-006796 978-1-4398-9917-5
Los Angeles Police Department meltdown; the fall of the
professional-reform model of policing.
Lasley, James. (Advances in police theory and practice series; 14)
CRC Press, ©2013 271 p. $79.95
In the immediate aftermath of the Rodney King beating incident, Lasley
(criminal justice, California State University-Fullerton) was asked by the
chief of the Los Angeles Police Department (LAPD) to conduct this study
of over 200 police officers’ attitudes and opinions on what went wrong
and why. This rare internal study of the LAPD was mysteriously ‘lost’ by
the department shortly after it was finished, and has only recently been
rediscovered. The study offers a qualitative analysis of the LAPD’s orga-
nizational death. It reveals that most officers were vehemently against
the transition from the professional-reform model of policing, which was
created at the LAPD 40 years previous, to the community policing model.
The book begins with a historical overview of the professional-reform
model of policing, then presents respondents’ attitudes on the causes of
the Rodney King incident, the impact of politicians and special interest
groups, policies on hiring and affirmative action, and respondents’ views
of management and administration. The book will interest those in
policing, management, and policy studies.
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
HV8291 2012-017887 978-1-4398-9227-5
Corporate security in the Asia-Pacific region; crisis, crime,
fraud, and misconduct.
Cubbage, Christopher J. and David J. Brooks.
CRC Press, ©2013 224 p. $79.95
Cubbage (editor, Asia-Pacific Security Magazine) and Brooks (security
science, Edith Cowan U., Australia) describe internal and external threats
to a corporation’s security and characterize how those threats play out
when doing business in Asian countries. Their approach to security risk
management incorporates ISO 31000:2009 to document decision making,
risk mitigation, and communication strategies. The final chapter sum-
marizes the government structure, geography, political conditions,
economy, foreign relations, and security issues in each of the 41 coun-
tries. The book is intended for corporate security managers but should
also be considered by college libraries.
HV8665 2012-017344 978-1-4129-7566-7
Introduction to corrections.
Hanser, Robert D.
Sage Publications, ©2013 558 p. $85.00 (pa)
Hanser (criminal justice, U. of Louisiana at Monroe) outlines basic con-
cepts in the field of corrections from a practitioner’s perspective as inte-
grated with theoretical aspects, for undergraduate students. He illustrates
how a practitioner conducts daily business in both institutional and com-
munity correctional settings, and how contemporary punishment, incar-
ceration, and supervision schemes are grounded in specific theories. He
discusses the historical background; the corrections system and process;
jail facilities, operations, design, and layout; legal issues; inmate and
officer subcultures; specialized offenders such as women, those with
mental challenges, and juveniles; administration; education, work, reli-
gious, and recreational programming; substance abuse treatment; parole
and reintegration; the death penalty; and evaluation and best practices.
He includes discussion of the qualifications of specific types of officers,
the role of technology, stressors in daily work, examples of tools and
instruments used, and other practical work issues. A companion website
includes video and audio clips, journal articles, state rankings, study
tools, and other resources.
HV8665 2012-015445 978-1-4398-3578-4
Trends in corrections; interviews with corrections leaders
around the world.
Title main entry. Ed. by Jennie K. Singer, Dilip K. Das, and Eileen
Ahlin.
CRC Press, ©2013 253 p. $99.95
Each of this book’s 12 chapters contains an interview with a corrections
official who leads a correctional institution or a key department or
agency related to the field of corrections, highlighting issues in correc-
tional programming and management styles in nine countries around
the world. The interviewees respond to questions about their own per-
sonal correctional philosophies, as well as how they incorporate theory
and evidence-based practices into their work, and how they balance goals
of corrective control and rehabilitation. They also give insight on back-
ground and education, career paths, and how international correctional
practice informs their work. Those conducting the interviews come from
fields such as social anthropology, rehabilitation counseling, criminal
justice, psychology, sociology, and criminology. Singer teaches criminal
justice at California State University-Sacramento. Das is the founding
president of the International Police Executive Symposium. Ahlin is a
researcher in evaluation of community corrections. The book is co-pub-
lished with International Police Executive Symposium.
HV8699 2009-014695 978-1-61186-047-4
Executing democracy; v.2: Capital punishment & the
making of America, 1835-1843.
Hartnett, Stephen John. (Rhetoric and public affairs series)
Michigan State U. Press, ©2010 342 p. $59.95
This is Volume 2 of a two-volume rhetorical history of public debates
about crime, violence, and corporeal and capital punishment in the US.
While Volume 1 provided a historical overview of capital punishment,
Volume 2 analyzes historical cases highlighting debates on the death
penalty during the period, especially exchanges between George Barrell
Cheever, a Calvinist minister, and John O’Sullivan, editor of an aboli-
tionist magazine. The debaters draw their arguments from the work of
writers and thinkers of the Revolutionary and Federalist eras, which
were covered in Volume 1. B&w historical illustrations are included.
Together, the two volumes map how the country’s debates about the
death penalty influenced thinking about national identity and character,
gender and sexuality, class and capitalism, religion and modernity, race
and slavery, and Enlightenment and democracy. Hartnett teaches com-
munication at the University of Colorado-Denver.
–108–
HV9304 2012-034617 978-1-4331-1473-1
Reconstructing rage; transformative reentry in the era of
mass incarceration.
Price-Spratlen, Townsand and William Goldsby. (Black studies & critical
thinking; v.25)
Peter Lang Publishing Inc, ©2012 294 p. $38.95 (pa)
This book examines principles and practices of post-incarceration reentry
and reintegration, with a special focus on Reconstruction, Inc., a grass-
roots organization offering support and assistance especially to post-
incarceration black men dealing with the rage often inherent to their
circumstances, and seeking transformation. The book is divided into
three sections. Part one discusses culture and explores the AEA,
resilience, healing, love and rage, race, and the origin of Reconstruction.
Part two discusses community and examines the role of women in
Reconstruction, an incorporation of a youth focus, and the nurturing of
the Reconstruction community between 1993 and 1998. Part three
explores capacity-building in bridging gaps, current and recent best prac-
tices, and transformative collaborations. An epilogue by an expert of
reentry and rehabilitation offers additional insight. References, notes, and
an index are included.
HV9306 2011-034149 978-0-8265-1838-5
Magdalene House; a place about mercy.
Suiter, Sarah VanHooser.
Vanderbilt University Press, ©2012 189 p. $22.50 (pa)
Magdalene House is a free residential recovery community in Nashville,
Tennessee that has provided women with housing, food, health care, psy-
chological services, job training, and education since 1997. Author Suiter,
former intern coordinator at Magdalene House, presents a history of the
community. She surveys the reasons women end up on the streets and
describes dimensions of healing as experienced by the women at
Magdalene House, with special focus on aspects that community
members themselves defined as essential to healing. Suiter is now a
program evaluator at Centerstone Research Institute.
HV9468 2011-050531 978-1-61186-061-0
Stop the presses! I want to get off!; a brief history of the
Prisoners’ Digest International.
Grant, Joseph W. (Voices from the underground)
Michigan State U. Press, ©2012 233 p. $39.95 (pa)
Joseph Grant, founder and publisher of Prisoners’ Digest International,
presents a brief history of how the underground newspaper written by
prisoners came into existence and circulation. He tells a loose story about
the paper’s political motivations during the time of the Cuban Revolution,
the support by Unitarian Universalists and National Lawyers Guild,
women prisoners stepping into the writing-ranks, racism, and the last
PDI in the mid-70s. Two extra sections in the end offer extended musings
Grant had while writing the PDI history.
HV9469 2012-020955 978-1-4496-4546-5
The effective corrections manager; correctional
supervision for the future, 3d ed.
Gladwin, Bridget P. and Charles R. McConnell.
Jones & Bartlett, ©2014 294 p. $110.95 (pa)
This textbook on management and supervision of correctional facilities is
designed for advanced undergraduates in courses in criminal justice or
sociology. Early chapters cover the nature and functions of management,
leadership styles, interpersonal relationships, and developing employees.
Later chapters treat employee problems, change management, budgeting,
ethical standards, and unions. Learning features include insider per-
spective boxes, review and discussion questions, and case exercises. The
text can be used by first- and second-line correctional managers
(including those supervising inmates) and by mid-level managers at the
headquarters level. An instructor website provides a test bank and lecture
slides. For this third edition, the previous edition’s 30 chapters have been
reorganized into 15 more concise chapters. There is new material on
supervision, writing reports, and interpersonal communication. Gladwin
teaches at John Jay College of Criminal Justice
HV9469 2012-024729 978-0-313-39571-0
Prison privatization; the many facets of a controversial
industry; 3v.
Title main entry. Ed. by Byron Eugene Price and John Charles Morris.
Praeger, ©2012 823 p. $163.00
In this superior three-volume reference for more-prepared high school
seniors and up, Price (business, City University of New York) and Morris
(public policy, Old Dominion University) present theory, practice, and
debates on all sides of the issue of private prisons in the US. Contributors
are US and a few international scholars and practitioners in criminology,
public administration, sociology, and urban and community planning;
–109–
they offer an extensive list of references at the end of each of the 12
chapters in each volume. Volume 1 describes the private prison envi-
ronment and looks at the motivations behind privatization. After a
history of local, state, and federal prison privatization, various types of
private correctional facilities are examined. This volume also examines
concerns related to the Freedom of Information Act and the globalization
of private prisons. Volume 2 raises issues about the incongruence of
incentives that arise when the coercive power of the state is privatized
and the goal of prisons becomes profit. Some subjects explored include
financing of private prisons and prison telecommunications. Volume 3
tackles the political and social climate of prison privatization. Chapters
address topics such as racism and classism, and the creation of a pow-
erful elite that drives policy choices. The volume closes with a discussion
of the future of private prisons and a review of growth patterns for
private prisons at the local, state, and federal levels. The same color photo
montage appears on the front cover of each volume. The book’s read-
ership includes practitioners, policy makers, advocates, students, and
general readers.
HV9469 2012-031499 978-1-4129-9813-0
Special needs offenders in correctional institutions.
Title main entry. Ed. by Lior Gideon.
Sage Publications, ©2013 530 p. $50.00 (pa)
In this textbook aimed at students in criminal justice, Gideon (John Jay
College of Criminal Justice) brings together a group of specialists and
scholars in criminal justice, women’s studies, sociology, psychology,
gerontology, social work, law, addiction, and public health, mostly from
the US, for 17 chapters on criminal offenders with special needs. These
include juveniles, female offenders, pregnant offenders and mothers,
chronically ill inmates, mentally ill inmates, older and geriatric offenders,
gay and lesbian inmates, inmates under protective custody, sex offenders,
veterans, death-sentenced inmates, immigrants, those with substance
abuse and addiction problems, inmates of different religions, and ter-
rorism-related inmates or those who were radicalized during incarcer-
ation. Each chapter focuses on the characteristics of each group and why
it should be considered a special needs case, challenges as inmates, chal-
lenges posed to correctional management and the daily routine of facil-
ities, and guidance for related policy, as well as rehabilitation and
reentry and reintegration preparation, where applicable.
HV9800 2011-045688 978-1-61608-688-6
Rotting in the Bangkok Hilton; the gruesome true story of
a man who survived Thailand’s deadliest prison.
Hoy, T.M.
Skyhorse Pub. Co., ©2012 207 p. $24.95
In 1995, author Hoy, an American, was sentenced to Thai prison for life,
for failing to report a friend to the police. He spent five years in Chiang
Mai Remand and Bang Kwang prison, where he was the target of special
abuse as a foreigner. He was eventually transferred to the US and was
released from prison in Tucson, Arizona, in 2011. In this collection of
real-life short stories, he describes how he coped with torture, violence,
illness, and near-starvation while in prison in Thailand. The book
includes official documents.
HV9950 2010-925062 978-0-495-80987-6
Sense and nonsense about crime, drugs, and
communities, 7th ed.
Walker, Samuel.
Wadsworth Publishing Co., ©2011 385 p. $108.95 (pa)
In this academic work written especially for criminal justice students,
Walker (U. of Nebraska) presents 62 theses, conveniently listed at the
outset of the book and explored thoroughly in the ensuing chapters. This
updated seventh edition pays special attention to communities, programs
that work, and newly available research on crime and prevention as well
as providing new evidence on a variety of topics including programs that
fail, resource crises, a selection of specific cases, and new laws. The book
is divided into six sections which focus on policy, the conservative
approach, gun crimes, the liberal approach, drugs, and the relationship
between crime and community. Each chapter ends with a conclusion and
a chapter-specific bibliography.
HV9955 2012-001254 978-1-59460-924-4
Florida’s criminal justice system.
Doerner, William G. (State-specific criminal justice series)
Carolina Academic Press, ©2012 227 p. $28.00 (pa)
Doerner (criminology and criminal justice, Florida State U.) provides an
extensive overview of crime and the responses initiated by the state of
Florida, the extent of crime in the state, its law enforcement community
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
and criminal law, its court system, and corrections. He also covers the
death penalty, juvenile delinquency and the state’s system for dealing
with it, and crime victims and safeguards put in place to protect them.
POLITICAL SCIENCE
JA71 2011-049793 978-1-4094-1062-1
A companion to political philosophy; methods, tools,
topics.
Title main entry. Ed. by Antonella Besussi.
Ashgate Publishing Co., ©2012 244 p. $134.95
The aim of this handbook, edited by Besussi (political philosophy, U. of
Milan, Italy), is to provide a selective introduction to how politics is
approached philosophically, covering both methodological questions and
issues of substance. It’s 20 chapters are presented in three sections, dis-
cussing “methods” and the associated topics of truth, objectivity, feasi-
bility and desirability, facts and principles, and realism and idealism;
“tools” and questions of politics/metaphysics, counterfactuals, justifi-
cation, the right and the good, trade-off, and means/ends; and “topics,”
including liberty, equality, community, justice, pluralism, public dis-
course, agreement/disagreement, and exclusion/assimilation.
JA71 2011-031478 978-1-4411-6048-5
On Zizek’s dialectics; surplus, subtraction, sublimation.
(reprint, 2010)
Vighi, Fabio. (Continuum studies in Continental philosophy)
Continuum Publishing Group, ©2012 189 p. $44.95 (pa)
Drawing on the critique of capitalism by Slovenian philosopher and
Marxist sociologist Slavoj Zizek and the epistemology of French psychia-
trist Jacques Lacan (1901-81), Vighi (ideology critique and Zizek studies,
Cardiff U., Wales) situates the question of surplus first within capitalism
and them in relation to dialectical thought. His topics include the will to
enjoyment, the unbearable lightness of being the proletariat, shame and
subversion, democracy under duress, and the invisible rabbit inside the
hat. The 2010 edition was cloth bound.
JA71 978-1-55238-530-2
Pessimism of the intellect, optimism of the will; the
political philosophy of Kai Nielson.
Title main entry. Ed. by David Rondel and Alex Sager
Univ. of Calgary Press, ©2012 476 p. $41.95 (pa)
This collection of Kai Nielsen’s writings has been conceived as a tribute
to the Canadian political philosopher, a self-described “liberal socialist
cosmopolitan nationalist.” Editors Rondel (philosophy, Ryerson U.,
Canada) and Sager (philosophy, Portland State U., US), who both studied
under Nielsen at Concordia U., have selected 13 essays as broadly repre-
sentative of Nielsen’s thought, organizing them into three sections the-
matically concerned with: critical theory and metaphilosophy;
egalitarianism and socialism; and cosmopolitanism, nationalism, and
global justice. Included as an afterword, is an interview with Nielsen on
various subjects in political philosophy. Distributed in the US by
Michigan State U. Press.
JA74 2011-050491 978-1-61186-053-5
Psychopolitics; conversations with Trevor Cribben Merrill.
Oughourlian, Jean-Michel. Trans. by Trevor Cribben Merrill. (Studies in
violence, mimesis, and culture series)
Michigan State U. Press, ©2012 98 p. $19.95 (pa)
This short collection of talks between Jean-Michel Oughourlian (clinical
psychopathology, U. of Paris) and Trevor Cribben Merrill, their translator,
extend Oughourlian’s previous work on mimetic rivalry in couples to the
international level. They are written for a general audience, and at times
light-hearted, but just the same quite serious about international conflict,
terrorism, “the apocalypse,” and ecological problems that call on a
renewed capacity to form healthy common purposes. René Girard writes
a forward, comparing Oughorlian’s psychopologics to “a sort of Prince for
the twenty-first century.”
JA75 2012-001642 978-0-85745-747-9
Environment and citizenship in Latin America; natures,
subjects and struggles.
Title main entry. Ed. by Alex Latta and Hannah Wittman. (CEDLA
Latin American studies (CLAS); 101)
Berghahn Books, ©2012 254 p. $70.00
A primary theme of this book is that much can be learned by dealing
with environmental questions “through the lens of citizenship.” Another
is the hope of the authors that it helps ignite new inquiries and debate
regarding the intersection of citizenship practices and the environment
in Latin America. In addressing issues in specific countries or regions,
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
the authors examine broader themes such as environmental citizenship
and climate security, traditional populations and protected lands, envi-
ronmental collective action, and environmental legislation. Editors are
Latta (global studies, Wilfrid Laurier U., Canada) and Wittman (sociology,
Latin American studies, Simon Fraser U., Canada).
JA76 2012-935296 978-0-85793-492-5
Good government; the relevance of political science.
Title main entry. Ed. by Sören Holmberg and Bo Rothstein.
Edward Elgar Publishing, ©2012 354 p. $150.00
The editors (both of the U. of Gothenburg, Sweden) present the work of
a research program, “The Quality of Government Institute,” that was
established in order to bring the disciplinary lens of political science to
bear on the causes, consequences, and nature of “good quality of gov-
ernment,” broadly defined as trustworthy, reliable, impartial, uncor-
rupted, and competent government institutions. Papers first examine
issues of definition, identification, and measurement of quality of gov-
ernment. They then consider the means by which good government is
achieved, focusing particularly on issues such as press freedom, cor-
ruption prevention, the role of international organizations, state legit-
imacy and the corruptibility of leaders, legislators and variation in
quality of government, and the gendered nature of corruption. The final
three contributions consider the links between good government and
outcomes, specifically related to access to safe water and to general hap-
piness.
JA83 2012-009753 978-0-8133-4690-8
Political philosophy in the twenty-first century; essential
essays.
Title main entry. Ed. by Steven M. Cahn and Robert B. Talisse.
Westview Press, ©2013 289 p. $38.00 (pa)
This collection of over a dozen essays, sampled as readings from other
sources, survey key issue areas in contemporary political philosophy. One
of the editors, Talisse (philosophy, Vanderbilt U.), offers an introductory
essay providing a background in John Rawl’s importance for political
theory and the issues debated in the essays. Those issues organize the
essays of the book in terms of equality, justice, liberty, democracy and
human rights. The selections themselves include criticisms and defense
of equality, positive vs. negative liberty, authoritarianism and democracy,
world poverty, social justice and flourishing of human capabilities. The
contributors include luminaries like Martha Nussbaum and Amartya
Sen, but also academic philosophers, political and otherwise social sci-
entists from the Industrialized world.
JA84 2012-014017 978-1-60384-848-0
The Arthasastra; selections from the classic Indian work
on statecraft.
Kautalya. Ed. and trans. by Mark McClish and Patrick Olivelle.
Hackett Publishing Co., ©2012 169 p. $16.95 (pa)
Editor-translators McClish (religion, Birmingham-Southern College) and
Olivelle (Sanskrit and Indian religion, UT Austin) present selections from
the Arthasastra, a classical compendium of best practices for kings written
in India around the beginning of the Common Era. The editors provide
a detailed introduction of the text, its composition and authorship, and
various historical contexts. The text itself is structured according to books
and more limited sub-topics and in these selections elucidate the finer
points of central administration, judiciary, internal security and sup-
pression of criminal activity, foreign affairs, and waging war. An index
of passages accompanies a standard index in the back.
JA85 2011-050519 978-1-61186-052-8
Making the case; advocacy and judgment in public
argument.
Title main entry. Ed. by Kathryn M. Olson et al. (Rhetoric and public
affairs)
Michigan State U. Press, ©2012 260 p. $69.95 (pa)
In this collection of essays, experts in communication and rhetoric
restructure and evaluate the use of rhetorical concepts and devices in a
variety of speeches and treatises, including The Oddysey, two addresses
by Barack Obama, and writings by Alan Greenspan, FDR, and Lincoln.
As a collection of case studies which stresses the importance of critical
inquiry, this book is appropriate for anyone with an interest in public
rhetoric, especially Aristotelian, and especially advanced students and
those with an interest in the validity of scholarly argument.
–110–
JA86 2011-046383 978-0-415-49079-5
Understanding research; coping with the quantitative-
qualitative divide.
Franklin, M.I.
Routledge, ©2012 308 p. $150.00
Franklin (global media and transnational communications, Goldsmiths,
UK) offers guidance for undergraduate and graduate students on con-
ducting academic research in international and cross-cultural environ-
ments. Specifically, he provides both theoretical and practical guidance
in designing, conducting, and communicating the results of research
projects executed at the point where arts, humanities, and the social sci-
ences join. In addition to the above, some specific topics include online
research and web-resourcing skills, surveys and questionnaires, and data
analysis.
JC71 2012-007529 978-1-58510-290-7
Statesman; translation, introduction, glossary, and essay.
Plato. Trans. by Eva Brann et al. (Focus philosophical library)
Focus Publishing, ©2012 166 p. $10.95 (pa)
A team of scholars from St. John’s College, Maryland presents one of
Plato’s political dialogues in translation with scholarly apparatus for stu-
dents of history, philosophy, and politics. Among the features is an essay
that comments on the dialogue passage by passage. The glossary iden-
tifies and explains the Greek original of such terms as art, likeness, and
faction. This is their third translation from Plato.
JC179 2011-031561 978-1-4411-5781-2
Rousseau and radical democracy. (reprint, 2010)
Inston, Kevin. (Continuum studies in philosophy)
Continuum Publishing Group, ©2012 226 p. $44.95 (pa)
Inston (French studies, University College London) argues that Jean-
Jacques Rousseau is still highly relevant for post-structuralist theorists of
radical democracy who value plurality. Against the criticism that
Rousseau’s “general will” is a homogenizing principle, Inston insists that
Rousseau’s conception of democracy possess the structural incom-
pleteness and openness to antagonism necessary to avoid stagnation and
tyranny. The text is organized into two parts. The first four chapter focus
on Rousseau’s Discourse on Inequality and considers Rousseau’s con-
ception of nature and society as a discursive construct, human per-
fectibility and lack, antagonism and social cohesion, democracy as an
ethos. The latter four turn to his Social Contract and explore Rousseau’s
rethinking of universality, the general will and the citizen, the paradox
of the legislator, and the impossible ideal of Rousseau’s radical
democracy.
JC183 2012-015198 978-0-85728-970-4
The politics of enlightenment; republicanism,
constitutionalism, and the rights of man in Gaetano
Filangieri.
Ferrone, Vincenzo. Trans. by Sophus A. Reinert. (The Anthem other
canon series)
Anthem Press, ©2012 294 p. $99.00
Ferrone (modern history, U. of Turin, Italy) explores the notions of
republic and constitution between the American and French revolutions.
Taking Filangieri’s (1752-88) The Science of Legislation (1780) as a starting
point, he formulates some working hypotheses based on the achieve-
ments of the new cultural history of the Enlightenment, some themes
and issues he has addressed previously. His topics include the critique of
the British constitutional model and the political laboratory of the
American revolution, the denunciations of the feudal monster and the
tempered monarchy, the Neapolitan school of natural law and the his-
torical origin of the rights of man, the republican and constitutional
patriotism of Italian Enlightenment thinkers, and the liberal constant
against the Enlightened Filangieri as two interpretations of modernity.
Reinert is at the Harvard Business School. Distributed in the US by Books
International, Inc.
JC261 2012-019309 978-1-61205-044-7
Sartre and Clio; encounters with history.
Hulliung, Mark..
Paradigm Publishers, ©2012 159 p. $102.00
Hulliung (history of ideas, Brandeis U.) traces the changing role of
history in the thought of French novelist and philosopher Jean-Paul
Sartre (1905-80) from Nausea in 1938 to his final writings. Considering a
large selection of his work, he discusses to historicize or not to historicize,
from time to history, the historical search for the unhistorical, human
history and the human condition, history and revolution, and history
and a note on ethics.
–111–
JC328 2012-452630 978-0-522-85485-5
Demanding the impossible; seven essays on resistance.
Lawson, Sylvia.
Melbourne U. Publishing, ©2012 181 p. $28.95 (pa)
Mixing elements of fiction, history, reportage, and analysis, Australian
cultural and political essayist Lawson explores the spirit of resistance in
different global settings. In a series of nine essays that frequently connect
ostensibly disparate subjects, she discusses such topics as Australian abo-
rigines, the story of murdered Russian journalist Anna Politkovskaya,
East Timorese and West Papuan resistance against Indonesia, and the
May 1968 insurrection in Paris.
JC328 978-1-78190-345-2
Nonviolent conflict and civil resistance.
Title main entry. Ed. by Sharon Erickson Neppstad and Lester R. Kurtz.
(Research in social movements, conflicts and change; v.34)
Emerald Group Publishing, ©2012 261 p. $124.95
Sociologists, political scientists, and historians link the study of social
movements with the study of nonviolent civil resistance, and push theo-
retical and empirical boundaries of nonviolent resistance research by
extending, refining, and challenging existing models. They cover strategic
interactions between nonviolent movements and the state, nonviolent
challenges and regime dilemmas, and the global diffusion of nonvio-
lence. Among the topics are the civil rights movement in Northern
Ireland, international context and nonviolent success in the Iranian rev-
olution, Nashville workshops in the southern civil rights movement, and
memory templates and limited violence in the Palestinian human rights
movement. The eight essays are not indexed. Distributed in North
America by Turpin Distribution.
JC330 2011-046326 978-0-85745-329-7
Charismatic leadership and social movements; the
revolutionary power of ordinary men and women.
Title main entry. Ed. by Jan Willem Stutje. (International studies in
social history; v.19)
Berghahn Books, ©2012 202 p. $70.00
In order to keep clear open water between themselves and the discredited
“great man” theory of history, social scientists have tended to downplay
the acknowledged role that a strong personality can play in social move-
ments. Here historians and political scholars sail close to the rocks,
looking at both examples and theories of charisma. Among the topics are
examining charisma in the light of Gandhi’s moral authority, Errico
Malatesta and charismatic leadership, Mao Zedong’s charismatic lead-
ership and the contradictions of socialist revolution, Western Europe at
the end of the 19th century, and incendiary personalities. Only names
are indexed.
JC393 2011-043080
The shogun’s scroll; wield power and control your
destiny. (reprint, 2006)
Kaufman, Steve F.
Tuttle Publishing, ©2012 128 p. $14.95
Kaufman, founder of the Dojo No Hebi School of the Snake, offers a work
of “docu-fiction.” Based on his personal investigations into the teachings
of Miyamoto Musashi’s Book of Five Rings and Sun Tzu’s Art of War,
Kaufman has created an ‘ancient text’ written in the voice of a real-life
advisor to the ruthless general Minamoto Yoritomo, the first shogun of
Japan. The book illustrates the medieval mindset of conquest attributed
to Minamoto Yoritomo and reveals the world of the samurai ethic of
Japan. It was first published in 2006.
JC423 2012-014319 978-1-59558-850-0
From dictatorship to democracy; a conceptual framework
for liberation.
Sharp, Gene.
The New Press, ©2012 138 p. $13.95 (pa)
Sharp (political science, UMASS Dartmouth) analyzes the anatomy of dic-
tatorships, the cultures of nonviolent resistance that bring them down,
and how effective democratic modes of collective life are forged out of
those cultures. It’s not a detailed analysis of any particular struggle with
a dictator, but more of an abstract view on the elements that Sharp has
gleaned from his interactions with survivors and resistors of dictator-
ships. He considers facing dictator’s realistically so as to reduce casu-
alties, the dangers of negotiations, sources of political power, attacking
the weaknesses of dictators through nonviolent struggle, strategic
planning and applying political defiance. A final chapter presents “a
groundwork for durable democracy” that addresses the threat of new
dictators and defending democracy. An appendix also offers a cheat-sheet
of different kinds of nonviolent actions people can take.
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
JC423 2012-025228 978-1-60358-413-5
Slow democracy; rediscovering community, bringing
decision making back home.
Clark, Susan and Woden Teachout.
Chelsea Green Publ. Co., ©2012 241 p. $19.95 (pa)
Clark, a writer and citizen activist, and Teachout, a historian interested
in American civic culture, make the case for what they call slow-
democracy. Slow here is a relative term, deriving most of its meaning
from a rejection of the sped up technocratic world of “fast food.” They
argue that much of what we’ve learned about democracy has probably
been focused on national politics, but that this distorts our ability to see
the potential efficacy of local civic participation. To get there they make
a lengthy comparison to the slow food movement and its critique of cen-
tralized, privatized industrial food production. The book is organized
into four parts on why we need slow democracy, why we need it now, a
“recipe for slow democracy,” and several reflections in the end about
local meetings and slow democracy. Several appendices provide helpful
rules for approaching slow democracy organizing as well as resources.
JC480 2012-021784 978-1-58826-849-5
Promoting authoritarianism abroad.
Vanderhill, Rachel.
Lynne Rienner Publishers, Inc., ©2013 217 p. $55.00
Vanderhill (international relations, Wheaton College) studies how nation-
states promote authoritarianism abroad. She focuses on the cases of
Russia, Iran, and Venezuela, but is not interested in the self-interested
goals of outside actors so much as the methods by which they influence
other countries. She’s concerned with how promoting authoritarianism
also impacts democratic participation. Authoritarianism is simply
“actively supporting illiberal elites.” She doesn’t just consider the United
States though, but in fact looks to how the three countries listed above
promote authoritarianism abroad. She offers cross-regional comparisons
and draws out the implications for US and European democracy.
JC571 2012-005066 978-1-4666-1918-0
Human rights and information communication
technologies; trends and consequences of use.
Title main entry. Ed. by John Lannon and Edward F. Halpin.
Information Science Reference, ©2013 292 p. $175.00
This work offers both academic and practitioner perspectives on the use
of information communication technologies (ICTs) in human rights
work. International contributors are from diverse fields including in
communication, journalism, and media and information studies, as well
as social work, law, and human rights and social justice advocacy. The
first part of the book reviews key trends and issues such as ICT policies
favoring human rights and negotiating boundaries between control and
dissent in repressive governments. The next section gathers case studies
from around the world, shedding light on topics such as digital dicta-
torship in Brazil and video exchange and Arab human rights. Part 3
presents practitioner perspectives, touching on areas such as crowd
sourcing for human rights monitoring, and the work of the Human
Rights Data Analysis Group. Part 4 considers economic and social rights.
Lannon is affiliated with the University of Limerick, Ireland. Halpin is
affiliated with Leeds Metropolitan University, UK.
JC571 2012-017026 978-0-8133-4501-7
International human rights, 4th ed.
Donnelly, Jack. (Dilemmas in world politics.)
Westview Press, ©2013 274 p. $37.00 (pa)
This treatment of the international relations of human rights politics by
Donnelly (international relations, U. of Denver), written to be accessible
to those with little or no background knowledge of the subject, is dis-
tinctive in its attention to the domestic politics of human rights as pro-
vided through examinations of human rights violations in the Southern
Cone of South America in the 1970s and 1980s and briefer domestic case
studies of South Africa, Central America, China, and the Yugoslavia, as
well as its relative emphasis on theory, which stands in contrast to other
volumes in the Dilemmas in World Politics series. The entire text is
largely built on case studies, covering both Cold War and post-Cold War
issues, which offer entry into such topics as global multilateral mecha-
nisms, regional mechanisms, American foreign policy, foreign policy
action in general, transnational advocacy, and different means of inter-
national action. New to this edition are nine discussion problems, accom-
panied by Donnelly’s responses to the problems, that are intended to
provoke further thought about the presented material.
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
JC575 2011-035029 978-1-4411-9850-1
Ricoeur, Rawls, and capability justice; civic phronesis and
equality.
Mann, Molly Harkirat. (Continuum studies in political philosophy)
Continuum Publishing Group, ©2012 234 p. $120.00
Mann (DePaul U., Chicago) examines how economic stratification in
Canada and the US reveals a growing compassion gap between rich and
poor, between capability and disability. The effort to legitimize the with-
drawal of the elite from the civic commons results in the moralization of
advantage and of disadvantage, she says. She attributes the situation to
dominant philosophical approaches to equality that allow the ethical or
teleological conception of justice to separate from the moral-deontological
conceptions of justice and equality. Her topics include Ricoeur’s response
to the moralization of inequality, the sacrificial ethics of constitutive com-
munitarianism, Rawl’s anti-sacrificial ethics for capability justice, and a
genealogy of enfranchisement in the modern welfare state.
JC578 2012-024230 978-3-11-025517-1
Liberal neutrality; treating citizens as free and equal.
Zellentin, Alexa. (Ideen & Argumente)
De Gruyter, ©2012 181 p. $91.00
Based on her PhD dissertation at the Institut für Philosophie, U. of Graz,
Austria, this work by Zellentin takes off from questions posed by per-
ceived challenges of Muslim integration in Germany and other Western
democracies in order to reflect on how liberal democracies should
respond to the challenges of pluralism. Zellentin is particularly con-
cerned with three interrelated issues: how to justify political action
towards citizens with different conceptions of the right and the good,
how the state can treat citizens as equals despite cultural differences,
how to ensure that cultural differences do not translate into political dis-
advantages for minorities, and how to establish and maintain a political
culture that ensures liberal democratic values over time. In response to
these challenges, she proposes a model of liberal neutrality that rests on
a claim to political justice based on Rawls’s conception of society as a
fair system of cooperation among citizens understood as free and equal.
This form of liberal neutrality requires justifying state actions in terms
that citizens can reasonably agree on and that outweigh the right to be
left alone from state involvement. Furthermore, respecting citizens as
equals requires priority for political liberties and sensitivity to cultural
differences. Finally, she argues that liberal neutrality requires com-
mitment to fundamental liberal principles, to democratic procedures,
and to awareness of political difference.
JC578 2011-037474 978-1-4411-9541-8
Perfecting justice in Rawls, Habermas and Honneth; a
deconstructive perspective.
Bankovsky, Miriam. (Continuum studies in political philosophy)
Continuum Publishing Group, ©2012 250 p. $120.00
Bankovsky (politics, La Trobe U., Australia) examines the theories of
justice formulated by John Rawls, Jurgen Habermas and Axel Honneth.
She approaches their claims from about “the art of the possible” from a
deconstructive perspective informed by Jacques Derrida’s own view on
the indeterminability of justice, arguing for the cultivation of decon-
structive civic attitudes. She applauds the political theorists’ commitment
to constructing justice as necessarily possible if worth pursuing at all.
This leads her to consider Rawls on the possibility of “ideal theory” and
“the ‘undecidability’ of the original position procedure,” Habermas on
popular sovereignty and deliberative outcomes, and Honneth on the pos-
sibility and moral implications of mutual recognition. She argues in the
end that “to ascribe a broadly therapeutic function to constructive the-
ories of justice is to overlook their complicity in the reproduction of
injustice.”
JC585 2011-049669 978-1-4128-4608-0
Post-liberalism; the death of a dream.
Fein, Melvyn L.
Transaction Publishers, ©2012 359 p. $39.95
Fein (sociology, Kennesaw State U.) argues without nuance that political
liberalism is in its well-deserved death throes. From talking about hippies
joining hands “to sing Cumbaya” to asserting that there is “no scientific
consensus” that global warming is man-made, he consistently tries to
make his case that liberals are not living in reality. And all the while he
lumps them into a single group that adores the ideas of Karl Marx.
Unfortunately, the use of such divisive language may block the reader
from considering his more interesting ideas, such as the “inverse force
rule” which describes how smaller communities are held together by
stronger forces than large-scale societies.
–112–
JF51 2012-020082 978-0-393-91279-1
Cases in comparative politics, 4th ed.
O’Neil, Patrick H. et al.
W.W. Norton, ©2012 741 p. $59.00 (pa)
This introductory textbook to comparative politics was created by three
political science professors working at University of Puget Sound seeking
a common vocabulary for their students. An introductory chapter frames
the study of comparative politics in terms of nation-states, making this
text unsuitable for the study of anti-statist or direct-action politics. Each
chapter thereafter is a case-study of one of thirteen nation-states: the UK,
USA, France, Russia, China, Germany, Brazil, South Africa, Nigeria,
Mexico, India, Iran, and Japan. Each chapter presents the same categories
of information: why this case study, geography, historical development,
political institutions, branches of government, local and national gov-
ernment, civil society, elections, parties, class and ethnic identities,
political culture, political economy, foreign relations and the world and
current issues. Most of their data is drawn from the CIA World Factbook.
This fourth edition includes through Norton’s website: vocabulary flash-
cards, country review quizzes, and interactive maps.
JF51 2012-020081 978-0-393-91280-7
Essential readings in comparative politics, 4th ed.
Title main entry. Ed. by Patrick H. O’Neil and Ronald Rogowski.
W.W. Norton, ©2013 630 p. $39.00 (pa)
For new students of political science as well as those already familiar
with the subject, this collection of readings attempts to define the core
ideas of comparative politics and is divided into 11 sections: What is
Comparative Politics?, The State, Nations and Society, Political Economy,
Democratic Regimes, Nondemocratic Regimes, Political Violence,
Advanced Democracies, Communism and Postcommunism, Less-
Developed and Newly Industrializing Countries, and Globalization. Each
section includes several essays, often excerpted from academic journals
and presenting complimentary as well as opposing viewpoints. Heavily
partitioned and including many charts and graphs, this book is laid out
as a flexible, easy-to-use textbook appropriate for a variety of educational
environments.
JF251 978-0-85793-272-3
Poor leadership and bad governance; reassessing
presidents and prime ministers in North America, Europe
and Japan.
Title main entry. Ed. by Ludger Helms. (New horizons in leadership
studies)
Edward Elgar Publishing, ©2012 215 p. $110.00
Bringing together the concepts of “leadership” and “governance,” this
volume, edited by Helms (U. of Innsbruck, Austria), contains eight papers
that focus on bad and problematic manifestations of leadership and gov-
ernance in the performance of presidents and prime ministers in the G8
countries from a broad international and historical comparative per-
spective. Each individual contribution focuses on a particular national
system (i.e., the United States, Canada, the United Kingdom, France,
Germany, Italy, Russia, and Japan) and seeks to identify patterns and
relationships between poor leadership (understood as ineffective or inef-
ficient leadership) and bad governance (violative of central norms of
democratic governance and/or producing bad policies.)
JF799 2012-002367 978-1-4094-4430-5
Facebook democracy; the architecture of disclosure and
the threat to public life.
Marichal, José. (Politics & international relations)
Ashgate Publishing Co., ©2012 193 p. $89.95
Calling out Facebook as the quintessential example, Marchal (California
Lutheran U., US) argues that the hyperconnectivity of today’s information
society social networking has made it “increasingly difficult to develop a
contingent self that embraces and exhibits doubt, flexibility and uncer-
tainty about the world around us.” Facebook in particular has created an
“architecture of disclosure” that may connect us more but makes us more
rigid and intransigent in our self-construct. Furthermore, it’s harmful to
democracy because it encourages the development of passive subjects,
unduly privileges voice over listening as a democratic virtue, emphasizes
the performance of political identity over other forms of communication,
undermines privacy, and creates the damaging impression that political
figures should be “friends.”
Assume that all books contain appropriate scholarly paraphernalia. We note if
the book should contain, but lacks, a subject index and/or a bibliography.
–113–
JF1351 978-1-78052-868-7
Institutional reforms in the public sector; what did we
learn?
Baimyrzaeva, Mahabat. (Research in public policy analysis and man-
agement; v.22)
Emerald Group Publishing, ©2012 289 p. $144.95
This work for practitioners and students of institutional change deals
with practical and theoretical issues related to the reform of public
administration institutions. It analyzes lessons from international devel-
opment agencies’ institutional reforms of the past 50 years and analyzes
how such reforms have played out in Kyrgyzstan. The first part of the
book offers an overview of the first, second, and third waves of institu-
tional reforms from the 1950s through the present. Part 2 presents a case
study of Kyrgyzstan’s public sector institutional reforms from 1991 to
2011, and part 3 reviews the existing literature on institutional change
and reform. The last section of the book presents theoretical tools for
reforming public sector institutions. There is no subject index.
Baimyrzaeva is affiliated with the Monterrey Institute of International
Studies at Middlebury College. The book is distributed in North America
by Turpin Distribution.
JF1351 2009-943654 978-1-4390-8623-0
Theories of public organization, 6th ed.
Denhardt, Robert B.
Wadsworth Publishing Co., ©2011 240 p. $122.95 (pa)
Denhardt (public administration, Arizona State U.) introduces public
administration’s organization perspective and reviews several theories of
public administration, the historical shift in theories and new develop-
ments. He stresses the integration of theory and practice, politics and
administration. He is also staunchly committed to public administration
as key to a democratic society. To this end he argues that “public organ-
izations ... may become models for reconstructing organizations of all
types along democratic lines.” His vision for public administration is
grounded in several organizational insights he derives from Karl Marx,
Max Weber, and Sigmund Freud. He offers two major counter-points to
the “rational model of public organization”: New Public Management
and New Public Service, which emphasize policy and service respectively.
Every chapter contains a conclusion, set of discussion questions and
cases, and notes for further reading.
JF1525 2012-019884 978-1-4666-2071-1
Cases on progressions and challenges in ICT utilization
for citizen-centric governance.
Title main entry. Ed. by Hakikur Rahman.
Information Science Reference, ©2013 512 p. $180.00
Contributors in politics, public administration, education, business, infor-
mation, and computers explore ways that information and communi-
cation technology (ICT) might go beyond streamlining government to
transform it into a better process. The topics include the evolution of ICT
institutions in Thailand and Malaysia, citizen-centric service dimensions
of Indian rural electronic governance systems, ICT-supported education
for sustainable development of South Korean rural communities, how to
develop novel electronic services with cooperation between academics
and practitioners, and transformation of the Egyptian National Post
Organization using ICT.
JF1525 2012-015950 978-1-4666-2119-0
E-procurement management for successful electronic
government systems.
Title main entry. Ed. by Patricia Ordóñez de Pablos et al.
Information Science Reference, ©2013 301 p. $180.00
Some from law and public administration, but most from computers and
electronics, contributors explore the possibilities and requirements for
governments to buy products and services online. The topics include elec-
tronic government systems for electronic procurement procedures in the
European Union, business-to-business electronic reverse auctions, prelim-
inary evidence from Malaysia on electronic tax filing, implementing
authentication in an electronic procurement system, and a complex
adaptive system-thinking approach to government electronic procure-
ments in a cloud computing environment.
JF1525 2012-005069 978-1-4666-1909-8
From government to e-governance; public administration
in the digital age.
Title main entry. Ed. by Muhammad Muinul Islam and Mohammad
Ehsan.
Information Science Reference, ©2013 325 p. $180.00
Edited by professors in Bangladesh, this volume explores developments
and challenges in the digital transformation of governance and public
administration in different parts of the world. Seventeen contributions
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
describe the transformative journey from e-government to e-governance,
citizen engagement in non-hierarchic e-governance regimes, and
business-IT alignment in cross-governmental partnerships. Four case
studies report on e-government implementations in Brunei, Bangladesh,
India, and Ghana. The final chapter from Athens University and the
Greek Ministry of Finance reminds the reader that “deadlines are some-
times overrun and budgets exceeded.”
JF1601 2011-051790 978-1-4129-9167-4
Human resource management in public service;
paradoxes, processes, and problems, 4th ed.
Berman, Evan M. et al.
Sage Publications, ©2013 530 p. $89.95
Berman (National Chengchi U., Taipei), Bowman (Florida State U.), West
(U. of Miami) and Van Wart (California State U., San Bernardino)
introduce the legal obligations that government agencies and their
employees must follow and the challenges human resource managers
navigate when recruiting and hiring job applicants in the public sector.
The textbook explores position classification systems, compensation,
workplace trends, training, assessment, and collective bargaining. The
fourth edition adds sections on selection tests, social media recruitment,
and the impact of personal drive.
JF1651 2011-043156 978-0-674-06570-3
Jobs for the boys; patronage and the state in comparative
perspective.
Grindle, Merilee S.
Harvard University Press, ©2012 316 p. $45.00
Grindle (international development, Harvard U.) analyzes ten historical
and contemporary case studies about challenges to patronage systems for
staffing the public service in different countries. His primary concerns
are the motivations of political actors, the political uses of patronage,
strategies adopted by reformers in trying to replace patronage systems,
and the consequences for governance of post-reform contention over the
nature and scope of change, as well as how each of these were shaped
by the particular constraints of specific historical and social contexts. The
case studies include examinations of practices in early modern Western
Europe and Japan and also in Latin America in the 20th and 21st
centuries.
JK275 2012-011254 978-1-60980-407-7
Real common sense; using our founding values to reclaim
our nation and stop the radical right from hijacking
America.
Kahn, Brian.
Seven Stories Press, ©2012 223 p. $14.95 (pa)
Writer and radio-journalist, Brian Kahn, argues that the United States
was founded on radically progressive values that are under threat by
reactionary and conservative forces of commerce and economic domi-
nation. He traces the history of the struggle to affirm these values in
terms of commitments to community and civic engagement, free and
accountable media, checks and balances, conservation, and finding
common ground. Scrutinizing the myths that have been cultivated to
insulate plutocracy and commercial society from criticism, Kahn advo-
cates reasserting conscience, community-grounded autonomy and egali-
tarianism as core American values.
JK421 2011-048766 978-1-58901-916-4
Collaborating to manage; a primer for the public sector.
Agranoff, Robert. (Public management and change series )
Georgetown U. Press, ©2012 270 p. $29.95 (pa)
In this introduction to how collaborative management between the new
‘conductive’ (more externally-focused) public agency and nongovern-
mental organizations is achieving program results, Agranoff (emeritus,
public and environmental affairs, Indiana U.-Bloomington) discusses
management within the sphere of governance, current practices, and
network support structures. The work includes supporting case studies,
figures, tables, and appendices (e.g., on challenges in contract man-
agement, knowledge management activities, and alternative dispute reso-
lution processes). It is based on lectures and papers delivered between
2008 and 2110.
JK511 2012-023290 978-1-60871-908-2
The presidency A to Z, 5th ed.
Peters, Gerhard and John T. Woolley. (American government A to Z)
CQ Press, ©2013 715 p. $125.00
Peters (political science, Citrus College) and Woolley (political science, U.
of California at Santa Barbara), both experts on the presidency, offer a
fifth edition of their encyclopedic-style resource on the history, powers,
and responsibilities of the three branches of U.S. government,
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
congressional and presidential elections, the people involved, and the
Constitution. It also includes an index and reference materials about the
presidents and their backgrounds, elections, cabinet members, and a
bibliography. The updated edition extends coverage to the 2008
presidential election and the 2010 congressional elections, and adds
biographies of presidents Bush and Obama, First Lady Michelle Obama,
and vice president Joe Biden. CQ Press is an imprint of SAGE
Publications.
JK516 2012-023291 978-1-60871-906-8
Guide to the presidency and the executive branch, 5th ed.;
2v.
Nelson, Michael.
CQ Press, ©2013 2141 p. $425.00
This remarkably thorough two-volume reference has been updated to
incorporate the final years of the George W. Bush administration, the
2004 election, and the first three years of Barack Obama’s adminis-
tration. The title has been expanded to reflect a broadened scope that
now includes not just the presidency but the entire executive branch. The
origins and development of the presidency are addressed in the first four
chapters. Following is detailed coverage of the selection and removal of
the president, presidential powers, the public and the parties, and the
organization and functioning of the executive branch. Chapters on the
presidents and their families, life in the White House, and life beyond the
White House are followed by biographies of the presidents, vice presi-
dents, and first ladies.A section of tabular and graphical data gives con-
venient access to a myriad of biographical details and data concerning
political party nominees, party affiliations in Congress, Cabinet
members, and presidential support in Congress over a 60-year period,
among other information. CQ Press is an imprint of SAGE Publications.
JK516 2012-002584 978-0-8133-4721-9
A presidential nation; causes, consequences, and cures.
Genovese, Michael A.
Westview Press, ©2013 238 p. $27.00 (pa)
In theory, at least, the United States is constitutionally designed as a
republic with a limited executive balanced by equal branches of gov-
ernment represented by the Congress and the courts. In practice,
Genovese (political science, Loyola Marymount U.) writes, we have
developed into a presidential nation with a near imperial presidency that
is more closely compared to a monarchy than to a country still holding
to the constitutional power granted the presidency in 1787. He traces the
development of the office from its constitutionally limited origins
through rising presidential power over the course of American history,
with a particular focus on the impact of the September 11th, 2001,
attacks on presidential power. He then considers responses to the issues
of centralized executive power, arguing for a strong and constitutional
presidency that is cognizant of both the constitutional framers’ intent to
have a limited, republican executive as well as contemporary circum-
stances (e.g., US superpower status, the age of terrorism, etc.) that neces-
sitate a strong presidency.
JK524 2011-052884 978-1-4408-0313-0
O.O.P.S.; observing our politicians stumble; the worst
candidate gaffes and recoveries in presidential campaigns.
Frantzich, Stephen.
Praeger, ©2012 249 p. $48.00
Offering both humor and serious analysis, this work for general readers,
students, and those in politics and the media examines gaffes by presi-
dential candidates from 1968 to 2012. Frantzich (political science, US
Naval Academy) explains why some gaffes can destroy a politician’s
chances while others are quickly forgotten, looking at media and public
reactions. Gaffes were selected based on how much difference they
seemed to make to the campaign. Early chapters chart how gaffes evolve
from private mistakes into public embarrassments or disasters. About 40
brief entries describe tactical mistakes and misstatements of presidential
candidates and presidents from George Romney in 1968 to Barack
Obama in 2009. As much as possible, the entries rely on empirical evi-
dence in the form of polls and media coverage. Final chapters reflect on
the role of the media in presidential campaigns and debate whether
gaffes in political debates are distractions or enhancements. The book is
illustrated with b&w photos and political cartoons.
JK721 2012-018805 978-1-58826-851-8
Women & executive office; pathways & performance.
Title main entry. Ed. by Melody Rose.
Lynne Rienner Publishers, Inc., ©2013 301 p. $65.00
Contributors in political science, educational leadership, policy studies,
and women’s studies explore the issues women must confront when
seeking to serve in the executive branch of government. The first part of
–114–
the book concentrates on women’s pathways to federal executive posi-
tions such as the presidency, vice presidency, house speakership, and
presidential appointments, examining women in the Obama adminis-
tration and the vice presidency as the new glass ceiling. Part 2 examines
women in executive office at the state and local levels, discussing how
party and gender affect policy agendas for women governors and high-
lighting factors affecting women’s decisions to run for mayor. Part 3
addresses barriers for women seeking executive office, such as lack of
support among elites, campaign finance issues, and the need to counter
stereotypical roles of female spouses of male executives. A conclusion
defines the future research agenda on women in executive positions. Rose
is affiliated with the Oregon University System.
JK1021 2012-008923 978-1-60426-953-6
Guide to Congress, 7th ed; 2v.
Title main entry.
CQ Press, ©2013 1668 p. $425.00
Now in its seventh edition this estimable reference continues to provide
solid, up-to-date information on the composition, structure, and functions
of Congress as well as details and analyses of recent legislative activities,
trends, personalities, and, yes, the politics of personality and power
underlying how Congress works (and doesn’t work). Presentation is in
two volumes with material organized in a logical manner beginning with
the origins and development of Congress and proceeding to its powers,
procedures, and pressures; housing and support; pay and perquisites; the
electorate; and qualifications and conduct. Extensive appendices include
the Constitution, acts of Congress held unconstitutional, election results
(1860-2010), women members (1917-2011), African American members
(1870-2011), Congressional information on the internet, a map of Capitol
Hill—and many more useful and illuminating lists and documents. CQ
Press is an imprint of SAGE Publications.
JK1118 2012-024334 978-1-60426-469-2
Lobbying and policymaking; the public pursuit of private
interests.
Godwin, Ken et al.
CQ Press, ©2013 258 p. $35.00 (pa)
Writing for undergraduate students and scholars, Godwin (political
science, U. of North Carolina Charlotte) et al. argue that paying attention
to rulemaking institutions and the public provision of private goods
changes the standard picture of lobbying and the policy making process.
They identify when, where, and how special interests influence policy
making and the implications for American democracy, considering what
goals interest organizations seek, what strategies they use, when different
types of interest organizations are most successful in the policy process,
and what factors influence their success or failure. They examine what
interest organizations actually seek from policy makers, showing how
lobbying is not just a struggle among competing interests over highly col-
lective goods; emphasize the regulatory process to reflect the importance
of regulatory agencies in policy making; connect theory to practice; and
present a formal model (the exchange model) reflecting the process. The
book is also organized around a neopluralism approach and uses eight
case studies for illustration and datasets of interviews with lobbyists,
archival data, documents, and other data to compare competing expla-
nations of lobbying influence and to test the model. CQ Press is an
imprint of SAGE Publications.
JK1976 2012-005954 978-0-8014-5085-3
The politics of voter suppression; defending and
expanding Americans’ right to vote.
Wang, Tova Andrea.
Cornell U. Press, ©2012 197 p. $24.95
In this challenge to Republication-led efforts to require people to have
photo identification to be able to vote in the 2012 U.S. presidential
election, Wang (The Century Foundation, New York, NY) advocates the
voter inclusion principle which views voting as a right rather than priv-
ilege. She traces the long history of partisan disenfranchisement schemes
leading to the Civil Rights Movement and Voting Rights Act of 1965, and
recommends specific reforms and citizen actions to promote voter edu-
cation and political participation.
JK1991 2012-024742 978-1-60980-478-7
Billionaires and ballot bandits; how to steal an election in
9 easy steps.
Palast, Greg.
Seven Stories Press, ©2012 300 p. $14.95 (pa)
Palast, an investigative journalist and independent scholar of voter fraud,
presents a light-hearted though serious survey of the various ways that
the electoral system is suppressed or captured by wealth. The brief
chapters touch on forms of voter fraud, postal sabotage, the financial
–115–
backers of various attempts to suppress voter-turnout among key demo-
graphics, how money keeps us locked into a two-party duopoly, and ger-
rymandering. Throughout the book and in dedicated section in the
middle, Ted Rall’s political comics illustrate Palast’s comments. Palast
upholds the political value of voting and recommends several steps to
protect the integrity of your vote. The lack of citations and casual pres-
entation make this more of an introductory than scholarly text.
JK2261 2012-004008 978-0-8133-4600-7
The parties respond; changes in American parties and
campaigns, 5th ed.
Title main entry. Ed. by Mark D. Brewer and L. Sandy Maisel.
(Transforming American politics series)
Westview Press, ©2013 369 p. $36.00 (pa)
While the first edition of this text on party politics in the United States
came at a time when theories of party decline were in the ascendancy,
this fifth edition, edited by Brewer (political science, U. of Maine) and
Maisel (government, Colby College), demonstrates a contrasting emphasis
on party resurgence. Nevertheless, despite the change in emphasis, the
basic topics of party politics in the United States of interest to scholars of
political science and government remain consistent, as is reflected in the
subjects examined in this volume’s 13 chapters: the American political
party system in global comparison, parties and the crafting of electoral
coalitions, ideologies and party polarization, local party viability and
objectives, the dynamics of national parties, the role of parties in the
presidential nominating contests, political parties and campaign finance,
political parties and the media, the role of parties in the congressional
policy process, and the impact of partisan presidential appointments.
JK2391 2011-042885 978-1-4214-0596-4
The Tea Party; a brief history.
Formisano, Ronald P.
Johns Hopkins U. Press, ©2012 143 p. $19.95
The Tea Party plowed its way into American politics in 2009-2010 and
managed to command heavy and immediate influence over the
Republican Party and the political scene. Formisano (American history,
U. of Kentucky) refers to the Tea Party as Tea Parties, an observation
meaning that the organization is a loose cluster of varied groups and not
a unified whole. He explores the origins of the Tea Party, the different
goals of its groups, and the composition of its membership.
JK6141 2012-018077 978-0-8166-8053-5
Minnesota’s miracle; learning from the government that
worked.
Berg, Tom.
U. of Minnesota Press, ©2012 319 p. $22.95 (pa)
Having served in the Minnesota state legislature from 1971 through 1978,
Berg presents an insider’s account of the period, a time when the legis-
lature, controlled the Democratic Party, “began to respond to the legit-
imate concerns of the majority of the people of the state and not just to
the concerns of a handful of powerful special-interest groups,” in Berg’s
estimation. His account examines the electoral politics of the legislature,
the deal-making and compromise involved, the impact of national pol-
itics, the actions and motivations of individual legislatures, and the sub-
stance of the legislative achievements he lauds. He also draws lessons
from the experience for contemporary US politics.
JK9016 2011-052977 978-0-87071-657-7
To the promised land; a history of government and
politics in Oregon.
Marsh, Tom.
Oregon State U. Press, ©2012 508 p. $29.95 (pa)
Author Tom Marsh was a career high school history teacher and a state
legislative representative from eastern Washington County in Oregon. He
has undertaken the massive task of writing the history of Oregon state
politics from its foundation to the present day. The author makes a good-
faith effort to be balanced in his reporting. The book’s greatest strengths
and weaknesses are connected; it is a history of the Oregon state legis-
lature. This approach allows Marsh to acquaint readers with figures like
Oswald West and William U’Ren. Men like these are not well remem-
bered today, but their choices in government set models for national
policy and strongly affect everyday life in Oregon and elsewhere in the
nation. Throughout the book, inset texts describe the lives and work of
such significant figures. The main text discusses every major political
race in the state’s history. But the history of state representation has
rarely been representative. Readers will look in vain for traces of Native
Americans in this Oregon territory. For readers who understand this is
not a history of Oregon but a history of Oregon statehouse politics,
however, Marsh’s book does what it sets out to do: faithfully record the
view from Salem.
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
JL75 978-0-7748-2376-0
Imperfect democracies; the democratic deficit in Canada
and the United States.
Title main entry. Ed. by Patti Tamara Lenard and Richard Simeon.
U. of British Columbia Press, ©2012 350 p. $99.00
Although Canada and the US consistently rank near the top in measure-
ments of democracy, there is a growing dissatisfaction among citizens
and a consistently low voting turnout. Originating in a conference spon-
sored by the Weatherhead Center for International Affairs, this work
looks at the causes of this democratic deficit and possible reforms.
Lenard (applied ethics, U. of Ottawa) and Simeon (political science and
law, U. of Toronto) edit 14 papers that often take a comparative stand-
point, while delving into specific details about each country.
JL1090 2012-015221 978-1-58367-301-0
Paramilitarism and the assault on democracy in Haiti.
Sprague, Jeb.
Monthly Review Press, ©2012 400 p. $23.95 (pa)
Sprague (a doctoral candidate in sociology at the U. of California at Santa
Barbara) investigates the role of paramilitary violence as a tool for
repressing the popular classes of Haiti (the workers, peasants, unem-
ployed, etc. who were not part of Haiti’s elite of large landholders and
big business owners), first laying out the historical context of paramili-
tarism in Haiti in the last quarter of the 20th century and then exploring
in detail the role of paramilitary violence, particularly that of the Front
pour la Libération et la Reconstruction Nationales (FLRN) in over-
throwing the popular democratic administration of Jean-Bertrand
Aristide in 2004 and suppressing his Fanmi Lavalas party. The blame for
the paramilitarism that brought the forces of Aristide low is placed for
the most part at the feet of Haitian elites and US and French govern-
mental forces, although the counterproductive role of the United Nations
is not ignored. This is a valuable contribution to the historiography of
contemporary Haiti and to the understanding of an episode that was
almost uniformly distorted in the US news media that is built on inter-
views conducted within Haiti and US government documents obtained
through the Freedom of Information Act.
JN15 978-3-8329-7167-0
Differentiated integration at work; the institutionalisation
and implementation of opt-outs from European
integration in the area of freedom, security and justice.
Tekin, Funda. (The studies on the European Union series; v.6)
Nomos, ©2012 330 p. $68.00 (pa)
Funda Tekin explores differentiated integration in Europe’s legal archi-
tecture in terms of opt-outing out of the EU and how those translate into
actual living legal decision-making forms. Differentiated integration,
sometimes known as “multi-speed Europe,” is the commitment to dif-
ferent parts of the European Union integrating into the Union at a pace
appropriate to their political situation. This study aims to present fresh
catalog of patterns of differentiated integration “at work,” which is
emphasized to distinguish it from mere intellectual debates to those hap-
pening over actual policy and everyday legal-decisions. Distributed in the
US by ISBS.
JN30 978-3-643-90181-1
The multi-level and polycentric European Union; legal and
political studies.
Title main entry. Ed. by Robert Grzeszczak and Ireneusz Pawel
Karolewski. (Region—nation—Europa; v.69)
LIT Verlag, ©2012 174 p. $44.95 (pa)
Political scientists and law scholars explore how actors at different levels
of the European Union interact interdependently with regard to their
tasks, as they find they need to coordinate their policies in order to fulfill
those tasks. They also consider the polycentric nature of the Union,
where states no longer provide the only interface between supranational
and sub-national arenas. Among their topics are the eastern enlargement
and the multilevel political system of the Union, Selesians as an example
of how the sub-national authorities utilize opportunity structures in the
Union’s multi-level governance, and whether the European citizens’ ini-
tiative is a remedy or placebo. There is no index. Distributed in the US
by ISBS.
JN318 978-0-85724-997-5
Emerging and potential trends in public management; an
age of austerity.
Title main entry. Ed. by John Diamond and Joyce Liddle. (Critical per-
spectives on international public sector management; v.1)
Emerald Group Publishing, ©2012 218 p. $114.95
International contributors in business, social science, and policy studies
offer essays based on practice and research, but also on speculation and
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
analysis. The book begins with an overview of the traditions and
assumptions which have informed contemporary debates within the
fields of public administration and public management. It then looks at
the changing role of business and management schools and considers
different models of organizing and structuring research and teaching.
There is special focus on various public policy initiatives which are
informed by a recognition that existing structures and models of practice
are failing. Several chapters overview trends in public sector management
in Brazil, Greece, Italy, Portugal, Spain, and Australia. There is no subject
index. Diamond teaches business at Edge Hill University, UK. Liddle
teaches business at Teesside University, UK. The book is distributed in
North America by Turpin Distribution.
JN1129 2012-022591 978-1-84467-959-1
Bloody nasty people; the rise of Britain’s far right.
Trilling, Daniel.
Verso, ©2012 234 p. $26.95
Daniel Trilling, assistant editor of The New Statesman and a journalist
who writes regularly about the British political right wing, is the author
of this new book on the rise and fall of the British National Party (often
compared with the US Tea Party). The author looks at how what was
once a Neo-Nazi fringe group became a major player in British conser-
vative politics. The book is divided into two sections, and ends with a
conclusion that sets out ten myths the author has written this book to
refute: that the threat of fascism passed with the BNP’s electoral failure
in 2010, that their rise was the result of “too much” immigration, that
white people in Britain face color discrimination, that anti-immigrant
rhetoric by mainstream politicians keeps the extreme right out of
political office, that opposition to racism is imposed on ordinary people
who don’t want it by a politically-correct elite, that the success of the
extreme right wing in politics means multiculturalism has failed and
racial segregation is the reality, that the extreme right wing was a
problem of the Labour party, that the BNP was not a fascist group but
represented the views of ordinary conservative citizens, and that a fascist
government “can’t happen here.” Trilling is an experienced journalist
who knows his material, gets close to his sources, and writes in a
readable and convincing style. His argument is that the rise of fascism
is the result of political parties on both the left and right putting their
attention on social issues and fears of outside attack rather than the
problems of growing job losses and economic inequity. The book will
interest readers who follow either British or US politics.
JN1129 978-94-6091-815-5
Policy, discourse and rhetoric; how new labour
challenged social justice and democracy
Title main entry. Ed. by Marie Lall. (Educational futures; rethinking
theory and practice; v.52)
Sense Publishers, ©2012 150 p. $49.00 (pa)
Educators, policy analysts, and social and medical workers review the
major shifts in Britain’s education under the New Labour government
between 1997 and 2009. They analyze selected policies in order to artic-
ulate dominant discourses in recent policy-making that have helped
establish a particular hegemony. The historically socialist party chose a
rhetoric heavily influenced by neoliberalism, they argue, which empha-
sizes the role of the free market, the individual as consumers, and the
state as a regulator rather than provider. They say that social justice has
suffered. There is no index.
JQ750 2011-034928 978-1-4128-4736-0
Soldiers and politics in Southeast Asia; civil-military
relations in comparative perspective, 1933-1975. (reprint,
1975)
Hoadley, J. Stephen.
Transaction Publishers, ©2012 307 p. $34.95 (pa)
First published in 1975, this book delves into the role of military officers
in the politics of southeast Asia and offers country-by-country surveys of
civil-military events and comparisons of civil-military relations. Hoadley
(political studies, University of Auckland, New Zealand) advances several
hypotheses on the causes and consequences of military involvement in
politics and tests these hypotheses with statistical data. After an intro-
ductory chapter reviewing trends and approaches to the study of armies
in the politics of developing nations, country chapters look at the situ-
ation in Thailand, Burma, South Vietnam, Indonesia, and Cambodia.
About 60 pages of appendices offer statistics on military expenditures of
Asian nations, military forces in Asia, and US military and economic aid
to Asian nations.
–116–
JQ1499 2011-030946 978-1-4411-5875-8
Governance in Pacific Asia; political economy and
development from Japan to Burma.
Ferdinand, Peter.
Continuum Publishing Group, ©2012 420 p. $120.00
Covering all the states of Pacific Asia from Japan to Myanmar (excluding,
for various reasons, Russia, Mongolia, Australia, and New Zealand), this
book introduces the structure and management of development gover-
nance in the region, adopting a wide definition of “governance” that
includes the role of government alongside that of other non-state actors.
He first sets out background on the emergence of the independent states
of the region and their political cultures. He then examines the concept
of the developmental state and how it manifested in the industrial and
agricultural policies of the various countries. The roles and patterns of
business responses in the region are examined next, with a significant
focus on the financial sector. Social and welfare underpinnings of the
developmental state are then considered, followed by discussion of
political development and the problems associated with transitions to
democracy. Finally, processes of political and social regionalization are
explored before general conclusions are drawn.
JQ1850 2012-021783 978-1-58826-853-2
Beyond the Arab Spring; authoritarianism &
democratization in the Arab world.
Brynen, Rex et al.
Lynne Rienner Publishers, Inc., ©2012 349 p. $68.50
Brynen (political science, McGill U., Canada), Moore (political science,
Case Western Reserve U., US), Salloukh (political science, Lebanese
American U., Lebanon), and Zahar (political science, U. of Montreal,
Canada) take stock of longstanding political issues of the Arab world in
light of the Arab uprisings of 2011 and subsequent events. After pro-
viding a country-by-country review of the political context of the
uprisings, they present eight chapters examining the subjects of political
culture, Islamist movements and democratic politics, electoral politics,
the politics of monarchical liberalization, rentierism and resource pol-
itics, economic liberalization, the Arab media, and the impact of the
regional and international environment.
JQ1850 978-0-86372-454-1
Madmen at the helm; pathology and politics in the Arab
Spring.
Mirak-Weissbach, Muriel.
Ithaca Press, ©2012 163 p. $39.95
Political journalist Mirak-Weissbach argues that the behavior of the Arab
dictators challenged by the events and demands of the so-called “Arab
Spring” can only truly be understood through “a clinical examination of
the psychological personality disorders present” and endeavors to apply
the literature of psycho-historical studies to an analysis of the behaviors
of Ben Ali of Tunisia, Mubarak of Egypt, Saleh of Yemen, Qaddafi of
Libya, and Assad of Syria. In order to carry out the study, she examines
actions, speeches, and public statements of the dictators in light of back-
ground material such as family histories, childhood experiences, and
adult education and training in order to analyze what she calls the
“pathology of power” as it manifested in these five men. She also adds
a postscript on what she sees as the narcissistic pathology of former US
President George W. Bush. Distributed in the US by ISBS.
JV61 2012-029663 978-0-7864-6848-5
Language and culture in the growth of imperialism.
Gu, Sharron.
McFarland & Co., ©2012 305 p. $45.00 (pa)
Gu (international law author and cultural and language researcher) pro-
vides a cultural history of imperialism from ancient to modern times and
focuses, not on political descriptions and analyses, but on the rela-
tionship between imperialism and young and emerging language. In
doing so, the author develops what may be surprising parallels and sim-
ilarities involving religion, language formation, and common character-
istics of cultures that become empires such as similar self image and
worldview, even those empires may have developed centuries apart.
JV6098 2012-938078 978-1-78100-353-4
Migration and economic growth.
Title main entry. Ed. by Mathias Czaika and Carlos Vargas-Silva. (The
international library of studies on migration; v.13)
Edward Elgar Publishing, ©2012 843 p. $465.00
Lack of economic growth is one reason for migration, but how does
immigration affect the receiving country? This collection of previously
published journal papers, written between 1962 and 2010, explores this
–117–
oft debated topic. Czaika and Vargas-Silva, both involved in migration
research at the University of Oxford, provide a 26 page introduction but
leave the articles in their original typefaces. No index is provided.
JV6225 2012-372778 978-0-7453-2905-5
Migration; changing the world.
Arnold, Guy.
Pluto Press, ©2012 282 p. $30.00 (pa)
This is a global survey of contemporary migration and its impacts
around the world that addresses both migration patterns between coun-
tries as well as the massive internal migrations that have characterized
the movement of people in such countries as India and China. Among
the issues addressed by the author as he describes migration patterns
and impacts across the globe are demographic change; replacement
migration as a solution to population decline and aging; attitudes
towards migrants; migration and global North-South relations; migration
and globalization; state and international migration policies; refugees; the
International Labour Organization; race, immigration, and economics;
people trafficking and abuse; and remittances. Practically every region of
the world is covered, some in more detail than others. Distributed in the
US by Palgrave Macmillan.
JV6346 2012-013811 978-0-313-37807-2
Refugees worldwide; 4v.
Title main entry. Ed. by Doreen Elliott and Uma A. Segal.
Praeger, ©2012 1414 p. $215.00
Each volume in this four-volume reference contains 11 or 12 essays per-
taining to a theme: A Global Perspective (v.1); Refugee Health (v.2); Mental
Health (v.3); and Law, Policy, and Programs (v.4). Editors Elliott (social
work, U. or Texas at Arlington) and Segal (social work, U. of Missouri,
St. Louis) have brought together contributions from passionately involved
practitioners affiliated with various agencies as well as dedicated
scholars of sociology, psychology, anthropology, psychiatry, and political
science. The audience for this reference will be equally wide, including
students and others seeking general information or a starting point for
research. A sampling of topics: environmental change and migration,
ethnic identities and political boundaries, torture, trauma, infectious dis-
eases, cultural influences on health, international health regulations and
global reporting laws, social policy, social work, and resettlement law.
Each volume begins with the editors’ introductory essay, which is fol-
lowed by a chapter that gives voice to the experiences of individual
refugees as a means of personalizing the issues. The full index for the set
is included in each volume.
JV6350 2011-032283 978-1-84519-503-8
Exile and the politics of exclusion in the Americas.
Title main entry. Ed. by Luis Roniger et al. (New historical and compar-
ative perspectives on Latin America; society, politics, and culture)
Sussex Academic Press, ©2012 378 p. $84.95
Roniger (Latin American studies, Wake Forest U., US), Green (Brazilian
history and culture, Brown U., US) and Yankelevich (National School of
Anthropology, Mexico) present 18 chapters examining patterns of
exclusion and inclusion in the Americas, with a focus on the issues of
political exile and the dynamics of forced displacement. They begin with
historical and comparative perspectives, discussing exile in the Andean
countries, representations of exile in Argentine history, African
Americans in Brazil, and Central European Jewish refugees in the
Dominican Republic during World War II. The focus then switches to the
Cold War era in chapters that discuss US expatriates fleeing from
McCarthyism to Mexico, Cuban exiles in the US and the politics of immi-
gration, Chilean political exile, Brazilian exiles in the United States and
the formation of a human rights discourse for Latin America, and exiles
and the Argentine diaspora. The final six chapters address exile and the
reconstruction of politics and identities. Distributed in the US by ISBS.
JV7590 2012-012225 978-1-59558-685-8
Fortress Europe; dispatches from a gated continent.
Carr, Matthew.
The New Press, ©2012 279 p. $27.95
This is a journalistic tour of “Fortress Europe,” the Europe that has
deployed an increasingly harsh system of deterrence and repression
against a growing population of international migrants seeking shelter.
The author contrasts the human rights proclamations of Europe’s treaties
and founding documents with its treatment of irregular immigrants and
builds his narrative on interviews with European policymakers, those
tasked with enforcing the boundaries against the tide of immigration,
immigrant rights activists, and migrants themselves across the breadth
of European physical, legal, and political spaces of migrant boundaries.
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
JV8010 2012-008042 978-90-04-22349-3
Transnational networks; German migrants in the British
Empire, 1670-1914.
Title main entry. Ed. by John R. Davis, Stefan Manz and Margrit
Schulte Beerbühl.
BRILL, ©2012 187 p. $122.00
Edited by Davis (history and international relations, Kingston U.,
England), Manz (German, Aston U., England), and Beerbühl (modern
history, Düsseldorf U., Germany), this volume examines German transna-
tional network creation within the structures of the British Empire over
the course of two centuries (German migrants and transmigrants being
one of the largest immigrant groups of non-British white Europeans in
the Empire). The focus on transnational links both expands on the mostly
local and regional histories that have been written about German
migrants in the British Empire and further shifts the scope beyond the
general focus on German migrants in North America that is found in the
literature. It also demonstrates the ways in which Germans contributed
to the British imperial project and raises questions about the
“Britishness” of the British Empire. Eight case studies are presented,
which examine different social and economic categories of migrants; a
variety of economic, political, intellectual, cultural, and social themes;
and geographical locations in Germany, Britain, and across the British
colonies.
JX1904 49-22132 978-90-04-23174-0
Yearbook of international organizations 2012-2013; guide
to global civil society networks, 49th ed.; v.4:
International organizations bibliography and resources.
Title main entry. Ed. by Union of International Associations.
BRILL, ©2012 694 p. $319.00
Presented by the Union of International Associations, this reference con-
tains comprehensive coverage of non-profit non-governmental and inter-
governmental international organizations, focusing in this volume on
about 46,000 publications and 17,000 research citations from the organi-
zations and a bibliography of resources on the history and practice of
transnational organization. The listing of publications is based on organ-
ization descriptions from volume one of the yearbook; they are listed in
alphabetical order by organization, then by title. This is followed by the
bibliography of sources on transnational organization, listed in broad
subject categories, then by alphabetical order by author, ending with a
lengthy general index.
JZ1242 2011-052825 978-0-8133-4588-8
International studies; an interdisciplinary approach to
global issues, 2d ed.
Anderson, Sheldon et al.
Westview Press, ©2013 474 p. $55.00 (pa)
A multidisciplinary group of editors (affiliated variously with Miami U.
and the U. of New England) present an undergraduate-level interdisci-
plinary introduction to international studies. The interdisciplinary nature
of the topic is reinforced through the presentation of opening chapters
addressing historical, geographical, anthropological, economic, and
political science approaches. Regional issues are then discussed in
chapters devoted to Europe, East Asia, South and Central Asia, Africa, the
Middle East, and Latin America (topically guided by issues that are con-
textually chosen and don’t attempt any thematic unity). A final set of
chapters examine select contemporary issues, including international ter-
rorism, Turkey and its relation the European Union, tourism along the
Silk Road, the partition of Sudan, and the implications of global popu-
lation projections.
JZ1242 2012-027834 978-0-393-91238-8
World politics; interests, interactions, institutions, 2d ed.
Frieden, Jeffry A. et al.
W.W. Norton, ©2013 622 p. $81.00 (pa)
This undergraduate textbook offers visual appeal with color photos,
charts, maps, and margin notes on every page. The textbook is organized
around a framework that asks: Who are the relevant actors and what do
they want? How do they interact? And how do institutions constrain
these actors’ interactions? An introduction touches on traditional para-
digms based on realism, liberalism, and constructivism, but the rest of
the book does not refer to those paradigms. After historical background,
the text is divided into sections on war and peace, international political
economy, transnational politics, and the future of international politics.
Boxed features shed light on history, controversies, and current research.
A companion website contains interactive study tools, BBC and New York
Times news links, and simulations that allow students to work with the-
oretical models. Frieden is affiliated with Harvard University.
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
JZ1308 2012-004641 978-1-61205-079-9
Thinking differently about cosmopolitanism; theory,
eccentricity, and the globalized world.
Papastephanou, Marianna. (Interventions; education, philosophy, and
culture)
Paradigm Publishers, ©2012 263 p. $105.00
Papastephanou (philosophy of education, U. of Cyprus) asserts that a
new conception of cosmopolitanism is needed that “decenters the self,
cultivates centrifugal virtues, and questions the inflated concern for a
globally enriched self.” She argues that diverse but incompatible under-
standings of cosmopolitanism plague academia, many failing to let go of
modernist baggage (e.g. toxic universalism, Eurocentrism, developmen-
talism) and thereby producing false dilemmas. She claims that if cos-
mopolitanism is typically conceived in terms of external borders (e.g.
walls, checkpoints, frontiers) that we must understand that internal
boundaries of the self are what must be traversed if we are to cultivate
a worthy ethico-political praxis. In later chapters she shows how patri-
otism and cosmopolitanism can complement one another.
JZ1318 2012-382266 978-1-4129-3493-0
Globalization, institutions & governance.
Caporaso, James A. and Mary Anne Madeira. (Sage series on the foun-
dations of international relations)
Sage Publications, ©2012 190 p. $43.00 (pa)
The authors (both professors of political science at the U. of Washington)
provide an overview of economic, political, and cultural developments
associated with contemporary globalization, addressing various ques-
tions concerning the significance of borders, the challenges to pursuing
national policies in a globalized world, and the institutions of global gov-
ernance. Chapters discuss different theoretical approach to globalization,
the role of domestic institutions in adapting to and shaping globalization,
the role of the World Bank and the International Monetary Fund in the
global economy, and the winners and losers of globalization.
JZ1318 2012-008919 978-1-60871-742-2
Introducing globalization; analysis and readings.
Title main entry. Ed. by Richard W. Mansbach and Edward Rhodes.
CQ Press, ©2013 380 p. $53.00 (pa)
A collection of relatively short readings, many of which first appeared in
newspapers, this volume provides a broad overview of globalization and
is intended for undergraduate students. The editors, Mansbach (political
science, Iowa State U.) and Rhodes (public policy, George Mason U.)
group the readings into 14 chapters ranging from the origins of global-
ization to its possible future. No index is provided. CQ Press is an imprint
of SAGE Publications.
JZ1318 2012-009482 978-0-8133-4669-4
Sociology of globalization; cultures, economies, and
politics.
Title main entry. Ed. by Keri E. Iyall Smith.
Westview Press, ©2013 372 p. $47.00 (pa)
This collection of over two dozen readings of separately produced essays
introduces major areas of interest for understanding globalization socio-
logically. The first few essays introduce globalization as a phenomenon
and situate it in the new millennium. Subsequent sections are organized
around culture, economy, and politics. They each are bracketed by an
editorial introduction and section on “ancillary materials” that include
website links, films, music, and class-room activity suggestions. Specific
essays consider globalization as hybridization, fundamentalist Islam
against the liberal West, identity politics as a response to globalization,
the tension between ending crisis and ending capitalism altogether,
global class formation and transnational class, fundamentals of free-
trade agreements, Chinese manufacturing in the global context, human
rights and humanitarian intervention, and building a global community.
The readings are selected from scholarly, journalistic, and theoretical
sources.
JZ1318 2012-021092 978-90-04-22961-7
Theorizing globalization; a critique of the mediatization
of social theory.
Ampuja, Marko. (Studies in critical social sciences; v.47)
BRILL, ©2012 410 p. $179.00
Arguing that the theories of Western globalization theorists that have
emphasized the importance of changes in media and communications
for global social and cultural life are more than just components of glob-
alization theory but in fact form the very foundation upon which glob-
alization theorists have built their entire edifice and the challenge to
social theory that is based in the ambiguously-defined determinative
nature of globalization towards a “cosmopolitan democracy” beyond the
sovereignty of nation-states, Ampuja (social research, U. of Helsinki,
–118–
Finland) begs to differ, contending that such grand pronouncements are
undermined by a lack of historical reflection in globalization theory lit-
erature. Such historical reflection, he notes, reveals that the positivist tele-
ology of globalization theory’s contentions about media and
communications have many earlier precedents in the claims of Western
intellectuals in the late 19th and early 20th centuries about earlier global
flows of communications (and transport and capital). It also fails to
account for the ways in which structures of media and communications
are implicated in the hierarchies and tensions of the international state
system as well as the power of capital to determine the nature of media
and communications. From this general perspective, he critiques the key
works of four selected globalization theorists—Manuel Castells, Scott
Lash, John Tomlinson, and Arjun Appadurai—in order to demonstrate
the shortcomings of globalization theory in general and its treatment of
the transformative nature of media and communications in particular.
JZ1480 2012-002424 978-1-4411-1044-2
Enemies of the American way; identity and presidential
foreign policymaking.
Mislan, David Bell.
Continuum Publishing Group, ©2012 228 p. $120.00
Identifying the definition of threat as a key determinant of presidential
foreign policy formulation, Mislan (US foreign policy, American U. in
Washington, DC) presents a theory of “rule-based identity” policy-making
that posits that “a president’s American way [understood in different
ways by different presidents according to their in-group identifications]
defines the population of potential threats, which constrains his threat
identification in a particular manner that differs between presidents.” He
tests this hypothesis through case studies of the foreign policy, rule-based
identities, and threat identifications in the Gilded Age presidencies of
Grover Cleveland, William Henry Harrison, and William McKinley.
JZ1480 2012-008768 978-0-313-39228-3
The national security doctrines of the American
presidency; how they shape our present and future; 2v.
Colucci, Lamont.
Praeger, ©2012 805 p. $189.00
Colucci (politics and government, Ripon College) emphasizes in his initial
overview chapter that the national security doctrines of each adminis-
tration arise primarily from the president’s philosophy and world
outlook. In subsequent chapters he explores the doctrines of 16 adminis-
trations, offering detailed analyses, background, and opinions in a nar-
rative that is accessible to a general readership. Coverage includes the
administrations of Washington, Monroe, Polk, Lincoln Roosevelt, Wilson,
Hoover, FDR, Truman, Eisenhower, Nixon, Carter, Reagan, Clinton, Bush,
and Obama. Discussion encompasses a wide range of topics pertaining
to national security, with investigation of the multiple sources and ideo-
logical underpinnings manifested in each president’s activities. The pres-
entation is in two volumes, each with its own appendix of relevant
primary documents.
JZ1582 978-3-643-90191-0
Austria (-Hungary) and its consulates in the United States
of America since 1820; “Our nationals settling here count
by the millions now...”.
Agstner, Rudolf. (Forschungen zur geschichte des österreichischen
Auswärtigen dienstes; v.4)
LIT Verlag, ©2012 389 p. $59.95 (pa)
Himself an Austrian diplomat and former ambassador, Agstner is a his-
torian of the Austrian and Austro-Hungarian foreign service in the
Middle East and East Africa. Here he applies his expertise to the other
side of the planet, exploring the interrelationship between Austrian immi-
gration and consular services in the US from the days of the Austrian
Empire/Austro-Hungarian Monarchy in the 1800s to the present-day
Republic of Austria. Among the stages of the history are a story of benign
neglect 1776-1820, the first 50 years of the consular network, the impact
of increasing immigration and re-emigration on the consular organi-
zation in the US and Europe 1900-14, and the Second Austrian Republic
and its consular network since 1947. There is no chapter covering World
War II. Distributed in the US by ISBS.
JZ1648 978-3-8329-6597-6
Towards open regionalism in South East Europe.
Title main entry. Ed. by Paul Stubbs and Christophe Solioz. (Southeast
European integration perspectives)
Nomos, ©2012 225 p. $43.00 (pa)
Building upon the previous Regional Cooperation in South East Europe and
Beyond: Challenges and Prospects, this volume switches the focus from the
political relationships between nation states and supranational organiza-
tions to questions concerning the multi-level processes of region building
–119–
in different thematic settings while also attempting to bring in more mul-
tidisciplinary and methodologically diverse perspectives. Presented by
Stubbs (Institute of Economics, Croatia) and Solioz (Secretary General of
the Center for European Integration Strategies), the volume’s nine
chapters discuss such topics as social networks and anti-war activism;
dynamics of regional co-operation in trade, energy, and justice; cultural
factors of economic integration; the role of networks in constituting the
South East European cultural space; the clash between fluid identity and
ethnic mixing in borderlands and the ethnic conceptions and practices
of dominant political elites; the institutional regional responses to
organized crime; and the relation of film production to hegemonic and
counter-hegemonic narratives in Yugoslavia and its successor states.
Distributed in the US by ISBS.
JZ1734 2012-015613 978-1-4094-2270-9
The Ashgate research companion to Chinese foreign
policy.
Title main entry. Ed. by Emilian Kavalski. (Rethinking Asia and inter-
national relations.)
Ashgate Publishing Co., ©2012 481 p. $154.95
Edited by Kavalski (politics and international relations, U. of Western
Sydney, Australia), this volume provides an analytically eclectic explo-
ration of China’s foreign policy while maintaining a certain unity of
approach by having each individual chapter include treatment of the his-
torical evolution of the particular topic, consideration of the main themes
of the particular dynamics under question (sometimes by consideration
of case studies), and analysis of the future trajectories of Chinese foreign
policy in light of the foregoing. Thirty-one chapters are organized into
six parts focusing in turn on: historical and analytical perspectives on
China’s external outlook, the domestic sources of Chinese foreign policy,
the international impact of Chinese outreach, bilateral relations between
China and other countries, China’s regional strategies, and outstanding
issues in China’s foreign policy (e.g., peacekeeping operations, climate
policy, Tibet, transnational social movements, Internet policy, and outer
space).
JZ1980 2012-930624 978-1-78100-446-3
The Asia-Pacific, regionalism and the global system.
Title main entry. Ed. by Christopher M. Dent and Jörn Dosch.
Edward Elgar Publishing, ©2012 289 p. $135.00
Sixteen chapters explore issues of regional governance, integration, and
international affairs within and across the Asia-Pacific region and the
impact and influence of Asia-Pacific developments for global governance.
The editors (both of the U. of Leeds, England) organize the contributions
into sections on regional and global perspectives on economic integration,
issues of regional and global multilateralism in the Asia-Pacific, the
impact of East Asian (especially Chinese) developments on global affairs,
and societal perspectives. Specific topics include the role of Japanese
foreign direct investment on production networks in Mexico; the place of
North America in Asia-Pacific regionalism; relationships of influence
between the Group of 20 and Asia; Asia-Pacific multilateral organizations
and the global economic downturn; intra-regional geopolitical dynamics
in Northeast Asia; lessons for the region from China’s developmental
experience; comparative experiences of Chinese, Japanese, and Korean
official development assistance; and regional policy implications of
China’s move to high-tech innovation.
JZ5538 978-1-4411-6022-5
Local peacebuilding and national peace; interaction
between grassroots and elite processes.
Title main entry. Ed. by Christopher R. Mitchell and Landon E.
Hancock.
Continuum Publishing Group, ©2012 183 p. $29.95 (pa)
The essays in this collection examine efforts by local people to stop long,
violent conflicts and wars with local combatants and how those efforts
have influenced and are influenced by national efforts to achieve the
same result in regions such as Africa, Asia, and South America. The
essays focus on recent examples of those efforts as well as theories on
reaching peace agreements at the local and national levels. Editors are
Mitchell (emeritus, conflict analysis and resolution, George Mason U.)
and Hancock (conflict management and political science, Kent State U.).
JZ5687 2012-036052 978-0-8157-2429-2
The opportunity; next steps in reducing nuclear arms.
Pifer, Steven and Michael E. O’Hanlon. (Brookings focus books)
Brookings Institution Press, ©2012 242 p. $24.95
This book explores some of the key questions on nuclear arms that the
incoming 2012 administration must consider regarding nuclear arms
control. The book begins by examining past and current nuclear policy,
then focuses on possible steps to reduce and control strategic nuclear
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
forces beyond those enforced through the New Strategic Arms Reduction
Treaty (New START). It also discusses issues associated with the
Comprehensive Nuclear Test Ban Treaty, considers questions surrounding
a possible ban on the production of fissile material, and explores the
potential for the multilateralization of the nuclear arms reduction
process. The book’s final chapter summarizes recommendations and
describes how actions taken by the US administration in 2013-2017 could
create a more secure world. Pifer and O’Hanlon are senior fellows in
foreign policy at the Brookings Institution.
JZ6005 2011-051795 978-1-58901-922-5
Conflict and cooperation in the global commons; a
comprehensive approach for international security.
Title main entry. Ed. by Scott Jasper.
Georgetown U. Press, ©2012 260 p. $29.95 (pa)
Thirteen chapters, presented by Jasper (Center for Civil-Military Relations,
US Naval Postgraduate School), take stock of the intertwined roles of the
military, civil, and commercial spheres in managing conflict and coop-
eration in the “global commons” of maritime, air, space, and cyber
domains, largely approaching the subject from the perspective of the US
national security apparatus. The papers are organized into sections that
address the broad theoretical contours of security dynamics in the global
commons, types of conflict and types of cooperation in the global
commons, institutional mechanisms for approaching issues of the
commons, and the importance of working towards behavioral norms in
the commons.
JZ6045 978-0-8203-4315-0
Unfinished business; why international negotiations fail.
Title main entry. Ed. by Guy Olivier Faure with Franz Cede. (Studies in
security and international affairs.)
U. of Georgia Press, ©2012 451 p. $24.95 (pa)
With most case studies analyzing causal factors in negotiations focusing
on successes, the lessons that social science might learn from studying
failed negotiations are largely overlooked. Edited by Faure (sociology, U.
of Paris-Sorbonne, France), this volume fills the lacuna, presenting case
studies of failures—with failure defined as “a discrete negotiation round
convened for achieving an agreement but instead breaking up in con-
tinued disagreement”—focusing on process, actors, structures, and
strategies as the key factors determining outcomes. These identified
factors guide the structure of the volume, which first presents case study
examinations of negotiations involving the UN Security Council and Iraq
before the US-led invasion; the Camp David negotiations involving Israel
and Palestine; nuclear negotiations between Iran, the European Union,
and the United States; negotiations over the conflict in Cyprus; the
Biological Weapons Convention; the 1830-1833 London Conference on the
Status of Belgium; and hostage negotiations at the 1993 Waco siege and
the 1972 Munich Olympics. The remaining chapters build upon the case
studies in their analysis of cross-case issues associated with actors, struc-
tures, strategies, and process, with each factor discussed in a separate
section. Concluding chapters draw out overarching lessons for theory and
for practice.
LAW
K129 2012-010771 978-1-61233-009-9
Essential knowledge and management issues in law
firms.
Apistola, Martin and Petter Gottschalk.
Universal Publishers, ©2012 308 p. $32.95 (pa)
Apistola (U. of Applied Sciences, the Netherlands) and Gottschalk
(Norwegian School of Management) provide advice on knowledge man-
agement issues and processes in law firms. They define the field of
knowledge management, discuss organizational aspects such as firm
maturity, examine the roles of objective and strategy, address the place
of clients in the knowledge management framework, consider the impact
of organizational culture, describe knowledge processes and supporting
information technology, and discuss structures of knowledge man-
agement support in law firms.
K129 2012-010769 978-1-61233-102-7
Practical strategies for effective law firm knowledge
management.
Title main entry. Ed. by Martin Apistola.
Universal Publishers, ©2012 119 p. $25.95 (pa)
Apistola (knowledge management in law practice, U. of Applied Sciences,
the Netherlands) compiles six essays that address the current state of
knowledge management in law firms in the Netherlands, Sweden, Spain,
the UK, and the US. Contributors working at firms in these countries
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
discuss how firms can be supported by knowledge management, and
how the legal market is changing, the impact of new legal service
providers on firms, and how knowledge management is important to
their future survival; knowledge management strategies and models to
support the business of firms, including organizational strategies to
create a knowledge sharing culture and business support; how to develop
an individualized strategy to articulate priorities and expected business
benefits, and create plans of action; case studies of firms; and knowledge
sharing, including the use of LinkedIn. No index is provided.
K230 2012-025898 978-1-61163-311-5
Jurisprudence; theory and context, 6th ed.
Bix, Brian.
Carolina Academic Press, ©2012 342 p. $40.00 (pa)
Bix (law and philosophy, U. of Minnesota) presents a textbook on the
problems of jurisprudence that is intended to serve as both introduction
to and commentary on the primary texts of the subject. Focused pri-
marily on practices in the American and English legal systems, the text
offers 22 chapters grouped into thematic sections covering introductory
topics of theory and methodology; theoretical schools, including legal
positivism, the pure theory of law, natural law theory, and Ronald
Dworkin’s interpretive approach; thematic subjects such as justice, pun-
ishment, rights and rights talk, will and reason, authority and finality,
common law reasoning and precedent, statutory interpretation and leg-
islative intention, legal enforcement of morality, and the obligation to
obey the law; and modern perspectives on legal theory, including
American legal realism, economic analysis of law, modern critical per-
spectives, law and literature, philosophical foundations of the common
law, and other approaches. Suggestions for further reading are included
throughout. While this new edition is billed as expanded and updated,
no explanation of specific changes has been provided.
K370 978-1-78052-870-0
Special issue; the discourse of judging.
Title main entry. Ed. by Austin Sarat. (Studies in law, politics, and
society; v.58)
Emerald Group Publishing, ©2012 157 p. $124.95
Six essays by scholars of politics and literature focus on the language
used in legal judgments in the US, with a comparison to Europe. They
cover public reason and the counter-majoritarian difficulty, recovering
the Pritchett synthesis, judicial retention and same-sex marriage rulings,
Kentucky’s constitutional crisis and the many meanings of judicial inde-
pendence, reading A Jury of Her Peers and “The Problem of Judgment”
in Procedure, and discourses of judging in the European Union. There is
no index. Distributed in North America by Turpin Distribution.
K370 978-1-78190-343-8
Special issue; the legacy of Stuart Scheingold.
Title main entry. Ed. by Austin Sarat. (Studies in law, politics, and
society; v.59)
Emerald Group Publishing, ©2012 231 p. $124.95
Political scientists and law scholars explore the legacy of their former
teacher and colleague Scheingold, who died in June 2010 at age 78. Some
comment on his work and others take up and extend themes he
developed. The topics include the myth of the myth of rights, novelty and
the politics of rights, phantom racism and the myth of crime and pun-
ishment, the political novel and animal rights, and a socio-legal critique
of the neoconservative case against rights. The anthology is not indexed.
Distributed in North America by Turpin Distribution.
K487 978-1-78052-898-4
Research in law and economics.
Title main entry. Ed. by Richard O. Zerbe and John B. Kirkwood.
(Research in law and economics; v.25)
Emerald Group Publishing, ©2012 233 p. $114.95
Edited by Zerbe (U. of Washington) and Kirkwood (Seattle U.), this 25th
volume of the Research in Law and Economics series brings together
work by an international group of scholars on a variety of topics. These
include application of accounting profits and Ricardian rents to antitrust
enforcement, resource distribution in a double lawsuit, the economics of
contract interpretation, foreign exchange regulations and pharmaceutical
sector research and development in India, the use of transaction cost eco-
nomics for choosing between environmental regulatory instruments, and
economic analysis of allegations in cigarette litigations and the impact of
Federal Trade Commission regulation. Distributed in North America by
Turpin Distribution.
–120–
K559 2012-930573 978-1-84980-252-9
Methods of comparative law.
Title main entry. Ed. by Pier Giuseppe Monateri. (Research handbooks
in comparative law)
Edward Elgar Publishing, ©2012 325 p. $195.00
The primary goal of this research handbook, edited by Monateri (law, U.
of Turin, Italy), is to highlight new methodology models that have
recently moved to the center in the field of comparative law, while the
contents of the opening chapters demonstrate a secondary goal of
offering critical perspectives on classical theories and perspective on com-
parative methodologies. The first seven chapters devote themselves to dis-
cussion of the role of methods in law and the critique of classical
approaches. The remaining nine chapters are presented in sections that
consider distortions of cultural bias and claims to scientific truth in legal
transplants and transnational codes; issues of space, boundaries, and
jurisdictions; legal narratives, judicial interpretations, and subversive
paradigms; and comparative law and economics approaches that take
into account political economies and the inner policies of law.
K564 2012-930582 978-0-85793-133-7
Transnational culture in the Internet age.
Title main entry. Ed. by Sean A. Pager and Adam Candeub. (Elgar law,
technology and society)
Edward Elgar Publishing, ©2012 430 p. $150.00
The editors (both of the Michigan State U. College of Law) present 17
chapters addressing neglected and emerging issues of the regulation of
cultural production and distribution in the digital age. Topics include the
implications of cloud computing for copyright control, the media
diversity potential of “long-tail markets” that exploit the reduced mar-
ginal costs of adding content, the ability of digital technologies to cul-
turally unify diasporic communities such as Jamaican musical
producers, issues of overlapping jurisdiction in the context of libel
tourism, threats to free speech arising from jurisdictional convergence in
the area of libel, strategies utilized by nation states to censor online
content, the nature of constitutional rights in the private digital sphere,
and the ways in which indigenous communities bend to technologies to
their own needs.
K564 2012-935286 978-1-84980-932-0
Virtual economies and financial crime; money laundering
in cyberspace.
Chambers-Jones, Clare.
Edward Elgar Publishing, ©2012 235 p. $125.00
Chambers-Jones (U. of West of England) presents a social and economic
exploration of financial crime in virtual online worlds, insisting that such
crimes should be seen to fall under real world legal remit. She presents
an approach to developing real world legal measures for the prevention,
detection, and prosecution of virtual world crime. With the virtual world
of Second Life serving as a case study, she describes virtual economies
and their connections to the real world economy and presents a series of
case studies of virtual financial crimes. She then considers current legal
frameworks for confronting financial crime and discusses how they can
be adapted to deal with virtual financial crime.
K1003 2012-357302 978-90-411-2527-9
Basic documents on international trade law, 4th ed.
Title main entry. Ed. by Chia-Jui Cheng.
Wolters Kluwer Law & Business, ©2012 1692 p. $297.00 (pa)
This collection of documents reveals the harmonization process in the
area of international trade law and demonstrates the international
business community’s willingness to accept international regulations.
After a section on the concept, nature, and development of international
trade law, the next three sections describe the law of the international
sale of goods, international transport, and international insurance.
Subsequent sections treat international intellectual property law, conflicts
of law in international trade, and the system of extrajudicial dispute set-
tlement in international trade law. Reflecting recent developments since
the third edition was published in 1999, this fourth edition adds new
documents and a list of resources for research on international trade law.
An expanded bibliography groups books and articles by 11 languages,
making this edition the first reference on international trade law to
include major Chinese works. This edition also contains new sources of
international trade law derived from periodicals and the Internet, and
includes a new list of international treaties and other instruments of
international trade law. Editor Cheng is affiliated with Soochow
University School of Law. Aspen Publishers is now Wolters Kluwer Law
& Business.
–121–
K1028 2012-419068 978-90-411-4024-1
Convention on Contracts for the International Sale of
Goods (CISG).
Lookofsky, Joseph.
Wolters Kluwer Law & Business, ©2012 224 p. $103.00 (pa)
Lookofsky (law, U. of Copenhagen, Denmark) offers a background,
overview, and details of the Convention on Contracts for the International
Sale of Goods (CISG), the first international sales treaty to become estab-
lished and accepted worldwide. Section headings include convention
scope and general provisions; sales contract formation; obligations, risks,
and remedies, and final provisions. Specific topics include determining
when the CISG has jurisdiction, interpretation, liability and remedies,
and damages. Aspen Publishers is now Wolters Kluwer Law & Business.
K1030 2012-382575 978-0-314-15278-7
International sales law; a problem-oriented coursebook,
2d ed.
Spanogle, John A. and Peter Winship. (American casebook series)
West, ©2012 384 p. $147.00
Placing hypothetical problems for analysis at the heart of their
coursebook, Spanogle (law, George Washington U.) and Winship (law,
Southern Methodist U.) introduce the law of international sales transac-
tions, with a focus on the United Nations Sales Convention. They offer six
chapters covering introductory materials, sphere of application of the
United Nations Sales Convention, formation of the sales contract, per-
formance of the contract, non-judicial remedies, and judicial remedies.
K1066 2009-940996 978-1-84542-270-7
Research handbook on international financial regulation.
Title main entry. Ed. by Kern Alexander and Rahul Dhumale.
Edward Elgar Publishing, ©2012 458 p. $245.00
Twenty papers, presented by Alexander (law and finance, U. of Zurich,
Switzerland) and Dhumale (managing director of risk control at UBS,
UK), take stock of how international financial markets and institutions
have changed over the past three decades and analyze the role of law and
regulation in responding to those changes. A key theme of the volume is
that law and regulation have not responded adequately to changes in the
financial markets, allowing private parties to reap great profits from
private risk-taking while socializing the losses. The contributions are pre-
sented in five sections that analyze the changing structure of global
financial markets involving the disintermediation of banks and how
regulatory failure sowed the seeds of the global credit and financial
crisis; bank capital adequacy regulation and its effect on bank behavior,
together with the risk measurement approaches under Basel I and II and
the challenges they pose for bank governance and regulation; the inter-
relationship between European institutions and the growing integration
of European financial markets; central clearing of derivatives; and the
interaction between regulatory institutions and markets and the deter-
minants of the institutional design of financial supervision and interna-
tional financial institutions such as the International Monetary Fund.
K1114 2012-470250 978-90-411-3602-2
International survey of investment adviser regulation, 3d
ed.
Title main entry. Ed. by Marcia L. MacHarg and Kenneth J. Berman.
Wolters Kluwer Law & Business, ©2012 1211 p. $338.00
This reference for those in the global investment management industry
begins with an overview of key regulatory developments in regions
around the world since the year 2000, then presents 40 country chapters
explaining the laws and regulations related to law advisors in 39 coun-
tries and the EU. Focus is on entities or individuals providing investment
advisory services, such as investment advice or portfolio management,
whether discretionary or non-discretionary, and no matter how rendered.
Each country chapter contains sections offering overviews of regulatory
structure, the registration process, and substantive regulation; these sec-
tions allow readers to easily compare the law in different countries. A
number of countries are included for the first time in this third edition.
This edition reflects the emergence of laws on the use of the Internet,
data protection, and consumer privacy, and also reflects the current
trend toward increased regulation of the financial services industry.
MacHarg and Berman are affiliated with the Investment Management
Group of Debevoise & Plimpton LLP. Aspen Publishers is now Wolters
Kluwer Law & Business.
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
K1168 2012-419085 978-90-411-2465-4
Shipowners’ limitation of liability.
Reynolds, Barnabas W.B. and Michael N. Tsimplis.
Wolters Kluwer Law & Business, ©2012 425 p. $176.00
This book aims to be a readable reference for anyone involved in
shipping disputes. It offers practical explanations of the rights of ship
owners to limit their liability and explores the differences between the
various limitation regimes and laws in various jurisdictions (especially
England, Wales and the UK in general), with special emphasis on how
conflict-of-law rules might be used by parties in international commerce
to select the most suitable tribunal to commence an action or limit action.
US law as of 2001 is considered for comparison, but the book does not
provide comprehensive analysis of US law. After a brief overview of how
limitation issues arise, sections cover the right to limit liability under
global limitation regimes, and specific liability regimes involving limi-
tation of liability. Appendices offer tables of legislation, conventions,
cases, and EU materials. Reynolds is a practicing attorney in London.
Tsimplis teaches oceanography and maritime law at the University of
Southampton, UK. Aspen Publishers is now Wolters Kluwer Law &
Business.
K1401 2012-471077 978-1-60930-103-3
International intellectual property law; cases and
materials, 3d ed.
Goldstein, Paul and Marketa Trimble. (University casebook series)
Foundation Press, ©2012 768 p. $186.00
This text equips law students with the tools they need to engage in inter-
national intellectual property practice, whether transactional or litigation.
Throughout, the material offers perspectives of practitioners working
with domestic and foreign clients. It also sheds light on the social, eco-
nomic, and cultural considerations that underpin intellectual property
laws around the world. While special attention is paid to the differences
between the law in developed and developing countries, the book also
explores the differences between common law and civil law approaches
to intellectual property protection. Part 1 considers the private and public
international law topics that frame the substantive rules of intellectual
property law. Part 2 examines the protection of foreigners under national
law. This section considers the substantive rules themselves from the per-
spective of comparative law, with chapters on copyright and neighboring
rights, patents, trademarks, and geographical indications. Goldstein
teaches law at Stanford University. Trimble teaches law at the University
of Nevada-Las Vegas.
K1401 2012-470004 978-0-314-20762-3
International intellectual property; problems, cases, and
materials, 2d ed.
Chow, Daniel C.K. and Edward Lee. (American casebook series)
West, ©2012 805 p. $188.00
Written by Chow (law, Ohio State U.) and Lee (law, Illinois Institute of
Technology) to serve as the primary text for a three or four credit course,
this casebook introduces international intellectual property law to law
students of different backgrounds, including students with no prior back-
ground in intellectual property or international law (ample explanatory
text is added to the case materials in order achieve this purpose). Five
chapters cover introductory materials, copyright and neighboring rights,
patents, trademarks and geographical indications, unfair competition
and trade secrets, and international enforcement of intellectual property
rights. This second edition has been updated with new cases and devel-
opments, but the authors have excised previous materials in order to
keep the same length as the previous edition.
K1401 2012-935272 978-1-84980-003-7
Intellectual property enforcement; a commentary on the
anti-counterfeiting trade agreement (ACTA).
Blakeney, Michael. (Elgar commentaries)
Edward Elgar Publishing, ©2012 394 p. $210.00
Blakeney (law, U. of Western Australia) examines the Plurilateral Anti-
Counterfeiting Trade Agreement (ACTA), a byproduct of an intellectual
property rights task force created by the 2007 G8 summit. Several
chapters examine the line-by-line language of the agreement. The
agreement provides for enhanced international cooperation, promotion of
enforcement practices, and a legal framework for intellectual property
rights enforcement in criminal/civil/administrative/border contexts.
Blakeney reviews the negotiations, the debate about metrics, and the
global economic impact of piracy. An appendix provides an unannotated
version of the agreement.
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
K1401 978-81-7708-326-2
Intellectual property rights (IPRs); TRIPS Agreement and
Indian laws.
Lokganathan, E.T.
New Century Pub. (New Delhi), ©2012 195 p. $41.75
Lokganathan (Kongu Arts and Science College, India) explains the
primary provisions defined in the trade-related aspects of intellectual
property rights (TRIPS) agreement enacted by the WTO in 1995 and
reviews the history of trade mark law in India. The closing chapters
discuss Indian and international laws governing geographical indication
of goods, industrial design, plant patents, integrated circuit layout, and
trade secret protection. Distributed in North America by ISBS.
K1401 2012-030469 978-0-88132-507-2
Private rights and public problems; the global economics
of intellectual property in the 21st century.
Maskus, Keith E.
Peterson Inst. Int’l Economics, ©2012 373 p. $24.95 (pa)
Maskus (economics, U. of Colorado, Boulder, and research fellow,
Peterson Institute for International Economics) provides extensive and
detailed coverage of global issues now affecting intellectual property
rights (IPRs) and the national laws and international agreements that
regulate them. A sampling of topics includes: the policy landscape, IPR
reforms and innovations, the new emphasis on enforcement, global
patents, technology transfer and climate change, and a vision for the
future.
K1505 2012-419069 978-90-411-3890-3
Patently outdated; patents in the post-industrial economy;
the case for service patents.
Pires de Carvalho, Nuno.
Wolters Kluwer Law & Business, ©2012 229 p. $149.00
This work explains the rationale and utility of service patents (patents for
intangible services), arguing that the patent system must embrace service
patents in this post-industrial economy. The author takes the perspective
that patents are not a social burden imposed by misguided lawmakers,
nor a weapon used by corporations to oppress consumers; rather, patents
are tools of competition and economic progress in free market
economies. The book begins with a review of the history of patents up
through the industrial revolution, then offers an overview of the current
status of the industrial patent system and its functions, especially in the
context of globalized trade. The author then describes the formal and
substantive requirements, scope of rights, and terms of protection that
service patents should have. Information on the author is not given.
Aspen Publishers is now Wolters Kluwer Law & Business.
K1519 2012-392007 978-90-411-3828-6
Intellectual property and biodiversity; rights to animal
genetic resources.
Temmerman, Michelangelo.
Wolters Kluwer Law & Business, ©2012 300 p. $176.00
Temmerman surveys the relationship between Animal Genetic Resources
(AnGR) and intellectual property law, and advances the hypothesis “that
intellectual property law and especially patent law should not funda-
mentally be altered to being adapted to AnGR.” Temmerman introduces
background elements of patent law, intellectual property and AnGR; com-
pares cases involving AnGR from Canada, Europe and the United States;
considers the impact on ownership traditions in agriculture, as well as
issues in animal welfare; international regulations; and a positive angle
on what intellectual property can do for biodiversity. In the end, he rec-
ommends excluding humans for patent-ability globally, as well as certain
animals for welfare reasons, prioritizing farmers interests in the reversal
of normal ownership rules, clarification of certain exclusions and defi-
nitions concerning “higher animals,” and further research into intel-
lectual property systems “tailored to local needs and linked to
conservation issues.” Aspen Publishers is now Wolters Kluwer Law &
Business.
K1530 2012-357041 978-90-411-3448-6
Sustainable technology transfer; a guide to global aid and
trade development.
Title main entry. Ed. by Hans Henrik Lidgard et al.
Wolters Kluwer Law & Business, ©2012 333 p. $150.00
The essays in this collection reflect the most significant findings of the
Conference on Sustainable Technology Transfer held in Vietnam in
October 2010. The primary focus was to define the obligations developed
nations have to help developing countries in keeping with the UN
Millennium Development Goals to eliminate poverty and improve living
conditions by shrinking the technology gap. Essay topics include: TRIPS
–122–
Article 66.2, technology transfer and competition law options for devel-
oping countries, intellectual property rights, technology transfer and
climate change, and more. Editors are Lidgard (private law, Lund U.,
Sweden), Atik (law, Loyola Law School), and Nguyen (law, Lund U., and
Department of International Law, Ministry of Justice, Vietnam). Aspen
Publishers is now Wolters Kluwer Law & Business.
K2280 2012-935270 978-1-84844-693-9
Breach of confidence; social origins and modern
developments.
Richardson, Megan.
Edward Elgar Publishing, ©2012 170 p. $110.00
The authors (all of the U. of Melbourne, Australia) explore the historical
origins and modern developments of the obscure doctrine of breach of
confidence in the intellectual property, privacy, and security laws of
British common law, arguing that the doctrine still has modern relevance
and influence, even as the precise meaning of its normative standard of
`trust and confidence’ has been adapted over time. They particularly
focus on how the doctrine has been contested over the years, from its
early development in cases concerning small business, private and
domestic relations, and master-servant dealings in the mid-19th century
through to the push towards a broader understanding of the scope of
breach of confidence by the late 1980s, in significant part as a response
to the rise of tabloid journalism and attendant concerns about protecting
both individual privacy and government secrecy.
K2400 2012-357312 978-90-411-3808-8
Arbitration; the next fifty years.
Title main entry. Ed. Albert Jan van den Berg. (ICCA congress series;
no.16)
Wolters Kluwer Law & Business, ©2012 300 p. $0.00
This volume contains the proceeding of the International Council of
Commercial Arbitration’s 50th anniversary conference, held in May of
2011. The volume opens with introductory remarks and a presentation
on the 50-year history of the ICCA. Two reports, analyzing the present
architecture of international commercial arbitration and considering the
question of whether the international investment arbitration regime can
be seen as a form of global governance, are then presented together with
commentary. A round table discussion considers future trends. Aspen
Publishers is now Wolters Kluwer Law & Business.
K2400 2012-357303 978-90-411-3817-0
Arbitrating under the 2012 ICC rules; an introductory
user’s guide.
Grierson, Jacob and Annet van Hooft.
Wolters Kluwer Law & Business, ©2012 360 p. $189.00
This beginner’s guide is written especially for non-insiders and non-spe-
cialists. It seeks to remove the mystery surrounding the 2012 version of
the International Chamber of Commerce (ICC)’s Rules of Arbitration. It
helps readers decide whether to opt for ICC arbitration and explains how
to conduct an actual ICC arbitration. Early chapters review key innova-
tions and changes under the 2012 ICC rules, outline the rationale for
choosing ICC arbitration, explain how to draft ICC arbitration clauses,
and look at the different actors in an ICC arbitration. The rest of the book
is divided into sections on the opening moves of the arbitration, initial
decisions by the court, procedure before the arbitral tribunal, and the
award. Appendices provide rules, model requests, model answers, and a
glossary. Aspen Publishers is now Wolters Kluwer Law & Business.
K2400 2012-471076 978-0-314-26719-1
International commercial arbitration; a transnational
perspective, 5th ed.
Várady, Tibor et al. (American casebook series)
West, ©2012 1073 p. $194.00
Because of the continuing global convergence of norms and basic prin-
ciples governing international commercial arbitration, Várady (law,
Central European U., Hungary), Barceló (international and comparative
law, Cornell Law School, US) and Mehren (emeritus, law, Harvard Law
School, US) have sought to fashion a truly transnational casebook that
introduces international arbitration law. They have retained the organi-
zational structure and main body of materials of earlier editions—
offering chapters on the authority of arbitration tribunals; the
qualifications, rights, responsibilities, and appointment of arbitrators;
arbitration procedure; choice of law; the arbitration award; and the
effects and limits of awards rendered in international commercial arbi-
tration—but have updated the text in recognition of new regulatory devel-
opments and new scholarly perspectives.
–123–
K3175 2012-020789 978-1-59332-443-8
Judicial power in a federal system; Canada, United States
and Germany.
Ruggiero, Cristina M. (Law and society; recent scholarship)
LFB Scholarly Publishing, LLC, ©2012 334 p. $80.00
This volume examines the nature of judicial power in the policy process
of the federal systems of Canada, the United States, and Germany by
examining high court decision-making in key policy areas together with
legislative responses (particularly by sub-national legislatures). Testing
existing concepts of court influence as “interdependent,” the author
argues that the influence of high courts and their decisions are shaped
by intrinsic institutional features as well as by the extrensic political and
federalist environments in which the courts operate. Within that broader
argument, the author also offers comparative analysis of why some
courts are more or less able to exercise their interdependent powers and
the institutional features that condition those outcomes.
K3242 2012-016991 978-90-04-22612-8
Legislating for equality; a multinational collection of non-
discrimination norms; v.1: Europe.
Title main entry. Ed. by Dina Porat et al. (Legislating against discrimi-
nation; 1)
Martinus Nijhoff Publishers, ©2012 552 p. $240.00
This is the first volume of a planned four-volume set surveying legal and
legislative measures against discrimination and promoting equality
around the world, with this first volume covering Europe and the
remaining three volumes dedicated respectively to the Americas, Africa,
and Asia and the South Pacific. The editors (all of Tel Aviv U., Israel)
identify and reproduce the texts of a range of legal materials, including
constitutional provisions on human rights; human rights-related laws
(including controversial measures such as “Burqa laws”; penal code pro-
visions prohibiting incitement, Holocaust denial, war crimes, etc.; specific
laws, labor code provisions, and civil code provisions on non-discrimi-
nation; and laws pertaining to the protection of minority rights,
including language rights. They also offer information on equality
bodies/ombudsmen; international and European treaties on human
rights, discrimination, and promotion of equality; and the ratification
status of treaties.
K3264 2012-939097 978-0-85793-233-4
Determann’s field guide to international data privacy law
compliance.
Determann, Lothar.
Edward Elgar Publishing, ©2012 155 p. $95.00
A California-based international data privacy, commercial, and intel-
lectual law teacher and practitioner, Determann guides non-specialist
lawyers through the increasingly complex field of laws, regulations, and
technology regarding international data privacy law. His emphasis is on
practical utility, and the references are to more detail rather than sources
or philosophical debates. He covers starting a compliance program,
selecting compliance mechanisms for international data transfers,
drafting documentation, and maintaining and auditing data privacy
compliance programs. The longest chapter, data privacy A to Z, looks at
specific areas such as employee data and monitoring, minors, social
media, unsolicited communications, and wiretapping.
K3496 2012-013748 978-0-7844-1230-5
Guidelines for development of effective water sharing
agreements.
Title main entry. Ed. by American Society of Civil Engineers. (ASCE
standard; ASCE-EWRI 60-12)
Am. Society of Civil Engineers, ©2013 117 p. $80.00 (pa)
From the Water Regulatory Standards Committee of the Standards
Development Council of the American Society of Civil Engineers’
Environmental and Water Resources Institute, this publication provides a
guideline for developing agreements for allocating and managing shared
water resources, including international agreements, interstate compacts,
and state-tribal agreements for regulating water resources along or across
political boundaries. It outlines a process to ensure all factors are
considered in the development of an agreement, to accommodate the
physical realities of shared resources, as well as different political
systems, cultures, and water use customs. It covers the assessment of
various factors influenced by shared water use, to include correlating the
geographic and political issues surrounding utilization of the resource,
inventorying its sources and uses, analyzing the ecological impact of the
transboundary use, and examining its effect on economic growth and
quality of life of the various constituents. It presents alternatives for
allocation of water among the parties, such as methods for surface,
underground, and atmospheric waters, with emphasis on extreme events
like droughts or floods, and presents different choices for supervising
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
implementation. It offers options and instructions but does not prescribe
a specific course of action. Three detailed model agreements are
provided. The guideline merges two previous publications: Model Sharing
Agreements for the 21st Century (2002) and Sharing Water in Times of
Scarcity (2006).
K3584 2012-935321 978-1-78100-328-2
Poverty alleviation and environmental law.
Title main entry. Ed. by Yves Le Bouthillier et al. (The IUCN Academy
of Environmental Law series)
Edward Elgar Publishing, ©2012 349 p. $150.00
As the editors note in their introduction, the international community
should work toward alleviating poverty and protecting the environment,
and that those two critical missions are interrelated, although in a very
complex way. However, they also explain that there are situations where
the relationship is not an easy one, as in when the need to increase the
standard of living in impoverished communities jeopardizes fragile
ecosystems. This is a collection of 14 papers selected from a conference
organized by the IUCN Academy of Environmental Law on poverty and
the environment. The papers address a variety of issues relevant to suc-
cessfully managing poverty alleviation and environmental protection.
Editors are Le Bouthillier (law, U. of Ottowa, Canada), Cohen
(Universidad Autónoma Metropolitano, Mexico), Gonzales Marquez (law,
Universidad Autónoma Metropolitano), Mumma (law, U. of Nairobi,
Kenya), and Smith (Willamette U.).
K3702 2012-392192 978-90-411-3816-3
The 33rd America’s Cup judicial and arbitral decisions.
Ross, Hamish and Graham Mckenzie. Ed by Henry Peter
Wolters Kluwer Law & Business, ©2012 254 p. $169.00
New Zealand commercial lawyers Ross and McKenzie have both been
long involved with the yacht race, and explore the judgments of various
courts and other dispute resolution bodies delivered during the tumul-
tuous 33rd American Cup. After reviewing the background, they detail
in turn the challenges by the Club Nautico Español de Vela, Spain and
the Golden Gate Yacht Club, US. They also comment on the settlement
reached and suggest implications for the management and future of the
race.
K3791 2012-019097 978-90-04-22839-9
Cultural heritage, cultural rights, cultural diversity; new
developments in international law.
Title main entry. Ed. by Silvia Borelli and Federico Lenzerini. (Studies
in intercultural human rights; v.4)
Martinus Nijhoff Publishers, ©2012 440 p. $234.00
The topics addressed in this volume’s 19 contributions—the result of an
Italian government-sponsored research project—reflect a new and
evolving consciousness of the connections between human rights and cul-
tural rights. Broad themes include the evolution of international law on
cultural heritage, intangible cultural heritage and human rights, and the
new dynamics of international cultural heritage law. Discussion encom-
passes The European Court of Human Rights and Religious Practices,
food as a cultural choice, illicit trade in cultural objects, recovered under-
water cultural heritage, the relationship between the World Heritage
Convention and climate change regulation, and the human dimension to
landscape protection in international law, among other topics. The two
editors are international law experts affiliated as follows: Silvia Borelli (U.
of Bedfordshire, UK) and Federico Lenzerini (U. of Siena, Italy). Martinus
Nijhoff is an imprint of Brill.
K3830 2012-935320 978-1-78100-321-3
International investment law and soft law.
Title main entry. Ed. by Andrea K. Bjorklund and August Reinisch.
Edward Elgar Publishing, ©2012 336 p. $145.00
Presented by Bjorklund (U. of California at Davis, US) and Reinisch (U.
of Vienna, Austria), this volume comes out of the work of a study group
established by the International Law Association Executive Council to
“study the development of soft law instruments [i.e., quasi-legal legal
instruments without binding force] in international investment law and
the feasibility of a “codification” of the present state of this field of inter-
national economic law.” The study group focused on identifying the
main issues surrounding a potential codification of investment law and
investigating whether and in what form investment law may be codified
using soft law under international law. Topics addressed by the volume’s
11 chapters include sources of international investment law; the role of
soft law in international law; the effectiveness of soft law instruments in
international investment law; soft law instruments in environmental,
commercial, and GATT/WTO law as potential models; learned lessons
from the evolution of investment protection based on public international
law treaties; and the relative “ripeness” for codification of principles of
expropriation and most-favored-nation status.
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
K3921 2012-392782 978-90-411-3875-0
Global textiles and clothing trade; trade policy
perspectives.
Ghori, Umair Hafeez. (Global trade law series; v.40)
Wolters Kluwer Law & Business, ©2012 379 p. $189.00
Ghori (law, Bond U., Australia) presents his PhD dissertation for the
University of New South Wales, research for which he began just after
the quotas on trade in textiles and clothing were abolished in early 2005.
He concentrates on the law and policy issues associated with the inter-
national textile and clothing trade, leaving the economics and social the-
ories to other scholars. He covers the history of regulation in the textiles
and clothing trade, the transition towards liberalized trade, issues
affecting the trade, case studies after the Agreement on Textiles and
Clothing expired, assessing the use of safeguards and anti-dumping as
trade remedy measures, and the way forward. Aspen Publishers is now
Wolters Kluwer Law & Business.
K3924 2012-392036 978-90-411-3826-2
Nanotechnology law; best practices.
Brazell, Lorna.
Wolters Kluwer Law & Business, ©2012 276 p. $176.00
As often happens with new scientific developments, the commercial
development of nanomaterals and nanotechnology has gotten ahead of
the laws and regulations necessary to protect the health of consumers
and the environment. After a brief introduction to the state of nanotech-
nology in the 21st century, this book focuses on the current regulatory
framework for health and safety in Europe. A middle chapter also gives
consideration to patentability and other business concerns. Although the
main focus is on the legal situation in the European Union (EU), this
book also touches in the last chapter on developments in the US, Canada,
Australia, Japan and China. It begins with a helpful list of abbreviations
and closes with international tables of cases and legislation. Four appen-
dixes which reproduce EU documents are also included. Aspen
Publishers is now Wolters Kluwer Law & Business.
K3943 2012-930615 978-1-78100-223-0
The standard of review in WTO dispute settlement;
critique and development.
Becroft, Ross.
Edward Elgar Publishing, ©2012 249 p. $125.00
With many of the measures states take in pursuit of obligations under
the World Trade Organization agreements coming in the form of
domestic administrative or judicial processes, WTO review of state com-
pliance with agreements becomes a far more complicated process than
simply assessing domestic laws and government decisions. In light of this
situation, Becroft (Melbourne Law School) assesses what standards of
review WTO panels should apply to questions of compliance, arguing
that the organization should adopt a flexible standard that allows for a
highly inflexible and non-deferential factual standard for assessing
domestic measures, but a more deferential standard of review where
WTO members have retained jurisdictional competencies to deal with
cases such as anti-dumping and countervailing measures. The decisions
concerning how to structure these differing standards, he argues, should
be based on three major considerations: the promotion of key objectives
of WTO dispute settlement, enhancing adjudicative legitimacy, and pro-
cedural effectiveness. He details how the WTO may adopt such new stan-
dards and considers specifics of application in areas likely to be
contentious.
K3981 2012-392627 978-90-411-3428-8
The Energy Charter Treaty; the notion of investor.
Baltag, Crina. (International arbitration law library)
Wolters Kluwer Law & Business, ©2012 284 p. $203.00
This volume reviews the notion of “investor” within the framework of
the Energy Charter Treaty and related treaties and rules under the
Investor-Contracting Party dispute resolution mechanisms. Because of the
complexity of the concept of “investor” within these treaties and rules,
the analysis is conducted in accordance with the rules of treaty inter-
pretation of the Vienna Convention on the Law of Treaties. The work was
originally written as a doctoral thesis at Queen Mary U. of London,
England, between 2008 and 2011. Aspen Publishers is now Wolters
Kluwer Law & Business.
K3981 2011-035823 978-1-4051-7787-0
Environmental and energy law.
Title main entry. Ed. by Karen E. Makuch and Ricardo Pereira.
Wiley-Blackwell, ©2012 651 p. $69.95
This book takes a two-pronged approach to discussions of environmental
and energy law. It includes both the legal developments related to those
topics as well as the scientific and technical side. While environmental
–124–
and energy concerns are global in many ways, the authors focus on leg-
islation and other measures taken in the European Union and the United
Kingdom. Topics include sustainable energy and climate change law,
exploration and exploitation of natural resources, clean technologies and
clean development, pollution controls, chemicals regulation and labo-
ratory safety, and governance, impact assessment, compliance, and
enforcement. Case studies also are included. Editors are Makuch and
Pereira (both environmental and energy law, Imperial College London).
The book is well-written and formatted and should interest practitioners
in a variety of related law and engineering fields and students.
K4095 2012-419435 978-90-411-3729-6
An introduction to air law, 9th ed.
Diederiks-Verschoor, I. H. Ph.
Wolters Kluwer Law & Business, ©2012 429 p. $135.00
This reference for those in aviation, business, and law covers the law
mainly in the UK, EU, and US. Opening chapters explain the regime of
international civil aviation, economic regulation, and market access.
Later chapters describe the regulatory framework of the EU and give
details on the contractual liability of the carrier, the safety of air navi-
gation and accident investigation, and product liability. There is also
material on the law related to surface damage and collisions, insurance,
and rights in aircraft. In addition, the book offers a historical survey of
criminal air law from 1963 to 2010. This ninth edition reflects current
legislation, such as the EU-US Agreement on Air Transport and the
Beijing Convention and Protocol of 2010, and deals with current issues
such as the liberalization of air services around the world and the impact
of aircraft emissions on the environment. Aspen Publishers is now
Wolters Kluwer Law & Business.
K4150 2012-014080 978-90-04-20243-6
The regulation of international shipping; international
and comparative perspectives; essays in honor of Edgar
Gold.
Title main entry. Ed. by Aldo Chircop et al.
Martinus Nijhoff Publishers, ©2012 585 p. $263.00
This festschrift honors Edgar Gold, retired in 2011 from the T.C. Beirne
School of Law, U. of Queensland, Australia. He moved back to Australia
(where he was born) after having lived in Halifax, Canada for three
decades affiliated there with Dalhousie Law School and the Dalhousie
Ocean Studies Programme, which he helped found. Twenty-seven contri-
butions pay tribute to his visionary yet practical passion for maritime
law. After an introduction to the regulation of international shipping, cov-
erage encompasses the law of the sea and ocean governance, the Arctic
Ocean, shipping and international maritime law, seafaring and maritime
labor law, and Canadian maritime law. Martinus Nijhoff is an imprint
of Brill.
K4240 2012-357326 978-3-11-027595-7
The right to privacy in the light of media convergence;
perspectives from three continents.
Title main entry. Ed. by Dieter Dörr and Russell L. Weaver. (Media
Convergence; v.3)
De Gruyter, ©2012 385 p. $112.00
The third volume in the Media Convergence series analyzing the effects
of the digital revolution on media, communication, education, marketing,
and the public, this book looks at right-to-privacy law. The editors are dis-
tinguished scholars of law in Germany (U. of Mainz, Mainz Media
Institute) and the US (Brandeis School of Law, Louisville). The book com-
pares and contrasts legal situations on three continents, through contri-
butions on specific topics and situations by lawyers in the US, Europe,
and Australia. Multiple legal frameworks for considering privacy are use-
fully shown here. Contributors weigh in on subjects including the Fourth
Amendment to the US Constitution as law enforcement or privacy, the
establishment of general privacy law in Britain (which protects citizens
from concrete losses but has no history of protecting abstract rights), the
contrary world of France, where abstract rights are protected in multiple
ways but specifics are lacking, and Australian attempts to find language
for updating its inadequate federal privacy laws. Specific cases in several
countries are also discussed. The book is clearly written, but will be most
understandable to readers with legal background.
K4550 2012-392602 978-90-411-3876-7
Tax treaty case law around the globe—2011.
Title main entry. Ed. by Michael Lang et al. (EUCOTAX series on
European taxation; v.34)
Wolters Kluwer Law & Business, ©2012 514 p. $176.00
European Universities Cooperating on Taxes (EUCOTAX) is a network of
tax institutes at 11 universities. Here, contributors from 30 jurisdictions
offer short case summaries that provide information on the impact of
–125–
important tax treaty cases decided in 2010 in various countries, much of
it not available anywhere else in English. Each case presents facts of the
case, the reasoning of the court, and the author’s observations; this
format makes it easy to compare tax treaty case law in different coun-
tries. Cases are grouped in sections on personal and substantive scope,
permanent establishments, business profits, transfer pricing, and divi-
dends, interest, royalties, and capital gains. Other sections cover
employment income of artists and sportsmen, methods to avoid double
taxation, and non-discrimination, mutual agreement, and mutual assis-
tance. The book’s readership includes attorneys, academics, businesses,
policy makers, and tax administrations. There is no subject index. Editor
Lang is affiliated with Vienna University of Economics and Business.
Aspen Publishers is now Wolters Kluwer Law & Business
K4610 2012-004706 978-90-04-20902-2
Remedies under the WTO legal system.
Babu, R. Rajesh. (Nijhofff international trade law series)
Martinus Nijhoff Publishers, ©2012 499 p. $230.00
Babu (public policy and management, Indian Institute of Management,
India) analyzes problems stemming from the nature and scope of the
remedies available under the World Trade Organization legal system and
its covered agreements, and their correlation with remedies available
under public international law. He reviews remedies under public inter-
national law and under the WTO Dispute Settlement Understanding and
covered agreement. He then considers the nature and effectiveness of the
enforcement of remedies under the WTO legal system, with special focus
provided to the interests of developing countries in the WTO system,
countries he argues are finding it extremely difficult to sustain and suc-
cessfully contest a dispute and/or enforce the rulings.
K4610 2012-007322 978-90-04-20898-8
WTO and the greater China; economic integration and
dispute resolution.
Wu, Chien-Huei. (Nijhofff international trade law series; v.8)
Martinus Nijhoff Publishers, ©2012 308 p. $166.00
Due to various historical and political factors, Greater Chinese represen-
tation at the World Trade Organization is comprised of China, Taiwan,
Hong Kong, and Macau, presenting a unique legal landscape within the
WTO system. Wu (Academia Sinica, Taiwan) explores the interactions
between these four WTO members as a window into investigating the
economic integration of Greater China at the multilateral, bilateral, and
domestic levels, focusing on how dispute resolution mechanisms at dif-
ferent levels contribute to the judicial settlement of disputes. Following
introduction to background and methodology, the work is organized into
three parts examining issues of judicial review among the four members
at all levels, trade disputes between the members and their resolution at
various levels, and conclusions regarding the legal and economic inte-
gration of Greater China. Martinus Nijhoff is an imprint of Brill.
K5001 2012-017799 978-1-4496-0425-7
Comparative criminal justice systems; global and local
perspectives.
Shahidullah, Shahid M.
Jones & Bartlett, ©2014 554 p. $97.95 (pa)
Shahidullah (criminal justice and sociology, U. of North Carolina) pro-
vides a global comparative examination of criminal justice systems and
philosophies around the world, with the thematic concern of the impacts
of modernization and globalization providing a unifying thread
throughout. He opens the text with discussion of the nature, theories, and
methods of comparative criminal justice conducted in chapters that
address the theoretical perspectives of modernization theory, civilization
theory, world-systems theory, and globalization theory; the nature and
sources of data on crime trends and patterns; performance indicators for
criminal justice systems in different countries; the value of national and
regional crime surveys; and comparative institutions and values of
criminal justice as benchmarks of comparison across the world’s soci-
eties. The remaining chapters explore the influence of the balance
between sacred and secular sources of law in four models of criminal
justice systems that he categorizes as modern systems (e.g., the US,
Canada, Europe, and Australia); modernizing systems (e.g., select coun-
tries in Asia, Africa, and Latin America); traditional systems (e.g., Saudi
Arabia and Iran); and dual systems (e.g., China, Pakistan, Malaysia,
Indonesia, and Nigeria).
K5026 2012-935266 978-1-84844-374-7
Research handbook on the economics of criminal law.
Title main entry. Ed. by Alon Harel and Keith N. Hylton. (Research
handbooks in law and economics)
Edward Elgar Publishing, ©2012 263 p. $175.00
This is a selective survey of scholarship on the economic analysis of
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
criminal law, covering different traditions and approaches, including the-
oretical economic models, behavioral findings, and empirical research.
Editors Harel (law, Hebrew U. of Jerusalem, Israel) and Hylton (law,
Boston U., US) present ten chapters discussing the main traditions of law
and economics approaches to criminal law, the boundaries between
criminal law and other fields of law (such as tort law), the size of
optimal sanctions taking into account differential vulnerabilities of
victims, optimal scope and optimal sanction in criminal law in the
context of a certain fixed distribution of wealth, a hybrid model of
optimal length of freedom that takes into account both deterrence and
incapacitation of criminals, the economics of corporate liability, a chal-
lenge to the premise that fraudulent accounting is rational behavior, the
incentives that influence prosecutors’ behavior, and law and economics
explanations for the dramatic reduction of crime rates in the 1990s.
K7625 2012-392077 978-90-411-3416-5
Private international law and the Internet, 2d ed.
Svantesson, Dan Jerker Börge.
Wolters Kluwer Law & Business, ©2012 557 p. $176.00
Most countries’ international law rules provide for jurisdictional claims
over any Internet content that can be accessed in their territories, in
relation to a wide range of legal matters, such as copyrights, trademarks,
defamation, and consumer contracts. This reference for academics and
lawyers explains such law in seven different jurisdictions: Australia,
England, Germany, Hong Kong SAR, China, Sweden, and the US. Two
early chapters are devoted to the Internet and private international law.
Country chapters overviewing traditional common law are structured
under the headings of jurisdiction, declining jurisdiction, choice of law,
and recognition and enforcement. Later chapters cover topics such as
geolocation and geoidentification technologies on the Internet. The book
closes by proposing models for defamation and contract conventions.
Three appendices offer practical checklists on private international law
issues for drafters of online agreements, for potential litigants, and for
potential defendants. This second edition reflects current trends and leg-
islation. Aspen Publishers is now Wolters Kluwer Law & Business.
KBP2460 2012-011622 978-0-8133-4467-6
Islam and human rights; tradition and politics, 5th ed.
Mayer, Ann Elizabeth.
Westview Press, ©2013 299 p. $38.00 (pa)
A more accurate title for this work, writes its author, Mayer (legal studies
and business ethics, Wharton School of the U. of Pennsylvania), would be
“A Comparison of Selected Civil and Political Rights Formulations in
International Law and in Actual and Proposed Human Rights Schemes
Purporting to Embody Islamic Principles, with a Critical Appraisal of the
Latter with Reference to International Law, Evolving Islamic Thought,
and Relevant State Practice in the Middle East.” While acknowledging
that, like any other major religious tradition, Islam can be deployed both
for and against human rights, Mayer criticizes common Islamic human
rights schemes that have recently been proffered in response to the UN
human rights systems as designed to both mimic and degrade the pro-
tections offered by international human rights law, arguing that they
often oversimplify and stereotype Islamic doctrines, fail to acknowledge
the reality of human rights abuses in the Middle East, exhibit a weak
grasp of international human rights principles, misrepresent comparative
legal theories, employ imprecise legal methodologies, and deliberately use
evasive and ambiguous foundations.
KD750 2012-419063 978-90-411-4019-7
Family and succession law in England and Wales, 2d ed.
Probert, Rebecca.
Wolters Kluwer Law & Business, ©2012 256 p. $115.00 (pa)
Derived from the multi-volume International Encyclopedia of Laws, this
volume shows lawyers, students, and academics how to apply the law in
regard to family relations, marital property, and succession to estates in
England and Wales, and the legal rules and customs related to the status
of persons, the family, and property. Probert (law, U. of Warwick, UK)
details the demographics of England and Wales, the historical back-
ground and sources and instruments of family and succession law, the
courts that adjudicate and administer the laws, and issues surrounding
the person as a legal entity and the legal disposition of property among
family members. She addresses issues such as nationality, domicile, and
residence; marriage, divorce, and cohabitation; adoption, parenthood,
and guardianship; succession and inter vivos arrangements; and the
acquisition and administration of estates. Aspen Publishers is now
Wolters Kluwer Law & Business.
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
KD2540 2012-392786 978-90-411-4023-4
Energy law in the United Kingdom.
Park, Patricia.
Wolters Kluwer Law & Business, ©2012 148 p. $81.00 (pa)
This reference for lawyers offers an overview and explanation of legis-
lation and legal practice related to energy resources and production in
the UK. The book begins with general background on the UK’s popu-
lation and geography, its legal and political structure, and the role of its
government institutions related to energy resources and the environment.
The rest of the book presents sections on the electricity and gas supply
industries, regulation of the oil industry, the regulatory framework con-
cerning coal, interactions between energy law, tax law, and competition
law. The material in the book was originally published in the
International Encyclopedia of Laws. Park teaches environmental law at
Southampton Solent University. Aspen Publishers is now Wolters Kluwer
Law & Business
KD4110 2012-013031 978-90-04-20774-5
Freedom of expression and the media.
Title main entry. Ed. by Merris Amos et al. (Nijhofff law specials; v.79)
Martinus Nijhoff Publishers, ©2012 264 p. $123.00 (pa)
Amos (law, U. of London, England), Harrison (public communication, U.
of Sheffield, England), and Woods (law, City U. London, England) present
nine chapters that explore the relationship between the media (broadcast,
print, and electronic) and freedom of expression, primarily within the
UK regulatory framework. The authors assess the value of particular reg-
ulatory approaches as they relate to key questions of the role of media
in a democracy, including discovery of truth and error, legitimate
political action, government by discussion, the public sphere, individual
autonomy, enabling public deliberation, and being free from government
corruption and intimidation.
KDC752 2012-429551 978-1-908373-13-7
A model constitution for Scotland; making democracy
work in an independent state. (reprint, 2011)
Bulmer, W. Elliot.
Luath Press Ltd., ©2012 154 p. $19.95 (pa)
In conjunction with the Constitutional Commission, of which he was
research director and vice president at the time of publication, Bulmer
(politics, U. of Glasgow) constructs an elaborate and detailed 35-page
model constitution as a starting point for discussion and debate con-
cerning matters of self-governance should the Scottish people decide to
separate their country from the United Kingdom. Introductory and
explanatory notes look at such topics as a civic approach to democracy,
a normal European democracy, Parliament, local government, and fun-
damental rights and freedoms. There is no index. Distributed in the US
by Ingram Publishers Services.
KE4395 2012-470277 978-1-4426-4262-1
Debating Sharia; Islam, gender politics, and family law
arbitration.
Title main entry. Ed. by Anna C. Korteweg and Jennifer A. Selby.
U. of Toronto Press, ©2012 397 p. $70.00
With Muslims living in Western cultures still hopeful about the possibil-
ities of finding shared cultural and social values in Europe and North
America while the majoritarian communities respond skeptically,
Korteweg (sociology, U. of Toronto, Canada) and Selby (religious studies,
Memorial U. of Newfoundland, Canada) suggest that it is up to the
majoritarian communities to find mutually acceptable ways to adapt to
Islamic beliefs in the realms of civil law and culture as they present 12
papers exploring competing ideas surrounding the prospective place of
Islamic law within Western civil traditions. Many of the papers begin
their analysis from the jumping off point of the controversy that erupted
when an Ontario-based Muslim organization announced it would offer
Sharia-compliant arbitration of family affairs within the already existing
structure of the laws then governing arbitration in Ontario, Canada.
KE7709 978-0-7748-2456-9
Aboriginal justice and the charter; realizing a culturally
sensitive interpretation of legal rights.
Milward, David Leo.
U. of British Columbia Press, ©2013 303 p. $99.00
Milward, a law professor of Cree ancestry at the University of Manitoba,
makes a case for the creation of free-standing Aboriginal justice pro-
grams, conceived and administered by aboriginal communities in
Canada. The author advocates the concept of culturally sensitive inter-
pretation of legal rights as articulated by the Royal Commission of
Aboriginal Peoples. He argues that the Canadian Charter of Rights and
Freedoms might be reinterpreted to provide greater room for the oper-
ation of indigenous methods of justice. The author draws on interviews
–126–
with Aboriginal people themselves to articulate Aboriginal visions of
justice. The book is distributed in the US by the University of Washington
Press and in Canada by the University of Toronto Press.
KE7722 2012-9039713 978-0-7748-2252-7
Hunger, horses, and government men; criminal law on
the aboriginal plains, 1870-1905.
Gavigan, Shelley A.M. (Law and society)
U. of British Columbia Press, ©2012 274 p. $99.00
This study of Canadian Plains Natives’ confrontations with Canada’s
Indian Act of 1876 is grounded in the records of a 19th century criminal
court in what is now Saskatchewan. Court documents of the period high-
light the voices of Aboriginal people as they faced judges as plaintiffs and
defendants. Author Gavigan (law, Osgoode Hall Law School) also draws
on other forms of law, such as treaties, government legislation and
policies, police and prison records, and newspaper accounts. She seeks
to understand the contexts in which the actions and cultural practices of
Aboriginal people were prosecuted, whether as crimes as or regulatory
or statutory offenses. The book contains b&w historical photos. It is dis-
tributed in the US by the University of Washington Press and in Canada
by the University of Toronto Press.
KE8809 2012-419438 978-90-411-4036-4
Criminal law in Canada.
Hermida, Julian.
Wolters Kluwer Law & Business, ©2012 112 p. $74.00 (pa)
Hermida (law, Algoma U., Ontario) wrote this study originally as one
volume in the multivolume International Encyclopedia of Laws/Criminal
Law, and it retains the terse format and tone of a component in a larger
work where the niceties are provided elsewhere. Thus it is an excellent
quick reference to information without context or explanation. After
introductory chapters, he covers general principles of criminal liability,
inchoate crimes, survey of criminal offenses, the sanctioning system: sen-
tencing principles and alternatives, the Youth Criminal Justice Act, the
Charter of Rights and Freedoms and the criminal process, disclosure and
evidence, and protection to victims. Aspen Publishers is now Wolters
Kluwer Law & Business.
KEO175 2012-470001 978-1-4426-4444-1
Middle income access to justice.
Title main entry. Ed. by Michael Trebilcock et al.
U. of Toronto Press, ©2012 556 p. $95.00
The editors (professors of law at the U. of Toronto and York U., Canada)
present a multidisciplinary collection of papers that consider the
question of civil access to justice in Canada for middle income earners,
i.e., those who are disqualified from legal aid but don’t command the
resources to cover the costs of litigation. Papers have been selected to
provide a particular emphasis on those areas of greatest unmet legal
need: family law, consumer law, and employment law. They address both
the boundaries of the problem and proposed solutions, including non-
lawyer forms of assistance, improved access to lawyers, reforming the
dispute resolution process, and public legal expenses insurance.
KF156 2012-014924 978-1-4548-1836-6
The Wolters Kluwer Bouvier law dictionary, quick
reference ed.
Title main entry. Ed. by Stephen Michael Sheppard.
Wolters Kluwer Law & Business, ©2012 659 p. $24.95 (pa)
Sheppard offers students a law dictionary based on the first major dic-
tionary of American law by John Bouvier. It has new definitions based
on quotations and entries from new cases, books, and statutes, as well
as Bouvier’s text and other classic materials. Terms are organized alpha-
betically and by idea or topic according to their relationship in the law,
and this quick reference edition has succinct summaries of definitions
from the longer versions, ranging from a word to a sentence. It includes
a transcription of the US Constitution and the Declaration of
Independence and short biographies of all Supreme Court justices. Aspen
Publishers is now Wolters Kluwer Law & Business.
KF229 2012-026130 978-1-61608-375-5
Priceless; the case that brought down the Visa/Mastercard
bank cartel. (reprint 2009)
Constantine, Lloyd.
Skyhorse Pub. Co., ©2012 264 p. $14.95 (pa)
It all began with a 1996 merchant complaint against Visa and Mastercard
which grew into one of the largest anti-trust cases in history. The case
centered on the fees charged behind the scenes for consumer use of debit
cards, and pitted author Constantine’s law firm (Constantine Cannon
LLP) against Clifford-Chance, one of the largest law firms in the world.
After an opening statement that is purely autobiographical, Constantine
–127–
presents a blow-by-blow account of the case. This reprint of the 2009
publication includes a seven page account bringing the case up to date,
as well as a three page addendum.
KF240 2012-015980 978-1-4548-0847-3
Basic legal research; tools and strategies, 5th ed.
Sloan, Amy E. (Aspen coursebook series)
Wolters Kluwer Law & Business, ©2012 357 p. $93.00 (pa)
This text for law students breaks down print and electronic legal research
processes into smaller steps, offering stand-alone chapters and numerous
summary charts, bullet points, screenshots, and sample pages. Early
chapters cover generating search terms and evaluating search options.
Later chapters are devoted to print and electronic research processes for
different types of sources, such as secondary sources, cases, citators,
statutes, federal legislative history, and federal administrative law.
Sample pages in each chapter contain step-by-step illustrations of the
research process described in the chapter. Especially helpful are examples
of labeled documents found during the research process. Each chapter
concludes with research checklists. This fifth edition offers updated
Internet research resources and a new chapter on evaluating search
options. There is a new overview of source- and content-driven search
strategies, and new material on how to prioritize search terms depending
on the nature of the research project. A companion website is available.
Sloan teaches law at the University of Baltimore. Aspen Publishers is now
Wolters Kluwer Law and Business
KF240 2012-938985 978-1-133-27829-0
Foundations of legal research and writing, 5th ed.
Bast, Carol M. and Margie Hawkins.
Delmar, ©2013 573 p. $178.95 (pa)
Bast (legal studies, U. of Central Florida) and Hawkins, a law librarian,
offer a text for paralegal and law students that focuses on how to
perform research in the law library and online, use correct citation form,
communicate clearly, eliminate writing errors, and understand the fun-
damentals of legal research, analysis, and writing. They address the legal
system and legal reasoning; encyclopedias, digests, American Law
Reports, cases, constitutions, statutes, court rules, administrative law, and
citators; the research process; computer-assisted research; and various
types of legal documents. This edition has new material on electronic
filing, discovery, the duty to prevent spoliation of evidence (and pertinent
rule changes), and coverage of HIPAA standards; added research tips and
exhibits for LexisNexis and Westlaw; updated examples of Internet
research websites; a new Supreme Court case; updates to the law; new
research exercises, forms, and task examples; and more analysis
problems, study features, review questions, and Internet applications.
KF240 2012-024900 978-1-4548-0550-2
Legal reasoning, research, and writing for international
graduate students, 3d ed.
Nedzel, Nadia E. (Aspen coursebook series)
Wolters Kluwer Law & Business, ©2012 421 p. $90.00 (pa)
This third edition of a guide for international students in law contains a
new introductory chapter on what is different about US law schools and
on study skills international students will need immediately in US-style
doctrinal law classes, such as techniques for reading, briefing cases, and
course outlining. There is also a new chapter on the technological revo-
lution in legal practice in areas such as e-filing, technology in the
courtroom, and document automation. In addition, these early chapters
explain how a common law system differs from traditional civilian legal
systems, how to locate authorities in a library or online, and how to syn-
thesize several sources into an operative legal rule through IRAC analysis
and a short closed-universe memorandum. Subsequent chapters cover
researching and updating case law, constitutions, statutes, regulations,
and international law, as well as writing issues such as advanced
objective writing, persuasive writing, drafting contracts, and drafting
advisory memoranda for attorneys in the US. Nedzel teaches at the
Southern University Law Center. Aspen Publishers is now Wolters Kluwer
Law & Business.
KF240 2012-018042 978-1-4548-0552-6
The process of legal research; authorities and options, 8th
ed.
Kunz, Christina L. et al. (Aspen coursebook series)
Wolters Kluwer Law & Business, ©2012 274 p. $91.00 (pa)
In this update of the 2008 edition, Kunz (William Mitchell College of Law,
St. Paul, Minnesota) and colleagues emphasize that research is an activity
that relates to the real problems of clients. Summarizing the cornerstones
of commentary, case law, and international public law legal research as
FEAT: focus, efficiency, analysis, and thoroughness, they discuss and
illustrate resources including and beyond LexisNexis and Westlaw; work-
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
flow; and options for optimally researching enacted law, statutory codes,
administrative rules and regulations, and decisions and orders. The text
includes case examples, chapter reflection questions, a self-test, and
companion website. Aspen Publishers is now Wolters Kluwer Law &
Business.
KF250 2012-015404 978-1-61163-145-6
The legal writing survival guide .
Smith, Rachel H.
Carolina Academic Press, ©2012 113 p. $17.00 (pa)
Rachel H. Smith (legal communication and research skills, U. of Miami
School of Law), has created a short, practical, how-to survival guide for
those who must produce legal writing. It is largely a guide to the prin-
ciples of expository writing that everyone should have learned in high
school, many people did not, and many more have forgotten. Smith’s
mission is to make sure that people remember, even when the sentences
they must write are incomprehensible to those of us who do not have a
legal education, and that they be able to apply these rules in technical
ways to legal forms. As a former working lawyer, Smith understands
legalese, but her most valuable point is that good legal writing has very
little to do with legal jargon: make an outline. Use topic sentences. Know
the point of each paragraph. Stay within your page limit. The book is
divided into practical chapters: Surviving Legal Writing (simplifying text,
shortening text, figuring out a document you do not understand),
Surviving Memos, Surviving Briefs, Surviving Correspondence, and a
Survival Toolbelt (basic rules of grammar and usage, citation, and style
for writers who may never have heard of Strunk and White). Smith has
the direct style of a writer and teacher who has learned not to waste any
time; subject headings include how to write “I was wrong,” “I need help,”
and “I did not mean to send that earlier email” emails. Along the way,
the book offers the kind of practical emotional advice that will be
valuable to those who are trying to produce highly technical documents
in a highly competitive environment without adequate sleep. This writer
knows her audience.
KF250 2012-018489 978-1-61163-123-4
Opinion writing, 3d ed.
Aldisert, Ruggero J.
Carolina Academic Press, ©2012 329 p. $40.00 (pa)
Aldisert (emeritus, Senior U.S. Circuit Judge, U.S. Court of Appeals) pro-
vides a third edition of his well-regarded book on legal opinion writing—
and this edition could be described as part teaching manual and part
collection of useful information. While the original core topics are the
same as previous editions, this edition provides step-by-step instruction
for writing trial and appellate opinions. The book also includes a section
with helpful checklists on how to write, evaluate, and shorten opinions.
The book will interest trial and appellate judges, administrative law
judges, arbitrators, and law clerks.
KF250 2011-050112 978-1-59460-788-2
Professional writing for lawyers; skills and
responsibilities, 2d ed.
Johns, Margaret Z. and Clayton S. Tanaka.
Carolina Academic Press, ©2012 235 p. $30.00 (pa)
Johns and Tanaka (UC Davis School of Law) offer a second edition of
their writing text for first-year law students. As the authors note, lawyers
are writers. This updated edition provides step-by-step guidance from the
initial idea and drafting to revising, evaluating, and editing for a variety
of types of letters. Those include office memoranda, client letters,
demand letters, complaints, motions, oral arguments, and appellate
briefs. Also included are several examples of rewriting.
KF250 2012-016496 978-1-61163-017-6
Scholarly writing; ideas, examples, and execution, 2d ed.
Clark, Jessica L. and Kristen E. Murray.
Carolina Academic Press, ©2012 305 p. $35.00 (pa)
As authors of a book on writing targeted specifically to legal students
and beginning professionals in law fields, Jessica L. Clark (George
Washington U. Law School) and Kristen E. Murray (Temple U. Beasley
School of Law) have a difficult task. Their target audience is students in
legal education, who are now often asked to write sophisticated narrative
research papers in programs that offer no instruction in either research
or writing. It is an open question whether students would be better
served by specialty products written by teachers in each field for that
field’s specific market, or by the experience and shared language of
books and programs about good writing and scholarship. The authors
here have tried a middle road. It has a practical focus on where good
scholarship and good writing skills connect, such as choosing a topic that
is interesting to you, not too broad, where you have access, and about
which you might be able to discover something useful. When partnered
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
with practical exercises in the classroom, or paired with a classic guide
to good writing in any discipline, this book fills a huge gap for law stu-
dents and law professionals who need to learn how to write.
KF251 2012-026656 978-0-7355-8775-5
Readings in persuasion; briefs that changed the world.
Edwards, Linda H. (Aspen coursebook series)
Wolters Kluwer Law & Business, ©2012 449 p. $45.00 (pa)
This collection of readings highlights advanced legal writing topics for
law students, with focus on writing the legal brief. Students should have
some background in legal writing, such as organizing a typical legal doc-
ument, drafting a legal brief, writing clearly, and citing correctly. The
first section of the book provides readings on elements of persuasive
writing, covering important topics a lawyer must consider in writing a
brief, such as voice, tone, order, emotion, and reasoning. The second
section introduces excerpts from briefs used in groundbreaking cases,
demonstrating how skillful lawyers have used the abstract ideas in Part
1 when there is a great deal at stake. The historic cases are presented in
sections on history, equality, privacy and liberty intimate conduct, rights
of the accused, and punishment. Each case entry consists mainly of back-
ground, with only a short excerpt from the actual brief; however, a
website offers complete texts of briefs and case decisions. The book fea-
tures stand-alone chapters and chapter discussion questions, plus b&w
photos. Edwards is affiliated with the University of Nevada-Las Vegas.
Aspen Publishers is now Wolters Kluwer Law and Business
KF283 2012-019026 978-1-61163-110-4
Reading like a lawyer; time-saving strategies for reading
law like an expert, 2d ed.
McKinney, Ruth Ann.
Carolina Academic Press, ©2012 312 p. $35.00 (pa)
McKinney (law, U. of North Carolina) supplies law students with a guide
to reading law-related material efficiently and effectively. She first gives
background information on the structure of law school and the funda-
mentals of legal logic, then delineates specific strategies for casebook
reading, statutes, and unedited cases, with a new chapter on how to read
legal materials online.
KF299 2012-020084 978-1-4548-2249-3
Best friends at the bar; the new balance for today’s
woman lawyer.
Blakely, Susan Smith.
Wolters Kluwer Law & Business, ©2012 238 p. $29.95 (pa)
Blakely, an attorney and former teacher, assists female lawyers in bal-
ancing their professional and personal lives by showing them how to
place the self at the center of their lives as professionals. She explains
what is really needed to be happy, illustrating the importance of loving
the work; getting serious; being true to oneself; putting oneself first;
having perspective, time, help, friends, and true grit; living within
means to keep options open; taking credit; being the best lawyer possible;
and thinking about career transitions. Throughout, she draws on the
experiences of other women through quotes, and profiles them in the
final chapter. There is no index. Aspen Publishers is now Wolters Kluwer
Law & Business.
KF300 2012-025875 978-1-4548-2166-3
The leadership matrix; elements of effective leadership.
Newman, Jeffrey Hugh.
Wolters Kluwer Law & Business, ©2012 105 p. $39.00 (pa)
Through colorful comparisons to the Three Laws of Motion of Sir Isaac
Newton or the coaching style of Vince Lombardi, Newman (Sills, Cummis
& Gross) lays out the key principles to effective leadership in an enter-
taining way. The work is written in an informal fashion as can be seen
in the use of words like “egotude” or phrases like “the salami approach”
to employee overload. Although Newman is a well-regarded real estate
attorney, only two chapters take the book into the realm of litigation. No
footnotes or index are provided. Aspen Publishers is now Wolters Kluwer
Law & Business.
KF319 2012-470245 978-0-314-60326-5
Advanced manual for the lawyer’s assistant, 11th ed.
Title main entry.
West, ©2012 757+ p. $90.00
Prepared by NALS, the association for legal professionals, this text pro-
vides guidance to support staff in law offices in a variety of areas,
assuming a working knowledge of legal terminology and procedure.
Opening chapters discuss ethics, law office management, computer infor-
mation systems, accounting, legal writing, legal research, the courts,
administrative agencies, civil procedure, and trial preparation. The
–128–
remainder of the text’s 37 chapters addresses specific areas of law (e.g.
contracts, estate planning, torts, alternative dispute resolution, environ-
mental law, labor law, maritime law, and immigration law).
KF380 2012-003150 978-1-58901-932-4
Law’s virtues; fostering autonomy and solidarity in
American society.
Kaveny, Cathleen. (Moral traditions)
Georgetown U. Press, ©2012 292 p. $29.95 (pa)
Kaveny (law and theology, U. of Notre Dame) argues that law is a moral
teacher of virtue and explores how to adapt this function in a pluralistic
society. This includes encouraging solidarity and empowering autonomy
as the ground of virtuous living. She advocates a third way between
secular (impartial) law and theocracy, underscoring the pedagogic
function of the law and how “law must key its moral message to the
actual culture and customs of the people it purports to govern.” She
organizes the book into three parts with the first considering what it
means to call the law a moral teacher. The next and largest section con-
siders life issues and the law, including abortion, regulating access to
genetic information, and assisted suicide. The last section turns toward
voting, morality and the law.
KF385 2012-021066 978-1-4548-0896-1
An introduction to the American legal system, 3d ed.
Scheb, John M., II and Hemant Sharma. (Aspen college series)
Wolters Kluwer Law & Business, ©2013 526 p. $117.95 (pa)
This introductory text is designed for undergraduates in political science,
sociology, criminal justice, and legal studies, as well as paralegal stu-
dents. After an explanation of the development and structure of
American law and the legal profession, the second part of the book offers
an overview of the substance of the law, with chapters on six types of
law, including criminal law, property law, and family law. Part 3 covers
civil and criminal procedure, and part 4 examines legislative and admin-
istrative law. Pedagogical features include chapter outlines and objectives,
case studies, controversy boxes, discussion questions, and a glossary. An
appendix provides the US Constitution. This third edition offers dis-
cussion of US Supreme Court decisions updated through 2011, along with
updated discussion of current issues such as same-sex marriage. Scheb
taught at the University of Tennessee-Knoxville. Sharma teaches political
science at the University of Tennessee-Knoxville. Aspen Publishers is now
Wolters Kluwer Law & Business.
KF385 2012-021341 978-1-61163-010-7
The United States legal system; an introduction, 3d ed.
Johns, Margaret Z. and Rex R. Perschbacher.
Carolina Academic Press, ©2012 278 p. $32.00 (pa)
This text introducing readers to the US legal system is suited for both the
prospective legal professional and the legally conscientious citizen. The
first chapter outlines a brief history of legal education in the United
States, as well as what law school is like academically and professionally
today. In subsequent chapters, Johns and Perschbacher (law, UC Davis)
introduce judicial hierarchies and jurisdictions, state vs. federal
government and their various branches, the legal canon, statutory
interpretation and legislative intent, cases and case-analysis. A final
section concludes with a case that highlights the tensions between
interpreting the law for equality while remaining sensitive to mitigating
circumstances.
KF386 2012-021026 978-1-4548-0875-6
The study of law; a critical thinking approach, 3d ed.
Currier, Katherine A. and Thomas E. Eimermann. (Aspen college
series)
Wolters Kluwer Law & Business, ©2013 649 p. $126.95
Currier (criminal justice and legal studies, Elms College) and Eimermann
(politics and government, Illinois State U.) use a critical thinking
approach to introduce pre-law, business, criminal justice, paralegal, and
political science students to basic legal concepts and the mechanics of the
US legal system. They focus on the basic foundations of the law and the
legal reasoning process and outline the basic skills needed to read and
understand statutes and cases. They emphasize careful reading for detail,
analytical thinking, and presentation of arguments. This edition has new
discussion questions, critical thinking exercises, and web exercises; infor-
mation on how judges are selected and their role in interpreting and cre-
ating the law; more on freedom of speech and equal protection; and
recent Supreme court cases. Aspen Publishers is now Wolters Kluwer
Law & Business.
–129–
KF410 2012-470002 978-0-314-28022-0
Conflict of laws; American, comparative, international;
cases and materials, 3d ed.
Symeonides, Symeon C. and Wendy Collins Perdue. (American
casebook series)
West, ©2012 1094 p. $194.00
This casebook is designed for a typical three-credit course on conflict of
law, with sections covering choice of law, jurisdiction, and recognition of
judgments. Jurisdiction is not presented first because it is also covered in
other courses usually taught before conflict of law; treating choice of law
first allows jurisdiction to be taught at a more sophisticated level. Most
footnotes have been omitted from the edited cases, and the titles of, and
citations to, most secondary sources have been abbreviated. This third
edition contains many recent cases reflecting contemporary conflicts in
law and practice, but also retains some older cases that have been influ-
ential in shaping American conflicts law. This edition now includes a
chapter on international conflicts in each section of the book. A new
chapter on conflicts involving Indian Tribes and non-state norms leads
students to reflect on the nature, function, and limits of sovereignty and
territoriality. Symeonides teaches law at Willamette University. Perdue
teaches law at the University of Richmond.
KF479 978-90-5887-051-3
Children’s rights; selected landmark cases; the US
Supreme Court.
Kristofer, Maria.
International Courts Assn., ©2011 765 p. $80.00 (pa)
This volume collects US Supreme Court opinions in 27 cases involving the
rights and welfare of children, from 1897’s US v. Wong Kim Ark, which
decided issues of birthright citizenship, to 2011’s Turner v. Rogers, which
involved child support. Other issues addressed by the cases presented
include Native American freedom of education, upbringing of children,
procreation, parental authority, racial segregation in public schools,
Amish private schooling, children of unwed fathers, maternity leave,
family living arrangements, foster children, parents’ rights in courts,
custody rights, child pornography, undocumented immigrant children
and education, visitation rights, child pornography, the death penalty,
Miranda rights, violent video games, and child support. Both majority
and dissenting opinions are included, as well as the Court’s summary
introductions. Distributed in the US by Enfield.
KF540 2012-017366 978-1-4548-1366-8
Family law; theoretical, comparative, and social science
perspectives.
Dwyer, James. (Aspen casebook series)
Wolters Kluwer Law & Business, ©2012 893 p. $190.00
This introduction to family law in the United States, while still presenting
a large amount of case law, is supplemented by other materials that
Dwyer (William and Mary Law School) thought would improve
prospective lawyers’ skills, including statutes to aid in statutory interpre-
tation issues, social science materials to help students become adept in
finding weaknesses in study design and flaws in reasoning because of
the increasing importance of social science in the courtroom, materials
addressing the diverse normative views that surround family law, and an
international comparative law perspective. Aspen Publishers is now
Wolters Kluwer Law & Business.
KF560 2012-470263 978-0-314-26535-7
Cases and materials on American property law, 6th ed.
Kurtz, Sheldon F. et al. (American casebook series)
West, ©2012 1324 p. $170.00
Intended for a property curriculum containing two to six semester units
of property law, this casebook combines a set of traditional legal mate-
rials (drawn from state and federal court decisions and statutes) with his-
torical, economics, and social science materials designed to add
perspective on property rights in the American legal system; these extra
materials don’t require extensive background and can easily be incorpo-
rated into the course or ignored at the instructor’s discretion. The first
seven chapters treat the traditional ‘private’ or common law of property;
there is more material on jurisprudence than in other property case-
books. There is also emphasis on nonmarital or extramarital alternatives
to the law of marital estates, and an economically oriented section on
rent control. Chapter 8 examines the law of servitudes as a privately
created and market driven set of land use control devices. This is fol-
lowed by five chapters on regulatory areas of property law, such as
zoning, housing discrimination, and condominiums. The final three
chapters overview the law of conveyance. This sixth edition features a
streamlined approach to the law of servitudes, plus more attention to
public law problems of regulatory takings. Kurtz teaches law at the
University of Iowa.
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
KF560 2012-470257 978-0-314-27554-7
Property; a contemporary approach, 2d ed. (online access
included)
Sprankling, John G. and Raymond R. Coletta. (Interactive casebook
series)
West, ©2012 976 p. $187.00
Sprankling and Coletta (McGeorge School of Law, U. of the Pacific) have
written a casebook on the core concepts of property law geared toward
the 21st century law student. The authors note that they have included
two areas not usually found in property law texts: intellectual property
and environmental law. Additional topics include: owning personal and
real property, estates and future interests, selling real property, private
land use planning, land use regulation, and more. Also included is 12
months of access to online content.
KF560 2012-470008 978-0-314-91174-2
Property law; power, governance, and the common good.
Freyfogle, Eric T. and Bradley C. Karkkainen. (American casebook
series)
West, ©2012 984 p. $171.00
The main difference between this casebook and others is that this book
treats property as an evolving social institution of vast economic,
political, and moral significance, and as a body of law with distinct fea-
tures and challenges. Another difference is its dedicated treatment of
land- and resource-use rights, making it attractive to instructors who
teach natural resource or environmental law. The text questions conser-
vative and neoliberal assumptions about property, shows how past law-
makers reformed property law, and invites students to consider
possibilities for continued reform. Of special note is a set of eight free-
standing essays on topics such as labor theory, the moral complexity of
private ownership, and the challenges and virtues of common property.
About half of the book’s 99 cases date from 2004; 21 cases are from 2009-
2011. Practice-oriented exercises help students engage with property law
and build basic legal skills. Freyfogle teaches law at the University of
Illinois. Karkkainen teaches at the University of Minnesota Law School.
KF560 2012-470264 978-1-59941-576-5
Property; principles and policies, 2d ed.
Merrill, Thomas W. and Henry E. Smith. (University casebook series)
Foundation Press, ©2012 1397 p. $216.00
Merrill (Columbia Law School) and Smith (Harvard Law School) offer a
second edition of their text (first edition: 2007), which is distinguished by
its unusual organization, although the selection of materials is deliber-
ately conventional. Their approach focuses on underlying principles that
unite the diverse arenas of land and buildings, personal, intellectual, and
natural resources property law. Coverage begins with discussion of two
conceptions of property: trespass and nuisance, and equity. Following are
chapters on original acquisition, values subject to ownership, owner sov-
ereignty and its limits, forms of ownership, entity property, security
interests, title records and property transfer, the law of neighbors, gov-
ernment forbearance, and takings.
KF561 2012-017024 978-1-4548-0915-9
Property, 8th ed.
Emanuel, Steven L. (Emanuel law outlines series)
Wolters Kluwer Law & Business, ©2012 429 p. $43.95 (pa)
In addition to review chapters on many areas, this study guide for law
students offers an 86-page summary covering key concepts of the law of
property, especially designed for use in the last week before an exam.
Along with chapter quizzes and explained answers, each chapter ends
with detailed exam tips on issues that repeatedly pop up on real-life
property exams and on the factual patterns commonly used to test those
issues. Also included are exam questions and explained answers; exam
essays and sample answers; and a chart correlating each section of the
book with the pages covering the same topic in the four leading property
casebooks. This eighth edition contains new material on intellectual
property, religious property, and beachfront property. Also new are flow
charts of legal principles. Aspen Publishers is now Wolters Kluwer Law
& Business.
KF570 2012-021649 978-1-4548-0919-7
Property, 4th ed.
Emanuel, Steven L. (The crunchtime series)
Wolters Kluwer Law & Business, ©2012 269 p. $32.95 (pa)
This study guide for law students provides a 106-page capsule summary
explaining major topics and issues of property; six visual summary
charts outlining the principles of property; and multiple-choice questions
and explained answers in Multistate-Bar-Exam style, taken from the pub-
lisher’s Strategies & Tactics for the Finz Multistate Method. The study
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
guide also contains essays questions and sample answers, short-answer
practice questions and explained answers, and exam tips and tricks.
Aspen Publishers is now Wolters Kluwer Law & Business.
KF570 2012-014585 978-0-7355-0783-8
Real estate and property law for paralegals, 3d ed.
Bevans, Neal R. (Aspen college series)
Wolters Kluwer Law & Business, ©2012 467 p. $112.95 (pa)
This text for paralegal students offers a strong emphasis on practical
applications of real estate law. It supplies practical information on how
to research deeds, decipher mortgage clauses, and how to conduct a title
examination, with special emphasis on the impact of software and the
Internet on the practice of real estate law. Learning features include
margin definitions, ethics boxes, review questions, practice exercises, and
tips on online research. Many sample forms, annotated legal documents,
and cases are also included. An instructor website is available. This third
edition contains updated cases, updated web links, and a new online
workbook. Also new are tech boxes discussing technological innovations
in real estate practice. Bevans teaches at Western Piedmont Community
College. Aspen Publishers is now Wolters Kluwer Law & Business.
KF605 2012-018931 978-1-4224-9874-3
A student’s guide to estates in land and future interests;
text, examples, problems and answers, 3d ed.
Laurence, Robert et al. (Student guide series)
LexisNexis, ©2012 238 p. $29.00 (pa)
Laurence (law, U. of Arkansas) et al. offer beginning law students in
property courses a guide to estates in land and future interests. They
emphasize distinguishing among contingent remainders, executory
interests, and vested remainders subject to divestment, and focus on the
common law of estates in land and future interests in England in about
1700, covering future interests before and after 1536. They do not cover
modern law in detail, as the variations between states are too wide. They
de-emphasize English legal history to focus on the practical significance
of English real property law to American law. They include graphic illus-
trations to symbolize various interests in real property, as well as review
problems with answers and explanations. An appendix includes answers
to problems in relation to modern statutes in California, Illinois,
Minnesota, New Mexico, and North Dakota in 2011.
KF755 2012-022058 978-1-4548-0916-6
Wills, trusts, and estates, 3d ed.
Wendel, Peter. (The Emanuel law outlines series)
Wolters Kluwer Law & Business, ©2012 390 p. $43.95 (pa)
This study guide for law students offers an outline of the law on wills,
trusts, and estates. The book begins with a correlation chart showing
how the chapters of this book correlate to sections of four major legal
texts. Next comes a 43-page summary overview of the material in a
course on wills, trusts, and estates. Subsequent chapters address 16 areas,
from intestacy and testamentary capacity, to estate and gift taxes and the
rule against perpetuities. These chapters close with brief case quizzes,
explained answers, and detailed exam tips. The book concludes with a
section of essay exam questions and suggested answers. This third
edition offers expanded coverage of the elective share doctrine of the
Uniform Probate Code, analyzing the Code’s harmless error approach
versus the traditional strict compliance approach. There is also expanded
material on the Uniform Trust Code, plus discussion of new topics such
as posthumously conceived children and same-sex marriage. Wendel
teaches law at Pepperdine University. Aspen Publishers is now Wolters
Kluwer Law and Business.
KF755 2012-020173 978-0-7355-8824-0
Wills, trusts, and estates, 5th ed.
Beyer, Gerry W. (Examples & explanations series)
Wolters Kluwer Law & Business, ©2012 676 p. $49.95 (pa)
The fifth edition of this reference considers the impact of recent legis-
lation such as the 2008 amendments to the Uniform Probate Code, and
the Tax Relief, Unemployment Insurance Reauthorization, and Job
Creation Act of 2010. Other new topics covered include trust protectors,
rights of same-sex partners, and physician-assisted suicide. Updated
casebook correlation tables reflect new editions of the four major case-
books. Written in a conversational style, the reference covers theory and
practice, with brief explanations in sections on intestate succession, wills,
estate administration, nonprofit transfers, trusts, and other estate
planning concerns. Coverage also includes nonprobate assets, wealth
transfer taxation, disability and death planning, and malpractice and
professional responsibility. Each section begins with a discussion of
applicable concepts, policies, and basic rules, followed by a series of brief
examples (or hypothetical questions) and explanations (or answers). The
book also includes many practical suggestions, plus sample will and trust
–130–
provisions. It can be used as a supplement for courses on wills, trusts,
and estates. A website offers current updates. Beyer teaches law at Texas
Tech University. Aspen Publishers is now Wolters Kluwer Law &
Business.
KF755 2012-030324 978-1-4548-0887-9
Wills, trusts, and estates for legal assistants, 4th ed.
Beyer, Gerry W. and John K. Hanft. (Aspen college series)
Wolters Kluwer Law & Business, ©2013 558 p. $117.95 (pa)
In this update of the 2009 text, Beyer (Texas Tech U. School of Law) and
Hanft (paralegal studies, San Francisco State U.) cover the theoretical and
practical applications of the legal concepts associated with estate
planning, wills and trusts. Following an overview of the real vs. personal
property transfer process, they discuss topics including probate code,
ownership and marital code, intestate succession issues, changing/revo-
cations of wills after execution, taxation, and ethical issues for legal assis-
tants in estate planning. The text includes examples, practice tips, a
glossary, sample forms, and tables of the provisions of the Uniform
Probate Code, Uniform Trust Code, and Internal Revenue Code. Aspen
Publishers is now Wolters Kluwer Law & Business.
KF801 2012-018967 978-1-4548-0918-0
Contracts, 5th ed.
Emanuel, Steven L. (The CrunchTime series)
Wolters Kluwer Law & Business, ©2012 328 p. $32.95 (pa)
This study guide offers a 113-page summary of contract law, touching on
topics most often asked on exams, along with a series of 16 visual flow-
charts outlining principles of contract law, which will be especially useful
for open book exams. The book also includes multiple-choice and short-
answer questions with explained answers, essay questions and example
answers, and exam tips. Aspen Publishers is now Wolters Kluwer Law
and Business.
KF801 2012-419071 978-90-411-3912-2
Contract law in the United States, 2d ed.
Klass, Gregory.
Wolters Kluwer Law & Business, ©2012 292 p. $115.00 (pa)
Klass (law, Georgetown U. Law Center) provides a second edition of his
analysis of U.S. contract law. Intended for lawyers representing clients
with interests in the U.S. as well as academics and researchers, the
author defines and classifies contracts and the differences between con-
tracts and other legal instruments such as torts and quasi-contracts.
Topics include, but are not limited to: formal and evidentiary require-
ments, defects of consent, contract contents, termination, and remedies
such as damages. The second part of the book pertains to specific con-
tracts. Aspen Publishers is now Wolters Kluwer Law & Business.
KF801 2012-029236 978-0-7355-5796-3
The Glannon guide to contracts; learning contracts
through multiple-choice questions and analysis.
Silver, Theodore and Stephen Hochberg.
Wolters Kluwer Law & Business, ©2013 577 p. $42.95 (pa)
Silver and Hochberg (law, Touro College) teach first-year law students
about contracts through multiple-choice questions and analysis and
explanation. They use simple stories to show problems in need of a legal
solution, then describe the legal rule designed to solve it (rather than
stating legal rules first), followed by questions and analysis. They also
address the misunderstandings and erroneous thinking that surround
some rules of contract. Aspen Publishers is now Wolters Kluwer Law &
Business.
KF801 2012-470261 978-0-314-26546-3
The modern law of contracts, 3d ed.
Frier, Bruce W. and James J. White. (American casebook series)
West, ©2012 807 p. $180.00
This casebook introducing the law of contracts to first-year law students
opts for breadth of coverage over depth, sacrificing detailed analysis of
certain subjects, but refusing to throw out important subjects such as the
Statute of Frauds or third-party interest in contracts while still main-
taining a reasonable length for a four-hour course as well as a relatively
full presentation of judicial opinions. Chapters are presented on the
bargain theory of contract, negotiation and formation of the contract, the
contents of the contract, legal regulation of contracts, remedies, condi-
tions and self-help remedies during performance, and third-party rights
and responsibilities. The authors (both of the U. of Michigan Law School)
have updated this third edition in light of doctrinal developments and
emerging issues.
–131–
KF801 2012-470260 978-0-314-19583-8
Principles of contract law, 4th ed.
Burton, Steven J. (American casebook series)
West, ©2012 688 p. $196.00
This casebook treats the law of contract under five general principles,
with individual chapters devoted to the autonomy, security, justification,
fairness, and compensation principles. Unlike most case books, this one
makes principles and policies of contract law explicit. It offers a small
cluster of ideas both as a rich example of one approach and as a foil for
exploring competing approaches. The bias in the casebook is toward the
law as it is applied by the courts in contemporary judicial practice. The
book ends with a chapter on the rights of third parties. Burton teaches
law at the University of Iowa.
KF801 2012-024274 978-0-7355-9822-5
Problems in contract law; cases and materials, 7th ed.
Knapp, Charles L. et al. (Aspen casebook series)
Wolters Kluwer Law & Business, ©2012 1115 p. $210.00
Knapp (law, U. of California, Hastings, and contract law, New York U.) et
al. offer first-year law students an overview of the rules and principles
of both common law and statutory contract law, within historical and
theoretical contexts, as well as the lawyering perspective. They explain
basic concepts, formation, interpretation and implication, defenses and
grounds for nonenforcement, third parties, and breach and remedies,
and provide cases, notes, problems, and questions, with new principal
cases in this edition. They include comments on places where contract
law overlaps with or is affected by other areas, such as tort, agency, pro-
fessional responsibility, and forms of alternate dispute resolution.
Material from the Uniform Commercial Code is integrated where rel-
evant. Aspen Publishers is now Wolters Kluwer Law & Business.
KF849 2011-942304 978-1-59460-804-9
Government contract law in the twenty-first century.
Tiefer, Charles and William A. Shook. (Carolina Academic Press law
casebook series)
Carolina Academic Press, ©2012 760 p. $90.00
This is a revised version, with added material, of the authors’ previous
casebook Government Contract Law; Cases and Materials (2d ed. 2004).
Tiefer (U. of Baltimore School of Law) and Shook (senior partner, Shook
Doran LLP) retain the core materials on such topics as the limited
authority of officials, competition, negotiated procurement, protests of
awards, contract types and administration, changes in contracts, claims,
small businesses and subcontracts, disputes, and termination for con-
venience and for default, utilizing more recent cases throughout. They
have also added seven new chapters, as well as new subchapters within
the core chapters, in order to cover a range of emerging topics related to
technology and health, recent litigation aspects, the evolution of transac-
tional government contracting, and connections between government
contracting and other policy realms.
KF889 2012-382583 978-90-411-3910-8
Commercial and economic law in the United States.
Fiebig, Andre.
Wolters Kluwer Law & Business, ©2012 138 p. $81.00 (pa)
Derived from the multi-volume International Encyclopaedia of Laws, this
monograph by Fiebig (a partner with Baker & McKenzie in Chicago) pro-
vides an overview of the basics of commercial and economic law in the
United States. Topics addressed include the sources of commercial law,
obligations of economic operators and institutions, goodwill,
broker/client relations, commercial property rights, bankruptcy, secured
transactions, negotiable instruments, documents of title, letters of credit,
commercial contracts, sale of goods, regulation of commercial activities,
competition law, and state regulation of the conditions of commercial
transactions. Aspen Publishers is now Wolters Kluwer Law & Business.
KF889 2011-942665 978-1-133-18863-6
Essentials of business law and the legal environment,
11th ed.
Mann, Richard A. and Barry S. Roberts.
South-Western, ©2013 1121 p. $304.95
Designed for use in business law and legal environment courses, Mann
and Roberts’ (both business law, U. of North Carolina, Chapel Hill)
updated text covers all topics included in the business law section of the
CPA exam, and also addresses the legal responsibilities and liabilities of
accountants and the corporate governance portion of the business envi-
ronment and concepts section of the CPA Exam. The 11th edition con-
tains a new “Taking Sides” feature, requiring students to apply critical
thinking skills to case-based fact situations; 21 new legal cases; and
recent legal and regulatory changes, including the Dodd-Frank Wall Street
Reform and Consumer Protection Act of 2010; amendments to the
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
Revised Model Business Corporation Act; Leahy-Smith America Invents
Act of 2011; Horizontal Mergers Guidelines of 2010; and Americans with
Disabilities Act Amendments of 2008. Oversize: 8.75x11.27”.
KF915 2012-010945 978-1-4548-1010-0
Commercial transactions; a systems approach, 5th ed.
LoPucki, Lynn M. et al. (Aspen casebook series)
Wolters Kluwer Law & Business, ©2012 1305 p. $209.00
The authors’ systems approach sets legal rules in the context of people,
contracts, and the physical practicalities of transactions as a means of
affording law students the opportunity to better understand the signifi-
cance and effectiveness of the relevant laws. Also distinguishing this pres-
entation is the authors’ emphasis on problems that require students to
formulate legal strategies; all needed information is included so that the
intellectual task is to apply the material. This fifth-edition text organizes
material in sections on sales systems; financial systems (payment, credit
enhancement liquidity systems); secured credit (the creditor-debtor rela-
tionship, and the creditor-third party relationship. The four authors are
affiliated as follows: Lynn M. LoPucki (UCLA), Elizabeth Warren
(Harvard), Daniel Keating (Washington U.), and Ronald J. Mann
(Columbia U.). Aspen Publishers is now Wolters Kluwer Law & Business.
KF915 2012-013607 978-0-7355-0966-5
The Glannon guide to sales; learning sales through
multiple-choice questions and analysis, 2d ed.
Burnham, Scott J.
Wolters Kluwer Law & Business, ©2012 395 p. $42.95 (pa)
Burnham (law, Gonzaga U.) provides law students and those preparing
for the bar exam with a review of sales and leases (covering Articles 1
and 2 of the Uniform Commercial Code) that uses multiple-choice ques-
tions to assess their understanding and improve their exam skills, and
aims to develop their skills of statutory analysis and interpretation. He
emphasizes the main ideas of topics (not the small details), and includes
analysis of correct and incorrect answers after each question, discussing
the rules in the context of the facts. Updated throughout, this edition has
new multiple-choice questions, expanded explanations, and new chapters
on software transactions and international sales transactions. Aspen
Publishers is now Wolters Kluwer Law & Business.
KF915 2012-018041 978-1-4548-0723-0
Problems and materials on the sale and lease of goods,
6th ed.
Whaley, Douglas J. and Stephen M. McJohn. (Aspen casebook series)
Wolters Kluwer Law & Business, ©2012 410 p. $175.00
This book explores the law of the sale and lease of goods and licenses
primarily by focusing on a series of problems designed to encourage stu-
dents to concentrate on the exact statutory language of the Uniform
Commercial Code and related statutes. While focus is on Article 2 of the
Uniform Commercial Code, there is also coverage of relevant parts of
several other Articles, including Article 2a (leases), Article 5 (letters of
credit), and Article 7 (documents of title). Other areas covered include
contract formation, warranties, terms of the contract, performance of the
contract, and remedies. Representative cases and textual notes are
included (most footnotes have been removed from cases). Problems
contain references to the Uniform Commercial Code. Whaley is professor
emeritus at The Ohio State University. McJohn teaches law at Suffolk
University Law School. Aspen Publishers is now Wolters Kluwer Law and
Business.
KF1050 2012-022016 978-1-4548-1359-0
Problems and cases on secured transactions, 2d ed.
Brook, James. (Aspen casebook series)
Wolters Kluwer Law & Business, ©2012 511 p. $173.00
This text is intended for an introductory course on the law of Secured
Transactions as presented in Article 9 of the Uniform Commercial Code,
as adopted in 2001. After an introduction to Article 9 and the classifi-
cation of collateral, sections cover the creation and protection of the
Article 9 interest, sales and other dispositions of collateral, the scope of
Article 9, and default and enforcement. Each chapter begins with intro-
ductory background and pointers to certain parts of the Code and
Comments as preparation. The bulk of the chapter consists of problems
and cases; most problems are longer than in other casebooks. An
appendix offers sample forms. Brook teaches law at New York Law
School. Aspen Publishers is now Wolters Kluwer Law & Business
KF1164 2012-008634 978-0-7698-4593-7
Understanding insurance law, 5th ed.
Jerry, Robert H. and Douglas R. Richmond.
LexisNexis, ©2012 1025 p. $45.00 (pa)
Jerry (law, U. of Florida) and Richmond (managing director, Aon Risk
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
Services) offer a fifth edition of their book on insurance law. They offer
discussions of a broad range of topics in the field, including contract for-
mation, the insurable interest requirement, scope of obligations, the
mechanics of claim presentation, excuses for the insurer’s nonperfor-
mance, automobile insurance, and reinsurance. The authors note that the
book would be useful to law students and lawyers unfamiliar with the
topic.
KF1249 2012-470289 978-0-314-26694-1
Cases and materials on the law of torts, 5th ed.
Christie, George C. et al. (American casebook series)
West, ©2012 1706 p. $215.00
For first-year students, this fifth-edition text offers comprehensive cov-
erage of torts, with the idea that instructors can select contents according
to their interests and the amount of course time. Minimally edited cases
are presented as a means of encouraging development of the techniques
of case analysis. The new edition reflects the increasing interaction
between tort law and constitutional law and the expanded reach of inter-
national human rights conventions. Substantial modifications of the pre-
vious edition (2004) are incorporated in such areas as negligence and
causation, duty decisions, and product liability, among other topics. The
three authors are affiliated as follows: George C. Christie (Duke U.),
Joseph Sanders (U. of Houston), and W. Jonathan Cardi (Wake Forest U.).
KF1250 2012-470276 978-0-314-27787-9
A short & happy guide to torts.
Schechter, Roger E. (Short & happy law series)
West, ©2012 197 p. $15.00 (pa)
Mapping the underlying rule structure in the law of torts, Schechter (law,
George Washington U.) defines the different types of intentional torts, the
reasonably prudent person standard of care, and the elements of the neg-
ligence tort. The study aid provides vivid examples for interpreting
breach of duty, factual causation, proximate cause, compensatory
damages, and negligence defenses. No index is provided.
KF1250 2012-024635 978-1-4548-0872-5
Tort law for paralegals, 4th ed.
Bevans, Neal R. (Aspen college series)
Wolters Kluwer Law & Business, ©2013 568 p. $141.95 (pa)
Bevans (Western Piedmont Community College) offers a fourth edition of
his text on tort law for paralegals. Subjects covered include an intro-
duction to tort law and short history, intentional torts, malicious prose-
cution, defenses to intentional torts, negligence, duty, breach of duty
under negligence law, negligence defenses, proximate cause, damages,
defamation, malpractice, insurance, and fraud, misrepresentation, and
business torts. Aspen Publishers is now Wolters Kluwer Law & Business.
KF1250 2012-022580 978-1-4548-0688-2
Tort law; responsibilities and redress, 3d ed.
Goldberg, John C. P. et al. (Aspen casebook series)
Wolters Kluwer Law & Business, ©2012 1220 p. $211.00
The cases and the notes in this book of lightly edited cases aim to demon-
strate how the substance of a body of law like torts is heavily influenced
by rules of procedure. Contemporary cases are used as much as possible,
and some ‘easy’ cases are included. The book also contains opinions
from intermediate appellate courts. It begins with a detailed overview
offering introduction to torts. Part 2 covers liability for physical harms,
and part 3 deals with battery, assault, false imprisonment, and infliction
of emotional distress. Part 4 covers liability without fault and products
liability, and part 5 looks at torts in the Supreme Court. An appendix
offers about 45 pages of materials related to a case against Wal-Mart
stores. A supporting website contains additional cases with notes. This
third edition reflects current law, with updated material on federal pre-
emption of state tort law, and new material on human rights litigation
and the Alien Tort Statute. There is also new discussion of issues raised
by litigation surrounding the 2010 Deepwater Horizon oil spill. Goldberg
teaches law at Harvard. Aspen Publishers is now Wolters Kluwer Law &
Business.
KF1297 2012-023835 978-1-936360-08-6
Drug injury; liability, analysis and prevention, 3d ed.
Title main entry. Ed. by James T. O’Donnell.
Lawyers & Judges Pub. Co., ©2012 872 p. $199.00
This reference is for attorneys, healthcare professionals, risk managers,
drug manufacturers, and regulators. It summarizes the FDA’s responsi-
bility in monitoring drug development and safety, reviews current lia-
bility issues, and identifies the role that pharmacists play in enhancing
medication safety. Focusing on the most dangerous drugs, the book
demonstrates what can happen when practitioners don’t perform ade-
quately. Part 1 charts the pharmaceutical process, while Part 2 presents
–132–
background and cases on high-risk drug therapies resulting in injury
and litigation. Part 3 is devoted to pharmacists, pharmacy, and pharmacy
practice, and Part 4 deals with forensic toxicology issues, such as recre-
ational drugs, drug testing, and pain equipotency. This third edition con-
tains 14 new or extensively revised chapters on topics such as on
counterfeit drugs and the dangers of opioids. Contributors include
lawyers, doctors, pharmacologists, and pharmacists. O’Donnell teaches
pharmacology at Rush University Medical Center.
KF1355 2012-021491 978-1-4548-0268-6
Business organizations; cases, problems, and case studies,
3d ed.
Smith, D. Gordon and Cynthia A. Williams. (Aspen casebook series)
Wolters Kluwer Law & Business, ©2012 742 p. $194.00
This casebook for law students in a business associations course is
intended to help students apply fundamental legal principles to complex
factual situations; therefore, it includes discussion problems based on
actual problems faced by real companies as reported in decided cases or
in the business press, along with excerpts from transactional and liti-
gation documents. In selecting cases, the editors have included historical,
economic, progressive, international, sociological, and psychological per-
spectives. Unlike many texts, the book begins with a chapter on the law
of agency. The rest of the text covers partnerships, limited liability com-
panies, and corporations. Each chapter is structured around formation,
management, financial attributes, fiduciary duties, and termination/dis-
solution of partnerships. Use of outside materials is not required because
fundamental concepts are explained in case introductions. Smith teaches
law at Brigham Young University. Williams teaches law at the University
of Illinois. Aspen Publishers is now Wolters Kluwer Law & Business
KF1414 2012-010137 978-1-59460-884-1
Business law and organizations for paralegals.
Morissette, Emily Lynch.
Carolina Academic Press, ©2013 298 p. $45.00 (pa)
Morissette (U. of San Diego) provides paralegals with a text on business
law and organizations. She addresses the foundation of business entities,
including agency law, employment-at-will, employment agreements,
workers’ compensation, wages, and benefits; corporate documents, such
as professional licensing, registration of intellectual property, fictitious
business name statements, sales tax, business licenses, workers’ compen-
sation and unemployment insurance, social security, and employer iden-
tification numbers; major business entities (sole proprietorships, general
and limited partnerships, limited liability partnerships and companies,
and types of corporations); investing; and the business entity as a litigant
in negligence, employment discrimination, business torts, and bank-
ruptcy lawsuits.
KF1414 2012-021984 978-1-4548-1361-3
Commentaries and cases on the law of business
organization, 4th ed.
Allen, William T. et al. (Aspen casebook series)
Wolters Kluwer Law & Business, ©2012 712 p. $107.00
Allen (law and business, New York U.), Kraakman (law, Harvard Law
School), and Subramanian (law and business, Harvard Law School)
present cases and provide commentary in this introduction of the basics
principles of business law in the United States. They first deal with the
fundamentals of organizational law in a business setting, including
agency law, the partnership form and its variants, and the corporate
form. They then examine relationships among shareholders, corpora-
tions, and corporate creditors; the functioning of the voting system,
including proxy rules; the duty of care; and the business judgment rule
and other legal devices that insulated corporate officers from shareholder
liability. Finally, they address more specialized issues, including self-
dealing and other potential duty of loyalty issues, challenges of executive
compensation, the law and practice of shareholder derivative suits, trans-
actions in corporate control, the specialized legal treatment of funda-
mental corporate actions (especially mergers and acquisitions), conflicts
for corporate control, and the regulation of transactions in shares on the
public markets. Aspen Publishers is now Wolters Kluwer Law &
Business.
KF1428 2012-470268 978-1-60930-059-3
Corporate finance; cases and materials, 7th ed.
Bratton, William W. (University casebook series)
Foundation Press, ©2012 — p. $195.00
This enduring text was first published in 1972; the sixth edition, in 2008.
In his preface to this seventh edition, Bratton (law, U. of Pennsylvania)
expresses feelings connected with his involvement with the subject over
the decades, and he explains changes to this edition including integration
of the 2008 financial crisis and subsequent reform. He also states that his
–133–
text continues to be about corporate capital structure (rather than a basic
text on regulated financial institutions). Coverage encompasses valuing
the firm and its securities, debt financing, financing with hybrid secu-
rities, and equity capital structure (payout policy and ownership stakes).
Appendices include financial contract forms, state corporate codes, the
bankruptcy code, provisions of the Federal Securities Laws, and sections
of the Dodd-Frank Wall Street Reform and Consumer Protection Act of
2010.
KF1439 2012-471082 978-1-60930-116-3
Securities regulation; cases and materials, 12th ed.
Coffee, John C. and Hillary A. Sale. (University casebook series)
Foundation Press, ©2012 1630 p. $204.00
The two authors for this edition are John C. Coffee, Jr. (Columbia U.) and
Hillary A. Sale (Washington U.), but this work has a legacy going back
to its original publication in 1963. The title page identifies this 12th
edition text as the successor to Securities Regulation by Jennings, Marsh,
Coffee and Seligman. Coverage now encompasses causes of the financial
crisis of 2008, efforts by Congress and others to prevent a recurrence, the
Dodd-Frank Act (now law), and the JOBS Act and its impact on the SEC
and on startups and small businesses. Throughout, the book stresses
policies and theories undergirding the cases and the statutory and regu-
latory structure. Organization is in sections offering an overview of the
capital markets and coverage of the regulation of the distribution of secu-
rities, regulation of trading in securities, civil liabilities under the federal
securities laws and shareholder voting, and enforcement of the federal
securities laws.
KF1477 2012-470262 978-0-314-18488-7
The law of mergers and acquisitions, 4th ed.
Oesterle, Dale A. (American casebook series)
West, ©2012 805 p. $185.00
This casebook by Oesterle (law, The Ohio State U.) is designed as a text
for a three-credit, upper-class law school course on mergers and acquisi-
tions. Following the introduction, chapters cover the basic mechanics of
the acquisition process; successorship to assets and liabilities; acquisition
documents; the legal duties of boards of directors, senior executives, and
controlling shareholders; the disclosure requirements of the Federal
Securities Act and state law, accounting and tax issues; protecting con-
sumer interests; and issues in international acquisitions. Presumably, the
fourth edition has been updated in light of recent developments in law,
but the author provides no specific information on what changes may or
may not have been made.
KF1649 2012-471259 978-0-314-19992-8
Cases and materials on U.S. antitrust in global context, 3d
ed.
Fox, Eleanor M. (American casebook series)
West, ©2012 959 p. $200.00
Eleanor M. Fox (New York U. School of Law) co-wrote the first edition
(1989) with Larry Sullivan (d. 2007), and the team had the help of
Rudolph H.R. Peretz for the second edition (2004); Fox is sole author of
this third edition. In her preface she briefly reviews the dramatically
evolving context of this topic with regard to Supreme Court decisions,
increasing internationalization, and the impact of the rapidly evolving
technological and economic environments. The book’s revisions reflect all
these changes and include new problems, more non-US references, and
investigation of the philosophic premises of recent court decisions.
KF1976 2012-470248 978-0-314-27446-5
International business transactions; a problem-oriented
coursebook, 11th ed.
Folsom, Ralph H. et al. (American casebook series)
West, ©2012 1344 p. $200.00
This text is designed to introduce law students to a wide range of
problems in international sales and letters of credit, trade regulation,
technology transfers, foreign investment, and dispute settlement. These
problems are explored in developed, developing, nonmarket, and tran-
sition economies. After a brief introduction to business in the world com-
munity, the book uses 36 hypothetical problems to present important
issues in international business transactions, using case materials from
treaties, conventions, statutes, and regulations. The hypothetical problems
also use material contained in a document section of the text; documents
include US trade acts and other US legislation, international treaties,
WTO agreements, regional documents such as NAFTA, and the laws of
Canada, Mexico, the UK, and the EU. An appendix introduces the EU
legal system. The book provides ample material for a single survey
course, or for separate courses on contracting across borders, interna-
tional trade and economic relations, and foreign investment. Folsom
teaches law at the University of San Diego.
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
KF2400 2012-003896 978-90-04-16810-7
Aviation law; cases, laws and related sources, 2d ed.
Larsen, Paul B. et al.
Martinus Nijhoff Publishers, ©2012 1386 p. $308.00
Presenting aviation law from the American point of view, this second
edition handbook is based on the original edition (date not stated), which
included coverage of early changes resulting from the attack on
September 11, 2001, but was in urgent need of updating. Air lawyers,
both foreign and American, will find this a detailed representation of rel-
evant law from the American point of view as well as an overview of the
international scene. Coverage begins with an introductory chapter on the
evolution of the aviation industry. Following is coverage of crimes, torts,
and rage involving aircraft; economic regulation of domestic and inter-
national aviation; international transport of passengers, aircraft manu-
facturers’ product liability; cargo damage and ground damage; aviation
security and airline travel restrictions; the US Federal Aviation
Administration; the National Transportation Safety Board; labor rela-
tions; and environmental regulations, among other topics. The three
authors’ affiliations are not stated. Martinus Nijhoff is an imprint of
Brill.
KF2750 2012-015389 978-1-118-29072-9
Digital media law, 2d ed.
Packard, Ashley.
Wiley-Blackwell, ©2013 404 p. $69.95
Packard (communication and digital media studies, U. of Houston-Clear
Lake) presents students and professionals in publishing, public relations,
advertising, marketing, e-commerce, graphic art, web design, animation,
photography, video and audio production, game design, instructional
technology, and other fields with a textbook on digital media law. It
covers issues like freedom of expression, information access and pro-
tection, intellectual property, defamation, privacy, indecency, information
gathering, and commercial speech in the context of new media, and reg-
ulations imposed on the content and operation of telecommunications.
This edition has been updated and expanded to include discussion of
new protections for corporate political speech, student expression, adver-
tising, video games, public video camera use, net neutrality, and
eAccessibility. It includes recent laws and regulations addressing libel
tourism, cyberstalking, sexting, and online privacy, and new case studies
related to WikiLeaks’ posts of classified information, file sharing, music
licensing, and the claims that social media sites assert over user-posted
intellectual property.
KF2765 2012-017595 978-1-59332-521-3
An open Internet for all; free speech and network
neutrality.
Bagwell, Dana D. (Law and society; recent scholarship)
LFB Scholarly Publishing, LLC, ©2012 162 p. $67.00
Bagwell (research manager, MarketLab/NovaQuant) examines the ways
that the first amendment can be used to make the case for Internet
network neutrality. She cites legal precedents from the 1940s on in her
argument that government has a strong interest in assuring free and
equal access to information. A bibliography includes formal and
informal federal agency communications, federal legislation, House and
Senate bills, and relevant legal cases.
KF2910 2012-027457 978-0-86715-583-9
Defense from within; a guide to success as a dental
malpractice defense expert.
Krompier, Jeffrey A.
Quintessence Pub. Co., ©2012 134 p. $42.00 (pa)
This resource for dental clinicians explains how to become a dental mal-
practice defense expert. Early chapters present the attorney’s perspective
and the jury’s perspectives and review the expert’s case participation.
Later chapters walk through the expert opinion, the deposition, and the
trial. There is also advice on creating a curriculum vitae, getting started,
and rules of conduct. The book’s attractive two-color layout includes b&w
ornamental photos. Krompier is an attorney in private practice who
defends health and dental care providers against malpractice suits.
KF2979 2012-021983 978-1-4548-2009-3
Intellectual property in the new technological age, 6th ed.
Merges, Robert P. et al. (Aspen casebook series)
Wolters Kluwer Law & Business, ©2012 1156 p. $193.00
This sixth edition of a text/reference for law students and professionals
integrates coverage of the America Invents Act, plus the latest Supreme
Court opinions on patentable subject matter. There is updated and
expanded coverage of digital copyright law, and the book’s chapter on
trademark law has been reorganized to cover the doctrines of genericness
and functionality earlier. An introduction presents philosophical
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
foundations of the protection of intellectual property and reviews key
areas of intellectual property. Further chapters address trade secret
protection, patent, copyright, and trademark law, state intellectual
property law, and federal preemption. Cases and problems are included.
Merges is affiliated with the Berkeley Center for Law and Technology at
the University of California-Berkeley. Aspen Publishers is now Wolters
Kluwer Law & Business.
KF2980 978-3-8329-5366-9
Enforcing intellectual property rights; necessary
instruments versus over-enforcement.
Title main entry. Ed. by Horst-Peter Götting et al. (Schriften zum
geistigen eigentum und zum wettbewerbsrecht; v.34)
Nomos, ©2012 134 p. $48.00 (pa)
This work collects eight papers from a conference held in October 2009
and organized by the Technical University of Dresden’s Institute for
Intellectual Property, Competition, and Media Law, in cooperation with
the Institute of Intellectual Property Law. Discussion encompasses the
impact of new legal standards on national law and proceedings and the
question of whether the reinforced recognition of intellectual property
rights has reached its limits. Major themes include civil enforcement,
problems of competition law, and objections and counterclaims in IP lit-
igation. Some specific paper topics include implementation of the
enforcement directive into Polish law, the enforcement of personality
rights, the compulsory license under competition law, and compulsory
patent licenses under German law. Editor Götting is affiliated with the
Technical University of Dresden. The book is distributed in the US by
ISBS.
KF2980 2012-017958 978-0-7355-9806-5
Intellectual property, 3d ed.
Barrett, Margreth. (Emanuel law outlines series)
Wolters Kluwer Law & Business, ©2012 411 p. $43.95 (pa)
Barrett (law, U. of California, Hastings) assists law students who are
taking intellectual property survey courses, and those in courses on
patents, copyrights, and trademarks and unfair competition, review the
key substantive points of patent law, copyright law, trademarks, and
unfair competition, as well as state trade secret, publicity, and unde-
veloped idea laws. She summarizes the black-letter law in outline form,
with examples, and includes exam tips, chapter questions and answers,
and essay questions and answers. This edition has a rewritten chapter on
patents to reflect changes brought by the Smith-Leahy America Invents
Act; updates on new US Supreme Court decisions, including cases on
patentable subject matter regarding medical diagnostic methods and
natural phenomena and business methods and abstract ideas, “willful
blindness” in patent infringement, and the constitutionality of foreign
copyright restoration; a reworked section on federal dilution claims that
discusses three new Circuit Court of Appeals decisions construing the
Trademark Dilution Revision Act of 2006; updates to reflect key Circuit
Court of Appeals decisions, including those on mental processes as
patentable subject matter, narrowing inequitable conduct defense, and
limiting scope of permissible “hot news misappropriation” claims; and
expanded discussion of implied copyright licenses, deceptive marks and
marks that “falsely suggest a connection,” extraterritorial trademark
infringement claims, and judicial review after resort to a Uniform
Domain Name Dispute Resolution Policy cybersquatting proceeding.
Aspen Publishers is now Wolters Kluwer Law & Business.
KF2980 2012-030339 978-0-7355-9807-2
Intellectual property, 3d ed.
Barrett, Margreth. (The CrunchTime series)
Wolters Kluwer Law & Business, ©2012 285 p. $32.95 (pa)
This study guide for law students features 11 flow charts for various sit-
uations, unpublished elsewhere. The flowcharts review important points
in a visual format, offering a step-by-step guide for addressing each
subject and determining whether there are enforceable rights and
whether there is a cause of action. An 86-page capsule summary of intel-
lectual property law focuses on issues likely to be covered on the exam.
Exam tips are provided in categories of intellectual property generally,
trade secrets, patents, rights of undeveloped ideas, copyright and
trademark law, unfair competition, the right of publicity, and the rela-
tionship between federal and state law. The study guide also contains
short-answer questions with explained answers, plus essay exam ques-
tions and sample responses. Barrett teaches law at the University of
California’s Hastings College of the Law. Aspen Publishers is now Wolters
Kluwer Law & Business.
–134–
KF2994 978-1-85604-827-9
The e-copyright handbook.
Pedley, Paul.
Facet Publishing, ©2012 194 p. $49.95 (pa)
Through a complex web of cases and legislation, copyright law in the
United Kingdom has attempted to keep up in an era of APIs, e-books,
blogs, wikis and social networking. This practical and in-depth volume
thoroughly reviews the latest legal considerations around activities such
as deep linking, mashups, and scraping. Although it touches on specific
cases from the U.S., the work is mostly geared toward library and infor-
mation professionals in the United Kingdom and makes use of relevant
European and British law. Useful information is provided upfront, with
tables of cases and applicable legislation, along with a list of initialisms
and a glossary. Pedley is currently a visiting lecturer in information law
and policy at City University. Distributed in the US by Neal-Schuman.
KF3080 2011-045918 978-1-4411-0610-0
Digital prohibition; piracy and authorship in new media
art.
Guertin, Carolyn.
Continuum Publishing Group, ©2012 p. $120.00
Guertin (digital media, U. of Texas-Arlington) explores the changing rela-
tionship between creativity and property in new media. Her overall
themes are the aesthetics of appropriation, authorship, and creative can-
nibalism and digital anthropology. Among specific topics are the third
space of authorship, interruption, dynamic data and augmented bodies,
from karaoke culture to vernacular video, real time, and producing mis-
translation in China and Pakistan.
KF3101 2012-392016 978-1-4548-1601-0
America Invents Act; law & analysis.
Brinckerhoff, Courtenay C. et al.
Wolters Kluwer Law & Business, ©2012 — p. $199.00 (pa)
This book for patent practitioners analyzes the impact of the America
Invents Act of 2011, which reformed the Patent Act, highlighting how the
new law differs from old law. Coverage encompasses the first-to-file pro-
visions, derivation and derivation proceedings, changes impacting patent
prosecution, transitional programs for covered business methods, inter
partes review and post-grant review, provisions related to litigation, and
other components of the AIA. Appendices offer the text of laws and side-
by-side comparisons of 35 U.S.C. before and after the enactment of the
America Invents Act of 2011. Brinckerhoff is an attorney in private
practice. Aspen Publishers is now Wolters Kluwer Law & Business.
KF3114 2012-011307 978-1-4548-1853-3
Mueller on patent law; patentability and validity; v.1.
Mueller, Janice M.
Wolters Kluwer Law & Business, ©2012 800 p. $295.00
Presented in a looseleaf three-ring binder, volume 1 of this new reference
begins with basic principles and coverage of patent claims and patent-eli-
gible subject matter. Following chapters address requirements pertaining
to enablement, best mode, the written description of the invention,
nonobviousness, and utility, among other topics. The volume includes
discussion of the before and after of the recently enacted Leahy-Smith
America Invents Act of 2011. Mueller (U. of Pittsburgh School of Law,
2004-2011) has had extensive experience in the field, including litigation
of patent and copyright infringement cases with the US Department of
Justice. Aspen Publishers is now Wolters Kluwer Law & Business.
KF3114 2011-041720 978-0-674-06468-3
Rethinking patent law.
Feldman, Robin.
Harvard University Press, ©2012 279 p. $45.00
Feldman (law, U. of California Hastings College of Law) argues that
doctrinal and theoretical debates about patent law have been
fundamentally misconceived as being based on defining the boundaries
of the rights of patent holders. In her view, patent law more correctly
should be seen as merely creating opportunities to bargain over the
definition of rights, as patents are established individually for each
patent in the face of rapidly changing knowledge and meaning and thus
could never provide a definitive and clearly bounded set of rights.
Furthermore, the practical footprint of a patent holder’s rights generally
develops during licensing interactions, which themselves depend on
factors related to the size of the company, its position relative to other
companies, and the company’s other assets. After critiquing current
formulations of doctrine and theory, she expands upon her theory and
then considers general implications for court treatments of patent law.
She also addresses implications for specific contemporary questions,
including whether software, genes, and business methods are proper
subjects for patent law; the proper relationship between patent, antitrust,
–135–
regulation, and contract law (illustrated with examples such as
pharmaceutical patents); and whether the footprint of a patent should
reach beyond the state of the art at the time of the invention (focusing
in particular on inventions in the biomedical industry).
KF3114 2012-024160 978-0-7698-5276-8
Understanding patent law, 2d ed.
Landers, Amy L.
LexisNexis, ©2012 559 p. $43.00 (pa)
Landers (law, Pacific McGeorge School of Law) overviews the history and
spectrum of patent arrangements in the United States. Since the first
edition was published in 2008, Congress has enacted the America Invents
Act of 2011 and there have been several key decisions by the U.S.
Supreme Court and the Court of Appeals for the Federal Circuit, so an
update was in order. To keep the information current there are periodi-
cally downloadable updates and supplements at the LexisNexis law
school website. The book closes with an 11 page glossary and a table of
cases.
KF3319 2012-015283 978-0-7355-0777-7
Basic labor and employment law for paralegals, 2d ed.
Craig, Clyde E. (Aspen college series)
Wolters Kluwer Law & Business, ©2012 495 p. $95.95 (pa)
This text is designed for a course in basic American labor and
employment law for paralegal students who will work in labor-man-
agement relations. The text’s clean, readable layout includes sample
forms as well as learning features such as scenarios and cases, discussion
questions and exercises, and additional suggested case readings. The first
part of the text reviews the origins of labor and employment law in
America and describes the employment relationship. Part 2 examines
labor-management relations in the union setting, explaining issues such
as the selection of representatives, employer and union unfair labor prac-
tices, and economic weapons such as strikes and boycotts. Part 3 treats
unlawful employment discrimination. The text also contains appendices
on how to brief a case and how to understand legal journals and con-
tract clauses. This second edition reflects recent trends and legislation,
such as the Genetic Information Nondiscrimination Act of 2008, and con-
tains new material on sexual-orientation discrimination. This edition also
reflects recent efforts to eliminate bargaining rights for public employees.
Aspen Publishers is now Wolters Kluwer Law & Business
KF3369 2012-029451 978-1-57018-778-0
The developing labor law; the board, the courts, and the
National Labor Relations Act, 6th ed.; 2v.
Title main entry. Ed. by John E. Higgins, Jr. et al.
Bloomberg BNA, ©2012 3556 p. $700.00
With the assistance of a long list of chapter and contributing editors,
editor-in-chief John E. Higgins Jr. (Catholic U. of America, Columbus
School of Law, National Labor Relations Board, retired) undertook
revision of the fourth, fifth, and now the sixth edition of this important
reference prepared by the ABA Section of Labor and Employment Law.
For practitioners and students, two hefty volumes offer coverage that
begins with a history of the National Labor Relations Act. Subsequent
chapters detail protected employee activity, the representation process
and union recognition, collective bargaining, arbitration, economic
action, relations between employee and union, and administration of the
Act.
KF3464 2012-470246 978-1-60930-073-9
Employment discrimination; law and theory, 3d ed.
Rutherglen, George et al. (University casebook series)
Foundation Press, ©2012 996 p. $193.00
This casebook by Rutherglen (employment law, U. of Virginia) and
Donohue (law, Stanford Law School) introduces employment discrimi-
nation law in the United States and has been updated to reflect major
decisions of the Supreme Court and new statutory developments.
Chapters cover individual claims of intentional discrimination, class
claims of disparate treatment and impact, affirmative action, affirmative
action under the Equal Pay Act and Title VII, other grounds of discrim-
ination and coverage, procedures under Title VII, remedies, Section 1981
and other Reconstruction Era civil rights acts, the Age Discrimination in
Employment Act, and disabilities.
KF3464 2012-470006 978-0-314-26789-4
Employment discrimination law; cases and notes.
Player, Mack A. and Martin H. Malin. (American casebook series)
West, ©2012 669 p. $185.00
This teaching textbook by Player (emeritus, Santa Clara U. of Law) and
Malin (director, Institute for Law & Workplace, Illinois Institute of
Technology) on employment discrimination law in the United States is
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
intended to contain only such essential materials as will be of use in a
single three unit semester course, and thus case materials have been
heavily edited and citations for notes have been kept to a minimum. They
present their material in sections that discuss: basic principles, including
coverage and scope, classes protected by statute, defenses and justifica-
tions for the use of protected classification, terms and conditions of
employment that define the scope of the statutes, the concept of dis-
crimination, and the meaning of the statutory term “because of;”
methods of proving violations; and procedures and remedies in
enforcement.
KF3509 2012-029412 978-0-7698-5280-5
Law of employee pension and welfare benefits, 3d ed.
Frolik, Lawrence A. and Kathryn L. Moore.
LexisNexis, ©2012 650 p. $133.00
Frolik (law, U. of Pittsburgh) and Moore (law, U. of Kentucky) largely
follow the framework of the previous edition of their casebook on
employee benefits law in the United States, retaining the aim of providing
the reader with an appreciation of why the federal government regulates
employee benefit plans, how it does so, and the policy and social justice
questions raised by the manner and effectiveness of that regulation. They
have, however, integrated new statutory and case law developments
throughout their nine chapters, which are devoted to the origins and
reasons for employee benefits and the Employee Retirement Income
Security Act, employee pension plans, welfare benefits, regulation of
employee benefit plans, preemption, plan administration, enforcement
issues, nondiscrimination rules, and plan amendment and termination.
Student questions and problems are integrated throughout.
KF3649 2012-471075 978-0-314-26495-4
Social security law and practice; cases and materials.
Bloch, Frank S. (American casebook series)
West, ©2012 957 p. $193.00 (pa)
Offering material not covered fully in many other law books, this text for
a classroom course (rather than a clinical course) covers the Social
Security Act and its major benefit programs. It focuses not only on the
relevant substantive law, but also on the most commonly contested issues
related to disability benefits, which make up the majority of real-life
Social Security practice. Early chapters relate historical background and
describe the basic coverage of the Social Security Act’s major benefit pro-
grams. This is followed by more detailed discussion of eligibility require-
ments for old age, survivors’, and disability benefits. The next two
chapters focus specifically on the statutory disability standard and how
it is implemented in practice. Other topics discussed include the Social
Security Administration’s process for determining disability, selected dis-
ability issues in contested claims, and calculation and payment of ben-
efits. The text concludes with two chapters on practice and procedure,
with special emphasis on representing a client for disability benefits.
Appendices provide selected Social Security regulations, rulings, and
statutes. Bloch is emeritus professor of law at Vanderbilt University Law
School.
KF3650 2012-392172 978-90-411-4012-8
Social Security law in the United States.
Glynn, Timothy P.
Wolters Kluwer Law & Business, ©2012 150 p. $81.00 (pa)
The first chapter of this reference for lawyers and scholars offers general
and historical background on Social Security law and reviews sources of
the law. Subsequent sections are devoted to institutions, contributions and
financing, health care, family allowances, incapacity to work, and indus-
trial accidents and occupational diseases. Further sections treat unem-
ployment, pensions, disabled persons, minimum income benefit, and
claims and adjudication. Glynn teaches employment and corporate law
at Seton Hall Law School. The material presented here was originally
published in the International Encyclopedia of Laws. Aspen Publishers is
now Wolters Kluwer Law & Business.
KF3775 2012-470256 978-1-59941-723-3
Environmental law and policy; problems, cases, and
readings, 2d ed.
Revesz, Richard L. (University casebook series)
Foundation Press, ©2012 1295 p. $195.00
This casebook presents materials that are intended to provide students
with an understanding of three key areas of US environmental law: the
major intellectual perspectives affecting the development of environ-
mental policy, the provisions of the major environmental statutes and
regulations, and the institutional structures in which environmental reg-
ulation is carried out. Thematically, Revesz (law, New York U.) stresses
the trade-off between environmental goals and other social goals,
including compliance costs, as well as types of incentives transmitted by
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
environmental rules. This second edition has been updated to reflect
recent changes in law and to incorporate recent commentary and cov-
erage of new topics such as ecosystem services markets.
KF3775 2012-470254 978-0-314-26607-1
Environmental law in context; cases and materials, 3d ed.
Craig, Robin Kundis. (American casebook series)
West, ©2012 1111 p. $194.00
The third edition of this environmental law text/reference reflects
changes in federal environmental law over the last four years and offers
a reorganized introduction to environmental law, emphasizing the EPA’s
new environmental justice programs. Covering the latest Supreme Court
decisions, the book provides updated material on the spotted owl’s
recovery plan and expanded coverage of the EPA’s use of the Clean Air
Act to address greenhouse gas emissions. An opening chapter explains
why the federal government protects the environment, traces the sources
of federal environmental law, and overviews climate change and other
challenges for regulators. The rest of the book deals with environmental
law and the common law on hazardous waste; environmental proce-
dures and judicial review; protecting endangered and threatened species
in the US and globally; the Clean Air Act and the costs and benefits of
environmental regulation; the Clean Water Act and federalism; and envi-
ronmental citizen suits and the US Constitution. Craig teaches law at the
University of Utah.
KF3775 2012-471057 978-1-60930-173-6
Environmental policy law; problems, cases, and readings,
6th ed.
Title main entry. Ed. by Holly Doremus et al. (University casebook
series)
Foundation Press, ©2012 1005 p. $195.00
This casebook is intended for an introductory course in environmental or
natural resources law. Coverage encompasses the regulation of private
and public land use and the protection of wildlife, as well as pollution
control and remediation, highlighting the similarities between pollution
law and the regulation of natural resources and the role of state and local
law as well as federal law. Part 1 covers basic concepts with chapters on
environmental policy perspectives, environmental common law, the
administration environmental law, and environmental federalism. Part 2,
on natural resources, focuses on the role of the NEPA, while subsequent
sections treat toxics and waste, pollution control, and international envi-
ronmental law. Chapter problems provide a focus for class discussion.
Doremus teaches law at the University of California-Berkeley.
KF3775 978-0-7748-2412-5
The right to a healthy environment; revitalizing Canada’s
constitution.
Boyd, David R. (Law and society series)
U. of British Columbia Press, ©2012 306 p. $94.00
Boyd, an environmental lawyer and professor at Simon Fraser University,
explores the arguments for and against adding environmental provisions
to the Canadian constitution. He reviews the history of such proposals
going back to the late ‘60s, provincial environmental bills of rights,
focusing on the practical effects of recognizing these rights. His focus on
the Canadian constitution is not just personal, but emanates from a
scholarly interest in understanding Canada among the majority of
nations that do recognize the environment in their constitutions and
highest laws. He identifies these other countries and considers the legal
and ecological impact these provisions have made. The final chapters
describe the specific tangible impacts constitutional recognition of envi-
ronmental rights would have in Canada, explores the political and legal
avenues for achieving this recognition, and offer a draft “Canadian
Charter of Environmental Rights and Responsibilities.” U.S. distribution
is by U. of Washington Press. Canadian distribution is by U. of Toronto
Press.
KF3821 2012-470265 978-1-60930-088-3
Law and the American health care system, 2d ed.
Rosenbaum, Sara et al. (University casebook series)
Foundation Press, ©2012 1413 p. $186.00
Combining law and policy—the authors believe that the subjects are inex-
tricably intertwined—this second edition text builds on the original pub-
lished in 1997, and a subsequently published supplement (2001). A new
edition was of course mandatory given the substantial changes of recent
years such as Obamacare, more formally known as the Patient Protection
and Affordable Care Act, which became law on March 23, 2010. The
book incorporates an understanding of American health law and policy
as being shaped by the perspectives of professionalism social contract,
and market competition. Material is arranged in four parts focusing on
access to care, health insurance and health care financing, health care
–136–
quality, and regulation of health care transactions. The four authors are
affiliated as follows: Sara Rosenbaum (George Washington U.), David M.
Frankford and Rand E. Rosenblatt (Rutgers U.), and Sylvia A. Law (New
York U.).
KF3827 2012-022300 978-0-313-34187-8
The euthanasia/assisted-suicide debate.
Pappas, Demetra M. (Historical guides to controversial issues in
America)
Greenwood Press, ©2012 183 p. $58.00
Writing for general readers and undergraduate students, Pappas (soci-
ology, St. Francis College) explains the controversy over euthanasia and
assisted suicide over the past 100 years in the US and the UK, with
emphasis on the past 50 years. Chronological chapters chart develop-
ments from the 1930s to the 2000s, from the era of prosecutions for
medical euthanasia to the decriminalization of assisted-suicide for those
in vegetative states. Various legislation efforts are described, with a
chapter-length case study on legalizing and implementing physician-
assisted suicide in Oregon in the 1990s and 2000s. The final chapter
looks at current cases shedding light on state reactions to euthanasia and
assisted suicide. Appendices offer tables of cases, legislation, proposed
legislation, and initiatives. The book also includes a glossary.
KF4119 2012-025810 978-1-61608-700-5
The 200 most frequently asked legal questions for
educators. (reprint, 2009)
Essex, Nathan L.
Skyhorse Pub. Co., ©2012 313 p. $16.95 (pa)
Are students entitled to Constitutional protection in public schools? Do
teachers have explicit rights to express themselves through religious dress
and appearance? This accessible reference for teachers, school adminis-
trators, and policy makers explains various aspects of the law related to
public education in plain language and conversational writing style. All
of the book’s 14 chapters are in Q&A format, with legal citations pro-
vided. Each chapter includes summary tables and closes with a
summary of relevant court cases involving the chapter topic, plus a
summary list of guidelines and key points. Areas of discussion include
student discipline, terms and conditions of employment, school and dis-
trict liability, religious freedoms in public schools, collective negotiations,
and No Child Left Behind. Appendices provide federal statutes, the
Constitution, a glossary of legal terms, and a list of professional associa-
tions. The book was first published in 2009. Essex teaches educational
law at the University of Memphis.
KF4119 2012-470243 978-0-314-27539-4
Education and the law, 3d ed.
Biegel, Stuart. (American casebook series)
West, ©2012 1012 p. $194.00
This third edition casebook on legal issues in education was published
three years after the second edition, a vivid indicator of how many new
developments have occurred in the field in a short period of time. This
edition includes two new chapters (on privacy law and disability rights
in postsecondary education), and other chapters have new additions and
sections. A brief sampling of topics includes: campus safety and the
criminal justice system, student freedom of expression, equal opportunity
rights, educators’ rights, and morality, value, and educational policy. The
author is Biegel, U. of California, Los Angeles.
KF4119 2011-040902 978-1-4129-8758-5
School law.
Title main entry. Ed. by Charles J. Russo. (Debating issues in American
education; v.8)
Sage Publications, ©2012 357 p. $80.00
This reference, a volume in the Debating Issues in American Education
series, examines a variety of emerging and current issues in school law.
A sampling of topics includes freedom for teachers to have more control
over their curricula, school uniforms, student and teacher drug testing,
disciplinary standards, educational rights of homeless children, sexual
misconduct records against teachers, limits on student and teacher free
speech, and teacher unions and collective bargaining. Editor is Russo
(education, U. of Dayton).
KF4305 2011-047586 978-1-58834-322-2
A legal primer on managing museum collections, 3d ed.
Malaro, Marie C. and Ildiko Pogány DeAngelis.
Smithsonian Books, ©2012 540 p. $47.95 (pa)
Museums function as cultural warehouses for objects understood to be
vitally important. As a result, the laws that control keeping of and access
to these objects are also vitally important. This book has been the
primary text on the subject in English; this is the newly updated third
–137–
edition. It is clearly written without legal jargon by two lawyers special-
izing in the subject, and is technical in style. The book is designed to
cover legal issues for all major categories of museum, including his-
torical, cultural, natural history, and art. It is most detailed in its cov-
erage of human objects: cultural property, art, and antiquities. The
contents are well organized. Part one, The Museum, covers definitions of
museums, board responsibilities, and who is accountable for what. Part
two, The Collection, covers collection management policy, accessioning
objects (including laws on stolen objects, UNESCO conventions, cultural
property, CITIES and other laws restricting use of plants and animals,
antiquities and historic property, and copyright and Fair Use), deacces-
sioning objects (return, sale, donation, disposal), loans, unclaimed loans,
international loans, temporary custody, objects found in the collections,
promised gifts, tax considerations, appraisal and authentication, duty to
care for collections, insurance, access to collections, and visitor and
employee safety. Sample agreements and contracts are included within
the text in the relevant chapter. Web links to documents online are pro-
vided. The book clarifies the importance of nonprofit status, the three
duties of board members, the difference between a legal and an ethical
standard (and why both are important), and the importance for every
museum of having a well-drafted and enforced collection management
policy. Required reading for all museum professionals and vital for every
scholar or critical theorist who wishes to write about or critique
museums.
KF4541 2012-012363 978-0-465-02957-0
America’s unwritten constitution; the precedents and
principles we live by.
Amar, Akhil Reed.
Basic Books, ©2012 615 p. $29.99
As author and legal scholar Amar (law and political science, Yale U.)
points out in his introduction, the 8,000 words of “terse text” in the U.S.
Constitution created essentially a framework, a beginning—and certainly
not a comprehensive document intended to accommodate the intricacies
and changes occurring in an ever-evolving country. As familiar as
phrases like “separation of powers,” “checks and balances,” and “rule of
law” may be, they are not included in the Constitution. Amar provides a
scholarly and in-depth exploration of what the ‘unwritten Constitution’ is
and how to understand it.
KF4550 2012-418103 978-1-4548-0925-8
Siegel’s constitutional law; essay and multiple-choice
questions and answers, 5th ed.
Siegel, Brian. Ed. by Ronald J. Krotoszynski.
Wolters Kluwer Law & Business, ©2012 319 p. $34.95 (pa)
This study guide for law students helps bridge the gap between memo-
rizing a rule of law and understanding how to use it in an exam. The
book begins with an overview of the exam-writing process, with tips on
issue spotting, how to discuss an issue and how to structure the answer,
how to transition from one issue to the next, and how and when to make
assumptions. The book then presents essay and multiple-choice questions
with sample essays and explained answers. Krotoszynski teaches law at
the University of Alabama. Aspen Publishers is now Wolters Kluwer Law
and Business.
KF4550 2012-015336 978-0-7698-4734-4
Understanding constitutional law, 4th ed.
Attanasio, John B. and Joel K. Goldstein.
LexisNexis, ©2012 830+ p. $43.00 (pa)
Attanasio (law, Southern Methodist U.) and Goldstein (law, Saint Louis U.)
present the newest edition of their textbook on constitutional law in the
United States. They approach the topic largely through explanatory text,
although some case material is included, and generally cover the
standard topics across 17 chapters, including the history of the consti-
tution and the principles of constitutional argument; the courts and
judicial review; congressional power; the Commerce Clause; the federal
system; the states and the Dormant Commerce clause; executive power;
liberty, property, due process, and the Taking and Contract Clauses;
racial and gender equality; affirmative action; equal protection for other
groups and interests; political speech and association; government and
the print and electronic media; speech in public places; special doctrines
in the system of freedom of expression; and government and religious
freedom.
KF4755 2012-471078 978-1-60930-061-6
Comparative equality and anti-discrimination law; cases,
codes, constitutions, and commentary.
Oppenheimer, David B. et al. (University casebook series)
Foundation Press, ©2012 752 p. $171.00
Oppenheimer (law, U. of California at Berkeley), Foster (law, Fordham
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
U.), and Han (criminology and law, U. of California at Irvine) present an
internationally comparative casebook examining laws around the world
that have been passed to address social inequality based on human dif-
ferences. Chapters address employment discrimination and affirmative
action; the tensions between guaranteeing equality and providing liberal
protection of religious, personal, or political self-expression; and how
legal articulations and enforcements of equality are influenced by issues
of political organization between local agencies, intermediary govern-
ments, and national or supranational institutions.
KF4755 978-0-465-02996-9
Mismatch; how affirmative action hurts students it’s
intended to help, and why universities won’t admit it.
Sander, Richard and Stuart Taylor, Jr.
Basic Books, ©2012 348 p. $28.95
In spite of affirmative action law, minority students are less likely to
finish college, even when given preference for admission. In this work
for general readers, educators, and administrators, Sander (law, eco-
nomics, UCLA) and co-author Taylor, a legal journalist, investigate this
paradox of ‘mismatch’ in affirmative action, focusing on the debate on
the law school mismatch. Drawing on interviews with students and uni-
versity officials, they point out the deception and secrecy surrounding
the results of racial preferences at universities and demonstrate how
racial preferences backfire against the students they are supposed to
help. The authors note that most universities neglect outreach to poor,
working-class, and even middle-class students in their single-minded
focus on race. They also offer an extended case study on what happened
in California after the legal ban on racial preferences. The authors con-
clude by giving recommendations for closing the test score gap and
making higher education admissions and outcomes more transparent. A
companion website contains extensive technical and supplemental
material.
KF4757 2012-011278 978-0-398-08815-6
Hispanics in the U.S. criminal justice system; the new
American demography.
Title main entry. Ed. by Martin Guevara Urbina.
C.C. Thomas, ©2012 418$59.95 p. $79.95
Noting the dearth of information on the subject, Urbina (criminal justice,
Sul Ross State U.-Rio Grande College) brings together a group of sociology,
criminal justice, and public administration scholars from the US and
Canada who present 17 studies on Hispanics in the US police, judicial,
and penal systems. The studies focus particularly on how ideas of eth-
nicity underpin and legitimize practices and with integrated discussion
of gender variation and major forces shaping public opinion. In the
section on police, they discuss theories; the history and influence of eth-
nicity; how ethnicity impacts field practices; the relationship between
Latinos and law enforcement; critical issues facing defendants, from
detection to arrest; the history of immigration laws as in relation to
Latinos, particularly Mexicans; and the dynamics of arresting ethnic
minorities. They then detail the historical context of experiences in the
judicial system, including the repressive practices against Mexicans in the
Southwest that resulted in executions, vigilantism, and mass expulsions;
repression against Mexicans by the dominant group in the US, resulting
in the criminalization of Mexican identity; unreasonable searches and
seizures; the underrepresentation and exclusion of Latinos from juries;
the processing of defendants; critical issues facing prisoners; probation
and parole; the historical legacy of executions; and life after prison. The
volume is aimed at criminal justice and law enforcement professionals
and students.
KF4770 2012-008641 978-1-4224-9864-4
Understanding the First Amendment, 4th ed.
Weaver, Russell L. and Donald E. Lively. (The understanding series)
LexisNexis, ©2012 406 p. $43.00 (pa)
Weaver (U. of Louisville Louis D. Brandeis School of Law) and Lively (vice
president for academic affairs, InfiLaw) introduce the core elements of
First Amendment law in the United States, primarily adopting an
explanatory textual approach and avoiding lengthy case excerpts.
Thirteen chapters discuss: the origins and nature of the First
Amendment; speech advocating violent or illegal action; content regu-
lation; overbreadth, vagueness, and prior restraints; content neutrality;
testing the boundaries of doctrine; freedom of association and compelled
expression; the government as employer, educator, and source of funds;
rights of the press; media technology and the First Amendment; the
Establishment Clause; and the Free Exercise Clause.
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
KF4880 2012-470267 978-1-59941-935-0
The law of democracy; legal structure of the political
process, 4th ed.
Issacharoff, Samuel et al. (University casebook series)
Foundation Press, ©2012 1390 p. $178.00
This casebook by Issachraoff (constitutional law, New York U.), Karlan
(public interest law, Stanford U.), and Pildes (constitutional law, New
York U.) explores issues associated with the legal institutions and prac-
tices of democratic politics in the United States. Thirteen chapters are pre-
sented on the design of democratic institutions, the right to participate,
reapportionment,, the role of political parties, money and politics, pre-
clearance and the voting rights act, constitutional and legislative
approaches to majority rule and minority vote dilution, racial vote
dilution under the Voting Rights Act, redistricting and representation,
gerrymandering and race, direct democracy, remedial possibilities for
defective elections, and alternative democratic structures. This fourth
edition has been updated and reorganized, with most revisions aimed at
making the material more concise and reducing the coverage of issues
that have become less important over the years.
KF4886 2012-015535 978-0-415-80848-4
Law and election politics; the rules of the game, 2d ed.
Title main entry. Ed. by Matthew J. Streb.
Routledge, ©2013 306 p. $140.00
This collection of a dozen essays interrogates how law and judicial inter-
pretation of the law affect politics in the United States. The essays con-
sider cases of courts making important and controversial decisions about
issues like campaign finance, voting rights, redistricting, party primaries
and campaign financing to show how election laws and electoral politics
are intractable. Their scope ranges from the national to the local level.
The essays are organized into three sections that focus on campaign
finance law and campaigns, voters, and institutions. They critically
examine the role of money in politics, how the Internet is changing how
candidates campaign and how voters mobilize, the impact of new voting
technologies and early voting, debates over voter identification, direct
democracy and citizen-driven initiatives, and getting third parties on
ballots. The contributors are mostly professors of political science, law
and public administration.
KF4945 2012-470278 978-0-314-27818-0
Cases and materials on statutory interpretation.
Eskridge, William N. et al. (American casebook series)
West, ©2012 872 p. $155.00 (pa)
This adaptation of Cases and Materials on Legislation: Statutes and the
Creation of Public Policy, 4th ed. introduces the textualism, intentionalism,
imaginative reconstruction, purposivism, and dynamic theories of
American judicial practice and explains the accepted and evolving
canons of statutory construction. Eskridge (Yale Law) et al. examine the
role of extrinsic sources for statutory interpretation, statutes created by
popular initiatives, congressional influence over statutory implemen-
tation, and judicial deference to agency interpretations.
KF5640 2012-016412 978-1-4665-0737-1
The endangered species act; history, implementation,
successes, and controversies.
Doub, J. Peyton.
CRC Press, ©2013 262 p. $79.95
Written for those with a professional or personal interest in environ-
mental protection, but with a marked interest in accessibility, this book
is an in-depth analysis of the complicated Endangered Species Act, an
intricate practical application of the theories of environmental conser-
vation which aims to protect plant and animal species from extinction.
Doub not only outlines the guidelines set forth by the Act but discusses
some of the more compelling stories and controversies related to it. Each
chapter includes an introduction, conclusion, and notes as well as clearly
differentiated subtopics to aid reader comprehension and a color photo-
graph inset.
KF5698 2012-470000 978-0-314-26765-8
Cases and materials on land use, 6th ed.
Callies, David L. et al. (American casebook series)
West, ©2012 1078 p. $194.00
This casebook introduces the law and regulation of land use in the
United States. Chapters are presented on the unplanned and unregulated
environment; zoning; constitutional limits on land use controls; subdi-
vision regulation, official map, infrastructure finance, and consumer
protection; zoning and housing; revitalizing the urban core; changing
from sprawl to smart growth; global warming, green development, rain-
water capture, and renewable energy; and controlling the use of ecolog-
ically sensitive lands. Presumably this sixth edition has been updated in
–138–
accordance with recent developments, although the editors provide no
significant detail on changes that may or may not have been made from
past editions.
KF5698 2012-027533 978-1-4548-1012-4
Land use regulation; cases and materials, 4th ed.
Selmi, Daniel P. et al. (Aspen casebook series)
Wolters Kluwer Law & Business, ©2012 1032 p. $187.00
The fourth edition of this reference for lawyers reflects the bursting of
the housing bubble and the subsequent recession of 2008. There is new
material on areas such as sustainable development, smart growth, and
transit-oriented development. This edition also contains new cases on
diverse subjects such as judicial review of small tract rezoning, the inter-
pretation of open meeting laws, and the availability of land use initia-
tives. Of special interest in this edition is new material addressing
opposition to development, especially in disputes over the siting of alter-
native energy sources. Other new coverage includes the ethics of land-use
decision making and alternative means of regulating land use. The ref-
erence continues its focus on the attempts of municipalities to require
developers to pay for infrastructure, and examines recent responses of
legislatures, courts, and commentators to the Supreme Court’s decision
on Kelo v. City of New London. Selmi teaches law at Loyola Law School.
Aspen Publishers is now Wolters Kluwer Law & Business.
KF5730 2011-029525 978-1-59460-818-6
Community economic development law; a text for
engaged learning.
Title main entry. Ed. by Susan D. Bennett et al.
Carolina Academic Press, ©2012 448 p. $60.00 (pa)
This book is intended as a collection of resources on community eco-
nomic development law that can be adapted for use as a textbook or for
community development law clinics. The field has, in recent years,
become an important strategy behind efforts to reduce persistent poverty
and develop sustainable economic and social change in low income com-
munities. Subjects include legal and organizational structures, access to
wealth and wellbeing in low income communities, access to capital
resources such as tax credits and grants, small business, affordable
housing, advocacy in public and private land use decisions, and com-
munity justice. Editors are Bennett (law, American U.), Blom (law, U. of
Maryland), Howells (law, U. of the District of Columbia), and Kenn (law,
Syracuse U.).
KF6368 2012-012743 978-1-4548-0996-8
Federal income taxation, 16th ed.
Bankman, Joseph et al. (Aspen casebook series)
Wolters Kluwer Law & Business, ©2012 730 p. $198.00
Bankman (law and business, Stanford U.), Shaviro (taxation, New York U.
School of Law), and Stark (law, U. of California at Los Angeles) present
case decisions, notes, and questions in order to provide students with an
introduction to US income taxation law. They have continued the trend
of recent editions of incorporating perspectives from fields outside of
law, including history, economics, finance, and political science, as well
including comparative materials from other countries. Aspen Publishers
is now Wolters Kluwer Law & Business.
KF6369 2012-033269 978-1-4548-1066-7
Problems and materials in federal income taxation, 8th
ed.
Guerin, Sanford M. et al. (Aspen casebook series)
Wolters Kluwer Law & Business, ©2013 781 p. $191.00
Unlike many other income tax casebooks, this text focuses on major con-
cepts and their underlying policies, rather than offering an overly
detailed treatise. Taxation of property transactions is emphasized because
federal income taxation is a prerequisite to other tax courses. The text
stresses a problem-solving approach through the use of many short
problems throughout the chapters. The book begins with a broad
overview of the federal income tax system, then presents chapters on the
concept of gross income, items excluded from gross income, choosing the
proper taxpayer, and timing of gross income. Further coverage includes
deductions for trade or business expenses, capital gains and losses,
investment and personal deductions, timing of deductions and tax
shelters, and computing tax liability. Guerin teaches law at Arizona State
University. Aspen Publishers is now Wolters Kluwer Law & Business.
KF6369 2012-020798 978-0-7698-4891-4
Taxation of individual income, 10th ed.
Burke, J. Martin and Michael K. Friel.
LexisNexis, ©2012 1107+ p. $169.00
This 10th-edition text is for beginning tax students with no tax back-
ground taking a basic course. Each chapter begins with a set of
–139–
problems, an assignment, lists of vocabulary and objectives, and an
overview. An introduction to federal income taxation is followed by 30
chapters covering gross income concepts and limitations, sale of a prin-
cipal residence, life insurance and annuities, compensation for personal
injury and sickness, business expenses, and so on, ending with accrual
method accounting, annual accounting, and capital gains and losses. The
two authors are affiliated as follows: J. Martin Burke (U. of Montana
School of Law) and Michael K. Friel (U. of Florida College of Law).
KF6450 2012-470266 978-0-314-19487-9
Taxation of business enterprises; cases and materials, 4th
ed.
Peroni, Robert J. and Steven A. Bank. (American casebook series)
West, ©2012 1239 p. $208.00
Peroni (law, U. of Texas at Austin) and Bank (law, U. of California, Los
Angeles) use a casebook approach to teach law students about the tax-
ation of C corporations, S corporations, partnerships, and limited liability
companies, while incorporating problems. They describe the law in an
order that follows the life cycle of a corporation, provide background and
discussion of cases, and include notes. This edition incorporates major
legal developments through February 2012.
KF8205 2012-010383 978-0-7698-5516-5
Cohen’s handbook of federal Indian law, 2012 ed.
Cohen, Felix S.
LexisNexis, ©2012 1452 p. $231.00
The front matter includes a foreword and an excerpt from the 1982
edition describing the extraordinary leadership and dedication of Felix S.
Cohen (1907-1953), who wrote the first edition (1941), gleaning from a 46-
volume collection of federal laws and treaties that he, primarily, had
compiled. That first edition incorporated his remarkably forward-looking
vision, and it endured for decades as an unmatched reference in an area
of law that is full of complexities and reversals. Editor-in-chief Newton
(Notre Dame Law School) and a roster of editors and contributing
authors continue the legacy. A history of federal Indian policy is followed
by coverage of principles of interpretation; tribal governments;
tribal/federal and tribal/state relationships; civil jurisdiction; taxation;
environmental regulation; gaming; liquor laws; child welfare; property;
and water rights, among other topics.
KF8839 2012-013678 978-1-4548-0222-8
Civil procedure, 3d ed.
Freer, Richard D. (Aspen treatise series)
Wolters Kluwer Law & Business, ©2012 918 p. $77.00 (pa)
Freer (law, Emory U.) presents first-year law students with a text on civil
procedure that uses real-world, common terms; breaks doctrines into
constituent parts; emphasizes how various doctrines fit together; uses
hypothetical situations to test application of principles; pulls together
complex topics into analytical frameworks; and places topics in context
with each other and the larger goal of the pursuit of justice. Chapters are
arranged in the order of bringing, defending, and litigating a case. This
edition has discussion of recent developments, such as the impact of the
Jurisdiction and Venue Clarification Act of 2011, the first personal juris-
diction cases in about 20 years (J. McIntyre Machinery Ltd. v. Nicastro and
Goodyear Dunlop Tires Operations, S.A. v. Brown), the Court’s decision
concerning corporate citizenship in Hertz Corp. v. Friend, The Shady Grove
opinion and its impact of the Erie doctrine, Wal-Mart v. Dukes and its
impact on class action practice, and revisions to the Federal Rules of Civil
Procedure. It also includes expanded analysis of pleading under Twombly
and Iqbal; e-discovery; preclusion, including rejection of virtual repre-
sentation; and aggregate litigation. Aspen Publishers is now Wolters
Kluwer Law & Business.
KF8839 2012-470255 978-1-60930-047-0
Civil procedure, 3d ed.
Rowe, Thomas D. Jr. et al. (University casebook series)
Foundation Press, ©2012 736 p. $190.00
Retaining the goal of presenting a casebook that covers both doctrinal
and theoretical themes of civil procedure in the United States in a man-
ageable length, the authors (professors of law from Duke U., Vanderbilt
U., and U. of Notre Dame) have updated this third edition in accordance
with recent Supreme Court and lower court jurisprudence, Congressional
action on subject matter jurisdiction and venue of the federal courts, and
significant amendments to the Federal Rules of Civil Procedure. They
incorporate seven new Supreme Court opinions and eight new lower
federal court decisions as principal cases and incorporate discussions
and citations of numerous others into their notes.
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
KF8839 2012-470269 978-0-314-27454-0
Leading cases in civil procedure, 2d ed.
Mullenix, Linda S. (American casebook series)
West, ©2012 907 p. $145.00 (pa)
This first-year civil procedure casebook has been produced by Mullenix
(U. of Texas School of Law) with the purpose of identifying the leading
cases in civil procedure that law students should know as they move into
professional life while simultaneously reducing the amount of detailed
nuance contained in most civil procedure course-books in order to
present a one-volume book that includes cases, constitutional provisions,
statutes, and rules but is still suitable for a one-semester, fourteen-week
course. This goal has been pursued by focusing on core canon and core
decisions that are illustrative but not exhaustive of the key problems and
issues of the topic. Chapters discuss personal jurisdiction, subject matter
jurisdiction, modern pleading, joinder of parties and claims, discovery,
summary judgment, trial and post-trial motions, choice of applicable
law, representational class action litigation, procedural due process, right
to trial by jury, interlocutory appeal, and res judicata and preclusion doc-
trine. This second edition has been revised to include coverage of the rel-
evant portions of the December 2010 revisions to the Federal Rules of
Civil Procedure and the Federal Courts Jurisdiction and Venue
Clarification Act of 2011.
KF8841 2012-013679 978-1-4548-0912-8
Civil procedure; keyed to Yeazell, 8th ed.
Cross, John T. (The Emanuel law outlines series)
Wolters Kluwer Law & Business, ©2012 332 p. $43.95 (pa)
Cross (law, U. of Louisville) helps law students understand civil pro-
cedure. He aims to complement the Yeazell Civil Procedure casebook and
focuses on the individual rules, their content, and why certain rules are
the way they are. He reviews topics in an outline format and includes
quiz questions, answers, and exam tips, as well as essay questions and
answers. This edition includes recent Supreme Court opinions on per-
sonal jurisdiction, subject matter jurisdiction, class actions, and the
standard for pleading a claim, and revisions to the Federal Rules of Civil
Procedure. Aspen Publishers is now Wolters Kluwer Law & Business.
KF8841 2012-016219 978-1-4548-1097-1
Inside civil procedure; what matters and why, 2d ed.
Erichson, Howard M. (The inside series)
Wolters Kluwer Law & Business, ©2012 286 p. $41.95 (pa)
Primarily based on civil procedure in federal courts, this study guide by
Erichson (law, Fordham U.) explores in detail a subject that many law
students either find dry or confusing. Each chapter begins with an
overview and closes with a chapter summary, and provides sidebars and
FAQ sections throughout. Useful connections boxes also appear that show
the relation of the subject discussed to information in other chapters,
along with occasional step-by-step analyses. A two page table of cases
closes out the book. This 2nd edition provides information on new
federal rules and statutes as well as coverage of recent important cases.
Aspen Publishers is now Wolters Kluwer Law & Business.
KF8858 2012-010182 978-1-4548-0402-4
Federal jurisdiction, 6th ed.
Chemerinsky, Erwin. (Aspen student treatise series)
Wolters Kluwer Law & Business, ©2012 1132 p. $79.00 (pa)
This text explains the current law defining the jurisdiction of the US
federal courts, identifies important unresolved issues and the lower
courts’ position on them, and discusses each area of the law, examining
the underlying, competing policy considerations. The book begins with a
chapter on the history of federal jurisdiction and a description of the
current structure of the federal judiciary. It then offers an overview of
two themes highlighted throughout the book: federalism and separation
of powers. Part 1 focuses on constitutional and statutory limits on the
federal judicial power, while part 2 deals with the ability of federal
courts to give relief against governments and government officers. Part 3
examines federal court review of state court judgments and proceedings.
Appendices provide the Constitution and selected federal statutes.
Updated to be complete through June 2011, this sixth edition reflects
recent developments in the law in areas such as limits on bankruptcy
courts, the ability to sue government officers and local government, and
major developments in the law of habeas corpus. This edition contains
eight new cases. Chemerinsky teaches law at the University of California-
Irvine. Aspen Publishers is now Wolters Kluwer Law & Business.
KF8935 2012-005360 978-1-4548-0541-0
Evidence; a structured approach, 3d ed.
Leonard, David P. et al. (Aspen casebook )
Wolters Kluwer Law & Business, ©2012 844 p. $199.00
This textbook explains each aspect of evidence law and gives students an
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
opportunity to apply the law to concise cases. The centerpiece of each
rule section is a set of short, hypothetical case discussion questions,
which lend themselves to the Socratic teaching method in the classroom.
Another unique feature of the text is its early treatment of the rules gov-
erning witnesses and documents and its early coverage of hearsay.
Explanations of each of the Federal Rules of Evidence outline the rule’s
background, rationale, and content and give examples. For each rule, the
book then provides transcript exercises, diagrams, charts, and edited
cases that illustrate the rule. A number of cases address problems posed
by modern communication technologies, as well as race and gender
issues. This third edition is updated to reflect the late 2011 version of the
Federal Rules of Evidence. Appendices provide the Federal Rules of
Evidence (about 150 pages) and the unadopted federal rules of evidence.
A companion web site offers the classroom discussion questions from the
book. Leonard taught law at Loyola Law School. Aspen Publishers is now
Wolters Kluwer Law & Business.
KF8935 2012-027655 978-1-4548-1156-5
Evidence; practice under the rules, 4th ed.
Mueller, Christopher B. et al
Wolters Kluwer Law & Business, ©2012 1543 p. $315.00
For practitioners and judges who apply evidence law daily and need
comprehensive, yet accessible information, this reference offers the basics
as well as exploration of difficult and important applications and sug-
gested approaches for challenging situations. The fourth edition comes
just three years after the third yet incorporates substantial changes
including the Restyled Rules (which took effect in the federal system in
2011) and decisions regarding forensic laboratory reports, among other
updates. The three authors are affiliated as follows: Christopher B.
Mueller (U. of Colorado), Laird C. Kirkpatrick (George Washington U.),
and Charles H. Rose II (Stetson University). Aspen Publishers is now
Wolters Kluwer Law & Business.
KF8961 2012-010844 978-1-4398-8767-7
Effective expert witnessing; practices for the 21st century,
5th ed. (CD-ROM included)
Matson, Jack V.
CRC Press, ©2013 188 p. $99.95
Litigation support consultant Matson (environmental engineering,
Pennsylvania State U.) explains litigation, trial preparation, courtroom
presentation, and business aspects of expert witnessing, to enable expert
witnesses and attornies to improve the effectiveness of their testimony. He
discusses the impact of Daubert v. Merrell Dow Pharmaceuticals, key cases
and precedents affecting expert witnessing, witnessing effectiveness, con-
tractual arrangements, and marketing services to lawyers. This edition
adds three new chapters: a case study exploring witness immunity and
issues related to professional malpractice and civil liability; a chapter on
psychology and the art of expert persuasion (contributed by a psychol-
ogist and witness preparation specialist); and the worst mistakes an
expert can make and how to avoid them. It updates information such as
changes to the Federal Rule 26 concerning disclosure and trends in issues
regarding the Internet and social networks. The CD-ROM contains videos
of effective and ineffective testimony at deposition and trial.
KF8965 2012-034984 978-1-58562-438-6
The mental health professional in court; a survival guide.
Gutheil, Thomas G. and Eric Y. Drogin.
American Psychiatric Pub., ©2013 115 p. $59.00 (pa)
Written by two experts in the fields of both psychiatry and law as a how-
to guide for mental health professionals who have been asked to go to
court, this revised and expanded version of The Psychiatrist in Court: A
Survival Guide (1998) begins with the most basic information about legal
proceedings, including setting, major players, and motivations, and
moves into preparation guidelines and what to expect. It culminates with
specific tips regarding testifying and an outline of possible roles the cli-
nician may be asked to fill in the courtroom. The tone throughout is
informal and lighthearted.
KF8965 2012-025185 978-1-4338-1212-5
Testifying in court; guidelines and maxims for the expert
witness, 2d ed.
Brodsky, Stanley L.
American Psychological Assn., ©2013 251 p. $29.95 (pa)
Brodsky (psychology, University of Alabama) offers advice for new and
experienced expert witnesses in psychology and psychiatry. In 55 brief
chapters, scenarios illustrate best practices in expert testimony and cross-
examination; each chapter ends with a key principle. There is special
focus on the cross examination process: power and control gambits
attorneys often use, lines of questioning, nonverbal parrying, and
courtroom rules. The book not only explains what to say but also gives
–140–
advice on how to act and how to dress. This second edition contains new
chapters on areas such as defending the psychological report and recov-
ering from catastrophic errors while testifying.
KF8968 2012-028116 978-1-4665-6262-2
Criminal financial investigations; the use of forensic
accounting techniques and indirect methods of proof, 2d
ed.
Pasco, Gregory A.
CRC Press, ©2013 277 p. $99.95
Focusing on white collar financial crime, this text is for those in civil and
criminal law enforcement agencies, and for financial investigators in
business and industry. It explains how to gather evidence in criminal
financial investigations and how to present it to a judge or jury. The book
starts off with a historical overview, a definition of forensic accounting,
and a review of the financial disciplines and basic tax law. Later chapters
review different forms of financial fraud and misappropriation of assets,
including money laundering and transnational financial transactions,
then progress to the courtroom, litigation, and evidence. Case studies are
included. This second edition contains a new chapter on the theory
behind indirect methods of proof, plus new chapters on indirect methods
in tax investigations, unique aspects of criminal tax investigations, and
innovative applications. Pasco teaches criminal justice at Colorado
Technical University’s Sioux Falls, South Dakota campus. He spent 28
years as a special agent with the Criminal Investigation Division of the
IRS.
KF9084 2012-019471 978-0-7355-0710-4
Dispute resolution; negotiation, mediation, arbitration,
and other processes, 6th ed.
Goldberg, Stephen B. et al. (Aspen casebook series)
Wolters Kluwer Law & Business, ©2012 701 p. $193.00
Goldberg (emeritus, law, Northwestern U.), Sander (emeritus, law,
Harvard U.), Rogers (alternative dispute resolution, The Ohio State U.
Moritz College of Law) and Cole (law, The Ohio State U. Moritz College
of Law) present a descriptive account of alternative dispute resolution
structures and practices in the United States. Eleven chapters discuss dis-
puting procedures, negotiation, the practice of mediation, fairness and
quality in mediation, mediation confidentiality, representing a client in
mediation, arbitration, designing disputer resolution processes and
systems, dispute resolution and the justice system, future directions, and
contemporary problems. For this new edition, they have updated the
material in light of developments over the past five years and have
expanded the number of simulations and questions included as peda-
gogical tools. Aspen Publishers is now Wolters Kluwer Law & Business.
KF9084 2012-025990 978-1-4548-2165-6
Mastering the art and skill of listening; a guide to
negotiation.
Newman, Jeffrey Hugh.
Wolters Kluwer Law & Business, ©2012 116 p. $39.00 (pa)
Filled with personal stories from his lengthy practice of law, this work
provides a guide to effective negotiation and dispute resolution. Chapters
like those on “egotude” or the ten lessons that can be learned from con-
ducting crossword puzzles are written in an informal way, but a suite of
useful lessons leap out for the attentive reader. And most relevant for
today is a chapter outlining the loss of available information as one pro-
ceeds in communication from in-person meetings to the use of a speaker
phone to regular phone calls and finally to email. Newman (Sills,
Cummis & Gross) is a well-regarded real estate attorney who takes his
inspiration from Dr. Norman Vincent Peale, as can be seen in the final
chapter on positive thinking. No footnotes or index are provided. Aspen
Publishers is now Wolters Kluwer Law & Business.
KF9218 2012-015981 978-1-4548-1755-0
Criminal law and its processes; cases and materials, 9th
ed.
Kadish, Sanford H. et al. (Aspem casebook series)
Wolters Kluwer Law & Business, ©2012 1308 p. $211.00
The ninth edition maintains continuity with its predecessors with regard
to organization, perspectives, and pedagogy; but it incorporates improved
clarity, new principal cases, discussion reflecting changes and advances,
and greater emphasis on empirical research, the field of international
human rights, and the importance of discretion in the criminal justice
system. Coverage encompasses institutions and processes, the justifi-
cation of punishment, the elements of just punishment, rape, homicide,
the significance of resulting harm, and exculpation, among other topics.
The four authors are affiliated as follows: Sanford H. Kadish (U. of
–141–
California, Berkeley), Stephen J. Schulhofer (New York U.), Carol S. Steiker
(Harvard), and Rachel E. Barkow (New York U.). Aspen Publishers is now
Wolters Kluwer Law & Business.
KF9219 978-1-4557-3052-0
Criminal law, 10th ed.
Pollock, Joycelyn M. (John C. Klotter justice administration legal series)
Anderson Publishing Co., ©2013 824 p. $81.95 (pa)
This introductory textbook/casebook for students in criminal justice
covers both roots of the law and modern legal issues in substantive
criminal law. The 10th edition contains recent Supreme Court cases, plus
current news boxes on topics such as violent video games, virtual child
pornography, and insider trading. One single chapter now covers all
forms of theft and deception, and material on federal crimes has been
consolidated from three chapters into two. In the first part of the book,
early chapters cover principles of criminal liability, capacity, and
defenses, while later chapters look at different types of offenses. The
federal US Criminal Code is discussed separately so that students will
understand how laws are created and enforced. Part 2 contains 165 pages
of briefs of judicial decisions, and part 3 offers a glossary and a table of
cases. Student and instructor websites are available. Pollock teaches
criminal justice at Texas State University-San Marcos. Anderson
Publishing is an imprint of Elsevier.
KF9219 2012-007791 978-0-7698-4893-8
Understanding criminal law, 6th ed.
Dressler, Joshua.
LexisNexis, ©2012 606$0.00 p. $43.00
This textbook by Dressler (Moritz College of Law) is primarily designed
for use by law students enrolled in an introductory course in criminal
law in the US. Covering the theory and substance of criminal law—
including issues of common law doctrine, statutory reform, and consti-
tutional law affecting the substantive criminal law—through explanatory
text and a minimum of case excerpts, the text has been updated to
account for recent legal developments and new citations to the most
recent scholarship in the field have also been added.
KF9223 2012022170 978-1-4496-9032-8
Introduction to law and criminal justice. (online access
included)
Acker, James R. and JoAnne M. Malatesta.
Jones & Bartlett, ©2014 435 p. $115.95 (pa)
This undergraduate text offers an introduction to the analytical methods
of law, for a course for non-criminal justice majors. The text also serves
as an intro for students who will continue to study criminal justice,
political science, and related disciplines. There is special focus on issues
that pit the interests of organized society against the individual’s per-
sonal liberties. After an opening section on crimes and defenses, part 2
introduces select constitutional issues, with an emphasis on civil liberties
such as free speech, abortion, gay rights, and the death penalty. Part 3
explores essential aspects of criminal procedure law, including the right
to a trial by jury, the role of prosecuting and defense attorneys, search
and seizure issues, and police interrogation. The text’s many cases
include notes and questions. A companion website is available. Acker
and Malatesta teach criminal justice at the University at Albany.
KF9227 2012-004811 978-1-61163-091-6
The past as prologue; the Supreme Court’s pre-modern
death penalty jurisprudence and its influence on the
Supreme Court’s modern death penalty decisions.
Bohm, Robert M.
Carolina Academic Press, ©2012 239 p. $33.00 (pa)
Bohm (criminal justice, U. of Central Florida) examines how the US
Supreme Court’s decisions about the death penalty before 1968 have
influenced its opinion from then until 2009. Courts are supposed to be
guided by previous decision when the same or similar points rise before
them again—the doctrine of stare decisis—but early death penalty deci-
sions are rarely mentioned now. In addition, he says, the thinking reveals
some the egregious practices of the pre-modern Court. He cites specific
cases to discuss such topics as coerced confession and compelled self-
incrimination, double jeopardy: not implicit in the concept of ordered
liberty, equal protection: an exceptional punishment for life prisoners,
military commissions unauthorized by congressional authority are
unconstitutional in jurisdictions where civil courts are operating consti-
tutionally, and the right to be tried by an impartial jury.
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
KF9350 2012-471220 978-0-314-27662-9
Federal white collar crime; cases and materials, 5th ed.
O’Sullivan, Julie R. (American casebook series)
West, ©2012 1216 p. $200.00
Three years after publication of the fourth edition, the fifth became nec-
essary because of busy times at the Supreme Court, Congress, and the
DOJ. O’Sullivan (Georgetown U. Law Center) points out in her preface
that this text should be used in conjunction with its website, which was
developed to take the place of an ink & paper statutory appendix and a
guidelines manual formerly published separately. Organization is in 17
chapters covering US sentencing guidelines, entity liability, perjury,
obstruction of justice, public corruption, securities fraud, Fifth
Amendment testimony and immunity, and attorney-client privilege,
among other topics.
KF9367 2012-418141 978-0-314-28090-9
Strategies for defending identity theft cases; leading
lawyers on understanding identity theft crime, preparing
a thorough defense, and managing technological evidence.
Title main entry. (Inside the minds)
Aspatore Books, ©2012 148 p. $85.00 (pa)
US lawyers present five views on defending a client who has been
charged with identity theft and fraud. They cover identity theft cases
demand concise defendant strategies, handling the rise in identity theft
cases, the unique characteristics of identity theft crime and defense,
understanding and defending identity theft and fraud charges, and
understanding the facts better than the prosecution. Over half the volume
is devoted to appended texts. There is no index.
KF9430 2012-020787 978-1-59332-482-7
American terrorism trials; prosecutorial and defense
strategies.
Shields, Christopher A. (Law and society; recent scholarship)
LFB Scholarly Publishing, LLC, ©2012 170 p. $67.00
Built upon an examination of the federal court case records of criminal
cases stemming from FBI investigations from 1980-2004 where an
“official” terrorism investigation was conducted under the auspices of
the Attorney General’s guidelines for terrorism investigations, together
with consideration of the existing scholarship, this study by Shields
(Terrorism Research Center, Fulbright College) examines the influence of
prosecutorial and defense trial strategies on the outcomes of criminal ter-
rorism cases; the reactions of terrorist groups to the arrest and trial in
federal court of their leaders (focusing on domestic right-wing terrorism);
and changes in terrorism cases since the September 11th attacks on the
World Trade Center and the Pentagon with regards to demographic char-
acteristics of those indicted, types of federal charges, and outcomes as
compared to pre-9/11 cases.
KF9618 2011-025934 978-0-7355-0719-7
Criminal procedures; prosecution and adjudication; cases,
statutes, and executive materials, 4th ed.
Miller, Marc L. and Ronald F. Wright. (Aspen casebook series)
Wolters Kluwer Law & Business, ©2011 786 p. $133.00 (pa)
This text for students in an upper-level ‘bail to jail’ course (such as
Criminal Procedure II) aims to move students beyond case synthesis and
beyond appreciation of the role of only one institution. Coverage encom-
passes constitutional, statutory, and administrative doctrine and practices
in both federal and state systems. Federal case problems address a wide
range of US Supreme Court precedents, while state cases take various
positions with respect to Supreme Court precedents. The text’s real-world
perspective focuses on procedures and issues of current importance to
defendants, lawyers, courts, legislators, and the public, with emphasis on
the impact of abstract constitutional doctrine on the daily interactions of
police with citizens and suspects. The text also considers the effects of
different procedures on law enforcers, lawyers, courts, defendants, and
victims, emphasizing primary materials but also social science studies.
This fourth edition reflects shifts in doctrine and contains new cases,
many decided since 2000. Miller teaches law at the University of Arizona.
Wright teaches law at Wake Forest University. Aspen Publishers is now
Wolters Kluwer Law & Business.
KF9619 2012-382566 978-0-7698-4711-5
Contemporary criminal procedure; court decisions for law
enforcement, 11th ed. (CD-ROM included)
Holtz, Larry E.
LexisNexis, ©2011 979 p. $59.00 (pa)
This text provides a quick reference to classical and current judicial deci-
sions which directly affect the daily activities of law enforcement and
criminal justice professionals. Most cases come from the US Supreme
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
Court and the US Circuit Courts of Appeal. The book is organized as a
college text and can be used in courses in criminal procedure, criminal
law, and general police science; in addition, the quick reference format
will be useful to practitioners in law enforcement and criminal justice
operating in either the federal or state system. Each of thecases presented
consists of a court decision which has been analyzed and restructured
into a question-and-answer format and an analysis or rationale behind
the rule of law. Coverage encompasses arrest, search and seizure, inter-
views and confessions, eyewitness identification, and the Sixth
Amendment Rights. A reference section provides the text of the US
Constitution, a list of current justices of the Supreme Court, and a
glossary of terms frequently used in case law analysis. The CD-ROM con-
tains an e-book with hypertext links, searchability, and customizable
printing. Attorney Holtz is president of a professional law enforcement
school for continuing legal and criminal justice education and training.
KF9619 2012-013026 978-0-7355-8425-9
Inside investigative criminal procedure; what matters and
why.
Cook, Julian A. III. (The inside series)
Wolters Kluwer Law & Business, ©2012 285 p. $41.95 (pa)
Questions about criminal procedure invariably wind up in the domain
of constitutional law. Thus this study guide frequently discusses Supreme
Court rulings that attempt to walk the fine line between permitting inves-
tigation and prosecution activity and protecting individual liberties. Each
chapter begins with an overview and closes with a chapter summary,
and provides sidebars and FAQ sections throughout. Cook (law, U. of
Georgia) also provides useful connections boxes that show the relation of
the subject discussed to information in other chapters. A four page table
of cases closes out the book.
KF9630 2012-032818 978-1-60885-054-9
Real world search & seizure; a street handbook for law
enforcement, 2d ed.
Medina, Matthew J.
Looseleaf Law Publications, ©2013 157 p. $19.95 (pa)
Medina, a former assistant state’s attorney, presents a non-academic prac-
tical guide to constitutional problems affecting search and seizure, aimed
at law enforcement officers, attorneys, law and criminal justice students,
correctional and probation officers, and others. He takes a safe approach
to what is constitutionally permissible, advising against performing law
enforcement actions if there is a question as to permissibility. He uses a
question-and-answer format to address topics related to warrantless
search and seizures, such as questioning and vehicle and house searches,
and warrants, such as drafting and post-arrest investigation. This edition
has samples of search warrants, affidavits, and Miranda warnings; tips
for surviving cross-examination; the Federal Rules for Issuance of Search
and Arrest Warrants, including 4.1 Warrants Using Technology; constitu-
tional amendments that affect criminal law and procedure; defendant
and witness statements; and new case citations culled from the 112 new
US Supreme Court cases and hundreds of Appellate Court rulings.
KF9672 2012-019560 978-1-60885-036-5
Winning court testimony for law enforcement officers; the
law, art and science of effective court communication.
Medina, Matthew J.
Looseleaf Law Publications, ©2012 147 p. $21.95 (pa)
Illinois lawyer and former Cook County prosecutor Medina coaches both
professional and civilian witnesses on delivering truthful testimony that
a jury will understand and trust. He explains the rules to follow when
testifying on behalf of the prosecution and depicts the desired and unde-
sired effects of precise words, jargon, vocal tone, pronunciation, volume,
and physical gestures.
KFA1705 2011-041057 978-1-60223-175-7
Alaska Natives and American laws, 3d ed.
Title main entry. Ed. by David S. Case and David A. Voluck.
U. of Alaska Press, ©2012 499 p. $85.00 (pa)
Case (attorney, Landye, Bennett Blumstein LLP) and Voluck (attorney,
magistrate, Central Council of Tlingit and Haida Indian Tribes of Alaska)
review the laws applied to Alaska Natives and their efforts to protect
their rights, their way of life, their health and social services, and to win
their claims of sovereignty. The authors address several relevant topics,
including the federal relationship with Alaska Natives, Native allotments
and townsites, reservations, the Alaska Native Claims Settlement Act, sub-
sistence in Alaska, self government, and more. This third edition includes
updates and addresses the development of the rights of indigenous
peoples in international law.
–142–
KFC76 2012-013608 978-0-7355-0993-1
Essay exam writing for the California bar exam.
Basick, Mary and Tina Schindler.
Wolters Kluwer Law & Business, ©2012 926 p. $79.95 (pa)
This study guide for those taking the California bar exam contains
practice essays and sample essay answers, along with guidelines on how
to organize and write a passing answer within the allotted time frame.
The substantive law is presented in several ways to assist readers in
understanding the law and then using it to solve the problem posed by
an essay question. Each chapter includes a one-page checklist of issues
tested in each subject, a memorization sheet, and a rule outline annotated
with exam, issue spotting, and memorization tips. Material is in 12 sec-
tions on areas such as civil procedure, community property, constitu-
tional law, evidence, real property, remedies, torts, and wills and trusts.
The final section covers crossover questions. The book also contains a
visual graph of the kinds of questions asked in each subject over the past
25 years. Aspen Publishers is now Wolters Kluwer Law & Business
KFC724 978-90-5850-872-0
Legislative drafting; an introduction to theories and
principles.
Jaja, Tonye Clinton.
Wolf Legal Publishers, ©2012 256 p. $30.00 (pa)
Taking Nigeria’s oil and gas legislation as a case study, Jaja (legislative
drafting law, U. of London) introduces the relevant theory and principles
of drafting legislation that stays within the regulatory framework and
produces high quality effective legislation. His perspectives are the legal
basis for a regulatory framework, defining effectiveness, drafting instruc-
tions and consultations, allocating responsibility among drafting institu-
tions, and standards or pre-legislative scrutiny of legislation. Distributed
in the US by Enfield.
KFC1030 2012-470259 978-0-314-27685-8
Evidence; the California code and the federal rules; a
problem approach, 5th ed.
Méndez, Miguel A. (American casebook series)
West, ©2012 1080 p. $172.00
This text on the law of evidence combines the problem approach with
the witness examination approach. Students learn the rules by reading
about evidence and then applying their knowledge to discrete problems.
Much discussion is devoted to the policies and concepts underlying the
rules of evidence and examining the concerns that initially drove judges
and then legislators to place limits on the evidence that parties can offer.
The book focuses on the California Evidence Code as well as the Federal
Rules of Evidence, because the California Evidence Code has greatly
influenced the Federal Rules Book. Following each section, questions and
answers contain problems and witness examinations; these examinations
are designed to raise significant evidentiary issues and are not intended
as model interrogations. A separate statutory supplement includes the
California evidence code and the Federal Rules of Evidence, as well as
comments and notes prepared by their drafters. This fifth edition reflects
recent amendments to the codes and rules, discusses new cases, and
offers more discussion of the Confrontation Clause. Méndez teaches law
at the University of California-Davis.
KFN5976 978-1-60885-037-2
The police tactical life saver; crucial skills for handling
major medical crises.
French, Glenn.
Looseleaf Law Publications, ©2012 89 p. $18.95 (pa)
In this spiral-bound guide meant to be used with a tactical combat
casualty care training course and hands-on practical training scenarios,
French, a police veteran assigned to a special response team, describes
how responding officers with tactical lifesaver training can manage an
officer’s life-threatening injuries when emergency medical services are
not immediately available. He outlines the skills needed to prevent unnec-
essary deaths; the goals and priorities of the tactical lifesaver; necessary
medical supplies; conducting a remote assessment; officer rescue tactics;
situational awareness; cognitive thinking in combat environments;
training the tactical lifesaver; airway management, penetrating chest
trauma and tension pneumothorax, shock, spinal fracture, and hemor-
rhage and bleeding; hemostatic agents; tourniquet use; and the warrior
spirit. There is no bibliography.
–143–
KG744 2012-009420 978-90-04-20249-8
Latin American investment protections; comparative
perspectives on laws, treaties, and disputes for investors,
states, and counsel.
Hamilton, Jonathan C. et al.
Martinus Nijhoff Publishers, ©2012 616 p. $203.00
The editors (international attorneys Hamilton, García-Bolívar, and Otero)
present a country-by-country examination of investment protections in
Latin America. Each chapter—penned by a native jurist or jurists from
that country with both national and international experience in
investment protections—examines the country’s domestic and interna-
tional framework for the protection of foreign investment and resolution
of foreign disputes as well as specific investment cases involving the
country. Chapters particularly focus on laws regarding state responsi-
bility, domestic law concerning investment protections, international
treaties relating to investment protection and arbitration, and significant
investment disputes. Eighteen countries are covered, representing all of
the Latin American countries with the exceptions of Cuba and Haiti (if
one counts Haiti). Martinus Nijhoff is an imprint of Brill.
KGF335 2012-382580 978-90-411-3908-5
Cyber law in Mexico.
San Martín, Cristos Velasco.
Wolters Kluwer Law & Business, ©2012 330 p. $130.00 (pa)
This work on the current regulation of information technologies and
telecommunications (ICT) in Mexico looks at the law in more depth than
other books in the series. San Martin (North America Consumer Project
on Electronic Commerce) uses language accessible to students and non-
lawyers to describe how Mexico’s government and the private sector are
regulating Internet activities while simultaneously promoting citizens’
rights and the development of new technologies. The book starts off with
background on the geography, demography, culture, and political system
of Mexico. Early chapters describe Mexico’s telecommunications infra-
structure, the ICT market, electronic commerce, the competitiveness of
the country’s telecommunications industry, and e-government systems in
Mexico. Subsequent sections deal with areas such as the regulation of the
ICT market, protection of intellectual property in the ICT sector, ICT con-
tracts, and online legal proceedings. This third edition covers recent
developments in the areas of privacy and Internet-related crime. The
book will be useful for international organizations, government officials,
academics, researchers, students, public interest and consumer groups,
and other stakeholders in ICT law in Mexico. The material was originally
published in the International Encyclopedia of Laws/Cyber Law. Aspen
Publishers is now Wolters Kluwer Law & Business.
KGF3053 978-3-8329-7047-5
Regime-hybridity in Mexico; the impact of clientelism on
transition and political regimes.
Seffer, Kristin. (Studien zu Lateinamerika; 17)
Nomos, ©2012 315 p. $68.00 (pa)
From the middle 1980s to about a decade ago, Seffer (area studies and
political science, U. of Leipzig) reminds readers, a paradigm of interna-
tional political studies was that the fall of authoritarian regimes led to
democracy. Scholars are over that now, and she proposes the concept of
regime-hybridity as a classification of some of the resulting regimes that
are characterized primarily by clientelism. She tests her idea on the gov-
ernment of Mexico. After setting out the theory and her hypothesis and
methodology, she discusses the genesis of the post-revolutionary political
regime in Mexico, decentralization and political openings, social pro-
tection policies after the political cambio in 2000, and economic groups
and their impact on the political regime. Her study is not indexed.
Distributed in the US by ISBS.
KHD346 2012-392082 978-90-411-3914-6
Private international law in Brazil.
Dolinger, Jacob.
Wolters Kluwer Law & Business, ©2012 392 p. $144.00 (pa)
This monograph on private international law in Brazil provides coverage
of a wide range of relevant topics from a well-qualified author, including
its history. Dolinger has taught at the graduate and post-graduate levels
in Brazil and the U.S. and is a member of the Brazilian and American
bar associations and the International Law Association. A sampling of
subjects he addresses includes: abolishment of slavery and creation of
the republic, influences on Brazilian law from the American legal
system, sources of private international law, the Bustamante Code, addi-
tional international treaties and conventions, and bills for a new private
international law statute. Aspen Publishers is now Wolters Kluwer Law
& Business.
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
KHD2921 2012-392173 978-90-411-4007-4
Constitutional law in Brazil.
Fernandes, Cristiana Belon et al.
Wolters Kluwer Law & Business, ©2012 250 p. $103.00 (pa)
Lawyers and legal scholars from Brazil, Germany, and Australia outline
constitutional law in Brazil, beginning with a brief narrative of the situ-
ation leading to independence from Portugal in 1822 and adopting of a
constitution. Then they cover sources of constitutional law, form of gov-
ernment, the state and its subdivisions, citizenship and the adminis-
tration of law, and specific problems such as war and relations with the
church. The study originally served as a monograph in the International
Encyclopedia of Law/Constitutional Law series. Wolters Kluwer Law &
Business was once Aspen Publishers.
KHL205 978-3-8329-7168-7
Rewriting a constitution; Georgia’s shift towards Europe.
Babeck, Wolfgang et al.
Nomos, ©2012 275 p. $36.00 (pa)
Babeck (law, Bond U., Australia); M. Steven Fish (political science, U. of
California-Berkeley); and Zeno Reichenbecher, a lawyer specializing in
the rule of law in transition and developing countries, report and reflect
on the political processes in constitutional reform in Georgia, and how
insights from that process might inform constitutional reform in other
countries. They cover the 2009-10 constitutional reform, German support
for the rule of law and constitutional reform in Georgia, a comparative
perspective, and whether Georgia is a role model for constitutional
reform. There is no index. Distributed in the US by ISBS.
KJE947 2012-930569 978-1-84980-100-3
Research handbook on the economics of European Union
law.
Title main entry. Ed. by Thomas Eger and Hans-Bernd Schäfer.
(Research handbooks in law and economics)
Edward Elgar Publishing, ©2012 427 p. $229.95
Eger (law and economics, U. of Hamburg, Germany) and Schäfer
(Bucerius Law School, Germany) present 16 papers that provide economic
analysis of the key areas of European Union law and the mechanisms of
decisions within the EU. The opening five papers look at the constitu-
tional framework of the European Union. The remaining papers discuss
such topics as economic and regulatory logic in goods and services, the
law and economics of the free movement of persons, corporate gover-
nance, tort and contract, consumer protection, legal harmonization and
law enforcement, private enforcement of antitrust law, monetary institu-
tions and policy, and the Eastern enlargement of the European Union.
KJE1639 2012-392204 978-90-411-3830-9
Environmental damage and liability problems in a
multilevel context; the case of the Environmental Liability
Directive.
Cassotta, Sandra. (Energy and environmental law & policy series; v.22)
Wolters Kluwer Law & Business, ©2012 261 p. $122.00
Cassotta (law and political science, Aarhus U., Denmark) offers a new
analytical perspective in solving the problems of effectiveness in EU envi-
ronmental law and policy, with a problem-solving emphasis on weak-
nesses in environmental directives. She combines a political and a legal
approach she calls polycentrism and legal pluralism, studying the
Environmental Liability Directive from a tripartite perspective of the EU,
international and domestic in order to “analyse how different national
rules at EU level and at international level try to solve common problems
on environmental harm and liability issues...” Organizing the material
into four parts, Cassotta first introduces the stakes and scope of her
research, and then moves on to building the framework of her analysis
by identifying focal elements, historically contextualizing the liability
directive. In the end she advances her conclusions and recommendations,
while arguing that “the ELD is not a true environmental liability regime;
rather it is, in effect, an administrative regime aimed at implementing a
public system defined by ‘reference’ to the definition of environmental
damage.” Aspen Publishers is now Wolters Kluwer Law & Business.
KJE2468 2012-359528 978-90-411-3360-1
The European financial market in transition.
Title main entry. Ed. by Hanne S. Birkmose et al. (European company
law series; v.9)
Wolters Kluwer Law & Business, ©2012 451 p. $162.00
Editor Birkmose (law, Aarhus University) unites international contrib-
utors to examine the most important changes that have emerged in the
law of European financial markets in recent years. Part 1 addresses cor-
porate takeovers and the need to rethink corporate control of the market,
with chapters on topics such as unwanted harmonization of corporate
law, cash-settled derivatives as takeover instruments, and the reform of
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
the EU Transparency Directive. Part 2 ponders ways to promote share-
holder democracy, investigating the evolution of corporate govnernance
codes and the transformation of passive institutional investors into active
owners. Part 3 presents hope for a new framework for the European
financial market, looking at aspects such as Europe’s financial regulatory
bodies, the role of banks’ corporate govnernance in systemic risk regu-
lation, and a new financial market segment for high tech companies in
Europe. Aspen Publishers is now Wolters Kluwer Law & Business.
KJE6044 2012-018016 978-90-04-22222-9
EU immigration and asylum law, 2d rev.ed.; v.1: Visas
and border controls.
Title main entry. Ed. by Steve Peers et al. (Immigration and asylum
law and policy in Europe; v.27)
Martinus Nijhoff Publishers, ©2012 411 p. $226.00
The first edition was published in 2006; this second (revised) edition is
updated through August 1, 2011. The aim is to present a cohesive, author-
itative reference for academics and legal practitioners. Each of the three
volumes in the set, of which this is volume 1, takes as its starting point
the Treaty of Amsterdam, which entered into force in May 1999. The new
edition takes into account developments including the Lisbon Treaty as
well as a tidal wave of changes in EU law. Visas and border controls are
covered in 11 chapters beginning with an overview and discussion of the
institutional framework and ending with the visa code, visa facilitation,
visa information system, and other visa measures. The three editors are
specialists in EU law, affiliated as follows: Steve Peers (U. of Essex, UK);
Elspeth Guild (Radboud U., the Netherlands); and Jonathan Tomkin
(Trinity College, Ireland).
KJE6044 2012018016 978-90-04-22223-6
EU immigration and asylum law (text and commentary),
2d rev.ed; v.2: EU immigration law.
Title main entry. Ed. by Steve Peers et al. (Immigration and asylum
law and policy in Europe; v.28)
Martinus Nijhoff Publishers, ©2012 589 p. $295.00
The first edition was published in 2006; this second (revised) edition
brings updates through August 1, 2011. The aim is to present a cohesive,
authoritative reference for academics and legal practitioners. Each of the
three volumes in the set, of which this is volume 2, takes as its starting
point the Treaty of Amsterdam, which entered into force in May 1999.
The new edition takes into account developments including the Lisbon
Treaty as well as a tidal wave of changes in EU law. In this second
volume, 20 chapters on EU immigration law cover the “Blue Card”
directive, intra-corporate transferees, admission of researchers, seasonal
workers, admission of students, family reunion, social security coordi-
nation, trafficking in persons, sanctions for employers of irregular
migrants, and mutual recognition of expulsion decisions, among other
topics. The five editors are affiliated as follows: Steve Peers (U. of Essex,
UK); Elspeth Guild (Radboud U., The Netherlands); Diego Acosta (U. of
Sheffield, UK); Kees Groenendijk (U. of Nijmegen, The Netherlands); and
Vileta Moreno Lax (U. of Oxford, UK).
KJE6251 978-3-8329-6351-4
Marine nature conservation and management at the
borders of the European Union.
Title main entry. Ed. by Detlef Czybulka. (Beiträge zum landwirtschaft-
srecht und zur biodiversität; v.7)
Nomos, ©2012 171 p. $55.00 (pa)
A workshop was held in Stralsund, Germany in September 2010 where
researchers and practitioners in law and the environmental sciences
explored the ecosystem approach in international and European law.
More particularly, they pondered just what is meant by the term
ecosystem approach when human activities in the seas are regulated by
law. The 13 studies here are from that gathering, some expanded from
oral presentation, and more than a few part of doctoral research. They
cover Russia and the European Union and the marine nature conser-
vation and management of the Baltic Sea; Atlantic marine nature con-
servation and management between three continents; the Black Sea as a
new European Union sea; and the European Union’s influence in the
South Atlantic, the wider Caribbean, and the Pacific. They are not
indexed. Distributed in the US by ISBS.
KJE6467 2012-359254 978-90-411-3285-7
Directory of EU case law on merger control; ‘the merger
brick’.
Noë, Steven.
Wolters Kluwer Law & Business, ©2012 642 p. $270.00
This book offers a quick reference to the case law on EU merger control.
Judgments made by the Court of Justice or the General Court of the EU,
relevant to the EU Merger Regulation, are grouped by topic, allowing the
–144–
reader to easily find what the EU courts have decided on particular
issues. The book begins with an overview of merger cases and a list of
cases that have been decided by EU courts and cases that are pending or
have been withdrawn. There is also a table of all Commission merger
cases that triggered litigation before the EU courts. Chapter 2 presents
judgments on a number of general issues, such as the purpose and
scheme of the Merger Regulation and the legal bases for the regulation
and principles guiding its interpretation. Chapter 3 details the case law
on the scope of application of the Merger Regulation. Five chapters are
devoted to the competitive assessment of mergers, and five chapters
address the review of the Commission’s actions by the courts of the EU.
Noë is affiliated with the Legal Service of the European Commission.
Aspen Publishers is now Wolters Kluwer Law & Business.
KJE7105 2012-392168 978-90-411-3877-4
European tax law, 6th ed., abridged student ed.
Terra, Ben J.M. and Peter J. Watte.
Wolters Kluwer Law & Business, ©2012 634 p. $122.00
Authors Terra (tax law, Universities of Amsterdam, the Netherlands) and
Wattel (Advocate General, Supreme Court of the Netherlands, and
European Union tax law, U. of Amsterdam) provide a sixth edition of
their abridged student edition text on European tax law. Topics include
general EU law concepts and tax law, excises and energy taxation, indi-
vidual and corporate income taxation, value added taxes, interest and
royalty directives, exit taxes, and cross-border loss relief. A glossary is
included. Aspen Publishers is now Wolters Kluwer Law & Business.
KJE7198 2012-357297 978-90-411-3872-9
CCCTB; selected issues.
Title main entry. Ed. by Dennis Weber. (EUCOTAX series on European
taxation; v.35)
Wolters Kluwer Law & Business, ©2012 337 p. $189.00
Weber (director, Amsterdam Center for Tax Law, the Netherlands) brings
together 19 representatives of the European business community, tax con-
sultancy, academic taxation scholarship, and tax administration to
discuss issues associated with the European Commission’s proposed
Common Consolidated Corporate Tax Base (CCCTB), which will allow for
a “one-stop shop” for filing tax returns and consolidating profits and
losses across the EU. Topics addressed include business reorganization
within the CCCTB group, leaving a group, depreciation rules, the com-
patibility of CCCTB with the principle of subsidiarity, appeals, relief for
double taxation, the sharing mechanism within the CCCTB, and tax
planning under the formulary apportionment provisions. Aspen
Publishers is now Wolters Kluwer Law & Business.
KJM7344 2012-419061 978-90-411-4026-5
Transport law in Croatia.
Stankovic, Predrag et al.
Wolters Kluwer Law & Business, ©2012 172 p. $92.00 (pa)
This reference begins with a brief general introduction on Croatia’s geog-
raphy, demography, political and legal system, social and cultural values,
and population and employment. It also supplies details on the country’s
inland waterways and ports, railroads, road systems, airports, and
pipelines, and the government departments responsible for transport
policy. This leads into a section on general issues of transport law,
including sources of the law, jurisdiction, and state immunity. The largest
section of the book is devoted to maritime law; coverage encompasses the
vessel, maritime liens and mortgages, liability, transport under bill of
lading, salvage and assistance, pilotage, collisions, marine pollution, the
arrest of ships, and carriage of passengers. The book also includes a
section on other transport. The material was originally published in the
International Encyclopedia of Laws/Transport Law. Stankovic taught at
maritime academies in Sweden. Aspen Publishers is now Wolters Kluwer
Law & Business.
KK6848 2012-418109 978-90-411-3857-6
Energy law in Germany.
Petersen, Malte and Henning Thomas.
Wolters Kluwer Law & Business, ©2011 304 p. $130.00 (pa)
Originally published as a monograph in the International Encyclopaedia
of Laws: Energy Law, this work provides extensive coverage of all aspects
of current German energy law, along with the accompanying government
regulations. Petersen (Heuking Kühn Lüer Wojtek) and Thomas (Becker
Büttner Held) provide regular references to government documents and
articles in professional journals. The preface was written in March 2011
thus the book may not cover changes in the law since then. Aspen
Publishers is now Wolters Kluwer Law & Business.
–145–
KKH1710 2012-382585 978-90-411-3906-1
Civil procedure in Italy.
Lupoi, Michele Angelo.
Wolters Kluwer Law & Business, ©2012 264 p. $115.00 (pa)
Lupoi (civil procedural law and comparative civil procedure, U. of
Bologna) presents a quick tour of the whole field of Italian civil law, as
established by the constitution written and adopted after the end of
World War II and the collapse of both the monarchy and the fascist dic-
tatorship. After a general introduction to the political and legal system,
he covers judicial organization, jurisdiction, actions and claims, pro-
ceedings, incidents, legal aid and legal costs, evidence, particular pro-
ceedings, seizure for security and enforcement of judgment, and
arbitration and alternative dispute resolution. First published as a mono-
graph in the International Encyclopedia of Laws/Civil Procedure. Aspen
Publishers in now Wolters Kluwer Law & Business.
KKN3035 2012-392792 978-90-411-4027-2
Sports law in Norway.
Meltvedt, Bård Racin.
Wolters Kluwer Law & Business, ©2012 110 p. $81.00 (pa)
In this reference for law students and attorneys, Meltvedt, an attorney in
Oslo, Norway, offers a plain-language overview and explanation of sports
law in Norway. The book starts with a brief general introduction, pro-
viding statistics and information on institutions and sports governance
and looking at internal regulation versus national and international leg-
islation in the EU. Later sections are devoted to the organization of sports,
sports and employment, doping in sports, and sports and commerce. The
author has nine years of experience as a regular arbitrator with the
International Court of Arbitration for Sport. The material was originally
published in the International Encyclopedia of Laws/Sports Law. Aspen
Publishers is now Wolters Kluwer Law & Business.
KKP998 2012-419065 978-90-411-4030-2
Insurance law in Poland.
Brodecki, Zdzisaw et al.
Wolters Kluwer Law & Business, ©2012 174 p. $92.00 (pa)
In this reference for lawyers, Brodecki (law, Gdansk University, Poland)
and coauthors offer a more or less plain-language overview and expla-
nation of the law and regulations on insurance policies and instruments
in Poland. The first part of the book gives background on Poland’s
political system, Poland’s insurance industry and insurance regulation,
sources of insurance law, and issues and methods of dispute settlement,
consumer protection, and compulsory insurance. Subsequent sections
cover the insurer, the insurance contract, property and liability
insurance, motor vehicle insurance, insurance of the person, private
insurance, insurance intermediaries, reinsurance, and taxation of
insurance. The material in the book was originally published in the
International Encyclopedia of Laws/Insurance Law. Aspen Publishers is
now Wolters Kluwer Law & Business.
KKT2070 2012-392791 978-90-411-4029-6
Constitutional law in Spain.
Robledo, Agustín Ruiz.
Wolters Kluwer Law & Business, ©2012 280 p. $115.00 (pa)
Robledo (law, Granada U., Spain) provides a reference on Spanish con-
stitutional law in the context of government and administrative
framework. Intended for lawyers who engage in transnational practice,
the book also highlights the areas where constitutional law affects inter-
pretations of legal procedures and rules. Topics include: the constitution,
international treaties, jurisprudence, head of state and state parliament,
judicial power and the constitutional court, local authorities, citizenship
and fundamental rights, civil and political rights, and suspension of
rights. Aspen Publishers is now Wolters Kluwer Law & Business.
KLF207 2012-392789 978-90-411-4028-9
Constitutional law in Belarus.
Vasilevich, Grigory A.
Wolters Kluwer Law & Business, ©2012 240 p. $149.00 (pa)
Derived from the multi-volume International Encyclopaedia of Laws, this
analysis of the constitutional law of Belarus has been written by
Vasilevich, who was a member of Belarus’s Constitutional Committee
from its creation in 1990 until the conclusion of deliberations in 1994 and
is now Chairman of the Constitutional Court of the Republic of Belarus.
Following a general introduction, he presents discussions of the sources
of constitutional law; the form and branches of government; the state and
its subdivisions; citizenship and administration of justice; and specific
problems including war and foreign affairs powers, taxing and spending
powers, emergency laws, the power of the military, and the constitutional
relationship between state and church. Aspen Publishers is now Wolters
Kluwer Law & Business.
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
KLR6 2012-357299 978-90-411-3892-7
Introduction to the law of Kazakhstan.
Title main entry. Ed. by Zhenis Kembayev. (Introduction to interna-
tional law)
Wolters Kluwer Law & Business, ©2012 326 p. $149.00
In this reference for law scholars and students, contributors in law from
Kazakhstan review the legal history of Kazakhstan, outline basic features
of the current legal system, and examine legal education and science in
Kazakhstan. Further chapters deal with constitutional law, adminis-
trative law, the law of persons, property law, the law of obligations, and
family and inheritance law, in addition to labor law, private international
law, civil procedure, criminal law and procedure, investment and energy
law, and tax law. Aspen Publishers is now Wolters Kluwer Law &
Business.
KMJ1270 2012-357298 978-90-411-3996-2
Labour law in Iraq.
Ahmed, Salam Abdullah.
Wolters Kluwer Law & Business, ©2012 194 p. $92.00 (pa)
Derived from the multi-volume International Encyclopaedia of Laws, this
monograph describes and analyzes current labor law in Iraq together
with labor relations practices and developing trends. Following coverage
of the general and historical background, Abdullah (a managing partner
of a law office in Iraq) presents chapters on the role of government insti-
tutions; sources of law; international private labor law; rights and duties
of parties during employment; working time, vacations, and holidays;
remuneration and benefits; incapacity to work; protection of certain cat-
egories of workers; covenants of non-competition; inventions by
employees; settlement of disputes; trade union organization; employers’
associations; institutionalized relations between employers and workers;
collective bargaining agreements; and settlement of industrial disputes.
Aspen Publishers is now Wolters Kluwer Law & Business.
KNQ9357 2012-000447 978-1-4094-1060-7
Policing in Hong Kong.
Wong, Kam C. (International and comparative criminal justice)
Ashgate Publishing Co., ©2012 357 p. $134.95
This is a study of how the Hong Kong Police Force (HKP) has changed
following the reversion of political authority from England to China in
1997. Wong (Xavier U.) offers chapters on police history, police account-
ability, police use of force, police beat deployment, computer crime
control, and police surveillance powers and gears his discussion of issues
such that he deals with concerns relevant in different forms to the public,
the HKP, political leaders, and Hong Kong as a whole.
KNX916 2012-357301 978-90-411-3891-0
Business law in Japan—cases and comments; intellectual
property, civil, commercial and international private law.
Title main entry. Ed. by Moritz Bälz et al.
Wolters Kluwer Law & Business, ©2012 824 p. $220.00
This work for lawyers, academics, and students of Japanese and inter-
national law collects 100 cases demonstrating the application of law in
Japan. Most cases are from the 1990s to the present, with a few from the
1960s-80s. Cases are grouped in sections on civil law; labor law; corporate
law, financial regulations, and insurance law; intellectual property and
competition law; and conflict of laws, arbitration, and civil procedure.
Each case begins with a brief description and offers a list of relevant
laws and provisions, key facts, an overview, and findings, followed by
comments on various aspects of the case. Bälz teaches Japanese law at
Goethe University, Germany. Aspen Publishers is now Wolters Kluwer
Law & Business.
KPL1034 2012-382264 978-90-411-3882-8
Energy law in Pakistan.
Arif, Muhammad et al.
Wolters Kluwer Law & Business, ©2012 382 p. $144.00 (pa)
Beginning with a five page list of acronyms, this work proceeds with 34
pages summarizing the developments in Pakistani energy law since 1947.
It then provides extensive coverage of all aspects of current energy law,
along with the accompanying government regulations. Originally pub-
lished as a monograph in the International Encyclopaedia of Laws: Energy
Law, this 2nd edition incorporates changes in Pakistani law up to
December 31, 2010. Aspen Publishers is now Wolters Kluwer Law &
Business.
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
KRM1155 2012-392788 978-90-411-4018-0
Intellectual property law in Lebanon.
El Said, Mohammed.
Wolters Kluwer Law & Business, ©2012 206 p. $103.00 (pa)
This reference for lawyers and researchers focuses on current and pro-
posed Lebanese domestic and national legislation and court decisions
related to the country’s international obligations in the area of intellectual
property. There is special reference to Lebanon’s commitment to bilateral
free trade agreements with the EU. The book’s coverage encompasses all
types of intellectual property, from copyright to crop varieties and trade
secrets. Chapters devoted to each intellectual property right cover sources
of the law, the subject matter of protection, ownership and transfer, and
the scope of exclusive rights, as well as the limitations of protection,
infringement and remedies, and relationship to other intellectual
property laws. El Said teaches international trade law at the Lancashire
Law School. The material in this book was originally published in the
International Encyclopedia of Laws. Aspen Publishers is now Wolters
Kluwer Law & Business.
KSS76 2012-392787 978-90-411-4020-3
Family and succession law in Malawi.
Mwale, Fiona Atupele.
Wolters Kluwer Law & Business, ©2012 108 p. $81.00 (pa)
Derived from the multi-volume International Encyclopaedia of Laws, this
monograph by Mwale (a legal researcher with the Southern African
Development Tribunal and a member of the Malawi Bar) introduces
family law and succession of estates in Malawi. Following general intro-
ductory matters, chapters are presented on the status of a person, regis-
tration of civil status, personality rights, names, nationality, domicile and
residence, mentally handicapped persons, marriage, divorce, cohabitation
without marriage, filiation, adoption, parental authority, guardianship
and fosterage, kinships and relationships of affinity, matrimonial
property, intestate succession, testamentary succession, and acquisition
and administration of the estate. Aspen Publishers is now Wolters Kluwer
Law & Business.
KUQ480 2012-392090 978-90-411-3852-1
Private international law in New Zealand.
Angelo, Anthony H.
Wolters Kluwer Law & Business, ©2012 112 p. $81.00 (pa)
This reference for lawyers and scholars begins with a brief introduction
to the historical development and general principles of the law, its nature
and scope, and special characteristics of New Zealand’s private interna-
tional law as it applies to cross border issues. Later chapters are devoted
to general principles, the choice of law technique, and sources of private
international law. The next section explains the rules of choice of law on
areas such as natural and legal persons, contractual and non-contractual
obligations, tangible and intangible property, family law, and company
law. An appendix on international civil procedure covers national and
international jurisdiction, recognition and enforcement of foreign judg-
ments, and international arbitration. Angelo teaches law at Victoria
University of Wellington. Material in this book was originally published
in the International Encyclopedia of Laws. Aspen Publishers is now
Wolters Kluwer Law & Business.
KZ1178 2012-030494 978-0-85745-530-7
Reassessing the Nuremberg Military Tribunals;
transitional justice, trial narratives, and historiography.
Title main entry. Ed. by Kim C. Priemel and Alexa Stiller. (Studies on
war and genocide; v.16)
Berghahn Books, ©2012 321 p. $95.00
For many years the history of the U.S. Military Tribunals at Nuremberg
(NMT) have been overshadowed by the first Nuremberg trial, the
International Military Tribunal, also referred to as IMT. While the 12
NMT trials that followed the first trial were far different, they have—to
an extent because of confusing nomenclature—been lumped together with
the first in the minds of many and largely ignored. The authors take care
to collect a variety of perspectives, such as law, political science, and
history, to explore the lasting effects and “legacy” of the 12 military tri-
bunals held between 1946 and 1949. Editors are Stiller (modern and con-
temporary history, U. of Berne, Switzerland)and Priemel (history,
Humboldt U., Germany).
KZ1242 2011-025452 978-0-7355-9810-2
International law, 6th ed.
Carter, Barry E. and Allen S. Weiner. (Aspen casebook series)
Wolters Kluwer Law & Business, ©2011 1173 p. $201.00
Blending the traditional and the new in this introductory text, Carter
(Georgetown U. Law Center) and Weiner (Stanford Law School) aim to
stimulate thinking about the sources of international public law, offer
–146–
analyses of supporting institutions, investigate the interaction between
public international law and national agencies and courts, and awaken
awareness of how public international law affects private individual and
business activity. The presentation includes sections on the US
Constitution and US laws that have international impact and coverage as
well of some principles and strategies underlying foreign legal systems.
The sixth edition has been substantially updated and revised to include
materials on the U.N., NATO, and EU military intervention in Libya;
developments in Afghanistan, Iran, Iraq, North Korea, and Pakistan;
climate change; and counter-terrorism policies pertaining to detention
and torture, among other topics. Aspen Publishers is now Wolters Kluwer
Law & Business.
KZ3410 2012-470271 978-0-314-26268-4
Principles of international law, 2d ed.
Murphy, Sean D. (Concise hornbook series)
West, ©2012 575 p. $48.00 (pa)
The goal of this introductory text by Murphy (a professor of law at
George Washington U. and a member of the United Nations International
Law Commission) is to provide an entry into the central principles and
issues of international law with appropriate citations for those interested
in further study, illustrating the material with relevant and contemporary
incidents and taking into account novel developments (such as the
growing influence of non-governmental organizations) alongside the tra-
ditional materials of international law. The first six chapters address sys-
temic elements, including foundations, international law actors, creation
of international law, interpretation and dispute resolution, compliance
and enforcement, and rules on state responsibility. The next three
chapters discuss the interrelationship of international and national law
and include discussions of the foreign relations law of the United States;
national jurisdiction to prescribe, adjudicate, and enforce; and immunity
from national jurisdiction. The final set of chapters is devoted to the spe-
cialized topics of human rights, the law of the sea, international envi-
ronmental law, international criminal law, use of armed force and arms
control, and international legal research.
KZ4041 2012-018443 978-90-04-22808-5
The significance of borders; why representative
government and the rule of law require nation states.
Baudet, Thierry.
BRILL, ©2012 271 p. $160.00
“Nation states are being dismantled—by supranationalism from above, by
multiculturalism from below,” writes Bauder (Leiden Law School, the
Netherlands), who proceeds to argue that representative government, the
rule of law, and the social and economic advantages of globalization can
only be realized through strong, sovereign nation states and to suggest
“multicultural nationalism” as a proper middle ground between multi-
culturalism and closed, isolated nationalism. He begins his argument by
describing the nation state as being characterized by the shared loyalty
of the population proceeding from a shared sense of social cohesion
(nationality) and the capacity for centralized decision-making (sover-
eignty). He then discusses the supranationalism of such institutions as
the International Criminal Court, the International Court of Justice, the
World Trade Organization, the United Nations Security Council, and the
European Union as an “assault on borders,” which is matched by the ten-
dency towards legal pluralism based on cultural or religious back-
grounds and the celebration of different cultures and loyalties within the
state over an emphasis on shared national identity. Finally, he proceeds
to argue that these twin “assaults on borders” are inimical to the sense
of overarching loyalty and centralized sovereignty required for represen-
tative government and the rule of law.
KZ4216 978-90-04-22896-2
Baltic yearbook of international law; v.11, 2011.
Title main entry. (Series: title)
Martinus Nijhoff Publishers, ©2012 626 p. $480.00
This 11th volume in the annual Yearbook states its focus on the
Lithuanian School of International Law: Traditions and Modern
Developments. This is the first volume in the series to be devoted to a
particular national school, and the editors point out that the authors are
young, having started their career in independent Lithuania after 2000;
they have connections to the school’s traditions but are actively inte-
grating European and global developments in legal reasoning. Eleven
general articles are followed by materials on international law 2010, and
three book reviews. Martinus Nijhoff is an imprint of Brill.
–147–
KZ4850 2012-012234 978-90-04-18294-3
The normative position of international non-governmental
organizations under international law; an analytical
framework.
Ben-Ari, Rephael Harel.
Martinus Nijhoff Publishers, ©2012 394 p. $219.00
Ben-Ari (legal theory, New York U. School of Law) investigates the possi-
bilities for and prospective nature of normative positions of international
non-governmental organizations (INGOs) under international law. He
addresses two main questions, whether the doctrine of personality,
heretofore only understood to apply to nation-states and international gov-
ernmental organizations, is sufficient for theorizing the normative legal
position of non-state actors in general and INGOs in particular and
whether the evolution of relative personality acquired by international
governmental organizations is theoretically or practically relevant in the
case of INGOs. In line with those two key topics, he also investigates the
possible importance of an interpretive legal community of lawyers with
shared understandings of the normative positions of INGOs, applicable
models for the regulation of non-state actors, which models of regulation
are most likely to be deemed as fair by governmental and non-govern-
mental participants and are in harmony with existing institutional
arrangements, and the kinds of mechanisms that bridge the gap between
the various approaches. Martinus Nijhoff is an imprint of Brill.
KZ5274 2012-015269 978-90-04-19470-0
The development and effectiveness of international
administrative law; on the occasion of the thirtieth
anniversary of the World Bank Administrative Tribunal.
Title main entry. Ed. by Olufemi Elias. (Queen Mary studies in interna-
tional law; v.8)
Martinus Nijhoff Publishers, ©2012 418 p. $209.00
Building upon a March 2010 conference on current issues in international
administrative law jointly co-hosted by the World Bank Administrative
Tribunal and the American Society of International Law on the occasion
of the former’s 30th anniversary, editor Elias (Executive Secretary, World
Bank Administrative Tribunal) supplements papers from the conference
with additional contributions on similar topics of interest. Following
introductory materials, the volume’s 22 chapters are organized into four
sections. The first considers the development of international adminis-
trative law as a field, and includes explorations of administrative tri-
bunals of international organizations as they relate to the concept of
world constitutionalism and from the perspective of emerging global
administrative law, as well as the role of administrative tribunals in the
independence of the international civil service. The next set of papers
explores the development of international administrative law by admin-
istrative tribunals and contains discussions of issues of monetary
problems, discovery, standard of proof in investigations of staff mis-
conduct, and the scope of World Bank Administrative Tribunal remedies.
Institutional frameworks are examined next, with reference to the United
Nations, the European Union Civil Service, and the possible role of arbi-
tration in administrative tribunals. Issues of effectiveness and legitimacy
are addressed by the final set of papers, including desirable standards
of administrative tribunal design from the perspective of domestic courts,
the evolution of judicial and quasi-judicial independence of adminis-
trative tribunals of the World Bank, the effectiveness of international
administrative law as a body of law and in comparison to some national
legal systems, International Court of Justice review of decisions by inter-
national administrative tribunals, the role of due process in international
adjudication mechanisms, and conflicts of interest. Martinus Nijhoff is
an imprint of Brill.
KZ5930 2012-392790 978-90-411-3918-4
North Atlantic Treaty Organization (NATO), 2d ed.
Trifunovska, Snezana.
Wolters Kluwer Law & Business, ©2012 184 p. $92.00 (pa)
This reference for lawyers, policymakers, and academics offers a plain-
language explanation of how NATO works and its role in international
law. Early chapters outline the origins and historical development of
NATO, describe its membership and structure, and explain its mecha-
nisms for decision-making and implementation. Later chapters describe
NATO’s peacekeeping and peace-enforcing activities in Bosnia and
Herzegovina, Kosovo, and six other countries, and look at NATO’s role in
the fight against terrorism and nuclear weapons. Other areas covered
include NATO’s cooperation with other international organizations and
programs, legal matters such as the legal status of NATO, the status of
military forces and international military headquarters, and financial
matters. The book includes a list of addresses and networks. Trifunovska
teaches law in the Netherlands. The material presented here was origi-
nally published in the International Encyclopedia of Laws. Aspen
Publishers is now Wolters Kluwer Law & Business.
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
KZ6010 2011-943159 978-1-59460-904-6
International dispute resolution; cases and materials, 2d
ed.
O’Connell, Mary Ellen.
Carolina Academic Press, ©2012 646 p. $80.00
O’Connell (international dispute resolution, U. of Notre Dame Law
School) introduces the rules and procedures of dispute settlement under
international law, focusing on those issues that involve states and/or
international organizations, particularly disputes over state boundaries
and shared resources; disputes in the area of diplomatic law, especially
consular rights; and disputes in the area of international dispute reso-
lution law. O’Connell describes the positive international law (treaties,
customary international law, and general principles) and addresses
related normative and natural law principles, illustrating the material
with problems drawn from actual incidents. A basic knowledge of inter-
national law is expected.
KZ6115 2012-392742 978-90-411-3168-3
Procedure and evidence in international arbitration.
Waincymer, Jeffrey.
Wolters Kluwer Law & Business, ©2012 1363 p. $473.00
This text is intended to fill a gap between introductory overviews on the
one hand and detailed expositions of laws and rules in various jurisdic-
tions on the other. Coverage emphasizes general issues and practical
analyses of each procedural and evidentiary stage in roughly chrono-
logical order, with grounding in theoretical and comparative perspectives
and plenty of attention to articulating arguments for and against various
responses. Waincymer (law, Monash U.) thanks assistants and sup-
porters; but he is sole author, and the text bears the stamp of his con-
sistent approach and methods. Aspen Publishers is now Wolters Kluwer
Law & Business.
KZ6385 2012-382200 978-1-84946-204-4
A history of the laws of war; v.1: the customs and laws
of war with regards to combatants and captives.
Gillespie, Alexander.
Hart Publishing, ©2011 264 p. $90.00
Gillespie (law, U. of Waikato, New Zealand) presents the first of a trilogy
of books examining how the customs and laws of warfare have
developed over the pasts 5000 years. It focuses on the characteristics of
combatants and treatment of captives during warfare (the other two
volumes will look at treatment of civilians and the types of weapons that
are utilized). He sets seven “benchmarks” by which progress could be
assessed in the customs and laws of war with regards to combatants and
captives: whether armies can be restricted in numbers; the age, sex, and
nationality of combatants; conscription; the formality and identifiability
of combatants; the treatment of prisoners of war; the use of torture; and
the treatment of the remains of the dead. Distributed in the US by ISBS.
KZ6385 2012-014079 978-90-04-17234-0
What is war?; an investigation in the wake of 9/11.
Title main entry. Ed. by Mary Ellen O’Connell. (International humani-
tarian law series; v.37)
Martinus Nijhoff Publishers, ©2012 495 p. $253.00
With governments often incentivized to deny that conflict in their coun-
tries amount to war and with the contrasting situation of the United
States claiming that it is in a global war against those who have com-
mitted what many critics see as simply criminal acts, there is a need for
the international legal community to more precisely define the actual
nature of war so as to further clarify questions with regard to the law of
war, law on resort to war, and international human rights. In 2005 the
International Law Association’s Executive Council tasked its Committee
on the Use of Force with reporting on the definition of war in interna-
tional law. O’Connell (U. of Notre Dame) presents the results of the delib-
erations that followed, including background papers addressing
associated issues from the disciplinary perspectives of international law,
political science, military history, journalism, ethics, and peace research,
as well as the various reports issues by the Committee in pursuit of its
mandate. Martinus Nijhoff is an imprint of Brill.
KZ6530 2012-023808 978-90-04-22054-6
Forcible displacement throughout the ages; towards an
international convention for the prevention and
punishment of the crime of forcible displacement.
Dawson, Grant and Sonia Farber. (International humanitarian law
series; v.36)
Martinus Nijhoff Publishers, ©2012 197 p. $158.00
Suggesting the body of law that is currently emerging around the crime
of forcible displacement from international tribunals may not reflect the
realities of the situations on the ground and further noting that refugee
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
law by definition only deals with situations occurring after displacement,
Dawson (a Legal Officer at the United Nations International Criminal
Tribunal for the Former Yugoslavia) and Farber (an Associate with
Debevoise & Plimpton, LLP) propose the need for an international
instrument that places a positive obligation upon state actors—and non-
state actors, where appropriate—to prevent the forcible displacement of
human populations. Such an instrument would contain uniform criminal
definitions for violations. They review the history of forcible dis-
placement, consider the legal underpinnings for the definition of the
crime, describe the experience of the international tribunals with forcible
displacement, examine the legal scholarly literature on forcible dis-
placement, explore the question of development-induced displacement,
assess the weaknesses of current applicable law through a case study of
Colombia, and present their own proposal for an international con-
vention on forced displacement (together with explanatory commentary).
Martinus Nijhoff is an imprint of Brill.
KZ7180 2012-015174 978-90-04-15328-8
The genocide convention; the legacy of 60 years.
Title main entry. Ed. by H.G. van der Wilt et al.
Martinus Nijhoff Publishers, ©2012 290 p. $151.00
The editors (professors of international criminal law and genocide studies
at the U. of Amsterdam and the director of the Peace Palace Library in
The Hague, the Netherlands) present materials from a 2008 conference
held in commemoration of the 60th anniversary of the Genocide
Convention. The major goal of the conference was to consider how to
achieve balance between overinflated conceptions of genocide (in which
each and every massacre is understood as such) and the danger of
making the term meaningless through limitations. To that end, lawyers
and historians were brought together in order to examine a range of
issues, including the relationship between genocide and crimes against
humanity, the drafting and development of the 1948 Convention on
Genocide in relation to the politics of international law, the Milosevic case
before the International Criminal Tribunal for the Former Yugoslavia, the
boundaries of incitement to genocide, the meaning of the word “destroy”
in the Genocide convention, victim compensation, laws banning genocide
denial, the implications of the US exceptional “sovereignty package”
passed alongside ratification of the Genocide Convention, the Soviet per-
spective on the drafting of the Genocide Convention, and issues of
genocide in relation to historical archives and education. Also included
are biographical and bibliographical discussions of jurist Raphael
Lemkin and his contribution to the drafting of the Genocide Convention,
as well as the text of a play depicting Lemkin’s engagement with the
issue of genocide. Martinus Nijhoff is an imprint of Brill.
KZA1002 978-90-04-22689-0
Ocean yearbook 26.
Title main entry. Ed. by Aldo Chircop et al. (series: title)
Martinus Nijhoff Publishers, ©2012 1133 p. $318.00
This yearbook is an extensive and detailed collection of articles on the
current state of ocean and coastal governance, management, and
knowledge. As in previous editions, it addresses policy, international rela-
tions, comparative and international law, management, marine sciences,
economics, and social sciences. Specific topics include: the law of the sea
and ocean governance, ocean governance for marine conservation, polar
oceans governance, coastal and ocean planning and management, mar-
itime transport and security, and education and training. Also included
are a selection of relevant book reviews. The yearbook is a collaborative
project of the International Ocean Institute and the Marine &
Environmental Law Institute at the Schulich School of Law, Dalhousie
University, Canada. Editors are Chircop, Coffen-Smout, and McConnell
(law, Schulich School of Law). Martinus Nijhoff is an imprint of Brill.
KZA1146 2012-010078 978-90-04-21773-7
Excessive maritime claims, 3d ed.
Roach, J. Ashley. (Publications on ocean development; v.73)
BRILL, ©2012 925 p. $299.00
The authors (both former US State Department officials long involved in
Law of the Sea issues) examine US government activities in the realm of
navigation and overflight rights and freedoms and in response to
“excessive maritime claims,” particularly in the years following the
adoption of the 1982 United Nations Convention on the Law of the Sea.
They consider the interpretation and implementation of the Convention
and describe the actions taken under the US Freedom of Navigation
Program. Following an introduction to the basics of freedom of
navigation under international law, they examine the various legal
criteria governing the legal divisions of the oceans and airspace. They
then address the rights held by states, excessive claims, and US efforts
to counter excessive claims. Finally, they consider the future of US ocean
policy. This third edition has been updated and new chapters have been
added on submarine cables, polar areas, environmental protection,
–148–
sovereign immunity and sunken ships, and maritime law enforcement.
The documentation in the appendices has also been expanded to facilitate
reference to recent developments.
KZA5205 978-90-04-20862-9
Reports of judgments, advisory opinions and orders 2011;
v.11./Recueil des arrêts, avis consultatifs et ordonnances.
International Tribunal for the Law of the Sea.
Martinus-Nijhoff, ©2012 124 p. $195.00
In French and English, this volume contains cases numbered 16, 17, and
18 presented before the International Tribunal for the Law of the Sea,
concerned, respectively, with a dispute concerning delimitation of the
maritime boundary between Bangladesh and Myanmar in the Bay of
Bengal, a request for advisory opinion submitted to the Seabed Disputes
Chamber, and the M/V “Louisa” case (Saint Vincent and the Grenadines
v. Spain). Martinus-Nijhoff is an imprint of Brill.
EDUCATION
LA11 978-94-6091-946-6
Being and learning; a poetic phenomenology of education
Duarte, Edward M.
Sense Publishers, ©2012 398 p. $49.00 (pa)
Duarte (education theory, Hofstra U., New York) presents an account of
teaching as the art of turning on the desire to behold Being. Being here
is not Plato’s Good existing in another heavenly realm, however, but
reread through a deconstruction of Aristotle as the permanence of pres-
encing. His journey takes readers through such features as the calling of
Socrates, the Way of Lao-Tzu, the dwelling of Heraclitus, meditative
thinking, and the improvisational art of teaching and learning.
LA212 978-94-6091-949-7
Quality and qualities; tensions in education reform.
Title main entry. Ed. by Clementina Acedo et al. (Comparative and
international education; a diversity of voices; v.16)
Sense Publishers, ©2012 213 p. $29.00 (pa)
There has been much controversy about the meaning and measurement
of quality in efforts to reform education, and though the central argu-
ments of the various factions seem to have been moving apart, actors at
the peripheries have been interacting. Here education scholars and prac-
titioners report on the debates in their various countries. Their topics
include education reform and the discourse of quality in Argentina,
active-learning pedagogies as a reform initiative in Egypt, a new gov-
ernment’s policy initiatives for school reform in Korea, enhancing access
and quality in Kenya, and the meaning of education quality in Chile.
There is no index.
LA216 2012-030243 978-0-8204-3398-1
Culture as curriculum; education and the international
expositions (1876-1904).
Provenzo, Eugene F., jr. (History of schools and schooling v.2)
Peter Lang Publishing Inc, ©2012 157 p. $37.95 (pa)
Working within the traditions of both education history and cultural
studies, Provenzo (education, U. of Miami) explores the role of education
in the construction of culture. The culture he describes is the urban and
industrial America that was being created between the end of the Civil
War and World War I, and the education came in the form of the three
international expositions held in the US during that period. He analyzes
the deliberate and perhaps unintentional educational aspects of the 1876
Philadelphia Centennial Exhibition, the World’s Columbian Exposition in
Chicago in 1893, and the 1904 St. Louis Louisiana Purchase Exposition.
He also places them in the context of contemporary exhibitions in
London and Paris.
LA621 2011-048920 978-1-4411-6573-2
Schools for the future Europe; values and change beyond
Lisbon.
Title main entry. Ed. by John Sayer and Lynn Erler.
Continuum Publishing Group, ©2012 255 p. $44.95 (pa)
Fourteen education professionals from England and Scotland contribute
12 chapters to a text analyzing EU policy on education, distinctive in its
look beyond the economy-driven EU to the heritage and future of Europe
as a whole. Chapters explore the entitlement of Europe’s children to have
access to a heritage that is European and how to promote a European
identity; issues of citizen education and language learning, to bring to life
a European dimension; and development of a framework of European
education that can be adapted and extended to meet future needs. The
text includes examples of initiatives, such as the UK’s Anglo-European
School at Ingatestone and Hockerill Anglo-European College at Bishop’s
–149–
Stortford, the Europe-Schulen in several German Länder, bilateral agree-
ments to recognize bilingual European examinations, and a case study of
the first British European Academy at Culham, UK.
LA1058 2012-021969 978-0-8166-7969-0
Student activism in Asia; between protest and
powerlessness.
Title main entry. Ed. by Meredith L. Weiss and Edward Aspinall.
U. of Minnesota Press, ©2012 318 p. $25.00 (pa)
This collection of 10 essays explores dramatic examples of student activist
mobilization in North- and South-East Asia—including China, Japan,
Burma, Hong Kong, Taiwan, South Korea, Indonesia, Malaysia, Thailand,
and the Philippines. They define student activism as collective action by
university students directed at and often against the ruling regime. They
examine the full post WWII period and develop an analysis of the student
as political identity. Area-studies experts consider shakers and supporters
in China, campus control in Taiwan, communist politics among Filipino
students, and more. The contributors are professors of political science,
sociology and area studies from universities around the Pacific Rim and
United States.
LB41 978-1-59363-953-2
Changing tomorrow 1; leadership curriculum for high-
ability elementary students; grades 4-5.
VanTassel-Baska, Joyce and Linda D. Avery.
Prufrock Press Inc., ©2013 135 p. $24.95 (pa)
VanTassel-Baska and Avery (gifted education, College of William and
Mary) offer instructional activities for high-ability students in grades four
and five that focus on leadership development. They present 10 lessons
and activities that address leadership behaviors, communication and col-
laboration skills, and metacognitive development, using six biographical
studies of leaders from various fields, from Bill Gates to Tecumseh to
Clara Barton, to show the abilities, skills, and mindsets related to lead-
ership practice and eight generalizations about leadership. Alignment to
national standards is addressed, and assessments and rubrics for scoring
are provided. There is no index.
LB1025 2012-018764 978-1-4166-1440-1
Assignments matter; making the connections that help
students meet standards.
Dougherty, Eleanor.
Assn/Supervision & Curric. Dev., ©2012 191 p. $26.95 (pa)
Dougherty is a consultant with education foundations and agencies on
curriculum and professional development; she has taught in public,
private, and postsecondary institutions, and worked in practice and
policy organizations, including the US Dept. of Education and the
Education Trust. Based on ten-plus years of coaching and working with
teachers across the US, her concise, accessible text guides teachers and
administrators in the craft of creating quality assignments, by laying out
a seven-step design process that demystifies and streamlines assignment
making. The text also helps educators become more aware of the impact
of assignments on teaching and learning, and explains ways to create
data and feedback from assignments and student work to determine next
steps and other supports.
LB1025 978-1-4129-9525-2
Creative scheduling for diverse populations in middle and
high school; maximizing opportunities for learning.
Merenbloom, Elliot Y. and Barbara A. Kalina.
Corwin Press Inc., ©2013 207 p. $38.95 (pa)
Merenbloom, an educational consultant and former teacher and admin-
istrator, and Kalina, who has been a nurse, middle school teacher, and
consultant, show middle and high school administrators working with
diverse populations how to use scheduling to meet challenges in the cur-
riculum and programs. They describe the definition and expectations of
a schedule; the development of schedules for response to intervention,
special education, English language learning, credit recovery, career and
technical education, gifted and talented programs, and Advanced
Placement and International Baccalaureate programs; fixed and variable
inclusive scheduling frameworks and their integration; scheduling frame-
works for small learning communities and magnets, houses, and acad-
emies; specific steps for scheduling in middle and high schools; effective
teaching in variable-length time periods; and guidelines for professional
development for successful implementation.
LB1025 2012-025761 978-1-4166-1468-5
A handbook for classroom instruction that works, 2d ed.
Pitler, Howard and Bj Stone.
Assn/Supervision & Curric. Dev., ©2012 333 p. $32.95 (pa)
Pitler, who conducts workshops and training for K-12 teachers on
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
research-based instructional strategies and technology integration, and
Stone, a consultant who facilitates learning sessions with teachers and
administrators in research-based instructional strategies, vocabulary
instruction, curriculum development, and assessment design, draw on a
survey to identify nine categories of instructional strategies that improve
student achievement: setting objectives and providing feedback; rein-
forcing effort and providing recognition; cooperative learning; cues, ques-
tions, and advance organizers; nonlinguistic representations;
summarizing and note taking; assigning homework and providing
practice; identifying similarities and differences; and generating and
testing hypotheses. This edition presents strategies within a framework
for instructional planning that emphasizes the importance of all
strategies and three components: creating the environment for learning,
helping students develop understanding, and helping students extend
and apply knowledge. The handbook is meant for use as a supplement
to the second edition of Classroom Instruction That Works and provides
more in-depth examples and practical applications. Discussion of each
strategy includes why it has a positive impact, how to reflect on current
practice, what the strategy looks like in the classroom, rubrics and check-
lists, and tools, templates, and protocols.
LB1025 2012-015978 978-0-393-70756-4
Thinking at every desk; four simple skills to transform
your classroom.
Cabrera, Derek and Laura Colosi. (Norton books in education)
W.W. Norton, ©2012 148 p. $19.95 (pa)
Cabrera, a specialist in thinking skills and learning, and Colosi (Cornell
U. Family Life Development Center) explain the implications of Cabrera’s
research into thinking, metacognition, and teaching thinking skills.
Drawing on an understanding of how knowledge is structured, they con-
sider problems with traditional teaching practices and the need to move
towards a constructivist approach (rather than instructionist) that
develops higher-order thinking skills. They describe how to teach
thinking to students in any grade or subject to get them to understand
what they’re required to know and how they know it. They outline four
universal structures that underlie the process of creating knowledge—
making distinctions between things, organizing things into systems,
relating things to each other, and doing these actions from various per-
spectives—to create increased metacognition, deep understanding, and
transfer of knowledge from one area to another. Examples from different
classrooms are integrated.
LB1027 2012-008256 978-0-415-87110-5
Pediatric school psychology; conceptualization,
applications, and strategies for leadership development.
(CD-ROM included)
Power, Thomas J. and Kathy L. Bradley-Klug. (School-based practice in
action series)
Routledge, ©2013 248 p. $34.95 (pa)
Power (school psychology in pediatrics, psychiatry, and education, U. of
Pennsylvania) and Bradley-Klug (school psychology, U. of South Florida)
provide child psychologists, trainees, and researchers with information
on conceptual models and applications of intervention and prevention
strategies in pediatric school psychology. They do not focus on specific
disorders, but instead address improving adherence, promoting school
reintegration, reducing stress and enhancing coping skills, improving
pain management, and enhancing quality of life. Addressing prevention
to promote competence and resilience, they cover developing multitiered
programs, establishing and maintaining partnerships with cross-system
and cross-discipline collaboration, monitoring program effectiveness and
quality of implementation, health promotion and illness prevention, and
programming for sustainability. They emphasize both theory and
practice and include school, primary care, community, and hospital set-
tings, as well as leadership development for professionals, with dis-
cussion of program development and evaluation, measurement
development, grant writing, manuscript reviewing and preparation, and
training and research. The CD contains guidelines for these leadership
development topics, as well as PowerPoint presentations and case studies.
Additional authors contribute to some chapters.
LB1028 2012-933234 978-0-85702-980-5
A beginner’s guide to doing your research project.
Lambert, Mike.
Sage Publications, ©2012 234 p. $100.00
Lambert, an education professor who develops and teaches the research
methods module for initial teaching training at the U. of Wolverhampton,
UK, outlines the process of doing a research project for undergraduate
and graduate students and professionals in education. He covers types of
research activities and ethics; learning from other research; choosing a
topic; research questions; literature review; methods such as question-
naires, interviews, and observations; designing research instruments;
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
validity, reliability, and ethical approval; carrying out the investigation;
analyzing data and producing findings; and writing up the project and
sharing it with others. An appendix contains photocopiable project
sheets.
LB1028 978-1-74286-100-5
Bring your own technology; the BYOT guide for schools
and families.
Lee, Mal and Martin Levins.
ACER Press, ©2012 136 p. $34.95 (pa)
Lee, an author and educational consultant who specializes in the use of
digital technology in schooling, and Levins, a director of information
technology at a school in Australia, discuss the trend of “bring your own
technology” in schools and how personal digital technology can be used
across the curriculum. They provide advice for parents and teachers and
address key issues and the current setting; case studies of schools in the
UK, US, and Australasia; the rationale for use; the school context and
readiness factors; a model for adoption and its options; implementation
principles; technical tips; implementation and management checklists;
developments during implementation and refining effectiveness; and
challenges and implications. Distributed in the US by ISBS.
LB1028 2012-029664 978-1-4331-1694-0
Critical digital literacies as social praxis; intersections and
challenges.
Title main entry. Ed. by JuliAnna Ávila, Jessica Zacher Pandya. (New
literacies and digital epistemologies; v.54)
Peter Lang Publishing Inc, ©2013 228 p. $38.95 (pa)
This collection of ten critical essays examines several intersections in new
information technology and pedagogy, considering both the challenges
and opportunities they afford. The essays are organized into three major
sections that focus on how digital teaching is “disruptive by design,” how
to teachers themselves are trained in teaching and themselves being dig-
itally literate, and resisting dominant narratives that reduce the devel-
opment of digital literacy to terms of market-literacy. Specific essays
include “Designing Space for Student Choice in a Digital Media Studies
Classroom,” “Beyond Technology Skills: toward a framework for critical
digital literacies in pre-service technology education,” and “Hacker
Literacies: user-generated resistance and reconfiguration of networked
publics.” The contributors are American professors of communication,
English and education. This text is not indexed.
LB1028 2012-013056 978-1-4666-2110-7
Educational communities of inquiry; theoretical
framework, research, and practice.
Title main entry. Ed. by Zehra Akyol and D. Randy Garrison.
Information Science Reference, ©2013 586 p. $175.00
Akyol, a researcher and practitioner interested in teaching and learning
online and blended learning environments, and Garrison (education, U.
of Calgary, Canada) present 25 chapters by education and other
researchers from Canada, the US, Europe, Japan, and South America.
They examine the community of inquiry framework, which focuses on
higher-level learning processes to develop learning environments through
three elements: social presence (the sense of belonging through the devel-
opment of climate and interpersonal relationships in the community);
cognitive presence (the progression through the phases of practical
inquiry to construct and confirm meaning through discourse); and
teaching presence (the design, facilitation, and direction through a course
of study). The chapters present research and practice associated with this
framework, for researchers and practitioners, students, and educators,
and discuss its theoretical foundations, philosophical roots, the place of
metacognitive awareness, and its historical development in distance edu-
cation, followed by design and implementation issues, including the role
of teaching presence, blending synchronous and asynchronous online
learning, the relationship between teaching presence and cognitive
presence, promoting discussion skills, nurturing cognitive presence and
fostering critical thinking, question prompts, group projects, blended
foreign language courses, student retention, and assessment. The last two
sections address administrative issues and organizational support and
emerging research and practice issues.
LB1028 2012-001506 978-0-415-80844-6
Education in a digital world; global perspectives on
technology and education.
Selwyn, Neil.
Routledge, ©2013 179 p. $135.00
Writing to be accessible to educators and general readers, Selwyn
(Institute of Education, University of London, UK) offers a socially
attuned, comparative analysis of the uses of educational technology and
the connections between digital technology and the politics of education,
–150–
not only in the developed countries of North America and Europe, but
also in South America, Africa, and Asia. The author seeks to reintroduce
a political dimension into the academic debates surrounding educational
technology by investigating the role of culture, politics, and economics on
the production and consumption of a range of educational technology
products, practices, and discourses at the macro and micro levels. He
touches on the roles of international organizations and national policy-
making, and offers a critical analysis of the “one laptop per child” policy.
LB1028 2012-020188 978-1-4666-2205-0
Open-source technologies for maximizing the creation,
deployment, and use of digital resources and information.
Title main entry. Ed. by Shalin Hai-Jew.
Information Science Reference, ©2013 345 p. $195.00
Contributors from information and computer sciences, of course, but also
education and a few other fields examine the hierarchy of open source
resources and information available, and the process of how such digital
collections are collected and often curated for quality. The topics include
geo-information technology as a case study of an open-source approach
to contemporary research, creating a digital learning community for
undergraduate minority science majors, building open-source resources
for online learning in a higher education environment, measuring lan-
guage learners’ speaking proficiency in a second language using eco-
nomic digital tools, creating open-source interactive articles for the wider
publics, and opening up options for school leaders.
LB1028 2011-031313 978-1-4129-8759-2
Technology in schools.
Title main entry. Ed. by Kevin P. Brady. (Debating issues in American
education; v.10)
Sage Publications, ©2012 322 p. $80.00
US contributors in educational leadership, instructional technology,
special education, and instructional design debate controversial issues
surrounding the role of technology in schools. The paired pro and con
essays are grouped in sections on 13 issues such as assistive technology
versus universal design, ebooks versus paper books, pocket assistive tech-
nologies, virtual schools, video surveillance in the schools, cyberbullying,
and public school presence on social networking sites. Each chapter
begins with a 2-3 page overview of the issue by the editor. Brady teaches
in the Department of Leadership, Policy, and Adult and Higher
Education at North Carolina State University.
LB1028 2011-045911 978-1-4411-9877-8
Theory building in educational research. (reprint, 2010)
Kettley, Nigel.
Continuum Publishing Group, ©2012 210 p. $44.95 (pa)
Kettley (social science, U. of Cambridge) explores processes involved in
generating, refining, and testing theory in education studies, bridging
empirical research strategies and education theories. He deploys the con-
ceptual principles of the Cambridge school of sociology, which underly a
range of contemporary research, to argue that theory building, and con-
sequently theory in education, are in a state of crisis. He covers crisis and
corrections, the interface of theory and method, education theory
building in practice, and prospects and promises.
LB1029 2012-003062 978-1-4411-9839-6
The false promise of global learning; why education
needs boundaries.
Standish, Alex.
Continuum Publishing Group, ©2012 203 p. $80.00
In this critique of global education, Standish (geography, Western
Connecticut State University) argues that advocates for global education
have created a new rationale for schooling that undermines the founda-
tions of subject knowledge and ultimately inhibits teaching children
about the world. He contends that contemporary global and international
education initiatives seek to break down boundaries between education
and noneducational endeavors such as training, political activism, and
therapy. The study focuses on primary and secondary education in the
US and England, with some discussion of higher education. The methods
used by the author for research include content analysis of teaching
materials, policy documents, and guidelines; interviews with those
working for nonprofits; classroom observations; and interviews with
principals at schools that have embraced a global or international
approach. A final chapter presents essential boundaries for learning
about the world.
We're always delighted to hear from our readers.
Contact us at (503) 281-9230 or booknews@booknews.com.
–151–
LB1029 2011-036297 978-1-4331-1529-5
A heart of wisdom; life writing as empathetic inquiry.
Title main entry. Ed. by Cynthia M. Chambers et al. (Complicated con-
versation; a book series of curriculum studies; v.39)
Peter Lang Publishing Inc, ©2012 390 p. $42.95 (pa)
Personal accounts, whether taking the form of memoirs, essays or even
poetry all come under the broad genre which can be described as life
writing. In this anthology, the editors, who are professors of education at
three Canadian universities, gather 47 pieces that explore key moments
of individuals in learning or teaching others. Striking color photographs
occasionally appear, most often in a series of poems by Ahava Shira.
Other more formal pieces, on the other hand, actually provide references.
What appears to be an automatically generated index appears at the
close.
LB1029 2012-005902 978-1-61608-640-4
Hooked on riddles; a guide to teaching kids math,
science, English, and other subjects using fun word plays
and silly jokes.
Quijano, Mary.
Skyhorse Pub. Co., ©2012 184 p. $14.95 (pa)
Q: What did one parallel line say to the other? A: Why don’t we ever
meet? Q: Why did the spider cross the road? A: To get to her web site.
These and many other gems are found in this fun reference for teachers,
parents, and others who work with kids. Quijano, a third grade teacher
at Long Creek Elementary School in Texas, also offers classroom vignettes
showing how to use riddles to encourage kids to analyze clues, build
vocabulary, and remember facts. All of the book’s color illustrations, and
many of the riddles, are by real children in the author’s classes.
LB1031 2012-019460 978-1-4625-0631-6
Universal design for learning in the classroom; practical
applications.
Title main entry. Ed. by Tracey E. Hall et al. (What works for special-
needs learners)
Guilford Pr., ©2012 156 p. $28.00 (pa)
This volume brings together a group of education scholars and
researchers from the US who show educators how to apply the principles
of Universal Design for Learning (UDL) in all subject areas and grade
levels. They introduce UDL and questions about how it relates to tech-
nology, its difference from universal design, how it applies to the cur-
riculum, and other areas, then offer guidelines to help teachers plan and
structure curricula, including goals, assessments, methods, and mate-
rials. They then focus on specific skills, content, and subject matter:
reading comprehension strategy instruction and digital learning envi-
ronments; writing instruction and online supported writing environ-
ments based on UDL principles; and science, math, history, and the arts,
including painting and dance. They describe applications to low or no-
technology settings and what the new national emphasis on UDL means
for teaching preparation and professional development. Hall et al., a
research scientist, psychologist, and developmental neuropsychologist
and educator, are associated with a non-profit research and development
organization that aims to improve education for all learners through tech-
nology and research in the cognitive neurosciences.
LB1032 2012941188 978-1-61250-496-4
Instructional rounds in action.
Roberts, John E.
Harvard Education Press, ©2012 178 p. $24.95 (pa)
Instructional rounds are an emerging trend for school improvement,
involving school and classroom observation. Incorporating the perspec-
tives of teachers, principals, and administrators, this book for educators
offers a case study of the practical problems encountered when using
instructional rounds at the school level, such as problems related to the
frequency of conducting observations and the problem of ignoring racial
differences. Author Roberts (Instructional Rounds Institute, Harvard
Graduate School of Education) criticizes the institutional constraints that
inhibit collective learning and undermine the espoused goals of equality
in secondary schools. He emphasizes the disruptive aspect of instruc-
tional rounds—that is, their ability to disrupt the typical patterns of inter-
action between adults in schools and their potential to highlight major
organizational problems.
LB1044 2012-028990 978-1-4666-1987-6
Student usability in educational software and games;
improving experiences.
Title main entry. Ed. by Carina Gonzalez.
Information Science Reference, ©2013 417 p. $175.00
González (computer science, U. of La Laguna, Spain) brings together a
group of technology, computer science, software engineering, informatics,
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
and other researchers from Europe, Australia, and South America for 17
articles on student usability in the design and evaluation of learning
systems and educational game environments. They cover new models of
interaction and human-computer interaction paradigms applied to
learning environments, to help specialists in human-computer inter-
action, learning systems, and educational video games improve their
understanding of student experiences with new learning-gaming envi-
ronments and allow researchers and developers to share techniques for
design and evaluation. They discuss principles and techniques related to
usability, accessibility, and playability in e-learning and educational video
games; the study of human factors in serious games, including the power
of attraction, trust, and different aspects linked to users’ collaboration;
and eight case studies of experiences in the design and usability evalu-
ation of educational tools, 3D mobile games, laboratory experiments in
computer supported collaborative learning activities, and applications in
different contexts or with individuals such as deaf or hospitalized
patients.
LB1050 2012-002054 978-0-13-294368-0
Bader reading and language inventory, 7th ed. (DVD
included)
Bader, Lois A. and Daniel L. Pearce. (Pearson professional development)
Pearson Education, ©2013 219 p. $66.60 (pa)
Bader, a retired professor at Michigan State U., and Pearce (literacy edu-
cation, Texas A&M U.-Corpus Christi) present the Bader Reading and
Language Inventory for K-12 teachers, literacy specialists, resource
teachers, and teachers of adults and English language learners to use to
determine literacy levels, plan instruction, and make referrals to spe-
cialists. The text includes inventories and checklists to assess the interests
and priorities of children, teens, and adults; graded word recognition
lists and reader’s passages; phonics and structural analysis inventories;
English language learning, spelling, arithmetic, visual and auditory dis-
crimination, preliteracy and emerging literacy, and cloze tests; and
instructions for evaluating language abilities and constructing cur-
riculum-based assessments. It also has forms for recording, summa-
rizing, and interpreting tests, including a case study, and explanation of
developing and validating the inventory. This edition has been revised to
include two sets of graded passages (for elementary and secondary/adult
students), some of which have been replaced. It also adds new record
sheets, more accurate graded word lists for the upper levels, updates to
address the needs of English language learners, and new footage and
updated information on the inventory’s reliability and validity on the
DVD, which contains video clips of the assessment of students of dif-
ferent ages and abilities, as well as the test battery forms. The text also
has new information on oral and silent reading, a revised checklist and
quick screening instrument for English language learners, and more
information on reliability. There is no index.
LB1050 2012-021155 978-0-8141-0291-6
Beyond standardized truth; improving teaching and
learning through inquiry-based reading assessment.
Filkins, Scott. (Literacy assessment strand)
NCTE, ©2012 133 p. $33.95 (pa)
Filkins, a teacher, instructional coach, and curriculum coordinator, sup-
plies high school teachers with examples of classroom practices that illus-
trate classroom-based, inquiry-driven reading assessment to support and
enhance instruction and learning, drawn from his work with teachers in
the U. of Illinois Writing Project and in local schools. He builds on
Stephen Kucer’s framework of four dimensions of reading (linguistic,
cognitive, sociocultural, and developmental) and explains this type of
formative assessment, the tools developed from two high school reading
classes, the theoretical and practical argument for authentic reading
assessment, the process of formative assessment, the reflections of three
classroom teachers who used inquiry to improve instruction, and
assessment as an act of caring for students.
LB1050 2012-020403 978-0-13-290708-8
Intervention strategies to follow informal reading
inventory assessment; so what do I do now?, 3d ed.
(online access included)
Caldwell, JoAnne Schudt and Lauren Leslie.
Pearson Education, ©2013 299 p. $40.99 (pa)
Caldwell (educational psychology, Cardinal Stritch U.) and Leslie (literacy,
Marquette U.) outline practical reading intervention strategies based on
students’ informal reading inventory results, specifically those from the
Qualitative Reading Inventory. They describe how intervention instruction
should move struggling readers to a level appropriate for their age and
grade; examine the informal reading inventory and what can be learned
from it; and discuss the assessment and teaching of phonological
awareness, word identification decoding and fluency, the role of prior
knowledge, word learning and comprehension, retelling, answering
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
questions, and developing comprehension, as well as models for
structuring different intervention sessions. This edition adds new student
case studies, a focus on teaching with classroom materials and textbooks
in an intervention lesson, more on teaching academic vocabulary, more
focus on improving sentence comprehension, sections on applications for
adolescent learners and English language learners and response to
intervention, information on recent intervention research and literacy
practices, applications of phonological awareness to writing and word
identification instruction to spelling, and a new PDToolkit website, which
contains lesson plans, videos, and other information. It also has sections
on the use of teacher read-alouds for vocabulary instruction, developing
word consciousness, expository read-alouds, and dialogic approaches to
comprehension. It has a new section on Common Core Standards for
English Language Arts, Reading of Literature, History, Social Studies,
Science, and Technical Subjects.
LB1050 2012-029926 978-0-325-04361-6
Making the most of your core reading program; research-
based essentials.
Dewitz, Peter and Jonni Wolskee.
Heinemann, ©2012 192 p. $27.50 (pa)
Dewitz, a professor, staff developer, and researcher who has studied core
programs, and Wolskee, a teacher and reading specialist, show teachers
how to remodel their core reading program to support every student.
They consider these programs from the publisher’s viewpoint to show
why developers focus on a specific way of teaching reading and present
a brief history of reading programs. They demonstrate how to increase
flexibility in lesson planning; ensure that whole-group lessons reach all
students; differentiate word study through small-group instruction; make
space for independent reading to build fluency, knowledge, and enthu-
siasm; improve vocabulary instruction; deepen and broaden readers’
prior knowledge; and support comprehension and thinking through
small-group instruction. They include discussion of the research base,
and sample lessons, planning guides, instructional strategies, ways to
extend understanding, and other resources. There is no index.
LB1050 2012-010299 978-1-4625-0694-1
Reading assessment in an RTI framework.
Stahl, Katherine A. Dougherty and Michael C. McKenna.
Guilford Pr., ©2013 164 p. $26.00 (pa)
Stahl (reading, New York U.) and McKenna (reading, U. of Virginia)
present a practical model for K-8 teachers and school personnel to use to
conduct reading assessments for screening, diagnosis, and progress mon-
itoring in each of the three tiers of response to intervention (RTI).
Focusing on the assessment component of RTI (and only including an
overview of instructional approaches and programs), they consider how
much assessment is needed, types used in RTI, assessing areas of reading
development, the process of conducting an assessment audit, assessment
in each tier, how to set up and maintain a record-keeping system and
communicate outcomes, implementing an RTI framework, and profes-
sional development. They organize strategies around the cognitive model
of reading assessment, connect their text to the measures in the RTI
framework, and include reproducibles, vignettes, and links to Common
Core State Standards.
LB1050 978-94-6091-853-7
The Socratic classroom; reflective thinking through
collaborative inquiry.
Chesters, Sarah Davey.
Sense Publishers, ©2012 185 p. $49.00 (pa)
Chesters (Queensland U. of Technology, Australia) explores Socratic ped-
agogy: a collaborative inquiry-based approach to teaching and learning
suitable not only to formal educational settings such as the school
classroom, but to all educational settings. Then she develops a
framework for understanding the relationship between what she calls
the generative evaluative and connective aspects of communal dialogue,
which she thinks are necessary to the Socratic notion of inquiry.
LB1050 2012-016840 978-1-4625-0629-3
Teaching strategic processes in reading, 2d ed.
Almasi, Janice F. and Susan King Fullerton.
Guilford Pr., ©2012 364 p. $35.00 (pa)
Almasi (literacy education, U. of Kentucky) and Fullerton (literacy and
teacher education, Clemson U.) show teachers how to incorporate strategy
instruction into the K-8 classroom. Their goals in this edition are to show
how to teach students to have more independence and agency in their
actions and strategies, and they include new knowledge and methods,
chapters on response to intervention and organizing instruction across
the school day and week, and more sample lessons and early literacy and
upper-elementary examples. They explain what is involved in strategic
–152–
processing and the difference between strategies and skills, as well as the
characteristics of strategic and nonstrategic readers; the critical elements
of strategies instruction model, its components, and comparisons to other
models; teaching strategic processing with responsive teaching; methods
for assessment; different types of students who struggle with compre-
hension and cognitive strategies to assist them; research supporting com-
prehension strategies like test anticipation, maintenance, and fix-up
strategies, with lesson plans and instructional materials; theories under-
lying word recognition strategies and sample lessons and instructional
guidelines; and stories about teachers’ growth and development as they
learned about strategic processes. They end with tools for putting it all
together and getting started.
LB1062 978-94-6091-971-8
Teacher learning and power in the knowledge society.
Title main entry. Ed. by Rosemary Clark et al. (The knowledge
economy and education; v.5)
Sense Publishers, ©2012 215 p. $49.00 (pa)
Teachers and education scholars in Ontario, Canada examine literature
and trends worldwide, and draw on their Canadian empirical research
data, to deepen the analysis of the global issue of teachers’ learning.
Among the topics are a comparison of teachers with other professionals
in terms of occupational requirements, class positions, and workplace
power; an overview of teachers’ work and learning; occasional teachers’
job-related learning; some policy implications of professional control and
professional learning; and a case study of job-embedded learning for
beginning teachers in the Toronto district school board. There is no
index.
LB1072 2011-025409 978-1-4411-6104-8
Developing everyday coping skills in the early years;
proactive strategies for supporting social and emotional
development.
Frydenberg, Erica et al.
Continuum Publishing Group, ©2012 158 p. $34.95 (pa)
Frydenberg, a psychologist at the U. of Melbourne, Australia, et al. show
teachers and parents how to develop young children’s (ages three
through eight) coping skills through arts and language-based activities.
They detail the theories that relate to positive development and coping,
including the use of coping images and teaching skills in different group
settings, then music and movement, drama, dance, drawing, and literacy
and language applications and activities, as well as those in family and
clinical contexts.
LB1139 2012-013881 978-1-57110-966-8
Apprenticeship in literacy; transitions across reading and
writing, K-4, 2d ed.
Dorn, Linda J. and Tammy Jones.
Stenhouse Publishers, ©2012 229 p. $25.00 (pa)
Dorn (reading education, U. of Arkansas at Little Rock) and Jones, an ele-
mentary teacher, professional development consultant, and adjunct
reading education professor at the U. of Arkansas at Little Rock, identify
seven principles of apprenticeship learning to illustrate to K-4 teachers
how children acquire higher-level understandings during assisted activ-
ities with a more knowledgeable person. They outline differentiation and
scaffolding techniques within a balanced literacy approach and discuss
the cognitive and social processes of learning to read and the teacher’s
role in literacy development; the implementation of a guided reading
program within a balanced literacy framework; two types of assisted
writing (interactive writing and writing aloud); independent writing;
letters, sounds, and word study; organizing the environment for learning;
the importance of high-quality instruction for all children; supple-
mentary support for struggling readers through small-group inter-
vention; and reflective teaching. This edition has updated research
emphasizing the importance of early reading; information on how
behaviors align to Common Core State Standards; new classroom
examples; more emphasis on the importance of the writing process; more
ideas on establishing routines and organizing the classroom; language
prompts that promote self-regulated learners; schedules for implementing
a workshop framework in various settings; an expanded word study
section; more on assessing students’ orthographic and phonological
knowledge; and suggestions for incorporating information texts.
LB1139 978-1-78190-074-1
Early education in a global context.
Title main entry. Ed. by John A. Sutterby. (Advances in early education
and day care; v.16)
Emerald Group Publishing, ©2012 219 p. $114.95
Editor Sutterby (University of Texas-Brownsville) unites international con-
tributors in education, psychology, and early childhood to examine
–153–
aspects of early childhood education in eight different countries on four
continents. Major themes include professional development, children’s
health, early childhood programs, and children’s cognition. Some specific
subjects explored include kindergarten curriculum reform in mainland
China, Florida’s statewide professional development initiative for pre-K
teachers, a five-country European intervention program, and devel-
opment and sustainability of high-quality early childhood education pro-
grams in Zambia. The book is distributed in North America by Turpin
Distribution.
LB1139 978-1-4522-4164-7
Early literacy materials selector ELMS; a tool for review
of early literacy program materials.
Rothkos, Kathleen et al.
Corwin Press Inc., ©2012 99 p. $25.95 (pa)
Roskos (reading assessment and instruction, John Carroll U.) et al.
present the early literacy materials selector, a tool to help teachers,
administrators, and other decision makers review the features of instruc-
tional materials in early childhood classrooms using evidence-based cri-
teria of product quality and make decisions about how to use materials
for preschool/early primary literacy instruction. They outline how to plan
a review, who might be involved, and types of programs to be reviewed;
additional uses of the tool to enhance and extend professional devel-
opment, teacher preparation, and curriculum development; and how to
take an inventory of teaching materials, examine the quality of materials,
analyze the guidance provided in them, and arrive at a final rating. The
tool and examples of completed parts are provided in appendices.
LB1139 2012-016402 978-1-4625-0499-2
Knowledge development in early childhood; sources of
learning and classroom implications.
Title main entry. Ed. by Ashley M. Pinkham et al.
Guilford Pr., ©2012 270 p. $40.00
Thirty-one American academics contribute 14 chapters examining how
children acquire knowledge in the “real world” and highlighting
strategies that can help practitioners build children’s knowledge bases in
classrooms and beyond. Chapters addressing learning resources focus on
learning from the ambient environment, learning through play, how
other people influence children’s knowledge acquisition, and knowledge-
building supports, such as the arts, books, and screen media. Practical
chapters describe ways to use children’s natural desire to play to simul-
taneously build knowledge, use of direct vocabulary instruction to
enhance future learning, teacher language influences on children’s
learning, ways to facilitate high-quality teacher-student interactions in
early childhood classrooms, building knowledge through informational
texts, literacy and content-area knowledge, and building literacy skills
through multimedia.
LB1140 2012-020543 978-0-13-261312-5
Endless opportunities for infant and toddler curriculum; a
relationship-based approach, 2d ed.
Petersen, Sandra H. and Donna S. Wittmer.
Pearson Education, ©2013 314 p. $44.20 (pa)
Learning for infants and toddlers occurs in spontaneous moments and
brief interactions, argue Peterson and Wittmer (U. of Colorado, Denver).
They help infant and toddler care teachers and child development and
early childhood education students plan a responsive and relationship-
based curriculum and bring relationship-based practices to larger
program issues, such as engaging families; responsive, safe, and healthy
caregiving routines; creating environments; helping infants and toddlers
learn to be members of their culture and participate in and realign rela-
tionships; and using observation and documentation for responsive
planning and ongoing assessment. They offer curricular suggestions for
attachment and emotional development; social development; learning;
language, literacy, and music; creativity, symbolic play, and sensory
development; fine motor development; movement development; and
learning about the outdoors. This edition adds learning outcomes in each
chapter; includes children with disabilities in vignettes; adds a chart of
developmental possibilities in each development chapter, as well as sec-
tions on theories and current research; and adds subheads, reflection
questions, applications, and additional resources in each chapter, and
new photos.
LB1140 2012-032226 978-1-60554-113-6
Planning for play, observation, and learning in preschool
and kindergarten.
Gronlund, Gaye.
Redleaf Press, ©2013 270 p. $29.95 (pa)
Gronlund, an early childhood consultant and former general and special
education teacher, presents several frameworks for planning and
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
reflecting on play, observation, and learning in preschool and kinder-
garten classrooms to help teachers use a developmentally appropriate
approach to integrate activities with the needs and traits of students. The
frameworks are based on her book Focused Early Learning: A Planning
Framework for Teaching Young Children (2003). She explores curriculum
as a process that incorporates planning, observation, and individual-
ization; introduces planning and reflection frameworks to reflect this;
and describes how to embed learning goals and academics in play, daily
routines, and teacher-led group activities. She discusses teachers’ roles in
planning and sustaining high-level play experiences, individualization
and differentiation for each child, balancing adult-guided and child-
guided activities, building relationships with children and families, and
integrating authentic assessment and curriculum.
LB1556 2012-021938 978-0-415-64515-7
Education 3-13; 40 years of research on primary,
elementary and early years education.
Title main entry. Ed. by Michael Bottery et al. (Education heritage)
Routledge, ©2013 346 p. $160.00
This anthology for students, researchers, teachers, administrator, and pol-
icymakers collects important articles published over the pat 40 years in
the journal Education 3-13, a publication of the Association for the Study
of Primary Education, which is published in the UK and read around the
world. The first group of articles explores learning and teaching,
including the psychology and philosophy of primary education, with dis-
cussion of topics such as outdoor learning and children’s views on the
purpose of schools. The second section outlines key challenges in primary
education, such as school governance and educational leadership, and
the impact of Every Child Matters. The section on the primary cur-
riculum examines topics such as challenging gifted students, the arts in
primary school, and phonics methods. The last section of the book
presents articles on teachers’ work and professionalism. The book is
illustrated with examples of children’s art. Bottery teaches education at
the University of Hull.
LB1564 2011-022991 978-1-4411-2569-9
The primary curriculum design handbook; preparing our
children for the 21st century.
Male, Brian.
Continuum Publishing Group, ©2012 219 p. $55.00 (pa)
Male, a curriculum design specialist in the UK, explores how primary
curriculum designers in England can meet the requirements of the
national curriculum (although the principles apply to schools of any level
in any country) but also be flexible and meet the needs, interests, and
concerns of pupils and allow teachers to use their own creativity. He
places the English National Curriculum within a wider context of
teaching knowledge, skills, and understanding to students and aiding
their development as human beings. He details the key skills of a twenty-
first century curriculum and its framework and shows how the skills
can be built into design at a general level. He also discusses how to
design an individual curriculum when the national curriculum must be
followed. Other topics examined include the roots of learning, subject
learning, and the impact of key concepts and skills; learning expecta-
tions; creating a creative curriculum; engaging students; rooting national
expectations in local settings; tracking success and conducting evalua-
tions; and getting started.
LB1570 2011-023010 978-1-4411-5484-2
Teaching and learning and the curriculum; a critical
introduction.
Mufti, Emmanuel and Mark Peace.
Continuum Publishing Group, ©2012 188 p. $130.00
Written from a UK perspective for current and future teachers, this
volume examines the learning process and the relationship between
schools, teachers, and pupils. It does not demonstrate how to teach, but
presents issues so teachers can form their own approaches and opinions.
These include traditional learning theories, focusing on behaviorism and
constructivism; newer learning theories; the concepts of intelligence and
learning preferences; liberal, instrumental, and critical approaches to the
curriculum; how education has been increasingly subject to centralized
control; the roles of technology, learning outside the classroom, culture,
class, parental involvement, teachers, and the school culture; and the
teacher as an educator.
LB1573 2012-027029 978-1-936765-53-9
What principals need to know about teaching and
learning reading, 2d ed.
Cunningham, Patricia M. and James W. Cunningham.
Solution Tree Press, ©2013 115 p. $24.95 (pa)
Patricia Cunningham (education, Wake Forest U.) and James
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
Cunningham (literacy studies, U. of North Carolina at Chapel Hill) show
principals how to improve a school’s reading program. They draw on
research, professional experience, and what they have learned from
helping teachers and schools to outline effective instruction. They discuss
the current state of instruction, then strategies for comprehension, vocab-
ulary, literacy in the content areas, phonics, fluency, teacher read-aloud
and independent reading, reading motivation and engagement, and
struggling readers and English learners, including roadblocks schools
may face, how to assess instruction in each area, best practices, and
resources.
LB1574 978-94-6091-922-0
Reading for evidence and interpreting visualizations in
mathematics and science education.
Title main entry. Ed. by Steven Norris.
Sense Publishers, ©2012 208 p. $49.00 (pa)
In 2004, Canada’s national funding body for scientific research requested
proposals for councils that would increase the understanding of the skills
and resources needed to improve the quality of science and mathematics
education in primary and secondary (K-12) education. Here are some of
the outcomes from the center in Alberta, which is both a prototype and
model for the others. The topics include reading for evidence through
hybrid adapted primary literature, explanatory reasoning in junior high
school textbooks, visualizations and visualization in mathematics edu-
cation, curriculum development to promote visualization and mathe-
matical reasoning, and using computer visualizations to introduce grade
five students to the particle nature of matter.
LB1574 2012-031113 978-1-59667-229-1
Vocabulary strategies that work; do this, not that!
Wilfong, Lori G.
Eye On Education, ©2012 130 p. $29.95 (pa)
Wilfong (teaching, learning, and curriculum studies, Kent State U. at
Stark) informs preservice and practicing educators at the elementary
level about strategies for teaching vocabulary and demonstrates why inef-
fective strategies need to be replaced. Each chapter explains reasons why
traditional practices might not work and offers others for teachers to try
to improve their instructional practice, such as engaging students in
word study, teaching morphological strategies to figure out unknown
words, using symbols and pictures, and modeling academic language.
She includes connections to Common Core State Standards, repro-
ducibles, and action steps. There is no index.
LB1576 2012-031396 978-1-936764-19-8
Common core English language arts in a PLC at work,
grades 3-5.
Fisher, Douglas and Nancy Frey.
Solution Tree Press, ©2013 172 p. $29.95 (pa)
Fisher and Frey (educational leadership and literacy, San Diego State U.)
outline strategies for teachers of grades three through five in professional
learning communities (PLC) at the school or district level to use when
integrating the Common Core State Standards for English language arts
in their instruction, curriculum, assessment, and intervention practices.
They review the standards and major shifts in teaching practice related
to informational texts, the role of speaking and listening in learning, the
development of academic language and vocabulary, and the importance
of argumentation in writing, as well as what the standards omit about
English learners, students with disabilities, and those who struggle with
literacy. Subsequent chapters each focus on a specific strand in the stan-
dards—reading, writing, and speaking and listening—and how the stan-
dards apply and were implemented by an example team, followed by
discussion of assessment instruments and interventions for struggling
students.
LB1576 2012-025335 978-0-87207-439-2
The literacy jigsaw puzzle; assembling the critical pieces
of literacy instruction.
Tyner, Beverly.
International Reading Assn., ©2012 182 p. $29.95 (pa)
Tyner, a literacy consultant who provides professional development in
school districts and at conferences and has been a teacher, principal, and
school district curriculum director, shows elementary teachers how to
identify, assemble, and deliver a comprehensive literacy plan that
includes whole-group instruction, small-group differentiated instruction,
and independent practice, projects, and presentations based on
standards, curriculum, and assessments. She explains the driving factors
behind good literacy instruction, including standards, curriculum design,
and curriculum delivery; a framework for delivering the curriculum;
planning models and strategies for each type of instruction; various
literacy assessments and their purposes; assembling the critical literacy
–154–
pieces in a first-grade classroom; and planning and delivery in a fourth-
grade classroom.
LB1576 2012-018910 978-1-4625-0751-1
Maximizing motivation for literacy learning; grades K-6.
Marinak, Barbara A. et al. (Teaching practices that work)
Guilford Pr., ©2013 184 p. $25.00 (pa)
Marinak (education and human services, Mount St. Mary’s U.) et al. offer
30 strategies and activities for teachers to use to promote children’s
intrinsic motivation to read. After outlining five general principles of
motivation, they present activities to enhance the motivational context of
the classroom, to support students in developing positive self-concepts as
literacy learners, and to help students recognize and appreciate the value
of literacy. Each strategy has an overview, a description of how it focuses
on motivation and literacy learning, and step-by-step instructions. Some
include extension activities. Many of the activities provide ideas for inte-
grating language arts and suggestions for listening, speaking, reading,
and writing. The three concluding sections include a case study of the
techniques as used in fifth-grade classrooms, two assessment instru-
ments, an interest inventory, and a discussion of myths and truths.
LB1576 2011-037145 978-0-415-89747-1
Multimodal composing in classrooms; learning and
teaching for the digital world.
Title main entry. Ed. by Suzanne M. Miller and Mary B. McVee.
Routledge, ©2012 161 p. $41.95 (pa)
Miller and McVee (learning, instruction, and literacy studies, U. of
Buffalo, State U. of New York) encourage teachers and other educators to
rethink literacy and literate practices and engage in new literacies, which
go beyond linguistic texts and draw on multiple modes. They present
nine cases from US education scholars who describe the composition of
multimodal texts and the opportunities and limitations this creates in ele-
mentary through graduate settings. Examples are discussed such as the
responses of preservice and inservice teachers when exploring digital
technologies and literacies in a teacher education course; the use of
digital videos, including multimodal composing in a music video; hyper-
text slides; and a multimodal poetry project. They illustrate six compo-
nents of this practice: developing a new literacies stance, initiating a
social space for mediation of collaborative composing, co-constructing a
sense of purpose for students’ multimodal composing, drawing on and
encouraging students to draw on their identities and lifeworlds, making
design elements explicit as meaning-making tools, and supporting
embodied learning through students’ translating symbolically with
modes.
LB1576 2012-019630 978-0-325-04239-8
The story of my thinking; expository writing activities for
13 teaching situations.
Bernabei, Gretchen S. and Dottie Hall.
Heinemann, ©2012 180 p. $23.75 (pa)
Bernabei, a middle and high school teacher and author, and Hall, a prin-
cipal and former English teacher, show teachers how to teach expository
writing in a way that draws from students’ personal narratives and
ideas, giving them the opportunity to write about what is meaningful to
them. They present 13 writing activities for familiar teaching situations,
such as using personal narrative and reflection, starting with journal
writing, using 11-minute essays for anxiety reduction, exploring topics for
deep development and systemic growth, responding to prompts, writing
open essays, developing theses, writing book report essays, and using
writing skills for content areas, with step-by-step lessons, including
extension ideas. No index has been provided.
LB1576 2012-025799 978-1-4625-0677-4
Teacher’s guide to effective sentence writing.
Saddler, Bruce. (What works for special-needs learners)
Guilford Pr., ©2012 176 p. $27.00 (pa)
Saddler (special education, U. at Albany, State U. of New York) describes
how to teach sentence construction to students with and without learning
disabilities through sentence-combining activities. He provides an
overview of the benefits and challenges of writing, particularly for
children with disabilities, and details why sentence-level skills are
important. He explains teaching sentence-combining and sentence-cre-
ating exercises, student grouping, assessing progress, a model unit of
instruction, practice activities, common grammatical terms, a suggested
sequence of sentence-combining skills, and exercise examples for words,
phrases, clauses, multiple grammatical elements, and paragraphs.
–155–
LB1576 2012-017421 978-1-4129-8904-6
Tools students need to be skillful writers; building better
sentences.
Hostmeyer, Phyllis.
Corwin Press Inc., ©2013 230 p. $36.95 (pa)
If 99 percent of a teacher’s students scored “meets and exceeds” on state
writing tests, one would conclude she has something valuable to say. And
Hostmeyer, now a language arts consultant with Educational Resources
Group, fits the bill. In the 1980s she began building on the ideas of Dr.
J.E. Sparks and Herb Hrebic to develop her own approach to the teaching
of sentence patterns—which she views as the key to student success. This
handbook guides teachers in the preparation of unit development for
grades 3-8, with the goal of sending students to high school with solid
writing skills.
LB1576 2012-027518 978-1-59363-992-1
Using the common core state standards for English
language arts with gifted and advanced learners.
Title main entry. Ed. by Joyce VanTassel-Baska.
Prufrock Press Inc., ©2013 88 p. $19.95 (pa)
VanTassel-Baska (gifted education, College of William and Mary) and
education and educational psychology scholars from the US provide
teachers and administrators with examples and strategies for imple-
menting the Common Core State Standards for English language arts
with gifted and advanced leaders in grades K-12. They discuss how to
use the strategies in various settings, such as cluster-grouped classrooms,
pull-out programs, and special classes and schools, and incorporate them
with gifted education curricula, instruction, and program models. They
present examples of the relevant standards, which are linked to suggested
activities for typical learners and differentiated for advanced learners,
and outline assessment examples, including rubrics, related material on
twenty-first century skills, the rationale for the book, using cross-disci-
plinary content and integrating standards, implications for professional
learning, collaboration with general and special education, and
resources. The book lacks an index.
LB1585 2012-023123 978-1-59667-222-2
Family science night; fun tips, activities, and ideas.
Connell, Shelley.
Eye On Education, ©2013 123 p. $29.95 (pa)
Connell, an elementary teacher who provides science enrichment for
school districts and teaches at Nova Southeastern U., shows kindergarten
through fifth grade teachers and others in the education and science
museum communities, how to plan a science night in which families can
explore hands-on science investigations together, with the goal of creating
self-initiated science discovery at home, positive attitudes toward science,
more understanding of standards, and greater scientific literacy. She
explains how to find funding, form a planning committee, get volunteers,
buy and store materials, and plan stations, then presents 22 reproducible
station activities with illustrations, supply lists, and setup instructions.
There is no index.
LB1590 2012-027453 978-1-59363-952-5
Educating for creativity and innovation; a comprehensive
guide for research-based practice.
Treffinger, Donald J., Patricia F. Schoonover and Edwin C. Selby.
Prufrock Press Inc., ©2013 300 p. $45.00 (pa)
Treffinger, Schoonover, and Selby, who are associated with the Center for
Creative Learning, help educational administrators and specialists,
teachers, and community leaders nurture creativity in learners in any
setting. They outline a set of concepts, principles, and terms related to
creativity and innovation, and discuss myths and misunderstandings,
definitions used to explain creativity and innovation, and reasons they
are important for education. They introduce a framework for under-
standing the foundations of creativity in education, which is made up of
personal characteristics, operations, context, and outcomes, and address
practical questions and resources, such as measurement concepts and
assessment. They describe how to foster creativity through eight guide-
lines, how to teach tools for creative and critical thinking, creativity and
problem-solving models and their instructional implications, specific edu-
cational programs, problems and challenges, and the role of mentoring,
working with at-risk students, technology, and linking creativity to cur-
riculum content and standards. There is no index. Co-published with the
National Association for Gifted Children.
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
LB1607 2012-034928 978-1-59667-226-0
Rigor is NOT a four-letter word, 2d ed.
Blackburn, Barbara R.
Eye On Education, ©2013 185 p. $29.95 (pa)
Blackburn, a former teacher and principal who works as an educational
consultant, speaker, and workshop presenter, shows teachers, principals,
curriculum specialists, and professional development coordinators how
to increase the level of rigor in classrooms by creating an environment
in which each student is expected to learn at high levels, is supported to
do so, and demonstrates learning at high levels, arguing that the power
to make a difference lies in the hands of the teacher. She describes spe-
cific strategies for increasing rigor—raising the level of content, increasing
complexity, giving appropriate support and guidance, opening the focus,
and raising expectations—with examples from different subject areas. She
also discusses assessment and grading, collaboration and professional
learning communities, and opportunities and challenges. This edition
shows how activities align with the Common Core State Standards and
includes new sections on problem-based learning and working with stu-
dents with special needs. There is no index.
LB1631 2012-032637 978-1-936764-28-0
20 literacy strategies to meet the common core; increasing
rigor in middle & high school classrooms.
McEwan-Adkins, Elaine K. and Allyson J. Burnett.
Solution Tree Press, ©2013 307 p. $34.95 (pa)
McEwan-Adkins, an educational consultant and former teacher, librarian,
principal, and assistant superintendent, and Burnett, a retired teacher,
reading specialist, and consultant, supply middle and high school stu-
dents with 20 strategies meant to help students meet the Common Core
State Standards for English Language Arts and Content Literacy in
History/Social Studies, Science, and Technical Subjects. They focus on
informational texts and provide models, lesson plans, and reproducible
graphic organizers for introducing literacy strategies into content
instruction. They explain the standards and their implications, how this
approach to literacy differs from previous content literacy models, the
nature of skilled reading, the role of teachers in modeling content lit-
eracy, and guidelines for using the strategies. The strategies follow, which
relate to the standards for key ideas and details, craft and structure, inte-
gration of knowledge and ideas, and range of reading and text com-
plexity. College and Career Readiness Anchor Standards, background
knowledge, and sample resource texts are included.
LB1631 2011-044233 978-1-57110-852-4
Beyond the five-paragraph essay.
Campbell, Kimberly Hill and Kristi Latimer.
Stenhouse Publishers, ©2012 220 p. $22.50 (pa)
Campbell (Lewis & Clark Graduate School of Education and Counseling)
and Latimer (Lewis & Clark’s Master of Arts in Teaching Program) point
to research showing that the five-paragraph essay, in addition to having
no use in the ‘real world’ outside the classroom, is not an effective
teaching tool. As an alternative, they offer strategies and suggestions for
facilitating thoughtful reading, creative writing, and critical thinking by
teaching the literary essay, debate, and imitation of successful writers.
The book’s 60 pages of appendices offer examples of unit plans, work-
sheets, and many exercises, including exercises based on specific titles.
The book also lists fiction, poetry, nonfiction, and essays to use in the
classroom.
LB1631 2012-032464 978-1-59667-231-4
Big skills for the common core; literacy strategies for the
6-12 classroom.
Benjamin, Amy and Michael Hugelmeyer.
Eye On Education, ©2013 177 p. $29.95 (pa)
Benjamin, an education consultant and former English teacher, and
Hugelmeyer, an assistant principal at a high school and former social
studies teacher, consider the role that specific academic skills and
strategies play in school and how they are a vehicle for learning content.
They focus on the Common Core State Standards in literacy for middle
and high school students: English language arts and literacy in
history/social studies, science, and technical subjects. They stress inter-
disciplinary learning and propose thinking about this learning in terms
of building common skills and strategies in reading, writing, speaking
and listening, and language. They explain the standards that relate to
each, related skills and strategies, how to teach them, and examples. No
index is provided.
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
LB1631 2012-033783 978-1-4166-1461-6
Common core standards for high school English language
arts; a quick-start guide.
Ryan, Susan. and Dana Frazee.
Assn/Supervision & Curric. Dev., ©2012 104 p. $17.95 (pa)
Ryan, a former high school language arts teacher and consultant at the
nonprofit education research and development organization Mid-con-
tinent Research for Education and Learning, and Frazee, a consultant
there and former middle and high school teacher and principal, provide
teachers with guidance in developing new lessons or adapting existing
lessons and activities to incorporate the Common Core State Standards for
English language arts and literacy at the high school level. They examine
how the standards help students build on and extend skills and
knowledge from earlier grades and detail the process of creating stan-
dards-based lessons. They detail the content, structure, terminology, and
emphases of the standards; the meaning of the individual standards
within the four strands of reading, writing, speaking and listening, and
language; how the standards connect across strands, grade bands, and
content areas to help students develop communication and analytical
skills needed for college and career readiness; and the areas that rep-
resent significant changes. Three sample lessons conclude the book.
There is no index.
LB1707 2011-046916 978-1-4411-5282-4
Inquiring in the classroom; asking the questions that
matter about teaching and learning.
Title main entry. Ed. by Nick Mitchell and Joanne Pearson.
Continuum Publishing Group, ©2012 181 p. $34.95 (pa)
Mitchell and Pearson (education, Leeds Metropolitan U., UK) offer
teachers a 10-chapter guide to planning, conducting, and presenting
classroom research for their continuous professional development.
Education scholars and teachers from the UK explain how to research
teaching practices and develop, improve, and share knowledge about
teaching and learning. They explore the mechanics of teacher inquiry,
including reading for inquiry, how to read critically, and what kind of
reading teachers should do; methodology; combining inquiry with
teaching; how to construct research into assessment, learning and
teaching, subject knowledge, diversity and inclusion, and leadership and
management; and how to share research.
LB1731 2012-029935 978-1-59667-228-4
Professional learning in the digital age; the educator’s
guide to user-generated learning.
Swanson, Kristen.
Eye On Education, ©2012 112 p. $19.95 (pa)
Former teacher and response to intervention consultant Swanson (instruc-
tional technology, DeSales U.) informs educators about digital and
physical tools and strategies they can use to improve professional devel-
opment learning that can be shared in the school, district, community,
and online. She discusses user-generated learning and the basis in adult
learning theory, and each of its phases—curation, reflection, and contri-
bution—with correlating tools such as building an online resource, com-
menting on blogs, professional development sessions, tagging, Flipboard,
and Google Reader. Each chapter has teacher cases, face-to face protocols,
supporting research, technology tools, and a to-do list. There is no index.
LB1762 2011-923794 978-0-7386-0950-8
Praxis II English subject assessments; (0041, 0042, 0043,
0049), 2d ed. (CD-ROM included)
Davis, Anita Price.
Research & Education Assn, ©2011 423 p. $34.95 (pa)
Davis (education, Converse College) provides future English teachers
preparing for certification with a study guide to the Praxis II English
Language, Literature, and Composition Assessments (0041, 0042, 0043,
and 0049), which cover the content of reading and language arts, liter-
ature, and composition and rhetoric. She explains the test, its format, and
how to study for it, then reviews each content area, with two practice
tests for each exam (with answers and explanations). Four of the practice
tests are on the CD.
LB1775 2012-022294 978-0-13-265706-8
Early childhood field experience; learning to teach well,
2d ed.
Browne, Kathryn Williams and Ann Miles Gordon.
Pearson, ©2013 243 p. $45.60 (pa)
With this textbook, Browne (Skyline College) and Gordon, a consultant,
introduce future teachers to student teaching in early childhood
programs and the fundamental principles of teaching and
professionalism. Topics include guiding behavior, observing and
–156–
assessing children, environments and schedules, team teaching,
collaborating with families, and diversity. This edition has more on
working with infants and toddlers and program types and guidance
strategies for children with special needs; more strategies for adapting
teaching practices with children with special needs and atypical
development; and ethical dilemmas and student learning outcomes in
each chapter. The curriculum chapter has been updated to include
challenges new teachers face when developing master planning and
implementation, as well as new content on children with special needs
and inclusion of group activities.
LB1775 2012-023688 978-1-62087-102-7
Teachers; a tribute to the enlightened, the exceptional, the
extraordinary.
Yow, John.
Skyhorse Pub. Co., ©2012 160 p. $24.95
An entry in a familiar genre (the unsung-heroes book) this volume
focuses on teachers. Each spread consists of a profile of a single teacher,
with one or more facing-page photographs in black and white. The text,
by John Yow, is developed from an interview with the teacher; it is com-
petently written in a journalistic style. The photographs, by Gary
Firstenberg, are posed or spontaneous; the latter are sometimes very suc-
cessful. Texts are designed to create flattering profiles of inspirational
teachers. The profiles cover American teachers of every cultural back-
ground, in settings from a one-teacher K-6 school in rural Montana to an
urban classroom in Newark, NJ. While small-town settings predominate,
the teachers are diverse. An unusual feature of the book is that while
“teacher” superficially appears here as someone who works with young
children, there are a number of high school teachers, and not all the
teachers profiled work in the K-12 system. Lu Yi is a master of Chinese
acrobatics who trains professional circus performers; Estelle Aden is a
theatre professor at Hofstra University; George Howard is a rodeo coach
at the University of Wyoming; Conni Gordon is an entrepreneur who uses
her experience as a painting teacher to train corporate CEOs. Overall, the
teachers and their students are more diverse than the book’s structure
would at first suggest.
LB2322 2011-042163 978-1-4411-1715-1
Interpretive pedagogies for higher education; Arendt,
Berger, Said, Nussbaum and their legacies.
Nixon, Jon.
Continuum Publishing Group, ©2012 166 p. $130.00
Nixon (U. of Sheffield, Britain) concludes his trilogy on the state of higher
education at the opening of the 21st century by examining the assault on
higher education through massive cuts in public expenditure and the
impact of those cuts on the student experience of learning, the profes-
sional identity of academy workers, and the governance of learning. The
legacy of interpretive pedagogy is severely at risk, he says, and the
solution must begin at the very basic pedagogy: the relationship between
teacher and taught, between learning learner and text, between the
knower and the knowing. Towards the Virtuous University focuses on the
moral bases of academic practice; Higher Education and the Public Good
argues that higher education is primarily a public good rather than
private or positional gain.
LB2324 978-94-6091-931-2
Learning and doing policy analysis in education;
examining diverse approaches to increasing educational
access.
Title main entry. Ed. by Maria Teresa Tatto. (Comparative and interna-
tional education; a diversity of voices; v.16)
Sense Publishers, ©2012 295 p. $39.00 (pa)
Scholars of education at Michigan State University present material from
a graduate course on policy analysis in education. The goal is to engage
doctoral students with the conception, generation, and analysis of edu-
cational policies in a number of contexts. Among the topics are whether
poverty reduction is enough, the effectiveness of policy and practice for
universal primary education within education for all, the effect of the No
Child Left Behind accountability mechanisms on middle school mathe-
matics teaching and student performance, the implementation of mathe-
matical literacy as a new subject area in the South African curriculum,
and the reach and possibilities of educational reform for rural poor in
Mexico. There is no index.
LB2331 2012-024207 978-1-4666-2621-8
Cases on assessment and evaluation in education.
Title main entry. Ed. by Mehdi Khosrow-Pour.
Information Science Reference, ©2013 664 p. $175.00
Khosrow-Pour, an author and editor who taught information system
courses at Penn State U., compiles 24 case studies describing methods
–157–
used to assess an education course, how to implement assessments, what
factors to assess, and which factors determine the success of the result,
as well as how to measure and convey results. Topics discussed include
the alignment of course objectives and assessments, the use of program
and institutional data, data for issues of retention and graduation rates,
and collaboration in student assessment research. Also examined are pre-
service teachers’ diversity awareness, the relationship between freshman
composition courses and student performance in intensive writing
courses, and online learning environments. The contributors are scholars
of education, instructional technology, and related disciplines from
around the world
LB2331 2011-032191 978-1-4411-2479-1
Towards teaching in public; reshaping the modern
university.
Title main entry. Ed. by Mike Neary et al.
Continuum Publishing Group, ©2012 189 p. $130.00
This British anthology looks at issues in teaching at the University level.
It is divided into three parts, each with a different editor: Education as
a Public Good, edited by Les Bell (educational leadership, U. of Lincoln,
UK), The Student-Teacher Nexus, edited by Howard Stevenson (education,
U. of Lincoln, UK), and Teaching as a Public Activity, edited by Mike
Neary (dean of teaching and learning, Lincoln U., UK). The contributors
are all connected with the Centre for Educational Research and
Development at the same institution. Though they are all working in
Britain, the anthology focuses on general applications of ideas and
research. The first section looks at how the university structure has his-
torically been reshaped and might be reshaped further to make uni-
versity education more accessible and equitable. The second section looks
at student advisors on teaching, student scholarship, and specific recom-
mendations to prevent digital teaching tools from becoming barriers to
inclusion (the author stresses using the flexible audiovisual formats that
digital tools allow as a general rule rather than a specific accommodation
for disabled students, and offers a helpful list of common formatting bar-
riers). The third section looks at possibilities for connecting classroom
teaching at the college level with the community, including professionals
in practice, through public access to information technology, open edu-
cation, and the university as a social center for knowledge. Overall, the
contributors focus here on practical challenges in order to propose some
general and some specific practical solutions.
LB2331 978-94-6091-862-9
Understanding teaching and learning; classroom research
revisited
Title main entry. Ed. by Baljit Kaur.
Sense Publishers, ©2012 332 p. $49.00 (pa)
As part of a project at the University of Canterbury in New Zealand that
also included a workshop and a symposium, education scholars from
around the world explore research in the classroom from perspectives of
theorizing, curriculum areas, creating inclusive classrooms, and
widening conversations. Among their topics are reassessing the nature of
learning in a science or mathematics classroom, a case study of
acquiring conceptual knowledge in the classroom, finding out about
fossils in an early years classroom, how Whanau classroom lessons illu-
minate bicultural and bilingual literary learning processes for Maori
children, and an auto-ethnographic inquiry into teaching and learning
with refugee students.
LB2332 978-0-7748-2396-8
Academic careers and the gender gap.
Baker, Maureen.
U. of British Columbia Press, ©2012 208 p. $99.00
Even though more women than men earn PhDs, women with PhDs hold
only 20 percent of the more prestigious jobs in academia in the English
speaking world. This study seeks to find out how the academic gender
gap has changed over the past 40 years and how it has been perpetuated,
demonstrating that academia has been influenced by the same global
trends affecting other workplaces. Baker (sociology, University of
Auckland, New Zealand) draws on interviews with men and women in
academia to highlight unequal treatment of women and men in areas
such as hours, appointments, and length of career. The author’s analysis
of structural, relational, and interpretive factors contributing to the aca-
demic gender gap shows similar patterns across five countries: the US,
Canada, Australia, New Zealand, and the UK. An appendix explains how
the author’s empirical research was conducted at a Western Canadian
university in 1973 and at two New Zealand universities in 2008. The book
is distributed in the US by the University of Washington Press and in
Canada by the University of Toronto Press.
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
LB2341 2012-019285 978-1-4666-2193-0
Enterprise resource planning models for the education
sector; applications and methodologies.
Title main entry. Ed. by Kanubhai K. Patel and Sanjaykumar Vij.
Information Science Reference, ©2013 241 p. $175.00
This book suggests enterprise resource planning (ERP) frameworks for
the academic sector and looks at their applications for improving
teaching, learning, and student-related services. International contrib-
utors are experts in diverse areas such as computer simulation, edu-
cation, knowledge management, information and communication
technology, and industrial economics. They address major themes such
as process automation, reduction of process cycle time, and better service
to all stake-holders. Section 1 deals with management and adminis-
tration, with chapters on topics such as virtual and interactive learning,
and ICT for education in developing countries. Section 2, on knowledge
management, explores areas including ontology-based educational infor-
mation systems. Section 3 looks at ERP adoption and implementation,
using the example of business process simulations in academia, and
section 4 addresses customer relationship management with ERP. The
last section offers case studies on course and curriculum development
with ERP. Patel is affiliated with Ahmedabad University. Vij is affiliated
with Sardar Vallabhbhai Patel Institute of Technology
LB2371 2012-012781 978-0-9777847-5-2
Collaborative futures; critical reflections on publicly active
graduate education.
Title main entry. Ed. by Amanda Gilvin et al.
Graduate School Press of Syracuse Univ., ©2012 409 p. $24.95 (pa)
Scholars of education, but also many other disciplines mostly in the
humanities, analyze graduate education, fully accounting for graduate
students as living people who interact with other real human beings, on
their campuses and in many other places. The emphasis is on students
who are grappling with the relationship between their knowledge and
the technical problem of living and earning a living. The topics include
publicly engaged graduate research and the transformation of the
American academy, the reciprocal rewards of fieldwork for artists, and
collaborative ethnography as engaged scholarship. Distributed in the US
by Syracuse U. Press.
LB2371 2011-031708 978-1-4411-6381-3
Meeting the challenges of change in postgraduate
education. (reprint, 2010)
Title main entry. Ed. by Trevor Kerry.
Continuum Publishing Group, ©2012 198 p. $44.95 (pa)
In this reprint from 2010, Kerry (education, Bishop Grosseteste U. College,
UK) assembles 10 essays by education and other scholars from Europe,
Australia, and New Zealand who examine the current state of and chal-
lenges in higher education at the graduate level (with a focus on these
countries, although the US is included at some points). They consider the
ideal master’s program and how the learning contract is organized, ben-
efits to the learner, and problems that can arise. In the second section,
they focus on the principles and philosophies that drive graduate edu-
cation, including Humboldt’s vision in the eighteenth century, which
combines teaching and research; trends in graduate studies in Europe
implemented after the Bologna Declaration in 1998; the role of infor-
mation and communications technology in learning; and issues of
quality. They end with chapters on the student perspective, including the
nature of teaching and self-determined learning, and equipping PhD stu-
dents more effectively for the world of work.
LB2395 2012-030245 978-0-07-340731-9
Improving reading skills; contemporary readings for
college students, 7th ed.
Spears, Deanne.
McGraw-Hill, ©2013 434 p. $82.57 (pa)
Spears (reading and composition, City College of San Francisco)
assembles 41 readings from books, magazines, newspapers, online and
newspaper editorials, textbooks, and short fiction and everyday reading
material (new sections in this edition), meant for use in introductory and
intermediate developmental reading courses. She argues that college stu-
dents improve their reading skills by actually reading, instead of reading
about techniques and strategies, and includes exercises to reinforce skills
and develop vocabulary, along with a section on vocabulary analysis
before each selection and overviews and explanations of reading skills.
Revised, this edition has expanded part introductions with short exer-
cises; a broader range of levels for the selections, with new readings on
contemporary topics like the psychological effects of the use of cell
phones, Facebook, and World of Warcraft, a way of finding marriage
partners in China, whether online education is appropriate for K-12 stu-
dents, materialism and consumerism, and a blog post by an Iraq war
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
veteran who describes returning to school; more emphasis on annotating,
paraphrasing, and summarizing; new pieces related to learning to read,
the world of work, psychological and social behavior, and human interest
and adventure; group activities; a new section on asking questions that
go beyond the readings; and web exercises.
LB2395 978-0-85702-931-7
The study skills toolkit for students with dyslexia.
Gribben, Monica.
Sage Publications, ©2012 194 p. $100.00
This guide for dyslexic students starting college offers a lively b&w layout
with many charts and diagrams for visual learners. The self-contained
chapters can be read in any order and feature many brief chapter activ-
ities, including journaling, self-assessment, and self-reflection activities.
Advice is given on dealing with procrastination, note-taking, gathering
info, thinking critically, and writing assignments (even writing a disser-
tation). Other areas covered are exams, oral presentations, and making
the most of teacher and peer feedback. A list of useful websites is pro-
vided. A companion website contains the book’s activities and answers,
plus checklists, podcasts for each chapter, and a video. The publisher also
offers a Word or PDF version of the text, upon request. Gribben is a
dyslexia advisor at Edinburgh Napier University.
LB2805 2011-036194 978-1-4411-8056-8
Evidence informed leadership in education. (reprint, 2010)
Taysum, Alison.
Continuum Publishing Group, ©2012 173 p. $44.95 (pa)
Taysom (education, U. of Leicester, Britain) establishes a framework that
enables critical reflection about consequences of evidence-informed deci-
sions made in educational settings, balancing the interests of the indi-
vidual and the community. Among her topics are evidence informed
leadership, tools to facilitate it, confronting taken-for-granted ways of
thinking and doing that limit change, ethical frameworks, and practical
cases of enhancing educational opportunities while meeting the social
justice agenda.
LB2805 2012-023120 978-0-13-267807-0
Instructional leadership; a research-based guide to
learning in schools, 4th ed.
Hoy, Anita Woolfolk and Wayne Kolter Hoy. (The Allyn & Bacon educa-
tional leadership series)
Pearson Education, ©2013 402 p. $100.00 (pa)
This fourth edition includes over 300 new studies and a new section
addressing technology leadership, and aims to educate school principals
about theories and practical application of teaching and learning
strategies with the aim to further collaboration between principals and
teachers. The book offers and in-depth exploration of student diversity,
learning, motivation, teaching, classroom management, and school
climate and culture and focuses on the real-life application of theories.
Each chapter begins with an outline, a list of key points, and a leadership
challenge, as well as a summary and lists of key terms and additional
resources at the end of each chapter.
LB2805 2012-025178 978-0-87389-843-0
There is another way!; launch a Baldrige-based quality
classroom, 2d ed.
Byrnes, Margaret A and Jeanne C. Baxter.
ASQ Quality Press, ©2012 325 p. $69.00 (pa)
Byrnes, who has served as a Baldrige examiner, teacher, counselor, and
administrator, and Baxter, an examiner and professor of leadership edu-
cation at Northeastern Illinois U., offer a training guide for teachers to
learn to apply the systemic improvement approach of the Baldrige
framework to organizational performance excellence in schools and
move from a traditional to student-centered learning-focused classroom.
They introduce quality theory and the Baldrige framework, and appli-
cation of the categories of leadership; strategic planning; customer focus;
measurement, analysis, and knowledge management; student focus; oper-
ations focus; and results. They discuss how to engage students and stake-
holders as partners in the educational process, establish a culture of
success, analyze data and improve instruction, include the student as a
partner in the process, and incorporate twenty-first century skills. They
include examples from different classes and schools around the country.
This edition has been organized to provide an increasingly progressive
understanding of the approach and deeper levels of implementation, and
includes graphs, charts, and instructions for teachers to choose from.
–158–
LB2822 978-94-6091-880-3
Collective responsibility; redefining what falls between the
cracks for school reform.
Whalan, Frances.
Sense Publishers, ©2012 229 p. $29.00 (pa)
Whalan (education, U. of Sydney, Australia) proposes developing
teachers’ collective responsibility for student learning as an avenue to
school reform and organizational change. The concept traverses both
sociological and psychological aspects of teaching, she says, and is
mapped by the interconnected discourses of professional community,
professional development, relational trust, accountability, and efficacy.
She presents evidence that collective responsibility is positively correlated
to the coherence between professional learning programs and the
school’s learning goals, teachers’ commitment to enact these shared
goals, and teacher-to-teacher trust. There is no index.
LB2822 2012-031312 978-1-4129-8786-8
The global fourth way; the quest for educational
excellence.
Hargreaves, Andy and Dennis Shirley.
Corwin Press Inc., ©2012 233 p. $27.95 (pa)
Building upon the arguments presented in their previous book, The
Fourth Way: The Inspiring Future for Educational Change, the authors
(both of the Lynch School of Education at Boston College) continue to
promote their “fourth way” model of educational change. The model is
built upon collectively decided and not politically imposed system targets
for achievement, the engagement of a broader range of learning beyond
literacy and mathematics, the use of data to inform rather than drive
teacher inquiry and decision making, the use of testing to sample the
progress of systems without distorting the way they operate, the
engagement of teachers in curriculum development within and across
schools as opposed to teachers as mere vehicles of curriculum developed
elsewhere, and a concept of leadership that revolves around collective
responsibility rather than vertical accountability. Here, they seek to
further illustrate the value of this previously articulated “fourth way” by
examining selected examples of high performance in school systems and
school around the world, with cases drawn from Finland, Singapore,
Canada, England, and the United States.
LB2825 2011-048921 978-1-4411-8684-3
School and system leadership; changing roles for primary
headteachers.
Robinson, Susan.
Continuum Publishing Group, ©2012 215 p. $39.95 (pa)
Robinson, a principal at a primary school and children’s center in the
UK, draws on her doctoral research to explore the impact of education
policy on the role of the principal in England. She draws from interviews
conducted with 27 principals from 2005 to 2011. She outlines the context
of school leadership in England, including issues governments face when
introducing policy, the main themes of educational policy from 1944 to
2001, why Labour leaders believed change was needed, and the reasons
and implications of systems thinking for policy design. She discusses
how the policies of the Labour government from 2001 and those intro-
duced by the Coalition government in 2010 have led to changes in the
role of principals; theoretical frameworks of leadership and the type of
leadership and professional development offered to principals; the role of
the National College; and the main challenges facing principals and how
they manage their roles within current educational constraints. Included
is discussion of their understanding of their new roles, changes in
relation to parents and governors, their new external and internal roles,
how they manage accountability and standards, and how they are
moving toward a more strategic role. The final section identifies key
findings from their perceptions and implications and recommendations
for government.
LB2825 2011-031311 978-1-4129-8757-8
School finance.
Title main entry. Ed. by William E. Thro. (Debating issues in American
education; v.6)
Sage Publications, ©2012 404 p. $80.00
Thro (constitutional studies, Christopher Newport U.) presents 18
chapters that consist of overviews and debates about topics related to
school finance. Scholars of education, educational leadership, and related
fields in the US address the role of local school boards, the role of the
judiciary in ensuring educational equity and adequacy, the use of tax-
payer money to promote parental choice, the role of the state and federal
government in financing special and gifted education, and the obligation
of public schools in terms of providing elite programs or activities.
Specific topics relate to taxes, the indebtedness of local school districts,
whether leaders at schools should have the authority to determine how
–159–
money is spent, the use of federal funds for the implementation of fed-
erally mandated curricula, basing teacher salaries on student per-
formance, whether additional fees should be paid by students for
extracurricular activities and Advanced Placement classes.
LB2831 2012-012104 978-1-59667-221-5
The principal as instructional leader; a practical
handbook, 3d ed.
Zepeda, Sally J.
Eye On Education, ©2013 202 p. $34.95 (pa)
Zepeda (educational administration and policy, U. of Georgia) offers
advice, tools, and examples from schools to help new and experienced
principals and assistant principals of all levels improve teacher effec-
tiveness and student achievement. She explains the notion of the prin-
cipal as an instructional leader and how to develop a vision and culture
to support the supervision of the instructional program, professional
development, and other processes to improve teaching. She discusses the
connection between supervision, professional development, and teacher
evaluation; formal and informal classroom observations; preobservation
and postobservation conferences; and data collection instruments. This
edition has more on confronting marginal teaching; teacher evaluation
related to teacher quality, Race to the Top, and value-added issues;
working with the administrative team to widen the sphere of instruc-
tional support; and the relationship between professional learning and
teacher evaluation focusing on the classroom evaluation. No index is
included.
LB2831 2012-031443 978-1-4129-8710-3
The principal; leadership for a global society.
Whitehead, Bruce M. et al.
Sage Publications, ©2013 493 p. $97.00
This text is for school leaders and students who will one day be school
principals in today’s globally connected classrooms. Emphasizing the
standards of the Educational Leadership Constituent Council, the text
focuses on collaborative roles as a framework for a discussion of the
principalship, detailing the principal’s many roles as visionary, instruc-
tional leader, behavioral specialist, community leader, and public rela-
tions specialist. Sections of the text cover foundations of principal
leadership, the process of leadership for the principalship, forces of lead-
ership, and current trends. Learning features include chapter summaries,
application questions and activities (some in-depth), case studies with
questions, list of websites, and summary charts, all in a two-color layout.
Appendixes offer evaluation handbooks for professional staff and admin-
istrators. An instructor website is available. Whitehead is affiliated with
the University of Montana.
LB2831 2011-029024 978-1-59667-200-0
What great principals do differently; eighteen things that
matter most, 2d ed.
Whitaker, Todd.
Eye On Education, ©2012 146 p. $29.95 (pa)
Whitaker (educational leadership, Indiana State U.) enumerates 18 prac-
tices of successful principals, based on his research, observations, and
work as a principal, such as focusing on people instead of programs,
treating everyone with respect, filtering out negatives, teaching teachers,
hiring outstanding teachers, keeping standardized testing in perspective,
being loyal to students and teachers, understanding high-achievers and
being sensitive to teachers’ needs, understanding emotion, and setting
expectations at the beginning of the year. This edition addresses the
impact of charter schools, limited funding, and technology, and the prin-
cipal’s sense of self, understanding the change dynamic, and dealing
with ineffective and negative staff. There is no index.
LB2847 978-1-78190-242-4
The management and leadership of educational
marketing; research, practice and applications.
Title main entry. Ed. by Izhar Oplatka and Jane Hemsley-Brown.
(Advances in educational administration; v.15)
Emerald Group Publishing, ©2012 286 p. $124.95
Scholars of education and education policy and of marketing look at the
emergence of educational marketing, educational marketing in diverse
national arenas, and new directions in the study of educational mar-
keting. Among their topics are a curriculum-based approach to inte-
grating marketing into the leadership and management of schools,
demographic representations and dilemmas for educational leaders of
school marketing in the US, a New Zealand case study of public-private
collaboration in international education, a conceptual framework for
classifying and understanding relationship marketing within schools,
and creating value in school education marketing through the co-creation
process. Distributed in North America by Turpin Distribution.
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
LB2864 2012-016135 978-1-4398-7407-3
The comprehensive handbook of school safety.
Title main entry. Ed. by E. Scott Dunlap. (Occupational safety & health
guide series)
CRC Press, ©2013 435 p. $119.95
As news headlines have made clear over the past several years, school
safety has taken on an entirely new, and critical, meaning—not only for
students but also for faculty and staff. Intended for school adminis-
trators, this guide covers all aspects of school safety and security, emer-
gency management and response, and program development and
execution. Chapters include case studies with accompanying questions,
exercises, and references and other sources of additional information.
Editor is Dunlap (safety security and emergency management, and cer-
tified safety professional, Eastern Kentucky U.).
LB2900 2011-022995 978-1-4411-0915-6
Leading the sustainable school; distributing leadership to
inspire school improvement.
Massey, Debra.
Continuum Publishing Group, ©2012 167 p. $34.95 (pa)
Massey examines key aspects of sustainable leadership in schools
through her experiences heading a school in the UK. She discusses
growing leadership from within, including training, encouraging growth
and ownership, creating an anti-bullying school, and resources to facil-
itate training. She also details using competencies to build a stronger
organization, performance management, and mentoring; children as
leaders and giving them a voice; and distributing leadership. Other topics
include how to find out how children learn best; self-evaluation tools;
and engaging parents, governors, and the wider community.
LB3013 978-1-78052-972-1
Classroom behavior, contexts, and interventions
Title main entry. Ed. by Bryan G. Cook et al. (Advances in learning
and behavioral disabilities; v.25)
Emerald Group Publishing, ©2012 322 p. $114.95
Are there differences in children that predispose them to difficult
behavior in school? Can these characteristics be altered through inter-
vention? What environmental factors hinder or help students? Cook
(University of Hawaii-Manoa) gathers work that addresses these ques-
tions. Some specific topics considered include ADHD and academics, evi-
dence-based social skills interventions, cognitive-behavioral interventions
to prevent aggression in students with emotional and behavioral dis-
orders, teacher expectations for student performance, and preventing and
responding to bullying and harassment in schools. The audience for the
book includes clinicians, teachers, researchers, graduate students, and
others who work with students with learning and behavioral disabilities.
Distribution in North America is by Turpin Distribution.
LB3013 2012-011687 978-1-4522-1669-0
No place for bullying; leadership for schools that care for
every student.
Dillon, James.
Corwin Press Inc., ©2012 268 p. $39.95 (pa)
Dillon, an educational consultant and former principal who developed a
bullying prevention program for school buses, offers a guide for admin-
istrators to creating a schoolwide bullying prevention program based on
strong leadership. He outlines three key elements: the commitment and
determination to make school a safe place; the decisions, strategies, and
processes to facilitate change for prevention; and the structures, routines,
and protocols to sustain and enhance progress made in prevention. He
explains the elusive nature of bullying and the difficulty adults have in
seeing, hearing, and understanding it; how prevention requires a moral
commitment from staff; how bullying is an adaptive problem requiring
an alternative to traditional approaches to school problems; how the
concept of mindset can be applied to prevention, and the difference
between a criminal justice and educational mindset; and the need to
examine how school leaders use their power and authority. He describes
possible misdirections of prevention and how to guide the school in the
right direction; working with small groups of members of the com-
munity; the role of data in decision making; understanding child and
human development and how to work with students; an educational
approach to empower bystanders; principles for creating the conditions
for all members of the community to become leaders; requirements and
mandates schools must follow; guidelines for supervising, responding,
and intervening in incidents; prevention beyond the school building; and
issues related to maintaining efforts.
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
LB3013 2012-019944 978-0-398-08836-1
Positive behavior supports in classrooms and schools;
effective and practical strategies for teachers and other
service providers.
Storey, Keith and Michal Post.
C.C. Thomas, ©2012 253 p. $59.95
Storey and Post (education and special education, Touro U.) provide K-12
teachers, classroom assistants, school psychologists, administrators, coun-
selors, and other service providers with a practical and nontechnical
overview of positive behavior supports in school settings, to help improve
the academic and social skills of students. After introducing applied
behavior analysis and positive behavior supports and their relationship
to student learning, they explain measuring behavior, functional
assessment and analysis, reinforcement, punishment, classroom
structure, preventative procedures and interventions, cooperative learning
and peer tutoring, self-management strategies, social skills instruction,
school-wide positive behavior supports, and working with agencies and
families. They include case studies and best practice recommendations.
LB3060 2012-008202 978-0-8166-7970-6
A measure of success; the influence of curriculum-based
measurement on education.
Title main entry. Ed. by Christine Espin et al.
U. of Minnesota Press, ©2012 392 p. $60.00
Espin (special education, Leiden University, the Netherlands) unties con-
tributors in special education and educational psychology to assess the
impact of curriculum-based measurement (CBM) on educational policy
and practice over the past 30 years, from the classroom to the state level
and in the areas of teacher education, psychology, and school psychology.
An introductory chapter describes the history and paradigms of CBM,
and section 1 overviews CBM’s contributions to educational policy and
practice. The rest of the book looks at CBM’s school-based and district-
wide applications, applications in elementary and secondary education,
applications for general education settings and special school popula-
tions, and applications in state assessment of schools. Also examined are
the uses of CBM for teacher development, the uses of CBM in psychology
and school psychology, and the use of CBM internationally.
LB3454 2012-022547 978-1-59756-480-9
A guide to school services in speech-language pathology,
2d ed.
Schraeder, Trici.
Plural Publishing, ©2013 233 p. $55.00 (pa)
Schraeder (speech-language pathology, U. of Wisconsin-Madison) intro-
duces undergraduates and professionals to school-based speech-language
pathology and issues related to providing services in this setting. She
describes the origins of public school programs, a workload analysis
approach to caseload standards in schools, assessment and evaluation,
service delivery formats, evidence-based practice, problem behavior man-
agement and conflict resolution, cultural competence, conferencing and
counseling, and the Oral Language Curriculum Standards Inventory.
Practice patterns as defined by the American Speech-Language Hearing
Association are incorporated in each chapter, along with guidelines and
position statements. This edition has updated information on new flexi-
bilities and modifications made to the No Child Left Behind Act; lan-
guage and literacy connections; the evidence behind new service delivery
models such as computer-assisted learning, telepractice, video modeling,
and multimodal communication; links to free apps for iTherapy; and
information on the new Common Core State Standards and how to write
individualized education programs to reflect a workload approach to
providing direct and indirect services to achieve the least restrictive envi-
ronment, to reflect transitions in services as students make progress, and
for students who use augmentative and alternative communication (AAC)
devices.
LB3608 2011-046144 978-0-7360-6382-1
Campus recreational sports; managing employees,
programs, facilities, and services.
Title main entry. Ed. by NIRSA.
Human Kinetics Pub., ©2012 253 p. $49.00
This text-reference provides practical guidance on management of
campus recreational sports programs. Contributors are affiliated with the
National Intramural-Recreational Sports Association (NIRSA) and include
higher education administrators and recreation directors at universities
and colleges. The first part of the book focuses on careers in and pro-
fessional preparation for campus recreational sports, then looks at uni-
versity and community relationships. The second part delves into
practical aspects of managing a campus recreational sports department,
such as budgeting, marketing (including online marketing), assessment,
risk management, and selecting and integrating technology. The third
–160–
section is devoted to human resources, program planning, facility man-
agement, and services provided by facilities such as training and
babysitting. A final chapter covers special events. Learning features
include chapter glossaries and brief chapter summaries.
LB3609 2012-007935 978-1-4214-0716-6
Cheating in college; why students do it and what
educators can do about it.
McCabe, Donald L. et al.
Johns Hopkins U. Press, ©2012 225 p. $39.95
More than two-thirds of college students report that they engaged in
some form of academic dishonesty in the previous year, per the authors’
surveys of students and faculty at public and private institutions with
strong or weak honor codes. Building on earlier research, McCabe
(Rutgers Business School), along with educators in management at
Washington State University and organizational behavioral at
Pennsylvania State University, discuss the individual and institutional
factors that influence cheating behavior/academic integrity, conclude that
cheating habits develop long before college, and offer advice on what
educators can do to maintain academic integrity in an age of ethical
ambiguity.
LB3610 2012-024052 978-1-61205-261-8
Inspiring participatory democracy; student movements
from Port Huron to today.
Title main entry. Ed. by Tom Hayden.
Paradigm Publishers, ©2013 199 p. $108.00
Even readers familiar with the political and cultural turmoil of the 1960s
and the Students for a Democratic Society (SDS) may not be familiar with
the Port Huron Statement, otherwise known as the “founding document”
of the student activist organization. And while editor Hayden (one of the
document’s 60 or so authors) describes it as a “relic of the early ideal-
istic years of the ‘60s,” he also writes that it is “worth treasuring” as it
reflects the idealism, rhetoric, and the excitement it brought to many.
This collection of essays on the Port Huron Statement includes numerous
perspectives and recollections from participants 50 years after it was
written. The book will interest readers who want to know more about
the student activist movement of the era and its political and cultural
environment.
LC89 2011-039967 978-1-4411-8842-7
The American model of state and school; an historical
inquiry.
Glenn, Charles L.
Continuum Publishing Group, ©2012 267 p. $100.00
Glenn (educational leadership, Boston U.) comments in his preface that
this book is primarily intended to examine the American model of
schooling by depicting the deeply rooted and traditional thinking about
schools that have hampered the efforts of the public and policy makers
to help schools operate as they should, be academically effective, and
responsive to parents’ concerns. He addresses topics such as the weak-
nesses and strengths of the American schooling model, its background,
religion as a source of both cooperation and conflict, schooling and local
democracy, schooling as protection for society, and redefining the teacher.
LC93 2011-046917 978-1-4411-3073-0
Education policy unravelled.
Garratt, Dean and Gillian Forrester.
Continuum Publishing Group, ©2012 201 p. $39.95 (pa)
British education scholars Garratt (U. of Chester, UK) and Forrester
(Liverpool John Moores U., UK) subject education policy to a scrutiny that
might alternatively be called untangling. They disaggregate the policy in
order to separate out and examine in depth significant features and char-
acteristics of policy-making, and to illuminate particular and important
enduring themes and trends. After tracing the development of modern
education policy, they consider whether education is improvement or
control, policy and social justice, the evolving primary curriculum, post-
compulsory education, the economics of education, globalization and
policy-borrowing, and possibilities for education policy.
LC111 2011-051761 978-1-4129-8775-2
Religion in schools.
Title main entry. Ed. by Charles J. Russo. (Debating issues in
American education; v.4)
Sage Publications, ©2012 396 p. $80.00
In this volume, Russo (education, U. of Dayton) brings together 18
chapters that argue for and against topics related to religion in schools.
Scholars of Education, law, and related disciplines from the US debate
about aid to students in religiously affiliated nonpublic schools. Topics
broached include whether public funds should be used to transport
–161–
students or provide textbooks and instructional materials, and public
school issues of prayer and devotional concerns, curriculum and
instruction, access to facilities and distribution of religious materials, and
religious dress. A sampling of topics includes: whether prayer should be
allowed in graduations, whether teachers should be allowed to pray,
whether to allow moments of silence, whether teachers can read the Bible
and other sacred texts when students are present, and whether students
should participate in pledging allegiance to the flag if their parents object
to the words “under God.”
LC151 978-1-86201-574-6
Adult literacy and development; stories from the field.
Rogers, Alan and Brian Street.
NIACE [Adult Contin. Educ.], ©2012 235 p. $34.95 (pa)
Rogers (education and lifelong learning, U. of East Anglia and U. of
Nottingham, UK) and anthropologist Street (language in education, King’s
College London, UK, and education, U. of Pennsylvania) draw on their
experiences in adult learning programs in developing countries, as well
as literacy practices in the UK and US, to show practitioners, policy
makers, planners, trainers, and researchers and students in international
development, anthropology, and educational programs how literacy is a
social practice and how learning is situated. They incorporate the
research and practice of others to describe the theories, policies, and
practices of adult literacy in the context of international development pro-
grams. They discuss challenges they faced in working in international
contexts, their conceptual frameworks, ethnographic approaches as
useful tools, how informal learning is ubiquitous and universal, how
formal learning is a sub-sector of the field of learning, and how devel-
opment enhances diversity. They address adult literacy programs with a
focus on learners rather than teachers, how adults are different from
children, and how teaching and learning are a collaborative social
process in which people build on what they already know. They detail
accounts of fieldwork in ethnographic studies of literacy, lessons learned,
different approaches to teaching literacy, the literacy environment, and
how these findings can impact policy and practice. They include a case
study of their project, the Learning For Empowerment Through Training
in Ethnographic Research Project in India, Ethiopia, and Uganda.
Distributed in the US by ISBS.
LC178 2011-534463 978-0-7453-3191-1
The assault on universities; a manifesto for resistance.
Title main entry. Ed. by Michael Bailey and Des Freedman.
Pluto Press, ©2011 194 p. $25.00 (pa)
This collection of sixteen essays accompanies a manifesto for radical
reform aiming to halt and reverse privatization in the UK system of
higher education. The essays familiarize readers with the issues and
stakes that are addressed in the manifesto, which is presented in the end
as an appendix with hundreds of co-signers. Aimed at both the UK gov-
ernment and universities, the demands in the 1-page manifesto include
restoration of public funding, increasing taxes on the rich, eliminating
“forms of evaluation which perpetuate cultures of ‘customer service’ and
quality control,” charging international students no more than
Europeans, ending outsourcing of university services to companies that
do not recognize unions and offer living wages, and more. The essays
address the changing idea of the university under neoliberalism, critical
pedagogy, re-imagining education as a public good, student politics, and
international perspectives. The contributors, who include Henry Giroux
and Alberto Toscano, are mostly humanities and social-science academics
from the UK, but also Canada and Spain. Distributed in the US by
Palgrave Macmillan.
LC191 2012-017331 978-0-415-87532-5
Can education change society?
Apple, Michael W.
Routledge, ©2013 188 p. $125.00
Apple (curriculum, instruction, and educational policy studies, U. of
Wisconsin) progresses from foundational theory and critical reflections
in the first chapters to a practical examination of the responsibilities of
educators in all communities. Apple examines pertinent ideologies dis-
cussed by prominent intellectuals both foreign and domestic. He not only
considers the perspective of who is asking the question but who will
implement changes. The ensuing chapters delineate two examples of how
social change has been achieved toward both radically progressive and
conservative goals in the area of democratization, but the book ultimately
avoids a succinct answer to the question posed by the title.
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
LC191 978-1-78190-014-7
Transforming learning environments; strategies to shape
the next generation.
Title main entry. Ed. by Faynesse S. Miller. (Advances in educational
administration; v.16)
Emerald Group Publishing, ©2013 235 p. $114.95
Education scholars challenge the traditions that serve as the foundation
for higher education and embrace the new realities that have emerged as
a result of a changed economy and cultural climate. They consider lead-
ership and transformations, thoughtful cultural models in a globally
dynamic world, implementing change in how professionals think and do
education, and technology as an agent for transformation. Among their
topics are designing a model of transformational leadership through the
Carnegie Project on the education doctorate, incorporating concepts of
global citizenry into student-centered academic advising, collaborative
partnerships for capacity building through professional development, the
value of valued-added methods, and how video games enhance the
capacity to learn and build community. No index is provided. Distributed
in North America by Turpin Distribution.
LC196 2011-028783 978-1-4331-1427-4
Critical pedagogy in the new dark ages; challenges and
possibilities.
Title main entry. Ed. by Maria Nikolakaki. (Counterpoints: studies in
the postmodern theory of education; v.422)
Peter Lang Publishing Inc, ©2012 370 p. $39.95 (pa)
This collection of sixteen essays explores topics in and otherwise
responds to Paulo Freire’s highly influential “critical pedagogy.” The
essays bring together several big names in critical theory, including:
Slavoj Zizek, Noam Chomsky, Howard Zinn, Cornelius Castoriadis,
Stanley Aronowitz, and Henry Giroux. They are organized into five sec-
tions on education and neoliberalism, rethinking democracy and edu-
cation, trends in critical pedagogy, critical pedagogy in the classroom,
and critical pedagogy in higher education. Most of the essays directly
address Freire’s pedagogy, while others comment on applications and
implications of it, while still others simply grapple with educating people
in the context of economic empire. Other contributors include philoso-
phers and professors of education. There is no index.
LC213 2005-014862 978-1-4129-9266-4
More courageous conversations about race.
Singleton, Glenn E.
Corwin Press Inc., ©2013 337 p. $36.95 (pa)
Singleton, a consultant who specializes in issues of educational equity
and teaches educational leadership at San Jose State U., draws on the
argument from his first book, Courageous Conversations About Race: A
Field Guide to Achieving Equity in Schools, that the US school system fails
to meet the needs of students of color, and focuses on how to implement
its theories and protocol to transform school leadership, learning,
teaching, and engagement with families and communities of color. He
reviews the components of the protocol and explores common barriers,
then discusses what is different and the same in the racial landscape of
schools since the first volume, followed by hot topics in racial equity like
the achievement of black males, moving beyond black and white to
include all students of color, the components of his systemic racial equity
framework, and a case study of one school, as well as the work of his
consulting firm in school systems across the country. Each chapter ends
with a section in which education leaders detail their efforts facing race-
relations challenges in classrooms, schools, and districts.
LC225 2012-029974 978-1-935543-30-5
Strengthening the connection between school and home,
2d ed.
LeBlanc-Esparza, Ricardo and Kym LeBlanc-Esparza. (Essentials for
principals)
Solution Tree Press, ©2013 83 p. $19.95 (pa)
Ricardo LeBlanc-Esparza, an elementary school principal and former
teacher, coach, athletic director, and administrator in high-poverty
schools, and Kym LeBlanc-Esparza, a superintendent and former teacher,
curriculum specialist, central office administrator, and principal,
consider the role of family engagement in student achievement and
outline strategies for K-8 principals to use to connect with family
members. They discuss steps leaders can take to welcome families,
including understanding educator and principal attitudes and
assumptions, then 11 strategies for improving communication and
creating a family-friendly school. They detail the steps involved in
planning, building, and implementing communication in home visits,
conferences, with media and technology, and family events, and ways to
communicate with families that are hard to reach. They also address the
goal-setting, implementation, launch, and progress monitoring aspects of
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
a family engagement plan. They include information on both low and
high-poverty schools and those with low and high percentages of at-risk
populations.
LC238 2011-050517 978-1-61186-046-7
The road half traveled; university engagement at a
crossroads.
Hodges, Rita Axelroth and Steve Dubb. (Transformations in higher edu-
cation; the scholarship of engagement)
Michigan State U. Press, ©2012 237 p. $44.95 (pa)
This study from the Anchor Institution Task Force profiles ten urban col-
leges and universities that demonstrate how institutions can support
communities through development initiatives and partnership programs.
The book begins with a brief history of universities, community part-
nerships, and economic development, then outlines a typology of three
different strategies of anchor-based community development, based on
the role of the university as a facilitator supporting partnerships in many
different neighborhoods, as a leader in developing adjacent low-income
neighborhoods, and as a convener acting with a broader coalition. The
book includes case studies from universities around the country and
sums up best practices for becoming an anchor institution. There is also
practical guidance on building internal constituencies for partnership
work and creating policy support for the Anchor Institution mission.
Appendices offer budget documents and an annotated list of organiza-
tions. Hodges is affiliated with Netter Center for Community
Partnerships, University of Pennsylvania. Dubb is affiliated with
Democracy Collaborative, University of Maryland-College Park.
LC1011 2012-029981 978-1-61248-074-9
Valuing useless knowledge; an anthropological inquiry
into the meaning of liberal education, 2d ed.
Graber, Robert Bates.
Truman State University Press, ©2012 57 p. $14.95 (pa)
Graber (anthropology, Truman State U.) offers an anthropological inves-
tigation of how and why we value what he calls “useless knowledge.” He
traces the practice of making the distinction between useful and useless
back to Democritus and ancient attitudes about “respectable knowledge”
and practical knowledge. He considers the origins of liberal arts edu-
cation, the advent of evolutionary biology, and Herbert Spencer’s views
on practical education. He argues that by valuing relatively useless
knowledge for its own sake that humans are able to transcend selfish
and short-sighted notions of practicality evolved under conditions of little
or no technology, which threaten to destroy us in this age of advanced
technology.
LC1038 2011-048021 978-1-4504-1091-5
Controversial issues in adventure programming.
Title main entry. Ed. by Bruce Martin and Mark Wagstaff.
Human Kinetics Pub., ©2012 315 p. $49.00
Fifty-plus international academics and independent scholars contribute
40 essays examining 20 controversial issues in adventure programming.
The text’s 20 chapters reflect numerous political, economic, social, cul-
tural, technological, and environmental changes in the industry and
globally since the last publication of a similar text, Controversial Issues in
Adventure Education: A Critical Examination (Wurdinger and Potter) in
1999. Designed for students and practitioners, the text features ten
chapters addressing long-running issues of concern—the certification
debate, motorized versus nonmotorized forms of outdoor recreation, and
program accreditation—and ten chapters on issues emerging in more
recent years, such as the rise of the Internet, new instructional tech-
nologies, and online educational programming. Each chapter features
one essay offering a “pro” and one offering a “con” position. No subject
index is provided. Oversize: 8.75x11.25 “.
LC1042 2011-031617 978-1-4411-0021-4
Dimensions of expertise; a conceptual exploration of
vocational knowledge. (reprint, 2010)
Winch, Christopher.
Continuum Publishing Group, ©2012 212 p. $44.95 (pa)
Winch (educational philosophy and policy, Kings College) presents a
detailed philosophical examination of the nature of expertise and voca-
tional knowledge. The work of Gilbert Ryle and the debates it has engen-
dered are a major touching point for him. Like Ryle, Winch defines
expertise as “knowing how” as opposed to “knowing that,” and in that
he gives attention to the moral dimension of knowledge in activity.
Whether that distinction exists is a topic of debate in its own right that
Ryle’s work has generated and that Winch defends. Additionally, he con-
siders the role systemic knowledge plays in “know-how,” which he
argues Ryle leaves undeveloped. Other chapters turn to the question of
tacit knowledge, whether there can be theories of expertise and the
–162–
“fluency” theory of expertise specifically. Winch employs a vertical/hori-
zontal understanding of expertise in his critical assessment. A final
chapter considers the implications for education policy and the European
Educational Framework in particularly.
LC1085 2012-013147 978-1-4666-2116-9
Academic entrepreneurship and technological innovation;
a business management perspective.
Title main entry. Ed. by Anna Szopa et al.
Information Science Reference, ©2013 284 p. $175.00
Scholars and practitioners of business, many of whom started in engi-
neering, explore the emerging discipline that encourages fellows and
institutional structures in the academic community to engage in entre-
preneurial behavior. The topics include a critical review of academic
entrepreneurship in India, entrepreneurship education at the University
of Maryland, evidence from the University of Nicosia on cultivating entre-
preneurial thinking through a management of innovation and technology
course, the role of universities, as catalysts for venture creation, the case
of publicly funded universities, and framework entrepreneurship
process.
LC1085 2012935288 978-0-85793-068-2
Public private partnerships in education; new actors and
modes of governance in a globalizing world.
Title main entry. Ed. by Susan L. Robertson et al.
Edward Elgar Publishing, ©2012 298 p. $135.00
In this work for scholars and policy makers in public policy and edu-
cation, Robertson (University of Bristol, UK) brings together international
contributors in sociology, education, economics, political science, as well
as practitioners and policymakers at NGOs and aid organizations. They
examine public-private partnerships (PPPs) for educational governance at
the local and global level. The first part of the book traces how PPPs, as
a policy idea, have been constructed in transnational agendas for educa-
tional development and circulated globally. Part 2 details the roles of
transnational and multilateral private sector actors, including the
International Finance Corporation, the WTO, NGOs, and private founda-
tions, and presents a case study of corporate-led PPPs in education. Part
3 addresses the impact of PPPs for education in developing countries,
providing arguments both for and against relying on PPPs in national
educational systems. The book is based on papers presented at a 2009
symposium held at the University of Amsterdam.
LC1091 2011-036195 978-1-4411-0515-8
Education, extremism and terrorism; what should be
taught in citizenship education and why.
Gereluk, Dianne.
Continuum Publishing Group, ©2012 139 p. $27.95 (pa)
Gereluk (educational policy, U. of Calgary) addresses the multiple and
sometimes conflicting messages about national security that schools are
being asked to facilitate. She introduces various debates regarding ter-
rorism and extremism’s place in education, comparing approaches in the
UK and US. She considers why the subjects might come up in a class and
examines different lesson plans that engage them. The central chapter
argues for a social constructionist approach to knowledge in the
classroom, focusing on the way the portrayal of 9/11 events shaped
American intuitions about terrorism. The fourth chapter considers
further moral dilemmas of teaching around terrorism. Her final chapter
argues for teaching about terrorism and extremism in their historically
and politically contexts, and offers normative recommendations to edu-
cators and policy makers. Each chapter is comprised of several sub-sec-
tions and reads like a primer. At several points, the author invites the
reader to reflect on their own positions and how they’ve changed in the
course of reading the text.
LC1091 2011-049040 978-1-61205-228-1
Teaching for dissent; citizenship education and political
activism.
Stitzlein, Sarah M.
Paradigm Publishers, ©2012 243 p. $108.00
The resurgence of dissent in town halls, on street corners, and in public
parks brings new promise for improved democratic life and citizen par-
ticipation, says Stitzlein (education, U. of Cincinnati, Ohio), but for that
promise to be fulfilled, schools must celebrate and cultivate the skills and
dispositions necessary for the next generation of citizens to engage in
political dissent. She investigates the historical and philosophical foun-
dations of dissent in the work of the American Founders and the prag-
matist philosophers who followed them. Among her perspectives are
informing today’s dissent with that of the Revolutionary and Progressive
eras, constraints on dissent in the current curriculum, and grounding
dissent in hope.
–163–
LC1099 978-90-420-3535-5
From conflict to recognition; moving multiculturalism
forward.
Title main entry. Ed. by Michael Kearney. (At the interface; v.79)
Editions Rodopi, ©2012 258 p. $72.80 (pa)
This volume grew out of an international and interdisciplinary con-
ference exploring issues of multiculturalism, conflict, and identity con-
struction at Oxford University, 2009. A unique aspect of the volume is
its dialogic structure: each author refers to the work of other authors in
the book; thus forming threads through-out the work, which link what
are often perceived as unrelated issues. Thirteen chapters are presented
by Kearney (Kogakuin U., Japan), who organizes them into four thematic
sections on: rights, culture, and recognition; complex stories of identity
formation; the interweaving of self and other; and crossing boundaries
and the language of the aesthetic.
LC1099 978-94-6091-892-6
Precarious international multicultural education;
hegemony, dissent and rising alternatives
Title main entry. Ed. by Handel Kashope Wright et al. (Transgressions;
cultural studies and education; v.84)
Sense Publishers, ©2012 376 p. $39.00 (pa)
Teachers and researchers in education, other social sciences, and the fine
arts address the viability of multicultural education, and seek to chal-
lenge readers through differently focused snapshots of the status quo that
problematize aspects of multiculturalism, examine the processes and dis-
courses that are contributing to its supposed imminent demise, and
provide examples of alternatives to multiculturalism and multicultural
education that are emerging. Among the topics are revolutionary critical
pedagogy against capitalist multicultural education, multiculturalism
and the assemblage of Iranian-Canadian identities, immigrant youth and
the political poetics of multiculturalism, enacting multicultural education
using critical ethnography, and the warning of the integrationist alter-
native for education and the multicultural backlash.
LC1200 2011-029898 978-1-4411-5739-3
Inclusive education, politics and policymaking;
contemporary issues in education studies.
Liasidou, Anastasia. (Contemporary issues in education studies)
Continuum Publishing Group, ©2012 175 p. $39.95 (pa)
Liasidou (education, European U., Cyprus) applies a variety of post-
modern/poststructural perspectives to a critical interrogation of current
issues and debates surrounding inclusive education policies and prac-
tices. He explores the relationships between ideologies, discourses, and
power relations that surround how special needs education and dis-
ability are understood and defined and considers their impact on pro-
grams of inclusive education.
LC1200 978-1-61250-501-5
A research reader in universal design for learning.
Title main entry. Ed. by Gabrielle Rappolt-Schlichtmann, Samantha G.
Daley and L. Todd Rose.
Harvard Education Press, ©2013 256 p. $29.95 (pa)
Rappolt-Schlichtmann, Daley, and Rose (Center for Applied Special
Technology) assemble six essays that address the core concepts and
assumptions of the universal design for learning (UDL) framework and
how UDL can bridge research in the learning sciences with educational
practice. Specialists working in the US and the Netherlands in learning
technologies, education, psychology, statistics, and other areas consider
major research areas and how they inform UDL, specifically the social
and contextual nature of learning, the balance between learners actively
and freely developing their own understandings and educators guiding
or limiting their exploration, the relationship between emotion and cog-
nition, the dynamics of scaffolding, how outliers learn, and modeling
variability among individuals.
LC1201 2012-026061 978-1-4666-2530-3
Technologies for inclusive education; beyond traditional
integration approaches.
Title main entry. Ed. by David Griol Barres et al.
Information Science Reference, ©2013 373 p. $175.00
For graduate students and researchers, Barres (Carlos III U. of Madrid,
Spain) et al. compile 15 articles by computer scientists and engineers,
educators, and others from Europe, India, Mexico, and Japan, who con-
sider the use of technology in inclusive education. They address the
potential of multimodal interfaces to facilitate universal access to learning
content, including multimodal conversational interfaces, the PreLingua
tool for voice therapy, interactive teaching agents that process non-verbal
input modalities such as eye-gaze and facial expression, and embodied
conversational agents in interactive applications for children with special
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
needs; the possibilities of virtual worlds in lifelong learning and middle
school; and approaches to user modeling, including adapted human-com-
puter interaction, adjusting speech-based interfaces to language disorders
associated with intellectual disabilities, and a user model compiled using
emotional parameters in game-based learning as related to student per-
formance and motivation. Subsequent sections cover content adapted to
users with special needs, such as digital educational objects, communi-
cation aids, and an automatic grading tool adapted to the language skills
of students, and devices and simulators like mobile devices for disabled
and non-native users, remote response devices used in university
teaching, and the use of simulators to explain abstract concepts.
LC1752 2012-009966 978-0-8014-5052-5
Mere equals; the paradox of educated women in the early
American republic.
McMahon, Lucia.
Cornell U. Press, ©2012 228 p. $45.00
In this study of women’s education in female academies in the 1780s-
1820s, McMahon (history, William Paterson University) examines
women’s education in the context of tensions between intellectual
equality and sexual difference during the period. She argues that the exis-
tence of educated women forced society to confront the question of how
Americans could continue to justify women’s formal exclusion from pol-
itics and other male-dominated spheres. The author uses a case study
model that focuses on individual women’s experiences as revealed in
diaries, letters, and personal papers; she also draws on other primary
sources, such as newspapers, periodicals, fiction, and school catalogs.
The book includes b&w historical illustrations and documents.
LC2781 2012-006831 978-1-4128-4771-1
Higher education for African Americans before the Civil
Rights era, 1900-1964.
Title main entry. Ed. by Marybeth Gasman and Roger L. Geiger.
(Perspectives on the history of higher education; v.29)
Transaction Publishers, ©2012 200 p. $34.95 (pa)
Editors Gasman and Geiger, both teachers of higher education at the
University of Pennsylvania, unite contributors in ethnic studies, educa-
tional policy, and educational studies in this collection of historical
studies. An introduction provides an overview of the principal episodes
in the development of higher education opportunities for African
Americans. Individual chapter topics include the role of city normal
schools and municipal colleges in higher education for African
Americans, white racial anxiety and black student presence at six
Midwest universities, interracialism at Fisk University in 1930, and the
National Scholarship Service and Fund for Negro Students, 1947-1968.
There is no subject index.
LC3719 2011-029895 978-1-4411-2494-4
Education and minorities; education as a humanitarian
response.
Title main entry. Ed. by Chris Atkin. (Education as a humanitarian
response series)
Continuum Publishing Group, ©2012 182 p. $44.95 (pa)
For undergraduate and graduate students, Atkin (education, Liverpool
Hope U., UK) compiles eight case studies that consider the formal and
informal educational experiences of minority learners. They concern the
Swedish-speaking minority in Finland; disadvantaged youth in India; the
Roma in Hungary; Tibetans in China; migrant agricultural workers in
England; and those in the US, Rwanda, and South Africa. Education
scholars from Europe, the US, and South Africa address the different
contextual definitions of minority; the different purposes of education for
minorities, including empowerment, developing community cohesion,
reducing inequalities, and promoting a sense of national identity; and the
relationship between education, minorities, and their ability to access
and influence policy makers. Other topics include literacy, teaching cul-
tural vs. national unity, and education as a tool for integration.
LC3733 2012-022007 978-1-84769-799-8
Bilingual community education and multilingualism;
beyond heritage languages in a global city.
Title main entry. Ed. by Ofelia García et al. (Bilingual education and
bilingualism; no.89)
Multilingual Matters, ©2012 343 p. $39.95 (pa)
Schools, religious places, community organizations, storefronts, play-
grounds, homes, and hair salons are among the contexts where scholars
of education, language, communication, and similar fields find bilingual
community education. They all start by exploring sociolinguistic aspects
of the language practices of the diasporic community, including the
history of their complex migrations and New York City as the backdrop
for their efforts. The themes are conceptualizing bilingual community
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
education, communities educate their own bilingual children, alliances
for bilingualism between communities and public schools, and bilingual
resources for a global future. Distributed in the US by UTP Distribution.
LC3737 978-1-921867-40-8
Asia Pacific education; diversity, challenges and changes.
Title main entry. Ed. by Philip Wing Keung Chan.
Monash University Press, ©2012 282 p. $49.95 (pa)
Emerging and experienced researchers in education present recent
studies of education in the region. They cover the areas of subject
teaching; early childhood education; language and literacy; education
systems and policies; and equity, identity, and social justice. Among the
topics are the influence of professional learning on secondary science
teachers’ ways of improving their subject teaching in Bangladesh, atti-
tudes toward and engagement with the graphics calculator among senior
secondary mathematics students in Singapore, a socio-historical interpre-
tation of current curriculum and pedagogy reform in Vietnamese early
childhood education, a railway enterprise-run school as a case study of
the new governance in Chinese public education reform, and students’
educational experiences in a weekend Chinese school in Victoria
(Australia). Distributed in the US by ISBS.
LC3986 978-1-74286-012-1
An extraordinary school; re-modelling special education.
Title main entry. Ed. by Sara James.
ACER Press, ©2012 186 p. $29.95 (pa)
Written to be accessible to educators, therapists, parents, and others
working with children with special needs, this book introduces Port
Phillip Specialist School in Australia, which provides education as well as
medical, paramedical, and mental health services to special needs stu-
dents within the integrated service delivery model. Contributors are
teachers and therapists at the school. The innovative school has an arts-
based curriculum, offering visual art, music, drama, and dance therapy
within the classroom context. The book explains the theoretical under-
pinnings of the school, demonstrates how theory is put into practice in
the classroom, and provides first-hand accounts from teachers and spe-
cialists at the school. The book includes color photos of real kids at the
school. James is a journalist seen on national news outlets. The book is
distributed in the US by ISBS.
LC3993 978-1-4462-1108-3
Gifted and talented in the early years; practical activities
for children aged 3 to 6, 2d ed.
Sutherland, Margaret.
Sage Publications, ©2012 131 p. $100.00
Young gifted and talented children do not always get the attention given
to other children with special needs. In this update of the 2005 edition
that takes into account UK initiatives toward more inclusive education,
Sutherland (U. of Glasgow, Scotland) discusses labels used to describe
such children; views on intelligence; identification issues; and the cur-
riculum areas of motor development/physical movement, language,
music, and mathematics. She includes reproducible assessment forms for
teachers and parents for identifying such students, and adaptable sug-
gestions and activity sheets with step-by-step instructions for each cur-
ricular area. This material is related to common practices in early
childhood education settings. The volume includes further resources and
a glossary.
LC3993 2011-024514 978-1-4411-5719-5
The identities and practices of high-achieving pupils;
negotiating achievement and peer cultures.
Francis, Becky et al.
Continuum Publishing Group, ©2012 209 p. $140.00
While many education studies examine the relationship between under
achievement and peer popularity in school, Pearson (education and social
justice, King’s College London), Skelton (gender equality in education, U.
of Birmingham), and Read’s (education, U. of Roehampton) study ana-
lyzes the experiences of high-achieving pupils. Their research explores the
identities of high-achievers, with a focus on gender and the ways that the
social constructions of gender and the pupils’ gender subjectivities relate
to their scholastic achievement. The authors consider three subgroups—
high-achievers who maintain strong popularity in the classroom, those
who are less popular but not directly stigmatized for their achievement,
and those viewed by their classmates as “boffins” or “geeks”—and
discuss the implications of their findings for education policy and
practice.
–164–
LC3993 2012-008257 978-0-415-99750-8
Serving the gifted; evidence-based clinical and
psychoeducational practice. (CD-ROM included)
Pfeiffer, Steven I. (School-based practice in action)
Routledge, ©2013 248 p. $39.95 (pa)
Pfeiffer (counseling psychology and school psychology, Florida State U.)
presents a text for school psychologists, counselors, and other practi-
tioners who work with gifted students that explains the history of the
field, myths, models, and categories of gifted students; conceptions of
giftedness and types of programs; theories of creativity, its relationship
to intelligence, and strategies to increase it in the classroom; screening,
identification, and assessment; educational programs and pedagogical
approaches; gifted students with coexisting disabilities; working with
parents; counseling students; and frequently asked questions. The accom-
panying CD contains PowerPoint presentations and handouts and forms.
LC3993 2012-022970 978-1-59363-956-3
The underachieving gifted child; recognizing,
understanding, and reversing underachievement.
Siegle, Del.
Prufrock Press Inc., ©2013 173 p. $24.95 (pa)
Siegle (gifted and talented education, U. of Connecticut) outlines strategies
teachers and parents can use to increase the achievement of under-
achieving gifted students. He explains underachievement, measuring
achievement, the characteristics and behaviors of underachievers, causes,
and how to recognize ability and effort, and addresses perfectionism, the
use of Rimm’s Trifocal Model, and the author’s achievement orientation
model, which involves increasing self-efficacy, making learning mean-
ingful, building trusting relationships, and developing self-regulation and
study skills.
LC4031 2012-029886 978-1-4164-0544-3
Case studies for inclusive schools, 3d ed.
Anderson, Peggy L.
PRO-ED, ©2013 179 p. $24.00 (pa)
Anderson (special education, Metropolitan State U. of Denver) presents 57
case studies to help education students understand various inclusion
issues in schools, focusing on problem solving from a collaborative per-
spective. She does not recommend specific instructional methods,
placement, or other actions, but encourages students to explore the dif-
ferent attitudes, problems, and situations that arise, such as assistive tech-
nology, curriculum accessibility, response to intervention, and evaluation
issues. She provides a sampling of problems associated with integrating
students with disabilities into general education classrooms, organized
by cases on learning and intellectual disabilities, emotional/behavioral
and communication disorders, attention-deficit/hyperactivity disorder,
physical disabilities and health and sensory impairments, autism
spectrum disorders, and gifted and talented students. Cases include back-
ground information and activities, with 13 new ones in this edition,
including cases from her colleagues. There is no index.
LC4631 2012-008775 978-0-13-262615-6
Strategies for teaching learners with special needs, 10th
ed.
Polloway, Edward A. et al.
Pearson, ©2013 462 p. $138.00 (pa)
Polloway (education, Lynchburg College) et al. help pre-service and
inservice educators teach students with special needs using strategies for
differentiated instruction and classroom management and behavioral
support in spoken language, reading, written language, math, science,
and social studies content. They also discuss additional strategies related
to study skills, social competence and self-determination skills, functional
academics, and career development and transition. This edition focuses
on strategies for any setting and has teaching tips for elementary and
middle or secondary classrooms, strategies and activities specific to these
levels, diversity features, objectives, and classroom activities.
LC4704 2004-008886 978-0-12-388409-1
Learning about learning disabilities, 4th ed.
Title main entry. Ed. by Bernice Wong and Deborah Butler.
Academic Press, ©2012 447 p. $89.95
This fourth edition of an overview for undergraduate and graduate stu-
dents contains 11 new chapters and input from new contributors. It
presents the state of research and practice in learning disabilities, con-
sidering not only academic but also social, emotional, and behavioral
dimensions of learning disabilities. Early chapters explain classification
and identification of learning disabilities. Later chapters provide descrip-
tions of, and interventions for, specific learning disabilities in reading,
writing, math, and social studies. There is also material on self-regulation
among students with LD and ADHD, and research on brain and behav-
–165–
ioral responses to intervention. Specific chapters are devoted to adoles-
cents, ELLs with LD, and special education students with learning dis-
abilities. Academic Press is an imprint of Elsevier.
LC4705 978-1-59237-873-9
The complete learning disabilities directory 2013;
associations, products, resources, magazines, books,
services, conferences, web sites, 18th ed.
Title main entry.
Grey House Pub., Inc., ©2012 539 p. $150.00 (pa)
This 20th edition of this directory for professionals, families, and indi-
viduals with learning disabilities includes 4,608 listings, arranged into 21
major chapters and 100 subchapters. Entries provide mail, phone, fax,
and email contact information, plus brief descriptions of products or
services provided. Categories include organizations, camps, classroom
resources, computer resources, government agencies, books and other
publications, audio and video resources, websites and databases, profes-
sional periodicals and texts, schools and colleges, testing resources, and
vocational and transition skills. Geographic and publisher indexes are
provided. This edition contains a glossary defining learning disability
terms and an article from the National Institute of Child & Human
Development discussing specific learning disabilities.
LC4718 2012-021089 978-1-59857-240-7
Bringing ABA to home, school, and play for young
children with autism spectrum disorders and other
disabilities.
Leach, Debra.
Brookes Publishing, ©2012 186 p. $29.95 (pa)
Leach (special education, Winthrop U.) offers a guide for teachers and
other personnel to using applied behavior analysis (ABA) with young
children with autism spectrum disorders and other disabilities in home,
school, and community settings. She combines ABA with natural envi-
ronment intervention to create a framework for everyday work with
children and families and embedding interventions in everyday routines.
She provides an overview of the legal mandates for natural environment
intervention and the research support for planning and delivering early
intervention services in the context of home, school, and community rou-
tines to enhance child development and improve the competence and con-
fidence of caregivers in meeting children’s needs. She gives an overview
of autism spectrum disorders, ABA, and how it can be applied to these
disorders and related disabilities in the natural environment. Also dis-
cussed are assessment for planning interventions, goal setting, developing
teaching procedures, data collection and analysis to monitor progress,
fostering collaboration between caregivers and professionals, and putting
it all together. Appendices include sample teaching plans for communi-
cation, social interaction, independent play and daily living skills, cog-
nitive skills, positive behaviors, and targeted routines, and assessment
forms.
LC5145 2012-020443 978-1-4522-0391-1
Changing suburbs, changing students; helping school
leaders face the challenges.
Wepner, Shelley B. et al.
Corwin Press Inc., ©2012 195 p. $36.95 (pa)
Wepner (education, Manhattanville College) et al. help current and future
school leaders in suburbs facing changes, as community demographics
shift to include more diversity, adjust and accommodate the needs of an
increasingly diverse student population, especially English language
learners. They offer ideas and strategies for addressing the changing
culture and for working with teachers, parents, and students, and discuss
leadership practices for forming partnerships and developing community
schools to help teachers develop professionally and help students achieve.
They discuss the changing suburbs and the role of school leaders,
including demographics and implications and how to meet the needs of
the community in light of national, state, and local mandates, and outline
ideas for modifying the culture of the school, including programs for
diverse student populations and forming school-university collaborations.
LC5225 978-94-6091-907-7
The persons in relation perspective; in counselling,
psychotherapy and community adult learning.
Kirkwood, Colin. (International issues in education; v.9)
Sense Publishers, ©2012 183 p. $39.00 (pa)
Kirkwood, a psychoanalytic psychotherapist and advocate of adult
learning in Scotland, presents a new synthesis of the ideas of John
McMurray, additionally drawing on the work of Martin Buber,
Emmanuel Mounier, and Paulo Freire. Many of the chapters were previ-
ously published in various journals or as papers delivered at meetings
over the past 10 years. With personalism and the practice of dialogue as
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
major threads, the author touches in theory and practice in theology and
religion, psychiatry, nursing, and social work. The book begins with a
review of the sources of the ‘persons in relation’ perspective and how it
is applied in counseling and psychotherapy. Section 2 explores the role of
dialogue in the therapy process, and Section 3 demonstrates applications
of the ‘persons in relation’ perspective in counseling and psychotherapy.
This section includes a chapter-long case study of a client with anorexia.
Section 4 introduces the work of John D. Sutherland, while Section 5
applies the ‘persons in relation’ perspective to adult education and adult
learning, integrating the legacy of Paulo Freire. The book includes a
Freirean bibliography.
LC5251 2012-021135 978-1-59558-786-2
Back to school; why everyone deserves a second chance at
education.
Rose, Mike.
The New Press, ©2012 206 p. $21.95
Rose (Graduate School of Education and Information Studies, UCLA) uses
vignettes of nontraditional college students, such as single parents, vet-
erans, and gang members, to trigger a discussion of the politics and eco-
nomics behind the debate on college for all. The success stories highlight
issues related to teaching and the curriculum, the validity of separating
academic and vocational courses, and assessment of intelligence and
ability. Rose argues that the country’s success relies on community col-
leges and adult education programs. His new philosophy of education
recognizes not only economic motives but also intellectual, social, civic,
moral, and aesthetic motives in the institutional mission to give students
who need it a second chance at college education. The author has written
previous books on education for general readers.
LC5457 2012-028461 978-1-4398-4787-9
Designing training and instructional programs for older
adults.
Czaja, Sara J. and Joseph Sharit. (Human factors & aging series)
CRC Press, ©2013 309 p. $79.95
Czaja (psychiatry and behavioral sciences and industrial engineering)
and Sharit (industrial engineering, both U. of Miami) draw on the
current understanding of today’s older adults—including their demo-
graphics, their needs, the challenges facing them, and a realistic
appraisal of their abilities and limitations—as a basis for how current
knowledge about training and instructional design should be shaped and
applied to best accommodate this population of learners. In particular,
they explore barriers that older people may encounter keeping up with
all the emerging technologies in health management, work, communi-
cation, and leisure. Among their topics are characteristics of older adult
learners, learning and skill acquisition, retention and transfer of training,
methods and approaches to instruction and training, multimedia and
electronic learning, and assessing performance and evaluating programs.
LC5800 2012-030851 978-1-937290-01-6
Teach beyond your reach; an instructor’s guide to
developing and running successful distance learning
classes, workshops, training sessions, and more, 2d ed.
Neidorf, Robin.
CyberAge Books, ©2012 214 p. $29.95 (pa)
This newly revised and updated edition of the original textbook by Robin
Neidorf is an intelligent, practical guide to teaching in distance learning
formats. Neidorf is experienced in full and low-residency academic
settings, nonprofit and for-profit universities, business information
consulting, and librarian services. She keeps the book’s focus specific:
the information, tools, and connections with others that are necessary to
teach well outside the classroom. This narrow focus (readers will not be
given advice on how to compose email or design webpages) allows
Neidorf to go through a variety of different options for how teachers can
teach using online tools. She also gives experienced common-sense advice
for working in teams and collaborating with technical specialists. The
book covers situations where teachers are assigned an online teaching
system and where they must design their own. She looks at online
learning whether the teacher also has in-person class time or not. The
book is designed for professors, instructors, and other professional
teachers of adults. It is written to be useful for distance learning
situations in academic, public, or business settings. The introductory
section covers the author’s personal experience, and clearly states the
audience, purpose, and subject of the book. Chapter 1 covers common
online teaching platforms and components. Chapter 2 looks at adult
learners and learning styles. Chapters 3 and 4 cover instructional design
and development. Chapter 5 is a plain-spoken guide to survival in the
online classroom. Chapter 6 deals with individual learners and
customization. Chapter 7 looks at creating class community and student-
to-student conversation, chapter 8 looks at informal learning
opportunities and common pitfalls, and the last chapter looks at distance
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
learning as a collaborative enterprise. Throughout, the author keeps a
clear and specific focus on the basics and a range of available options,
all from the perspective of working teachers of adults.
LC5808 978-94-6091-726-4
Putting knowledge to work and letting information play,
2d ed.
Title main entry. Ed. by Timothy W. Luke and Jeremy Hunsinger.
(Transdisciplinary studies; v.04)
Sense Publishers, ©2012 238 p. $39.00 (pa)
Critical reflections about the digitalization of discourse and culture are
offered by scholars of the humanities and social sciences. Among the per-
spectives are reconsidering one-dimensionality in the Internet age, the
web as digital discourse and culture, the pleasures of collaboration, the
origins of the cute as a dominant aesthetic category in digital culture,
Barack Obama and the celebrity spectacle, and digital research and
tenure and promotion in colleges of arts and sciences. The 16 essays are
not indexed.
LC6256 2011-023004 978-1-4411-0545-5
Teaching and learning on foundation degrees; a guide for
tutors and support staff in further and higher education.
Taylor, Claire.
Continuum Publishing Group, ©2012 161 p. $140.00
Taylor, dean of students and academic engagement at Bishop Grosseteste
U. College Lincoln, UK, brings together a group of education scholars
from the university who present eight chapters on learning and teaching
as related to the Foundation Degree in further and higher education set-
tings in England and Wales. The book is aimed at those involved in
teaching and supporting learning, including lecturers, program leaders,
course managers and department heads, and academic and professional
support staff. Chapters cover theoretical introductions to the Foundation
Degree format, its integration of academic study and work-based
learning, and issues related to teaching and learning, including sup-
porting students with dyslexia and other learning differences, course
design, teaching strategies, e-learning, assessment, and learning enablers
and inhibitors.
MUSIC
M1825 2012-330281 978-981-4345-23-1
Countering MTV influence in Indonesia and Malaysia.
Seneviratne, Kalinga.
ISEAS Publishing, ©2012 278 p. $52.90 (pa)
Seneviratne (journalist, radio broadcaster, and media and international
communications analyst) reports on his study of how “postmodern” cul-
tural identities in Indonesia and Malaysia are developing as they are
exposed to new media technologies and types of media—and how they
are being adapted to accommodate local culture and religion. More
specifically, the author addresses how the technical aspects of those new
media such as presentation and formatting could be absorbed and
adapted to give Malaysian and Indonesian cultural expression a more
contemporary appearance, all without sacrificing the original cultural
identities, Islam, and preferences.
ML55 2012-029348 978-1-57647-203-3
Treasures of the golden age; essays in honor of Robert M.
Stevenson.
Title main entry. Ed. by Michael B. O’Connor and Walter Aaron Clark.
(Festschrift series; no.27)
Pendragon Press, ©2012 330 p. $60.00
Scholars of early modern Iberian music honor Stevenson, a stalwart in
the field, with 15 essays on Iberian cathedral music, the unexpected and
reassessed, and foreign influences and intersections. Among the topics
are the University of Sydney Fisher Rare Book additional manuscript 327,
the Cantum ecclesiasticum of Filipe de Magalhães, Tomás Luis de
Victoria’s Marian antiphon settings, Judith’s Song: creating the warrior
priestess, and Luys de Narváez and the intabulation tradition of Josquin’s
Mille regretz.
ML74 2012-930791 978-1-133-69334-5
Scoring with Logic Pro.
Asher, Jay.
Course Technology PTR, ©2013 236 p. $29.99 (pa)
Asher, a composer, songwriter, arranger, orchestrator, conductor, and
pianist, shows users who have basic knowledge of the application and
sequencing how to use Apple’s Logic Pro 9 Score Editor to prepare parts
and scores for recording sessions and rehearsals. The 22 tutorials cover
the Score Editor menus and getting started; display quantization and
–166–
polyphonic staff styles methods to prepare parts for individual instru-
ments; grace notes, beamed grace notes, and other issues for parts; score
sets, symbols, and note alteration; lyric entry, text styles, headers, and
footers; cross-staff beaming, doubling instruments, polytonal scores, and
time signatures; edit and copy options; drum notation; orchestral per-
cussion; creating parts for guitarists and specialized instruments; score
preferences and project settings; layout techniques; preparing chord
charts for sessions, lead sheets, and master rhythm charts; and other
aspects.
ML196 2012-028569 978-0-393-92919-5
Music in the nineteenth century.
Frisch, Walter. (Western music in context: a Norton history)
W.W. Norton, ©2013 253 p. $35.00 (pa)
Frisch (music, Columbia U.) presents an overview of major themes and
actors in 19th-century Western music contextualized in terms of their his-
torical, social and cultural contexts. He considers the rise of romanticism,
the opera industry, popular music criticism, concert culture and “the
great symphony”, program music and the character-piece, musical life in
late the 19th-century United States, and the emergence of romanticism.
Familiarity with music notation is useful but not required. Since Frisch’s
focus is on historical and social circumstances, he does not analyze
works of art themselves to great length, but each chapter nonetheless con-
tains several snippets from musical scores that color his points about
changes in and approaches to musical composition in the 19th century.
Chapters include suggestions for further reading, and a glossary
describing musical terms is provided.
ML210 2012-002833 978-0-8166-7317-9
Dissonant divas in Chicana music; the limits of la onda.
Vargas, Deborah R.
U. of Minnesota Press, ©2012 313 p. $22.50 (pa)
The Chicana/Tejana singers and musicians profiled here were selected
because their performances, song styles, instrumentation, lyrics, and
lived experiences run counter to Chicana/Tejana music’s heteronormative
constructions of gender, citizenship, class resistance, and ideas of femi-
ninity. Vargas (Chicano/Latino studies, University of California-Irvine)
explores the lives and influences of numerous performers active in the
Southwestern US, Mexico, Havana, and New York City since the early
decades of the 20th century, including Rosita Fernandez, Chelo Silva, Eva
Yberra, and Girl in a Coma. The book is illustrated with b&w historical
and contemporary photos.
ML410 2012-563490 978-1-84383-550-9
Gyorgy Ligeti; of foreign lands and strange sounds.
Title main entry. Ed. by Louise Duchesneau and Wolfgang Marx.
The Boydell Press, ©2011 298 p. $80.00
Hungarian-Austrian composer Liegeti is perhaps best known for his
modernist Requiem featured in the film 2001: A Space Odyssey and his
etudes for piano. Duchesneau, who was his assistant from 1983-2005, and
Marx (music, U. College Dublin) treat Ligeti as one of the leading con-
temporary composers. In this first edited volume since his death in 2006,
international contributors discuss the influences of native folk, poetry,
African, and electronic music on him, the development of his technique
of ‘micropolyphony, and his cinematic music. The volume includes
interview excerpts, color plates, musical notation examples, and a bibli-
ography. Boydell Press is an imprint of Boydell & Brewer.
ML410 2012-563489 978-1-84383-688-9
Jean Sibelius.
Mäkelä, Tomi. Trans by Steven Lindberg
The Boydell Press, ©2011 496 p. $90.00
In this translation of his 2007 study in German of Sibelius (1865-1957),
Finnish scholar Mäkelä (music, Martin Luther U. of Halle-Wittenberg,
Germany) situates his music in the context of his biography and Finnish
history and culture. Probing the issue of whether his music is more
reflective of a unique Nordic national identity or his personality, this
authority on Finnish music discusses his influences, work in various
forms, and critiques of his music and reception in German-speaking
countries in the 1930s. The book includes a historical-cultural chronology,
Sibelius’ family tree, catalog of his works, musical notes, an index of his
works, bibliography, and photographs.
ML410 2012-002027 978-0-393-05070-7
Mozart at the gateway to his fortune; serving the
Emperor, 1788-1791.
Wolff, Christoph.
W.W. Norton, ©2012 244 p. $27.95
This book is not a biography of Mozart’s last four years (although the
first two chapters are biographical), nor is it a general analytical study
–167–
of his music from this period. Instead, Wolff (Harvard University) offers
a new perspective on the last four years of Mozart’s life and the impact
of Mozart’s appointment to the Viennese court, based in part on details
found in his letters to family and friends. The study considers major key-
board, chamber, orchestral, operatic, and sacred compositions. A chapter
on the works left unfinished at his sudden death is supported by a ded-
icated website hosted by Harvard University, which contains recordings
of his unfinished pieces, plus color reproductions of Mozart’s manu-
scripts. The book contains b&w historical illustrations and musical
notation.
ML410 2011-035398 978-0-7546-6889-3
Music, sexuality and the Enlightenment in Mozart’s
F i g a r o , D o n G i o v a n n i and C o s í f a n t u t t e .
Ford, Charles.
Ashgate Publishing Co., ©2012 336 p. $119.95
Ford (music, University College London) presents a study of the sexual
politics and Enlightenment ethics of Mozart’s three operas: Le nozze die
Figaro, Don Giovanni, and Cossí fan tutte. He interprets the overtures
from the three operas in terms of the Anglo/Scottish-French
Enlightenment, presents the case for a masculine sub-style, considers the
contradiction between women’s absence from Enlightenment discourse
and musical foregrounding in the operas, analyzes musical seduction in
terms of emerging idealist theories of music, and addresses all seven
finales with comparisons between Immanuel Kant’s ethics and those of
Marquis de Sade. A conclusion considers how the operas frame their
own ideological and fictive futures. Ford’s analysis focuses on the
musical at least as much as the narrative aspects of the operas. To this
end, extensive musical examples are included in the back and musical
notation is referenced through-out the text. More than a passing famil-
iarity with musical theory is necessary to get the most out of this text—
Ford suggests advanced undergraduate study.
ML419 2011-040308 978-0-306-81957-5
When I left home; my story.
Guy, Buddy.
Da Capo Press, ©2012 280 p. $26.00
Chicago-style blues guitarist Buddy Guy, now 75 years old, was the son
of sharecroppers in the Deep South. He taught himself how to play guitar
and left for Chicago in 1957 at age 21. In his own voice, he describes
milestones in his career such as playing alongside blues greats Muddy
Waters and Willie Dixon, the transition to electric blues, and concerts
with the Rolling Stones and the Grateful Dead in the 1960s. The book
includes a selected discography and b&w photos from personal
collections. Coauthor David Ritz has helped other musicians write their
autobiographies
ML420 2012-031706 978-0-7864-7105-8
Do you believe in rock and roll?; essays on Don McLean’s
“American Pie”.
Title main entry. Ed. by Raymond I. Schuck and Ray Schuck.
McFarland & Co., ©2012 209 p. $40.00 (pa)
A collection of eight essays, complete with footnotes about a
single American song? And a 21 page bibliography? Yet Don McLean’s
“American Pie” deserves that attention as can be seen in a collection of
works by scholars of history and communications. The essays vary in
their strict attention to the song—from a line by line analysis of the lyrics
to a general history of the development of rock and roll up to 1971.
Raymond Schuck is a professor of communications at Bowling Green
State University and his father, Ray Schuck, teaches courses in the public
history and museum studies program at Ohio Northern University.
Besides being the editors each contributes a chapter.
ML420 2012-028614 978-0-7864-7067-9
Geraldine Farrar; opera’s charismatic innovator, 2d ed.
Nash, Elizabeth.
McFarland & Co., ©2012 186 p. $45.00 (pa)
Nash (theatre arts and dance, U. of Minnesota) introduces Farrar (1882-
1967), “America’s first lady of opera,” to a new generation. She traces her
life and career from her reign at the Metropolitan Opera to her
Hollywood film career and later support of African American singers.
This update of the 1981 edition includes notes on Farrar’s views on
operatic theory and practice and acting in the movies; her conversations
with protégé Camilla Williams; lists of her operatic roles, silent films,
and radio broadcasts; and a discography
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
ML420 978-1-61205-188-8
It ain’t me, babe; Bob Dylan and the performance of
authenticity.
Cossu, Andrea.
Paradigm Publishers, ©2012 195 p. $22.95 (pa)
For over five decades, Bob Dylan has remained an enigma to both fans
and critics. He has undergone multiple transformations throughout his
career while maintaining a level of artistic authenticity. In five chapters
covering four important tours and live performances, Cossu offers a
unique explanation of the many sides of Dylan. Focusing on the artist,
the audience, and the image, he examines the dynamics that temper the
making of fame and the role culture can play in artistic
reputation/representation.
ML420 2012-006210 978-1-58834-326-0
Madcap May; mistress of myth, men, and hope.
Kurin, Richard.
Smithsonian Books, ©2012 274 p. $27.95
Richard Kurin is under secretary for History, Art, and Culture at the
Smithsonian, and he understands better than most authors how to create
a carefully researched historical book that will entertain popular readers.
He gains a lot of help from his subject, May Lohe. An American icon
through the Gay Nineties, the Wild Twenties, and a survivor of the Great
Depression, Lohe was a popular entertainer, her era’s Madonna, Janet
Jackson, and Grace Kelly all rolled into one. She swept floors for star-
vation wages, found fame with her golden voice and brass manners,
fought for her rights and her citizenship, and was showered with jewels,
including the Hope diamond, by a bevy of international admirers—not
always in that order. Her story has remarkable turns (Was she an English
duchess? Native American? Did she really shoot that war hero? Become
famous for playing men onstage? Three husbands? Twelve husbands?
Only her hairdresser, and Mr. Kurin, know for sure). What’s most
remarkable is that a woman who was front-page news on multiple con-
tinents for years is now entirely forgotten. Kurin rediscovered May Lohe
while researching the history of the Hope diamond, and he shares with
readers the delights of his discovery. Like May Lohe herself, Kurin’s book
entertains, and remains positive in the face of both tragedy and triumph.
ML1200 2011-053216 978-0-19-976028-2
The orchestra; a very short introduction.
Holoman, D. Kern.
Oxford U. Press, ©2012 158 p. $11.95 (pa)
In this Oxford Very Short Introduction, Holoman (music, University of
California, Davis) reviews and explains the history, composition and func-
tioning of modern (Western) orchestras. He considers their history since
they emerged in 17th-century Europe; the working conditions and voca-
tional aims of, as well as relations between, musicians and other partic-
ipants; different kinds of venues where orchestras perform and the
architecture they inspire; the role money, patronage, and endowments
played in the rise of concert-going culture; conductors, why they matter,
and why maestros are a myth; musicology and popular music criticism;
the impact recording technology had on orchestras; and the relationship
between orchestras and politics, especially concerning peace advocacy. A
short conclusion repudiates the notion that orchestras are dead.
ML1255 2011-000910 978-1-57647-167-8
The dramatic symphony; issues and explorations from
Berlioz to Liszt.
Laudon, Robert Tallant. (Franz Liszt studies series; no.12)
Pendragon Press, ©2012 156 p. $46.00 (pa)
Berlioz called his Roméo et Juliette, which blended musical and extra-
musical elements, a “dramatic symphony.” Musicologist Laudon treats
this new style in musical genres of 1839-1851. He discusses debates at the
time over whether music should act purely on the senses (the German
view), or can also describe scenes or express passions (the French view).
Liszt’s embrace of the dramatic symphony led to program music and
symphonic poems that later became the accepted style. The book includes
year-by-year season highlights; illustrations; and notes on parodies of
these “monster” orchestras, and on the revolutions of 1848 and subse-
quent exodus to America.
ML1531 2011-052208 978-0-7546-0536-2
An imperishable heritage; British choral music from
Parry to Dyson; a study of selected works.
Town, Stephen.
Ashgate Publishing Co., ©2012 327 p. $124.95
Town (music, Northwest Missouri State U.) chose the genre of choral
music for its prominence place in British music over time. He selected
composers Hubert Parry, Charles Stanford, Ralph Vaughan Williams,
Gerald Finzi, Edmund Rubbra, and George Dyson—for their significant
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
contributions; and he selected works by these composers for their impor-
tance to the composers’ oeuvres and to history. His essays offer historical
context and critical discussion.
ML1700 2012-028596 978-0-393-93555-4
The story of opera.
Parakilas, James.
W.W. Norton, ©2013 507 p. $55.00 (pa)
Tracing the history of opera from the 17th century to the present,
Parakilas (performing arts, Bates College, Lewiston, Maine) enhances
readers’ experience of nights at the opera. Following explanation of the
roles of the orchestra, soloists, and chorus, he discusses selected operas’
narrative source, characters’ voices, and staging, from Verdi’s La traviata
(1853) to Kaija Saariaho’s L’Amour de loin (2000). The book includes a
timeline of opera milestones; illustrations (color stills, posters, set-design
drawings, and musical notation); remarks by persons associated with the
art form; further reading; a glossary; and companion website with
playlists of performances of featured operas.
ML3001 2012-020288 978-0-8028-6593-9
From memory to imagination; reforming the church’s
music.
Bradley, C. Randall. (Calvin Institute of Christian Worship liturgical
studies)
W.B. Eerdmans, ©2012 235 p. $25.00 (pa)
By looking at the power shifts the church has undergone through the
decades, Bradley (music, Baylor U.) examines the “worship wars” and
how the effects of postmodernism command new approaches to worship
and church music. With a deep love for the church and its music, the
author offers imaginative ways for the church to evolve and re-imagine
its music in an ecumenical age. This book is an engaging read for church
leaders and those interested in religious music. The book lacks a subject
index.
ML3186 2012-020329 978-1-4331-1904-0
Trinity of discord; the hymnal and poetic innovations of
Isaac Watts, Charles Wesley, and William Cowper.
Arnold, Richard.
Peter Lang Publishing Inc, ©2012 162 p. $74.95
Arnold (English, Alfaisal U., Saudi Arabia) explores the beginnings of
congregational singing in the Anglican church during 18th-century when
congregations were allowed to sing texts only from the Psalms. The pub-
lished works of Watts (1674-1748), Wesley (1707-88), and Cowper (1731-
1800) were popular but not accepted by church authorities until well into
the 19th century. The study is not indexed.
ML3187 2012-001908 978-0-313-37770-9
Jesus rocks the world; the definitive history of
contemporary Christian music; 2v.
Gersztyn, Bob.
Praeger, ©2012 506 p. $110.00
Gersztyn, a freelance photojournalist and writer, and former ordained
minister who became involved in the Jesus movement in Los Angeles,
surveys the history of contemporary Christian music. In the first volume,
he outlines the chronology, artists, and issues from the genre’s genesis as
the Jesus movement, through its evolution into contemporary Christian
music in the late 1970s, and musical developments up to the late 1980s,
including the origins and rise of Calvary Chapel, the band Love Song, the
record label Maranatha! Music and its artists, Billy Ray Hearn and
Sparrow Records, Larry Norman and Solid Rock Records, crossover
artists like Bob Dylan and Bruce Cockburn, Keith and Melody Green, the
Roman Catholic contingent, Barry McGuire, Amy Grant, Reunion
Records, and Word Records. The second volume explores its expansion
beyond the US from the 1990s to the present, with discussion of the
British scene; black Christian music; Andraé Crouch; Jars of Clay; the
Christian music industry; Pete Furler, the Newsboys, and Festival Con
Dios; Christian heavy metal; Alisa Childers and ZOEgirl; music festivals;
the Rock and Worship Roadshow; gay, lesbian, bisexual, and transgender
music; Larry Norman’s album from Cornerstone; and worship music.
Throughout, he relates the stories of artists, agents, producers, and
prophets drawn from interviews, and ends with chapters surveying 100
essential albums.
ML3470 2012-026593 978-0-313-37906-2
The album; a guide to pop music’s most provocative,
influential, and important creations; 4v.
Title main entry. Ed. by James E. Perone. (The Praeger singer-song-
writer collection)
Praeger, ©2012 1252 p. $257.00
In this accessible four-volume set for students and general readers, essays
–168–
on great albums are presented chronologically. Each volume begins with
an overview of the era musically and socially. About half of the essays
are by editor Perone (music, University of Mount Union); other contrib-
utors are musicians and scholars in American studies, history, sociology,
and popular culture studies. Although many essays include a biogra-
phical box, the essays focus on the artistic merits of each album and its
groundbreaking musical, stylistic, and lyrical elements. Essays also high-
light the impact of the album on popular culture and the music industry,
and discuss production and marketing aspects. Volume 1 covers 39
country, rock, soul, pop, and blues albums from Joan Baez in 1960 to the
Woodstock soundtrack of 1969. Volume 2 revisits the golden age of the
singer-songwriter, 1970-1973, looking at 46 albums, from George
Harrison’s All Things Must Pass to Stevie Wonder’s Innervisions. Volume
3 adds punk attitude to the mix, looking at 43 albums produced in the
period 1974-1988; diverse artists covered include Patti Smith, The
Ramones, The Sex Pistols, Tom Waits, and The Eagles. Volume 4
examines 35 albums from 1989 to the present, by artists including
Nirvana, Sheryl Crow, Sufjan Stevens, and of course Lady Gaga. The four-
volume set also includes a discography, a chronology of the album as a
sales medium and as an artistic statement, and a list of 101 other
important albums. Sadly, there are no pictures. Some of the essays are
drawn from previously published volumes in the series, The Praeger
Singer-Songwriter Collection.
ML3470 2012-001679 978-1-4094-0678-5
The art of record production; an introductory reader for a
new academic field.
Title main entry. Ed. by Simon Frith and Simon Zagorski-Thomas.
(Ashgate popular and folk music series)
Ashgate Publishing Co., ©2012 301 p. $39.95 (pa)
This introductory reader presents 16 contributed essays arranged under
three broad themes—historical approaches, theoretical approaches, and
case studies—each section concluding with comments and commentaries
by industry professionals and producers. A sampling of topics: profes-
sional recording and home recording from the 1920s to the 1950s; the
changing role of the studio in the age of the internet; the conflict and
connection of headphone mixes and multiple audioscapes; the place of
the producer in the discourse of rock; and 50 years of music studios in
revolutionary Cuba. Editors Simon Frith (music, U. of Edinburgh, UK)
and Simon Zagorski-Thomas (London College of Music, U. of London,
UK) have brought together an eclectic roster of authors, selecting from
presentations made at Art of Record Production conferences held
annually since 2005.
ML3534 2012-003059 978-1-4411-4649-6
Reverberations of dissent; identity and expression in
Iran’s illegal music scene.
Robertson, Bronwen.
Continuum Publishing Group, ©2012 162 p. $110.00
By and large, finds Robertson (music, U. of Melbourne), Iran’s unofficial
rock musicians are young men aged 17-30 from middle to upper-class
families in the affluent northern suburbs who are competent technicians
and highly educated. The socio-economic status is necessary, she says,
because there is no money to be made, and equipment and training are
expensive. Her year of observation and participation is distilled into dis-
cussions of such topics as a political overview from king to clergy, music
in Iran from pop to pariah, music and Islam, case studies of selected par-
ticipants from TehrenAvenue’s online music festival, inventing inventive
identities, and the 2009 presidential elections and potential futures for
unofficial rock music in Iran.
ML3557 2011-052246 978-0-87071-675-1
Songs of power and prayer in the Columbia Plateau; the
Jesuit, the medicine man, and the Indian hymn singer.
Hamill, Chad Stephen. (First Peoples; new directions in indigenous
studies)
Oregon State U. Press, ©2012 169 p. $21.95 (pa)
Himself of Spokane and non-Indian descent, Hamill (ethnomusicology,
Northern Arizona U.) explores the connection between music and spiri-
tuality among the native peoples in the watershed of the Columbia River,
an area that extends east to Montana and north far into British Columbia.
He covers power and prophecy in the plateau, Christians answer the call,
the old Indian hymns, song and power, Gibson Eli, medicine and mir-
acles, and the end and the afterlife.
This consolodated bimonthly bibliography contains all of the content formerly
split between Reference and Research Book News and SciTech Book News.
–169–
ML3790 2012-025306 978-1-61774-089-3
Making the scene; Nashville; how to live, network, and
succeed in Music City.
Sullivan, Liam.
Hal Leonard, ©2012 264 p. $19.99 (pa)
Sullivan, a musician and creative director at a music production
company in Nashville, supplies musicians with a guide that lists
resources for living, networking, and succeeding in Nashville. He surveys
the history of the town and its music scene, then identifies resources for
finding a place to live and settling in. The guide lists stores and other
businesses, restaurants, clubs, open mic/writers’ nights, organizations,
music publishing terms and businesses, music schools, local producers
and recording studios, talent agencies, music instrument and record
stores, music festivals, radio stations, and other resources, ending with
four suggested road trips. Incorporated throughout are interviews with
music professionals.
ML3830 2012-006890 978-0-398-08803-3
Psychological foundations of musical behavior, 5th ed.
Radocy, Rudolf E. and J. David Boyle.
C.C. Thomas, ©2012 505 p. $79.95
For psychologists, musicians, educators, therapists, businesspeople, and
others, Radocy (music education and music therapy, U. of Kansas) and
Boyle (music education and music therapy, U. of Miami) survey the psy-
chology of musical behavior from a comprehensive and psychological
perspective, also drawing on sociology, anthropology, philosophy, music
history, acoustics, and business, and focusing on questions of describing,
predicting, and explaining human musical behavior. They discuss psy-
choacoustics; musical preference; views of why people have music,
music’s functions for individuals, and its social values and cultural
importance; nonmuscial or extramusical purposes like therapy, cere-
monies, enhancing a story, or selling something; perception, judgment,
and measurement of music, as well as physical and psychophysical
events; rhythmic behaviors; horizontal and pitch organization, tonality,
scales, and value judgments, and related pedagogical issues; per-
formance, improvisation, and composition; the affective response to
music; the development and prediction of musical ability; music learning
as a form of learning; music abnormalities; and future research. This
edition incorporates new research and reinterprets some older findings.
ML3845 2012-027431 978-1-61451-154-0
Semiotics of classical music; how Mozart, Brahms and
Wagner talk to us.
Tarasti, Eero. (Semiotics, communication and cognition; v.10)
De Gruyter, ©2012 493 p. $168.00
Tarasti (musicology, U. of Helsinki, Finland) presents the theory or phi-
losophy of existential semiotics that he has been developing in previous
books for the past 15 years. After years under the influence of French
semiology, he explains, he has returned to his earlier roots in German
speculative philosophy and its continuation in continental epistemic
thought even in France. He covers the classical style, the Romantic era,
rhetorics and synaesthesias, and in the Slavonic world. Among his topics
are the existential and transcendental analysis of music, the irony of
romanticism, whether Wagner’s leitmotifs have a system, the implicit
musical semiotics of Marcel Proust, and an essay on Russian music.
ML3849 2012-563962 978-1-84383-730-5
British music and literary context; artistic connections in
the long nineteenth century.
Allis, Michael. (Music in Britain, 1600-1900)
The Boydell Press, ©2012 320 p. $99.00
In this interdisciplinary study, Allis (music, University of Leeds) shows
how British composers of the late 19th and early 20th century combined
literary texts with their music in various ways, such as collaboration
between a composer and a poet, the sustained musical promotion of a
literary figure, the refiguring of a poetic text in music, and the musical
application of narrative strategies from a literary genre. Composers
studied are Hubert Parry, Edward Elgar, Charles Villiers Stanford, and
Granville Bantock. Numerous examples of musical notation are included.
The Boydell Press is an imprint of Boydell & Brewer.
ML3880 2011-030954 978-1-4411-5087-5
D i c k e n s , j o u r n a l i s m , m u s i c ; H o u s e h o l d w o r d s and All the
year round .
Bledsoe, Robert Terrell. (Continuum literary studies series)
Continuum Publishing Group, ©2012 256 p. $110.00
This is a scholarly addition to the area of Dickens studies in English lit-
erature. The author, Robert Terrell Bledsoe, (emeritus, U. of Texas at El
Paso) is an expert on Victorian studies with a particular interest in jour-
nalism. The book looks at articles on music in Dickens’ two journals:
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
Household Words and All The Year Round. Bledsoe believes the articles,
though written by various contributors, reflect Dickens’ interests and
goals as an editor. He provides textual analysis of the articles, and sees
Dickens’ interest in music as focused on two themes: elevating society by
helping people become more socially respectable in their public enter-
tainments, and using art to make life more bearable. He notes that the
later journal was more strongly interested in music, especially classical
music, and ties this development to Dickens’ growing personal interest in
music and the musical friendships he developed after the death of his
wife. The book is divided into four chapters: Household Words, All The
Year Round, the influence of Dickens’ musical friend H. F. Chorley on
Household Words, and music and friendship. Approximately a quarter of
the book’s length is in the endnotes, index, and works cited.
ML3916 2010013784 978-1-59451-789-1
Playing for change; music and musicians in the service of
social movements.
Rosenthal, Rob and Richard Flacks.
Paradigm Publishers, ©2012 323 p. $23.95 (pa)
Juxtaposing views that music is a force that can change the world and
that music is entertaining at best but irrelevant to the real job of reform,
sociologists Rosenthal (Wesleyan U.) and Flacks (emeritus, U. of
California-Santa Barbara) argue that there is a range of connections
between music and social change, and that the uses, functions, and
effects of music in movements are surprisingly and intriguingly compli-
cated. Among their perspectives are Aretha Franklin sings to Charlie
Masson, the audience and reception, serving the committed, conversion
and recruitment, how musicking harms movements, and what makes a
difference.
ML3917 978-3-643-90188-0
Playing music, performing resistance; the dynamics of
resistance through music in the Colombian South Pacific
coast.
Lozano, Natalia. (Masters of peace; v.5)
LIT Verlag, ©2012 128 p. $29.95 (pa)
A native of Bogota, Columbia, Lozano here presents the thesis for her
2009 master’s degree in peace studies at the University of Innsbrook,
Switzerland. Having done her bachelor’s work on the music of displaced
people in Bogota, she moves her focus to communities on the country’s
Pacific coast. She asks whether the act of playing marimba music is an
act of resistance to the oppressive regime, whether it is a manifestation
of peace, and so whether the musicians from Guapí are making peace
by playing their vernacular music. She does not provide an index.
Distributed in the US by ISBS.
ML3917 2011943847 978-1-4214-0571-1
Sound clash; listening to American studies.
Title main entry. Ed. by Kara Keeling and Josh Kun.
Johns Hopkins U. Press, ©2012 426 p. $35.00 (pa)
Originally published in the September 2011 issue of American Quarterly,
the 17 papers presented here by Keeling (American studies, U. of
Southern California) and Kun (communication and journalism, U. of
Southern California) are united thematically by their consideration of
sound as an entrance into various facets of American studies. They are
organized into three sections considering sound technologies and subjec-
tivities; sounding race, ethnicity, and gender; and sound, citizenship, and
the public sphere.
ML3920 2012-013027 978-0-398-08818-7
Music therapy in principle and practice, 2d ed.
Michel, Donald E. and Joseph Pinson.
C.C. Thomas, ©2012 223 p. $52.95
For music educators, rehabilitation professionals, and practicing and
student music therapists, the late Michel and Pinson (music therapy,
Texas Woman’s U.) offer a textbook on the principles and practice of
music therapy. They cover basic philosophical concepts in the field, his-
torical perspectives, and employment opportunities; professional guide-
lines; assessment; protocol planning; music therapy and motor,
communication, cognitive, and social-emotional skills; and research.
Updated and expanded, this edition has more on managing and coping
with anxiety-associated situations and types of lifetime developmental
skills, as well as an expanded chapter on professional ethics and a
section on new trends. It has more on focusing treatment on the needs
at the time of assessment and being aware of levels of stress at all stages
of treatment.
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
MT90 2011-946250 978-1-133-30794-5
Music of the peoples of the world, 3d ed.
Alves, William.
Schirmer, ©2013 416 p. $144.95 (pa)
Alves (Harvey Mudd College) teaches non-majors how to listen to and
appreciate music from different cultures. He introduces various musical
elements and listening skills, then organizes chapters geographically,
drawing on music theory, musicology, and ethnomusicology to discuss
the music of 11 cultures, with an overview of their distinctive musical
and cultural elements, the region’s history and musical life, and a more
detailed look at specific cultures and genres within the larger region.
This edition has a revised order of chapters, which are more modular to
allow flexibility; a new section on the music of Cuba, as well as other
new sections; new listening guides; expanded and updated sections on
popular music; added close-up maps of regions; and references to tracks
on the CDs (available separately) and playlist. A companion website fea-
tures quizzes, flashcards, interactive versions of listening exercises,
YouTube videos, and the playlist.
MT100 2012-011744 978-1-58046-419-2
Elliott Carter’s “What Next?”; communication, cooperation,
and separation.
Capuzzo, Guy. (Eastman studies in music; v.89)
U. of Rochester Press, ©2012 189 p. $75.00
Written in 1997, What Next? was a one-act opera created by composer
Elliot Carter and music critic and librettist, Paul Griffiths. In the first
book to strictly focus on only one of Carter’s compositions, Capuzzo
(music theory, U. of North Carolina) offers an incredibly detailed and full
length study of What Next?; analyzing the interplay of words and music
while making a significant contribution to Carter scholarship. Highly
academic in nature, this study is intended for music theorists, composers,
and musicologists. Contains a list of symbols, abbreviations, terminology,
and locutions.
ART, ARCHITECTURE
N5300 2011-941009 978-1-111-84072-3
Gardner’s art through the ages; a concise global history,
3d ed.
Gardner, Helen. Ed. by Fred S. Kleiner.
Wadsworth Publishing Co., ©2013 636 p. $184.95 (pa)
Helen Gardner’s text has been the standard textbook in art history
courses since publication of the first edition in 1926; more recently,
special concise editions have been created from it for a wide range of
introductory art history courses. Designed for use in one-semester
courses, Kleiner’s (Boston U.) third edition text features more photo-
graphs, plans, and drawings than the previous two editions, nearly all in
color; revisions in all chapters to reflect new research and discoveries; a
new chapter on the exploration of contemporary art worldwide over the
past three decades; and chapter-opening “Framing the Era” essays and
timelines summarizing major developments of the era. Oversize: 9x11.5”.
N5970 2012-001118 978-90-04-18555-5
Reassessing the roles of women as ‘makers’ of medieval
art and architecture; 2v.
Title main entry. Ed. by Therese Martin. (Visualising the Middle Ages;
v.7)
BRILL, ©2012 1109 p. $299.00
The 24 lengthy essays of this 2-volume work investigate the role of
women as creators, patrons, and users of art and architecture in
medieval Europe and the eastern Mediterranean. Written by art histo-
rians based in the U.S., Europe, and Israel, the essays are grouped into
the themes of display and concealment, ownership and community, col-
laboration and authorship, family and audience, piety and authority,
memory and motherhood, groupings which advertise the role of gender
studies in informing the methodology of the collection, though most,
such as the essays on the tomb of Elisenda de Montcada, by Eileen
McKiernan González (Berea College, Kentucky) and that on the history,
iconography, and use of the cult object known as Vierge ouvrante, by
Melissa R. Katz (U. of Exeter, the UK) expand beyond the confines of
gender studies to explore specific works of art in their full historic
context. Other topics include non-male patronage in Islamic Córdoba,
portrayals of women in Jewish books, Emma of Blois as patron, illus-
trated textiles in Germany, women patrons in late medieval Ireland, and
women embroiderers in early medieval Ireland. The volumes are heavily
illustrated with color and b&w images.
–170–
N6490 2012932512 978-0-500-23898-1
Commissioning contemporary art; a handbook for
curators collectors and artists.
Buck, Louisa and Daniel McClean.
Thames & Hudson, ©2012 320 p. $29.95
In this primer for patrons, artists, curators, commissioning agents, and
others involved in the art world, Buck, an art critic and journalist, and
McClean, a lawyer specializing in art law, explain why patrons employ
artists and why artists choose to accept their commissions. They provide
a step-by-step guide through each stage of the commissioning process.
Chronological coverage progresses from when, why, and how to com-
mission, though ensuring the afterlife of the commissioned work. Ethical
and conceptual issues underpinning current patronage are also
addressed. Quotes from real-life artists and practitioners are presented
throughout the book; unfortunately, the quotes are printed in annoying
orange, making them difficult to read.
N6490 2011-050251 978-1-4411-4258-0
The phenomenology of modern art; exploding Deleuze,
illuminating style.
Crowther, Paul.
Continuum Publishing Group, ©2012 281 p. $44.95 (pa)
Crowther (philosophy, National U. of Ireland) addresses basic features of
modern art “on the basis of style as a bearer of aesthetic meaning.” He
defines style as “a way of visually disclosing attitudes toward aspects of
the world (including social factors) and which engages, indeed, with
some of the deepest aspects of human experience.” To this end, he comes
out this study with a phenomenological approach, drawing on the aes-
thetic philosophy and preoccupations of Gilles Deleuze, Friedrich
Nietzsche, Maurice Merleau-Ponty and Immanuel Kant. He notes several
stylistic tendencies in modern art, which for his study is confined to
visual forms: overcoming traditional academic notions of ideal form, an
emphasis on nonconventionally artistic subjects, new pictorial codes
extending “the kinds of perceptual relations that can be expressed
directly through visual art”, and an insistently planer emphasis. His
interrogation with Deleuze’s study of Francis Bacon is a critical one that
argues against essentialist, hierarchical “grand narrative” about modern
art. He is interested in Deleuze and abstraction in art, which he argues
in the end “engages actively with the relation between visual appearance
and reality at the deepest levels.”
N6537 978-0-500-51649-2
Joseph Cornell’s manual of marvels. (CD-ROM included)
Title main entry. Ed. by Dickran Tashjian and Analisa Leppanen-
Guerra.
Thames & Hudson, ©2012 156 p. $80.00
In the 1930s, assemblage artist Joseph Cornell found a 1911 French
handbook of agricultural practices; he altered many pages of the
handbook with his own whimsical collages, drawings, hand-colored
engravings, cut-outs, fold-outs, visual jokes, and French puns. The
original altered book, found after Cornell’s death in 1972, is now held at
the Philadelphia Museum of Art. This two-book/CD-ROM package offers
an authentic-looking handmade, abridged facsimile edition reproducing
60 pages of Cornell’s much longer book, plus a book of four illustrated
essays on Cornell’s art, written by the editors and one other contributor.
The essays are illustrated with color photos of pages from Cornell’s
altered book, plus many color historical illustrations, art, and ephemera
that inspired Cornell. An interactive CD contains the entire altered book
by Cornell, along with commentary. The two books and the CD-ROM are
packaged in a cardboard box designed to look like collage elements
affixed to a wooden cigar box; the box features a nifty magnetic closure.
Tashjian is affiliated with the University of California-Irvine. Leppanen-
Guerra teaches art history at DePaul University.
N6537 2011-534275 978-0-7148-6309-2
Silent theater; the art of Edward Hopper.
Wells, Walter.
Phaidon Press Ltd., ©2012 264 p. $39.95 (pa)
Winner of the 2009 Umhoefer Prize for Achievement in the Arts and
Humanities, this oversized softbound volume documents the work of
painter Edward Hopper. The book is produced with Phaidon’s usual
attention to detail, and filled with high-quality reproductions of Hopper’s
paintings, as well as works by other artists relevant to the discussion of
Hopper’s work. Walter Wells’ text is well-researched and written (he is
emeritus professor of both English and Humanities and American
Studies at California State University, Dominguez Hills, US). When ana-
lyzing the effect of Hopper’s images on the viewer, Wells assumes that
viewer is a white heterosexual man, in concordance with the historical
demographics of Hopper’s collectors, critics, evaluators, and fans. The
final chapter looks at Hopper as an impresario, theatrically staging his
–171–
images. The author strikes a careful balance among three kinds of
analysis: the paintings in relation to the painter’s life, the paintings in
terms of cultural and Freudian iconography and viewer response, and
the painter’s choices as aesthetic and technical. Wells offers extensive
research and analysis without attempting to codify all meanings, leaving
room for mystery. Some chapter headings are thematic (“Vortices of
Despair,” “The Furtive Eye,” “Sexual Permutations”) while others are tech-
nical (“Women in Windows,” “By the Sea,” “Architecture”). The author’s
strongest editorial choices come in selecting which paintings represent
the former categories.
N6538 2012003005 978-0-8061-4304-0
The James T. Bialac Native American art collection;
selected works.
Title main entry. Ed. by Mark Andrew White.
U. of Oklahoma Press, ©2012 223 p. $29.95 (pa)
James T. Bialac was the child of working-class immigrants who became
a successful lawyer. Along the way he discovered art, and began to collect
the work of Native American artists (and related artists such as Fritz
Scholder) and to do legal work for Native communities. As a result, he
became a self-taught collector with personal connections to many tribal
artists. Bialac bought work from across the continent in styles that
ranged from Indian-school style watercolors and Inuit ink sketches to
modernist political works and contemporary abstract painting. This book
documents selected pieces from the collection of more than 4000 works
of art Bialac donated to the Fred Jones, Jr. Museum of Art at the
University of Oklahoma. The book is oversized and available in soft or
hardcover (ISBN: 978-0-8061-4299-9) with fine reproduction quality.
Paintings make up the majority of the works in the collection, but a large
number of first-rate kachina dolls and a smaller number of sculptural
works and jewelry are included. The collection has its greatest depth in
the US Southwest, and traditional styles are strongly represented.
However, Bialac’s collecting was ecletic, and artistically rather than
ethnographically focused. Works by most canonically-major Native artists
of the 20th century are seen here, including Harrison Begay, Alvin
“Makya” James, Robert Chee, Charles Loloma, Emmi Whitehorse, Jaune
Quick-to-See Smith, and Diego Romero.
N6764 2011-031829 978-1-4094-0977-9
Transculturation in British art, 1770-1930.
Title main entry. Ed. by Julie F. Codell. (British art; global contexts)
Ashgate Publishing Co., ©2012 289 p. $119.95
In this contribution to scholarship on the colonial aspects of visual art,
Codell (art history/Center for Asian Research, Arizona State U.) compiles
essays that examine spatial forms in which transculturation across
‘contact zones’ was represented in and about the British Empire and in
countries subject to British influence. International art historians offer
interpretations of the production and reception of colonial-era images
and image-makers, including portraits of a British baron in 18th-century
Bengal, representations of Othello and Desdemona in Victorian England,
photographs of aboriginal women in Canada, sculptures of Congolese
peoples, John Singer Sargent’s portrayals of British males, and a UK
founder of art museums in South Arica. Several of the numerous art
illustrations are in color.
N6797 2011-486255 978-1-85759-678-6
Constable and Salisbury; the soul of landscape.
Wilcox, Timothy.
Scala Publishers, ©2011 192 p. $39.95 (pa)
This catalog was published to accompany an exhibition of the same
name presented by the UK’s Salisbury and South Wiltshire Museum,
from May to September 2011, to commemorate Constable’s first visit to
Salisbury in 1811. Through six chronological chapters, illustrated with
some 150 full-color and b&w reproductions, curator and art historian
Wilcox provides a survey of Constable’s varied responses to the archi-
tecture and landscape of Salisbury and other areas of southern England
from 1811 to 1831. The text also includes a chronology of Constable’s life
and map of Salisbury and the district. Distributed in North America by
ACC Distribution.
N6923 2011-033460 978-1-4094-2926-5
Vasari and the Renaissance print.
Gregory, Sharon. (Visual culture in early modernity)
Ashgate Publishing Co., ©2012 427 p. $124.95
Gregory (St. Francis Xavier U., Antigonish) suggests that Giorgio Vasari
(1511-75) invented art history partly because the recent profusion of
prints exposed him to a wide variety of artistic images and allowed him
to conceive of a comprehensive history of art. In the 1550 edition of his
Lives of the Artists, she says, he paid little attention to engravings and
woodcuts, but in the second edition of 1568, he created an entirely new
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
chapter on the life of Marcantonio Raimondi and other engravers of
prints to encapsulate the development of the increasingly important
graphic media. High quality monochrome reproductions appear
throughout, along with a battery of 12 color plates.
N6988 978-1-936235-29-2
The Russian avant-garde and radical modernism; an
introductory reader.
Title main entry. Ed. by Dennis G. Ioffe and Frederick H. White.
(Cultural syllabus)
Academic Studies Press, ©2012 486 p. $59.00
Ioffe (arts and philosophy, Ghent U., Belgium) and White (humanities
and social science, Utah Valley U., US) present a collection of selections
from, and analytical essays on, Russian avant-garde literature, film,
theater and other art. Works are arranged chronologically and themati-
cally, starting with Russian futurism in the early 20th century, supre-
matism and constructivism in the 1920s, the OBERIU artist-collective of
the 1920s and ‘30s, experimental theater in the 1930s, and the work of
Sergei Eisenstein and Dziga Vertov. Reading selections predominate in the
first two sections, while later chapters have original essays. Ioffe provides
a concluding addendum that reviews the tradition of experimentation in
Russian culture and the Russian avant-garde. The contributors are pro-
fessors of Slavic language and cultures, art of various forms, and
European and United States history.
N7280 2012-933050 978-0-500-51642-3
Persian art & architecture.
Stierlin, Henri.
Thames & Hudson, ©2012 279 p. $65.00
The art and architecture that came from the fusion of Persian culture
with Muslim faith is the subject of this new book by Henri Stierlin. In
practice, the book focuses mostly on architectural decoration, particularly
the colored mosaic tile interiors and exteriors of mosques, palaces, civic
buildings, and minarets, with a secondary focus on architecture (with
related material) and miniature painting. It is lavishly illustrated with
excellent photographs by the author, Anne Stierlin, and Adrien Buchet,
and lovely as a coffee-table book. For readers not familiar with
Persian/Iranian work, these photos are a jaw-dropping introduction to
the sophisticated beauty and virtuosity of Persian buildings, and the
pointlessness of dividing “craft” and “ornament” from fine art or archi-
tecture. For readers in Persian architecture and arts, the photos show
many buildings and their visual effects in detail from a variety of dis-
tances. There are also some photographs of miniature painting and other
arts. The text is respectful and informed on a range of topics in art, archi-
tecture, history, and traditions in faith, science, and society across the
Persian cultural sphere from the Near East to Central Asia. The book
surveys Persian work from the rise of Islam through the 19th century.
Its focus on a few arts allows the author to do this job in depth. The
author is an architectural historian with many previous books. There is
an excellent rear index of architectural plans as well as a glossary, index,
and general bibliography. Of interest to readers looking for a beautiful
art book, and technical readers in architecture, art history, or Persian and
Islamic cultures. Oversize: 11x13”.
N7290 2012-000955 978-1-4094-3557-0
Medieval and Renaissance Famagusta; studies in
architecture, art and history.
Title main entry. Ed. by Michael J. K. Walsh, Peter W. Edbury and
Nicholas S. H. Coureas.
Ashgate Publishing Co., ©2012 341 p. $119.95
This superbly produced volume, printed on glossy paper and filled with
b&w and color images of excellent quality, offers a thorough overview of
current scholarship on the exceptional city of Famagusta, Cyprus. Written
by an international group of historians and archaeologists, the essays
describe the authors’ researches regarding the city’s Armenian,
Byzantine, and western Gothic churches; the heraldic shields and fortifi-
cations of the Venetians; the source of the city’s wealth as a port and
source of trade in textiles; and descriptions and analysis of the sculpture,
wall painting, and the dating and chronology of the city’s most famous
church, the Gothic Cathedral of St Nicholas. The final group of essays are
devoted to the urgent issue of conservation of the city’s medieval and ren-
aissance architecture.
N7392 978-1-86914-222-3
Siyazama; art, AIDS and education in South Africa.
Title main entry. Ed. by Kate Wells et al.
U. of KwaZulu-Natal Press, ©2012 170 p. $38.50 (pa)
In the late 1990s, graphic designer and educator Kate Wells began an art-
based HIV/AIDS intervention project focused on a group of South African
rural traditional female artists. By giving the women the opportunity to
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
make and market traditional crafts, while educating them about
HIV/AIDS, the project helped the artists find new audiences for their
work, with some becoming very successful in their communities. This
book provides profiles of some of these artists, a history of the project,
information about traditional South African art, and insight into a cre-
ative approach to the problems associated with AIDS education in rural
Africa. It is richly illustrated with color photographs, including portraits
of the artists and images of the art, and includes some information about
other similar craft, health, and economic projects in South Africa.
Distributed in the US by ISBS.
N7400 978-1-74258-394-5
Guy Grey-Smith; life force.
Gaynor, Andrew.
U. of Washington Press, ©2012 291 p. $59.95 (pa)
Considered one of Australia’s most significant artists of the 20th century,
Guy Grey-Smith was a painter, printmaker, ceramicist, and a pioneer of
modernism. For the first time ever, Gaynor (art history, U. of Melbourne,
AU) has been given access to the late artist’s notebooks, correspondence,
war-time sketches, and estate in this beautifully illustrated collection.
With informative text, photographs, and full-color images of Guy’s works,
this book provides a definitive portrait of the artist, his time as a
prisoner of war, and his incredible 35-year contribution to the Australian
art community.
N7425 2012-932513 978-0-500-23896-7
In my view; personal reflections on art by today’s leading
artists.
Title main entry. Ed. by Simon Grant.
Thames & Hudson, ©2012 208 p. $40.00
Art historian and journalist Simon Grant asked seventy-five major pro-
fessional artists from all over the world to each name a single artist who
has been deeply influential on their lives and work, and to write a short
essay about their influence. In any such book, who counts as a major
living artist is arguable; Grant has chosen artists he was interested in,
who were interested in the project. This may be as good a way as any to
organize such a project, and he has been consciously and carefully inter-
national in scope. There are two main limits to the project. These are
high-art-market artists in a Western tradition; the majority create two-
dimensional gallery-style work; most are painters. Most of the artists who
have influenced them are also painters in that tradition, from the
Renaissance onward. There are some lovely exceptions, and unexpected
alliances and differences of style between the artists and their influences.
The book as a whole has a meditative feel. Each essay includes repro-
ductions of artworks by the artist cited as the influence; some of these
reproductions are small, others are large and beautifully printed.
Reproductions of work by some but not all of the artist-writers are
included; considerations of space seem to have determined this choice.
The book will interest general readers, as well as artists inside and
outside the high-art world who are interested in the question of
influence.
N7483 2011-041728 978-0-7546-3485-0
The art of religion; Sforza Pallavicino and art theory in
Bernini’s Rome.
Delbeke, Maarten. (Histories of vision)
Ashgate Publishing Co., ©2012 241 p. $124.95
This study highlights fundamental differences and tensions between the
Jesuit cardinal Pallavicino and the artist Bernini. Through close readings
and comparison of texts, Delbeke (architecture and urban planning,
Ghent U., Belgium; art history, U. of Leiden, The Netherlands) develops
an understanding of the visual arts in the papal courts of Urban VIII and
Alexander VII. Pallavicino’s writings articulate core religious questions
regarding art in connection with faith, idolatry, and illusionism and
stand in strong contrast to Bernini’s perspectives.
N7572 2011-946035 978-0-500-23892-9
The naked nude.
Borzello, Frances.
Thames & Hudson, ©2012 192 p. $45.00
Examining the representation of nudes in twentieth and twenty-first
century art, art historian Frances Borzello contrasts the idealized, bal-
anced, prosperous and confident nudes discussed in Kenneth Clark?’s,
The Nude: A Study In Ideal Form (1956) with today?’s more raw and
grittier nudes. With engaging text and 130 provocative and beautifully
reproduced images of nudes in painting, performance art, sculpture and
portraiture, this hardback embraces the vulnerability of the new nude
and celebrates the artists that use the body to bring humanity back into
the art world.
–172–
N8065 978-99932-7-387-5
An eighteenth-century Neapolitan crib in Malta; the
evolution of the Italian crib; a threshold to the Bourbon
crib.
Vella, Edgar.
Midsea Books Ltd, ©2011 144 p. $64.00
The Neapolitan crib (or nativity scene) is typically crowded with lively
and exuberant figurines celebrating the birth of Christ. They were
popular with clergy and aristocracy mostly between the late 17th and
early 19th centuries. A combination of folk art and fine art, the
Neapolitan crib could contain many different scenes as well as a wide
array of delicately sculpted and meticulously clothed characters. Vella dis-
cusses the history of the crib, and typical scenes and characters found in
Neapolitan cribs. The bulk of the book is devoted to photos of Vella’s crib,
focusing mainly on the finely detailed figurines and accompanied by
biographies of the 18th century artists who created them. Distributed in
North America by The David Brown Book Co.
N8193 2011-924496 978-0-7643-3739-0
Thai & Southeast Asian paintings; 18th through 20th
centuries.
Bogle, James Emanuel.
Schiffer Publishing Ltd., ©2011 176 p. $49.99
Bogle first became exposed to Asian art in 1958, while in Thailand to
work on a city plan for Bangkok with a team of professionals. His prior
art history studies at the U. of Pennsylvania had surveyed only works of
Western cultures. Captivated by what he saw in Thailand in the late
1950s, he immediately began collecting Southeast Asian paintings and
other art forms—a passion which he shares in this beautiful sampling of
Southeast Asian religious paintings inspired by Theravada Buddhism.
Illustrated with some 140 full-color images, the text includes background
information on the genre and the historical development of Southeast
Asian art as compared to Chinese, Japanese, and Indian art. The images
are organized into thematic chapters, and each image is accompanied by
detailed explanatory notes. Oversize: 9.25x12.25”.
N8195 2012-010499 978-0-8248-3525-5
Making faces; self and image creation in a Himalayan
valley.
Hingorani, Alka.
U. of Hawai’i Press, ©2013 147 p. $45.00
Hingorani, an independent researcher/photographer (PhD, art history, U.
of California, Berkeley), interested in Indian art, focuses on the inter-
section of geography, history, and Hindu-animistic traditions in the Kulla
district of Himachal Pradesh in the lower Himalayas. Hingorani’s color
photographs and art images from the Franco-Indian Research Pvt. Ltd.,
Mumbai, and the Philadelphia Museum of Art illustrate such major fes-
tivals as the Dashera. She discusses the creation of deity representations
and objects for the festival, their symbolism, artisans, and Indian the-
ories of aesthetics. The book includes a glossary and bibliography.
N8199 2012-004186 978-0-674-06573-4
Picturing the true form; Daoist visual culture in
traditional China.
Huang, Shih-shan Susan. (Harvard East Asian monographs; 342)
Harvard University Press, ©2012 497 p. $69.95
Huang (art history, Rice U.) presents a comprehensive catalog and review
of Daoist iconography, art, cartography, diagrams, charts and aesthetic
influence in traditional China visual culture. The theme of the text, true
form, is “not static, but instead entails a vigorous quest, an active journey
of seeing underlying and secret phenomena through a series of meta-
morphoses.” To that end, she argues that three modes of images are
central to Daoist symbolism: aniconic, immaterial/invisible, and emphe-
meral. She aims to distinguish a Daoist image theory more adequate to
Daoist dynamism than static Buddhist models. The text is divided into
two parts that focus on esoteric and exoteric visual forms. These inner
and outer halves are further divided into chapters on bodies and the
cosmos, mapping the world, charts of the true-form, ritual space and
equipment, performing the salvation ritual, and painting mobile deities.
In an epilogue, she lists several points of consideration for developing
Daoist image theory including visual vocabularies, religious meaning and
ritual function, iconography and beyond. Nearly every page is full of bril-
liant color plates that make this a treat to simply view. Her primary
sources include the Daoist Canon printed in 1445, as well as Schipper
and Verellen’s historical companion to it.
–173–
N8580 2011-033878 978-1-4094-3149-7
Inganno —the art of deception; imitation, reception, and
deceit in early modern art.
Title main entry. Ed. by Sharon Gregory and Sally Anne Hickson.
(Visual culture in early modernity)
Ashgate Publishing Co., ©2012 204 p. $104.95
The Eros Sleeping sculpture gracing the cover has been traced to the
Greek or Roman period. Are copies that Michelangelo was urged to make
of his Sleeping Cupid paying homage to this influence or willful misrep-
resentations? This example is emblematic of anxieties regarding authen-
ticity and the development of expertise in the rapidly-evolving Roman
antiquities market in the Renaissance. In this important catalyst to a new
branch of research on the history and purpose of the copy, art historians
Gregory (St. Francis Xavier U., Nova Scotia) and Hickson (U. of Guelph,
Canada) introduce nine illustrated case studies that address such issues.
Hickson’s essay on Giuseppe Oroglogi treats a Venetian scholar who sat-
irized his society as one that thrived on deception.
NA483 2010-281242 978-1-84383-760-2
Medieval church window tracery in England. (reprint
2010)
Hart, Stephen.
Boydell & Brewer, ©2012 154 p. $34.95 (pa)
Though the design of great cathedral windows certainly had an impact
on window tracery in small churches, says retired architect Hart, he
believes that other influences were also at work and perhaps more
powerfully. Indeed he traces an evolution of church window tracery
down the centuries that is completely distinct from that of cathedral
windows. He defines the mainstream styles, differentiates the many sub-
styles and variations developed from them, places these variations with
the context of the progression of window tracery design, and
demonstrates connections between styles. His own photographs, most
black and white, illustrate.
NA730 2012-017303 978-1-57233-874-6
Tennessee log buildings; a folk tradition.
Rehder, John B.
U. of Tennessee Press, ©2012 160 p. $29.95 (pa)
The product of over four decades of research and photography, this book
describes the architecture of historic log buildings in 42 counties in
Tennessee, as well as providing limited social context. Chapters are
divided by building type, giving weight to some Appalachian history and
note-worthy buildings as well. Notch types, timber types, building
layouts, and county distributions of house types are all heavily detailed.
Includes many b&w photographs as well as an appendix of distribution
maps, references, and an index.
NA737 2011-053070 978-0-393-73359-4
Andrew Jackson Downing; essential texts.
Downing, Andrew Jackson. Ed. by Robert Twombly.
W.W. Norton, ©2012 400 p. $35.00 (pa)
Andrew Jackson Downing, a pioneering figure of 19th-century US land-
scape architecture, was the founding editor of The Horticulturalist and
Journal of Rural Art and Rural Trade. This anthology collects many of his
essays and magazine articles, with sections on architecture, landscape
gardening, parks and public places, village beautification, horticulture,
and agricultural education. Some specific subjects explored include
planting shade trees, American versus British horticulture, and man-
agement of large country places. The book includes a biography chapter
and introductory notes for each reading. It is illustrated with b&w his-
torical drawings and maps. Twombly teaches history at the City College
of New York
NA737 2011-044973 978-1-4214-0432-5
George Washington’s eye; landscape, and design at Mount
Vernon.
Manca, Joseph.
Johns Hopkins U. Press, ©2012 297 p. $49.95
Drawing on Washington’s diaries and letters and on first-hand accounts
by visitors to Mount Vernon, Manca (art history, Rice University) offers
another perspective of the Founding Father as a landscape designer, gar-
dener, amateur architect, and art collector. He demonstrates how Mount
Vernon, George Washington’s home, expresses Washington’s aesthetic sen-
sibility and his architectural knowledge, and explains how the various
architectural elements of Mount Vernon manifest Washington’s ideals
and morals through biblical and classical references. The large format
(8.5x10”) book is illustrated with b&w and color historical illustrations,
color contemporary photos of locations and artifacts, and b&w architec-
tural plans.
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
NA737 2011-534283 978-0-7148-6316-0
On and by Frank Lloyd Wright; a primer of architectural
principles. (reprint 2005)
Title main entry. Ed. by Robert McCarter.
Phaidon Press Ltd., ©2011 372 p. $29.95 (pa)
This is a reprint of a 2005 text containing 14 essays by 14 internationally-
renowned architects and architectural historians providing a compre-
hensive critical overview of Frank Lloyd Wright as a maker of
architecture, with analyses of his earliest works to his final masterpieces,
from inception to completion. The text also includes three essays by
Wright discussing his philosophies about architecture. The material is
illustrated with 400-plus b&w and color photographs, archival material,
and diagrammatic analyses. The 2011 edition now makes McCarter’s
(architecture, U. of Florida) valuable resource available to students and
practitioners in paperback form.
NA737 2011-945504 978-0-8478-3888-2
Ralph Walker; architect of the century.
Holliday, Kathryn E.
Rizzoli Intl. Pub. Inc., ©2012 159 p. $50.00
Kathryn E. Holliday (architectural history and theory, U. of Texas-
Arlington) is Director of the David Dillon Center for Texas Architecture.
She has written the first book on the career of Ralph Walker, one of the
most influential architects of the 1930s, whose work strongly contributed
to the development of the New York skyline and the American popular
imagination of what cities should look like. He was a major figure in the
design of the Chicago and New York World’s Fairs. The book is gor-
geously produced on heavy toothed paper, and lavishly illustrated in
black and white with some color. Many of the illustrations are architects’
drawings. The careful choice of drawings, as much as the text, shows
how Walker’s buildings and his visual style have influenced us on two
fronts: the literal vision of what tall buildings (and 1930s cities) look like,
and our cultural vision of what it means to be modern. Holliday
describes each of Walker’s major buildings in depth. Work by artists
associated with Walker, such as Hildreth Miere, is also shown. Holliday’s
writing is knowledgeable about history and architecture and thoughtful
about cultural aesthetics (of One Wall Street: “The mural, now lost, was
titled ‘The Only Reason For Wealth Is The Attainment Of Beauty.’”) Of
interest to readers of architecture, modernism, the history of the era,
World’s Fairs, or the history of New York City, and to readers who love
architectural drawings. Oversize: 10x12 “.
NA737 2012-019148 978-0-393-73380-8
Taliesin diary; a year with Frank Lloyd Wright.
Henken, Priscilla J.
W.W. Norton, ©2012 272 p. $34.95
Henken (1918-1969) won a 1942-43 fellowship to work in Frank Lloyd
Wright’s apprenticeship program at his Taliesin studio in Spring Green,
Wisconsin. Her previously-unpublished diary provides insights into one
of America’s leading architects and rural life during these war years. The
book includes a foreword by the executive director of the National
Building Museum, Washington, DC; photographs of Wright, Priscilla, and
his inner circle; a filmography (of films shown during her stay), and
reading list.
NA996 978-1-85946-165-5
Robert Maguire and Keith Murray; twentieth century
architects.
Adler, Gerald.
RIBA Publishing, ©2012 206 p. $40.00 (pa)
Maguire & Murray was a small-scaled but well-respected and widely-
emulated architectural practice known for innovations in church, school,
and university design. Robert Maguire, a trained architect, and Keith
Murray, a trained silversmith, met in the early 1950s and actively col-
laborated for the next three decades. Part of the new Brutualist
movement, influenced by Japanese and Scandinavian architecture, and
rooted in Christianity and the English Arts and Crafts movement, they
were known for their ability to combine pragmatic idealism with
economy and spirituality. This history of their collaboration is illustrated
with photographs of building interiors and exteriors, blueprints,
drawings, and design models. A list of works and bibliography is
included as well. Distributed in North America by The David Brown
Book Co.
NA1313 978-0-500-51650-8
Gaudí pop-ups.
McCarthy, Courtney Watson.
Thames & Hudson, ©2012 16 p. $29.95
This handsome book is the product of graphic and paper designer
Courtney Watson McCarthy, and is nicely printed by Thames & Hudson.
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
It creates pop-up paper photographic constructions of seven buildings or
objects designed by architect Antoni Gaudí, from a bench to the facade
of the Sagrada Familia cathedral. Faced with the design balancing act of
all pop-up books, McCarthy has chosen to make her paper engineering
less breathtakingly inventive and more simple and durable (the cathedral
facade is the book’s “wow” piece.) She relies instead on fine color design
and excellent photographic print quality, which is a standout. The seven
designs are built to work without any more effort than turning the page.
Additional photographs of the object or building are provided on the
double-page spread that includes the pop-up. The short text is designed
for adult readers, and the book is intended for adults and older children.
Oversize: 12.5x14”.
NA1502 2011-312024 978-81-921106-1-5
Orchha and beyond; design at the court of Raja Bir Singh
Dev.
Rothfarb, Edward Leland. (The Marg Foundation publication; v.63,
no.30)
Marg Publications, ©2012 164 p. $68.00
Here is a study of design at the court of Raja Bir Singh Dev Bundela
(1605-1627). The court buildings show the top achievements of the
Bundela school of architecture and design in the Orchha kingdom (now
central India). The author is art historian Edward Leland Rothfarb, an
experienced academic teacher in the US and scholar of Asian art and
culture. Rothfarb considers the structure, design, ornament, and painted
decoration of major temples, palaces, and government buildings in a
broad context; the book explains Bundela architecture and design in
terms of history, myth, culture, political needs, and religious symbolism.
The book is supported by the Shreeramanugrah Trust, and models art
history scholarship that assesses the quality and value of artistic work
from within its own cultural universe. The text is written in a traditional
scholarly but accessible style. Rothfarb considers a wide range of sources
in pinning down the history, uses, and meanings behind the buildings,
from Orchha court poetry to contemporary archeology. Distributed in
North America by ACC Distribution.
NA1580 2011-031228 978-0-7546-7512-9
Colonial architecture and urbanism in Africa; intertwined
and contested histories.
Title main entry. Ed. by Fassil Demissie. (Design and the built envi-
ronment)
Ashgate Publishing Co., ©2012 438 p. $124.95
Along with the attempts to impose new political and economic orders,
colonialism in Africa also brought with itself new architectural and cul-
tural projects for the spatial and social regulation of subject populations,
even as such projects were countered by a raft of environmental,
political, economic, and social challenges. In this work, Demissie (DePaul
U.) presents 16 papers that explore, through case studies, the complexity,
fluidity, and multi-valence of architectural and urban planning
encounters between colonialism and Africa in the 19th and early 20th
centuries, with a particular focus on the cultural dimension. The papers
are presented in three separate sections that respectively focus on the
archaeology of colonial architecture and the built environment across the
African continent, the links between colonial architecture and urban
planning and disciplinary institutions designed to regulate the geo-
graphic movement and every day lives of Africans, and the ways in
which architectural practices and planning strategies were linked to both
changes in local realities and shifting ideas in the metropolitan center.
NA2500 2011-930148 978-0-9819667-1-7
Nesting; body, dwelling, mind.
Robinson, Sarah.
William Stout Publishers, ©2011 181 p. $30.00 (pa)
Noted Finnish architect Juhani Pallasmaa introduces architecture as “the
most significant means of transforming natural space and time into cul-
tural and mental meanings.” Drawing on the metaphor of the nest,
poetry, design principles, and findings from neuroscience, Robinson, a
San Francisco Bay-based architect who was a student of philosophy prior
to studying at Taliesin, the Frank Lloyd Wright School of Architecture,
reflects deeply on this theme. Photographs complement the text.
NA2540 2011-032949 978-0-8248-3363-3
Chinese architecture and metaphor; Song culture in the
Yingzao fashi building manual.
Feng, Jiren. (Spatial habitus)
U. of Hawai’i Press, ©2012 304 p. $53.00
A new kind of analysis of the most famous work in the history of
Chinese architecture, Jiren Feng’s book will be important for students of
Chinese architecture, and useful for readers in pre-modern Chinese
history, craft, and literature. The author is an architectural historian
–174–
trained in both China and the US, a former research fellow at the Max
Planck Institute for the History of Science, and a professor of the Chinese
language (U. of Hawai’i at Hilo). He has a distinguished record of
teaching and research on several continents. In this book, he looks philo-
logically at the Yingzao Fashi building manual, a Song Dynasty document
that is the core book of pre-modern Chinese architecture. He discovers a
specific technical language for talking about building elements using
metaphors based on growing plants: support brackets are flowers, a
building is a flowering tree. Tracing the use of this language, Feng care-
fully argues that intellectuals, artists, writers, builders, and crafters
shared a vocabulary for talking together and a single way of thinking
about buildings and the relationship between people and the envi-
ronment, products and materials, culture and nature. As both cause and
effect, the Song Dynasty was a time of great literary production and inno-
vation, increased respect for craft labor among upper-class intellectuals,
and growing intellectual knowledge and literary interests among
working class people. Feng also argues that in Chinese architecture, it is
artificial and inaccurate to separate the study of language from buildings
and metaphors from materials. The book is sparely but carefully illus-
trated with black and white photographs and diagrams, many historical.
There are seven appendices: previous scholarship on the Yingzao Fashi,
named architectural types and structural elements in related texts, entries
on architecture in the Taiping Yulan, comparisons of architectural termi-
nology, and literary classics and historical sources cited in the Yingzao
Fashi.
NA2542 2012-424733 978-90-6450-761-8
Energy.
Knaack, Ulrich et al. (Imagine; 05)
nai010 Publishers, ©2011 127 p. $35.00 (pa)
This belletristic conceptual art book is a production of the Chair of
Design of Constructions at Delft U. of Technology. It is the fifth in their
Imagination series, designed to inject architects and building designers
with postmodernist inspiration. Most is the product of student exercises.
This volume begins from the premise that buildings are forms of energy.
It proposes but does not define an index measuring not just building
energy use but how much energy is contained in the material of a
building. The authors seem inspired by the idea of burning things down.
“...we have to reconsider the use of books (that is, belletristic publications
and not books important for society and science)...” The idea of the index
involves practical environmental building issues, notably that a building
which is energy-efficient to operate but energy-expensive to build is not
actually energy-efficient. Solutions proposed here involve immaterial
cities, individual inflated pig skins used as miniature greenhouses, and
zeppelin-transported party balloon insulation. Many important graphs
with unlabeled axes are included. The text sometimes gives the
impression that readers should take the book seriously, which may be
the result of very literal translation from the Dutch.
NA2543 2011-048740 978-0-7546-7880-9
Colonial frames, nationalist histories; imperial legacies,
architecture and modernity.
Title main entry. Ed. by Mrinalini Rajagopalan and Madhuri Desai.
(Ashgate studies in architecture)
Ashgate Publishing Co., ©2012 317 p. $119.95
This anthology of architectural theory and analysis deals with relation-
ships between colonialism and colonial and post-colonial architecture,
particularly in former territories of the British Orient. Within this general
structure, however, the authors’ interests are diverse and wide-ranging,
looking at many different situations and settings where architecture,
meaning, and history meet. The contributors are academics, primarily in
architecture, and art and architectural history. Most are from US institu-
tions, though many have backgrounds in formerly colonized nations and
peoples. Section one is on colonial taxonomies and the nation’s episteme,
section two is imperial designs and the nation’s fragments, and section
three is global vocabularies and local products. Wherever contributors
write of specific objects and buildings, readers can see conversations
about culture and history carried out in accessible and tangible ways,
and the links between colonial history, architecture, and culture appear
as natural, convincing, problematic, and important. The first section
deals with India. The second section travels widely: the display of culture
in museums, Afro-British Georgians in London, architecture in Hawai’i.
The last section considers Asia: Singapore, Hong Kong, and Shanghai.
Prices are U.S. "list." They may vary outside the U.S. Bookstores, jobbers,
or the presses will fill orders. Do not order books from Book News Inc.
–175–
NA2543 978-1-84564-614-1
Eco-architecture IV; harmonisation between architecture
and nature; proceedings.
International Conference on Harmonisation Between Architecture &
Nature (4th: 2012: Kos, Greece) Ed. by C.A. Brebbia. (WIT Transactions
on ecology and the environment; v.165)
WIT Press, ©2012 444 p. $398.00
Architects and civil engineers present 38 peer-reviewed papers on
designing with nature, ecological and cultural sensitivity, energy effi-
ciency, bioclimatic design, vertical greenery systems, the ecological
impact of materials, building technologies, education and training, and
case studies. Among the topics are the effect of skylight configuration
and sky type on the daylight impression of a room, whether a hotel can
be ecological, the cooling performance of Persian wind towers, natural
zeolite as an environmentally friendly supplementary cementitious
material in concrete, the Crucifiers Convent in Venice as a model for
renewable energy sources in historical buildings, and the Bavarian expe-
rience of eco-districts and urban regeneration policies. Only authors are
indexed. The US office of WIT Press is Computational Mechanics.
NA2545 2009-924663 978-3-7643-8871-3
Living for the elderly; a design manual.
Feddersen, Eckhard and Insa Lüdtke.
Birkhäuser Boston, ©2009 247 p. $119.00
Translated from the work in German published in 2009 (Birkhaüser
Verlag, Switzerland), this collection of essays and projects is presented in
an oversize volume (10x13”) that allows for generous display of photos
and architectural drawings. The essays address general topics and prin-
ciples—such as aging across various cultures, dementia and the living
environment, living and dying in a hospice, gardens for senior citizens—
as well as the processes of design—the role of the architect, the life cycle
and energy balance of residential buildings, project control and cost
management, and quality management and user satisfaction surveys.
Thirty-nine projects are thoroughly presented, arranged in sections on
inter-generational living, assisted living, residential and nursing homes,
concepts for specific user groups and for people with dementia, and inte-
grated housing and neighborhood concepts. The projects are located in a
half dozen European countries, Japan, and the US (one project).
Author/editors Feddersen and Lüdtke are based in Berlin.
NA3810 2012-935731 978-0-7643-4001-7
Mosaic art today.
Title main entry. Ed. by Jeffrey B. Snyder.
Schiffer Publishing Ltd., ©2012 256 p. $50.00
Snyder, who writes and edits books on the arts and other topics, collects
the artwork of about 50 contemporary mosaic artists from the US, UK,
Australia, and Ecuador, which includes public and private installations,
sculptures, murals, wall hangings, windows, plaques, medallions, floors,
triptychs, and furniture. Presented in color, the art is organized alpha-
betically by artist and is accompanied by artist statements and explana-
tions of the works.
NA4482 2012-002482 978-1-61248-063-3
Missouri armories; the Guard’s home in architecture and
history.
Wiegers, Robert P.
Truman State University Press, ©2012 192 p. $34.95 (pa)
This work surveys the history and architecture of National Guard armory
buildings in Missouri and looks at the Guard’s connections with indi-
vidual communities in the state through the public use of the armories.
The author identifies six styles of the buildings: Main Street armories,
castle armories, Depression-era armories in Art Deco and WPA style, Cold
War armories, traditional revival armories, and unique armories. The
book is illustrated with 185 b&w photos, some historical and some con-
temporary. Wiegers served in the US Army and the Missouri National
Guard; he now teaches history at Central Methodist University.
NA7110 2012-028017 978-1-60085-765-2
Taunton’s small houses.
Title main entry. Ed. by the editors of Fine Homebuilding.
Taunton Press, ©2012 237 p. $21.95 (pa)
The experts at Fine Homebuilding magazine present an inspiring col-
lection of smaller homes for those interested in a more cost efficient and
greener alternative to larger spaces. Chapters cover the basics of small
space design, small scale remodeling, and solutions for space saving
storage. Dozens of examples of architect designed homes are displayed,
ranging from modern-day farmhouses to duplexes for urbanites. Full of
images, floor plans, and helpful tips, this is a wonderful guide for those
interested in making smaller spaces both practical and luxurious.
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
NA7173 2011-926222 978-0-7643-3793-2
Post & beam dreams.
Glennon, Lisa et al.
Schiffer Publishing Ltd., ©2011 224 p. $49.99
From ancient Japanese temples to vintage American barns, post and
beam construction has been a major influence in the evolution of archi-
tecture. Combining nostalgia, functionality, and high quality modern con-
struction principles, the principal designer of Yankee Barn Homes
(Grantham, New Hampshire), the company’s president, and the editor of
a blog on the subject showcase this type of construction. For homes of
various architectural styles (barn style, carriage, classic farmhouse,
cottage and bungalow, coastal, and rustic Adrirondack/mountain style),
they discuss the setting, silhouette, exterior façade, interior layout, and
exterior décor. Includes color illustrations and floor plans.
NA7235 2012-930821 978-0-8478-3782-3
Carefree California; Cliff May and the romance of the
ranch house.
Gibbs, Jocelyn and Nicholas Olsberg.
Rizzoli Intl. Pub. Inc., ©2012 275 p. $45.00
The University of California, Santa Barbara hosts the world’s largest col-
lection of materials on Southern California architects. With the help of
the Getty Foundation, this material became the inaugural exhibition of
their newly revamped Art, Design, and Architecture Museum; this book
accompanies the exhibit. It focuses on, but is not exclusive to, the work
of self-taught designer Cliff May, architect of the Ranch House movement.
In this lavish production, sepiatone photographs and discreetly colored
architect’s drawings in the Southern California style fully illustrate the
text, which is mostly an architectural history by Jocelyn Gibbs with
Nicholas Olsberg about post-War California ranch houses. Also in the
Southern California style, guest authors contribute essays in critical
studies on the ranch house as performative idea, with references to the
Hollywood film industry. The book was co-sponsored by Pacific Standard
Time: Art in LA 1945-1980, The Getty, and Bank of America. Oversize:
13x11”.
NA7361 978-94-6058-094-9
Dutch architects and their houses.
Bleeker, Mirjam et al.
Luster publishing, ©2012 263 p. $55.00
This book pictures sixteen homes lived in by Dutch architects. While each
architect is given a few paragraphs to describe and explain their home
and its design choices, this is almost entirely a book of interior photo-
graphs. Given the diversity of perspectives architects bring to their work,
there is a surprising uniformity of design aesthetic in this book, a sort
of minimalist Martha-Stewart-meets-Le-Corbusier, with the tone of austere
playfulness you might expect from children who grew up in a Northern
landscape, playing with small modernist toys. The color palette is almost
universally white, gray-blacks, and leaf greens, with natural wood tones
and the occasional contrasting splash of bright red. There are also many
interesting chairs. Distributed in the US by ACC Distribution.
NA7580 2011-925693 978-0-7643-3774-1
Contemporary villas; dialogues with nature.
Strahan, David et al.
Schiffer Publishing Ltd., ©2011 272 p. $59.99
Intended for designers, architects, and home owners seeking inspiration
and ideas, this book considers a modern villa to be a residence integrated
with nature—simple or complex, rural or urban. With essays introducing
each section, organization is in four parts, showcasing about 40 resi-
dences located in the desert, mountains and meadows, waterside, and
urban areas. Each is fully described in text, abundant photos, and
drawings. The three authors are identified as follows: David Strahan, a
Texas-based architect and interior designer: Katharine Kaye McMillan, a
research psychologist; and Patricia Hart McMillan, an editor and writer
in the fields of design and the home industry. The book’s format is hor-
izontal: 12.5x9.5”.
NA9053 2012-006681 978-1-4051-9506-5
Ecosystem services come to town; greening cities by
working with nature.
Grant, Gary.
Wiley-Blackwell, ©2012 220 p. $80.00 (pa)
Grant (built environment, U. College London) describes how the growing
understanding of ecology is changing urban planning, architecture, and
restoration. He covers the origins of cities, modern cities, issues facing
contemporary cities, working with nature, urban nature, water and
cities, city-wide greening, and greening neighborhoods and buildings.
His examples come from all over the world.
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
NB1278 978-1-85759-739-4
The Sydney and Walda Besthoff Sculpture Garden at the
New Orleans Museum of Art.
Lash, Miranda.
Scala Publishers, ©2012 194 p. $49.95
Opened in 2003, the New Orleans Museum of Art’s (NOMA) interna-
tionally acclaimed Sculpture Garden contains 63 striking examples of
20th and 21st-century sculpture, including works by Leonard Baskin,
Deborah Butterfield, Barbara Hepworth, Jacques Lipchitz, Henry Moore,
Claes Oldenburg, Auguste Rodin, and George Segal. Free to visitors, it
provides an opportunity to experience fine art in a relaxed and informal
setting. Lash, curator of Modern and Contemporary Art, NOMA, presents
the first catalog of the collection to contain in-depth entries for each of
the Garden’s pieces. Each entry includes discussion of the piece and
background on the artist’s life and career. The catalog is illustrated with
full-color photographs. Distributed in North American by ACC
Distribution. Oversize 10x12.25”.
NC978 2012-008313 978-1-4197-0438-3
Brian Froud’s trolls.
Froud, Brian and Wendy Froud.
Abrams, ©2012 144 p. $35.00
Brian Froud, coartist of the international bestseller Faeries and Wendy
Froud, a talented sculptor and puppet builder, are widely known for their
artistic projects involving magical creatures. Here they offer a delightful
entré into the world of trolls presented in an oversize (12x13”) format on
glossy stock. Tales of enchantment interspersed with tidbits of troll
culture and worldview, are brought to life through Brian Froud’s full-
page sketches and detailed drawings. The high quality photographs of
Wendy Froud’s marvelous three dimensional creatures and those of their
tools, talismans, and other personal belongings will charm troll fanciers
of all ages.
NC1002 2011-275788 978-1-60061-971-7
Just design; socially conscious design for critical causes.
Simmons, Christopher.
HOW Books, ©2011 199 p. $40.00
San Francisco-based design professional Simmons (California College of
the Arts) offers a thoughtful text celebrating a selection of the best of
cause-based design—work that seeks to benefit society as a whole in
areas of increasing concern, such as equality, water, education,
community, peace, justice, and hope. The text will inspire design students
and professionals, and inform general readers interested in the world of
commercial visual imagery around us. It contains examples of 140-plus
noteworthy design solutions, illustrated with full-color photographs and
accompanied by explanatory notes; profiles and interviews with several
designers; and essays by design professionals including Alissa Walker,
Kate Andrews, Aaris Sherin, Alice Bybee, Cinthia Wen, and Brian Collins.
Indexed by designer and business names only; no subject index is
provided.
NC1766 2012-031704 978-0-7864-7068-6
Kyoto animation; a critical study and filmography.
Cavallaro, Dani.
McFarland & Co., ©2012 192 p. $35.00 (pa)
This book looks at films in the anime genre produced by Kyoto
Animation in Japan. Kyoto became a major anime house, but did not
start with major investment or position in the Japanese film industry.
The author, Dani Cavallaro, is interested in how Kyoto accomplished this
task, and she looks at factors she sees as unusually creative, effective, or
skillful in Kyoto Animation films. The book includes both descriptions of
Kyoto films and analysis. While the author gives some attention to the
production of the films, she is mostly interested in analyzing their
internal worlds and characters. The book’s tone mixes fan colloquialisms
and a loving interest in individual Kyoto films with the complex writing
style characteristic of academic film theory. The book includes a bibli-
ography and a filmography.
NC1766 978-0-8166-8049-8
Mechademia 7; lines of sight.
Title main entry. Ed. by Frenchy Lunning.
U. of Minnesota Press, ©2012 301 p. $24.95 (pa)
The Mechademia series presents creative and critical studies of anime,
manga, and fan arts. This seventh volume explores the complicated rela-
tionship between Japanese media and popular culture, especially anime
and manga illustration, and Cartesian ideals of perspective, which dom-
inate modern visual modes and serve to enforce a divide between
Western and Eastern cultures. The book serves as a call for radical per-
spectivalism, or a reconfiguration of modes of perspective in the visual
arts. The first section explores intervals, the second discusses perspective,
–176–
the third nonlocalizable selves, and the fourth energetic matter. Essay
contributors include a variety of professors, artists, and academics in the
fields of East Asian studies, architecture, literature and film, as well as
others.
NC1883 2011-278826 978-0-393-08278-4
R. Crumb; the complete record cover collection.
Crumb, R.
W.W. Norton, ©2011 — p. $27.95
Music enthusiasts and fans of Robert Crumb will delight in this compi-
lation of Crumb’s album cover designs, record labels, show posters,
trading cards, portraits, and comics related to music and musicians.
Containing over 267 images, mostly lent by long-term Crumb collectors
Richard Kuiters and Cecile van Lijnden, this comprehensive collection
also includes lesser known illustrations and rare works from other col-
lectors as well as some additions from the artist himself.
ND237 2012-012526 978-1-61168-328-8
Edward Hopper in Vermont.
Clause, Bonnie Tocher.
U. Press of New England, ©2012 214 p. $35.00
Edward Hopper was one of America’s most prominent realist painters
but the works he created in Vermont remain relatively unknown. Clause
has collected some of Hopper’s Vermont watercolors and describers her
research in locating these summer pastorals and the places they were
created. Detailed and full of context, this volume contains information on
Hopper’s Vermont vacations with his wife and explores how his vision of
Vermont developed between the time of his first visit and his last.
Contains 21 full color illustrations and identifies two works previously
not recognized.
ND237 2011-051905 978-1-4197-0394-2
Georgia O’Keeffe and her houses; Ghost Ranch and
Abiquiu.
Lynes, Barbara Buhler and Agapita Judy Lopez.
Abrams, ©2012 256 p. $50.00
Lynes (curator, Georgia O’Keeffe Museum, Santa Fe) and Lopes, who
worked for O’Keeffe from 1974 until the artist’s death, explore the history
of O’Keeffe’s famous houses in Ghost Ranch and Abiquiu, New Mexico
and the relationship they played in the artist’s personal and professional
life. Full of quotes from O’Keeffe, and beautiful photographs of her in
and around these homes as well as paintings inspired by them, this is
both an intimate portrayal of O’Keeffe’s life in the Southwest as well as
a celebration of these houses and the surrounding landscapes. Includes
an essay by Beverly Spears describing the characteristics of adobe con-
struction and an appendix detailing the materials used and the indi-
viduals involved with the restoration of the Abiquiu home.
ND237 2012-937268 978-0-8478-3900-1
Mark Rothko; the decisive decade 1940-1950.
Title main entry. Ed. by Bradford R. Collins.
Skira Editore, ©2012 176 p. $50.00
Published for a 2013-14 exhibition organized by the Arkansas Arts Center,
the Columbia Museum of Art (South Carolina), and the Denver Museum
of Art, in conjunction with the National Gallery of Art, this volume show-
cases what art scholar Collins (U. of South Carolina) calls “the unknown
Rothko.” Rothko’s psychologist son contends that this decade is essential
to understanding his father’s artistic evolution and contribution to the
Abstract Expressionist Movement in America. Exhibit organizers discuss
this transition from biomorphic images to his iconic “multiforms.” The
volume includes works featured in the exhibit, photographs of Rothko
(1903-1970 ), a 1940s chronology, endnotes, and a bibliography.
Distributed by Rizzoli.
ND546 978-1-85759-743-1
Royalists to romantics; women artists from the Louvre,
Versailles, and other French national collections.
Title main entry.
Scala Publishers, ©2012 135 p. $45.00
This catalog was produced as an accompaniment to an exhibition of the
same name, held from February to May 2012 at the National Museum of
Women in the Arts, Washington, DC, in celebration of the Museum’s 25th
anniversary. The first exhibition to focus on the extraordinary depth and
breadth of women’s artistic practice in France from 1750 to 1848, it fea-
tures paintings, sculptures, prints, and drawings produced by 35 French
women. Through these works and explanatory essays, readers will learn
about the artists’ education and professionalization, the prospects and
constraints they faced, and how they dealt with the challenges of being
–177–
a woman and artist as their country experienced its Revolution, the emer-
gence of the Empire, and the Restoration. Oversize: 9.75x11.25”.
Distributed in North America by ACC Distribution.
ND553 2012-007182 978-0-307-37707-4
Cezanne; a life.
Danchev, Alex.
Pantheon Books, ©2012 488 p. $40.00
Danchev (international relations, U. of Nottingham, UK) has written biog-
raphies (including Georges Braque) and published collections of essays
(On Art and War and Terror and 100 Artists’ Manifestos) and articles for
The Times Literary Supplement and other publications. Here he has taken
on the challenges of Cezanne’s life, offering a well-researched portrait of
the visionary artist. The volume includes a generous number of repro-
ductions of Cezanne’s work.
NE2049 978-0-500-51634-8
A cabinet of rarities; antiquarian obsessions and the spell
of death.
Desmaziéres, Érik and Patrick Mauriès.
Thames & Hudson, ©2012 110 p. $45.00
Largely inspired by seventeenth-century scientist and antiquary Sir
Thomas Browne, Érik Desmaziéres, one of the world’s finest contem-
porary printmakers, and Patrick Mauriés (author of Cabinets of
Curiosities) have teamed up to celebrate the macabre and the melancholy
in this superb volume. Containing 38 illustrations, this collection of
Desmaziéres’ exquisite rare etchings in color accompanied by Mauriés’
text explore the engrossment Browne and other collectors have had with
accumulating recondite objects and how these curiosities have entered
the mainstream, becoming emblems of the vanity of earthly life and the
constraints of mortality. Intended for bibliophiles, print collectors, and
esoteric aficionados.
NK7 2012-931643 978-0-500-51628-7
Jewelry by Chanel.
Mauriés, Patrick.
Thames & Hudson, ©2012 272 p. $95.00
Postmodernism and costume jewelry are linked in this book: both create
worth from materials of limited value. As Patrick Mauriés shows in his
text on Gabrielle Chanel, the job requires carefully manipulating desire
and social status, focusing on ideas, de-emphasizing the mechanics of
production, and if you cultivate powerful friends with large budgets the
results can look smashing. They do. The book is expensively produced,
and skillfully focuses most of its attention on lavish full- and double-page
photographs of jewelry, historic photographs of Chanel modeling it, and
contemporary fashion photographs of models. A few images of Roman
palaces, Byzantine icons, and staged photos suggesting hand crafting in
traditional workshops are also skillfully deployed in the high-status
advertising tradition. Mauriés argues the enterprise is a way of creating
human freedom, turning cultural assumptions on their heads and
opening the corridors of wealth and power to those formerly excluded.
His text will strongly appeal to readers who share his vision of couture
designer Chanel and her clients as oppressed revolutionary outsiders.
The contemporary model photographs place pieces with strong 1920s-40s
aesthetics on fashion models mostly styled to recent magazine trends.
Some pieces will not fit on the bodies or with the stylings of the models.
These are held or placed nearby. When necklines and dress styles have
changed, nudity and feather boas are carefully arranged. Some of the
pieces here are original works designed by Chanel, and include recre-
ations of precious metal and diamond jewelry. Some are production
recreations or “inspired by” designs; the book serves to showcase high-
end costume jewelry created for sale by the House of Chanel fashion
business. Oversize: 10x13”.
NK1125 978-1-57912-915-6
Kovels’ antiques and collectibles price guide 2013, 45th
ed.
Kovel, Terry H. and Kim Kovel.
Black Dog and Leventhal, ©2012 722 p. $27.95 (pa)
In this edition of the respected Kovels’ guides, a well-known collector and
her daughter carry on the family tradition of providing the latest price
information on antiques and collectibles. The guide includes some 700
illustrated categories with a brief description and history, tips on care,
and a list of the year’s record prices. Antiquities, fine art paintings,
stamps, coins, and books (except for children’s books like Big Little
Books) are not priced.
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
NK1510 2012-002799 978-1-84788-576-0
Design and designing; a critical introduction.
Title main entry. Ed. by Steve Garner and Chris Evans.
Berg Publishers, ©2012 483 p. $49.95 (pa)
Thirty-five international academics and practitioners contribute 28
chapters providing key insights into design practice and design theory
today. Written for students who are, or are considering, pursuing a uni-
versity or college education in design, the text can be used to support uni-
versity-level design teaching, as a supplement in specialist subjects such
as graphic communication or product design, for self-directed study, or
with an individual’s own online community. Organized into seven sec-
tions, the chapters explore the designing process; creating and commu-
nicating; designing for people; business, markets and clients; sustainable
design and designing; the professional practice of design; and design
futures. Each chapter is illustrated with a combination of images and
information boxes. Each section concludes with a design project pro-
viding readers with a hands-on application of the chapter’s content.
NK1520 2012-003885 978-0-12-386531-1
Design for emotion.
Van Gorp, Trevor and Edie Adams
Morgan Kaufmann Pub., Inc., ©2012 217 p. $34.95 (pa)
Intended for creative professionals, Van Gorp and Adams ( both envi-
ronmental design, U. of Calgary) have teamed up to present a practical
guide for creating effective designs that succeed in emotion and person-
ality to appeal to consumer’s needs. Included are chapters covering the
psychology of emotion, how design communicates emotion and person-
ality, why some products have more meaning, and an A.C.T. model
framework for addressing the users’ emotional needs. The work also con-
tains a forward by BJ Fogg (Stanford Persuasive Technology Lab) as well
as interviews and case studies from industry professionals. Morgan
Kaufmann is an imprint of Elsevier.
NK2049 2012-931637 978-0-500-51630-0
New Paris style.
Miller, Danielle. Photographs by Richard Powers.
Thames & Hudson, ©2012 223 p. $40.00
Paris has long been regarded as a style-setter. Miller (Tropical Minimal)
discusses the eclectic influences on the le bon chic of many Parisian
homes, including eco-friendly design and the Surrealist artists. Color pho-
tographs by Richard Powers showcase the homes, organized by neigh-
borhood, of fashion designers, architects, chefs, and other creative types.
Styles vary from renovations of heritage-listed flats to industrial chic. The
book includes directories of the featured homeowners and suppliers.
NK2408 2012-931231 978-0-7643-4115-1
Mind & hand; contemporary studio furniture.
The Furniture Society
Schiffer Publishing Ltd., ©2012 160 p. $29.99
This attractive 9x11.5” collection of color photos is for anyone interested
in the field of small-shop custom furniture-making, whether as furniture
maker or consumer. The full-page photos present exemplary pieces of
handmade furniture made mainly of wood (including exotic woods) and
other materials such as glass, metal, fabric, recycled materials, and even
straw. The largest section showcases work by members and guests who
attended The Furniture Society’s annual 2010 conference, held in
Cambridge, Mass. Other sections offer galleries of outdoor furniture, a
juried exhibit, pieces made with historical woods, and a selection of
juried student work, all from the 2010 conference. Each section opens
with a brief introduction. The book includes a list of members of The
Furniture Society and guest exhibitors.
NK3748 978-3-89790-353-1
Elisabeth J. Gu. Defner; man, nature, cosmos: Jewellery
and objects.
Bollmann, Karl.
Arnoldsche Art Publishers, ©2012 247 p. $85.00
Karl Bollmann has written a book on the work of Elisabeth J. Gu. Defner,
a leading Austrian art jeweler. Several other writers have contributed
minor portions of the text, including an interview with the artist. The text
appears in German with facing-page English translation by Joan Clough.
It describes the artist’s development, interests, and career. Defner’s work
is technically accomplished, beautifully designed, and presented here in
a well-produced book focused on the best-quality photography of jewelry
that readers are likely to see. The photographs are often full-page and
always in exceptional detail with true colors. Most of the work is
wearable jewelry, both cast and fabricated (a few ventures into con-
ceptual work around the idea of acupuncture meridians are docu-
mented). Styles vary from cool modernist to deco-inflected, often using
organic forms (insects, feathers, skulls, shells, leaves), frequently in matte
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
gold and oxidized silver with precious stones. Though some of these
forms have become mass-production cliches in jewelry, the work here is
notable for its quality and distinctive idiom. Some unusual decorative
objects appear: a bowl of lapis lazuli, a series of magic wands
(“Devotional figure of saint with staff and scroll, gold plinth, forged staff,
gold plinth set with pink sapphires, mounted on pebble”). A few of
Defner’s drawings also appear. They are skillful and closely observed,
justifying the excellent quality of reproduction. Appendices provide a
biography, awards, works in public collections, exhibitions, and a bibli-
ography. A strikingly beautiful book from Arnoldsche Art Publishers.
NK4567 978-0-7156-3463-9
Vessels of influence; China and the birth of porcelain in
medieval and early modern Japan.
Rousmaniere, Nicole Coolidge. (Duckworth debates in archaeology)
Bristol Classical Press, ©2012 192 p. $22.00 (pa)
Rousmaniere (Sainsbury Institute for the Study of Japanese Arts and
Cultures) examines the scholarship surrounding the use and significance
of Chinese porcelain in medieval and early modern Japan and the origins
of Japanese domestic porcelain production. She sees the rapid devel-
opment of Japanese porcelain production in terms of consumer demand
and pan-Asian trade, which resulted in profits for the ruling elite, local
officials, and well-placed merchants. B&w photos of ceramics are
included. The author is project curator for Japanese ceramics at the
British Museum. The book is distributed in the US by International
Publishers Marketing.
NK7160 978-3-89790-360-9
Konrad Mehus; form follows fiction jewellery and objects,
Veiteberg, Jorunn et al.
Arnoldsche Art Publishers, ©2012 208 p. $70.00 (pa)
Veiteberg, Enstad, and Skre present the first monograph of Norwegian
jewelry and objects artist Konrad Mehus, whose work over the past 40
years has addressed a number of fundamental questions about everyday
life and society—What does it mean to belong? What is it that shapes us?
How can we balance our need and respect for roots and tradition with
artistic demands to be innovative and in tune with our own times?—in
provocative, political, and ironic ways. The text includes essays by
Veiteberg and Enstad on Mehus’ life and work, full-color photographs of
114 works, an interview between Mehus and Skre, and lists of the artist’s
solo and group exhibitions, public collections, public art commissions,
grants, and awards.
NK7234 2011-942522 978-0-7643-3939-4
Sterling silver flatware for dining elegance, 3d ed.
Osterberg, Richard F.
Schiffer Publishing Ltd., ©2011 206 p. $39.99
Retired academic Ostenburg (California State U., Fresno) resides in
Washington State where he does appraisal work for private silver collec-
tions and provides current values for insurance companies. He offers col-
lectors a revised and expanded third edition guide to the sterling silver
flatware used during the Victorian and Edwardian eras. Illustrated with
b&w photographs, the examples are organized into three categories—
place pieces, place settings, and serving pieces. The text includes infor-
mation about silver, its history and its past, plus examples of Haviland
and other noteworthy china and crystal which has been used to com-
plement silver in elegant dining. The text also includes a bibliography,
reproducible charts for keeping records of sterling silver flatware, a price
guide, index of place and serving pieces, and index of pattern names.
Oversize: 8.75x11.25 “.
NK7398 978-0-500-51629-4
The new jewelers; desirable, collectable, contemporary.
Dupon, Olivier
Thames & Hudson, ©2012 288 p. $45.00
Dupon (The New Artisans), an Australian who started his career at
Christian Dior, searches international markets for unique and collectible
contemporary design, art and craft objects. Following a brief introduction
to the magic of jewelry—which originally served as talismans, he groups
stunning wearable art pieces by categories including glam, neo-classics,
sculptural bliss, and avant-garde. The book includes some 800 color and
b&w illustrations with descriptions and notes on the designers, and
resources worldwide.
NK9924 2012-017862 978-0-7892-1126-2
Renaissance intarsia; masterpieces of wood inlay.
Title main entry. Ed. by Luca Trevisan. Trans. by Marguerite Shore.
Abbeville Press, ©2012 254 p. $125.00
This sumptuous coffee-table book is also an important publication for art
historians. It is the first modern survey of Renaissance intarsia work.
–178–
Intarsia, monochrome “painting” in natural wood inlay, was a major
noble craft art of the Renaissance. Though its makers worked at the
highest level of artistic ability, often in collaboration with top painters
and architects, the contemporary prejudice against any art form but
painting has kept intarsia in obscurity. This book surveys twelve major
cycles of well-preserved high-level intarsia work (including the studiolo
of Frederico da Montefeltro, the sacristy of Santa Maria in Organo at
Verona, and the choir of Santa Maria Maggiore in Bergamo). The iconog-
raphy and context of each suite is explained by an expert author; photo-
graphs of paintings from the same era are included as needed. The book
is edited by Luca Trevisan. The excellent large-scale color photography is
by Luca Sassi. It offers amazing full page images that seem impossible
as wood inlay, along with close-ups that make the truth clear, mid-range
shots that show the works in their architectural context (framing and
trompe d’oiel context effects are preserved here which are often lost from
paintings of the same era), and interior shots that show the mind-bog-
gling scale of a whole suite. The intarsias themselves combine visual
aspects of painting, printmaking, fresco, and architecture. They are
breathtakingly golden and lovely, and surrealistically rigorous: haunting
exercises in perspective, still life, and landscape, sometimes with holy
figures. Both Paolo Ucello and Georgio di Chirco seem to have learned
from them. The text is translated from the Italian by Marguerite Shore.
It is easy and pleasant to read, a fine achievement for a technical book.
A final essay by Paolo Pizzati explains how intarsia work was done, and
there is a scholarly bibliography. Of interest to general readers seeking a
beautiful art book, to artists seeking new inspiration, and to scholars of
Renaissance art. Oversize: 11x13”.
LANGUAGE, LITERATURE
P35 978-3-8329-7100-7
Europe, anyone?; the “communication deficit” of the
European Union revisited.
Spanier, Bernd. ( Kommunikation in politik und wirtschaft; v.4)
Nomos, ©2012 172 p. $43.00 (pa)
Currently an official in the European Commission, Spanier offers an
integrative theoretical model to account or the interrelations between
information provision, media coverage, and audience orientation. He
draws primarily from the practical analysis of the relationship between
spokespersons and journalists, and from structural as well as institu-
tional factors that guide the communication flow in Brussels. He looks at
communication and democratic legitimacy, a framework for European
Union communications, and the European Union Commission
spokesperson service as a case study. There is no index. Distributed in
the US by ISBS.
P40 2011-487587 978-0-9877575-0-0
Cities and languages; governance and policy; proceedings.
International Symposium “Language Planning in Capitals and Urban
Environments” (2010: Ottawa, Ontario) Ed. by Richard Clément and
Caroline Andrew.
Invenire Books, ©2012 124 p. $19.95 (pa)
Administrators and researchers from Canadian and European cities
discuss language planning in urban environments. The topics include the
bivalent multilingual city of Barcelona, symbolic representation and
public image in Ottawa, Helsinki as Helsingfors in a nation of two
official languages, two opposing policy mindsets for language planning
in Brussels, and a linguistic bridge at Switzerland’s language boundary
at Biel/Bienne. The proceedings are not indexed.
P53
Learning to write effectively; current trends in European
research.
Title main entry. Ed. by Mark Torrance et al. (Studies in writing)
Emerald Group Publishing, ©2012 425 p. $144.95
This volume provides an overview of research programs spread across 15
European countries that are focused on understanding the nature of
writing competence, how writing competence develops, and how writing
competence can best be taught. Eighty-nine contributions are presented
in sections discussing research in writing development, writing
instruction, learners’ writing processes, text assessment, learner and
teacher variables, genre in educational contexts, design of documents,
and tools for studying and supporting writing. Distributed in North
America by Turpin Distribution.
–179–
P53 2011-042156 978-1-4411-4010-4
Pedagogical stylistics; current trends in language,
literature and ELT.
Title main entry. Ed. by Michael Burke et al. (Advances in stylistics)
Continuum Publishing Group, ©2012 219 p. $140.00
Pedagogical stylistics should occupy a central position not only within its
parent discipline, stylistics, but within other cognate disciplines that
apply linguistic models to text and discourse. Such is the contention here
of scholars of language, literature, and teaching English. The volume is
part of an ongoing project by a group of people interested in the theory
of teaching stylistics who came together at the Poetics and Linguistics
Association conference in 2008 and launched an unbounded research
agenda. It covers analysis, reading, and reception; emerging trends and
methods; and English as a foreign language.
P53 2012-022105 978-1-84769-790-5
Researching language teacher cognition and practice;
international case studies.
Title main entry. Ed. by Roger Barnard and Anne Burns. (New per-
spectives on language and education)
Multilingual Matters, ©2012 190 p. $139.95
Barnard (U. of Waikato, New Zealand) and Burns (U. of New South
Wales, Australia) present paired case studies and commentaries with the
intention of helping emergent researchers, particularly graduate students,
understand some of the practical implications of collecting qualitative
data in the study of language teacher cognition. Each case study
describes a particular research project, typically a recently completed doc-
toral project, with authors first describing the aims and context of the
study, reviewing the published literature on the topic, and then exam-
ining the methodological issues that arose over the course of the project.
A paired commentary then presents discussion points and questions for
consideration.
P90 2012-932719 978-1-111-83529-3
Media/impact; an introduction to mass media, enhanced
10th ed.
Biagi, Shirley.
Wadsworth Publishing Co., ©2013 430 p. $174.95 (pa)
Biagi (communication studies, California State U., Sacramento) offers stu-
dents a textbook on mass media and its impact on everyday life. She dis-
cusses various media types, advertising, public relations, and issues like
politics, culture, law and regulation, ethics, and global media. Coverage
incorporates digital media, analysis of changing delivery systems for
news and information, and discussion of current issues. Each industry
chapter contains career information. Updated, this edition also has video
lessons on the companion website and new culture, money, world,
people, and audience media/impact boxes. The website also contains
quizzes, flashcards, images, and an ebook.
P91 2012-017346 978-1-4522-3005-4
Qualitative media analysis, 2d ed.
Altheide, David L. and Christopher J. Schneider. (Qualitative research
methods; v.38)
Sage Publications, ©2013 150 p. $26.00 (pa)
For students and researchers, Altheide (justice and social inquiry,
Arizona State U.) and Schneider (sociology, U. of British Columbia,
Canada) explain how to use qualitative approaches to analyze media doc-
uments like newspapers and magazines, electronic documents, television
newscasts, Internet video games, and online newspaper and other web-
sites. They blend the traditional idea of objective content analysis with
participant observation to form ethnographic content analysis and focus
on documents as representations of social meanings and institutional
relations. They compare traditional quantitative with ethnographic (or
qualitative) content analysis, outline the steps of qualitative document
analysis and the role of the research task and perspective in various sam-
pling strategies, and address the use of computer information bases for
tracking discourse, and field notes and other research materials as doc-
uments. Materials from their students’ projects are used for illustration.
This edition adds new examples, clarifies some concepts and perspec-
tives, adds research by others and more on the process of qualitative
media analysis, and has a new chapter on social media, as well as more
on their approach, with an expanded list of studies using it. All chapters
have been expanded, and figures have been revised.
P91 2012-015011 978-0-415-89022-9
Qualitative research methods for media studies.
Brennen, Bonnie S.
Routledge, ©2013 238 p. $49.95 (pa)
Written especially for students and researchers in the field of media
studies, this book describes common methods of qualitative research. In
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
the first chapter, Brennen (journalism, Marquette U.) explains the theo-
retical framework within which the book was written as well as pre-
senting pertinent information regarding situating research within
conceptual orientations, and an introduction to how qualitative and
quantitative research differs. The chapters which follow cover general
guidelines for performing research, interviewing, focus groups, history,
oral history, ethnography and participant observation, and textual
analysis. Bibliographies, a conclusion, and exercises are included at the
end of each chapter.
P94 2011-943943 978-1-111-34910-3
Communication between cultures, 8th ed.
Samovar, Larry A. et al.
Wadsworth Publishing Co., ©2013 403 p. $148.95 (pa)
This undergraduate textbook advances the view that engaging in inter-
cultural communication leads to philosophical and ethical choices and
the consequences of those choices. This eighth edition condenses the pre-
vious edition’s chapters on business, education, and health care into a
single chapter, which uses Brazil, China, and India as models to explain
culture’s impact on negotiations and conflict resolution in the business
context. This edition offers a new section on American values and
expanded material on Islam, secularism, and the impact of globalization
on intercultural communication. There is also new coverage of how glob-
alization and social changes are impacting traditional family structures,
and new material on interpersonal communication and communication
technology. Many new b&w photos have also been added to this edition.
Learning features include chapter summaries, activities, and discussion
and reflection questions. Samovar is affiliated with San Diego State
University.
P94 2012-008309 978-3-11-028396-9
Mediation, remediation, and the dynamics of cultural
memory.
Title main entry. Ed. by Astrid Erll and Ann Rigney. (De Gruyter
graduate)
De Gruyter, ©2012 256 p. $35.00 (pa)
Scholars of literature and culture, with the odd social scientist, provide a
bridge between the social dynamics of cultural memory and the
dynamics specific to the ongoing emergence of new media practices. The
topics include personal memories in Memento (2000) and Eternal
Sunshine of the Spotless Mind (2004), theories of memory and photograph
in W.G. Sebald’s Austerlitz, digital network memory, the diamond jubilee
of Queen Victoria in 1897, and reporting on the expulsion of Germans in
Polish and German magazines. Only names are indexed. The 12 essays
are from a September 2007 symposium at the University of Giessen. They
were first published in a clothbound edition as part of the series “Media
and Cultural Memory.”
P96 2011-534094 978-0-7456-4762-3
Scandal and silence; media responses to presidential
misconduct.
Entman, Robert M. (Contemporary political communication)
Polity Press, ©2012 269 p. $64.95 (pa)
This in-depth look at press coverage of presidential scandals examines
the seemingly random and contradictory levels of publicity afforded
social, economic, and relationship scandals within the highest level and
most visible of American politicians. The book aims to show the internal
logic of media coverage as well as reasons for inconsistent or inappro-
priate treatment of scandal news. Entman (media and public affairs,
George Washington U.) not only focuses on traditional major media
outlets but also on the newer forms of media which have emerged since
the advent of the internet, as well as exploring the elevation of misdeeds
into scandals and how the media creates that framework. Special
attention is given to the McCain, Edwards, and Clinton family scandals.
The book is appropriate for media and communications students as well
as those with an interest in American politics and media coverage
thereof.
P99 978-94-6091-995-4
Be(com)ing human; semiosis and the myth of reason.
Stables, Andrew. (Educational issues; rethinking theory and practice;
v.56)
Sense Publishers, ©2012 142 p. $49.00 (pa)
What should be the grounds for a theory of the individual in society and
world, asks Stables (U. of Bath, England), that can best underpin
approaches to social policy and education on the assumption that the
human animal is always aspiring to a fully human status that can never
be attained. He suggests what those grounds might be and some of the
theoretical frameworks that might logically be inferred from them. He
considers semiotics, process, and the language game; moving in time:
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
consciousness and reason; thens within now; be(com)ing responsible:
humans, others, and ethics; and promoting human progress. There is no
index.
P99 2012-020051 978-1-61451-090-1
Direct belief; an essay on the semantics, pragmatics, and
metaphysics of belief.
Berg, Jonathan. (Mouton series in pragmatics; 23)
De Gruyter, ©2012 157 p. $112.00
Berg (philosophy, U. of Haifa) has assembled material from his essays,
articles, and presentations over the past several years into a compre-
hensive account of his thoughts on direct belief. He discusses the insta-
bility of belief ascriptions and how not to explain it; the pragmatics of
substitutivity; and conceptions, belief, and “inner speech.”
P107 2011-051176 978-1-4411-4186-6
The discourse of Twitter and social media.
Zappavigna, Michele. (Continuum discourse)
Continuum Publishing Group, ©2012 227 p. $140.00
Social networking via Web 2.0 has prompted a revolution in linguistic
analysis as well as in society. In this contribution that applies linguistics
in the field of computer-generated communication, Zappavigna (lin-
guistics, U. of Sydney, Australia) uses functional linguistics to process the
way tweeters and other social media users interact and exchange shared
values through searchable talk. Following a comparison of Web 1.0 and
Web 2.0, she draws on social semiotics, appraisal theory, and quantitative
analysis in a discourse analysis of approaches to studying influences on
online social networks. Case studies examine features/types of microposts
(e.g., hashtags as a marker of ambient affiliation, memes, slang, humor,
and political discourse).
P115 2012-009131 978-1-84769-734-9
European multilingualism; current perspectives and
challenges.
Rindler Schjerve, Rosita and Eva Vetter. (Multilingual matters; 147)
Multilingual Matters, ©2012 221 p. $49.95 (pa)
For the LINEE project (Languages in as Network of European Excellence),
nine partners from European universities collaborated on 24 sub-projects
to find out how European multilingualism fosters European integration
and the European knowledge-based society. This work examines socio-
cultural, political, and scientific dimensions of multilingualism in the
EU, based on the results of the LINEE project. The book is distributed in
the US by UTP Distribution.
P115 2012-022006 978-1-84769-794-3
Multilingualism and creativity.
Kharkhurin, Anatoliy V. (Bilingual education and bilingualism; no.88)
Multilingual Matters, ©2012 220 p. $49.95 (pa)
Himself having studied in several countries and become fluent in several
languages all the while remaining active in creative writing, Kharkhurin
(psychology, American U. of Sharjah, United Arab Emirates) explores the
relationship between the two in a longitudinal study that uses his own
experience as a starting point. He covers creative cognition, multilingual
cognition, multilingual creativity, multilingual creative cognition, multi-
lingual creative development, and implications of multilingual creative
cognition for creativity domains and for education. Distributed in the US
by UTP Distributors.
P118 2012-013689 978-0-85745-760-8
Playing with languages; children and change in a
Caribbean village.
Paugh, Amy L.
Berghahn Books, ©2012 250 p. $90.00
The use of Patwa (an Afro-French creole) in Dominica is in the midst of
conflicting pressures. On the one hand, parents and schools prohibit the
use of this natural language as it impairs children’s ability to succeed in
both school and work. The government, on the other hand is pushing its
use in order to promote cultural heritage tourism. Within this context,
Paugh (anthropology, James Madison U.), makes use here of ethno-
graphic fieldwork and video-recorded social interactions to explore an
entirely different facet: how the use of separate languages by children in
play can be used to negotiate authority, autonomy and social identity. In
addition to footnotes, a 19 page bibliography is included. Some of the
material in this book makes use of a 2005 paper in Language in Society
and a paper published in the 4th International Symposium on
Bilingualism.
–180–
P119 2012-009129 978-1-84769-729-5
The Common European Framework of Reference; the
globalisation of language education policy.
Title main entry. Ed. by Michael Byram and Lynne Parmenter.
(Languages for intercultural communication and education; no.23)
Multilingual Matters, ©2012 270 p. $49.95 (pa)
The Common European Framework of Reference for Languages: Learning,
Teaching, Assessment (CEFR) is a Council of Europe-issued guideline that
aims to provide a method of language pedagogy that applies to all lan-
guages of Europe. This text provides a comparative analysis of the
influence of the CEFR in selected countries within and outside Europe.
Having solicited contributors from academia as well as those involved in
policy-formation in their respective countries, editors Byram (emeritus,
Durham U., England) and Parmenter (Institute of Education, Manchester
Metropolitan U., England) present twinned chapters for each country that
address the processes of taking CEFR into consideration in curriculum
development, addressing aims, methods, materials, assessment, evalu-
ation, and inspection, as well as the broader intellectual context for CEFR
influence. The countries discussed are France, Germany, Bulgaria,
Poland, Argentina, Colombia, the US, China, Japan, Taiwan, and New
Zealand. Distributed in the US by UTP Distribution.
P119 2012-009134 978-1-84769-744-8
Implementing educational language policy in Arizona;
legal, historical and current practices in SEI.
Title main entry. Ed. by M. Beatriz Arias and Christian Faltis.
(Bilingual education & bilingualism; 86)
Multilingual Matters, ©2012 181 p. $39.95 (pa)
Arias (education, Arizona State University) and Faltis (education,
University of California-Davis) unite contributors in English, education,
teaching English as a second language, and applied linguistics to study
the implementation of state-prescribed structured English immersion
(SEI) and English-only polices in Arizona public schools, in force in the
state since 2000, and their impact on language minority students in
Arizona. The book begins with a review of language policies and teacher
preparation, pointing to research that SEI is not effective in teaching stu-
dents new languages. Part 2 outlines the impact of SEI in Arizona class-
rooms, drawing on interviews to give insight on teachers’ attitudes to
students, teaching preferences, and educational values. The book con-
cludes by analyzing the Arizona Department of Education’s mandated
SEI professional development for teachers. There is no subject index.
P119 978-90-420-3528-7
Multilingual Europe; multilingual Europeans.
Title main entry. Ed. by László Marácz adn Mireille Rosello. (European
studies; v.29)
Editions Rodopi, ©2012 323 p. $90.45
The 14 essays in this collection explore how multilingual and multicul-
tural Europe practices and thinks about that multilingualism, how those
terms are defined, encouraged or discouraged by policy, and in a variety
of communities. Topics include policy and practice in European institu-
tions, multilingualism and transnational communications, language
policy and national equity, minority and regional languages, and
migration and grammar in the ‘New Europe.’ Editors are Marácz
(European studies, U. of Amsterdam, the Netherlands) and Rosello (lit-
erary studies, U. of Amsterdam). Price is converted from the euro and
subject to fluctuation.
P126 2012-031446 978-3-11-028466-9
Methods in contemporary linguistics.
Title main entry. Ed. by Andrea Ender et al. (Trends in linguistics;
studies and monographs; 247)
De Gruyter, ©2012 536 p. $168.00
Mostly Swiss linguists, but also some German and Belgian, show that
developing and using research methods in linguistics cannot be sepa-
rated from analyzing methods, that is methodology. They discuss core
domains from phonetics to pragmatics; cross-linguistic and language
internal diversity; dynamic language; writing; and language, space, and
society. Among specific topics are indirect measurement in morpho-
logical typology, qualitative and quantitative ways of tapping into the
multilingual repertoire, underlying parameters and methodological pro-
cedures for historical text analysis, experimental methods in psycholin-
guistics, and the territoriality principle’s applicability to the Romansh
area in the Swiss canton of Grisons.
–181–
P128 2012-016385 978-3-11-022921-9
Linguistic complexity; second language acquisition,
indigenization, contact.
Title main entry. Ed. by Bernd Kortmann and Benedikt Szmrecsanyi.
(Linguae & litterae; 13)
De Gruyter, ©2012 264 p. $140.00
Linguists in different specialties discuss complexity in the three major
contact-related fields of creolistics, indigenization, and nativization. The
topics include accounting for analyticity in creoles, nothing will come of
nothing, the complexity of the personal and possessive pronoun system
of Norf’k, what defies complete acquisition in second language acqui-
sition, and syntactical and variational complexity in British and
Ghanaian English. The 10 essays are from a May 2009 workshop in
Freiburg, Germany. They are not indexed.
P129 2011-031560 978-1-4411-0832-6
Appliable linguistics. (reprint, 2010)
Title main entry. Ed. by Ahmar Mahboob and Naomi K. Knight.
Continuum Publishing Group, ©2012 313 p. $55.00 (pa)
Linguists at the University of Sydney and elsewhere in Australia explore
appliable linguistics as a framework through which to study language-
related issues in theoretical linguistics. The discipline takes everyday real-
life language-related theoretical and practical problems as a starting
point, then develops and contributes to a theoretical model of language
that can be applied in the context. Many of the 16 chapters were delivered
as papers at the 2008 Second Free Linguistics Conference in Sydney.
P143 2012-018952 978-90-04-22407-0
Copies versus cognates in bound morphology.
Title main entry. Ed. by Lars Johanson and Martine Robbeets. (Brill’s
studies in language, cognition and culture; v.2)
BRILL, ©2012 455 p. $189.00
When two or more languages have bound morphology in common, it is
generally either because the languages are daughters of a common
parent language, and so inherit the morphology; or because contact
between the languages has led to the morphology spreading from one to
the other or others. Inherited morphemes are cognates, and borrowed
ones are copies. Here linguists balance internal and external explanations
for shared morphology, and work out criteria for distinguishing between
cognates and copies. They begin with theoretical and typological issues,
then look at case studies in America and Eurasia. Among the topics are
non-borrowed but non-cognate parallels in bound morphology, a varia-
tionist solution to apparent copying across related languages, morpho-
logical borrowing in Sierra Populuca, the origin of absolutes in Old and
Middle English, and the likelihood of morphological borrowing in
Korean and Japanese.
P165 2012-001426 978-3-11-027556-8
A cognitive linguistics view of terminology and
specialized language.
Title main entry. Ed. by Pamela Faber. (Applications of cognitive lin-
guistics; 20)
De Gruyter, ©2012 307 p. $140.00
Contributors identified only by name—presumably linguists—demonstrate
the importance of cognitive linguistics as a methodological framework
for studying terminology and specialized language. Their overall themes
are basic concepts, terms as specialized knowledge units, and contextual
information in specialized knowledge representation: linguistic contexts
and images. Specific topics are terminology and specialized language,
metaphor and metonymy in specialized language, translating specialized
language, semantics, pragmatics, a contextual selection for term entries,
and graphical information.
P298 2012-031448 978-3-11-026008-3
The expression of information structure.
Title main entry. Ed. by Manfred Krifka and Renate Musan. (The
expression of cognitive categories; 5)
De Gruyter, ©2012 468 p. $140.00
European and US linguists explore information structure as the form of
information rather than its content in Chinese, English, French, Georgian,
Hungarian, and Japanese. They also consider the empirical and prosodic
investigation of information structure, the psychology and acquisition of
information structure, computation and modeling, and information
structure and theoretical models of grammar.
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
P299 2012-450560 978-3-11-027009-9
Grammatical replication and borrowability in language
contact.
Title main entry. Ed. by Björn Wiemer et al. (Trends in linguistics;
studies and monographs; 242)
De Gruyter, ©2012 670 p. $182.00
Presented by Wiemer (Institut für Slavistik, Germany), Wälchli
(Institutionen för Lingvistik, Sweden), and Hansen (Institut für Slavistik),
15 articles examine two key theoretical issues that have been of recent
interest in research on grammaticalization and language contact. The
first issue concerns how grammatical replication can be distinguished
from other processes of contact-induced linguistic change and the condi-
tions under which it takes place. The second addresses whether there are
grammatical morphemes or constructions that are more easily borrowed
than others and how language contact can account for areal biases in the
borrowing of grammatical formatives. Generally focused on the Slavic
language family, the chapters are arranged in thematic groups based on
the structural or functional domains of noun phrase-related, verb phrase-
related, connection of nuclei, and cores.
P306 2011-034959 978-1-4411-0856-2
Translation, adaptation and transformation.
Title main entry. Ed. by Laurence Raw. (Continuum advances in trans-
lation studies)
Continuum Publishing Group, ©2012 220 p. $140.00
The question being posed is whether translation, adaptation, and trans-
formation are the same or different, and if different, how. Among the
perspectives are whether translation and adaptation are two sides of an
ideological coin, a theoretical view from translation studies on authen-
ticity in adaptation, the transadaptation of Shakespeare’s Christian
dimension in China’s theater, Waltz with Bashir as a case of multidi-
mensional translation, translation and inter-titles in Victor Sjöstroöm’s
silent film adaptation of Henrik Ibsen’s Terje Vigen, and some thoughts
about Chinese students studying in a British university.
P306 978-977-416-533-7
Translating Egypt’s revolution; the language of Tahrir.
Title main entry. Ed. by Samia Mehrez.
American U. in Cairo Press, ©2012 305 p. $29.95 (pa)
This collection of 8 essays compiles several translation-projects under-
taken in the wake of the Egyptian Revolution of 2011. They are products
of a seminar on “Translating Revolution” offered at the American
University at Cairo in spring of 2011. They consider semiotics and the re-
ordering of public subjectivities, the dramatic and transformatively per-
formative moments of the revolution, revolutionary banners, street-art,
the challenges of translating revolutionary humor, revolutionary poetry,
the myth that “the army and people are one,” and the discursive regimes
of revolt. Being a public seminar, the contributors have an eclectic back-
ground: poets, musicians, journalist, security specialists, activists,
teachers. Three appendices present Arabic quotations and selections from
interviews, poetry and song that were referenced in the essays.
Distributed in North America by Oxford University Press.
P306 2012-010115 978-1-61451-144-1
Wittgenstein in translation; exploring semiotic signatures.
Gorlée, Dinda L. (Semiotics, communication and cognition; 9)
De Gruyter, ©2012 361 p. $140.00
Gorleé, a research associate at the Wittgenstein Archives at the University
of Bergen, explores Wittgenstein’s philosophical reasoning in translation,
from a semiotic perspective. By focusing on his work in and on trans-
lation she aims to underscore how his semiotic style informed his
approach to philosophical writing. She considers Pierce’s influence on
his translatology, the picture-theory of thought, his fragmentary writing
style, art-science myth-making, the biblical and literary influences on his
semiotic methods, language-games of translation, and the transformation
to a more “understandable” version of philosophical reasoning. Her
chapters and subsections are numbered. She also makes ample use of
foot-notes for extended discussion.
PA4399 2012-020657 978-1-4128-4747-6
Praxiphanes of Mytilene and Chamaeleon of Heraclea;
text, translation, and discussion.
Title main entry. Ed. by Andrea Martano et al. (Rutgers University
studies in classical humanities; v.18)
Transaction Publishers, ©2012 593 p. $79.95
Volume 18 of this series offers texts, translations, and essays on the work
of two Hellenistic philosophers, Chamaeleon and Praxiphanes. As they
were both students of Aristotle’s inheritor Theophrastus, they are con-
sidered Peripatetic philosophers within the realm of both Theophrastus
and Aristotelian studies. Their work here focuses on language, poetry,
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
music, and textual criticism. It is presented in Greek with facing-page
translation in English. The translation is literal and scholarly, focused on
direct accuracy. Footnotes are provided. Two types of textual apparatus
are given for each author: textual variants, and parallel texts. There are
three editors: Andrea Martano (research fellow, Catholic U. of the Sacred
Heart, Milan, IT), Elisabetta Matelli (classics, Catholic U. of the Sacred
Heart, Milan, IT), and David Mirhady (humanities, Simon Fraser U., CA).
Contributors offer ten essays designed mainly to explicate textual
problems. Both philosophers write here in short texts which functioned
primarily as commentary on or criticism of contemporary works; as a
result, their ideas will be intelligible only to specialists in classics, par-
ticularly with experience in Peripatetic philosophy or the Hellenistic era.
The explanatory essays are also technical, and designed for classical
scholars. Each essay offers works cited; the book offers an index of
ancient sources.
PA4413 2011-027655 978-1-4411-0799-2
Sophocles’ Oedipus the King ; a reader’s guide.
Sheehan, Seán. (Reader’s guides)
Continuum Publishing Group, ©2012 174 p. $80.00
Sheehan comments on the best known ancient Greek play, one of seven
surviving plays by Sophocles. He discusses contexts; form, language, and
style; overview of themes; reading Oedipus; critical reception and pub-
lishing history; adaptation, interpretation, and influence; and a guide to
further reading.
PA6029 2012-006338 978-1-4214-0674-9
The empire of the self; self-command and political speech
in Seneca and Petronius.
Star, Christopher.
Johns Hopkins U. Press, ©2012 302 p. $65.00
Star (classics, Middlebury College) provides an expanded portrait of
ancient Roman self-care by considering how, in the work of rival philoso-
phers Seneca and Petronius, empire in the ancient world structured the
self and was internalized in the ideal of self-command. In two major sec-
tions, he examines how they address the problems and possibilities of
self-shaping and self-revelation in the world of empire. Chapter topics
include: the role of imperium in Seneca’s philosophy, how self-address
figures in Seneca’s tragedies, bodies and their control in Petronius’ char-
acters, the crisis of words and appearances in the early Roman empire,
bodily manifestations of Senecan psychology, and the place of the body
in moral revelation. He argues that both Seneca and Petronius “attempt
to move beyond the body as the privileged site for determining moral
self-worth.”
PA6396 2012-014016 978-1-60384-844-2
Satires.
Horace. Trans. by John Svarlien.
Hackett Publishing Co., ©2012 198 p. $14.95 (pa)
Svarlien (classics, Transylvania U.) translates the two books of satires by
Roman poet Horace—Quintus Horatilus Flaccus—(65-8 BC), whose life wit-
nessed the stormy transition from republic to the empire. In these 18
verses, he says, the poet fashioned a new poetic genre. David Mankin
(classics, Cornell U.) introduces them by placing the poet and the poem
in historical, political, and literary context.
PA8527 2003-070860 978-90-04-22893-1
The poetic works of Helius Eobanus Hessus; v.3: King of
poets, 1514-1517.
Hessus, Helius Eobanus. Ed. and trans. by Harry Vredeveld. (The
Renaissance Society of America texts and studies series; v.1)
BRILL, ©2012 786 p. $199.00
Vredeveld (emeritus, The Ohio State U.) did the editing, translating, and
annotating, and wrote commentary and introductions—sharing his
passion for the writings of the extraordinarily witty and wise Eobanus
Hessus (1488-1540), who was hailed as “King of Poets” by Johann
Reuchlin in 1514. During the years under consideration (1514-1517),
Hessus produced numerous works, and these are presented in facing
pages displaying the original Latin and the English translation. Readers
will find here the satirical bestseller The Species of Drunkards, as well as
Easter Hymn, On True Nobility, On the Avoidance of Drunkenness, and
Christ’s Victory over the Underworld, among other writings. Previous
volumes (v.1 and 2) were published by the Arizona Center for Medieval
and Renaissance Studies; this third volume is identified as the first
volume in Brill’s “The Renaissance Society of America Texts and Studies”
series.
–182–
PC2129 2011-935891 978-1-111-35203-5
Mais oui!; introductory French and Francophone culture,
5th ed.
Thompson, Chantal P. and Elaine M. Phillips.
Cengage Learning, ©2013 521 p. $203.95
Thompson (Brigham Young U.) and Phillips, an educational consultant,
supply beginning French students with a textbook that takes a critical
thinking approach to language, leading students through a process of
observing, inferring, confirming, and acquiring French. Chapters are
divided into themes that begin with listening or reading materials from
magazine articles, books, and literary works, or interviews with native
speakers, and address both grammar, pronunciation, and vocabulary,
and the cultural context. Also included are videos of native speakers on
the companion website, along with the listening passages, activities, pro-
nunciation guides, quizzes, grammar tutorials, and other resources.
PC5447 2012-022589 978-0-8263-5086-2
Calunga and the legacy of an African language in Brazil.
Byrd, Steven.
U. of New Mexico Press, ©2012 278 p. $55.00
For over a century, scholars studied possible influences of African lan-
guages on Brazilian Portuguese, says Byrd (Spanish and Portuguese lan-
guages, U. of New England), but almost no attention has been paid to
languages of African slaves that have persisted to the present in the New
World. To start closing that gap, he describes and analyzes the contem-
porary Afro-Brazilian speech community of Calunga, and how this par-
ticular speech community fits into the larger picture of the African legacy
in Brazil. It is spoken now mostly by old men numbering perhaps in the
hundreds, and exists in a moribund state. After reviewing the historical
and linguistic background, he looks at sociolinguistic and sociohistorical
considerations of Calunga, the lexicon, and grammar.
PD131 2012-024229 978-3-11-025934-6
Phonological evidence from the Continental runic
inscriptions.
Findell, Martin. (Ergänzungsbände zum Reallexikon der Germanischen
Altertumskunde; v.79)
De Gruyter, ©2012 533 p. $32.95
Findell, a research associate at University of Leicester, reconstructs a
phonological system of proto-German dialects from the 1st millennia. He
uses runic inscriptions that date back to the 5th-7th century from the
southern region of Germany. The runes are written in Older Futhark;
those using innovative English or Fresian runes are excluded. The bulk
of the text is an item by item analysis of inscriptions that try to relate
grapheme and phoneme.
PE1074 2012-020311 978-3-11-026645-0
The amazing world of Englishes; a practical introduction.
Siemund, Peter et al. (Mouton textbook)
De Gruyter Mouton, ©2012 283 p. $42.00 (pa)
Siemund, Julia Davydova, and Georg Maier (all U. of Hamburg,
Germany) present a textbook for a high school or undergraduate course
exploring the varieties of the English language spoken around the world.
It assumes a sound command of English but no background in lin-
guistics or its terminology. It covers English as a global language; the
inner circle of Irish, Scottish, British and American, and Australian
English; the outer circle of Indian, Nigerian, and South African English;
and the expanding circle of English in Europe. A glossary is provided,
but no index.
PE1111 2012-947234 978-1-938690-21-1
Rocket English grammar.
Hart, Carl W.
Two Harbors Press, ©2012 259 p. $26.99 (pa)
Hart, who teaches English as a second language in the US and other
countries, offers a grammar book for English as a second language stu-
dents at any level, from beginning to advanced, to use in a classroom or
with a tutor. He focuses on grammar and not vocabulary, writing, lis-
tening, or conversation, omits illustrations, and covers basic to advanced
grammar, with exercises and entire units on the use of “have got” and
phrasal verbs, as well as the emphatic “do” and ellipsis, modals, gerunds,
and conditional sentences. Most units have a special advanced section.
PE1112 2012-013254 978-0-7641-4786-9
Grammar in plain English, 5th ed.
Diamond, Harriet and Phyllis Dutwin.
Barron’s Educational Ser., ©2012 362 p. $14.99 (pa)
Aimed at adults preparing for the GED, ESL students and others looking
to improve their English, this manual presents 22 grammar lessons that
–183–
take a common-sense approach to language study and cover all areas of
the GED Writing Skills test: organization, sentence structure, usage,
mechanics, and writing ability. The manual emphasizes language
structure over traditional grammar, shows students what they already
know about language, and builds upon this understanding. It begins
with the basic sentence pattern and introduces all basic elements,
including usage, punctuation, effective expression, capitalization, and
spelling, with examples, practice exercises and questions, review lessons,
and a final review. Diamond is an author and speaker, and Dutwin is
associated with a training and development company.
PE1112 2011-931173 978-1-133-30736-5
Grammar to go; how it works and how to use it, 4th ed.
Goldstein, Barbara et al.
Wadsworth Publishing Co., ©2013 270 p. $57.95 (pa)
In this grammar and punctuation workbook, Goldstein (Hillsborough
Community College) offers a new, interactive approach to sentence dia-
gramming, minimizing memorization of rules and instead emphasizing
hands-on exercises that allow students to visualize relationships among
sentence parts. Part 1 covers grammar basics, from parts of speech
through sentence patterns, verbal phrases, word order variation, clauses,
and types of sentences. In Part 2, students put the basics to work as they
deal with fragments and run-ons, punctuation, pronoun use, agreement,
modifiers, and sentence coherence. The book contains numerous practice
exercises, self-tests with answers, exercises based on readings, and
writing exercises. A companion website contains PowerPoint lectures nar-
rated by the author. An instructor’s manual with answers and teaching
suggestions is available. This fourth edition offers a new feature on
common errors in speech, and the companion web site provides more
instructions on advanced sentence diagramming.
PE1112 2012-013518 978-1-61608-370-0
Missed periods and other grammar scares; how to avoid
unplanned and unwanted writing errors.
Baranick, Jenny.
Skyhorse Pub. Co., ©2012 168 p. $16.95
Baranick, who teaches English composition, critical thinking, and writing
skills at the Fashion Institute of Design and Merchandising, offers a
humorous guide to grammar and spelling based on her blog. She focuses
on what she views are the most important writing errors and helping
readers make their writing more professional. She tackles spelling; words
that are not actually in the dictionary; run-on sentences; commas; apos-
trophes; colons; dashes and hyphens; the ellipsis; punctuation with quo-
tation marks; capitalization; pronouns; numbers; grammar myths; email
etiquette; formatting papers, letters, and résumés; and proofreading. Each
chapter provides exercises.
PE1128 2011-025408 978-1-4411-9356-8
100 ideas for supporting learners with EAL.
Pim, Chris. (Continuum one hundreds series)
Continuum Publishing Group, ©2012 149 p. $19.95 (pa)
Pim, a UK teacher and consultant in information and communications
technology and EAL (English as an additional language), delineates 100
practical and simple ideas for teachers, support staff, managers, spe-
cialists, and coordinators to use to support learners with EAL. Ideas use
low-cost or free resources where appropriate and relate to matters such
as parent conferences, visual timetables, and personal workbooks, and
assessment, with a focus on resources in the UK. Other ideas have to do
with curriculum access, such as using images, audio, video, tablets, and
graphic organizers; integrated approaches to learning, like digital story-
telling, talking books, and building a wiki; and encouraging speaking
and listening through cross-curricular drama, talk prompts, and talking
devices. Some ideas concern developing reading using graphic readers,
software, and other resources; supporting writing through graphic texts;
and promoting an intercultural dimension through dual-language story-
telling, understanding of social and cultural norms, and other methods.
There is no index.
PE1128 2011-031559 978-1-4411-5198-8
Corpus-based approaches to English language teaching.
(reprint, 2010)
Title main entry. Ed. by Mari Carmen Campoy-Cubillo et al. (Research
in corpus and discourse)
Continuum Publishing Group, ©2012 281 p. $49.95 (pa)
Linguists explore different ways of applying corpus-based and corpus-
informed research to language teaching environments. The three areas of
particular emphasis are using corpora in teaching English for specific
purposes, pedagogically motivated uses of corpora, and the potential of
corpora-mediated multimodal tools for the language-learning context.
Specific topics include reporting intuitions and ideas in spoken academic
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
discourse, the analysis of organizing and rhetorical items in a learner
corpus of technical writing, designing and exploiting a small online
English-Spanish parallel textual database for language teaching purposes,
corpus methodology for implementing language representation, and the
videocorpus as a multimodal tool for teaching. A soft-cover reprint of the
2010 original.
PE1128 2012-025628 978-1-60554-101-3
Dual-language learners; strategies for teaching English.
Passe, Angèle Sancho.
Redleaf Press, ©2013 198 p. $24.95 (pa)
Passe, an early childhood education consultant who specializes in
working with programs to develop plans for teaching dual-language
learners, outlines an approach teachers in multilingual early childhood
classrooms can use to help dual-language learners learn English,
maintain their native language, and develop the early literacy skills
needed for school readiness and success. She discusses challenges and
best practices, frequently asked questions, planning a program, learning
and teaching language, working with families, setting up an environment
and curriculum for a multilingual classroom, and techniques for teaching
English, supporting the home language, and assessment. Reproducible
templates are provided.
PE1128 2012-020408 978-1-4522-3523-3
Teaching beginner ELLs using picture books; tellability.
Lado, Ana.
Corwin Press Inc., ©2012 204 p. $29.71 (pa)
Lado (education and human services, Marymount U.) demonstrates how
picture books can be used to teach beginning English language learners
and how to select books with the right content difficulty and language
input (based on the principles of communicative language teaching), use
assessments to match books and learners, and match books to commu-
nicative language teaching strategies. She refers to books that are com-
patible with teaching beginners as books with tellability, and details
those that favor language development through scaffolds, themes, lan-
guage difficulty, and format. Included are three units with book lists and
four lesson plans each and annotated lists of books in each chapter.
Others are listed online.
PE1128 2011-925979 978-1-111-35197-7
Writing clearly; grammar for editing, 3d ed.
Lane, Janet and Ellen Lange
Heinle Cengage, ©2012 358 p. $59.95 (pa)
This workbook is designed for high-intermediate and advanced ELLs
who want to improve their writing in academic or professional settings.
It also addresses the needs of Generation 1.5 immigrant students. This
third edition features a new color design with color photos and a new
organization with more headings in a clean, modern layout. The
workbook reinforces editing skills for 15 common grammar problems of
ELLs. The first section looks at global errors, such as verb tense, and the
second section addresses local errors, such as word choice. Section 3
covers expanding vocabulary and achieving an academic writing style.
The book includes grammar journal assignments and pre- and post-
chapter tests. Appendices offer an outline of steps for writing and
revising, editing symbols and error awareness worksheets, and addi-
tional practice exercises. Student and instructor companion websites are
available. This third edition contains writing assignments based on
photos; exercises have been updated to reflect current technology and
current trends in pedagogy. Grammar charts are also new. The
workbook can be used as a core or companion text, or for tutoring or
independent study. The authors are affiliated with UC-Davis.
PE1271 2012-027337 978-0-393-08116-9
Vex, hex, smash, smooch; let verbs power your writing.
Hale, Constance.
W.W. Norton, ©2012 395 p. $26.95
Integrating pop culture, linguistics, history, literature, and grammar, Hale
(teacher of writing and editing, Harvard U. and U. of California at
Berkeley) invites wordsmiths of every level to embrace the often neglected
but omnipotent verb and explains why they’re so crucial to great writing.
Broken up in four easy sections, this witty and engaging writer’s
handbook draws from great works of literature (Shakespeare, Ernest
Hemmingway) as well as Facebook status updates and “tweets” to illus-
trate the numerous paths to verbal panache. Includes six appendices cov-
ering subjects such as the author’s preferred dictionaries, as well as a
companion website featuring further writing exercises and lesson plans
for writing teachers.
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
PE1315 2012-009734 978-3-11-020438-4
Epistemic meaning; a crosslinguistic and functional-
cognitive study.
Boye, Kasper. (Empirical approaches to language typology; 43)
De Gruyter Mouton, ©2012 373 p. $168.00
A major controversy in this branch of linguistics is whether crosslin-
guistic descriptive categories of evidentiality and epistemic modality are
distinct but similar, are distinct but overlapping, or one is a subset of the
other, explains Boye (U. of Copenhagen, Denmark). He advocates a fourth
view, that the categories are distinct but both subcategories of the larger
category of epistemicity. After preliminaries, he covers epistemic systems,
a semantic map of epistemic expressions, epistemic meaning and scope,
a functional-cognitive analysis of epistemic meaning and the proposition.
The book is based on his December 2006 PhD dissertation at the
University of Copenhagen.
PE1319 978-94-6091-795-0
Critical ELT practices in Asia.
Title main entry. Ed. by Kiwan Sung and Rod Pederson.
(Transgressions; cultural studies and education; v.82)
Sense Publishers, ©2012 175 p. $39.00 (pa)
Sung (Kyung Hee University, Korea) and Pederson’s (Woosong University,
Korea) collection of eight essays critically examines the conventional, gen-
erally unquestioned objectives of English teaching in Asia—as a tool for
communication or acquisition of basic skills or high test scores for edu-
cational or workplace advancement—and explores the potential of
English teaching for the nontraditional purposes of democracy and social
justice in China, Hong Kong, Indonesia, Korea, and Sri Lanka. A sam-
pling of topics: how English and its roles are constructed in globalization
discourse, native speakerism, desire for standard English, and compe-
tition- and accountability-based teaching and exams; the historical ties of
English teaching and learning with colonialism and neocolonialism, and
the importance of valuing the diverse language backgrounds of learners
today; and how global changes have promoted English as a tool for indi-
vidual and national competition and success.
PE1404 2012-011447 978-1-4331-1787-9
A synthesis of qualitative studies of writing center
tutoring, 1983-2006.
Babcock, Rebecca Day et al.
Peter Lang Publishing Inc, ©2012 137 p. $139.95 (pa)
This synthesis of studies came about when one of the authors, who was
searching for a unified theory of writing center tutoring, discovered that
it would require analyzing existing studies to mine them for theories. The
authors note that writing centers began appearing over a 20-year period
beginning in the late 20th century. Among the topics addressed are: per-
sonal characteristics of participants, external influences, communication
and emotion, roles, temperament, and outcome. Each chapter except the
conclusion ends with a summary. Authors are Babcock (English, U. of
Texas of the Permian Basin), Manning (writing center director and coor-
dinator of developmental English, Frank and Sue Mayborn School of
Journalism), and Rogers (U. of Texas and project research assistant).
PE1404 2012-029661 978-1-4331-1914-9
Writing for change; research as public pedagogy and arts-
based activism.
Robson, Claire. (Critical qualitative research; v.8)
Peter Lang Publishing Inc, ©2012 169$0.00 p. $37.95 (pa)
The story is a powerful tool for understanding and thus for education,
both for individuals and for communities. Robson explores this inter-
section of narrative and academia with a focus on activism and self-
awareness. This book is divided into five chapters, each preceded by a
short section, or interlude, of fiction or other creative writing, which
serve to set the tone or theme of the chapter which follows. The first
interlude and chapter deal with the exploration and knowledge of the
self; the second delves more deeply into addressing painful or difficult
areas of self awareness, with particular focus on using the tools of close
writing exercises. The third chapter discusses the intersection between lit-
erature and psychoanalytic theory, especially screen memory, which is
explored further in the fourth chapter. The fifth chapter deals with genre
and pedagogy. Though there is a focus on application to the voices of the
queer community, the discussion has wide application to those working
with any marginalized community.
PE1408 2011-937664 978-1-111-84054-9
The composition of everyday life; a guide to writing, brief
4th ed.
Mauk, John and John Metz.
Wadsworth Publishing Co., ©2013 654 p. $133.95 (pa)
In this writing text, Mauk (Northwestern Michigan College) and Metz
–184–
(Kent State U. at Geauga) focus on the idea of the inventive nature of
writing and writing as a tool for developing ideas, and show students
how to discover and develop ideas through reading, inventing, and
writing. Each of the main chapters begins with three sample essays (one
by a student) that illustrate rhetorical concepts, such as making argu-
ments and finding sources, and includes an annotated essay. The final
chapter is an anthology of readings. This edition has a new chapter on
information literacy, a section on thinking critically about facts and sta-
tistics, new reflection activities, 16 new reading selections, and additional
images.
PE1408 2012-450542 978-0-8400-2885-3
The craft of revision, 5th ed.
Murray, Donald M.
Wadsworth Publishing Co., ©2013 261 p. $62.95 (pa)
Written by an experienced writer and teacher, this fifth edition explores
in detail the processes of revision any writer must apply to their own
work, and why revision is important. It is appropriate for any person
seeking to become a better writer, from middle school student to cor-
porate businessman. Chapter one focuses on the first steps of writing,
chapter two outlines common tricks of the trade, and chapter three
addresses the importance of appropriate reading. The chapters which
follow explore focus, genre, structure, documentation, development, voice,
and the process of finalizing a draft before culminating with how to
finish the work. Included at the end of many chapters are interviews
with published writers addressing relevant topics.
PE1408 2012-017465 978-0-393-91201-2
Everyone’s an author; with readings.
Lunsford, Andrea et al.
W.W. Norton, ©2013 1015 p. $52.50 (pa)
The authors provide a writing textbook that acknowledges writing for
students has changed. They no longer write when assigned an essay or
paper; they write when they text message, post on a variety of social
media, blog, and otherwise take advantage of the Internet and commu-
nications technologies available to them. In short, they write all the time.
They address writing from a variety of perspectives and cover thinking
rhetorically, writing processes, collaboration, argument, narratives,
reporting, analysis, evaluating sources, personal style, and other elements
of writing. Authors are Lunsford (Stanford U.), Brody (San Francisco State
U.), Moss (The Ohio State U.), Papper (Hofstra U.), and Walters (Portland
State U.).
PE1408 2009-936397 978-1-4282-9193-5
The Wadsworth handbook, 9th ed.
Kirszner, Laurie G. and Stephen R. Mandell.
Wadsworth Publishing Co., ©2011 826 p. $113.95
The ninth edition of this writing handbook contains a set of three new
chapters, offering guidance on writing in a digital environment,
designing effective documents, and designing a website. The book
includes new chapters on synthesizing sources and writing for the
public, along with updated coverage of documentation styles, plus
expanded tips for non-native writers and two new annotated student
papers. This edition also offers a new design for easier navigation. In
addition to material on grammar, punctuation and sentence problems,
the guide also features sections devoted to writing essays, thinking criti-
cally, writing arguments, and doing research. Color photos are included
in a color layout. The companion website offers an interactive ebook, peer
review tools, and tools for managing writing portfolios, plus exercises,
tutorials, multimedia activities, and grammar podcasts. Kirszner is affil-
iated with the University of the Sciences in Philadelphia. Mandell is affil-
iated with Drexel University.
PE1413 2011-942961 978-1-111-35025-3
The least you should know about English; form b; writing
skills, 11th ed.
Wilson, Paige and Teresa Ferster Glazier.
Wadsworth Publishing Co., ©2013 325 p. $75.95 (pa)
This is a textbook for anyone who needs to review basic English skills in
a highly simplified format. The first three parts of the book cover essen-
tials of word-choice, spelling, sentence structure, punctuation and capi-
talization. The fourth, and last, focuses on paragraph and essay
composition. The “least you should know” approach is stripped of ter-
minology as much as possible and makes readers use words they know
to grasp English grammar and usage. Every chapter is full of several
exercise sections. Updates to this 11th edition include new explanations,
examples and exercises. Part one 1 presents “spelling” before “word-
choice,” and part 2 clarifies first, second and third-person perspectives.
–185–
Part 3’s section on punctuation cross-references with part 4’s section on
quotations. Paige Wilson, who survives her co-author Teresa Ferster
Glazier, is an English instructor at Pasadena City College.
PE1417 2011-938977 978-0-8400-3007-8
The essay connection; readings for writers, 10th ed.
Title main entry. Ed. by Lynn Z. Bloom.
Wadsworth Publishing Co., ©2013 609 p. $103.95 (pa)
Bloom (U. of Connecticut) collects essays to help students improve their
writing, reading, and critical thinking skills. Sections are organized by
topics related to the writing process, writing and social media, and
rhetorical principles—narration, process analysis, cause and effect,
description, definition, comparison and contrast, and argument—and end
with thematically related essays on identity and human rights and world
peace. Twelve of the essays and one creative nonfiction piece are by stu-
dents, and questions and writing suggestions are integrated in each
chapter. This edition adds 20 new selections, such as poems, fiction and
creative nonfiction, and visuals, and includes a photo essay, a new
section on social media, and essays on identity, the environment, and
health.
PE1417 2011-943693 978-0-495-90196-9
Portable legacies; function poetry drama nonfiction, 2d
ed.
Schmidt, Jan Zlotnik and Lynne Crockett.
Wadsworth Publishing Co., ©2013 1022 p. $85.95 (pa)
This textbook for undergraduate students spans all major genres of liter-
ature, with a focus on English literature. The book is divided into three
sections: the first explores interpretation and discusses critical thinking
in reading and writing; the second examines common themes such as
rites of passage, gender and sexuality, and identity and the self; the third
probes discussion of each genre individually and spends one chapter
each on fiction, poetry, drama, nonfiction, and visual texts. Extensive
readings are included across the genres, as well as essays, writing exer-
cises, and diagrams to aid comprehension. Readings are organized by
theme within genre to encourage in-depth exploration and under-
standing. Two appendixes are included, and external supplemental mate-
rials are available from Cengage Learning.
PE1439 2011-940411 978-1-133-30999-4
Paragraphs and essays; with integrated readings, 12th ed.
Brandon, Lee and Kelly Brandon.
Wadsworth Publishing Co., ©2013 608 p. $120.95 (pa)
Lee Brandon (Mt. San Antonio College) and Kelly Brandon (Santa Ana
College) provide students in English writing courses one level below
freshman composition with a guide to the writing process. They detail
the stages of writing and writing paragraphs and essays; link writing to
readings, reading techniques, and reading-based writing exercises;
discuss different types of paragraphs and essays, with integrated
readings and examples of career-related writing; address using, evalu-
ating, and documenting sources; and provide a handbook with exercises,
sentence elements and patterns, punctuation, spelling, and other tips.
This edition includes a guide for revising and editing, a list of the top 25
editing errors, and 20 new reading selections.
PE1475 2009-929260 978-1-4282-6393-2
Technical communication; a reader-centered approach, 7th
ed.
Anderson, Paul V.
Wadsworth Publishing Co., ©2011 726 p. $164.95 (pa)
Anderson (Miami U., Ohio) emphasizes a reader-centered approach to
technical communication to help students in a variety of fields learn the
nature of technical writing. He explains the approach; the communi-
cation process, from objectives to conducting research to revising;
applying the approach to communicating on the Internet, creating com-
munications with a team, creating oral presentations, making websites,
and working on client and service-learning projects; and the six most
common types of career-related communications (correspondence, pro-
posals, research projects, feasibility reports, progress reports, and instruc-
tions). This edition has new margin features helping students explore
ideas; new chapters on communicating and collaborating in the globally
networked world and analyzing information and thinking critically;
updates to core topics, tutorials and examples, and guidelines from
American Psychological Association and Modern Language Association
citation models; new sections guiding students through the process; new
discussions to connect technical communication with other writing
classes and of free Internet programs used in the workplace for collabo-
rative writing; a revised chapter on creating websites with Microsoft
Word; and new chapter-long examples.
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
PE1574 2012-002859 978-0-8232-4205-4
Loaded words.
Garber, Marjorie.
Fordham University Press, ©2012 233 p. $26.00 (pa)
In this collection of essays, cultural and literary critic Garber (English,
visual and environmental studies, Harvard University) focuses on words
that have, in various ways, become ‘loaded’ in recent years, such as
“‘madness,” “celebrity,””knowledge,” “general education,” and “patri-
otism.” There are several essays on Shakespeare, and on the work of
thinkers including Kant, Freud, and Foucault. Other subjects considered
include advertising culture, film and TV, Hollywood tourism, and IQ
tests.
PE1628 2011-004777 978-0-547-04101-8
The American Heritage dictionary of the English
language, 5th ed.
Title main entry.
Houghton Mifflin Harcourt, ©2011 2084 p. $60.00
From ‘a’ to ‘zqr,’ this update of the 2000 edition adds some 10,000 new
words and senses of words, while continuing to feature notes on English
as a changing language and its Indo-European roots, guidance on correct
usage, a pronunciation key, and the standard charts and tables—though
Pluto is now noted as a dwarf planet of our solar system. The usage
panel includes academics, well-known writers, even a politician. This
edition includes color images; interspersed word history, living language
and usage notes; thumb tabs; and a downloadable app of the hefty dic-
tionary on an iPad, iPhone, iPod or Android Smartphone. (Yes, ‘smart
phone’ is in the dictionary.)
PE2751 2011-046610 978-1-4411-3725-8
Analyzing English as a lingua franca; a corpus-driven
investigation.
Cogo, Alessia and Martin Dewey.
Continuum Publishing Group, ©2012 202 p. $140.00
Applied linguists Cogo (U. of Southampton, Britain) and Dewey (King’s
College London) have combined the research for their PhD dissertations,
both in 2007, to present a large study of English as a world language
spoken primarily by non-native speakers. Drawing on a corpus of 58
hours of audio-recorded spoken interaction, they demonstrate how
speakers in English-as-lingua-franca interactions manipulate the lin-
guistic resources of English in systematic, regular, but also varying ways.
In particular they find that speakers routinely exploit the language to fit
the immediate communicative environment, adapting and blending
English innovatively and resourcefully to achieve a jointly constructed
means of conveying and interpreting meaning.
PF3398 2012-031105 978-3-11-029037-0
Local instability; split topicalization and quantifier float
in German.
Ott, Dennis. (Linguistische arbeiten; 544))
De Gruyter, ©2012 174 p. $140.00
In a slight revision of his 2011 doctoral dissertation in linguistics at
Harvard University, Ott (U. of Groningen, the Netherlands) proposes a
novel analysis of the so-called split-topicalization, a notorious and long-
standing problem for syntactic theory. Most analysis is limited to a single
simple variety, but his approach provides a unified analysis of all split-
topic constructions. The phenomenon is found predominantly in spoken
German, rarely in written German, he says.
PG3365 2012-015299 978-0-8014-7817-8
Tolstoy on war; narrative art and historical truth in “War
and Peace”.
Title main entry. Ed. by Rick McPeak and Donna Tussing Orwin.
Cornell U. Press, ©2012 246 p. $24.95
This collection of essays is in part to mark the 200th anniversary of the
French invasion of Russia and to underscore the importance of Tolstoy’s
War and Peace as a record of the significant events of the era. Authors
from a variety of professions—literary criticism, social science, history,
and philosophy—address current readings of Tolstoy’s work. Editors are
McPeak (foreign language, U.S. Military Academy at West Point) and
Orwin (Russian literature, U. of Toronto, Canada).
PJ4150 2012-029692 978-1-59856-820-2
An introduction to Ugaritic.
Huehnergard, John.
Hendrickson Publishers, ©2012 246 p. $69.95
Huehnergard (Middle East studies, U. of Texas-Austin) summarizes the
grammar of the Semitic language Ugaritic for students who are already
at least slightly familiar with Biblical Hebrew. He also includes a number
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
of short practice exercises and a few sample texts in several genres to
reinforce the main points of the grammar, and to introduce some
common vocabulary. The language was spoken in the city of Ugarit,
modern Ras Shamra in Syria, and the texts come from the Late Bronze
Age, roughly 1300-1190 BCE. Color photographs show ruins and engraved
texts.
PJ5059 978-1-936235-94-0
Hebrew classics; a journey through Israel’s timeless
fiction and poetry.
Abramovich, Dvir. (Israel; society, culture, and history.)
Academic Studies Press, ©2012 160 p. $55.00
In response to requests from professors, Abramovich (Jewish history and
culture, U. of Melbourne) selects 11 pieces of Hebrew literature by con-
temporary authors to introduce as classics in the Israeli/Jewish canon
that offer cultural and historical insights. He begins by discussing the
life, influences, and works of Shaul Tchernichovsky (1875-1943), con-
sidered the first Modern Hebrew poet, and concludes with a discussion
of fiction writer Dvorah Baron (1887-1956). Other authors discussed are:
Yehuda Amicha, Hayyim Nahman Bialik, Shulamith Hareven, Haim
Gouri, Hanoch Bartov, Aharon Megged, and Amos Oz. Their themes
range from the Holocaust to kibbutz life.
PK6459 2012-003074 978-90-04-21127-8
Shahnama studies II; the reception of Firdausi’s
Shahnama .
Title main entry. Ed. by Charles Melville & Gabrielle van den Berg.
(Studies in Persian cultural history; v.2)
BRILL, ©2012 316 p. $177.00
This collection of 15 essays delves into the reception of and later versions
created from the Persian epic by Firdausi. Depictions of the demon divs
are the subject of two essays; other topics include the Shahnama tradition
in dastans of medieval Persia, the popularity of the Shahnama and its
influence on painting in Ottoman Turkey, and the remnants of the
Shahnama tradition in oral poetry in contemporary Central Asia. The
contributors are scholars of art and languages in Europe, Canada, Israel,
and Turkey. A series of color plates is included.
PL728 2011-044757 978-0-674-05330-4
Traversing the frontier; the Man’Yoshu account of a
Japanese mission to Silla in 736-737.
Horton, H. Mack. (Harvard East Asian monographs; 330)
Harvard University Asia Center, ©2012 628 p. $55.00
H. Mack Horton (premodern Japanese literature and culture, U. of
California, Berkeley) has produced the first new English study in a gen-
eration of the Man’yoshu, a sequence of 145 poems written in the 8th
century about an expedition from Japan to the Silla kingdom (later
known as Korea). His book, which could easily have been of only tech-
nical interest, succeeds on diverse fronts. The translations of the poems
are skilled and evocative. They are printed together in a creative graphic
format. Each poem is given a careful analysis. Readers are told the
history of the expedition in a smartly-written nonfiction narrative. The
author also explores a series of historical transformations the Man’yoshu
represents: between oral storytelling and writing, between religious ritual
and literature, between indigenous tradition and cultural cross-polli-
nation, and between the anonymous, collective product of a people and
the voice of an individual artist. The first section of his book introduces
the poems, and prints his translation. The second analyzes the poems.
The third recounts the expedition and describes its historical contexts, the
fourth looks at literary contexts and how those transformations work on
the page, and the fifth looks at the authors and editors who first put
together the poems into a book that mirrors the events of the expedition.
There are two appendices: a technical description of the content and
structure of the poems, and a scholarly overview of the Man’yoshu. Notes
and works cited form an extensive end section. In addition to being a
vital book for scholars in premodern Japanese literature, this book may
be interesting to an educated readership that loves translation, poetry,
Japan, travel writing, storytelling, or history.
PL1175 2012-356766 978-3-447-06557-3
Japanese models, Chinese culture and the dilemma of
Taiwanese language reform.
Heylen, Ann. (Studia formosiana; v.7)
Harrassowitz, ©2012 241 p. $84.00
The nature of Taiwan’s present day linguistic diversity may not have
manifested itself the way it did had Taiwan not been colonized by Japan
from 1895 to 1945, suggests Heylen (Taiwanese culture and literature,
Ruhr-U. Bochum, Germany), and had China and Japan not embarked
upon their process of nation building and language standardization at
that time. It is against the background of these two historical realities
–186–
that she explores linguistic modernization in Taiwan, past and present.
She covers Taiwan’s historico-linguistic setting, the Japanese regime, the
romanized Taiwanese movement, the Mandarin baihuawen movement,
and the written Taiwanese movement. The study is largely based on her
2001 doctoral dissertation at Catholic University Leuven. Distributed in
North America by The David Brown Book Co.
PL2658 2012-004760 978-1-60384-813-8
Battles, betrayals, and brotherhood; early Chinese plays
on the Three Kingdoms.
Title main entry. Ed. and trans. by Wilt L. Idema and Stephen H. West.
Hackett Publishing Co., ©2012 469 p. $27.95 (pa)
Seven early plays portray the major episodes in the saga of the Three
Kingdoms during 1250-1450, the centuries immediately before the saga
was written at the end of the 15th century as Sanguo zhi tongsu yanyi
(The Popular Elaboration of the Records of the Three Kingdoms). The
plays are also important themselves as representatives of zaju as it was
performed in the urban theaters of the Yuan and on the palace stage of
the Ming. Idema (Chinese literature, Harvard U.) and West (Chinese,
Arizona State U.) have translated the earliest extant versions, but also
later versions if they depart significantly from the earlier ones.
PL5373 2012-021339 978-90-04-22397-4
Deriving nominals; a syntactic account of Malagasy
nominalizations.
Ntelitheos, Dimitrios. (Empirical approaches to linguistic theory; v.3)
BRILL, ©2012 306 p. $149.00
Ntelitheos (linguistics, United Arab Emirates U.) explores how Malagasy
speakers, in Madagascar, turn words and even entire phrases into nom-
inals that can then be manipulated and referred to as a single noun. He
covers building morphosyntactic structure, Malagasy morphosyntax,
gerundive and referential nominals, participant nominals, clausal nom-
inals, and participant nominals and relative clauses. In addition to pro-
viding information about the Austronesian language, he offers empirical
evidence to support the assertion that there is a single combinatorial
component of grammar that builds morphosyntactic strings—a highly
controversial issue. The study served as his 2005 PhD dissertation at the
University of California-Los Angeles.
PL7101 2012-031445 978-3-11-027815-6
A grammar of Bardi.
Bowern, Claire Louise. (Mouton grammar library; 57)
De Gruyter, ©2012 820 p. $210.00
In the first full published grammar of a language in the Nyulnyulan
family, Bowern (linguistics, Yale U.) presents a broad reference to Bardi,
the northernmost language in the family, and now spoken by fewer than
10 people in the far northwest of Australia. She covers all the conven-
tional aspects of language analysis, including, phonetics and phonology,
nouns and nominal morphology, verbal predicate structure, agreement
morphology, adverbs and particles, and clause combining. Appendices
provide a basic vocabulary list, prefix tables, light verbs, information on
speakers and texts, and nine traditional and modern texts.
PL8489 2012-450572 978-3-11-021840-4
A grammar of Wandala.
Frajzyngier, Zygmunt. (Mouton grammar library; 47)
De Gruyter, ©2012 720 p. $210.00
This grammar provides a description of the language of Wandala, a
Chadic language spoken by some 40,000 people in Northern Cameroon
and Nigeria. The author seeks to provide a complete description of
phonological means, morphological means, lexical categories and sub-
categories, linear order, repetition of morphemes, lexical items, and
phrases, as well as description of the functions coded by these means.
PM7895 2012-011462 978-1-61451-142-7
Origins of a creole; the history of Papiamentu and its
African ties.
Jacobs, Bart. (Language contact and bilingualism; 3)
De Gruyter, ©2012 387 p. $140.00
Scholars have been arguing for a century about the unexplained occur-
rence of Portuguese words in the Spanish-based creole language of the
Caribbean islands of Aruba, Bonaire, and Curaçao. Jacobs (Ludwig-
Maximilians-Universität München, Germany) delves into the subject,
beginning with a critical review of the literature, which is followed by
detailed linguistic analyses (phonology parts of speech, morphology) as
well as a survey of historical ties between Upper Guinea and Curaçao.
–187–
CRITICISM, THEATER, FILM, JOURNALISM, ETC.
PN44 2011-034807 978-0-8264-4267-3
Key terms in literary theory.
Klages, Mary. (Key terms)
Continuum Publishing Group, ©2012 132 p. $19.95 (pa)
Klages (English, U. of Colorado at Denver) provides students of literature,
film, and cultural studies definitions of key theoretical terms and con-
cepts in literary theory, along with descriptions of major movements and
figures in literary and cultural theory and an annotated bibliography.
Key terms, from abjection to feminist theory to value, are presented
alphabetically, followed by biographical information on theorists, which
include dates and lists of major works, as well as the theoretical projects,
goals, and influences of major theorists.
PN49 978-90-420-3553-9
Raed and Frofer; Christian poetics in the Old English
Froferboc meters.
Lenz, Karmen. (Costerus new series; 195)
Editions Rodopi, ©2012 130 p. $41.60 (pa)
Lenz (English, Macon U., Georgia) examines the poetry in the
prosimetrum version of the Froferboc (Book of Consolidation), King
Alfred’s ninth-century Anglo-Saxon version of Boethius’ sixth-century
Latin De Consolatione Philosphiae. She covers the Alfredian Boethius, the
Alfredian world view in the poetry, cultivating ingethonc (inner thought),
and the landscape of the mind. It is the first study to benefit from the
recent edition of the Froferboc, the first printed edition to restore the
prosimetrum format presented in the earliest manuscript.
PN50 978-3-11-024042-9
Towards a multifunctional lexical resource; design and
implementation of a graph-based lexicon model.
Spohr, Dennis. (Lexicographica series major)
De Gruyter, ©2012 203 p. $154.00
Updating his July 2010 doctoral dissertation at the University of Stuttgart,
Spohr develops a model for a lexical resource that can be used to serve
both human users and natural language processing applications. He
covers requirements analysis and state of the art, a graph-based for-
malism for representing lexical information, components of the multi-
functional lexicon model, and towards a multifunctional lexical resource.
He has not indexed his work.
PN51 978-90-420-3543-0
Yet another Europe after 1984; rethinking Milan Kundera
and the idea of Central Europe.
Title main entry. Ed. by Leonidas Donskis. (Value inquiry book series;
v.252)
Editions Rodopi, ©2012 223 p. $65.00 (pa)
Edited by European parlimentarian and scholar Leonidas Donskis, this
book is an anthology of essays in response to Milan Kundera’s essay The
Tragedy of Central Europe. The essays here are by central European
scholars, and deal with the years after 1984. The authors take up
Kundera’s idea that to exist is to be present in the eyes of those we love,
and respond with two basic questions: does Central Europe exist? If it
exists, where is it now? Along the way they must tackle two thorny
problems: since the fall of the Soviet Union, does Western Europe still
exist? When we say, “where is Central Europe now?” are we speaking in
political, economic, cultural, linguistic, or emotional terms, and is this
question asked of ourselves, or of others? The contributors are academics
from the humanities and social sciences, political representatives, and
public intellectuals.
PN56 2012-016186 978-0-7864-6039-7
Ancient symbology in fantasy literature; a psychological
study.
Indick, William.
McFarland & Co., ©2012 195 p. $40.00 (pa)
Indick (psychology, Dowling College) uses psychoanalytic studies to view
the role of certain symbols found in fairy tales, folk tales, and Judeo-
Christian and Greek mythology which also appear in modern fantasy lit-
erature. The author draws on the work of the classic psychoanalytic
writers including Jung, Campbell, Fromm, Eliade, and Bettelheim, and
examines work by writers like C.S. Lewis, J.R.R. Tolkien, and J.K.
Rowling. Most of the focus is on the mythological symbols and arche-
types (The Hero, The Princess, The Goddess and The Witch, etc) and their
role in the unconscious. This book would be appropriate for fans of
fantasy or science fiction writing, or for those interested in psychoana-
lytic approaches to mythological and dream symbols.
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
PN56 2011-038964 978-1-4411-2438-8
Cybertext poetics; the critical landscape of new media
literary theory.
Eskelinen, Markku. (International texts in critical media aesthetics; v.2)
Continuum Publishing Group, ©2012 462 p. $130.00
Finnish scholar and experimental writer Eskelinen deploys ludology and
modified cybertext theory as a cross-disciplinary perspective to solve
problems in the separate but interconnected fields of literary theory, nar-
ratology, game studies, and digital media. Among his topics are cyber-
textuality and transtexuality, the enigma of the ergodic, towards an
expanded narratology, ludology and the exhaustion of narratology, game
ecology and the classic game model, transmodial modes and ecologies,
and textual instruments and instrumental texts.
PN56 2012-022979 978-1-56368-539-2
Outcasts and angels; the new anthology of deaf characters
in literature.
Title main entry. Ed. by Edna Edith Sayers.
Gallaudet University Pr., ©2012 361 p. $35.00 (pa)
Gallaudet U. Press has released a new anthology of deaf characters in lit-
erature. This book, edited by Gaullaudet emerita (English) Sayers,
updates the pioneering 1976 anthology. It includes work by both deaf
and hearing authors portraying deaf characters. While a few excerpts
from early works are included here, most are stand-alone pieces, and
excerpts from longer works are often a necessary evil in order to include
historical writing by or about underrepresented groups. The anthology
begins with Daniel Dafoe in 1729 and ends with Marlin Barton and
Julian Barnes, both from 2009. While the majority of the works included
are from the US, with secondary representation from England, the editor
has also included work from France, Italy, Korea, Denmark, Lithuania,
Canada, South Africa, Nigeria, and England/Guyana. Male and female
authors are both well represented. The editor provides introductory and
concluding essays, on deaf characters from the perspectives of writer and
reader. The writers anthologized offer short work in a variety of literary
styles and eras in nonfiction and fiction, with a preponderance in the
twentieth-century American short story of fifteen pages or less; the book
will appeal to any literary reader. It is a must-have book for deaf studies.
While it has obvious uses in cultural and minority studies in general, this
book is also an important one for any teacher seeking diverse and skillful
short work for classes in English literature, creative writing, or compo-
sition; new literary anthologies with this mix of work by famous authors
and skilled work by new and less-known authors are becoming rare, due
to the increasing cost and difficulty of obtaining permissions.
PN56 2012-002863 978-0-8232-4225-2
Speaking about torture.
Title main entry. Ed. by Julie A. Carlson and Elisabeth Weber.
Fordham University Press, ©2012 374 p. $32.00 (pa)
Carlson (English and comparative literature, U. of California at Santa
Barbara) and Weber (German and comparative literature, U. of California
at Santa Barbara) present contributions from a lectures series devoted to
confronting from the perspective of the humanities the facts that torture
is a part and consequence of official US policy, that the media enter-
tainment complex is complicit in promoting the acceptability of torture,
and that there is a significant layer of support for state-sanctioned terror
among US academics. Topics addressed by the 17 contributions include
the history of torture in American state policy, lessons to be drawn from
Nazi crimes against humanity, responses in the visual arts to torture,
torture and hegemonic masculinity in cinematic approaches to the
Middle East, the role of music in torture, 18th century anarchist
philosopher and novelist William Godwin’s literary confrontation with
torture, and Samuel R. Delany’s transgressive novel Hogg (written in 1969
but first published in 1995) as a lens through which to consider the
humanist response to torture.
PN56 2012-014929 978-0-7864-6816-4
Werewolves and other shapeshifters in popular culture; a
thematic analysis of recent depictions.
McMahon-Coleman, Kimberley and Roslyn Weaver.
McFarland & Co., ©2012 203 p. $40.00 (pa)
McMahon-Coleman and Weaver, two Australian scholars with expertise in
contemporary literature and popular culture, look at the phenomena of
werewolves and shape-shifting in popular books, films, and television
shows. In contemporary literature, werewolves appear in works which
tend to be aimed toward a young adult audience in the genre of specu-
lative fiction. The authors analyze how werewolves are often a metaphor
for difficult transitional states and convey ideas about gender, race, class,
illness, and social difference.
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
PN81 2012-002228 978-1-4214-0638-1
Contemporary literary & cultural theory; the Johns
Hopkins guide.
Title main entry. Ed. by Michael Groden et al.
Johns Hopkins U. Press, ©2012 521 p. $90.00
This text is a comprehensive reference on major literary critics and other
figures in critical theory, schools, and theoretical projects. The alphabet-
ically organized entries offer a passing understanding for those wishing
to explore everything from ecocriticism to cultural studies in four anglo-
phone contexts to deconstructionism’s fascist imbroglio with Paul de
Man. Like some dictionaries devoted to a discipline or particular thinker,
this text uses special notation to reference itself, though the entries are
considerably longer. This gives the reader a more contextual under-
standing than a typical primer or anthology. At the end of each entry are
notes for further reading. The contributors are professors of English and
related fields; the contributor list in the back also functions as an index
for their names.
PN98 2012-016480 978-3-11-024551-6
Wolfgang Iser; a companion.
De Bruyn, Ben. (Companions to contemporary German culture; v.1)
De Gruyter, ©2012 272 p. $37.00 (pa)
The first volume in the new series Companions to Contemporary German
Culture, this book provides a systematic analysis of the full corpus of the
literary theory and criticism of Wolgang Iser (1926-2007), a German
scholar whose “reception theory” has proved influential, but whose
writings are often considered in isolation from one another. By exam-
ining the Iser’s entire theoretical oeuvre, the author of this study finds
that Iser “ultimately advances a systematic reflection on modernity,
meaning and humanity, as well as on the way these phenomena intersect
in the novel, a literary form which throughout history has enabled
readers to imagine other realities.”
PN212 2012-031098 978-3-11-025995-7
Narrative, interrupted; the plotless, the disturbing and the
trivial in literature.
Title main entry. Ed. by Markku Lehtimaki et al.
De Gruyter, ©2012 327 p. $140.00
Going beyond the macro framing typical of postclassical narratology, lit-
erature scholars demonstrate approaches more sensitive to the variety of
narratives available. In sections on the boring and the plotless, inter-
preting the disturbing and the difficult, and problems of authorship,
they considers such topics as interpreting narrative technique in the
plotless novels of Nicholson Baker, storytelling and species difference in
animal comics, intertextuality and fragmentary narrative in Margaret
Atwood’s Alias Grace, name change and author avatars in Varlam
Shalamov and Primo Levi, and a shadow on the marble. Only names and
titles are indexed.
PN441 2011-046356 978-0-8232-4255-9
Against democracy; literary experience in the era of
emancipations.
During, Simon.
Fordham University Press, ©2012 181 p. $24.00 (pa)
A primary argument of this book is that the time is past for imagining
an alternative to global democratic capitalism. During (Australian
research professor, U. of Queensland, Australia) points out that until
roughly 1945, literature had been opposed to political democracy. The
author, relying on political theory, intellectual history, and close readings,
provides a fresh look at the tradition of refuting democracy, the contri-
butions of literary criticism to that tradition, and different perspectives
on the writings of a variety of authors, from Tocqueville to Saul Bellow.
PN495 2012-020556 978-0-7864-4900-2
The writer and the overseas childhood; the third culture
literature of Kingsolver, McEwan and others.
Rauwerda, Antje M.
McFarland & Co., ©2012 193 p. $40.00 (pa)
With an interest borne by personal experience, Rauwerda (British and
postcolonial literature, Goucher College) examines so-called third culture
children, those who grew up expatriated and especially in a variety of
cultures different from the one listed on their passports, who became
writers in adulthood, and the literature they produced. Such literature
often describes both the good and bad aspects of constant relocation, new
experiences being offset by the loss of place. The first section addresses
the definition of third culture literature. Section two examines the
writings of those raised by military parents while the third deals with
those children raised by missionaries. The conclusion focuses on
Kingsolver’s The Poisonwood Bible, and the book includes a thorough
introduction as well as a bibliography and index.
–188–
PN603 2012-008137 978-0-8166-7321-6
Worm work; recasting Romanticism.
Schwartz, Janelle A.
U. of Minnesota Press, ©2012 277 p. $27.50 (pa)
Worms evoke metaphorical cultural associations (e.g., as in the many ref-
erences in William Blake’s works). Schwartz (comparative literature,
Hamilton College, Clinton, New York) examines the relationship between
scientific study of vermiculture in the 18th and early 19th century to
Romantic era literary representations of the natural world. For example,
she presents a reading of the dual roles of worms in Shelley’s
Frankenstein in decay and creation, reflecting ambivalent attitudes
toward them.
PN682 2012-014418 978-3-11-028536-9
Rural space in the Middle Ages and early modern age;
the spatial turn in premodern studies.
Title main entry. Ed. by Albrecht Classen. (Fundamentals of medieval
and early modern culture; 9)
De Gruyter, ©2012 919 p. $182.00
After Classen’s (emeritus, German studies, U. of Arizona) near 200-page
introduction, mostly US but also some Austrian medievalists explore
depictions of rural space in the European middle ages. Among their
topics are rural space and agricultural space in the Old French fabliaux,
answering the challenges of social decay in William Langland’s Piers
Plowman, Juan Manuel’s Libro de la caza (ca 1325), Jews in the Austrian
countryside during the 14th century, and developing a gendered logic of
rural space in the Netherlandish visual tradition.
PN685 2012-030664 978-0-7864-6858-4
Origins of Arthurian romances; early sources for the
legends of Tristan, The Grail and The abduction of the
queen.
Johnson, Flint F.
McFarland & Co., ©2012 227 p. $35.00 (pa)
Originally published as a Ph.D. thesis in medieval studies at the
University of Glasgow, Johnson’s work combines literary studies with the
examination of historical documents, legal texts, and archaeological
research. Each of the three main Arthurian romances are analyzed, ulti-
mately leading to the conclusion that they have their origins as far back
as post-Roman Britain. In addition to extensive references, this work
closes with a 13 page bibliography.
PN1009 2011-276050 978-1-84706-486-8
Children’s literature in context.
McCulloch, Fiona. (Texts and contexts)
Continuum Publishing Group, ©2011 172 p. $90.00
Part 1 of this accessible introduction outlines social, cultural, and literary
contexts of children’s literature and contrasts idealized childhood with
the reality of 20th- and 21st-century childhood. Part 2 analyzes works by
authors including Lewis Carroll, L. Frank Baum, Frances Hodgson
Burnett, C.S. Lewis, Philip Pullman, and J.K. Rowling. There is also
material on critical contexts and adaptations. Each chapter closes with
some combination of review terms and concepts, suggested readings,
web resources, open and closed research questions, discussion topics,
and ideas for extended research. Information on the author is not given.
PN1040 2011-045890 978-90-04-21740-9
Aristotle Poetics ; editio maior of the Greek text with
historical introductions and philological commentaries.
Aristotle. Trans. by Leonardo Tarán and Dimitri Gutas. (Mnemosyne;
supplements; Monographs on Greek and Latin language and literature;
v.338)
BRILL, ©2012 536 p. $226.00
Taran (classics, Princeton U.) and Gutas (arabic and islamic studies, Yale
U.) present this new edition of Aristotle’s classic work, the Poetics. The
Poetics is one of the earliest examples of literary and dramatic theory in
the world. The text itself is in Greek, comprising a small section in the
middle the book, with no translation. The bulk of the book is back-
ground material on Aristotle, the text in Syriac and Arabic translations,
and the history of the text and its various sources. This background
focuses on the typographic history rather than the text’s intellectual
content. The notes that append the text and appear later in the book also
are focused on translation and philological issues rather than com-
mentary on the intellectual content. Several indexes and specially devised
schema for annotating variations in textual lineages make this an
excellent research aide.
–189–
PN1991 978-1-60807-203-3
Cognitive radio techniques; spectrum sensing, interference
mitigation, and localization.
Sithamparanathan, Kandeepan and Andrea Giorgetti. (Mobile communi-
cations)
Artech House, ©2013 369 p. $139.00
Sithamparanathan (electrical and computer engineering, RMIT U.,
Melbourne, Australia) and Giorgetti (electronics, computer sciences, and
systems, U. of Bologna, Italy) explore some of the core functions of radios
that can sense and respond to the signal and their environment. For
engineers and other professionals in electronic communications, they
discuss such topics as fundamentals of spectrum sensing and detection,
cooperative spectrum sensing, fundamentals of coexistence and inter-
ference mitigation techniques, interference mitigation techniques
enabling coexistence, and the localization of primary users.
PN1992 2012-013078 978-0-8126-9764-3
Breaking Bad and philosophy; badder living through
chemistry.
Title main entry. Ed. by David R. Koepsell and Robert Arp (Popular
culture and philosophy; v.67)
Open Court Publishing, ©2012 242 p. $19.95
Written for a popular audience and published before the show’s fifth
season, this is a collection of essays examining ethical and philosophical
issues raised by the popular television series Breaking Bad. Twenty-two
authors examine questions raised by the actions of the series anti-hero,
Walter White, a chemistry teacher turned meth cook, referencing the
writings of Machiavelli, Nietzsche, Heidigger, Hobbes, and Satre, among
others. The book concludes with a chapter on real life chemistry teachers,
chemists, and meth cooks who “broke bad,” and brief bios for all the
writers.
PN1992 978-0-7864-6556-9
The D o c t o r W h o f r a n c h i s e ; A m e r i c a n i n f l u e n c e , f a n
culture and the spinoffs.
Porter, Lynnette.
McFarland & Co., ©2012 194 p. $35.00 (pa)
The Doctor Who franchise is rooted in the UK, but what does that mean
for American fans? Porter (humanities, Embry-Riddle Aeronautical
University) applies the American concept of franchise to the post-2005
Whoniverse, exploring how the British show has been Americanized and
examining recent British-American spinoffs, especially The Sarah Jane
Adventures and Torchwood. The author looks at reasons behind Doctor
Who’s longevity and popularity, describes shifts in character development
over the years, and discusses the show’s broadened international mar-
keting strategy in the age of social media.
PN1992 2012-028689 978-0-8156-3308-2
Interrogating The Shield.
Title main entry. Ed. by Nicholas Ray. (Television and popular culture)
Syracuse U. Press, ©2012 227 p. $29.95
Ray (English, U. of Leeds, UK) compiles 10 essays that examine The Shield
from various theoretical and methodological perspectives. Scholars of
gender studies, media, English, American studies, and many other disci-
plines in Europe, Guam, and Australia consider the influences that
shaped the series. They discuss its visual style; its acoustic signatures and
sound practices; comparisons between the show’s Detective Wagenbach
and Agent Fox Mulder of The X-Files and to The Sopranos; the place of the
interrogation room; the representation of race, masculinity, and female
officers; the place of The Shield in the context of the political exception-
alism that defined the George W. Bush era; and how the series repre-
sented the middle class crisis of social reproduction.
PN1992 2012-032004 978-0-8126-9799-5
Jeopardy! and philosophy; what is knowledge in the form
of a question?
Title main entry. Ed. by Shaun P. Young. (Popular culture and phi-
losophy; v.72)
Open Court Publishing, ©2012 193 p. $19.95 (pa)
This collection of over a dozen essays explores philosophical themes and
critical issues in the famous quiz-show, Jeopardy. They interrogate
American exceptionalism in the show, cognitive inequality, what trivia
really has to do with knowledge, what having information at our finger-
tips does to our memories, what makes Jeopardy a good game, the pos-
sibility of artificial intelligence, and more. One essay takes the form of a
dialogue between Bertrand Russell, Ludwig Wittgenstein, Francis Bradley,
and Johnny Gilbert. The contributors are academics studying popular
cultural and philosophy, journalists, and media scholars.
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
PN1992 2012-032435 978-1-934432-50-1
Video production; disciplines and techniques, 11th ed.
Foust, James C. et al.
Holcomb Hathaway, Pub., ©2013 286 p. $58.00 (pa)
Foust (journalism and public relations, Bowling Green State U.) et al.
outline the techniques and practices of video production and emphasize
learning within the structure of production exercises provided in the text.
They describe the importance of disciplines and techniques, the role of
convergence in production, and the differences among studio, field, and
remote truck production; the duties and responsibilities of cast and crew;
producing and directing functions; and cameras, lighting, audio,
graphics and sets, the switcher, and recording and editing equipment.
Revised and reorganized to reflect changes in the field, this edition has
more emphasis on digital, non-linear video production; updated and
expanded information on mobile technologies; updated terminology; and
new and updated figures. The chapter on cameras focuses on high-defi-
nition American Television Systems Committee (ATSC) formats and incor-
porates a wider range of camera types, including digital single-lens reflex
cameras and consumer-grade units. A helpful companion website offers
further study resources including chapter focus points, review questions,
videos, and additional materials. Discussion of National Television
Systems Committee (NTSC) and differences between ATSC and NTSC has
been moved to the companion website, as has material on videotape
recorder operation and linear editing. The chapter on audio has been
revised to emphasize digital equipment and minimize analog coverage.
There is more on how graphics are constructed, building sets for the 16:9
aspect ratio, single-person crews, downstream keying and fade effects,
and encoding and compression, including preparing video for use on
sites like YouTube and Vimeo; emphasis on tapeless technologies;
exclusive emphasis on nonlinear editing in the editing chapter and
tapeless recording equipment and techniques in the field production
chapter; and added discussion of the operation of live slow-motion
editing servers.
PN1992 978-1-4411-6293-9
What are you laughing at?; a comprehensive guide to the
comedic event.
O’Shannon, Dan.
Continuum Publishing Group, ©2013 298 p. $24.95 (pa)
Dan O’Shannon (former writer and producer of Cheers, Fraiser, and
Modern Family) presents a theory of humor and guide to creating
comedy. He argues that comedy is an experience with its own structures
that we can discern and even manipulate to create intended or innovative
effects in audiences. To this end, O’Shannon employs many diagrams
and tables to illustrate the different elements of comedy, which in the
end he also argues should not be seen as taking the magic out of it. He
draws on comedic examples from many different eras and genres,
insisting that it’s enough if an event or experience was funny for
someone. After an overview of past theories of comedy and what he
means by the comedic event, he identifies elements step-by-step such as
the receiver, the comedic frame of mind, elements of communication,
vehicles, comedic information, incongruity in joke construction, cognitive
processes, comedy and entropy, and practical jokes. An appendix of
charts and diagrams modeling aspects of comedic communication/set-up
appears in the back.
PN1993 978-3-643-90217-7
Identity and difference; postcoloniality and
transnationality in lusophone films.
Ferreira, Carolin Overhoff. (Filmwissenschaft; v.13)
LIT Verlag, ©2012 262 p. $44.95 (pa)
Ferreira (contemporary cinema, Federal U. of São Paulo, Brazil) explores
facing authoritarianism and the end of the empire and facing past and
present from a transnational perspective in Portuguese-language films.
Among her topics are non-inscription and dictatorship in A Bee in the
Rain (1968-71) and The Dauphin (2001) by Fernanod Lopes, the represen-
tation of the African colonial war in Portuguese cinema, the adolescent
as post-colonial allegory in Portuguese films of the 1990s, Luso-African
co-productions after independence 1988-2010, and fortress Europe and
the limits of Luso-Brazilian brotherhood in Foreign Land (1995) by Walter
Salles and Daniela Thomas. Distributed in the US by ISBS.
PN1993 2012-020414 978-0-85745-894-0
In contrast; Croatian film today.
Title main entry. Ed. by Aida Vidan and Gordana P. Crnkovic.
Berghahn Books, ©2012 263 p. $26.00 (pa)
Vidan (South Slavic languages and literatures, Harvard U.) and Crnkovic
(Slavic and comparative literature, U. of Washington) bring together
essays from film scholars and interviews with film practitioners in order
to present an analytical portrait of Croatian film. Overarching topics
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
addressed by the opening contributions include the roots of Croatian
cinema within the Yugoslav framework and its development since inde-
pendence, the social role of documentary over the past 20 years, Croatian
contributions to animation, and gender in contemporary Croatian film.
Interviews with filmmakers Rajko Grlic, Vinko Bresan, Josko Barusic,
and Nenad Puhovski that address their own oeuvres and comment on
practical issues of filmmaking are then presented. The remaining 17
chapters consist of critical reviews of key films produced in post-inde-
pendence Croatia.
PN1993 2012-008162 978-1-57113-490-5
A new history of German cinema.
Title main entry. Ed. by Jennifer M. Kapczynski and Michael D.
Richardson. (Screen cultures: German film and the visual.)
Camden House, ©2012 673 p. $115.00
Kapczynski (German, Washington U.) and Richardson (German, Ithaca
College) adopt a relatively novel approach to producing this edited history
of German cinema, soliciting 88 essays that each focus in on a specific
“event” of German cinematic history (e.g., important premiers, formation
of organizations, issuance of manifestos, etc.) and then consider the
importance of the event within the larger context of the development of
German film. The events discussed may have long been considered
seminal moments, they may serve as paradigmatic stand-ins for broader
trends, or they may only have achieved significance in retrospect. As a
whole, the volume engages with German film both synchronically (how
films construct meaning within the particular moment of their
appearance or in relation to circumstances of production, distribution,
and exhibition) and diachronically (how the meanings of films evolve as
social, political, technological, and other circumstances change). The
essays are presented in chronological order, from the November 1895 pre-
miere of the Wintergarten Program of loop films and what they reveal
about the transitional nature of early film technology to the February
2008 awarding of the German Critic’s Award for Best Documentary to
Ulrike Ottinger’s Prater. Camden House is an imprint of Boydell &
Brewer.
PN1993 2012-024973 978-0-85745-768-4
Turkish German cinema in the new millennium; sites,
sounds, and screens.
Title main entry. Ed. by Sabine Hake and Barbara Mennel. (Film
Europa: German cinema in an international context; v.13)
Berghahn Books, ©2012 251 p. $90.00
With the 1961 labor recruitment agreement between the Federal Republic
of Germany and the Republic of Turkey, a migration flow was launched
bringing large numbers of Turks to Germany and resulting, some
decades later, in a flowering of Turkish German cinema. This collection
of 15 essays, edited by Hake (German literature and culture, U. of Texas
at Austin) and Mennel (German studies and film and media studies, U.
of Florida at Gainesville), takes stock of the new landscape of Turkish
German cinema, engaging with varied methodological approaches and
theoretical perspectives on hyphenated identities; transnational cinemas;
and new approaches to documentary, genre, and art film.
PN1995 2012-019878 978-0-275-99225-5
The art of nonfiction movie making.
Friedman, Jeffrey et al.
Praeger, ©2012 234 p. $48.00
Robert Epstein and Jeffrey Friedman are the co-founders of Telling
Pictures, and the directors of films honored with Oscar, Emmy, Peabody,
and Sundance nominations or awards. Sharon Wood is a documentary
film producer and a writer on three Oscar-nominated documentaries.
Together, they have written a practical guide to making nonfiction films,
using illustrative case studies from their own work. The book is well-
written in an informal, direct-to-the-reader style; the tone is informative
and supportive rather than directive. The writers trust the reader’s ability
to think for themselves, evaluate ideas, have a sense of what is good and
what is reasonable, and understand what is meant by basic terms like
character and story. The book works by introducing readers step-by-step
to the filmmaking process and focuses at each stage on letting film-
makers know what they are going to need to accomplish next, asking
them the questions they will need to be able to answer, and giving an
example of how the authors handled the situation in a specific film of
their own. This choice encourages filmmakers to practice thinking
through the specific challenges of their own project, and allows the book
to be useful for a broad range of would-be filmmakers working with dif-
ferent styles, aims, subjects, structures, and budgets. The book is divided
into four sections: Development, Preproduction, Production, and
Postproduction. The first covers choosing a strong and marketable idea,
research, story, proposal, treatment, budget, and sample reel. The second
covers financing, fundraising, and promotion, casting, and legal and
rights issues. The third covers assembling a production and a business
–190–
team, and fundamentals of directing. The fourth covers editing (dailies,
outline, rough cut, fine cut, music and narration) and launch (festivals,
educational distribution, TV and Internet). Four appendices give samples
of an on-camera release, a deal memo, and two treatments, one with
script excerpts.
PN1995 2012-031705 978-0-7864-6167-7
Australian horror films, 1973-2010.
Shelley, Peter.
McFarland & Co., ©2012 320 p. $49.95 (pa)
Shelley, a Sydney-based playwright and librarian, presents a history of
Australia’s horror film industry. Arranged in chronological order from
1973 (Night of Fear) to 2010 (Slaughtered), feature film entries include
credits, cast, plot synopsis, background notes, release dates for various
countries, awards (if any), and available DVD. Illustrations include film
stills and posters.
PN1995 2012-023671 978-1-935709-23-7
The Basque nation on-screen; cinema, nationalism, and
political violence.
Pablo, Santiago de. (Douglass scholar series; no.2)
Center for Basque Studies, ©2012 471 p. $24.95 (pa)
This is the second volume in the Douglass scholar series in Basque
studies from the University of Nevada at Reno. Author Santiago de Pablo
gives readers a vivid sense of the film landscape in a country where pol-
itics and media cannot be separated. He treats films that deal with
Basque subjects or characters; in doing so, he is aware of the importance
of a film’s success as a piece of art and drama, but most often focuses
more attention on the cultural, historical, and political dialogue it repre-
sents. The book’s account of Basque nationalism and its history is
thorough and clearly explained hand-in-hand with the films that reflect
it from various perspectives from cinema’s beginnings to the present day.
The political affiliations of both characters and filmmakers are discussed
wherever they are important to the relevance of the film in a larger his-
torical frame. While the complexities can occasionally be bewildering for
the reader, the fault is not with de Pablo’s prose; his book makes clear
they are equally bewildering for the participants. In a landscape where
no one can remain neutral, the author takes a position supporting
Basque cultural independence, and increasingly outraged at the human
costs of political violence in the post-Franco era. The book deals with
Spanish-language and Basque-language films; a few are from Mexico,
most are from Spain and the Basque Country. The book functions as a
history of Basque nationalism and a history of Basque subjects in film.
PN1995 978-1-4411-0757-2
The blue box; Kristevan/Lacanian readings of
contemporary cinema.
Restuccia, Frances.
Continuum Publishing Group, ©2012 175 p. $29.95 (pa)
Drawing on the theories of feminist film theorist Julia Kristeva and
French psychoanalyst and philosopher Jacques Lacan, Restuccia (English,
Boston College) analyzes contemporary films with psychoanalytic themes
of loss and desire. For example, she reads Kieslowski’s Blue, Almodóvor’s
Volver, and Hitchcock’s Psycho through the lens of Kristeva’s concepts of
‘negativity’ and the ‘thought specular’(Intimate Revolt). The “blue box” of
the title, as in David Lynch’s Mulholland Drive, refers to the Lacanian
abyss of the Real and possible transformation. Chapters include film
stills, references, and a filmography.
PN1995 2011-031698 978-1-4411-6338-7
Cinema after Deleuze.
Rushton, Richard. (Deleuze encounters)
Continuum Publishing Group, ©2012 174 p. $100.00
This scholarly book looks at the philosophy of cinema in light of the
writing of Gilles Deleuze. It follows basic premises of French film crit-
icism: the director is the author of a film, and functionally equivalent to
a novelist: neither dynamics of team work nor practical technologies,
accidents, and necessities of film production systems have significant
influence. The book’s first chapter looks at the philosophy of Deleuze.
The author points out that Deleuze is not interested in the question of
what cinema is, but rather in the question of what films do, from a
philosophical perspective. His answer is that they manipulate time and
movement, with sweeping cultural associations. The next nine chapters
are divided into three on the movement-image (in Griffith, Eisenstein,
Gance, and Lang, Ford and Kazan, and Hawks and Hitchcock), three on
the time-image (in Italian neorealism, Ophuls and Fellini, and Welles and
Resnais), and chapters on “Thought and Cinema” and recent iterations of
the movement-image and the time-image.
–191–
PN1995 2011-044736 978-0-85745-591-8
Cinema of choice; optional thinking and narrative movies.
Shaul, Nitzan Ben.
Berghahn Books, ©2012 189 p. $70.00
Written by an academic film theorist (film and television studies, Tel
Aviv U.), this book examines alternatives to traditional linear narrative in
filmmaking. The goal is to show how films can let viewers create mul-
tiple readings of what happens and why, while still preserving a sense
of meaning, excitement, and interest. This is an academic study rather
than a practical craft book, and will appeal to readers who share the
author’s conviction that the faux-documentary genre (This is Spinal Tap)
is a response to the theories of Baudrillard and Foucault. For a book of
this type, however, the author is unusually interested in practical factors,
such as how to keep a non-traditional narrative from boring or confusing
audiences. The focus is on feature-length films in general release. The
definition of a film’s success with audiences is based in theoretical
factors rather than viewer numbers or interviews; a popular film such
as Pulp Fiction can be unsuccessful with audiences due to conventional
use of cataphora-anaphora interplay.
PN1995 2012-030298 978-0-7864-6390-9
Cinema’s sinister psychiatrists; from Caligari to Hannibal.
Packer, Sharon.
McFarland & Co., ©2012 245 p. $45.00 (pa)
Readers could easily be misled at first glance into thinking this book is
a popular romp through the history of a horror film subgenre. But this
book has a quite different purpose. The author, Sharon Packer (psy-
chiatry, Albert Einstein College of Medicine) is a clinical psychiatrist
interested in movies that portray psychiatrists. The book reveals a degree
of schizophrenia. At one moment, the author is psychoanalyzing: what a
film’s plot reveals about the audience’s or director’s feelings about psy-
chiatrists (Packer seems to be following the auteur theory here). At
another, she is giving cogent historical details; The Manchurian Candidate
was made shortly after a Freud anniversary celebration had brought a
wave of media attention to psychiatry. The film critic Packer is less suc-
cessful than the medical historian Packer; plot points generally depend
more on a screenwriter’s narrative needs than a director’s opinion of psy-
chiatrists, Fritz Lang did not leave Germany because he’d made a film
about a psychiatrist and the Nazis hated Freud, and so on. Where the
book succeeds is as a history of psychiatry in the US through the
medium of film. It is thoughtful here, well researched (there is a bibli-
ography and endnotes), and well written. Readers may hope she will
follow through in this mode on her closing point that a history of how
mental patients are portrayed in film would also be worth a look.
PN1995 2012-002426 978-1-4411-1142-5
Critical theory and film; rethinking ideology through film
noir.
Vighi, Fabio. (Critical theory and contemporary society)
Continuum Publishing Group, ©2012 175 p. $120.00
Fabio Vighi’s book in this series looks at film noir; he has a political goal.
Academic critical theory derived from the Frankfurt School is funda-
mentally hostile to popular film, on the grounds that the film industry
is an ideological machine dedicated to brainwashing and propaganda.
Vighi’s goal here is to refute that criticism. Writing in the prose style of
academic critical theory, he argues that while Adorno, Horkeimer, and
critical theory in general depend on the idea of dialectic, Adorno and
Horkeimer missed the dialectic between the Hollywood industry and the
creative artists making films within it. In examining film noir, Vighi
looks at a genre whose creators largely came from the proletarian under-
class, or were refugees from fascist regimes. The complex dialogue
among good, evil, need, and expedience in film noir and its ramifica-
tions in terms of culture and class have been widely recognized in film
history and criticism. Vighi breaks new ground by translating this infor-
mation into the language of academic critical theory.
PN1995 2011-038241 978-1-4411-1340-5
Deleuze and film; a feminist introduction.
Rizzo, Teresa.
Continuum Publishing Group, ©2012 195 p. $34.95 (pa)
Rizzo (film studies, U. of New South Wales) introduces readers to French
philosopher, Gilles Deleuze’s work on, and relating to, film. This involves
a substantial engagement with psychoanalysis as much as conventional
philosophy. Furthermore, she draws out the explicit feminist themes and
readings of his work that focus on representation, difference, and the
body. To this end, she devotes a chapter to new lines of feminist thought.
This combination of orientations is brought to bear on films such as La
Signora di Tutti, the Alien films, Before the Night Falls, and Elephant. She
introduces and explores a concept of “cinematic assemblages,” and how
Deleuze draws attention to the construction of affects between viewer and
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
film. A concluding post-script advances the case that “the appeal of this
Deleuzean model for feminist film analysis is that it understands sub-
jectivity as an effect produced through the intersection of different power
relations, and while these may produce fixed categories at particular
moments, it also reveals that they are not fixed forever.”
PN1995 2011-038820 978-1-4411-9043-7
Equivocal subjects; between Italy and Africa—
constructions of racial and national identity in the Italian
cinema.
Greene, Shelleen.
Continuum Publishing Group, ©2012 315 p. $120.00
Greene (art and design, U. of Wisconsin-Milwaukee) explores the role
Italian cinema has played in the development and circulation of ide-
ologies of race within the country, how the representation of mixed-race
identity marks shifts in conceptual paradigms of race and nation, and
how these factors influence contemporary representations of non-Western
European migration and Italian and European citizenship.
PN1995 2012-029452 978-0-85745-729-5
Existentialism and contemporary cinema; a Beauvoirian
perspective.
Title main entry. Ed. by Jean-Pierre Boulé, and Ursula Tidd.
Berghahn Books, ©2012 188 p. $70.00
In spite of her work on the concept of the “othering” gaze, a major theme
that runs through second-wave Anglophone feminist film theory, as well
as her long-professed fascination with cinema, French feminist and exis-
tentialist philosopher Simone de Beauvoir (1908-86) has largely been
ignored within the realm of film studies, note Boulé (contemporary
French studies, Nottingham Trent U., England) and Tidd (French studies,
U. of Manchester, England), who present 11 essays that re-open the
dormant dialogue between Beauvoir and film theory. Specific topics
include the implications of Beauvoir’s account of childhood for the
analysis of Lucile Hadzihalilovic’s Innocence (2004), Beauvoir’s portrayal
of motherhood and female sexuality in The Second Sex and recent roles
played by Isabelle Huppert, the notion of freedom as an ambiguous
dialectical interplay between individual choices and social conventions
and Sam Mendes’s Revolutionary Road (2008), the relationship between
Beauvoir’s philosophy and melodrama, and the existentialist analysis of
ageing femininity and screen representations in Yamina Benguigui’s
Inch’Allah Sunday (2001).
PN1995 2012-016110 978-1-61593-121-7
Filmmaking for change; make films that transform the
world.
Fitzgerald, Jon.
Michael Wiese Productions, ©2012 236 p. $24.95 (pa)
This is a short basic overview for people who want to make films for a
cause. The book is targeted to self-confident people who are passionate
about a subject and want to produce and market a film about it. Such
beginners to film should either expect to hire a creative team or also have
in-depth books focused on cinematography, sound, interviewing, story,
and editing; this book’s strength is in encouraging readers to think about
fundraising, marketing, and distribution from the moment they start to
think about making a film. Though his can-do boosterism is unusual for
a form so difficult and financially risky as documentary film, author Jon
Fitzgerald (Slamdance film festival, CineCause) makes a case that with
Internet fundraising and home computer programs like FinalCut Pro,
skilled entrepreneurs with energy, passion, and good business sense can
succeed in producing a film. The book is divided into three sections:
development, production, and distribution. The first covers story devel-
opment by making a quick recap of Joseph Campbell and naming some
Hollywood film genres. The second briefly covers pre-production, pro-
duction, and post-production. The third covers marketing, the film fes-
tival circuit, and distribution platforms. The book traces five specific
films through each section, showing how they made it through each part
of the process. There is a rear section of resources, including links to
CineCause, a glossary, sample budget, fundraising campaign, press kit,
and do-it-yourself screening promotional packet, and delivery require-
ments for digital platforms, international sales, and US theatrical and
ancillary rights.
PN1995 2012-004275 978-0-8143-3482-9
Hollywood’s chosen people; the Jewish experience in
American cinema.
Title main entry. Ed. by Daniel Bernardi et al. (Contemporary
approaches to film and media )
Wayne State Univ. Press, ©2013 270 p. $31.95 (pa)
Edited by Daniel Bernardi (cinema, San Francisco State U.), Murray
Pomerance (sociology, Ryerson U., CA), and Hava Tirosh-Samuelson
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
(history and Jewish studies, Arizona State U), this is a scholarly
anthology about Jewish experiences of American film. The essays are all
written in intellectual styles, but range in voice from academic cultural
studies analysis to informal personal essays of response. They deal with
particular themes, films, filmmakers, or film stars. Almost all connect
filmmaking, film viewing, and larger issues of Jewish identity and
culture in America. Most deal with the experiences of Jewish audiences
looking at the work of Jewish filmmakers in Hollywood, with a minority
of essays looking at non-Jewish images of Jews in film, or topics in film
history. The authors represent a range of perspectives, and tend to write
from humanistic traditions of cultural studies rather than postmodernist
traditions of critical theory. The essays point out that the Hollywood film
industry was created almost entirely by Jews, many of its core creators
were Jewish refugees, and social opinions about Hollywood have over-
lapped strongly with social opinions about American Jews. The prose is
accessible to general readers, but because they reason in relationship to
other academic writers on the subject, some essays will be most acces-
sible to readers familiar with academic conversations on film history,
cultural studies, or American Jewish history.
PN1995 2011-037987 978-1-4411-4541-3
Morality and the movies; reading ethics through film.
Shaw, Dan.
Continuum Publishing Group, ©2012 198 p. $27.95 (pa)
Written primarily as a textbook for introductory level ethics courses, this
volume by Shaw (philosophy and film, Lock Haven U.) engages ethical
issues through readings of selected well-known American films. Each
film is related to a particular ethical theme, thus social contract theory
is considered in light of The Man Who Shot Liberty Valance, egoism and
utilitarianism are discussed in relation to Casablanca, and freedom and
determinism are addressed in the context of A Clockwork Orange. Other
ethical issues discussed—neglecting mention of the specific films they are
related to—include submission to God’s will, relativism and perspec-
tivism, moral virtue and the limits of friendship, sexual morality,
euthanasia, capital punishment and compassion, the morality and
meaning of war, individual autonomy and abortion rights, gun control,
terrorism and counterterrorism, business ethics, and affirmative action
and diversity.
PN1995 2012-029422 978-0-7864-6699-3
Mourning films; a critical study of loss and grieving in
cinema.
Armstrong, Richard.
McFarland & Co., ©2012 212 p. $40.00 (pa)
Richard Armstrong is a film writer affiliated with the British Film
Institute. He has produced a study of certain images of loss and grief in
the cinema. In the introduction, he offers his first-person encounter with
the subject of grief: the death of his sister’s husband. He establishes the
book’s range of investigation, asking why the English root term for a sur-
viving spouse is “widow” and exploring answers from perspectives of
critical theory (women are associated with fear and sadness) rather than
historical factors (women live longer than men). The book’s core
argument is that grief films are a distinct genre. The author defines the
origin of this grief genre in melodrama and horror films. Melodrama
refers here to “women’s pictures,” and horror to psychological horror,
particularly when the protagonist is female. The author is interested in
the film theories of Gilles Deleuze. Using a psychoanalyitical perspective,
Armstrong excludes films dealing with physical and social sources of
grief: war, crime/punishment, genocide, violence, injustice, want,
aging/pain/disability. Through careful description of selected films and
theories, Armstrong offers readers a genre in which the only victims of
grief and loss are pale, attractive young women of means who have expe-
rienced a personal bereavement (usually the death of a relative). He con-
vincingly shows there is a long and thematically unified tradition of such
films in European and US cinema.
PN1995 2012-026119 978-0-7864-5920-9
The new American crime film.
Sorrento, Matthew.
McFarland & Co., ©2012 212 p. $40.00 (pa)
Matthew Sorrento (film, Rutgers U.-Camden), a former editor of Film
Threat, has turned his attention to recent US crime films. He begins the
book with a short analysis of the genre, in which he points out that little
critical attention has been paid to recent crime films, and that in their
pessimistic outlook and archetypes they cleave close to traditions in
horror and film noir. The rest of the book consists of his analyses of spe-
cific films. These are organized into sections. The first looks at recent
takes on the heist film. The second looks at recent permutations of serial
murder, corruption, and despair. The third looks at new versions of old-
school crime films, often by older artists. The last looks at antihero films,
mostly in the work of the Coen Brothers and David Cronenberg. Within
–192–
this structure, the author uses single films as a jumping-off point to look
at the works of a particular director, and to examine and argue for new
expansions in the idea of crime films (for instance, looking at Gus Van
Sant’s Elephant and Paranoid Park as examples of a teen crime and
redemption subgenre, or arguing for Fast Food Nation and other food
exposes as examples of true crime film). Readers may agree or disagree
with the author’s ways of seeing the genre, but Sorrento’s writing neatly
manages to be both analyitic and conversational. The book well repre-
sents the kind of educated viewer and critic who stimulates thoughtful
responses to popular film.
PN1995 2011-038997 978-1-4411-7658-5
New American teenagers; the lost generation of youth in
1970s film.
Brickman, Barbara Jane.
Continuum Publishing Group, ©2012 263 p. $130.00
A new book in film studies, this account of teenagers in American film
of the 1970s is theoretical in interests but accessible in style. Barbara Jane
Brickman (English and film studies, U. of West Georgia), writes in
response to a convention in American film criticism that films for teen
viewers had a large market share in the mid-century, disappeared in the
1970s, and starting in the 1980s mainstream films in general began to
be targeted to juvenile markets. This book is a response to that critique.
It documents a teen film genre in the 1970s, and discusses some of its
salient features, for instance androgynous protagonists who are sexually
available but not partnered, more radical tropes on the rock-and-roll and
Disney film, and the rise of the teen slasher film. Readers who
remember being those teens, and are in tune with Brickman’s theoretical
concerns, will enjoy this book.
PN1995 2011-044016 978-1-4411-2457-9
A new history of documentary film, 2d ed.
McLane, Betsy A.
Continuum Publishing Group, ©2012 428 p. $34.95 (pa)
Written in a clear, straightforward, accessible style, this is a practical
history of English-language documentary film from the UK, Western
Europe, and North America. This newly updated second edition is
designed to keep up with the rapid pace of change and new recent work
in the English-language documentary genre. The author, Betsy A.
McLane, is Director Emerita of the International Documentary
Association and a Past President of the University Film and Video
Association. Her book is produced with a smart eye for classroom use,
and will also interest general readers who want to understand film doc-
umentaries and their history. Though the book’s language is deceptively
simple, it is extremely well written. The author handles issues of culture
and perspective by simply stating her aims and opinions, and the
reasons for them, directly at the beginning of the book and wherever rel-
evant in the text. She writes fluid historical narratives based on extensive
research and archival experience. The book covers thinking about docu-
mentary, the work of the Flahertys, 1920s Soviet film and political indoc-
trination, 1920s European avant-garde, pre-war documentary industry in
the UK and US, WWII, post-war documentary, documentary for television
1951-71, British Free and New American cinema, cinema verite, the 1970s,
video, new public technologies, documentary tradition in the 21st
century, and a concluding chapter on current approaches and directions.
Each chapter lists related films and related books, and there are two
appendices: the Academy Awards for Best Documentary Feature, and the
National Film Registry.
PN1995 2012-038741 978-0-7864-6888-1
The Old West in fact and film; history versus Hollywood.
Agnew, Jeremy.
McFarland & Co., ©2012 258 p. $40.00 (pa)
Agnew, a biomedical electronics consultant and independent scholar of
the Old West, examines the history of the Old West represented in
Westerns and how the evolution of Westerns changed this
(non)engagement with history. He argues he is not writing film criticism,
focusing instead on the history in the film and not the effectiveness of
the film. He compares and contrasts the actual and filmed realities of
cowboys, Native Americans, women, and frontier law-enforcement. Going
back and forth, he describes the development of the West as a real place
and the Western as a film genre itself riding on the coat-tails of the
westward push of the 19th century.
PN1995 2011-045916 978-1-4411-3295-6
Post-9/11 horror in American cinema.
Wetmore, Kevin J.
Continuum Publishing Group, ©2012 231 p. $90.00
Kevin J. Wetmore has developed a book about recent US horror films
based on a simple premise: the September 11th terrorist attacks were the
–193–
greatest source of trauma any American has experienced in recent times;
therefore, it is impossible to understand any horror film after 9/11
without considering 9/11. This is fundamentally a book of personal
reflections on seeing recent American terror films as tropes on terrorism.
Wetmore’s analysis defines terrorism here, in filmic terms, as terror,
helplessness, and bodily harm inflicted by foreigners, monsters, or
random outsiders on normative Americans. For films like the Hostel
series, this analysis is useful; the author explores at length how the trope
evolves to justify Americans inflicting such harm, and to cover
Americans inflicting it on other Americans. Where fear images depend
instead on terror being domestic (domestic violence, US right-wing cults),
as in the work of Stephen King, Wetmore’s reflections become more dif-
ficult to follow. Wetmore argues from subgenres such as “torture porn”
and the nihilistic “everybody dies” film. These, he argues, should be seen
as attempts by American audiences to come to terms with meaningless
violence and torture, and with the experience of seeing actual violent
death on live television. The links he creates can be compelling. But as
the author occasionally recognizes, these subgenres date back not to 9/11
but the 1970s. Older readers may wonder what Wetmore would say, were
he to look past the Twin Towers to Vietnam.
PN1995 2012-037348 978-0-7864-7227-7
Regional horror films, 1958-1990; a state-by-state guide
with interviews.
Albright, Brian.
McFarland & Co., ©2012 327 p. $45.00 (pa)
Albright, a freelance journalist, lists regional horror and science fiction
films produced from 1958 to 1990, during the peak of their production.
He begins with interviews with 13 directors and producers who made
independent horror films during the period, including Russ Marker, J.R.
Bookwalter, Albert Salzer, Ed Adlum, William Grefé, and Robert Burrill.
The listing follows, which is organized by state, and mostly consists of
films made outside of California, those that were produced independ-
ently, and those primarily with a local cast or crew. Each includes a syn-
opsis, information, and trivia about the films and filmmakers, without
critical commentary.
PN1995 2012-034633 978-0-7864-6638-2
Western movie references in American literature.
Hoffmann, Henryk.
McFarland & Co., ©2012 224 p. $55.00 (pa)
This work takes Western film and novel fans on a journey to reminisce
about Western tales and heroes in films from 1903 to 2007, with famous
writers serving as both guides and companions. The book catalogs ref-
erences and allusions to Western movie and TV themes, characters, and
locations found in about 250 literary works, including novels, short
stories, and plays (plus a few works of narrative nonfiction) by about 130
authors. B&w publicity shots are included. Hoffmann teaches at the
Perkiomen School.
PN1995 978-0-7864-6163-9
The zombie movie encyclopedia, v.2: 2000-2010.
Dendle, Peter.
McFarland & Co., ©2012 282 p. $45.00
Dendle (English, Pennsylvania State U., Mont Alto) presents the second
volume of his encyclopedia on zombie movies, which covers the years
2000-2010 (the previous volume covered 1932 to the late 1990s).
Incorporating all sub-genres, budget ranges, and countries, including
homemade movies, he focuses on the uses of the zombie for artistic, psy-
chological, or conceptual impact, rather than film aesthetics, and docu-
ments the zombies’ appearance, behavior, and characteristics in about
280 films, which are listed by final year of production and include infor-
mation on budget, director, producer, screenwriter, cast, and plot. Some
b&w photos are provided. An appendix lists shorts and serials.
PN1997 2011-024412 978-1-4214-0365-6
When stories travel; cross-cultural encounters between
fiction and film.
Della Coletta, Cristina.
Johns Hopkins U. Press, ©2012 273 p. $65.00
Written in a highly academic style, this book looks at the adaptation of
creative material from fiction to film as a cross-cultural encounter; as in
language translation, artists from different cultural and creative tradi-
tions meet. The author, Cristina Della Coletta (Italian, U. of Virginia), also
engages translation and adaptation within this book in more literal ways.
Her topics include film from US, Italian, French, and Argentine sources:
Visconti adapting James M. Cain, Fellini adapting Poe, Alain Corneau
adapting Antonio Tabucchi, Bertolucci adapting Borges. In order to talk
about these cross-cultural encounters in both language and media, the
author relies on hermeneutic theory. The book is designed to stimulate
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
cross-disciplinary conversation in film and media studies, cultural
studies, and literature. While the style of writing is more straightforward
than passive-voice critical theory, all readers will need to be comfortable
with hermaneutics and familiar with the usual suspects of intellectual
critical theory (Freud, Bakhtin, Levi-Strauss, etc).
PN1998 2011-046833 978-1-4411-7139-9
The cinema of Eric Rohmer; irony, imagination, and the
social world.
Leigh, Jason.
Continuum Publishing Group, ©2012 374 p. $130.00
Eric Rohmer exemplified the French cinema auteur; he produced,
directed, and wrote his film scripts, and largely controlled casting and
location choices as well. In looking at Rohmer’s films, Jacob Leigh
(media arts, Royal Holloway, U. of London, UK) explores auteurship, the
analysis of bodies of work that require hundreds of people to make as
the products of a single creative mind. Leigh looks at each of Rohmer’s
almost two dozen feature films, analyzing the finished work in great
detail. Through historical research and analysis, the author also looks at
how they compare with the films Rohmer intended to create, and the
primary ideas behind his creative choices. In his analysis, Leigh com-
pares Rohmer’s work to that of artists from Fritz Lang to Anton Chekov.
The book will be best for readers with some academic background in
film studies. It will be of use to readers interested in the films of Eric
Rohmer, French New Wave cinema, or cinema and media studies from
an auteur perspective.
PN1998 2012-018352 978-0-313-39161-3
The Coppolas; a family business.
LoBrutto, Vincent and Harriet R. Morrison. (Modern filmmakers)
Praeger, ©2012 183 p. $48.00
This book looks at the film work of Francis Ford Coppola, with sub-
sidiary interest in the work of Sofia Coppola and a chapter on the work
of other members of the Coppola family. Author Vincent LoBrutto is an
experienced and lauded film journalist; author Harriet R. Morrison is pri-
marily interested in women in the workplace. Since Francis Ford Coppola
is considered a major American director and his daughter Sofia has a
more limited filmography to date, it would be easy to see the book’s
subject as a less-skilled woman riding on the coattails of a more-skilled
man. The authors gracefully avoid this problem by organizing the book
as a look at the history of a film family. Francis Ford dominates the book
as the establisher of the family business and the senior member whose
long and illustrious history of films is documented. Sofia is the up-and-
coming next generation director. In addition to analysis of both directors’
films and their circumstances of production, the book looks at what it
means (and doesn’t mean) for individual creative artists to be part of a
family tradition.
PN1998 2012-001064 978-0-8143-3462-1
The films of Joseph H. Lewis.
Title main entry. Ed. by Gary D. Rhodes. (Contemporary approaches to
film and media )
Wayne State Univ. Press, ©2012 284 p. $31.95 (pa)
This collection of essays examines Lewis’ treatment of common themes
and explorations of film styles. The book is divided into 3 parts, the first
addressing topics such as style development, B movie ambitions, the
themes of partition and desire, and Lewis’ televison films. The second
section examines a number of specific films, including Mad Doctor of
Market Street, Bombs over Burma, and So Dark the Night. The final section
focuses on the filmmaker’s most well-known work, Gun Crazy, with a
focus on examining Radical Noir, representations of masculinity, and
ethos and ethics. A selection of b&w illustrations is found throughout.
PN1998 2012-033485 978-0-7864-7183-6
The Gus Van Sant touch; a thematic study— Drugstore
Cowboy, Milk , and beyond.
Vicari, Justin.
McFarland & Co., ©2012 251 p. $40.00 (pa)
Vicari, an essayist and film-writer, presents a thematic study of several
films by Gus Van Sant. He argues that Van Sant’s films are primarily
poetic and attach “Heideggerian postmodern Being to a queerness which
gives it purpose and a larger raison d’être which manages to transcend
the loss of absolute meanings.” Referencing Bill Borroughs through-out
the text, Vicari views Van Sant’s films with an eye for postmodernist tech-
niques in sampling and nonlinear narrative, not to mention a quasi-
obsession with drugs. Vicari calls him “perhaps a drug film-maker
without drugs.” As a prominent gay director, Vicari also considers
themes of intertextuality, queer cinema and queers in cinema, de-oedi-
palizing Psycho, sexuality and sexual politics, and erotic meta-aesthetics.
Vicari is rigorous in his attention, but conversational and witty.
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
PN1998 2012-007139 978-1-4331-1932-3
Theorizing ambivalence in Ang Lee’s transnational
cinema.
Chiang, Chih-Yun. (Framing film: the history and art of cinema; v.17)
Peter Lang Publishing Inc, ©2012 132 p. $70.95
Indpendent scholar Chih-Yun Chiang looks at a large subject-media and
identity-through a narrow window. The window is two films made for
international audiences by Chinese expatriate director Ang Lee: Crouching
Tiger, Hidden Dragon and Lust, Caution. Through her attention to both the
films themselves, and to how audiences responded to these films in
online conversations across the Chinese diaspora, the author looks at dif-
ferent ways that different people construct and experience “Chineseness.”
She adroitly turns ideas like “authenticity” inside out, not through theo-
retical reasoning but through direct analysis. The author looks at the
plots of films made in the US by a Chinese-raised American director cre-
ating Chinese/American stories for non-Chinese and Chinese audiences
in the US and for Chinese and non-Chinese audiences in mainland China,
Taiwan, and across Asia. For every cogent critique of an Ang Lee trope
as not Chinese, or not Chinese enough, there is another voice, such as the
mainland Chinese forum poster who writes that an expositional crash
course in Chinese history is as needed for a generation denied history by
the Cultural Revolution as for Americans ignorant of Chinese history.
Does a Hollywood China validate a real China? Is there a difference? The
book is written with far more care than most books on media, identity,
or diasporic studies give to writing English prose that is understandable
by non-specialist readers. It is a fine example of academic analysis of
popular media; when the author argues that audiences experience a
piece of work in certain ways, she consistently works from respectful
attention to how audiences are reporting their own experiences in critical
conversations. The central truth in this book resolves not as nation, state,
history, politics, or culture, but as ambivalence itself, the live experience
of simultaneously having a shared identity and not being able to define
or be defined by its terms.
PN1998 2011-942056 978-0-7643-3934-9
Western movie photographs and autographs; 50 years of
western movies, 1920s-1970s; collector’s price guide.
Owens, Ken. (Collector’s price guide)
Schiffer Publishing Ltd., ©2011 456 p. $49.99
Primarily a collection of historic photographs, this book is a price guide
for autographs of actors in US Western genre films. Each chapter covers
a category of actor (“Singing Cowboys” “Indians in Westerns” “Women in
Westerns”) for a particular decade or decades. Within the chapter, each
actor has a page with their name, several photographs, and a price range
for their autograph in the contemporary market. The appearance of the
actor’s authentic autograph may or may not be shown, and separate
prices for clip signatures and signed photos may or may not be included.
Sometimes birth and death dates are included. Some actors who
appeared in Westerns but are not usually associated with the genre, such
as Marlene Dietrich and Steve McQueen, are included. Of interest to auto-
graph collectors and those interested in Western film memorabilia. Of
secondary interest to readers interested in film or cultural history; some
unexpected images appear, such as Native American football star Jim
Thorpe as a film extra dressed in a plains war bonnet.
PN2042 2011-043969 978-1-4411-8585-3
Censoring translation; censorship, theatre and the politics
of translation.
Woods, Michelle.
Continuum Publishing Group, ©2012 181 p. $100.00
This is an academic critical theory piece by Michelle Woods in response
to the experiences of Vera Blackwell as a translator of the plays of Vaclav
Havel. Woods’ thesis is that Havel was censored in the English-speaking
world because the response to his plays in Blackwell’s translations was
less than enthusiastic. Her critique centers on two factors: Blackwell was
a woman, and negative reception of her translations was because she
was a woman. Havel chooses Czech language constructions that are
highly idiosyncratic, therefore the preference of producers for transla-
tions into more conventional or easily spoken English diction was a form
of economic censorship motivated by cultural hegemony. In some areas
of the text, such as the discussion of how theatre-makers may shift words
and phrases in new written translations in response to how the language
sounds when spoken by a live person, Woods identifies hegemonic
oppression whenever rules of practice are not completely codified. While
Wood levels the charge of hegemony against many objects in her range
of view, the book offers no analysis of how to distinguish between trans-
lation, adaptation, and bowdlerization, or between different creative
opinions, limited resources, and censorship. The author states that
Blackwell’s (1967-85) translations are being correctly supplanted by new
ones; the book’s goal seems to be to punish incorrect past politics, rather
than to argue for Blackwell’s translations.
–194–
PN2053 978-1-57525-784-6
Directing plays, directing people; a collaborative art.
Robinson, Mary B.
Smith and Kraus, ©2012 187 p. $17.95 (pa)
Robinson (directing, New York U.) offers an insider’s perspective on how
directors work with their playwright (dead or alive), actors, designers,
and others to stage a play. The book includes personal career notes, a list
of the theater artists interviewed, and a bibliography.
PN2053 2012-007528 978-1-58510-395-9
Stage directing; a director’s itinerary.
Wainstein, Michael.
Focus Publishing, ©2012 286 p. $40.95 (pa)
This handbook of stage directing was created by Michael Wainstein (per-
forming arts, Savannah College of Art and Design). It is very clearly
designed for a single use: an introductory textbook for beginning college,
community college, and high school students preparing to direct their
first production. Some aspects of the book are elementary: the student
director is instructed on how to evaluate the musicianship of auditioning
players: “Do they make music or just noise?” Exercises in directing actors
include asking the actor to imagine the event is actually happening to
them. However, Wainstein is a veteran workhorse director. The book’s
structure is carefully, logically designed to take a person with no expe-
rience start-to-finish through the process of directing a standard
American stage production. The book goes step-by-step through the itin-
erary: choosing the play, securing rights, budgeting, reading and inter-
preting the script, visual design, casting, table work, staging and
blocking, working with actors in rehearsal, run-throughs, tech, and
opening. A separate chapter looks at the rehearsal and staging of musical
theatre. Appendices include a script analysis, sample schedules, and con-
tracts. The book is a highly functional do-it-yourself guide for getting a
traditional production onstage. Wainstein finds the most depth in his
advice on juggling diverse personalities: establish control and then relax,
never correct a diva in public, give a resistant actor a victory right before
you need them to do as you say, and so on. At its best, the book’s advice
is clear, economical, won from years of practical production experience,
and will save students much time and stress. Inexperienced directors and
their teachers and assistants would do very well to keep this book close;
it is built to include all the things people assume directors already know.
PN2074 2012-008081 978-1-61117-081-8
Theater careers; a realistic guide.
Donahue, Tim and Jim Patterson.
U. of South Carolina Press, ©2012 173 p. $24.95 (pa)
This is a down-to-earth fact-focused guide for high school students,
college students, parents, and guidance counselors interested in theatre
careers. It offers concrete information about different theatre-based
careers and the type of training, education, and experience each career
requires. It includes information about salaries, unions, and geographical
distribution of theatre jobs. The authors’ backgrounds are in theatre, edu-
cation, and business.
PN2075 2012-427089 978-1-84842-144-8
The acting book.
Abbott, John.
Nick Hern Books, ©2012 288p. $22.95 (pa)
Full of techniques (both analytical and artistic), useful exercises and
improvisational scenarios, Abbott (drama, ArtsEd School of Acting,
London) has created an accessible handbook to strengthen the actor’s
intentions while building confidence. Exploring the processes of
Stanislavsky and Meisner as well as newer ones developed by the author
himself, this is both a ‘fast-forward’ acting course as well as a fantastic
accompaniment for teachers of drama, actors at any level and directors
seeking insight into the ways actors think.
PN2272 978-1-908020-42-0
Madness at the theatre.
Oyebode, Femi.
RCPsych Publications, ©2012 100 p. $30.00 (pa)
Oyebode (psychiatry, U. of Birmingham, England) explores how madness
is represented in Western and Western-influenced theater. He examines
how the emblems and devices that are utilized to signal madness have
historically developed from the Greek tragedies to the 20th century. After
presenting individual chapters on Greek tragedy and Greco-Roman
comedy, he considers select plays by William Shakespeare, Henrik Ibsen,
Tennessee Williams, Wole Soyinka, and Sarah Kane. Distributed in the US
by Publishers Storage and Shipping Company, Fitchburg, MA.
–195–
PN2287 2012-035336 978-0-7864-7226-0
Ingrid Bergman; the life, career and public image.
Smit, David.
McFarland & Co., ©2012 245 p. $35.00 (pa)
Ingrid Bergman (1915-1982), who worked with Selznick, Hitchcock, and
other notable directors, was the most celebrated actress in the 1940s. Smit
(English, Kansas State U.) presents her life history, a critique of her acting
ability, and the range of her complex public persona: from the
wholesome star created by the Hollywood publicity machine, to one who
reinvented her image after outrage over her affair with Italian director
Roberto Rosellini. He also offers an a alternative assessment of her later
career. The book features several movie stills, but not a filmography.
PN2287 2012-029410 978-0-7864-6637-5
They knew Marilyn Monroe; famous persons in the life of
the Hollywood icon.
Harding, Les.
McFarland & Co., ©2012 183 p. $29.95 (pa)
Based in Newfoundland, Canada, Harding is a former academic librarian
and the author of many articles, book reviews, and 12-plus books.
Drawing on his scholarly skills and passion for old movies, he has
crafted a unique, well-researched survey of 618 famous people and the
relationship Marilyn Monroe had with each of them. Organized as an A-
to-Z dictionary, the text includes entries for the most obvious indi-
viduals—the Kennedys, Joe DiMaggio, and Arthur Miller—as well as the
unexpected, from Sir Laurence Olivier to The Three Stooges, Nikita
Khrushchev to Dylan Thomas, Brigitte Bardot to Eleanor Roosevelt. The
text also features an introductory overview of Monroe’s life and career; a
chronology of key events in her life from birth to death; a filmography
of work; and extensive bibliography.
PN2596 2010-478283 978-1-85936-208-2
London stage in the nineteenth century.
Tanitch, Robert.
Carnegie Publishing, ©2010 p. $38.95
This illustrated reference transports general readers and students back to
the golden age of London theater, an era of pageantry and technical inno-
vations on the stage, with year-by-year entries on London’s stage per-
formers, performances, and productions in the 19th century. Coverage
encompasses premiers by playwrights including Oscar Wilde and Gilbert
and Sullivan, as well as revivals of Shakespeare and adaptations of novels
by Dickens. The book includes 220 b&w historical photos and illustra-
tions from the Westminster Libraries and Archives Theater Collection,
showing actors, actresses, buildings, productions, and souvenir programs
and playbills. Tanitch has written other books on theater. The book is dis-
tributed in the US by International Publishers Marketing.
PN2599 90-42095 978-0-8093-1270-2
A register of English theatrical documents, 1660-1737; 2v.
Title main entry. Ed. by Judith Milhous and Robert D. Hume
Southern Illinois U. Press, ©1991 1079 p. $90.00
To determine for the first time what primary research materials exist in
the field, Milhous and Hume have supplied a chronological list of all doc-
uments related to the management and regulation of the theatre in
England from the reopening of the playhouses in 1660 to the Licensing
Act of 1737. Their descriptive checklist supplies enough information
about each document to give the potential user a sense of what the doc-
ument offers and to allow anyone who finds a theatrical manuscript to
determine whether it is already known or whether it is known from
another copy.
PN2881 2011-430095 978-3-447-06281-7
Between fame and shame; performing women—women
performers in India.
Title main entry. Ed. by Heidrun Brückner et al. (Drama und Theater
in Südasien; v.9)
Harrassowitz, ©2011 284 p. $72.00
This collection of ten papers is the outcome of the Third International
Würzburg Colloquium on Indian Studies on Changing Roles and
Perceptions of Women Performers in Indian Culture, held at the U. of
Würzburg, Germany, in 2005. Although the contributors—anthropolo-
gists, folklorists, Indologists, sociologists, and theater scholars from India,
Europe, and the US—adopt widely varying approaches to analytical style
and choice of subject matter, common themes that arise across the con-
tributions include the minimization of female embodiment and mobility
in Indian performance, the complex negotiation process through which
tradition and modernity are constructed by different performers, issues
of agency for women performers in Indian society, and differences in
insider and outsider perspectives on female roles in Indian performance.
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
PN3035 2012-004394 978-1-60938-124-0
The Jewish Kulturbund theatre company in Nazi Berlin.
Rovit, Rebecca. (Studies in theatre history and culture)
Univ. of Iowa Press, ©2012 287 p. $32.50 (pa)
Ironically, Nathan the Wise, Lessing’s German Enlightenment-era play
about religious tolerance, inaugurated the Kulturbund Theatre Company
(part of the Cultural Association of German Jews) in Berlin in 1933 a few
months after the Nazis took power. Drawing on interviews, the Jewish
press, and other sources, Rovit (theatre, U. of Kansas) traces the history
of the company until its dissolution in 1943 and the lives of some of its
participants. Includes a dramatis personae of those involved with the
Kulturbund (from actors to Nazi censorship officials), photographs, and
facsimiles of scripts and playbills.
PN3331 2012-014100 978-1-4331-1157-0
Between worlds; an anthology of contemporary fiction
and criticism.
Title main entry. Ed. by Deborah Poe and Ama Wattley.
Peter Lang Publishing Inc, ©2012 216 p. $38.95 (pa)
The 10 short stories and chapters and excerpts from novels depict char-
acters who embody the increasing number of people on the move with
the rise of global capitalism—bodies drifting between countries, between
cultures, between languages, and across borders. US scholars of literature
analyze each of the four groups of readings. There is no index.
PN3435 2012-034269 978-0-7864-6388-6
The postmodern sacred; popular culture spirituality in the
science fiction, fantasy and urban fantasy genres.
McAvan, Emily.
McFarland & Co., ©2012 188 p. $40.00 (pa)
McAvan (cultural, media and gender studies, Murdoch U. and Curtin U.,
Australia) interrogates popular forms of spirituality that proliferate in
contemporary literature, film, television and games. She argues that athe-
istic rationality hasn’t swept away religion, but under the aegis of the
postmodern end of grand narratives, hyper-reality, and pastiche spiritu-
ality persists in both conservative and liberalized forms. Postmodern
spirituality is “a paradoxical attempt at accessing spirituality” from
which the entertainment industryprofits as spiritual-consumers grope
after second-hand experiences of transcendence. She chronicles the new
monsters and supernatural creatures of the postmodern imaginary. She
draws heavily onpostmodern theorists and literary critics, particularly
Lyotard, Baudrillard, Jameson, Derrida. By examining both Christian and
non-Christian religions, she prepares a useful corrective to Slavoj Zizek’s
over-stated case against Eastern Religions as the ideologicalsupplement to
late capitalism.
PN3504 2011-037800 978-1-4411-2597-2
States of exception in the contemporary novel; Martel,
Eugenides, Coetzee, Sebald.
De Boever, Arne.
Continuum Publishing Group, ©2012 159 p. $100.00
De Boever (American Studies, California Institute of the Arts) investigates
the aesthetics, ethics, and politics of decisions depicted in four novels that
were published around September 11, 2001: Yann Martel’s The Life of Pi;
Jeffrey Eugenides’s Middlesex; J.M. Coetzee’s Disgrace; and W.G. Sebald’s
Austerlitz. None of the novels deals explicitly with the 9/11 attacks;
instead, the novels present crisis situations and look at how the char-
acters or narrators make decisions in response to the crises. An intro-
duction reviews related philosophical and political stances by Carl
Schmitt and Thomas Hobbes.
PN4784 2012-011843 978-0-8263-5163-0
Media management in the age of giants; business
dynamics of journalism, 2d ed.
Herrick, Dennis F.
U. of New Mexico Press, ©2012 399 p. $49.95 (pa)
This textbook introduces basic business terms and theories for
management of news-only newspaper, magazine, television, radio, and
online companies, using real-life examples, interviews, case studies, and
web exercises. It is intended for students seeking careers in media
management and for professionals being promoted to their first
management position. The book begins with an overview of today’s
media industry, then describes issues of the media workforce, such as
unionism, and reviews theories of management and human motivation.
Later chapters cover topics such as decision making, ethics, operations
and structure of news media companies, budgeting and financial
management, sales and marketing, consolidation and convergence, and
entrepreneurship. A final chapter on technology looks at issues such
mobile journalism. A companion website provides updates on current
technology and issues; there is also a companion blog with commentary
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
based on the book. Herrick is affiliated with the University of New
Mexico.
PN4874 2012-025346 978-1-4331-1137-2
Walter Lippmann; a critical introduction to media and
communication theory.
Jansen, Sue Curry. (A critical introduction to media and communi-
cation theory; v.5)
Peter Lang Publishing Inc, ©2012 169 p. $36.95 (pa)
Jansen (sociology, U. Buffalo SUNY) reexamines the work of Lippmann,
a much-maligned theorist in the realm of media and communication,
especially as contrasting with the work of highly-praised Dewey. The
author posits that due to the politics of knowledge and the current
structure of the market-based knowledge economy, Lippmann’s repu-
tation has been allowed to decline unjustly though his book, Public
Opinion, profoundly impacted American media studies and set him as a
founder of the field. Jansen also pays careful attention to the impact of
contemporary intellectual, biographical, and social contexts on Lippman’s
work.
PN4888 2012-005914 978-1-4331-1497-7
Millennials, news, and social media; is news engagement
a thing of the past?.
Poindexter, Paula M.
Peter Lang Publishing Inc, ©2012 214 p. $37.95 (pa)
Results from the author’s survey on attitudes towards news and social
media indicate that Millennials (those born between the early 1980s and
late 1990s) are not interested in news mainly because they don’t see
themselves in the news. Poindexter (journalism, University of Texas-
Austin) warns that the news industry’s failure to take a proactive role in
helping to create a new generation of news consumers will have devas-
tating consequences for the news media, journalism schools, democracy,
and everyday life. The book looks at factors of race, ethnicity, gender, and
political identity in Millennial news engagement and proposes best prac-
tices to engage Millennials in the news through social media. A 55-page
appendix presents questionnaires used in the author’s research, plus e-
mails used in the survey which contain week-by-week classroom
resources for teachers. The book’s readership includes students, scholars,
teachers, and journalists. The author is vice president of the Association
for Education in Journalism and Mass Communication.
PN4888 2011-501351 978-1-84467-687-3
News for all the people; the epic story of race and the
American media. (reprint, 2011)
Gonzaléz, Juan and Joseph Torres.
Verso, ©2012 453 p. $22.95 (pa)
Juan Gonzalez and Joseph Torres have produced this acclaimed history
of race and the US media, which will be a core book for readers in jour-
nalism and US history. Both authors have helped lead the National
Association of Hispanic Journalists; Gonzalez is a two-time winner of the
George Polk Award for commentary, and Torres is the Senior Advisor for
Government and External Affairs for the national media reform organi-
zation Free Press. They document the efforts of Native American,
Hispanic, African-American, and Asian-American journalists and news
outlets to report the news from and to all Americans. The authors show
a history of American media that barred large percentages of the popu-
lation from information outlets from the beginnings of the nation; one of
the first responses to a wave of racial fear (of Indian or slave uprisings,
Chinese immigration, and so on) was to ban ethnic minority reporters
and cut minority communities from access to news. The authors describe
the alternative press outlets and community responses to mainstream
media that evolved, offering both minority history and its national
context. The book also introduces readers to remarkable individual jour-
nalists whose work has been unfairly pigeonholed as racial or forgotten.
The book’s vision of news media is broad, from historical laws deciding
whether African-Americans could carry the US Mail to current debates
over control of the Internet. It is based on extensive scholarly research,
and there is a large section of endnotes. The book includes both history
and commentary; where the authors have strong opinions (such as on
net neutrality) they explain their own reasoning, and document the his-
torical and contemporary range of opinions among minority and media
organizations. The book discusses the transition from traditional to new
media and the transfer of the control of journalism from media owners
to media distributors. The book is divided into five sections: the age of
newspapers, rebel voices, the age of news networks, the age of broad-
casting, and the age of the Internet. It is very suitable for general readers
and academic classes in both journalism and history.
–196–
PN5124 2012-003108 978-1-4094-2266-2
Constructing girlhood through the periodical press, 1850-
1915.
Moruzi, Kristine. (Ashgate studies in childhood, 1700 to the present)
Ashgate Publishing Co., ©2012 231 p. $99.95
Moruzi, a postdoctoral fellow at the University of Alberta, looks at
Victorian girlhood through the lens of the competing discourses of six
British middle-class girls’ periodicals: The Monthly Packet, Girl of the
Period Miscellany, Girls’ Own Paper, Atalanta, Young Woman, and Girl’s
Realm. Moruzi looks at how the periodicals presented contrasting fem-
inine ideals, often within the same publication, such as the religious girl,
the educated girl, and the marrying girl, in the face of great political,
social, and economic change during the period. The book includes b&w
illustrations from periodicals.
PN5124 2011-045358 978-1-84519-456-7
Sex, lies and politics; gay politicians in the press.
Smith, Donna.
Sussex Academic Press, ©2012 239 p. $65.00
As elsewhere, newspapers in the UK have glommed onto scandals
involving gay politicians, but someone who is openly gay tends to be
characterized less negatively than one caught in such a scandal who
denies being gay. Following discussion of the boundaries between
private/public spheres (if any), and case studies of press coverage histor-
ically, Smith (politics and social sciences, Open U.) applies interconnected
frames to recent representations of ‘out’ members of Parliament in UK
newspapers: the move toward recognition for such marginalized groups,
changing acceptability over time, and mediated personas in constructed
reality. Distributed in the US by ISBS.
PN5364 978-0-7748-2338-8
Merry laughter and angry curses; the Shanghai tabloid
press, 1897-1911.
Wang, Juan. (Contemporary Chinese studies)
U. of British Columbia Press, ©2012 232 p. $95.00
This first book by independent Chinese Studies scholar Juan Wang takes
on an understudied subject: tabloid journalism in China. Prior to the
1890s, newspapers in the Western sense were basically unknown in
China. By the 1911 revolution, they were everywhere. In a scholarly but
very readable style, Wang traces the rise of Shanghai tabloids at the end
of the Qing era, and how their blend of funny stories, gossip, under-
handed critique, and sarcasm paved the way for the end of an empire.
The author understands well that the voice of democracy in entrenched
regimes is often hard-edged and scurrilous popular humor. The book is
well structured to take the reader through both the historical evolution
of the era and the colorful history of the Shanghai tabloids. In addition
to strong scholarly endnotes and bibliography, there is a helpful glossary
of names and terms in both Roman and Chinese characters. For readers
accustomed to seeing the Chinese revolutionary era in terms of political
fervor and dour Maoism, this book will be an enlightening surprise.
PN6080 2012-396454 978-3-8253-5969-0
Writing empire; Latin quotations in texts on the British
Empire.
Lucht, Bente. (Anglistische Forschungen)
Universitätsverlag Winter, ©2012 239 p. $66.00
From the second half of the 18th century to the beginning of the 19th,
Greek images prevailed in defining most political theories in English lit-
erature, says Lucht, then quite abruptly, Roman images and Latin
phrased replaced them. He surveys some examples of English writers
using Latin quotations in texts about the British Empire. His topics
include Kipling’s “Regulus,” the function of the Roman culture in Joseph
Conrad’s Heart of Darkness, imperialism in George Orwell’s Burmese
Days, and Tom Stoppard’s Indian Ink and Memento Mori. There is no
index.
PN6142 2012-004053 978-1-60938-112-7
On the shoreline of knowledge; Irish wanderings.
Arthur, Chris. (Sightline books; the Iowa series in literary nonfiction)
Univ. of Iowa Press, ©2012 211 p. $21.95 (pa)
Writer Chris Arthur uses the Zen figure of the ensho to describe the cir-
cular and meandering essays of this collection of literary nonfiction. He
argues that his essays “seek out contours of circumambulation that
afford glimpses of epiphanies which straighter paths would rush us
blindly past.” They are an eclectic mix of perspective experiment and
sketches that revel in ordinary wonders. A final essay reflects on
Arthur’s discovery of Zen practice. Though there are end-notes there is
no index.
–197–
ROMANCE LITERATURES
PQ1 77-648803 978-1-57591-186-1
French XX bibliography; a bibliography for the study of
French literature and culture since 1885, v.13, no.3, issue
no.63.
Title main entry. Ed. by Sheri K. Dion. (Series: title)
Susquehanna Univ. Press, ©2012 316 p. $110.00 (pa)
A publication of the American Association of Teachers of French, the
annual cites without annotation, books and articles relating to French lit-
erature since 1885 that were published during the previous year. More
than 5,500 studies are cited in such chapters as anthologies and collec-
tions, literary themes and topics, memoirs and autobiography, novel and
short story, theaters, and cinema. A section also lists works by author,
subject, theater, actor, and director; otherwise, there is no index.
Distributed in the US by Associated University Presses.
PQ265 2011-053307 978-1-4094-2241-9
Female sexuality and cultural degradation in
enlightenment France; medicine and literature.
McAlpin, Mary.
Ashgate Publishing Co., ©2012 195 p. $99.95
In this rejoinder to Enlightenment-era embrace of the idea of mankind’s
innate perfectability, McAlpin (French, U. of Tennessee) argues a cogent
case for a counter-narrative that feared the collapse of European civi-
lization due to its citizen’s moral or physical degradation. She examines
the belief that the main cause of this impending collapse was the pre-
mature awakening of female sexual desire, through medical and literary
sources treating females as “cultural thermometers.” The new genre of
the adolescent hygiene treatise, that emerged in the 1760s, represented a
new secular approach to sexuality. With young girls considered especially
vulnerable to the influence of novels, the author examines their
ambiguous sexual/virtuous role in the writings of Rousseau, Marie-
Jeanne Roland, de Sade, and others.
PQ298 2012-033505 978-0-7864-7214-7
Dreyfus and the literature of the Third Republic;
secularism and tolerance in Zola, Barrés, Lazare and
Proust.
Gould, Evlyn.
McFarland & Co., ©2012 244 p. $0.00 (pa)
Captain Alfred Dreyfus, a Jewish French Army officer, was falsely
charged with treason and spent 12 years in solitary confinement. The
Dreyfus Affair, as his case was known, inspired four of the most influ-
ential public intellectuals writing in France at the turn of the 19th
century to reexamine their stances on moral and civil issues. Gould
(French, University of Oregon) examines the work of Emile Zola, Maurice
Barrés, Bernard Lazare, and Marcel Proust, analyzing their conflicting
political views on the Dreyfus Affair in their writings on issues such as
national citizenship, education, secularism, and tolerance of Jews and
other immigrants.
PQ1521 2012-014018 978-1-60384-850-3
The song of Roland.
Chanson de Roland. Trans. by John DuVal.
Hackett Publishing Co., ©2012 239 p. $11.95 (pa)
DuVal (English U. of Arkansas) offers a new English translation of the
12th-century Old French epic. In his introduction, David Staines (English,
U. of Ottawa) explains that the poem linked the glorious past of
Charlemagne three centuries earlier with the contemporary rising power
of the knightly class and the crusades. An edition of La Chanson de
Roland in its original language is appended.
PQ2631 2012-021597 978-1-4331-2034-3
Judaism in Marcel Proust; anti-Semitism, philo-Semitism,
and Judaic perspectives in art.
Lustig, Bette H. (Currents in comparative romance languages and litera-
tures; v.207)
Peter Lang Publishing Inc, ©2012 162 p. $74.95
Bette H. Lustig is an independent US French-language scholar. Here, she
produces a scholarly analysis of Jewish themes in Proust. The book is dis-
tinctive in two ways: it provides a full analysis in English, and it focuses
entirely on Proust’s work rather than his life. The latter is a welcome
alternative to literary analysis that seeks to analyze Marcel Proust rather
than his art or society. The book is divided into three chapters: imagery
of Anti-Semite and Philo-Semite in Proust’s work (Sartre is the context
here), Biblical and ritual references in the work, and the Judaic signifi-
cance of Proust’s character portraits. The book is written in an accessible
style. The author lets readers see the commentary on Jewish life in a
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
Christian and anti-Semitic society in Proust’s writing, and understand the
specifically Judaic contexts of characters and passages in his work. The
text is supported throughout by quotations; these are given in the original
French and not translated, though they are occasionally glossed. The
book will be useful to readers, particularly French-speaking readers,
interested in Proust, Judaism, or social issues in the Belle Epoque.
PQ2637 978-2-87386-768-3
Georges Simenon; itinerary of a Belgian writer.
Title main entry.
Racine (Belgium), ©2012 144 p. $38.00 (pa)
This highly illustrated book accompanies an exhibit of original docu-
ments by Georges Simenon, the most widely read and translated Belgian
novelist, in the permanent collection at the Museum of Letters and
Manuscripts of Brussels. The book also contains material from the
University of Liege’s Simenon Collection. In addition to color photos of
handwritten and typed manuscripts, the book also presents a wealth of
b&w photos from the Simenon family’s archives. The book includes an
interview with Simenon’s son, essays on various periods in Simenon’s
life, writing, novels, and his travels in America. The book is distributed
in North America by ACC Distribution.
PQ2683 2012-015989 978-1-60280-211-7
God’s inner circle; the radical devotion of Elie Wiesel to
faith; a seeker’s scrapbook of quotations.
Ritzen, Michael.
KTAV Pub. House, ©2012 127 p. $16.95 (pa)
Ritzen, retired from teaching college English, collects quotations by
Holocaust survivor, author, and Nobel laureate Wiesel that he personally
has found most inspiring. They are arranged in sections on three tales,
wounded faith, four stages of mending faith, and God’s inner circle. He
concludes with “The Madman’s Prayer.” There is no index.
PQ6105 2012-003111 978-1-4094-3963-9
Gendering the crown in the Spanish Baroque Comedia .
Quintero, María Cristina. (New Hispanisms; cultural and literary
studies)
Ashgate Publishing Co., ©2012 248 p. $99.95
A work of feminist literary analysis from an identity studies perspective,
dealing with comedia, an extinct Spanish theatrical style that relied on
complex poetics and melodramatic plots. The book focuses on work by
Calderon and his contemporaries, and looks at plays that deal with
female rulers. The author follows two principles in dealing with per-
formance. One is that the goal of analyzing old plays long out of pro-
duction is to discover what they mean to scholars now. When this is true,
good scholarship can look usefully at 17th century plays as examples of
contemporary ideas like transgender politics and the Freudian phallic
woman. The other is that theatre is a form of literature. This idea is hard
on plays where scripts had to please conservative patrons and censors,
and artists relied heavily on subversion and irony in how lines were per-
formed live. However, given the first principle, the second is necessary.
The author analyzes the relationship between the texts of plays and off-
stage historical events, as interpreted by postmodern critical theory and
gender studies, and finds that every script she looks at reflects and sup-
ports Spanish society as both very sexist and very stratified. However, her
view of comedia is more nuanced and less universally condemnatory
than that of most scholars in this field. Author Maria Christina Quintero
intends the book as a corrective to that condemnation, and locates its
genesis in Malveena McKendricks’ recognition of the complexity of the
work of Lope de Vega.
PQ7499 2012-017907 978-0-8165-2134-0
Time commences in Xibalbá.
Lión, Luis de. (Sun tracks: an American Indian literary series; v.74)
U. of Arizona Press, ©2012 119 p. $22.95 (pa)
Lión (1940-84) was a primary school teacher in various parts of rural
Guatemala and later taught at the University of San Carlos, Guatemala
City. Much of his writing was critical of the dictatorship, and one of its
death squads kidnapped him in May 1984 as part of the anti-insurgency
dirty war. His is presumed to have been killed three weeks later. Born
and raised in Guatemala, Nathan C. Henne (Latin American studies and
Spanish, Loyola U., New Orleans) presents the first English translation of
his novel Tiempo principia en Xibalbá, which tells of a poor son who
returns to his village after a stint in the military.
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
ENGLISH-LANGUAGE LITERATURES
PR149 2011-016501 978-1-4411-3666-4
Writing Muslim identity.
Nash, Geoffrey.
Continuum Publishing Group, ©2012 142 p. $34.95 (pa)
Nash (English, U. of Sunderland, UK), a specialist in Anglo-Arab studies,
writes in a learned but accessible style useful to both scholars and edu-
cated popular readers. His subject is how contemporary writing portrays
Muslim identity. In a slender volume often relying on criticism of indi-
vidual texts, he speaks strongly about how Muslims are being portrayed
by both Muslim and non-Muslim writers, from across the English- and
Arabic-reading worlds, in forms from novels to journalism. His argu-
ments will interest both liberal and conservative readers. The book
addresses five topics: the literary kulturkampf against Islam, British
migrant Muslim fiction, Muslim images of reform and modernity, fixing
the “Islamic Terrorist,” and a chapter echoing Faludi on the way many
images of Muslim gender relations rely on Western sexual anxieties
(women-raper racism, and women as incompetent to choose their own
lives). Like other writers knowledgeable about Muslim people, Nash is
outraged by many current portrayals of Muslims. His definition of cul-
turally Muslim writers who advocate secular governance as Western may
report on or encourage the binary identity politics he criticizes, but the
writing here rarely descends into postmodernist polemics. The author
argues that Western secular-postmodern culture (including postcolo-
nialism) misrepresents and opposes Muslim identity because it does not
fit its categories of difference: race, gender, class, nation, and so on.
Muslim identity is based on religion, and coexists with multiple other
identities. Nash acknowledges his debt to Amin Malak here. Western
identity politics does not tolerate religion as a foundation for identity, and
demands a singular, exclusive identity. Distributed by Continuum.
PR418 2011-410571 978-3-11-025830-1
Humankinds; the renaissance and its anthropologies.
Title main entry. Ed. by Andreas Höfele and Stephan Laqué.
(Pluralisierung & Autorität; bd. 25)
De Gruyter, ©2011 281 p. $126.00
Contributors identified only by name explore the many depictions of
humankind in a range of branches of philosophy and academic disci-
plines as well as the nascent field of anthropology in early modern
Europe. They cover literary sites of the human, religious being, negoti-
ating the foreign, human and non-human, and thinking the human.
Specific topics include religion and the anthropology of ritual in
Shakespeare, indigenous exoticism in the literature of roguery,
Montaigne’s rapprochement between man and animal, and The Masque
of Lethe and the recovery of humankind. Only names are indexed.
PR448 2011-034744 978-1-4214-0480-6
Imagining methodism in eighteenth-century Britain;
enthusiasm, belief, and the border of the self.
Anderson, Misty G.
Johns Hopkins U. Press, ©2012 279 p. $65.00
Attending to representations of Methodism in the popular British press
and literature in its first phase, from 1736 to 1778 “not because they are
true but because they are telling,” Anderson (English, U. of Tennessee)
interprets how these representations reflected British culture’s prob-
lematic relationships with belief, consciousness, and modernity. She sug-
gests that this period represents the negotiation of the birth of modern
religion and the modern self through the active contestation of religion
in “a secular age.”
PR468 2011-047747 978-1-4331-1523-3
Cemetery plots from Victoria to Verdun; literary
representations of epitaph and burial from the 19th
century through The Great War.
Kichner, Heather J. (Studies on themes and motifs in literature; v.110)
Peter Lang Publishing Inc, ©2012 150 p. $72.95
Kichner (English, Lorain County Community College, Ohio) explores the
changing literary and historical conventions of epitaph writing and the
value placed upon individual burial within the wider culture of
mourning during the 19th century. She discusses novel responses to 19th
century reform with an emphasis on Charles Dickens, epitaphs and
memorializing literature in general, and war writing and the new
cemetery problem. The horrors of mechanized warfare in World War I,
she argues, reminded people of the crowded and sordid public ceme-
teries before the 19th-century reforms.
–198–
PR478 2012-023836 978-0-7864-6294-0
Culture wars in British literature; multiculturalism and
national identity.
Prince, Tracy J.
McFarland & Co., ©2012 224 p. $45.00 (pa)
Prince (Portland State U.) considers questions of the changing nature of
British identity over the course of the 20th century through an explo-
ration of issues of culture and identity as they have played out in the
world of British literature, addressing both how various writers have
addressed these issues in their writings and how identities are defined
in discussions of and teaching about British literature. Over the course of
seven chapters, she discusses how different writers responded to the
changing cultural and literary climate of an empire in decline, argu-
ments over definitions of British identity in literature, the construction of
“Black British” and literary challenges to white-centric ideals, class issues
in British literature, the historical circumstances of British Jewish writers,
the negotiation of national identities in the politics of the Man Booker
Prize, and recent constructions of British multicultural identity in liter-
ature and politics.
PR868 2011-039974 978-1-4411-3159-1
Mapping the Wessex novel; landscape, history and the
parochial in British literature, 1870-1940. (reprint, 2010)
Radford, Andrew.
Continuum Publishing Group, ©2012 182 p. $44.95 (pa)
Scholars of British literature will find great value in Radford’s exami-
nation of the import of Wessex in novels published between 1870-1940 by
Thomas Hardy, Richard Jefferies, John Cowper Powys, and Mary Butts.
Radford (British and American literature, U York) explores the sense of
the historical past, especially from an archaeological perspective, the
landscape and geography, and conceptual and cultural definitions of
place. Radford pays particular attention to how each author excavates
Wessex and places import on the regularly ignored region, with a focus
on how its history contributes to definitions of an English identity both
in contemporary times and over the past centuries.
PR878 2012-031880 978-0-85728-534-8
Empire and the animal body; violence, identity and
ecology in Victorian adventure fiction.
Miller, John.
Anthem Press, ©2012 234 p. $99.00
Miller (19th century lit, U. of Sheffield) explores representations of wild
animals and violence toward them in Victorian adventure literature in
the context of British colonialism. Drawing on Adorno and Derrida, he
attends to the way that romanticized violence against animals reflects
imperialist aggression and racism, but cautions against this intersec-
tionism’s potential to re-articulate colonialist binaries. His primary
sources are G.A. Henty, John Buchan, G.M. Fenn, Rider Haggard, R.M.
Ballantyne, and Paul Du Chaillu. In their texts, he is mostly looking at
Africa, but also India and Indonesia. Issues of masculinity and
aggressive performance are also explored. This text contributes to an ever
broadening eco-criticism. Distributed by Books International.
PR878 2011-028609 978-1-4411-4650-2
Victorian parables.
Colón, Susan E. (New directions in religion and literature)
Continuum Publishing Group, ©2012 158 p. $29.95 (pa)
Contesting critical assumptions prevalent in both religious and literary
studies regarding biblical and extra-biblical parables, Colón (literature,
Baylor U., Waco, Texas) presents a critical history of parable interpre-
tation in the context of their Judeo-Christian roots. Grounding her
analysis of extra-biblical parables Victorian literature in Paul Ricouer’s
theory of parable, which treats parables as paradoxical narratives that
depict the extraordinary in the ordinary, she argues that they suggest a
transformation of life by confronting conventional moral assumptions.
Works read as parables include Charlotte Yonge’s The Heir of Redclyffe
(1853) treatment of Pharisee-like hypocrisy, and Margaret Oliphant’s
fiction’s prodigal son theme.
PR1121 2012934805 978-0-7546-3116-3
Sarah Fyge Egerton.
Title main entry. Ed. by Betty S.Travistsky and Anne Lake Prescott.
(The early modern Englishwoman; a facsimile library of essential
works: Series II: Printed writings, 1641-1700; pt.4, v.2)
Ashgate Publishing Co., ©2012 — p. $114.95
Egerton (1668-1723) launched her career in poetry at age 14 with “Female
Advocate: or, An Answer to a Late Satyr Against the Pride, Lust and
Inconstancy, &c. of Woman. Written by a Lady in Vindication of her Sex”
published in 1686 and in a revised form in 1707. Facsimiles of both
printings are presented here, along with her collection Poems on Several
–199–
Occasions, Together with a Pastoral, published in 1703. These poems show
that she had acquaintances in the world of the theater and was an
engaged reader of philosophical and scientific works.
PR1260 978-0-8386-4397-6
Medieval and renaissance drama in England; v.25.
Title main entry. Ed. by S.P. Cerasano.
Fairleigh Dickinson U.P., ©2012 246 p. $80.00
Eight articles consider such topics as aggression, anxiety, and repertory
in the playhouses of early modern London; King Lear at Gowthwaite Hall;
why Greene was angry at Shakespeare; and symbolic and thematic
impoverishment in Polanski’s Macbeth. Seven reviews also look at such
recent publications as Carla Mazzio’s The Inarticulate Renaissance:
Language Trouble in an Age of Eloquence, Paul A. Kottman’s Tragic
Conditions in Shakespeare: Disinheriting the Globe, and Elizabeth
Williamson’s The Materiality of Religion in Early Modern English Drama.
Distributed in the US by Associated University Presses.
PR2362 978-0-404-19227-3
Spenser studies; a renaissance poetry annual; v.27
Title main entry. Ed. by Anne Lake Prescott, William A. Oram and
Andrew Escobedo.
AMS Press, ©2013 342 p. $178.50
The 14 essays in this collection are led off by The Kathleen Williams
Lecture, 2010, “Chivalric Idealism versus Pragmatism in Spenser and
Malory: Taking up Arms in a Wrongful Quarrel” by Carol Kaske (Cornell
U.). Other topics include infants and the battle for the future in The Faerie
Queene, Milton’s compressed memory in Areopagitica of Spenser’s Cave of
Mammon, art and objectivity in the House of Busirane, Spenser’s “May”
eclogue and charitable admonition, Henry Lok and holy disorder in devo-
tional lyric, evidence from Thomas Middleton on Spenserianism and
satire before and after the bishops’ ban, and a mortgage agreement of
Edmund Spenser’s grandson Hugolin Spenser.
PR2823 2012-029654 978-0-7864-6479-1
The tragedie of Macbeth; a frankly annotated first folio
edition.
Shakespeare, William. Ed. and annotated by Demitra Papadinis.
McFarland & Co., ©2012 426 p. $35.00 (pa)
Producer and director Papadinis (New England Shakespeare) stopped
using edited modernized versions of Shakespeare’s plays because they
obliterate essential meaning and reduce performability and the anno-
tation is inadequate, inaccurate, or both. To encourage others to use only
versions from the original publication in the First Folio on 1623, she
offers this edition of Macbeth with notes explaining word meanings, allu-
sions and references, and matters that the original audience would know.
PR2976 2011-046613 978-1-4411-8743-7
Joyce, T.S. Eliot, Auden, Beckett.
Title main entry. Ed. by Adrian Poole. (Great Shakespeareans; v.12)
Continuum Publishing Group, ©2012 226 p. $140.00
The Great Shakespeareans series, of which this is volume 12, selects
figures—actors, novelists, playwrights, musicians, and thinkers in various
realms—and then finds experts on these individuals. Contributors are
asked to consider two themes: Shakespeare’s impact on their selected
subject, and that person’s impact on interpretation and appreciation of
Shakespeare. Editor Poole (English, U. of Cambridge) provides an intro-
duction, stating some of the rationale for bringing together essays on the
four writers announced in the title.
PR2981 2012-035339 978-0-7864-7243-7
Shakespeare and the problem play; complex forms,
crossed genres and moral quandaries.
Risden, E.L.
McFarland & Co., ©2012 224 p. $45.00 (pa)
This book is intended as a scholarly exploration of Shakespeare’s plays
as problem plays, as they regularly present unsolvable moral dilemmas
as well as often defying the reader’s attempts at classification by genre,
thus inviting further meditation. Risden (English, St. Norbert College)
gives careful consideration to the context in which Shakespeare wrote,
drawing from research into medieval and Classical literature as well as
contemporary intellectual expectations. The book examines several plays
in particular, including The Merchant of Venice, Troilus and Cressida, All’s
Well That Ends Well, and Measure for Measure, in addition to discussing
Shakespeare’s general treatment of comedy, tragedy, history, and
romance.
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
PR2995 978-0-8386-4398-3
Shakespeare studies; v.40.
Title main entry. Ed. by Susan Zimmerman and Garrett Sullivan.
Fairleigh Dickinson U.P., ©2012 315 p. $60.00 (pa)
This collection of essays, articles, and reviews appropriate for students of
Shakespeare encompasses a variety of topics relating to Shakespeare’s
work, including materialism and aesthetics, political thought, animals as
characters, contemporary popular culture, cultural exchange and
diversity, performance history and historical contexts, and several essays
addressing moral agency. Popular plays such as King Lear, Macbeth, and
Hamlet are closely examined in many essays, and the concept of char-
acter as agency, in contrast to a focus on context, runs through the col-
lection. Expert contributors include professors and researchers of
English, drama, literature, classics, and philosophy.
PR3011 2012-018566 978-90-04-23005-7
The unheard prayer; religious toleration in Shakespeare’s
drama.
Sterrett, Joseph. (Studies in religion and the arts; v.6)
BRILL, ©2012 187 p. $140.00
Sterrett (literature in English, Aarhus U., Denmark) traces a roughly
chronological path through the plays to explore how Shakespeare used
the motif of the unheard prayer in his early tragedy, comedy, history, late
tragedy, problem play, and romance. He discusses oppositional praying
in Titus Andronicus; poems and unheard prayers in Love’s Labour’s Lost;
outpraying prayers in Richard II; sovereignty, fraternity, and isolation at
the heart of Hamlet; an economy of prayer in All’s Well That Ends Well;
vain prayer in King Lear; and answered prayer in Shakespeare’s late
plays.
PR3562 2012-022081 978-0-8207-0456-2
Satan’s poetry; fallenness and poetic tradition in Paradise
Lost .
St. Hilaire, Danielle A. (Medieval & Renaissance literary studies)
Duquesne University Press, ©2012 246 p. $58.00
Through close readings and careful analysis of the text, St. Hilaire
(English, Duquesne U.) explores the poetics used in the depiction of Satan
in Milton’s Paradise Lost and argues that the Fall reorients Satan’s lan-
guage and thus self-identification especially with regard to the state of
being fallen. The book explores the links between the poem’s con-
struction and Satan’s development as a character, allusions and the lit-
erary tradition within which the poem functions, and the ways in which
the narrative voice and Satan converge. Appropriate for scholars of
English literature, especially those studying Milton.
PR3588 2012-022080 978-0-8207-0454-8
To repair the ruins; reading Milton.
Title main entry. Ed. by Mary C. Fenton and Louis Schwartz. (Medieval
& Renaissance literary studies)
Duquesne University Press, ©2012 436 p. $58.00
From the 2009 incarnation of a biennial conference on British poet John
Milton (1608-74), held in Murfreesboro, Tennessee, 12 essays look at
recovering Milton’s poetics; rereading the inner landscape; recovering
ruins; and reception, ruin, and repair. Among the topics are his empyreal
conceit, private piety in the brief epic Paradise Regained, his genii loci and
the medieval saints, and the fate of place in Paradise Lost.
PR3588 70129962 978-0-8207-0446-3
A variorum commentary on the poems of John Milton;
v.5, pt.8: Paradise Lost, books 11-12.
Lares, Jameela. Ed. by P.J. Klemp. (Series: title)
Duquesne University Press, ©2012 393 p. $85.00
Lares (English, U. of Southern Mississippi) has compiled all the
important and influential line-by-line commentary published between
1667 and 1970 on the conclusion to John Milton’s (1608-74) Paradise Lost
in books 11-12. The comments include explanations of obscure terms,
echoes of other literature, biblical references, and pointing out poetic
devices. Many scholars have complained about the conclusion of the epic
for various reasons, but because the line-by-line commentary rarely deals
with such issues, she addresses them in her introduction.
PR4037 2011-025052 978-1-4411-7654-7
Everybody’s Jane; Austen in the popular imagination.
Wells, Juliette.
Continuum Publishing Group, ©2011 246 p. $100.00
The legacy of Jane Austen (1775-1817) lives on in adaptations of her
fiction, book groups, Austen studies, and pilgrimages to Austen’s Home
Museum in Chawton, England. Drawing on her questioning of tourists to
the museum about what Austen means to them, Wells (English,
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
Manhattanville College) examines why her novels still attract general
readers. She also discusses the passion of a late American amateur col-
lector of all things Austen, and unusual reinventions of her works which
infuse them with the missing sex and violence. Illustrations include
Austen art, memorabilia, photographs of locales in her life, and film
stills.
PR4057 2011-024401 978-1-4214-0458-5
Anna Letitia Barbauld and eighteenth-century visionary
poetics.
Watkins, Daniel P.
Johns Hopkins U. Press, ©2012 245 p. $60.00
Watkins (English, Duquesne U.) finds Barbauld’s (1743-1825) collection
Poems, first published in 1773, then in a revised version in 1792, to be a
carefully constructed visionary statement and an especially good example
of the visionary method used by poets in the 18th century. The poet
ranges across political and philosophical topics, pastoral and epic poetic
forms, and biblical and secular source materials, he says, in a manner
that allows each poem to speak to the others and together present a
dynamic and compelling imaginative statement that is expanse yet
checked by self-reflection.
PR4201 68-18389 978-0-8214-1981-6
The complete works of Robert Browning with variant
readings and annotations; v.17
Title main entry. Ed. by Ashby Bland Crowder and Allan C. Dooley.
Ohio University Press, ©2011 492 p. $79.95
This final volume of a 17-volume set presents Browning’s last collection
of poems, published on the day he died in 1889, plus 99 other pieces that
were unpublished or uncontrolled during Browning’s lifetime, including
juvenilia, translations, and other ephemera. The book also contains a
biographical essay on Thomas Wentworth, Earl of Strafford, coauthored
by Browning in 1836, which was the basis for a play he wrote the fol-
lowing year. The goal of the 17-volume set is to present the poet’s works
as he published them, to represent the creative process by which they
developed, and to annotate Browning’s wide-ranging allusions; therefore,
the books present all variant readings in the texts under Browning’s
control, from cancelled manuscript readings to proof corrections in later
collected readings. Editorial notes for each piece provide historical, lit-
erary, social, and biographical contexts and background. Crowder is
affiliated with Hendrix College. Dooley is affiliated with Kent State
University.
PR4682 2012030762 978-1-61148-418-2
The complicity of friends; how George Eliot, G. H. Lewes,
and John Hughlings-Jackson encoded Herbert Spencer’s
secret.
Raitiere, Martin N.
Bucknell University Pr., ©2012 385 p. $95.00
Beautifully written, based in exhaustive research, and like a detective
story in its pace and sequence of revealed discovery, this study reveals
that the famous 19th-century philosopher Herbert Spencer suffered from
a specific neurological disorder, one that was described by his doctor
John Hughlings-Jackson only in the privacy of his medical notes. Raitiere
(he earned a PhD in English before going on to study and practice psy-
chiatry and neuroscience) shows how Spencer’s condition was perceived
by friends and acquaintances, most notably by the novelist George Eliot,
who incorporates her close relationship with him into fiction. This is a
fascinating and substantial work, one that will be of interest to the
general reader as well as specialists in 19th-century literature, philosophy,
and neuroscience. Co-published with The Rowman & Littlefield
Publishing Group, Inc.
PR4989 2012-029800 978-1-936320-54-7
Mary Elizabeth Braddon and Yorkshire; dialect, place and
setting in Victorian sensation literature.
Morris, Ruth.
Academica Press, LLC, ©2013 146 p. $64.95
Writing for an academic audience familiar with women writers of
Victorian Literature, Morris thoroughly explores the setting of Yorkshire
in Braddon’s novels, plays, poems, and short stories, with focus on the
Yorkshire dialect. As the first book to examione Braddon’s writings in
relation to Yorkshire, the author not only writes generally about the
whole of Braddon’s work but also explores certain novels in some detail.
An additional motivation for Morris is to redefine much of Braddon’s
work as more than sensationalist and to place her in the company of the
likes of the Bronte sisters.
–200–
PR4989 2012-037648 978-0-7864-3667-5
Mary Elizabeth Braddon; a companion to the mystery
fiction.
Beller, Anne-Marie. (McFarland companions to mystery fiction; 4)
McFarland & Co., ©2012 196 p. $39.95 (pa)
Mary Elizabeth Braddon, a prolific mystery and crime fiction writer of
the mid 19th and early 20th centuries, is best known for her then-scan-
dalous novel, Lady Audley’s Secret. In addition to many other novels, she
also wrote short stories, plays, essays, and poems. This reference work
contains entries on her writing in all genres and on her characters,
themes, and influences. The book includes a chronology and a list of
works, plus historical illustrations and b&w photos of first editions, book
jackets, posters, and playbills, as well as b&w stills from film and TV
adaptations of her works. Beller teaches English at Loughborough
University, UK.
PR6005 2011-534187 978-90-420-3440-2
Under Western eyes; centennial essays.
Title main entry. Ed. by Alan H. Simmons, J.H. Stape and Jeremy
Hawthorn. (Conrad studies; v.6)
Editions Rodopi, ©2011 161 p. $44.00 (pa)
In this collection of 11 essays, international contributors in literature and
English examine Joseph Conrad’s novel Under Western Eyes, published in
1911. They look at influences on the novel, its representation of ethical
issues, its reception in Russia, and examples of intertextuality in the
novel. The book will be of interest to scholars of literary modernism.
There is no subject index. Simmons and Stape are affiliated with St.
Mary’s University College. Hawthorn is affiliated with the Norwegian
University of Science and Technology. Price is converted from the euro
and subject to fluctuation.
PR6007 2012-008860 978-1-4331-1873-9
“The ethos of Britain”; Delderfield’s Swann trilogy.
Lams, Victor J.
Peter Lang Publishing Inc, ©2012 121 p. $68.95
Lams (emeritus, English, California State U.-Chico) analyzes the three
novels by R. F. Delderfield (1912-72) that evaluates a half-century of
English history drawing on the journal of Adam Swann, who ran a
goods-hauling business during the late 19th century. The novels are God
is an Englishman, Theirs was the Kingdom, and Give Us this Day. There is
no index.
PR6029 2012-009895 978-0-87140-410-7
Diaries.
Orwell, George. Ed. by Peter Davison.
Liveright Publishing, ©2012 597 p. $39.95
This edition of George Orwell’s diaries offers very high production
quality. The handwritten entries are set in attractive and readable fonts
that preserve some of the qualities of an original journal without sacri-
ficing clarity. Sketches by Orwell are included. The diaries here cover the
years 1931-1949, and are edited by Peter Davidson, who was co-editor of
the twenty volumes of Orwell’s Complete Works and is generally con-
sidered the world’s leading Orwell scholar. The introduction is by
Christopher Hitchens. The editor provides informative and helpful notes
at the end of each entry where they are needed, identifying places,
events, and historical figures to which Orwell refers. These notes are
unobtrusive and no longer than necessary to give useful information for
context. He also provides introductions to each journal to give biogra-
phical and historical context for the journal, and to help readers under-
stand what Orwell was thinking about as he wrote, and the
circumstances that moved him. The eleven diaries of Orwell’s that
survive are included here in their entirety. A necessary book for Orwell
scholars, and a good book for general readers who are interested in fol-
lowing a writer and a thinker whose commitment to politics was based
on care for people more than ideology, as he bears witness to the Second
World War and some of the greatest tumults of the 20th century.
PR6039 2012-015784 978-0-393-08907-3
Now all roads lead to France; the last years of Edward
Thomas.
Hollis, Matthew.
W.W. Norton, ©2011 388 p. $29.95
This account retraces the last five years of the WWI poet Edward
Thomas, beginning with his friendship with American poet Robert Frost
and ending with his death on a French battlefield in 1917. The book
includes b&w historical photos. Author Hollis has been awarded prizes
for his poetry and for this biography.
–201–
PR6054 2012-358485 978-1-908188-05-2
Conversations; poets & poetry 1981-2010.
Dawe, Gerald.
Lagan Press, ©2011 286 p. $16.00 (pa)
This collection presents reviews and interviews by poet and essayist
Gerald Dawe (Trinity College, Dublin), previously published over the
period 1981-2010. The first section presents interpretations of various
works of poetry in Ireland, covering not only literary poets but also the
lyrics of visionary singer Van Morrison. The second section offers inter-
views with seven Irish poets, including Morrison.
PR6057 2012-035678 978-0-7864-6636-8
Feminism in the worlds of Neil Gaiman; essays on the
comics, poetry and prose.
Title main entry. Ed. by Tara Prescott and Aaron Drucker.
McFarland & Co., ©2012 285 p. $35.00 (pa)
In this anthology of 16 essays, contributors in English and feminist
studies look at the portrayal of women and feminist issues in the writing
of Neil Gaiman. Several essays explore Gaiman’s most popular graphic
novel series, The Sandman, but there are also essays on his writing
outside of graphic novels, including his screenplays, short fiction, and
children’s stories. Some specific topics include the fracturing of phallo-
centric discourse, the problem of delirium in The Sandman, sexual vio-
lence and “Calliope,” feminist subjectivity in Gaiman’s Black Orchid, and
feminine folklore and agency in The Dream Hunters. Prescott is affiliated
with UCLA. Drucker is an instructor in Los Angeles.
PR6066 2012-032248 978-0-7864-6508-8
Beyond His Dark Materials ; innocence and experience in
the fiction of Philip Pullman.
Bobby, Susan Redington.
McFarland & Co., ©2012 197 p. $40.00 (pa)
Bobby (English, Wesley College) examines Philip Pullman’s published
work, excluding the well-known trilogy His Dark Materials, with focus on
those stories, novellas, and novels that deal with growth and maturity
through trial of the characters. With more than a nod to William Blake,
this book is divided into two sections: the first, Stories of Innocence,
examines those of Pullman’s stories, especially reimagined fairy tales,
which deal with more innocent characters and are written for youthful
audiences; the second, Stories of Experience, deals with those stories in
which the characters face difficulties and deeper sufferings, and is espe-
cially focused on novels and retellings of biblical stories. The book is
thoroughly notated and includes and extensive bibliography.
PR6068 2012-024861 978-0-7864-7137-9
Hermione Granger saves the world; essays on the feminist
heroine of Hogwarts.
Title main entry. Ed. by Christopher E. Bell.
McFarland & Co., ©2012 223 p. $40.00 (pa)
This collection of essays examines the idea of modern-day feminism
through the lens of popular heroine Hermione Granger, a character in
the well-known Harry Potter series. The book seeks to reclaim feminism
in the face of modern-day demonization and is divided into sections
delineating archetypical aspects of Hermione’s character: woman,
scholar, warrior, and activist. Bell (communication, U. of Colorado) out-
lines in the introduction why Hermione is an appropriate study for
modern-day feminism, including the history of her name and her gen-
erally misunderstood antithetical role to the series’ namesake.
Contributors include students and professors across a range of studies.
PR6068 2012-000750 978-1-4331-1326-0
The play of reasons; the sacred and the profane in
Salman Rushdie’s fiction.
Yacoubi, Youssef. (Postcolonial studies; 14)
Peter Lang Publishing Inc, ©2012 230 p. $81.95
Yacoubi, (Near Eastern studies, Ohio State U.), a professor with a back-
ground in Arab-American studies, modern Arabic literature, and critical
theory, argues that Salmon Rushdie’s fiction operates both within and
beyond Islamic literary and theologic tradition. Yacoubi’s post-struc-
turalist approach emphasizes what he calls “post-colonial flow,” or
movement between authoritarian structures. Yacoubi compares different
critical readings of Rushdie’s work, readings of traditional texts such as
the Qur’an, and Rushdie’s writing, especially The Satanic Verses.
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
PR6068 2011-049514 978-1-4411-4850-6
Salman Rushdie’s cities; reconfigurational politics and the
contemporary urban imagination.
Parashkevova, Vassilena. (Continuum studies in the city)
Continuum Publishing Group, ©2012 232 p. $110.00
Parashkevova (English, London South Bank U.) explores novelist Salman
Rushdie’s use of urban settings at the “dynamic intersections of colonial,
postcolonial and global contexts”. She argues that “Rushdie’s cities rarely
stay within themselves” and focuses interconnections with other cities
and places, whereas most examinations of Rushdie’s cities stays within
a given one. Parashkevova analyzes Rushdie’s use of real and unreal
cities, paying special attention to the way that they regenerate and pro-
liferate. This regenerative process she observes can effect reconfiguration
and transcendence or conformity to existing power relations.
PR8803 2012-451180 978-1-85918-495-0
The Irish novel, 1960-2010.
O’Brien, George.
Cork University Press, ©2012 224 p. $55.00
O’Brien (emeritus, English, Georgetown U.) approaches his subject in an
interesting way. He has selected an author and a novel for each year of
the 50 years under consideration—a span of time in which the Irish novel
developed and flourished. In a chronological presentation, O’Brien offers
a critical essay on each of his selections. Each essay begins with notes on
the author’s oeuvre and ends with a supplementary reading list and
mention of other novels published that year. Distribution in the US is by
Stylus Publishing.
PR9340 2012-005294 978-1-57233-868-5
Teaching Olaudah Equiano’s Narrative ; pedagogical
strategies and new perspectives.
Title main entry. Ed. by Eric D. Lamore.
U. of Tennessee Press, ©2012 328 p. $50.00
The Interesting Narrative of the Life of Olaudah Equiano, or Gustavus Vassa,
the African. Written by Himself, published in London in 1789, has
achieved canonical status in recent decades and historians, literary
critics, and the general public increasingly recognize Equiano as one of
the most accomplished English-speaking writers of African descent. Here
teachers in a number of disciplines explore the pedagogical challenges
and opportunities that the autobiography offers to teachers and students.
They consider such topics as domesticating The Narrative, a transatlantic
approach to teaching it, its metaphysics of presence, teaching it in the
early American literature survey course, and The Narrative as a captivity
narrative.
PR9359 2012-002773 978-0-8166-7769-6
South Africa and the dream of love to come; queer
sexuality and the struggle for freedom.
Munro, Brenna M.
U. of Minnesota Press, ©2012 337 p. $25.00 (pa)
Brenda Munro (English, U. of Miami) has created a smartly-written book
about queer images in recent South Africa. The study will be extremely
useful to readers in GLBT studies, and also to readers interested in South
African literature, or media and cultural studies in general. One of the
author’s core points is that images of same-sex activities, desires, and
relationships appeared in South African culture almost overnight. Under
apartheid, images were censored and activities were illegal; the new con-
stitution gave GLBT people full citizenship and rights. At the same time,
the racial structure and politics of the nation similarly transformed. So
for Munro, South Africa in the past twenty-five years is a laboratory for
understanding how queer images in art and entertainment reflect trends
and tensions in society. Through analyses of individual works, the author
looks at how gay and lesbian stock characters emerged. Homosexual
identity and desire became part of a multicultural image that used
money, queerness, hipness, and style to represent modernity, erasing the
pain and divisions of the past. GLBT characters often symbolized the
hope of a wealthy, international, “post-racial” future. When that future
failed to materialize for most South Africans, portrayals of GLBT char-
acters changed again; homophobic images represented queerness as
alien, Western, and exploitative. More nuanced and sympathetic por-
trayals currently reject a naive “rainbow nation” optimism in exchange
for explorations of the problems and possibilities of queerness and of the
nation, often arising out of chaos and change. Munro looks at the work
of many writers and media-makers, from popular South African TV
serials to the post-apartheid work of Nadine Gordimer and J.M. Coetzee.
The author writes in an accessible style for educated readers, and pro-
vides narrative endnotes.
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
PR9615 978-1-74258-445-4
Collected verse of John Shaw Neilson.
Neilson, John Shaw. Ed. by Margaret Roberts.
UWA, ©2012 531 p. $39.95 (pa)
Neilson (1872-1942) is regarded as one of Australia’s foremost lyricists,
says Roberts, but his verse is an extraordinary mixture of the beautiful
and banal, and she considers him a naíve in artistic terms. To date about
700 completed pieces of verse have been located, of which about 135 are
limericks and humorous quatrains, though only 197 poems and 31 lim-
ericks and quatrains were published during his life. She gathers them all
and arranges them in four periods, with sections on verses that cannot
be assigned a date and verses of doubtful attribution. Distributed in the
US by ISBS.
AMERICAN LITERATURE
PS151 2012-011196 978-1-61117-086-3
Mosaic of fire; the work of Lola Ridge, Evelyn Scott,
Charlotte Wilder, and Kay Boyle.
Maun, Caroline.
U. of South Carolina Press, ©2012 196 p. $44.95
Maun (English, Wayne State U., Detroit) introduces readers to several
modernist women writers who deserve to be read more widely, whose
lives and works intersected in New York’s Greenwich Village in the 1920s-
1940s. Emphasizing their mutual mentoring relationships, she discusses
their lives and professional challenges, use of various genres to address
social justice issues, and adds her critiques to those of others of their
works. Through “Three Men Die,” poet-activist Ridge protested the Sacco
and Venzetti trial. Includes a previously unpublished poem by Boyle.
PS153 2012-030015 978-0-8166-7444-2
Inhuman citizenship; traumatic enjoyment and Asian
American literature.
Chang, Juliana.
U. of Minnesota Press, ©2012 241 p. $25.00 (pa)
Chang (English, Santa Clara University) examines four novels by Asian
American writers, all of which feature a protagonist who is a second-gen-
eration Asian American: Bone, by Fae Myenne Ng; American Son, by
Brian Roley; Native Speaker, by Chang-rae Lee; and The Interpreter, by
Suki Kim. The novels were chosen because they unsettle national fan-
tasies of American exceptionalism and neoliberalism. In her analysis,
Chang employs Lacanian psychoanalysis, especially Lacan’s concept of
‘jouissance,’ meaning a traumatic yet also ecstatic experience that
happens when we sacrifice the self in order to enter into the Symbolic.
PS153 2012-020997 978-0-8166-7598-2
The red land to the south; American Indian writers and
indigenous Mexico.
Cox, James H. (Indigenous Americas)
U. of Minnesota Press, ©2012 275 p. $25.00 (pa)
This study of Native American literature of 1920-1960 examines the anti-
colonial spirit of Native American writing, especially novels, histories,
and plays about Mexico and indigenous Mexican peoples and cultures.
Cox (Native America and indigenous studies, the University of Texas-
Austin) focuses on three writers: Todd Downing, Lynn Riggs, and D’Arcy
McNickle. He also looks at work by Gerald Vizenor and Leslie Marmon
Silko.
PS159 2012-018741 978-0-8142-1194-6
German writing, American reading; women and the
import of fiction, 1866-1917.
Tatlock, Lynne.
Ohio State U. Pr., ©2012 347 p. $57.95
Popular literature after the Civil War included a large number of books
of fiction written in German by German women and translated into
English by American women. Tatlock (humanities, comparative liter-
ature, Germanic languages and literatures, Washington U.) examines this
phenomenon, looking at how these writings influenced aspects of
American culture around this time of national focus, and how these
stories offered wholesome fantasies of domestic bliss to American women
who craved them. The first section discusses German women writers, the
second details how the German books functioned as American books,
and the third focuses on three American translators and discusses the
world of translating and publishing at that time.
–202–
PS169 2012-025974 978-1-936320-52-3
From The way to wealth to The gospel of wealth; the
transformation in the concept of success in American
literature from Benjamin Franklin to Theodore Dreiser.
Köseman, Zennure.
Academica Press, LLC, ©2013 191 p. $69.95
Analyzing representative American autobiography, essays, and fiction
from the late colonial period to the early 20th century, Köseman (English,
Inonu U., Turkey) charts a transformation in the meaning of success and
the means of achieving it. He describes the transformation of self-making
from a moral to a materials conception, and uses that shift to argue that
idealism waned after the Civil War, when winning and losing began to
be measured in material terms with the advent of industrialization. The
transformation is vague in the country’s socio-political life, he says, but
glaringly obvious in literature.
PS217 2012-027703 978-0-8166-7707-8
Antebellum at sea; maritime fantasies in nineteenth-
century America.
Berger, Jason.
U. of Minnesota Press, ©2012 338 p. $25.00 (pa)
Berger (English, University of South Dakota) employs a Lacanian psy-
choanalytic perspective (as interpreted by Slavoj Zizek) in this analysis of
maritime narratives by Herman Melville and James Fenimore Cooper. He
examines how the narratives reflect developments in politics, economy,
labor, the law, and changes in gender relations during the antebellum
era. Part 1 examines the common sailor as a flashpoint for ideological
fantasies of the age, while part 2 uses Melville’s novels and a wide range
of primary texts to reconsider scenes of cross-cultural encounters from a
Lacanian perspective. Part 3 looks at how maritime narratives illuminate
legal fantasies in the era’s volatile political landscape.
PS228 2012-006953 978-1-60938-113-4
American literature and culture in an age of Cold War; a
critical reassessment.
Title main entry. Ed. by Steven Belletto and Daniel Grausam.
Univ. of Iowa Press, ©2012 240 p. $49.95 (pa)
Belletto (English/American studies, Lafayette College) and Grausam (On
Endings: American Postmodern Fiction and the Cold War) contend that the
timing is right for cultural critics’ re-reading of Cold War cultural
themes such as political repression, post-modernism and post-colo-
nialism. The theme of making order out of chaos is read in novels by
John Updike, Joan Didion, and Norman Mailer. Ecological consciousness
is examined in Frank Herbert’s Dune fantasy trilogy. The final essay in
the anthology, “The Empire Strikes Out: Star Wars (IV, V, and VI) and the
Advent of Reaganism,” sees parallels between Reagan’s Western and Star
Wars’ galactic mentality.
PS352 2012-014678 978-0-7864-7097-6
The contemporary American dramatic trilogy; a critical
study.
Andreach, Robert J.
McFarland & Co., ©2012 193 p. $55.00 (pa)
The trilogy, defined as three plays which are all thematically connected
and through which there is a development, is an ancient, but still
popular, form. Andreach offers close readings of several recent American
dramatic trilogies by ethnically diverse writers. He divides the trilogies
according to five thematic qualities: opposing families, classical reimag-
inings, medieval reimaginings, new forms, and new selves. This book
will be of interest to students of drama or screenwriting.
PS352 2012-033848 978-0-7864-6512-5
Dramatic revisions of myths, fairy tales and legends;
essays on recent plays.
Title main entry. Ed. by Verna A. Foster.
McFarland & Co., ©2012 250 p. $40.00 (pa)
A few classicists, but mostly scholars of English literature and theater
expand the usual focus on Greek myth to include dramatic retellings of
myths and legends from many cultures and times. Among the topics are
A. R. Gurney and Charles Mee rewrite Greek drama, unmaking myth in
Ellen McLaughlin’s Helen and Saviana Stanescru and Richard
Schechneer’s YokastaS, West African myth in African-American theater,
damaged myth in Caryl Churchill’s The Skriker, Sharon Pollock’s revision
of legend and feminine myth in Blood Relations, and the cinematic myth
of the wild west revised in Beth Henley’s Abundance.
–203–
PS374 2012-034270 978-0-7864-3863-1
The American novel of war; a critical analysis and
classification system.
Sanborn, Wallis R. III.
McFarland & Co., ©2012 232 p. $45.00 (pa)
Sanborn (Angelo State University) presents an original set of standards
by which the modern and postmodern American war novel can be clas-
sified and critically analyzed using a set of chronological, philosophical,
structural, and stylistic defining characteristics. The book begins with a
chapter on the defining characteristics of the American war novel; sub-
sequent chapters treat major themes such as the violence of war, the
rhetoric of war, the death of peers, the death of noncombatants, rela-
tionships between officers and enlisted men, the absurdity of war, and
prostitution.
PS374 2012-038704 978-0-7864-6685-6
The sex is out of this world; essays on the carnal side of
science fiction.
Title main entry. Ed. by Sherry Ginn and Michael G. Cornelius.
(Critical explorations in science fiction and fantasy; 36)
McFarland & Co., ©2012 249 p. $40.00 (pa)
This collection of over a dozen essays interrogates how sex and sexuality
are reflected in science fiction as changing categories and persistent
motifs. Organization is in two parts, the first looking at how portrayals
of aliens reflect and redact our own attitudes, desires and resistances to
sex. Here the alien-human congress is explored in essays on Octavia
Butler’s Xenogenesis trilogy, miscegenation in science fiction TV and
film, colonialism in Star Trek, and preoedipal development in Primo
Levi’s science fiction. The second part turns to technological intervention
in sex. Essays in this section explore patriarchy and technologies of repro-
duction, Dr. Moreau’s women, primate lust in American science fiction,
evolutionary psychology, and technology as a nexus for homoerotic
desire. The contributors are mostly humanities professors, but include a
television producer and independent science and science-fiction historian.
PS3503 2012-018234 978-0-7864-6693-1
Elizabeth Bishop in Brazil and after; a poetic career
transformed.
Monteiro, George.
McFarland & Co., ©2012 214 p. $55.00 (pa)
Elizabeth Bishop (1911-1979) was one of America’s notable poets and
short story writers and served as Poet Laureate. While she lived in France
for a time and in several locations in the U.S., her time in Brazil influ-
enced her work then and after her return. She was keenly interested in
Latin American literature and culture and knew at least some of the
region’s notable writers. As Monteiro (emeritus, English, Portuguese, and
Brazilian studies, Brown U.) notes, Bishops’ career and work can be
divided into two categories: before Brazil and during and after. He pro-
vides an analysis of how her stay in Brazil directly and permanently
influenced her work on several levels.
PS3509 2012-015909 978-1-84519-554-0
Eliot’s objective correlative; tradition or individual talent;
contributions to the history of a topos.
Olsen, Flemming.
Sussex Academic Press, ©2012 72 p. $24.95 (pa)
In this book-length essay, Olsen (English, U. of Copenhagen, Denmark)
surveys the influences, both past and present, on T.S. Eliot’s notion of the
objective correlative. He argues that Eliot was not unique among his con-
temporaries for being so concerned with “language and the use and
function of the individual word,” but that his “originality resides in the
fact that he states categorically that a poet has to seek the support of
something outside him to find a suitable formula for his emotions.” Not
a comprehensive or systematic survey, he looks at classical, early modern
and modern influences from Aristotle to John Locke to Charles
Baudelaire. Before considering the objective correlative directly, he also
considers positivism as a contemporary influence. His final chapter
details features and stakes of Eliot’s theory, including a justification for
Eliot’s “instinctive dislike” for Hamlet. Distributed in the US by ISBS.
PS3511 2012-016943 978-0-8166-7820-4
Fool for love; F. Scott Fitzgerald. (reprint, 1983)
Donaldson, Scott. (Fesler/Lampert Minnesota Heritage book series)
U. of Minnesota Press, ©2012 262 p. $19.95 (pa)
Relying on research into materials, some of which were previously
ignored or unknown, such as memoirs, letters, notes, interviews, and
private journals, Donaldson’s thoughtful biography offers insight into
Fitzgerald’s relationships, particularly romantic, and how the life he lived
may have found its way into his fiction. Donaldson also explores
Fitzgerald’s focus on class and determination to please others and how
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
these often informed his amorous encounters and friendships. The book
reveals a side of Fitzgerald heretofore only hinted at in previous biogra-
phies. It is appropriate for a wide audience and a handful of b&w pic-
tures are included.
PS3515 2011-052856 978-1-61117-074-0
Understanding James Leo Herlihy.
Ward, Robert. (Understanding contemporary American literature)
U. of South Carolina Press, ©2012 108 p. $39.95
Ward (English, Brown U. and Emerson College) examines the life and
works of Herlihy, an important but neglected gay American fiction
writer, actor, and playwright. Beginning with Herlihy’s time at Black
Mountain College and following his career chronologically until his
suicide in 1993, Ward devotes a chapter to each of Herlihy’s major works
including Blue Denim, All Fall Down, Midnight Cowboy, and The Season of
the Witch, as well as his short story collections. Ward traces Herlihy’s
growth and development as a writer and as a person in the context of
his time and culture.
PS3515 2012-009952 978-0-8014-7826-0
The worlds of Langston Hughes; modernism and
translation in the Americas.
Kutzinski, Vera M.
Cornell U. Press, ©2012 358 p. $26.95 (pa)
In this study of the African American poet Langston Hughes, Kutzinski
(English, Vanderbilt University) examines translations of his autobiogra-
phies and poetry, as well as his own translations, while tracing his
writings and his travels in Europe and North and South America. There
is special focus on how Hispanic American writers engaged with
Hughes’s texts, with case studies mainly from Cuba and Argentina, plus
additional detours to Mexico, Uruguay, Chile, Colombia, and Spain. The
book includes a chronology of travels, translations, and other key publi-
cations from 1902 to 2004. It is illustrated with b&w book jackets and
photos from news articles of the period.
PS3537 978-0-7864-6799-0
The life and truth of George R. Stewart; a literary
biography of the author of Earth Abides
Scott, Donald M.
McFarland & Co., ©2012 236 p. $55.00 (pa)
Scott, a National Park ranger-naturalist who has taught in high schools,
adult schools, and community college, offers a biography of ecological
novelist and historian George Stewart (1895-1980) that focuses on his lit-
erary work. He traces Stewart’s childhood, college education, marriage,
teaching career at the U. of California at Berkeley, retirement, and legacy,
and his ecological novels, road-study books, histories, name histories, and
other works (and his creation of these new genres) such as Ordeal by
Hunger, Storm, Names on the Land, the post-apocalyptic novel Earth
Abides, Fire, Sheep Rock, and The Years of the City.
PS3552 2012-002042 978-0-393-34260-4
Literary outlaw; the life and times of William S.
Burroughs.
Morgan, Ted.
W.W. Norton, ©2012 714 p. $24.95 (pa)
Pulitzer-Prize wining author Morgan originally met Beat poet William
Burroughs in London in the 1970s; Burroughs himself chose Morgan to
write this biography. When it was first published in 1988, the biography
concluded with Burroughs’s move to Kansas and his participation in a
methadone program. This edition contains a new chapter on Burroughs’s
death and legacy. Of special interest are chapters devoted to the contro-
versy surrounding Naked Lunch and on Burroughs’s relationship with his
son. Morgan uses writing techniques recalling Burroughs’s style, such as
stream of consciousness inner monologues, based on about 100 hours of
interviews Morgan conducted with Burroughs over the course of four
years. Morgan also draws on extensive interviews with friends and col-
leagues of Burroughs, including Gregory Corso and Allen Ginsberg, and
access to Ginsberg’s archives. The book includes many b&w historical
photos taken throughout Burroughs’s life, plus a b&w photo portrait
montage on front cover.
PS3555 2012-010035 978-1-60419-068-7
Essays in biography.
Epstein, Joseph.
Axios Press, ©2012 603 p. $24.00
Epstein, popular essayist and former educator, offers a series of 40 pieces,
each on a famous and/or otherwise notable individual. The carefully
chosen subjects include historian, philosopher, and soldier Xenophon of
ancient Greece to George Washington and literary icon Susan Sontag. The
whole is an interesting and varied collection, including politicians and
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
leaders, authors and poets of all stripes, comedians, athletes, scientists,
and more. The author offers a new way of looking at some familiar
figures.
PS3560 2012-008084 978-1-61117-075-7
Understanding Diane Johnson.
Durham, Carolyn A. (Understanding contemporary American literature)
U. of South Carolina Press, ©2012 148 p. $39.95
Diane Johnson is the author of eleven novels and several works of non-
fiction. Known for having strong female protagonists and travel-related
themes, she has been described as a comic novelist, a novelist of
manners, and a travel novelist. Durham (French, comparative literature,
women’s studies, College of Wooster) fits Johnson’s novels and nonfiction
into the context of the female writer coming of age in the 1950s. She
divides Johnson’s work into southern California novels, northern
California novels, the Franco-American trilogy, travel novels, and critical
works.
PS3561 978-1-61117-066-5
Understanding Etheridge Knight.
Collins, Michael S. (Understanding contemporary American literature)
U. of South Carolina Press, ©2012 160 p. $39.95
Etheridge Knight was a Korean war veteran who struggled with a
lifelong opiate addiction and who began his writing career while serving
prison time for a drug-related crime. With the publication of his debut
Poems from Prison, he became a major figure in the Black Arts
Movement, connecting with many other important poets of the day.
Collins (English, Texas A&M U.) examines Knight’s writing in relation
to its personal, social, and political context.
PS3561 978-94-90947-72-9
Visual language; perspectives for both makers and users.
van den Broek, Jos et al.
Eleven International Publishing, ©2012 320 p. $63.00 (pa)
This interdisciplinary visual text is intended for students and profes-
sionals in publishing, journalism, graphic design, advertising, photog-
raphy, web design, and other fields involving the publication of images.
The text is not a technical manual for designers or photographers, nor is
it a book on software or printing processes, nor a theoretical treatise.
Instead, the text covers both the theory and practice of how to interpret
and use images in various media. Part 1 deals with visual literacy and
the function of visual language, and part 2 examines theories of visual
images, including Gestalt, semiotics, and visual rhetoric. Part 3 uses these
theories to examine basics of visual language: composition, typography,
perspective, and color. Part 4 presents real-life cases and applications in
areas such as photography, charts and tables, infographics, web pages,
and magazine pages. A final chapter deals with copyrights and an
appendix reviews photo file formats. Learning features include dis-
cussion questions and assignments, plus color photos and illustrations on
every page. Van der Broek teaches at Leiden University. The book is dis-
tributed in North America by ISBS.
PS3566 2012-031428 978-1-4331-2027-5
Thomas Pynchon and the postmodern mythology of the
underworld.
Smith, Evans Lansing. (Modern American literature; new approaches;
v.62)
Peter Lang Publishing Inc, ©2012 345 p. $92.95
Smith (mythological studies, Pacifica Graduate Institute) presents five
mini-studies of stories by Thomas Pynchon that tease out what Smith
terms “necrotypes,” archetypes catalyzed by a trip or connection to the
underworld (nekyia). The five include: V, The Crying of Lot 49, Gravity’s
Rainbow, Mason & Dixon, and Against the Day. These readings stay close
to the text, attending to what T.S. Eliot described as the “mythical
method.” He shows that the nekyia is a central feature of these novels
that draw on Pynchon’s immense abilities as a writer: “the diction and
iconography of the nekyia is the single most important myth in the
novels, conferring that shape and significance upon their potential
anarchy and futility that Eliot saw as the consequence of the mythical
method.” To this end, Smith argues that the modernist and postmod-
ernist underworlds can be conceived as four chambers: crypt, inferno,
temenos, and cornucopia. The underworld is where we encounter the
voices of the dead and their accumulated wisdom, a place of spiritual
and historical suffering, and where seed forms of the imagination are
stored. This book, comprised only of close readings, does not present a
conclusion.
–204–
GERMANIC LITERATURES
PT405 2012-005905 978-3-11-025867-7
“Escape to Life”; German intellectuals in New York; a
compendium on exile after 1933.
Title main entry. Ed. by Eckart Goebel and Sigrid Weigel.
De Gruyter, ©2012 553 p. $182.00
This book is based on a symposium held in New York, co-sponsored by
New York University, the Zentrum für Literatur- and Kulturforschung
Berlin), and the German Center for Research and Innovation (New York).
Thirty contributions include symposium presentations as well as a
number of added articles and an introductory essay by the editors.
“Escape to Life” in the title is a reference to the book published in Boston
in 1939 (by Klaus and Erika Mann). Seven decades later the topic of exile
is the same, but the perspectives presented here are quite different.
Contributors to this volume address the impact of exile over time—on the
lives and intellectual work of the exiles, including Walter Benjamin,
Hannah Arendt, Ernst Bloch, Bertolt Brecht, and others.
PT1982 2012-013772 978-1-57113-534-6
Metamimesis; imitation in Goethe’s Wilhelm Meisters
Lehrjahre and early German romanticism.
Pirholt, Mattias. (Studies in German literature, linguistics, and culture)
Camden House, ©2012 220 p. $85.00
No work of the period defined the double theme of self-understanding
and interaction with society as Goethe’s paradigmatic novel Wilhelm
Meisters Lehrjahre, says Pirholt (literature, Uppsala U., Sweden), and
though it is not itself a romantic work, it constitutes an indisputable
point of departure for any discussion of the romantic novel. He contrasts
Goethe’s treatment of self-reflection with that of Friedrich Schlegel in
Lucinda, Novalis in Heinrich von Ofterdingen, and Clemens Brentano in
Godwi. The quotations are in German. Camden House is an imprint of
Boydell & Brewer.
PT2625 978-3-643-90201-6
Was the real Thomas Mann an antisemite?; v.2; the image
of the Jew in Thomas Mann’s stories.
Raviv, Alexander. (German Studies; v.40)
LIT Verlag, ©2012 124 p. $39.95
Following up his book on the image of the Jew in German writer Mann’s
(1875-1955) novels, German scholar of literature Raviv serves his short
stories in like manner. He analyzes “The Will for Happiness” (1896),
“Gladius Dei” (1902), “Tristan” (1903), and “The Blood of the Walsungs”
(1905). They are from early in Mann’s career, he points out, and followed
each other at short intervals within a single decade. He has not indexed
the study. Distributed in the US by ISBS.
PT3822 2001-022780 978-1-57241-161-6
Modern Austrian prose; interpretations and insights; v.2
Title main entry. Ed. by Paul F. Dvorak. (Studies in Austrian literature,
culture, and thought)
Ariadne Press, ©2012 357 p. $39.00 (pa)
The 15 essays in this collection complement the 2001 first volume by
highlighting a characteristic work by authors who were not represented
there. US scholars of Austrian literature interpret significant works of
modern Austrian prose within the broader field of German-language lit-
erature. The essays and quotations are in English with German refer-
ences. Well established writers such as Norbert Gstein, Julian Schutting,
and Elisabeth Reichart are joined by a cohort of more recent authors.
There is no index.
PT9811 2012-019217 978-0-8166-7974-4
Selected plays; v.2. (reprint, 1986)
Strindberg, August. Trans. by Evert Sprinchorn.
U. of Minnesota Press, ©2012 463 p. $25.00 (pa)
This book is the second volume of a new edition of selected plays of
August Strindberg. The translator is emeritus professor Evert Sprinchorn
(drama, Vassar College). This volume covers later plays written after
Strindberg’s years of madness, and marking his movement from natu-
ralism to symbolic and psychological theatre: To Damascus I, Crimes and
Crimes, The Dance of Death I, A Dream Play, The Ghost Sonata, and The
Pelican. The last two works in the volume are examples of Strindberg’s
chamber plays, while A Dream Play explores the transition between nat-
uralism and symbolism, and is often considered Strindberg’s best play
and the one most relevant to contemporary theatre. The book begins with
a critical introduction on Strindberg’s theatre and the plays in this
volume by Charlotte Gavel Adams (Scandinavian studies, U. of
Washington) and Anna Westerstahl Stenport (Scandinavian studies and
theatre, U. of Illinois at Champaign-Urbana). Within the volume, each
–205–
play has a short introduction describing its genesis. Of interest to readers
and performers of Scandinavian theatre or psychological drama, and
those interested in the transition from 19th to 20th century concerns in
the Euro-American stage play tradition.
PT9811 2012-019217 978-0-8166-7973-7
Selected plays; v.1. Trans. by Evert Sprinchorn. (reprint,
1986)
Strindberg, August.
U. of Minnesota Press, ©2012 397 p. $25.00 (pa)
This book is the first volume of a new edition of selected plays of August
Strindberg. The translator is emeritus professor Evert Sprinchorn (drama,
Vassar College). This volume selects plays from Strindberg’s early career;
most are naturalistic pieces dealing with status and power, often in
struggles between men and women. Included here are: Master Olof, The
Father, and Creditors. Also included is perhaps Strindberg’s most famous
naturalistic play, Miss Julie, as well as a very short one-act piece suitable
for classes and non-traditional productions called The Stronger, and
Playing with Fire, that rarest of rarities, an August Strindberg comedy.
The book begins with a critical introduction on Strindberg’s theatre and
the plays in this volume, by Charlotte Gavel Adams (Scandinavian
studies, U. of Washington) and Anna Westerstahl Stenport (Scandinavian
studies and theatre, U. of Illinois at Champaign-Urbana). Within the
volume, each play has a short introduction describing its genesis. Of
interest to readers and performers of Scandinavian theatre or naturalistic
drama, and those curious to discover what a Strindberg comedy might
be.
SCIENCE (GENERAL)
Q124 978-94-6091-940-4
The images of science through cultural lenses; a Chinese
study on the nature of science.
Ma, Hongming.
Sense Publishers, ©2012 113 p. $49.00 (pa)
Ma (education, Monash U.) examines how traditional underpinnings of
Chinese culture inform Chinese understandings of otherwise Western
science. The focus of her empirical study is secondary-school science
teachers. She probes their conceptions of nature, the relationship between
scientific and traditional ways of knowing, and the relationship between
nature and humans. The first few chapters are more historical and philo-
sophical. Here Ma develops her interest in the convergence and diver-
gence between Chinese and Western understandings of nature and our
knowledge of it. She finds that “Eurocentric” views about science pre-
vailed among her subjects, but questions their understanding of the
nature of science because they showed weak comprehension of inter-
pretive issues in science in multicultural contexts.
Q127 978-3-8329-7242-4
Towards a European research area; proceedings.
Research Conference (2005: German Research Institute for Public
Administration Speyer). Ed. by Dorothea Jansen. (Interdisziplinäre
schriften zur Wissenschaftsforshung; v.13)
Nomos, ©2012 165 p. $54.00 (pa)
The conference sought to advance the understanding and analysis of
research and technology policies at the European level, its intertwining
with the national policy level, and the chances and challenges it poses to
the European research community. Social scientists look at the role of
Europe in basic research funding, from national research cultures to
internationalization, and on the road to the Seventh Framework
Programme. The proceedings are not indexed. Distributed in the US by
ISBS.
Q130 2012-015949 978-1-4666-2107-7
Gendered occupational differences in science, engineering,
and technology careers.
Prescott, Julie and Jan Bogg.
Information Science Reference, ©2013 315 p. $175.00
Prescott (U. of Central Lancashire) and Bogg (U. of Liverpool) present
hard data on the number of women working in science, technology, and
engineering within the U.K. and U.S., and identify the barriers to career
progression. The authors discuss the importance of self-esteem in career
choice, gendered expectations in the workplace, different theories for
understanding career development and occupational choice, work-life
balance, the perceived characteristics of leaders, and the lack of men-
toring and networking opportunities for women. Their approach high-
lights the interplay of internal and external factors that help perpetuate
gendered occupational segregation and how people experiencing the
same work conditions can react differently due to personal attributes.
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
Q141 2012-930269 978-0-500-25191-1
The scientists; an epic of discovery.
Title main entry. Ed. by Andrew Robinson.
Thames & Hudson, ©2012 304 p. $45.00
This reference for high school and up offers profiles of 40 giants of
science, from Copernicus to Albert Einstein, and from Gregor Mendel to
Crick and Watson. The 5-6 page profiles are divided into sections on the
universe, Earth, molecules and matter, inside the atom, life, and the body
and mind. Contributors are scientists, science historians, and science
writers. The book’s appealing design features b&w and color historical
and contemporary photos and illustrations on every page, plus photo
reproductions of the scientists’ own notes, drawings, diagrams, and
letters. Robinson has written other books on science for general readers.
Q147 2012-006906 978-0-87893-963-3
You’re hired! Now what?; a guide for new science faculty.
Noor, Mohamed A.F.
Sinauer Associates, ©2012 96 p. $11.95 (pa)
Noor (biology, Duke U.) offers a concise handbook for navigating the pro-
fessional demands of being an academic scientist. The guide is aimed at
newly hired science faculty and considers setting up an office from
which to do research as well as teaching-work, organizing a research
team and strategizing grants; supervising and motivating people; on-
going research-team communication considerations; organizing your
teaching materials and approach; managing time between the lab,
classroom and home; staying competitive and creating opportunities.
These are demands that arise from aspects of the academic setting that,
in his experience and that of his colleagues, years of research-training as
students doesn’t really provide. Conversational in style, the guide’s
appendices include lab rules, authorship policy, graduate student expec-
tations, grad-student meeting agendas, and a lab-projects list.
Q175 2012-008600 978-1-936113-60-6
Basic stereology for biologists and neuroscientists.
West, Mark J.
Cold Spring Harbor Lab. Press, ©2012 203 p. $69.00
Design-based unbiased stereological methods represent a paradigm shift
in thinking about how to derive meaningful quantitative data about
structural features in biological tissues, explains West (U. of Aarhus,
Denmark). He presents a number of the concepts and principles of the
new stereology to allow readers to design, supervise, and critically
evaluate studies. His emphasis is on applications to the structure of the
nervous system, but he also shows how the methods would be extended
to other tissues. His topics include estimating a volume, estimating
surface area, systematic versus random sampling, local estimators of
size, and counting and measuring ultra-structural features.
Q175 2012-015948 978-1-4666-2077-3
Complexity science, living systems, and reflexing
interfaces; new models and perspectives.
Title main entry. Ed. by Franco Orsucci and Nicoletta Sala.
Information Science Reference, ©2013 331 p. $195.00
Contributors in psychology, physics, art therapy, and other fields explore
complexity in the interface between living systems and information tech-
nology. Their topics include fractal geometry as a bridge between realms,
exploring structural and dynamic properties of microtubules by means
of artificial neural networks, the biotic logic of quantum processes and
quantum computation, recurrence indicators for estimating characteristic
size and frequency of spatial patterns, and a parametric generator for
architectural and urban three-dimensional objects.
Q175 978-1-4665-0986-3
Paradoxes in scientific inference.
Chang, Mark.
CRC Press, ©2013 273 p. $39.95 (pa)
Chang, the vice president of biometrics at AMAG Pharmaceuticals, offers
a comprehensive textbook that may also serve as a reference of paradoxes
encountered in scientific and mathematical reasoning. He opens up the
text with relatively simple or commonplace paradoxes, that include quips
of wisdom and explores the application of them. Later sections focus on
mathematics, statistics, principles of science, and artificial intelligence.
Each section is highly structured and walks through the cognitive mis-
steps that are possible with paradoxes. The reader isn’t merely kept from
confusion, but also introduced to the cognitive leaps encountering such
paradoxes can engender and that are the ground of scientific creativity.
At the end of each chapter is a review section and exercises. It is not a
mathematically advanced book, but Chang does use notation that he
keeps simple.
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
Q175 2011-031385 978-1-4411-2881-2
Philosophy of science; the key thinkers.
Title main entry. Ed. by James Robert Brown. (Key thinkers)
Continuum Publishing Group, ©2012 263 p. $100.00
Scholars of philosophy in Europe and North America explore some of the
thinkers and their ideas that have shaped the philosophy of science over
the past two centuries, pivoting on the question of why science has been
successful. Among the topics are conventionalism: Poincaré, Duhem,
Reichenbach; Carl G. Hempel: logical empiricist; historical approaches:
Kuhn, Lakatos, and Feyerabend; the sociology of science: Bloor, Collins,
Latour; and feminist critiques: Harding and Longino.
Q175 2012-017371 978-0-393-91903-5
Philosophy of science; the central issues, 2d ed.
Title main entry. Ed. by Martin Curd et al.
W.W. Norton, ©2013 1393 p. $50.00 (pa)
An academic anthology which explores the modern philosophical ques-
tions arising from scientific inquiry, this 2d edition is especially useful
for use in introductory courses. It includes commentaries to each chapter,
in addition to chapter-specific bibliographies, to aid study. The book
approaches a wide range of subjects of philosophic inquiry into the
natural sciences, including rationality, objectivity, specific theses and
approaches, models of explanation, laws of nature, empiricism, and a
variety of others. The book begins with a selection of essays exploring the
definition of science and pseudoscience and culminates with several
essays on realism. The majority of the essays have been previously pub-
lished in books and professional journals.
Q175 2011-046616 978-1-4411-8872-4
Scientific discourse and the rhetoric of globalization; the
impact of culture and language.
Pérez-Llantada, Carmen.
Continuum Publishing Group, ©2012 243 p. $140.00
In order to investigate inter-relations between science, language, culture,
and the processes of globalization, Pérez-Llantada (English linguistics, U.
of Zaragoza, Spain) examines such matters as how the experience of
living in a globalizing world is affecting contemporary scholarly life, the
scope of the changes produced by globalization in academic and research
settings, the extent to which knowledge-based economies determine
research activities and assess research output, and how individual
scholars and research practices are affected by global changes across cul-
tural contexts. Above all she asks what role the English language plays
in the complex contemporary landscape.
Q180 2012-021067 978-1-4398-9737-9
The A-Z of error-free research.
Good, Phillip I.
CRC Press, ©2013 249 p. $49.95 (pa)
Goode, a Canadian mathematician and statistics instructor, presents a
concise guide to research design and implementation. The text is
organized into 6 major sections: planning and experimental design, fun-
damentals of data collection and quality control, how to analyze your
data and how to choose statistical methods, building a model from your
data, reporting your results in journals and orally, and nonrandom
samples. Goode refers to R Code throughout the text and provides a
primer and code-reference in the back. The material could be used for
personal reference or as a secondary text in a science course.
Q180 2011-277602 978-0-307-39375-3
Bunch of amateurs; a search for the American character.
Hitt, Jack.
Crown Publishers, ©2012 280 p. $26.00
In this work for general readers, Hitt, an award-winning contributing
editor to the New York Times Magazine, Harper’s, and NPR’s This
American Life, demonstrates that the cult of the amateur is the soul of
America. He profiles amateur inventors, from Ben Franklin to kitchen
gene splicers, and predicts that the next surge of American inventions is
just around the corner, in part due to the pervasive influence of the
Internet, reality shows, and contests.
Q180 2012-360843 978-0-309-21748-4
Measuring the impacts of federal investments in research;
a workshop summary.
Committee on Measuring Economic and Other Returns on Federal
Research Investments et al. Ed. by Steve Olson and Stephen Merrill.
National Academies Press, ©2011 191 p. $54.00 (pa)
This report summarizes key points delivered during presentations at an
April 2011 workshop on federal research funding and the ensuing dis-
cussions among participants. The eight sessions explore metrics and
–206–
models for measuring the return on public funds and characterize the
resulting benefits to the U.S. economy, quality of life, biomedical inno-
vation, the labor market, and professional development. Two full papers
examine the limits of performance measures and review studies on the
contribution of clinical public research activities to private sector drug
development.
Q183 2012-019288 978-1-4666-2214-2
Cases on interdisciplinary research trends in science,
technology, engineering, and mathematics; studies on
urban classrooms.
Title main entry. Ed. by Reneta D. Lansiquot.
Information Science Reference, ©2013 384 p. $175.00
Contributors from a range of social and natural sciences explore practical
theories for interdisciplinary teaching in science, technology, engineering,
and mathematics (STEM) and modern education; and theories in practice
at the City University of New York’s College of Technology. Among the
topics are interdisciplinary learning from a student’s perspective, reengi-
neering in introductory computer education course for undergraduate
students, addressing Army energy use through curricular reform at West
Point, developing interdisciplinary problem-solving strategies through
games and computer simulations, and using case studies to support insti-
tutional change.
Q183 2012-027266 978-0-309-25411-3
Discipline-based education research; understanding and
improving learning in undergraduate science and
engineering.
National Research Council.
National Academies Press, ©2012 263 p. $49.00 (pa)
This work offers a synthesis of research from the National Research
Council’s Committee on the Status, Contributions, and Future Directions
of Discipline-based Education Research. Committee members are edu-
cators and researchers in the sciences as well as education and educa-
tional administration. They report on the status of discipline-based
education research in undergraduate teaching and learning in physics,
chemistry, engineering, biology, the geosciences, and astronomy, and ask
how this research actually influences undergraduate science instruction
in areas such as improving students’ conceptual understanding and their
problem solving abilities. The study makes recommendations for further
research in areas such as differences among student populations and lon-
gitudinal studies of the transition to college.
Q183 2012-025559 978-1-4665-1227-6
XML in scientific computing.
Pozrikidis, C. (Chapman and Hall/CRC numerical analysis and scien-
tific computing series)
CRC Press, ©2013 p. $69.95
Extensible markup language (XML) is it not a language at all, says
Pozrikidis (U. of Massachusetts), but a systematic way of encoding and
formatting data and statements contained in an electronic file according
to a chosen tagging system. Most books and online tutorials on XML
discuss it in the context of computer science and web and database pro-
gramming, but he introduces and describes it to scientists and engineers
who have some typesetting and programming experience. He also intro-
duces extensible stylesheet language (XSL), and XML implementation,
with applications in data processing and numerical computation. His
account includes how to save, import, and share XML data in code
written in programming languages used by scientists and engineers, such
as latex, html, fortan, C++, and perl.
Q325 2012-019290 978-1-4666-2202-9
Boundedness and self-organized semantics; theory and
applications.
Koleva, Maria K.
Information Science Reference, ©2013 217 p. $175.00
Koleva (catalysis, Bulgarian Academy of Science, Sofia) proposes a
general principle she called boundedness that governs both the organi-
zation and functioning of complex systems. It explains how and why
both intelligent and non-intelligent complex systems share the same type
of universality, discriminates unambiguously between intelligent and
non-intelligent complex systems, and provides a general frame for non-
extensive hierarchical structuring of the information. Her topics include
time series invariants under boundedness, hierarchical order, invariant
measure: power laws, sustainable evolution in an ever-changing envi-
ronment, and the Second Law as a ban on perpetuum mobile.
–207–
Q325 2012-003492 978-1-4666-1833-6
Machine learning algorithms for problem solving in
computational applications; intelligent techniques.
Title main entry. Ed. by Siddhivinayak Kulkarni.
Information Science Reference, ©2012 442 p. $195.00
The 21 papers in this collection develop new algorithms for helping
machines learn from previous data and describe the application of
machine learning algorithms to image retrieval, computer vision, hand-
written character recognition, text analysis, legal databases, and network
security. Medical applications are discussed in several papers dealing
with radiation therapy, DNA data sets, brain tumor images, and can-
cerous cervical cells. A contribution from Romania structures web meta-
search results according to the specific interests of users, and Brazilian
researchers add a beam search to a decision tree induction algorithm.
Q335 2012-017897 978-1-4398-4469-4
Contemporary artificial intelligence.
Neapolitan, Richard E. and Xia Jiang.
CRC Press, ©2013 501 p. $99.95
Neapolitan (computer science, Northeastern Illinois U.) and Jiang (bio-
medical informatics, U. of Pittsburgh) present a textbook for an under-
graduate course introducing artificial intelligence. It is designed to be
taken after or alongside a course in analyzing algorithms. They cover
logical intelligence, probabilistic intelligence, emergent intelligence,
learning, and language understanding. Among specific topics are propo-
sitional logic, uncertain knowledge representation, evolutionary compu-
tation, swarm intelligence, and learning probabilistic model structure.
Q335 978-0-7695-4802-9
Temporal representation and reasoning; proceedings.
Int’l Symposium on Temporal Representation and Reasoning (19th:
2012: Leicester, UK)
Computer Society Press, ©2012 149 p. $184.00 (pa)
Researchers working in different areas of computer science where tem-
poral aspects of information and computation play a central role
gathered to bridge the gap between theoretical and applied research and
exchange ideas across such disciplines as artificial intelligence, lin-
guistics, databases, and logic. The invited talks cover some landmarks in
undecidability and temporal logic from Alan Turing to the present, rea-
soning about plan revision in agent programs, and the current status and
research issues regarding spatio-temporal data warehouses and mobility.
Another 16 papers explore such areas as point-based temporal logics,
times automata and metric temporal logics, and databases and datas-
treams. Only the authors are indexed.
MATH, COMPUTERS
QA3 978-1-904868-98-9
Singularities of functions, wave fronts, caustics and
multidimensional integrals.
Arnold, V.I. et al. (Reviews in mathematics and mathematical physics;
v.14, pt.2.)
Cambridge Scientific Publishers, ©2012 91 p. $48.55 (pa)
Four mathematicians from the Moscow State University introduce
graduate students and researchers to some elements of catastrophe
theory, a category that encompasses the theory of typical singularities of
functions and mappings. The sections cover singularities of functions,
caustics, and wave fronts; integrals of the stationary phase method; and
the geometry of formulas. The treatise is not indexed. Distributed in the
US by Enfield.
QA7 2011-923181 978-0-88385-571-3
Expeditions in mathematics.
Title main entry. Ed. by Tatiana Shubin et al. (Spectrum series)
Mathematical Assn. of America, ©2011 312 p. $60.95
The Bay Area Mathematical Adventures are popular lectures held
monthly since 1998. In 2004, the Association published a collection, not
of transcripts of the talks, but of articles on the most popular themes at
the same elementary level. Here is a second volume, with 20 articles on
general topics, number theory, geometry and topology, combinatorics and
graph theory, and applied mathematics. Among specifics are the mathe-
matics of sudoku, soap bubble clusters, the art of counting, and zero
knowledge proofs.
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
QA11 2012-029983 978-1-57110-942-2
Math sense; the look, sound, and feel of effective
instruction.
Moynihan, Christine.
Stenhouse Publishers, ©2012 135 p. $19.00 (pa)
Moynihan, a former elementary school principal, math curriculum spe-
cialist, and elementary teacher who consults with schools and districts,
shows teachers and administrators how to identify the elements of
effective math instruction. She describes what the classroom space
should look like and things that can improve instruction, such as a
number line, a manipulatives collection, student work samples, daily
schedules, technology, and a designated math center or area; the compo-
nents of lessons and student engagement, including differentiation, iden-
tifying student misconceptions, providing written feedback, setting lesson
goals, active engagement and listening, and collaboration; elements that
should be heard during instruction, such as lesson summation, students
justifying reasoning, encouraging and modeling risk taking, and using
math vocabulary; and intangible aspects like creativity. Each includes dis-
cussion of the purpose, methods, and when to use it.
QA11 978-94-6091-968-8
Research in mathematics education in Australasia 2008-
2011.
Title main entry. Ed. by Bob Perry et al.
Sense Publishers, ©2012 377 p. $49.00 (pa)
The 15 chapters in this quadrennial collection review recent Australian
research on teaching mathematics to indigenous students, exceptional stu-
dents, elementary school children, and college students. The role of
digital technology in the classroom is updated, and assessment receives
its own chapter for the first time. The closing chapters explore teacher
recruitment, teacher education practices, professional knowledge, and
future directions for the field. No index is provided.
QA11 2012-022985 978-1-59363-994-5
Using the common core state standards for mathematics
with gifted and advanced learners.
Title main entry. Ed. by Susan K. Johnsen and Linda J. Sheffield.
Prufrock Press Inc., ©2013 115 p. $19.95 (pa)
Johnsen (educational psychology, Baylor U.) and Sheffield (mathematics
education, Northern Kentucky U.), along with a group of education
scholars from the US, supply teachers and administrators with examples
and strategies for implementing the Common Core State Standards for
Mathematics with gifted and advanced leaders in grades K-12 in different
settings, from cluster-grouped classrooms to pull-out programs to special
classes and schools, and integrate them with gifted education curricula,
instructional practices, and program models. They give examples of the
relevant standards, which are matched to activities for typical learners
and differentiated for advanced learners. They also present assessment
examples, including rubrics, and related material on twenty-first century
skills. They describe the research support for the book, how to link math
and English language arts standards, implications for professional
learning, collaboration with general and special education, and resources
to assist with implementation. There is no index.
QA13 2012-032775 978-1-936764-10-5
Common core mathematics in a PLC at work; grades 6-8.
Briars, Diane J., Harold Asturias, David Foster and Mardi A. Gale.
(Common core mathematics in a PLC at work)
Solution Tree Press, ©2013 227 p. $29.95 (pa)
Briars, a math education consultant and former math director and sec-
ondary math teacher, et al. focus on five key areas needed to prepare
teachers for the implementation of the Common Core State Standards
(CCSS) for mathematics, which will lead to the improvement of teaching
and learning for all students. They detail collaboration within a
Professional Learning Community at Work (PLC), instruction that incor-
porates CCSS Standards for Mathematical Practice, content domains and
standard clusters, formative assessment and the formative use of sum-
mative assessments, and response to intervention. Co-published with the
National Council of Teachers of Mathematics.
QA13 2012909200 978-1-58381-796-4
Connecting people to science; a national conference on
science education and public outreach; proceedings.
Connecting people to science (2011: Baltimore, Maryland) Ed by Joseph
B. Jensen et al. (Astronomical Society of the Pacific conference series;
v.457)
Astronomical Soc./Pacific, ©2012 377 p. $77.00
Science education and public outreach specialists, scientists, formal and
informal educators, science communicators, and others from the US and
abroad share perspectives and seek collaboration regarding current
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
issues around science education. The proceedings contain six plenary lec-
tures, 17 reports from workshops and special sessions, 12 oral presenta-
tions, and 41 poster papers. Among the topics are looking homeward
toward Earth, using the big ideas in cosmology to teach college students,
the Galileo teacher training program global efforts, lifelines for high
school climate change education, engaging in online group discussions
using Facebook to enhance social presence, and whether democratic
space tourism could contribute to Earth stewardship. There is no subject
index.
QA13 2012-034726 978-0-8218-6926-0
The mathematical education of teachers II.
Title main entry. (Issues in mathematics education; v.17)
American Mathematical Society, ©2012 86 p. $33.00 (pa)
The report—updated from a 2001 first version—makes recommendations
for the mathematics and statistics that teachers of mathematics at levels
from pre-kindergarten through high school should know, and how they
should come to know that mathematics. It urges greater involvement of
mathematicians and statisticians in teacher education, so that the
nation’s mathematics teachers have the knowledge, skills, and disposi-
tions needed to provide students with a mathematics education that
ensures high school graduates are ready for college or career as envi-
sioned by the Common Core State Standards. It is not indexed.
QA20 2012-021746 978-0-325-04434-7
Minds on mathematics; using math workshop to develop
deep understanding in grades 4-8.
Hoffer, Wendy Ward.
Heinemann, ©2012 185 p. $27.50 (pa)
Hoffer, a staff developer who works with teachers, schools, and districts
locally and nationally, explains how teachers can serve as coaches, engage
students as a community of learners, and help everyone learn math
together through “minds-on math workshops,” which require students to
draw on their intellectual resources as critical thinkers and problem
solvers, stretch and think in new ways, communicate ideas to others, and
attain a deeper understanding of math. She contends that all learners
have the ability to succeed in math with the right support, and describes
how teachers can organize their classroom instruction, the intellectual
tools math learners need, the tasks that promote understanding, how to
build communities of learners, how to use classroom discourse to
promote thinking, and each part of the workshop: the opening, mini-
lessons, work time, conferring, and sharing and reflection. There is no
index.
QA27 978-0-12-397913-1
Mathematical achievements of pre-modern Indian
mathematicians.
Puttaswamy, T.K. (Elsevier Insights)
Elsevier, ©2012 743 p. $150.00
Puttaswamy (emeritus, mathematical sciences, Ball State U., Indiana) was
asked to contribute a chapter on ancient Indians for a history of non-
Western mathematics, and became so enthralled that he also wrote an
entire book on algebra, geometry, and Hindu trigonometry from the
Vedic Period (800 BC) to the 17th century of the Christian era. His
arrangement is chronological, and the focus is entirely on the mathe-
matics, with no discussion of the mathematicians or the context. The
topics include the Sulvasutras, mathematics of Jains, Brahmagupta,
Bhaskara II, Kerala astronomers, and commentators in the 16th and 17th
centuries on Bhaskara II. He has not indexed his work.
QA76 2009-940546 978-1-4390-8035-1
Connecting with computer science, 2d ed.
Anderson, Greg et al.
Course Technology PTR, ©2011 944 p. $144.95 (pa)
This visually appealing text for an introductory course in computer
science speaks to both nonmajors and majors in a conversational writing
style and offers high-interest features such as humorous vignettes and
chapter introductions explaining why the chapter material is important.
The text’s two-color layout contains color key terms, tables, charts, and
margin notes, plus b&w photos and screenshots. Other learning features
include summaries, key terms, review and critical thinking questions,
and Internet research exercises. The book’s 15 modular chapters are con-
venient for a 15-week semester, but can also be used in any order for
other schedules. This second edition contains two new chapters on user
interface design and debugging, along with a new emphasis on Linux.
The previous edition’s single chapter on programming is now divided
into two chapters with new coverage of Java and C++. A companion web
site now holds the first edition’s chapters on emerging technologies and
–208–
software tools. The web site also contains tutorials and labs. Instructor
materials and distance learning content are also available. Anderson
teaches computer science at Weber State University.
QA76 978-1-4493-1179-7
The ethics of big data.
Davis, Kord and Doug Patterson.
O’Reilly Media, Inc., ©2012 64 p. $19.99 (pa)
This text explores questions about ethical conduct raised by large per-
sonal and otherwise data-sets. It is aimed at those in business and takes
markets as natural conditions for ethical conduct. He argues that big
data is ethically neutral, asks what do values have to do with anything,
surveys current practices in data-ownership and management, and
presents an alignment methodology framework for connecting values
with actions. There is no index.
QA76.2 2012-930596 978-1-133-52616-2
Computer concepts, 9th ed. brief.
Parsons, June Jamrich and Dan Oja. (Illustrated series)
Course Technology PTR, ©2013 152 p. $46.95 (pa)
In this update of New Perspectives on Computer Concepts, 8th ed
(Cambridge, MA: Course Technology, 2005), the authors cover topics in
question-and-answer format including types of computers, tips on buying
hardware and software, managing files, and the digital lifestyle’s effects
on health. The guide includes exercises, color illustrations, discussion
questions, a glossary, and access to online learning tools and technology
updates.
QA76.5 2012-019278 978-1-4666-2190-9
Integrated information and computing systems for
natural, spatial, and social sciences.
Title main entry. Ed. by Claus-Peter Rückemann.
Information Science Reference, ©2013 519 p. $195.00
Contributors from communication and information sciences, but also
from natural, geospatial, and social sciences examine how information
and computing resources are being used now in those sciences and how
the future might be changed by new requirements or new technology.
The overall themes are collaboration, frameworks, and legal aspects; high
end computing, storage, and services; communication, computation, and
advanced scientific computing; and big data exploration, visualization,
education, and social media. Among the topics are software design for
passing Sarbanes-Oxley in cloud computing, the high-end monitoring and
control of computer systems, password recovery research and its future
direction, thermo-chemical convection in planetary mantles advection
methods and magma ocean overturn simulations, and integrating a visu-
alization solution with a three-dimensional simulation model for tissue
growth.
QA76.5 2012-028834 978-1-4398-9299-2
The Internet of things in the cloud; a middleware
perspective.
Zhou, Honbo.
CRC Press, ©2013 365 p. $99.95
A pioneer in the Internet of Things and machine-to-machine computing,
Zhou presents a panoramic view of the Internet-of-Things (IoT) land-
scape, focusing on the overall technological architecture and design of a
tentatively unified system underpinned by different cloud computing
paradigms from a middleware perspective. His topics include the third
information and communication technology wave, the DNA of IoT, pro-
tocol standardization, cloud computing, and the Cloud of Things. Lay
readers with an interest and some knowledge about computers should be
able to follow his account, as well as professionals in computers,
software, electronics, or networks.
QA76.575 2012-019289 978-1-4666-2217-3
Multimedia information hiding technologies and
methodologies for controlling data.
Title main entry. Ed. by Kazuhiro Kondo.
Information Science Reference, ©2013 473 p. $190.00
The original purpose of hiding data in electronic media was to identify
authors, distributors, and other legitimate parties as part of combating
piracy. Recently, however, meta data is also being hidden in media to
provide additional functions to the signal. Information and computer sci-
entists provide theoretical frameworks, recent empirical research results,
and new applications for the benefit of new or experienced researchers
and for media content manufacturers who would like to apply the tech-
nology. They cover information hiding for audio and speech, for images
and video, for text and binary data, and for multimedia. The topics
include interpolation for audio and speech signals, enhancing speech
–209–
quality of telephone communications by steganography, new proposals
for hiding data in paper media, self-embedding watermarking with
content restoration capabilities, and a data-embedding pen.
QA76.585 2012-015478 978-1-4665-0782-1
Cloud computing; data-intensive computing and
scheduling.
Magoulés, Frédéric et al. (Chapman & Hall/CRC numerical analysis and
scientific computing series)
CRC Press, ©2013 205 p. $79.95
Magoulés (École Centrale Paris), Jie Pan, and Fei Teng (Southwest
Jiaotong U., China) look at the two aspects of cloud computing, with a
particular focus on new developments in classical techniques and recent
methods, and innovative algorithms that have appeared in the field.
After an overview of cloud computing, they consider such topics as
resource scheduling, multi-dimensional data analysis in a cloud data-
center, data intensive applications with MapReduce, multi-dimensional
data analysis optimization, and real-time scheduling with MapReduce.
QA76.585 2012-019839 978-1-4666-2187-9
Cloud computing service and deployment models; layers
and management.
Title main entry. Ed. by Alberto M. Bento and Anil K. Aggarwal.
Business Science Reference, ©2013 368 p. $185.00
Researchers and practitioners in business and information science
present relevant theoretical frameworks and practical applications in
cloud computing for fellow professionals who want to improve their
understanding of cloud computing. They also address some of the man-
agement, security, and processing issues related to it. The sections cover
cloud computing services, cloud services development and framework,
security and legal issues, the economic impact, and applications.
QA76.585 2012-025271 978-1-4666-2125-1
Security engineering for cloud computing; approaches and
tools.
Title main entry. Ed. by David G. Rosado et al.
Information Science Reference, ©2013 235 p. $195.00
Exploring approaches to security in cloud computing services, computer
scientists and software engineers in Spain, elsewhere in Europe, and the
Americas cover cloud architecture and patterns; risks and vulnerabilities;
and hardware security, secure storage, and policy management. Among
their topics are dynamic security properties monitoring architecture for
cloud computing, three misuse patterns, a software tool to support risk
analysis about what should or should not go into the cloud, a goal-driven
risk management approach to support security and privacy analysis of
cloud-based systems, and securing cloud storage.
QA76.585 2012-033729 978-1-4666-2536-5
Software testing in the cloud; perspectives on an emerging
discipline.
Title main entry. Ed. by Scott Tilley and Tauhida Parveen.
Information Science Reference, ©2013 459 p. $195.00
In this overview for researchers, practitioners, managers, and students,
international contributors in computer science, software testing, and
information technology examine software testing in the cloud (STITC)
from different perspectives, presenting case studies and experience
reports. Major themes include migrating testing to the cloud, using a
cloud computing infrastructure for testing in a virtualized environment,
and testing applications that are hosted and deployed in a cloud envi-
ronment. Some specific topics include leveraging the cloud for large-scale
software testing, cloud scalability measurement and testing, and building
a cloud-based mobile application testbed. With material on issues such
as balancing the value and risks of cloud computing, the book will be
useful as an overview for those new to the field, as well as more experi-
enced practitioners. Several chapters are updated versions of papers pre-
sented at the April 2010 IEEE International Conference on Software
Testing, Verification, and Validation. Tilley is affiliated with Florida
Institute of Technology. Parveen is a consultant.
QA76.59 2012-008611 978-1-4398-0152-9
Handbook of mobile systems applications and services.
Title main entry. Ed. by Anup Kumar and Bin Xie.
CRC Press, ©2012 593 p. $119.95
Computer scientists offer students and instructors, researchers and prac-
titioners a broad reference to the technologies that underlie mobile com-
puter services. They cover building blocks for mobile services
architecture, middleware for mobile services, and security and applica-
tions of mobile services. Among specific topics are interactive context-
aware services for mobile devices, service collaboration protocols,
context-aware middleware for supporting mobile applications and
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
services, developing and implementing mobile services in mobile plat-
forms, and mobile access to printed texts for people who are blind or
visually impaired.
QA76.59 2012-028459 978-1-4398-4811-1
Handbook on mobile and ubiquitous computing; status
and perspective.
Title main entry. Ed. by Laurence T. Yang, Evi Syukur and Seng W.
Loke.
CRC Press, ©2012 691 p. $119.95
Computer scientists summarize recent developments and the current
status of mobile and ubiquitous computing for researchers, graduate stu-
dents, and practitioners in computer science and engineering. They cover
smart environments and agent systems; human-computer interaction and
multimedia computing; security, privacy, and trust management;
embedded real-time systems; and networking sensing and communica-
tions. Among specific topics are wireless payment and systems, building
smart spaces with intelligent objects, agent-based automated trust nego-
tiation and management for pervasive computing, logical location-based
multicast routing in large-scale mobile ad hoc networks, and connectivity
for sensor networks using geometrical probability.
QA76.7 2011-943605 978-1-111-64288-4
Game development essentials; game interface design, 2d
ed. (DVD-ROM included)
Saunders, Kevin and Jeannie Novak.
Delmar, ©2013 351 p. $93.95 (pa)
This text for college students will also be useful for game and other
media professionals. This second edition offers expanded discussion and
examples of interface design, touching on areas such as platform- and
genre-specific game interfaces, and the connection between gameplay
and interface design. This edition also covers recent technologies such as
smartphones, tablets, and gesture-driven interfaces. The first part of the
book covers basic concepts, platforms, and genres. Part 2 treats player
controls and interfaces, and Part 3 details the game, interface, and testing
design processes. In addition to review exercises, case studies, and color
screenshots, the text includes real-world anecdotes and profiles of
professionals. About 18 pages of resources list online communities,
libraries, and tutorials, plus career and educational resources,
development and post-production tools, organizations, events, game-
related companies, and books. The DVD contains media and links to
software, plus templates, documentation, demos, mobile apps, and
videos. Saunders is a professional game designer. Novak has written
previous books on game development.
QA76.7 978-1-4493-3029-3
Switching to the Mac; the missing manual, Mountain Lion
edition.
Pogue, David.
O’Reilly Media, Inc., ©2012 743 p. $29.99 (pa)
For converts from Microsoft Windows to the Macintosh with its latest
operating system, Pogue, The New York Times tech columnist and creator
of the Missing Manuals series, provides a balanced assessment of the
advantages and drawbacks of Mountain Lion (an upgrade from Leopard
OS X). Noting differences between the Mac and Windows operating
systems, Pough covers hardware, software, file sharing, and iCloud
basics. The guide includes freeware references, helpful appendixes
including the master OS X keystroke list, and a “nostalgia corner” for
former Windows users.
QA76.754 2012-023744 978-0-321-81573-6
Software architecture in practice, 3d ed.
Bass, Len et al. (SEI series in software engineering)
Addison-Wesley, ©2013 589 p. $69.95
It has been a decade since the second edition appeared, say Bass, Paul
Clements, and Rick Kazman, all formerly associated with the Software
Engineering Institute (SEI) at Carnegie Mellon University in Pittsburgh.
During that time the field of software architecture has broadened its
focus from internal issues of how to design, evaluate, and document
software to incorporate external impacts such as the impact architectures
have on software life cycle, organization, and management. They have
added more material on patterns, reorganized the material on quality
attributes, and lifted interoperability to its own chapter. To make room,
they have moved the extensive case studies to the website. As before they
suggest discussing the topics within reading groups or classroom set-
tings, and provide open-ended questions for that purpose.
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
QA76.76 2012-023354 978-1-4666-2503-7
Agile and lean service-oriented development; foundations,
theory, and practice.
Title main entry. Ed. by Xiaofeng Wang et al.
Information Science Reference, ©2013 317 p. $195.00
International contributors in computer science, information technology,
and business information systems present original research studies, expe-
rience reports, best practices, and case studies for combining agile and
lean software development with service-oriented computing. Major
themes include test-driven service-oriented systems, service-oriented archi-
tectures driven by agile/lean principles, migration to service-oriented
systems using agile approaches, agile/lean cloud computing, and SaaS
requirements engineering for agile development. The book’s readership
includes researchers in software engineering and information systems,
software development practitioners, and students. Wang is affiliated with
the Free University of Bozen, Italy.
QA76.76 2012-027060 978-1-4665-5748-2
Business-driven IT-wide agile (scrum) and kanban (lean)
implementation; an action guide for business and IT
leaders.
Pham, Andrew T. and David K. Pham.
CRC Press, ©2013 172 p. $49.95 (pa)
Andrew Pham, an engineer and project manager who trains software
professionals and coaches project teams in Agile and Kanban, and David
Pham, a software creator and technology entrepreneur, explain how
information technology leaders, executives, and senior staff can increase
information technology delivery capabilities through the use of Agile and
Kanban across software project management and development. They
review Agile (including Scrum) and Kanban (as part of Lean), and why
to combine the two, then offer a large-scale, seven-step process
improvement framework, with two case studies.
QA76.76 978-1-4493-1956-4
Enterprise games; using game mechanics to build a better
business.
Hugos, Michael.
O’Reilly Media, Inc., ©2012 199 p. $24.99 (pa)
Hugos, a systems consultant, explains how games, especially massively
multiplayer online games, can be used as models for facilitating coordi-
nation and cooperation in the workplace with agile network structures.
Written to be accessible to a broad range of readers from business, pro-
fessional, and technical backgrounds, the book is not a cookbook of steps
for applying specific game techniques to a particular business situation,
but rather an overview of issues and a source of inspiration, with many
real-world examples. The first part of the book outlines challenges and
opportunities for redesigning work to fit the realities of the current
economy. The next section examines games and game mechanics, and the
last part of the book describes the business and social impacts of com-
bining video game technology with in-house corporate systems and the
technologies that make up social media, consumer technology, and cloud
computing. The book closes with a discussion of the future of work and
examples of apps for collaborative work environments. It is illustrated
with b&w screenshots and process diagrams.
QA76.76 2012-028382 978-1-84821-427-9
Model-driven and software product line engineering.
Arboleda, Hugo and Jean-Claude Royer.
ISTE/Wiley, ©2012 278 p. $125.00
Model-driven engineering and software product line engineering are dif-
ferent approaches to software engineering that are usually contrasted,
though also have important features in common. Arboleda (ICESI U.,
Cali, Columbia) and Royer (Ecole des Mines de Nantes, France) propose
a practical approach to engineering a software product line based on
model-driven engineering. They present the basic concepts of both
approaches, and the main challenges in defining a model-driven tool. At
a level accessible to graduate students and software engineers, they con-
sider technical aspects of modeling variability, defining a reference archi-
tecture, and constructing tool support.
QA76.8 2011-283210 978-0-306-82076-2
Always on; how the iPhone unlocked the anything -
anytime - anywhere future—and locked us in. (reprint,
2011)
Chen, Brian X.
Da Capo Press, ©2012 252 p. $15.00 (pa)
A man used a variety of applications on his iPhone to help survive the
2010 Haiti earthquake, yet a South Korean couple let their baby starve
while caught up in playing a game called Prius Online. Others use their
–210–
iPhones for less dramatic purposes, such as pointing them at a restaurant
to get an online menu and to read others’ opinions. From its introduction
in 2007, the iPhone has become capable of over a half million functions—
yet understanding of its social implications lags far behind. Chen (tech-
nology reporter, New York Times) has regularly written columns on
Apple products, and this paperback version of his 2011 publication now
includes an afterword on the legacy of Steve Jobs.
QA76.8 978-3-527-33245-8
Information processing; 2v.
Title main entry. Ed. by Evgeny Katz.
Wiley-VCH, ©2012 720 p. $285.00
For this two-volume set, Katz (chemistry and biomolecular science,
Clarkson University) unites international contributors in unconventional
computing, chemical and biological engineering, biomolecular science,
and physics to describe the latest theoretical and experimental work in
the use of molecular systems for processing information, performing
logic operations, and making computations. The book is of interest to the
interdisciplinary community active in the areas of unconventional com-
puting and chemical computing, and will be useful as an introduction to
newcomers to the field. Volume 1 offers an overview of the research on
molecular, supramolecular, and semiconductor species for chemical com-
puting. This volume also explore topics such as arithmetic circuits in
subexcitable chemical media, Kabbalistic-Liebnizian automata for simu-
lating the universe, inorganic intelligent response, and electrode inter-
faces switchable by physicals and chemical signals. Volume 2 discusses
protein/enzyme information processing systems, DNA/RNA-based com-
puting systems, application of whole biological cells for biocomputing,
and general computational aspects of biomolecular computing. Some spe-
cific subjects include peptide-based computation, molecular electronics
and protein-based optical computing, and enzyme logic digital biosensors
for biomedical applications. The two-volume set includes color and b&w
images, photos, and process diagrams.
QA76.9 2012-030627 978-0-12-396463-2
Agile data warehousing project management; business
intelligence systems using Scrum.
Hughes, Ralph.
Morgan Kaufmann Pub., Inc., ©2013 356 p. $49.95 (pa)
Hughes (systems architect, Ceregenics, Inc.) first began working with
agile data warehousing in 1996 and received skeptical reactions up until
at least six years ago. Having stuck with this approach throughout, he is
now receiving a more and more favorable reception and here uses his
expertise to deliver a thorough implementation guide. The first of two
planned volumes, this one focuses on developing agile methods to build
a robust data mart in the project room while the second will cover
scaling this up to the enterprise level. Morgan Kaufman is an imprint of
Elsevier.
QA76.9 2012-028180 978-1-4398-3841-9
Clustering; a data recovery approach, 2d ed.
Mirkin, Boris. (Computer science and data analysis )
CRC Press, ©2012 350 p. $99.95
In the 2005 first edition, published as Clustering for Data Mining, Mirkin
(computer science, U. of London) presented a coherent theory for K-
Means partitioning and Ward hierarchical clustering. The theory leads to
effective data pre—processing options, clustering algorithms, and inter-
pretation aids, he says, as well as to firm links to other areas of data
analysis. Here he seeks to consolidate, strengthen, and extend this core,
moving from the nested Russian doll structure of the first edition to a
linear presentation of the data recovery approach that distinguishes this
from other accounts of clustering.
QA76.9 978-0-12-388436-7
Computers as components; principles of embedded
computing system design, 3d ed.
Wolf, Marilyn.
Morgan Kaufmann Pub., Inc., ©2012 500 p. $84.95 (pa)
This update of the 2008 edition by Wayne Wolfe keeps pace with the
growing prevalence of embedded processors, “systems-on-chips,” in
products ranging from automobiles and airplanes to alarm clocks and
toys. His daughter Marilyn Wolf (Georgia Institute of Technology) builds
on his discussion of the characteristics, design requirements of hardware
and software architectures, system integration, computing platforms,
quality assurance, and other challenges of embedded—as vs. general
purpose—computing applications. Illustrated chapters include design
examples, discussion questions, lab exercises, and further reading.
Morgan Kaufmann is an imprint of Elsevier.
–211–
QA76.9 2012-025085 978-1-4398-5432-7
Contrast data mining; concepts, algorithms, and
applications.
Title main entry. Ed. by Guozhu Dong and James Bailey. (Chapman &
Hall/CRC data mining and knowledge discovery series)
CRC Press, ©2013 410 p. $89.95
Contrast data mining uses concepts and algorithmic tools to overcome
the limitations of simpler approaches to contrasting datasets. Mostly com-
puter scientists, but also some contributors from fields where contrast
data mining is applied, discuss preliminaries and statistical contrast
measures; contrast mining algorithms; generalized contrasts, emerging
data cubes, and rough sets; contrast mining for classification and clus-
tering; contrast mining for bioinformatics and chemoinformatics; and
contrast mining for special domains. A final section surveys other
papers.
QA76.9 2012-023339 978-1-4666-2533-4
Distributed computing innovations for business,
engineering, and science.
Title main entry. Ed. by Alfred Waising Loo.
Information Science Reference, ©2013 353 p. $195.00
Editor Loo (computing, Lingnan University, Hong Kong) unites interna-
tional contributors in information systems, software engineering, and
computer science to explain the latest developments in distributed com-
puting. The book’s 16 chapters are grouped in three sections. Section 1 is
devoted to algorithms and infrastructures, with chapters on topics such
as self-stabilizing graph coloring algorithms, and distributed service pro-
gramming and interoperability. Section 2 addresses the use of cloud com-
puting in areas such as enterprise migration strategies and virtualization.
Section 3 describes applications of distributed computing, looking at
work in social question answering, and adding personalization and
social features to a context-aware application for mobile tourism. The
book’s readership includes advanced students and professionals in areas
such as systems design and distributed computing.
QA76.9 978-0-7695-4846-3
Distributed simulation and real-time applications;
proceedings.
International Symposium on Distributed Simulation and Real-Time
Applications (16th: 2012: Dublin, Ireland) Ed. by A. Boukerche et al.
Computer Society Press, ©2012 256 p. $198.00 (pa)
The symposium explores the growing overlap between large distributed
simulations and real-time applications, such as mirror world simulation
and collaborative virtual environments. Among the topics are large scale
simulation and visualization, modeling and simulating wireless sensor
and mobile networks, interest management and group communications,
gaming, optimization, road simulation, and modeling and simulating on
multicore systems. Only the authors are indexed.
QA76.9 2012019631 978-1-4666-2169-5
Emerging applications of natural language processing;
concepts and new research.
Title main entry. Ed. by Sivaji Bandyopadhyay et al.
Information Science Reference, ©2013 370 p. $195.00
For graduate students and budding researchers in natural language pro-
cessing, computer scientists review current research and practices in
computational techniques to automate any kind of human-like processing
of natural language content. They cover text analytics, machine trans-
lation, advanced question answering systems, multilingual information
access, digital content management, and speech processing. Among the
topics are word sense disambiguation, domain adaptation in part-of-
speech tagging, a computational cognitive model of human translation
processes, interactive question answering, mining user-generated content
for social research and other applications, and spreadsheeting using
modified visual feature vectors.
QA76.9 2012-025781 978-1-4398-4618-6
Handbook of finite state based models and applications.
Title main entry. Ed. by Jiacun Wang. (Discrete mathematics and its
applications)
CRC Press, ©2013 397 p. $99.95
A finite state model, or automata, is a model of behavior composed of a
finite number of states, transitions between those states, and actions.
They are routinely used in a wide range of fields, and here computer sci-
entists, electrical engineers, mathematicians, and other contributors
introduce the fundamentals of automata theory. They also describe some
widely used automata, including transducers, tree automata, quantum
automata, and timed automata. Other topics include regular path queries
of graph-structured data, finite state automata in compiler, Petri nets, and
model checking.
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
QA76.9 2012-002867 978-1-4666-1806-0
Intelligent data analysis for real-life applications; theory
and practice.
Title main entry. Ed. by Rafael Magdalena-Benedito et al.
Information Science Reference, ©2012 420 p. $195.00
The 18 papers in this collection explore machine learning techniques for
extracting information from large amounts of data with several variables.
Six papers from Spanish universities review Bayesian network classifiers,
apply computer vision to sorting fruit, describe data visualization for
industrial processes, and propose agent-based systems for reading engi-
neering sketches. Other topics include landmark sliding from 3D shape
correspondence, detecting impact craters in planetary images, proba-
bilistic graphical models for sports video mining, automatic text classifi-
cation from labeled and unlabeled data, and the impact of enterprises’
organizational quality on their economic results. B&w images and dia-
grams are provided.
QA76.9 2012-014224 978-1-4666-2083-4
IT security governance innovations; theory and research.
Title main entry. Ed. by Daniel Mellado et al.
Information Science Reference, ©2013 343 p. $195.00
For technical personnel or non-technical executives in companies, com-
puter and information scientists, some in academia and some in
business, compile existing approaches, standards, best practices, and new
trends in governing the security of information technology. The topics
include electronic banking, legal issues, assessing the maturity of the
control objectives for information and related technology framework in
the Egyptian banking sector, the adoption of ISO 27001 in Cyprus enter-
prises, biometrics, ontology-based multi-agent modeling for measuring
information security, and the art of detecting hidden malware.
QA76.9 2012-026466 978-1-4666-2488-7
Migrating legacy applications; challenges in service
oriented architecture and cloud computing environments.
Title main entry. Ed. by Anca Daniela Ionita et al.
Information Science Reference, ©2012 399 p. $195.00
Approaches to service oriented architecture and cloud computing almost
always assume starting a system from scratch, which for many otherwise
potential customers is not viable for financial or other reasons. Here com-
puter scientists explore ways to fold older software into such networked
systems. Their topics include research challenges in the maintenance and
evolution of service-oriented systems, re-engineering and wrapping legacy
modules for reuse as web services, the migration of data between cloud
and non-cloud datastores, a report of experience migrating a legacy web-
based document-analysis application to Hadoop and HBsa,e and the
model-driven integration of heterogeneous software artifacts in service
oriented computing.
QA76.9 2012-035443 978-1-4665-7751-0
Open systems dependability; dependability engineering
for ever-changing systems.
Title main entry. Ed. by Mario Tokoro.
CRC Press, ©2012 173 p. $69.95
Japanese scientists and engineers report some results so far from a seven-
and-a-half-year research project that began in December 2006. They
describe how to achieve dependability in open information systems, that
is systems that are not complete and static, but incomplete in specifi-
cation and changing in uncertain ways. Their topics include achieving
open systems dependability, tools for consensus building and accounta-
bility achievement support, flexible failure management with scripting,
toward an open systems dependability evaluation framework, and
towards standardization of open systems dependability.
QA76.9 2012-011979 978-1-4398-4665-0
Real-time simulation technologies; principles,
methodologies, and applications.
Title main entry. Ed. by Katalin Popovici and Pieter J. Mosterman.
(Computational analysis, synthesis, and design of dynamic systems
series)
CRC Press, ©2013 638 p. $139.95
Computer scientists and electrical engineers have scoured the literature to
compile a broad reference on designing and using simulations that
operate at the speed of time. They cover basic simulation technologies
and fundamentals, real-time simulation for system design, parallel and
distributed real-time simulation, and tools and applications. Among the
topics are a formalized approach to designing real-time distributed com-
puter systems, modeling and simulating timing behavior with the timing
definition language, a service-based simulation framework for estimating
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
the performance of embedded systems, concurrent simulation for the
online optimization of discrete event systems, and the systematic deri-
vation of hybrid system models for hydraulic systems.
QA76.9 2012-028117 978-1-4398-7531-5
Service-oriented distributed knowledge discovery.
Talia, Domenico and Paolo Trunfio. (Chapman & Hall/CRC data
mining and knowledge discovery series)
CRC Press, ©2013 210 p. $89.95
Talia and Trunfio (both computer engineering, U. of Calabria, Italy)
argue that service-oriented architectures can offer tools, techniques, and
environments to support analysis, inference, and discovery processes over
large data repositories available in many scientific and business areas.
After an overview of distributed knowledge discovery, they consider such
aspects as designing services for distributed knowledge discovery, work-
flows of services for data analysis, how services can support mobile data
mining, and knowledge discovery applications.
QA76.9 978-0-12-391063-9
Usability in government systems; user experience design
for citizens and public servants.
Title main entry. Ed. by Buie, Elizabeth and Dianne Murray.
Morgan Kaufmann Pub., Inc., ©2012 407 p. $59.95 (pa)
This volume brings together the knowledge of researchers, consultants,
and practitioners in the realm of human-computer interaction and user
experience studies in government systems. The contributors begin by con-
sidering issues of public-facing systems, including the usability of web-
sites and questions of privacy. They then consider governmental-internal
systems topics such as usability in aviation defense systems, emergency
response in simulated terrorist attacks, national critical infrastructures,
and legislative drafting systems. Common public and internal systems
issues are then addressed, including content strategy, plain language,
accessibility for those with disabilities, mobile access, user security, and
biometric systems. Issues of procurement and development and con-
sidered next, including contract issues, ISO design and usability stan-
dards, user-centered requirements definition, models as representations
for supporting the development of e-procedures, evaluation in gov-
ernment environment, and evaluation of usability in cultural contexts.
International case studies are presented throughout. Academic Press is
an imprint of Elsevier.
QA135 978-1-4522-6139-3
Math tools; grades 3-12; 60+ ways to build mathematical
practices, differentiate instruction, and increase student
engagement, 2d ed.
Silver, Harvey F. et al.
Corwin Press Inc., ©2012 241 p. $38.95 (pa)
Silver, a former educator who conducts workshops with schools and state
education departments, et al. present about 60 tools teachers of grades
three through 12 can use to teach math. The tools build the type of math-
ematical reasoning and thinking in the Common Core State Standards (a
new focus in this edition) and increase student engagement, differentiate
instruction, and improve lessons and units, as well as assess student
progress and integrate technology and multimedia. They focus on the
Standards for Mathematical Practice, and each tool includes a section on
building Common Core thinking (also new), and some include College
and Career Readiness Anchor Standards for Reading, Writing, Speaking
and Listening, or Language. Tools are organized by different styles of
thinking and learning and include the purpose, an overview, implemen-
tation steps, and examples. This edition includes 13 new tools, formative
assessment and technology sidebars, updated matrices, a revised final
chapter on mosaic or multi-style tools, and a companion website.
QA169 2012-025195 978-0-8218-8979-4
Deformation theory of algebras and their diagrams.
Markl, Martin. (Regional conference series in mathematics; no.116)
American Mathematical Society, ©2012 129 p. $35.00 (pa)
Markl has revised for publication ten lectures on deformation theory that
he delivered to graduate students and professional mathematicians in
Raleigh, North Carolina during May 2011. He focuses on deformations
over local complete Noetherian rings, which covers most types of defor-
mations of algebraic structures that working mathematicians meet in
their professional life. Readers are assumed to have a basic knowledge of
commutative algebra, homological algebra, and category theory. Among
the topics are deformations and cohomology, the gauge group, strongly
homotopy Lie algebras, and operads.
–212–
QA174 2012-023441 978-0-8218-7563-6
Computational and combinatorial group theory and
cryptography; proceedings.
AMS Special Sessions; Computational Algebra, Groups... (2011: Las
Vegas, NV) and Mathematical Aspects of Cryptography... (2011: Ithica,
NY) Ed. by Benjamin Fine, Delaram Kahrobaei and Gerhard
Rosenberger. (Contemporary mathematics; v.582)
American Mathematical Society, ©2012 199 p. $74.00 (pa)
The conferences were separated in time and space—Las Vegas in May and
Ithaca in September—but sessions at both addressed the same areas, so
are published together. The 17 research and review papers represent
group theory as it has been energized over the past 20 years by the
emergence of geometric and asymptotic group theory, algebraic geometry
over groups leading to the solution of the Tarski problems, and group-
based cryptography. Among the topics are a new look at finitely gen-
erated metabelian groups, improving Latin square based secret sharing
schemes, the adjunction of roots in exponential A-groups, the classifi-
cation of one relator limit groups and the surface group, and an algo-
rithm to express words as a product of conjugates of relators. There is
no index.
QA193 2012-006098 978-3-11-025033-6
Numerical methods for eigenvalue problems.
Börm, Steffen and Christian Mehl. (De Gruyter graduate lectures)
De Gruyter, ©2012 208 p. $34.95 (pa)
Börm (scientific computing, Christian-Albrechts U., Kiel, Germany) and
Mehl (numerical mathematics, Technical U. of Berlin) present a number
of the most important numerical methods for finding eigenvalues and
eigenvectors of matrices. The material is from a course for third-year
mathematics students, but they believe students of physics and engi-
neering sciences should have no difficulty with it. Among the methods
are Jacobi iteration, bisection methods, and Krylov subspace methods of
large sparse eigenvalue problems.
QA241 2012-019333 978-1-4665-5464-1
Number, shape, and symmetry; an introduction to
number theory, geometry, and group theory.
Herrmann, Diane and Paul J. Sally, Jr.
CRC Press, ©2012 425 p. $69.95
Hermmann and Sally (both mathematics, U. of Chicago) present a
textbook reestablishing some of the fundamental concepts that are taught
in middle and high school, but tend to be forgotten later by everyone
except mathematics majors. They have honed the material on three dis-
tinct groups: non-math major undergraduate students, mathematically
talented students in grades seven to ten, and K-8 teachers in public
schools. Among the topics are axioms in number theory, congruencies
and groups, rational numbers and real numbers, polygons and their con-
struction, and tessellations.
QA241 978-0-8218-2095-7
Number theory 3; Iwasawa theory and modular forms.
Kurokawa, Nobushige et al. (Translations of mathematical monographs;
v.242)
American Mathematical Society, ©2012 226 p. $53.00 (pa)
Not a third number theory, but a third volume, the final in a series on
number theory that applies fundamental methods of modern number
theory to elucidate the mystery of prime numbers. It looks at modular
forms and Iwasawa theory, and illustrates them with many examples for
non-specialists and beginners. The introduction reviews developments
from before Fermat to his famous last theorem. Other topics are rational
points on elliptic curves, conics and the p-adic numbers, the zeta
function, and algebraic number theory. Exercises and questions are pro-
vided, along with answers. The Japanese original was published by
Iwanami Shoten Publishers, Tokyo, in 1998 and in a second edition in
2005. The translation is by Masato Kuwata.
QA247 2012-023154 978-3-11-021810-7
Approximations and endomorphism algebras of modules,
2d ed.; 2v.
Göbel, Rüdiger and Jan Trlifaj. (De Gruyter expositions in mathematics;
41)
De Gruyter, ©2012 972 p. $364.00
Göbel, (U. of Duisburg-Essen, Germany) and Trlifaj (Charles University,
Czech Republic) combine approximation theory and realization theorems
to solve problems with classifying modules. The first volume, devoted to
approximations, covers some useful classes of module, approximation
and co-torsion pairs, and tilting and co-tilting approximations. The
second volume deals with realization theorems from perspectives of pre-
diction principles; endomorphism algebras and automorphism groups;
modules and rings related to algebraic topology; large cellular cover,
–213–
localizations, and E(R)-algebras; and some useful classes of algebras. The
treatment has been revised from the 2006 first edition, and so substan-
tially expanded that it has been split into the two volumes. They are
paged consecutively and both contain the index.
QA247 2012-023438 978-0-8218-5298-9
Theory and applications of finite fields; proceedings.
International Conference on Finite Fields and their Applications (10th:
2011: Ghent, Belgium) Ed. by Michael Lavrauw et al. (Contemporary
mathematics; v.579)
American Mathematical Society, ©2012 204 p. $74.00 (pa)
For two decades, the conference has brought together researchers
working on various topics in finite fields to present their results and
discuss problems on finite fields. Three invited and 14 contributed
papers discuss such topics as Davenport’s constant for groups with large
exponents, the exact divisibility of exponential sums and some conse-
quences, sequences of Dedekind sums in function fields, a bound on the
number of points of a curve in a projective space over a finite field,
small-bias sets from extended norm-trace codes, and additive decompo-
sitions induced by multiplicative characters over finite fields. The pro-
ceedings are not indexed.
QA252 2012-026116 978-0-8218-6917-8
Recent developments in lie algebras, groups and
representation theory; proceedings.
Southeastern Lie Theory Workshop Series 2009-2011: Combinatorial Lie
Theory and Applications (2009: North Carolina State University)
(Homological Methods in Representation Theory (2010: University of
Georgia) (Finite and Algebraic Groups (2011: University of Virginia). Ed.
by Kailash C. Misra et al. (Proceedings of symposia in pure mathe-
matics; v.86)
American Mathematical Society, ©2012 310 p. $80.00
Fifteen papers from the three workshops test perverse coherent sheaves
on the nilpotent cone, prove the Kac-Wakimoto atypicality conject rue for
a Lie superalgebra, locate non-trivial cohomology classes for finite groups
of Lie type II, and derive a semi-simple series for q-Weyl and q-Sprecht
modules. Survey articles describe current efforts to classify endotrivial
modules over the group algebras of finite groups, recent developments in
the theory of affine q-Schur algebras, and Frobenius twists in the repre-
sentation theory of the symmetric group. No index is provided.
QA267 2011-032612 978-1-57808-751-8
A level of Martin-Lof randomness.
Tice, Bradley S.
Science Publishers, Inc., ©2013 118 p. $79.95
Tice pursues aspects of statistical physics that relate to telecommunica-
tions and the study of natural languages. Here he addresses the notion
of compression ratios greater than have been known for random
sequential strings in both binary and larger radix bases system as
applied to those traditionally found in kolmogorov complexity. This
account culminates a decade of research since he discovered a com-
pressible random sequential string in 1998. After defining a level of
Martin-Lof randomness he looks in turn at binary, ternary, quanternary,
quinary, and larger radix systems then surveys some universal and trun-
cated applications. Distributed in the US by CRC Press.
QA267 2012-025225 978-1-4398-8206-1
Limits of computation; an introduction to the undecidable
and the intractable.
Reiter, Edna E. and Clayton Matthew Johnson.
CRC Press, ©2013 259 p. $89.95
Reiter and Johnson (both mathematics and computer science, California
State U.-East Bay) present material they developed for a graduate course
on computational complexity. It can be used in a one-quarter or one-
semester course for graduate or advanced undergraduate students who
do not necessarily have strong backgrounds in theoretical computer
science and do not plan to specialize in it. Among the topics are set
theory, algorithms, Turing-completeness, undecidability and reducibility,
and other interesting questions and classes.
QA271 2012-027637 978-0-12-397857-8
The theory of gambling and statistical logic, 2d ed.
Epstein, Richard A.
Academic Press, ©2012 451 p. $44.95
For readers with an undergraduate level of mathematics background,
American game theorist Epstein describes the statistical and probability
mathematics of various games that involve some degree of chance. After
setting out some mathematical preliminaries, he discusses such aspects
as fundamental principles of a theory of gambling, Parrondo’s principle,
coups and games with dice, blackjack, and games of pure skill and
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
competitive computers. A final chapter on fallacies and sophistries
includes a look at paranormal phenomena. He mentions a revised edition
being published in 1977, and Academic Press published an edition in
2009, so this may be a reprint rather than a new edition. Academic Press
in an imprint of Elsevier.
QA273 2012-013119 978-0-8218-8532-1
Knowing the odds; an introduction to probability.
Walsh, John B. (Graduate studies in mathematics; v.139)
American Mathematical Society, ©2012 421 p. $75.00
Walsh (U. of British Columbia) presents a textbook based on a two-
semester course mainly for senior mathematics honor students. He
assumes a knowledge of calculus and some analysis, but no measure
theory. He begins with the basic axioms of probability and the all-
important ideas of conditional probability and independence. Then he
develops enough machinery to allow students to solve some problems
and analyze card games and lotteries, and before anyone notices they
have stumbled into the non-trivial questions, they are working out the
gambler’s ruin problem. Then comes chapter two. Among the topics are
random variables, convergence, Markov chains and random walks, and
Brownian motion.
QA273 2012-002023 978-1-118-16640-6
A modern theory of random variation; with applications
in stochastic calculus, financial mathematics, and
Feynman integration.
Muldowney, Pat.
John Wiley & Sons, ©2012 527 p. $115.00
Muldowney (U. of Ulster, Ireland) overcomes limitations on the appli-
cation of probability theory by formulating it in terms of the Stieltjes-
complete integral instead of the Lebesgue integral. After introductory
matter, he covers infinite-dimensional integration, the theory of the
integral, random variability, Gaussian integrals, Browning motion, sto-
chastic integration, and numerical calculation. Readers are not assumed
to be adept in either probability theory or integration theory.
QA273 2012-025210 978-1-4398-7206-2
Probability and stochastic modeling.
Rotar, Vladimir I.
CRC Press, ©2013 490 p. $79.95
Rotar (San Diego State U., California) offers a textbook for a first course
in probability, with an emphasis on stochastic modeling. Students should
have completed at least two semesters of calculus and a course in linear
algebra, he says, and this will probably be the only course they take on
stochastic models. He presents the material in two nested routes, one con-
tains the basic material for a one-semester course and is self-contained
and moderately difficult. The other route presents a more complete expo-
sition and is suited for a two-semester course or self-study. It is slightly
more difficult, he says, but still should be accessible to anyone familiar
with the primary concepts of calculus and linear algebra.
QA273 2012-020141 978-0-470-89203-9
Risk assessment; tools, techniques, and their applications.
Ostrom, Lee T. and Cheryl A. Wilhelmsen.
John Wiley & Sons, ©2012 392 p. $89.95
Experienced risk assessment professionals Ostrom (certified professional
ergonomist and safety professional) and Wilhelmsen (assistant professor,
APUS/AMU, and NASA aviation inspection consultant) provide a practical
and accessible how-to-guide for conducting risk assessments and under-
standing how and when to use the available tools. Industry-specific case
studies illustrate how each technique can be used in a variety of real-
world environments. Topics included in this reference include: risk per-
ception, risks and consequences, task analysis techniques, preliminary
hazards analysis, failure mode and effects analysis, critical function
analysis, epidemic risk, vulnerability analysis technique, risk assessment
and community planning, and much more. The guide is written in such
a way that it can be adapted to a variety of settings, as the case studies
indicate.
QA273 2012-022037 978-1-4398-7368-7
A statistical guide for the ethically perplexed.
Hubert, Lawrence and Howard Wainer.
CRC Press, ©2013 565 p. $49.95 (pa)
Hubert (psychology, UL Urbana-Champaign) and Wainer (statistics,
Upenn) present an intermediate to advanced guide to using statistics and
avoiding ethical issues in social scientific, clinical, and legal contexts.
Ethical in this case is less a moral than a professional category, referring
to “the accepted rules or standards for right conduct that govern the
practice of some professions.” The book is divided into three major
sections on tools from probability and statistics, data presentation and
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
interpretation, and experimental design and data-collection. They review
areas such as Bayes Theorem, correlation and prediction, sampling
models, psychometrics, inferring causality, Simpson’s paradox, meta-
analysis, and include a chapter on federal rules of evidence. This text is
not an introduction to statistics and presumes more than a passing
familiarity with it.
QA273 2012-002909 978-1-118-21798-6
Using the Weibull distribution; reliability, modeling, and
inference.
McCool, John I. (Wiley series in probability and statistics)
John Wiley & Sons, ©2012 336 p. $120.00
The ball and roller bearing industry began using the Weibull distribution
to describe the fatigue life of its products during the 1940s, and McCool
(systems engineering, Pennsylvania State U.-Great Valley) was exposed to
it when he was a mechanical engineer for a manufacturer. He has used
a draft of this book as the textbook for a reliability engineering course
in the Master of Systems Engineering curriculum, and here releases the
completed version. Among the topics are probability, properties of the
Weibull distribution, estimation in single samples, inference from mul-
tiple samples, and Weibull regression.
QA274 2012-007045 978-3-11-027889-7
Brownian motion; an introduction to stochastic processes.
Schilling, René L. and Lothar Partzsch. (De Gruyter graduate)
De Gruyter, ©2012 380 p. $40.00 (pa)
Schilling (probability) and Partzsch (mathematical stochastics, both
Technological U. of Dresden, Germany) present a textbook for a course
on Brownian motion and stochastic calculus for graduate mathematics
students at an early stage of their study, because these areas are the foun-
dation for many other topics in mathematics. Students should be familiar
with the classical limit theorems of probability theory and basic discrete-
time martingales. There is more material than can be covered in a single
semester, so instructors can shape the course and students can wander
about as their interest leads.
QA274 2012-021567 978-1-4398-1708-7
Latent Markov models for longitudinal data.
Bartolucci, Francesco, Alessio Farcomeni and Fulvia Pennoni. (Statistics
in the social and behavioral sciences)
CRC Press, ©2013 234 p. $89.95
Latent Markov models are an important class of latent variable models
for analyzing longitudinal data when the response variables measure
common characteristics of interest that are not directly observable. They
are applied in such fields as education and health care, where the latent
characteristics might correspond to a certain type of ability, for example,
or the quality of life. Italian statisticians Bartolucci (U. of Perugia),
Farcomeni (Sapienza, U. of Rome), and Pennoni (U. of Milano-Bicocca)
offer a complete overview of latent Markov models, emphasizing the
interpretation of the model assumptions and the practical use of the
models. A modest knowledge of probability and statistics is required,
they say, in particular readers should know the basic concepts of
maximum likelihood estimation and Bayesian theory.
QA274 2012-028123 978-1-4665-5779-6
Stationary stochastic processes; theory and applications.
Lindgren, Georg. (Texts in statistical science)
CRC Press, ©2013 347 p. $89.95
Lindgren (mathematical sciences, Lund U., Sweden) presents a textbook
for a second course in stationary processes, providing a fairly broad
overview of the theory behind widely scattered applications in engi-
neering and science. It is designed for graduate students in science or
engineering who have some experience with stochastic processes and are
interested in the underpinnings. His emphasis is on second order prop-
erties and Fourier methods; neither time series analysis nor Markov
assumptions play a prominent role.
QA274 2012-030105 978-0-7844-1223-7
Stochastic models of uncertainties in computational
mechanics.
Soize, Christian. (Lecture notes in mechanics; 2)
Am. Society of Civil Engineers, ©2012 125 p. $60.00 (pa)
Soize (multiscale modeling and simulations, U Paris-Est) summarizes the
main concepts, formulations, and recent developments in the stochastic
modeling of uncertainties in computational mechanics. Uncertainty in
computational models can come from variabilities in the real system or
from uncertainties in the model itself, he explains, so the models must
support robust optimization, design, and updating to be effective. His
topics include an overview of probabilistic modeling, parametric and
nonparametric probabilistic approaches to uncertainties in computational
–214–
structural dynamics, and the nonparametric probabilistic approach to
uncertainties in structural-acoustic models for frequencies in low and
medium ranges.
QA276 2012-005888 978-1-118-29439-0
Common errors in statistics (and how to avoid them), 4th
ed.
Good, Phillip I. and James W. Hardin.
John Wiley & Sons, ©2012 336 p. $59.95 (pa)
For people who use statistical software packages but consider them black
boxes, Good, a California-based consultant specializing in statistical solu-
tions for private and public organizations, and Hardin (biostatistics, U. of
South Carolina) offer a mathematically rigorous foundation for statistical
procedures, explaining such basic concepts as null and alternative
hypotheses, p-value, significance level, and power. They also draw on
reprints from the statistical literature to reexamine sample selection,
linear regression, the analysis of variance, maximum likelihood, Bayes’
Theorem, meta-analysis, and the bootstrap. New to this edition are sec-
tions on fraud, and on the potential sources of error to be found in epi-
demiology and case-control studies.
QA276 2012-025219 978-1-4398-7540-7
The R student companion.
Dennis, Brian.
CRC Press, ©2013 339 p. $39.95 (pa)
Dennis (fish and wildlife sciences and statistical sciences, U. of Idaho)
introduces the R computer package for scientific graphs and calculations
to high school and college students, and anyone else who wants it and
has high school algebra pretty well down. It is free and open-source, easy
to install on most computers, and is rapidly becoming the standard for
statistics and mathematics. His topics include R scripts, basic graphs,
quadratic functions, matrix arithmetic, probability and simulation, and
fitting models to data.
QA276 2011-048238 978-1-4214-0602-2
Sandlot stats; learning statistics with baseball.
Rothman, Stanley.
Johns Hopkins U. Press, ©2012 571 p. $85.00
There are books on the market that use statistics to analyze baseball
records, but Rothman (mathematics, Quinnipiac U., Connecticut) did not
find them appropriate for his course using baseball to teach statistics. So
he wrote his own lecture notes, which an editor at Johns Hopkins Press
discovered online, and a textbook was born. It uses the vast quantity of
available baseball records to teach such matters as descriptive statistics
for one quantitative variable, sports betting, probability distribution func-
tions for a discrete random variable, confidence intervals, and streaking.
Once the basics are acquired, he says, they can be applied to other areas,
such as healthcare or business.
QA276.74 2012-026176 978-1-4398-1278-5
Confidence intervals for proportions and related measures
of effect size.
Newcombe, Robert G. (Chapman & Hall/CRC biostatistics series)
CRC Press, ©2013 442 p. $89.95
For statistical researchers and people who review their work, applied
statisticians, and researchers in the health and social sciences generally,
Newcombe (medical statistics and epidemiology, Cardiff U., Wales)
explores some novel applications of the confidence intervals method.
Many such readers will have used confidence intervals and similar
methods before, he says, but he wants to impart a deeper understanding
of what happens when they are applied in situations far removed from
the familiar Gaussian case. Primarily he distills his own research, rather
than reviewing the literature. Among the topics are means and their dif-
ferences, intervals for the Poisson parameter and the substitution
approach, the difference between proportions based on individually
paired data, the odds ratio and logistic regression, and generalized
Wilcoxon measure.
QA278 2012-012199 978-0-470-66952-5
Basic and advanced Bayesian structural equation
modeling with applications in the medical and behavioral
sciences.
Song, Xin-Yuan and Sik-Yum Lee. (Wiley series in probability and sta-
tistics)
John Wiley & Sons, ©2012 367 p. $105.00
Song and Lee (both statistics, Chinese U. of Hong Kong) explore the
Bayesian analysis of structural equation models (SEM), which are the
technique of choice to assess various inter-relationships among observed
and latent variables. Their topics include basic concepts and applications
of structural equation models, Bayesian model comparison and model
–215–
checking, structural equation modeling for latent curve models, struc-
tural equation models with mixed continuous and unordered categorical
variables, and transformation structural equation models.
QA278 2012-009793 978-0-470-17896-6
Methods of multivariate analysis, 3d ed.
Rencher, Alvin C. and William F. Christensen. (Wiley series in proba-
bility and statistics)
John Wiley & Sons, ©2012 758 p. $130.00
Rencher (emeritus) and Christensen (both statistics, Brigham Young U.)
present a textbook introducing students who have taken two earlier sta-
tistical methods courses to methods that analyze more than one variable
in a body of data at the same time. Among their topics are matrix
algebra, the multivariate normal distribution, tests on covariance
matrices, principle component analysis, cluster analysis, and graphical
procedures. They have added a chapter on confirmatory factor analysis.
QA278 2012-009795 978-0-470-90584-5
Regression analysis by example, 5th ed.
Chatterjee, Samprit and Ali S. Hadi. (Wiley series in probability and
statistics)
John Wiley & Sons, ©2012 393 p. $125.00
Chatterjee (business, New York U.) and Hadi (actuarial science, American
U., Cairo) update again their textbook, first published in 1977, on one of
the most widely used statistical tools for analyzing multifactor data.
Viewing regression analysis more broadly than some, they consider it as
a set of data analysis techniques that examine the inter-relationships
among a given set of variables. Rather than formal statistical tests and
probability calculations, they emphasize an informal analysis directed
toward uncovering patterns in the data. Students would typically be
majoring not in statistics itself but in a field where statistics is used. Even
so, some previous familiarity with statistics would be helpful.
QA278 2012-016113 978-1-119-97829-9
Structural equation modeling with Mplus; methods and
applications.
Wang, Jichuan and Xiaoqian Wang. (Wiley series in probability and sta-
tistics)
John Wiley & Sons, ©2012 453 p. $105.00
Jichuan (children’s medicine, George Washington U.) and Xiaoqian, with
a Chinese company, explain structural equation modeling as it is increas-
ingly being used in social and health sciences. The approach has several
advantages over others, they say, but is not used as much as it could be
if it were better known. They cover confirmatory factor analysis, struc-
tural equations with latent variable, latent growth models for longitu-
dinal data analysis, multi-group modeling, mixture modeling, and
sample size for structural equation modeling.
QA279 2012-007007 978-1-118-33257-3
Bayesian statistics; an introduction, 4th ed.
Lee, Peter M.
John Wiley & Sons, ©2012 462 p. $55.95 (pa)
Lee (York U., Britain) began teaching Bayesian statistics in the middle
1980s as an alternative to the standard mathematical statistics that con-
fused him and many of his upper level undergraduate students. He had
to write a textbook for the course himself, and here it is being updated
and revised again a generation later. The field continues to change, he
reports, with an increasing emphasis on Monte-Carolo techniques. So he
has considerably extended the chapter on the Gibbs sampler and added
a new chapter on Bayesian importance sampling, variation Bayes,
approximate Bayesian computation, and reversible jump Markov Chain
Monte Carlo. All the exercises are worked through on the website.
QA279 2012-026280 978-1-58488-849-9
The BUGS book; a practical introduction to Bayesian
analysis.
Lunn, David and Christopher Jackson, Nicky Best, Andrew Thomas,
David Spiegelhalter. (Texts in statistical science)
Chapman & Hall/CRC, ©2013 381 p. $49.95 (pa)
The team that developed the BUGS software for Bayesian analysis pro-
vides a thorough introduction to it. The first half is a basic introduction
up to regression modeling for readers with a solid background in sta-
tistics but not in Markov chain Monti Carlo or Bayesian methods. The
second half discusses topics that are likely new even to old hands. The
book could be used for a course, for self-study, or as a reference.
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
QA279 2012-025214 978-1-4398-1512-0
Generalized linear mixed models; modern concepts,
methods and applications.
Stroup, Walter W. (Chapman & Hall/CRC texts in statistical science)
CRC Press, ©2013 529 p. $89.95
Stroup (U. of Nebraska) says that by 2012, the term linear model means
generalized linear mixed model (GLMM), and all other types of linear
models are subsumed under it as special cases. Therefore, GLMM should
be the first course in linear models, not the second, he argues, and pro-
vides a textbook for the job. It is for graduate students in statistics, sta-
tistics professionals seeking to get up to speed, and researchers new to
generalized linear model thought process. They should have a basic
understanding of linear algebra; some previous exposure to probability
distribution theory, and likelihood-based estimation and inference; and a
working knowledge of applied statistics, especially analysis of variance
and regression. He uses the proprietary software GLIMMIX instead of R.
QA297 2012-007291 978-0-470-57237-5
Introduction to the explicit finite element method for
nonlinear transient dynamics.
Wu, Shen R. and Lei Gu.
John Wiley & Sons, ©2012 335 p. $125.00
Applying the explicit finite element method in simulations of nonlinear
dynamic problems, Wu and Gu demonstrate how it produces a better
solution than implicit finite element methods to difficult problems that
are commonly encountered when solving large deformation transient
dynamics problems, and so can be used in a wider range of contact and
impact engineering problems. The information has been floating around
the literature, they say, but they decided it was time to gather it into a
consistent and coherent account. They cover fundamentals, element tech-
nology, material models, and contact and constraint conditions.
QA312 2012-020947 978-0-8218-9083-7
A course in abstract analysis.
Conway, John B. (Graduate studies in mathematics; 141)
American Mathematical Society, ©2012 367 p. $75.00
Conway (mathematics, George Washington U.) presents a textbook for a
year-long course with a semester of measure theory followed by a
semester of functional analysis to prepare first-year graduate students for
the PhD qualifying examination. Students are assumed to be familiar
with the basic properties of metric spaces, in particular the concepts of
compactness, connectedness, continuity, uniform continuity, and the sur-
rounding results on these topics. Among his topics are elements of
measure theory, a Hilbert space interlude, linear transformations, locally
convex spaces, and Banach algebras and spectral theory.
QA312 2012-001629 978-3-11-027640-4
Young measures and compactness in measure spaces.
Florescu, Liviu C. and Christiane Godet-Thobie.
De Gruyter, ©2012 339 p. $168.00
For graduate students and researchers with a basic knowledge of general
topology, functional analysis, and Lebesgue integration, Florescu
(“Alexandru Ioan Cuza” U., Romania) and Godet-Thobie (U. de Bretagne
Occidentale, France) summarize all the theoretical aspects related to
defining Young measures—measurability, disintegration, stable conver-
gence, and compactness. They cover weak compactness in measure
spaces; bounded measures on topological space; and Young measures
themselves, which generalize measurable functions.
QA320 2012-023909 978-0-8218-8984-8
Foundations of analysis.
Taylor, Joseph L. (Pure and applied undergraduate texts; v.18)
American Mathematical Society, ©2012 398 p. $74.00
Taylor (mathematics, U. of Utah) has developed a textbook from notes for
a two-semester undergraduate course he teaches for students who have
completed three semesters of calculus and one semester of linear algebra.
For many students, he says, this is the first course in which everything
is proved rigorously, and they are expected to create proofs as well as
understand them. He presents a rigorous development of the calculus,
beginning with a study of the properties of the real number system. The
topics include sequences, the derivation, infinite series, convergence in
Euclidean space, differential in several variables, and vector calculus.
QA324 2011-042975 978-3-11-026927-7
Distributions; generalized functions with applications in
Sobolev spaces.
Bhattacharyya, Pulin Kumar. (De Gruyter textbook)
De Gruyter, ©2012 833 p. $98.00 (pa)
To fill a gap in the existing literature, Bhattacharyya (Indian Institute of
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
Technology Delhi) offers a rigorous treatment of distributions and their
applications, primarily to Sobolev spaces, in a simple style and form such
that the proofs and results are understandable to the applied mathe-
matics community in general, rather than to specialists in distributions.
He also addresses some additional matters of interest to applied mathe-
maticians, engineers, physicists, and others. His topics include Schwartz
distributions; differentiation of distribution and application of distribu-
tional derivatives; derivatives of piecewise smooth functions, Green’s
formula, elementary solutions, and applications to Sobolev spaces; con-
volutions of distributions; and vector-valued distributions.
QA331 2012-006137 978-3-11-025229-3
Bernstein functions; theory and applications, 2d ed.
Schilling, Rene L. et al. (De Gruyter studies in mathematics; 37)
De Gruyter, ©2012 410 p. $168.00
Many mathematicians may never have heard of Bernstein functions,
because in probability they are known as Laplace exponents, in har-
monic analysis as negative definite functions, in complex analysis as Pick
or Nevanlinna functions, and in matrix analysis and operator theory as
monotone function. Schilling (stochastics, Technical U. of Dresden),
Renming Song (mathematics, U. of Illinois-Urbana), and Zoran
Vondracek (mathematics, U. of Zagreb) examine the features common to
all, first introducing the basic classics of functions, then surveying appli-
cations of Bernstein and complete Bernstein functions. A final section
presents extensive tales of complete Bernstein functions. They have
revised and rewritten portions of the 2009 first edition, and added a sub-
stantial amount of new material.
QA331 2012-014772 978-0-8218-8795-0
Numbers and functions; from a classical-experimental
mathematician’s point of view.
Moll, Victor H. (Student mathematical library, v.65)
American Mathematical Society, ©2012 504 p. $58.00 (pa)
Moll (Tulane U.) has collected additional notes he gave to his students in
a variety of mathematics courses, primarily putting the specific topic of
the course—calculus, combinatorics, real analysis, and so on—in the
context of mathematics as a whole. In some way or another, each looks
at elementary functions from the perspective of experimental mathe-
matics. The topics include the number systems, polynomials, rational
functions, trigonometric functions, and Landen transformations.
QA331 2012-017031 978-0-8218-6896-6
Recent advances in orthogonal polynomials, special
functions, and their applications; proceedings.
International Symposium on Orthogonal Polynomials, Special Functions
and Applications. (11th: 2011: Leganes, Spain) (Contemporary mathe-
matics; 578)
American Mathematical Society, ©2012 254 p. $86.00 (pa)
A selection of 12 papers, most of them plenary talks, present new results
and methods, recent developments, current trends, and open problems
regarding orthogonal polynomiala, special functions, and their applica-
tions. The topics include the next-order term for optimal Riesz and loga-
rithmic energy asymptotics on the sphere, the numerical study of higher
order analogues of the Tracy-Widom distribution, orthogonality relations
for bivariate Bernstein-Szego measures, discrete beta ensembles based on
Gauss type quadratures, and orthogonal polynomials and S-curves. The
proceedings are not indexed.
QA360 2012-030309 978-0-8218-9086-8
The ubiquitous quasidisk.
Gehring, Frederick W. and Kari Hag. (Mathematical surveys and mono-
graphs; v.184)
American Mathematical Society, ©2012 171 p. $74.00
Gehring (1925-2012) was a leading figure in the theory of quasiconformal
mappings; Hag received her PhD under his direction and worked with
him on this book for over a decade. It is an expansion of a set of his
lecture notes published in 1981, now long out of print, on the connections
that quasidisks—the images of a disk under a quasiconformal mapping
of the Riemann sphere—have with various branches of analysis and
geometry. It is suitable for graduate students in geometric function
theory, and could serve as a textbook for a one-semester second-year
graduate course on selected topics in the field.
QA372 2012-016258 978-1-61197-224-5
Control and optimization with differential-algebraic
constraints.
Title main entry. Ed. by Lorenz T. Biegler, Stephen L. Campbell and
Volker Mehrmann. (Advances in design and control)
SIAM, ©2012 344 p. $99.00 (pa)
Mixed systems of differential and algebraic equations (DAE) form one of
–216–
the simplest ways to model a physical system, because they allow sep-
arate models to be created for subcomponents that can then be pasted
together with a network. They were originally devised to simulate the
behavior of complex systems, but are now used widely in science and
technology. Here, mathematicians, computer scientists, and mechanical
and chemical engineers apply them to control and optimization
problems. Among the topics are the regularization of linear and non-
linear descriptor systems, spectra and leading directions for linear DEAs,
linear quadratic optimal control problems with switch points and a small
parameter, direct transcription with moving finite elements, and
applying Pontryagin’s minimum principles for endpoint optimization in
batch processes. The 16 papers are from an October 2010 workshop in
Banff, Canada.
QA372 2012-025419 978-3-11-027558-2
Painlevé equations and related topics; proceedings.
International Conference on Painleve Equations and Related Topics
(2011: Saint Petersburg, Russia) Ed. by Alexander D. Bruno and
Alexander B. Batkhin. (De Gruyter proceedings in mathematics)
De Gruyter, ©2012 272 p. $168.00
The problems for the equations and their generalization are addressed
with the competing methods of isomonodromy deformations and power
geometry in 36 papers. Among the topics are convergence of a formal
solution to an ordinary differential equation, isomonodromic deforma-
tions on Riemann surfaces, expansions for solutions of the Schlesinger
equation at a singular point, the sixth Painlevé transcendent and uni-
formizable orbifolds, and deriving Painlevé equations by anti-quanti-
zation. They are not indexed.
QA372 2012-020075 978-1-118-39899-9
Solutions manual to accompany Ordinary Differential
Equations .
Greenberg, Michael D.
John Wiley & Sons, ©2012 198 p. $29.95 (pa)
Greenberg (mechanical engineering, U. of Delaware) works out the solu-
tions to exercises in the mother text in great detail. He also includes a
computer-algebra systems (CAS) tutorial, with Maple, MATLAB, and
Mathematica sections.
QA377 2012-021685 978-3-11-028310-5
Adaptive numerical solution of PDEs.
Deuflhard, Peter and Martin Weiser. (De Gruyter textbook)
De Gruyter, ©2012 421 p. $84.00 (pa)
Mathematicians Deuflhard (Free U. Berlin) and Weiser explain to
graduate students and researchers the numerical solution of elliptic and
parabolic systems, and of hyperbolic conservation laws excluding turbu-
lence. They emphasize the derivation of efficient algorithms, that is those
that are adaptable with respect to space and time. Among their topics are
elementary partial differential equations, finite difference methods for
Poisson problems, the numerical solution of linear elliptic grid equations,
adaptive multigrid methods for linear elliptic problems, and the adaptive
integration of parabolic problems.
QA377 2012-017382 978-1-118-06330-9
Partial differential equations; theory and completely
solved problems.
Hillen, T. et al.
John Wiley & Sons, ©2012 678 p. $135.00
Hillen, I. E. Leonard, and H. Van Roessel (all mathematical and statistical
sciences, U. of Alberta) present a textbook for a course introducing linear
partial differential equations that differs from the many others by pro-
viding over 150 explicitly solved problems for the equations and
boundary value problems. The first part sets out the theory, then stu-
dents can practice their skills on the problems in the second, which are
fully worked, thoroughly explained, and cross-referenced with the rel-
evant theoretical treatment. The topics include the Fourier series, Sturm-
Liouville theory, spherical coordinates, Fourier transforms, and methods
of characteristics.
QA378 2012-020877 978-1-61197-233-7
Linear and nonlinear inverse problems with practical
applications.
Mueller, Jennifer and Samuli Siltanen. (Computational science and engi-
neering series)
SIAM, ©2012 351 p. $84.00 (pa)
Mueller (Colorado State U.-Fort Collins) and Siltanen (U. of Helsinki,
Finland) introduce the computational and theoretical aspects of inverse
problems, which arise from the need to interpret indirect and incomplete
measurements. Solving an inverse problem involves implementing a com-
putational algorithm that recovers useful information from the measured
–217–
data, they say, and a successful inverse algorithm is robust against
measurement noise, computationally effective, and mathematically jus-
tified by appropriate analysis and theorems. The first part requires
knowledge of basic linear algebra and matrix computations, some
knowledge of partial differential equations and basic analysis, and some
programming skills. The second part, on nonlinear inversion, is suitable
as a text for a graduate course in applied mathematics.
QA402 2012-021318 978-1-4665-6026-0
Nonlinear optimal control theory.
Berkovitz, Leonard D. and Negash G. Medhin. (Chapman & Hall/CRC
applied mathematics & nonlinear science)
CRC Press, ©2013 380 p. $99.95
In a sequel to Berkovitz’ 1974 Optimal Control Theory, Berkovitz (Purdue
U.) and Medhin (North Carolina State U) explore the Pontryagin principle,
Bellman’s dynamic programming method, and theorems about the exis-
tence of optimal controls. A highlight of their treatment is the systematic
use of a relaxed control formulation of optimal control problems, an
extension of L. C. Young’s notion of generalized curves and the related
concept of Young measures. The principles are illustrated with examples
from such fields as flight mechanics, chemical and electrical engineering,
production planning models, and the classical calculus of variation.
QA402 978-1-904868-89-7
Stabilization of linear systems.
Leonov, Gennady A. and Magomet M. Shumafov. (Stabilization, oscilla-
tions and optimization of systems; v.5)
Cambridge Scientific Publishers, ©2013 408 p. $87.00
Leonov (St. Petersburgh State U.) and Shumafov (Adyghe State U., Russia)
describe new methods of analysis and design of linear control systems
that have been developed since the previous comprehensive overview. The
information should be of use to specialists in the field, and help develop
the theory of stabilization of linear controlable systems. They cover
transfer functions and frequency responses, controlability and observ-
ability, the stationary stabilization of linear systems, the non-stationary
low-frequency and high-frequency stabilization of linear systems, and
stabilizing discrete-time systems. Distributed in the US by Enfield.
QA403 2012-023442 978-0-8218-8986-2
Higher order Fourier analysis.
Tao, Terence. (Graduate studies in mathematics; v.142)
American Mathematical Society, ©2012 187 p. $54.00
Tao (mathematics, U. of California-Los Angeles) presents the material he
used in a graduate course summarizing the nascent field of quadratic—
and more generally higher-order—Fourier analysis. He focuses on the
foundational and preparatory aspects and on the simplest illustrations of
key results in order to provide a companion to the core literature, which
is often quite technical and lengthy. Readers are presumed to have a
graduate-level familiarity with basic real analysis and measure theory,
particularly the soft or qualitative side.
QA404 2012-028470 978-1-4665-1729-5
Continuous time dynamical systems; state estimation and
optimal control with orthogonal functions.
Mohan, B. M. and S. K. Kar.
CRC Press, ©2012 221 p. $149.95
Electrical engineers Mohan (Indian Institute of Technology, Kharagpur)
and Kar (Institute of Technical Education and Research, and Siksha ‘O’
Anusandhan U, Bhubaneswar) present what may be the first book
devoted exclusively to applying block-pulse functions—members of the
piecewise constant family of orthogonal functions—and Legendre poly-
nomials to state estimation and optimal control of continuous-time
dynamical systems. Writing for control students and engineers, they
examine such topics as orthogonal functions and their properties, linear
optimal control systems incorporating observers, linear-quadratic-
Gaussian control, the optimal control of time-delay systems, and the hier-
archical control of linear systems.
QA440 978-3-03719-112-5
Large scale geometry.
Nowak, Piotr W. and Guoliang Yu. (EMS textbooks in mathematics.)
European Mathematical Soc., ©2013 189 p. $44.00
Large scale geometry is the study of geometric objects viewed from afar,
explains mathematicians Nowak (Polish Academy of Sciences and U. of
Warsaw) and U Yu (Texas A&M U.-College Station). It considers two
objects to be the same if they look roughly the same from a large dis-
tance, for example planets. One of the motivations for the book is the use
of large scale geometric methods in index theory, but they also note appli-
cations in Banach spaces, theoretical computer science, and large data
analysis. Graduate students and mathematicians new to large scale
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
geometry should have no trouble with the material, they say; they
include proofs for most of the theorems, and chapter-end exercises.
Distributed in the US by American Mathematical Society.
QA462 2012-017156 978-0-325-04351-7
Cognition-based assessment & teaching of geometric
shapes; building on students’ reasoning.
Battista, Michael T.
Heinemann, ©2012 150 p. $24.38 (pa)
Battista (mathematics education, Ohio State U.) outlines a cognition-
based, needs-sensitive framework to use with any curriculum to support
teaching that allows all students to understand, make sense of, and
become proficient in elementary-level math, with an emphasis on geo-
metric shapes in this volume. The assessment method focuses on deep
understanding and reasoning within the context of continually assessing
and understanding students’ mathematical thinking, and building on
that thinking with instruction, instead of teaching predetermined, fixed
content. He describes research on students’ development of meaning for
core ideas and reasoning processes in learning geometric shapes, assess-
ments that determine how they are reasoning about these ideas, and dif-
ferentiated instructional activities to help them at each level of reasoning.
Student work examples are included. There is no index.
QA531 978-0-8311-3454-9
Trigonometry for engineering technology; with
mechanical, civil, and architectural applications.
Powers, Gary.
Industrial Press, ©2013 282 p. $39.95 (pa)
Powers (South Hills School of Business and Technology, Pennsylvania)
presents a textbook and workbook for a geometry and trigonometry
course for engineering technology students in their first two years. It is
an affordable alternative to textbooks that combine math, algebra,
geometry, and trigonomics, so are big and expensive. Students are
assumed to have solid algebra skills for solving simple equations and a
working knowledge of the Cartesian coordinate system. Answers and
solutions for the exercises are appended.
QA564 978-3-03719-114-9
Contributions to algebraic geometry; Impanga lecture
notes; proceedings.
Impanga Conference on Algebraic Geometry (2010; Bedlewo, Poland)
Ed. by Piotr Pragacz.
European Mathematical Soc., ©2012 504 p. $128.00
Two of the 19 papers in this collection are by mathematicians who were
not able to attend the conference. The first paper reviews the life and
work of Oscar Zariski (1899-1986), considered the father of modern alge-
braic geometry. Other topics include recent developments and open
problems in linear series, invariants of hypersurfaces and logarithmic
differential forms, lines crossing a tetrahedron and the Bloch group,
some degenerations of G2 and Calabi-Yau varieties, and Shur function
expansions of Thom polynomials. Distributed in the US by the American
Mathematical Society.
QA564 978-3-03719-119-4
Geometry and arithmetic.
Title main entry. Ed. by Carel Faber, Gavril Farkas and Robin de Jong.
(EMS congress reports)
European Mathematical Soc., ©2013 376 p. $98.00
About half of the 21 papers were submitted by participants at the
September 2010 geometry and arithmetic conference held on the island
of Schiermonnikoog in the Netherlands; the other half were invited by
the editors to fill out the theme. The topics include the non-rationality of
the symmetric sextic Fano threefold, approximate computations with
modular curves, new methods for bounding the number of points on
curves over finite fields, wildly ramified actions and surfaces of general
type arising from Artin-Schreier curves, and Getzler’s semi-classical
approximation. There is no index. Distributed in the US by the American
Mathematical Society.
QA564 2012-025768 978-0-8218-7295-6
String-math 2011.
Title main entry. Ed. by Jonathan Block, Jacques Distler, Ron Donagi,
and Eric Sharpe. (Proceedings of symposia in pure mathematics; v85.)
American Mathematical Society, ©2012 484 p. $113.00
The first in a new annual series of conferences exploring the interface of
mathematics and string theory was held in Philadelphia in June 2011,
and the 29 plenary and contributed papers here are the proceedings of
that gathering. Among the topics are elusive worldsheet instantons in het-
erotic string compactifications, the Witten equation and the geometry of
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
the Landau-Ginzburg model, algebraic topological string theory, the
fibrancy of symplectic homology in cotangent bundles, and the theory of
higher rank stable pairs and virtual localization. There is no index.
QA582 2012-023440 978-0-8218-7553-7
Tropical geometry and integrable systems; proceedings.
Conference on Tropical Geometry and Integrable Systems (2011:
University of Glasgow, United Kingdom) Ed. by Chris Athorne et al.
(Contemporary mathematics; v.580)
American Mathematical Society, ©2012 155 p. $62.00 (pa)
Two of the nine papers in this collection introduce tropical geometry and
integrable systems to specialists in the other, emphasizing the max-plus
algebra and other features common to both areas of mathematics. Other
topics include counting algebraic curves with tropical geometry, block tri-
angular bilinear forms and braid group action, the topicalization method
in cluster algebras, and an application of the max-plus spectral theory to
an ultradiscrete analogue of the Lax pair. There is no index.
QA612 2011-281625 978-981-4307-72-7
Etale cohomology theory.
Fu, Lei. (Nankai tracts in mathematics; v.13)
World Scientific, ©2011 611 p. $153.00
Fu (mathematics, Nankai U., China) introduces the theory to prepare
readers for reading more advanced papers on it. He assumes a solid
foundation in commutative algebra. Among the topics are etale mor-
phisms and smooth morphisms, group cohomology and Galois coho-
mology, derived categories and derived functors, duality, and finiteness
theorems.
QA612 2012-006139 978-3-11-027722-7
Topological analysis; from the basics to the triple degree
for nonlinear Fredholm inclusions.
Väth, Martin. (De Gruyter series in nonlinear analysis and applications;
16)
De Gruyter, ©2012 490 p. $168.00
Väth (Freie U. Berlin) introduces topology, functional analysis, and
analysis for advanced readers who have taken a first course in analysis
and are adept in basic calculus and linear algebra. He also develops a
degree theory for function triples that unifies and extends most known
degree theories. The treatment is meant to be self-contained, and many
chapters could serve as the basis for a course in that topic. Among the
topics are multivalued maps, advanced topological tools, the orientation
of families of linear FreDholm operators, function triples, and the degree
for non-compact Fredholm triples.
QA901 2012-012476 978-1-4398-7460-8
Fundamental mechanics of fluids, 4th ed.
Currie, I.G.
CRC Press, ©2013 581 p. $119.95
Currie (U. of Toronto) presents a textbook for senior undergraduate or
beginning graduate courses on the fundamentals of fluid mechanics, to
complement the many texts and courses that detail a particular aspect of
the field. The material can be covered in about 50 lecture hours, he says.
He covers governing equations, ideal-fluid flow, viscous flows of incom-
pressible fluids, the compressible flow of inviscid fluids, and methods of
mathematical analysis. This edition has a new chapter on some useful
methods of analysis, and many new and revised problems.
ASTRONOMY
QB64 2012-360689 978-1-55407-793-9
Deep-sky wonders; a tour of the universe with Sky and
Telescope ’s Sue French.
French, Sue.
Firefly Books Ltd., ©2011 320 p. $39.95
French, a columnist for Star & Telescope magazine and former plane-
tarium educator, presents a well-illustrated tour of deep-sky attractions,
organized by season and month. She conveys her enthusiasm for viewing
planetary nebulae, constellations, stars, the Milky Way, and galaxies
beyond our home one that she lucidly describes. The volume includes
star maps and information on using them, scientific and historical back-
ground, telescope use tips, data summary tables, art illustrations, and
resources.
–218–
QB121 2012-017859 978-0-9832176-0-2
Starstruck; the fine art of astrophotography.
Title main entry. Ed. by Anthony Shostak.
Bates College Museum of Art, ©2012 242 p. $45.00
Produced by the Bates College Museum of Art (Lewiston, ME) in associ-
ation with their exhibition of the same name, this book showcases pho-
tography of galaxies, stars, planets, and atmospheric effects as art. It is
a contribution to an important and growing field, that of art/science col-
laboration. Most of the book consists of photographs by a dozen different
artists and scientists from various countries. Though the majority of pho-
tographers are from the US, the photographs are taken all over the world.
Alfred Steglitz is on hand to provide gravitas, but the other photogra-
phers are living. In addition to the editor’s introduction, four essays by
four authors are included: one on photography by amateur astronomers,
one on the history of astrophotography, one on contemporary develop-
ments, and one on the science of astrophotography. The authors vary
from a Getty Museum photographic curator to the editor of Sky and
Telescope magazine. The images themselves vary from the deep-sky color
photographs made familiar years ago by National Geographic to haunting
and arresting black and white and color photographs of aerial and astro-
nomical phenomena by Hans-Christian Schink, Linda Connor, and
others. Each photograph in the exhibit is given a full page in the book.
QB521 2012931264 978-1-58381-792-6
Hinode Science Meeting; unsolved problems and recent
insights; proceedings.
Hinode Science Meeting (4th: 2010: Mondello, Palermo, Italy) Ed. by
Luis R. Bellot Rubio et al. (Astronomical Society of the Pacific con-
ference series; v.455)
Astronomical Soc./Pacific, ©2012 376 p. $77.00
The 35 papers in this collection discuss outstanding problems in solar
physics and progress toward resolving them based on observations
through the Hinode orbiting satellite and measurements by other ground-
based and space-based instruments. They cover interior, convection, and
dynamo, the formation and evolution of sunspots and active regions; flux
emergence and submergence; waves, reconnection, and chromospheric
and coronal heating; magnetic fields as structuring agents of the solar
atmosphere; flares, eruptions, and particle acceleration; solar wind and
the interplanetary space; and Hinode and Solar Dynamics Observatory.
There is no subject index.
QB581 978-1-61233-122-5
Everything moon; a teacher guide and activities for
teaching and learning about the moon.
Millham, Rosemary A.
Universal Publishers, ©2012 229 p. $28.95 (pa)
Millham (science education, State U. of New York at New Paltz) supplies
teachers with a guide to teaching and learning about the moon, drawing
on data collected during orbital lunar missions, observations of the moon
from Earth, lunar rock samples, and data from instruments left on the
lunar surface. She describes its geologic history and formation, features,
place in space (including phases, tides, and eclipses), and the Apollo
program; addresses misconceptions; and includes student investigations
and activities. B&w photos are incorporated throughout. No index is pro-
vided.
QB603 2012-016321 978-0-12-415977-8
Highlights in helioclimatology; cosmophysical influences
on climate and hurricanes.
Pérez-Peraza, Jorge A. and Igor Y. Libin.
Elsevier, ©2012 284$0.00 p. $150.00
Pérez-Peraza (geophysics, National Free U. of Mexico) and Libin
(International Academy of Appraisal and Consulting, Moscow) synthesize
research into the sun’s influence on Earth’s climate by a number of sci-
entists, and estimate what hazards global climatic variation presents to
humans. They cover climate and global warming, the influence of solar
activity on cosmophysical and geophysical processes, possible influence
of solar activity on terrestrial processes, estimating risks and advantages
of global climate change, and a case study of hurricanes versus African
dust.
QB631 2012-023955 978-1-58542-901-1
An unknown world; notes on the meaning of the earth.
Needleman, Jacob.
Jeremy P. Tarcher / Penguin, ©2012 219 p. $24.95
Needleman (philosophy, San Francisco State U.) presents a series of med-
itations on humanity’s role as stewards of the earth, as well as the earth’s
role in the universe in general. They’re told in a casual, almost story-like
manner. He starts with a dream of his childhood and moves forward in
short chapters groping for answers. He considers how the earth is a
–219–
living system, how the human being yearns to “relate Heaven and Earth
within himself,” what he wants to call “the intentions of the Earth,” the
fragility of human ego, and the unfinishedness of creation.
QB857 978-1-58381-798-8
Galactic archaeology; near-field cosmology and the
formation of the Milky Way; proceedings.
Galactic Archaeology (3d: 2011: Laforet Shuzenji, Japan) Ed. by Wako
Aoki et al. (Astronomical Society of the Pacific conference series; v.458)
Astronomical Soc./Pacific, ©2012 428 p. $77.00
Galactic archaeology uses the spatial distribution, ages, and chemical
compositions of individual stars to reconstruct the formation history of
substructures within galaxies. This conference focused on such investi-
gation in our own Milky Way and neighboring galaxies. The 123 papers
cover nucleoysnthesis, supernovae, and gamma-ray bursts; the early gen-
eration of stars; chemical evolution; the Milky Way Galaxy; local groups
and nearby galaxies; dark matter; and future prospects. Only authors are
indexed. The gathering was planned for May, but postponed until
November because of the earthquake.
QB858 978-3-527-41091-0
Active Galactic Nuclei
Beckmann, Volker and Chris Shrader.
Wiley-VCH, ©2012 351 p. $170.00
Exploring the most energetic persistent objects in the universe, Beckmann
(U. Paris-Diderot) and Shrader (NASA Goddard Space Flight Center)
discuss the observational picture of active galactic nuclei; radiative
processes; the central engine; types and unification; nuclei through the
electromagnetic spectrum; variability; environment; quasars and cos-
mology; formation, evolution and ultimate fate; and what is not yet
known.
PHYSICS
QC20 2012-026128 978-3-11-026396-1
Current algebras on Riemann surfaces; new results and
applications.
Sheinman, Oleg K. (De Gruyter expositions in mathematics; 58)
De Gruyter, ©2012 150 p. $126.00
Sheinman (mathematics, Russian Academy of Sciences, Moscow) intro-
duces a new and growing field at the crossroad of infinite-dimensional
Lie algebra theory and contemporary mathematical physics. He presents
the theory of Krichever-Nobikov algebras, Lax operator algebras, their
interaction, elements of their representation theory, relations to moduli
spaces of Riemann surface and holomorphic vector bundles of them and
to Lax integrable systems and conformal field theory. The treatment is
for beginners in the field and can be used for a one-semester course.
QC20 2012-010830 978-1-61197-226-9
Physics and partial differential equations, v.1
Li, Tatsien and Tiehu Quin.
SIAM, ©2012 264 p. $79.00 (pa)
The fundamental equations in many physical and mechanical disciplines
are partial differential equations, say Li and Qin (both mathematics
Fudan U., Shanghai), but the relationship between the science and the
equations is not always easy to grasp. It is that relationship they con-
centrate on, for the benefit of teachers, graduate and advanced under-
graduate students, and researchers in any field of science or engineering
where partial differential equations play a major role. In this first
volume they cover electrodynamics, fluid dynamics, magneto-hydrody-
namics, reacting fluid dynamics, and elastic mechanics. The first volume
of the Chinese original, Wu li xue yu pian wei fen fang cheng was pub-
lished in 1997 and reprinted with correction in 2000, a month after the
second volume was published. Yachun Li (Shanghai Jiao Tong U.) trans-
lates. No notice is provided about an English version of Volume Two.
QC173 978-3-527-40937-2
Dynamics at solid state surfaces and interfaces; v.1:
Current developments.
Title main entry. Ed. by Uwe Bovensiepen et al.
Wiley-VCH, ©2010 619 p. $180.00
Physicists and chemists offer new researchers an overview of the funda-
mental concepts, techniques, and current developments in ultrafast
dynamics of solid-state surfaces and interfaces. Here they summarize the
status of research of quasiparticle dynamics, collective excitations, het-
erogenous electron transfer, the photoinduced modification of materials,
and applications of novel techniques to study the dynamics of solids and
interfaces. A second volume discusses the fundamental concepts and ele-
mentary processes.
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
QC173 2012-025909 978-1-891389-82-5
A general relativity workbook.
Moore, Thomas A.
University Science Books, ©2013 476 p. $62.50 (pa)
After a century and a half, says Moore (physics, Pomona College,
California) the instrumentation and applications are beginning to catch
up with the theory of general relativity, making it a practical tool in
physics rather than intellectual exercise in mathematics. He has found
that he can now teach the theory to undergraduate students by demon-
strating actual applications. This workbook, with homework pages to be
torn out and handed in, supports a one-semester introduction to general
relativity at the junior or senior undergraduate level. It assumes only that
students have taken multivariate calculus, some intermediate Newtonian
mechanics beyond a standard treatment of mechanics, and electricity
and magnetism at the introductory level. Additional science and mathe-
matics would smooth the way, of course.
QC173 2012-010206 978-1-4665-1047-0
The geometry of special relativity.
Dray, Tevian.
CRC Press, ©2012 131 p. $34.95
Einstein’s unification of time and space in his special theory of relativity
is counterintuitive yet is a cornerstone of modern understanding of the
universe. In a monograph developed from class notes for a course on
Reference Frames as part of a Paradigms in Physics curriculum, Dray
(mathematics, Oregon State U.) presents the postulates, paradoxes, appli-
cations of, and problems with, special relativity. A chapter each is
devoted to non-Euclidian geometry and calculus. The accessible intro-
ductory text includes practice problems with solutions; and supporting
formulas, figures, tables, and a website.
QC173 2012-382312 978-1-84816-769-8
Quantum mechanics; its early development and the road
to entanglement and beyond, new enlarged ed.
Steward, Edward G.
Imperial College Press, ©2012 315 p. $105.00
Steward (emeritus, City U., London) recounts the origin and estab-
lishment of quantum mechanics, with the mathematics in a digestible
form, then goes on to trace developments in the field up to the present.
The book therefore, both introduces physics students to quantum
mechanics, and provides information for historians of science. The math-
ematics follows the original closely, he says, but in modern terms and
uniform notation where possible. He has simplified some auxiliary com-
plications that tickle the fancy of mathematicians but not of many others.
For this edition, Sara McMurry (Trinity College, Dublin) updates the cov-
erage with chapters on indeterminacy and entanglement, and interpre-
tation of quantum mechanics. Distributed in the US by World Scientific.
QC174 978-1-4665-1063-0
Group theory for high energy physicists.
Saleem, Mohammad and Muhammad Rafique.
CRC Press, ©2013 218 p. $79.95
For graduate and undergraduate students in physics and mathematics
and researchers in high energy physics, Saleem (emeritus, physics) and
Rafique (applied mathematics, both U. of the Punjab, India), introduce
group theory from the beginning and describe its applications in high
energy physics. They cover elements of group theory; group representa-
tions; continuous groups; and symmetry, Lie groups, and physics.
QC174 2012-017930 978-0-8218-6863-8
Probability and statistical physics in two and more
dimensions; proceedings.
Clay Mathematics Institute Summer School and XIV Brazilian School
of Probability (14th: 2010: Búzios, Brazil) Ed. by David Ellwood et al.
(Clay mathematics proceedings; v.15)
American Mathematical Society, ©2012 467 p. $114.00 (pa)
Seven lectures delve into recent results in the two areas of mathematics.
They cover Schramm-Loewner evolution and other conformally invariant
objects, noise sensitivity and percolation, scaling limits of random trees
and planar maps, the conformal invariance of lattice models, fractal and
multifractal properties of Schramm-Loewner evolution, random
polymers, and self-avoiding walks. They are not indexed.
QC174 978-0-12-397912-4
Quantum theory of anharmonic effects in molecules
Kazakov, Konstantin V. (Elsevier insights)
Elsevier, ©2012 223 p. $150.00
Kazakov, who is not further identified, presents a new approach to the
physical perturbation theory of systems according to quantum
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
mechanics, in which anharmonic phenomena of vibrations of varied
nature play an important role. His goal is to provide a concise and
precise presentation of the method arising from the evolution of the
theory from traditional perturbation algebra to the more powerful
methods of particular practice in physical problems. One fruitful appli-
cation of the polynomial formalism he describes is calculating the
observable frequencies and intensities of lines in high-resolution spectra
of molecules and their aggregates. Elsevier has offshored its color illus-
trations and indexes to the Internet.
QC174 2011-282956 978-981-4293-37-2
The world according to quantum mechanics; why the
laws of physics make perfect sense after all.
Mohrhoff, Ulrich.
World Scientific, ©2011 298 p. $81.00
Mohrhoff (physics, Sri Aurobindo International Centre of Education,
India) asks “what does it take to have stable objects that ‘occupy space’
while being composed of objects that do not ‘occupy space’?” His answer
is quantum mechanics, which he ambitiously argues structures reality
from the top-down rather than the bottom-up. His book, written like a
textbook for ease of presentation while remaining accessible to non-spe-
cialists, introduces readers to the history, basic stakes and mathematical
concepts of quantum mechanics; issues surrounding probabilities, meas-
urement and quantum states; and ultimately the pitfalls and promise of
making sense of the (he argues mistakenly termed) “macroscopic” world
with quantum mechanics. This text takes a very philosophical approach
to quantum mechanics, but in a way that is more attentive to the
methods and interpretative strategies of actual physicists doing research
than most popular texts on the subject. In the end, he offers some defin-
itive answers to “why the laws of physics are just so,” as well as makes
connections between Indian religion (Vedanta) and the philosophical
outlook quantum mechanics brings into focus.
QC178 2012-026783 978-1-4398-9542-9
Geomathematically oriented potential theory.
Freeden, Willi and Christian Gerhards. (Pure and applied mathe-
matics)
CRC Press, ©2013 452 p. $109.95
German mathematicians Freeden and Gerhards present a textbook for a
two-semester graduate course within a geomathematics curriculum. They
explain the theory of potentials concerned with the Laplace equation
with a particular emphasis on the Earth’s gravitational and magnetic
field. Physics is required to understand the nature of gravitation or mag-
netics, they say, but their goal is to provide insight on how gravitation
and magnetics can be geomathematically handled for the relevant observ-
ables, and how the resulting geopotential problems can be solved in a
systematic, mathematically rigorous framework involving three-dimen-
sional Euclidean space as well as spherical concepts.
QC311.5 978-1-4665-1067-8
Statistical thermodynamics; understanding the properties
of macroscopic systems.
Fai, Lukong Cornelius and Gary Matthew Wysin.
CRC Press, ©2013 534 p. $79.95
Fai (condensed matter physics, U. of Dschang, Cameroon) and Wysin
(physics, Kansas State U.) present a textbook for graduate and practicing
theoretical physicists who are already familiar with statistical thermody-
namics, particularly its experimental dimension. Knowing the micro-
scopic constituents of a system permits its macroscopic parameters to be
evaluated using statistical thermodynamics, he says. Among his topics
are thermodynamic functions, the quantum statistics of ideal gases, mag-
netic and dielectric materials, multiphase systems, and functional inte-
gration in statistical physics.
QC318 2012-008085 978-981-4374-89-7
Entropy and the second law; interpretation and misss-
interpretationsss.
Ben-Naim, Arieh.
World Scientific, ©2012 263 p. $18.00 (pa)
Some readers complained that Ben-Naim (Hebrew U. of Jerusalem) did
not provide proofs for many assertions in his first two semi-popular
books on entropy. He answers that those books were written for general
readers and not students—let alone professionals—in chemistry or
physics. But he has heard their cry, and here provides an account for
readers who do not cringe at the mere sight of a mathematical formula.
The effort also gives him an excuse to expand an argument in an article
he wrote about three years earlier promoting the informational interpre-
tation of entropy and the Second Law of thermodynamics.
–220–
QC320 2012-008650 978-1-119-96079-9
Rotating thermal flows in natural and industrial
processes.
Lappa, Marcello.
John Wiley & Sons, ©2012 522 p. $195.00
Italian scientist Lappa extends the treatment in his Thermal Convection:
Patterns, Evolution and Stability (Wiley, 2010) by focusing on hybrid
regimes of convection in which one of the involved forces is represented
by standard gravity or surface tension gradients while the other arises
by virtue of rotation. He examines the analogies and kinships between
large-scale natural processes in the atmosphere and ocean and the small
scale-processes in laboratories and factories. In particular, he shows that
they share an important group of equations, related from a mathematical
perspective, that model mass, momentum, and energy transfer. He avoids
jargon to make his account accessible to meteorologists, materials scien-
tists, and readers in other fields.
QC321 2011-052322 978-0-470-90293-6
Heat conduction, 3d ed.
Hahn, David W. and M. Necati Özisik.
John Wiley & Sons, ©2012 718 p. $165.00
Having taught from the 1993 second edition of Özysik’s (emeritus,
mechanical and aerospace engineering, North Carolina State U.) graduate
textbook for over a dozen years, Hahn (mechanical and aerospace engi-
neering, U. of Florida-Gainesville) thought often of asking if he wanted
to work together on a third edition. Before he asked, Özysik died in 2008,
so he decided to go it alone. His goal is to preserve the spirit of the
standard contemporary analytic treatment of conduction heat transfer,
and to produce a truly major revision to improve the presentation of the
material covered.
QC374 2012-017895 978-0-8247-2759-8
Optical materials and applications.
Title main entry. Ed. Moriaki Wakaki. (Optical science and engineering)
CRC Press, ©2013 305 p. $139.95
Writing for graduate students, researchers, and practicing engineers,
Japanese and Indian physicists explain the optical characteristics of mate-
rials that are used in devices to manipulate light. They begin by setting
out some basic theory on the optical properties of solids. Then they con-
sider in turn materials for ultraviolet, visible, and infrared light; non-
linear optics; solid-state lasers; optical waveguides; thin films; and
nanophotonics.
QC454 2012-015407 978-1-4398-6765-5
Coherent Raman scattering microscopy.
Title main entry. Ed. by Ji-Xin Cheng and Xiaoliang Sunney Xie.
(Series in cellular and clinical imaging)
CRC Press, ©2013 590 p. $149.95
International contributors in physics, molecular spectroscopy, medical
physics, applied physics, and biomedical engineering demonstrate how
Raman spectroscopy can be used to obtain a point-by-point chemical map
of a live cell or tissue. Early chapters outline the theory of coherent
Raman scattering, while subsequent chapters address various platforms,
describing constructions of a coherent Raman microscope, femtosecond
versus picosecond pulses for coherent Raman microscopy, miniature
coherent Raman probes for in vivo biomedical imaging, and vibrational
phase microscopy. The last part of the book presents applications in
areas such as imaging myelin sheath by CARS microscopy, imaging lipid
metabolism, CARS microscopy studies of liquid crystals, and coherent
Raman scattering imaging of drug delivery systems. The book is illus-
trated with color and b&w images and process diagrams. Cheng teaches
biomedical engineering at Purdue University. Xie teaches chemistry at
Harvard University.
QC481 978-3-527-30774-6
X-Rays, neutrons and muons; photons and particles for
material characterization.
Fischer, Walter E.
Wiley-VCH, ©2012 233 p. $80.00 (pa)
For his last couple decades, theoretical physicist Fischer (1939-2008)
worked to establish a source for neutrons and to use neutrons and
muons to characterize material. In parallel, he set out the theory and
methodology of such characterization as an introduction to what he
hoped would be case studies by other scientists. He was able to complete
his treatment as he succumbed to cancer, and asked colleagues at the
Paul Scherrer Institute in Switzerland to oversee its publication. It covers
the probes and their origin and properties, the interaction of the probes
with constituents of matter, scattering on bulk samples, and a general
theoretical framework.
–221–
QC665 2012-005367 978-1-4666-1921-0
Electromagnetic transients in transformer and rotating
machine windings.
Title main entry. Ed. by Charles Q. Su.
Information Science Reference, ©2013 568 p. $195.00
Electromagnetic transients have a major impact on all aspects of high
voltage equipment in electrical power systems, and abnormal transient
voltages and currents must be carefully considered in winding insulation
design, circuit switching, and lightning protection in order to improve
network reliability. Electrical engineers here explain the basic theories,
modeling, and applications. Their topics include frequency characteristics
of transformer windings, ferro-resonance in power and instrument trans-
formers, the computer modeling of rotating machines, transformer insu-
lation design based on the analysis of impulse voltage distribution, and
using ultrahigh frequency techniques to detect and locate partial dis-
charges in transformers.
QC718 978-3-527-41134-4
Fusion plasma physics, 2d ed.
Stacey, Weston M.
Wiley-VCH, ©2012 647 p. $165.00
Stacey (Georgia Institute of Technology, US) presents a textbook for
graduate and advanced undergraduate students in physics, nuclear engi-
neering, and other disciplines offering courses in fusion plasma physics.
He incorporates the significant developments in magnetic fusion plasma
physics and supporting technology that have emerged during the nearly
seven years since the first edition was published. The topics include mag-
netic confinement, plasma equilibria, turbulent transport, plasma edge,
and operational limits.
QC718 2012-024642 978-1-4398-7848-4
Waves and oscillations in plasmas.
Pécseli, Hans L. (Series in plasma physics)
CRC Press, ©2013 553 p. $119.95
Pécseli (U. of Oslo, Norway) has developed his lecture notes for a course
in plasma physics—the study of dynamics in charged particle. Students
are not assumed to have previous knowledge of plasma physics, though
he recommends basic mathematics through Fourier transforms. The
book provides a broad foundation for more advanced courses. The topics
include linear wave dynamics, natural occurrences of plasmas, electro-
static waves in warm homogeneous and isotropic plasmas, weakly non-
linear electrostatic drift waves, and kinetic plasma sound waves.
QC753 978-3-03785-436-5
Magnetism and magnetic materials V (MISM 2011);
proceedings.
Moscow International Symposium on Magnetism (5th: 2011: Moscow,
Russia) Ed. by N. Perov and V. Rodionova. (Solid state phenomena;
v.190)
Trans Tech Publications, ©2012 755 p. $276.00 (pa)
One-hundred eighty papers from the August 2011 symposium share new
developments in low dimensional magnetism, magnetic semiconductors
and oxides, transport phenomena and spintronics, magnetophotonics,
high frequency magnetic materials, multiferroics, shape memory alloys,
the magnetic properties of strongly correlated systems, and supercon-
ductivity. Most of the researchers are Russian, with multiple papers
coming from Chelyabinsk State University, Moscow State University, the
Siberian Federal University, and the Kirensky Institute of Physics. Topics
include a chiral model of graphene, spin-polarized current in magnetic
nanowires, numerical simulation of magnetic cooling cycles, the effect of
electron irradiation on lanthanum manganites, and MRI of malignant
tumorigenesis.
QC793 978-3-527-40847-4
Electron and proton kinetics and dynamics in flaring
atmospheres.
Zharkova, Valentina.
Wiley-VCH, ©2012 422 p. $185.00
Too often scientists cannot see the charged particles for the plasma when
they study the Sun, stars, magnetospheres, interplanetary space, and lab-
oratory experiments, says Zharkova (applied mathematics, U. of
Bradford, Britain), but these invisible subatomic particles are behind all
the macro phenomena such as temperature, density, and electric and
magnetic fields. She investigates processes of non-equilibrium in flaring
atmospheres with a consideration of particle kinetics, dynamics, and
radiative processes. Among the topics are particle acceleration in flares,
the continuity equation approach to electron-beam precipitation, hydro-
dynamic response to particle injection, microwave emission and polar-
ization, non-thermal hydrogen emission caused by electron beams, and
sunquakes associated with solar flares.
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
QC793 2012-008917 978-1-4398-5357-3
Interaction of radiation with matter.
Nikjoo, Hooshang et al.
CRC Press, ©2012 348 p. $129.95
Nikjoo (radiation biophysics, Karolinska Institutet, Sweden), Shuzo
Uehara (physics, Kyushu U., Japan), and Dimitris Emfietzoglou (medical
physics, U. of Ioannina, Greece) explore the physics of the interaction of
ionizing radiation in water and the Monte Carlo simulation of radiation
tracks. They begin with the elementary knowledge of the radiation field,
then turn to the cross-sections for electrons and heavy ions—the most
important information needed to simulate radiation tracks at the
molecular level. A final section discusses in some detail the inelastic scat-
tering and energy loss of charged particles in condensed media, empha-
sizing liquid water. The book was designed partly as a textbook for
radiation interactions courses for master’s and doctorate students of
medical physics, health physics, and nuclear engineering.
QC793 2012-023635 978-0-470-76900-3
A matter of density; exploring the electron density
concept in the chemical, biological, and materials
sciences.
Title main entry. Ed. by N. Sukumar.
John Wiley & Sons, ©2013 318 p. $125.00
Chemists present a unified treatment of the theoretical foundations of the
electron density concept, beginning with its statistical underpinnings, the
use of probabilities in statistical physics, and the origins of quantum
mechanics. Then they survey applications of the electron density concept
in chemical, biological, and materials sciences. Among the topics are
probability concepts in physics as the path to statistical mechanics, atoms
in molecules, density-functional approximations for exchange and corre-
lation, electron density and molecular similarity, probing electron
dynamics with the Laplacian of the momentum density, and applications
of modern density functional theory to surfaces and interfaces.
QC866 2012-013823 978-0-393-06798-9
Air; the restless shaper of the world.
Logan, William Bryant.
W.W. Norton, ©2012 398 p. $26.95
William Bryant Logan is a member of the faculty at the New York
Botanic Garden. This is a good credential for taking up the daunting task
of following in the footsteps of John McPhee, the most famous and
honored contemporary writer of popular narrative nonfiction. This book
takes up the genre McPhee made famous with his book Oranges: take a
common object or substance as the one-word title of your book, and tell
the reader all about it. This is Logan’s third entry in the genre; this one
is about air. The strongest of writers have quailed at the thought of going
head-to-head with McPhee as a prose stylist in this genre, so this review
will not make the comparison. At their worst, such books are narrow
and pedestrian. At their best, they throw open a narrow window through
which readers can enter and discover the whole wide world. Logan
understands the best goal of the enterprise. Air is a very big subject for
such a book; the author knows this and organizes his work carefully. As
a naturalist, he focuses mostly not on air itself but on what’s in it: the
seeds of life, baby spiders, planes, clouds, birds, words, music, light.
Eventually we discover that not only are we all suspended in air, it is
equally suspended in all of us. The book is engagingly divided into
chapters based on the verbs of air: floating, spinning, flying, telling,
calling, breathing, shining.
QC880 2012-022179 978-0-12-384866-6
An introduction to dynamic meteorology, 5th ed.
Holton, James R. and Gregory J. Hakim.
Academic Press, ©2013 532 p. $94.95
Holton (1938-2004) asked his colleague Hakim (both U. of Washington-
Seattle) to join him as coauthor for this edition, then abruptly left him to
finish on his own. He has taken the opportunity to introduce some fresh
perspectives, taking care to retain the features that have made the text the
standard for generations of graduate and undergraduate students in the
atmospheric sciences, practitioners in the field, and people in neigh-
boring fields who want an accessible introduction.
QC903 978-3-643-90180-4
Mainstreaming climate change adaptation into
Development Assistance; "What it shapes and what it
takes"; An analysis of policy, practice and implications
with evidence from German Official Development
Assistance.
Iro, Andrea. (Studies on international environmental policy; v.14)
LIT Verlag, ©2012 275 p. $44.95 (pa)
Iro investigates implications of adapting to climate change for
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
development policy and practice, and possible entry points and key
constraints for mainstreaming such adaptation. In particular, she asks
why adapting to climate change has only recently reached the top of the
agenda in development assistance. She also examines how development
aid agencies in general, and the German organizations in particular,
dealing with the challenge of climate change and adapting to it. The
study began as her doctoral dissertation, perhaps at the University of
Potsdam. It is not indexed. Distributed in the US by ISBS.
QC955 2012-030101 978-0-7844-1250-3
Joplin, Missouri, tornado of May 22, 2011; structural
damage survey and case for tornado-resilient building
codes.
Title main entry. Ed. by David O. Prevatt et al.
Am. Society of Civil Engineers, ©2013 54 p. $50.00 (pa)
Aimed at structural engineers, construction professionals, building code
officials, and risk managers, this report presents the observations,
findings, and recommendations of a team of building and construction
professionals that surveyed the residential structures, critical facilities,
and schools affected by the tornado that hit Joplin, Missouri, on May 22,
2011, which destroyed about 5,000 buildings and killed about 150 people.
Prevatt (U. of Florida) et al. aim to gather information to improve under-
standing of predominant structural failure mechanisms associated with
tornadic wind loads and support future development and modification
of building design guidelines and standards. They explain their data col-
lection methodology, which documented damage and assigned failure
mechanisms to about 150 buildings. They provide an overview of the
tornado and its formation and passage across Joplin, as well as details
on the demographics of the building stock, then describe the damage in
residential buildings, commercial structures, and critical facilities;
damage in relation to the Enhanced Fujita Scale; a new design phi-
losophy regarding tornadoes; and recommendations to develop guide-
lines for tornado-resilient construction.
QC981 978-1-77022-364-6
Extreme environment; how environmental exaggeration
harms emerging economies.
Vegter, Ivo.
Zebra Press, ©2013 321 p. $25.00 (pa)
Journalist Vegter claims that environmental dangers are exaggerated and
argues that less-developed countries should not be subjected to environ-
mental policies that only rich nations can afford. He downplays the
nuclear disaster in Japan, the Deepwater Horizon oil spill, and evidence
of climate change, and points to deception and exaggeration by officials,
consultants, contractors, and activists. Several chapters are devoted to
fracking. The book includes color maps, explanatory diagrams, and
photos. It is distributed in the US by International Publishers Marketing.
QC981 978-1-61635-393-3
Fiscal policy to mitigate climate change; a guide for
policymakers.
Title main entry. Ed. by Ian W.H. Parry et al.
Intl. Monetary Fund, ©2012 198 p. $28.00 (pa)
This volume from the International Monetary Fund (IMF) provides policy
makers with practical guidelines for the design and implementation of
climate change mitigation policies, illustrating that fiscal instruments,
namely carbon taxes and their cap-and-trade equivalents, can be the
focus of policies to reduce energy-related carbon dioxide emissions, and
that these pricing policies can become a new source of government
revenue. The volume collects eight policy briefs from a workshop held in
September 2011 by the IMF’s Fiscal Affairs Department, which address
specific questions in creating carbon pricing legislation: how strong the
case is for pricing instruments over regulatory approaches, how carbon
taxes and cap-and-trade systems compare, and alternatives if ideal
pricing instruments are not viable; the design of a carbon pricing system
in terms of covering emissions sources, using revenues, overcoming
implementation obstacles, and combining it with other instruments, and
how pricing policies can be coordinated across different countries; how
policy makers should think about the appropriate level of emissions
pricing; the importance and feasibility of including the forest sector in
carbon pricing schemes; the priorities for developing economies in terms
of fiscal reforms to reduce emissions; the most promising fiscal instru-
ments and how they should be designed, from the perspective of raising
funds from developed economies to fund climate projects in developing
economies; and what lessons can be drawn from emissions pricing pro-
grams like the European Emissions Trading System or various carbon
tax programs. Contributors are from Europe and the US and work at the
US Environmental Protection Agency, International Monetary Fund, uni-
versities, and other agencies.
–222–
CHEMISTRY
QD31 2011-934948 978-1-133-10982-2
Introduction to general, organic, and biochemistry
(hybrid), 10th ed. (online access included)
Title main entry. Ed. by Frederick A. Bettelheim et al.
Brooks/Cole Publishing, ©2013 832 p. $169.95 (pa)
This hybrid text introduces basic and increasingly advanced concepts,
practices, and research-areas in general, organic, and biochemistry. It
presents the subject matter progressively and with an emphasis on
chemical underpinnings biology and medicine in the latter two sections.
This approach makes the text especially well-suited for pre-med students
and those in related health- and life-sciences. Certain content, such as
end-of-chapter problem-sets, is accessible online through the UMASS
Amherst website with a key that comes with the text. Chapters are
written in a single column, with large margins of key-terms and other
annotations, as well as numerous boxed text sections that illustrate the
“chemical connection” in practical scenarios. In the back are mathe-
matical appendices and an indexed glossary. The contributors are expe-
rienced researchers and professors of chemistry and biochemistry.
QD40 978-3-03785-456-3
Advances in chemistry research II; proceedings; 3v.
International Conference on Chemical Engineering and Advanced
Materials (CEAM 2012), (2d, 2012: Guangzhou, China). Ed. by Shuang
Chen et al. (Advanced materials research; v.554-556 )
Trans Tech Publications, ©2012 2146 p. $414.00 (pa)
The first volume of this three-volume set from the July 2012 conference
presents recent research on supramolecular chemistry, crystal engi-
neering, polymer chemistry, inorganic materials, the physical chemistry
of solid surface catalysis, and electrochemistry. Contributors from the
Southwest University of Science and Technology in China study the
degradation of corn starch in NaOH/urea, the synthesis of Konjac gluco-
mannan, the thermal stability of glucose polymers, and the effect of
alkali on the compressive strength of metakaolin. Volume two explores
chiral catalysis, organic synthesis, and food chemistry. The last volume
reports developments in food sensory science, computational chemistry,
medicinal chemistry, and environmental chemistry with researchers
tackling such diverse topics as the effect of refrigeration processes on
steamed bread, heavy metal pollution in lake sediment, and the anti-dia-
betic activities of hovenia dulcis thunb.
QD79 2012-012782 978-0-12-385540-4
Gas chromatography.
Title main entry. Ed. by Colin F. Poole.
Elsevier, ©2012 743 p. $200.00
This anthology begins with Walter Jennings’ experience as one of the
major pioneers and innovators in gas chromatography. Articles cover
analytic chemistry in academic, government, and corporate laboratories
then discuss such aspects as packed columns for gas-liquid and gas-solid
chromatography, sample introduction methods, field and portable instru-
ments, analyzing essential oils and fragrances, and emerging and per-
sistent environmental compound analysis.
QD181 2012-025732 978-1-118-07856-3
Efficient preparation of fluorine compounds.
Title main entry. Ed. by Herbert W. Roesky.
John Wiley & Sons, ©2013 454 p. $125.00
About 20% of pharmaceuticals and 30% of agrochemical compounds
contain fluorine, and the proportion is increasing. Meanwhile, back on
campus, interest in fluorine chemistry is steadily decreasing. Experienced
chemists were asked to write about their discoveries in a way that would
allow young scientists to reproduce their results, and use the fluorine-
containing compounds to add new facets to their research. A sampling
of the 68 procedures turns up a room-temperature non-irradiative syn-
thesis of XeF2, preparing transition metal sulfide fluorides, delocalized
lipophilic cations as a source of naked fluoride and phase-transfer cata-
lysts, preparing pentafluorosulfanyl carbonyl compounds, synthesizing
original fluoromonomers and their radical co-polymerization with
vinylidene fluoride, and the safe synthesis of super-stoichiometric meso-
porous fluorocarbons.
QD241 978-3-527-33377-6
Organic Chemistry; Breakthroughs and Perspectives
Title main entry. Ed. by Kuiling Ding and Li-Xin Dai.
Wiley-VCH, ©2012 802 p. $140.00
Teachers and researchers of chemistry summarize development in
organic chemistry over the past two decades or so, and comment on the
accounts of others, to provide overlapping perspectives. The topics
–223–
include diversity-oriented syntheses of natural products and natural
product-like compounds, carbohydrate synthesis towards glycobiology,
flourishing frontiers in organofluorine chemistry, a novel catalysis for
alkene polymerization mediated by post-metallocenes as a gateway to
new polyalkenes, and organic materials and chemistry for bulk hetero-
junction solar cells.
QD253 2010-939442 978-1-111-42556-2
Organic chemistry; a short course, 13th ed. (online access
included)
Hart, David J. et al.
Brooks/Cole Publishing, ©2012 580 p. $231.95
Over 50 years old now, this textbook is updated here from its 2007
edition. It supports a course for students who will probably not major in
chemistry, but whose main interest requires some knowledge of organic
chemistry, such as biological or medical fields. It is designed for a one-
semester introductory course, but has been used in a course of one or
two quarters, and even with other texts in a full course. The main
changes to this edition has been in the graphics, but some new problems
have also been added and the text clarified where there was some con-
fusion. The topics include bonding and isomerism, aromatic compounds,
ethers and epoxides, amine and related nitrogen compounds, synthetic
polymers, and carbohydrates.
QD281 978-1-4665-7239-3
Reduction in organic synthesis.
Ahluwalia, V.K. (Ane’s chemistry series)
CRC Press, ©2013 141 p. $89.95
A large number of organic syntheses involve reduction at some stage,
says Ahluwalia (biomedical research, U. of Delhi, India), and he presents
a comprehensive account of different types of reducing agents and their
applications. Among the special types of organic compounds he con-
siders are hydrocarbons, alcohols, phenols, aldehydes, ketones, carboxylic
acids and their derivatives, nitro compounds, and nitriles. In most cases,
he also describes the mechanism of the reactions involving reduction.
Most of the reductions require solvents that are harmful to the envi-
ronment, he concedes, so he also describes some reductions under
benign conditions. The information could be useful to any student,
researcher, or chemist who conducts organic synthesis.
QD331 978-3-527-32946-5
Aromaticity and other conjugation effects.
Gleiter, Rolf and Gebhard Haberhauer.
Wiley-VCH, ©2012 452 p. $170.00
This overview of conjugation effects in organic chemistry is for second-
year undergraduate through advanced students in chemistry who have
completed first-year courses in organic and theoretical chemistry. The
book describes various concepts of bonding by first presenting the exper-
imental results which led to their postulation, followed by molecular-
orbital-based reasoning based on perturbation theory within a
one-electron model. This is further refined by experimental data and
results based on ab initio calculations. Chapters progress from conjugated
pi systems to through-space interactions between pi systems, hypercon-
jugative interactions, and theoretical models. Reference appendices offer
character tables, equations, and an energy conversion table.Gleiter is
affiliated with the University of Heidelberg. Haberhauer teaches chem-
istry at the University of Duisburg-Essen.
QD381 978-0-444-56347-7
High-pressure fluid phase equilibria; phenomenology and
computation.
Deiters, Ulrich K. and Thomas Kraska (Supercritical fluid science and
technology; v.2)
Elsevier, ©2012 342 p. $170.00
The many textbooks and references on phase equilibrium thermody-
namics that have appeared over the past century have paid little attention
to high pressure, say Deiters and Kraska (physical chemistry, U. of
Cologne, Germany). They show that pressure can do more than shift
boiling temperature a few degrees, but can bring about qualitative
changes of phase equilibria and give rise to unusual phase separation
phenomena. Their topics are the phenomenology of phase diagrams,
experimental observation of phase equilibria, thermodynamic variables
and functions, stability and equilibrium, solid-fluid equilibrium, equa-
tions of state for pure fluids and mixtures, and global phase diagrams.
QD382 978-0-444-56331-6
Molecularly imprinted sensors; overview and applications.
Li, Songjun et al.
Elsevier, ©2012 370 p. $200.00
Analytical chemists and materials science and engineering scientists
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
from Asia and Europe address selected issues with the particular type of
sensors used in diagnostic applications. The topics include molecularly
imprinted polymers as recognition elements in sensors, the fabrication
and development of molecularly imprinted polymer-based sensors for
environmental applications, comparing optical and mass-sensitive
detection, discriminating analytes with fluorescent molecular imprinting
sensor arrays, luminescent optical sensors based on nanoscale molecu-
larly imprinted polymers, conductive polymers for plastic electronics, and
molecularly imprinted sol-gel sensors.
QD412 2011-277760 978-1-118-34445-3
Allylboration of carbonyl compounds.
Hall, Dennis G. and Hugo Lachance.
John Wiley & Sons, ©2012 585 p. $75.00 (pa)
Hall (chemistry, U. of Alberta) and his former student Lachance, now
with a drug company, offer organic chemists a broad treatment of allylic
boron compounds, a class of synthetic reagents that over 25 years have
become the choice in the stereoselective synthesis of homoallylic alcohols
by allyl transfer to carbonyl compounds. Over 500 pages are devoted to
details of experimental procedures and related tables. Introductory
chapters look at mechanisms and stereochemistry, scope and limitations,
applications to the synthesis of natural products, comparisons with other
methods, and experimental conditions.
QD412 2011-019446 978-0-470-74907-4
The chemistry of organomanganese compounds; R-Mn.
Title main entry. Ed. by Zvi Rappoport and Ilan Marek. (PATAI’s chem-
istry of functional groups)
John Wiley & Sons, ©2011 831 p. $850.00
Part of a highly-regarded series, this handbook offers a thorough
overview of the topic, written by 28 chemists at institutions in 9 countries
worldwide. The initial chapter presents an introduction to the discoveries
of manganese, early developments and uses, a description of the element,
and detailed discussion of the dimer, clusters, hydrides, and methyl
derivatives, describing individual complexes in sequence. The remaining
12 chapters are presented in the same thorough, clearly organized
format, with topics that include structural organomanganese chemistry,
structures and reaction mechanisms of manganese oxidants, organoman-
genese-mediated radical reactions, and the chemistry of manganese eno-
lates. The editors note the omission of manganese-containing
photosystem II due to extensive coverage elsewhere. Each chapter is illus-
trated with b&w and color diagrams and includes both a detailed table
of contents of the chapter and a full list of references. Rappoport is at the
Hebrew U. in Jerusalem, Marek is at Technion, the Israel Institute of
Technology.
QD412 978-3-527-33043-0
Isocyanide chemistry; applications in synthesis and
material science.
Title main entry. Ed. by Valentine Nenajdenko.
Wiley-VCH, ©2012 605 p. $185.00
Isocyanide, or isonitrile, chemistry attracted much attention at the end of
the 20th century when the stable carbene began being used for diversity-
oriented synthesis, high throughput screening, and drug discovery. Here
chemists from around the world offer a broad reference to the field
today. The topics include chiral non-racemic isocyanides, Ugi and
Passerine reactions with carboxylic acid surrogates, multiple multi-com-
ponent reactions with isocyanides, the synthesis of pyrroles and their
derivatives from isocyanides, and carbene complexes derived from metal-
bound isocyanides.
QD412 2011-053468 978-0-470-56665-7
Solid-phase palladium chemistry.
Title main entry. Ed. by Peter J. H. Scott. (Wiley series on solid-phase
organic syntheses; v.2)
John Wiley & Sons, ©2012 168 p. $150.00
Since palladium-mediated cross-coupling reactions were introduced
during the late 1970s and early 1980s, they have revolutionized the
science of carbon-carbon bond formation and become a workhorse in the
modern synthetic organic chemistry laboratory. Chemists here describe
palladium-mediated solid-phase organic synthesis, immobilized catalysts
and ligands, and palladium-mediated multifunctional cleavage. Among
the topics are solid-phase reactions of polymer-bound arenesulfonates
with aryl Grignard reagents, resin-to-resin transfer reactions through
Sonogashira coupling, polyaniline-immobilized palladium for Suzuki-
Miyuaura coupling reactions in water, solid-phase reactions of resin-sup-
ported boronic acids, and the palladium-catalyzed solid-phase synthesis
of allelic amines.
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
QD415 2012-008652 978-1-119-97668-4
Asymmetric synthesis of natural products, 2d ed.
Koskinen, Ari M.P.
John Wiley & Sons, ©2012 306 p. $155.00
Koskinen (chemistry, Aalto U., Finland) presents a textbook based on a
one-semester, 24-hour lecture course for senior undergraduate and
beginning graduate students that combines asymmetric synthesis with
natural product synthesis. It covers chirality, topology, and asymmetric
synthesis; asymmetric synthesis; sugars; amino acids, peptides, and pro-
teins; nucleosides, nucleotides, and nucleic acids; polyketides; terpenes;
shikimic acid derivatives; and alkaloids. He updates the 1992 first edition
to account for organometallic and chiral chemistry, and computer mod-
eling going mainstream.
QD415 2012-011091 978-0-470-61618-5
Modern tools for the synthesis of complex bioactive
molecules.
Title main entry. Ed. by Janine Cossy and Stellios Aryseniyadis.
John Wiley & Sons, ©2012 581 p. $149.95
Chemists and chemical engineers present case studies that show how
modern tools for synthesis have changed the way chemists design their
synthesis of complex biologically active molecules. Among them are the
Negishi cross-coupling, metal-catalyzed carbon-heteroatom cross-coupling
reactions, enantioselective organocatalysis, asymmetric phase-transfer
catalysis, the fluorous linker-facilitated synthesis of biologically inter-
esting molecules, synthetic approaches to bioactive carbohydrates, the
precursor-directed biosynthesis of polyketide and non-ribosomal peptide
natural products, and DNA as a tool for molecular discovery.
QD453 2012-024640 978-1-4665-1846-9
Physical chemistry for engineering and applied sciences.
Foulkes, Frank R.
CRC Press, ©2013 703 p. $89.95
Foulkes (emeritus, chemical engineering and applied chemistry, U. of
Toronto) presents a textbook for a course he took in his first year as an
engineering student, then later taught. Most introductory physical chem-
istry textbooks are for students in chemistry, so he has written one for
students of engineering and applied sciences. It downplays theoretical
aspects such as quantum mechanics, atomic structure, molecular spec-
troscopy in favor of such practical aspects as melting points, how to
balance a chemical reaction, and how to calculate the voltage of a car
battery. He also kept in mind the pocketbooks of beginning students.
QD455 978-3-527-33195-6
Molecular and supramolecular information processing;
from molecular switches to logic systems
Title main entry. Ed. by Evgeny Katz.
Wiley-VCH, ©2012 363 p. $190.00
The possibility of molecular systems for processing information has
attracted much scientific attention in recent years, and here chemists
report some experimental work by chemists and theoretical work by
physicists and computer scientists. Among the topics are binary logic
with synthetic molecular and supramolecular species, photonically
switched molecular logic devices, toward arithmetic circuits in subex-
citable chemical media, Kabbalistic-Leibnizian automata for simulating
the universe, and electrode interfaces switchable by physical and
chemical signals operating as a platform for information processing. Katz
has also assembled a sequel, Biomolecular Information Processing: From
Logic Systems to Smart Sensors and Actuators.
QD461 978-0-19-965741-4
Molecules & models; the molecular structures of main
group element compounds. (reprint, 2008)
Haaland, Arne.
Oxford U. Press, ©2012 313 p. $62.99 (pa)
Haaland (chemistry, U. of Oslo) concentrates on bond distances, bond
energies and coordination geometries in this systematic description of
about 300 representative compounds in Groups 1 and 2 and 12 through
18. Haaland has gathered his data from hundreds of references and sup-
plies tabulations of structure data, thermodynamic data and atomic
energy levels. He begins with the atomic properties of one-electron and
two-electron atoms, then explains the atomic properties and periodic
trends of atoms with more than two electrons, homonuclear diatomic
molecules, gaseous alkali metal haloids with ionic bonds, other het-
eronuclear diatomic molecules with polar covalent bonds, the Lewis
cubical atom model, molecular orbital calculations on heteronuclear
diatomic molecules (as well as hybridization and estimation of net
atomic charges from calculated electron densities), homonuclear diatomic
species of certain second-period elements, structure and bonding
–224–
(including in simple compounds of the Group 14 elements and those in
other Groups), and electron deficient molecules. This is a paperback
reprint of a book first published in 2008.
QD466 978-3-527-32896-3
Isotopic analysis; fundamentals and applications using
ICP-MS.
Title main entry. Ed. by Frank Vanhaecke and Patrick Degryse.
Wiley-VCH, ©2012 529 p. $120.00
Chemists and geological scientists explain how to use inductively coupled
plasma mass spectrometry (ICP-MS) to measure the proportions of iso-
topes in an element sample. Among their topics are the isotopic compo-
sition of the elements, reference materials in isotopic analysis,
geochronological dating, establishing the basis for using stable isotope
ratios of metals as paleo-redox proxies, forensic applications, and using
stable isotope techniques to study mineral and trace element metabolism
in humans.
QD501 2012-025722 978-1-84821-425-5
Flows and chemical reactions.
Prud’homme, Roger.
ISTE/Wiley, ©2012 359 p. $165.00
Prud’homme (emeritus, aerothermics and mechanical modeling,
National Center of Scientific Research, Paris) explains that aerothermo-
chemistry is a new scientific discipline mainly concerned with estab-
lishing coherent systems of equations, with their boundary and interface
conditions, that can model and deal with complex situations involving
multiple parameters. Phenomena that combine chemical reactions, fluid
flows, and heat exchange are among such situations. He presents equa-
tions of homogeneous laminar flows, interfaces, and lines. More specifi-
cally, he looks at simple fluids, with only one chemical component; the
flow of fluid mixture in the presence of chemical reactions; and inter-
faces and lines, which have been discussed widely over the past half
century but are still little known.
QD505 978-3-527-32349-4
Catalysis; from principles to applications
Title main entry. Ed. by Mattias Beller et al.
Wiley-VCH, ©2012 642 p. $90.00
For use in an advanced catalysis course, the book explains the funda-
mentals of catalysis that have been developed over the past decades, and
introduces new catalytic systems that are of increasing importance. Both
the theory and the practice of catalysis are currently being transformed
by the growing understanding of the molecular chemistry underlying
catalytic phenomena. The topics include the kinetics of heterogeneous cat-
alytic reactions, electrocatalysis, zeolite catalysis, porous materials as cat-
alysts and catalyst supports, and catalytic reactor engineering.
QD506 2012001518 978-1-119-99036-9
Surface science; foundations of catalysis and nanoscience,
3d ed.
Kolasinski, Kurt W.
John Wiley & Sons, ©2012 556 p. $195.00
Kolasinski (chemistry, West Chester U., Pennsylvania) introduces students
of chemistry, physics, and material science to the chemical transfor-
mation and the formation of structures at surfaces. After establishing the
vocabulary of the science, he describes the research tools used and the
principles that guide thinking, aid interpretation, and enhance pre-
diction. The topics include surface and adsorbate structure, experimental
probes and techniques, thermodynamic and kinetics of adsorption and
desorption, heterogeneous catalysis, and laser and non-thermal chem-
istry. Answers to chapter-end exercises are appended.
QD511 2011-052540 978-0-12-251100-4
Practical chemical thermodynamics for geoscientists.
Fegley, Bruce, Jr.
Academic Press, ©2013 674 p. $124.95
Fegley (planetary chemistry, Washington U. in Saint Louis) presents a
textbook for a graduate or advanced undergraduate course introducing
students of earth and planetary sciences to chemical thermodynamics
and its application in their fields. Students, researchers, and practitioners
who need to review one or more aspects of chemical thermodynamics
could use the book as a reference. His topics include important concepts
and mathematical methods, thermal properties of pure substances and
some applications, the second law of thermodynamics and entropy, equa-
tions of state, chemical equilibria, and solutions. Answers to problems
are on the associated Web site. Academic Press is an imprint of Elsevier.
–225–
QD581 978-3-527-33006-5
Plasma chemistry and catalysis in gases and liquids.
Title main entry. Ed. by Vasile Parvulescu et al.
Wiley-VCH, ©2012 401 p. $185.00
Chemists and physicists examine plasma-chemical and plasma-catalytic
processes associated with low-temperature plasma generated by electrical
discharges in gas, liquid, and gas-liquid environments. Non-thermal
plasmas offer a unique way to initiate chemical reactions in the gas and
liquid phases that have potential for practical use in different environ-
mental, biological, or medical applications; energy; and molecular syn-
thesis. The topics include non-equilibrium plasmas at atmospheric
pressure, experimental work on removing volatile organic compounds
from air by plasma-assisted catalysis, elementary chemical and physical
phenomena in electrical discharge plasma in gas-liquid environments
and in liquids, biological effects of electrical discharge plasma in water
and in gas-liquid environments, and producing hydrogen and syngas
from hydrocarbons.
QD875 2012-405838 978-3-527-33093-5
Molecules at work; selfassembly, nanomaterials,
molecular machinery.
Title main entry. Ed. by Bruno Pignataro.
Wiley-VCH, ©2012 391 p. $140.00
Presentations selected from the European Young Chemist Award at the
Third European Association for Chemical and Molecular Sciences, held
August-September 2010, are collected in two volumes. This one covers the
generic area of functional molecular and supramolecular materials. The
topics include yoctoliter-sized vessels as potential biological models, ana-
lyzing the surface area properties of microporous materials, luminescent
dendrimers, surface-functionalized inorganic colloidal nanocrystals in
functional nanocomposite materials for microfabrication, and photo-
chemically driven molecular devices and machines. The other volume is
New Strategies in Chemical Synthesis and Catalysis.
QD878 2012-011090 978-0-470-28175-8
Self-assembled supramolecular architectures; lyotropic
liquid crystals.
Title main entry. Ed. by Nissim Garti et al. (Wiley series on surface
and interfacial chemistry)
John Wiley & Sons, ©2012 378 p. $135.00
Chemists and materials scientists examine both fundamental and applied
aspects of the complex fluids, which show potential to serve as microre-
actors, template systems for interfacial crystallization, and other devices
and may soon be used as carriers of bioactives in pharmaceutical, cos-
metic, and food contexts. The topics include the physics of self-assembly
of lyotropic liquid crystals, the nanocharacterization of lyotropic liquid
crystalline systems, hierarchically organized systems based on liquid
crystalline phases, recent developments in lyotropic liquid crystals as
drug delivery vehicles, and stimulus-responsive lipid-based self-
assembled systems.
QD921 2011-046055 978-0-470-68827-4
The importance of Pi-interactions in crystal engineering;
frontiers in crystal engineering.
Title main entry. Ed. by Edward R.T. Tiekink and Julio Zukerman-
Schpector.
John Wiley & Sons, ©2012 376 p. $180.00
In this third volume of the series Frontiers in Crystal Engineering,
chemists focus on pi...pi and carbon-hydrogen...pi interactions where the
pi system is typically an all organic aromatic ring. Early chapters on the
nature of the interactions themselves give way to chapters on implications
of such interactions in crystal engineering. Among the topics are new
aspects of the aromatic interactions in crystal engineering, conforma-
tional flexibility and selectivity in host-guest systems, halogen-pi interac-
tions as important contributors to binding affinity in medicinal
chemistry, non-covalent interactions of pi -systems in crystal structures of
transition-metal complexes, and the supramolecular assembly of silver(I)
complexes with argentophilic and silver-carbon interactions.
GEOLOGY
QE33 2012-418344 978-0-470-18315-1
Geostatistics; modeling spatial uncertainty, 2d ed.
Chilés, Jean-Paul and Pierre Delfiner. (Wiley series in probability and
statistics)
John Wiley & Sons, ©2012 699 p. $125.00
In its first use, geostatistics referred to a methodology of evaluating ore
reserves, but it is now applied widely in the earth sciences for land,
atmosphere, and the oceans as well as subsurface materials. Chilès
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
(geosciences and geoengineering, MINES ParisTech) and Delfiner, a
consultant in Paris, have compiled information about both theory and
applications in the discipline that were scattered, not easily accessible, or
unpublished. Their goal is to provide a unified view of geostatistics with
an emphasis on methodology. They include simple proofs, but not
complex ones they deem too technical. On the other hand, they include
more theory than the mathematical and statistical background of many
practitioners can handle, for the sake of completeness, but in a different
type.
QE78 978-0-8137-0029-8
From the Blue Ridge to the coastal plain; field excursions
in the southeastern United States.
Title main entry. Ed. by Martha Cary Eppes and Mervin J.
Bartholomew. (Field guide 29)
Geological Society of America, ©2012 395 p. $60.00 (pa)
The 11 excursions described were developed in conjunction with the
Society’s 2012 annual meeting in Charlotte, North Carolina, to highlight
the geology of the region in a broad range of timescales and settings.
Among the times and places are floodplain geology and geomorphology
of the Lower Congaree River Valley in South Carolina, the New Madrid
Seismic Zone, seismic hazard and visible damage from the great 1886
earthquake, the stratigraphic and structural evolution of the Talladega
slate belt in the Alabama Appalachians, and traversing suspect terranes
in the central Virginia Piedmont from Proterozoic anorthosites to modern
earthquakes.
QE138 2012-008117 978-0-8137-1209-3
Hydrology and geochemistry of Yucca Mountain and
vicinity, Southern Nevada and California.
Title main entry. Ed. by John S. Stuckless. (GSA memoir; 209)
Geological Society of America, ©2012 393 p. $60.00
Seven hydrology and geochemistry studies form a companion volume to
the 2007 Geology and Climatology of Yucca Mountain and Vicinity. Both
volumes present a comprehensive approach to characterizing a potential
site for the disposal of radioactive waste. After an introduction to the
science and the political controversy, the topics are the hydrology of the
unsaturated zone, the saturated zone hydrology, the fluid geochemistry,
the paleohydrology of unsaturated and saturated zones, conditions and
processes affecting radionuclide transport, and effects of coupled
processes on the proposed repository. There is no index.
QE508 2004-043586 978-0-444-59425-9
The geologic time scale 2012; 2v. (map included)
Title main entry. Ed. by Felix M. Gradstein, James G. Ogg, Mark D.
Schmitz and Gabi M. Ogg.
Elsevier (Amsterdam), ©2012 1144 p. $115.00 (pa)
The tradition of setting out in a single publication the consensus, or near
consensus, understanding of the entire four billion years of Earth’s
geology began in 1989, continued with a 2004 update, and is renewed
here again to reflect current knowledge and thinking. It is more than
twice the size of the 2004 edition, and features full color throughout both
volumes. The first 16 chapters explain methodology, the time scales used,
and such topics as a brief history of plants on Earth and sequence stratig-
raphy and sea-level change. A chapter also reviews the geologic time
scales of the Moon and nearby planets. The chronological chapters begin
with the Cryogenian Period, slow down for details at the Triassic and
Jurassic, then continue through the Quaternary Period before slowing
again to a human time scale. Some of the treatment is detailed and tech-
nical, but much is accessible to scientists in other fields. The two volumes
are paged and indexed together. A 40”x52” heavy-paper color wall poster
is also included.
QE511 2012-405723 978-0-444-56356-9
Regional geology and tectonics; phanerozoic rift systems
and sedimentary basins; v.1b
Title main entry. Ed. by D.G. Roberts and A.W. Bally.
Elsevier, ©2012 528 p. $129.95
The three-volume set surveys the geology of extensional basins including
rifts, passive margins, and inverted extensional basins around the world.
The information is for professional geoscientists in the petroleum
business and in academia who want to examine, understand, and
compare the tectonics and stratigraphy of a large variety of basins
formed by extension. This middle volume discusses such topics as models
for the evolution of passive margins, the Gulf of Suez rift basin, Lake
Baikal, the development of the passive margin of eastern North America,
and sedimentary basics of the late Mesozoic extensional domain of China
and Mongolia.
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
QE511 2012-405723 978-0-444-56357-6
Regional geology and tectonics; phanerozoic passive
margins, cratonic basins and global tectonic maps; v.1c
Title main entry. Ed. by D.G. Roberts and A.W. Bally.
Elsevier, ©2012 1196 p. $209.95
The purpose of the series is to compile and pass on the accumulated
knowledge of regional geology that is being lost as generalists with field
experience are replaced by specialists with computers. It is designed to
appeal to both academic and petroleum geologists. In this third and final
part of Volume One, geologists discuss extensional basins including rifts,
passive margins, and inverted extensional basins. The chapters have a
broadly similar layout, and where appropriate include a section on the
petroleum system. They cover non-volcanic and transform passive
margins, cratonic basins on pre-Cambrian and Paleozoic basements, and
world maps.
QE511 2012-405723 978-0-444-53042-4
Regional geology and tectonics; principles of geologic
analysis; v.1a
Title main entry. Ed. by D.G. Roberts and A.W. Bally.
Elsevier, ©2012 864 p. $169.95
In both petroleum and academic geology, generalists with hands-on expe-
rience are retiring and leaving the field to younger scientists who use
computer programs to solve very focused problems using limited data
sets. This series is designed to record fundamentals of regional geology
that might otherwise be lost. This first of three parts of volume one
covers the Earth, geological megaprovinces, principles of regional geo-
logical analysis: geological and geophysical tools, sedimentary systems,
experimental and analogue structural models, and ocean basins.
QE720 2012-024959 978-0-8137-2490-4
Mima mounds; the case for polygenesis and bioturbation.
Title main entry. Ed. by Jennifer L. Horwath Burnham and Donald L.
Johnson. (Special paper; 490)
Geological Society of America, ©2012 205 p. $80.00 (pa)
At the Society’s October 2008 annual meeting in Houston, a symposium
was held on the origin of Mima mounds and similar micro-relief fea-
tures. Five of the eight papers presented there were expanded and a sixth
added for this symposium. They investigate what causes small mounds
in flat country, mostly weighing the respective roles of burrowing
animals, plant roots, and physical processes. They cover using LIDAR to
model Mima mound evolution and regional energy valances in
California’s Great Central Valley, “pimple” mound microrelief in
southern Saskatchewan, alpine and montane Mima mounds of the
western US, the biodynamic significance of double stone layers in Mima
mounds, the forgotten natural prairie mounds of the Upper Midwest, and
the polygenetic origin of prairie mounds in northeastern California.
BIOLOGY
QH31 2012-003433 978-0-670-02571-8
Darwin; portrait of a genius.
Johnson, Paul.
Viking, ©2012 164 p. $25.95
This light biography of Charles Darwin is by British popular historian
Paul Johnson. Like Steven Jay Gould, Johnson writes in an opinionated
style, likes to debunk authority figures, and knows how to exaggerate for
effect. Johnson lacks Gould’s passion for justice and his knowledge of
science, both problems for the book’s central argument: that Darwin was
a sloppy scientist who created racism through his ignorance of anthro-
pology. Unfortunately, Darwin was ignorant of anthropology because it
didn’t exist at the time. The realities of 200 years ago are not mentioned
here: child labor and malnutrition distorted brains and bodies along
class and ethnic lines, modern medicine didn’t exist, and most anti-evo-
lutionists believed non-Europeans were non-human apes or monkeys. In
science, genetics was unknown, and social and biological science was one
field. Johnson relabels all these historical facts as personality traits and
personal failures of Charles Darwin. If Darwin were really so smart, and
not a racist, the author argues, you’d never know such things from
reading his work. The book’s banner claim is that Darwin was the
architect of imperialism and personally responsible for Social
Darwinism. As a historian, Johnson presumably knows better and is just
having fun. But readers who believe him will tend to conclude that
racism was personally invented by Charles Darwin. (The author admits
in passing that the peddlers of the prejudices later named after Darwin
were busy peddling well before Darwin wrote.) Johnson’s approach may
seem an innocent amusement in the UK, a kind of saint-tipping. In the
US, bitter wars over evolution can make the book read as exploiting race
in the service of anti-science politics. The book will not help readers
–226–
understand Darwin or the very real problem of scientific prejudice, but
as an exercise in shooting haloes, readers who can ignore the politics
may find it fun.
QH31 2012-003077 978-0-307-46220-6
On a farther shore; the life and legacy of Rachel Carson.
Souder, William.
Crown Publishers, ©2012 496 p. $30.00
Marking the Golden anniversary of Rachel Carson’s seminal environ-
mental tome, Silent Spring, Souder pays tribute with this extensively
researched biographical account of Carson, one of the most important
environmental writers of our time. Silent Spring decried the use of DDT,
among other chemicals and pesticides, and changed the face of the envi-
ronmental movement, even garnering the attention of President Kennedy.
Carson’s legacy influenced modern environmental policy and regulation
and Souder highlights this while meticulously detailing the private
author’s story. The book is divided into two sections, the first detailing
recounting Carson’s life around the time of the publication of Water
World and the second focusing on the time and impact of Silent Spring.
Includes a section of b&w photos.
QH76 2012-006674 978-0-8203-4392-1
Fields and streams; stream restoration, neoliberalism, and
the future of environmental science.
Lave, Rebecca. (Geographies of justice and social transformation; 12)
U. of Georgia Press, ©2012 170 p. $22.95 (pa)
Although Dave Rosgen has little formal training in science, his Natural
Channel Design approach for stream restoration is advocated by US
federal agencies. In this qualitative study, Lave (geography, Indiana
University) draws on the ideas of Pierre Bourdieu to examine who and
what confers authority within scientific fields: is it knowledge, a degree,
market demand, or the state? She also considers how the acceptance of
authority is changing due to the global rise of neoliberalism, with its
emphasis on privatization and the commercialization of knowledge.
Some areas addressed include the history of stream restoration, the rise
of Rosgen, capital conflicts, and the political economy of stream
restoration. An appendix presents metadata on interviews and surveys
for the book.
QH87 2012-007471 978-1-60938-118-9
Of men and marshes. (reprint 1957)
Errington, Paul Lester. (A bur oak book)
Univ. of Iowa Press, ©2012 150 p. $22.00 (pa)
Author Paul Errington (1902-1962) was a naturalist awarded the Aldo
Leopold Medal by the Wildlife Society in 1962. In this American envi-
ronmental classic, first published in 1957, he changed the perception of
wetlands by explaining their value. The book weaves together Errington’s
biological fieldwork, his tales of hunting and trapping, and descriptions
of the marshes of rural South Dakota, where he grew up. This edition
includes the original b&w drawings by wildlife biologist H. Albert
Hochbaum (1911-1988), plus a new introduction by Matthew Wynn Sivils,
a former wildlife biologist who now teaches English and environmental
literature at Iowa State University. Sivils provides an overview of
Errington’s life and work, illustrated with five b&w photos of Errington
in the 1950s.
QH87 2012-010853 978-1-4051-9841-7
Wetland environments; a global perspective.
Aber, James Sandusky et al.
Wiley-Blackwell, ©2012 421 p. $120.00
This undergraduate and graduate textbook will also be useful as a ref-
erence for researchers and applied environmental scientists. It covers
physical and environmental properties and functions of wetlands and
considers political and social aspects of human impact on wetlands.
Early sections of the text set out wetland definitions and criteria, describe
methods in wetland research, and detail wetland hydrology, soil, vege-
tation, and wildlife. Later sections look at wetlands through geological
time, chart environmental cycles in wetlands, and explore issues related
to wetland resources and valuation, such as conservation and man-
agement, restoration, and public policy. The last section presents case
studies of low-, middle-, and high-latitude and high-altitude wetlands
mainly in North America, with a few cases in other global regions. The
text features an extensive glossary of wetland types and terms and is
illustrated with satellite images as well as b&w and color photos of land-
scapes, wildlife, and individual plants. Aber teaches at Emporia State
University.
–227–
QH104 2012-012519 978-0-393-08188-6
October, or Autumnal tints. (reprint 2007)
Thoreau, Henry David. Ed. by Robert D. Richardson.
W.W. Norton, ©2012 127 p. $17.95
Richardson, author of Henry Thoreau: A Life of the Mind presents
Thoreau’s classic reflections on mortality, “Autumnal Tints” (based on
journal entries from the winter of 1859-60 and his last lecture), comple-
mented by a biographical/critical sketch of the author of Walden and
watercolors by Lincoln Perry. Room is left for readers to press their own
autumn leaves. Originally published in 1862, the essay is reprinted from
Excursions, edited by Joseph J. Moldenhauer, Princeton U. Press, 2007.
QH105 2012-005967 978-1-60223-181-8
Land of extremes; a natural history of the Arctic North
Slope of Alaska.
Huryn, Alexander D. and John E. Hobbie.
U. of Alaska Press, ©2012 311 p. $29.95 (pa)
Huryn (biological sciences, U. of Alabama-Tuscaloosa) and Hobbie
(ecosystems, Biological Laboratory, Woods Hole, Massachusetts) have
extracted from the vast scientific literature—much of it their own—stories
of how animals and plants interact and survive in the harsh arctic envi-
ronment. They write for visitors to the area and for people who are inter-
ested in natural history in general, in a specific topic such as mammals
or bird, in a specific region such as the coastal plain around Barrow or
the Arctic National Wildlife Refuge, or in the last American wilderness.
Color photographs appear throughout.
QH181 2011-049249 978-1-61091-172-6
Tibet wild; a naturalist’s journeys on the roof of the
world.
Schaller, George B.
Island Press, ©2012 372 p. $29.95
Before Dian Fossey and Jane Goodall, there was George Schaller. Schaller
has spent more than half a century walking into the wildest places on
Earth to lie down with animals; he first did so with mountain gorillas
in an era when people believed they were monsters that would kill a
man on sight, and reported to the world the slow joy of their family lives
and their penchant for wild celery. He has written pioneering books on
many of the wild creatures that have captured the public’s imagination:
gorillas in the mist, lions and wildebeest in the Serengeti, snow leopards
in the Himalayas. Their fame and protection often trace back to a George
Schaller book. In an era when the National Geographic Society gives its
Explorer Awards to computer specialists in labs, Schaller is an
anachronism, and he knows it. This book may be his swan song: the last
of the classic Western naturalists travels to perhaps the last place on
earth inhabited but not controlled by humans: the cold desert plains of
Tibet. The book centers on the animals who astonishingly survive here
in numbers, especially chiru an antelope that may be the legendary
unicorn. Schaller looks at whole systems, including the lives of people.
As a naturalist who has watched wilderness for so long, he knows we
are witnessing a worldwide mass extinction; he sees Smithsonian scien-
tists help US Congressmen go on safari to shoot endangered species,
corrupt regional politics, and an exploding human population. This is
not often a cheery book. But Schaller also sees small changes having pos-
itive effects, and is the ideal wilderness travelling companion: observant,
honest, unsentimental, without ego or bigotry, and joyful in the beauty
of small things. He walks on without pretense, a renowned Western sci-
entist motivated by the desire to be in wild places, consistently trans-
ferring his authority to indigenous scientists, herders, hunters, and
farmers protecting their native lands. Beautifully written, the book offers
breathtaking natural history, and the human side of daily life in zones
we only know from war and conflict (Afghanistan, Pakistan, the Tibet-
China border). In the end, the author finds hope in Tibetan Buddhist
monasteries that have created wildlife reserves for centuries, and are now
starting conservation organizations. Readers may find hope in Schaller’s
example of a life dedicated to saving a planet where chiru, tiny rabbits,
snow leopards, and human beings of every race, gender, and nation are
all animals working to survive.
QH183 2012937160 978-1-938086-06-9
The jungle at the door; a glimpse of wild India.
Myer, Joan and William deBuys.
George F. Thompson, ©2013 — p. $45.00 (pa)
This book documents the photography of Jan Myers in the wildlife
refuges of India. Myers is a American photographer whose work appears
in major museum collections and award-winning books. Most of the
book consists of full-page photographic reproductions, printed without
comment. Each is identified in a rear index where a small reproduction
of each image is accompanied by information giving the location of the
picture and identifying any animals that appear. The only text is a
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
thoughtful and eloquent essay by Pulitzer Prize-nominated author
William deBuys, who writes often on conservation topics. Myers’ photo-
graphs are evocative as art, and more deeply informative than many
images; she allows readers to see the natural blur or crispness of motion
and atmosphere, and animals appear at their natural scale within scenes
that will surprise viewers used to the close-up photography of animals in
studios and zoos. The major presences that inhabit these photographs are
the landscapes in which wild animals, people, and livestock appear,
materializing through the greenness as astonishing and solid ghosts.
Distributed by International Publishers Marketing.
QH197 978-1-74258-297-9
26 views of the starburst world; William Dawes at Sydney
Cove, 1788-91.
Gibson, Ross.
UWA, ©2012 290 p. $32.95 (pa)
Lieutenant Dawes (1762-1836) was an English astronomer/surveyor who
recorded the language of the indigenous Eora people of Sydney Cove,
Australia, in the colonial period. Inspired by non-linear approaches such
as that of Thirty-Two Short Films About Glenn Gould, Gibson (contem-
porary arts, Sydney College of the Arts) seeks to fill in gaps in knowledge
about his career, relationship with a young Aboriginal woman, and the
linguistic project which deeply affected his life. Illustrations include fac-
simile pages from his notebooks. Distributed in the US by ISBS.
QH205 2012-009798 978-0-471-69214-0
Fundamentals of light microscopy and electronic imaging,
2d ed.
Murphy, Douglas B. and Michael W. Davidson
Wiley-Blackwell, ©2013 538 p. $149.95
Murphy (microscopy and histology, Howard Hughes Medical Institute
and cell biology, Johns Hopkins U.) and Davidson (National High
Magnetic Field Laboratory and biological science, Florida State U.) have
revised their textbook to account for changes in visible-light microscopy
over the ten years since the first edition. Among the topics are light and
color, diffraction and spatial resolution, phase contrast microscopy and
darkfield microscopy, the fluorescence imaging of dynamic molecular
processes, super-resolution imaging, and digital image processing.
Resources include a glossary, appendices that supplement the exercises,
and a new Webliography.
QH212 2012-003429 978-0-470-63882-8
Atomic force microscopy; understanding basic modes and
advanced applications.
Haugstad, Greg.
John Wiley & Sons, ©2012 464 p. $140.00
Atomic force microscopy has become an essential tool for materials and
biological research, says Haugstad (characterization, U. of Minnesota),
but rigorous education and training in it is lacking and even experienced
users tend not to exchange information with others or newcomers.
Drawing material from a number of curricular course, training sessions,
short courses, and outreach programs, he offers a tutorial for prospective
users of the imaging technology from pre-college students to working sci-
entists. The topics include distance-dependent interactions, topographic
imaging, probing material properties, data post-processing and statistical
analysis, and advanced dynamic force methods.
QH212 978-3-03785-381-8
Electron microscopy; proceedings.
International Confrence on Electron Microscopy (14th: 2011; Wisla,
Poland) Ed by Danuta Stróz and Krystian Prusik. (Solid state phe-
nomena; v.186)
Trans Tech Publications, ©2012 346 p. $166.00
Researchers from different countries exchange recent experiences in
structural studies that use electron microscopy techniques on many dif-
ferent materials. Among 77 papers are discussions of the art and appli-
cation of large angle convergent beam electron diffraction, near grain
boundary behavior of aluminum bicrystals deformed in plane strain con-
ditions, the structure and morphology of thin films deposited by pulsed
laser deposition techniques, the positive hydrogen effect in structure
surface layers on titanium alloys, and microstructural changes induced
during the hydrogen charging process in stainless steels with and
without nitrided layers.
QH323 2011-921758 978-1-932658-78-1
Clinical pharmacist’s guide to biostatistics and literature
evaluation.
Title main entry. Ed. by Robert DiCenzo.
American College of Clinical Pharmacy, ©2011 167 p. $24.95 (pa)
Material has been drawn from a number of textbooks to provide
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
pharmacists a study guide for the Pharmacotherapy and Ambulatory
Care Board of Pharmacy Specialties examination on interpreting,
evaluating, and using statistics. It begins with the basics of biostatistics
and statistical tests, then moves to interpreting literature and applying it
to patient care. Among specific topics are hypothesis testing, common
statistical tests, power and sample size, study design, and choosing the
appropriate statistical test. Answers are provided to the self-assessment
questions. There is no index.
QH323.5 978-0-12-415794-1
Practical biostatistics; a user-friendly approach for
evidence-based medicine.
Suchmacher, Mendel and Mauro Geller.
Academic Press, ©2012 236 p. $69.95 (pa)
Mendel Suchmacher and Mauro Geller (both clinical immunology, Carlos
Chagas Institute of Medical Post-graduation, Rio de Janeiro) share the
lessons they have learned over several years assimilating mathematical
concepts through biostatistics-specialized literature, personal guidance,
and reading clinical trials. They write for clinicians who, like them, are
not trained biostatisticians, but need to know enough to evaluate reports
and sometimes generate their own. They did, however, have a biosta-
tician review the material, just to be sure. Their choice of a common
database program is intended as a bridge between biostatistics and the
common technology user. Academic Press is an imprint of Elsevier.
QH324 2012-025562 978-1-4665-1240-5
Introduction to instrumentation in life sciences.
Bisen, Prakash S. and Anjana Sharma.
CRC Press, ©2013 355 p. $79.95 (pa)
Writing for students and professionals at all levels, Bisen (Indian Ministry
of Defense) and Sharma (biology, Western Carolina U.) describe the
nature and explain the applications of technologies that are used in the
biological sciences today. They cover microscopy, micrometry, electro-
chemical techniques, chromatography, spectroscopy, centrifugation, elec-
trophoresis, X-ray microanalysis, techniques with radio-isotopes,
fermentation, and conductivity meter. The plastic claw binding lies flat
on the laboratory bench.
QH326 2012-023387 978-1-61614-549-1
The stardust revolution; the new story of our origin in the
stars.
Berkowitz, Jacob.
Prometheus Books, ©2012 376 p. $27.00
Berkowitz, a science writer with a penchant for the speculative, explores
what he calls our extreme genealogy, which seeks to put our Earth in a
historical, cosmic context. This involves turning to our fundamental con-
stituents and the role stars and other stellar processes played in forming
them. It reads in some ways like a documentary film, in that the writer
takes us along a trip side-by-side with him. The text is organized into
three sections that develop an increasingly expansive view of life and
history in the cosmos. Berkowitz considers the movement within cos-
mology, the origins of elements and essential compounds like water,
abiogenesis, the distribution of life-essential elements in the universe, and
studying space-dust in a biologically evolutionary context. The text con-
tains two sets of brilliant color plates and photos.
QH431 2012-405936 978-0-12-385212-0
Human genes and genomes; science, health, society.
Rosenberg, Leon E. and Diane Drobnis Rosenberg.
Academic Press, ©2012 421 p. $99.95
Leon (molecular biology and public and international affairs, Princeton
U.) and Diane, a science and medical writer before graduating to run an
alpaca farm in New Jersey, present a textbook that can be used in a one-
semester undergraduate course for students who are not science majors.
The rationale is that all educated people need to know something about
human genes and genomes. The topics include framing the field,
genetics, the transmission of genes, biological evolution, disorders of
variable genomic architecture, and populations and individuals.
Academic press in an imprint of Elsevier.
QH438 2012-013274 978-0-465-02175-8
Regenesis; how synthetic biology will reinvent nature and
ourselves.
Church, George and Ed. Regis.
Basic Books, ©2012 284 p. $28.00
Church, a pioneering geneticist who started the Personal Genome Project,
introduces the new field of synthetic biology and synthetic genomics,
which promises the possibility of creating new species of organisms by
altering portions of the genomes of existing living organisms. He gives
examples of how science will soon have the potential to recreate species
–228–
that existed millions of years ago and to alter our own genetic makeup,
even to the point of creating genetically engineered humans who can
withstand conditions in outer space as we populate the universe. Apart
from some discussion of how to regulate bioengineering, there is little
consideration of what could possibly go wrong with this plan. The expla-
nations of complex scientific concepts and processes are not for the faint
of heart and will be accessible only to more educated general readers.
The book contains b&w illustrations, photos, and images. Church teaches
genetics at Harvard Medical School. Regis has written other books on
science for general readers.
QH441 978-1-4398-4117-4
Genome annotation. (CD-ROM included)
Soh, Jung et al. (Chapman & Hall/CRC mathematical and computa-
tional biology series)
CRC Press, ©2013 232 p. $89.95
Introducing automated genome analysis and annotation, Soh, Paul
Gordon, and Christopher W. Sensen (all bioinformatics, U. of Calgary,
Canada) trace the development of the current analysis strategies over the
16 years since the first full genome was announced, and project next
steps in the process. Among their topics are predicting coding sequence,
between the genes, visualization techniques and tools for genomic data,
automated annotation systems, web-based workflows, and analysis
pipelines for next-generation sequencing data. The accompanying disk
contains two genome annotation systems.
QH447 978-0-8243-3713-1
Annual review of genomics and human genetics; v.13,
2012.
Title main entry. Ed. by Aravinda Chakravarti and Eric Green.
Annual Reviews, ©2012 469 p. $89.00
This year’s review looks at 20 aspects of the sciences that were deemed
to have changed enough that an update was called for. Among them are
human genetic individuality, the evolution of the immune system in the
lower vertebrates, a comparative genomics approach to understanding
transmissible cancer in Tasmanian devils, the genomic analysis of fetal
nucleic acids in maternal blood, and tension between sharing data and
protecting privacy in genomics research. The author and subject indexes
are cumulative for the past 10 volumes.
QH449 978-1-908230-10-2
Horizontal gene transfer in microorganisms.
Title main entry. Ed. by M. Pilar Francino.
Caister Academic Press, ©2012 202 p. $319.00
Eukaryotes have evolved genetic systems that are closed to exchanges
among organisms of different species, but in the microbial world, mech-
anisms allow the transfer of genes easily, so that novelties created in one
organism can find their way into many other taxa. Biological scientists
explore the process and mechanism of horizontal gene transfer, their
extent and limitation, and the consequences of the openness of microbial
genetic systems for different evolutionary processes. Among their topics
are gene survival in emergent genomes, the horizontal transfer of host-
adaptability systems in bacteria, a model for the evolution of horizontally
transferred genes in prokaryotes, what maintains plasmids among bac-
teria, and horizontal gene transfer and recombination in the evolution of
antibiotic resistance genes. Distributed in the US by ISBS.
QH450 2012-016831 978-1-936113-46-0
Protein synthesis and translational control.
Title main entry. Ed. by John W.B. Hershey et al.
Cold Spring Harbor Lab. Press, ©2012 352 p. $135.00
Nineteen chapters review the process and regulation of protein synthesis
as understood through recent research. Among the topics are new
insights and challenges in the mechanism of eukaryotic translation initi-
ation, the single-molecule analysis of translational dynamics, mRNA
localization and translational control in Drosophila oogenesis, imaging
translation in single cells using fluorescent microscopy, translational
control in cancer etiology, and protein synthesis in virus-infected cells.
QH452 2011-278586 978-0-309-22034-7
Integrating large-scale genomic information into clinical
practice; workshop summary.
Institute of Medicine of the National Academies.
National Academies Press, ©2012 92 p. $37.00 (pa)
The cost and time to have a person’s entire genome sequenced is
dropping so precipitously that it is expected to be comparable in the near
future to an imaging test such as computed tomography. In that light a
workshop was assembled in July 2011 to explore the challenges and
opportunities in integrating large-scale genomic information into clinical
practice. Organizers deemed that several workshops would be necessary,
–229–
so this first one focused on a few selected aspects. The report covers the
realization of genomic medicine, the analysis and interpretation of
genomic data, delivery of the data, ethical and legal issues, workforce
development, and envisioning the future. There is no index.
QH499 2006-299798 978-0-12-384860-4
Regenerative biology and medicine, 2d ed.
Stocum, David L.
Elsevier/Academic Press, ©2012 461 p. $119.95 (pa)
Stocum (Center for Regenerative Biology and Medicine, Indiana U. Purdue
U. of Indiana) presents a volume on regenerative biology and medicine
for research investigators, graduate and undergraduate students, medical
students, and fellows, in addition to researchers in chemistry, infor-
matics, computer science, math, physics, and engineering. This edition
has been reorganized to follow the natural progression of discovery
within regenerative biology: chapters on the mechanisms and basic
biology of regeneration of various structures are followed by strategies of
regenerative medicine for each organ system. The final chapter provides
a perspective on what has been achieved in the field and future
prospects. This edition has also been expanded to include advances in
non-mammalian regeneration.
QH506 978-3-527-33228-1
Biomolecular information processing; from logic systems
to smart sensors and actuators.
Title main entry. Ed. by Evgeny Katz.
Wiley-VCH, ©2012 357 p. $175.00
Contributors from those fields describe experimental work by bio-
chemists and biologists and theoretical approaches by physicists and
computer scientists into using biomolecular systems for processing infor-
mation. The topics include bioelectronic devices controlled by enzyme-
based information processing systems, some experiments and models in
molecular computing and robotics, in vivo information processing using
RNA interference, the logic of decision making in environmental bacteria,
and qualitative and quantitative aspects of a model for processes inspired
by the functioning of the living cell.
QH506 2012-018626 978-0-465-02253-3
Life’s ratchet; how molecular machines extract order from
chaos.
Hoffmann, Peter M.
Basic Books, ©2012 278 p. $27.99
Scientific and technological advances have made several contributions to
our vocabulary in recent years, among them nanotechnology, nanoscale,
and even more derivatives. Hoffman (physics and materials science,
Wayne State U.) takes advantage of nanotechnology to explore the
nanometer-sized “molecular machines” that are responsible for keeping
cells alive and working properly, how those machines function, what
they do, and the techniques and tools scientists use to measure and
understand them. The book is, in a way, a from the bottom up view of
how life works.
QH506 2002-111287 978-0-12-397044-2
Molecular microbiology laboratory; a writing-intensive
course, 2d ed.
Title main entry. Ed. by Walt Ream et al.
Elsevier/Academic Press, ©2013 259 p. $74.95 (pa)
This 10-week course teaches the essential principles and techniques of
molecular and microbial ecology to upper-level undergraduate students
majoring in the life sciences, along with instruction on scientific writing,
editing, and critical reading skills. The course contains four units that
introduce procedures used by life scientists and explains the preparation
and peer review of laboratory reports, with formal reports to complete
and additional writing exercises in each unit based on journal articles.
Several appendices contain sample lab reports, proposals, and tests;
guidance for presentations; sequence editing, peak scanner, and PRIMER
tutorials; grading and peer review checklists; career advice; a molecular
microbiology lab preparation manual; and other resources.
QH506 2012-006899 978-1-4398-2722-2
Quantitative biology; from molecular to cellular systems.
Title main entry. Ed. by Michael E. Wall. (Chapman & Hall/CRC mathe-
matical and computational biology series)
CRC Press, ©2013 374 p. $89.95
Now that quantitative methods in molecular and cellular biology are
maturing beyond the pioneer stage, scientists who are experienced in
them introduce them to scientists and students who are not. They discuss
both the methodologies that have been, and are being, developed and
some of the early findings and their implications. Among the topics are
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
system design principles, information theory and adaptation, subcellular
signaling dynamics, modeling cellular variability, and the stochastic sim-
ulation of the phage lambda gene regulatory circuitry.
QH513 2012-007486 978-1-119-99923-2
The elements of continuum biomechanics.
Epstein, Marcelo.
John Wiley & Sons, ©2012 371 p. $125.00
Epstein (mechanical manufacturing engineering and kinesiology, U. of
Calgary) introduces continuum mechanics as applied in biology,
beginning with everything that can be presented in a one-dimensional
spatial context then moving to three dimensions in later chapters. He
covers material bodies and kinematics; balance laws; constitutive equa-
tions; mixture theory; geometry and kinematics; balance laws and con-
stitutive equations in three dimensions; and remodeling, aging, and
growth.
QH540 2012-019259 978-0-8156-3307-5
Green syndicalism; an alternative red/green vision.
Shantz, Jeff. (Space, place, and society)
Syracuse U. Press, ©2012 214 p. $39.95
Shantz, author of books on radical ecology and anarchist practice, makes
the case for a productive relationship between radical labor activists, like
the Industrial Workers of the World, and radical environmentalists. He
does so by first tracing how working-class people’s relationship to the
natural world has been neglected by environmental activists, who are
quick to identify industrial workers with destructive industry. He offers
a revised history of working-people resisting both the destruction of the
environment and economic exploitation. As he examines the origins and
histories of organizations like Earth First!, he considers how revolu-
tionary unionists like the IWW and CNT cross-pollinate the environ-
mental movement with direct-action tactics and rank-and-file organizing.
His conclusion re-iterates a motif of anti-productivist radicalism that
seeks to “abolish the wage system and live in harmony with the earth.”
This is an exciting vision of a new kind of radical anticapitalist environ-
mental movement.
QH541 2012-945155 978-1-934874-30-1
Advancing an ecosystem approach in the Gulf of Maine.
Title main entry. Ed. by Robert L. Stephenson et al.
American Fisheries Society, ©2012 415 p. $79.00 (pa)
A collection of 28 papers, perspectives, and syntheses documents an
October 2009 international symposium held in St. Andrews, New
Brunswick, to review progress, share knowledge, and identify challenges
in developing an ecosystem approach to managing the Gulf of Maine.
Scientists from Canada and the US consider such aspects as important
steps toward ecosystem-based fishery management, a changing per-
spective on zooplankton of the Gulf of Maine, anthropogenic and external
influences, organismal biology in the age of ecosystem-based man-
agement, and thermal phenological factors affecting the survival of
Atlantic salmon in the Gulf of Maine. There is no index.
QH541 2012-027724 978-0-12-088571-8
Environmental fluid dynamics; flow processes, scaling,
equations of motion, and solutions to environmental
flows.
Imberger, Jörg.
Academic Press, ©2013 430 p. $89.95 (pa)
Imberger (water research, U. of Western Australia) explains some of the
tools for waste cycling, rather than disposal, where all three stages of the
process are given equal importance. The first stage is removing waste
from the immediate location where it is generated. The second is to dilute
it to levels conducive for the microbial world. The third and largely neg-
lected stage is placing the waste in an environment and a state that
fosters the transformation of waste to food by microbes. He covers
physical quantities, dimensional analysis, scaling, and bulk conservation
equations; equations of motion: the axiomatic approach; some exact solu-
tions; the effect of viscosity; fundamentals of hydraulics; environmental
hydraulics; mixing in environmental flows; surface waves; and environ-
mental flows. Academic Press is an imprint of Elsevier.
QH541 2012-007159 978-1-4443-3792-1
Historical environmental variation in conservation and
natural resource management.
Title main entry. Ed. by John A. Wiens et al.
Wiley-Blackwell, ©2012 337 p. $170.00
The operant question here is what good are the lessons of history if the
future is so different that they do not apply. Some academics and some
activists, but mostly researchers with the US Forest Service, seek to
answer by looking at the environment’s natural variation through time
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
and the role it plays in natural resource management alongside expected
changes—particularly in the atmosphere—that may not reverse in the
foreseeable future. Among the topics are the development of historical
ecology concepts and their application to resource management and con-
servation, creating a historical range of variation time series using land-
scape modeling, incorporating concepts of historical range of variation in
the ecosystem-based management of British Columbia’s coastal temperate
rainforest, fluvial responses to rapid environmental change in the context
of historical variation, and whether the historical range of variation is
relevant to rangeland management.
QH541 2012-015479 978-1-58488-919-9
Introduction to hierarchical Bayesian modeling for
ecological data.
Parent, Éric and Étienne Rivot. (Chapman & Hall/CRC applied environ-
mental statistics)
Chapman & Hall/CRC, ©2013 405 p. $89.95
French environmental scientists Parent (National School of Rural Water
and Forestry Engineering, Paris) and Rivot (Institute for Agronomic
Research) walk colleagues through the first steps of statistical modeling
and inference, particularly hierarchical Bayesian modeling, which they
characterize as a golden key that allows ecologists to free their creativity
and designs statistical models of their own. Moving from simple to more
complex, they consider such aspects as the beta-binomial model, the
basic normal model, combining various sources of information, non-
linear models for analyzing stock recruitment, piling up simple layers,
and decision and planning.
QH541 2012-021070 978-1-4398-8506-2
Simulation of ecological and environmental models.
Acevedo, Miguel F.
CRC Press, ©2013 464 p. $99.95
Acevedo (geography, environmental sciences, biology, and electrical engi-
neering; U. of North Texas) presents a textbook on modeling and simu-
lation for advanced undergraduate and beginning graduate students, or
researchers and practitioners, in any of the fields he has taught. He
emphasizes contexts that require a unified presentation of methods,
including modeling ecological systems subject to disturbances or stresses
due to human-nature interactions. He also includes training in analysis
using computers. After introducing the mathematics and software fun-
damentals, he looks at one-dimensional models and fundamentals of
modeling methodology then turns to the multidimensional models of
structured populations, communities, and ecosystems.
QH541.5.L3 2012945658 978-1-84564-668-4
Lake sustainability
Title main entry. Ed. by C.A. Brebbia and S.E. Jorgensen.
WIT Press, ©2013 196 p. $198.00
Lake Sustainability is not a body of water, but the theme of one in a
series of sustainability conferences held by the Wessex Institute of
Technology. In 15 selected and extended papers, environmental scientists
examine such aspects as assimilative capacity modeling using integrated
watershed and lake models to support the Georgia Comprehensive
Statewide Water Management Plan, small-scale best management prac-
tices to protect lake water quality, the impact of mercury in ecological
effects of underwater self-explosion of ammunition in Sweden’s Lake
Lomtjärn, socio-ecological barriers to adaptive management of Lake
Fuquene in Columbia, and worldwide environmental threats to salt
lakes. No date is noted for the conference. The US office of WIT Press is
Computational Mechanics.
QH545 2012-021096 978-1-4398-3564-7
Quantitative ecotoxicology, 2d ed.
Newman, Michael C.
CRC Press, ©2013 570 p. $149.95
Newman (marine science, College of William and Mary, Virginia) seeks
to help solidify ecotoxicological principles and paradigms by adapting
and promoting a stronger inferential approach than has been used to
date in the discipline. He covers the measurement process, bioaccumu-
lation, lethal and other quantal responses to stress, statistical tests for
detecting chronic lethal and sub-lethal stress, population and metapopu-
lation effects, and community effects. This second edition has been
revised to be closer complements to his textbooks Fundamentals of
Ecotoxicology (2010) and Ecotoxicology: A Comprehensive Treatment (2008).
QH587 2012-944515 978-1-907568-60-2
Commercializing the stem cell sciences.
Harvey, Olivia. (Woodhead Publishing series in biomedicine; no.12)
Woodhead Publishing, ©2012 194 p. $165.00
Harvey (biopolitics of science, U. of Sydney) tracks the development of
–230–
commercial prospects for the stem cell sciences, and looks at how stem
cell technologies have entered or are entering into the marketplace, in
order to identify what specific barriers might be facing the global
business. She covers stem cell science, biotechnology, and the problem of
commercialization; stem cell treatments in a global marketplace; the role
of innovation systems in the commercialization of biotechnology; low-
risk, high-value adult stem cells; high-risk, high-value embryonic stem
cells; and low-risk, low-value induced pluripotent stem cells; and what
the future holds.
QH588 978-0-12-401719-1
Handbook of stem cells, 2d ed.; 2v.
Title main entry. Ed. by Robert Lanza and Anthony Atala.
Academic Press, ©2013 1040 p. $439.95
The first edition of this reference was published in 2004. This second
edition incorporates updates and breakthroughs in a total of 84 con-
tributed chapters. Like the first edition, it comprises two volumes: the
first on pluripotent stem cells and the second on adult & fetal stem cells.
The first volume begins with explanation of advances in the field as well
as definitions, criteria and standards for ‘stemness,’ the molecular cir-
cuitry underlying pluripotency in embryonic stem cells and iPS cells, and
mechanisms of stem cell self-renewal. Subsequent coverage includes engi-
neered proteins for controlling gene expression, surface antigen markers,
lineage marking, heart disease treatment, and tissue engineering, among
other topics. A sampling of topics in the second volume: mesenchymal
stem cells in regenerative medicine, cell therapy for blood substitutes,
muscular dystrophy treatment, spinal cord injury, and orthopedic appli-
cations; concluding chapters address ethical and religious considerations,
research policy, and the regulatory process. Editors Robert Lanza and
Anthony Atala are affiliated with Wake Forest School of Medicine.
Academic Press is an imprint of Elsevier.
QH588 978-0-12-385473-5
Human stem cell manual; a laboratory guide, 2d ed.
Title main entry. Ed. by Jeanne F. Loring and Suzanne E. Peterson.
Academic Press, ©2012 619 p. $99.95 (pa)
Loring and Peterson offer medical and biology researchers a lab manual
containing 38 chapters contributed by stem cell researchers from the US,
Europe, Asia, and Australia who outline methods for deriving, charac-
terizing, and differentiating human stem cells. They describe basic
methods, characterization of human pluripotent stem cells, differenti-
ation, genetic manipulation, and stem cell transplantation, and detail pro-
cedures, alternative procedures, pitfalls and advice, equipment, reagents
and supplies, and recipes. The final chapters address stem cell patents
and the ethics of human pluripotent stem cell research and development.
This edition has new chapters on recent methods, such as induced
pluripotent stem cell technology. Academic Press is an imprint of
Elsevier.
BOTANY
QK47 2012-008432 978-1-4496-4884-8
Botany; an introduction to plant biology, 5th ed. (online
access included)
Mauseth, James D.
Jones & Bartlett, ©2014 696 p. $135.95
For the fifth edition of his textbook, Mauseth (U. of Texas-Austin) has
added more material and emphasis on how the biology of humans
impacts plant biology, not just by planting, eating, and modifying crops,
but also changing the climate, damning rivers, polluting water and air,
and other behavior unique to humans. He also points out the growing
awareness of problems and steps toward solving them that are relevant
to botany. The book covers plant structure, plant physiology and devel-
opment, genetics and evolution, and ecology. All the sections are self-con-
tained, to allow instructors flexibility.
QK99 978-1-921719-16-5
Medicinal plants in Australia; v.3: Plants, potions and
poisons.
Williams, Cheryll J.
Rosenberg Publishing, ©2012 472 p. $89.95
In the third of a four-volume set, acupuncturist and herbalist Williams
surveys plants native to Australia that are biologically active, some to the
benefit of humans and some to their harm, and many one or the other
depending on how they are used. Her topics include the art of detoxifi-
cation, psychotic potatoes and tasty tomatoes, caustics and corrosives,
foaming fish poisons, poisonous pteridophyta, and neurotoxic plants of
–231–
perilous consequence. The other volumes cove bush pharmacy; gums,
resins, tannin, and essential oils; and the drug-plant potential of the
native Antipodean Apothecary. Distributed in the US by ISBS.
QK600 2011-945640 978-0-89054-400-6
Illustrated dictionary of mycology, 2d ed.
Ulloa, Miguel and Richard T. Hanlin.
Am. Phytopathological Soc., ©2012 762 p. $169.00
As soon as the 2000 first edition—translated and enlarged from a 1991
Spanish original—was in print, Ulloa (botany, U. Nacional Autónoma de
México) and Hanlin (mycology herbarium, Museum of Natural History,
U. of Georgia) began work on a new enlarged Spanish version. When this
was published in 2006, they thought English readers should have access
to the additional information, so began translating from the Spanish
again, entry by entry. The result is a comprehensive, up-to-date com-
pendium of terms used in the study of mushrooms and other fungus,
along with definitions and origins, and lavishly illustrated with color
photographs and drawings. The completion of the project is a major
event in the mycology discipline and profession.
QK623 978-1-908230-12-6
Neurospora; genomics and molecular biology.
Title main entry. Ed. by Durgadas P. Kasbekar and Kevin McCluskey.
Caister Academic Press, ©2013 294 p. $319.00
Neutospora is the leading model for the study of the genomics and
molecular biology of filamentous fungi, and the application of modern
high-throughput analysis has led to a deluge of information. Geneticists
and other biologists summarize and synthesize the current under-
standing in the fungus’ genome and molecular biology. Among the topics
are the fungal sense of non-self, genetic recombination in Neurospora
crassa, the regulation of gene transcription by light, calcium signaling,
and the Neurospora circadian system: from genes to proteins and back in
less than 24 hours. Distributed in the US by ISBS.
QK641 2012-005599 978-1-78064-019-8
Crop plant anatomy.
Maiti, Ratikanta et al.
CABI Publishing, ©2012 317 p. $145.00
Maiti et al. provide students, researchers, and professionals of agricul-
tural science, applied botany, and crop ecology and botany with a
manual on crop plant anatomy that has an applied approach to adap-
tation and productivity. They address anatomy in relation to crop man-
agement, including the origin and development of crop anatomy, the
relevance of anatomical studies in modern crop science, techniques of
study, and general anatomy; anatomical descriptions of the major crop
plants (cereals, pulses like chickpeas and beans, and oil, fiber, and veg-
etable crops); anatomical changes in adaptation to environments (in
defense against biotic stresses and for drought and waterlogging stress
tolerance); and the link between anatomy and productivity, including to
harvest higher energy, for better reproduction efficiency, and for higher
productivity. Throughout, they show how simple, low-cost light
microscopy of hand sections can be used for rapid identification of
anatomical features and for selection of genotypes under different envi-
ronments, and they cite examples from research. Knowledge from a first
course in botany is assumed. Distributed in the US by Stylus Publishing.
QK725 2012-010722 978-0-470-95860-5
Phloem; molecular cell biology, systemic communication,
biotic interactions.
Title main entry. Ed. by Gary A. Thompson and Aart J.E. Van Bel.
Wiley-Blackwell, ©2012 360 p. $199.95
Already by the end of the 19th century, plant biologists recognized the
paramount importance of phloem transport for plants, suspecting that
plant growth strongly relies on the phloem-mediated supply of photo-
synthates and other organic compounds. Here specialists showcase the
current state of phloem biochemistry, molecular biology, physiology, and
interactions with other living organisms. The topics include funda-
mentals of phloem transport physiology, roles of plasma membrane
transporters in phloem functions, sieve element occlusion, the effect of
long-distance signaling on development, and the behavioral and
molecular-genetic basis of resistance against phloem-feeding insects.
QK725 978-0-12-415920-4
Plant tissue culture; techniques and experiments, 3d ed.
Smith, Roberta H.
Academic Press, ©2013 188 p. $89.95 (pa)
Smith (horticulture, Texas A & M U.) presents a manual for the labo-
ratory exercises in plant tissue culture to accompany courses at levels
from high school to graduate. The exercises use plant materials that are
readily available year round, and do not require an extensive plant
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
material collection. The topics include setup of a tissue culture laboratory, QL638 2012-005658 978-0-8166-7954-6
contamination, regeneration and morphogenesis, in vitro propagation for Northern pike; ecology, conservation, and management
the commercial production of ornamentals, and the agrobacterium- history.
mediated transformation of plants. Earlier editions were published in Pierce, Rodney B.
1996 and 2006. Academic Press in an imprint of Elsevier. U. of Minnesota Press, ©2012 205 p. $40.00
QK728 2012-007650 978-0-470-87012-9 In his first chapter Pierce (Minnesota Department of Natural Resources)
provides a highly detailed examination of variations within Minnesota
The molecular life of plants.
northern pike communities for the purpose of clearly delineating all
Jones, Russell et al. aspects of pike ecology. The second, shortest, chapter explores both recre-
Wiley-Blackwell, ©2012 742 p. $99.95 (pa) ational and commercial fishing practices. The third synthesizes this
This textbook for undergraduate students introduces concepts of experi- information into a practical exploration of conservation and man-
mental plant biology and relies heavily on color illustrations and figures. agement, and the fourth chapter explains sampling practices. The book
The first section provides basic information regarding plant structure includes several graphs, charts, and many full-color photographs as well
and reproduction, cellular structure and chemistry, and plant genomes. as a long bibliography. Due to the large volume of data included, this
The following sections explore in detail aspects of germination, roles of book would be suitable specifically for those with great interest in the
light, growth and maturation, and renewal, with chapters detailing pho- ecology and management of the northern pike of Minnesota.
tosynthesis, the cell cycle, nutrient acquisition, long-distance transport,
environmental interactions, and senescence, among other topics. Each QL666 2011-047301 978-1-4214-0579-7
subsection includes a brief summary of key points to facilitate student The case of the green turtle; an uncensored history of a
learning. Access to a companion website is provided. Included is a conservation icon.
chapter-specific bibliography and detailed index.
Rieser, Alison.
Johns Hopkins U. Press, ©2012 338 p. $45.00
ZOOLOGY Once associated with wealth and abundance, the wide-ranging green
turtle has come to represent the plight of all imperiled species. Reiser
QL60 2012942368 978-1-934874-26-4 (ocean policy, U. of Hawaii) writes a fascinating and well-referenced
history of sea turtle fishing, depletion, and conservation efforts. It is also
Telemetry techniques; a user guide for fisheries research. a “group biography” of the scientists leading the effort to study and pre-
Title main entry. Ed. by Noah S. Adams et al. serve the species, and their differences around the issue of sea turtle
American Fisheries Society, ©2012 543 p. $79.00 farming.
This handbook is designed particularly for fishery biologists working in
the field, but could be used by scientists studying other aquatic animals QL666 2012-382035 978-1-55407-802-8
or managers seeking background to help them interpret results of studies Snakes.
based on radio or acoustic telemetry. It provides the basic information of Gower, David et al.
the theory of signal transmission, propagation, and reception of radio Firefly Books Ltd., ©2012 144 p. $19.95 (pa)
and sound waves from the transmitter to the receiver. On that foundation
it presents practical guidelines from engineers who design the equipment For general readers, Gower, an organismal biologist in the UK, et al.
and from biologists who use it in the field. After introductory chapters, detail the biology and natural history of snakes. They discuss the origins
they consider principles and practice and present case studies first for and fossil records of snakes, their anatomy, senses, temperature regu-
radio then for sound. A final section explains data management and lation, feeding and diet, venom, reproduction, and predator evasion and
analysis common to both media. defense, then their classification and main groups, from boas and
pythons, to vipers, to racers and garter, rat, cat, tree, reed, and water
QL123 2012-002473 978-1-4214-0618-3 snakes. Many color photos and illustrations are incorporated throughout.
The book is based on Peter Stafford’s Snakes from 2000.
Zooplankton of the Atlantic and Gulf coasts; a guide to
their identification and ecology, 2d ed. QL677 2012-020761 978-1-4262-0964-2
Johnson, William S. and Dennis M. Allen. Bird-watcher’s bible; a complete treasury; science, know-
Johns Hopkins U. Press, ©2012 452 p. $50.00 (pa)
how, beauty, lore.
Johnson (biological sciences, Goucher College, Baltimore) and Allen Title main entry. Ed. by Jonathan Alderfer.
(Baruch Marine Laboratory, U. of South Carolina) present a guide for National Geographic Society, ©2012 399 p. $40.00
beginners to the difficult task of identifying the many species of zoo-
plankton—nearly microscopic marine organisms that eat other plankton, Beautifully illustrated and full of fascinating facts, this comprehensive
in contrast to phytoplankton, which use photosynthesis. They include an treasury from National Geographic explores everything you need to know
introduction to the whole study of plankton as well. The focus is on about birds. Edited by artist Alderfer (birding consultant for National
species that live in the low-salinity river outflows within 10 miles of Geographic), the book blends art, folklore, history and science to span all
shore from Cape Cod, Massachusetts south to Florida then west along the levels of interest and expertise. Chapters cover various topics ranging
Gulf of Mexico to Texas. Detailed line drawings are provided, with from mating to mythology, while offering practical tips for finding,
arrows pointing out features salient for identification. The first edition feeding, attracting and identifying birds. This volume will be a welcome
was prepared in 2004, and this second includes more than 50 new taxa. addition to the libraries of bird enthusiasts and those wanting to make
the leap from bird-watcher to birder. Contains “birdographies” and sug-
QL430 2012-008199 978-0-8166-7822-8 gestions for further reading.
Vampyroteuthis infernalis; a treatise; with a report by the QL677 2012-019219 978-0-8166-8119-8
Institut Scientifique de Recherche Paranaturaliste. Hawk Ridge; Minnesota’s birds of prey.
Flusser, Vilém and Louis Bec. Trans. by Valentine A. Pakis.
Erickson, Laura.
(Posthumanities; 23)
U. of Minnesota Press, ©2012 91 p. $24.95
U. of Minnesota Press, ©2012 75 p. $19.50 (pa)
Hawk Ridge, overlooking Lake Superior in Duluth, is a premier site to
Flusser and Bec consider the human dasein, its being-in-a-the-world,
view hawk migration in the autumn. Erickson, whose books and For the
from the perspective of a fablized octopod, the Vampyrotheuthis
Birds radio spot and podcast have been promoting conservation for many
Infernalis. The text is a philosophical inquiry that very creatively dis-
years, discusses the joys and challenges of watching and counting the
places humans in order to think about them from a distance while also
hawks and other raptors that frequent Hawk Ridge. She also provides
trying to think with them, as the Vampyrotheuthis Infernalis shares
tips for visiting the Ridge. Illustrations by Betsy Bowen, another
developmental features with humans that also give them a cognitive rela-
Minnesota resident, complement the text. The book is presented in land-
tionship to the world analogous to human dasein. This is all a bit of a
scape format.
farce that’s intended as a thought-experiment. The authors consider the
creature’s genealogy, its experience of world and its own dasein, and
QL696 2012-018087 978-0-395-70959-7
even cultural features like thinking, social life, and art.
Hawks in flight; the flight identification of North
American raptors, 2d ed.
Dunne, Pete et al.
Houghton Mifflin Harcourt, ©2012 335 p. $26.00
Some 24 years after the first edition, veteran hawk watchers Dune, David
Sibley, and Clay Sutton present a second that is expanded to include all

Reference & Research Book News December 2012 –232–

the raptors that have established breeding populations in the US and
Canada. Among their topics are the flight identification of raptors from
the shotgun to the sublime, falcons: birds that measure distance by the
horizon, big black eagles and vultures, aerialists and specialists of
Florida, and other birds that soar. The book is tightly focused on distin-
guishing between species as seen in flight from the ground; the natural
history, ecology, and other scientific information must be sought else-
where once people know what they are looking at.
QL696 2012-014237 978-0-8070-1076-1
Rare birds; the extraordinary tale of the Bermuda petrel
and the man who brought it back from extinction.
Gehrman, Elizabeth.
Beacon Press, ©2012 240 p. $26.95
In an entertaining and informative style, nonfiction writer Elizabeth
Gehrman introduces readers to an extraordinary person and an extraor-
dinary story about Bermuda, biology, and conservation. Naturalist David
Windgate was a fourteen-year-old boy as he watched the rediscovery of
the last Bermuda petrels, a bird thought as long dead as the dodo. He
decided to dedicate his life to saving the species, and he has. Gehrman
tells the tale of what happened with great human drama, without senti-
mentality, and with scientific accuracy. The history of the bird, Bermuda,
and Windgate’s life are all fascinating and thoroughly intertwined here,
and the book will be a pleasure for general readers with an interest in
natural history, birds, conservation, Bermuda, or island life. The book’s
interest is larger than the tale of the Bermuda petrel. In her profile of
David Windgate, Gehrman quietly makes two facts clear. The first is that,
working alone and mostly without support or recognition, Windgate and
a few similar individuals invented modern conservation biology: endan-
gered species can be saved, they can save themselves, the job requires
protecting and restoring the lands where they live, and how to do it in
practice. (In Windgate’s case, he replanted an entire island by hand.) The
second is that people with the vision to see what others cannot and the
passionate dedication to persist and succeed are by definition eccentric
and out of step. A society benefits from them as much or as little as it
respects their differences. In this story, the petrel flies again, and
Windgate and Bermuda both turn out to be winners.
QL737 2012-004662 978-1-84593-927-4
Feline behaviour and welfare.
Fraser, Andrew F.
CABI Publishing, ©2012 198 p. $72.00 (pa)
Fraser, a retired veterinarian and professor of veterinary surgery who
taught at the Memorial U. of Newfoundland, Canada, supplies veteri-
narians, students of veterinary medicine and animal welfare, and animal
care professionals with a guide to feline behavior and welfare that covers
aspects of cat well-being, pedigree breeds and their characteristic
domestic behavior, feline neuroethology, play and developmental stages,
basic activities, association and reproduction, giant wild cats, principle
and minor species of wild cats, common and comparative features of
cats, abnormal behavior and training, health monitoring, and welfare
guidelines. Distributed in the US by Stylus Publishing.
QL737 2012-008902 978-1-4214-0736-4
Porcupines; the animal answer guide.
Roze, Uldis.
Johns Hopkins U. Press, ©2012 204 p. $24.95 (pa)
Using a question and answer format and integrating color and b&w
photos, Roze (Queens College) presents general readers with a guide to
the 26 species of porcupines around the world and their form and
function, colors, behavior, ecology, reproduction and development, food
and feeding, interactions with humans, problems, representation in
stories and literature, and study.
QL737 2012-010548 978-1-62087-106-5
Waltzes with giants; the twilight journey of the North
Atlantic right whale.
Stone, Peter C.
Skyhorse Pub. Co., ©2012 112 p. $17.95
Stone, an author, educator, and artist, tells the story of a North Atlantic
right whale, inspired by a female whale named Arpeggio chronicled in
the New England Aquarium North Atlantic Right Whale Catalog and the
people who worked to protect her threatened migration routes along the
eastern US and her calving grounds off the coasts of Georgia and Florida.
He uses storytelling and color paintings to imagine her sensations,
encounters, and migration and illustrate the wonder, sorrow, and con-
flicts associated with the species, including conservation and the effects
of hunting, shipping, and active-sonar testing.
–233–
ANATOMY, PHYSIOLOGY, MICROBIOLOGY
QM165 2012-013485 978-1-4504-4021-9
Delavier’s anatomy for bigger, stronger arms.
Delavier, Frédéric and Michael Gundill.
Human Kinetics Pub., ©2011 173 p. $24.95 (pa)
Full of both useful photographs and anatomical illustrations, this guide
shows both how to build up biceps, triceps and forearms and how to
prevent injury and imbalance. Delavier, a journalist for Le Monde du
Muscle and a contributor to several other strength publications, presents
30 effective programs designed for those seeking various results. The
book closes with an exercise index.
QM311 2012-011413 978-0-470-65611-2
Basic guide to anatomy and physiology for dental care
professionals.
Hollins, Carole.
Wiley-Blackwell, ©2012 182 p. $36.99 (pa)
A dental practitioner in Stoke-on-Trent, Hollins is also facilitator of two
long-established dental nursing training courses in the area. Here she
reviews the relevant anatomy and physiology for all members of the oral
health care team besides the dentist: nurses, hygienists, therapists, and
technicians. Among the topics are the cardiovascular system, the digestive
system, oral embryology and histology, the skull and oral anatomy, and
salivary glands. Color line drawings illustrate structures described.
QM495 2011-053153 978-0-393-06318-9
Breasts; a natural and unnatural history.
Williams, Florence.
W.W. Norton, ©2012 338 p. $25.95
Williams (contributing editor, Outside magazine) writes that she didn’t
think much about breasts until she became a mother. Treating breasts as
an ecosystem, she blends personal experience, cultural analysis, psy-
chology, and science in discussing societal hangups and health aspects of
breast-feeding and breast cancer (in men as well as women). Includes
illustrations and endnotes.
QP34 2011-920150 978-1-111-13844-8
Introduction to anatomy and physiology. (CD-ROM
included)
Rizzo, Donald C.
Delmar, ©2012 529 p. $110.95
This undergraduate text offers a visual orientation with color photos,
anatomical illustrations, and process illustrations on every page. Early
chapters cover the human body, the chemistry of life, cell structure, cel-
lular metabolism and reproduction, and tissues. These chapters are fol-
lowed by 14 chapters on various body systems, with each organ
discussed in terms of its anatomy and physiology. Some chapter lab exer-
cises are two-page spreads with color photos, while other lab exercises
can be found on the CD-ROM. Other learning features include review
questions, web search projects, case studies, career boxes, and detailed
summary outlines of key points lasting several pages. The companion
CD-ROM contains quizzes, image labeling exercises, interactive study
games, and 3D animations of complex processes. Mobile downloads of
key terms and images are also available. Rizzo teaches biology at
Marygrove College.
QP88 978-0-12-415784-2
Translational endocrinology of bone; reproduction,
metabolism, and the central nervous system.
Title main entry. Ed. by Gerard Karsenty.
Academic Press, ©2013 226 p. $139.95
Karsenty (genetics and development, Columbia U.) compiles 17 articles by
researchers from Europe, the US, Australia, and Japan who discuss the
effects of bone on whole-organism physiology and how the study of this
discipline aids in the understanding of the pathogenesis of degenerative
diseases affecting several organs. Chapters address various hormones
and neuromediators ranging from serotonin to osteocalcin, as well as
knowledge about the ability of bone to regulate phosphate metabolism.
They demonstrate, through examples of hormones emerging during evo-
lution with bone and coordinating the regulation of bone mass accrual,
energy metabolism, and reproduction, that the appearance of bone
during evolution has impacted the physiology of the entire organism, and
also show, through the example of the skeleton, how a genetic-based
approach to the study of the physiology of a given organ can reveal mul-
tiple new functions, connections with other organs, and novel identities
for well-known molecules. They discuss the basic principles of bone cell
biology, the central control of bone mass, neuropeptide Y and bone for-
mation, the gastrointestinal tract and the control of bone mass, the
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
skeletal actions of insulin, transcriptional regulation of the endocrine
function of bone, regulation of bone resorption, the clinical aspects of
fibroblast growth factor 23, bone marrow fat and bone mass, and the
significance of organ crosstalk in insulin resistance and type 2 diabetes.
Academic Press is an imprint of Elsevier.
QP89 2012-009761 978-1-4051-9825-7
Tissue and cell clinical use; an essential guide.
Title main entry. Ed. by Ruth M. Warwick & Scott A. Brubaker.
John Wiley & Sons, ©2012 468 p. $130.00
Warwick (U. of Bristol, UK) and Brubaker (American Association of
Tissue Banks) present a guide to all aspects of the donation, processing,
and transplantation of tissues and cells, for those working in the clinical
field: tissue banking professionals, transfusionists, hematologists, trans-
plant specialists, and surgeons. In 20 chapters, a variety of specialists
from the US, Europe, Australia, Egypt, and Taiwan include cases and
learning points in their discussion of the ethics and use of allografts;
clinical governance in hospitals, dental surgeries, and other establish-
ments that use allografts; vigilance and surveillance schemes for tissues
and cells from around the world; transmission of disease by organs,
tissues, and cells; and the use of allografts in surgical specialties such as
vascular, cardiac, and orthopedic surgery, as well as neurosurgery, sports
medicine, dentistry, burns, and the use of skin substitutes for a variety
of other applications. Included are chapters on ophthalmic use; complex
composite vascular tissue grafting such as hand and face transplantation;
the use of donated gametes in assisted reproduction; the use of hemo-
poietic stem cells and mesenchymal stem cells; embryonic or neural stem
cells and the central nervous system, with a focus on Parkinson’s disease,
multiple sclerosis, spinal cord damage, and stroke; pancreatic islet cells;
and cardiac stem cells.
QP113 2012-026687 978-1-4398-4980-4
Heart rate variability (HRV) signal analysis; clinical
applications.
Title main entry. Ed. by Markad V. Kamath, Mari A. Watanabe and
Adrian Upton.
CRC Press, ©2013 513 p. $149.95
Bioengineers and medical researchers and practitioners explore how the
precise electronic analysis of variation in the heart rate can be used in
clinical diagnosis. They describe techniques of analyzing heart rate vari-
ability, and clinical applications of the findings in monitoring, acute care,
and chronic disorders. The topics include arterial blood pressure
waveform analysis and its applications in assessing vasovagal syncope,
heart rate variability analysis for monitoring fetal distress and neonatal
critical care, bariatric surgery and its effects on heart rate variability,
heart rate variability in congestive heart failure, and heart rate variability
and depression.
QP144 2012-947354 978-0-85709-124-6
Encapsulation technologies and delivery systems for food
ingredients and nutraceuticals.
Title main entry. Ed. by Nissim Garti and D. Julian McClements.
(Woodhead Publishing series in food science, technology and nutrition;
no.239)
Woodhead Publishing, ©2012 612 p. $305.00
Food scientists survey how delivery systems conventionally used to encap-
sulate ingredients to improve a food’s flavor, color, and other features,
can be used to encapsulate bioactive components to improve human
health. They cover requirements for food ingredient and nutraceutical
delivery systems, processing technology approaches, physico-chemical
approaches, and characterizing and applying delivery systems. The topics
include interactions of food ingredients and nutraceutical delivery
systems with the human gastrointestinal tract, fluid bed microencapsu-
lation and other coating methods for food ingredient and nutraceutical
bioactive compounds, liposomes as delivery systems, a business per-
spective on the advantages and disadvantages of different flavor delivery
systems, and properties and applications of different probiotic delivery
systems.
QP145 2012-007480 978-1-4051-5091-0
The gastrointestinal system at a glance, 2d ed.
Keshav, Satish and Adam Bailey. (At a glance series)
Wiley-Blackwell, ©2013 120 p. $29.95 (pa)
Keshav and Bailey, gastroenterologists in the UK, introduce medical and
allied health students to the basic science and clinical practice related to
the gastrointestinal system, including structure and function, integrated
function, gastrointestinal and hepatobiliary disorders and diseases, and
diagnosis and treatment. Each topic is presented in a two-page format,
with text on one side and illustrations on the other. The text is
accompanied by a website that includes multiple-choice questions and
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
downloadable flashcards. This edition is in full color and has been
revised and updated to include more on diagnostic and therapeutic
endoscopy, revised liver chapters, and a new chapter on embryology.
QP171 2011-041441 978-0-470-14684-2
Biochemical pathways; an atlas of biochemistry and
molecular biology, 2d ed.
Title main entry. Ed. by Gerhard Michal and Dietmar Schomburg.
John Wiley & Sons, ©2012 398 p. $125.00
German microbiologists update and enlarge the 1999 edition to account
for how the rise of the -omics and of systems biology has changed the
understanding of biochemical pathways. This is not a full textbook, they
warn, but a condensation of current knowledge. They cover bacteria,
some archaea, plants, yeasts, and animals, but confess a bias towards
creatures more like themselves. Among the topics are the cell and its con-
tents, metabolism, viruses, signal transduction and cellular communi-
cation, and blood coagulation and fibrinolysis.
QP251 2011-052020 978-0-85745-502-4
Problems of conception; issues of law, biotechnology,
individuals and kinship.
Melhuus, Marit.
Berghahn Books, ©2012 174 p. $70.00
Melhuus (social anthropology, U. of Oslo) presents an empirical study of
current controversies in Norway concerning assisted reproduction raised
by the convergence of new reproduction technologies and a new law reg-
ulating the use of biotechnology in medicine. Focusing on the making of
that law and its subsequent revisions, she explores what the legislative
process reveals about a particular socio-cultural reality.
QP306 978-1-59756-481-6
Speech and voice science, 2d ed.
Behrman, Alison.
Plural Publishing, ©2013 483 p. $65.00 (pa)
This textbook addresses the physics, acoustics, and physiology of voice
and speech production, and features a layout of b&w anatomical illus-
trations, images, and whimsical drawings; amusing yet relevant sidebars
also lighten the material. In this second edition, Behrman (speech com-
munication, Iona College) offers a new organization of introductory
chapters, plus study questions, review questions, group activities, and
recommended web sites, along with advice on study techniques. Chapters
cover sound waves, breathing, basic voice science, and measurements
and instrumentation, in addition to the production and perception of
vowels and consonants, and theories and models of speech production
and speech perception. The text includes a glossary, reference appendices,
and material for a review game.
QP310 2012-011894 978-1-62087-159-1
Anatomy for runners; unlocking your athletic potential
for health, speed, and injury prevention.
Dicharry, Jay.
Skyhorse Pub. Co., ©2012 309 p. $14.95 (pa)
Almost every runner develops joint pains, pulled muscles or perhaps
even fractures. Motivated by his own experience, Dicharry (SPEED Clinic
and Motion Analysis Lab) brings together information from clinical care,
biomechanical analysis, and the experience of coaches to provide some
answers as to why this happens and how injuries can be prevented. The
final chapter discusses corrective exercises using fun extras such as LAX
balls, IT bands, and the large Swiss balls. Color photographs and figures
support the text and four appendixes provide definitions of terms such
as gait velocity and stride time, as well as useful references. No index is
provided.
QP341 2012-021264 978-0-393-07803-9
The spark of life; electricity in the human body.
Ashcroft, Frances.
W.W. Norton, ©2012 339 p. $28.95
Ashcroft (British geneticsist and physiologist and professor at
Oxfordphysiology, Oxford U., UK) uses her research into cellular ion
channels to explore the role electricity plays in our bodies. In this fasci-
nating and accessible account of the body electric, the early contributions
of Benjamin Franklin, Luigi Galvani, Hogin & Huxley et al are examined
as well as present-day research onf how ion channels and electricity are
producing some of the most exciting advances in medicine, shedding
new light on conditions ranging from diabetes and heart arrhythmias to
cystic fibrosis and infertility. Contains 50 illustrations, extensive notes,
and suggestions for further reading.
–234–
QP357 978-0-12-415956-3
Fundamentals of motor control.
Latash, Mark L.
Academic Press, ©2012 352 p. $74.95
Latash (Penn State U.) provides upper-level undergraduates and graduate
students with an overview of motor control, with an emphasis on physics
and neurophysiology. He reviews the history of movement studies and
describes movement production, different theoretical approaches to
motor control and coordination, examples of human motor actions, the
spinal cord and brain structures associated with movement, major motor
pathologies associated with injuries to or dysfunction of neural struc-
tures, and the application of information to daily behaviors like standing,
walking, reaching, and grasping, as well as motor learning and adap-
tation, and methods used in research, from biomechanics to electro-
physiological methods and brain imaging. Academic Press is an imprint
of Elsevier.
QP360 2012-016187 978-1-4666-2113-8
Biomedical engineering and cognitive neuroscience for
healthcare; interdisciplinary applications.
Title main entry. Ed. by Jinglong Wu.
Medical Information Science Reference, ©2013 456 p. $245.00
Engineers, medical doctors, health professionals, and neuroscientists, and
computer and information scientists explore applications of information
systems, artificial intelligence, signal processing, electronics, and other
engineering tools to cognitive neuroscience, which investigate the neural
mechanics of mental processes. Among their topics are motion control of
omni-directional walker for walking support, cross-modal interactions in
visual competition, the effects of the fixation cue in inhibition of return,
self-body recognition and its impairment, language processing in the
human brain of literate and illiterate subjects, evaluating olfactory
impairment in Parkinson’s disease using near-infrared spectroscopy,
neural mechanisms of audiovisual integration in integrated processing
for verbal perception and spatial factors, and speed-accuracy tradeoff
models of target-based and trajectory-based movements.
QP364 2012-001992 978-1-936113-02-6
The synapse.
Title main entry. Ed. by Morgan Sheng et al.
Cold Spring Harbor Lab. Press, ©2012 397 p. $135.00
Most synapses—connections between neurons in a nervous system—
transduce signals chemically, but some electrically. The focus here is on
functions and mechanisms of chemical synapses. Specialists in synapses
were asked to summarize the current status of various aspects of them.
The topics include synaptic cell adhesion, vesicular and plasma mem-
brane transporters for neurotransmitters, calcium signaling in dendritic
spines, regulated gene transcription in synapse development and cog-
nitive function, and synapses and Alzheimer’s disease.
QP376 978-0-12-397916-2
Adolescent brain development.
Jetha, Michelle K. and Sidney J. Segalowitz.
Academic Press, ©2012 100 p. $34.95 (pa)
Aimed at healthcare practitioners, community workers, college students,
and parents, this volume summarizes the research literature on the ado-
lescent brain and implications for social and emotional behavior, with
the goal of providing an accessible overview that links research to real-
world issues and controversies in the field. It covers structural brain
development in late childhood, adolescence, and early adulthood;
changes in connectivity and their relationship to development in the cog-
nitive domain; social and emotional development, including the devel-
opment of social information processing, models of social behavior,
aggression, and individual differences in social behavior; and how genes
and environment work together to influence brain growth and behavior.
No index is included.
QP376 2012-018327 978-1-62087-258-1
Nutrient power.
Walsh, William.
Skyhorse Pub. Co., ©2012 203 p. $29.95
Nutritional medicine researcher Walsh has developed biochemical treat-
ments for patients with various mental illnesses for 40-plus years. He has
written 200-plus scientific articles and presented his research at the
American Psychiatric Assn., the US Senate, and the National Institutes of
Mental Health. In this text, Walsh explains his approach, which is based
on current scientific theory of mental disorders resulting from nutrient
imbalances due to genetic and environmental factors. Opening chapters
discuss brain chemistry; subsequent chapters describe biochemical ther-
apies using chemicals natural to the body to treat disorders such as schiz-
ophrenia, depression, autism, behavioral disorders and ADHD, and
–235–
Alzheimer’s disease. The text may be accessible to general readers—and
offer a hopeful alternative to psychiatric drugs; however, the nutrient
therapies described require supervision by an experienced medical pro-
fessional. No subject index is provided.
QP385 2012-027185 978-0-670-02529-9
How to create a mind; the secret of human thought
revealed.
Kurzweil, Ray.
Viking, ©2012 336 p. $27.95
Author, inventor, and futurist, Ray Kurzweil, ties in current neuroscience
research, thought experiments, and artificial intelligence inventions to
present his theory on the basic algorithm of the neocortex. Presenting a
thesis called pattern recognition theory of the mind (PRTM), Kurzweil
details the true nature of both biological and nonbiolgical intelligence
while shedding light on consciousness, free will, and identity. This
fascinating study provides a map for the production of super intelligence
and explores how these insights will unlock some of humanity’s greatest
challenges.
QP425 978-0-12-384995-3
Sleep and brain activity.
Title main entry. Ed. by Marcos G. Frank
Academic Press, ©2012 276 p. $99.95
This book delves into the science behind brain activity during sleep,
exploring cellular and molecular activity in a series of essays written by
and for neurologists and those in related fields. Contributors discuss,
among other items, alterations in the brain during sleep and wake-
fulness, genetic mechanisms, memory processing, learning and brain
maturation, oscillations during sleep, EEG activity, and some of the func-
tions of sleep in birds and what applications this information may have
with regard to the study of the human brain. Divided into ten chapters,
each with a long list of references and with twenty contributors from
universities and research centers, this book is a wealth of detailed infor-
mation for those interested in staying up-to-date with modern research in
neurobiology.
QP471 2012-005803 978-1-59756-468-7
Translational perspectives in auditory neuroscience;
special topics.
Tremblay, Kelly. and Robert Burkard. (Translational perspectives in
auditory neuroscience; v.3)
Plural Publishing, ©2012 198 p. $99.99
Hearing science research tends to cluster at two ends of a spectrum: the
basic science of cellular and molecular experiments, and clinical trials.
The “translational” aspect of the three-volume series is its intention to
bridge the barren center that has kept the two ends from communicating
with each other. They can be used as course texts for students and as ref-
erences for professionals in either neuroscience or clinical sciences. For
this final volume, contributors from a range of basic and clinical sciences
demonstrate the benefits of combining perspectives for a number of hot
issues in the field. They are noise-induced hearing loss, auditory neu-
ropathy spectrum disorder, auditory temporal processing, inner ear
regeneration, tinnitus, and auditory plasticity and auditory training.
QP471 2012-005803 978-1-59756-202-7
Translational perspectives in auditory neuroscience;
normal aspects of hearing.
Tremblay, Kelly and Robert Burkard. (Translational perspectives in
auditory neuroscience; v.1)
Plural Publishing, ©2012 477 p. $149.99
Hearing science research tends to cluster at two ends of a spectrum: the
basic science of cellular and molecular experiments, and clinical trials.
The “translational” aspect of the three-volume series is its intention to
bridge the barren center that has kept the two ends from communicating
with each other. They can be used as course texts for students and as ref-
erences for professionals in either neuroscience or clinical sciences. This
first volume looks at anatomy and physiology and at physiological cor-
relates of perception in functioning systems. The topics include the
physics of sound, the anatomy and physiology of the cochlea, the lateral
lemniscus and inferior colliculus, perceptual correlates of frequency
coding in the auditory system, and intensity coding throughout the
auditory system.
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
QP471 2012-005803 978-1-59756-467-0
Translational perspectives in auditory neuroscience;
hearing across the life span — assessment and disorders.
Tremblay, Kelly and Robert Burkard. (Translational perspectives in
auditory neuroscience; v.2)
Plural Publishing, ©2012 324 p. $129.99
Hearing science research tends to cluster at two ends of a spectrum: the
basic science of cellular and molecular experiments, and clinical trials.
The “translational” aspect of the three-volume series is its intention to
bridge the barren center that has kept the two ends from communicating
with each other. They can be used as course texts for students and as ref-
erences for professionals in either neuroscience or clinical sciences. This
second volume looks first at life span and disordered hearing, then at
the physiological assessment of audition. Audiologists and other
researchers discuss such topics as the maturation of the auditory system,
physiological mechanisms assessed by aural acoustic transfer functions,
and fundamental principles of magnetic resonance imaging and its func-
tional version.
QP514 2012-008575 978-1-4496-6137-3
Biochemistry. (online access included)
Ochs, Raymond S.
Jones & Bartlett, ©2015 413 p. $190.95
Characterizing metabolism as the central science of biochemistry, Ochs
(St. John’s U., New York) adopts it as the core concept of his one-semester
introductory textbook. He has kept the book short enough that even non-
biochemistry majors can read through it all during the semester and get
a sense of continuity; rather than pick and choose chapters to study, he
says, instructors can bring in outside material for their own emphasis.
The topics include water, enzymes, metabolism and energy, photosyn-
thesis, and nitrogen metabolism.
QP514 2012-012322 978-1-118-10118-6
Chemical biology; approaches to drug discovery and
development to targeting disease.
Title main entry. Ed. by Natanya Civjan.
John Wiley & Sons, ©2012 509 p. $125.00
For those working in drug discovery and development, including
researchers in chemical biology, biochemistry, medicine, pharmaceutical
sciences, and other fields, Civjan, a freelance editor who has a doctorate
in biochemistry, offers a text based on the Wiley Encyclopedia of Chemical
Biology (2008) that explores the role of chemical biology in drug dis-
covery and development. The 23 articles consist of reprints from the
encyclopedia and new contributions on key principles and techniques
used in the design, development, and optimization of drug candidates;
drug pharmacokinetics and properties; drug transport and delivery; and
the biological mechanisms of specific diseases and approaches to under-
standing, targeting, and treating them, including mental disorders,
chronic obstructive pulmonary disease, osteoarthritis, HIV, allergy and
asthma, protein trafficking diseases, metabolic diseases, and lysomal
disorders. Contributors are researchers from North America, Europe,
Australia, Israel, and Asia.
QP517 2012-911033 978-1-84569-802-7
Optical biomimetics; materials and applications.
Title main entry. Ed. by Maryanne Large. (Woodhead Publishing series
in electronic and optical materials )
Woodhead Publishing, ©2012 240 p. $205.00
The field of biological photochemistry and optics is multifaceted, and
editor Large (U. of Sydney, Australia) explains that this volume is distin-
guished by a narrowed focus on the practicalities of applications. The
idea is to discover ways to use materials and processes that exist in
nature with regard to the interaction of light with biological tissue. Seven
contributions offer an overview of natural photonic structures and cov-
erage of optical applications of biomolecules, polarization effects and
their applications, biomimetic nanostructures for anti-reflection devices,
control of iridescence (the case of butterfly scales), optical materials using
silk, and fluorescence control in natural green fluorescent protein-based
photonic structures of reef corals.
QP552 2012-016545 978-1-936113-23-1
Wnt signaling.
Title main entry. Ed. by Roel Nusse et al.
Cold Spring Harbor Lab. Press, ©2013 454 p. $135.00
Signaling by the Wnt family of secreted proteins is recognized as one of
the most fundamental and conserved regulatory systems in animals, con-
trolling many critical aspects of development and adult tissue home-
ostasis. Twenty-three chapters cover signaling mechanisms, development,
stem cell biology and differentiation, and disease and intervention.
Among the topics are secreted and transmembrane Wnt inhibitors and
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
activators, Wnt signaling in vertebrate axis specification, Wnt pathway
regulation of embryonic stem cell self-removal, Wnt signaling and fore-
brain development, and Wnt signaling and injury repaid.
QP561 2012-009844 978-0-470-66151-2
Amino acid metabolism. 3rd ed.
Bender, David A..
John Wiley & Sons, ©2012 456 p. $129.95
Bender (nutritional biochemistry, U. College London, UK)
comprehensively covers all aspects of the biochemistry and nutritional
biochemistry of amino acids. He discusses nitrogen fixation and the
incorporation of inorganic nitrogen into amino acids, and other major
nitrogenous compounds in micro-organisms, plants, and animals,
including the catabolism of amino acids and the microbiological
reactions involved in the release of nitrogen gas back into the
atmosphere. He addresses mammalian protein and amino acid
requirements, methods used to determine them, and individual amino
acids by their metabolic origin, with discussion of their biosynthesis,
major metabolic roles, and catabolism, as well as regulatory mechanisms
for these metabolic pathways and metabolic and genetic diseases
affecting metabolism of amino acids. He emphasizes the nutritional
importance of amino acids, integration and control of metabolism, and
metabolic and other disturbances relevant to human biochemistry and
health. The book assumes students have understanding of the principles
of enzymology, metabolism and cells, and molecular and structural
biology. Revised, this edition includes new advances in structural biology
and recent research in amino acid metabolism.
QP601 2012-008853 978-1-119-99595-1
Introduction to enzyme and coenzyme chemistry, 3d ed.
Bugg, T.D.H.
John Wiley & Sons, ©2012 279 p. $145.00
Bugg (chemistry, U. of Warwick, England) explains that for this edition
he has enhanced the interplay of enzyme active site structure with their
catalytic mechanisms, added findings and research topics from the
recent literature, and redrawn the figures of protein structures with a
program—PyMOL—he hopes will improve the resolution. Among his
topics are from Jack beans to designer genes, methods for studying enzy-
matic reactions, hydrolytic and group transfer enzymes, enzymatic
carbon-carbon bond formation, isomerases, and non-enzymatic biological
catalysis. The textbook can be used at the graduate or undergraduate
level.
QP625 2012-017992 978-0-8153-4456-8
Practical bioinformatics.
Agostino, Michael.
Garland Science, ©2013 367 p. $70.00 (pa)
Having migrated from molecular biology to bioinformatics and from aca-
demia to drug and genetics companies, Agostino offers a textbook for a
first course in bioinformatics for students of biology and biochemistry.
He focuses on the practical skills for analyzing DNA, RNA, and protein
sequences. Throughout, the underlying question is always what can be
learned from the sequence. No equipment is required except access to the
Internet and a web browser. After introductions, he discusses such topics
as the basic local alignment search tool (BLAST) suite and the BLASTN
version for nucleotides, cross-molecular searches, bioinformatics tools for
the laboratory, exploring short nucleotide sequences, and browsing the
genome. Garland Science is an imprint of Taylor & Francis group.
QP702 2012-405610 978-1-57331-839-6
Glycobiology of the immune response.
Title main entry. Ed. by Gabriel Rabinovich et al. (Annals of the New
York Academy of Sciences; v.1253)
N.Y. Academy of Sciences, ©2012 221 p. $45.00 (pa)
Immunologists and other specialists review the current understanding of
how carbohydrates and their binding partners cooperate within the
immune systems, and identify areas of opportunity to learn more about
how carbohydrates influence immune responses. The examples demon-
strate that carbohydrates are as integral to biology as proteins, nucleic
acids, and lipids. Among the topics are multifarious roles of sialic acids
in immunity, galectins in acute and chronic inflammation, whether acute
phase glycoproteins are bystanders or participants in carcinogenesis, an
integrated approach to discovering glyco-biomarkers of inflammation-
related diseases, and engineering cellular trafficking via glycosyltrans-
ferase-programmed stereosubstitution. There is no index.
–236–
QP702 2012-025728 978-1-4398-5460-0
Structural glycobiology.
Title main entry. Ed. by Elizabeth Yuriev and Paul A. Ramsland.
CRC Press, ©2013 309 p. $119.95
Structural glycobiology examines diverse structural and functional roles
of carbohydrates using a wide variety of experimental as well as theo-
retical, predictive approaches. Researchers in biological and medical sci-
ences describe experimental techniques to determine and
theoretical/modeling techniques to predict three-dimensional structures,
alternative approaches for yielding detailed structural information, and
carbohydrates in medicine. Among their topics are nuclear magnetic res-
onance studies of interactions between carbohydrates and proteins,
electron cryomicroscopy of large glycoprotein assemblies, the docking of
carbohydrates into protein binding sites, applications in cancer research,
and the current state of therapeutics derived from glycosamino-glycans.
QP751 2012-025082 978-1-4665-5146-6
Introduction to lipidomics; from bacteria to man.
Leray, Claude.
CRC Press, ©2013 317 p. $99.95 (pa)
Leray (researcher and educator, U. of Strasbourg, France) provides an
introductory text on lipidomics, the study of lipid molecules found in
plant, animal, and bacterial cells. As the author notes, lipidomics is a
new field of study and continuing effective research requires both an
inventory and classification of the diverse family of lipids and their com-
ponents. The author addresses lipids in two primary categories, simple
and complex lipids and includes several appendices on biological and
pharmacological properties, lipids in human pathologies, and a selected
history of lipid science and technology. The book is intended for students
in cell biology, medicine, pharmacology, nutrition, and related fields.
Translated from Les lipides dans le monde vivant; Introduction à la
lipidomique.
QP752 2012-028537 978-1-4398-7486-8
Neurons and the DHA principle.
Valentine, Raymond C. and David L. Valentine.
CRC Press, ©2013 251 p. $159.95
Raymond (emeritus, marine sciences, U. of California-Davis) and David
(ecology, evolution, and marine biology, U. of California-Santa Barbara)
propose that the secret to understanding Alzheimer’s disease is kept by
deep-sea bacteria whose membrane oils are similar to neurons. They
present studies with bacteria and other systems suggesting that the
omega-3 fatty acid DHA contributes great benefits to neurons in maxi-
mizing both the speed of neural impulses and energy efficiency.
However, they show, it is also harmful in that its oxidation damages
membrane integrity. They propose that Alzheimer’s disease is caused by
DHA-enriched membranes of neurons becoming dysfunctional and ener-
getically wasteful, triggering the premature death of neurons.
QP772 2012-027080 978-1-4398-8441-6
Tocotrienols; vitamin E beyond tocopherols, 2d ed.
Title main entry. Ed. by Barrie Tan et al.
CRC Press, ©2013 377 p. $149.95
Tan, a chemist who has invented different tocotrienol extractions from
natural sources and their application in product formulation, et al.
compile 26 chapters of research on the non-tocopherol vitamin E mol-
ecule tocotrienol and its sources, chemistry, and mechanisms of action,
as well as the role in the treatment and prevention of cancer and in car-
diovascular health, diabetes, and other conditions. Scientists and medical
specialists from the US, Asia, Australia, and Europe discuss the occur-
rence, biosynthesis, and function of tocotrienols in plants; the safety of
unsaturated tocotrienols and their isomers; their bioavailability and
metabolism; alpha-tocopherol; antiangiogenic effects; their potential for
various cancers, metabolic diseases, obesity, skin blemishes, bone health,
reproduction and fertility, stress-induced gastric mucosal injury, and dys-
lipidemia; antioxidant action; and their structural modification to
improve bioavailability. This edition has all new chapters. Research was
also presented at the Second International Tocotrienol Symposium, which
occurred in conjunction with the 103rd Annual Meeting of the American
Oil Chemists Society in April 2012 in Long Beach, California.
QP772 2012-022410 978-3-318-02188-2
The vitamin A story; lifting the shadow of the death.
Semba, Richard D. (World review of nutrition and dietetics; v.104)
S. Karger, AG, ©2012 207 p. $104.00
The follow-up to the Manual on Vitamin A Deficiency Disorders, this
volume is written especially for students, nutritionists, and those in the
medical field. Vitamin A deficiency, a nutritionally acquired immune
deficiency syndrome, has been and in some places still is a leading cause
of blindness and death. Until the last decades of the 20th century, the
–237–
impact of Vitamin A on health, especially the health of children, was
unknown. This book explores the impact of Vitamin A deficiency
throughout history and traces the story of how it was identified. Dr.
Richard D. Semba is affiliated with The Johns Hopkins University School
of Medicine.
QP993 2012-022036 978-1-4398-5026-8
Biotechnology of plasma proteins.
Lundblad, Roger L. (Protein science series)
CRC Press, ©2013 446 p. $149.95
Lundblad (pathology, U. of North Carolina-Chapel Hill) discusses using
human blood plasma as a starting material for manufacturing thera-
peutic products. Where it is relevant, he also talks about producing
recombinant products based on plasma proteins and using a protein as
a diagnostic analyte, but not using blood plasma as a source of bio-
markers except in passing. He covers blood, plasma, cells, and other bio-
logical fluids; plasma fractionation and plasma protein products;
methods for analyzing plasma and plasma protein fractions; albumin;
plasma immunoglobulins; factor VIII and von Willebrand factor; plasma
proteinase inhibitors; proteins dependent on vitamin K; and miscella-
neous plasma proteins.
QR41 2011-044258 978-0-470-90594-4
Microbes; concepts and applications.
Bisen, Prakash S. et al.
Wiley-Blackwell, ©2012 699 p. $199.95
Bisen (emeritus, scientist, Indian Ministry of Defence), Mousmi Debnath
(biotechnology, Central U. of Rajasthan), and Godavarthi B.K.S. Prasad
(biochemistry and biotechnology, Jawaji U.) present a textbook for
graduate or undergraduate students in microbiology and medicine. Each
chapter is fairly self-contained, so courses can be tailored in many dif-
ferent configurations. They cover the human and microbial world, appli-
cations and techniques of gene technology, medical microbiology and
molecular diagnostics, identifying and classifying microbes, the diversity
of microorganisms, microbes in agriculture, and microbes as a tool for
business and research.
QR46 49-432 978-0-8243-1166-7
Annual review of microbiology; v.66, 2012.
Title main entry. Ed. by Susan Gottesman et al.
Annual Reviews, ©2012 553 p. $89.00
A number of founding discoveries in molecular biology were made in
1961, and several of this year’s chapters explore the background to those
seminal papers published 50 years ago. In particular, Agnes Ullman
(Institut Pasteur, Paris) writes about a fortunate journey on uneven
grounds, Peter Lengyel (molecular biophysics and biochemistry, Yale U.)
about passing the 50th anniversary of the beginning of deciphering the
genetic code, and Gerald L. Hazelbauer (biochemistry, U. of Missouri-
Columbia) about bacterial chemotaxis during the early years of
molecular studies. Another 22 chapters consider such topics as the phys-
iology and diversity of ammonia-oxidizing archaea, DNA replication and
genomic architecture in very large bacteria, microbial population and
community dynamics on plant roots and their feedback on plant com-
munities, the origin and diversification of eukaryotes, and postgenomic
approaches to using corynebacteria as biocatalysts.
QR69 2012-010293 978-1-4443-3013-7
A practical guide to decontamination in healthcare.
McDonnell, Gerald and Denise Sheard.
Wiley-Blackwell, ©2012 445 p. $124.95
This reference is for those involved in the science, technology, and
practice of decontaminating devices in health settings. The book begins
with an overview of basic anatomy, physiology, and biochemistry related
to contaminants and decontamination, and a survey of common issues
in medical and surgical procedures and facilities. Later chapters address
steps of the decontamination process, covering instrumentation, microbi-
ology and infection control, post-procedure handling, cleaning and disin-
fection, sterilization, storage and distribution, safety, and management
principles. The reference is illustrated with color photos and contains a
detailed glossary. McDonnell is affiliated with STERIS Limited. Sheard is
a sterile services training consultant.
QR115 2012-009375 978-1-4398-3483-1
Microbiological research and development for the food
industry.
Title main entry. Ed. by Peter J. Taormina.
CRC Press, ©2013 345 p. $139.95
Researchers describe the purposes and processes for conducting micro-
biological research and development for companies involved in pro-
ducing and distributing food, beverages, and ingredients and in such
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
support services as processing, sanitation, and food testing. The topics
include building research and development capabilities, validating food
products, competitive research and development of food-processing sani-
tizers and biocides, principles and practices of predictive modeling,
detecting and identifying bacterial pathogens in food using biochemical
and immunological assays, and reporting food microbiology research
outcomes.
QR181 2012-010180 978-1-4511-0937-5
Immunology; 2d ed. (online access included)
Title main entry. Ed. by Thao Doan, Roger Melvold, Susan Viselli and
Carl Waltenbaugh. (Lippincott’s illustrated reviews)
Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, ©2013 376 p. $58.95 (pa)
Doan et al., immunologists and a biochemist, help medical students and
health professionals review immunology. In an outline format, they
explain antigens and receptors, the innate and adaptive immune systems,
and clinical aspects of immunity, including immune deficiency, autoim-
munity, transplantation, and pharmacotherapy. They include many color
illustrations and multiple-choice questions and answers, with explana-
tions. This edition offers five full-color animations on the companion
website (which also has a searchable text and 300 US Medical Licensing
Examination-style questions) and an abbreviations list and glossary.
QR201 2011-043432 978-1-55581-674-2
Intracellular pathogens I; Chlamydiales.
Title main entry. Ed. by Tan, Ming and Patrik M. Bavoil.
ASM Press, ©2012 388 p. $189.95
Tan (microbiology and molecular genetics, and medicine, U. of
California, Irvine) and Bavoil (microbial pathogenesis, and microbiology
and immunology, U. of Maryland, Baltimore) assemble 16 articles by
researchers specializing in infectious diseases, microbiology, and other
disciplines from the US, Australia, and Europe who discuss research on
Chlamydia infections. Writing for scientists, physicians, medical students,
public health professionals, biocomputational scientists, epidemiologists,
and policy makers, they address the range of chlamydial infections and
the relationship between clinical knowledge and the fundamental biology
of Chlamydia; the impact of genomic analysis on understanding of
chlamydial biology and evolution; Chlamydia-like organisms within the
order Chlamydiales; the chlamydial envelope and how specific compo-
nents mediate surface interactions between chlamydiae and susceptible
cells; interactions with the host cell; gene regulations; immune recog-
nition and host cell response during infection; immunopathogenesis; per-
sistent chlamydial infection; animal models of infection; progress toward
a vaccine; genetics; and biomathematical modeling.
QR201 2011-043433 978-1-55581-677-3
Intracellular pathogens II; Rickettsiales.
Title main entry. Ed. by Guy H. Palmer, Abdu F. Azad.
ASM Press, ©2012 443 p. $189.95
Palmer (pathology and infectious diseases, Washington State U.) and
Azad (microbiology and immunology, U. of Maryland) offer this 14-
chapter volume which assembles a group of microbiologists, immunolo-
gists, pathologists, entomologists, biologists, and other researchers from
the US, who update scientists, physicians, medical and veterinary stu-
dents, public health professionals, epidemiologists, biocomputational sci-
entists, and policy makers on recent knowledge about rickettsiae.
Focusing on five of the six genera of Rickettsiales (excluding Wolbachia),
they discuss the human disease manifestations, the evolution of
treatment for infections, challenges for treatment and management, and
treatment failures or persistent complaints; epidemiology and public
health in the US, as well as the global impact; phylogeny and compar-
ative genomics; the cell biology involved in host invasion; stages of intra-
cellular infection; physiology and metabolism; innate immune response
and inflammation in pathogenesis and protection; adaptive immune
responses to infection and opportunities for vaccine development; per-
sistence and antigenic variation; transmission; and improving genetic
systems.
QR394 2012-359307 978-0-12-384684-6
Virus taxonomy; classification and nomenclature of
viruses; ninth report of the International Committee on
Taxonomy of Viruses.
International Committee on Taxonomy of Viruses. Ed. by Andrew M.Q.
King et al.
Academic Press, ©2012 1327 p. $400.00
ICTV is the committee that the International Union of Microbiological
Societies Virology Division has charged with developing a universal tax-
onomic scheme for viruses, irrespective of host. Material in this hefty
volume is arranged in four parts. The first presents a historical survey
and explains the current taxonomic system. The second part, which is the
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
main body of the Report, describes the orders, families, subfamilies, and
genera of viruses as of April 2011, with listings of the species associated
with each. The third section presents the Committee’s personnel, study
groups, and statutes; and the fourth section contains a virus index and
the taxonomic index. The volume is printed on coated stock and is well
produced, and the important taxonomic pages are clearly designed and
include color illustrations. Of the four editors, two are based in the UK,
one in Canada, and one in the US; 10 associate editors helped oversee the
work of a very long list of contributors. Academic Press is an imprint of
Elsevier.
QT18.2 2012-016111 978-1-60913-241-5
Physiology. (online access included)
Preston, Robin R. and Thad E. Wilson. (Lippincott’s illustrated reviews)
Wolters Kluwer Health, ©2013 518 p. $62.95 (pa)
To help medical students studying for licensing examinations, Preston
(pharmacology and physiology, Drexel U.) and Wilson (physiology and
medicine, Ohio U.) provide an illustrated review of physiology that
begins with identifying organ functions in each body system and then
shows how cells and tissues are designed to fulfill that function, rather
than the usual macro-to-micro approach. They focus on topics tested in
the US Medical Licensing Examination, learning objectives covered by
medical school physiology courses, and topics covered in BRS Physiology.
They use a lecture-note format and incorporate examples, clinical appli-
cations, equations, and practice questions, with answers and explana-
tions. Full-color animations, about 200 US Medical Licensing
Examination-style and Comprehensive Osteopathic Medical Licensing
Examination-style questions, and a searchable text are accessible online.
QT25 2012-007453 978-1-4398-7893-4
A laboratory course in tissue engineering.
Title main entry. Ed. by Melissa Kurtis Micou and Dawn Kilkenny.
CRC Press, ©2013 284 p. $59.95 (pa)
Micou (bioengineering, U. of California, San Diego) and Kilkenny (bio-
materials and biomedical engineering, U. of Toronto, Canada) present a
lab textbook to help advanced undergraduate and graduate students who
have knowledge of engineering, cell biology, and statistics, gain hands-on
experience in tissue engineering. The text details 15 experiments based on
classic and recent approaches, including cell culture, microscopy, his-
tology, immuno-histochemistry, mechanical testing, soft lithography, and
common biochemical assays, with emphasis on engineering analysis,
mathematical modeling, and statistical experimental design. Each exper-
iment includes background information, objectives, an overview, safety
notes, a materials list, recipes, methods, pre- and post-lab questions, and
references, as well as a data analysis and reporting section. Introductory
chapters review equipment, lab safety, and essential lab skills, and a sep-
arate chapter presents guidelines for reporting results in technical reports
and posters, journal articles, and extended abstracts and abstracts.
QT255 2012-009493 978-0-7360-8286-0
Physical activity epidemiology, 2d ed.
Dishman, Rod K. et al.
Human Kinetics Pub., ©2013 584 p. $79.00
For beginning students, Dishman (exercise science and psychology, U. of
Georgia at Athens) et al. examine the relationship between physical
activity and disease. They look at the study of the distribution and
determinants of physical activity in a population, as well as how physical
activity can be altered to reduce the frequency of disease, such as hyper-
tension, dyslipidemia, and obesity, or injury or early death. They sum-
marize the knowledge and methods of physical activity epidemiology,
implications for public health, and key questions. They apply principles
used by epidemiologists to cause-and-effect relationships about physical
activity and health risk and address the measurement and surveillance
of physical activity and fitness in a population and problems with moti-
vating youth and adults to be more active. They include chapters on the
etiology of major diseases and the evidence that physical activity offers
protection, including diabetes, osteoporosis, and cancers, as well as
effects on mental health. This edition has been updated to reflect new
research, adds new content, and has more on all-cause and coronary
heart disease mortality and new information on physical activity among
various racial-ethnic populations and effects on cognitive function,
dementia, and HIV/AIDS. It adds a section on patients with inflam-
matory diseases, more on special populations and health disparities, and
a new section on the built environment and social interventions to
promote physical activity participation.
–238–
QT255 2012-009494 978-0-7360-9711-6
Physiological tests for elite athletes, 2d ed.
Title main entry. Ed. by Rebecca K. Tanner and Christopher J. Gore.
Human Kinetics Pub., ©2013 546 p. $89.00
Tanner and Gore (National Sport Science Quality Assurance program,
Australian Institute of Sport) assemble 33 chapters on assessing high-level
athletes to help exercise physiologists and coaches understand and
enhance their performance. Australian sport scientists compile current
standardized physiological test procedures for 18 different sports played
by elite athletes in any country and include rationales and normative
data for them. These include basketball, cricket, cycling, hockey, netball,
rowing, rugby, sailing, swimming, triathlon, and water polo. They also
discuss quality assurance in the exercise laboratory, athlete preparation
prior to testing, and generalized test procedures for the determination of
anaerobic capacity, concepts for the measurement of maximal aerobic
power and blood lactate thresholds, and guidelines for the use of altitude
and hypoxic exposure and the preparation of athletes for hot and humid
environments. In addition, they detail principles and protocols for
common assessment tools for physique, agility, and strength and power,
and field-based assessment. This edition adds new chapters on data col-
lection and analysis, ergometer-based maximal neuromuscular power,
altitude training, heat, physiological recovery, perceptual-cognitive and
perceptual-motor contributions to performance, and Australian football,
rugby, sprint kayak, and volleyball, with updates to data and reference
material.
QT261 2012-020850 978-1-118-27577-1
Sports therapy services; organization and operations.
Title main entry. Ed. by James E. Zachazewski and David J. Magee.
(Handbook of sports medicine and science)
Wiley-Blackwell, ©2012 125 p. $60.00 (pa)
For sports therapists responsible for services at large international,
national, and regional sporting events, Zachazewski (physical and occu-
pational therapy, Massachusetts General Hospital Institute of Health
Professions) and Magee (physical therapy, U. of Alberta, Canada) compile
10 chapters by physical therapists, orthopedists, and sports medicine spe-
cialists from North America, Europe, Brazil, Australia, and Japan, who
focus on the organization and operation of sports therapy services. They
discuss the roles of the different professionals involved; the history of
sports medicine and therapy; the role of the sports therapist in pre-event,
event, and post-event organization; providing host services at interna-
tional Olympic events and working with professional vs. amateur ath-
letes; logistical and treatment considerations for pre-Olympic and
Olympic team travel; the role of communication with athletes, coaches,
and others; decision making about competition after injuries during
Olympic events; and sports nutrition and therapy.
QU325 2012-024102 978-3-318-02170-7
Advances in stem cell aging.
Title main entry. Ed by Karl Lenhard Rudolph. (Else Kröner-Fresenius
symposia; v.3)
S. Karger, AG, ©2012 125 p. $93.00
For scientists working in stem cell research, aging, regeneration, and
cancer, and physicians and scientists in geriatric medicine, internal med-
icine, and surgery, Rudolph (molecular medicine and stem cell aging, U.
of Ulm, Germany) compiles nine papers summarizing the proceedings of
the Third Else Kröner-Fresnius Symposium held in May 2011 and
focusing on current advances in stem cell aging at the cellular and
molecular level and new perspectives in research. Researchers from
Germany and China discuss alterations of stem cell-niche interactions,
age-associated leukemia, and systemic influences on stem cell aging in
Drosophila and mice; hematopoietic stem cell aging and leukemia, as
well as fate decision; DNA damage, checkpoint responses, and cell cycle
control in aging stem cells; stem cell therapy and stress response in the
pancreas and intestine, including approaches to diabetes; niche-stem cell
interactions and environmental influences; stem cells and metabolism;
molecular mechanisms of muscle stem cell aging; and neural stem cells
in development and aging.
QU350 2012-019181 978-3-11-025876-9
Extracellular matrix; pathobiology and signaling.
Title main entry. Ed. by Nikos K. Karamanos.
De Gruyter, ©2012 888 p. $266.00
Biochemists, hematologists, and other medical and biological specialists
synthesize the current understanding of the materials and processes in
the space between cells of a living organism. They cover the extracellular
matrix molecules and their importance in pathobiology and signaling;
the function of glycans; the structure, pathobiology, and signaling of pro-
teoglycans; the biological significance of matrix proteinases in health and
disease; extracellular matrix cell surface receptors, insights into the
folding, assembly, and functions of collagen; emerging aspects in the
–239–
extracellular matrix pathobiology; and targeting the tumor microenvi-
ronment at the extracellular matrix level. The volume could serve as an
introduction for biologists entering the specialty, or a hearty reference for
professionals already in it.
QV38 2012-007296 978-1-118-02868-1
Biopharmaceutics modeling and simulations; theory,
practice, methods, and applications.
Sugano, Kiyohiko.
John Wiley & Sons, ©2012 483 p. $125.00
A pharmaceutical researcher for large Japanese and British companies,
Sugano says that biopharmaceutical modeling demands a wide range of
knowledge about the physical theories, the physiology of the gastroin-
testinal tract, and the meaning of drug parameters. He focuses on oral
absorption of a drug, but shows how the same scientific framework is
applicable to other routes of application such as nasal and pulmonary.
He begins by setting out theoretical frameworks for solubility, disso-
lution, biological membrane permeation, and gastrointestinal transit
models and integration. Then he discusses such topics as drug param-
eters, validation of mechanistic models, dose and particle size
dependency, food effect, and intestinal transporters.
QV39 2012-027738 978-1-58212-166-6
The practitioner’s quick reference to nonprescription
drugs, 2d ed.
Title main entry. Ed. by Cynthia Knapp Dlugosz.
American Pharmacists Assn., ©2012 330 p. $34.95 (pa)
Dlugosz, who is associated with a health care communications and edu-
cation consulting firm and has experience in pharmacy publishing and
continuing education program development, supplies pharmacists, physi-
cians, physician assistants, and nurse practitioners with a quick-reference
guide that draws from the Handbook of Nonprescription Drugs: An
Interactive Approach to Self-Care. It edits and format information from the
text to focus on content that practitioners are most likely to need during
self-care consultations. It covers 22 common self-treatable conditions,
from acne to the common cold to warts, with self-care algorithms on
treatment, follow-up recommendations, and exclusions for self-treatment;
information on cautions, signs and symptoms, contraindications, com-
plications, drug interactions, and special populations; and background
information such as epidemiology and etiology. American Pharmacists
Assn. books are distributed by McGraw-Hill.
QV748 2012-021655 978-1-4511-2036-3
Pharmaceutical calculations, 14th ed. (online access
included)
Ansel, Howard C.
Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, ©2012 450 p. $83.99 (pa)
Ansel (emeritus, pharmacy, U. of Georgia, Atlanta) has revised the 2010
edition of his textbook in light of recommendations by a review team of
pharmacy educators. Among the additions are unsolved problems at the
end of each chapter that can serve as homework, quiz, or assessment
exercises, and more solved problems within and at the end of chapters.
He retains from previous editions an emphasis on background infor-
mation to explain the pharmaceutical or clinical purpose underpinning
each type of calculation.
QZ50 2012002232 978-1-4214-0667-1
Telling genes; the story of genetic counseling in America.
Stern, Alexandra Minna.
Johns Hopkins U. Press, ©2012 238 p. $60.00
This volume presents a historically-informed discussion of the devel-
opment of genetic counseling as a medical profession in the United States
that provides an understanding of how the field matured within the
context of medical discovery and economic, social, and cultural develop-
ments in society and also allows for an interrogation of how controversial
issues have been dealt with from the field’s founding in the 1940s to the
present day, with said issues involving questions of the concept of genetic
risk, the relationship between genetic counseling and understandings of
race in science and society, treatment of disabilities, gender dynamics,
bioethics, and the role of reproductive choice and technologies in the
establishment of prenatal diagnosis.
QZ53 2012-008217 978-3-8055-9929-0
Handbook of clinical gender medicine.
Title main entry. Ed. by Karin Schenck-Gustafsson et al.
S. Karger, AG, ©2012 522 p. $69.00 (pa)
Schenck-Gustafsson (gender medicine, Karolinska U. Hospital Solna,
Sweden) et al. compile 51 chapters on the role of gender in the clinical
presentation, diagnosis, and management of common diseases in dif-
ferent body systems. Specialists working in various specialties around the
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
world address social and biological determinants in health and disease,
with discussion of gender effects on health and healthcare, sex-selective
abortion, fetal programming, and ambiguous genitalia. They then
discuss diseases such as autism, depression, Parkinson’s disease, stroke,
multiple sclerosis, epilepsy, pain, migraine and headaches, fibromyalgia,
irritable bowel syndrome, coronary heart disease, cancer, diabetes,
obesity, pituitary and thyroid diseases, bone metabolic disorders, adrenal
disorders, transsexualism, lupus, rheumatoid arthritis, gout, HIV,
malaria, measles, tuberculosis, sexual dysfunction, chronic kidney
disease, and dementia, as well as policies and practices regarding women
in clinical drug trials, drug disposition and effect, aging, and cognition.
MEDICINE (GENERAL)
R123 2012-026124 978-1-4511-1583-3
Using medical terminology, 2d ed.
Nath, Judi L.
Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, ©2013 1234 p. $87.95 (pa)
With this hybrid workbook-textbook, Nath (biology, Lourdes U.) uses
methods of natural language acquisition applied in foreign language
courses to assist medical students in learning medical terminology by
placing the terminology in the context of basic anatomy, physiology, and
pathology (rather than only presenting lists of terms), and offering it in
manageable chunks. The text includes profiles of individuals working in
healthcare, case studies, information on developmental anatomy and
physiology, medical report examples, and many exercises and questions.
This edition has new chapters on oncology and gerontology, more exer-
cises, added labeling exercises and word search puzzles, a more student-
friendly writing style, reduced anatomy and physiology content, and
more photos. The chapters on the skeletal system and articulations have
been combined, and the chapter on the nervous system and special
senses has been divided.
R601 978-0-12-398510-1
Modern computational approaches to traditional Chinese
medicine.
Title main entry. Ed. by Wu, Zhaohui et al. (Elsevier insights)
Elsevier, ©2012 233 p. $150.00
Compiling a number of recent research results from the Traditional
Chinese Medicine Informatics Group of Zhejiang University, the study
presents systematic approaches to developing knowledge discovery and
management in traditional Chinese medicine using semantic web and
data mining methods. The perspectives include the integrative mining of
traditional Chinese medicine literature and MEDLINE for functional gene
networks, service-oriented data mining, developing ontology for a unified
traditional Chinese medical language system, semantic association
mining, and deriving similarity graphs from linked data on the semantic
web. There is no index.
R690 2012-015722 978-1-4398-7850-7
Getting to standard work in health care; using TWI to
create a foundation for quality care.
Graupp, Patrick and Martha Purrier.
CRC Press, ©2013 197 p. $59.95 (pa)
Graupp, who delivers Training Within Industry (TWI) and has developed
standardized training manuals and materials on TWI modules, and
Purrier, a registered nurse who has experience in Lean and TWI,
introduce readers to a method of training that was developed during
World War II, the Job Instruction module of TWI. Its purpose is to help
standardize work and reduce errors and inefficiencies, provide more
effective training for new employees, and update best practices for
veteran employees in healthcare organizations. They discuss the impor-
tance of humans in the art of medicine, provide a case study of training
in hand hygiene, and describe applications of TWI in health care. Using
the case study, they detail the four steps of Job Instruction and how to
break down a job for training, then discuss how to find key points in a
job, organize and plan training, and implement the Job Instruction
program and integrate it into the culture.
R702 2012-022212 978-0-313-38490-5
Health and wellness in colonial America.
Tannenbaum, Rebecca. (Health and wellness in daily life)
Greenwood Press, ©2012 249 p. $58.00
Contrasting colonial and Native American medical practices throughout,
along with some details on that of African slave populations, this acces-
sible volume provides an overall picture of medical practice in colonial
America from 1600 through 1800. It covers subjects as varied as the inter-
action of religion and medicine to brain disease, and also touches upon
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
topics like the Revolutionary War. Tannenbaum (history, Yale U.) spe-
cializes in the history of women in medicine. The book closes with a two
page glossary.
R723 978-0-470-67270-9
The student’s guide to becoming a nurse, 2d ed.
Peate, Ian.
Wiley-Blackwell, ©2012 460 p. $41.50
Peate (formerly with U. of West London and U. of Hertfordshire) is an
independent consultant and Editor in Chief of British Journal of Nursing.
His second edition textbook provides an update of the standards of com-
petence used by the Nursing and Midwifery Council (NMC) to admit stu-
dents to the professional register, and is organized under the four
domains of the NMC standards for pre-registration nursing education.
The second edition features a title change from the original Becoming a
Nurse in the 21st Century and new case studies, activities, and references
to contemporary literature and legislation. The work is suitable for
nursing students, health-care assistants, those undertaking SNVQ/NVQ
level of study or returning to practice, and individuals planning to
undertake a program of study leading to registration as a nurse.
R724 2012-023893 978-1-4496-8960-5
Ethics for health professionals. (online access included)
Stanford, Carla Caldwell and Valerie J. Connor.
Jones & Bartlett, ©2014 213 p. $51.95 (pa)
Stanford, who has taught a medical law and bioethics course at the
undergraduate level, and Connor, who teaches the legal and ethical
aspects of health care, provide students and clinicians with a guide to
ethical principles and their application to the healthcare environment.
They provide an overview of the field of ethics and a three-step ethical
decision-making model, then discuss patient rights and the patient-
provider relationship, vulnerable populations, confidentiality, workplace
laws, accountability, liability, life and death issues, and controversial
issues like stem cell research, genetic testing, and organ allocation. Case
studies are integrated in each chapter. Instructor resources, crosswords,
flashcards, a glossary, matching exercises, and web links are accessible
online.
R724 2012-019192 978-1-58901-946-1
Hippocratic, religious, and secular medical ethics; the
points of conflict.
Veatch, Robert M.
Georgetown U. Press, ©2012 242 p. $29.95 (pa)
Using medicine as a lens, Veatch (medical ethics, Georgetown U.) argues
that professional ethics are not morally justifiable, are morally repugnant
even, and that the Hippocratic Oath in particular must be abandoned by
medical professionals. Professional ethics are unable to ground their
legitimacy without creating a double-standard, since moral claims on
conduct are still coming from outside the professional context even when
an individual is acting in their capacity as a professional. He’s not
claiming that a professional doesn’t or can’t have role-specific duties, but
that these can only be grounded in a wider ethical system. To that end,
he considers medical ethical prescriptions from both religious and
secular ethical systems. He argues that any religious/secular source for a
medical ethic must come to its knowledge through natural rather than
revealed means. Veatch is arguing about wider moral epistemological
issues that are shuttered by professionally generated codes of ethics.
R724 2011-031713 978-1-4411-2338-1
Reconceiving medical ethics.
Title main entry. Ed. by Christopher Cowley. (Continuum studies in
philosophy)
Continuum Publishing Group, ©2012 266 p. $120.00
European, North American, and Chinese scholars mostly of philosophy
but also law present a modest challenge to the mainstream Anglo-
American conception of medical ethics, by re-examining some of the fun-
damental assumptions of the familiar philosophical arguments and some
of the basic situations that generate the issues. They cover the suffering
patient and the suffering body; when high-tech medicine fails: old age,
dying, and mental illness; autonomy and autonomous decision-making;
and the law, the profession, and ethics.
R726 2010-925117 978-1-84860-871-9
Key concepts in palliative care.
Title main entry. Ed. by Moyra A. Baldwin and Jan Woodhouse. (SAGE
key concepts series)
Sage Publications, ©2011 245 p. $135.00
For health and social care practitioners in the UK, Baldwin and
Woodhouse (health and social care and professional development in
health care, U. of Chester, UK) present 50 key concepts in palliative care,
–240–
contributed by health and social care and palliative care specialists from
the UK. The contributors draw on several professions to address concepts
like agencies in the UK, caring for children and older people, communi-
cation, cultural issues, death, financial issues, funerals, holism, the
hospice movement, legal and ethical issues, organ donation, palliative
care for people with different conditions, patient choices, rehabilitation,
research, sexuality, symptom management, spirituality, stress, and tech-
nology. Arranged alphabetically, each concept is defined and discussed,
with practical applications. One chapter is by a service user and carer
and includes four case studies illustrating the client’s perspective.
Physician-assisted suicide and euthanasia are not discussed in detail.
R726 978-3-643-90097-5
Vegetative state; a paradigmatic problem of modern
societies; medical, ethical, legal and social perspectives on
chronic disorders of consciousness.
Title main entry. Ed. by Ralf J. Jox et al. (Practical ethics studies; v.36)
LIT Verlag, ©2012 209 p. $52.95 (pa)
This collection of essays and studies interrogates ethical and legal issues
surrounding vegetative states made possibly by modern medical tech-
nology. The essays are organized into four sections that build off one
another, though the individual essays can stand alone. First they consider
what the vegetative state is, what it’s like to be in the vegetative state,
what it’s like to live with patients in the vegetative state and how society
should deal with these patients, and a final section considers how deci-
sions are to be reached. Some of the essays are scientific and focus on
neurology, while others are almost ethnographic in their approach to
those who live with vegetative patients. Many of the essays are concerned
with legal decision making. The European authors come from a wide-
range of backgrounds in bioethics, medicine, law, and therapy.
Distributed in the US by ISBS.
R728 2012-013464 978-1-4398-7299-4
Cost-based, charge-based, and contractual payment
systems.
Abbey, Duane C. (Healthcare payment systems)
CRC Press, ©2013 161 p. $59.95 (pa)
In this fourth volume in a series on healthcare payment systems, Abbey,
a management consultant who specializes in healthcare consulting and
related areas, addresses several fee-for-service payment systems and cap-
itation, with an emphasis on Medicare cost-based systems. He provides
background material on types of healthcare providers and associated
organizations and reviews the main types of payment systems, then
addresses healthcare costs and cost-based reimbursement systems,
healthcare charges and charge-based reimbursement, the features and
pitfalls of contractual arrangements, the adjudication of claims, and the
future of payment systems, using case studies to illustrate concepts.
R728 978-1-4398-5624-6
Handling the medical claim; an 8-step guide on “how-to”
correct and resolve claim issues.
Cochran, Catherine.
CRC Press, ©2013 227 p. $49.95 (pa)
For medical billing specialists, Cochran, a billing specialist demonstrates
how to bill and collect on claims for services provided in a physician’s
office, focusing on the CMS-1500 claim form and how to prepare and file
it to submit charges to patients’ insurance companies. She describes basic
practice management skills, the parts of the CMS-1500 form, and the
steps of the claim process: setting up the doctor’s schedule and reviewing
the different appointment types; the patient’s chart, medical documen-
tation, and forms; patient and insurance information; the appointment,
service, where it took place, who provided it, and the patient diagnosis;
different types of coding systems used for billing and how a claim is for-
matted and filed; processing an allowed claim and types of reim-
bursement fees, including the explanation of benefits and what the
American National Standards Institute reason codes mean; and claims
that cannot be processed or denied claims, including appeals and patient
balances. Case examples are provided, and the last section reviews the
revenue cycle and the importance of keeping cash flow moving.
R733 2012-359173 978-1-84816-556-4
Perspectives on complementary and alternative medicines.
Title main entry. Ed. by Ian Olver, Monica Robotin.
Imperial College Press, ©2012 465 p. $124.00
Olver and Robotin (University of Sydney, Australia) unite 20 international
contributors in public health, psychiatry, and medicine, as well as those
who practice and use complementary and alternative medicines (CAM).
The book’s mixture of patient and practitioner stories, strong opinions,
and scientific reviews encompasses a wide range of perspectives on CAM,
both for and against. Some of the major themes discussed are the
–241–
classification of CAM, problems in researching CAM, and regulation of
CAM. Other areas highlighted include what to tell the public about CAM,
what medical practitioners and students should know about CAM, and
how to integrate CAM into Western medical practice. The book offers a
clean, readable layout with many headings and subheadings. It is
distributed in the US by World Scientific.
R733 2012-020158 978-1-59079-955-0
The soul of wellness; 12 holistic principles for achieving a
healthy body, mind, heart, 398399
and spirit.
Parti, Rajiv.
SelectBooks, ©2012 151 p. $14.95 (pa)
After he was diagnosed with chronic pain, prostate cancer, a subsequent
infection, and depression, Parti, an anesthesiologist who specializes in
pain management, began to explore non-traditional treatments based on
complementary and alternative medicine. Here, he enumerates 12 prin-
ciples to help people understand the power of spirit in healing, harmony,
and happiness and creating greater wellness in all areas of life. He details
four dimensions of wellness—mind, body, heart, and spirit—focusing on
the importance of spiritual wellness and how it can foster greater
meaning and direction. He uses the stories of others and exercises to
outline the 12 principles: balancing inner and outer nature; calmness;
acceptance; thinking; finding passion and purpose; practicing love, com-
passion, and kindness; living in unity and balance; accepting the gift of
selfless service; embracing the present; gratitude; recognizing spirit in
everyone; and non-attachment. There is no index.
R837 978-1-84619-524-2
The ultimate guide to passing clinical medicine finals.
Malik, Mohammed Faysal et al.
Radcliffe Publishing, ©2012 346 p. $49.95 (pa)
With this guide, Malki et al., physicians in the UK who have organized
a revision course and recently taken clinical finals, help final-year
medical students in the UK pass the clinical medicine finals. They
address the format of the finals, ethics and communication skills, clinical
histories, examination of each of the body systems, medical emergencies,
and radiology, clinical procedures, and data interpretation, with ques-
tions, answers, cases, and tips. They mostly cover the basics, but include
illustrations of honors responses where possible. Published by Radcliffe
Publishing, UK, and distributed in the US by BookMasters.
R850 2012-009122 978-1-4665-1558-1
A primer on clinical experience in medicine; reasoning,
decision making, and communication in health sciences.
Jenicek, Milos.
CRC Press, ©2013 326 p. $89.95
This work explains how physicians and other health professionals
reason, make decisions, and communicate their views and knowledge,
and advocates a method for critical thinking and decision making in the
health professions. It is intended for undergrads, physicians, nurses, and
other health professionals, including health administration and man-
agement professionals. The book outlines a process for understanding
reasoning about the nature of a health problem and its management;
applying such reasoning to the steps of clinical work; making decisions;
and sharing decisions with peers, patients, and other care providers. The
book presents intentionally simplified clinical examples and dialogs as
they might occur between health professionals, illustrating medical
decision-making and communication in clinical and community settings.
Pedagogical features include chapter-opening summaries and quotes, con-
clusions, and an extensive glossary. Jenicek teaches health sciences at
McMaster University, Canada.
R855 978-1-78190-128-1
The economics of medical technology.
Title main entry. Ed. by Kristian Bolin and Robert Kaestner. (Advances
in health economics and health services research; v.23)
Emerald Group Publishing, ©2012 198 p. $114.95
The seven papers presented in this volume of the series “Advances in
Health Economics and Health Services Research,” edited by Bolin (Lund
U., Sweden) and Kaestner (U. of Illinois, US), investigate the role of
markets in medical technology (broadly defined to include pharmaceu-
ticals, medical devices, surgical procedures, and other aspects of the
medical process). Specific topics include: research and development con-
tract terms in the bio/pharmaceutical sector; effects of regulation on drug
launch and pricing in interdependent markets; the effect of pharmaceu-
tical innovation on the functional limitations of elderly Americans; com-
parative effectiveness research, technological abandonment, and health
care spending; the influence of initial signals of quality on the diffusion
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
of new cancer drug treatments; technology diffusion and substitution of
medical innovations; and health insurance and hospital technology
adoption. Distributed in North America by Turpin Distribution.
R855 2012-020013 978-1-4666-2196-1
Technological advancements in biomedicine for healthcare
applications.
Title main entry. Ed. by Jinglong Wu.
Medical Information Science Reference, ©2013 477 p. $245.00
Wu (natural science and technology, Okayama U., Japan) presents 29
chapters from a group of Asian engineers, physicians, health profes-
sionals, and neuroscience, informatics, and computer scientists who
examine technological advances in biomedical engineering for healthcare.
They address biomechatronics, biomedical image processing, technology
in rehabilitation, biomedical robotics, sustainable materials and tech-
niques, information technology, complex bioinformatics, systems biology,
brain-machine interfaces and rehabilitation, and communication tech-
nology. This includes a motion analysis method for upper limbs, a non-
invasive optical blood glucose measurement technique using
near-infrared radiation, image fusion of multimodal cardiac images,
functional electrical stimulation for the restoration and rehabilitation of
motor function, medical manipulators for surgical applications, a
walking assistance robot, a wearable power assist robot driven with
pneumatic rubber artificial muscles, automated analysis of nursery
school observations, a sleep monitoring system, quantitative modeling of
neuronal polarization, and a web-based image database system.
R857 978-1-84735-752-6
Biodamage and biodegradation of polymeric materials;
new frontiers.
Pekhtasheva, Elena L. et al.
Smithers Rapra, ©2012 248 p. $155.00 (pa)
Russian scientists review the research on damage done to both natural
and artificial polymers by various creatures. They cover bacteria and
microscopic fungi; insects and rodents; the classification of biodamage,
evaluation, and protection methods; the biodamage and protection of
textile materials and fibers; and biodamage and protection of materials
and products. Among the material they consider are wood, paint, leather,
fur, cotton, wool, and synthetic fiber.
R857 2012-941102 978-1-84569-935-2
Biosensors for medical applications.
Title main entry. Ed. by Séamus Higson. (Woodhead Publishing series
in biomaterials; no.45)
Woodhead Publishing, ©2012 337 p. $230.00
In a series of detailed studies of specific areas, specialists at the interface
between electronic technology and medicine provide an overview of
biosensors from the perspectives of principles and transduction
approaches and medical applications. Among the topics are electro-
chemical biosensors for medical applications, nano-sized biosensors,
practical applications and protocols for enzyme biosensors, affibodies as
an alternative to antibodies in biosensors for cancer markets, biosensors
for non-invasive measurements, and wearable biosensors for medical
applications. The information should be useful to researchers in
biosensors or their application in medicine.
R857 2012-022198 978-1-4398-7143-0
Biosignal processing; principles and practices.
Title main entry. Ed. by Hualou Liang, Joseph D. Bronzino and Donald
R. Peterson.
CRC Press, ©2013 202 p. $99.95
Contemporary methods in processing biomedical signals, with an
emphasis on analyzing brain signals, are reviewed by biomedical and
electrical engineers and related specialists. The topics include acquiring
and processing digital biomedical signals, time-frequency signal repre-
sentations for biomedical signals, general linear modeling of magneto-
encephalography data, the emergence of groupwise registration in
magnetic resonance study of the brain, and causality analysis of multi-
variate neural data.
R857 978-1-84735-601-7
Electrospinning for advanced biomedical applications and
therapies.
Title main entry. Ed. by Nuno M. Neves.
Smithers Rapra, ©2012 320 p. $205.00 (pa)
Biomedical and regenerative engineers, materials scientists and engi-
neers, and other contributors explore how electrospun fibrous mem-
branes are being used in tissue engineering, drug delivery, and other
biomedical applications. They cover extracellular matrix analogues fabri-
cated by electrospinning, advanced electrospinning setups and special
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
fiber and mesh morphologies, critical aspects of electrospun meshes for
biomedical applications, tissue engineering scaffolding using electro-
spinning, nanofiber-based systems for wound healing applications, bio-
mimetics with nanofiber meshes, challenges and opportunities of
nanofibers in biomedical products, translational research into the clinic
of electrospun solutions, and future perspectives.
R857 978-3-527-33033-1
Hydrogel micro and nanoparticles.
Title main entry. Ed. by L. Andrew Lyon and Michael Joseph Serpe.
Wiley-VCH, ©2012 406 p. $200.00
Chemists, physicists, and materials scientists explore colloidally stable
hydrogel particles—often called microgels or nanogels depending on the
length scale of their smallest dimension. Because they are composed of
a cross-linked hydrophilic polymer network, they swell with water, typi-
cally taking on a spherical shape. Applications range from machinery
lubrication to drug delivery. The focus here is on new synthetic routes,
characterization methods, and applications. The topics include basic con-
cepts and applications of thermosensitive core-shell microgels, doubly
crosslinked microgels, nanogel engineering by associating polymers for
biomedical applications, oscillating microgels driven by chemical reac-
tions, and dynamical arrest and crystallization in dense microgel sus-
pensions.
R857 2012945022 978-0-85709-233-5
Nanomedicine; technologies and applications.
Title main entry. Ed. by Thomas J. Webster. (Woodhead Publishing
series in biomaterials; no.49)
Woodhead Publishing, ©2012 680 p. $300.00
Biomedical engineers, chemists, and other contributors review materials,
technologies, and processes in medicine that include manipulations at
the nanometer scale. They look at materials, properties, and considera-
tions; therapeutics and imaging; soft tissue engineering; and bone and
cartilage tissue engineering. The topics include nanoporous gold, ortho-
pedic carbon nanotube biosensors for controlled drug delivery, DNA and
RNA delivery, the rapid fabrication of biomimetic nanofiber-enabled skin
grafts, and electrically active biocomposites as smart scaffolds for bone
tissue engineering.
R857.M3 2012-025753 978-1-118-03014-1
Biomedical materials and diagnostic devices.
Title main entry. Ed. by Ashutosh Tiwari et al.
Scrivener/Wiley, ©2012 614 p. $220.00
Tiwari (nanobioelectronics, IFM-Linköping U., Sweden) et al. provide
undergraduate and graduate students and researchers in chemistry,
materials science, physics, pharmacy, biological science, and biomedical
engineering with a guide to biomedical materials and devices, including
the fabrication, performance, and uses of diagnostic devices, those for
drug delivery and therapeutics, and devices for tissue engineering and
organ regeneration. In 20 chapters, scientists working in chemistry, phar-
maceutics, biotechnology, engineering, and other fields in Europe, North
America, the Middle East, and Asia discuss the use of collagen, crys-
talline calcium orthophosphates, amphiphilic polymers, polycapro-
lactone, biomimetic assembly, bio-nanocomposite matrices, bio-silica,
theranostic nanobiomaterials, intelligent drug delivery systems, elas-
tomeric nanobiomaterials, electrospun nanomatrices, metal nanopar-
ticles, and biosensors.
R858 2012-022497 978-1-56793-435-9
Health informatics; a systems perspective.
Title main entry. Ed. by Gordon D. Brown et al.
Health Administration Press, ©2013 390 p. $116.00
This introductory text is intended for students in health services man-
agement and the health professions, including medicine, nursing, health
policy, and information technology. The text emphasizes health infor-
matics as the basis for inter-professionalism and collaboration. Unlike
other textbooks, it shows how information technology can fundamentally
transform the structure of clinical processes and organizations. Coverage
encompasses bioinformatics, medical and nursing informatics, and
public health informatics, with material on operational aspects, such as
building databases and implementing electronic records, and discussion
of the potential of evidence-based clinical decision-support systems in
medicine and nursing. Discussion of systems theory touches on clinical
decision making, clinical work processes, predictive modeling, and data
mining. Learning features include chapter objectives and key terms, dis-
cussion questions, case studies, and a glossary. Online instructor
resources are available. Brown teaches health management and infor-
matics at the University of Missouri.
–242–
R864 978-1-907132-39-1
Advances in electronic health records.
Title main entry. Ed. by Ming-Chien Chyu.
Multi-Science Publishing Co., ©2013 494 p. $95.00 (pa)
Chyu (Texas Tech U.) collects 26 articles originally published in the
Journal of Healthcare Engineering that focus on advances in electronic
health records, electronic medical records, and personal health records.
They address topics related to interoperability and standards, including
the implementation of standards to represent and communicate infor-
mation and interoperability issues among systems managing HIV patient
information; safety, with discussion of storing healthcare data in the
cloud and the design of resilient healthcare and records systems;
improvement; implementation and barriers in England, the US, Italy,
Greece, and Australia; aspects related to the Signal Interpretation and
Monitoring project that collects and processes bedside medical device
data; a free, downloadable system that documents nursing care; a self-
service, multi-function kiosk; evaluation and benefits, such as the effect
of systems on work process efficiencies and hospital productivity; and
applications, such as home care electronic health records, software that
transforms clinical data into diagnostic assertions, and a system for atrial
fibrillation patients with implant devices. Article authors are specialists
in engineering, health informatics, medical information technology, med-
icine, nursing, and other fields from.0North America, Europe, and India.
No index is provided.
R920 978-1-4496-5288-3
Nuclear medicine instrumentation, 2d ed. (online access
included)
Prekeges, Jennifer.
Jones & Bartlett, ©2013 371 p. $99.95 (pa)
Prekeges (nuclear medicine technology, Bellevue College) offers a guide to
nuclear medicine instruments for students learning to become technolo-
gists. It provides information on operation, quality control, sample cal-
culations, and other aspects. A sampling of topics includes small
instruments like gas-filled, scintillation, and semiconductor detectors; the
gamma camera; single-photon emission computed tomography (SPECT);
and positron emission tomography (PET). This edition incorporates new
developments and imaging instruments, a new chapter on magnetic res-
onance imaging and its application in nuclear medicine,and a new
appendix on laboratory accreditation. It has new and revised illustrations
and a new glossary. It also has a new concept map on the operation of
a scintillation detector; clarification of energy resolution vs. FWHM; a
section on noise regularization; and more information on the implemen-
tation and clinical benefits of SPECT images and direct and cross-planes
in PET images. The companion website contains crosswords, interactive
flashcards, matching exercises, and other resources.
MEDICINE (PUBLIC ASPECTS)
RA393 2012-017298 978-0-87417-889-0
Cries of crisis; rethinking the health care debate.
Hackey, Robert B.
U. of Nevada Press, ©2012 174 p. $34.95
Decrying the “discourse of endless crisis,” Hackey (health policy,
Providence College) examines the policy implications of describing the
health care system using the rhetoric of crisis. He argues that the under-
lying assumptions that frame public debate on health care reform are
counterproductive, especially the rhetoric of crisis and the portrayal of
the health care system as teetering on the edge of collapse, in forums
such as journalistic coverage, political speeches, popular film and TV,
and advertising. The author offers a conceptual toolkit to analyze the
rhetoric of health care reform, which draws on diverse research tradi-
tions, including rhetoric, public affairs, sociology, and symbolic politics.
In his conclusion, he offers a blueprint for redefining public discourse
about reform.
RA393 2012-371848 978-981-4313-96-4
The health care dilemma; a comparison of health care
systems in three European countries and the US.
Armstrong, Elizabeth G. et al.
World Scientific, ©2011 443 p. $98.00
This work presents 25 patient stories and case histories offering insight
on three contrasting healthcare systems: the single-payer socialized med-
icine model of Scandinavia; the government-legislated Statutory Health
Insurance system of Germany; and the variety of public and private
health care providers in the US. The cases are written by senior level
medical students as participant-observers in a student exchange program
called The United States-Europe Medical Education Exchange, and draw
on interviews with the patient, the patient’s family, and healthcare
–243–
providers involved in the patient’s care. Cases are presented in country
sections on Denmark, Sweden, and Germany. Each section begins with a
comparison of the healthcare systems of the US and the country under
discussion. A final chapter describes the US healthcare system. The
book’s readership includes healthcare faculties, policy makers, and
others concerned with patient-centric care. Armstrong is affiliated with
Harvard Medical School.
RA394 2012-035128 978-1-4665-5474-0
Developing a poly-chronic care network; an engineered,
community-wide approach to disease management.
Story, Pierce.
CRC Press, ©2013 265 p. $69.95
Story presents the second volume in a series designed to change the
healthcare system in the US and perhaps across the globe. The first was
Dynamic Capacity Management for Healthcare: Advanced Methods and
Tools for Optimization (CRC Press, 2010). The 2010 Patient Protection and
Affordable Care Act reveals that Medicare and Medicaid are financially
unfeasible, he argues, and the only answer is more business-like profit-
driven health corporations.
RA394 2012-035014 978-1-4398-4152-5
Kaizen workshops for lean healthcare.
Title main entry. Ed. by Thomas Lindsay Jackson. (Lean tools for
healthcare series)
CRC Press, ©2013 108 p. $28.95 (pa)
This guide outlines the steps to conducting a kaizen workshop for con-
tinuous improvement in healthcare organizations. It describes key con-
cepts, the origins of Lean healthcare methodology, and the elements of
the “production” of healthcare services. Contributors detail the differ-
ences between healthcare processes and the individual operations or
cycles of work that processes link together; foundational information for
kaizen and kaizen workshops, including value, value-added, and waste,
and key roles for success; planning and preparation, including identi-
fying waste, selecting the leader and team, and scheduling the workshop;
implementation; and how to present workshop results to organizations
and follow up.
RA395 2012-023367 978-1-4129-9602-0
Debates on U.S. health care.
Title main entry. Ed. Jennie Jacobs Kronenfeld et al. (A Sage reference
publication)
Sage Reference Publication, ©2012 569 p. $115.00
For this collection of paired point/counterpoint essays, Kronenfield (soci-
ology, Arizona State U.) unites US contributors in political science, health
administration and policymaking, public health, and philosophy, as well
as medical practitioners in areas such as primary care and community
medicine. The essays summarize debates related to various aspects of the
US healthcare system and are grouped in sections on philosophical,
political and legal debates; economic and fiscal debates; and debates on
quality. Major themes include health care reform and paying for reform,
providers and quality, treatment methods, and cost and quality. Each
section offers a detailed introduction connecting the different perspec-
tives and supplying historical context. Each chapter begins with a one-
sentence summary of the point and the counterpoint, and closes with a
list of further reading. Some specific topics debated include states’ rights
and health care reform, taxing high-cost plans, Medicaid program flexi-
bility, and home care.
RA395 2011-276793 978-0-309-21914-3
Essential health benefits; balancing coverage and cost.
Committee on Defining and Revising an Essential Health Benefits
Package for Qualified Health Plans, Board on Health Care Services,
Institute of Medicine of the National Academies. Ed. by Cheryl Ulmer
et al.
National Academies Press, ©2012 231 p. $54.00 (pa)
As requested by the US Department of Health and Human Services, the
Institute of Medicine’s Committee on Defining and Revising an Essential
Health Benefits Package for Qualified Health Plans outlines a process and
criteria for defining, monitoring, and updating the set of benefits that
must be offered to individuals and small groups in state-based pur-
chasing exchanges and the existing market as mandated by the Patient
Protection and Affordable Care Act (ACA). The committee focused on bal-
ancing the comprehensiveness of benefits with their cost. It contends that
the initial package should be a modification of what small employers are
currently offering and should be improved over time, and recommends
that it take into account the 10 general categories of the ACA, apply com-
mittee-developed criteria to guide content and methods to determine the
package, and develop an initial package within a premium target. In
addition, the committee addresses medical necessity and the emphasis on
evidence-based research. The report discusses how the package will
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
impact the health insurance system; approaches to covered benefit defi-
nition and design; the policy foundations and criteria the committee used
to guide deliberations and for defining and updated benefits; and con-
clusions about the provisions in the ACA that provide conflicting
direction for essential benefits. Also covered is the definition of the
package and the nature of guidance to insurers and exchanges; an
approach to public deliberation for tradeoffs among benefits; the impor-
tance of learning from implementation and planning in advance through
data collection and research with guidance from an appointed National
Benefits Advisory Council; alternative ways of defining essential health
benefits through a state-initiated process; and updating the package.
There is no index.
RA395 978-1-4665-6152-6
Healthcare at a turning point; a roadmap for change.
Numerof, Rita E. and Michael N. Abrams.
CRC Press, ©2013 250 p. $39.95
Numerof, a consultant and author, and Abrams, a consultant to corpo-
rations, pharmaceutical and medical device companies, and other indus-
tries, explore how the healthcare industry got where it is, what the
implications are for major industry segments, and how to move forward.
They argue that reform requires business model change that aligns
financial mechanisms with prevention, improved quality, and reduced
costs; places patients at the center; and involves a competitive market.
They describe the role of consumers and employers in healthcare reform,
and the importance of comparative effectiveness research and its impli-
cations for delivery, payers, and pharmaceutical, medical device, and
diagnostics manufacturers. Other topics discussed include the impor-
tance of reforming delivery, creating value, and why the Patient
Protection and Affordable Care Act won’t work; enabling markets to
create access to care; and creating change.
RA395 978-1-84619-521-1
Sustainably improving health care; creatively linking care
outcomes, system performance, and professional
development.
Title main entry. Ed. by Paul Batalden and Tina Foster. (Culture,
context and quality in health sciences research, education, leadership
and patient care.)
Radcliffe Publishing, ©2012 206 p. $59.95 (pa)
Specialists in medical administration and education in the US, Sweden,
and Canada explain a model of requirements for the future continual
improvement of health care. They explore its origins in their work and
observations with real patients in real health care settings, its content and
manifestations, and its implications for health care professional leaders.
The model links improved care outcomes, improved system performance,
and improved professional development. Among their perspectives are
approaches to improving care by addressing different levels of systems,
the development and work of faculty as coaches, and triangle synergies
in a national quality and safety education initiative in nursing. Published
by Radcliffe Publishing in Britain and distributed in the US by
BookMasters.
RA395 2012-015803 978-1-4496-3210-6
Understanding health care management; a case study
approach.
Goldsmith, Seth B.
Jones & Bartlett, ©2014 333 p. $87.95 (pa)
Current healthcare practitioners and administrators as well as students
of healthcare administration will benefit from the case studies presented
by Goldsmith (health policy and management, U Massachusetts at
Amherst) in this thoughtfully composed book. The book is divided by
theme in order to facilitate full understanding of effective health care
management: patient and family perspectives, corporate governance,
human resource management, organization, change management,
planning, marketing, finances, legal issues and corporate compliance,
and working with the Office of Inspector General’s Advisory Process. The
case studies are provided by a variety of healthcare administrators and
providers and represent a diverse selection of situations healthcare man-
agers can be expected to experience. Discussion questions are included
with each case study to encourage thoughtful engagement with the text.
RA407 2012-027228 978-0-7637-9788-1
Health policy; crisis and reform, 6th ed.
Title main entry. Ed. by Carroll L. Estes et al.
Jones & Bartlett, ©2013 821 p. $84.95 (pa)
Estes et al. (social and behavioral sciences and health and aging, U. of
California, San Francisco) provide health professionals and students in
health policy, as well as scholars, researchers, and policy makers, with
an overview of the health policy and political process as it relates to US
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
healthcare. The book collects 68 recently published and original articles,
book excerpts, and issue briefs. They relate to health politics and political
action and reform, health status and access to care, delivery systems
issues, economics, and global issues. This edition has all new articles
(except for fourrevised classics) and a new chapter on corporate influ-
ences. It has been revised to include new articles related to the recent
healthcare reform, and focuses on population and individual health and
health inequalities linked to health policy. Articles address children’s
health and insurance and problems relating to healthcare delivery for
diverse and vulnerable populations. It adds an epilogue on urgent con-
cerns like health reform, the “war on women,” and the “war on Social
Security, Medicare, and Medicaid.”
RA409 2012-015698 978-1-4398-6797-6
Applied medical statistics using SAS.
Der, Geoff and Brian S. Everitt.
CRC Press, ©2012 541 p. $89.95
In 2010, Der, a consulting medical statistician in Glasgow, and Everitt
(emeritus, statistics, King’s College, London) embarked on a revision of
their 2006 Statistical Analysis of Medical Data Using SAS but there were
so many revisions and additions that they decided to start over instead.
Here they devote more attention to the planning stage of medical studies
in the sense that several chapters now contain details of sample size esti-
mation. They explain various methods of randomization that might be
used for clinical trials, and include chapters on areas of recent interest
such as Bayesian methods and multiple imputation. The SAS statistical
software has also changed; they use version 9.3, the latest at press time.
RA409 2012-019378 978-1-4398-8414-0
Medical biostatistics, 3d ed.
Indrayan, Abhaya. (Chapman & Hall/CRC biostatistics series)
CRC Press, ©2013 962 p. $129.95
Aimed at students, researchers, and professionals in medicine and
health, this textbook explains statistical aspects of medicine from a
medical perspective. It covers the basics, such as types of medical studies
and data collection tools; the design of investigations, including sam-
pling, observational studies, medical experiments, and clinical trials; and
numerical and graphical methods for describing variation in data. It also
details quantitative aspects of medicine in clinimetrics and evidence-
based medicine; indicators used for measuring the health level of a com-
munity; and confidence intervals and tests of statistical significance in
view of sampling fluctuations. It de-emphasizes theoretical development
and stresses applications, and includes examples. Basic algebra is used
(but kept to a minimum), and the fundamentals of equations and for-
mulas are explained.
RA410 2012019556 978-1-4496-6539-5
Economics of health and medical care, 6th ed. (online
access included)
Hicks, Lanis L.
Jones & Bartlett, ©2014 599 p. $102.95 (pa)
Hicks (health management and informatics, U. of Missouri, Columbia)
introduces public health students to the economic approach to under-
standing healthcare issues and problems, based on the identification of
scarcity as a major cause of many problems. She focuses on how to think
about economic problems in a systematic way and the three main eco-
nomic tasks in a health context—descriptive, explanatory, and evaluative
economics—and the medical care, health insurance, and the labor
markets. This edition has more on health insurance to incorporate more
theory on insurance markets and the implications that insurance has for
efficiency in the industry, and new coverage of healthcare reform and its
impact on different sectors of the economy and individuals in the system
and other changes in health policy, such as the implications of the Health
Information for Economics and Clinical Health (HITECH) Act. The
glossary has been updated and expanded, and the text has more on
Medicare to include Part C and Part D, the conversion of the original
Diagnosis-Related Groups system, employer-based insurance, rationing,
capitation and salaried physicians, the net-benefit approach and the
benefit-cost ratio approach, normal and inferior goods, expectations, and
substitution effects, and moral hazard, including Nyman’s model.
RA410 978-1-60359-802-6
Physician characteristics and distribution in the US, 2013
ed.
Smart, Derek R.
American Medical Association, ©2012 514 p. $205.00 (pa)
From the American Medical Association, this annual resource lists sta-
tistical data about the physician supply in the US, for hospitals, medical
societies, medical schools, specialty boards, government agencies, associ-
ations, and other organizations researching health care issues, trends in
–244–
physician supply, and the availability of physician services, or those
involved in planning or policy development. It draws data from the
American Medical Association Masterfile to outline, in tables and descrip-
tions, the trends, characteristics, distribution, professional activity by self-
designated specialty and geographic region, and primary care specialties
of about one million physicians. It includes physician/population ratios
for the nation, state of location, and specialty of practice, and compar-
ative data on the activity, specialty, and location of physicians from 1975
through 2011, along with information on the school and year of gradu-
ation, specialty board certification, and race/ethnicity, age, and sex.
Tables for female physicians and international medical graduates are
included. This edition adds statistics on group and physician positions
by size, specialty, and state, and a chapter on doctors of osteopathy.
RA418 978-1-78190-124-3
Issues in health and health care related to race/ethnicity,
immigration, SES and gender.
Title main entry. Ed. by Jennie Jacobs Kronenfeld. (Research in the
sociology of health care; v.30)
Emerald Group Publishing, ©2012 280 p. $134.95
Editor Kronenfeld (sociology, Arizona State University) gathers contrib-
utors in sociology, education, emergency medicine, gender studies,
political science, and urban studies in this work for students and
scholars. The first part of the book reviews basic concepts related to race
and ethnicity, immigration, socioeconomic status (SES), and gender as
factors in health and health care, and briefly introduces subsequent
chapters. Section 2, the largest section of the book, contains six chapters
on race/ethnicity, immigration, and SES as related to health and health
care services, with three chapters on specific ethnic groups and three
chapters on broader issues. Section 3 offers three chapters on gender
issues such as the gendering of affective disorders in consumer adver-
tisements. The last section considers policy issues and race/ethnicity. The
book is distributed in North America by Turpin Distribution.
RA427 2012-011500 978-1-4496-8385-6
Marketing public health; strategies to promote social
change, 3d ed. (includes online access code)
Resnick, Elissa and Michael Siegel.
Jones & Bartlett, ©2013 382 p. $99.95 (pa)
Resnick (health research and policy, U. of Illinois, Chicago) and Siegel
(community health sciences, Boston U.) help public health students and
practitioners in all levels of government and the private sector under-
stand basic marketing principles and their application in planning,
implementing, and evaluating initiatives to change individual behavior,
improve social and economic conditions, advance social policies, and
compete for public attention and resources. They argue that practitioners
must learn the needs and desires of their target audience and package
the desired behavior so the target audience recognizes that it will meet
those needs and desires, requiring them to understand the motivation,
opportunity, and ability to engage in the desired behavior and create
product offerings that increase opportunities to do so. They discuss
threats to public health and public health as an institution; challenges in
promoting social changes; key marketing concepts and how they apply
to individual behavior and policy changes; strategic planning, research
techniques, and framing and delivering messages; developing messages
and mass media and other promotional activities and materials; and
tracking, evaluating, and refining social change efforts. This edition has
new examples and new case studies on global health and suicide pre-
vention through social media; new coverage of social media technology;
and discussion of building relationships with audiences rather than
managing individual transactions, the power of branding, and ensuring
that audience self-interest is considered and addressed. A companion
website features crosswords, flashcards, a glossary, quizzes, matching
questions, and web links.
RA427 2012-017084 978-1-56793-437-3
Risk adjustment for measuring health care outcomes, 4th
ed.
Title main entry. Ed. by Lisa I. Iezzoni.
Health Administration Press, ©2013 606 p. $104.00
This text offers independent chapters for a multidisciplinary readership
of students and professionals in areas such as biostatistics, public health,
psychology, and health policy. It introduces concepts and methods for
designing, using, and evaluating risk adjustment methods when com-
paring outcomes of care such as costs, clinical outcomes, and patient-cen-
tered outcomes in various health care settings. Because the field is broad
and changing, the book does not review existing risk adjustment
methods; instead, it concentrates on basic methods and principles that
apply generally to risk adjustment. Individual chapters are devoted to
data from administrative sources, medical records, and patient surveys.
Later chapters cover practical issues in developing and evaluating risk
–245–
adjustment methods and understanding their validity and reliability.
There is also material on risk adjustment for specific populations. This
fourth edition contains a new chapter on using risk adjustment in the
management of health care organizations, plus new information on
genetic, social, and environmental risk factors. This edition reflects
current practice in electronic health records and health information tech-
nologies. Iezzoni teaches medicine at Harvard Medical School.
RA440 2003-54348 978-1-4496-8335-1
A case manager’s study guide; preparing for certification,
4th ed. (online access included)
Fattorusso, Denise and Campion Quinn.
Jones & Bartlett, ©2013 421 p. $125.95 (pa)
This fourth edition for those studying for case management certification
is a comprehensive study guide which includes a pretest with answers,
exclusive access to online test preparation materials, thorough overview
of required subjects, a posttest, and several appendices. The six main
chapters discussing case management concepts, principles of practice,
psychological aspects, healthcare management and delivery, healthcare
reimbursement, and rehabilitation are divided into detailed subsections
to promote fast, effective studying. The study guide is also appropriate as
a quick reference guide for practicing case managers. Chapter-specific
bibliographies and practice tests with answers are included at the end of
each chapter.
RA440 2012-419507 978-0-309-22029-3
Facilitating state health exchange communication through
the use of health literate practices; workshop summary.
Institute of Medicine of the National Academies.
National Academies Press, ©2012 101 p. $37.00 (pa)
The Institute of Medicine convened a Roundtable on Health Literacy to
address issues raised in its report Health Literacy: A Prescription to End
Confusion (2004) and brought together leaders from government, foun-
dations, health plans, associations, and private companies to discuss chal-
lenges facing health literacy practice and research and identify
approaches to promote it in the public and private sectors. It held a
workshop in July 2011 that focused on the ways health literacy can facil-
itate state health insurance exchange communication with potential
enrollees when this part of the Affordable Care Act is implemented in
2014. The workshop focused on lessons learned from existing state
insurance exchanges, the impact of state insurance exchanges on con-
sumers, and aspects addressed in the report, which provides an overview
of health insurance exchanges and their creation and operation, evidence
on how much consumers understand health insurance concepts, chal-
lenges faced by non-English speakers, the relevance of health literacy to
health insurance reform and how interventions can facilitate the imple-
mentation of health insurance reforms, and best practices in developing
materials and communicating with consumers. No index is provided.
RA440 2012-010750 978-1-4496-8389-4
Practical application of entry-level health education skills,
2d ed. (includes online access code)
Bhandari, Michelyn Wilson, Karen M. Hunter and Kathleen Phillips.
Jones & Bartlett, ©2013 253 p. $89.95 (pa)
For health education students, Bhandari, Hunter, and Phillips (Eastern
Kentucky U.) present a textbook that identifies competencies in health
education that correspond to the Seven Areas of Responsibility set forth
in the National Health Educator Job Analysis study (2010) reflected in A
Competency-Based Framework for Health Education Specialists-2010. In this
edition, they address new and expanded competencies in the areas of
consultative relationships, ethics, influencing policy, partnership devel-
opment, promoting the health education profession, and training. Each
chapter covers the primary responsibilities, competencies, and sub-com-
petencies of an education specialist through 148 activities that correspond
with the areas of responsibility: needs assessment, planning and imple-
menting health education, conducting related evaluation and research,
administering and managing health education, serving as a resource
person, and communicating and advocating for health and health edu-
cation. Activities are meant to promote hands-on, student-centered
learning. This edition reflects changes and developments in health edu-
cation professional preparation programs. Access to online course mate-
rials is included.
RA441 2012-405850 978-0-7456-5309-9
Global health governance.
Youde, Jeremy.
Polity Press, ©2012 188 p. $24.95 (pa)
In light of the no-longer unquestioned leadership of the World Health
Organization on international health threats such as AIDS and malaria,
Youde (political science, U. of Minnesota, Duluth) traces the history of
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
global health governance. He distinguishes GHG from previous trans-
border health efforts; weighs the successes and criticisms of key state,
civic, and private actors (e.g., WHO, Rotary International, The Gates
Foundation); and examines such issues as funding, national security, and
access to pharmaceuticals. Distributed by Wiley.
RA441 2012-015797 978-1-4496-1899-5
Global health systems; comparing strategies for delivering
health services.
Lovett-Scott, Margie and Faith Prather.
Jones & Bartlett, ©2014 326 p. $93.95 (pa)
Lovett-Scott and Prather (nursing and public administration, College at
Brockport, State U. of New York) survey healthcare access and delivery in
11 developing and industrialized countries, for undergraduate and
beginning graduate students in health-related disciplines, and professors,
healthcare administrators, and public health clinicians and adminis-
trators. They aim to demonstrate what can be learned from healthcare
systems around the world, to help improve the US system, and how
healthcare leaders should shift their focus from management to lead-
ership. After discussing health challenges in the US, the factors of race
and age in disparities, and an eight factor model for evaluating access,
they examine systems in the US, Canada, Japan, the UK, France, Italy,
Brazil, Cuba, India, the Russian Federation, and Ghana, and their
history, structure, financing, interventions, prevention, resources, major
health issues, and disparities, along with case scenarios. They end with
a section on behavioral health care, comparative health systems, and the
leadership needed.
RA541 2012-330282 978-981-4345-68-2
The Vietnamese health care system in change; a policy
network analysis of a Southeast Asian welfare regime.
Priwitzer, Kerstin.
ISEAS Publishing, ©2012 370 p. $49.90 (pa)
Priwitzer (research fellow, Arnold Bergstraesser Institute, Germany)
shares the findings of her study of the Vietnamese health care system,
its evolution, and its policies. The author addresses several topics,
including: public and private provider networks, the regulatory policy
network, and more. The book should interest readers who want to know
more about health care systems changes, public health policy, and
Southeast Asia in general.
RA564 2011-277293 978-0-309-21538-1
Clinical preventive services for women; closing the gaps.
Institute of Medicine of the National Academies.
National Academies Press, ©2011 235 p. $59.00 (pa)
The Institute of Medicine’s Committee on Preventive Services for Women,
which consisted of specialists in disease prevention, women’s health
issues, adolescent health issues, and evidence-based guidelines, con-
ducted a review of preventive services necessary to ensure women’s
health and well-being. The committee considered US Preventive Services
Task Force recommendations, Bright Futures recommendations for ado-
lescents, vaccinations specified by the Centers for Disease Control and
Prevention’s Advisory Committee on Immunization Practices, and other
considerations. This report focuses on the preventive services for women
specified in Section 2713 of the Public Health Service Act added by the
Patient Protection and Affordable Care Act (ACA). It reviews existing
guidelines used in the ACA to determine coverage; existing practices of
national, state, and selected private health plans; a framework for iden-
tifying gaps in preventive services and a process for selecting how to
address them; specific gaps for diabetes, cervical cancer, sexually trans-
mitted infections, HIV, unintended pregnancy and healthy birth spacing,
breastfeeding, interpersonal and domestic violence, and preventive visits;
recommendations for updating guidelines for preventive services; and
conclusions and limitations. There is no index.
RA566 2011-939904 978-0-309-21883-2
Improving health in the United States; the role of health
impact assessment.
Committee on Health Impact Assessment et al.
National Academies Press, ©2011 209 p. $39.00 (pa)
Despite large expenditures on healthcare and medical technology, the
United States still ranks 32nd in the world for life expectancy. The
missing piece is the impact of factors such as housing quality, exposure
to pollutants, food quality, and the lack of exercise—which leads to high
obesity rates. Prepared by the Committee on Health Impact Assessment,
this detailed work looks at integrating the possible effects on health into
factors such as decisions over land use and provision of transportation
options. The book closes with six appendixes, including a dictionary and
a summary of health impact assessment guides. No index is provided.
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
RA591 2011-397724
Water safety in buildings.
Title main entry. Ed. by David Cunliffe et al.
World Health Organization, ©2011 146 p. $42.00 (pa)
Authors of this publication from the World Health Organization note that
extensive experience indicates that poor design and management of water
systems in buildings are responsible disease outbreaks. And, those health
risks are preventable and can be relatively easily controlled. However, the
evidence from outbreak detection seem to indicate an overall trend of
increasing disease outbreaks as global urbanization increases and more
people are exposed. WHO contends that cutting the risk of disease should
be considered a public health priority, and recommends guidelines on
how that can be done. Lead editor Cunliffe (South Australian Department
of Health) and 32 co-editors and co-authors contributed to the
publication.
RA602 2012-023356 978-1-57067-285-9
Killer fish; how eating aquatic life endangers your health.
Clement, Brian R.
Hippocrates Publications, ©2012 162 p. $14.95 (pa)
Clement (Hippocrates Health Institute) lays out the evidence signaling the
contamination of aquatic life ocean-wide, depicts the harmful effects on
human and planetary health, and advocates everyone cease eating all
fish. An appendix summarizes key findings from studies on specific con-
taminants. The author’s website sells the nutritional supplements recom-
mended in the book. Hippocrates Publications is an imprint of Book
Publishing Company.
RA639 2012-025083 978-1-4398-4881-4
Public health entomology.
Goddard, Jerome.
CRC Press, ©2013 210 p. $99.95
Goddard (medical and veterinary entomology, Mississippi State U.) pro-
vides a reference text on public health entomology that explains the prin-
ciples for building and operating a public health entomology program
and describes the primary public health pests. Topics include: pest
control in modern public health, vector-borne disease surveillance, public
health entomology preparedness, primary pests and conditions of public
health importance, and descriptions of specific pests, their distribution,
and impact on human health. Chapters include references. The book will
interest public health professionals, policy makers, and others involved
in related fields.
RA643 2012-418085 978-1-84701-048-3
Growing up with HIV in Zimbabwe; one day this will all
be over.
Parsons, Ross.
James Currey Publishers, ©2012 197 p. $70.00
Parsons (anthropology and psychology, Africa U., Zimbabwe) explores
via personal stories what it means to grow up in urban eastern
Zimbabwe with the AIDS virus. The book begins with an ethnography
before moving into aspects of life such as relationships and forms of
caring, exposure and disclosure, faith, and grief and mourning. The rate
of infection in Zimbabwe is sometimes estimated at over 14 percent, and
the vast majority of HIV-positive children do not live to adulthood.
Parsons examines what it means to be such a child in the extreme
adversity of a poor country with chaotic antiretroviral treatment pro-
grams and a population which often favors supernatural explanation and
treatment.
RA643 2011-051264 978-0-374-21028-1
The scientists; a family romance.
Roth, Marco.
Farrar, Straus & Giroux, ©2012 196 p. $23.00
A young writer reflects on growing up in the 1980s and 1990s as the son
of a physician/scientist and a classical musician in the Jewish-American
intellectual milieu of Manhattan’s Upper West Side. Roth’s memoir pivots
around uncovering the truth surrounding his father’s death from AIDS,
and his range of reactions to this family secret. He philosophically con-
cludes: “In what ways were most of us not the children of denial?”
RA645 2012-013750 978-1-4338-1214-9
Caregiver family therapy; empowering families to meet
the challenges of aging.
Qualls, Sara Honn and Ashley A. Williams.
American Psychological Assn., ©2013 280 p. $69.95
For clinicians and counselors, Qualls and Williams (aging studies, psy-
chology, and gerontology, U. of Colorado, Colorado Springs) share the
caregiver family therapy model they developed with other clinicians in
–246–
the Aging Families and Caregiver Program at the U. of Colorado Aging
Center. They detail this systems approach to working with families that
care for an aging adult, which focuses on addressing the care recipient’s
problem, establishing the caregiving role structures, and addressing the
caregiver’s self-care, as well as transition processes. They describe
strategies for assessment and intervention and discuss the empirical and
theoretical foundations of the therapy, each stage, clinical examples, in-
depth case studies, and practical, ethical, and business issues.
RA651 2012-012911 978-1-4496-6548-7
Introduction to epidemiology, 6th ed. (includes online
access code)
Merrill, Ray M.
Jones & Bartlett, ©2013 434 p. $99.95 (pa)
Merrill (epidemiology and biostatistics, Brigham Young U., Utah) believes
that the advanced analysis of empirical research studies using advanced
statistical methods are more akin to biostatistics than epidemiology, and
have no place in an introduction to epidemiology for students with
minimal training in the biomedical sciences and statistics. He focuses on
identifying causal factors and modes of transmission, with the aid of sta-
tistical tools and biomedical information. For this edition, he places
increased emphasis on international settings and includes additional
study questions, expanded conclusions, and updated tables and
examples. A code for online access is provided.
RA652 2012-009651 978-1-4496-2784-3
Introduction to epidemiologic research methods in public
health practice.
Bailey, Susan L. and Deepa Handu.
Jones & Bartlett, ©2013 310 p. $0.00 (pa)
With a focus on quantitative methods in epidemiology and designed as
a textbook for medical students as well as a reference for those con-
ducting research studies, this book offers a detailed outline of research
procedures. The reader is guided from research goals and study designs
to ethics, formulating questions, reviewing literature, obtaining subjects,
measuring concepts, analyzing data, interpreting and reporting results,
and finally, funding, presentation, and publication. Each chapter
includes questions to facilitate comprehension or development of a study.
Additional tools such as outlines, references, appendices, and exercises
are also included.
RA761 2012945021 978-1-84569-932-1
Sterilisation of biomaterials and medical devices.
Title main entry. Ed. by Sophie Lerouge and Anne Simmons.
(Woodhead Publishing series in biomaterials; no.46)
Woodhead Publishing, ©2012 330 p. $230.00
Contributors from a wide range of fields consider scientific, mechanical,
and microbiological aspects of sterilization in medical and biological con-
texts. They cover the steam and dry heat sterilization of biomaterials and
medical devices, principles and standards of sterilizing healthcare
products by ionizing radiation, the ethylene oxide sterilization of
healthcare products, non-traditional sterilization techniques for biomate-
rials and medical devices, sterilizing and decontaminating surfaces by
plasma discharges, sterilization techniques for polymers, sterilizing drug-
device products and tissue allografts by ionizing radiation, antimicrobial
coatings for self-sterilization, prions and endotoxins: reprocessing
strategies for reusable medical devices, and future trends.
RA776 2012-011917 978-0-313-37865-2
Health and wellness in antiquity through the Middle
Ages.
York, William H. (Health and wellness in daily life)
Greenwood Press, ©2012 251 p. $58.00
The latest in a seven volume series on health and wellness in daily life,
this volume covers medical practice in seven different regions, from
ancient Mesopotamia to medieval Europe. York (interdisciplinary studies,
Portland State U.) explores medieval medical theories such as bubonic
plague being caused by unusual planetary alignments that led to deadly
vapors being released from underground. Chapters are arranged by
subject such as infectious diseases or women’s health, rather than region.
Based on solid research and well-footnoted, this volume is accessible to
general readers.
RA776 2012-019956 978-1-60163-234-0
Sustainable wellness; an integrative approach to
transform your mind, body, and spirit.
Mumber, Matthew P. and Heather Reed.
New Page Books, ©2012 238 p. $15.99 (pa)
Mumber, a radiation oncologist, and Reed, a yoga and meditation
instructor who specializes in working with people with cancer, post-polio
–247–
syndrome, and other chronic illnesses, enumerate eight steps to help
people create and sustain better health, reduce stress, and have a greater
sense of wellness in their lives. The steps—mindfulness, knowing oneself,
life review and planning, nutrition, physical activity, stress management,
spirituality, and bringing it all together—include tools and exercises and
are meant to be used in a weekly format.
RA777 2012-019221 978-0-313-39305-1
A student guide to health; understanding the facts, trends,
and challenges; 5v.
Title main entry. Ed. by Yvette Malamud Ozer.
Greenwood Press, ©2012 968 p. $268.00
Ozer (clinical psychology, California School of Professional
Psychology/Alliant International School, San Francisco) presents a five-
volume reference set for high school and community college students;
teachers; counselors and therapists working with teens; administrators;
public and community college libraries, staff, and patrons; and parents.
Chapters and topics in the five volumes are aligned with the National
Health Education Standards for students in grades 9-12. The materials
address different aspects of health and wellness, providing young adults
with evidence-based information to make choices that promote a healthy
lifestyle. Each volume focuses on a specific subtopic—health basics;
nutrition and physical fitness; sexual health and development; alcohol,
tobacco, and other drugs; mental and emotional health—and was written
by one or more academics and/or practitioners. All chapters include a
list of websites, help lines, and hotlines; references and suggestions for
further reading; and a glossary of terms. Each of the volumes also con-
tains a complete subject index for all five books in the set.
RA778 978-1-937235-27-7
The skin care ingredient handbook.
Walker, Linda.
Alluredbooks, ©2012 439 p. $95.00 (pa)
Walker, who owns a manufacturing company of professional skin care
products, provides estheticians, skin care professionals, and others with
a guide to skin care ingredients. She outlines the 14 key functions in skin
cells that active ingredients are designed to help; concepts such as
natural, organic, green, sustainable, and synthetic; definitions of func-
tional ingredients and technologies; and new trends in the industry. She
then presents a glossary of about 1,500 common ingredients, with
common and International Nomenclature of Cosmetic Ingredients names,
descriptions, common uses, and categories for each, followed by appen-
dices of term definitions, a name table, and labeling regulations.
RA781 2011-942959 978-0-8400-4809-7
Fitness!, 5th ed.
Mazzeo, Karen S. and Lauren M. Mangili. (Cengage learning activity
series)
Wadsworth Publishing Co., ©2013 253 p. $56.95 (pa)
Mazzeo (human movement, sport and leisure studies, Bowling Green
State U.) and Mangili (fitness, U. of North Carolina at Chapel Hill) provide
a fitness textbook for future fitness professionals and students new to
fitness. They explain the principles and techniques involved in a complete
program promoting aerobic conditioning, strength training, and flexi-
bility exercise, as well as basic yoga movement to promote total relaxation
training. They also discuss motivation and goal setting, common injuries
and their prevention, posture and alignment, fitness testing, step
training, cool-down, stress management and relaxation, nutrition, and
positive weight management. This edition has all color photos; new dis-
cussion of popular aerobic equipment; a new visual summary at the end
of the chapter on warm-ups; an expanded chapter on fitness walking to
encourage the use of pedometers and a new 22-day monitoring
assessment; a chart on how strength training exercises are organized by
major muscle groups; MyPlate guidelines; and discussion of nutrient-
dense eating, fluid replacement, nutritional patterns for athletic per-
formance, and selected points from the Dietary Guidelines for Americans,
2010.
RA790 2011-052125 978-0-85745-488-1
Patients and agents; mental illness, modernity, and Islam
in Sylhet, Bangladesh.
Callan, Alyson.
Berghahn Books, ©2012 227 p. $85.00
The result of two years of intensive fieldwork in Bangladesh, this book
looks at ideas and experiences of mental illness in the Sylhet community.
Madness (by local definition) is common; the author considers how this
fact may relate to the pressures of rapid modernization. As a female
fieldworker, many of her informants were women; the author also
believes the pressures in Sylhet are particularly difficult for newly-
married women. Alyson Callan was a psychiatrist when she undertook
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
this research for her PhD in anthropology, but in the book she acts as an
anthropologist, following Sylhet rather than Western ideas of madness.
The book begins with a chapter on social change in the area. There
follows an outline of the ethnopsychiatry of Sylhet, and chapters on the
relationship between madness and religiosity, on sorcery, and on mar-
riage and the ways madness operates to offer resistance in difficult situ-
ations. Callan also looks at how definitions of madness interact with
spirit possession, personal choice, and the will of Allah (Sylhet is a
Muslim region). She considers Muslim patients with Hindu healers, and
the role of female saints. In her conclusions, the author points out that
patients have much agency, though it is constrained by the systems they
are in. Callan’s data refutes simplistic interpretations: Western biomed-
icine does not destroy native systems of treatment, men’s and women’s
experiences of madness are neither the same nor opposite, Islam and
modernization are neither positive nor negative forces in the lives of
women. The author points out that tradition and modernity are not
opposing forces, and while these forces are never neutral, they operate in
all directions. Callan writes extremely well in an engaging first-person
style, and the book will interest general readers who wish to know more
about mental affliction, spiritual belief, medicine, life in Bangladesh, or
modernization.
RA966 978-1-84619-525-9
Confluence of policy and leadership in academic health
science centers; a professional and personal guide.
Title main entry. Ed. by Steven A. Wartman. (Culture, context and
quality in health sciences research, education, leadership and patient
care.)
Radcliffe Publishing, ©2012 201 p. $59.95 (pa)
Academic health science centers are programs in universities that
educate the next generation of health professionals, conduct leading bio-
medical and clinical research that leads to new treatments and diagnostic
breakthroughs, and deliver comprehensive patient care from the basic to
the most advanced level. Administrators of several such centers in the US
describe on both personal and professional levels what effective lead-
ership of the complex institutions entails. Among their topics are opti-
mizing structure and government for high performance in the new
world order, contemporary challenges in financial management, conflicts
of interest and commitment, trainee and student policy, faculty account-
ability, and community relations. Published by Radcliffe Publishing,
Britain, and distributed in the US by BookMasters.
RA971 978-1-78190-190-8
Annual review of health care management; strategy and
policy perspectives on reforming health systems.
Title main entry. Ed. by Leonard H. Friedman, Grant T. Savage and Jim
Goes. (Advances health care management; v.13)
Emerald Group Publishing, ©2012 234 p. $124.95
Friedman (George Washington U.) et al. assemble eight essays by man-
agement, business, tourism, health administration and policy, public
health, and other scholars working in Europe, the US, and Canada, who
consider the question of health care reform from the perspectives of the
microsystem, mesosystem, and macrosystem. They examine how
financial incentives affect the behavior of physicians in terms of the
adoption of programs linked to the incentives, medical staff governance
and physician sensemaking as applied to prevention of errors, and the
concept of crew resource management in other high reliability organiza-
tions, particularly commercial aviation, to train members of the care
team to make clinical health care safer. They discuss the effect of pro-
fessional identity on physician and nonphysician executives; the process
of information sharing in the health care environment; medical tourism;
efficiency; and how hospital clusters are configured in response to health
reform legislation in the US. No index is provided. Distributed in North
America by Turpin Distribution.
RA971 2012-021163 978-1-56793-475-5
Fundamentals of healthcare finance, 2d ed.
Gapenski, Louis C.
Health Administration Press, ©2013 465 p. $115.00 (pa)
Gapenski (health services administration, U. of Florida) offers a text for
undergraduate and graduate students in health administration and
public health and health science that introduces the skills of healthcare
finance that are most important to entry-level operation managers, espe-
cially those essential to the operational management of clinical services,
as opposed to principles used by financial staff personnel, which are not
discussed in detail. Background information on financial markets and
securities is also not provided. He covers the institutional setting,
including the organization and role of the finance staff and types of
healthcare organizations; business basics; paying for health services;
planning, managing, and control, including pricing decisions and profit
analysis, estimating costs, budgeting, and managing financial operations;
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
financing and capital investment decisions; and reporting profits, assets,
financing, and cash flows, and assessing financial condition. This edition
has updated examples; a new section on healthcare reform, which
includes discussion of value-based purchasing, bundling, accountable
care organizations, and medical homes; updated accounting coverage
that conforms to the latest American Institute of Certified Public
Accountants formats; new sidebars that present issues in the news; and
updated lecture presentation software. The website has additional
chapters on financial markets and securities, lease financing and
business valuation, distributions to owners and capitation, rate setting,
and risk sharing, as well as cases and appendixes of financial and oper-
ational ratios and their definitions. There is no bibliography.
RA971 2012-015802 978-1-4496-5739-0
Health care manager’s human resources handbook, 2d ed.
McConnell, Charles R.
Jones & Bartlett, ©2013 419 p. $88.95 (pa)
McConnell, a Canadian healthcare management and human resources
consultant, provides healthcare managers with a textbook on the respon-
sibilities and function of the human resources department from the per-
spective of the department manager in a healthcare organization. It
focuses on what the human resources function can do for the manager
and how to get the best value out of the organization’s human resources
department, but does not go into detail about aspects for human
resources practitioners. It covers how human resources fits into the
healthcare organization; the legal framework; and employee relations,
including performance appraisal, addressing problems, and legal action.
Other topics discussed include employee training; and compensation,
benefits, and other concerns. This edition takes into account new and
changed laws that impact recruiting and interviewing, documentation,
termination, legal action, and unions. It discusses and expands topics like
the increased pressure on human resources to operate with less staff; the
decentralization of specific activities; and the impact of organizational
flattening, mergers, and acquisitions. It adds a section on the Patient
Protection and Affordable Care Act of 2010 and the intent and hazards
of the proposed Employee Free Choice Act; updates information on
recruiting and prohibitions in interview questioning and unions; dis-
cusses the manager’s conduct during union organizing; and expands
information on the importance and handling of informal documentation.
Chapter questions have been clarified and expanded, and a checklist has
been added to every chapter.
RA971 2012-020606 978-1-56793-474-8
Healthcare leadership excellence; creating a career of
impact.
Rice, James A. and Frankie Perry. (ACHE management series)
Health Administration Press, ©2013 218 p. $80.00 (pa)
Rice, a consultant and specialist in healthcare policy, governance, and
strategy development who teaches at Cambridge U., UK and the U. of
Minnesota, and Perry, a healthcare consultant who has been a nursing
and hospital administrator and teaches at the U. of New Mexico, draw on
interviews with 21 leaders from US hospitals and healthcare organiza-
tions, business texts on leadership and legacies, and their experiences to
show leaders in healthcare provider organizations at all stages of their
careers how to create a legacy. They describe the importance of devel-
oping self-awareness, building essential skills, and instilling the attributes
that produce leaders who make a difference, and outline seven building
blocks (with action steps): self-reflection and awareness, integrity and
character, visioning, mentoring and leadership development, managing
diversity, leading innovation, and celebration. They end with discussion
of retirement and mapping the legacy journey.
RA971 212-017250 978-1-56793-449-6
Healthcare philanthropy; advance charitable giving to
your organization’s mission.
Taylor, Betsy Chapin. (ACHE management series)
Health Administration Press, ©2013 229 p. $78.00 (pa)
Taylor, a consultant who specializes in fund development, board rela-
tions, and communications and has worked in healthcare philanthropy
and marketing, provides healthcare CEOS, other senior executives, and
board members with a guide to creating or enhancing a program to inte-
grate voluntary charitable giving to advance a healthcare organization’s
mission and deal with declining revenues. She explores the rationale for
using philanthropy as a revenue source; identifies roles and responsibil-
ities for CEOs, board members, physician leaders, and the chief devel-
opment officer; and considers key levers organizations can use to
strengthen programs: nurturing a culture of philanthropy, aligning
fundraising with the strategic plan, supporting giving through service,
making a case for support through storytelling, gaining insights about
–248–
donors, inviting donors to make a gift, and driving excellence through
evaluation. Each chapter ends with action steps, and some include inter-
views with executives.
RA971 2012-022168 978-1-4496-4565-6
Risk management in healthcare institutions; limiting
liability and enhancing care, 3d ed.
Kavaler, Florence and Raymond S. Alexander.
Jones & Bartlett, ©2014 530 p. $98.95 (pa)
Kavaler (health policy and management, State U. of New York Downstate
Medical Center) and Alexander, a former hospital administrator, bring
together 17 chapters by risk management, health, law, and other profes-
sionals from the US who explain risk management concepts and
strategies to leaders of healthcare institutions. They address adminis-
trative issues, including the regulatory environment, employment, com-
munications to reduce risk, financing risk, ethical issues, and safety and
security. They also discuss managing risks in clinical services, including
patient safety, medical malpractice, reducing liability, high-risk hospital
departments, infection control programs, and psychiatry. Managing risks
in other venues, such as long-term care institutions and services is also
considerd. Along with updates to other chapters, this edition has new
chapters on risk management in ambulatory care settings, office-based
surgery, and telemedicine.
RA974 2012-018525 978-0-7637-7404-2
Patient safety handbook, 2d ed.
Title main entry. Ed. by Barbara Youngberg.
Jones & Bartlett, ©2013 646 p. $93.95 (pa)
Youngberg (law, Loyola U. Chicago) brings together law, health, and other
specialists mostly from the US for 42 chapters on patient safety. After dis-
cussion of the first Institute of Medicine report and its impact on patient
safety, the patient safety movement, the importance of leadership, and an
organizational development framework for change in patient safety, they
address the role of the board of directors, risk managers, physicians, and
leaders. Other topics considered include medical error, the investigation
and analysis of clinical incidents, applying epidemiology to patient safety,
and improving health literacy. The volume offers information on nursing
leadership, teamwork communications and training, health information
technology, and the effects of sleep deprivation. It also examines patient
handoffs, employee safety, medical malpractice litigation, and safety in
the medication use process among other topics. This edition has new
chapters for about half of the book, including chapters on the need to
change medical education. It has learning objectives, questions, and
PowerPoint slides.
RA975 2011-017488 978-1-4398-2777-2
The case management workbook; defining the role of
physicians, nurses, and case managers.
Murer, Cherilyn G. et al.
CRC Press, ©2011 112 p. $59.95 (pa)
Murer, a healthcare consultant, et al. offer a workbook for case man-
agers, administrators, physicians, and others who play a role in the case
management process to the roles of the case management team and key
post-acute venues of care. They provide an overview of case management,
its structure, and the responsibility of each team member, then address
financial incentives; the watershed years of the US healthcare delivery
system; key obstacles in reducing length of stay; effective use of post-
acute venues, such as long-term acute care hospitals, comprehensive inpa-
tient rehabilitation hospitals or units, and skilled nursing facilities and
their roles; case management as at the center of an integrated health
system; diagnosis-related group review; and understanding data. The
workbook is meant to be a sequel to The Case Management Sourcebook: a
Guide to Designing and Implementing a Centralized Case Management
System (1997) by Murer and Lyndean Brick; it has been updated to reflect
regulatory changes in the field and in healthcare reform.
RA997 2011-051595 978-1-56793-383-3
Dimensions of long-term care management; an
introduction.
Title main entry. Ed. by Mary Helen McSweeney-Feld and Reid Oetjen.
Health Administration Press, ©2012 336 p. $90.00 (pa)
Seventeen American health care practitioners, academics, administrators,
and legal experts contribute 14 chapters to an introductory text for
undergraduates and other students new to healthcare management.
Coverage includes an overview and definitions of long-term care, long-
term care services, and delivery systems; the spectrum of long-term care
services from residential to home and community-based care, technology
and long-term care, hospice and end-of-life care, and care for those with
chronic illnesses; an overview of management issues affecting long-term
care service delivery such as service design and environmental
–249–
considerations, human resource issues, marketing services, legal and
ethical issues, regulations, and financing and reimbursement;
international perspectives; and factors affecting the future of long-term
care service delivery.
RA1057.5 978-0-12-394585-3
Forensic DNA biology; a laboratory manual
Elkins, Kelly M.
Academic Press, ©2013 198 p. $49.95 (pa)
For upper-level undergraduates and others new to the field, Elkins (chem-
istry, Towson U., Maryland) details step-by-step 22 laboratory experi-
ments in DNA typing. They are adapted from laboratory experiments
and procedures commonly found in the literature and used in regional,
state, and national crime laboratories. Her topics include sampling bio-
logical evidence for DNA extraction, determining DNA quality by fluo-
rescence spectroscopy, testing designed polymerase chain reaction
primers in multiplex reactions, computing random match probability
from DNA profile data using population database, and human genetic
analysis for paternity or missing persons cases and statistics. Spiral-
bound to lie flat on the bench. Academic Press is an imprint of Elsevier.
RA1063 2012-009123 978-1-4398-7837-8
Death, decomposition, and detector dogs; from science to
scene.
Stejskal, Susan M.
CRC Press, ©2013 213 p. $59.95 (pa)
Stejskal, who is a toxicologist and dog handler herself, describes how the
natural outdoor environment affects decomposition of the body and dis-
persion of odor from a decedent. Intended for police detectives and HRD
dog handlers, the book explains the anatomy and physiology of scent per-
ception in the dog and the chemistry needed to understand the odor
profile of decomposing human remains. Color and b&w photographs
depict decomposition in pigs and humans.
RA1147 2012-023450 978-1-4625-0717-7
Clinical practice of forensic neuropsychology; an evidence-
based approach.
Boone, Kyle Brauer. (Evidence-based practice in neuropsychology)
Guilford Pr., ©2013 352 p. $50.00
Boone (California School of Forensic Studies, Alliant International U., and
psychiatry and biobehavioral sciences, U. of California, Los Angeles) out-
lines evidence-based practices for graduate students, trainees, and
forensic psychologists and psychiatrists to use when conducting a civil
forensic neuropsychological assessment and delivering expert testimony.
In the first chapter, she discusses issues related to the exam, like requests
for observers, treater-expert relationships, demands that test names be
provided to the test taker and counsel prior to the exam, the pretest
interview, problems with interviewing collateral informants, test
selection, testing patients who are not fluent in English, the use of tech-
nicians, and documentation. Chapters that follow cover symptom validity
tests and techniques for identifying negative response bias; the effec-
tiveness of tests to identify psychological symptom overreport; the ability
of standard psychological tests to detect overreport, including post-trau-
matic stress disorder symptoms; test scoring and interpretation; major
flaws in reports; common misperceptions about mild traumatic brain
injury; and how to protect a report from attack during testimony and
common methods used to discredit neuropsychologists and their data.
RA1151 978-0-12-382169-0
Introduction to forensic psychology; court, law
enforcement, and correctional practices, 3d ed.
Shipley, Stacey L. and Bruce A. Arrigo.
Academic Press, ©2012 696 p. $79.95
Shipley, a clinical/forensic psychologist at a state hospital, and Arrigo
(criminology, law, and society, U. of North Carolina, Charlotte) introduce
students, practitioners, and academics to forensic psychology and the
complexities of police, court, and correctional work, with emphasis on
where and how the insights of psychology can foster human justice and
pro-social change for various stakeholders through the criminal and civil
justice systems. This edition has been reorganized into three parts that
focus separately on adult, juvenile, and family forensics, each with infor-
mation on the court and legal system, police and law enforcement, and
corrections and prison practices for both civil and criminal forensics. It
also has new coverage of school violence and cyber bullying, mothers
who kill their children, suicide by inducing police shooting, custody eval-
uations, family law and emotional rights, and the best interests of the
child, and more on corrections with juveniles, including boot camps and
juveniles in adult jails and on death row. It has expanded cases and
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
vignettes, practice and ethics updates, international trends, and new
overviews of key issues and chapter reviews. Academic Press is an
imprint of Elsevier.
RA1211 2012-006663 978-1-4511-7330-7
Lippincott’s manual of toxicology.
Title main entry.
Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, ©2012 458 p. $72.99 (pa)
Drawing information from Harwood-Nuss’ Clinical Practice of Emergency
Medicine, with added content from Rosen and Barkin’s 5-Minute
Emergency Medicine Consult, this manual helps emergency medicine cli-
nicians and toxicologists diagnose and treat poisonings and toxicologic
emergencies. Chapters address general considerations such as recog-
nition, initial approach, and early management of the poisoned patient;
alcohol-related agents and conditions; analgesics and related conditions;
anticonvulsants and sedative-hypnotics; anti-infective agents and biocides;
cardiovascular drugs; chemicals, gases, and metals; psychotherapeutic
agents; stimulants and hallucinogens; and miscellaneous agents and con-
ditions, such as biological and chemical warfare agents, drug with-
drawal, botulism, mushrooms, and dietary supplements and herbal
medications. Information on clinical presentation, differential diagnosis,
emergency department evaluation and management, critical interven-
tions, and patient disposition is given. Chapters were originally written
by medical toxicologists.
RA1231 2012-015276 978-0-9835450-1-9
Uncertainties in the estimation of radiation risks and
probability of disease causation; recommendations of the
National Council on Radiation Protection and
Measurements..
National Council on Radiation Protection and Measurements. (NCRP
report; no.171)
NCRP-Radiation Protection, ©2012 418 p. $155.00
The problem the report addresses is that estimates of the association
between ionizing radiation and adverse health effects can be no more
reliable than the quality of exposure data they are based on, and
measured or estimated doses from such exposure are subject to uncer-
tainties. The report appraises the major aspects of uncertainty in relating
absorbed doses in specific organs and tissues to the risk of disease,
including cancer, non-cancer, and heritable effects. It builds on the
analysis in earlier reports on testing external and internal doses. There is
no index.
RA1270 2012-021058 978-1-4398-5510-2
Aerosols handbook; measurement, dosimetry, and health
effects, 2d ed.
Title main entry. Ed. by Lev S. Ruzer and Naomi H. Harley.
CRC Press, ©2013 648 p. $179.95
This handbook updates the first edition, which was published in 2006,
with the aim of providing a convenient and cohesive source of infor-
mation on the impact on human health of aerosol particles in the envi-
ronment. This second edition incorporates a substantial amount of new
material pertaining in particular to nanotechnology synthesis for bio-
medical use, atmospheric pollution related to climate change, and new
data on measurement, dosimetry, and health effects. A sampling of cov-
erage in the 23 contributions: breathing zone exposure assessment, mech-
anisms of particle deposition, aerosol chemistry and physics, health
effects of ambient ultrafine particles, nanoparticle cell penetration,
radioactive aerosols, filtration and sampling of fibrous filters, radioactive
aerosols of the Chernobyl accidence, and lung cancer risk associated with
radon and thoron, among other topics. The editors are affiliated as
follows: Ruzer (Lawrence Berkeley National Laboratory) and Harley (radi-
ological physics, New York U.).
PATHOLOGY
RB37 2012-014642 978-1-4398-3608-8
Vibrational spectroscopy for tissue analysis.
ur Rehman, Ihtesham et al. (Series in medical physics and biomedical
engineering)
CRC Press, ©2013 319 p. $159.95
Ur Rehman (biomedical materials, U. of Shefield); Zanyar Movasaghi
(dental surgery, U. of London); and Shazza Rehman (a medical oncologist
consulting with the National Health Service, West Yorkshire) present a
wide and detailed collection of interpretations of infrared and Raman
spectral frequencies, for researchers of the spectroscopy of biological
tissues and for clinical and non-clinical researchers who use vibrational
spectroscopy as a research tool. Among their topics are spectroscopy and
molecular changes in cancer cells, vibrational spectroscopy and cancer,
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
infrared and Raman spectroscopy an imaging of breast cancer, the
chemical structural analysis of bone by spectroscopy, and future potential
clinical applications.
RB40 2011-043320 978-0-470-44527-3
Analytical techniques for clinical chemistry; methods and
applications.
Title main entry. Ed. by Sergio Caroli and Gyula Záray.
John Wiley & Sons, ©2012 800 p. $195.00
Analytical chemists, biochemists, medical scientists, toxicologists, and
even a geologist explore the role of analytical chemistry in clinical med-
icine. Covering in turn fundamentals, applications, and future trends,
they discuss such topics as the role and significance of reference values
in identifying and evaluating trace elements from diet, the role of ana-
lytical chemistry in the safety of drug therapy, applying plasma-based
techniques to biological monitoring, biomarkers of oxidative stress in
plasma and urine, and analytical methodologies and clinical applications
of breath analysis.
RB43 978-0-12-415871-9
Biomedical optical phase microscopy and nanoscopy.
Title main entry. Ed. by Natan T. Shaked, Zeev Zalevsky and Lisa L.
Satterwhite.
Academic Press, ©2013 411 p. $130.00
This book has been structured to be self-contained and therefore useful
for researchers and students at all levels who need a cutting edge review
of techniques and applications, particularly biological and medical appli-
cations. Organization is in four parts, with the older technologies pre-
sented first followed by the newer ones. Coverage encompasses phase
contrast microscopy and differential interference contrast microscopy,
digital holographic phase microscopy, advanced interferometric and
polarization techniques, and phase nanoscopy. The three editors are bio-
medical engineers affiliated as follows: Natan T. Shaked (Tel Aviv U.,
Israel), Zeev Zalevsky (Bar-Ilan U., Israel), and Lisa L. Satterwhite (Duke
U., US). Academic Press is an imprint of Elsevier.
RB111 2012-017317 978-1-4496-8843-1
Essentials of human disease, 2d ed. (online access
included)
Crowley, Leonard V.
Jones & Bartlett, ©2014 550 p. $98.95 (pa)
The late Crowley (biology, Century College and U. of Minnesota Medical
Center, Fairview) offers a modified and condensed version of An
Introduction to Human Disease for allied health and health education stu-
dents who have limited time to learn basic disease concepts. After an
introductory section on general concepts and diseases affecting the whole
body, the text is organized by body system, with each chapter reviewing
anatomy and physiology and discussing the pathology, pathophysiology,
clinical manifestations, and principles of treatment for specific diseases.
This edition includes new and updated boxes discussing physicians and
scientists who contributed to the diagnosis of specific diseases, new infor-
mation on ultrasounds, new and updated information on HIV prevention
and mother-to-infant transmission, new text on renal transplantations,
updated BMI data from the 2010 USDA Dietary Guidelines, new sections
on pectus excavatum and Marfan syndrome, and updated tables and sta-
tistics. Resources such as an anatomy and physiology review, chapter out-
lines, flashcards, crosswords, a glossary, quizzes, and web links are
available online.
RB113 2011-043181 978-1-901831-23-8
Pathophysiology made incredibly easy! (online access
included)
Scott, William N. (Made incredibly easy)
Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, ©2012 516 p. $38.28 (pa)
Scott (biomedicine, Queen’s U., Belfast, Ireland) presents the first UK
edition of this text, which aims for a simple and fun approach to patho-
physiology and explains complex concepts in a concise and clear way.
The text reviews the basics, including cells and cell components, cell
division, degeneration and aging, genetics, homeostasis, infection, and
disease, then uses a systems approach to present information on many
common disorders and their epidemiology and pathophysiology, signs
and symptoms, diagnostic tools, and current treatments, along with
overviews of each body system and its anatomy and physiology.
Mnemonics, illustrations, and multiple-choice questions are included,
and study cards, image banks, and other resources are accessible online.
–250–
RB115 978-1-60359-684-8
CPT 2013; current procedural terminology; professional
edition.
Title main entry.
American Medical Association, ©2013 885 p. $109.95 (pa)
Published annually by the American Medical Association, this spiral-
bound volume outlines official Current Procedural Terminology (CPT)
coding rules and guidelines developed by the CPT editorial panel and
includes code, guideline, and text changes for 2013 and changes to the
cardiovascular, neurologic testing, and psychiatry subsections. It lists
descriptive terms and identifying codes for reporting medical services
and procedures performed by physicians. Each section—evaluation and
management, anesthesiology, surgery, radiology, pathology and labo-
ratory, and medicine—has subsections with anatomic, procedural, con-
dition, and descriptor subheadings. This edition also has updated
citations for CPT Assistant, Clinical Examples in Radiology, and CPT
Changes; a revised, enhanced, and expanded index that eliminates redun-
dancy and expands pathology and laboratory index entries to include
analytes; more anatomical and procedural illustrations; a new appendix
of multianalyte assays with algorithmic analyses; and new background
information on the evolution of molecular pathology.
RB115 978-1-60359-683-1
CPT 2013; current procedural terminology, standard ed.
Title main entry.
American Medical Association, ©2013 723 p. $84.95 (pa)
This reference for medical coders lists the CPT codes, descriptions, and
guidelines that describe procedures and services performed by physi-
cians and other health care professionals. Guidelines and code lists are
given in sections on evaluation and management, anesthesia, surgery,
radiology, pathology and laboratory, medicine, Category II codes, and
Category III codes. About 70 pages of appendices offer code summaries,
code modifiers, and clinical examples. This edition provides a new 23-
page section of b&w anatomical illustrations. Also new is an expanded
alphabetical index that includes listings by procedure and anatomic site,
and lists procedures and services by their commonly known eponyms or
other designations.
RB115 978-1-60359-685-5
Current procedural terminology 2013; changes, an
insider’s view.
Title main entry.
American Medical Association, ©2013 404 p. $75.95 (pa)
In addition to listing about 700 recent code and guideline changes to the
2013 CPT codes, this reference explains the logic, rationale, and proposed
function of recent CPT changes. Clinical examples include detailed
descriptions of procedures. Opening chapters explain CPT nomenclature
reporting neutrality and review explicit code ranges. The changes are
grouped in sections on evaluation and management, surgery, radiology,
pathology and laboratory, medicine, Category II codes, and Category III
codes. The book’s two-color layout presents actual code text in maroon
type. Appendices provide about 30 pages of charts summarizing changes.
RB115 978-1-60359-804-0
Principles of ICD-10-CM coding workbook, 2d ed.
Grider, Deborah J.
American Medical Association, ©2012 172 p. $59.95 (pa)
Grider, a coder, medical auditor, and ICD-10 trainer, provides medical
assistants, medical insurance specialists, medical coders, other health
care providers, new medical office personnel, physicians, independent
billing service personnel, and students with coding case studies to help
them learn the principles of ICD-10-CM (International Classification of
Diseases, 10th Revision, Clinical Modification) diagnosis coding. The
workbook is meant to be used as a companion to Principles of ICD-10-CM
Coding and presents information on the ICD-10-CM format and conven-
tions, a summary of general coding guidelines, chapter-specific diagnosis
coding guidelines for various diseases, several case studies in each
chapter, and an answer key with rationales.
RB115 978-1-60359-803-3
Principles of ICD-10-CM coding, 2d ed.
Grider, Deborah J.
American Medical Association, ©2012 435 p. $89.95 (pa)
Grider, a coder, medical auditor, coding specialist, and ICD-10 trainer,
introduces medical assistants, medical insurance specialists, and other
health care providers, as well as new medical office personnel, physi-
cians, and independent billing services personnel, to the principles of
selecting diagnosis codes for outpatient and physician services using the
ICD-10-CM (International Classification of Diseases, 10th Revision,
Clinical Modification) system. She explains the purpose of the ICD-10-CM
–251–
and its relationship to the reimbursement process, and how to apply
coding conventions when assigning codes, interpret basic coding guide-
lines for outpatient care, assign codes to the highest level of specificity,
and sequence codes. She provides an overview of the content, format,
general coding guidelines, coding process, and supplementary classifica-
tions of the ICD-10-CM, and presents the basic guidelines for coding in
each chapter of ICD-10-CM and the diseases and injuries categorized in
it, as well as conventions and terminology. An accompanying CD con-
tains checkpoint exercise answers, PowerPoint slides, and an exam testing
module.
RB131 2012-021072 978-1-4398-7211-6
Chronic inflammation; molecular pathophysiology,
nutritional and therapeutic interventions.
Title main entry. Ed. by Sashwati Roy et al.
CRC Press, ©2013 433 p. $139.95
Roy (surgery, Ohio State U., Columbus) et al. compile 28 chapters for sci-
entists and clinicians that detail the process and factors that influence
chronic inflammation, outlining the systems biology of inflammation
and regulatory mechanisms, including initiation, progression, and reso-
lution; associated pathologies, such as cancer, chronic wounds, scarring,
neuroinflammatory disease, autoimmune disease, and vascular inflam-
mation; and nutrition and therapeutics for these diseases, including the
protective abilities of structurally diverse antioxidants, phytochemicals,
anti-inflammatory diets, omega-3 fatty acids, nonsteroidal anti-inflam-
matory drugs (NSAIDS), physical activity, disease modifying anti-rheu-
matic drugs, and novel regimens. Contributors are scientists and medical
specialists based in North America, Asia, Europe, and Australia.
RB155 2012-405309 978-0-309-16216-6
Direct-to-consumer genetic testing; summary of a
workshop.
Institute of Medicine and National Research Council of the National
Academies.
National Academies Press, ©2011 93 p. $28.75 (pa)
Under the aegis of the Institute of Medicine and National Research
Council’s Committee on Science, Technology, and Law Policy and Global
Affairs, a workshop was held in August and September 2009 to bring
together physicians, scientists, lawyers, ethicists, patient advocacy groups,
industry representatives, and other professionals to educate the public
and policy makers about the increasing availability and use of direct-to-
consumer genetic testing and determine issues for future study. They
identified appropriate policy responses and the technical, legal, policy,
and ethical questions raised, including the current state of knowledge
and future research path, issues related to shared genes, and the edu-
cation of the public and medical community. This report summarizes the
presentations and discussions and addresses the scientific and ethical
foundations for testing, including genomic associations, analytic and
clinical validity, and clinical utility; personal and social issues, especially
privacy, public awareness and understanding, and the need for broad
public education; research and medical issues like informed consent, the
role of institutional review boards, and whether customers of testing
companies should be considered human research subjects; the impact on
health care and public health in terms of economics, physician
awareness and education, and genetic counseling; and the legislative and
regulatory framework in the US. The report lacks an index.
RB155 978-0-12-388415-2
Epigenetics in human disease.
Title main entry. Ed. by Trygve O. Tollefsbol.
Academic Press, ©2012 577 p. $149.95
For students and scientists in areas ranging from basic molecular biology
to clinical therapy who are interested in the underlying basis of human
diseases and new treatments caused by reversible epigenetic processes,
Tollefsbol (epigenetics and gene regulation in cancer and aging, U. of
Alabama at Birmingham) assembles 27 chapters on the role of epige-
netics in human disease, such as cancer, autoimmune disorders, and
aging, as well as recent breakthroughs in diabetes, neurological dis-
orders, and cardiovascular disease. They detail the role of epigenetics in
the etiology, progression, diagnosis, and prognosis of these diseases, as
well as new epigenetic approaches to treatment. Chapters describe each
disease in terms of the underlying role of epigenetics, then the most
recent advances in epigenetic approaches for treatment. Others address
human imprinting disorders, and respiratory, infectious, and gynecol-
ogical and reproductive diseases, as well as stem cells, obesity, and
allergic diseases. Contributors work in epigenetics and various medical
specialties in Europe, North America, Asia, Australia, and New Zealand.
Academic Press is an imprint of Elsevier.
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
INTERNAL MEDICINE, PSYCHIATRY
RC78 978-1-907816-42-0
First FRCR anatomy; mock papers.
Budak, Matthew et al.
JP Medical Publishers Ltd, ©2013 468 p. $40.00 (pa)
This study guide presents 15 practice exams for radiology trainees
studying for the First FRCR Anatomy Exam. Just like real exam format,
the practice exams contain 20 cases to be answered in 75 minutes. Each
case consists of one labeled b&w diagnostic image and five questions,
with explained answers, for a total of 300 b&w diagnostic images. Budak
is affiliated with Ninewells Hospital and Medical School, UK
RC78 978-1-907816-37-6
First FRCR anatomy; practice cases.
Tingerides, Constantinos et al.
JP Medical Publishers Ltd, ©2013 406 p. $40.00 (pa)
This collection of practice cases will help radiology trainees studying for
the First FRCR Anatomy Exam. Chapters are keyed to body regions, as
on the syllabus of the actual exam. Cases consist of one b&w diagnostic
image and five questions, plus explained answers; many answers include
illustrations. Coverage encompasses all imaging modalities: radiographs,
CT, MRI, and ultrasound. In addition to practice cases, the book contains
two practice exams of 20 cases to be answered within 75 minutes, with
explained answered. The book contains about 230 b&w diagnostic
images total. Tingerides is affiliated with Leeds Radiology Academy.
RC78 2012-028603 978-0-8194-9257-9
Spectral computed tomography imaging.
Heismann, Björn et al.
SPIE, ©2012 119 p. $51.00 (pa)
Heismann (medical imaging, Friedereich-Alexander U., Germany),
Bernhard Schmidt, and Thomas Flohr, both with a giant German elec-
tronics company, describe the fundamentals and clinical applications of
an imaging technology that has become widely used since it was
developed in 1975. The spectral version of computed tomography (CT)
provides information on the energy-dependent, or spectral, attenuation
properties of the object being observed. They cover clinical motivations,
the physics, algorithms, techniques to acquire spectral CT data, and
clinical applications.
RC86 2012-018517 978-1-4496-2890-1
ACLS for EMTs, 2d ed.
Smith, Mike. (EMS; continuing education series.)
Jones & Bartlett, ©2012 120 p. $52.95 (pa)
Smith (emergency medical and health services, Tacoma Community
College) acquaints emergency medical technicians with advanced cardiac
life support (ACLS), to enhance their role in the emergency medical
services team. He explains airway evaluation and control; the cardiac
continuum of care, including the progression of cardiac disease and
assessment of the patient; heart rhythms; electrical interventions in
cardiac care; the fundamentals of cardiac pharmacology and common
drugs; challenging resuscitation situations, such as stroke, hypothermia,
electrical injuries, lightning-related injuries, and drug-related emer-
gencies; legal considerations; stress and self-care; and putting all the com-
ponents together in the context of an emergency ACLS call.
RC86 2012-025533 978-1-4496-0918-4
ECG cases for EMS.
Lawner, Benjamin, Christopher Touzeau and Amal Mattu.
Jones & Bartlett, ©2013 206 p. $59.95 (pa)
The 89 cases are designed to allow students of emergency medicine to
practice the skills they have learned in formal training on interpreting
electrocardiograms (ECG). Each scenario depicts a real patient encounter
and includes a chief complaint, a brief description of the current illness,
vital signs, physical exam findings, pertinent medical history, and an
actual pre-hospital ECG to expose students to what they will encounter in
the field. The second half of the book contains the answers.
RC86 2012-008537 978-0-470-65772-0
Urgent care emergencies; avoiding the pitfalls and
improving the outcomes.
Title main entry. Ed. by Deepi G. Goyal and Amal Mattu.
John Wiley & Sons, ©2012 149 p. $57.95 (pa)
This on-the-job reference for medical professionals working in urgent
care, emergency room, or other settings provides management tips and
cautions against pitfalls of various medications and procedures for con-
ditions often seen in urgent care settings. There is special emphasis on
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
determining whether the patient is actually in more serious condition
that needs immediate emergency attention. Featuring a reader-friendly
layout, key fact boxes, and b&w images, the book covers management of
genitourinary complains, orthopedic pitfalls of the upper and lower
extremity, orthopedic pitfalls of pediatrics, and pitfalls of wound man-
agement, in addition to emergency dermatology for the acute care
provider, management of common infections, headache, evaluation and
management of back pain, and pediatric and geriatric pitfalls. Final
chapters review pharmacology pitfalls and pearls in urgent care med-
icine and offer basic guidelines for effective communication in urgent
care. Goyal teaches emergency medicine at the Mayo Clinic. Mattu teaches
emergency medicine at the University of Maryland
RC112 2012-004198 978-1-84593-938-0
Communicable diseases; a global perspective, 4th ed.
Webber, Roger.
CABI Publishing, ©2012 327 p. $75.00 (pa)
Published as Communicable Diseases Epidemiology and Control from 1996
to 2009, the reference has been renamed and updated to incorporate both
the science and the experience with communicable disease worldwide,
particularly the declaration of A(H1N1) influenza—swine flu—as a pan-
demic in 2010 and steady progress against it since then. The material is
primarily for students and instructors in public health and medicine, but
also for doctors, health workers, and public health policy makers. Among
the topics are communicable disease theory, notification and health reg-
ulations, food-borne diseases, diseases transmitted by body fluids, and
new and emerging diseases. Distributed in the US by Stylus Publishing.
RC112 978-0-12-415895-5
Taxonomic guide to infectious diseases; understanding the
biologic classes of pathogenic organisms.
Berman, Jules J.
Academic Press, ©2012 355 p. $79.95
Although only a small percentage of terrestrial organisms are pathogenic
in humans, infectious diseases remain the leading cause of death
globally. Dr. Berman, board-certified in pathology and cryptopathology,
covers some 350 living organisms and 150 viruses falling into 40 bio-
logical classes that are considered clinically significant. He discusses
general principles of classification, the tree of life, and the classes of bac-
teria, eukaryotes, animals, fungi, and viruses and prions. The text
includes a glossary and appended further notes on taxonomy, the
number of occurrences of some common infectious diseases, and some
1400 organisms (common and rare) that cause infectious diseases in
humans. Academic Press is an imprint of Elsevier.
RC113 2012-470026 978-3-11-027883-5
Molecular diagnostics of infectious diseases, 2d ed.
Title main entry. Ed. by Harald H. Kessler.
De Gruyter, ©2012 202 p. $126.00
Molecular diagnostics is based on the direct detection of specific genetic
material in a specimen through nucleic acid amplification techniques,
and has largely replaced antigen testing to become the leading technology
for screening or diagnosing patients for many diseases. The method can
also detect genetic variations within the pathogen species, for example
varieties that may be resistant to particular drugs. Specialists in infec-
tious disease provide an overview of the approach and survey its appli-
cations. The topics include the stability of the specimen during
pre-analytics, extracting nucleic acids, human immunodeficiency virus,
the molecular diagnosis of gastrointestinal pathogens, and pathogens rel-
evant in the central nervous system.
RC119 2012-023208 978-0-470-97248-9
Immunity to parasitic infection.
Title main entry. Ed. by Tracey J. Lamb.
John Wiley & Sons, ©2012 500 p. $89.95 (pa)
Lamb (pediatrics, Emory U.) provides advanced undergraduates and
graduate students with a guide to immunity to parasitic infections
affecting humans. Contributed by immunologists, infectious disease spe-
cialists, and others from North America, Europe, Africa, South America,
Australia, and Japan, the 28 chapters detail the history of immunopara-
sitology; background on the immune system; protozoan infections,
including malaria, Toxoplasma gondii, Giardia, Cryptosporidium,
Leishmania, and trypanosomes; helminth infections, such as filarial
nematodes, Ascaris lumbricoides, hookworms, Trichuris, Trichinella, schis-
tosomes, and tapeworm; co-infections like HIV and malaria, HIV and
Leishmania, gastrointestinal nematodes and malaria, and malaria and
schistosomes; and other aspects, including hygiene and other early
childhood influences, nematodes as therapeutic organisms, malaria vac-
cination, and vaccine development for leishmaniasis, hookworms, and
filarial nematodes.
–252–
RC262 2012-021572 978-1-4398-3144-1
Computational systems biology of cancer.
Barillot, Emmanuel et al. (Chapman & Hall/CRC mathematical and
computational biology series)
CRC Press, ©2013 423 p. $79.95
A team of researchers from the Curie Institute in Paris explain how com-
putational approaches with system-oriented thinking can complement the
experimental approach to understanding cancer, bypassing some of its
limitations. Computational studies not only provide new insights from
large-scale experimental data, they say, but can explore conceivable char-
acteristics of cancer under different assumptions. Their topics include
basic principles of the molecular biology of cancer, bioinformatics tools
and standards for systems biology, mathematical modeling applied to
cancer cell biology, facts and hypotheses about cancer robustness, and
finding new cancer targets.
RC262 2012-021108 978-1-118-08373-4
Textbook of uncommon cancer, 4d ed.
Title main entry. Ed. by Derek Raghavan et.
John Wiley & Sons, ©2012 991 p. $349.95
With this much-needed text, Reghavan (medicine, U. of North Carolina at
Charlotte) et al. help oncologists, hematologists, and other clinicians
manage the treatment of uncommon cancers. They present 70 chapters
by oncologists, surgeons, pathologists, and other medical specialists from
the US, Europe, Australia, and South America, who provide an overview
of the published information and their approach to the management of
rare types of genitourinary, head and neck, endocrine, breast, thoracic,
gastrointestinal, gynecological, hematological, cutaneous, neurological,
and pediatric malignancies. They include discussion of anatomy, staging,
epidemiology, biology, pathology, histology, clinical presentation, diag-
nosis, treatment, and prognosis. This edition has been revised with new
material and a new focus on evidence-based research and clinical
practice. It adds five chapters, revises others, and adds new illustrations
and images.
RC267 978-0-12-397833-2
Recent advances in cancer research and therapy.
Title main entry. Ed. by Xin-Yuan Liu et al. (Elsevier insights)
Elsevier, ©2012 674 p. $150.00
Liu (Institute of Biochemistry and Cell Biology, Chinese Academy of
Sciences, and Xinyuan Institute of Medicine and Biotechnology, Zhejiang
Sci-Tech U., China) et al. compile 21 articles on recent advances in cancer
research and therapy, contributed by researchers working in China, the
US, and UK in molecular cell biology, molecular oncology, biological
chemistry, cancer research, pharmacology, surgery, and other areas. They
discuss progress in China in cancer biotherapy and chemotherapeutic
drug research; cancer targeting gene-viro-therapy; the relationship
between antiproliferative activities and class I MHC surface expression of
mouse interferon proteins on B16-F10 melanoma cells; mitotic regulator
Hec1 as a potential target for cancer therapy; advances in liposome-based
targeted gene therapy; rewiring the intracellular signaling network in
cancer; and the research and development of highly potent antibody-
based drug conjugates and fusion proteins for cancer therapy. Also
covered are cancer stem cells; the p53 tumor antigen as a therapy target
and biomarker; the recombinant adenoviral-p53 agent; a three-dimen-
sional tumor model and T-lymphocytes immunotherapy; doxorubicin car-
diotoxicity; the biochemistry and pharmacology of human ABCC1/MRP1;
the role of traditional Chinese medicine; the effect of arsenic trioxide on
acute promyelocytic leukemia and glioma; nasopharyngeal and
esophageal carcinoma; colorectal cancer in China; and molecular and cel-
lular characteristics of small cell lung cancer. There is no index.
RC268 2011-278592 978-0-309-22064-4
Facilitating collaborations to develop combination
investigational cancer therapies; workshop summary.
Institute of Medicine of the National Academics.
National Academies Press, ©2012 103 p. $38.00 (pa)
This report summarizes a workshop held by the National Cancer Policy
Forum of the Institute of Medicine, which was convened in June 2011 to
help further the development of innovative combination cancer therapies,
determine barriers that may be impeding development and offer ways to
overcome them, improve collaboration, and accelerate the development of
promising combination investigational cancer therapies. The presenta-
tions addressed scientific challenges and opportunities in the codevel-
opment of investigational therapies; the regulatory environment for
codevelopment, including the recent Food and Drug Administration draft
guidance on the topic; cultural and legal issues that affect collaboration;
lessons learned from codeveloping HIV and cancer combination ther-
apies; and examples that can serve as models of collaboration. There is
no index.
–253–
RC270 2011-276579 978-0-309-21273-1
Patient-centered cancer treatment planning; improving the
quality of oncology care.
Title main entry. Ed. by Institute of Medicine of the National
Academies.
National Academies Press, ©2011 66 p. $24.00 (pa)
As good communication between patient and doctors has been linked in
a number of studies to positive health outcomes, it made sense to hold a
workshop that discussed ways in which patients could become effective
self-advocates. The resulting volume is not a collection of papers, but an
integrated summary of both the presented information and the discus-
sions that ensued between patients and medical professionals. The
volume closes with an appendix showing the workshop agenda and notes
the questions considered by the panels. No index is provided.
RC271 2012-025719 978-1-4398-1607-3
Proton and carbon ion therapy.
Title main entry. Ed. by C.-M. Charlie Ma and Tony Lomax. (Imaging
in medical diagnosis and therapy)
CRC Press, ©2013 224 p. $129.95
Researchers and practitioners in medical physics and radiation therapy
offer other professionals in those fields a broad and practical guide to
proton and carbon ion therapy. They include the physics and radiobi-
ology basics; dosimetry methods and radiation measurements; treatment
delivery systems; practical guidance on patient setup, target localization,
and treatment planning; and reports on the treatment of pediatric
cancers, lymphomas, and various other cancers. Other topics include
accelerators for proton and ion therapy, requirements for particle therapy
facilities, image-guided therapy, conformal proton therapy, and future
prospects for particle therapy.
RC271 2012026307 978-1-936287-53-6
Radiation oncology; self-assessment guide.
Suh, John.
Demos Medical Publishing, Inc., ©2013 561 p. $75.00 (pa)
Written by colleagues at the radiation oncology department of the
Cleveland Clinic Taussig Cancer Institute, this handbook is designed to
facilitate understanding and knowledge of the natural history, epidemi-
ology, imaging, diagnosis, staging, evidence-based treatment options, and
treatment-related side effects of cancers encountered in the field. In a
flash card format, study questions cover cancers of the various disease
sites: head and neck, central nervous system, breast, thoracic, gastroin-
testinal, genitourinary, gynecological, lymphomas, and pediatric cancers.
Answers to each of the some 900 questions include key references.
RC280 2012-024205 978-1-4496-8808-0
100 questions & answers about mesothelioma, 3d ed.
Pass, Harvery I. et al.
Jones & Bartlett, ©2014 193 p. $24.95 (pa)
Pass (thoracic oncology, New York U. Langone Medical Center) et al.
answer questions patients, survivors, friends, and families of those with
mesothelioma might have about the condition. They address what it is,
its causes, risk factors, and prevention; diagnosis, symptoms, and finding
doctors; psychosocial support, talking to family and children, and
insurance and financial concerns; legal implications and rights;
treatment, staging, survival rates, and palliative care; clinical trials, exper-
imental and investigational treatments, and treatment plans; side effects
of therapy, pain, and diet and exercise suggestions; recurrence; and care-
giving and end-of-life issues. This edition has been updated to provide the
doctor’s and patient’s views; it includes two authors whose family
members have the disease.
RC280 2012-009770 978-0-470-97432-2
Clinical psycho-oncology; an international perspective.
Grassi, Luigi and Michelle Riba.
Wiley-Blackwell, ©2012 321 p. $65.95
Grassi (psychiatry, U. of Ferrara, Italy) and Riba (integrated medicine and
psychiatric services, U. of Michigan Medical School) compile 22 chapters
on the behavioral and psychological problems associated with cancer, to
help clinicians in psychiatry, psychology, and oncology, and general
practitioners, community psychiatric nurses, palliative care physicians,
pediatricians, social workers, and others better care for patients and their
families. Psychiatrists, psychologists, palliative medicine specialists,
psycho-oncologists, and others from around the world discuss themes in
psycho-oncology, including genetic counseling, bioethics, advocacy, and
special populations, and describe responses to challenging clinical
problems in assessment, diagnosis, and treatment. They cover
psychosocial instruments for assessment; aspects related to sexuality and
gender; the most common psychiatric and psychosocial disorders;
cognitive changes associated with cancer and treatments; screening for
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
distress; psychological and psychopharmacological interventions; cancer
rehabilitation programs; different approaches to psycho-oncology,
including pediatric and geriatric issues and underserved and minority
populations; the significance of the family; psychosocial and physical
recovery; post-traumatic growth; guiding terminally ill patients through
the dying process; grief and bereavement; spiritual and religious coping;
and international perspectives and advocacy in cancer care. Cultural
issues are addressed throughout.
RC280 2012-032109 978-1-936287-78-9
Lymphomas.
Title main entry. Ed. by John W. Sweetenham. (Emerging cancer thera-
peutics; v.3, issue 2)
Demos Medical Publishing, Inc., ©2012 389 p. $85.00
This work for oncologists and cancer biologists provides eight chapters
on the evolving role of established therapies as well as pathway-directed
agents, within the context of the emerging paradigm of personalized lym-
phoma treatment. The disease specific chapters describe signaling
pathways central to disease pathology, but also emphasize the biological
heterogeneity of the entities currently recognized by the WHO
Classification and stress the importance of this heterogeneity when con-
sidering treatment choices. The book examines new and emerging ther-
apies for Hodgkin and non-Hodgkin lymphoma, T-cell lymphoma,
indolent lymphoma, mantle cell lymphoma, and aggressive B-cell lym-
phoma. Treatments described include autologous hematopoietic stem cell
transplantation, allogenic stem cell transplantation, and non-transplant-
based salvage therapy. Sweetenham teaches medicine at UCSD Nevada
Cancer Institute in Las Vegas.
RC280 2012-032113 978-1-936287-76-5
Malignant gliomas.
Title main entry. Ed. by Arnab Chakravarti and Martin Fuss.
(Radiation medicine rounds; v.3, issue 2)
Demos Medical Publishing, Inc., ©2012 363 p. $85.00
International contributors survey the latest research, practice, and
emerging topics in the use of radiotherapy for management of primary
brain gliomas. Overview chapters chart recent advances and directions
in the treatment of malignant gliomas, especially the role of advanced
radiation modalities. Specific chapter topics include amino acid PET
imaging, molecular classification of malignant gliomas, biomarkers, and
boron neutron capture therapy, antiangiogenesis therapies, and gene
therapy. The art program offers color and b&w medical images plus
b&w process diagrams. The book is intended as a reference for students,
house staff, fellows, clinicians, medical physicists, cancer biologists,
radiobiologists, and others in oncology. Chakravarti teaches radiation
oncology at The Ohio State University Medical School. Fuss teaches radi-
ation medicine at Oregon Health & Science University.
RC281 2012-010170 978-1-119-99883-9
Pediatric psycho-oncology; psychosocial aspects and
clinical interventions, 2d ed.
Title main entry. Ed. by Shulamith Kreitler et al.
Wiley-Blackwell, ©2012 310 p. $98.95
For health care professionals caring for children and adolescents with
cancer, Kreitler (psychological sciences, Tel-Aviv U., and social welfare
and health sciences, U. of Haifa, Israel) et al. bring together a group of
pediatric oncologists and psychologists/psycho-oncologists from the US,
Israel, Europe, and New Zealand who focus on the psychosocial aspects
of cancer treatment and children’s quality of life. In 22 chapters, they
address active treatment, including comprehensive and family-centered
psychosocial care, pain, the psychiatric impact of childhood cancer, the
psychosocial effects of hematopoietic cell transplantation and radio-
therapy, communicating with children, cognitive behavioral interven-
tions, education, complementary and alternative medicine, art and other
therapies, and palliative care; survivorship; death; and additional con-
siderations. This edition has updated 16 chapters and adds new chapters
on psychopharmacology, bereavement, ethical considerations, interna-
tional collaborations, and addressing the emotional needs of children
whose parents have cancer. It includes a new appendix that details
research tools in pediatric psycho-oncology.
RC346 978-1-4511-0012-9
The 5-minute neurology consult, 2d ed.
Title main entry. Ed. by D. Joanne Lynn et al. (The 5-minute series)
Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, ©2012 464 p. $99.95
Lynn (neurology, Ohio State U.) et al. provide practitioners in neurology,
emergency medicine, and non-neurological specialties, and residents, stu-
dents, patients, and families with a reference to disorders of the nervous
system. Sections cover symptoms and signs, diagnostic tests, and diseases
and disorders. Each topic is presented in a two-page layout and outline
format by neurologists and others from the US, Canada, Europe, and
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
New Zealand, with information on definitions, pathophysiology, clinical
characteristics, risk factors, epidemiology, signs and symptoms, diag-
nosis, treatment, medications, follow-up, diseases with similar character-
istics, pregnancy, synonyms, ICD (International Classification of Diseases)
coding, and other information. A final section details short topics. This
edition has been revised and expanded to cover stroke therapy, multiple
sclerosis, neurogenetic disorders, and Lewy Body dementia.
RC346 2011-031975 978-1-4511-4263-1
Practical neurology, 4th ed.
Title main entry. Ed. by José Biller.
Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, ©2012 747 p. $99.00 (pa)
Biller (neurology, Loyola U. Chicago) offers a concise neurology text for
residents, fellows, and practicing physicians that presents concepts in an
outline format. The text includes information on the diagnosis of patients
with dementia, aphasia, seizures, syncope, sleep disorders, visual loss,
diplopia, dysphagia, headache, hyperkinesis, acute muscle weakness, and
other problems, as well as neuroimaging; selection of electrodiagnostic,
cerebrospinal fluid, and other ancillary testing; common office problems
in pediatric neurology; and ethical issues. The second section covers
treatment for various disorders, such as cerebrovascular disease, epilepsy,
multiple sclerosis, spinal cord disorders, peripheral neuropathy, chronic
pain, tumors, complications of cancer, dizziness and vertigo, and neuro-
logic diseases in pregnancy, as well as neurotoxicology and neurologic
emergencies. Revised and updated, this edition has been rewritten to
cover advances in the field. Contributors are neurologists and other spe-
cialists from the US.
RC372 2012-023320 978-1-936287-25-3
Inherited metabolic epilepsies.
Title main entry. Ed. by Phillip L. Pearl.
Demos Medical Publishing, Inc., ©2013 356 p. $95.00
US contributors in pediatric neurology, clinical biochemistry, molecular
imaging, and genetic counseling present the latest research and practice
in the field, in this review and reference for physicians and researchers.
Part 1, on general principles, begins with a review of the top 10 diag-
noses that should not be missed due to serious consequences. Other
chapters provide overviews with specific examples of the vital roles of
neuroradiology, electroencephalography, and genetic counseling in the
evaluation and management of patients with inherited metabolic
epilepsies. Part 2 covers small molecule diseases, such as disorders of
amino acids, organic acids, neurotransmitters, and mitochondria, while
Part 3 reports on work in large molecule diseases, such as defects of gly-
cosylation, lysosomal and peroxisomal function, and leukodystrophies.
Of special note is a detailed algorithm for disease screening and choosing
specific diagnostic tests, again with emphasis on identifying treatable dis-
orders that can have dire consequences if left untreated. The book con-
tains chapter key points and clinical pearls and is illustrated with b&w
medical images. Pearl, chief of the Division of Child Neurology at
Children’s National Medical Center, teaches medicine at The George
Washington University.
RC374 2012-010604 978-0-470-67041-5
Dietary treatment of epilepsy; practical implementation of
ketogenic therapy.
Title main entry. Ed. by Elizabeth Neal.
John Wiley & Sons, ©2012 241 p. $69.99 (pa)
Neal, a research dietitian who holds an honorary post at the U. College
London-Institute of Child Health in the UK, presents 28 chapters con-
tributed by neurologists and dietitians from the UK, Germany, India, US,
Korea, and South Africa, who show dietitians and other healthcare pro-
fessionals how to implement the ketogenic diet in patients with epilepsy
to reduce seizures. They discuss the science behind ketogenic therapies;
epilepsy and epileptic seizures; treatment options in the pediatric
epilepsy clinic, including diet, surgery, and deep brain and vagal nerve
stimulation; the diet’s efficacy; the biochemical basis of dietary therapies
for neurological disorders; initiation, monitoring, nutritional adequacy,
problems, and discontinuation of diets like the ketogenic diet, Atkins
diet, and the low glycemic index; and the use of ketogenic regimens in
non-Western countries, as well as in infants, adults, and other conditions,
such as Alzheimer’s disease, Parkinson’s disease, amyotrophic lateral
sclerosis, ischemia, neurotrauma, and cancer.
RC377 2012-017893 978-1-4398-2884-7
Multiple sclerosis rehabilitation; from impairment to
participation.
Title main entry. Ed. by Marcia Finlayson. (Rehabilitation science in
practice series)
CRC Press, ©2013 581 p. $149.95
Editor Finlayson has been involved with MS rehabilitation for over 20
–254–
years and was a tenured professor at the U. of Illinois at Chicago during
the preparation of this book and more recently as director of the School
of Rehabilitation Therapy at Queen’s U., Canada. This collection of 24
contributed chapters represents her vision for a thorough, up-to-date ref-
erence. Organization is in sections on the basics, rehab for impairments
in body structure and function, rehab for activity limitations and partic-
ipation restrictions, the influence of personal and environmental con-
texts, and optimizing rehab experiences.
RC387 978-0-12-416046-0
Neuropsychological rehabilitation; principles and
applications.
Title main entry. Ed. by Jamuna Rajeswaran. (Elsevier insights)
Elsevier, ©2013 191 p. $69.95
Rajeswaran (clinical neuropsychology, National Institute of Mental Health
and Neurosciences, India) brings together nine chapters by neuropsy-
chologists, psychiatrists, and psychologists particularly from the National
Institute of Mental Health and Neurosciences from India (as well as from
Australia), who discuss principles and applications in neuropsychological
rehabilitation. They introduce assessment, theories, and methods, then
discuss computerized cognitive retraining programs for patients with
traumatic brain injury and other brain disorders, a holistic approach
that involves cognitive tasks and mediation and psychological and other
professional services, EEG neurofeedback training, cognitive behavioral
principles, a circuitry approach to rehabilitation, cognitive remediation of
neurocognitive deficits in schizophrenia, interventions for specific
learning disorders, and challenges in the field. The book lacks an index.
RC423 2012-419478 978-0-323-07201-4
Cognition and acquired language disorders; an
information processing approach.
Peach, Richard K. and Lewis P. Shapiro.
Elsevier Mosby, ©2012 357 p. $83.95 (pa)
Peach (communication disorders and sciences, Rush U.) and Shapiro
(speech, language, and hearing sciences, San Diego State U.) bring
together a group of specialists in communication sciences and disorders,
psychology, neurology, speech, language, and hearing sciences, and other
fields from the US and Australia for 15 chapters aimed at graduate stu-
dents and clinicians on the assessment, diagnosis, and management of
cognitive-communication disorders. They review cognition and language,
including the effects of aging and neurological conditions associated with
acquired language disorders, then cover normal cognitive processing in
adults in the areas of attention, memory, language, and executive func-
tioning, and the cognitive impairments underlying language disorders
arising from a variety of conditions, including language and communi-
cation disorders associated with attention deficits, memory disorders and
impaired language and communication, language processing disorders,
and communication following executive dysfunction, as well as their
management. Chapters are organized using an information processing
approach rather than by syndrome.
RC423 2012-005633 978-1-84872-612-3
Handbook of vowels and vowel disorders.
Title main entry. Ed. by Martin J. Ball and Fiona Gibbon. (Language
and speech disorders book series; 2)
Psychology Press, ©2013 467 p. $84.95
Almost all speech disorders involve consonants, which have therefore
attracted most attention, but here linguists, psychologists, and other
researchers demonstrate that a wide range of vowel disorders can be
found, can be described, can be accounted for within models of
phonology, and can be remediated. The topics include normal vowel
development, the acoustic measurement of vowels, recurring patterns
and idiosyncratic systems in some English children with vowel disorders,
vowel production in childhood and acquired apraxia of speech, vowel
perception in listeners with cochlear implants, and the clinical phonology
of vowel disorders. Psychology Press is an imprint of the Taylor &
Francis Group.
RC424 2012-005851 978-0-470-67158-0
The science and practice of stuttering treatment; a
symposium; proceedings.
Stuttering: A Clinical Symposium (2010: Cavtat, Croatia) Ed. by Suzana
Jelcic Jaksic and Mark Onslow.
Wiley-Blackwell, ©2012 253 p. $69.99 (pa)
Edited by the President of the Croatian Association for People Who
Stutter and the Director of the Australian Stuttering Research Centre, this
book brings together professionals from Europe, North America, and
Australia to describe different theories of stuttering treatment and offer
evidence for their effectiveness in practice. Each chapter of the book
–255–
describes the theory behind one type of treatment. It outlines the
treatment program, documents scientific evidence for the treatment’s
effectiveness, offers information on its advantages and disadvantages,
and gives information about how the author believes the treatment may
be developed in the future. The final chapter, Innovations, Watersheds,
and Gold Standards by editor Mark Onslow (University of Sydney, AU),
gives a critical review of the evidence presented. He reports the field still
has no conclusive evidence for which treatment, if any, is the “right one,”
but treatments that work better have some features in common. The book
is well-organized and clear, and will allow both stutterers and profes-
sionals in the field to quickly understand and evaluate a wide variety of
treatment options for stuttering in both children and adults. Treatments
considered include: Camperdown, Altered Auditory Feedback, Lidcombe,
Student-delivered Intensive Speech Restructuring, the Successful
Stuttering Management Program, the Comprehensive Stuttering Program,
Telehealth Treatments, an art-mediated program, Self-modeling, multi-
factoral treatment for preschoolers, Cognitive Behavior Therapy,
Westmead, and approaches focused on holistic treatment and gradual
increase in length and complexity of utterances.
RC429 2012-012010 978-1-59756-439-7
Videofluoroscopy; a multidisciplinary team approach.
Title main entry. Ed. by Roger D. Newman and Julie M. Nightingale.
Plural Publishing, ©2012 315 p. $89.95 (pa)
Speech and language therapists, communication disorders scientists, and
related specialists explore the complexities of the videofluoroscopy study
of swallowing, and offer evidence-informed guidance to practitioners on
what is best practice. Among the topics are alternative investigations, the
neurophysiology of swallowing, the effective use of imaging technology,
pediatric videofluoroscopy, and dementia.
RC437 2012-002229 978-1-4214-0701-2
Systematic psychiatric evaluation; a step-by-step guide to
applying The Perspectives of Psychiatry .
Chisolm, Margaret S. and Constantine G. Lyketsos.
Johns Hopkins U. Press, ©2012 243 p. $60.00
For those in mental health training programs, Chisolm and Lyketsos
(psychiatry and behavioral sciences, Johns Hopkins U. Bayview Medical
Center) focus on four aspects of psychiatric practice—disease, dimen-
sional, behavior, and life story perspectives—to illustrate the biopsy-
chosocial approach outlined in The Perspectives of Psychiatry (by Paul
McHugh and Phillip Slavney), which emphasizes considering each
patient from several points of view and then developing a treatment plan.
They aim to distill the instructions into a practical ‘recipe,’ and outline
this systematic and integrative approach and each of its perspectives, in
addition to applying it to nine cases involving issues such as bipolar dis-
order, psychosis, substance abuse, depression, memory and mood
problems, eating disorders, cutting, and bereavement. Each case is fol-
lowed by a systematic formulation interweaving each perspective, from
which an integrative treatment plan is developed.
RC438 978-90-209-5639-9
Neither rhyme nor reason; history of psychiatry.
Museum Dr. Guislain Gent.
Lannoo Publishers, ©2012 159 p. $50.00 (pa)
Opened in Ghent in September 1986, the Dr. Guislain Museum tells the
history of psychiatry through its permanent and temporary exhibitions.
It occupies a large portion of a historic building constructed in 1857,
through the collaboration of the Brothers of Charity and mental health
professional Joseph Guislain (1797-1860), as the first psychiatric insti-
tution in Belgium. Catalogues of the permanent collection were previ-
ously created in 1989 and 2001. The newest catalogue reflects the
extensive expansion of the collection over the past decade. Illustrated
throughout with full-color and b&w photographs, the text features 22
concise and accessible essays documenting and commenting on the col-
lection and how mental illness has been dealt with over the centuries.
Distributed in North America by ACC Distribution.
RC454 2011-934458 978-1-111-83698-6
Essentials of abnormal psychology, 6th ed. (online access
included)
Durand, V. Mark and David H. Barlow.
Wadsworth Publishing Co., ©2013 678 p. $185.95
This sixth edition introductory textbook for students explores major
aspects of abnormal psychology. Every chapter has been revised and
updated, with a focus on the integration of psychological, biological, and
social influences on psychopathology. Chapter one introduces abnormal
behavior in historical context, chapter two discusses integrative
approaches, and chapter three addresses clinical assessment, diagnosis,
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
and research in psychopathology. The following ten chapters detail major
psychological disorders and discuss clinical description, causal factors,
and treatment and outcomes. The final chapter examines legal and
ethical issues related to mental health services. Each chapter includes real
life case studies and culminates with a summary, list of key terms,
answers to in-chapter questions, media resources, and a chapter quiz.
Further resources are made available at the end of some chapters, and
access to additional online study materials is included.
RC455 978-0-88937-434-8
Cultural variations in psychopathology; from research to
practice.
Title main entry. Ed. by Sven Barnow and Nazli Balkir.
Hogrefe Publishing, ©2013 286 p. $63.00 (pa)
The result of a 2010 international closed workshop on “Cultural
Variations in Emotion Regulation and the Treatment of Psychiatric
Patients,” this collection of essays explores cultural psychology and sen-
sitivity within mental health care. Chapters examine basic relevance of
culture in mental health, how culture shapes the identification and
understanding of the self, cultural aspects of emotional regulation, and
the relationship between culture and diagnosis especially with regard to
perceptions of pain, depression, and addiction, among other topics. The
work is especially appropriate for mental health care practitioners with
interactions among ethnically diverse and migrant communities.
RC455 2011-015400 978-0-444-52002-9
Neurobiology of psychiatric disorders.
Title main entry. Ed. by Thomas E. Schlaepfer and Charles B.
Nemeroff. (Handbook of clinical neurology, 3d ser.; v.106)
Elsevier, ©2012 760 p. $275.00
Schlaepfer (psychiatry, U. of Bonn, Germany, and psychiatric neu-
roimaging, Johns Hopkins U.) and Nemeroff (psychiatry and behavioral
sciences, U. of Miami) present a 45-chapter manual on the neurobiology
of psychiatric disorders, for psychiatrists, neurologists, and neuroscien-
tists. Each chapter has been contributed by one author from the US and
another from elsewhere (Europe, China, South Africa, Canada, or Israel),
who are psychiatrists, neuroscientists, neurologists, and other physicians.
They cover the history of psychiatry and neuroscience, receptor signaling
and the cell biology of synaptic transmission, the genetics of schizo-
phrenia, neurological and psychiatric aspects of emotion, cognitive neu-
ropsychological research methods, structural imaging in psychiatric
disorders, human functional neuroimaging, neurotransmitters and neu-
ropeptides in depression, animal models, psychiatric epidemiology,
emerging methods in the molecular biology of neuropsychiatric dis-
orders, clinical psychoneuroimmunology, and psychiatric rating scales.
Chapters then address depression, bipolar disorder, seasonal affective dis-
order, posttraumatic stress disorder, generalized anxiety and panic dis-
orders, obsessive-compulsive disorder, attention-deficit/hyperactivity
disorder, autism, substance abuse disorders, eating disorders, personality
disorders, psychiatric aspects of Parkinson’s disease, stroke, Huntington’s
disease, sleep disorders, depression and cardiovascular disorders, psy-
chiatric disorders among cancer patients, chronic fatigue syndrome, neu-
rocognitive deficits in patients with HIV, gastrointestinal disorders, the
role of psychotherapy, pharmacology and neuroimaging, antipsychotic
drugs, anxiolytics, brain stimulation therapies, light and wake therapy,
and the pharmacogenetics of antidepressants and mood stabilizers.
Disorder chapters include information on neurobiological findings,
genetics, treatment, diagnosis, epidemiology, and other aspects.
RC455 2012-021293 978-1-58562-418-8
Restoring mentalizing in attachment relationships;
treating trauma with plain old therapy.
Allen, Jon G.
American Psychiatric Pub., ©2013 301 p. $65.00 (pa)
Writing in plain language for a broad audience of professionals and
laypersons, Allen (The Menninger Clinic) asserts that trauma may be
understood as a consequence of mental pain experienced in psychological
isolation. He defines ‘plain old therapy’ as a relationship in which the
therapist’s empathy allows the patient to no longer feel alone in his or
her emotional pain. The author offers a new vision of development, of
trauma genesis, and of therapeutic interaction, linking attachment theory
to research in mindfulness, self-compassion, and mentalizing (attention
to mental states such as thoughts and feelings in self and others). Focus
is on trauma in attachment relationships and the many symptoms and
disorders that stem from such trauma, such as anxiety, depression, self-
harm, eating disorders, suicide, PTSD, and dissociative disorder. A final
chapter is devoted to existential-spiritual perspectives. Case examples,
summary charts, and chapter-ending key points are included. The author
teaches psychiatry at the Baylor College of Medicine.
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
RC469 978-0-12-416048-4
Telemental health; clinical, technical, and administrative
foundations for evidence-based practice.
Title main entry. Ed. by Kathleen Myers and Carolyn L. Turvey.
(Elsevier insights)
Elsevier, ©2013 435 p. $74.95
Myers (psychiatry and behavioral sciences, U. of Washington School of
Medicine) and Turvey (psychiatry, U. of Iowa College of Medicine)
introduce the telemental health (TMH) model for treating mental dis-
orders in rural and other patients with poor access to care. Following an
overview of trends supporting the broader adoption of TMH, contributors
discuss demographic changes and professional shortages that contribute
to the problem, and solutions that TMH offers through videoconfer-
encing, social networking, mobile applications, and eHealth. They treat
clinical, ethical, technical, and business aspects of delivering TMH
services. The work includes case studies, documentation templates, a
glossary, directory of Telehealth Resource Centers, and websites.
RC475 2012-008551 978-0-415-88336-8
The therapeutic situation in the 21st century.
Leffert, Mark.
Routledge, ©2013 288 p. $39.95 (pa)
Leffert, a psychoanalyst and writer, develops and explores a psychology
free of metapsychology that puts him in productive dialogue with the
Freudian psychoanalytic tradition that gave rise to it. He is strongly influ-
enced by Foucault’s critical engagement with psychoanalysis and devotes
many pages to considering how psychoanalysis and psychotherapy, terms
he uses interchangeably, develop us into exploitable subjects. Each
chapter offers an introduction and several sub-topics. Earlier chapters
consider issues of power and persuasion in the context of the therapist’s
office itself, while later chapters map out social consequences of psy-
chotherapy. In the end, presenting “a view from the edge,” Leffert argues
for a bio-psychosocial holistic approach to understanding the self.
RC480 2010-928365 978-0-495-00915-3
Clinical supervision; theory and practice.
Russell-Chapin, Lori A. and Theodore J. Chapin.
Brooks/Cole Publishing, ©2012 230 p. $103.95 (pa)
Lori Russell-Chapin (dean, education and health sciences, Bradley U.,
Peoria, Illinois) and Theodore Chapin (licensed clinical psychologist/mar-
riage and family therapist in private practice) provide a “one stop
shopping” approach to five supervision models to fit the needs of prac-
titioners and various client populations. They discuss the basic tenets,
ethics, and benefits of supervision throughout a counseling career.
Chapters include model examples, goals, process, and discussion ques-
tions. Appendices feature information packet forms, web resources for
professional organizations and codes of ethics, a counseling interview
rating form, glossary of interview rating form skills, and practice super-
vision case scenarios with the authors’ preferred choices. The preface
refers to a bundled DVD that is not included.
RC480 978-1-84619-976-9
Companion to primary care mental health.
Title main entry. Ed. by Gabriel Ivbijaro.
Radcliffe Publishing, ©2012 715 p. $79.00 (pa)
Ivbijaro (community and family health services, Wood Street Medical
Centre, UK) brings together medical and mental health specialists from
around the world for this manual for primary care practitioners on the
management of patients with mental health conditions. They draw on
their clinical experiences and literature reviews to address the
foundational knowledge needed to promote good mental health,
including the need to harness the wider determinants of health and
mental health and the need to tackle stigma through advocacy; issues of
spirituality and ethical practice; the role of public health and the
management of interfaces associated with providing good mental health;
assessment and intervention principles, including risk assessment and
classification, history-taking and investigations, and the principles of
prescribing and a biopsychosocial approach to care; and the assessment
and treatment of anxiety, bereavement, depression, bipolar disorder,
schizophrenia, perinatal mental health disorders, bodily stress syndrome,
eating disorders, gender dysphoria, substance use disorders, childhood
disorders, dementia, mental disorders due to physical illness, physical
health consequences of mental illness, and multimorbidity.
–256–
RC480 2012-006274 978-0-415-88459-4
The developing practitioner; growth and stagnation of
therapists and counselors.
Rønnestad, Michael Helge and Thomas M. Skovholt.
Routledge, ©2013 369 p. $39.95
Rønnestad (clinical psychology, U. of Oslo, Norway) and Skovholt (coun-
seling psychology, U. of Minnesota) provide an overview of the profes-
sional development of counselors and therapists over the career lifespan,
drawing on their experiences, research, and that of students and col-
leagues. The volume is derived from and expands their previous volume,
The Evolving Professional Self: Stages and Themes in Counselor and
Therapist Development, but integrates many changes, thus warranting a
new text. It changes the concept of stages to phases and decreases the
number of phases from eight to six and the number of themes of devel-
opment from 20 to 14. It extends the initial review of the conceptual lit-
erature in the first chapter by adding topics such as the study of
expertise, learning, decision making, and cognitive complexity. It has a
new chapter on cultural conceptions (replacing the chapter on the con-
ventional or lay helper), adds new material on the phases, and adds
developmental tasks for each. The content of each phase has been
organized around an introduction, developmental tasks and general
description, sources of influence and learning process, the professional
role and conceptual ideas used, and measures of effectiveness and satis-
faction. New chapters on a cyclical/trajectories model of development and
professional resiliency are included, as is a new supervision model. Other
chapters address research findings on master therapists, and findings,
perspectives, models, and implications of the Society for Psychotherapy
Research/Collaborative Research Network. Additional authors, who are
psychologists from the US and Norway, contribute some chapters.
RC480 2012-007454 978-0-415-53199-3
Nothing good is allowed to stand; an integrative view of
the negative therapeutic reaction.
Title main entry. Ed. by Léon Wurmser and Heidrun Jarass.
(Psychoanalytic inquiry; v.39)
Routledge, ©2013 204 p. $36.95 (pa)
Wurmser (New York Freudian Society) and Jarass (the German
Psychoanalytic Society’s Institute for Psychoanalysis) bring together inter-
national contributors in psychoanalysis, psychiatry, and psychology to
explore the causes and consequences of the negative therapeutic reaction
in psychoanalysis with difficult patients with severe neuroses. Numerous
case vignettes illustrate phenomena and approaches such as the negative
therapeutic reaction in the light of object relations theory, totalitarian
conscience and totalitarian repression, anxiety in the negative therapeutic
reaction, the psychoanalytic understanding of the negative therapeutic
reaction, and clinical sadomasochism.
RC481 2011-943777 978-0-85702-391-9
Person-centred therapy and CBT; siblings not rivals.
Casemore, Roger and Jeremy Tudway.
Sage Publications, ©2012 179 p. $100.00
In the format of a dialogue, Casemore (lifelong learning, U. of Warwick,
UK) and Tudway (clinical psychology, U. of Coventry/U. of Warwick, UK)
compare and contrast the differences and similarities in the under-
pinning philosophies, theories, and practices of cognitive behavioral
therapy (CBT) and the person-centered approach (PCA). They debunk
stereotypes of these models (e.g., of CBT therapists as always males,
while PCA ones are women who hug a lot); delineate the main areas of
dissonance and complementarity; and differentiate between therapy and
therapeutic support in both approaches. Chapters include casework
examples of each author’s approach to counseling, insights gleaned from
working together, other practitioners’ reflections, and recommended
reading.
RC483 2012-034985 978-1-58562-435-5
Clinical manual of child and adolescent
psychopharmacology, 2d ed.
Title main entry. Ed. by Molly McVoy and Robert L. Findling.
American Psychiatric Pub., ©2013 458 p. $79.00 (pa)
McVoy and Findling (child and adolescent psychiatry, Case Western
Reserve U.) outline the medical treatment of various psychiatric disorders
seen in children and adolescents, for psychiatrists, family physicians,
pediatricians, nurses, and students. Written by psychiatrists from the US
and Turkey, who comment on the clinical implications of the scientific
literature, the nine chapters cover developmental aspects of pediatric
psychopharmacology, and the diagnosis, treatment, choice of medication,
epidemiology, differential diagnosis, course and outcome, rationale and
justification for psychopharmacological treatment, safety issues, and
other aspects of attention-deficit/hyperactivity disorder, disruptive
behavior disorders and aggression, anxiety disorders, major depressive
–257–
disorder, bipolar disorders, autism and other pervasive developmental
disorders, tic disorders, and early schizophrenia and psychotic illnesses.
Revised and updated, this edition integrates recent findings from the
scientific literature and omits the chapter on disorders primarily seen in
general medical settings. It adds new authors and emphasizes what has
been learned since the last edition.
RC488 2012-005706 978-0-415-80730-2
Couples in collusion; short-term, assessment-based
strategies for helping couples disarm their defenses.
Bagarozzi, Dennis A. (Family therapy and counseling series)
Routledge, ©2013 180 p. $39.95 (pa)
Bagarozzi, a psychologist, family therapist, and supervisor, outlines
guidelines therapists can use for identifying, understanding, and dealing
with unspoken agreements and defensive systems that couples build up
to validate and protect themselves, bolster self-esteem, and maintain equi-
librium. He offers strategies for helping couples free themselves from
these confines, along with case examples. He explains how the presenting
problems for which couples seek treatment can serve as a collusive
defense; marital structure, interactive dynamics, and the self; various
assessments; the defense systems of acting out and monitoring and
restraining and their treatment; complementary defensive systems; and
primitive defense mechanisms in borderline and narcissistic disorders.
RC488 2012-007313 978-0-415-80663-3
Family therapy review; contrasting contemporary models.
Title main entry. Ed. by Anne Rambo et al.
Routledge, ©2013 277 p. $44.95 (pa)
Writing for beginning and experienced therapists, Rambo (family
therapy, Nova Southeastern U.) et al. assemble 66 chapters that use one
hypothetical case to demonstrate the applications of various family
therapy models, namely psychoanalytic/experiential, intergenerational,
structural and strategic, brief therapy, narrative, collaborative, inte-
grative, psychoeducational, and couples therapy models. Therapists who
practice in the US, Australia, Mexico, and Canada apply their model to
the same case to show what it would look like in practice, and each
section includes an introduction to the history of specific groups of
models and comments comparing and contrasting groups to others, as
well as an update on current use. They include introductory chapters on
family therapy and its underlying theoretical concepts, common skills,
requirements for practice, and issues like diversity, evidence and efficacy,
and faith and spirituality, and end with overviews of recent applications
to alternative settings and unconventional populations, such as military
families, in schools, equine-assisted approaches, international family
therapy, medical family therapy, and collaborative family law.
RC489 2011-042668 978-0-393-70669-7
Body psychotherapy; history, concepts, and methods.
Heller, Michael C. Trans. by Marcel A. Duclos. (A Norton professional
book)
W.W. Norton, ©2012 842 p. $68.95
In this English translation of the French edition (Psychotherapies cor-
porelles), a psychologist affiliated with the European Association of Body
Psychotherapists introduces the field. Following a foreword by a fellow
therapist who explains why he resists the reduction of psychological
issues to neuroscience, Heller introduces basic concepts, issues relevant
to practice in individual adult psychotherapy, schools, and methods that
explicitly include body dynamics as a way of thinking about psycho-
logical dynamics. Grouping models as a “system of the dimensions of the
organism,” he describes diverse influences including Eastern practices,
Spinoza’s systemics, Reich’s organismic approach, and Fenichel’s psy-
chosomatics. The text includes a new chapter on gymnastics and psy-
chotherapy, glossary, and reference postures used by body
psychotherapists.
RC489 978-1-4462-0837-3
Gestalt counseling in a nutshell.
Houston, Gaie.
Sage Publications, ©2013 110 p. $100.00
Houston, who teaches and practices gestalt therapy and organizational
behavior in London, briefly explains gestalt therapy theory and practice
to practitioners. She describes human nature and gestalt, the work of
Fritz Perls, the aspect of choice, and developmental theory and gestalt;
the theory of gestalt counseling; assessment; the method of dialogue; the
role and types of experiments used; and the integration of different the-
ories and methods such as neuroscience, developmental theory,
attachment theory, and group therapy.
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
RC489 2012-025518 978-1-60994-536-7
So far from home; lost and found in our brave new
world.
Wheatley, Margaret J.
Berrett-Koehler Publishers, ©2012 183 p. $17.95 (pa)
Wheatley, author of Leadership and the New Science, offers guidance for
“warriors” wishing to improve the world without feeling lost. Drawing
on concepts from Buddhism and chaos theory, Wheatley presents the
“new science”—counter to reductionist science—as informed by emergent
thinking, i.e., a process whereby interactions create something new that
cannot be changed. Such thinking entails being open to change but
accepting the present technology-distracted world as the starting point.
RC489 2012-026970 978-1-932529-72-2
Transcending dementia through the TTAP method; a new
psychology of art, brain, and cognition.
Madori, Linda Levine.
Health Professions Press, ©2012 243 p. $42.95 (pa)
Madori (therapeutic recreation and creative arts therapies, St. Thomas
Aquinas College) shows activity directors, therapists, social workers,
nurses, nursing assistants, and family members how to use the thera-
peutic thematic arts programming (TTAP) method with patients with
Alzheimer’s and other dementias to improve cognitive and psychosocial
functioning. The method combines the principles of therapeutic recre-
ation and creative arts therapies into a person-centered approach and
uses different forms of creative expression to build on theme-based activ-
ities that can be used to improve remaining strengths and abilities, as
well as provide emotional and psychological benefits. She reviews
Alzheimer’s disease and its symptoms and stages, then describes the
steps of the method; common communication problems associated with
Alzheimer’s and how the method addresses them; research on brain
physiology and how it processes memory, how to stimulate various
regions, and how depression, emotions, and stress can affect memory
and cognitive functioning; and how the method relates to research on
learning and intelligence, specifically Benjamin Bloom’s six levels of
learning and Howard Gardner’s seven learning styles, and how it stimu-
lates different types of learners. She discusses the role of emotions, imag-
ination, and creativity in stimulating the brain and how the method
integrates them in therapy; theories that stress the importance of activ-
ities throughout the life span; the theoretical framework of therapeutic
recreation; other aging and human development theories that the method
integrates; and the need for more research on the effectiveness of thera-
peutic art and recreation on Alzheimer’s.
RC523 2012-033306 978-0-7573-1665-4
A dignified life, revised and expanded; the best friends
approach to Alzheimer’s care; a guide for care partners.
Bell, Virginia and David Troxel.
Health Communications, Inc., ©2012 317 p. $16.95 (pa)
A “best friend” for a person with Alzheimer’s can be a hired caregiver,
a family member or even a good friend. This guide offers tips for
becoming a true care partner, from making a record of the person’s
memories to making sure they are still connected to the things that truly
matter to them. And to prevent burnout of the friend, a whole chapter is
devoted to self-care. Most chapters end with “Best Friends Pointers”
which summarize the tips presented throughout. To reduce the stigma
that often comes with Alzheimer’s, the book closes with 16 pages of short
biographies with the full names of patients mentioned throughout the
book. This revised edition not only updates the 2002 information on
online and other resources, but expands upon the need for dementia
patients to engage in lively activity and offers further tips on managing
challenging behavior. Bell founded the Best Friends Adult Day Center,
and Troxel currently works as a consultant on dementia care.
RC523 2012-030249 978-1-61035-135-5
Dr. Ruth’s guide for the Alzheimer’s caregiver; how to
care for your loved one without getting overwhelmed and
without doing it all yourself.
Westheimer, Ruth K. and Pierre A. Lehu.
Quill Driver Books, ©2012 188 p. $16.95 (pa)
Sex therapist Westheimer and writer Lehu detail coping strategies for
caregivers of individuals with Alzheimer’s disease. Westheimer draws on
the advice she has given friends in this situation, as well as her training
and experience in behavioral therapy, to describe how to deal with stress
and feelings like guilt and anger; accept help from others; have a life;
cope with taking care of a spouse, parent, or relative; work with
professional caregivers; and help children and grandchildren cope. The
second section addresses treatment and stages of the disease; assisting
the person with Alzheimer’s by understanding the role of the
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
environment, communication, behavioral issues, agitation, personal
hygiene, and other aspects; finding support; considering facilities; and
legal and financial issues. Web resources are listed,
RC523 2012-021198 978-1-936303-46-5
A look inside Alzheimer’s.
Allen, Marjorie N. et al.
Demos Health, ©2013 138 p. $16.95 (pa)
Allen, an author whose husband had Alzheimer’s, Dublin, a nurse who
has Alzheimer’s, and Kimmerly, who also has Alzheimer’s and worked
in traumatic brain injury rehabilitation and adult education, give
patients, their caregivers, and their doctors an inside look at Alzheimer’s
disease. Incorporating their own stories and those of others throughout,
they explain the disease and how the medical community understands
it; their experiences with it, including early signs; how their diagnosis
affected interactions with family and friends and coming to terms with
life changes; how they planned for a new lifestyle; ways to develop a
routine that incorporates the disease into daily life; the role of caregivers;
the later stages of the disease process; getting help using support groups,
organizations, and trials and studies; and the latest research.
RC533 2012-024802 978-1-60918-227-4
Motivational interviewing; helping people change, 3d ed.
Miller, William R. and Stephen Rollnick. (Applications of motivational
interviewing)
Guilford Pr., ©2013 482 p. $60.00
Motivational Interviewing is a structured method of conversation
developed thirty years ago by mental health professionals to get people
to voluntarily enter drug treatment. This book is the newly revised third
edition of a standard handbook on the method. MI has found broad
application in areas from social work to prisons to coaching. Its premise
is that the interviewer is helping the interviewee find and produce a
useful behavior voluntarily. When performed well, MI resembles Active
Listening for “type A” personalities; it can help people who want to make
a particular change carry it out in practice. When performed badly, the
interviewer chooses the “right” behavior, and psychological manipulation
by an authority figure is defined as care and help. The authors of this
book admit honestly that earlier editions encouraged the habit of using
MI techniques to get people to do whatever the interviewer wanted; they
provide a section in this edition on the spirit of MI, designed as a cor-
rective. Here, they offer instead the analogy that the interviewer is the
interviewee’s hired guide to a foreign country. This edition is divided into
seven parts. The first defines the spirit and method of MI. The second
describes how to engage the client and create a trusting relationship. The
third describes how to focus the client on a specific goal. The fourth
explains evoking preparation for change. The fifth describes making a
change plan with the client. The sixth discusses using MI in everyday
practice, and the last discusses how MI has been and can be evaluated
for effectiveness. There are two appendices: a glossary of MI terminology,
and a bibliography of books and articles on MI.
RC533 2012-009775 978-0-470-71125-5
Obsessive-compulsive disorder; current science and
clinical practice.
Title main entry. Ed. by Joseph Zohar.
Wiley-Blackwell, ©2012 339 p. $100.00
Zohar (psychiatry, Tel Aviv U., Israel) assembles 13 chapters that detail
various aspects of new practice and research on obsessive-compulsive dis-
order (OCD), including what is known about the genetics of the disorder;
evidence from neuroimaging; assessment; neurocognitive endopheno-
types; current treatment approaches, including pharmacotherapy, cog-
nitive behavioral therapy, electroconvulsive therapy, transcranial
magnetic stimulation, and deep brain stimulation; treatment resistance;
subtypes and spectrum issues; pediatric populations; methodological
issues for clinical trials; and venturing beyond the conventional sero-
tonin hypothesis. Contributors are psychiatrists, psychologists, geneticists,
and pharmacologists from Europe, North America, Israel, and South
Africa.
RC537 2012-014817 978-1-4443-3058-8
Depression in neurologic disorders; diagnosis and
management.
Title main entry. Ed. by Andres M. Kanner.
Wiley-Blackwell, ©2012 212 p. $89.95
In this valuable contribution to bridging the communication gap between
neurologists and psychiatrists in regard to the relevance of depression
often associated with neurological disorders, Kanner (neurological
sciences and psychiatry, Rush Medical College at Rush U., Chicago,
Illinois) contends that neurologists should care about depression because
–258–
it increases the risk and poor prognosis for neurologic disorders.
Contributors discuss models, assessment, and findings in understanding,
diagnosing, and managing neurobiological aspects of depressive
disorders in adult and pediatric patients with migraine, epilepsy,
suicidality, movement disorders, multiple sclerosis, Alzheimer’s disease,
stroke, and traumatic brain injury. Chapters include clinical pearls of
wisdom.
RC537 978-0-89042-460-5
Major depressive disorder; maintenance of certification
workbook.
Title main entry. Ed. by Deborah J. Hales et al. (Focus; journal of
lifelong learning in psychiatry)
American Psychiatric Pub., ©2013 177 p. $72.00 (pa)
Although participation in the Maintenance of Certification (MOC)
program is voluntary, it is increasingly being required by hospitals,
practice groups and third-party payers. This workbook takes the active
psychiatrist through the process of approval for parts 2 and 4 of the
American Board of Psychiatry and Neurology (ABPN) requirements for
MOC. It comes with three unique purchaser numbers to enroll in online
courses and claim Category 1 credits.
RC550 2011-456139 978-1-84725-241-8
Broken men; shell shock, treatment and recovery in
Britain 1914-1930.
Reid, Fiona.
Continuum Publishing Group, ©2010 214 p. $110.00
This study of ‘shell-shocked’ veterans of WWI delves into the history of
the recognition of the condition now known as post-traumatic stress dis-
order (PTSD). The study pays special attention to the voices of doctors,
nurses, and medical orderlies who cared for veterans, and also examines
the perspectives of politicians, civil servants, and charity workers respon-
sible for veterans’ welfare. The book draws on material from the Ex-
Services’ Welfare Society, established in 1919 and still the only British
charity specifically dedicated to the care of psychologically wounded vet-
erans. Their records give insight on how veterans recreated their lives
after shell shock and mental collapse. The study includes an extensive
bibliography of contemporary military and medical journals, articles and
books; contemporary newspapers and journals; websites; newspaper and
radio sources; and archives and collections.
RC550 2012-022804 978-1-4625-0540-1
Couple-based interventions for military and veteran
families; a practitioner’s guide.
Title main entry. Ed. by Douglas K. Snyder and Candice M. Monson.
Guilford Pr., ©2012 345 p. $40.00
Two million U.S. service members have been deployed in Iraq and
Afghanistan since 2001. In this timely clinical guide,
psychologists/clinical trainers Snyder (Texas A&M U.) and Monson
(Ryerson U., Toronto) introduce research on the consequences of the
stressors involved in such service for military families. Contributors
discuss the changing nature of military service and family life, offer sug-
gestions on what to say to family members and guidelines for assessment
and intervention. Includes case illustrations, resources, handouts, and
information on the organizational structure of the U.S. military and
Department of Veterans Affairs.
RC552 2012-011684 978-1-4129-7879-8
Encyclopedia of trauma; an interdisciplinary guide.
Title main entry. Ed. by Charles R. Figley.
Sage Publications, ©2012 873 p. $375.00
Intended for students and professionals in social work, counseling, psy-
chology, psychiatry, law, criminal justice, behavioral health, and disaster
mental health, this comprehensive reference contains 280 accessible
entries reflecting the recent shift in the field away from an emphasis on
psychopathology and toward resilience and growth. The in-depth entries
treat emerging areas such as neurologically based interventions for
memory management, identifying biomarkers of stress injuries and
health disorders, and underserved populations. Other themes are the
behavioral and neurobiological response to trauma, the role of the arts
in trauma treatment, and professional standards. Of special note are dis-
cussions on the role of religion and spirituality in healing from trauma.
Entries are written to be accessible to all, and each one contains a list of
further readings online and in print. Navigational aids include an alpha-
betical list of entries and a list of articles grouped by 21 categories. Figley
teaches at Tulane University.
–259–
RC552 2012-027422 978-1-4625-0630-9
Night eating syndrome; research, assessment, and
treatment.
Title main entry. Ed. by Jennifer D. Lundgren et al.
Guilford Pr., ©2012 299 p. $45.00
This book looks at the research, assessment, and treatment of Night
Eating Syndrome, which was declared a diagnosis by obesity researchers
in 1955. One of the editors of the present book was one of the clinicians
who first described NES. Not much attention has been given to the diag-
nosis until recently, so the evaluation of research here is limited by small
sample sizes and limited samples, mostly of obese females, though the
same patterns exist in men and non-obese people. However, the book
provides a full overview of existing studies and suggestions for further
research. It also considers whether NES may share a clinical picture with
Sleep-Related Eating Disorder, a diagnosis separately defined by
researchers in the sleep field. Since NES is not defined as causing
problems beyond personal distress and possible weight gain, SRED is,
and current treatments differ, this question is significant. Most contrib-
utors find a link between NES and stress factors. The book is divided into
five sections: introduction and history, biology, relationship to other
clinical syndromes, assessment, and treatment.
RC553 2012-943710 978-1-934575-91-8
Social behavior and self-management; 5-point scales for
adolescents and adults.
Buron, Kari Dunn et al.
Autism Asperger Publishing Co., ©2012 71 p. $19.95 (pa)
Buron, who taught students on the autism spectrum and developed an
autism spectrum disorders certificate program for educators at Hamline
U., et al. contend that individuals with autism spectrum disorders (ASD)
understand social information better when it is explained using visual
systems and show how the 5-point scale can help explain social and emo-
tional concepts to these individuals. They outline the use of the scale by
those advocating for, living with, or working with adults with ASD. They
offer examples of scales used for 15 different social situations, such as
emotional regulation, relaxation, stalking behavior, friendships, dating,
roommates, workplace issues, and handling obsessive behavior, and
include discussion of issues that can arise and ideas and words to use
when explaining issues to people with ASD. No index is included.
RC553 978-1-4129-8246-7
Understanding children with autism spectrum disorders;
educators partnering with families.
Haney, Michelle R.
Sage Publications, ©2013 397 p. $45.00 (pa)
Haney (psychology, Berry College) introduces teachers, undergraduate
students in psychology or preprofessional programs, graduate education
students, and other professionals to the research and theory in the field
of autism spectrum disorders (ASD) within the context of understanding
the sociocultural dimensions of individuals with ASD and their families.
She details the complexity and diversity of children with ASD, interven-
tions and how to choose them, how to partner with parents to provide
educational opportunities, and the personal and professional growth that
is likely to take place. She emphasizes diagnosis, intervention, and
support issues, and explains the historical evolution of understanding
autism, the impact on the family, diagnostic systems, biological issues
and etiology, the sociocultural characteristics of families and collabo-
rating with them, data collection and assessments that contribute to
accurate diagnosis and educational planning, issues in early intervention
and the shared decision-making process in planning, and research,
theory, and application of the development of behavior, language, inde-
pendent living, and social skills necessary at home, school, and within
the community, including applied behavior analysis, environmental sup-
ports (a chapter contributed by another psychologist), social communi-
cation, social development, and transitioning to adulthood.
RC554 2012-005350 978-1-4338-1166-1
Personality disorders and the five-factor model of
personality, 3d ed.
Title main entry. Ed. by Thomas A. Widiger and Paul T. Costa Jr.
American Psychological Assn., ©2013 468 p. $89.95
Widiger (psychology, U. of Kentucky, Lexington) and Costa (medical psy-
chology, Duke U., and psychiatry and behavioral sciences and mental
health, Johns Hopkins U.) assemble 26 chapters by specialists in psy-
chology, psychiatry, counseling, addiction, and mental health from North
America and Europe who explain the five-factor model of personality,
noting the expected shift in the fifth edition of the Diagnostic and
Statistical Manual of Mental Disorders toward this conceptual position.
They outline the five domains of the model and examine how person-
ality disorders represent maladaptive variants of the traits, demonstrate
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
the application and utility of the model to disorders, illustrate its power
to capture the major features of disorders through clinical case studies,
and provide possible reconceptualizations of disorders. They explain the
conceptual and empirical background on the model, including its history
and universality, construct validation, childhood antecedents of person-
ality disorder, and existing research; specific patient populations with
borderline personality disorder, psychopathy, narcissism, schizotypal
personality disorder, dependent personality disorder, depressive person-
ality disorder, alexithymia, and intellectual disabilities; assessment (a
new section); and illustrations of clinical applications, such as to martial
and family counseling and dialectical behavior therapy. This edition adds
new chapters to reflect new research and explores topics in greater depth.
It provides empirical support for descriptions of disorders and the use of
the model in treatment planning.
RC557 2012-012588 978-0-415-63494-6
The cultural context of sexual pleasure and problems;
psychotherapy with diverse clients.
Title main entry. Ed. by Kathryn S.K. Hall and Cynthia A. Graham.
Routledge, ©2013 402 p. $49.95 (pa)
Sex is universal but the appropriate expression of sexuality varies by
culture. Clinical psychologists Hall (private practice, Princeton, NJ) and
Graham (U. of Southampton, UK; Kinsey Institute for Research in Sex,
Gender, and Reproduction and Rural Center for AIDS/STD Prevention,
Indiana) introduce chapters by international contributors who examine
the ways in which culture/ethnicity define what is normal and prob-
lematic sexuality and their clinical implications. Subjects treated include
factors influencing negative sexual stereotypes about African Americans,
HIV prevention among Latinas, traditional Persian medicine for sexual
problems, and Russia’s changing sexual culture. Includes case material.
RC563 2012-020279 978-1-58765-959-1
Addictions and substance abuse; 2v. (online access
included)
Title main entry. Ed. by Robin Kamienny Montvilo. (Salem health)
Salem Press, ©2013 760 p. $137.50
This series offers accessible, well-written, carefully edited, and authori-
tative entries that cover the myriad health and social issues of the topic.
The present 2-volume reference presents 400 entries on drugs, alcohol,
other substances; addictive behaviors and circumstances; and groups and
agencies devoted to eliminating drug trade and addiction. A sampling of
the topics includes separate entries on pregnancy and alcohol, drug use,
and smoking; entries presenting an overview and in-depth discussion of
prescription drug addiction; children and behavioral addictions;
hoarding; and kleptomania. Each entry is clearly presented, with an
initial definition of the term, short discussion of its causes, and longer
sections on risk factors, age-related risk factors, symptoms, screening and
diagnosis, treatment and therapy, among other topics. Some entries
include inset boxes with case studies and each entry is followed with an
annotated guide to further reading, a list of websites, and cross-refer-
ences to other entries. Access to an accompanying website is included.
RC564 2010-933371 978-0-8400-3390-1
Concepts of chemical dependency, 8th ed.
Doweiko, Harold E.
Brooks/Cole Publishing, ©2012 624 p. $152.95 (pa)
Written for students, this textbook examines substance use disorders and
the effects, abuse, pharmacology, history and medical uses, complica-
tions, and other aspects of alcohol, barbiturates, benzodiazepines, central
nervous system stimulants, cocaine, marijuana, opioids, hallucinogens,
inhalants and aerosols, steroids, over-the-counter analgesics, and tobacco.
Other chapters address the science of pharmacology; chemicals and the
neonate; gender issues; issues for the homeless, the elderly, gays and les-
bians, the disabled, ethnic minorities, children and adolescents, and fam-
ilies; codependency and enabling; substance use disorders and mental
illness; the medical and psychosocial models of substance use disorders;
assessment; intervention, including pharmacological interventions;
treatment; relapse and other problems; support groups; infectious
disease; the relationship between drugs and crime; and the debate over
legalization. This edition adds new research and a new chapter on sub-
stance use issues in the college student population.
RC565 978-0-12-398518-7
Practical skills and clinical management of alcoholism
and drug addiction.
Obembe, Samuel B. (Elsevier insights)
Elsevier, ©2012 104 p. $64.95
For professionals, Obembe, an alcohol and drug counselor, summarizes
the causes and clinical management of alcoholism and drug addiction
and practical skills and other resources. He covers addiction and its
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
etiology; common psychoactive drugs and their effects (from alcohol to
amphetamines to opioids); the management of addiction, including
assessment, motivational interviewing, and the classification format of
pathologies; theories of treatment (psychotherapy, support groups, and
special focus programs); the impact and treatment of addiction, with
discussion of family, culture, the socio-cultural influence of alcohol,
women, older adults, mental illness, sexual minorities, diseases, and
other aspects; medication therapy; and crisis intervention. There is no
index.
RC569 2012-024417 978-0-7573-1644-9
The ACoA trauma syndrome; the impact of childhood
pain on adult relationships.
Dayton, Tian.
Health Communications, Inc., ©2012 304 p. $16.95 (pa)
Dayton, a psychologist, trainer in psychodrama, creative arts therapist,
and teacher, offers a guide for adult children of alcoholics (AcoAs) to
understanding the cumulative trauma that addiction or dysfunction can
create in their lives, to the extent in which suppressed pain from
childhood reemerges and is experienced and lived out in adulthood. She
addresses the AcoA trauma syndrome and how it is a post-traumatic
stress syndrome, its effects, and how to manage them. She explains the
family system that contains addiction, how the mind and body become
affected by this dysfunctional relationship, the narcissistic parent, cases
of adult children who have used self-medication to cope, case studies of
attitude and lifestyle changes that can build resilience and strength, and
ways to break the intergenerational cycle of pain.
RC569 2012-024203 978-0-393-70783-0
Borderline personality disorder and the conversational
model; a clinician’s manual.
Title main entry. Ed. by Russell Meares et al. (The Norton series on
interpersonal neurobiology)
W.W. Norton, ©2012 313 p. $29.95 (pa)
This is Mear’s (psychiatry, Sydney U., AU) companion book to A
Dissociation Model of Borderline Personality Disorder and focuses on the
primary disturbances of BPD; providing a manual for health profes-
sionals interested in using the Conversation Model (CM) to treat BPD.
Chapters cover the principles of (CM), general issues associated in
working with patients with BPS, and detailed case material. Full of tech-
niques for building therapeutic relationships with patients using the
(CM), this compelling guide is essential reading for those in the psy-
chology and psychiatric fields.
RC569 2011-050072 978-0-393-70585-0
A dissociation model of borderline personality disorder.
Meares, Russell. (Norton series on interpersonal neurobiology)
W.W. Norton, ©2012 396 p. $44.95
Drawing on the early work of Pierre Janet, author Meares, (emeritus psy-
chiatry at Sydney U., Australia, sets out an original theory on dissociation
is the primary feature of borderline personality disorder (BPD).
Furthermore, he postulates that dissociative symptoms in BPD have a dis-
tinct, observable neural/neurological component. He describes a neural
network for the matrix of Self and demonstrates its utility with many
case vignettes and dialogs showing how BPD patients experience their
symptoms. Some topics explored include the paradox of fusion and dis-
connectedness, somatization, and paranoid ideas in delusion formation.
The author closes with hope for a type of talk therapy that fosters the
right-hemisphere function of creating coherence.
RC570 2011-277745 978-1-119-99381-0
Psychiatry of intellectual disability; a practical manual.
Title main entry. Ed. by Julie P. Gentile and Paulette M. Gillig.
Wiley-Blackwell, ©2012 376 p. $70.00
Gentile and Gillig (psychiatry, Wright State U.) present a framework for
the assessment and treatment of psychiatric disorders in individuals with
intellectual disability, for psychiatrists, nurse practitioners, prescribers,
residents, medical students, graduate students, psychotherapists, coun-
selors, social workers, and behavior support specialists. In 16 chapters,
contributors from the US address psychiatric and medical assessment;
neurologic conditions; traumatic brain injuries and co-occurring mental
illness; interviewing techniques; mood, anxiety, psychotic, and personality
disorders; aggression; psychotropic medications; psychotherapy; behav-
ioral assessment and interventions; legal issues; and syndromes of intel-
lectual disability.
–260–
RC627 2012-027544 978-3-318-02143-1
Manual on vitamin A deficiency disorders (VADD).
Title main entry. Ed. by Donald S. McLaren and Klaus Kraemer. (World
review of nutrition and dietetics; v.103)
S. Karger, AG, ©2012 192 p. $231.00
McLaren and Kraemer draw on various sources, including journal
articles, policy statements, reports, fact sheets, guidelines, reference
books, websites, and Sight and Life magazine to address vitamin A defi-
ciency disorders (VADD). They describe vitamin A in nature and health;
methods of analysis; food sources; assessment of vitamin A status;
xerophthalmia; mortality and morbidity, especially in relation to infec-
tions; other effects of VAD; interaction with other micronutrients; global
occurrence; epidemiology; retinoids and carotenoids in general medicine;
and deficiency control. In this edition, they include three new chapters
on the control of VADD (the focus of the manual), how essential and ver-
satile the vitamin A molecules are, and the bioavailability of carotenoids,
as well as the latest data on global occurrence from the World Health
Organization.
RC628 2012-007651 978-1-4051-8559-2
Weight management; a practitioner’s guide.
Pearson, Dympna and Clare Grace.
Wiley-Blackwell, ©2012 278 p. $79.99 (pa)
Pearson, a registered dietitian in the UK interested in lifestyle change
related to diabetes, coronary heart disease, and weight management, and
Grace, a registered dietitian in the UK with experience in the clinical
management of obesity and interest in weight management interventions,
offer a guide for current and future healthcare practitioners working in
acute and community settings to the weight management process, with
a focus on one-to-one lifestyle interventions for adults. They present back-
ground information on obesity, its risk factors, causes, implications,
health professionals’ attitudes, and the evidence for various treatment
options, including lifestyle, surgical, and drug interventions, then discuss
prevention, assessment, and the steps of intervention, including specific
tips, suggestions on how to adhere to best practices when time is limited,
the challenge of weight maintenance, how to evaluate treatment impact,
and myths and misconceptions.
RC646 2012-031280 978-1-936287-08-6
Lymph nodes.
Olteanu, Horatiu, Alexander M. Harrington and Steven H. Kroft. (Demos
surgical pathology guides)
Demos Medical Publishing, Inc., ©2013 245 p. $75.00 (pa)
Pathologists from the Medical College of Wisconsin in Milwaukee focus
on histopathological features of lymph node diseases, though also discuss
important ancillary studies used for diagnosis where appropriate. They
use low-power images throughout to evaluate the several anatomic and
functional compartments of lymph nodes separately. Their topics include
reactive lymphadenopathies, spindle cell neoplasms of lymph nodes,
mature B-cell neoplasms, immunodeficiency-associated
lymphoproliferative disorders, and acute myeloid leukemia and related
precursor neoplasms.
RC646 2012-025892 978-1-936287-63-5
Neoplastic hematopathology; an atlas and concise guide.
Dunphy, Cherie H.
Demos Medical Publishing, Inc., ©2013 292 p. $135.00
Dunphy (pathology and laboratory medicine, U. of North Carolina at
Chapel Hill) helps practicing pathologists, hematopathologists, oncolo-
gists, internists, and trainees understand the characteristic morphologic,
immunophenotypic, and cytogenic/molecular features of the hematolym-
phoid neoplasms listed in the current World Health Organization
Classification of hematolymphoid neoplasms and arrive at definitive
diagnoses. In 13 chapters, hematopathologists and pathologists from the
US discuss various hematolymphoid neoplasms, rather than focusing on
individual neoplasms in detail, and present summary tables and illus-
trations to show key pathologic and differential features. They include
information on definitions, morphologic features, special stains,
immunohistochemistry and flow cytometry techniques, differential diag-
nosis, diagnostic features, and special issues for normal findings; myelo-
proliferative neoplasms; neoplasms associated with eosinophilia and
abnormalities of PDGFRA, PDGFRB, or FGFR1; myelodysplastic syn-
drome/myeloproliferative neoplasms; acute myeloid leukemia and related
precursor neoplasms; precursor lymphoid neoplasms; mature B-cell neo-
plasms; mature T-cell and natural killer cell neoplasms; Hodgkin’s lym-
phoma; histiocytic and dendritic cell neoplasms; and
immunodeficiency-associated lymphoproliferative disorders.
–261–
RC660 2012-022778 978-0-470-65605-1
Diabetes education; art, science, and evidence.
Title main entry. Ed. by Trisha Dunning.
John Wiley & Sons, ©2013 241 p. $57.95 (pa)
Along with other patient education specialists, nurses, and diabetes spe-
cialists from Australia, the US, and Europe, Dunning (nursing, Deakin U.,
Australia) helps health care practitioners ensure that people living with
diabetes receive individualized support and information. They do not
focus on what diabetes is, medical care, or what people need to know.
Instead, they provide a brief outline of diabetes pathophysiology and
management, then 12 chapters that discuss patient experiences, teaching
and learning principles, issues to reflect on in diabetes education, the
characteristics of an effective teacher, language issues, the use of creative
arts, using life transitions as opportunities, peer education, how and
what educators should teach, medicine self-management, the use of
healthcare information technology, and leadership.
RC660 978-1-903378-78-6
Evidence-based management of diabetes.
Vora, Jiten and John Buse.
TFM Publishing Ltd., ©2012 506 p. $99.00
For all health care professionals involved in diabetes care, Vora
(endocrinology, Royal Liverpool U. Hospital, UK) and Buse
(endocrinology, U. of North Carolina at Chapel Hill) compile 26 chapters
on the latest evidence base. Endocrinologists and other medical spe-
cialists from Europe and North America apply the principles of evidence-
based medicine to various clinical questions, examining current evidence
and grading the level of evidence for each major point. They consider
where insulin resistance starts, the use of genetic studies in diabetes, pre-
vention in high-risk individuals, the glucocentric approach to care, evi-
dence-based structured education, the role of blood glucose monitoring,
treatment through weight loss, beta-cell preservation, early insulin initi-
ation, immune intervention, pancreas and islet transplantation, hypo-
glycemia, mental illness and diabetes, diabetes treatments and cancer,
screening for diabetic retinopathy, medical therapies for diabetic eye
disease, diabetic neuropathic pain, the diabetic foot, non-alcoholic fatty
liver disease, management of kidney risk, use of dual RAAS (renin-
angiotensin-aldosterone system) blockades in diabetic neuropathy,
glucose control and macrovascular disease/morbidity, hyperglycemia in
acute coronary syndromes, and screening for coronary artery disease. US
distribution by BookMasters.
RC662 978-0-12-397153-1
Bioactive food as dietary interventions for diabetes.
Title main entry. Ed. by Ronald Ross Watson and Victor R. Preedy.
(Bioactive foods in chronic disease states)
Academic Press, ©2013 633 p. $129.95
Watson (public health and medicine, U. of Arizona, Tucson) and Preedy
assemble an international group of researchers for 47 chapters that
examine the role of foods, herbs, and novel extracts in moderating the
pathology leading to diabetes and its risk factors for other chronic dis-
eases. Chapters provide overviews of topics such as the role of oxidative
stress in insulin resistance and the role of supplements in diabetes;
discuss how diabetes induces an immune dysfunction syndrome and
how supplements can help control it; review government regulations
affecting the role of supplement use and community participation in dia-
betes control; describe the role of foods and herbs in treatment by
indigenous people in Canada, India, and the Arab world; and address
modulators like vitamin D, essential fatty acids, chromium, magnesium,
calcium, amino acids, taurine, and lutein. Others address the comple-
mentary and alternative therapeutics of fenugreek, garlic, ginger, onions,
and mushrooms, and the benefits of vegetables, okra, pomegranates,
black plums, prickly pear cacti, honey, and Amla, as well as probiotics,
milk, and other fermented materials. Academic Press is an imprint of
Elsevier.
RC685 2012-018134 978-3-318-02168-4
Antiplatelet therapy in ACS and A-Fib.
Title main entry. Ed. by Victor L. Serebruany and Dan Atar. (Advances
in cardiology; v.47)
S. Karger, AG, ©2012 170 p. $167.00
Serebruany (drug research, Johns Hopkins U.) and Atar (cardiology, Oslo
U. Hospital, Norway) provide cardiologists, internists, and clinical phar-
macologists with 12 articles on developments in antiplatelet therapies for
a variety of conditions. Cardiologists, biophysicists, neurologists, and
others from Europe and North America examine the impact of
antiplatelet therapy in heart disease; the use of aspirin and ticagrelor,
clopidogrel, prasugrel, dipyridamole, and voapaxar and atopaxar in acute
coronary syndrome and atrial fibrillation, coronary artery disease, high-
risk acute coronary syndrome, and antithrombotic treatment; genetic
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
considerations; antiplatelet regimens administered during or following
coronary stent implantation; bleeding risk; antiplatelet therapy in stroke
prevention; and challenges in atrial fibrillation.
RC691 978-1-4377-1719-8
The practice of interventional radiology; with online cases
and videos. (online access included)
Valji, Karim.
Elsevier Saunders, ©2012 768 p. $199.00
Drawing on the second edition of his text Vascular and Interventional
Radiology (2006), Valji (radiology, U. of Washington) brings together radi-
ologists from the US for this concise textbook on interventional radiology
aimed at trainees in diagnostic and interventional radiology. He presents
all vascular and nonvascular image-guided interventional procedures,
along with two new chapters on neurointerventional procedures and
interventional oncology. The 24 chapters cover the pathology of vascular
diseases, the fundamentals of patient care, basic interventional tech-
niques, and techniques for each of the major vascular beds, followed by
nonvascular procedures organized by organ system. Emphasis is on
disease pathogenesis and natural history, relevant aspects of imaging
studies, specific techniques and their outcomes, and the merits of various
treatments. Each procedure includes evidence to support its use. Many
illustrations are included, many new or with added color. All line
drawings have been revised, and the chapter on lymphangiography has
been deleted. The full text, as well as videos of techniques and about 100
case studies, is accessible online.
RC804 978-1-4511-0959-7
Biopsy interpretation of the gastrointestinal tract mucosa;
v.2: Neoplastic, 2d ed. (online access included)
Montgomery, Elizabeth A. and Lysandra Voltaggio. (Biopsy interpre-
tation series)
Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, ©2012 328 p. $163.95
Montgomery (pathology, Johns Hopkins Medical Institutions) and
Voltaggio (pathology, George Washington U. Hospital) supply pathologists
with a reference to use when making diagnostic decisions based on
biopsy specimens of the gastrointestinal tract mucosa. They review
overall microscopic anatomy of the gastrointestinal tract in general, then
explain interpretation of mucosal biopsies from the esophagus, stomach,
small intestine, colon, and anus. The website contains all illustrations in
the book and an additional 1400 figures, as well as a searchable version
of the text and a test bank.
RC815 978-1-59756-485-4
Clinical management of swallowing disorders workbook,
3d ed.
Murry, Thomas.
Plural Publishing, ©2013 102 p. $45.00 (pa)
For students, Murry (speech pathology in otolaryngology, Weill Cornell
Medical College) presents a workbook meant to supplement the text
Clinical Management of Swallowing Disorders, Third Edition. It contains
true/false, multiple choice, and completion questions, along with study
topics related to each chapter of the text, from epidemiology, to treatment,
to patients with voice and swallowing disorders. Revised and expanded,
this edition includes a new chapter on pediatric feeding and swallowing.
RC840 2012002557 978-0-470-65617-4
Hepatology; diagnosis and clinical management.
Title main entry. Ed. by Jenny Heathcote
Wiley-Blackwell, ©2012 439 p. $84.95 (pa)
Researchers and practitioners at the University of Toronto offer a guide
to facilitate the recognition, diagnosis, and management of suspected
liver disease, which is often asymptomatic until management is very dif-
ficult. The goal is to make the material easily comprehensible to clini-
cians who have not been able to keep up with the latest research, as well
as to students and instructors. The topics include a natural history of the
cirrhotic patient, chronic portosystemic encephalopathy and its man-
agement, managing complications of liver transplantation, obesity and its
hepatic complications in adults and children, and an approach to meta-
bolic and storage diseases.
RC861 2012-023033 978-3-318-02174-5
Histopathology of chronic constipation, 2d ed.
Meier-Ruge, William and Elisabeth Bruder.
S. Karger, AG, ©2012 53 p. $93.00
Meier-Ruge and Bruder (Institute for Pathology, U. of Basel, Switzerland)
present a revised edition of Pathology of Chronic Constipation in Pediatric
and Adult Coloproctology (2005), which includes new diseases and
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
figures. Sections cover histopathological diagnosis; different colon dis-
eases with chronic constipation; a laboratory guide to histopathological
diagnosis of intestinal motility disorders; preparation of cryostat sections
from biopsies and colorectal specimens; and immunohistochemical tech-
niques of paraffin sections in the diagnosis of gut dysmotility. Discussion
includes characteristics of classical and ultrashort Hirschsprung’s
disease; total intestinal aganglionosis and hypoganglionosis; new diseases
like intestinal neuronal dysplasia, desmosis coli, leiomyopathy, architec-
tural malformation, and stretching lesions of muscularis propria; and
atrophic desmosis. The volume is intended for diagnostic pathologists, cli-
nicians, pediatric and abdominal surgeons, coloproctologists, and gas-
troenterologists.
RC862 2012-008417 978-0-7637-9392-0
Questions & answers about Crohn’s disease.
Farraye, Francis A.
Jones & Bartlett, ©2013 158 p. $19.95 (pa)
Farraye (gastroenterology, Boston U.) answers questions patients and
their families might have about Crohn’s disease and its diagnosis,
treatment, quality of life, and other aspects. He discusses various
inflammatory bowel diseases, different types of Crohn’s disease,
symptoms, effects on the gastrointestinal tract, and the difference
between irritable bowel syndrome and inflammatory bowel disease;
causes, prevention, epidemiology, genetics, and risk factors; diagnosis
and other diseases that can be confused with Crohn’s disease, such as
ulcerative colitis; associated conditions, such as achy joints, and skin, eye,
and liver manifestations; treatment options, including steroids, medica-
tions, immunomodulators, antibiotics, and vitamins; complementary and
alternative medications, probiotics, prebiotics, and diet; complications;
surgery; issues for pregnant, elderly, or young patients; the effects of
stress, dealing with work, disability, and depression; and future treat-
ments, clinical trials, and resources.
RC889 978-0-12-416045-3
Obesity; a ticking time bomb for reproductive health.
Title main entry. Ed. by Tahir Mahmood and Sararatnam
Arulkumaran. (Elsevier insights)
Elsevier, ©2013 658 p. $150.00
Mahmood, an obstetrician/gynecologist who lectures at the U. of St.
Andrews and U. of Dundee in the UK, and Arulkumaran (obstetrics and
gynecology, St. George’s U. of London, UK) assemble 46 chapters on the
impact of obesity on reproductive health, for students in obstetrics and
gynecology, reproductive medicine, general medicine, general surgery,
public health, and health care management, and specialists in genito-
urinary medicine, infertility, and other areas. Obstetricians and gynecol-
ogists, reproductive specialists, nutritionists, and others from Europe, the
US, Asia, Australia, and Israel discuss the obesity epidemic, social and
ethnic determinants, the genetic, molecular, and psychological bases, and
obesity in adolescence; reproductive aspects like contraception, sexual
health, polycystic ovary syndrome and infertility, recurrent miscarriage,
and assisted reproduction; and male reproduction and sexual dys-
function, impacts on semen quality, and bariatric surgery. They address
pregnancy, including developmental priming of risk of later disease, fetal
ultrasound, prolonged pregnancy, venous thromboembolism, pre-
eclampsia, and insulin resistance and placental dysfunction; gestational
diabetes and metabolic disorders; labor, induction, intrapartum care, the
role of the midwife, anesthetic issues, risk of stillbirth, placental
pathology and fetal malformations, and post-natal care; interventions like
anti-obesity drugs, surgery, a multimodal framework for reducing mor-
bidity and mortality, and standards of care; the long-term impact,
including diabetes and cardiovascular risk, malignancies, menstrual dis-
orders, hormone replacement therapy, incontinence and prolapse, and
laparoscopic surgery; and future research and health service planning,
with discussion of quality of life, eating behavior and lifestyle issues, and
maternity and infertility services. No index is provided.
RC935 2012-022792 978-1-119-97587-8
Sarcopenia.
Title main entry. Ed. by Alfonso J. Cruz-Jentoft and John Morley.
Wiley-Blackwell, ©2012 347 p. $120.00
For geriatricians, clinicians, and professionals working in nursing homes,
nutrition, and sports medicine, as well as graduate students researchers,
Cruz-Jentoft (geriatrics, U. Hospital Ramón y Cajal, Spain) and Morley
(geriatric medicine and endocrinology, Saint Louis U.) compile 21
chapters by European and US specialists in geriatrics, neurology, and
other medical fields who discuss sarcopenia and its definition, clinical
relevance, nosology, pathophysiology, clinical identification, and
treatment. They address the biological aspects of muscle and the central
nervous system and their relation to movement and function; the indi-
vidual from lifetime and syndromic approaches, particularly adverse
–262–
effects on health and function; the relationships between sarcopenia,
cachexia, frailty, and bones; the complexity measuring different param-
eters linked to muscle mass and function; nutrition, exercise, and drug
interventions; and prevention.
RC967 2012-024308 978-0-87912-312-3
Fundamentals of industrial hygiene, 6th ed.
Title main entry. Ed. by Barbara A. Plog and Patricia J. Quinlan.
National Safety Council Press, ©2012 1225 p. $242.85
This sixth edition acts as a guide for those studying industrial hygiene as
well as professionals in fields such as medicine, labor and industry,
public service, and manufacturing. It is intended mainly as a reference
book for those involved in planning and implementing programs for
minimizing occupational health hazards. The authors explore anatomy,
physiology, and pathology before delving into the recognition, evaluation,
and control of hazards. Occupational health and safety professions are
also examined, as well as government regulations. Appendices include a
list of additional resources, pertinent mathematics review, conversion of
units, and ACGIH TLVs and BEIs.
RC967 2012-012141 978-0-415-87932-3
Research methods in occupational health psychology;
measurement, design, and data analysis.
Title main entry. Ed. by Robert R. Sinclair et al.
Routledge, ©2013 440 p. $85.00
While focusing primarily on the core methodological issues that arise in
traditional occupational health psychology (OHP) research, this book also
provides the reader with exposure to the benefits of some of the method-
ologies used in more mainstream occupational health and safety
research. Recent innovations in methodology are translated into sets of
concrete recommendations. Part 1 contains brief chapters on the meas-
urement of areas of health such as musculoskeletal functioning, sleep,
and emotions, as well as interpersonal maltreatment in organizations,
depression and anxiety in occupational health psychology, and work
engagement. Part 2 contains longer reviews addressing research design
and statistical issues in OHP, with chapters on experimental design,
event-sampling methods, quantitative and qualitative approaches, use of
archival data, multilevel modeling, person-centered analysis, and longi-
tudinal research. Sinclair teaches industrial and organizational psy-
chology at Clemson University.
RC1220 2012-014029 978-0-547-77394-0
Concussions and our kids; America’s leading expert on
how to protect young athletes and keep sports safe.
Cantu, Robert C. and Mark Hyman.
Houghton Mifflin Harcourt, ©2012 181 p. $24.00
Cantu (neurosurgery, Boston U.), who advises the National Football
League’s Head, Neck, and Spine Committee, and Hyman, a sports jour-
nalist, explain how parents and coaches can protect children who play
sports from concussions. They describe what a concussion is and how to
recognize one; how to make collision sports like ice hockey, football, and
boxing safer for kids; concussions in non-collision sports like wrestling,
soccer, basketball, baseball, cheerleading, mixed martial arts, skate-
boarding, volleyball, and tennis; baseline testing; post-concussion syn-
drome and second impact syndrome; chronic traumatic encephalopathy;
myths about concussions; what parents should do; stories of athletes who
have returned to the sport after concussion; and reforms.
SURGERY
RD33 2012-014993 978-0-470-67070-5
Basics of blood management, 2d ed.
Seeber, Petra and Aryeh Shander.
Wiley-Blackwell, ©2013 350 p. $115.00
Seeber (Institute for Blood Management, Germany) and Shander (anes-
thesiology; Englewood Hospital and Medical Center, New Jersey, and
Mount Sinai Hospital, New York City) revise their 2007 guide to incor-
porate new findings from several different fields that make managing
blood into more of an evidence-based practice. They focus on managing
blood that is still inside the patient, rather than donated blood as many
understood the term. Specifically, they suggest how to avoid undue blood
loss, enhance the patient’s blood, and improve tolerance of anemia and
coagulopathy until the underlying conditions are successfully remedied.
There is a shift of emphasis is this edition from avoiding transfusion to
reducing morbidity and mortality, though both are still deemed
desirable.
–263–
RD49 2012-005849 978-0-470-65918-2
Manual of perioperative care; an essential guide.
Title main entry. Ed. by Kate Woodhead and Lesley K. Fudge.
Wiley-Blackwell, ©2012 325 p. $65.95 (pa)
Woodhead, a nurse who runs a healthcare consultancy business in the
UK specializing in the perioperative field, and Fudge, a nurse and con-
sultant in the UK, present a manual of principles of perioperative care
for nurses, surgeons, surgical trainees, and medical students. In 32
chapters, nurses, surgeons, and others from the UK cover preoperative
assessment, communication, and the perioperative environment;
infection prevention, including decontamination and sterilization and
wound healing and surgical site infection; patient safety and managing
risks, including fluid replacement and blood transfusion, moving and
handling patients, patient positioning, thermoregulation, care of spec-
imens and surgical instruments, swab and instrument count, managing
high risk equipment, medical imaging and radiation, death, and pain
management; neonatal, pediatric, adolescent, and bariatric surgery; care
of elderly and pregnant patients; and principles of laparoscopic and
endoscopic surgery.
RD81 2012-007478 978-0-470-65892-5
Clinical anaesthesia, 4th ed.
Gwinnutt, Carl and Matthew Gwinnutt. (Lecture notes)
Wiley-Blackwell, ©2012 184 p. $42.95 (pa)
As Carl Gwinnutt (honorary anesthesia, U. Manchester) settles into a slow
phase of his career, he has taken on his son Matthew Gwinnutt (trainee
anesthesia, Mersey Deanery, Liverpool) as a collaborator with fresh per-
spectives from recent training. Their textbook introduces medical stu-
dents to such aspects of the specialty as anesthetic equipment and
monitoring, drugs and fluids used, local and regional anesthesia, post-
anesthesia care, and the acutely ill adult patient on the ward. Answers
are provided for short-answer and true/false questions.
RD85 2012-012456 978-1-4214-0734-0
The epidural book; a woman’s guide to anesthesia for
childbirth. (reprint, 2008)
Siegenfeld, Richard.
Johns Hopkins U. Press, ©2012 133 p. $15.95 (pa)
In this reprint from 2008, Siegenfeld (anesthesiology, Hofstra U.) explains
epidurals, spinals, and general anesthesia used during labor and vaginal
delivery or C-section to pregnant women, to alleviate any fears. He
explains how thinking and practice about eliminating pain during labor
has changed over the years; how an epidural works; on who, where, and
when it is used; preparation; the procedure; common and uncommon
problems; side effects; rare complications; conditions affecting epidurals
and spinals; spinals and walking epidurals; after the delivery; alterna-
tives; and effects on the baby.
RD97 2012-018992 978-3-318-02164-6
Epidemiology of injury in adventure and extreme sports.
Title main entry. Ed. by Travis W. Heggie and Dennis J. Caine.
(Medicine and sport science; v.58)
S. Karger, AG, ©2012 177 p. $229.00
Heggie (sport management, Bowling Green State U.) and Caine (physical
education, exercise, and wellness, U. of North Dakota) compile 10 articles
on the frequency, distribution, and contributing factors to injuries in
adventure and extreme sports, for sports physicians, physical therapists,
recreation managers, researchers, injury prevention specialists, the
adventure and extreme sport industry, and participants. After describing
the epidemiological approach to the topic, specialists in orthopedics,
surgery, neurology, sports science, and population and public health in
Europe, Australia, and the US consider questions of who is affected by
injury, where and when it occurs, what the outcome is, what the risk
factors and inciting events are, and prevention strategies in moun-
taineering, rock and ice climbing, hang-gliding and paragliding, scuba
diving, surfing and watercraft riding, canoeing, kayaking, rafting,
bungee jumping, BASE jumping, skydiving, extreme hiking in volcanic
environments, skateboarding, and ATV and motorcross sports.
RD97 2012018884 978-0-7808-1265-9
Sports injuries information for teens; health tips about
acute, traumatic, and chronic injuries in adolescent
athletes..., 3d ed.
Title main entry. Ed. by Zachary Klimecki and Elizabeth Bellenir. (Teen
health series)
Omnigraphics, Inc., ©2012 401 p. $69.00
Covering the whole spectrum of sports injuries, the pieces here can be
roughly divided into two parts: those that give teens advice for avoiding
injuries and those that describe in general language the medical
treatment. This is joined by a closing directory of organizations and web-
sites to consult for further information.All of the chapters are either
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
straight reprints from periodicals or excerpts from government agencies
or nonprofit organizations. Thus the new edition presumably just relies
upon more recent sources of information.
RD521 2012-017311 978-3-8055-9972-6
Pearls and pitfalls in head and neck surgery; practical
tips to minimize complications, 2d ed.
Title main entry. Ed. by Claudio R. Cernea.
S. Karger, AG, ©2012 212 p. $115.00
Cernea (head and neck surgery, U. of São Paulo, Brazil) aids head and
neck surgeons, otolaryngologists, neurosurgeons, maxillofacial and
plastic surgeons, radiation and clinical oncologists, and general physi-
cians, as well as students and residents, in the management of head and
neck tumors by providing 101 brief chapters outlining pearls and pitfalls.
These are related to the thyroid and parathyroid glands; neck metastases;
oral/oropharyngeal, laryngeal, nasopharyngeal, salivary gland, skull
base, vascular, and parapharyngeal space tumors; infections; tra-
cheostomy; and reconstruction. This edition has been expanded to
include new topics such as video-assisted thyroidectomy, robotic surgery,
and management of the neck after organ preservation treatment, as well
as new chapters on intraoperative frozen section examination in thyroid
surgery, robotic thyroidectomy, the surgical management of
recurrent/persistent differentiated thyroid cancer, lymph node density,
the influence of human papillomavirus status on the management of
oropharyngeal tumors, salvage surgery after chemoradiotherapy for head
and neck squamous cell carcinoma, supratracheal subtotal laryngectomy,
hypopharyngeal cancers, robotic nasopharyngectomy, interventional sial-
endoscopy, the endonasal endoscopic approach for juvenile nasopha-
ryngeal angiofibroma, transnasal endoscopic approaches to the skull
base, and performing a supraclavicular fasciocutaneous flap for head
and neck reconstruction. Contributors are surgeons from around the
world.
RD525 2012-015056 978-3-318-02107-3
Cleft lip and palate; epidemiology, aetiology, and
treatment.
Title main entry. Ed. by Martyn T. Cobourne. (Frontiers of oral biology;
v.16)
S. Karger, AG, ©2012 159 p. $206.00
Cobourne (orthodontics and craniofacial development, King’s College
London Dental Institute, UK) presents an overview of the epidemiology,
etiology, and treatment of cleft lip and palate, for students, biologists, and
clinicians. In 13 chapters, dental specialists and specialists in genetics,
oral biochemistry, child health, biology, and maxillofacial surgery from
Europe and the US cover genetic and environmental factors, the devel-
opmental biology of early lip and palate development (using mouse
models), the main molecular signaling pathways involved in devel-
opment and their role in the etiology of oro-facial clefting, the assessment
of treatment outcomes, surgical anatomy, primary surgery, major sec-
ondary procedures, orthodontics, speech and language therapy, alveolar
bone grafting, and the use of molecular tools in prevention and
treatment.
RD540 2012-025167 978-1-57626-330-3
Advances in abdominal wall reconstruction. (DVD
included)
Title main entry. Ed. by Albert Losken and Jeffrey E. Janis.
Quality Medical Publishing, ©2012 425 p. $295.00
Losken (plastic surgery, Emory U.) and Janis (plastic surgery, U. of Texas
Southwestern Medical Center) bring together a group of surgeons from
the US, Canada, and Brazil who present 20 chapters for plastic, general,
and other surgeons, and students and residents, on abdominal wall
reconstruction. They combine principles and perspectives from various
surgical specialties to review the range of operative approaches. They
address the fundamentals, including abdominal wall anatomy, etiologic
factors, and the fundamentals of hernia repair, including wound care,
synthetic meshes, implant material selection, and tissue biologics; oper-
ative approaches and technical details, such as components separation
and laparoscopic approaches, outcomes, and a comparison of open vs.
laparoscopic hernia repair techniques; and complex reconstructions,
including the management of fistulae, postoperative bulge, recurrent
hernia, and other abdominal wall defects, ending with a chapter on com-
posite tissue allotransplantation. The DVD contains three operative
videos.
RD544 978-1-907816-20-8
Handbook of colorectal surgery, 3d ed.
Beck, David E.
JP Medical Publishers Ltd, ©2013 498 p. $80.00
This guide to fundamentals of colorectal surgery is written especially for
surgical trainees; it will also be useful for nurses and nursing students,
medical students, and allied health professionals. Section 1 covers basic
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
principles and skills, with material on anatomy, pathophysiology,
physical examination, diagnostic imaging, endoscopy, minimally invasive
surgery, and intestinal stomas. Section 2 covers preoperative preparation,
anesthetics, and postoperative management. The third section offers 13
chapters on specific conditions. Each chapter contains rounds questions
which highlight the teaching points of the chapter. The layout offers b&w
medical images, photos, surgical drawings, and anatomical drawings.
This third edition covers new concepts in patient care and new operative
techniques, such as laparoscopic surgery and fistula management. Beck
is affiliated with the Ochsner Clinic Foundation.
RD557 978-0-89203-856-5
Shoulder arthroplasty.
Title main entry. Ed. by Joaquin Sanchez-Sotelo. (Monograph series; 47)
Am. Acad./Orthopaedic Surgeons, ©2012 122 p. $75.00 (pa)
Orthopaedic surgeons from across the US describe shoulder arthroplasty
in light of recent developments such as modern anatomic prostheses
designs, interest in minimally invasive resurfacing arthroplasty, the intro-
duction and refinement of reverse shoulder arthroplasty, better under-
standing of the role of prosthetic replacement for treating fractures, and
improved revision techniques. Other topics are hemiarthroplasty and
total shoulder arthroplasty in osteoarthritis, inflammatory arthritis,
proximal humerus fractures, post traumatic osteonecrosis and proximal
humerus malunion, rotator cuff tear arthropathy, and complications.
Drawings, photographs, and radiographs help explain the concepts.
RD561 978-93-5025-870-5
Improving accuracy in knee arthroplasty.
Title main entry. Ed. by Emmanuel Thienpont.
Jaypee Bros., ©2012 375 p. $105.00
Thienpont (orthopedics, Saint Luc U. Hospital, Belgium) brings together
other orthopedic specialists and biomedical engineers from Europe, the
US, Australia, and the Middle East for 26 chapters on technology meant
to improve total knee arthroplasty for patients with knee arthritis. They
discuss alignment and malalignment, its assessment, and frontal,
sagittal, and rotational alignment; finding anatomical landmarks in the
normal and arthritic knee; biomechanics; the impact of the foot on
weight-bearing alignment; the intra-articular impact of extra-articular
alignment deformity; navigation in arthroplasty; Mimics software;
patient-specific instruments; MRI and CT-based cutting and pinning
guides; kinematically-aligned arthroplasty with MRI-based cutting guides;
individualized total knee arthroplasty; unicompartmental arthroplasty
with patient-specific guides and instruments; robotic knee arthroplasty;
patient-matched robotic uniconylar arthroplasty; patient-specific instru-
ments as a teaching tool; and soft tissue-based alignment. Many operative
photos, images, and other illustrations are incorporated.
RD563 2012-006861 978-0-7817-6580-0
McGlamry’s comprehensive textbook of foot and ankle
surgery, 4th ed.; 2v. (online access included)
Title main entry. Ed. by Joe T. Southerland et al.
Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, ©2012 1982 p. $439.95
E. Dalton McGlamry was responsible for the first edition (Comprehensive
Textbook of Foot Surgery) published in 1987; subsequent editions were in
1992 and 2001, and saw expansion of the title to include ankle surgery
and McGlamry’s name at the head. The fourth edition features a com-
plete reorganization for a more logical presentation, dozens of new
chapters and contributors, full color illustrations (for the first time), and
online access. The scope is comprehensive and includes detailed coverage
of both common and unusual surgeries illustrated with 3,000 images. In
all, 117 contributed chapters have been brought together and shaped by
editor Joe T. Southerland, who is affiliated with The Podiatry Institute,
Decatur, Georgia, as are four of the five other editors and many of the
contributors.
RD593 978-1-903378-79-3
The evidence for neurosurgery.
Title main entry. Ed. by Zoher Ghogawala et al.
TFM Publishing Ltd., ©2012 484 p. $150.00
For physicians-in-training, neurologists, neurological surgeons, radiation
oncologists, and medical doctors, Ghogawala (neurosurgery, Tufts U.) et
al. bring together 35 chapters by a group of neurosurgeons from the US,
Asia, Canada, and Israel. They examine controversial areas of neuro-
logical surgery by applying current evidence on the pathophysiology of
each disease and outcomes from surgical and non-surgical treatments.
They explain the levels of clinical evidence and types of study designs,
then common conditions and situations related to spinal neurosurgery,
as well as how to interpret the clinical evidence and the limitations of
randomized controlled trials. Subsequent sections address functional
neurosurgery, including epilepsy, mesial temporal sclerosis, movement
disorders, medical and psychiatric conditions, and chronic pain;
common questions related to tumors; pediatric neurosurgery, particularly
–264–
hydrocephalus, Chiari malformations, myelomeningocele, and medul-
loblastoma; vascular neurosurgery, including intracranial aneurysms,
arteriovenous malformations, intracranial and extracranial arterial
stenosis, vasospasm, and intraparenchymal/intraventricular hemorrhage;
and neurotrauma, including traumatic brain injury and spinal cord
injury. There is no index. US distribution by BookMasters.
RD593 978-93-5025-239-0
Textbook of contemporary neurosurgery; 2v.
Title main entry. Ed. by Vincent A. Thamburaj.
Jaypee Bros., ©2013 1759 p. $325.00
Thamburaj, a neurosurgeon in India, brings together a group of neuro-
surgeons, neurologists, and other specialists from Asia, Europe, the US,
and Zimbabwe for a two-volume neurosurgery textbook aimed at
trainees, neurosurgeons, and other practitioners. In 121 chapters, they
explain the history of the field, examination, genetics, ethics, evidence-
based medicine, cerebral homeostasis and perioperative care, neurodiag-
nostics, anesthesia and adjuncts, neuro-ophthalmology,
neurodevelopmental disorders, infections, neurotrauma, brain tumors
and tumor-like lesions, cerebrovascular disorders, spine and spinal cord
disorders, peripheral nerve disorders, and neurorehabilitation.
Information on pathology, clinical features, imaging, anatomy, man-
agement, epidemiology, prognosis, and other aspects is provided.
RD598 978-93-5025-275-8
Cardiology; an illustrated textbook; 2v. (DVD-ROM and
online access included)
Title main entry. Ed. by Kanu Chatterjee et al.
Jaypee Bros., ©2013 2145 p. $199.00
Chatterjee (medicine, U. of Iowa) et al. offer an illustrated text on cardi-
ology consisting of 120 chapters in two volumes, along with online access
to an image bank and a DVD of videos to accompany chapters on
transthoracic echocardiography, stress echocardiography, trans-
esophageal echocardiography, real time three-dimensional echocardiog-
raphy, and electrophysiology studies. For cardiologists, internists, and
others, specialists from the US, India, and Guatemala emphasize
advances in the understanding of coronary circulation, the molecular
mechanisms of myocyte function, and the assessment of regional and
global ventricular functions in physiologic and pathologic conditions,
and address advances in cardiovascular pharmacology, including the
advantages and disadvantages of diuretic therapy, vasodilators, neuro-
hormone modulators, positive inotropic agents, and antilipid, antithrom-
botic, and antiplatelet agents, and their clinical pharmacology in the
management of various cardiovascular disorders. They also discuss
advances in diagnostic techniques and their clinical applications; the role
of rest and stress; the function and dysfunction of ion channels and the
diagnosis and management of supraventricular and ventricular
arrhythmias; new therapeutic modalities for the management of chronic
coronary artery disease; the diagnosis and management of valvular heart
disease and heart failure; chemotherapy and radiation-induced cardio-
vascular disorders; progress in vascular biology, genetics, and pharma-
cogenetics; and issues related to costs, errors, and gender and geographic
differences in the incidence, diagnosis, and management of disorders.
They have added modified guidelines for the management of angina,
arrhythmias, heart failure, valvular heart diseases, and perioperative
cardiac evaluations.
RD727 2012-017395 978-0-8166-7955-3
Thirty rooms to hide in; insanity, addiction, and rock ‘n’
roll in the shadow of the Mayo Clinic.
Sullivan, Luke Longstreet.
U. of Minnesota Press, ©2012 305 p. $24.95
In this memoir for general readers, author Sullivan and his five brothers
support each other through their father’s rapid descent from a respected
surgeon at the Mayo Clinic to an abusive alcoholic on Skid Row. The boys
find love and laughter in spite of their circumstances, mainly because of
their mother’s efforts, and find strength through their identification with
rock music and popular culture. Written with a sense of dark humor, the
book includes many excerpts from the mother’s letters as well as diary
entries written by the sons, plus b&w family photos from personal col-
lections. Sullivan is now chair of the Advertising Department at the
Savannah College of Art and Design.
RD731 978-1-903378-59-5
Current orthopaedic practice; a concise guide for
postgraduate exams.
Agarwal, Sanjeev.
TFM Publishing Ltd., ©2012 464 p. $120.00
Agarwal (orthopedic surgery, U. Hospital of Wales, UK) provides a review
text for candidates preparing for the Fellowship of the Royal College of
–265–
Surgeons’ Intercollegiate Examination in Trauma and Orthopaedic
Surgery in the UK, as well as medical students, physiotherapists, and
surgeons in training. The text covers the main areas of clinical orthopedic
practice for various regions of the body, as well as arthroplasty, bone and
soft tissue tumors, disorders in children, infections, non-unions, surgical
approaches, sports medicine, and imaging. US distribution by
BookMasters.
RD781 2012-018968 978-1-4511-1596-3
Foot and ankle, 2d ed. (online access included)
Title main entry. Ed. by David B. Thordarson. (Orthopaedic surgery
essentials)
Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, ©2013 368 p. $125.00
Thordarson, an orthopedic surgeon, supplies orthopedics residents with
an introductory textbook on the anatomy, biomechanics, physical exami-
nation, orthotics, diagnosis, and treatment of foot and ankle conditions.
In 14 chapters, orthopedic surgeons from the US and Turkey present sur-
gical techniques, but focus on the essential information needed to
evaluate and diagnose a condition and begin treatment planning. These
include neuromuscular disorders; nerve entrapment syndromes; the dia-
betic foot; hellux valgus, hallix varus, and sesamoid disorders; lesser toe
deformities and bunionettes; tendon disorders; heal and subcalcaneal
pain; degenerative joint disease; acute ankle sprain, chronic ankle insta-
bility, and subtalar laxity; and trauma. This edition has been updated
with new procedures, including minimally invasive calcaneal fracture
fixation and subcutaneous plating pilon fractions; more on total ankle
arthroplasty to reflect recent advances and improved outcomes; and
information on minimally invasive techniques. Access to a searchable
version of the book and other resources is included.
OPHTHALMOLOGY, OTORHINOLARYNGOLOGY
RE48 2012-026424 978-3-318-02158-5
Surgical retina.
Title main entry. Ed. by Francesco Bandello and Maurizio Battaglia
Parodi. (ESASO course series; v.2)
S. Karger, AG, ©2012 177 p. $115.00 (pa)
Bandello and Parodi (ophthalmology, U. Vita-Salute, Scientific Institute
San Raffaele, Italy) provide ophthalmologists, optometrists, technicians,
and residents who have attended the European School of Advanced
Studies in Ophthalmology seminars on surgical retina with a review of
their content, as well as new ophthalmologists with a guide to the topic.
Contributed by ophthalmologists from Europe, the US, and Israel, the 19
chapters address the surgical and nonsurgical management of vitreo-
retinal disorders, including diabetic retinopathy; diabetic macular
edema, with discussion of the use of anti-vascular endothelial growth
factor drugs and diagnosis; proliferative diabetic retinopathy; the com-
plications and management of diabetic vitrectomy; retinal venous occlu-
sions; rhegmatogenous retinal detachment, including vitrectomy, scleral
buckling materials, and pneumatic retinopexy; the use of prophylaxis for
retinal detachment; retinal detachment due to giant tears or dialysis;
macular hole surgery; vitrectomy for epiretinal membranes; Irvine-Gass
syndrome; and endophthalmitis.
RE711 2012-011414 978-1-4511-4312-6
Atlas of oculoplastic and orbital surgery. (online access
included)
Dutton, Jonathan J. and Thomas G. Waldrop.
Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, ©2013 330 p. $249.00
For residents, general ophthalmologists, otolaryngologists, dermatologists,
and general plastic surgeons, Dutton (ophthalmology, U. of North
Carolina at Chapel Hill) and Waldrop, a medical illustrator, present 98
ophthalmic plastic and reconstructive operations commonly performed
by oculoplastic surgeons in the areas of eyelid, lacrimal system, and
orbital surgery, with step-by-step instructions; matching illustrations
(shown from the view of the operating surgeon); an overview of surgical
anatomy and pathologic etiology and techniques of preoperative evalu-
ation; and indications, postoperative care, and avoiding and managing
complications. The atlas is an updated version of a volume published in
1992 that is now out of print. It updates many procedures, eliminates out-
dated ones, and adds 12 new ones. A searchable text is accessible online.
RE871 978-3-8055-9937-5
Glaucoma surgery.
Title main entry. Ed. by Paolo Bettin and Peng Tee Khaw.
(Developments in ophthalmology; v.50)
S. Karger, AG, ©2012 188 p. $233.00
For glaucoma surgeons and specialists, residents, and general ophthal-
mologists, Bettin (ophthalmology, U. Scientific Institute San Raffaele,
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
Italy) and Khaw (ophthalmology, U. College London, UK) bring together
glaucoma surgeons from the US, Europe, Asia, and Israel. They detail
the indications, outcomes, and techniques of glaucoma surgery, in
addition to tips and pitfalls. The 14 articles discuss conventional
glaucoma procedures like trabeculectomy, deep sclerectomy, and
glaucoma drainage device surgery; postoperative management of filtering
procedures; the role of the ocular surface and the issue of modulation of
the scarring processes; new devices and techniques, such as the Ex-PRESS
mini-glaucoma device, laser-assisted techniques, and Schlemm’s canal
surgery; and surgical approaches to specific and challenging forms of
glaucoma, including angle-closure glaucoma, concomitant cataract and
glaucoma, pediatric glaucoma, and refractory glaucomas.
RE977 2012-035674 978-1-57808-740-2
Ocular surface; anatomy and physiology, disorders and
therapeutic care.
Title main entry. Ed. by Raul Martin Herranz and Rosa M. Corrales
Herran.
CRC Press, ©2013 358 p. $119.95
Herranz (optometry, U. of Valladolid, Spain) and Herran (ophthalmology,
Baylor College of Medicine) aid ophthalmologists, optometrists, biologists,
biochemists, and medical doctors in understanding ocular surface
anatomy and physiology, disorders, and their treatment. Contributed by
eye specialists from the US, Europe, South America, and Singapore, the
20 chapters address common disorders like dry eye, anterior and pos-
terior blepharitis, keratitis, ocular allergy, cicatricial conjunctivitis, and
ocular surface alterations related to glaucoma treatment, and topical, sys-
temic, and surgical treatment options, as well as the relationship of the
ocular surface to contact lens wear, indications for contact lenses, their
complications, and managing adverse effects.
RE994 2012-015794 978-1-4398-4800-5
Ocular drug delivery systems; barriers and application of
nanoparticulate systems.
Title main entry. Ed. by Deepak Thassu and Gerald J. Chader.
CRC Press, ©2013 447 p. $169.95
This collection of in-depth essays examines the use of nanoparticles in
ocular drug delivery systems, focusing on current state of the art tech-
nologies as well as emerging developments. Chapters also discuss the
variety of delivery systems, eye physiology, animal models used in safety
and efficacy evaluations, computer modeling, ocular barriers, specific
targeting of tissue and cell types, and gene-based medicine. Charts,
tables, figures, and photos are included, as well as a ten-page full-color
insert. Contributors include experts in opthamology, cell biology, phar-
maceutical sciences, bioengineering, and immunopathology.
RE994 978-1-57439-345-3
Ophthalmic drug facts, 24th ed.
Title main entry. Ed. by Jimmy D. Bartlett.
Wolters Kluwer Health, ©2012 496 p. $91.25 (pa)
Bartlett, a consultant and optometrist, compiles information on drugs for
ophthalmologists, optometrists, students, and pharmacists. Drugs are
organized by therapeutic categories, with emphasis on drug action and
product availability rather than the pathophysiology of diseases, and
include information on actions, indications, off-label uses, contraindica-
tions, warnings, precautions, interactions, adverse reactions, overdosage,
patient information, and administration and dosage. Also covered are
contact lens products, extemporaneous preparations, dosage forms and
routes of administration, miscellaneous products, systemic medications
for ocular conditions, systemic drugs affecting the eye, and orphan oph-
thalmic agents and investigational drugs, along with an ophthalmic
product manufacturer index. Each chapter includes general treatment
guidelines.
RF290 2012-011995 978-1-59756-427-4
Hearing; anatomy, physiology, and disorders of the
auditory system, 3d ed.
Møller, Aage.
Plural Publishing, ©2013 415 p. $99.95
For audiologists, otologists, neurologists, researchers, and psychologists
and psychiatrists who treat patients with tinnitus and other hyperactive
auditory disorders, Møller (cognition and neuroscience, U. of Texas at
Dallas) explains the anatomy and physiology of the middle ear, cochlea,
and auditory nervous system; the causes and treatments of several
hearing disorders; and the physiological basis for the involvement of the
auditory nervous system in disorders that were previously assumed to
only involve the ear. He addresses the role of the expression of neural
plasticity in creating symptoms and signs of disorders, electrical poten-
tials, what anatomical structures generate the different components of
such far field potentials as auditory brainstem responses and middle
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
latency response, and how these potentials are affected by different
pathologies. He discusses disorders of the ear and auditory nervous
system, including hearing impairment and those caused by hyperactivity
of the brain, especially tinnitus; the role of neural plasticity; cochlear and
brainstem implants and their physiological basis; prevention of hearing
loss; and practical and legal aspects of hearing conservation. This edition
takes an integrated approach to disorders, rather than dividing them into
peripheral and central disorders, and emphasizes the roles of the
nervous system in the normal function of hearing, especially involvement
in age-related hearing. Chapters have been revised and reorganized, and
new artwork and information has been added. The book was previously
published as Hearing: Its Physiology and Pathophysiology (2006).
RF305 2011-051397 978-1-59756-253-9
Better hearing with cochlear implants; studies at the
Research Triangle Institute.
Wilson, Blake S. and Michael F. Dorman.
Plural Publishing, ©2012 453 p. $149.95 (pa)
Wilson (Duke U. Hearing Center and Research Triangle Institute) and
Dorman (speech and hearing science and linguistics, Arizona State U.)
describe the 23 years of research (1983-2006) into cochlear implants at the
Research Triangle Institute, a non-profit research institute created by
Duke U., North Carolina State U., and the U. of North Carolina at Chapel
Hill, as well as research at Duke U. Medical Center, and key results of the
seven research projects. They present key sections from 21 important
progress reports on the design and evaluation of novel processing
strategies, electrical stimulation on both sides with bilateral cochlear
implants, combined electric and acoustic stimulation of the auditory
system, and representations of temporal information with cochlear
implants.
RF305 2012-021004 978-1-59756-435-9
Objective measures in cochlear implants.
Hughes, Michelle L. (Core clinical concepts in audiology)
Plural Publishing, ©2013 164 p. $55.00 (pa)
Hughes, who coordinates a cochlear implant program and cochlear
implant research laboratory at a hospital and teaches special education
and communication disorders at the U. of Nebraska-Lincoln, offers audi-
ology graduate students and audiologists a guide to objective measures
in cochlear implants, with information on measurements and clinical
uses for each. She discusses the basic science, including the anatomy of
hearing loss, principles of electrical stimulation of the auditory system,
parts and functions of a cochlear implant, past and present devices, can-
didacy, and signal delivery with cochlear implants; nonphysiological
objective measures, including electrode impedance, electrical field poten-
tials, and averaged electrode voltages; and physiological measures: elec-
trically evoked stapedial reflexes, compound action potentials, auditory
brainstem response, auditory middle latency response, and auditory cor-
tical potentials.
RF421 978-3-8055-9210-9
Endoscopic approaches to the skull base.
Title main entry. Ed. by Amin B. Kassam and Paul A. Gardner.
(Progress in neurological surgery; v.26)
S. Karger, AG, ©2012 237 p. $268.00
This resource is for neurosurgeons, otolaryngologists, head and neck sur-
geons, and craniofacial surgeons seeking practical understanding of the
endoscopic endonasal approach (EEA) to the skull base. The first three
chapters offer historical perspectives, discussion of advantages and tran-
sitioning from the microscope to the endoscope, and principles.
Following is coverage of pituituary tumors, olfactory groove menin-
giomas, esthesioneuroblastoma, clival lesions, and anterior skull base
defects reconstruction, among other topics. The final chapter discusses
the learning curve for endonasal surgery of the cranial base and a sys-
tematic approach to training. The two editors are neurosurgeons affil-
iated as follows: Armin B. Kassam (Ottawa Hospital, Canada) and Paul
A. Gardner (U. of Pittsburgh School of Medicine).
RF514 2012-011997 978-1-59756-474-8
Atlas of laryngoscopy, 3d ed.
Title main entry. Ed. by Robert T. Sataloff et al.
Plural Publishing, ©2013 332 p. $199.95
Sataloff (otolaryngology-head and neck surgery, Drexel U.) et al. supply
residents, fellows, otolaryngologists, laryngologists, nurses, speech-
language pathologists, voice and acting teachers, and academics with 176
brief cases that demonstrate differences among various vocal functions
and dysfunctions. Otolaryngologists, voice specialists, surgeons, speech-
language pathologists, and others from the US, Europe, and Asia use
cases and color photos and b&w drawings to illustrate normal vocal
folds, imaging and evaluation techniques, congenital and idiopathic
–266–
conditions, inflammation, infections, trauma, vascular problems, masses
and lesions, impaired vocal fold mobility, neoplasms, and complications.
This edition adds new diagnostic information, new clinical observations,
new and updated images, and 73 new chapters on techniques in vocal
fold imaging, genetic anomalies, masses, infection, trauma, hemorrhage,
neoplasm, and complications of laryngeal surgery. No references are
provided.
GYNECOLOGY & OBSTETRICS
RG110 978-93-5025-962-7
Practical guide to office procedures in gynecology and
urogynecology.
Sakhel, Khaled et al.
Jaypee Bros., ©2013 278 p. $44.00 (pa)
Sakhel et al. (obstetrics and gynecology, Eastern Virginia Medical School)
offer a quick reference on office procedures used by gynecologists and
urogynecologists. Specialists in obstetrics and gynecology, pelvic
medicine, and urology in the US address patient safety, legal issues,
ultrasound, hysteroscopy, colposcopy and loop electrosurgical excision
procedure (LEEP), long-acting reversible contraception, transcervical
sterilization, endometrial ablation, bone mineral density assessment,
intrauterine insemination, urodynamic testing, diagnostic
cysturethroscopy, stress urinary incontinence and overactive bladder
treatments, conservative management of pelvic organ prolapse, interstitial
cystitis/painful bladder syndrome, treatment of pelvic floor muscle
spasm, and cosmetic procedures. Information on indications,
contraindications, patient selection, counseling and consent, preparation,
set-up and instrumentation, techniques, and complications and
management is provided.
RG482 2012-008905 978-1-4214-0691-6
A woman’s guide to pelvic health; expert advice for
women of all ages.
Houser, Elizabeth E. and Stephanie Riley Hahn.
Johns Hopkins U. Press, ©2012 206 p. $40.00
Houser, a urologist, and Hahn, a physical therapist, offer a guide for
women to pelvic health and facts and treatment for five conditions asso-
ciated with the pelvic floor: stress urinary incontinence, overactive
bladder and urge urinary incontinence, mixed urinary incontinence,
pelvic organ prolapse, and decreased sexual sensation. They also describe
anatomy; an at-home pelvic floor muscle exercise program, with photos
of exercises; additional conservative treatments, such as medication,
acupuncture, pelvic floor retraining, behavior and diet modifications and
weight management, percutaneous nerve stimulation, urethral dilation,
and vaginal pessaries; and surgical solutions.
RG493 2012-013738 978-0-8014-5093-8
The big squeeze; a social and political history of the
controversial mammogram.
Reynolds, Handel. (The culture and politics of health care work)
Cornell U. Press, ©2012 121 p. $19.95
In this book intended for general readers, students, medical profes-
sionals, and women’s health advocates, Reynolds, former chief of breast
radiology at Indiana University, chronicles the history of screening mam-
mography since its inception in the early 1970s and shows how decisions
made in mammography’s early history were guaranteed to make the test
controversial. He describes how the creation of a culture of mammog-
raphy screening was aided by social and political forces such as the fem-
inist movement, and shows how politics came to dominate the debate
over when screening should begin. He also considers the risks of over-
diagnosis (the detection of cancers that would not cause symptoms in the
individual’s lifetime) due to mammography.
RG591 2012-006339 978-1-4214-0643-5
The evolution of the human placenta.
Power, Michael L. and Jay Schulkin.
Johns Hopkins U. Press, ©2012 266 p. $65.00
Power and Schulkin, researchers at the American College of Obstetricians
and Gynecologists, explore the evolution of the human placenta. They
focus on the biomedical aspects of the placenta, how the placenta func-
tions as a regulatory organ, the co-option of the immune system to
become a regulatory system in early gestation, the evolution of genetic
regulatory mechanisms made possible by the presence of the placenta,
and the biological anthropology of the placenta. They review ancient and
more modern investigations into the placenta in the first chapter and
compare mammalian placentas in chapter 3, but otherwise maintain the
–267–
above stated focus and offer small “boxes” for further considerations or
lines of investigation. A final chapter considers modern gestational chal-
lenges including menstruation, placental infection, and pre-mature birth.
RG626 978-1-84619-488-7
Fetal and perinatal skeletal dysplasias; an atlas of
multimodality imaging.
Hall, Christine M. et al.
Radcliffe Publishing, ©2012 688 p. $199.00
For clinicians and technicians in fetal medicine and neonatal care, such
as clinical geneticists, pediatric radiologists, maternal-fetal specialists,
pathologists, and obstetricians, Hall (pediatric radiology, U. of London,
UK) et al. present information on rare skeletal disorders, including
skeletal dysplasias and malformation syndromes, through specific cases
and perinatal images. After chapters on normal fetal skeletal growth and
development and diagnosis of fetal skeletal dysplasias, they detail 132
conditions (based on the 2010 international nosology and classification of
genetic skeletal disorders) and their synonyms, incidence, genetics, age at
presentation, clinical features, prenatal ultrasound and postnatal radio-
logical features, bone histology, prognosis, and differential diagnosis,
with images showing different modalities and gross and histopathology
findings when available. The table of contents consists of a chart of infor-
mation on mode of inheritance, the Mendelian Inheritance in Man
number, the locus, the mutated gene, and the affected protein. Published
by Radcliffe Publishing, UK, and distributed in the US by BookMasters.
RG951 2012-012319 978-1-60831-801-8
Essentials of maternity, newborn & women’s health
nursing, 3d ed. (online access included)
Ricci, Susan Scott.
Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, ©2013 928 p. $105.99
Ricci (nursing, U. of Central Florida) supplies students and practicing
nurses with a condensed version of her textbook Maternity and Pediatric
Nursing and details how to care for women and newborns, their risk
factors, lifestyle choices that influence well-being, interventions, and
nursing education topics. She covers women’s health throughout the
lifespan, pregnancy, labor and birth, the postpartum period, the
newborn, childbearing at risk, and the newborn at risk, omitting the
chapters on child health promotion, atraumatic care, child health super-
vision and assessment, caring for children in diverse settings and special
needs children, pediatric nursing interventions, pain management, and
management of children’s health disorders in this version. This edition
has more cultural and global aspects, evidence-based research, and
pharmacology content; many new images; revised chapter objectives; and
additional features, such as drug guides, nursing care plans, comparison
charts, and tables of common medical treatments and laboratory and
diagnostic tests. Resources such as an e-book, National Council Licensure
Examination-style (NCLEX) questions, videos, animations, and a Spanish-
English audio glossary are online.
RG951 2012-021656 978-1-60913-747-2
Maternity and pediatric nursing, 2d ed.
Ricci, Susan Scott and Terri Kyle, Susan Carman.
Wolters Kluwer Health, ©2013 2046 p. $137.99
Ricci (nursing, U. of Central Florida) et al. assist nursing students in
caring for women and children in a variety of settings and addressing
common problems with evidence-based interventions. Each chapter
focuses on a different component of maternity or pediatric nursing care,
including general concepts, women’s health throughout the lifespan,
pregnancy and birth, at-risk pregnancy and childbirth, at-risk newborns,
child health promotion, health supervision and assessment of children,
care in diverse settings and for special needs children, pediatric inter-
ventions, pain management, and nursing management of children’s
health disorders, with drug guides, case studies, health education guide-
lines, common laboratory and diagnostic tests, tables of common medical
treatments, nursing care plans, nursing procedures, and information on
assessment and management. This edition has information on special
developmental concerns and providing atraumatic care to children.
Online resources include an e-book, National Council Licensure
Examination-style (NCLEX) review questions, video clips, and journal
articles.
We're always delighted to hear from our readers.
Contact us at (503) 281-9230 or booknews@booknews.com.
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
PEDIATRICS
RJ50 978-1-907816-35-2
Paediatric clinical examination.
Brugha, Rossa et al. (Pocket tutor)
JP Medical Publishers Ltd, ©2013 271 p. $16.00 (pa)
Brugha (pediatrics, Barts and the London School of Medicine and
Dentistry, UK) et al. present a pocket guide for medical students, junior
doctors, and general practitioners looking for information on clinical
skills in pediatrics. For each body system, they outline a method of exam-
ination for all ages and information about common or important ill-
nesses, along with case scenarios. Chapters on history taking,
examination of the newborn, growth and nutrition, developmental
assessment, and genetic disorders and syndromes are included. There
are no references.
RJ61 2012-018883 978-0-7808-1271-0
Childhood diseases and disorders sourcebook; basic
consumer health information about the physical, mental,
and developmental health of pre-adolescent children..., 3d
ed.
Title main entry. Ed. by Laura Larsen. (Health reference series)
Omnigraphics, Inc., ©2012 705 p. $95.00
Written for consumers, this volume compiles information from period-
icals and government and non-profit organizations like the Centers for
Disease Control and Prevention on common disorders that affect the
physical, mental, and developmental health of school-age children. It
addresses routine and emergency care, including child health statistics,
doctor visits, how to give medication to children, recommended vaccina-
tions, promoting wellness, preventing injuries, fevers and febrile seizures,
and responding to medical injuries; bacterial, viral, parasitic, and fungal
infections and related concerns; medical conditions like allergies, cancer,
and diabetes; blood and circulatory, cardiovascular, ear, nose, and throat,
endocrine and growth, gastrointestinal, kidney and urologic, liver, mus-
culoskeletal, neurological, respiratory and lung, skin, and vision and eye
disorders; and developmental and pediatric mental health concerns,
including autism spectrum disorders, attention deficit hyperactivity dis-
order, conduct and oppositional disorders, developmental and learning
disorders, fragile X syndrome, anxiety, bipolar disorder, depression, and
obsessive-compulsive disorder.
RJ133 2012-009678 978-1-4504-0184-5
Heart education; strategies, lessons, science, and
technology for cardiovascular fitness.
Swaim, Deve.
Human Kinetics Pub., ©2013 239 p. $39.00 (pa)
Swaim (curriculum and instruction, Portland State U.) shows physical
education teachers how to use heart monitoring technology to help teens
ages 11 to 18 learn how to collect and apply heart rate data; design indi-
vidualized physical activity goals; and chart their improvements in
health, fitness, and athletic performance. She outlines a curriculum
based on the principles of her Heart Zones Education program, a car-
diovascular fitness program that considers wellness from the perspec-
tives of health, fitness, and performance. The curriculum consists of
modules with lesson plans that introduce various skills, from getting
started, to gathering and interpreting data, to workouts, and how heart
zone strategies are applied to sports, athletic performance training, and
outdoor recreation. A new module addresses emotional fitness. The text
combines Middle School Healthy Hearts in the Zone and High School
Healthy Hearts in the Zone with new fitness technology tools. Access to a
companion website with reproducible worksheets, station cards, training
logs, and other resources is included.
RJ216 2012-011789 978-0-7637-9879-6
Core curriculum for lactation consultant practice, 3d ed.
Title main entry. Ed. by Rebecca Mannel, Patricia J. Martens and
Marsha Walker.
Jones & Bartlett, ©2013 903 p. $67.09 (pa)
Lactation consultants Mannel, Martens, and Walker compile 43 chapters
that outline the core curriculum for lactation consultant practice
developed by the International Lactation Consultant Association, to help
consultants prepare for the International Board of Lactation Consultant
Examiners (IBLCE) certification and practice as an International Board
Certified Lactation Consultant. Consultants from North America, Brazil,
and Australia consider aspects of the profession, including communi-
cation and counseling skills, the parental role, maternal mental health
and employment, and vulnerable populations; professional development,
including education, research, and legal issues; breastfeeding anatomy,
physiology, nutrition, and biochemistry; techniques, including for
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
preterm infants, twins and multiple births, and mothers with disabilities;
breastfeeding technology and equipment; and problem solving, with dis-
cussion of breast pathology, hyperbilirubinemia and hypoglycemia,
maternal illnesses, insufficient milk production, and slow weight gain
and failure to thrive. This edition has new chapters on normal infant
behavior, change management, developing and managing a hospital lac-
tation service, and nutrition for the breastfeeding child. It also has a new
code of professional conduct; updated photos; new figures of breast
anatomy and infant suckling; and sections on mentoring future con-
sultants, protecting against chronic disease for the lactating mother, and
breastfeeding late preterm infants.
RJ370 978-1-4496-3777-4
APLS; the pediatric emergency medicine resource, 5d ed.
(includes online access code)
Title main entry. Ed. by American Academy of Pediatrics and
American College of Emergency Physicians.
Jones & Bartlett, ©2012 535 p. $78.95 (pa)
With this text, which serves as the foundation of an Advanced Pediatric
Life Support program, the American Academy of Pediatrics and
American College of Emergency Physicians teaches emergency physi-
cians, pediatricians, nurses, and other allied health professionals the
knowledge and skills needed to assess and manage critically ill or injured
children during the first hours in the emergency department or office.
The text addresses assessment, the airway, shock, the cardiovascular
system, the central nervous system, trauma, maltreatment, nontraumatic
surgical and orthopedic emergencies, medical and neonatal emergencies,
procedural sedation and analgesia, and the special needs of children
dependent on technology. Also provided is online access to seven educa-
tional modules and 13 additional chapters on pediatric advanced life
support essentials; emergency department and office preparedness for
pediatric emergencies; metabolic diseases; environmental emergencies;
toxicology; the interface with emergency medical services; disaster man-
agement; preparedness for nuclear, biological, and chemical terrorism;
primary care orthopedic issues; medical-legal issues; imaging decision-
making strategies and considerations; and office and critical procedures.
This edition has updated and improved chapters, a section on bedside
ultrasound, a guideline for the emergency department management of
diabetic ketoacidosis, advances in procedural sedation and a recom-
mended deep sedation protocol, a standard set of discharge instruction
forms in several languages, a simulation primer with cases, and updated
recommendations and algorithms from Pediatric Advanced Life Support.
RJ370 2012006814 978-1-4496-7041-2
Pediatric first aid for caregivers and teachers, 2d ed.
(online access included)
American Academy of Pediatrics. (Pedfacts)
Jones & Bartlett, ©2014 502 p. $17.95 (pa)
From the American Academy of Pediatrics, this guide helps caregivers
and teachers learn pediatric first aid, as part of an online or hybrid
PedFACTs course. The course teaches them how to recognize an injured
or ill child, identify specific types of medical problems and give appro-
priate first aid care, know when to call emergency medical services and
how to perform cardiopulmonary resuscitation, understand and use an
automated external defibrillator, know what to do when a child is
choking, give rescue medication for a breathing problem, and use an epi-
nephrine auto-injector for a severe allergic reaction. The manual contains
18 topics related to common first aid situations and serious emergencies
and is meant to be read before taking the online course. The topics
address how to keep children safe from injury and illness, the 4Cs
(check, call, care, and complete) of pediatric first aid and how to apply
them, and specific types of illnesses or injuries, with background infor-
mation, signs and symptoms, instructions, algorithms, and application of
the 4Cs. Access to online course materials is included.
RJ375 2012-026283 978-1-4398-5535-5
Child abuse and its mimics in skin and bone.
Brogdon, B. G. et al.
CRC Press, ©2013 200 p. $129.95
For family and emergency physicians, pediatricians, nurses, social
workers, educators, and law enforcement personnel, Brogdon (radiology,
U. of South Alabama), Shwayder, a pediatric dermatologist, and Elifritz
(radiology and pathology, U. of New Mexico) illustrate classic
manifestations of child physical abuse by dermatological and radiological
examination as a standard against which the mimickers of abuse can be
compared, focusing on trauma to the musculoskeletal system, soft
tissues, and skin. They discuss the historical context of child abuse,
inflicted trauma, risk factors, and suspicion, substantiation, or exclusion
of inflicted trauma, then accidental and inflicted musculoskeletal
trauma; radiological mimickers of physical child abuse, including lesions
from leukemia, scurvy, rickets, fractures, bowing deformities, false
–268–
fractures, dislocations, periosteal new bone formation, and spine and
skull conditions; dermatological signs of abuse, such as bruises,
abrasions and lacerations, burns, and cultural remedies and folk
medicine; and dermatological mimics of bruises, other pattern injuries,
and burns.
RJ421 2012-004155 978-1-4511-1893-3
Moss and Adams’ heart disease in infants, children, and
adolescents; including the fetus and young adult, 8th ed;
2v. (includes online access)
Title main entry. Ed. by Hugh D. Allen et al.
Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, ©2013 1792 p. $359.95
Allen (pediatrics, cardiology, Baylor College of Medicine) et al. present a
two-volume text on heart disease in infants, children, and adolescents,
including the fetus and young adult. In 79 chapters, cardiology, pedi-
atrics, and other specialists from North America and Europe cover the
structure and function of the cardiovascular system; diagnostic and ther-
apeutic methods; electrophysiology; pediatric cardiac intensive care;
molecular determinants, epidemiology and prevention of congenital heart
defects, genetic aspects, and fetal echocardiography and cardiology; con-
genital cardiovascular malformations; diseases of the endocardium,
myocardium, and pericardium; pulmonary vascular disease; the young
adult with congenital heart disease; and other problems and issues, such
as chest pain, coronary risk factors, tumors, chronic heart failure, neu-
rodevelopmental outcomes after heart surgery, and hematologic aspects.
This edition has access to online questions similar to those on the pedi-
atric cardiology board examination, and chapters on quality of life,
quality and safety, pharmacology, and research design. The companion
website includes appendices, the chapter on the development of the field,
the full text, a test bank, tables and figures, historical milestones, and
video clips of echocardiography and multiplanar reconstruction.
RJ486 978-1-74286-032-9
In the beginning; the brain, early development and
learning.
Nagel, Michael C.
ACER Press, ©2012 236 p. $39.95 (pa)
Offering plain-language explanations accessible to teachers, parents, and
students in early childhood education and health, this work explains the
learning implications of the latest findings in brain development in the
early years. The book adopts a broad scientific perspective, acknowl-
edging that human development is a product of both nature and nurture.
After a review of significant findings in neurodevelopment since the
1990s, chapters chart brain development from conception through age
six. Later chapters cover learning and brain development, language and
the developing brain, emotional and social development, and intelligence.
A final chapter gives practical suggestions for educating healthy, happy
children, focusing especially on the negative impact of stress on learning
and brain development. The book’s clean, reader-friendly b&w layout
contains summary charts and simple anatomical illustrations of the
brain. A glossary is also included. Nagel, a member of the International
Neuropsychological Society, is affiliated with the University of the
Sunshine Coast, Australia. Distributed in the US by ISBS.
RJ496 2012-022802 978-1-59756-487-8
Assessment of communication disorders in children;
resources and protocols, 2d ed.
Hegde, M.N. and Frances Pomaville.
Plural Publishing, ©2013 543 p. $97.95 (pa)
Hedge and Pomaville (speech-language pathology and communication
disorders and deaf studies, California State U.-Fresno) outline resources
and protocols for the assessment of communication disorders in children.
They bring together scholarly background information and practical
assessment tools by providing a chapter on each (one with background
on the research base, etiology, classification, diagnostic criteria, asso-
ciated clinical conditions, postassessment counseling, and a descriptive
overview; the other with protocols) as related to commonly assessed com-
munication disorders: speech sound production, language skills, fluency,
voice disorders, and nonverbal and minimally verbal children. They
present a single chapter on literacy and begin with an introduction to
common assessment procedures and major issues, including procedures
based on standardized tests, assessment of ethnoculturally diverse
children, and alternative procedures, along with a model that integrates
alternative and traditional approaches, as they argue for integration in
assessing all children. This edition adds behavioral assessment as an
additional alternative approach and updates research and tools. It
includes a new chapter on assessment for augmentative and alternative
communication (AAC) systems. Protocols are also provided on the CD,
along with resources, and can be individualized.
–269–
RJ503 2012-943073 978-0-87822-675-7
Meeting the challenges of adolescent psychotherapy.
Gardner, James E.
Research Press, ©2013 169 p. $21.95 (pa)
Primarily written for graduate students undertaking the study of psy-
chotherapy, this work focuses on areas often unique to adolescents—such
as an orientation toward immediate gratification or sometimes attending
sessions against their will. It jumps between personal stories and expla-
nation of concepts such as “priming the pump” or indirect modeling.
General legal considerations are lightly covered, but it is recommended
that the student specifically study their state’s laws. Gardner is a clinical
psychologist specializing in diagnostic and psychotherapeutic work with
children and adolescents, along with parental counseling.
RJ506 2012-006289 978-1-4625-0632-3
Cognitive-behavioral therapy for anger and aggression in
children.
Sukhodolsky, Denis G. and Lawrence Scahill.
Guilford Pr., ©2012 184 p. $30.00 (pa)
Sukhodolsky and Scahill (psychology and nursing and child psychiatry,
Yale U. and Yale U. Child Study Center) outline an evidence-based indi-
vidual cognitive-behavioral therapy approach that clinicians with a back-
ground in psychopathology, as well as psychologists, psychiatrists, social
workers, psychiatric nurse practitioners, and other professionals, can use
with children and adolescents (ages eight to 16) experiencing anger,
aggression, irritability, and noncompliance problems. It contains 10 child
sessions and three parent sessions that address anger management,
problem solving, and social skills. They review the theoretical underpin-
nings and research evidence in support of this therapy and guidelines
for assessment of disruptive behavior, then present the sessions, which
are structured around goals and therapeutic techniques and activities.
Meant for use in outpatient mental health settings, inpatient services,
schools, juvenile justice programs, and other facilities, each session
includes scripts and guidelines for implementing treatment. Handouts
and a treatment fidelity checklist are also provided.
RJ506 2010-933759 978-0-9755859-9-3
Crafting connections; contemporary applied behavior
analysis for enriching the social lives of persons with
autism spectrum disorder.
Taubman, Mitchell et al.
DRL Books, ©2011 242 p. $39.95 (pa)
Taubman, a psychologist who co-directs an autism organization, et al.
argue that social skills, along with communication, are a core deficit in
people with autism spectrum disorders. They draw on their research and
interventional experiences to show treatment and education practitioners,
in addition to families, how to teach the social skills of social awareness,
communication, interaction, learning, and relatedness to these indi-
viduals, with curriculum programs for each of these skills included. They
address important issues related to social skills and autism spectrum dis-
orders, including play, socialization and adolescence, and true friend-
ships. Also discussed are ways to assess competencies and develop
programs, curricula and instructional content, and methods for teaching
and programming social skills using an applied behavior analysis
approach meant to teach true social skills development. Discussion of
teaching interactions and social skills groups is incorporated. There is no
index.
RJ506 2012-007633 978-1-84872-084-8
Current issues in developmental disorders.
Title main entry. Ed. by Chloë R. Marshall. (Current issues in develop-
mental psychology)
Psychology Press, ©2013 221 p. $67.95
For advanced students, researchers, and practitioners in developmental
psychology, neuropsychology, speech and language therapy, and other
developmental disorders, Marshall (psychology and human development,
U. of London, UK) compiles eight essays by psychologists and specialists
in development, language and communication, special education, and
behavioral sciences in the UK, Sweden, Australia, China, and the US, who
consider issues in syndromic and non-syndromic neurodevelopmental
disorders: fragile X syndrome, Down’s syndrome, Williams syndrome,
and velocardiofacial syndrome, and dyslexia, autism spectrum disorder,
specific language impairment, and attention deficit hyperactivity dis-
order. Chapters are not organized by these disorders, but instead address
the specific issues of diagnosis and comorbidity, genetics, longitudinal
studies, computational models, distinguishing disorder from disad-
vantage, and language and culture. The final chapters consider the
modern beginnings of research in the field and how the study con-
tributes to understanding of typical development. Psychology Press is an
imprint of the Taylor & Francis Group.
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
RJ506 2012942651 978-1-937473-07-5
The incredible 5-point scale; assisting students in
understanding social interactions and controlling their
emotional responses, 2d ed. (CD-ROM included)
Buron, Kari Dunn and Mitzi Curtis.
Autism Asperger Publishing Co., ©2012 97 p. $22.95 (pa)
Buron, who teaches students on the autism spectrum and developed an
autism spectrum disorders certificate program for educators at Hamline
U., and Curtis, a consultant and autism resource specialist at a school dis-
trict, introduce the five-point scale as a method of teaching social and
emotional understanding to students with autism spectrum disorders
and similar challenges. They provide an overview of how to use the scale
in different ways; the specifics of 14 scales and scenarios, such as for
voice volume, touching and talking, obsessions, being at home, meeting
friends, control, and understanding feelings; ideas for scales with indi-
viduals with more classic forms of autism; a list of goals and objectives
related to uses in individualized education programs; and new material
on scales for younger children. This edition also has expanded use of the
anxiety curve model and new scale ideas. The CD contains blank scales,
small portable scales, and worksheets. There is no index.
DENTISTRY
RK52 978-1-84619-973-8
Dental statistics made easy, 2d ed.
Smeeton, Nigel.
Radcliffe Publishing, ©2012 168 p. $45.00 (pa)
For dental students and practitioners, Smeeton (imaging sciences and bio-
medical engineering, King’s College, London) explains the rationale
behind the application of statistics to dentistry, using practical examples
to illustrate rather than algebraic formulae. The second edition accom-
modates changes in what statistics are used and how in dentistry since
the 2005 first edition. A new chapter has been added on one-way analysis
of variance, a natural extension of the unpaired t-test to the case of three
or more independent groups. Other topics include types of study in
dental research, diagnostic tests, comparing two means, and the choice
of sample size. Published by Radcliffe Publishing, Britain, and dis-
tributed in the US by BookMasters.
RK61 2012-024522 978-0-7808-1273-4
Dental care and oral health sourcebook; basic consumer
health information about caring for the mouth and
teeth..., 4th ed.
Title main entry. Ed. by Joyce Brennfleck Shannon. (Health reference
series)
Omnigraphics, Inc., ©2012 631 p. $95.00
This resource draws information from government agencies like the
Centers for Disease Control and Prevention, non-profit dental organiza-
tions, and periodicals to present facts about dental care and oral health
for general readers. It details mouth anatomy, taking care of teeth,
removing plaque, the role of nutrition, fluoride, oral injuries, caring for
oral piercings, and information for travelers. Coverage also includes
dental visits, including cavities, imaging, tooth pain, medications,
sedation techniques, alternatives to drills, fillings, rebuilding and
reshaping teeth, having a tooth pulled, and dentures; dental care for
infants and children, including fluoride consumption during tooth devel-
opment, preventing tooth decay, cavities, preventing sports-related oro-
facial injuries, teeth grinding or clenching, and oral conditions in
children with special needs; and orthodontic, endodontic, periodontic,
and orofacial procedures, such as root canals, implants, and oral sur-
geries. There is also discussion of oral diseases and disorders, from cleft
palate to dry mouth to oral cancer; conditions that affect oral health,
such as cancer, diabetes, disabilities, eating disorders, heart disease,
immune system disorders, osteoporosis, and tobacco use; and finding
and financing dental care.
RK521 2012-017471 978-0-86715-564-8
Evidence-based clinical orthodontics.
Title main entry. Ed. by Peter G. Miles et al.
Quintessence Pub. Co., ©2012 206 p. $118.00
Orthodontists from around the world review research results that can
and should inform clinical practice in the profession but are too often
either not known or bypassed for familiar, inherited, but perhaps less sci-
entific methods. The topics include evidence for and against early inter-
vention, wires used in orthodontic practice, treating class III
malocclusions, dental midline asymmetries, orthodontically induced
inflammatory root resorption, orthodontic retention and stability, and
accelerated orthodontic tooth movement.
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
RK651 2012-007472 978-1-4051-7691-0
Prosthodontics at a glance.
Ahmad, Irfan. (At a glance)
Wiley-Blackwell, ©2012 126 p. $49.99 (pa)
Ahmad, a lecturer, researcher, and dentist in private practice in the UK,
offers a concise introduction to all aspects of prosthodontic dentistry for
students, clinicians, and other members of the dental team. Each topic is
presented in a two-page spread with facts, diagrams, and color clinical
photos. Topics relate to diagnostics, treatment planning, occlusion, peri-
odontal and endodontic aspects, anterior dental aesthetics, intracoronal
and extracoronal restorations, materials for indirect restorations, tooth
preparation, temporary restorations, impressions, the dental laboratory,
implants, cementation, and removable prostheses.
RK667 2012-025031 978-1-118-30115-9
Esthetic soft tissue management of teeth and implants.
Saadoun, André P.
John Wiley & Sons, ©2013 179 p. $99.99
Saadoun (periodontics and implantology, Hadassah School of Dental
Medicine, Israel) offers a guide to esthetic soft tissue management of
teeth and implants for periodontists, other dental specialists, and
advanced general dentists. He discusses the impact of dental esthetics on
quality of life; facial esthetics; the composition of an esthetic and func-
tional dentoalveolar gingival unit or periodontal restorative interface,
which takes into account the periodontal health of the bone, gingiva,
interdental papillae, teeth, and biological space; treatments for gingival
recession and tooth deficiencies, including implantation; and periodontal
and implant treatment, such as crown lengthening procedures and con-
nective tissue grafts.
DERMATOLOGY
RL120 2012-011987 978-1-59756-442-7
Techniques of botulinum toxin injections in the head and
neck.
Benninger, Michael S. and P. Daniel Knott.
Plural Publishing, ©2012 136 p. $99.00
Benninger (surgery, Cleveland Clinic Lerner College of Medicine, Case
Western Reserve U.) and Knott (facial plastic and reconstructive surgery,
U. of California San Francisco) present a reference outlining specific tech-
niques for performing injections of botulinum toxins in the head and
neck for dystonias like blepharospasm; functional disorders like
headaches, salivary gland disorders, and Frey’s syndrome; and cosmetic
applications like forehead and brow repositioning, periorbital rejuve-
nation, and treatment of facial paralysis and synkinesis. Illustrations and
anatomic considerations are provided. An introductory chapter addresses
the development and history of botulinum toxin in medicine, its action,
and differences between types. Additional contributors are surgeons and
head and neck specialists from the US.
RL901 2012-012162 978-981-4289-75-7
Dialysis; history, development and promise.
Title main entry. Ed. by Todd S. Ing et al.
World Scientific, ©2012 969 p. $140.00
Ing (Loyola U. Chicago) et al. assemble 95 chapters by an international
group of nephrologists and other medical specialists who outline the
history and development of dialysis, as well as its future. They describe
the work of pioneers such as Claude Bernard, Thomas Graham, John
Jacob Abel, Charles Leonard von Hess and Hugh McGuigan, G.R. Love,
Heinrich Necheles, William Thalhimer, Nils Alwall, Gordon Murray, and
John Putnam Merrill, then outline progress and expansion in current
practice, methods and machines, and modifications of standard
hemodialysis schedules and techniques, such as continuous renal
replacement therapy, non-dialytic ultrafiltration, and various modalities
of peritoneal dialysis and dialysis in veterinary medicine. They also
discuss dialysis around the world; special problems in treating patients;
practice guidelines, management, and patient education; and innovations
like electronic medical records, nanotechnology, wearable artificial
kidneys, affinity hemodialysis, bioartificial kidneys, artificial cells, and
stem cell research.
This consolodated bimonthly bibliography contains all of the content formerly
split between Reference and Research Book News and SciTech Book News.
–270–
THERAPEUTICS, PHARMACOLOGY, NURSING
RM171 978-0-470-65527-6
Hemovigilance; an effective tool for improving transfusion
safety.
Title main entry. Ed. by René R.P. De Vries and Jean-Claude Faber.
Wiley-Blackwell, ©2012 380 p. $159.95
De Vries (immunohematology and blood transfusion, Leiden U. Medical
Center, the Netherlands) and Faber (Blood Transfusion Service, Red
Cross, Luxembourg) compile 27 chapters by hematology, blood trans-
fusion, and other specialists from Europe, North America, Asia, the
Middle East, and Australia who outline safety procedures in the blood
transfusion chain for those in the fields of transfusion medicine and
quality and safety management, health and regulatory authorities, hos-
pital transfusion committees, hemovigilance officers, personnel involved
in the transfusion process, hospital managers, and students. They
introduce hemovigilance and its concepts and models, then detail how to
establish a hemovigilance system and how these systems work at the
level of a blood establishment and hospital; national and regional
systems; and international systems, particularly the International
Hemovigilance Network and in developing countries. They detail key
achievements in hemovigilance activities and new developments in alter-
natives for blood components, surveillance of clinical effectiveness of
transfusion, and biovigilance. They exclude detailed descriptions of dif-
ferent types of transfusion reactions in patients and how to deal with
them.
RM172 2011-047863 978-0-8036-2682-9
Modern blood banking and transfusion practices, 6th ed.
Harmening, Denise.
F.A. Davis, ©2012 648 p. $99.00
Harmening (clinical laboratory management and medical laboratory
science, Rush U.) provides future medical technologists, blood bank spe-
cialists, and residents with a textbook on transfusion practices and
immunohematology. The 28 chapters are contributed by laboratory med-
icine, pathology, transfusion medicine, and other specialists from the US.
This edition has been reorganized around sections on fundamental con-
cepts; blood groups and serologic testing, including detection and identi-
fication of antibodies and pretransfusion testing; transfusion practice,
with chapters on donor screening, component preparation, transfusion
therapy, reactions, and apheresis, and discussion of hemolytic disease of
the fetus and newborn, autoimmune hemolytic anemias, and trans-
fusion-transmitted diseases; leukocyte antigens and relationship testing;
quality and compliance issues, with discussion of quality management,
safety and federal regulatory requirements, laboratory information
systems, and legal and ethical issues; and future trends. It adds new
chapters on cellular therapy, utilization management, and tissue
banking.
RM282 2012944511 978-1-907568-37-4
Therapeutic antibody engineering; current and future
advances driving the strongest growth area in the
pharmaceutical industry.
Strohl, William R. and Lila M. Strohl. (Woodhead Publishing series in
biomedicine; no.11)
Woodhead Publishing, ©2012 650 p. $290.00
William Strohl, with a biotechnology company, and medical illustrator
Lila Strohl survey the current status of designing and producing thera-
peutic antibodies. Their topics include relationships between the
structure and function of antibodies, sources of antibody variable chains,
monoclonal antibody targets and mechanisms of action, antibody frag-
ments as therapeutics, antibody-drug conjugates, cell line development,
and issues facing therapeutic monoclonal antibodies for the future.
RM315 2012-024215 978-0-393-70857-8
Successful psychopharmacology; evidence-based treatment
solutions for achieving remission.
Sobel, Stephen V.
W.W. Norton, ©2012 338 p. $29.95 (pa)
Writing in a conversational style accessible to both professionals and
patients, psychiatrist Sobel (University of California School of Medicine)
explains how to choose and use psychotropic medications to address the
biological factors of psychiatric disease, while also emphasizing key
aspects of psychotherapy that deal with psychosocial factors. Unlike
many psychiatrists, the author stresses the goal of remission of
symptoms and a return to full functioning, not just the medically defined
treatment response of a 50% alleviation of symptoms. Paired chapters on
depression, anxiety, bipolar disorder, and psychosis offer points and
pearls on medication and guidelines on treating the conditions. There is
–271–
also material on eating disorders and insomnia. With its anecdotes, sense
of humor, case vignettes, and the voices of real patients, the book will
appeal to patients and families as well as psychiatrists, psychotherapists,
and medical professionals.
RM316 2012-027804 978-0-07-352974-5
Drugs, society and human behavior, 15th ed.
Hart, Carl L. and Charles Ksir.
McGraw-Hill, ©2013 471 p. $143.33 (pa)
Hart (psychology, Columbia U.) and Ksir (psychology and neuroscience,
U. of Wyoming) supply undergraduates with a textbook on drugs and
their effects on society and human behavior from behavioral, pharma-
cological, historical, social, legal, and clinical perspectives. This edition
has a feature on drugs in the media; statistics on drug use trends, new
drug treatments, and drug-related mortality statistics; and discussion of
the nicotine vaccine for treating tobacco dependence, whether negative
antidrug ads are effective, and Portugal’s experience with drug pos-
session decriminalization. Other updates include an expanded section on
brain imaging; a rewritten section on components of the nervous system
to simplify the action potential; tables on the states with medical mari-
juana laws and the major characteristics associated with different routes
of administration; and sections on the importance of sleep when taking
amphetamines, acetaminophen and liver damage, and the “meth mouth”
myth. It integrates information on the relationship between insomnia
and depression and the Treatment Episode Data Set; has updated sta-
tistics on sales of antidepressants and antipsychotics; more discussion of
college efforts to reduce the impacts of high-risk drinking; updated infor-
mation on LSD, psilocybin, and Salvia Divinorum; and updated toxicity
data from the Drug Abuse Warning Network.
RM356 978-3-527-33059-1
Parasitic helminths; targets, screens, drugs and vaccines.
Title main entry. Ed. by Conor R. Caffrey. (Drug discovery in infectious
diseases; v.3)
Wiley-VCH, ©2012 516 p. $139.95
Parasitologists, immunologists, veterinary scientists, and other
researchers review the state of drug and vaccine development to deal
with helminths that are parasitic in the gut of livestock or humans, and
draw attention to the challenges associated with bringing such products
to market. The topics include harnessing genomic technologies to explore
the molecular biology of liver flukes, identifying and profiling nemati-
cidal compounds in veterinary parasitology, drugs and targets to perturb
the symbiosis of Wolbachia and filarial nematodes, the preclinical devel-
opment of a human hookworm vaccine, new approaches to antigen dis-
covery and promising new candidates for schistosomiasis vaccines, and
vaccines against cestode parasites.
RM370 2012002555 978-1-4051-8574-5
Vaccinology; principles and practice.
Title main entry. Ed. by W. John W. Morrow et al.
Wiley-Blackwell, ©2012 540 p. $179.95
The whole process of producing vaccines, from basic research and the
preclinical demonstration of efficacy, to approval and clinical trials in
humans, is explored by biochemists, microbiologists, and other
researchers in North America, Europe, and India. They cover principles
of vaccine design, antigen discovery, antigen engineering, delivery
systems, regulatory considerations, evaluating vaccine efficacy, and
implementing immunization/therapies.
RM405 2012-002908 978-0-470-57754-7
Comparative pathophysiology and toxicology of
cyclooxygenases.
Radi, Zaher A.
John Wiley & Sons, ©2012 324 p. $135.00
A toxicological anatomic pathologist for an international drug company,
Radi examines cyclooxygenases (COX) in order to fill a gap in the patho-
physiology and toxicology of prostanoids. COX catalyze the conversion of
arachidonic acid into prostaglandins, he explains, which play a signif-
icant role in the health and disease of many organ systems, and these
systems are the organizing principle of his study. After a review of the
history, he covers the gastrointestinal tract and the bone-tendon-ligament,
renal, cardiovascular, ocular, and respiratory systems. A final chapter
surveys current research strategies for designing safer non-steroidal anti-
inflammatory drugs.
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
RM666 978-1-908230-13-3
Bioremediation of mercury; current research and
industrial applications.
Title main entry. Ed. by Irene Wagner-Döbler.
Caister Academic Press, ©2013 144 p. $240.00
The conventional approach to removing mercury from the environment
involves solidification/stabilization and subsequent deposition, which is
very expensive—especially for large areas of low mercury concentration—
and requires long-term storage sites. Biochemists, hydrogeologists, and
other researchers and practitioners here report experiences with biore-
mediation approaches that are cheaper and less environmentally dam-
aging. After a review of current research, they look at a former
chlor-alkali factory in Kazakhstan, an abandoned polyvinyl chloride
factory on the Mediterranean coast, the Madeira River Basin as a case
study of land use change and mercury mobilization in the Amazon, the
chlor-alkali electrolysis industry, the long-term operation of a microbio-
logical pilot plant for cleaning up mercury-contaminated wastewater at
electrolysis factories in Europe, and the microbiological treatment of air
scrubber solutions from a waste incineration plant and other mercury-
contaminated wastewater. Distributed in the US by ISBS.
RM700 2012-002237 978-0-8036-1716-2
Evidence-based physical therapy.
Fetters, Linda and Julie Tilson.
F.A. Davis, ©2012 182 p. $44.95 (pa)
With its stand-alone chapters and material on the use of communication
technology in the workplace, this text for physical therapy students can
also serve as a tool for more experienced clinicians. It helps readers
develop skills to search and critically appraise the literature for quality
and clinical application. Section 1 focuses on the randomized clinical
trial, while section 2 explains how to appraise other types of studies, such
as diagnostic and prognostic research studies, clinical practice guidelines,
and studies with alterative designs. Section 3 concentrates on communi-
cation and technology for evidence based practice. Learning features
include chapter pre-tests, review questions, and many visual summary
and comparison tables, plus boxes on more advanced material. The text
includes b&w screenshots in two-color layout. Fetters and Tilson are both
affiliated with the University of Southern California-Los Angeles.
RS51 55-6286 978-1-57439-337-8
American drug index 2013, 57th ed.
Title main entry.
Facts & Comparisons, ©2012 1217 p. $99.95
This 57th edition of the ADI is useful for anyone in the medical field,
especially those with any interaction with pharmaceuticals. The number
of available drugs has increased by a wide margin, further necessitating
this comprehensive index divided into fifteen sections: drug monographs,
standard medical abbreviations, calculations, common systems of
weights and measures, approximate practical equivalents, international
system of units, normal laboratory values, FDA pregnancy categories,
controlled substances summary, medical terminology glossary, oral
dosage forms that should not be crushed or chewed, drug names that
look alike and sound alike, discontinued drugs, common abbreviations
of chemotherapy regimens, and a manufacturer and distributor listing.
Appropriate for both study and reference.
RS57 2011-942790 978-1-133-13134-2
Pharmaceutical calculations for pharmacy technicians; a
worktext, 2d ed.
Moini, Jahangir.
Delmar, ©2013 393 p. $87.95 (pa)
Moini (allied health sciences, Everest U.) offers undergraduate and
graduate pharmacy technician students and other health science students
a guide to essential math skills. The text focuses on the fundamental
skills of calculating drug dosages and converting them within the metric,
apothecary, and household systems, and includes examples and review
questions. It covers basic math skills like number systems, fractions, dec-
imals, ratios, proportions, and temperature conversions; calculation
methods; dosage calculations, including pediatric drug administration;
and business math. This edition has new chapters on the ratio and pro-
portion method, dimensional analysis, the formula method, prescrip-
tions, drug labels, percentage of error, dilutions, liquid measures,
concentrations, oral medications, reconstitution of powdered drugs, par-
enteral medications, and intravenous flow rates. All others have been
revised. It expands the chapter on fundamentals to include more on
essential concepts and operations; reorganizes chapters; adds answers to
all questions; and adds a new appendix listing the most commonly pre-
scribed drugs in 2011. A companion website contains case studies and
about 1,000 questions.
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
RS92 978-0-85369-899-9
Social and cognitive pharmacy; theory and case studies.
Donyai, Parastou.
Pharmaceutical Press, ©2012 229 p. $49.99 (pa)
Donyai (pharmacy practice, U. of Reading, UK) offers a handbook on
applying sociology and psychology principles to pharmacy practice, for
undergraduate students of pharmacy, postgraduate pharmacists, and
academics (particularly those in the UK). The text examines the rela-
tionship between the principles, methodologies, and theories of the social
and behavioral sciences and their application to everyday pharmacy
practice issues. It introduces sociology and psychology as individual dis-
ciplines and the impact of social factors on people’s experiences of health
and illness; explains how knowledge within the disciplines is generated
through research; and outlines and summarizes relevant social and psy-
chological theories, with examples. Subsequent chapters cover modes of
communication and the use of the theories and methodologies in phar-
macists’ efforts to counter-prescribe, promote good health, and help
patients with prescribed medicines through communication, followed by
patient and research case studies.
RS100 978-0-85711-018-3
Essentials of pharmacy management, 2d ed.
Tootelian, Dennis H. et al.
Pharmaceutical Press, ©2012 446 p. $65.00 (pa)
According to the authors, business education is traditionally a weak part
of pharmacy studies, yet it is increasing necessary for one’s pharmacy to
survive. Tootelian and Mikhailitchenko (business, California State U.) and
Wertheimer (pharmacy practice, Temple U.) provide students with infor-
mation on a variety of business concerns, from accounting and financial
management to pharmacy operations management. Most chapters begin
with learning objectives and key terms, and end with questions for dis-
cussion, a self-test review, and multiple choice questions. In addition,
case studies appear for each of the book’s six parts, along with possible
discussion questions for students to consider.
RS100 2012-016802 978-1-4496-6028-4
Pharmacy management, leadership, marketing, and
finance, 2d ed. (online access included)
Title main entry. Ed. by Marie A. Chisholm-Burns et al.
Jones & Bartlett, ©2014 590 p. $61.95 (pa)
Chisholm-Burns (pharmacy, U. of Tennessee Health Science Center) et al.
prepare student pharmacists to be managers through this text, which
applies business management theory to the pharmacy environment.
Chapters address management and leadership essentials for pharmacists,
then real-world application of these principles, concepts, and practices in
planning, pharmacy and clinical operations, finance, risk management,
human resources, marketing and promotion, and professional effec-
tiveness. Updated, reorganized, and revised, this edition has new
chapters on the basics of managing risk, insurance fundamentals, quality
improvement, integrating pharmacoeconomic principles and pharmacy
management, and developing and evaluating clinical pharmacy services.
Crosswords, flashcards, a glossary, matching exercises, self-assessment
questions, and other resources can be found online. Contributors are
pharmacists and academics from the US.
RS165 2012-025567 978-1-4665-5162-6
Phytochemicals; health promotion and therapeutic
potential.
Title main entry. Ed. by Colleen Carkeet et al.
CRC Press, ©2013 250 p. $129.95
This seventh volume in a series presents 12 papers from the Seventh
International Phytochemical Conference, held in Buena Park, California
during October 2008. The topics include wine and cancer, multidisci-
plinary studies of the anti-inflammatory botanicals ginger and turmeric,
comprehensive strategies for evaluating the adaptogenic properties of
phytochemicals, alterations in the adiposity and dyslipidemia of obesity
by berries and berry phytochemicals, the role of berry fruit and nuts in
reducing oxidative stress and inflammation in the aging brain, and the
bioavailability of dietary carotenoids in humans.
RS189 2012002022 978-1-118-14965-2
Resolving erroneous reports in toxicology and therapeutic
drug monitoring; a comprehensive guide.
Dasgupta, Amitava.
John Wiley & Sons, ©2012 457 p. $125.00
For laboratory professionals and clinicians, Dasgupta (pathology and
laboratory medicine, U. of Texas-Houston) explains possible sources of
errors in therapeutic drug monitoring and testing for drugs of abuse,
and how to resolve such errors and identify discordant specimens.
Among the topics are false-positive drugs of abuse test results due to the
–272–
use of prescription and non-prescription drugs, when a toxicology report
is negative in a suspected overdosed patient: the world of designer drugs,
limitations of blood alcohol measurements using automated analyzers
and breath analyzers, plant poisoning and the clinical laboratory,
interference in immunoassays used to monitor trycyclic antidepressants,
and the effect of drug-herb interactions on therapeutic drug monitoring.
RS201 2012946289 978-1-907568-98-5
Nanoparticulate drug delivery; perspectives on the
transition from laboratory to market.
Patravale, Vandana and Prajakta Dandekar, Ratnesh Jain. (Woodhead
Publishing series in biomedicine; no.17)
Woodhead Publishing, ©2012 229 p. $205.00
Researchers at the Institute of Chemical Technology, Mumbai, India
identify the technical hurdles yet to be overcome before nanoparticulate
drug delivery can enter the market. They discuss the need for nanopar-
ticulate systems as drug carriers, nanoparticles as drug carriers, charac-
terization techniques for nanoparticulate carriers, evaluating the toxicity
potential of drug-nanoparticles, regulatory aspects of nanoparticulate
drug delivery systems, clinical trials and commercial aspects, and case
studies of nano-systems in the market.
RS201 2012-031355 978-1-4398-1129-0
Topical nail products and ungual drug delivery.
Title main entry. Ed. by S. Narasimha Murthy and Howard I. Maibach.
CRC Press, ©2013 267 p. $129.95
Pharmacists, pharmacologists, and dermatologists review various nail
diseases, tropical formulations, drug delivery approaches, and the unguo-
kinetics of drugs. The topics include the permeability of the nail plate,
approaches to enhancing ungual and trans-ungual drug delivery,
hydration-controlled nail system for evaluating topical formulations and
a novel nail sampling device, trans-ungual iontophoresis and physical
drug delivery enhancement, the pharmacokinetics of drugs in the nail
apparatus, and the photodynamic therapy of nail diseases.
RS403 978-3-527-33015-7
Bioisosteres in medicinal chemistry.
Title main entry. Ed. by Nathan Brown. (Methods and principles in
medical chemistry)
Wiley-VCH, ©2012 237 p. $185.00
Bioisosteres are groups of atoms that are substituted for those found in
natural biological substances to create analogue compounds with par-
ticular biological properties. Contributors from pharmaceuticals and
medicinal chemistry examine such topics as classical bioisosteres, mining
the Cambridge structural database for bioisosteres, molecular topology,
the Drug Guru Project, and perspectives from medicinal chemistry.
RT24 2012-025030 978-1-118-41071-4
How to write your nursing dissertation. (with website)
Glasper, Alan and Colin Rees.
John Wiley & Sons, ©2013 284 p. $33.99 (pa)
This clearly-structured, detailed guide for advanced nursing students and
other healthcare professionals was written by practicing clinicians, many
of whom are also lecturers, professors, and researchers. The book focuses
on real-life applications and synthesizes evidence-based practice with
research skills, legal and ethical considerations, and benchmarking. Each
chapter includes scenarios and activities as well as clear directives and
additional sources. The first section outlines what a dissertation is and
defines how it should be approached. The following six sections address
sourcing and evidence, development of the dissertation, understanding
research, critical reviewing, implementation of evidence, and what to do
after completing the dissertation. A companion website which includes
additional chapters, tools, examples, and other materials is referenced
frequently.
RT48 2012-015988 978-1-60831-110-1
Handbook of nursing diagnosis, 14th ed.
Carpenito, Lynda Juall.
Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, ©2012 874 p. $39.81 (pa)
Carpenito, a family nurse practitioner and nursing consultant, offers stu-
dents and nurses working in a variety of settings a quick reference to
nursing diagnoses and care. She provides the steps for creating a care
plan; an alphabetical reference to diagnoses; health promotions and
wellness diagnoses; and a section on diagnostic clusters, which presents
medical conditions with associated collaborative problems and diag-
noses. Each diagnosis includes the NANDA-International (North
American Nursing Diagnosis Association-International) definition,
defining characteristics, related factors, goals, notes, and nursing care
interventions. More content for selected collaborative problems, sample
–273–
generic care plans, and an e-book are available online. This edition
includes the newest diagnoses approved by NANDA-International for
2012-2014.
RT71 2011-94313 978-0-85702-743-6
Nursing education; planning and delivering the
curriculum.
Boore, Jennifer and Pat Deeny.
Sage Publications, ©2012 340 p. $130.00
Boore and Deeny (nursing education, U. of Ulster, UK) offer a broad view
of nursing education in the UK to help teachers understand its structures
and process, including new teachers who have moved from hospital-
based schools of nursing or other educational institutions to higher edu-
cation institutions. They provide specific information about higher
education institutions and how they work, and examine all aspects of
pre-registration nursing education and its planning and provision,
including the philosophy for nursing education, theories and philoso-
phies of education, and statutory body standards and Quality Assurance
Agency benchmarks; partnership working between academic and
healthcare organizations; and educational structures in the UK, including
issues arising from the Bologna Process and their implementation and
application. They continue with discussion of curriculum approaches
and content; teaching and learning concepts; intellectual skills like critical
thinking, creativity, and problem solving; teaching and learning in the
university context; skills and competence development for person-cen-
tered care; technology; assessment of knowledge, skills, and competence;
student recruitment and selection; student support, such as tutors,
mentors, and peer support; the resources needed for nursing education;
and quality management. They do not address methodologies for edu-
cation research.
RT85 2012-021642 978-1-4511-4633-2
Lippincott’s nursing procedures, 6th ed.
Title main entry.
Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, ©2012 825 p. $74.95 (pa)
This volume contains about 400 procedures performed by nurses in hos-
pitals and other clinical settings, presented alphabetically in this edition,
with step-by-step instructions, color photos and illustrations, and infor-
mation on equipment lists and preparation, setup, complications, special
considerations, patient teaching, documentation, and troubleshooting.
Procedures range from admission, to burn care, to lumbar puncture, to
wound irrigation. This edition has been updated with evidence-based
research, and lists the level of strength for each research reference.
RT87 2012-011915 978-0-470-95825-4
Case studies in palliative and end-of-life care.
Title main entry. Ed. by Margaret L. Campbell.
Wiley-Blackwell, ©2012 311 p. $59.99 (pa)
Campbell (health research in nursing, Wayne State U.) collects 36 case
studies on palliative and end-of-life care for various illnesses, to show stu-
dents and practitioners how to improve critical thinking skills and under-
stand the experiences of patients and their families. Contributed by
nurses from the US and Canada, the cases are organized into sections on
communication, symptom management, and family care, with each case
addressing evidence-based concepts, including the case history, physical
examination, diagnosis, and clinical questions, and discussion of aspects
like assessment and treatment considerations, and family support (in the
final section).
RT90 978-1-4496-8667-3
Health promotion for nurses; a practical guide. (online
access included)
Clark, Carolyn Chambers and Karen K. Paraska.
Jones & Bartlett, ©2014 719 p. $72.95 (pa)
Clark (nursing and health services, Walden U.) and Paraska (Duquesne
U.) outline the principles of health promotion for undergraduate nursing
students and nurses, nurse practitioners, and graduate students. They
explain concepts, models, and theories, and the nurse’s role in health
promotion; definitions, measures, and interventions for promoting
physical, mental, and family health; how healthcare policy affects pro-
motion; evidence-based promotion, including how to develop research
questions; how to use natural and non-invasive approaches for self-man-
agement; health promotion programs; and the prevention and self-man-
agement of chronic conditions like heart conditions, cancer, stroke, and
obesity and their causes (insufficient exercise, poor nutrition, smoking,
and drinking). Also provided are an appendix of evidence-based self-
management interventions for 32 chronic conditions and access to online
study aids, glossaries, case studies, review questions and other tools.
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
RT98 978-1-4496-5177-0
Community health nursing; an alliance for health, 2d ed.
(online access included)
Title main entry. Ed. by Stephen Paul Holzemer and Marilyn Klainberg.
Jones & Bartlett, ©2014 379 p. $82.95 (pa)
Holzemer and Klainberg (nursing, Aldephi U.) acquaint nursing students
with community health nursing and the impact of communication,
ethics, management of care, epidemiology, resources, and resource allo-
cation on the provision of care. They introduce students to a philosophy
of nursing care to help them understand the relationship to the client or
community-based needs, the system of care management, and the
influence of resource allocations. In 16 chapters, nursing specialists from
the US also cover personal and professional responsibilities, cultural
issues, health policy and evidence-based research, and the voice of the
client. Other topics discussed include the expertise of the community
health nurse, environmental health, inquiry and helping the client make
choices, community program development, project management for com-
munity program change, emergency disaster management, global com-
munity health issues, and the future of health care. The companion
website includes study tools, learning activities, glossaries, crosswords,
chapter objectives, and other resources.
RT98 2012-004585 978-1-4496-8358-0
Public health nursing; practicing population-based care,
2d ed. (includes online access code)
Title main entry. Ed. by Marie Truglio-Londrigan and Sandra B.
Lewenson.
Jones & Bartlett, ©2013 435 p. $80.95 (pa)
Truglio-Londrigan and Lewenson (nursing, Pace U.) offer undergraduate
and graduate nursing students and practitioners an 18-chapter textbook
on public health nursing. Public health nurses mainly from the US
address the definition of public health and public health nursing and the
ideas of health promotion and disease prevention; the history of the field;
assessment; the fundamentals of epidemiology and social epidemiology;
evidence-based practice; informatics; cultural considerations; healthcare
policy and politics; intervention strategies, such as outreach, screening,
surveillance, referral, follow-up, case management, counseling, consul-
tation, health teaching, collaboration, coalition building, community
organizing, advocacy, social marketing, and policy development and
enforcement; epidemics and their history; emergency preparedness; and
nursing education. This edition has new chapters on disaster man-
agement, primary health care, and new technologies, and the public
health nursing assessment tool has been revised to reflect Healthy People
2020. A companion website has study aids, learning activities, glossaries,
animated flashcards, puzzles, and other resources.
RX601 978-1-4496-8797-7
Clinical therapeutics primer; link to the evidence for the
ambulatory care pharmacist. (online access included)
Title main entry. Ed. by Jennifer A. Reinhold and Grace Earl.
Jones & Bartlett, ©2014 444 p. $57.95 (pa)
Reinhold and Earl (pharmacy, Philadelphia College of Pharmacy, U. of
the Sciences) offer this 19-chapter text for pharmacy students and new
practitioners that explains how to treat patients with commonly encoun-
tered chronic conditions in the outpatient setting. After introductory
chapters on the approach to the patient and patient-centered care, clinical
trial evaluation and biostatistics, and evidence-based medicine, pharmacy
specialists from the US address geriatric, pediatric, and pregnant and lac-
tating patients and those with renal and hepatic impairment, and aspects
of hypertension, diabetes, dyslipidemia, heart failure, anticoagulation,
generalized anxiety disorder, major depressive disorder, chronic
obstructive pulmonary disease and asthma, bone health, HIV, and
chronic pain, including pathophysiology, etiology and epidemiology,
diagnosis, complications, treatments, evidence-based medicine, self-care,
and special considerations. The companion website contains crosswords,
flashcards, a glossary, matching exercises, and web links.
AGRICULTURE, PLANT CULTURE, FORESTRY
S417 2012-935335 978-0-89054-408-2
Recollections of a life in science and agriculture.
Niederhauser, John S. Ed. by Paul D. Peterson et al.
Am. Phytopathological Soc., ©2012 141 p. $49.00
Agricultural scientist Niederhauser (1916-2005) recounts his observations
and participation in such seminal events of the 20th century as the Soviet
collectivist experiment, the Rockefeller Foundation’s Mexican Agricultural
Program, the early stages of the Green Revolution, the development of
the system of International Agricultural Centers, and the struggle to
understand and contain the late blight disease of potatoes. He had
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
worked out a rough draft with friends and colleagues but had not
finished the manuscript when he died. His circle of supporters completed
the project.
S477 2012-003435 978-0-8265-1859-0
Sowing change; the making of Havana’s urban
agriculture.
Premat, Adriana.
Vanderbilt University Press, ©2012 181 p. $24.95 (pa)
Premat (anthropology, U. of Western Ontario) has been conducting
ethnographic research on urban agriculture in Cuba’s capital city since
1997. She traces changes in the practice over more than a decade,
pointing out lessons for the dynamics of sustainable development,
transnational governance, and state power in contemporary Cuba.
Among her perspectives are shifting socialist spatial dreams, becoming
an urban farmer in Havana, questioning the order of things, green
agendas and community work, and global networks.
S494 2012-029112 978-1-4666-2655-3
E-agriculture and rural development; global innovations
and future prospects.
Title main entry. Ed. by Blessing M. Maumbe and Charalampos Z.
Patrikakis.
Information Science Reference, ©2013 286 p. $180.00
This reference book appropriate for students and professionals within
agriculture, rural development, and related fields explores the use of
information and communication technologies within global agriculture,
relying on case studies and examining conceptual and implementation
frameworks, agriculture market information systems, value-added agri-
culture services, e-agriculture policies, and institutions and regulations.
The book is divided into four sections: the first introduces key concepts,
the second explores rural development in sub-Saharan Africa, the third
focuses on Asia, and the fourth focuses on Europe and North America.
Charts and figures are included throughout. Each chapter includes an
abstract, conclusion, and references.
S494 2012-014403 978-0-8014-7802-4
One billion hungry; can we feed the world?
Conway, Gordon.
Cornell U. Press, ©2012 439 p. $24.95 (pa)
Conway (international development, Imperial College) makes the case for
how, through a second green revolution utilizing traditional and techno-
logical farming techniques, we can feed the world and make a profit
while we’re at it. The material is organized into four sections, the first
looking at what hunger is, what the green revolution was, and the
political economy of food security. In the second he moves into his vision
of a “doubly green revolution,” in which food production and money-
making are wedded. The third section develops these themes, looking at
designer crops, farmers as innovators and “the livestock revolution.” The
final section turns to ecological concerns that range from pest-control to
soil and water maintenance to adapting to climate change and reducing
greenhouse gases. In addition to farming practices, Conway’s “doubly
green vision” also relies on advocating economic regimes that favor
markets and trade. He underscores the need for growth that “lasts from
generation to generation” and does not undermine our planet’s finite
resources.
S591 978-0-12-386941-8
Hydropedology; synergistic integration of soil science and
hydrology.
Title main entry. Ed. by Henry Lin.
Academic Press, ©2012 800 p. $125.00
Groundwater is at the interface between the biotic and the abiotic worlds,
and though water is usually included in studies of soil and soil is some-
times considered in studies of water, the goal here is to create a new
branch of science founded on the interaction between the two. Scientists
cover overviews and fundamentals; case studies and applications; and
modeling, mapping, and coupling. The topics include soil architecture
and its functional manifestation across scales, thermodynamic limits of
the critical zone and their relevance to hydropedology, the hydropedology
of the North American coastal temperate rainforest, detecting and mod-
eling subsurface flow networks at the hillslope scale, and coupling bio-
geochemistry and hydropedology to advance carbon and nitrogen cycling
science. Academic Press is an imprint of Elsevier.
–274–
SB63 2012-016861 978-0-87785-345-9
The core of Johnny Appleseed; the unknown story of a
spiritual trailblazer.
Silverman, Ray.
Swedenborg Foundation Pub., ©2012 140 p. $14.95 (pa)
In this spiritual biography Silverman, an adjunct instructor at Urbana
University, Ohio—home of the Johnny Appleseed Education Center—
dispels myths about John Chapman (1774-1845), the man behind the folk
tales. The core focus is on the impact of Emanuel Swedenborg’s teachings
on him; his tree planting was part of his New Church missionary work.
Silverman’s book includes a map of Appleseed landmarks and nurseries,
answers to frequently asked questions, list of Chapman’s land holdings,
transcriptions of original documents, timeline, and illustrations by Nancy
Poes.
SB63 2012-012916 978-1-4214-0728-9
Johnny Appleseed and the American orchard; a cultural
history.
Kerrigan, William.
Johns Hopkins U. Press, ©2012 231 p. $50.00
Kerrigan (American history, Muskingum U.) casts a different light on
American historical figure Johnny “Appleseed” Chapman and the signif-
icance, both environmentally and culturally, of the fruit he spread in his
wanderings. The author explores the oral tradition of the Johnny
Appleseed myth and relies on archived materials and those from local
historical societies in New England and the Midwest to illustrate how the
innovative nurseryman’s apple trees were a part of the “agro-ecological
revolution” that was changing a young country.
SB123 2012-010721 978-0-8138-0349-4
Plant gene containment.
Title main entry. Ed. by Melvin J. Oliver & Yi Li.
John Wiley & Sons, ©2012 209 p. $149.95
Molecular biologists, ecological engineers, crop scientists, and other con-
tributors explore the flow of genes between plants, and survey strategies
for making genes stay where they are put. The problem is that artificially
altered genes can migrate to plants or animals where they might have
unintended and potentially devastating effects. Among the topics are
assessing and detecting gene flow, monitoring Bt resistance in European
corn borers and western corn rootworms, male sterility and hybrid plant
systems for gene confinement, seed-based containment strategies, and
tapping RNA silencing for trans-gene containment through the engi-
neering of sterility in plants.
SB126 2012-006492 978-1-4398-7867-5
Hydroponic food production; a definitive guidebook for
the advanced home gardener and the commercial
hydroponic grower, 7th ed.
Resh, Howard M.
CRC Press, ©2013 524 p. $59.95
For use as a reference and study quide for professional gardeners and
growers, though serious hobbyists may find the book useful as well, this
7th edition guidebook outlines in great detail all aspects of hydroponic
food production. It includes plant nutrition, nutrient film technique,
special applications, and thorough examinations of plant and soil cul-
tures in addition to water, sand, gravel, sawdust, rockwool, and other
soilless cultures. Resh explains design, setup, harvesting, and trou-
bleshooting. He also provides examples of specific plants, insects, and
diseases which may be encountered. Hundreds of figures and illustra-
tions are included, as well as extensive appendices. A companion CD fea-
turing color photographs is also included.
SB249 2012943320 978-1-84569-698-6
Handbook of natural fibres; v.2: Processing and
applications.
Title main entry. Ed. by Ryszard M. Kozlowski. (Woodhead Publishing
series in textiles; no. 119)
Woodhead Publishing, ©2012 516 p. $270.00
Textile scientists along with chemists, mechanical engineers, and others
who specialize in textiles within their discipline, look at the aspects of
processing and application that are unique to fibers from natural
sources. Among their topics are silk production and the future of natural
silk manufacture, ultraviolet-blocking properties of natural fibers, enzy-
matic treatment, construction and automotive industries, flax and hemp
for textile applications, paper and packaging applications, environmental
textiles from jute and coir, and enhancing consumer demand for natural
textile fibers.
–275–
SB419 2011-045164 978-1-60469-243-3
The unexpected houseplant; 220 extraordinary choices for
every spot in your home.
Martin, Tovah.
Timber Press, ©2012 326 p. $22.95 (pa)
Martin, a well-known organic gardening writer, offers a tour of plants,
organized by season, that she grows in her New England cottage.
Descriptions of plants unexpectedly treated as houseplants (e.g., conifers,
ornamental grasses, fuchsias) include their official name, attributes, pre-
ferred conditions, and care. Martin also devotes a chapter to plants that
she has not succeeded in growing indoors. The guide includes photo-
graphs by Kindra Clineff, a directory of plant sources, and suggestions
for further reading.
SB425 2012-009136 978-1-4398-4924-8
Ornamental geophytes; from basic science to sustainable
production.
Title main entry. Ed. by Rina Kamenetsky and Hiroshi Okubo.
CRC Press, ©2013 553 p. $139.95
Ornamental geophytes—also called flower bulbs—encompass more than
800 botanical genera that have renewal buds located in an underground
storage organ, such as a rhizome, tuber, corm, or bulb. The best known
are tulip, lily, gladiolus, narcissus, iris, hyacinth, and crocus.
Horticulturalists and botanists look at the current status of research and
the business of buying and selling plants and cut flowers in a few coun-
tries and regions that serve as models for different approaches. These are
East and Southeast Asia, Brazil, Chile, New Zealand, South Africa, and
Turkey. Other contributors consider general topics such as taxonomy and
phylogeny, breeding and genetics, dormancy, cut flowers and potted
plants, and sustainable production and integrated management.
SB443 2012-038190 978-1-60138-904-6
How to open & operate a financially successful florist
and floral business both online and off, 2d ed. (CD-ROM
included)
Beener, Stephanie and Constance H. Marse.
Atlantic Publishing, ©2013 288 p. $39.95 (pa)
This guide for general readers offers many checklists, bullet points, and
tips boxes, plus a glossary of flowers and an additional glossary of florist
terms, techniques, and supplies. Case study boxes offer an insider look
in the words of three real-life florists. After an overview of types of floral
businesses and education needed, chapters cover daily business, the
product, arranging, customer service, bookkeeping and accounting, legal
aspects, employees, marketing, and expansion. The book includes b&w
photos of happy florists, and an appendix listing national and state asso-
ciations, other resources, and trade magazines.
SB453 2012-014843 978-0-8248-3731-0
The small food garden; growing organic fruit and
vegetables at home.
Anthony, Diana.
U. of Hawai’i Press, ©2012 112 p. $19.99 (pa)
Anthony, a garden writer and columnist in Melbourne, Australia, pro-
vides gardeners with a guide to small food gardens. She explains
planning the site, including watering and irrigation; growing edibles in
climatic extremes; container gardening; planning planting; growing veg-
etables, fruits, and herbs (with alphabetical guides to varieties); and
organic management, including composting and fighting pests. She
includes a seasonal calendar of gardening tasks.
SB455 2011-050643 978-1-60469-271-6
The roots of my obsession; thirty great gardeners reveal
why they garden.
Title main entry. Ed. by Thomas C. Cooper.
Timber Press, ©2012 162 p. $14.95 (pa)
This collection of brief (3-5 page) essays compiles reflections by long-time
gardeners on why they got into the activity. They are quite casual and
focus on little things like family relations, finding peace through disci-
pline, producing healthy and tasty food, caring for a living project, and
other simple pleasures. The authors are all gardeners, some only in their
spare time while others professionally so, as in the case of William
Culina, the director of Coastal Maine Botanical Gardens, or Panayoti
Kelaidis, the senior curator of the Denver Botanical Gardens. No index
has been provided.
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
SB472 2012-931630 978-0-500-34282-4
Digital landscape architecture now.
Amoroso, Nadia.
Thames & Hudson, ©2012 304 p. $60.00
A successor to Digital Architecture Now, Amoroso (landscape architecture,
U. of Toronto) presents some of the most prolific landscape architects,
artists, and researchers who are challenging traditional landscape design
through digital means. Among the practices included in this summary
are designers and architects noted for their radical design sensibilities
and commitments to discovering environmentally and socially responsive
methods for dealing with site-design problems. Includes a forward by
George Hargreaves (landscape architect), 700 illustrations, project credits,
and a directory of architects.
SB472 2012-012393 978-0-393-73353-2
Greening the landscape; strategies for environmentally
sound practice.
Arvidson, Adam Regn.
W.W. Norton, ©2012 108 p. $24.95 (pa)
In the context of current environmental standards, Arvidson, a
Minneapolis-based landscape architect and writer, presents principles for
landscape architects, the “green industry,” and landowners to become
more environmentally responsible. He focuses on how (not which) plants
are grown, installed, and maintained. Aptly in landscape format, the
guide includes checklists for determining the environmental impacts of
practices, a directory of green industry companies, b&w illustrations,
and a website for additional examples.
SB472 2012-021015 978-1-4398-9404-0
Sustainable energy landscapes; designing, planning, and
development.
Title main entry. Ed. by Sven Stremke and Andy Van Den
Dobbelsteen. (Applied ecology and environmental management)
CRC Press, ©2013 510 p. $129.95
Inspired by the renewable energy island of Samsø in Denmark, land-
scape architects and environmental scientists explore physical environ-
ments that provide energy for human use. In sections on methods, case
studies, and education they consider such topics as the emotional land-
scape of wind turbines, multicriteria decision analysis for planning and
designing sustainable energy landscapes, the integrated optimization of
spatial structures and energy systems, rethinking infrastructural ecology
in North America’s Great Lakes mega-region, strategic planning for
energy-optimized urban structures in Austria, and applying the five-step
approach in a graduate student’s studio in the Netherlands.
SB482 2012-009992 978-1-84593-931-1
Managing outdoor recreation; case studies in the national
parks.
Manning, Robert E. and Laura E. Anderson.
CABI Publishing, ©2012 243 p. $145.00
Manning and Anderson (both environmental and natural resources, U. of
Vermont) address the issue of managing outdoor recreation to protect
park resources and the quality of the visitor experience. They begin by
drawing on the scientific and professional literature on parks and
outdoor recreation to develop a systematic and creative approach to
outdoor recreation management. Those chapters cover parks and outdoor
recreation, impacts of outdoor recreation, and management practices and
evaluating and applying them. Then they present 20 case studies of US
national parks. Among the fanciful titles are building a better campsite
along the Appalachian Trail, busing among the grizzlies at Denali, a
mountain with handrails at Yosemite, and the buzz from above at Grand
Canyon. To conclude, they set out 36 principles they gleaned from their
study. Distributed in the US by Styluis Publishing.
SB608 2012-940399 978-0-12-386895-4
Insect pests of potato; global perspectives on biology and
management.
Title main entry. Ed. by Philippe Giordanengo et al.
Academic Press, ©2013 598 p. $124.95
Specialists in potato cultivation around the world provide information
about insect pests of one the five most important agricultural crops in
the world. They cover the potato as an important staple crop, the biology
of major pests, the potato field as a managed ecosystem, and man-
agement approaches. Much of the information has not been published in
English before. Among the topics are aphids as major potato pests, the
biology and ecology of potato tuber moths, species interaction and bio-
diversity in potatoes, the biological control of potato insect pests, cultural
control and other non-chemical methods, and evolutionary considera-
tions in potato pest management. Academic Press is an imprint of
Elsevier.
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
SB608 978-0-12-398515-6
Pests of ornamental trees, shrubs and flowers; a color
handbook, 2d ed.
Alford, David V. (Plant protection handbook series)
Academic Press, ©2012 480 p. $175.00
Formerly an entomologist with the British Ministry of Agriculture,
Fisheries and Food, Alford presents a visual guide to selected pests of
ornamental plants that most commonly cause damage or are most often
seen. The region he covers is Britain and continental Europe particularly
north of the Alps, though he includes pests that have become temporary
or permanent residents. He does not include wood-boring pests, which
are primarily of concern in forestry. In addition to color photographs of
pests at various stages and the damage they cause, articles provide
description, life history, and types of damage. Most of the pests are
insects, arranged by order and family. A few mites are also included, and
even fewer woodlice, millipedes, and others. Academic Press in an
imprint of Elsevier.
SB608 978-0-12-387737-6
Tomato diseases; identification, biology and control; a
color handbook, 2d ed.
Blancard, Dominique et al. Trans. by Denise McGee. (Plant protection
handbook series)
Academic Press, ©2012 688 p. $199.95
For tomato producers, researchers, students, and gardeners, Blancard
explains the diagnosis of parasitic and nonparasitic tomato plant diseases
through descriptions and color photos, using a specific method for diag-
nosis and detailing methods of protection. After an introductory section
on the tomato plant, he presents symptoms of all common and serious
pests and pathogens, as well as possible causes and other information,
and provides detailed descriptions of pathogens, including principal
characteristics of pathogenic agents and methods of control, the distri-
bution and impact on tomato growing in the world, the main symptoms
produced, and their morphological and biological characteristics. The
book has been translated from the French version, Les maladies de la
tomate (2009), and has been revised and expanded. Academic Press is an
imprint of Elsevier.
SB608 2011-909928 978-0-89054-396-2
Virus and virus-like diseases of pome and stone fruits.
Title main entry. Ed. by Ahmed Hadidi et al.
Am. Phytopathological Soc., ©2011 429 p. $299.00
Botanists and agricultural scientists examine virus, viroid, and phyto-
plasma diseases of both the apple family and the peach family of fruits,
because many of the diseases affect both groups. They also consider
some other groups that have not been included in earlier studies, such
as figs, olives, and temperate nuts. Detailed descriptions and high quality
illustrations of the diseases, are presented along with precise characteri-
zations of the associated pathogens, including their genomes and strains.
All this information is deployed to understand the evolution, dissemi-
nation, diagnosis, and control of the pathogen and disease. Among the
topics are the apple stem grooving virus, cherry detrimental canker,
stocky prune virus, fluorescent and ultra-microscopic methods for diag-
nosis, and vector control of fruit tree viruses and phytoplasmas.
SB731 63-8847 978-0-8243-1350-0
Annual review of phytopathology; v.50, 2012.
Title main entry. Ed. by Neal K. Van Alfen et al.
Annual Reviews, ©2012 494 p. $89.00
This year’s memoir is by Kurt J. Leonard (plant pathology, U. of
Minnesota-St. Paul), and the volume also offers an obituary of pioneer
plant pathologist Arthur Kelman. Articles of about 20 pages then discuss
such aspects of the science as pathogenomics of the Ralstonia
solanacearum species complex, the role of nematode peptides and other
small molecules in plant parasitism, new grower-friendly methods for
monitoring plant pathogens, gall midges (Hessian flies) as plant
pathogens, and receptor kinase signaling pathways in plant-microbe
interactions.
SB731 2011-938425 978-0-89054-399-3
Hungry planet; stories of plant diseases.
Schumann, Gail L. and Cleora J. D’Arcy.
Am. Phytopathological Soc., ©2012 294 p. $65.00 (pa)
For students of botany, plant pathology, agriculture, resource economics,
and other disciplines, Schumann (Marquette U., Wisconsin) and D’Arcy
(U. of Illinois-Urbana-Champaign) present case studies of plant diseases
that have affected humans, considering the biology both of the crop plant
and the pathogen. The topics include the Irish potato famine and the
birth of plant pathology, the single-cell pathogens bacteria, underground
–276–
soilborne pathogens, fungi in food as natural poisons and gourmet deli-
cacies, and viruses and viroids. Update from Schumann’s 1991 Plant
Diseases: Their Biology and Social Impact.
SB942 978-0-12-386899-2
Manual of techniques in invertebrate pathology, 2d ed.
Title main entry. Ed. by Lawrence A. Lacey.
Elsevier/Academic Press, ©2012 493 p. $149.95 (pa)
Lacey, a consultant, provides insect pathologists, biologists, entomologists,
students, biotechnology personnel, and government regulators with a
manual on techniques for working with major groups of ento-
mopathogens, and their discovery, diagnosis, identification, isolation,
propagation/cultivation, quantification, bioassay, and storage. In 15
chapters, researchers in virology, microbiology, mycology, nematology,
biological control, and pest management from North America, Europe,
and New Zealand focus on how to use techniques, but include infor-
mation on why they are used and literature and recipes for media, fixa-
tives, and stains. Also provided are chapters on safety testing of
entomopathogens in mammals and complementary techniques for the
preparation of entomopathogens and diseased specimens for more
detailed study using microscopy and molecular techniques. This edition
integrates molecular methods that cover new techniques and subjects in
invertebrate pathology. It presents molecular techniques for identifi-
cation, determination, phylogeny, mode of action and virulence factors,
factors responsible for resistance to entomopathogens, recombinant tech-
nology, and other aspects of invertebrate pathology, and extends basic
techniques with specific procedures for research on entomopathogens.
Academic Press is an imprint of Elsevier.
SB950 2012-029754 978-1-60107-785-1
IPM in practice; principles and methods of integrated pest
management, 2d ed.
Flint, Mary Louise. (Publication 3418)
U. of California ANR, ©2012 292 p. $35.00 (pa)
Flint (U. of California Agriculture and Natural Resources, Statewide IPM
Program ) describes pests commonly seen in California and applies inte-
grated pest management methods to agricultural crops, urban land-
scapes, greenhouses, forests, rights-of-way and other managed
ecosystems. The field guide was written for California PCA licensing
exam preparation but can also be used by growers, landscape managers,
and pest control consultants. Color photographs, recommended websites,
and a glossary are provided.
ANIMAL CULTURE, AQUACULTURE, WILDLIFE
MANAGEMENT
SF203 2012-009292 978-0-470-95952-7
Feed efficiency in the beef industry.
Title main entry. Ed by Rodney A. Hill
John Wiley & Sons, ©2012 311 p. $149.95
Contributors from universities and agencies, mostly in North America
but also Australia and Spain, offer a range of perspectives on how to
reduce the cost of feeding cattle for slaughter in light of new scientific
findings, competing economic forces, and tensions within the business.
They include measuring individual feed intake and utilization in
growing cattle, nutrition and feed efficiency of beef cattle, the genetic
improvement of feed efficiency, feed efficiency interactions with growth
and product quality, and epigenetics and effects on the neonate that may
impact feed efficiency.
SF284 2011-938331 978-0-306-82097-7
The rescue of Belle and Sundance; one town’s incredible
race to save two abandoned horses. (reprint, 2010)
Stutz, Birgit and Lawrence Scanlan. (A Merloyd Lawrence book)
Da Capo Press, ©2012 221 p. $22.00
In this heartwarming account, an entire village works together the week
before Christmas to dig a passageway 3,280 feet long through six feet of
snow, in order to rescue two packhorses abandoned on Mount Renshaw
in the Canadian Rockies. Rescuers successfully lead the horses 18 miles
down the mountain to safety, and the book offers updates on their lives
after rescue. Many b&w photos of rescuers and the horses are included.
The book was first published in 2010. Stutz, a horse trainer and jour-
nalist, was a participant in the rescue. Scanlan has written previous
books on horses.
–277–
SF397 2012-008287 978-0-470-65864-2
Applied population and community ecology; the case
study of feral pigs in Australia.
Hone, Jim. (Conservation science and practice series, no. 11)
John Wiley & Sons, ©2012 192 p. $129.95
Hone (applied ecology, U. of Canberra, Australia) integrates the findings
from his research in the Namadgi National Park, other studies of feral
pigs and birds in the Australian high country that have been published
in various journals and books or not at all, and studies of wildlife species
over years or decades conducted in scattered locales and published in
scattered journals. He analyzes all the disparate information in the
context of the scientific discipline of applied ecology. He covers applied
population and community ecology, environment, the population ecology
of feral pigs, ground disturbance and feral pigs, feral pig population
management, community ecology, and management options for the
future.
SF407 978-0-12-382008-2
The laboratory mouse, 2d ed.
Title main entry. Ed. by Hans J. Hedrich.
Academic Press, ©2012 845 p. $299.95
Hedrich (Institute of Laboratory Science, Hannover Medical School,
Germany) brings together 35 chapters by European, Asian, and US sci-
entists to help researchers improve their knowledge about mice used in
research. They address mouse genetics, mutant mice, development, gross
and pathological anatomy, various systems, immunology, behavior,
pathophysiology, neoplasms and infectious diseases, husbandry, method-
ological aspects, alleviation of pain, legal aspects, and procedures for han-
dling and restraint, routes of administration, collection of bodily fluids,
anesthesia, analgesia, euthanasia, imaging, and necroscopy. Along with
revised chapters, this edition includes revised European standards on lab-
oratory animals, and new and updated chapters on genomics, the mus-
culoskeletal system, biological rhythms, bacterial and parasitic diseases,
enrichment, genetic monitoring, and care standards. Translational
aspects of mouse experimentation and basics in experimental mouse
surgery are not covered. Academic Press is an imprint of Elsevier.
SF523 2012-020426 978-1-60358-461-6
Top-bar beekeeping; organic practices for honeybee
health.
Crowder, Les and Heather Harrell.
Chelsea Green Publ. Co., ©2012 175 p. $24.95 (pa)
Crowder, a beekeeper, and Harrell, an organic farmer who studies
multiuse permaculture plantings, show beekeepers, orchardists, gar-
deners, and permaculture practitioners how to keep bees naturally
without using antibiotics to kill bacteria, comb fumigants to kill wax
moths, miticides to kill mites, or fungicides to kill chalkbrood fungus.
They explain the use of top-bar hives, their pros and cons, and design;
the characteristics and roles of bees; beekeeping basics, including
smokers, obtaining bees, hive placement and removal, and transfer from
a Langstroth hive to a top-bar hive; hive management, including
removing old comb, killing bees, and feeding; what happens in each
season; honey, beeswax, and other products; evaluating and raising
queens; problem-solving; and planting for bees.
SF757 2012-010602 978-0-470-65648-8
Practical veterinary diagnostic imaging, 2d ed.
Easton, Suzanne.
Wiley-Blackwell, ©2012 244 p. $59.99 (pa)
Designed as a guide for student and qualified veterinary nurses and as
a reference for veterinary students and veterinarians in general practice,
Easton’s (diagnostic imaging, U. of the West of England) updated text
covers the various diagnostic imaging modalities used in veterinary
practice today. Coverage includes essential mathematics and physics used
in radiology, the basics of atoms, the X-ray tube, diagnostic equipment,
production of X-rays, radiation effects, control of the primary beam and
scatter, radiographic film, intensifying screens and cassettes, processing
the radiographic film, digital radiography, radiographic image quality,
radiation protection, radiography principles, contrast media, small and
large animal radiographic techniques, ultrasound, and advanced imaging
techniques. The material and references have been updated throughout
to reflect advances since publication of the 2002 first edition.
SF769 2012-004866 978-0-8138-1027-0
Veterinary hematology and clinical chemistry, 2d ed.
Title main entry. Ed. by Mary Anna Thrall et al.
Wiley-Blackwell, ©2012 762 p. $99.99
Thrall (pathobiology, Ross U. School of Veterinary Medicine, West Indies)
et al. offer veterinary students, technicians, pathologists, and researchers
a reference on veterinary laboratory diagnostic techniques and
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
interpretation that covers both hematology and chemistry for various
species, including common domestic species, birds, reptiles, amphibians,
and fish. In 37 chapters, veterinary pathologists from the US and New
Zealand also cover general principles of lab testing and diagnosis,
including sample collection, processing, and analysis of lab service
options, and data interpretation and disease diagnosis. All aspects of the
hemogram or complete blood count, bone marrow, hemostasis, and
transfusion medicine are addressed. This edition adds new chapters on
the molecular diagnostics of hematologic malignancies and lipid
pathology; updates to reflect advances in diagnostic instrumentation and
capabilities; revisions to the data interpretation chapter to provide
introductory guidance; revisions to information on diagnostics related to
pathology involving the liver, pancreas, blood proteins, and muscle, and
electrolyte and acid-base pathology; and current information on
immunodiagnostics and laboratory diagnostics of renal, endocrine, and
calcium metabolic pathologies. It removes some procedures that are no
longer used. Clinical case presentations (previously in a supplement) have
been expanded and incorporated.
SF772 2012-002559 978-1-4051-9001-5
Clinical manual of small animal endosurgery.
Title main entry. Ed. by Alasdair Hotston Moore and Rosa Angela
Ragni.
Wiley-Blackwell, ©2012 321 p. $89.99
British and US veterinary surgeons describe how to use endoscopy to
make diagnostic and therapeutic procedures less invasive than with tra-
ditional open surgery. They cover rigid endoscopy, diagnostic and oper-
ative arthroscopy and laparoscopy, thorascopy, urethrocystoscopy and the
female reproductive tract, endoscopy of the upper respiratory tract, otoen-
doscopy of the canine and feline ear, and small exotic animal endo-
surgery.
SF774 2012-005127 978-0-470-65514-6
The consulting veterinary nurse.
Ackerman, Nicola.
Wiley-Blackwell, ©2012 251 p. $49.99 (pa)
This reference is for consulting veterinary nurses who want to lead their
own small-animal nursing clinics. The first part of the book looks at the
role of the nurse in veterinary practice, with material on ethics, the con-
sultation, diagnostic clinics, marketing, and protocol writing. Later parts
give guidelines for conducting specific clinics in areas such as nutrition
and diet, behavioral issues, well pet clinics, and medical clinics.
Appendices offer a diet history sheet, unit conversion tables, and a
glossary. The book is illustrated with b&w photos and includes FAQs,
flow charts, and key points. Ackerman is an award-winning senior vet-
erinary nurse working in the UK.
SF867 2012-016638 978-0-470-95996-1
Blackwell’s five-minute veterinary consult clinical
companion; small animal dentistry, 2d ed.
Lobprise, Heidi B.
Wiley-Blackwell, ©2012 490 p. $99.99 (pa)
Lobprise supplies clinicians and students in veterinary medicine with a
quick reference on dentistry. Presenting information in an outline format,
she covers periodontal probing, transillumination, intraoral radiology,
complete dental cleaning, root planing, gingival flaps, extraction tech-
nique, oral and dental diseases, enamel and dentin problems, endodontic
disease, neoplasia, trauma, disorders prevalent in felines, and salivary
and other special problems. This edition has been revised to include
more color images, general updates from recent developments, and revi-
sions to the diagnostic and techniques sections, as well as more infor-
mation the oral exam and charting, with corresponding illustrations. It
adds new information on exotic pets such as ferrets, hedgehogs, prairie
dogs, and chinchillas; oral pain management; home care; the technician
in dentistry; and business aspects. It includes all of the dentistry chapters
from the fifth edition of the Five-Minute Veterinary Consult: Canine and
Feline and relevant chapters from other sections.
SF918 2012-001960 978-3-8055-9892-7
Potency testing of veterinary vaccines for animals; the
way from in vivo to in vitro; proceedings.
Potency Testing of Veterinary Vaccinces for Animals; The Way from
Vivo to in Vitro (2010: Langen, Germany) Ed. by Carmen Jungbäck.
(Developments in biologicals; v.134)
S. Karger, AG, ©2012 164 p. $124.00 (pa)
Jungbäck (Paul-Ehrlich-Institut, Germany) draws together 19 papers pre-
sented at the International Scientific Workshop, “Potency Testing of
Veterinary Vaccines: The Way from in Vivo to in Vitro,” in Langen,
Germany, in December 2010. Noting that efforts have been made to
modify tests of inactivated vaccines on laboratory animals to reduce the
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
number of required animals and the stress imposed on them or to
replace these experiments with in vitro tests, individuals from industry,
academia, and regulatory authorities from North America and Europe
discuss the current state of the 3R concept (reduction, refinement, and
replacement of animal use); examples of its implementation, such as with
rabies vaccines, inactivated erysipelas vaccines, veterinary clostridial vac-
cines, and inactivated Newcastle disease virus antigen; and existing bar-
riers, including adequate validation of potency tests and assay
development and implementation. They address existing replacement
approaches and their advantages and disadvantages, such as the consis-
tency approach, and new ways to ensure the quality of veterinary
immunological medicinal products.
SF951 2012-014116 978-0-470-95877-3
Advances in equine laparoscopy.
Title main entry. Ed. by Claude A. Ragle. (Advances in veterinary
surgery)
Wiley-Blackwell, ©2012 344 p. $149.99
In this color-illustrated handbook for equine surgical specialists and cli-
nicians, international contributors detail techniques and applications of a
wide range of laparoscopic and thoracoscopic procedures. Following a
review of basic skills and equipment for equine laparoscopy, clinical tech-
niques are grouped by body system, in sections on the standing horse
and the recumbent horse. Each section includes a chapter on sedation
and analgesia. The operative chapters each follow a general framework,
making it easy to find information. The book includes color surgical
photos on every page, and a companion website offers eight video clips
demonstrating techniques. Ragle teaches veterinary medicine at
Washington State University.
SF959 2012-010186 978-0-470-65871-0
Handbook of equine parasite control.
Reinemeyer, Craig R. and Martin K. Nielsen.
Wiley-Blackwell, ©2013 210 p. $69.99 (pa)
Reinemeyer, a veterinarian who is associated with a research organi-
zation that conducts pharmaceutical studies to facilitate the development
of new veterinary drugs, and Nielsen (veterinary science, U. of Kentucky)
offer a guide for equine veterinarians, students, technicians, nurses,
researchers, horse owners, and farm and stable managers that focuses on
the evidence-based control of parasites. They review the basic biology of
internal parasites, the pathogenic mechanisms specific to helminth para-
sites of the horse, and the environmental, host, and parasite factors influ-
encing their transmission, then discuss the general principles of parasite
control; diagnostic and assessment tools for interpreting clinical, his-
torical, and laboratory information; and 20 case studies.
SF985 2012-360035 978-1-4377-0660-4
The cat; clinical medicine and management.
Title main entry. Ed. by Susan E. Little.
Elsevier Saunders, ©2012 1398 p. $189.00
This clinically focused reference offers comprehensive coverage beginning
with the fundamentals such as physical features of a cat-friendly
practice, feline-friendly handling, guidelines and precautions for drug
therapy, fluid therapy, and analgesia. Distinguishing this new reference
is coverage of some topics only lightly addressed in other texts including
clinical advances resulting from the mapping of the feline genome,
behavioral problems, management of concurrent and chronic diseases,
and zoonotic agents and implications for human health, among others.
Chapters also address nutrition, internal medicine, infectious diseases,
reproduction, and pediatrics. Editor Little’s cat-friendly practice is located
in Ottawa, Canada. She has shaped the work of section editors and con-
tributors based in the US, Canada, Australia, and the result is an author-
itative, clearly organized, up-to-date reference.
SF996 2012-010183 978-1-4051-9905-6
Infectious diseases of wild mammals and birds in
Europe.
Title main entry. Ed. by Dolores Gavier-Widén et al.
Wiley-Blackwell, ©2012 554 p. $169.99
Fifty-five European academics and researchers contribute 43 chapters to
the first text to describe in detail the infectious diseases of wild animals
and wild birds in Europe. It is intended as a reference to help biologists,
ecologists, veterinarians, epidemiologists, and wildlife rehabilitators
understand the health of wildlife populations. Organized by infection
type, the chapters present background information on aspects of each
disease or group of pathogens and the distinctive nature of the diseases
as they occur in Europe; focus on the European-wide situation, including
geographical distribution and regulations for diagnosis and control of the
diseases; describe the latest advances in veterinary diagnostics, wildlife
–278–
vaccination and disease surveillance; provide practical information on
disease spread, diagnostic sampling requirements, diagnostic methods,
and EU reference laboratories; and describe disease control measures.
SF997 2012-015449 978-1-4398-6728-0
Pocket handbook of nonhuman primate clinical medicine.
Title main entry. Ed. by Angela Courtney.
CRC Press, ©2013 233 p. $99.95 (pa)
For veterinarians, Courtney, a veterinarian, offers a spiral-bound pocket
guide containing 12 chapters on clinical medicine and nonhuman pri-
mates. Other veterinary specialists based in the US, Peru, and Australasia
present information in an outline format on anesthesia; pain man-
agement; wounds and wound care; basic fluid therapy; management of
gastrointestinal/abdominal conditions; thorax conditions; bacterial,
mycotic, viral, and parasitic infections; gestational concerns; dentistry;
dermatologic and ophthalmologic conditions; managing behavior
problems; and drug dosages. The book was written from the perspective
of treating the rhesus macaque, and specific treatments for other species
are noted.
SF997 2012-001020 978-1-78064-006-8
Veterinary treatment of llamas and alpacas.
Duncanson, Graham R.
CABI Publishing, ©2012 248 p. $145.00
British farm animal veterinarian Duncanson explains to colleagues the
medical care of New World camelids—llamas bred as pack animals and
alpacas for their fiber. Among his topics are nutrition and metabolic dis-
eases, sample taking and simple diagnostic tests, medicine and surgery
of the gastroenteric system, medicine and surgery of the neurological
system, skin conditions, and zoonotic diseases. Distributed in the US by
Stylus Publishing.
SH135 2012-470025 978-1-888807-21-9
Biofloc technology; a practical guide book, 2d ed.
Avnimelech, Yoram.
World Aquaculture Society, ©2012 272 p. $70.00 (pa)
Avnimelech (emeritus, agricultural engineering, the Technion, Israel)
explains to practitioners and researchers a technology that was developed
during the middle 1990s to raise the productivity of aquaculture, keep
the system expenses down, avoid damaging the environment, and con-
serve water and other resources. Among his topics are microbial
processes and communities relevant to aquaculture, feeding with
bioflocs, optimizing microbial activity in extensive ponds, aeration
placement, and pond construction. The second edition adds contributed
chapters on shrimp production, feed pellets, and biology. No index is
provided.
SH155 2012-007484 978-0-470-96008-0
Functional genomics in aquaculture.
Title main entry. Ed. by Marco Saroglia and Zhanjiang (John) Liu.
John Wiley & Sons, ©2012 420 p. $199.95
Functional genomics involves developing and applying genome-wide
experimental approaches to assess gene function by making use of the
information and resources provided by structural genomics, which is
concerned with the sequence of genes. Biologists and geneticists survey
the field’s application in fish farming. Among the topics are genomics
resources for functional genomics in aquaculture species, transcriptomics
of the compensatory growth in European sea bass Dicentrarchus labrax,
genomic response to stress challenges in fish, next-generation sequencing
and functional genomic analysis in rainbow trout, and applying func-
tional genomics in mollusks aquaculture. Co-published with the World
Aquaculture Society.
SK361 2012-002461 978-1-4214-0654-1
Human dimensions of wildlife management, 2d ed.
Title main entry. Ed. by Daniel J. Decker et al.
Johns Hopkins U. Press, ©2012 286 p. $85.00
This textbook for wildlife management students can also be used as a ref-
erence by professionals in wildlife management. It explains principles
underlying the human dimensions of wildlife management and presents
applications of principles across many facets of wildlife conservation
around the world. Unique to the text is coverage of governance, decision
making, and ethical analysis. The first part of the book defines key con-
cepts and introduces stakeholders in wildlife management. The second
part looks at concepts of social psychology, sociology, and economics to
show how wildlife is valued and how society interprets humans-wildlife
interactions, and the third part outlines the management process. The
fourth part of the book explains how to plan a human dimensions study
using common social science methods, and the fifth part looks at the
human dimension in management of abundant and scarce wildlife. A
–279–
final section considers ethics and the need for continual learning. The
book’s many real-life case boxes are illustrated with b&w photos. Decker
teaches natural resources at Cornell University.
SK361 978-1-920544-75-1
Save me from the lion’s mouth; exposing human-wildlife
conflict in Africa.
Clarke, James.
Struik Nature, ©2013 246 p. $20.00 (pa)
Author Clarke, a conservation writer, is a co-founder of South Africa’s
Endangered Wildlife Trust. Writing for general readers, he uncovers the
roots of conflicting wildlife polices throughout Africa, revealing that
African countries often create wildlife policies to please donor nations
rather than to address serious situations. The author explains how this
practice has a negative impact on rural Africans, including those living
near game reserves in Africa, and even on wildlife. He describes the
guerilla war between game reserve guards and armed poachers and
hunters, who view national parks and game reserves as places set aside
for the entertainment of rich outsiders. He relates harrowing near-escapes
and tragedies when humans, including tourists and guides, have been
attacked by wild animals. The author advocates compensation for rural
people for loss of livestock, crops, and human lives to the wild animals
that are protected by government policies. The book is distributed in the
US by International Publishers Marketing.
TECHNOLOGY (GENERAL)
T10 2012-028554 978-1-4398-6159-2
Technical documentation and process.
Whitaker, Jerry C. and Robert K. Mancini.
CRC Press, ©2012 179 p. $49.95 (pa)
Whitaker, a broadcast engineer who is associated with a nonprofit organ-
ization that develops voluntary standards for digital television, and
Mancini, a business, estate planning, and educational services consultant
who has worked with the software and aerospace industries, help tech-
nical managers develop appropriate process steps and documentation for
projects and products in their organizations. They draw on previous
books by coauthor Whitaker and their experience to provide guidelines,
suggestions, and examples to help readers develop the steps and struc-
tures needed to accomplish their goals and create their own specific
plans. They address documentation strategies for a project or product;
the development of a style guide to serve as the foundation on which doc-
uments are built, with document templates; the organization of meetings;
systems and concurrent engineering; disaster planning and recovery; and
standards and references.
T11 978-0-12-384727-0
Scientific papers and presentations, 3d ed.
Davis, Martha et al.
Academic Press, ©2012 342 p. $44.95 (pa)
Davis (agronomy), Kaaron Davis (agricultural, food and life sciences),
and Marion Dunagan (business, all U. of Arkansas) offer fledgling sci-
entists advice about the professional communications requirements they
will face as graduate students and working scientists. They cover many
aspects lightly, and refer readers to more specialized treatments for
greater detail. Their topics include organizing and writing a rough draft,
graduate theses and dissertations, publishing data, visual aids for pre-
sentations, and communicating with nonscientists. Previous editions
were published in 1996 and 2004. Academic Press is an imprint of
Elsevier.
T14 2010-941446 978-0-8400-3380-2
Society, ethics, and technology, 4th ed.
Title main entry. Ed. by Morton E. Winston and Ralph D. Edelbach.
Wadsworth Publishing Co., ©2012 467 p. $110.27 (pa)
This is a textbook for standard 15-week undergraduate science, tech-
nology, and society courses, which are designed to provide an interdisci-
plinary bridge between ethics and other humanities, the natural and
social sciences, and engineering. It develops a framework for analyzing
the social, environmental, and ethical implications of contemporary
science and technology, in order to empower students to think critically
about current issues such as Internet privacy, genetic engineering, and
global warming. It begins with historical, social and political, and ethics
perspectives, then applies the principles to such matters as globalization
and economic development; artificial intelligence, robotics, and nan-
otechnology; and population, energy, and climate change. There is no
index. The previous dates cited are 2007 and 2009.
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
T14 2011-941645 978-1-111-82854-7
Technology & the future, 12th ed.
Title main entry. Ed. by Albert H. Teich.
Wadsworth Publishing Co., ©2013 343 p. $93.95 (pa)
The collection is for courses in the history of science and technology, or
science and society courses. The 28 essays cover thinking about tech-
nology, debating technology 1960s style and 21st-century style, climate
change, the new biology, information and communications technology,
and governance and globalization. They are not indexed. The immedi-
ately previous editions were published in 2006 and 2005.
T15 2011-053470 978-0-470-76817-4
Great inventions that changed the world.
Wei, James.
John Wiley & Sons, ©2012 345 p. $49.95
Most books on subjects like Great Inventions that Changed the World are
designed to entertain general readers. This one is a practical introductory
text for people likely to become our next generation of inventors. Author
James Wei is the former president of the American Institute of Chemical
Engineers, and was Dean of Engineering and Applied Sciences at
Princeton. He has also worked as a research scientist in the oil industry,
and has a long list of publications and two U.S. patents. The book was
written for a freshman college course. It will be suitable for students in
engineering, business, and research fields, and also for general readers
interested in history, industry, or invention. In dozens of short, inform-
ative accounts, Wei takes readers through the history of individual inven-
tions and the people who created them: how the inventors came to the
problem and created the invention, and how those inventions were
adopted by manufacturers and accepted by society. The book deals with
technological inventions, but these are broadly defined. Systems of
knowledge and methods of assessment are not included here because
they are not physical objects, but the stone hand-axe, the stirrup, and
clothing dye are as much part of this book as home refrigeration, antibi-
otics, and digital electronics. The author sees world-changing inventions
coming from many eras and cultures, and writes with the practicality
and specificity of a teaching engineer. He divides the book into chapters
based on category: work, domestic life (food, clothing, shelter), health
and reproduction, security, transportation, information, good life, and
future challenges.
T37 978-1-902771-92-2
Industrial archaeology; a handbook.
Palmer, Marilyn et al. (CBA practical handbook; 21)
Council /British Archaeology, ©2012 326 p. $40.00 (pa)
The Council for British Archeology (CBA) is noted as the first organi-
zation to include industrial archeology in the field’s scope, and Palmer
(emeritus, U. of Leicester, UK) as the UK’s first professor of industrial
archeology; the editors are CBA members of the Association for
Industrial Archeology. In the context of the recent English Heritage
‘Industrial Heritage at Risk’ list, efforts to conserve or adaptively reuse
key buildings or sites that established England as the cradle of the
Industrial Revolution are detailed. The volume includes color images of
these buildings (including Irish whiskey distilleries) and related infra-
structures. Distributed in North America by The David Brown Book Co.
T55 978-1-4398-7836-1
Management of hazardous energy; deactivation, de-
energization, isolation, and lockout.
McManus, Thomas Neil.
CRC Press, ©2013 930 p. $129.95
Intended for safety practitioners, this dense handbook provides the
detailed background information needed to understand the technical
rationale behind safety procedures in the industrial maintenance setting.
The author explains how to assess the input, transformation, storage, and
output of hazardous energy generated by physical, chemical, nuclear,
and mechanical processes, and how to create concise procedures for
ensuring worker safety. The human factors that contribute to workplace
accidents are also discussed. Ten appendices survey industry standards,
document personnel qualifications, and describe hazardous conditions
created by electrical systems, mechanical systems, fluid power systems,
and solid material flow.
T57 2012-013145 978-1-4666-2086-5
Meta-heuristics optimization algorithms in engineering,
business, economics, and finance.
Title main entry. Ed. by Pandian Vasant.
Information Science Reference, ©2013 708 p. $195.00
The meta-heuristic hybrid optimization techniques discussed in this col-
lection address the intrinsic difficulty of algorithms and the need to
model uncertainty problems troubling modern industrial, business, and
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
financial systems. Mexican and Iranian contributors describe algorithms
for inventory and supply chain management problems, compare
Lagrangian relaxations of a two stage facility location problem, and
propose an ANN self-tuning frequency control design for an isolated
microgrid. Other topics of the 20 papers include particle swarm for
optimal power flow, the relationship between stock returns and earnings,
robot motion control, generator maintenance scheduling, and weighted
affinity measure clustering for online data mining.
T57 978-3-03785-484-6
Progress in industrial and civil engineering; proceedings;
5v.
Int’l Conference on Civil, Architectural and Hydraulic Engineering
(2012: Zhangjiajie, China) Ed. by Weijun Yang and Qiusheng Li.
(Applied mechanics and materials; vs.204-208)
Trans Tech Publications, ©2012 5025 p. $552.00 (pa)
Five volumes contain something like 800 peer-reviewed papers from a
conference held in China in August 2012, focused on topics of interest to
scientists, engineers, policymakers, and specialists in civil, architectural,
and hydraulic engineering. The theme was “innovation in construction,”
and contributors represented some 30 countries. Broad themes include
geological and geotechnical engineering; structural engineering; tunnel,
subway, and underground facilities; roads and railways; bridges; coastal
engineering; seismic engineering; surveying; cartography and geographic
information systems; monitoring and control of structures; reliability and
durability of structures; disaster prevention and mitigation; traditional
and novel construction materials; heating; gas supply; ventilation; and
mathematical modeling, among other topics. The papers are not indexed.
T57 978-1-84564-620-2
Risk analysis VIII; proceedings.
Int’l Conference on Simulation in Risk Analysis and Hazard Mitigation
(8th: 2012: Brac, Croatia) Ed by C.A. Brebbia. (WIT transactions on
information and communication technologies; v.44)
WIT Press, ©2013 532 p. $474.00
Most of the presentations are among the 43 papers published. They
explore assessing, managing, and mapping risk; preventing, managing,
and controlling hazards; natural hazards and climate change; assessing
vulnerability and resilience; safety and security; and mitigating risk
during evacuation. Among the topics are a dynamic model for assessing
the level of energy security, the advantages of using a geographic infor-
mation system to evaluate risk in highly contaminated sites, constructing
confidence intervals for extreme rainfall quantiles, and the latest three-
dimensional visualization engine room simulators for emergency pro-
cedure training. There is no subject index. The US office of WIT Press is
Computational Mechanics.
T58 2012-015923 978-1-61233-111-9
Being a go-to-tech; how to be both successful and happy
while working in the world of computers.
Zabloudil, Warren C.
Universal Publishers, ©2012 136 p. $25.95 (pa)
Arguing that information technology skills are not innate, Zabloudil, a
veteran IT consultant, offers a personal perspective on essential and neg-
ative attributes for this career path. The Microsoft Certified Solutions
Expert also discusses how to manage job stress, understand the needs of
end-user clients, work as part of a team, and keep up with developments
in the field.
T58 978-0-12-394425-2
Data virtualization for business intelligence systems;
revolutionizing data integration for data warehouses
Van Der Lans, Rick F.
Morgan Kaufmann Pub., Inc., ©2012 275 p. $59.95 (pa)
Data virtualization is a technology that can be used to integrate data
from various sources, including data warehouses, data marts, and pro-
duction databases. This book for those in business and information man-
agement explains how to use data virtualization in business intelligence
systems. Beginning chapters provide an introduction to data virtual-
ization and describe the building blocks of the data virtualization server.
Later chapters cover data virtualization server management and security,
caching of virtual tables, and query optimization techniques. The book
also offers guidelines on deploying data virtualization in business intel-
ligence systems, service-oriented architecture, and master data man-
agement. The book contains b&w screenshots, process diagrams, and
code. Some general knowledge of data warehousing, business intelli-
gence, and database technology is assumed. Van der Lans is a consultant
in data warehousing. Morgan Kaufman is an imprint of Elsevier.
–280–
T58 2012-004721 978-1-118-23013-8
Information overload; an international challenge for
professional engineers and technical communicators.
Title main entry. Ed. by Judith B. Strother et al. (IEEE PCS professional
engineering communication series; 2)
IEEE/Wiley, ©2012 279 p. $49.95 (pa)
Conversations at the 2008 International Professional Communication
Conference in Montreal led to a project to gather perspectives on
information overload from such fields as communication, information,
journalism, linguistics, and psychology. The topics include the evolution
of information overload theories and concepts, the challenge of
information balance in the age of affluent communication, the influence
of culture on information overload, a human-centered approach to
surviving the information deluge, exploring the promise and problems
of visual communication to reduce information overload, and
information overload within organizations and the viability of strategic
communication principles.
T64 978-94-6091-956-5
Project approaches to learning in engineering education;
the practice of teamwork.
Title main entry. Ed. by Luiz Carlos de Campos et al.
Sense Publishers, ©2012 175 p. $49.00 (pa)
In accordance with the Bologna Declaration’s call for more learner-cen-
tered education in the European Union, a group of industrial man-
agement and engineering teachers at the University of Minho in Portugal
started to transform a traditional first-year semester into a project-based
approach based on a theme related to the future professional practice of
the students. The challenges and successes of that now ongoing program
were the highlight of a July 2009 Ibero-American symposium at Minho.
From that event 10 studies here explore such topics as the European
Project Semester as a useful teaching method in engineering education,
design-based learning in mechanical engineering education, and student
assessment in project-based learning. There is no index.
T65 2011-031366 978-1-4398-0078-2
Creating a lean R&D system; lean principles and
approaches for pharmaceutical and research-based
organizations.
Barnhart, Terence M.
CRC Press, ©2013 243 p. $49.95
Where Lean manufacturing exposes barriers to productive work, Lean
research and development helps scientists expose barriers in the inno-
vation space through critical question mapping, value stream mapping,
and the A3 report. Exercises encourage individuals to engage in deep
observation and teams to develop current-state maps, enabling facile
reframing where disconnected bits of knowledge crystallize into new con-
figurations with innovative power.
T73 978-3-03785-347-4
Trends in civil engineering; proceedings; 4v.
Int’l Conference on Structures and Building Materials (2d: 2012:
Hangzhou, China) Ed. by Xiuli Du et al. (Advanced materials research;
vs.446-449)
Trans Tech Publications, ©2012 3939 p. $590.00 (pa)
This four-volume set contains 735 papers from the Second International
Conference on Structures and Building Materials (ICSBM2012), held in
March 2012 in Hangzhou, China. Contributed by engineers mostly from
China, papers consist of case studies and research on new and innovative
ways to achieve sustainable construction practices through the use of
novel building materials and technologies. They address topics related to
civil, bridge, geotechnical, geological, seismic, road and railway, and
hydraulic engineering; heating, gas supply, ventilation, and air condi-
tioning works; disaster prevention and mitigation; monitoring and
control of structures; computational mechanics; construction technology;
and computer simulation and computer-aided design and engineering.
T174 2012-018247 978-1-4398-9323-4
Computational finite element methods in nanotechnology.
Title main entry. Ed. by Sarhan M. Musa.
CRC Press, ©2012 622 p. $159.95
This introduction to basic concepts in the widely used computation
method is for physical and biological scientists and engineers and infor-
mation business managers, but it can also serve as a quick reference for
veterans of nanotechnology. Among the topics are finite element method
for applications in nano-electronics, simulating dislocations and coherent
nanostructures, the finite element modeling of carbon nanotubes and
their composites, applying biomaterials and finite element analysis in
nano-medicine and nano-dentistry, and the design of nano-injection
detectors using finite element modeling.
–281–
T174 2011-293564 978-981-4310-02-4
Nanotechnology in Australia; showcase of early career
research.
Title main entry. Ed. by Deborah Kane et al.
Pan Stanford Publishing, ©2011 350 p. $129.95
One purpose of the volume is to highlight topics in nanoscience that
people just entering the field are interested in and working on, as a har-
binger of what is coming. Another is to allow young researchers to hone
their writing and publishing skills early in their career so they can con-
centrate on the science itself later; the process involved workshops,
courses, and editorial conferences. The topics include nanoplasmonics for
light trapping in solar cells, the theoretical nanoscale design of self-
cleaning coatings, fabricating metal nanoparticles by laser ablation, the
synthesis and application of hollow nanostructured silica, magnetic
nanoparticles for biomedical imaging, and olfactory biosensing.
Distributed in the US by CRC Press.
T174 2011-535715 978-1-926692-73-9
Recent advances in nanotechnology.
Title main entry. Ed. by Changhong Ke.
Apple Academic Press, ©2012 288 p. $149.95
Chemists and other physical scientists review some recent developments
in science and technology at the nanometer scale, with a particular
emphasis on medical applications. Their topics include cancer nanotech-
nology, novel lipid-coated magnetic nanoparticles for in vivo imaging,
monocyte subset dynamics in human atherosclerosis, detecting and selec-
tively destroying breast cancer cells, electrochemical screen-printed
(bio)sensors, and nanoscopic grooving on vesicle walls in submarine
basaltic glass. The 12 chapters are reprinted from journal articles and US
government reports published mostly in 2009. Distributed in the US by
CRC Press, part of the Taylor & Francis Group.
T174 2011-278396 978-0-309-25328-4
A research strategy for environmental, health, and safety
aspects of engineered nanomaterials.
National Research Council.
National Academies Press, ©2012 211 p. $57.00 (pa)
In light of the rising use of nanomaterials, the Environmental Protection
Agency commissioned the National Research Council to form a
Committee to Develop a Research Strategy for Environmental, Health, and
Safety Aspects of Engineered Nanomaterials, which presents a conceptual
framework for a proposed research strategy to address these aspects of
engineered nanomaterials and identifies research gaps and tools needed.
The report also develops a research plan with short-term and long-term
research priorities, and estimates resources needed to implement it. It
presents a strategic approach for developing the science and research
infrastructure needed to address uncertainties regarding potential risks
of engineered nanomaterials and discusses a framework that focuses on
emerging materials that may pose unanticipated risks and on the prop-
erties of these materials and their influence on hazards and exposure.
Chapters also discuss what is known about environmental, health, and
safety aspects of nanomaterials; tools needed to understand the interac-
tions of these materials with humans and the environment; the recom-
mended timing and costs of research activities; and mechanisms to
ensure effective implementation of the research strategy. The volume
lacks an index.
T174 978-3-527-41141-2
What is what in the nanoworld; a handbook on
nanoscience and nanotechnology, 3d ed.
Borisenko, Victor E. and Stefano Ossicini.
Wiley-VCH, ©2012 601 p. $185.00
Terms, phenomena, regulations, and experimental and theoretical tools
of the nanometer world, are among the subjects of more than 2,300
alphabetical entries. Besides definitions, articles include diagrams,
drawings, equations, graphs, origin and place in science, and references.
Among the topics are biological surface science, distributed-feedback
laser, giant magnetoresistance effect, quantum logic gate, and scanning
ion-conductance microscopy. The cross-referencing is extensive.
T339 2012-025071 978-1-4665-0944-3
Patent fundamentals for scientists and engineers, 3d ed.
Gordon, Thomas T. et al.
CRC Press, ©2013 198 p. $89.95 (pa)
Younger patent attorneys are rotating onto the writing team as the
original ones age and, in Gordon’s case, die. This edition addresses the
September 2011 American Leahy-Smith America Invents Act, particularly
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
looking at its definition of what a patent is, how one is obtained and
enforced, and the recent changes through statute or case law litigation.
The overview of the patent system can be used by individual inventors
or by members of the scientific and business community such as super-
visors and managers as well as scientists and engineers. Among the
topics are patents as intellectual property, the US and Canadian patent
systems, the patent document as technical literature, the importance of
record keeping and patents around the world. No dates are cited for pre-
vious editions.
T385 978-1-4493-2357-8
WebGL; up and running.
Parisi, Tony.
O’Reilly Media, Inc., ©2012 211 p. $34.99 (pa)
A pioneer of three-dimensional standards for the Web, Parisi explains a
standard that began gaining popularity in 2009 and by 2012 looked like
it was here to stay, unlike the many before it that had proven ephemeral.
Based on the same graphics used in smartphones and tablets, he says,
WebGL brings three dimensions to the browser, providing a JavaScript
interface to the graphics hardware on the machine that allows pro-
grammers to create three-dimensional games, databases, advertisements,
and other products. The tutorial walks through the first WebGL program,
graphics, animation, interaction, integrating two and three dimensions,
WebGL in production, and first game.
ENGINEERING (GENERAL, CIVIL)
TA158 2012-009722 978-1-4666-1999-9
Challenging ICT applications in architecture, engineering,
and industrial design education.
Wang, James.
Engineering Science Reference, ©2013 237 p. $175.00
How does the constantly developing array of information and communi-
cation technologies fit into the life of education in design and in the
practice of architects and engineers, asks architecture educator Wang. He
provides answers, or at least thoughts, both for designers and for edu-
cators. His topics include articulating design education, pedagogy and
curriculum in architecture and engineering, reviewing engineering and
introducing industrial designers, complexity theory revisited, and design
and virtual reality.
TA160 2011-276959 978-0-309-22143-6
Frontiers of engineering; reports on leading-edge
engineering from the 2011 symposium.
National Academy of Engineering of the National Academies.
National Academies Press, ©2012 161 p. $45.00 (pa)
Every year the symposium brings together 100 young leaders in engi-
neering to share their cutting-edge research and technical work; the 2011
incarnation was held in September at a corporate headquarters in
California. Extended summaries of 15 presentations were selected for
publication. They cover additive manufacturing, semantic processing,
engineering sustainable buildings, and neuroprosthetics. There is no
index.
TA164 978-3-527-33183-3
Synthetic biology; industrial and environmental
applications.
Title main entry. Ed. by Markus Schmidt.
Wiley-Blackwell, ©2012 240 p. $99.95
Going beyond garden variety biotechnology, synthetic biology subjects
biological systems to engineering principles such as standardization,
modularization, hierarchies of abstraction, and decoupling design and
fabrication. Contributors from biological and other sciences here assess
a selected number of promising commercial and environmental applica-
tions enabled by synthetic biology. They cover biofuels, bioremediation,
biomaterials, other developments in synthetic biology such as the eco-
nomic potential and environmental impacts, and regulatory frameworks.
TA167 2012-028471 978-1-4398-5745-8
Neuroadaptive systems; theory and applications.
Title main entry. Ed. by Magdalena Fafrowicz, Tadeusz Marek,
Waldemar Harwowski and Dylan Schmorrow. (Ergonomics design and
management; theory and applications)
CRC Press, ©2013 364 p. $129.95
Appropriate for neurologists as well as others involved in the medical
field, this review of the emerging study of neuroadaptive systems, or the
study of neural processing systems in the brain, is divided into two sec-
tions. The first section comprises essays considering the understanding
of neural network functioning, while the second examines the challenges
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
and applications of neuroadaptive systems. Essays explore neural mech-
anisms, cybernetics, controls, and frameworks; electroencephalography;
brain-computer interfaces; systems modeling language and dynamics;
and neuroethics as well as other topics. Contributors include experts in
the fields of industrial engineering, psychology, economics, neuroer-
gonomics, and brain and cognitive science. The volume makes extensive
use of figures, charts, and diagrams.
TA169 2012-024378 978-1-84821-413-2
Supervision and safety of complex systems.
Title main entry. Ed. by Nada Matta et al.
ISTE/Wiley, ©2012 335 p. $165.00
In April 2007, the French Ministry of Higher Education and Research
founded a research group on supervision, safety, and security of large
systems in order to compile and generalize the research being conducted
in various disciplines. Members are from a number of universities and
companies, and here share some of their findings. The topics include
towards fourth-generation nuclear reactors, the diagnosis of systems with
multiple operating modes, multitask learning for the diagnosis of a
machine fleet, a dynamic learning-based approach to the surveillance
and monitoring of steam generators in prototypes fast reactors, and an
influence diagram-based approach to integrating human and organiza-
tional factors into the benefit-cost-deficit risk analysis model.
TA170 2012-021336 978-1-4398-5351-1
Engineering for sustainability.
Mathaisel, Dennis F.X. et al. (Sustaining the military enterprise)
CRC Press, ©2013 498 p. $89.95
In a third volume of the series on sustaining the military, Mathaisel
(management science, Babson College), Joel M. Manary (Massachusetts
Institute of Technology), and reliability and maintainability consultant
Ned H. Criscimagna explore how to engineer an enterprise or a product
for sustainability. They address the problems that military services are
emphasizing the need to reduce costs and improve readiness, and the
increasing international competition and rising customer expectations for
economical and easily maintained military products. Among their topics
are structuring a sustainability engineering program, sustainability engi-
neering methodology, tailoring sustainability engineering processes, sus-
tainability analysis, and assessing sustainability capability maturity.
TA174 978-3-03785-441-9
Frontiers of mechanical engineering and materials
engineering (MEME 2012); proceedings; 2v.
International Conference on Frontiers of Mechanical Engineering and
Materials Engineering (2012: Hong Kong) Ed. by Wen-Pei Sung et al.
(Applied mechanics and materials; v.184-185 )
Trans Tech Publications, ©2012 1685 p. $414.00 (pa)
In this two-volume set of papers from a July 2012 conference,
researchers, engineers, academics, and industrial professionals share the
latest research results and development activities in mechanical and
materials engineering. Volume 1 is devoted to mechanical science and
engineering, with chapters on subjects such as friction properties of
concave laser-textured surfaces, calculation of rigid-body motion of inte-
grated raft isolation systems, effects of cooling air on turbine blade per-
formance, and flow field analysis and numerical simulation for dynamic
filtration with rotating disks. Volume 2 contains sections on materials
science and engineering, and on mechatronics engineering. Topics
treated include curing kinetics of phenol formaldehyde resin modified
with sodium silicate, knitted fabric made of jutecell fiber, an ESD simu-
lator console, design of a device to measure gun wall temperatures, and
control of inverse system decoupling.
TA183 2012-003455 978-0-470-67299-0
Engineering project appraisal; the evaluation of
alternative development schemes, 2d ed.
Rogers, Martin and Aidan Duffy
Wiley-Blackwell, ©2012 378 p. $65.00 (pa)
Engineer and town planner Rogers and specialist in the finances of
renewable energy Duffy (both Dublin Institute of Technology) present a
textbook for a course on economic and non-economic evaluation tech-
niques required to assess competing engineering projects, a skill that civil
engineers are increasingly being called to display. The topics include
basic tools for economic appraisal, equivalent annual worth computa-
tions, the economic analysis of renewable energy supply and energy effi-
cient projects, multi-criteria analysis, and concordance techniques.
–282–
TA190 2012-019880 978-0-7844-1238-1
Managing gigaprojects; advice from those who’ve been
there, done that.
Title main entry. Ed. by Patricia D. Galloway et al.
Am. Society of Civil Engineers, ©2013 437 p. $120.00
For investors, senior executives, board members, and others, Galloway et
al., who are associated with an international management consulting
firm and have experience in project management, risk management, and
dispute resolution for megaprojects and gigaprojects in the construction
industry, assemble a group of financiers, owners, program managers,
consultants, designers, contractors, and lawyers from around the world
to share lessons learned and best practices for the planning, design, con-
struction, and delivery of construction and engineering megaprojects,
which cost more than one billion dollars, to apply them to gigaprojects
that cost more than 10 billion dollars. The first 12 chapters discuss gov-
ernance, risk, international investment and transparency, project delivery
methodologies, international financing and construction consortia,
public-private partnerships, the program manager’s role, public-private
financing in transportation projects, project control systems, pro-
curement and construction issues, culture and ethics in a multinational
megaproject, and dispute resolution. The second section consists of seven
chapters by construction professionals who detail projects in the Middle
East, Brazil, Asia, Australia, Europe, and North America and strategies
for success.
TA190 2012-018961 978-0-321-81574-3
Mastering the requirements process; getting requirements
right, 3d ed.
Robertson, Suzanne and James Robertson.
Addison Wesley Professional, ©2013 541 p. $64.99
The authors, consultants in system building, describe their own set of
requirements techniques and explain how to apply them to software
development. Step-by-step directions with many examples and templates
show how to assemble a complete process for discovering, verifying, and
documenting software requirements. Each chapter covers an activity of
the process, or some aspect of requirements gathering that is needed to
complete the activity. The book is written to be understandable even to
non-experts and offers a visual orientation with many process diagrams
and whimsical illustration, plus margin definitions, quotes, cross
references, and suggested reading on every page. About 120 pages of
appendices provide requirements specification and stakeholder
management templates. This third edition reflects new techniques for
software development.
TA219 2012-029642 978-0-7844-1246-6
Guidelines for forensic engineering practice, 2d ed.
Title main entry. Ed Joshua B. Kardon.
Am. Society of Civil Engineers, ©2012 127 p. $60.00 (pa)
Written for civil engineers, including structural and geotechnical engi-
neers, this volume outlines the technical, ethical, business, and legal com-
ponents of the practice of forensic civil engineering in the US. It covers
the competencies and qualifications of forensic engineers, including
issues of advocacy, objectivity, and bias; the standard of care of engi-
neers; investigations and reports; ethics, including the American Society
of Civil Engineers Code of Ethics and conflicts of interest, expert
opinions, fees, time constraints, reporting unethical practices, and other
sanctioning processes; the legal forum, such as the role of the forensic
engineer as an expert witness and interactions with those in a lawsuit
and in non-adjudication forums, and the rules of evidence and case law
that affect the qualification of witnesses and admissibility of testimony;
and business and management aspects, such as contracts, insurance, and
compensation. This edition takes into account changes to design codes
and standards, construction safety regulations, investigation and analysis
tools, and dispute resolution rules and procedures.
TA330 2012-023358 978-1-4496-7977-4
Advanced engineering mathematics, 5th ed. (online access
included)
Zill, Dennis G. and Warren S. Wright. (Jones & Bartlett learning series
in mathematics)
Jones & Bartlett, ©2014 1000 p. $266.95
Zill and Wright (both Loyola Marymount, Los Angeles) present mathe-
matical topics that are either needed or useful in courses in science and
engineering or in subsequent careers in these areas. Such courses and
careers vary over time and institution, they admit, so they have to guess
sometimes what is going to be most important. They cover ordinary dif-
ferential equations; vectors, matrices, and vector calculus; systems of dif-
ferential equations; Fourier serves and partial differential equations; and
complex analysis. The particular reason for this new edition was to add
–283–
new problems and applications throughout the text, and to replace a few
practical problems that some instructors objected strongly to. Online
access is included in the price.
TA345 2012-025544 978-0-321-88894-5
Model-based engineering with AADL; an introduction to
the SAE Architecture Analysis and Design Language.
Feiler, Peter H. and David P. Gluch. (SEI series in software engineering)
Addison-Wesley, ©2013 468 p. $49.99
Software engineers Feiler (Carnegie-Mellon U.) and Gluch (Emory-Riddle
Aeronautical U.) introduce the language as an effective tool for model-
based engineering of software system architectures. The text provides suf-
ficient detail that readers can development and analyze basic system
models, and a foundation upon which to develop expertise. Writing for
graduate and advanced undergraduate students and practitioners in
software engineering, they discuss such topics as modeling and analysis
with the Architecture Analysis and Design Language (AADL), software
components, composite and generic components, system flows and
software deployment, and extending the language.
TA345 2012-005856 978-1-4398-5429-7
Numerical and analytical methods with MATLAB for
electrical engineers.
Bober, William and Andrew Stevens. (Computational mechanics and
applied analysis)
CRC Press, ©2013 374 p. $109.95
Bober (civil engineering, Florida Atlantic U.) and Stevens, an engineering
consultant specializing in electrical hardware and software, offer a
textbook to guide students in the laboratory project assignments that are
typically part of undergraduate courses in computer applications for
engineers. Their topics include numerical methods for electrical engi-
neers, roots of algebraic and transcendental equations, the numerical
integration of ordinary differential equations, Fourier transforms and
signal processing, and optimization.
TA347 2012-011745 978-1-119-94050-0
Finite elements; computational engineering sciences.
Baker, A. J.
John Wiley & Sons, ©2012 259 p. $120.00
Baker (emeritus, engineering science, U. of Tennessee) develops discrete
implementations of Weak Statement theory and modern finite element
discrete algorithms for a variety of problem statements in the computa-
tional engineering sciences. The classes of problems are heat conduction,
structural mechanics, mechanical vibrations, heat transfer with con-
vection and radiation, fluid mechanics, and heat and mass convective
transport. This text supersedes the 1991 Finite Elements 1-2-3, he says.
Computer lab exercises in MATLAB can be downloaded from the web
site, which also contains the color illustrations.
TA347 2012-010732 978-1-61197-230-6
From vector spaces to function spaces; introduction to
functional analysis with applications.
Yamamoto, Yutaka.
SIAM, ©2012 268 p. $89.00
Yamamoto (applied analysis and complex dynamical systems, Kyoto U.,
Japan) writes for senior or graduate students who wish to study ana-
lytical methods in science and engineering, and for researchers who are
interested in functional analytic methods. He offers an accessible account
of elementary real analysis from normed spaces to Hilbert and Banach
spaces, with some extended treatment of distribution theory, Fourier and
Laplace analyses, and Hardy spaces, accompanied by some applications
to linear systems and control theory. He assumes readers have taken an
elementary course in linear algebra and basic calculus. The English
version differs in many respects from the Japanese original, published in
1998 by Asakura Publishing.
TA349 978-3-03785-452-5
Applied mechanics and civil engineering II; proceedings.
SREE Workshop on Applied Mechanics and Civil Engineering (AMCE
2012) (2d: 2012: Hong Kong) Ed. by Liquan Xie. (Applied mechanics
and materials; v.188 )
Trans Tech Publications, ©2012 331 p. $166.00 (pa)
These proceedings collect 54 papers presented by academic scientists,
engineers, industry researchers, and scholars based in China, Vietnam,
the Czech Republic, and the US at the Second SREE (Society for
Resources, Environment and Engineering) Workshop on Applied
Mechanics and Civil Engineering (AMCE 2012), held in September 2012
in Hong Kong. They cover theories, methodologies, and techniques
related to applied mechanics and civil engineering, including building
construction materials and engineering applications, hydraulic
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
engineering and water treatment, tunnels and underground structures,
mechanical engineering and instrumentation, building and bridge
structure, civil and transportation engineering, rock and soil mechanics
and geotechnical engineering, and environmental engineering and safety.
TA350 978-3-03785-444-0
Optimization of the mechanical engineering,
manufacturing systems, robotics and aerospace;
proceedings.
Int’l conference on Optimization of the Mechanical
Engineerings...Aerospace (7th: 2012: Mamaia, Romania) Ed. by Adrain
Olaru. (Applied mechanics and materials; v.186)
Trans Tech Publications, ©2012 322 p. $138.00 (pa)
Researchers, scientists, and engineers share their findings and thoughts
regarding optimization in the four areas. Of the 44 papers, 12 were
invited, and discuss such aspects as a spherical ultrasonic motor for a
pipe inspection robot, machining with image recognition using industrial
robots, and the dynamic force-position control of a walking robot’s
motion on a slope. Other topics include the optimal design of the
mechanical component of a photovoltaic tracking mechanism, possibil-
ities for using virtual reality in manufacturing systems, using eye
tracking to evaluate human behavior, and analyzing the nonlinear aero-
elastic behavior of slender wings using a static stall model based on the
Wagner function.
TA357 2012-028458 978-1-4665-0604-6
Mathematical techniques for wave interaction with
flexible structures.
Sahoo, Trilochan. (IIT Kharagpur research monograph series)
CRC Press, ©2013 226 p. $139.95
Interactions between waves and structures are a major branch of fluid
mechanics, says Sahoo (Indian Institute of Technology, Kharagpur), and
assume special significance due to its wide range of application in
marine technology and Arctic engineering. He presents a contemporary
account of various mathematical techniques to solve wave-structure inter-
action problems and to deal with a class of initial value and boundary
values problems associated with Laplace equations satisfying certain
higher-order boundary conditions. His focus is on water waves, he says,
but the underlying mathematical tools can be extended to deal with
physical problems in acoustics, electromagnetic waves, wave propagation
in elastic media, and solid state physics. The material might be of use to
researchers and practitioners in any of those fields, and the book could
serve as an advanced graduate textbook.
TA401 978-3-03785-434-1
Advanced research on material engineering, chemistry,
bioinformatics II; proceedings.
International Conference on Material Engineering, Chemistry,
Bioinformatics (2012: Xi’an, China) Ed. by Helen Zhang and David Jin.
(Advanced materials research; v.531)
Trans Tech Publications, ©2012 661 p. $138.00 (pa)
The 152 papers in this collection were presented during the Second
International Conference on Material Engineering, Chemistry, and
Bioinformatics held in Xi’an, China, in July 2012. The papers are grouped
into three general topic areas: material engineering and its application
technology, biochemical materials, environmental materials, and chem-
istry processing, and applied mechanics in material engineering. Editors
are Zhang (U. of Munich, China) and Jin (for whom no background infor-
mation is given).
TA401 978-1-118-29607-3
Materials processing and interfaces; supplemental
proceedings; v.1.
TMS Annual Meeting & Exhibition (2012: 141st: Orlando, CA)
John Wiley & Sons, ©2012 1024 p. $195.00
Some 120 papers document 10 of the 65 symposia at the conference. They
cover surface engineering: alloyed and composite coatings; mechanical
behavior related to interface physics; nanocomposites; new advances in
synthesis, characterization, and application of layered double hydroxides;
sintering and powder-based materials; biological, electronic, functional,
and structural thin films and coatings; the science and engineering of
light metal matrix nanocomposites and composites; processing, charac-
terization, and properties of titanium; wettability and interfacial phe-
nomena between metals and ceramic/refractory materials; and structural
materials.
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
TA401 2012-405373 978-1-118-29609-7
TMS 2012 141st annual meeting & exhibition;
supplemental proceedings; v.2: Materials properties,
characterization, and modeling.
Minerals, Metals and Materials Society.
John Wiley & Sons, ©2012 887 p. $195.00
The approximately 120 papers have not been edited or reviewed by con-
ference program organizers, and the opinions and statements are those
of the authors and not necessarily of the editors or staff. Among the
areas considered are computational thermodynamics and kinetics,
defects and properties of cast metals, understanding mechanical behavior
across length scales from the macro to the nano, materials design
approaches and experiences, and ultrasonic fatigue in advanced mate-
rials and systems. Specific topics include the photo-ignition of liquid fuel
spray and solid fuel through carbon nanotubes, fluid flow and inclusion
entrapment in runner steel during ingot casting, eliminating defects in
cast aluminum components by friction stir processing, investigating
polymer composite materials reinforced by hybrid carbon and basalt
fibers, and stochastic geometry and transformation kinetics theories.
TA403 978-3-03785-447-1
Materials processing technology II; proceedings; 4v.
Int’l Conference on Advanced Engineering Materials and Technology
(2d: 2012: Zhuhai, China) Ed. by Xianghua Liu et al. (Advanced mate-
rials research; vs.538-541)
Trans Tech Publications, ©2012 3341 p. $552.00 (pa)
Nearly 700 papers discuss matters in such areas as thin films, materials
forming, welding and joining, mechanical behavior and fracture, the
theory and application of friction and wear, thermal engineering theory
and applications, precision manufacturing technology and measurement,
and the dynamic analysis of processing. A sampling of specific topics
shows the finite analysis and optimizing design of a exhaust system, the
design and manufacturing of a punching die for thickening steel plate,
hydraulic jet fracturing in a shallow reservoir, a gain-adjustable intel-
ligent tracking algorithm, and the intelligent optimization design of a
permanent magnet for lifting rare earth. The four volumes are paged and
indexed together.
TA403 978-3-03785-460-0
Material sciences and technology; proceedings; 2v.
Spring International Conference on Material Sciences and Technology
(MST-S) (2012: Xi’an, China) Ed. by Yue Li. (Advanced materials
research; v.560-561)
Trans Tech Publications, ©2012 1211 p. $414.00 (pa)
This two-volume set presents papers from a May 2012 conference.
Volume 1 presents work on analytical, physical, organic, inorganic, and
catalytic chemistry, biochemistry, and applied chemistry. Some specific
topics include modernization of the production of high-purity quartz
groats from natural quartz, auto-ignition temperature data for selected
ketones, and thermal treatment of new inorganic thermal insulation
board based on expanded perlite. Volume 2 compiles papers in sections
on nanomaterials, materials science, metal, and applications of modeling.
Some specific topics include a mass transfer model for coated urea par-
ticles in a controlling-release process, simulation analysis of springback
for lead frame copper alloy, and the effects of nanofiber diameter on fil-
tration efficiency.
TA403 978-0-12-396989-7
Microstructure-sensitive design for performance
optimization.
Adams, Brent L. et al.
Butterworth-Heinemann, ©2013 410 p. $129.95
Adams (emeritus), David T. Fullwood (both mechanical engineering,
Brigham Young U.), and Surya R. Kalidindi (Drexel U.) argue that
increasing demands for new materials and new characteristics will
require an inversion in the approach, so that empirical methods for
finding new materials give way to modeling and simulation. They
present a mathematically rigorous framework for addressing the inverse
problems of materials design and process design, using a comprehensive
set of hierarchical measures of the microstructure statistics and com-
posite theories that are based on the same description of the
microstructure. Their framework uses highly efficient spectral represen-
tations to arrive at invertible linkages between material structure, its
properties, and the processing paths used to alter the material structure.
–284–
TA405 978-3-03785-474-7
Advanced research on civil engineering and material
engineering; proceedings.
International Conference on Civil Engineering and Material Engineering
(CEME2012) (2012: Wuhan, China). Ed. by Helen Zhang et al.
(Advanced materials research; v.568 )
Trans Tech Publications, ©2012 411 p. $138.00 (pa)
Many of the 90 papers in this collection consider areas where civil engi-
neering and materials engineering overlap, but many others look at
aspects in only one or the other. Among the topics are engineering prop-
erties of peaty soil in Kunming civil engineering, the resistance of struc-
tural optimization in a pipeline elbow in civil engineering, the effective
slab width of a composite cable-stayed bridge under axial force, simu-
lating the cracking behavior for fiber reinforced composite materials with
different inclusion quantity, the influence of heat treatment on the mag-
netism of carbon coated iron nanoparticles, applying carbon fiber rein-
forced materials in sports equipment.
TA405 978-3-03785-459-4
Frontier in information engineering for mechanics and
materials; proceedings.
International Conference on Information Engineering for Mechanics
and Materials (ICIMM 2012) (2012: Hangzhou, China). Ed. by Xiancan
Deng and Yoshinori Hayafuji. (Applied mechanics and materials; v.189 )
Trans Tech Publications, ©2012 510 p. $207.00 (pa)
This proceedings volume contains selected, peer-reviewed papers from a
May 2012 conference, grouped in three sections on materials engineering,
mechanical engineering, and computer aided design, modeling, and
analysis. Specific areas examined are applications of laser welding in the
welding of hot-rolled sheet, fatigue properties of Grade B steel casted by
the resin sand process, and non-destructive testing of wire rope using
magnetic flux leafage. Other topics water flow heat transfer in metal
foams, applications of computer science in materials science, finite
element analysis of temperature field in traction motors, and computa-
tional simulation of failures in brittle materials. B&w images are
included. Deng is affiliated with Hangzhou Dianzi University. Hayafuji is
affiliated with Kwansei Gakuin University, Japan.
TA409 978-3-03785-487-7
Fatigue failure and fracture mechanics; proceedings.
Conference on XXIV Symposium on Fatigue Failure and Fracture
Mechanics (2012: Bydgoszcz-Pieczyska, Poland) Ed. by Dariusz Skibicki.
(Materials science forum; v.726)
Trans Tech Publications, ©2012 243 p. $138.00 (pa)
The conference has been held every second year since 1971. This year’s
sitting produced 34 papers on predicting fatigue life, fatigue properties
of materials, the fatigue of welded structures, temperature and thermo-
mechanical fatigue, multi-axial fatigue, and fatigue crack growth. Among
the topics are the fictitious radius as a tool for estimating the fatigue life
of notched elements, determining the initial stiffness modulus for tra-
becular bone under stepwise load, the impact of laser welding speed on
the mechanical properties of joints in multilayer pipes, estimating the
fatigue life of materials with out-of-parallel fatigue characteristics under
block loading, and a dual-camera experimental system for testing sub-
surface cracks.
TA417 2012-940060 978-0-08-097781-2
Adiabatic shear localization; frontiers and advances, 2d
ed.
Title main entry. Ed. by Bradley Dodd and Yilong Bai. (Elsevier
insights)
Elsevier, ©2012 454 p. $150.00
Dodd (shock physics, U. of London) and Bai (non-linear mechanics,
Chinese Academy of Sciences, Beijing) wrote the 1992 first edition as an
introduction to adiabatic shear bands. They figure they did a good job
because the field has grown so huge that by the time they wanted to
update their book, they needed to call specialists to cover various aspects.
It remains an introduction, they say, but now to a thriving discipline. The
topics include experimental methods, analyzing adiabatic shear bands by
numerical methods, adiabatic shear bands in penetrators and targets,
strain localization in energetic and inert granular materials, and shear
localization in deep geological layers during seismic slip. There is no
index.
TA418 2012-945570 978-1-84569-940-6
Advances in polymer nanocomposites; types and
applications.
Title main entry. Ed. by Fengge Gao.
Woodhead Publishing, ©2012 651 p. $305.00
Scientists and engineers examine the materials, the processes, and the
–285–
applications of filler-enhanced polymer nanocomposite technology, one of
the drivers of nanotechnology development. Looking in turn at types by
fillers, types by base, and applications, they consider such aspects as the
environmental life-cycle assessment of polymer nanocomposites, cellulose
nanoparticles as reinforcement in polymer nanocomposites, polyolefin-
based polymer nanocomposites, soft polymer nanocomposites and gels,
biodegradable polymer nanocomposites, and polymer nanocomposites
for optical applications.
TA418 978-3-03785-480-8
Advanced materials design and mechanics; proceedings.
International Conference on Advanced Materials Design and Mechanics
(ICAMDM 2012) (2012: Xiamen, China). Ed. by Jing Guo. (Advanced
materials research; v.569 )
Trans Tech Publications, ©2012 836 p. $207.00 (pa)
This volume collects 167 papers from the 2012 International Conference
on Advanced Materials Design and Mechanics (ICAMDM 2012), held in
June 2012 in Xiamen, China. The conference brought together scientists,
engineers, academics, and students from Asia, Europe, Iran, and North
America to present research on advanced materials design and
mechanics topics, including materials engineering; manufacturing,
technology, and processing; mechanical engineering; and applied
computer technologies and control. Coverage includes numerical
simulation, prediction behavior, synthesis, structure, measurement,
properties, preparation, fabrication, polymerization, modeling,
simulation, design and dynamic analysis, attenuation, stability analysis,
experimental verification, applications, and other aspects of various
materials and technologies.
TA418 978-3-03785-449-5
Advancement of materials and nanotechnology II;
proceedings.
International Conference on the Advancement of Materials and
Nanotechnology (ICAMN II 2010) (2010: Kuala Lumpur, Malaysia). Ed.
by Norlida Kamarulzaman et al. (Advanced materials research; v.545 )
Trans Tech Publications, ©2012 421 p. $207.00 (pa)
Materials scientists working in a number of different fields trade inno-
vative ideas. The 72 papers, selected from four times that many, cover
nanomaterials and nanostructures; electrochemical materials; biological,
medical, and pharmaceutical materials and technology; metal and alloys;
electrical and electronic materials; polymeric materials and composites;
devices; catalytic materials; semiconducting and superconducting mate-
rials; and other materials. Among topics of the plenary lectures are
single-crystal X-ray structural determination as a powerful technique for
natural products research and drug discovery; functional films of
polymer-nanocomposites by electrospinning for advanced electronics, and
clean energy conversion and storage; and optical properties of silicon
quantum dot potential under pressure effect.
TA418 978-3-527-31024-1
Diffusion in nanoporous materials; 2v.
Kärger, Jörg et al.
Wiley-VCH, ©2012 872 p. $470.00
Kärger (interfacial physics, U. of Leipzig, Germany), Douglas M. Ruthven
(chemical engineering, U. of Maine, US), and Doros N. Theodorou
(chemical engineering, National Technological U. of Athens, Greece) focus
primarily on diffusion in microporous solids such as zeolites. Indeed the
1992 first edition was titled Diffusion in Zeolites and Other Microporous
Solids. Since then, however, several new microporous and mesoporous
materials have been developed, including metal organic frameworks, and
mesoporous silicas, and these have been incorporated into an expanded
reference. It covers theory, molecular modeling, measurement methods,
diffusion in selected systems, and selected applications. Among the topics
are diffusion and non-equilibrium thermodynamics, molecular dynamics
simulations, measuring diffusion by monitoring molecular displacement,
chromatographic and permeation methods of measuring intraparticle
diffusion, and diffusional effects in zeolite catalysts.
TA418 2012-027082 978-1-4665-1179-8
Introduction to thermodynamics of mechanical fatigue.
Khonsari, Michael M. and Mehdi Amiri.
CRC Press, ©2013 150 p. $159.95
Maybe fatigue is a dissipative process and must obey the laws of ther-
modynamics, suggest Khonsari and Amiri (both mechanical engineering,
Louisiana State U.). They hypothesize that the degradation of machinery
components is a consequence of irreversible thermodynamic processes,
that is, a time-dependent phenomenon with increasing disorder. In ther-
modynamics, disorder is characterized by entropy, they say, which
therefore offers a natural measure of component degradation. The new
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
theoretical approach may help simulate and model mechanical fatigue
with more certainly, so that components and machines do not have to be
so overbuilt to be safe.
TA418 2012-357277 978-3-527-41043-9
Optical properties of nanoparticle systems; Mie and
beyond.
Quinten, Michael.
Wiley-VCH, ©2011 488 p. $165.00
Now with a German company, physicist Quinten spent nearly two
decades in academia writing about optical properties of nanoparticles
and related topics. Here he shows how the combination of electrostatics
and solid-state physics that he worked on theoretically, can be used to
analyze inharmonious nanoparticle matter in optical metrology for pho-
tovoltaics, thin films, organic LEDs, and other applications he has run
into in the business world. Mie is Gustov Mie’s 1908 general solution for
scattering and absorption of light from single, isolated spheres based on
Maxwell’s equations. Among the topics are the fundamentals of light
scattering by an obstacle, extension of Mie’s theory, and densely packed
systems.
TA428 2012-017873 978-0-8031-7034-6
ASTM standards for limestone and lime products and
their applications, 2d ed.
Title main entry. Ed. by American Society for Testing and Materials.
ASTM International, ©2012 936 p. $220.00 (pa)
The Society’s committee on lime (C7) was established in 1912, and since
then has been establishing, updating, expanding and augmenting stan-
dards for all aspects of limestone and the many forms and applications
of lime. At its centenary, a new compilation of current standards has
been produced. Among the matters for which standards have been estab-
lished are terminology relating to lime and limestone, specification for
air-entraining admixtures for concrete, applying and finishing gypsum
board, mortars for repairing historic masonry, a test method for the field
measurement of infiltration rate using double-ring infiltometer with
sealed inner ring, and conducting an inter-laboratory study to evaluate
the performance of an analytical method.
TA439 2012-015460 978-0-415-51715-7
Super-high-strength, high performance concrete.
Pu, Xincheng. Trans by Ding Jixin and Neil Milestone.
CRC Press, ©2013 258 p. $155.00
Pu (cement and concrete science, Chongqing U., China) presents the
findings of two research programs he led, which developed 90-150 MPa
super-high strength high-performance concrete. He also describes the
close relationship between modern concrete and modern civil engi-
neering. Among his topics are approaches and principles, analysis of the
pozzolanic effect and strength composition, raw materials, strength and
deformation properties, durability, and test methods.
TA440 2012-017244 978-1-4665-5470-2
Concrete fracture; a multiscale approach.
van Mier, Jan G.M.
CRC Press, ©2013 357 p. $129.95
Since the late 1970s, Van Mier (building materials, Eidgen?ssische
Technische Hochschule Zurich) has focused on concrete fracture, grad-
ually augmenting numerical models based on continuum theory with
theoretical physics. Here he combines the two for professionals and stu-
dents, providing many opportunities for hands-on experimentation while
insisting that no one can learn how a material such as concrete behaves
just by sitting behind a computer. Among his topics are classical fracture
mechanics approaches, lattice geometry and the structure of cement and
concrete, the fracture of concrete in tension, combined tensile and shear
fracture of concrete, a four-stage fracture model, and multiscale modeling
and testing.
TA455 978-1-4557-2598-4
The effect of sterilization on plastics and elastomers, 3d
ed.
McKeen, Laurence. (Plastics Design Library handbook series)
William Andrew Publishing, ©2012 313 p. $330.00
A chemist at a large US chemical company, McKeen updates and expands
Liesl K. Massey’s reference, published in 1994 and 2006, incorporating
the many new plastics that have been introduced, and especially green
materials. The emphasis is on plastic containers for food products, which
are often sterilized together. The topics are food irradiation and medical
sterilization; plastics and polymers; the physical, mechanical, and
thermal properties of plastics and elastomers; styrenic plastics; poly-
esters; polyimides; polyamides (nylons); polyolefins; polyvinyls and
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
acrylics; fluoropolymers; high-temperature/high-performance polymers;
renewable resources and biodegradable polymers; and elastomers.
William Andrew Publishing is an imprint of Elsevier.
TA455 2012-018248 978-1-4398-2779-6
Graphite, graphene, and their polymer nanocomposites.
Title main entry. Ed. by Prithu Mukhopadhyay and Rakesh K. Gupta.
CRC Press, ©2013 609 p. $149.95
Graphene is the basal plane of graphite: a one-atom-thick, two-dimen-
sional honeycomb layer of sp2-bonded carbon. It is of interest in the
digital world because it is a semiconductor with a zero band gap and an
exceptionally high charge mobility. Chemical, mechanical, and other engi-
neers review emerging research trends in graphene-based polymer
nanocomposites. The topics include different characterization techniques
to evaluate graphene and its properties, graphene-based materials for
clean energy applications, graphene-polymer composites for pulse lasers,
synthesizing polymer-functionalized graphene by an atom transfer
radical polymerization route for graphene-based polymer nanocom-
posites, and using functionalized graphene sheets to restrain chemically
driven composite aging.
TA455 978-3-03785-425-9
High-performance ceramics; proceedings; 2v.
China International Conference on High-Performance Ceramics (7th:
2011: Xiamen, China) Ed. by Wei Pan and Jianghong Gong. (Key engi-
neering materials; vs. 512-515)
Trans Tech Publications, ©2012 1850 p. $537.00 (pa)
The first volume in this two-volume set describes novel processes for
manufacturing high-performance ceramics and the properties of ceramic
composites. Researchers from Tsinghua University present a porous
yttria-stabilized zirconia ceramic made by gelcasting with high solid
loading slurry, a direct ink writing assembly for producing 3D functional
ceramics, and porous mullite ceramics reinforced by mullite fiber.
Volume two explores magnetic and optical ceramics, electrical properties,
chemical and energy applications, and bioceramics. Six papers from
Beijing Jiaotong University investigate the static seal of magnetic fluid,
the properties of magnetic fluids for sensor design, and magnetic fluid
dampers. Other topics of the 380 papers from the November 2011 con-
ference include nanoporous hydrophobic silica aerogels, modified
alumina for automobile catalysts, pressureless sintering of silicon nitride
ceramics, and the damping properties of epoxy-embedded piezoelectric
composites.
TA459 978-3-03785-477-8
Dislocation reactions and stacking-fault energies.
Title main entry. Ed. by D.J. Fisher. (Defect and diffusion forum; 329 )
Trans Tech Publications, ©2012 276 p. $138.00 (pa)
This issue of the journal presents 18 original papers on metals, theory,
ceramics, semiconductors, and salt. Another 80 pages are devoted to
abstracts of articles published in other journals, arranged by material.
Among the topics are nanocrystalline nickel-aluminum alloys prepared
by mechanical alloying, the effect of hydrogen on the microhardness of
tin brass heat exchanger tubes, the diffusion problem of new phase
inclusion growth in bounded regions of oversaturated solid solutions,
growing zinc oxide thin films on silicon substrates by atomic layer dep-
osition, and the theoretical investigation of the spin Hamiltonian param-
eters for the tetragonal complex in sodium chloride.
TA472 978-3-03785-489-1
Advances in rolling equipment and technologies II;
proceedings.
Int’l Symposium on Advanced Rolling Equipment and Technologies (2d:
2012: Beijing, China) Ed. by Li Wang et al. (Advanced materials
research; v.572)
Trans Tech Publications, ©2012 421 p. $166.00 (pa)
Metal rolling equipment and technologies are central to making various
projects of plates, sheets, strips, bars, and wires, but designers and man-
ufactures of such equipment are having to deal with scarcity in both
materials and energy. The 73 selected and peer-reviewed papers cover
applied fundamentals, rolling technologies, materials science and pro-
cessing, leveling and shearing technologies, testing technologies, and
related research and development. Among specific topics are new
methods of quality control systems on strip rolling mills, a predictive
model of plate camber, cooling process of die steel during on-line pre-
hardening, design parameters of whole-roll shape detecting roll, and a
multi-level material service safety assessment system.
–286–
TA480 978-3-03785-468-6
Powder metallurgy of titanium; powder processing,
consolidation and metallurgy of titanium; proceedings.
Symposium on Powder Processing and Metallurgy of Titanium (2011:
Brisbane, Australia) Ed. by Ma Qian. (Key engineering materials; v.520)
Trans Tech Publications, ©2012 357 p. $207.00 (pa)
The powder metallurgy of titanium began in 1937, but despite persistent
efforts since then, it has not become an important process for manufac-
turing titanium products. This conference was called as an international
forum to review recent developments in both the fundamental science
and applications; it turned out to be the largest conference on the subject
to date. The 50 selected and peer-reviewed papers cover powder metal-
lurgy titanium alloy design and processing developments; powder pro-
duction; effects of impurities; the metal injection moulding of titanium;
biomedical titanium alloys; titanium composites; forging and equal-
channel angular pressing of titanium; and laser cladding, welding, slip
casting, and other processing developments.
TA487 978-3-03785-473-0
Innovation in materials science II.
Title main entry. Ed. by M. Nadagouda et al. (Key engineering mate-
rials; v.521 )
Trans Tech Publications, ©2012 270 p. $166.00 (pa)
The 18 invited and peer-reviewed papers reflect changes in materials
science and engineering since 2008, when the first volume was produced.
Most of the new materials described are sustainable, biological and
nanometer-scale materials, and glass materials. There is also considerable
emphasis on processes that impact the commercial development of new
materials. Among the topics are nonstationary theory of the thermal
explosion for monomolecular exothermic reactions, the material science
chemistry of electrochemical microsensors and applications for biofilm
research, a green process to prepare hydrophobic and transparent carbon
nanotube-based surfaces, innovations in wood science, waste as a
resource for high value materials, and applying electron backscatter dif-
fraction to shape memory alloys.
TA492 978-0-85709-855-9
IIW recommendations for the fatigue assessment of
welded structures by notch stress analysis; IIW-2006-09.
Fricke, Wolfgang.
Woodhead Publishing, ©2013 41 p. $195.00 (pa)
The notch stress approach to assessing fatigue in welded joints is based
on the highest elastic stress at the weld toe or root, explains Fricke (ship
structural design and analysis, Hamburg U. of Technology, Germany). He
describes the procedures for the test, noting possible variations and their
consequences and implications. He covers the background to the
approach, the numerical analysis of notch stresses, and fatigue strength.
He demonstrates with examples such as a fillet welded cruciform joint,
and spot welds in a automobile door. IWW is the International Institute
of Welding. There is no index.
TA492 2012-017876 978-0-7844-1222-0
Practical approximate analysis of beams and flanges.
Fares, Nabil. (Lecture notes in mechanics; 1)
Am. Society of Civil Engineers, ©2012 378 p. $150.00 (pa)
The new series, produced by the Engineering Mechanics Institute, is
designed to transcend the conventional division of mechanics and
provide a forum for state-of-the-art research that tackles the range of
complex issues facing society today. The emphasis is on the rapid dis-
semination of original reports and surveys, though all the material will
be peer reviewed for accuracy, and indexed to serve as a repository. Fares
begins with a volume presenting a new approach to the approximate
analysis of beams and frames. The approach complements the use of
software but provides a critical role for the structural engineer at a
higher conceptual level where humans are good at recognizing visual
and other patterns. The book could be used in a second course on struc-
tural analysis, he says, but only in conjunction with other texts.
TA492 978-1-4398-7432-5
Wicking in porous materials; traditional and modern
modeling approaches.
Title main entry. Ed. by Reza Masoodi and Krishna M. Pillai.
CRC Press, ©2013 368 p. $149.95
The spontaneous imbibition of liquid into dry porous media—wicking—
is here taken as a problem to be addressed in the processing of textiles,
food, composites, and other materials. There are many different
approaches to analyzing wicking, but until now they have not been
assembled into a single volume where they could easily be compared.
Mechanical engineers, soil scientists, and other researchers discuss such
aspects as wettability and its role in wicking, modeling flows in porous
–287–
media, modeling fluid adsorption in anisotropic fibrous porous media,
evaporation and wicking, a fractal-based approach, and simulating fluid
wicking into porous media with the lattice Boltzmann method.
TA645 978-3-03785-443-3
Structural health monitoring II; proceedings.
International Conference on Smart Diagnostics of Structures (2d: 2011:
Cracow, Poland) Ed. by Tadeusz Uhl. (Key engineering materials; 518 )
Trans Tech Publications, ©2012 458 p. $207.00 (pa)
This volume collects 45 papers from the Second International Conference
on Smart Diagnostics of Structures, held in Krakow, Poland, in November
of 2011. Academic and industry scientists and engineers from Europe,
Australia, and Tunisia working in mechanics, materials engineering,
electronics, software engineering, and signal processing, as well as
system users from civil engineering, aviation, power plants, wind tur-
bines, chemical and petrochemical plants, and railways sectors address
the fields of structural health monitoring, non-destructive evaluation, and
condition monitoring, in addition to advanced measurement techniques,
signal processing theory and applications, and computation methods.
Papers also cover the general theory of technical diagnostics; sensor and
measurement systems in diagnostics; analytical and numerical models of
technical facilities and their application in diagnostics; algorithms,
methods, and diagnostic tools; rotating machinery diagnostics; methods
of detection, location, and assessment of failures; artificial intelligence in
diagnostics; diagnostics of industrial and mechatronic systems;
machineries and industrial systems health management; and economic
aspects of technical diagnostics.
TA647 2012-011741 978-0-470-66644-9
Non-linear finite element analysis of solids and structures,
2d ed.
Title main entry. Ed. by René de Borst, Mike A. Crisfield, Joris J.C.
Remmers, and Clemens V. Verhoosel. (Wiley series in computational
mechanics)
John Wiley & Sons, ©2012 516 p. $105.00
Borst (engineering, U. of Glasgow), Joris J. C. Remmers, and Clemens B.
Verhoosel (both Eindhoven U. of Technology, The Netherlands) update the
late Mike A. Chrisfield’s (Imperial College of Science, Technology, and
Medicine, Britain) classic two volume first edition, published in 1991 and
1997. The goal is to maintain as much as possible of his famed writing
style while providing engineers a broad and accessible introduction to
non-linear finite element analysis that encompasses the newest develop-
ments. They cover basic concepts and solution techniques, material non-
linearities, structural elements, large strains, and advanced discretization
concepts.
TA654 2012-009917 978-1-4666-2029-2
Design optimization of active and passive structural
control systems.
Title main entry. Ed. by Nikos D. Lagaros et al.
Information Science Reference, ©2013 396 p. $180.00
Structural control systems are designed to protect buildings, bridges,
power plants, and other structures during earthquakes, and provide an
alternative to conventional structural design methods. Pivoting on the
concept of optimization, engineers here discuss various aspects of active
and passive versions. Among the topics are the optimal placement of
viscous dampers for seismic building design, the optimal design and
practical considerations of tuned mass dampers, a neuromorphic smart
controller for seismically excited structures, the optimum design of a new
hysteretic dissipater, and multi-objective genetic algorithms for seismic
response controls of structure.
TA654 2012-011742 978-1-118-33962-6
Elements of structural dynamics; a new perspective.
Roy, Debasish and G Visweswara Rao.
John Wiley & Sons, ©2012 426 p. $115.00
Rather than beginning with the single-degree-of-freedom oscillator and
its response features then gradually moving into more complex elements,
Roy (Indian Institute of Science, Bangalore) and Rao, an engineering con-
sultant in Bangalore, present a top-down approach to structural
dynamics. They start with direct mathematical models and computa-
tional treatments of real-life structural systems, while maintaining a
suitable graded exposition with gradually increasing complexity. The text
is suitable for a one-semester undergraduate course in structural
dynamics.
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
TA654 978-1-84564-612-7
Structures under shock and impact XII; proceedings.
International Conference on Structures Under Shock and Impact (12th:
2012: Kos, Greece) Ed. by G. Schleyer and C.A. Brebbia. (WIT transac-
tions on the built environment; v.126)
WIT Press, ©2013 392 p. $344.00
The 34 papers cover impact and blast loading, energy absorbing issues,
interaction between computational and experimental results, aeronautical
and aerospace applications, the response of reinforced concrete under
impact, the response of building facade and components to blast and
impact load, seismic behavior, structural crashworthiness, and nonlinear
numeral analysis. Among the topics are simple models for the pene-
tration of thick targets by rigid projectiles, developing a thermal and
structural design technology for a hermetically sealed oil transformer, the
high-impact force attenuation of reinforced concrete systems, evaluating
seismic loads on elevated storage tanks, and evaluating the Egyptian
seismic code approach to estimating lateral drift. Only authors are
indexed. The US office of WIT Press is Computational Mechanics.
TA654 2012-009848 978-0-7844-1228-2
Wind tunnel testing for buildings and other structures.
Title main entry. Ed. by American Society of Civil Engineers. (ASCE
standard; ASCE/SEI 49-12)
Am. Society of Civil Engineers, ©2012 50 p. $80.00 (pa)
The standards identify minimum requirements for wind tunnel tests to
determine wind loads on, and responses of, buildings and other struc-
tures. They consider windloads for main wind-force-resisting systems
and for individual structural components and cladding of buildings and
other structures. Standard are provided for simulation of wind in
boundary-layer wind tunnels; local and area-averaged wind loads; overall
wind loads excluding aeroelastic effects; aeroelastically active structures;
extreme wind climate; snow load model studies; and accuracy, precision,
and quality assurance. Commentary on each is also included.
TA660 978-3-03785-463-1
Advances in fracture and damage mechanics XI;
proceedings.
International Conference on Fracture and Damage Mechanics
(FDM 2012) (11th: Xian, China) Ed. by Li Qingfen et al. (Key engi-
neering materials; v.525-526 )
Trans Tech Publications, ©2013 634 p. $276.00 (pa)
Researchers from 18 countries traded their recent ideas and findings on
theoretical, computational, and experimental research into fracture and
damage mechanics and structural integrity and durability. The pro-
ceedings contains about 150 papers on such topics as the numerical
analysis of femoral neck angle influence on stress distribution of
cemented Austin Moore hip prosthesis, load influence on the behavior of
micro-cracks in particulate composites, analyzing crack tip fields in
materials with creep behavior, using mesh the superposition technique to
study delaminations in composite thin plates, and mechanical character-
istics of bamboo.
TA681 2012-017947 978-0-415-60388-1
Damage to concrete structures.
De Schutter, Geert.
CRC Press, ©2013 189 p. $59.95 (pa)
De Schutter (structural engineering, Ghent U., Belgium) explains how
damage can occur to concrete structures, arranging the chapter to reflect
the timing of the actions leading to damage. Damage can occur due to
inappropriate design, errors during execution, some mechanisms
occurring during hardening of the concrete, or actions or degradation
mechanisms during the service life of hardened concrete. He describes
the different actions or mechanisms in a fundamental way without too
many physical or chemical details, and illustrates the damage with many
drawings and photographs. The information could be useful to anyone
who builds with or designs for concrete, formulates concrete, or studies
chemical and physical processes.
TA681 2012-032045 978-0-415-56701-5
Failures in concrete structures; case studies in reinforced
and prestressed concrete.
Whittle, Robin.
CRC Press, ©2012 134 p. $100.00
A long veteran of concrete construction in Britain and of European codes
concerning it, Whittle presents case studies of incidents related to
reinforced and prestressed concrete structures. Not all led to failures, and
some mistakes were even caught at the design stage, he says, but all
required some form of remedial action to ensure safety of the structure.
He arranges the problems and failures by cause, among them errors in
structural modeling, inadequate assessment of critical force paths,
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
inadequate understanding of materials’ properties, poor construction,
and deliberate malpractice. A final chapter considers the contributions
of research and development in avoiding failures.
TA684 2012-939824 978-0-85709-531-2
Fundamentals of evaluation and diagnostics of welded
structures.
Nedoseka, A. (Woodhead Publishing in materials)
Woodhead Publishing, ©2012 641 p. $325.00
A specialist in technical diagnostics and non-destructive testing, Nedoseka
(electric welding, National Academy of Sciences, Kiev, Ukraine)
summarizes results in technical diagnostics of structural materials and
of organizations guiding and coordinating this work over a
comparatively short period between the emergnce of technical
diagnostics and the beginning of its development as an independent
field. He covers the temperature field in welding, welding stresses and
strains, the load-carrying capacity of welded structures, diagnostics and
prediction of the residual life of welded structures, acoustic emission
techniques for the analysis of welded structures, and numerical technical
and tests for welded structures.
TA705 2012-418350 978-0-07-178971-4
Geotechnical engineer’s portable handbook; with the 2012
international building code, 2d ed.
Day, Robert W.
McGraw-Hill, ©2012 1088 p. $70.00 (pa)
Day, a geotechnical engineer based in San Diego, Day incorporates the
2012 International Building Code into this second edition of a field ref-
erence for engineers, students, and contractors. It provides geotechnical
and foundation information that is often needed far from desk refer-
ences. The topics include soil and rock classification, permeability and
seepage, pavement and pipeline design, grading and other site
improvement methods, geosynthetics, and the International Building
Code regulations for soils.
TA706 2011-040521 978-0-415-68723-2
True triaxial testing of rocks; proceedings.
TTT Workshop (2011: Beijing, China). Ed. by Marek Kwasniewski et al.
(Geomechanics research series; v.4)
CRC Press, ©2013 367 p. $119.95
One of several scientific events leading up to the 12th International
Congress of Rock Mechanics, the workshop provided a forum for
reviewing and summarizing the most recent experience and knowledge
in true triaxial testing techniques and the mechanical behavior of rocks
under general triaxial loading conditions. The 28 papers cover the areas
of true triaxial testing techniques and procedures; test results: strength,
deformity, failure mode, permeability, acoustic emission, and elastic
wave velocity; failure mechanisms and failure criteria; applications to
geoengineering and geosciences; and miscellaneous topics.
TA710 2012-028464 978-1-4665-5585-3
Analytic methods in geomechanics.
Chau, K.T.
CRC Press, ©2013 437 p. $69.95 (pa)
When he was a graduate student, Chau (geotechnical engineering, Hong
Kong Polytechnic U.) had to take, or sit in on, a number of applied math-
ematics and mechanics courses that were tangential to his field in order
to piece together the necessary background for geomechanics research. If
there had been a book devoted to mathematical theory on geomaterials,
he would have had a much easier time, so he provides that textbook for
his own graduate students. Writing for student or practicing scientists
and engineers who have had some exposure to engineering mathematics
and strength of materials, he explores topics in tensor analysis, elasticity
in two and three dimensions, plasticity, fracture mechanics, viscoelas-
ticity, poroelasticity, and dynamics that are relevant to modeling geoma-
terials. Ice, snow, and even concrete are technically considered
geomaterials, but he stays with soil and rock.
TA710 2012-004274 978-1-119-95155-1
Solutions for soil and structural systems using Excel and
VBA programs. (CD-ROM included)
Sogge, Robert L.
John Wiley & Sons, ©2012 286 p. $120.00
A consulting civil engineer in Arizona and California, Sogge specializes
in interaction between soil and structures. He presents a textbook for stu-
dents and a reference for practicing professional geotechnical and struc-
tural engineers on those aspects of structural analysis and soil mechanics
that are necessary to analyze soil-structure interactions. He also presents
–288–
the basics of the Excel spreadsheet software and Visual Basic for
Applications (VBA) macros. US Customary Standard units of measure are
used.
TA749 2012-011485 978-0-8031-7031-5
ASTM standards on erosion and sediment control
technology, 3d ed.
Title main entry.
ASTM International, ©2012 467 p. $249.00 (pa)
Most of the more than 50 standards in this third compilation come from
the more specific compilations D18, soil and rock, and D35 geosynthetics.
The standards include test methods, material specifications, practices,
and guides. Among the matters they consider are testing the amount of
material in soil finer than number 200 (75 μm) sieve, identifying and
classifying dispersive clay soils by the pinhole test, preparing rock slabs
for durability testing, analyzing the size of particles in natural and man-
made riprap materials, determining the short-term compression behavior
of turf reinforcement mats, measuring nominal thickness of permanent
rolled erosion control products, installing articulating concrete block
revetment systems, and determining the performance of a temporary
ditch check in protecting earthen channels from stormwater-induced
erosion.
TA1005 2012-019049 978-0-7844-1229-9
Sustainable transportation systems; plan, design, build,
manage, and maintain; proceedings.
Asia Pacific Transportation Development Conference (2012: Chongqing,
China) Ed. by Yong Bai et al.
Am. Society of Civil Engineers, 698 p. $200.00 (pa)
The 81 papers in this collection were originally presented during the
Ninth Asia Pacific Transportation Development Conference held in
Chongqing, China, June 29-July 1, 2012. A sampling of general topics
includes: sustainable transportation development, low carbon emissions
and energy saving in transportation, intelligent transportation systems,
advancements in traffic control technologies, work zone safety, design
and construction of bridges and tunnels, and geotechnical design and
construction. Editors are Bai (U. of Kansas), Ping (Florida State U.), Chen
(T. Y. Lin International Group, China), and Shen (for whom no back-
ground information is given).
TA1520 2012-016466 978-1-4398-7746-3
Biomimetics in photonics.
Title main entry. Ed. by Olaf Karthaus. (Series in optics and optoelec-
tronics)
CRC Press, ©2012 259 p. $119.95
Contributors from biological sciences, materials science, and mathe-
matics and computer science describe some of the devices in photonics
that are inspired by discoveries in the natural world. They cover photonic
structures in plants, biomineralization and photonics, biomimetics and
optical nanostructures, photomechanic infrared receptors in pyrophilous
beetles and bugs, the commercial production of biomimetic photonic
structures, a night vision algorithm inspired by the visual system of a
nocturnal bee, and modeling and simulating structural colors. The
material could be used in a specialist or general science course.
TA1522 978-3-527-41064-4
Optical imaging and metrology; advanced technologies.
Title main entry. Ed. by Wolfgang Osten and Nadya Reingand.
Wiley-VCH, ©2013 482 p. $140.00
This work contains papers from the HoloMet 2010 workshop, presenting
the latest research, applications, and future directions in optical tech-
nologies. Some topics addressed include 3D display and imaging, LCOS
spatial light modulators, holographic TV, and 3D particle control by holo-
graphic optical tweezers. Other subjects are differences between 3D
imaging and 3D metrology for computed tomography, and quantitative
optical microscopy. There is also a chapter on the role of intellectual
property protection in creating business in optical metrology. The book
is illustrated with color and b&w photos and images. Osten is affiliated
with the University of Stuttgart’s Institute for Optical Technology.
Reingand is a private sector researcher in the US.
TA1632 2012-021570 978-1-4398-6955-0
Image restoration; fundamentals and advances.
Title main entry. Ed. by Bahadir K. Gunturk and Xin Li. (Digital
imaging and computer vision)
CRC Press, ©2013 343 p. $149.95
Electronic engineers and information scientists describe techniques for
recovering an unknown true image from an electronic signal that has
been degraded by additive noise, space variant or unvariant blur
aliasing, or compression artifact during formation, transmission, or
storage. The topics include fundamentals of image restoration, image de-
–289–
noising and restoration based on non-local means, enhancing resolution
using prior information, transform domain-based learning for restoring
super resolution, restoring color images using vector filtering operators,
and correcting spatially varying image and video motion blur using a
hybrid camera.
TA1632 978-1-4493-2036-2
Practical computer vision with SimpleCV.
Demaagd, Kurt et al.
O’Reilly Media, Inc., ©2012 240 p. $24.99 (pa)
SimpleCV is a framework for use with Python, a popular language for
people with no programming experience taking introductory computer
and web programming classes. The book introduces general readers to
techniques of computer vision that can be used to process images from
the cameras that are becoming standard components of computers, tele-
phones, and other electronic devices. Among the topics are getting to
know the SimpleCV framework, image sources, image arithmetic, basic
feature detection, and advanced features.
TA1634 2012-031910 978-1-4666-2539-6
Developing and applying biologically-inspired vision
systems; interdisciplinary concepts.
Title main entry. Ed. by Marc Pomplun and Junichi Suzuki.
Information Science Reference, ©2013 424 p. $195.00
Current scientific knowledge about machine vision is examined by and
for professionals from such fields as computer science, engineering, psy-
chology, neuroscience, and biology. They cover the areas of visual
attention, binocular vision, visual cortical structures, and artificial vision
systems. Among the topics are computational approaches to measuring
visual attention, modeling binocular and motion transparency processing
by local center-surround interactions, the roles of endstopped and cur-
vature tuned computations in a hierarchical representation of two-dimen-
sional shape, mathematical foundations modeled after neo-cortex for
discovery and understanding of structures in data, and implementing
biologically inspired components in embedded vision systems.
TA1634 2012-004763 978-1-4666-1891-6
Graph-based methods in computer vision; developments
and applications.
Title main entry. Ed. by Xiao Bai et al.
Information Science Reference, ©2013 375 p. $195.00
Addressing problems related to applying graph-based methods in com-
puter vision, computer, information, and other scientists present accounts
of recent developments in graph-based methodology and its application
to image matching, image segmentation, image and video analysis, and
image processing. The topics include geometric-edge random graph
model for image representation, unsupervised and supervised image seg-
mentation using graph partitioning, generative group activity analysis
with quaternion descriptor, discriminating feature selection in image clas-
sification and retrieval, and region-based graph learning towards large
scale image annotation.
TA1637 2012-025217 978-1-4665-0994-8
Image processing; tensor transform and discrete
tomography with MATLAB.
Grigoryan, Artyom and Merughan M. Grigoryan.
CRC Press, ©2012 442 p. $149.95
Artyom Grigoryan (electrical engineering, U. of Texas-San Antonio) and
Merughan Grigoryan, a physicist currently engaged in private research,
present results of their research in digital image reconstruction, using the
case of the two-dimensional image and the parallel projections. Their
model entails an object or image to be analyzed being held immobile,
while on both sides, the X-ray set and detectors are disposed and revolved
around the object at different angles. The measurement data of radiation
and detection of X-rays are collected along other directions, and
processed by specific mathematical methods to reconstruct the image of
the observed object or tissue. The technique is fast enough to be used in
diagnosis, they say, and minimizes the exposure of the body to X-rays.
TA1637 2012-013127 978-0-8218-6929-1
Multi-scale and high-contrast PDE; from modelling, to
mathematical analysis, to inversion; proceedings.
Conference on Multi-Scale and High-Contrast PDE: From Modelling, to
Mathematical Analysis, to Inversion (2011: Oxford, UK) Ed. by Habib
Ammari et al. (Contemporary mathematics; 577)
American Mathematical Society, ©2012 144 p. $174.00 (pa)
Eight papers explore the particularly difficult analysis of partial
differential equations for which the material parameters present a high
contrast ratio. Among the topics are looking at the world through liquid
crystal glasses, the observability of conservative linear systems, the
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
scattered field generated by a ball inhomogeneity of constant index in
dimension three, imaging with noise blending, and correlations of
heterogeneous wave fields propagating in homogeneous media. There is
no index.
TA1673 978-3-527-41114-6
Fiber lasers.
Title main entry. Ed. by Oleg G. Okhotnikov.
Wiley-VCH, ©2012 280 p. $140.00
Scientists experienced in the new specialty of quantum electronics
provide an overview of selected topics in fiber lasers, a guided-wave
system being used in optical communication. They cover fundamentals
and enabling technologies to enter the upper limits of high-power fiber
lasers and amplifiers, supercontinuum sources based on photonic crystal
fiber, dissipative soliton fiber lasers, modeling and technologies of
ultrafast fiber lasers, tapered fiber lasers and amplifiers, fiber lasers that
bridge the shortwave to midwave regions of the infrared spectrum, and
outlook.
TA1675 2011-045634 978-1-4398-6055-7
Fundamentals of laser micromachining.
Schaeffer, Ronald D.
CRC Press, ©2012 238 p. $99.95
A veteran of laser manufacturing and materials processing, Schaeffer
adds to his many publications by introducing the basic principles of
using lasers to make very small features in materials, typically much
smaller than one millimeter and down to a micron. His treatment is not
comprehensive, he warns, and is shaped by his own experience and prej-
udices, for example a fondness for ultraviolet lasers. He covers laser
theory and operation, optics, light-material interaction, system inte-
gration, some processing techniques, applications, materials, and
metrology and cleaning. Practice problems are provided in the end
matter.
TA1770 2011-052023 978-0-470-66160-4
Acoustical imaging; techniques and applications for
engineers.
Gan, Woon Siong.
John Wiley & Sons, ©2012 417 p. $140.00
For practicing engineers and researchers, Gan, with a Singapore acoustic
technologies company, discusses all the key areas of the engineering
applications of acoustical imaging in a single volume. Among his topics
are the physics of acoustics and acoustical imaging, time-reversal
acoustics and super-resolution, the statistical treatment of acoustic
imaging, medical ultrasound imaging, underwater acoustical imaging,
geophysical exploration, and new acoustics based on metamaterials.
TA1815 2012-005812 978-0-470-57540-6
Fundamentals of optical fiber sensors.
Title main entry. Ed. by Zujie Fang et al.
John Wiley & Sons, ©2012 476 p. $110.00
Fang, Ronghui Qu, Haiwen Cai (all optics and fine mechanics, Chinese
Academy of Sciences, Shanghai), and Ken K. Chin (physics, New Jersey
Institute of Technology) compile scattered information on optical fiber
sensors into a textbook for graduate and senior undergraduate students
and a reference for scientists and engineers in the field. They explain the
physical principles behind optical fiber sensors, and describe practical
applications. The topics are fundamentals of optical fibers, fiber sensi-
tivities and devices, fiber gratings and related devices, distributed optical
fiber sensors, fiber sensors with special applications, and the extrinsic
fiber Fabry-Perot interferometer sensor.
TA1815 2011-044215 978-0-470-62695-5
Photonic sensing; principles and applications for safety
and security monitoring.
Title main entry. Ed. by Gaozhi Xiao and Wojtek J. Bock. (Wiley series
in microwave and optical engineering)
John Wiley & Sons, ©2012 313 p. $125.00
Researchers describe some of the ways light is being used in electronic
surveillance and alert systems for structural integrity, environmental
health, human security and health, and industrial process control. They
cover surface plasmons for biodetection, microchip-based flow cytometry
in photonic sensing, opto-fluidic techniques for manipulating microscopic
particles in bioanalysis, optical fiber sensors and their applications for
detecting explosions, photonomic liquid crystal fiber sensors for safety
and security monitoring, miniaturized fiber Bragg grating sensor
systems for potential air vehicle structural health monitoring, optimal
coherence tomography for document security and biometrics, and pho-
tonic-assisted instantaneous frequency measurement.
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
HYDRAULIC ENGINEERING
TC145 978-3-03785-486-0
Advances in hydrology and hydraulic engineering;
proceedings; 2v.
Int’l Conference on Civil, Architectural and Hydraulic Engineering
(2012: Zhangjiajie, China) Ed. by Changbo Jiang and Zhaohui Joey
Yang. (Applied mechanics and materials; vs. 212-213)
Trans Tech Publications, ©2012 1294 p. $414.00 (pa)
The two-volume set from the August 2012 conference collects Chinese
research on hydrology, water resources, irrigation, flood and drought
management, dam construction, hydropower, and hydraulic machinery.
Three papers from Shanghai Ocean University analyze the influence of
saltwater intrusion on the Qingcaosha River estuary, sediment deposition
in the navigation channel of the Changjiang estuary, and the settling
velocity of sediment particle clouds. Other topics of the 240 papers
include the impact of irrigation diverting water from the Yellow River on
the regional water cycle, FEM simulation of temperature and thermal
stress in the Xiaowan arch dam, dynamic mesh analysis of propeller
characteristics, and a sludge pump with a recessed centrifugal impeller.
B&w photographs are provided.
TC328 2012-030104 978-0-7844-1198-8
Planning and design guidelines for small craft harbors,
3d ed.
Title main entry. Ed. by the Task Committee on Marinas 2020 of the
Coasts, Oceans, Ports, and Rivers Institute of the American Society of
Civil Engineers. (ASCE manuals and reports on engineering practice;
no.50)
Am. Society of Civil Engineers, ©2012 365 p. $115.00 (pa)
The 1994 guidelines are revised in light of increased demand to US
oceans, lakes, and rivers while the maintenance and new construction of
harbor infrastructure has lagged behind; and the older outdated marinas
that traditionally provided public access to the water are being replace
by more profitable land uses. They offer standards on planning, envi-
ronmental, and financial considerations; entrance, breakwater, and basic
design; inner harbor structures; and land-based support facilities.
TC504 2012-019383 978-1-4398-7376-2
Ganga-Brahmaputra-Meghna waters; advances in
development and management.
Chaturvedi, Mahesh Chandra.
CRC Press, ©2013 423 p. $139.95
Pioneering water resource engineer Chaturvedi taught and practiced in
India for many years before he moved to the US in 1989, and here inves-
tigates how a river basin where 10% of humanity lives has changed from
one of the healthiest parts of the world to one of the most miserable.
Large scale water management projects are urgently needed, he argues,
especially in light of climate change. In sections on system characteristics,
current development policy and state, and proposed revolutionary policy,
he discusses such aspects as system environmental characteristics, post-
independent development in India, India’s interactions with Nepal and
Bhutan, the institutional setup, and the policy and implementation of
total integrated development of the basin.
TC556 2012-026285 978-0-415-78194-7
Specialty construction techniques for dam and levee
remediation.
Title main entry. Ed. by Donald A. Bruce.
CRC Press, ©2013 431 p. $165.00
Contributors from constructions companies in the US, Japan, and Europe
describe the current theories, approaches, technologies, and methods for
shoring up dams and levees, with case studies to illustrate. They cover
background and scope, contemporary drilling and grouting methods,
mix-in-place technologies, excavated and backfilled cutoffs, composite
cutoff walls, prestressed rock anchors, instrumented performance moni-
toring, and a distant mirror and a word of warning.
ENVIRONMENTAL TECHNOLOGY
TD192 2012-025720 978-1-4398-7518-6
Phytotechnologies; remediation of environmental
contaminants.
Title main entry. Ed. by Naser A. Anjum et al.
CRC Press, ©2013 585 p. $169.95
Phytotechnology is the strategic use of the natural and inherent traits of
plants and their associated microbes to exclude, accumulate, immobilize,
metabolize, or degrade various environmental contaminants.
–290–
Contributors from a wide range of sciences assess the current state of the
science and its application around the world, and summarize major envi-
ronmental contaminants, contaminated sites, and the significant role of
plants—including Brassica and vetivr grass species—for remediating
various environmental contaminants. They also discuss the major physi-
ological, biochemical, and genetic-molecular mechanism responsible for
plant tolerance/adaptation to important environmental contaminants.
The material should be accessible to non-specialists.
TD193 2012-025734 978-0-470-87420-2
Redox biocatalysis; fundamentals and applications.
Title main entry. Ed. by Daniela Gamenara et al.
John Wiley & Sons, ©2013 537 p. $149.95
Gamenara, Gustavo A. Seoane, Patricia Saenz-Méndez (all organic chem-
istry, U. de la República, Uruguay), and Pablo Domínguez de María (tech-
nical and macromolecular chemistry, Aachen U., Germany) summarize
the current understanding and use of redox enzymes and enzyme-
mediated oxidative processes. They cover natural sources and a mecha-
nistic overview; natural co-factors and their regeneration strategies;
reactions involving dehydrogenesis, oxygenases, and oxidases and perox-
idases; hydrolase-mediated oxidations; from enzyme discovery to bio-
processes; and from academic curiosities to robust processes.
TD195 2012-015793 978-1-4665-1467-6
Environmental impacts of hydraulic fracturing.
Spellman, Frank R.
CRC Press, ©2013 459 p. $129.95
Retired now from both managing environmental health and safety at a
wastewater sanitation district and teaching environmental health at Old
Dominion, Spellman sets out both the benefits and the dangers of an
extraction process developed by the Haliburton company 60 years ago
that is now being increasingly used, primarily to extract natural gas that
was previously unreachable, but also to stimulate water wells and to
remediate deep pollution. The main drawback is that many of the
chemical used are toxic to humans, and the companies often refuse to
identify which ones they are using. His topics include shale gas, shale
gas geology, the process of hydraulic fracturing, chemicals used in it, and
laws and regulations affecting shale gas development and operations.
TD365 2012-031064 978-1-58321-857-0
Environmental compliance guidebook; beyond water
quality regulations. (CD-ROM included)
Herndon, Christine and Shelley Hemming.
American Water Works Assn., ©2013 316 p. $229.00
While water utilities are intimately familiar with the requirements of the
Safe Water Drinking Act and wastewater utilities with the Clean Water
Act, the water sector engages in other activities that are governed by less
well-known government acts. Environmental regulatory compliance
experts provide a guide to understanding government regulations and
regulatory agencies for eliminating/mitigating the risk of various pollu-
tants to the environment. For example, they discuss the provisions of, and
programs created by, the Resource Conservation and Recovery Act for the
management of hazardous waste. The reference includes compliance
checklists, samples of data sheets for documentation, tips on overcoming
common regulatory findings, a glossary of terms and acronyms, and an
accompanying CD-ROM with the checklists.
TD365 2012-418042 978-0-309-25493-9
Review of the EPA’s economic analysis of final water
quality standards for nutrients for lakes and flowing
waters in Florida.
National Research Council.
National Academies Press, ©2012 132 p. $42.00 (pa)
Nutrient pollution of surface waters has traditionally been addressed
through narrative standards. But there is an increasing push to move
toward numeric nutrient criteria which would lead toward better results
and more standardization. When costs are involved, however, accurate
economic analysis is important, and this work attempts to objectively
evaluate the work of the Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). The
book closes with a two page list of the acronyms used and an appendix
showing the proposed Florida nutrient criteria processes. No index is
provided.
TD434 2012-026716 978-1-58321-904-1
AWWA water operator field guide, 2d ed.
Title main entry. Ed. William C. Lauer, et al.
American Water Works Assn., ©2012 442 p. $85.00 (pa)
Association staff members have compiled information, charts, graphs,
formulas, and definitions that are used by water system operators in per-
forming their daily duties. The information is otherwise scattered among
–291–
many books and manuals that would be tedious to haul around and pore
through. The first edition was published in 2004, and this second is
updated to reflect current standards. The sections cover basic math; units
of measure and conversion; chemistry; safety; water quality; water
treatment; chemical additions; distribution; wells; pumps; pressure,
flows, and meters; abbreviations and acronyms, and a glossary.
TD449 2012-003367 978-3-11-024022-1
Adsorption technology in water treatment; fundamentals,
processes, and modeling.
Worch, Eckhard.
De Gruyter, ©2012 332 p. $126.00
Exploring the theoretical fundamentals of adsorption technology for
water treatment, Worch (water chemistry, Dresden U. of Technology)
presents the most important basics needed for planning and evaluating
experimental adsorption studies as well as for process modeling and
adsorber design. He is mostly concerned with practical aspects of macro-
scopic processes in the reactors rather than the microscopic processes at
the molecular level. His goal is provide the general basics, which can be
adapted to the respective requirements.
TD481 978-0-7277-4112-7
Water distribution systems.
Title main entry. Ed. by Dragan A. Savic and John K. Banyard.
ICE Publishing, ©2011 342 p. $130.00
Contributors from academia and from companies that took over Britain’s
public water system when it was privatized, present a textbook for water
and environmental engineering courses at the final-year undergraduate
and master-of-science level. They focus on water distribution, where engi-
neers have been able to optimize solutions and clarify levels of under-
standing that were murky to previous generations of practitioners, and
where profit demands and environmental concerns have outpaced earlier
textbooks. The topics include the historical development of water distri-
bution practice, water supply systems, network modeling, asset planning
and management, finance and project appraisal, and sustainability and
climate change.
TD879 2012-015649 978-1-4398-8014-2
Competitive sorption and transport of heavy metals in
soils and geological media.
Title main entry. Ed. by H. Magdi Selim.
CRC Press, ©2013 412 p. $129.95
Soil and other environmental scientists provide information needed to
understand the sorption and transport of heavy metals in soils and
aquifers in cases where several heavy metals are competing for sorption
sites on soil matrix surfaces, which is true in most cases. They explain
how that competition can be used as a factor in predicting the movement
of various metals through the vadose zone and aquifers. Among their
topics are the equilibrium and kinetic modeling of competitive heavy
metals sorption and transport in soils, leaching of antimony from con-
taminated soils, mercury sorption and desorption by tropical soils, the
influence of selenium speciation and fractionation on its mobility in
soils, sorption and desorption of heavy metals in low-activity clays under
coffee tracts of South India, and release rates of solutes from phosphatic
shales in Southeast Idaho in the western US.
TD898 2012943209 978-0-85709-132-1
Radionuclide behaviour in the natural environment;
science, implications and lessons for the nuclear industry.
Title main entry. Ed. by Christophe Poinssot and Horst Geckeis.
(Woodhead Publishing series in energy; no. 42)
Woodhead Publishing, ©2012 710 p. $305.00
Researchers from physics and nuclear energy and from the geological sci-
ences explore radiochemical aspects of the radioactive waste produced by
generating nuclear power once it is in the natural world. They also con-
sider radionuclide migration, and environmental impact and remedi-
ation. Among the topics are fundamentals of aquatic chemistry relevant
to radionuclide behavior in the environment, aquatic chemistry of long-
lived mobile fission and activation products in the context of deep geo-
logical disposal, the impact of microorganisms on radionuclides in
contaminated environments and waste materials, hydrogeological fea-
tures relevant to radionuclide migration in the natural environment, the
impact of colloidal transport on radionuclide migration, and radionu-
clide transfer processes in the biosphere.
TD898 2012945187 978-1-936420-24-7
Topics in systems.
Eisner, Howard.
Mercury Learning and Information, ©2013 284 p. $41.95 (pa)
Eisner (engineering and applied science, George Washington U.) explores
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
the variety of systems that people are embedded in, and explains how to
analyze and evaluate the ones that are inherited and design and create
new ones for general or specific purposes. His topics include engineering,
systems analysis, changing and fixing systems, business as a system, and
integrating systems. He suggests that his textbook can be used for a one-
year undergraduate course or a 14-week three-credit graduate course.
Distributed in the US by International Publishers Marketing.
ROADS, RAILROADS
TE228 978-3-03785-476-1
Advances in intelligent transportation system and
technology; proceedings.
International Doctoral Annual Symposium on Intelligent Transportation
Technique and Sustainable Development (1st: 2012: Harbin, China) Ed.
by Decheng Feng. (Advanced engineering forum; v.5 )
Trans Tech Publications, ©2012 394 p. $166.00 (pa)
The symposium is designed to allow graduate students in different
countries to communicate with each other and share the best ideas and
results coming to fruition in intelligent transportation technology, bridge
monitoring and maintenance, and road engineering, and material
science. The 67 papers of this first outing include such discussions as
the price transmission mechanism of transit service in the city,
characteristics of the eye during traffic operation, a route selection model
of road network emergency evacuation under ice and snow, dynamic
characteristics and seismic response analysis of self-anchored suspension
bridges, mechanics and pavement properties of asphalt modified with
nanomaterial, and the flexual strength and frost resistance of air
entrained concrete.
TE250 978-0-415-64331-3
Four-point bending; proceedings. (CD-Rom included)
Conference on Four-Poing Bending (3d: 2012: Davis, CA) Ed. by Jorge C.
Pais and John T. Harvey.
CRC Press/Balkema, ©2012 295 p. $169.00
A September 2012 conference gave researchers, government and private
agencies, and consultants a chance to exchange ideas and experiences on
the use of four-point bending tests to evaluate stiffness and fatigue
resistance of bituminous mixtures. This book compiles proceedings from
the conference. Papers are grouped in sections on modeling the four-point
beam test, applications to mechanistic design, asphaltic materials evalu-
ation, comparisons with other tests, and non-asphaltic materials evalu-
ation. Specific topics examined include fatigue evaluation of reinforced
asphalt concrete slabs, quality control test procedures for characterizing
fracture properties of asphalt mixtures, and a lab study of the influence
of multiple axle loads on the fatigue performance of a cemented material.
A CD-ROM of the papers is included Pais teaches at the University of
Minho, Portugal. Harvey teaches at UC-Davis.
TE301 978-1-61091-436-9
Urban bikeway design guide, 2d ed.
National Association of City Transportation Officials.
Island Press, ©2012 329 p. $49.95
Drawing on the experience of top cycling cities worldwide, this update of
the 2011 NACTO guide (part of the Cities for Cycling Initiative) presents
design solutions for making streets safe and enjoyable for bicyclists.
Entries on alternatives to conventional bike lanes, signage, pavement
markings, and green infrastructure include information on their ben-
efits, typical applications, cities where currently used, maintenance,
treatment adoption, and professional consensus. The illustrated guide
includes background on the project teams and references. Presentation is
in a looseleaf ring-binder.
TF24 2012-008203 978-0-8166-7591-3
Minnesota railroads; a photographic history, 1940-2012.
Glischinski, Steve.
U. of Minnesota Press, ©2012 298 p. $39.95
This history of railroads in the state of Minnesota will satisfy railroad
buffs and serious regional historians alike. Author and photographer
Steve Glischinski is a Minnesotan, an experienced writer on railroads,
and a correspondent for Trains Magazine. While most of the book is pho-
tographs, a series of essays gives the history of Minnesota railroads in
four chapters: transition (1940-60), struggle (1960-80), revival (1980-2000),
and railroading after 2000. These are extremely well researched and well
written. They focus exclusively on the railroads themselves in classic rail-
roading-hobbyist style, without offering context for railroads within the
larger history of the state or country. The book’s photographs are in both
black and white and color, interspersed with occasional historical items
(route maps, tickets, advertisements). Each is provided with a highly
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
informative caption. The pictures themselves offer abundant, useful, and
sometimes very evocative pictures of trains across the state from 1940
until today. They are mostly printed in fairly small formats to make room
for more pictures and historical information. Most are informative rather
than breathtaking, but the best of these pictures could stand alone as
photojournalism or art photography in a larger format. Oversize: 10x11”
TF153 978-1-84564-616-5
Computers in railways XIII; computer system design and
operation in railways and other transit systems.
Title main entry. Ed. by C. A. Brebbia et al. (WIT transactions on the
built environment; v.127)
WIT Press, ©2013 755 p. $670.00
The 63 papers in this collection represent most of the talks at a 2012
international conference in New Forest, Britain, the 13th in a series
devoted to reviewing recent developments in railway engineering and
advanced systems and to promote their use in the business management,
design, manufacture, and operation of railways. They consider such
areas as advanced train controls, computer techniques and simulations,
monitoring and maintenance, rescheduling, risk management, and
dynamics. Only authors are indexed. The US office of WIT Press is
Computational Mechanics.
BUILDING CONSTRUCTION
TH149 978-1-60525-810-2
Construction and building technology.
Blankenbaker, E. Keith.
Goodheart-Willcox, ©2012 656 p. $82.64
Blankenbaker’s (industrial technology education, Ohio State U.,
Columbus) textbook provides an important foundation for those inter-
ested in becoming skilled tradespeople and individuals pursuing careers
in design, engineering, or construction management. It also provides a
resource for employees of companies selling construction equipment,
materials, and supplies; banking and insurance personnel who process
construction loans and insurance claims; and homeowners. Coverage
includes an introduction to construction technology; construction mate-
rials; project design; construction management; beginning construction;
building the superstructure; installing plumbing, HVAC, and communi-
cation systems; project completion; servicing construction projects; com-
mercial, industrial, and engineered construction; construction careers;
and future trends in construction. Illustrated with b&w and color pho-
tographs, diagrams, tables, and charts, the text also includes a glossary
of terms. Oversize: 8.75x11.25 “.
TH153 2012-014354 978-0-8031-7032-2
ASTM standards on building economics, 7th ed.
Title main entry.
ASTM International, ©2012 477 p. $120.00 (pa)
The building economics subcommittee of the Society’s committee on the
performance of buildings develops standards that serve as guidelines for
making building and infrastructure choice, design, construction, oper-
ation, clean-up, and disposal decisions based on economic analysis. The
standards are intended for agencies at all levels of government, private
building owners, constructors, building code bodies architects and engi-
neers, consumer and trade advocates, and researchers. The matters for
which standards are provided include a classification for program and
project estimate summaries, summarizing the economic impacts of
building-related projects, measuring life-cycle costs of buildings and
building systems, terminology, and discount factor tables.
TH880 2011-930166 978-0-9819667-2-4
Horizontal skyscraper.
Steven Holl Architects.
William Stout Publishers, ©2011 143 p. $35.00 (pa)
The firm of Steven Holl Architects has produced this book, which docu-
ments the design, plan, and appearance of the Vanke Center, a building
in Shenzhen, China nicknamed the “Horizontal Skyscraper.” The rise of
capitalism and rapid industrial growth of Chinese coastal cities have
created opportunities for the kind of large-scale building statements that
put Western architects and their firms on the high-end design map; some
call these projects revolutionary architecture, while others term them
vanity projects. This building was produced to take up a very large
ground footprint while having minimal contact with the ground surface.
Technical details, such as earthquake-proofing, are not discussed. Most
of the pages showcase visual aspects of the finished building and the
sketches, Autocad images, plans, and models of the building created by
the Steven Holl firm. There is a short section on green design aspects of
–292–
the building, and some text on the theoretical concerns of the architects
(Le Corbusier’s Algier’s project is invoked as the inspiration), but this is
mostly a visual book.
TH880 2012-006682 978-1-4051-9508-9
Sustainable refurbishment.
Shah, Sunil.
John Wiley & Sons, ©2012 276 p. $85.00 (pa)
Various factors are encouraging businesses and government to refurbish
buildings rather than build new ones, says British sustainability con-
sultant Shah, but the approaches and practices that have been developed
in the green building movement have not been passed over to the field
of renovation. He explains to architects, contractors, and clients how both
the refurbishing project and the finished building can be more environ-
mentally sustainable. His topics include occupant evaluation, developing
a business plan and strategy, energy-efficiency measures, embodied
carbon, and biodiversity. One of his case studies is of the Empire State
Building becoming a model of energy efficiency.
TH4763 2011-939798 978-0-7643-3915-8
Swimming pool innovations.
Forte, Duane and Darlene Claire Preussner.
Schiffer Publishing Ltd., ©2011 159 p. $29.99
Swimming pools are not just rectangular holes in the ground surrounded
by concrete anymore. Forte, who has a pool and landscape design and
construction company, and fellow Nevada resident Preussner, a lifestyle
writer, discuss design options for in- and above-ground pools, mainte-
nance, and ancillary features including statutes, fire pits, and outdoor
kitchens. The book includes fantasy-inducing color photographs, and
resources.
TH4812 978-3-03785-466-2
Frontiers of green building, materials and civil
engineering II; proceedings; 2v.
International Conference on Green Building, Materials and Civil
Engineering (GBMCE 2012) (2012: SanYa, China) Ed. by Jimmy C.M.
Kao et al. (Applied mechanics and materials; v.193-194 )
Trans Tech Publications, ©2012 1493 p. $414.00 (pa)
This volume collects about 300 papers from the August 2012 Second
International Conference on Green Building, Materials and Civil
Engineering (GBMCE 2012), held in SanYa, China. Papers share research
related to green building, including design, architecture, renewable
energy technology, energy saving, construction problems and techniques,
solar water heating, low-grade energy conversion, and other topics;
building materials and their preparation, performance, properties,
assessment, application, effectiveness, strength and resistance, and other
aspects; and civil engineering materials, design, analysis, technology and
issues. Contributors are engineers, architects, urban planners, con-
struction managers, and others working in Asia and elsewhere, including
the US, Europe, and Australia.
TH6021 978-3-433-03027-1
Building physics; heat, air and moisture; fundamentals
and engineering methods with examples and exercises, 2d
ed.
Hens, Hugo.
Ernst & Sohn, ©2012 315 p. $85.00 (pa)
Hens (civil engineering, U. of Leuven, Belgium) has thoroughly revised
the 2007 first edition, correcting and extending the text where appro-
priate, reviewing the exercises, and adding solutions for all 33 problems.
The textbook is for undergraduate and graduate students in architecture
and building engineering, but could also serve as a reference or refresher
for practicing mechanical or building engineers. It assumes a sound
knowledge of calculus and differential equations and a background in
physics, thermodynamics, hydraulics, building materials, and building
construction. There is no index. Ernst & Sohn is a Wiley company.
TH6123 2011-942524 978-1-133-28153-5
Plumbing 101, 6th ed.
PHCC Educational Foundation Plumbing Apprentice & Journeyman
Training Committee.
Delmar, ©2013 361 p. $89.95 (pa)
The Plumbing-Heating-Cooling-Contractors (PHCC) National Association
develops and delivers educational programs to help shape the future of
the trade. Here is the first in a series of four plumbing textbooks/work-
books designed for students in secondary, post-secondary, and apprentice
programs. Contractors, educators, and code and business specialists
provide students with the applied knowledge needed on the job. The
–293–
topics include tools of the plumbing trade, basic math for plumbing,
piping materials used in plumbing work, faucets and related devices,
and water heaters. Revised from the 2009 edition.
TH6125 2010-930863 978-1-111-13594-2
Dewalt plumbing code reference, 2d ed.
Title main entry. Ed. by American Contractors Exam Services.
Delmar, ©2011 78 p. $19.95 (pa)
In this update of the 2008 edition, instructors with American Contractors
Exam Services provide concise coverage of plumbing materials and
common codes for specific rooms, water heaters, and lawn irrigation;
testing procedures; backflow prevention; and isometics. The well-illus-
trated, spiral-bound, laminated page resource includes iron pipe size
(IPC) and international residential code (IRC) reference tables, appended
information on soil types and allowable slopes, and safety guidelines for
trenching.
TH7688 2012-029220 978-1-936504-33-6
Thermal guidelines for data processing environments, 3d
ed.
Title main entry. (ASHRAE datacom series; bk.1)
ASHRAE Publications, ©2012 136 p. $54.00 (pa)
The standards were first published in 2004, and in 2008 expanded the
recommended temperature and humidity ranges. The recommended tem-
peratures have not been changed for this edition, but include new data
center environmental classes that enable near-full-time use of free-cooling
techniques in most of the world’s climates. Also retained is the corner-
stone idea that inlet temperature is the only temperature that matters to
information technology equipment. A glance to the future is included,
when increased density of machinery will make liquid cooling more cost
effective than the air cooling used almost exclusively now. A reference
card to stay on site is provided. There is no index
TH9446 2012-013745 978-0-8031-7527-3
Uncertainty in fire standards and what to do about it.
Title main entry. Ed. by John R. Hall, Jr. (Journal of testing and evalu-
ation, selected technical papers; STP1541)
ASTM International, ©2012 184 p. $59.00 (pa)
The 11 papers are from a June 2011 symposium in Anaheim, California
called to discuss different issues related to uncertainty in fire standards
and how different parties—testing laboratories, enforcement authorities,
manufacturers, and practicing engineers—incorporate uncertainty into
their use of results from fire safety tests and calculations. The topics
include who gets the benefit of the doubt from uncertainty, measurement
uncertainty and statistical process control for the Steiner tunnel, uncer-
tainty in fire protection engineering design, fire pattern repeatability, and
heat flux measurements and their uncertainty in a large-scale fire test.
There is no index.
MECHANICAL ENGINEERING & MACHINERY
TJ5 978-3-03785-464-8
Advanced mechanical engineering II; proceedings.
International Conference on Advanced Mechanical Engineering (AME
2012) (2012: Wuhan, China) Ed. by Zhenyu Du and Bin Liu. (Applied
mechanics and materials; v.192 )
Trans Tech Publications, ©2012 485 p. $207.00 (pa)
In addition to mechanical engineering, the 145 papers cover material
science, digital enterprise, and manufacturing processes. The topics
include the test and study of a soybean storage anti-grading device, the
virtual and optimized design of the mechanical arm of a forestry felling
and cultivation machine, workplace analysis and calculation for the
manipulator of an explosive-handling robot in mines, purifying and char-
acterizing an alkaline protease from Bacillus alcalophilus, a new power
flow control and management method based on a multi-line trans-
mission/distribution system, and protecting and symbolizing innovation
of manufacturing process of blue and white porcelain.
TJ145 2012-017260 978-1-4666-2095-7
Diagnostics and prognostics of engineering systems;
methods and techniques.
Title main entry. Ed. by Seifedine Kadry.
Engineering Science Reference, ©2013 433 p. $195.00
Structural health monitoring (SHM) assesses the current ability of a struc-
tural component or system to perform its intended design function suc-
cessfully, and prognostics extends the assessment to forecast remaining
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
useful life. The 19 chapters in this volume describe techniques for diag-
nosing fault levels, modeling equipment degradation, monitoring systems
intelligently, and scheduling maintenance according to condition rather
than preset time intervals. The last two chapters approach structure reli-
ability and response prognostics with Bayesian analysis and analytical
approximation, and predict fatigue damage through indirect sensor
measurements. The book will mainly be of interest to mechanical and
industrial engineers.
TJ163 2012-015650 978-1-4398-7157-7
Applied energy; an introduction.
Abdullah, Mohammad Omar.
CRC Press, ©2013 410 p. $109.95
Applied energy refers to any energy conversion when applied to energy
systems, explains Abdullah (chemical and energy sustainability, U.
Malaysia Sarawak), and incorporates energy conversion and conser-
vation, energy resources and sustainability, energy processes, and envi-
ronmental applications analysis. He presents a textbook, tutorial, and
review for students who may or may not have had some previous
exposure to applied energy. It can service for a two-semester course, or
be squeezed down into one semester. Either way, he warns, it is an intro-
duction, not a comprehensive treatment.
TJ163 2012-020281 978-1-58765-849-5
Encyclopedia of energy; 4v. (online access code included)
Title main entry. Ed. by Morris A. Pierce.
Salem Press, ©2013 1474 p. $495.00
For high school students and general readers, this is a non-technical ref-
erence offering information tied to curriculum in the fields of history,
sociology, environmentalism, public policy, science, engineering, and
business. The idea is to describe current levels of energy use and pro-
duction throughout the world and to set that use in the context of history
and social impact. Four volumes contain approximately 550 signed
entries that include references and cross references and range in length
from 500 to 3,500 words. The topic finder in the front matter groups
entries according to theme or category: biographies, business, energy con-
sumption, energy issues in each state, resources, technology, environ-
mentalism, technical fundamentals of energy, country-by-country entries,
and the history of energy. The fourth volume concludes with a
chronology, glossary, bibliography, and the index. Editor Pierce is affil-
iated with the U. of Rochester as energy manager and instructor of
courses including the history of technology and the politics of energy and
the environment. Online access to the contents is included with purchase
of the print edition.
TJ163 2009-030155 978-1-933742-63-2
Energy efficiency guide for existing commercial buildings;
the business case for building owners and managers.
Landsberg, Dennis R. and Mychele R. Lord.
ASHRAE Publications, ©2009 78 p. $39.00 (pa)
Without going into technical details, this slim guide presents a simple
method for measuring the energy efficiency of a commercial building
and metrics for comparing energy performance with similar buildings.
The suggested integrated approach to improving energy efficiency,
addresses operation and management practices, energy audits, capital
upgrades, lighting, plug loads, HVAC, and water heating. Color images
are provided, but no index.
TJ163 2011-043253 978-1-936504-17-6
Energy efficiency guide for existing commercial buildings;
technical implementation.
Landsberg, Dennis R.
ASHRAE Publications, ©2011 199 p. $75.00 (pa)
Addressing primarily large commercial buildings, this guide describes
the energy efficiency and cost measures typically used for buildings, life-
cycle cost analysis, and metrics for tracking energy performance after
upgrades have been completed. The opening chapters explain how to cal-
culate the annual energy use and cost index for a building, compare that
number to typical national values, and set performance improvement
goals. Appendices list benchmark energy utilization indexes by weather
zone and provide example data.
TJ163 2012945261 978-0-85709-059-1
Functional materials for sustainable energy applications.
Title main entry. Ed. by John A. Kilner. (Woodhead Publishing series in
energy; no.35)
Woodhead Publishing, ©2012 681 p. $305.00
Scientists and engineers in chemistry, materials, and physics explore
materials that are likely to be used in energy systems as they become
more efficient. They cover functional materials for solar power,
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
producing and storing hydrogen, fuel cells, and reducing demand and
storing energy. Among the topic are photovoltaic thin-films for solar cells,
thermophotovoltaic devices, reversible solid oxide electrolytic cells for
large-scale energy storage, membrane electrode assemblies for polymer
electrolyte membrane fuel cells, novel cathodes for solid oxide fuel cells,
and materials and techniques for energy harvesting.
TJ163 978-3-03785-435-8
Novel and non-conventional materials and technologies
for sustainability; proceedings.
Int’l Conference on Non-Conventional Materials and Technologies (13th:
2011: Changsha, China) Ed. by Yan Xiao et al. (Key engineering mate-
rials; v.517)
Trans Tech Publications, ©2012 978 p. $345.00 (pa)
This volume collects the proceedings of an international conference on
non-conventional materials and technologies held in Changsha, China in
2011. Many of the papers discuss uses of bamboo along with recycled
materials and unusual uses of concrete. The last 39 papers are devoted
to energy saving design that also reduce the amount of carbon dioxide
emissions. Almost all of the authors appear to be from either China or
South America.
TJ211 978-1-4665-0697-8
Human-robot interactions in social robotics.
Kanda, Takayuki and Hiroshi Ishiguro.
CRC Press, ©2013 351 p. $149.95
Kanda, a researcher at a Kyoto intelligent and robotics and communi-
cation company, and Ishiguro (adaptive machine systems, Osaka U.)
explore the new field of designing robots to interact with humans in the
environment. They cover the network robot approach to interactions,
observing people’s reaction in field tests, users’ attitude and expectations,
modeling natural behaviors for human-like interaction with robots, a net-
worked robot approach to sensing systems, shared autonomy and tele-
operation, and learning and adaptation.
TJ211 2012-002035 978-1-118-31707-5
Hybrid control and motion planning of dynamical legged
locomotion.
Title main entry. Ed. by Nasser Sadati et al. (IEEE Press series on
systems science and engineering.)
IEEE/Wiley, ©2012 256 p. $99.95
Electrical engineers Sadati (Sharif U. of Technology, Iran), Guy A.
Dumont (U. of British Columbia), Kaveh Akbari Hamed (U. of Michigan-
Ann Arbor), and William A Gruver (Simon Fraser U., Canada) report the
current status of research into a technology to help people with disabil-
ities walk and to replace humans in hazardous environments. For
researchers, professionals, and students versed in robotics and control
theory, they provide a reference and essential guide to various aspects of
the hybrid control of legged locomotion. Among the topics are prelimi-
naries in hybrid systems, the asymptotic stabilization of periodic orbits
for planar monopedal running, the stabilization of periodic orbits for
walking with passive knees, and continuous-time update laws during
continuous phases of locomotion.
TJ211 2012-013146 978-1-4666-2074-2
Intelligent planning for mobile robotics; algorithmic
approaches.
Tiwari, Ritu et al.
Information Science Reference, ©2013 306 p. $195.00
Tiwari, Anupam Shukla (both Indian Institute of Information Technology
and Management), and Rahul Kala (U. of Reading, Britain) focus on the
planning stage of creating mobile autonomous robots, emphasizing the
basics of artificial intelligence, search problems, and soft computing
approaches. They cover graph-based path planning, common planning
techniques, evolutionary robotics, behavioral path planning, hybrid
graph-based methods, hybrid evolutionary methods, and multi-robot
systems.
TJ211 2012-015952 978-1-4666-2104-6
Simultaneous localization and mapping for mobile robots;
introduction and methods.
Fernández-Madrigal, Juan-Antonio and José Luis Blanco Claraco.
Information Science Reference, ©2013 483 p. $195.00
Fernandez-Madrigal and Claraco (both U. of Malaga, Spain) examine how
mobile robots designed to interact with humans in service environments
know where they are, where other things are, and how to get where they
are needed. Writing for practitioners and graduate students, they cover
robotic, probabilistic, and statistical basics; robot motion and sensor
models; mobile robot localization with recursive Bayesian filters; types
–294–
and constructions of maps for mobile robots; the Bayesian approach to
simultaneous localization and mapping (SLAM); and advanced SLAM
techniques.
TJ211 2012-014892 978-1-61233-104-1
Vision-based robot navigation; quest for intelligent
approaches using a sparse distributed memory.
Mendes, Mateus et al.
Universal Publishers, ©2012 224 p. $32.95 (pa)
The main problem with robots, say Mendes (systems and robotics), A.
Paulo Coimbra, and Manel M. Crisóstomo (both electrical engineering
and computer science, all U. of Coimbra, Portugal), is getting them to
know where they are, where they have been, and how to go some place
they are supposed to be. They present an approach to robot localization
and navigation that uses visual memories stored into a kind of asso-
ciative memory called sparse distributed memory. There is no index.
TJ217 978-3-03785-469-3
Mechanical engineering and intelligent systems;
proceedings; 2v.
International Conference on Mechanical Engineering and Intelligent
Systems (ICMEIS2012) (2012: Beijing, China) Ed. by J.W. Hu and J. Su.
(Applied mechanics and materials; v.195-196 )
Trans Tech Publications, ©2012 1351 p. $345.00 (pa)
This publication collects about 420 papers from the 2012 International
Conference on Mechanical Engineering and Intelligent Systems
(ICMEIS2012), held in August of that year in Beijing, China. Engineers
and other researchers mainly from China discuss topics related to
mechanics, electromechanics, and electrotechnics; electronics and com-
munication; materials engineering; biomedical manufacturing; digital
manufacturing; computational simulation, monitoring, and analysis in
manufacture; e-technologies in design and manufacture; information
technology in product realization; intelligent and robotic systems; and
agricultural manufacturing.
TJ217 2012-021068 978-1-4398-6300-8
Mobile intelligent autonomous systems.
Title main entry. Ed. by Jitendra R. Raol and Ajith K. Gopal.
CRC Press, ©2013 804 p. $159.95
Mechanical and structural aspects of MIAS vehicles are not addressed;
but this volume’s scope is broad in that it extends beyond the field of
robotics, which is where most of the literature is directed, and includes
theory and practice for micro-mini air vehicles and unmanned aerial
vehicles as well as robots. Among topics addressed in 35 contributions:
mathematical models of robot motion, data fusion, image registration
and fusion, sensors and instrumentation, multi-robot coordination, real-
time system identification of an unstable vehicle, neuro-fuzzy fault-tol-
erant aircraft autoland controllers, target tracking using a 2D radar, and
modeling out-of-sequence measurements. The appendices present statis-
tical and numerical concepts, and notes on software and algorithms
related to robotics. Raol (emeritus, M S Ramaiah Institute of Technology
(MSRIT) in Bangalore, India) and Gopal (CSIR, South Africa) authored or
co-authored a large number of the chapters, joining their expertise with
contributions from others.
TJ230 978-3-03785-470-9
Machine design and manufacturing engineering;
proceedings.
International Conference on Machine Design and Manufacturing
Engineering (ICMDME 2012) (2012: Jeju Island, South Korea). Ed. by
Sally Gao. (Advanced materials research; v.566 )
Trans Tech Publications, ©2012 726 p. $276.00 (pa)
Fully peer reviewed and selected from submissions, about 150 papers
look at designing and analyzing machine elements and mechanisms, the
automation and control of manufacturing processes and systems, and
new technologies for manufacturing. Among specific topics are the
influence of the rudder time constant on ship motion, analyzing the
forces and movement characteristics of the dispersal phase in a swirling
flow field, outflow curve and its simulation for a class of reaction chro-
matography with gradual changed head-on injection, the stick-slip simu-
lation of a feeding system in a silicon ultra-precision grinding machine,
and designing and implementing an online network user behavior
analysis system.
TJ260 2012-022622 978-1-4398-9907-6
Advances in industrial heat transfer.
Title main entry. Ed. by Alina Adriana Minea. (Heat transfer)
CRC Press, ©2013 403 p. $149.95
European physicists and mechanical and metallurgical engineers explain
to engineering students ways to enhance heat transfer in processes at
–295–
industrial scales. Fluid mechanics and thermodynamics have developed
advanced techniques for calculating heat transfer, they say, and those
calculations inform the design and implementation of such equipment
as ducts, extended surfaces, heat exchangers, and furnaces to optimize
heat transfer. They cover the basics of heat transfer, experimental and
numerical techniques for enhancing heat transfer, different industrial
equipment based on heat transfer, porous media, nanofluids, and
thermoelectricity.
TJ778 2012-028552 978-1-4665-1024-1
Fundamentals of premixed turbulent combustion.
Lipatnikov, Andrei.
CRC Press, ©2012 525 p. $169.95
In an advanced graduate text, Lipatnikov (applied mechanics, Chalmers
U. of Technology, Sweden) overviews the physics of premixed turbulent
flames, summarizes the acquired knowledge, emphasizes the advantages
and disadvantages of approaches, and highlights unresolved issues. His
goal is to encourage students to reflect on what has happened and what
should happen before they choose a research method. Among the topics
are unperturbed laminar premixed flame, the phenomenology of pre-
mixed turbulent combustion, the influence of premixed combustion on
turbulence, modeling premixed burning in turbulent flows, and partially
premixed turbulent flames.
TJ785 2012-943931 978-0-7680-2084-7
Introduction to internal combustion engines, 4th ed.
Stone, Richard.
SAE International, ©2012 494 p. $81.00
Most university courses in thermodynamics consider internal combustion
engines, says Stone (engineering science, U. of Oxford), so this textbook
and a course using it is for students who are following specialist options
or for students and engineers who need an overview of internal com-
bustion engines but did not take thermodynamics. Without mentioning
dates of earlier editions, he notes that he has added further worked
examples and many problems with numerical answers. Some of the
notation has been changed to current practice, and some retained from
earlier editions.
TJ807 978-3-03785-461-7
Materials for energy conversion and storage; proceedings.
International Workshop on Materials for Energy Conversion and Storage
(2012: Shenzhen, China) Ed. by Huayu Zhang. (Key engineering mate-
rials; v.519 )
Trans Tech Publications, ©2012 313 p. $166.00 (pa)
Zhang (Harbin Institute of Technology, China) compiles 69 papers from
the 2012 International Workshop on Materials for Energy Conversion and
Storage, held in March of that year in Shenzhen, China. Researchers, stu-
dents, and engineers mainly from China share findings in the field of
new energy materials, addressing topics such as the synthesis and prop-
erties, preparation and characterization, microstructure modification,
technology, chemical synthesis, production, performance, measurement,
temperature effects, fabrication, and other aspects of materials like
veneering porcelain, zirconia fiber, ceramics, dental fiber posts, nano-
materials used in the oil industry, thin films, lithium-ion batteries,
ultralow density silica aerogels, solar cells, and polymer electrolytes.
TJ808 2011-377667 978-981-4340-31-1
The energy problem.
Stein, Richard S. and Joseph Powers.
World Scientific, ©2011 188 p. $38.00
Assuming the correctness of scientific predictions of global climate
change and coming of peak oil, Stein (U. of Massachusetts) and Powers
(United Technologies Corporation) introduce the scientific nonspecialist to
the basic issues and scientific background underlying contemporary
issues of global energy. They first address how energy is used around
the globe and issues of energy conservation before examining the science
of current and alternative energy sources, including fossil fuels, biofuels,
wind and water power, geothermal energy, solar energy, and nuclear
energy. They conclude with some discussion of the economics and pol-
itics of energy.
TJ809 2012-015260 978-1-118-01621-3
Time to shine; applications of solar energy technology.
Grupp, Michael.
Scrivener/Wiley, ©2012 128 p. $69.95
This plain-language primer is accessible to general readers and nonspe-
cialists, as well as engineers, scientists, and anyone else working in the
solar industry. The book’s conversational writing style includes a sense
of humor and some material in Q&A format. Drawing on the work of
the Synopsis Institute in Lodéve (a solar energy R&D firm in France), the
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
book reviews the current status of solar energy, explains how solar
energy works, and provides examples of applications of solar technology
around the world, especially in Europe and developing countries.
Applications described include solar thermal applications, such as water
heaters, domestic and industrial cookers, and pumps, as well as solar PV
applications in solar airplanes and boats. The final chapter offers case
studies on large-scale projects such as solar energy in a high-density
urban environment. The book is illustrated with many color photos of
solar projects and buildings. There is no subject index. Author Grupp
received a European Solar Prize in 2004.
TJ810 2012-016891 978-1-4666-1996-8
Handbook of research on solar energy systems and
technologies.
Title main entry. Ed. by Sohail Anwar et al.
Information Science Reference, ©2013 596 p. $270.00
The 20 papers in this volume present recent research on converting sun-
light into electricity and survey the state of the art in thin film silicon
solar cells. The contributors review material characterization techniques
for solar cell devices, mechatronics technology for tracking solar panels,
computer simulations of solar energy systems, image processing for solar
cell analysis, and artificial intelligence techniques for solar energy and
photovoltaic applications. Methods of forecasting solar radiation are com-
pared and a solar-powered electrical generation plant is proposed for the
hot Saudi Arabian desert. B&w images are provided.
TJ820 2012-023941 978-1-4496-2450-7
Wind power generation and distribution.
Rivkin, David et al.
Jones & Bartlett, ©2014 169 p. $64.95 (pa)
Rivkin (science technology, Sustainable Methods Institute, nanosciences in
renewable energy, Chiist U., and education and research, Israel
Sustainability Institute), Randall, a freelance writer and instructional
designer, and Silk, who manages e-learning initiatives, provide beginning
and advanced professionals with a textbook on wind energy and its
design and installation. They discuss electric motors and the installation
and maintenance of wind turbines, including energy conversion, power
electronics, convertors, generators, wind-turbine control, rotor dynamics,
and wind farms.
TJ820 2011-047129 978-1-59370-244-1
Wind power; the industry grows up.
Busby, Rebecca L.
PennWell Books, ©2012 545 p. $79.00
This overview of the wind power industry is written in terms accessible
to general readers and undergraduates. It begins with a simple expla-
nation of how wind power works, then explains components of wind tur-
bines and aspects of wind power system design, covering both traditional
and alternative designs and systems. There are detailed explanations of
how wind farms and wind power plants operate, from operational and
maintenance aspects through connections to utilities, permitting,
financing, and construction. Later chapters cover wind power inte-
gration, transmission and storage, offshore wind, and advanced and
emerging technologies for wind power. A final chapter examines envi-
ronmental and economic issues of wind power. About 100 pages of ref-
erence appendices collect design equations, system charts, wind farm
case studies, cost estimations, and data on US offshore wind resources
and global wind power capacity. Color photos throughout show examples
of equipment. Busby has written other books on energy resources.
TJ823 978-1-84383-723-7
Suffolk windmills, 2d ed.
Flint, Brian.
The Boydell Press, ©2012 164 p. $24.95 (pa)
First published in 1979, Flint’s text provides windmill students and afi-
cionados with an historical survey of 100 remains of these beautiful
structures found in Suffolk, England, site of the earliest recorded wind-
mills in Europe. Coverage includes the postmill, towermills and other
types, the miller and the millwright, marshmills and pumps, and preser-
vation and the future. Since publication of the first edition 33 years ago,
some windmills have disappeared, been damaged, or converted to a
house; a few have been repaired or returned to working order. The
updated 2012 edition includes a listing of the various changes, additions
to, and errors in, the original text; page numbers of revisions are given
to aid identification. The Boydell Press is an imprint of Boydell & Brewer.
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
TJ849 2012-009052 978-0-7844-1216-9
Steel penstocks, 2d ed.
Title main entry. Ed. by John H. Bambei. (ASCE manuals and reports
on engineering practice; no. 9)
Am. Society of Civil Engineers, ©2012 295 p. $60.00 (pa)
This manual covers designing, manufacturing, installing, testing, starting
up, and maintaining steel penstocks, that is closed pipes or conduits to
carry water. It was first published in 1993 as part of a reference on
hydroelectric power, and has been updated by a special committee. The
topics include material, exposed penstocks, wye branches and branch
outlets, preventing and controlling corrosion, inspection and testing, and
documentation and certification.
TJ853.4.M53 978-1-4398-9924-3
Microfluidics and microscale transport processes.
Chakraborty, Suman. (IIT Kharagpur research monograph series)
CRC Press, ©2013 347 p. $169.95
Reporting from research centers mostly in India and the US, but also
Canada and Germany, mechanical and other engineers summarize
recent research into the movement of fluids and solids at the microscopic
scale. The topics include capillary transport in microchannels, electroki-
netics in narrow confinements, characteristics and possibilities of cen-
trifugal microfluidics, microfluidics-based DNA hybridization, and
particle transport in nanoscale colloidal suspensions.
TJ1075 978-3-03785-500-3
Engineering materials and tribology; proceedings.
Int’l Baltic Conference Engineering Materials and Tribology (2012:
Tallinn, Estonia) Ed. by Irina Hussainova. (Key engineering materials;
v.527)
Trans Tech Publications, ©2012 238 p. $138.00 (pa)
Recently developments in advanced materials and technologies, coatings
and surface engineering, characterizing material, and tribology are con-
sidered in 37 papers delivered at the 21st annual conference. Among the
topics are the mechanical properties of kaolin during heating, the critical
radius in the effect of transformation toughening of zirconia doped
ceramics and cermets, the experimental analysis of steel plasticity
parameters during quenching, analyzing abrasive wear in a helical
grooved journal bearing, and the tribological behavior of bronze alloys
with solid lubricants.
TJ1075 978-1-84564-610-3
Tribology and design II, proceedings.
International Conference on Tribology and Design (4th: 2012: Malta)
Ed. by M. Hadfield and C.A. Brebbia. (WIT transactions on engineering
sciences; v.76)
WIT Press, ©2012 201 p. $190.00
The 16 papers examine tribology in the wide field of engineering design
from perspectives of lubrication studies, test methods, surface engi-
neering, and wear mechanics. Specific topics include the experimental
characterization of an electrospindle with gas bearings, the multi-com-
ponent friction testing of a full-scale drill pipe specimen, a new method
for evaluating the frictional properties of tissue engineered cartilage,
residual stress and retained austenite in induction-hardened ductile iron
camshafts, and the effect of misalignment on rod lip seal behavior. The
US office of WIT Press is Computational Mechanics.
TJ1077 2012-000848 978-0-8031-7507-5
Testing and use of environmentally acceptable lubricants.
Title main entry. Ed. by In-Sik Rhee. (Journal of ASTM International
selected technical papers; STP1521)
ASTM International, ©2012 195 p. $61.00 (pa)
The nine papers in this collection originally were presented during a
Symposium on Testing and Use of Environmentally Acceptable
Lubricants held in December 2010 in Jacksonville. Topics include: USDA
programs supporting development of bio-based industrial products,
polyalkylene glycols as next generation engine oils, determining
biodegradability of lubricants by a biokinetic model, and a historical
overview of the use of vegetable and animal oils as steel quenchants.
Editor is Rhee (U.S. Army, TARDEC).
TJ1189 978-3-03785-437-2
High speed machining; proceedings.
International Conference on High Speed Machining (5th: 2012: Jinan,
China) Ed. by Zhanqiang Liu et al. (Materials science forum; v.723)
Trans Tech Publications, ©2012 493 p. $246.00 (pa)
The papers in this volume were initially presented during the Fifth
International Conference on High Speed Machining held in Jinan, China,
in August, 2012. The 82 papers address a variety of topics, including
mechanisms of machining processes, machine tools and cutting tools,
–296–
difficult-to-machine materials, micro-cutting technologies, and grinding
and non-traditional technologies. Editors are Liu, Wan, Song, and Shi
(Shandong U. China).
TJ1189 978-3-03785-428-0
Precision engineering and nanotechnology (ASPEN2011);
proceedings.
International Conference of Asian Society for Precision Engineering and
Nanotechnology (4th: 2011: Xi’an, China) Ed. by W.B. Lee et al. (Key
engineering materials; v.516)
Trans Tech Publications, ©2012 666 p. $276.00 (pa)
The conferences are held by a consortium of academic societies in East
Asia to promote collaboration among scientists in the region. The 114
papers from the 2011 sitting look at such areas as precision and ultra-
precision machining, non-traditional machining, manufacturing systems
and machine tools, nanometer and micrometer metrology and surface
characterization, electro-mechanical systems, advanced moulding and
forming, high precision mechatronics, and other technologies association
with micrometer and nanometer manufacturing. The topics include fab-
ricating fine mesh filter screens with a pulsed laser, robust production
scheduling using autonomous distributed systems, analyzing the stress
on cannonballs during collision with the sea surface, developing a
focusing system for X-ray free-electron lasers, binocular robot vision with
an active viewpoint for measuring spheres, a novel process for fabricating
large area triangular nanocavity arrays by bilayer nanosphere lithog-
raphy, the micropolishing of tungsten carbide using a magnetostrictive
vibrating polisher, and the nonlinear dynamics of tool vibration in micro-
cutting.
TJ1191 2012-015444 978-1-4398-5290-3
Micromanufacturing processes.
Title main entry. Ed. by V.K. Jain.
CRC Press, ©2012 411 p. $129.95
Mechanical engineers and materials and other physical scientists
introduce micromachining in a manner than can be used as a textbook
for a graduate or undergraduate course. They discuss the principles,
basic machine tools, micromachining processes, measurement techniques
and other essential matters. Among the topics are challenges in manu-
facturing from the mesoscopic to nanoscopic scales, microgrinding, mag-
netorheological and allied finished processes, laser microwelding,
dimensional metrology for microscale and mesoscale manufacturing,
and an integrated wafer surface evolution model for chemical mechanical
planarization.
TJ1280 978-3-03785-467-9
Advances in abrasive technology XV; proceedings.
International Symposium on Advances in Abrasive Technology
(ISAAT2012) (15th: 2012: Singapore) Ed. by Y.F. Zhang. (Advanced
materials research; v.565 )
Trans Tech Publications, ©2012 678 p. $276.00 (pa)
Selected and peer reviewed, the 109 papers in this collection cover
grinding and grinding wheels; truing and dressing grinding wheels; fin-
ishing, lapping, and polishing; abrasive jet machining; advances in
machining technologies; micro/nano-fabrication; and other novel tech-
nologies and advances studies. The specific topics include grinding
processes of sapphire waters, the functional surface grinding of medical
titanium plate, the vibratory finishing of immobilized cylinders, the
effect of ground surface roughness of ball end mill on cutting character-
istics, the mechanical behavior of single crystal copper for different
shearing directions, effects of machining small tools by means of focused
ion beam, and the thermal analysis of multi-pass laser irradiation on
fused silica.
ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING, ELECTRONICS,
NUCLEAR ENGINEERING
TK23 2012-028594 978-0-7006-1873-6
The wired Northwest; the history of electric power, 1870s-
1970s.
Hirt, Paul W.
University Press of Kansas, ©2012 461 p. $49.95
Hirt (history, Arizona State U.) presents a history of how the electric grid
developed from the early 20th century to the 1970s in the Pacific
Northwest (Oregon, Washington, Idaho and British Columbia). He
emphasizes the relationship between social goals and profitability,
arguing that this history shows “how Americans and Canadians use
markets and governing institutions in partnership to achieve social
goals.” He considers the advent of electrical devices and the subsequent
commodification of electricity to power them, the making public of
–297–
electric utilities in the early 20th century, the transformation that
electricity brought to industries and home-life in the Pacific Northwest,
the influence and interest of international finance in Pacific Northwest
electricity, the energy crisis of the 1970s, and considerations for further
energy transformations. His analysis focuses on governments, consumers,
energy-providing organizations themselves, but not energy-workers
themselves.
TK1001 2011-044126 978-1-4398-5633-8
Power systems, 3d ed.
Title main entry. Ed. by Leonard L. Grigsby. (The electric power engi-
neering handbook)
CRC Press, ©2012 —- p. $129.95
This third edition reference, part of The Electric Power Engineering
Handbook series, has been updated in almost all chapters and includes
new ones covering recent developments in power systems. The book is
formatted in four major parts: power system analysis and simulation,
power system transients, power system planning (reliability), and power
electronics. While intended for professionals in the field, the book also
would be useful as an educational resource. Editor is Grigsby (power
engineering authority, researcher, former educator).
TK1005 2012-011740 978-1-118-16381-8
Arc flash hazard analysis and mitigation.
Das, J. C.
John Wiley & Sons, ©2012 614 p. $135.00
New regulations on worker safety in the electrical environment are
calling forth new equipment innovations, electrical system designs, and
arc flash analysis and its mitigation. In turn, power companies are chal-
lenging practicing and consulting engineers to innovate electrical power
systems designs and relay protections. US power electricity engineer Das
summarizes the current status and trends for his colleagues and other
technical people in the power business. Among his perspectives are arc
flash hazards and their analysis, accounting for decaying short-circuit
currents in arc flash calculations, unit protection systems, over-current
coordination, arc-resistant equipment, and arc flash hazard calculations
in direct-current systems. Co-published with IEEE Press.
TK1006 978-3-8329-7202-8
Transforming the grid; electricity system governance and
network integration of distributed generation.
Bauknecht, Dierk. (Die Reihe “Wettbewerb und Regulierung von
Märkten und Untermehmen” wird herausgegeben von; v.20)
Nomos, ©2012 250 p. $61.00 (pa)
Drawing on his background in political science and electricity markets,
Bauknecht (Öko-Institute) deals with two major political forces that have
shaped policy making in general and the electricity business in par-
ticular. One is privatization and market deregulation and the other is sus-
tainability, particularly in light of climate change. His main question is
whether these two forces can be reconciled. Among his topics are the lib-
eralization and transformation of electricity systems, network regulation
and innovation, beyond changes in the incentive formula, and cases
studies of Britain and Denmark. The study began as his 2011 PhD dis-
sertation at Sussex University. Distributed in the US by ISBS.
TK1010 2011-044127 978-1-4398-8320-4
Power system stability and control, 3d ed.
Title main entry. Ed. by Leonard L. Grigsby. (The electric power engi-
neering handbook)
CRC Press, ©2012 —- p. $129.95
Writing primarily for electric power engineering professionals who want
facts, but also for engineers in neighboring fields who want an overview
or need some specific information, contributors in academia and utilities
explain how to keep a system stable and under control. This edition adds
chapters on smart grid, energy harvesting, distribution systems pro-
tection, electricity pricing, linear machines, and other novelties. Among
the topics are protecting synchronous generators, using oscillograph
records to analyze system performance, wide-area monitoring and situa-
tional awareness, integrating wind power into power systems, and
optimal power flow.
TK1191 2011-275796 978-0-07-177221-1
Power plant equipment operation and maintenance guide;
maximizing efficiency and profitability.
Kiameh, Philip.
McGraw-Hill, ©2012 738 p. $75.00
Kiameh (engineering, U. of Toronto, Canada) provides a guide to the
different types of power plants—including co-generation, combined cycle,
and integrated gasification combined cycle plants—and their selection,
maintenance, operation, and testing. He also discusses plant sizing,
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
troubleshooting, reconditioning, the economics of combined cycle and co-
generation plants, wind turbine generators, a vast array of technologies
and equipment, pumping system calculations, and more. Numerous
illustrations are included.
TK1541 2011-279441 978-1-61190-005-7
Planning for wind energy.
Title main entry. Ed. by Suzanne Rynne et al. (Planning advisory
service report; no. 566)
American Planning Assoc., ©2011 135 p. $60.00 (pa)
This report on wind energy begins with an overview of the benefits of
wind power, a discussion of the role of planning, and a review of state
policies and goals. The report then presents an industry overview of dis-
tributed wind power, mid-sized and utility-scale turbines, community
wind power, and utility-scale wind project costs and economics. Later
chapters address environmental and ecological concerns and examine the
state and local government’s authority over wind facility siting, trans-
mission, and interconnection. The book offers guidelines for regulation
of small-scale wind energy systems and permitting of utility-scale wind
energy systems at the local level. Color photos and charts are included.
Rynne is affiliated with the American Planning Association’s Green
Communities Research Center.
TK2313 2012-021350 978-0-8493-7027-4
Electric machines; modeling, condition monitoring, and
fault diagnosis.
Title main entry. Ed. by Hamid A. Toliyat, Subhasis Nandi, Seungdeog
Choi and Homayoun Meshgin-Kelk.
CRC Press, ©2012 259 p. $149.95
Drawing from research and development at the Electrical Machines and
Power Electronics Laboratory at Texas A&M University, a team of con-
tributors review diagnostic technologies for electric motors and their
application for graduate and senior undergraduate students in the power
electronics discipline who want to develop and implement a fault diag-
nosis and condition monitoring scheme to increase the safety and relia-
bility of motors in operation. The topics include faults in induction and
synchronous motors, modeling electric machines using the magnetic
equivalent circuit method, the fault diagnosis of electric machines using
techniques based on frequency domain, applying pattern recognition to
fault diagnosis, and implementing fault diagnosis in hybrid electric
vehicles based on reference frame theory.
TK2551 2012-021569 978-1-4398-5377-1
Transformer engineering; design, technology, and
diagnostics, 2d ed.
Kulkarni, S.V. and S.A. Khaparde.
CRC Press, ©2013 730 p. $149.95
Computational capabilities and monitoring and diagnostic techniques are
among the aspects of electrical transformers that have changed since the
2004 first edition went to print. Kulkarni and Khaparde (both Indian
Institute of Technology, Mumbai) have added new chapters on theory
and computations in electromagnetic fields in transformers, transformer-
system interactions and modeling, and monitoring and diagnostics.
Other chapters have also been revised as needed. The topics include
transformer fundamentals, stray losses in structural components, surge
phenomena in transformers, special transformers, and recent trends in
transformer technology. The book is mainly a reference for practitioners,
but could be used in a graduate or even advanced undergraduate course.
TK2796 2012-021351 978-1-4398-9109-4
Renewable energy systems; advanced conversion
technologies and applications.
Luo, Fang Lin. and Hong Ye. (Industrial electronics)
CRC Press, ©2013 851 p. $169.95
Authors Luo and Ye of Nanyang Technical University in Singapore are
pioneers in the advanced conversion technology that are critical elements
of wind turbine and solar energy panel systems. They offer detailed
examinations of converters and inverters for renewable energy pro-
duction, including innovative techniques and equipment. The extensive
diagrams and examples are intended to lead readers through the
processes of designing advanced converters for renewable energy pro-
duction. As one would expect, the book is intended for a specialized tech-
nical audience.
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
TK2896 978-3-03785-504-1
Advanced research on energy materials and material
application.
Title main entry. Ed. by Helen Zhang, David Jin and X.J. Zhao.
(Advance materials research; v.578 )
Trans Tech Publications, ©2013 224 p. $138.00 (pa)
Hot from a September 2012 international conference in Wuhan, China,
48 papers look first at energy engineering and energy materials based on
energy saving, then at material engineering and material applications.
Among the topics are the environmental evaluation of three typical steel
pipe production processes based on energy materials and life cycle
assessment, the high dielectric constant of polymer matrix composites
and its application for energy saving, the sensitive and selective determi-
nation of aminophenol isomers in chromogenic reactions by carbon nan-
otubes, the effect of a polypropylene skin on the hardness of polyethylene
pipe, and evaluating antifouling paints based on chloric polymer with
nano-titanium dioxide addition in material application engineering.
TK2896 978-3-03785-499-0
Energy material, chemical engineering and mining
engineering.
International Conference on Energy Material, Chemical Engineering and
Mining Engineering (2012: Wuhan, China) Ed. by B. Xu and H.Y. Li.
(Advanced materials research; v.577)
Trans Tech Publications, ©2012 194 p. $138.00 (pa)
Selected and peer reviewed, 41 papers take up the three areas in turn.
The topics include the design of test devices for carbon dioxide
absorbents as energy materials based on pressure sensors and temper-
ature sensors, a neural model of the production process for predicting fil-
tration properties of melt blowing non-wovens, the effect of antimony on
the corrosion resistance of steel in acid solution with high chloride con-
centration, reagents and processes of fine-grained cassiterite flotation in
mining engineering, and the effect of pore pressure variation on borehole
stability of drilling in sandstone reservoirs.
TK2945 978-3-527-33151-2
Principles and applications of lithium secondary batteries.
Title main entry. Ed. by Jung-Ki Park.
Wiley-VCH, ©2012 366 p. $160.00
Secondary batteries are rechargeable, in contrast to primary batteries,
which are used once and thrown away. Chemical and materials engi-
neers explain to colleagues the fundamentals of secondary lithium bat-
teries that make them essential elements in the development and
proliferation of mobile communication. They cover the basics of battery
chemistry, materials for lithium secondary batteries, electrochemical and
material property analysis, battery design and manufacturing, and eval-
uating battery performance.
TK2960 2012-006136 978-0-470-66111-6
Advanced silicon materials for photovoltaic applications.
Pizzini, Sergio et al.
John Wiley & Sons, ©2012 405 p. $145.00
The qualities that have made silicon the material of choice in electronics
for 60 years are making it the choice in photovoltaics as well. Physics,
chemists, and materials scientists from Italy and elsewhere explore its
use in that field. Among their topics are silicon science and technology
as he background of the current and future knowledge society, the role
of impurities in solar silicon, advanced analytic techniques for solar-
grade feedstock, modeling thin-film deposition processes, and innovative
quantum effects in silicon for photovoltaic applications.
TK4058 2011-049804 978-1-119-96398-1
Predictive control of power converters and electrical
drives.
Rodriguez, Jose and Patricio Cortes.
IEEE/Wiley, ©2012 230 p. $120.00
Model predictive control has been around for some decades, say
Rodriguez and Cortes (both U. Tecnica Federico Santa Maria, Chile), but
it has been applied to power electronics and drives only recently, as pow-
erful microprocessors have made possible the fast processing time
required to control electrical variables. They cover the basic principles of
power converters, drives, and control; the application of model predictive
control to power converters and motor drives; and some general and
practical implementation issues. Their topics include classical control
methods for power converters and drives, the predictive control of a
three-phase inverter, predictive control of induction machines, weighing
factor design, and the effect of model parameter errors. Distributed in the
US by Wiley.
–298–
TK5102 2012-017888 978-1-4398-4808-1
Game theory in communication networks; cooperative
resolution of interactive networking scenarios.
Antoniou, Josephina and Andreas Pitisllides.
CRC Press, ©2013 146 p. $129.95
In order to investigate how to promote cooperative behavior in interactive
situations between heterogeneous entities in communications networking
scenarios, Antoniou and Pitsillides (both computer science, U. of Cyprus)
use game theory models to analyze a set of illustrative strategic situations
and demonstrate profitable behaviors of the participating entities. They
do not explain cooperation theory itself, but highlight its nature and
power and its application and benefits in computer network communi-
cation. For two party cooperation they look at Prisoner’s Dilemma type
games and dealing with different types of player behavior; for many
players they discuss Spatial Prisoner’s Dilemma, games in neighbor-
hoods, and payoffs to coalitions. A MATLAB implementation is included.
TK5102 2012-030993 978-1-4665-0107-2
Green communications; theoretical fundamentals,
algorithms and applications.
Title main entry. Ed. by Jinsong Wu et al.
CRC Press, ©2013 812 p. $119.95
As the theme of sustainability permeates the energy industry and many
others, the field of green communications has emerged. And because the
information and communications technologies (ICT) it represents use so
much energy, companies and researchers are looking to energy efficiency
as a way to control costs, but it is such a young field, research in energy
efficiency for communications has only recently begun. The authors here
address both academic research and pertinent applications for green
communications and hope the discussions will encourage continued
development of techniques and strategies for solutions. Editors are Wu
(founding chair, Technical Subcommittee on Green Communications and
Computing of the IEEE Communications Society and former communi-
cations engineering professional), Rangan (electrical and computer engi-
neering, Polytechnic Institute of New York U.), and Zhang (information
science and electronic engineering, Zhejiang U., China).
TK5102 2012-028169 978-1-84821-378-4
Green networking.
Title main entry. Ed. by Francine Krief.
ISTE/Wiley, ©2012 278 p. $125.00
In most discussions of climate change, information and communication
technology only comes up as an alternative to commuting, but here spe-
cialists in the field focus on the carbon dioxide emissions and the very
high energy consumption of the technology, and suggest ways to reduce
them. The topics include the environmental impact of networking infra-
structures, a step towards green mobile networks, cognitive radio in the
service of green communication and networking, schemes for putting
base stations in sleep mode in mobile networks, and smarter cities.
TK5102 2012-943135 978-0-8194-9133-6
Sensor and data fusion; a tool for information assessment
and decision making, 2d ed.
Klein, Lawrence A.
SPIE, ©2012 473 p. $91.00
Klein updates his companion text to courses he has taught on multi-
sensor, multi-target data fusion techniques for tracking and identifying
objects. He keeps the mathematics as simple as possible, but suggests a
knowledge of statistics, probability, matrix algebra, and to a lesser extent
linear systems and radar detection. His topics include sensor data fusion
architectures and algorithms, classical and Bayesian inference, artificial
neural networks, data fusion issues associate with multiple-radar
tracking systems, and passive data association techniques for the unam-
biguous location of targets.
TK5102 2012-002991 978-1-4666-1839-8
Sustainable ICTs and management systems for green
computing.
Title main entry. Ed. by Wen-Chen Hu and Naima Kaabouch.
Information Science Reference, ©2012 467 p. $180.00
The 18 papers in this volume address the need to monitor the energy
and resources consumed by the information and communication
technology industry, and identify ways computers can support
environmental practices. German researchers propose a self-optimizing
technique for IT infrastructures that automatically tunes the energy
efficiency of IT systems, and Japanese researchers present algorithms for
selecting a server from a cluster that reduces total power consumption.
Other topics include multidimensional analysis of supply chain
environmental performance, mitigating the environmental impact of
smartphones with device reuse, video compression for portable and low-
–299–
power applications, and a hybrid energy system based on photovoltaic
and fuel cells.
TK5103 2012-012165 978-1-119-95150-6
Cognitive communications; distributed artificial
intelligence (DAI), regulatory policy & economics,
implementation.
Title main entry. Ed. by David Grace and Honggang Zhang.
John Wiley & Sons, ©2012 467 p. $160.00
Specialists in wireless communications and artificial intelligence go
beyond the current interest in cognitive radio to describe whole networks
that intelligently assign communication resources and operations. In
what they envision as a reference for students and researchers, they con-
sider such topics as cognitive radio and networks for heterogeneous net-
working, a message-passing approach to the distributed clustering of
cognitive radio networks, reinforcement learning for distributed power
control and channel access in cognitive wireless mesh networks, cog-
nitive radio networks in television white spaces, and cognitive acoustics
as a way to extend the lifetime of underwater acoustic sensor networks.
TK5103 2012-012203 978-1-4666-2005-6
Cognitive radio and interference management; technology
and strategy.
Title main entry. Ed. by Meng-Lin Ku and Jia-Chin Lin.
Information Science Reference, ©2013 338 p. $190.00
Sixteen papers explore challenges and developments in spectrum sensing
methodologies, interference mitigation schemes, cognitive radio network
analyses, resource allocation and sensing strategies, spectrum access and
mobility management, cross-layer designs, and cognitive radio network
security. Serving as a bridge between people working on theoretical and
practical wireless multimedia services, the book is organized from the
communication lower layer to the communication upper layer and
describes both academic theories and practical applications.
TK5103 2012-015862 978-1-118-34357-9
A guide to the wireless engineering body of knowledge
(WEBOK), 2d ed.
Title main entry. Ed. by Andrzej Jajszczyk.
IEEE/Wiley, ©2012 304 p. $74.95 (pa)
Professionals in wireless communication offer a broad overview of the
technical and other areas with which wireless practitioners should be
familiar. Unlike academic textbooks, this tutorial focuses on practical
engineering issues, though it does not neglect theoretical issues. The text
is also intended to help develop a common technical understanding, lan-
guage, set of tools, and approaches among wireless professionals edu-
cated and working in different parts of the world. The areas covered are
wireless technologies; network and service architecture, network man-
agement and security; radio engineering and antennas; facilities infra-
structure; agreements, standards, policies, and regulation; and
fundamental knowledge.
TK5103 20120709 978-1-4200-4648-9
Lightwave engineering.
Kokubun, Yasuo. (Optical science and engineering)
CRC Press, ©2013 351 p. $129.95
Kokubun (electrical and computer engineering, Yokohama National U.)
chose the term lightwave engineering to refer to a academic discipline
that deals with the behavior of electromagnetic waves and the propa-
gation of light that forms the basis of optoelectronics. The material spans
a wide spectrum of sophistication, from middle undergraduate through
graduate to professional engineer. Providing both mathematical equa-
tions and visual images to make sense of them, he covers fundamentals
of optical propagation and optical waveguides, the propagation of light
beams in free space, interference and resonators, guided wave optics,
optical fibers, propagation and focusing of the beam, and the basic
optical waveguide circuit.
TK5103 2012-012173 978-1-119-97405-5
LTE advanced; 3GPP solution for IMT-advanced.
Title main entry. Ed. by Harri Holma and Antti Toskala.
John Wiley & Sons, ©2012 219 p. $105.00
Contributors from a large computer company explain Release 10 and the
evolution toward Release 11 of LTE-Advanced—a networking protocol that
smart phones, tablet computers, and similar wireless communication
devices use. Among the topics are LTE-Advanced standardization,
downlink and uplink carrier aggregation and MIMO (multiple-input,
multiple output), relays, performance evaluation, and coordinated multi-
point transmission and reception.
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
TK5103 978-1-4665-0152-2
LTE-advanced air interface technology.
Zhang, Xincheng and Xiaojin Zhou.
CRC Press, ©2013 514 p. $119.95
At a level suitable for fellow wireless communication professionals,
Zhang and Zhou describe the performance targets and technology
components that the Third-Generation Partnership Project studied to
devise the Long-Term Evolution-Advanced (LTE-A) protocol for wireless
communication. They detail the evolutions in the first release of LTE-A,
Release 10, and refer to various technical proceedings related to its
development. The topics are from LTE to LTE-A, carrier aggregation,
collaborative multipoint, multiple-input multiple output (MIMO),
relaying, self-organizing network, heterogeneous networks, and
interference suppression.
TK5103 2012-007155 978-1-118-07273-8
Microwave line of sight link engineering.
Angueira, Pablo and Juan Antonio Romo.
John Wiley & Sons, ©2012 392 p. $125.00
Angueira and Romo (both communications engineering, U. of the Basque
Country) provide a complete guide to designing, bringing into service,
and operating microwave line-of-sight communications systems, which
continue to proliferate even after the success of optical links and satellite
fixed service since the 1980s. Their organization is by design work area,
showing the relations between different design procedures. Among their
topics are loss and fading associated with troposphere propagation phe-
nomena, frequency plan for a fixed service microwave link, link path
engineering, link engineering according to availability and error per-
formance criteria, and link operations and monitoring.
TK5103 2012-015764 978-1-4398-1723-0
Mobile communications handbook, 3d ed.
Title main entry. Ed. by Jerry D. Gibson. (Electrical engineering
handbook series)
CRC Press, ©2013 797 p. $139.95
Electrical engineers and related professionals cover basic principles,
wireless standards, source compression and quality assessment, wireless
networks, and emerging applications. Among their topics are baseband
signaling and pulse shaping, synchronizing communication receivers,
fundamental limits on increasing data rate in wireless systems, emer-
gency first responder communications, and cross-layer cooperative com-
munication in wireless networks. 26 of the 39 chapters in this ediiton are
entirely new.
TK5103 2012-002026 978-1-119-99201-1
Mobility models for next generation wireless networks; ad
hoc, vehicular, and mesh networks.
Santi, Paolo. (Wiley series in communications networking and dis-
tributed systems)
John Wiley & Sons, ©2012 338 p. $125.00
Santi (informatics and telematics, Italian National Research Council)
addresses all areas of mobility modeling, from the theoretical character-
ization of stationary properties of mobility models to the design of
mobility models aimed at resembling mobility features observed in the
real world. He applies the models to short-range, mostly infrastructure-
free wireless networks based on existing or forthcoming technology such
as WiFi, Bluetooth, and ZigBee. These technologies will complement tra-
ditional infrastructured wireless networks such as cellular phones, he
says, and make possible the realization of the ubiquitous computing par-
adigm. He writes for graduate students, researchers, engineers, and prac-
titioners interested in a global view of mobility modeling.
TK5103 2011-046434 978-0-470-66517-6
Optical CDMA networks; principles, analysis and
applications.
Ghafouri-Shiraz, Hooshang and M. Massoud Karbassian.
IEEE/Wiley, ©2012 398 p. $135.00
The concept of code-division multiple-access (CDMA) techniques were
proposed for optical communications during the late 1980s, and
Ghafouri-Shiraz (U. of Birmingham, Britain) and Karbassian (U. of
Arizona) report on the current state of optical spreading codes, optical
modulations, and transceiver architectures. Each chapter considers both
the physical understanding and engineering aspects, so the book can be
used as both a textbook and a reference. The topics include an intro-
duction to optical communication, spectrally encoded optical CDMA net-
works, coherent and incoherent optical CDMA networks, optical CDMA
with polarization modulations, and services differentiation and quality of
services.
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
TK5103 2012-006800 978-1-4398-5188-3
Optical wireless communications; system and channel
modelling with MATLAB.
Ghassemlooy, Z. et al.
CRC Press, ©2013 517 p. $129.95
Ghassemlooy (computing, engineering, and information sciences), S.
Rajbhandari (optical communications, both U. of Northumbria-
Newcastle), and W. Popoola (digital communications, U. of Edinburgh)
set out the theory of optical wireless communication for undergraduate
and graduate courses and for researchers and professional engineers.
They cover the fundamental principles, devices and systems, modulation
techniques, and channel models and system performance analysis. They
also survey various challenges encountered with the technology and
outline possible solutions. Throughout they use MATLAB simulations
and codes. The information is applicable to both indoor and outdoor
systems.
TK5103 978-3-03785-433-4
Smart technologies for materials; proceedings.
Int’l Conference on Smart Technologies for Materials and
Communication (2012: Melbourne, Australia) Ed. by Tianharry Chang.
(Advanced materials research; v.530)
Trans Tech Publications, ©2012 138 p. $124.00 (pa)
Selected from over 220 submissions, 23 papers report on recent research
into materials processing using advanced technologies. The topics include
coating postponed-set mortar with a single-screw extruder, the induced
synthesis of hydroxyapatite by chitosan for enamel remineralization, an
experimental study of the mechanical performance of shale lightweight
aggregate concrete, friction and wear mechanism between rubber and
nickel for water lubricated bearings, and the numerical simulation of the
failure process in a girder bridge under seismic influence.
TK5104 2012-000091 978-0-470-54084-8
Satellite communications payload and system.
Braun, Teresa M.
IEEE/Wiley, ©2012 369 p. $95.00
Drawing on her long career in satellite communication and navigation
for a number of companies, Braun examines the payload of communi-
cations satellites, to complement the many books on other aspects of the
satellites. She combines practical payload systems engineering and
applied communication theory for engineers in those fields and others
associated with communication satellites such as proposal writers, cus-
tomers, electrical and software engineers, and bus engineers. She recom-
mends knowledge of the Fourier transform and the duality of the time
and frequency domains, but says most of the book is understandable
without them.
TK5105 2012-013952 978-1-4666-2089-6
Adaptive web services for modular and reusable software
development; tactics and solutions.
Title main entry. Ed. by Guadalupe Ortiz and Javier Cubo.
Information Science Reference, ©2013 391 p. $195.00
In most cases services that are distributed over the web are in a flexible
enough form that many kinds of devices with different platforms can
receive them, but sometimes it is necessary to adapt web services for par-
ticular situations. Here European computer and information scientists
compile the most representative approaches to adapting services without
disruption the network as a whole. They cover contract-based adaptation
and interoperability, context-aware adaptation, adaptation for compo-
sition, dynamic adaptation, and device-based future Internet adaptation.
TK5105 2012-023343 978-1-4666-2494-8
Advancing information management through semantic
web concepts and ontologies.
Title main entry. Ed. by Patricia Ordónez de Pablos et a.
Information Science Reference, ©2013 413 p. $190.00
In this work for policy makers, information technology directors, and
researchers, international contributors in computer science and infor-
mation management come together to share new theories, research
findings, and case studies on semantic web and the role of information
technologies. Some specific topics discussed include multimedia systems
development, enterprise tomography, semantic web data partitioning,
and knowledge building in online environments. Other subjects are an
ontology-based search tool on the semantic web, identifying polarized
Wikipedia articles, mining sentiment using conversation ontology, and
ontology-based opinion mining. The editor is affiliated with the
University of Oviedo, Spain.
–300–
TK5105 2011-042246 978-0-470-90875-4
Energy-efficient distributed computing systems.
Title main entry. Ed. by Albert Y. Zomaya and Young Choon Lee.
(Wiley series on parallel and distributed computing)
John Wiley & Sons, ©2012 813 p. $130.00
Zomaya and Lee (information technology, The University of Sydney)
gather 26 chapters by international contributors in computer science,
detailing theoretical paradigms, technologies, and applications in the
design of distributed computing systems that use less energy. Early
chapters overview power allocation and task scheduling on multi-
processor computers with energy and time constraints, aspects of power-
aware high-performance computing, and energy efficiency in HPC
systems. The book then offers a stochastic framework for hierarchical
system-level power management and an energy-efficient reservation
infrastructure for grids, clouds, and networks. Other topics are energy-
aware scheduling using machine learning, and energy efficiency metrics,
scheduling, and storage systems for data centers. Also described are
energy efficiency strategies for distributed mobile computing, mobile
data mining, wireless sensor networks, and wireless healthcare net-
works. Readership includes advanced students, researchers, and practi-
tioners in computer science and engineering.
TK5105 2012-025821 978-1-59749-951-4
Hacking web apps; detecting and preventing web
application security problems.
Shema, Mike.
Syngress Media, Inc., ©2012 273 p. $49.95 (pa)
Whether hacking of websites is done out of bravado or more malicious
motives, such attacks can have a devastating impact. Shema, a San
Francisco-based web application security expert, presents examples of dif-
ferent hacks against Web applications (e.g., abusing HTML5, authenti-
cation schemes, malware, leveraging browser quirks); discusses their
methodology; and explains countermeasures including using “remember
me” features with caution, access control policies, encryption guidelines,
and learning from mistakes. Chapters include screenshots, warnings,
tips, and diagrams. Syngress Media is an imprint of Elsevier.
TK5105 978-1-4493-0933-6
Learning Rails 3.
St. Laurent, Simon et al. (Rails from the outside in)
O’Reilly Media, Inc., ©2012 387 p. $34.99 (pa)
With its conversational style and sense of humor, this tutorial offers a
slow approach to Ruby on Rails, starting from elements that are more
familiar to the average web developer and then moving into controllers
and models. The book is intended for designers who are moving toward
application development, and for developers who combine design skills
with programming skills. Because readers will insert a Ruby code into
HTML as a first step toward writing Ruby code directly, readers must be
familiar with HTML and have a general knowledge of how programming
works. Coverage progresses from installation of Ruby on Rails, through
simple and more sophisticated layouts using a variety of tools. Other
areas covered include Active Record, data models, testing and debugging
Rails code, and adding common web applications such as cookies.
Appendices offer brief (10-20 pages) introductions to Ruby, relational
databases, and regular expressions. Code examples, plus all code from
the book, can be found online. St. Laurent has written and edited other
computing books.
TK5105 2012-025209 978-1-4665-5263-0
Linear programming and algorithms for communication
networks; a practical guide to network design, control,
and management.
Oki, Eiji.
CRC Press, ©2013 194 p. $119.95
To fill a gap he finds between the theory-oriented academic texts and the
practical manuals of network operators and service providers, Oki (U. of
Electro-Communications, Tokyo) describes the fundamentals of linear
programming as applied to communications networks and a practical
guide on how to solve communications-related problems using a linear
programming solver, in this case the GNU Linear Programming Kit
(GLPK) package. The textbook could serve courses for senior and
graduate students in electrical engineering, computer engineering, and
computer science who are adept in linear algebra and computer logic.
TK5105 2012-021069 978-1-4398-7331-1
Multimedia security; watermarking, steganography, and
forensics.
Title main entry. Ed. by Frank Y. Shih.
CRC Press, ©2013 399 p. $129.95
Researchers and practitioners in computer, electronics, and information
–301–
provide students, researchers, and professionals with technical infor-
mation regarding digital security, and place it within a fundamental the-
oretical framework for developing the extensive advanced techniques.
Taking the techniques in turn, they consider such topics as discriminative
learning-assisted video semantic concept classification, digital water-
marking based on chaotic map and reference register, digital stegano-
graphic schemes based on image vector quantization, methodology based
on genetic algorithms for breaking steganalytic systems, and the behavior
modeling of human objects in multimedia content.
TK5105 2012-021348 978-1-4398-1205-1
The practical OPNET user guide for computer network
simulation.
Sethi, Adarshpal S. and Vasil Y. Hnatyshin.
CRC Press, ©2013 503 p. $49.95
Computer scientists Sethi (U. of Delaware-Newark) and Hnatyshin
(Rowan U., New Jersey) describe how to use software produced by the
OPNET company, IT Guru and Modeler, to simulate, model, and analyze
computer networks. Their topics include creating network topology, con-
figuring and running a simulation, advanced traffic generation features,
specifying user profiles and deploying applications, advanced Internet
Protocol (IP) features, and data link and physical layers. They include 14
laboratory assignments. The treatment could interest professionals and
researchers as well as graduate and undergraduate students in computer
commutations and networks.
TK5105 2012-021349 978-1-4665-1726-4
Principles of synchronous digital hierarchy.
Jain, Rajesh Kumar.
CRC Press, ©2013 531 p. $139.95
Chief signal engineer for Indian Railways, Jain has compiled for the
benefit of other engineers the information he gathered for himself to
learn about synchronous digital hierarchy technology and telecommuni-
cations systems based on it. His topics include the advent of digital tech-
nology, line coding and digital modulation, plesiochronous digital
hierarchy, architecture and protection mechanisms, and emerging
systems and the future of synchronous digital hierarchy.
TK5105 2012-010711 978-1-119-95154-4
Publish/subscribe systems; design and principles.
Tarkoma, Sasu. (Wiley series in communications networking and dis-
tributed systems)
John Wiley & Sons, ©2012 341 p. $105.00 (pa)
Tarkoma (computer science, University of Helsinki, Finland) offers a
unified presentation of publish/subscribe technology, which is a par-
adigm for connecting information supplies and consumers, used exten-
sively in modern distributed services and in emerging enterprise, cloud,
and mobile solutions. Emphasis is on the design of such systems based
on modular building blocks and commonly employed solutions. The
book begins by explaining the components of a pub/sub system and
related interfaces, environments, and application areas, then looks at the
history of such systems and how different solutions have been developed
and deployed. Content matching, filtering, and algorithms and data
structures for aggregation are also treated. Case examples show how to
combine publish/subscribe with the cloud, Twitter, Facebook, service-ori-
ented architecture, and multiplayer games. The book’s readership
includes advanced students and professionals in IT, distributed systems,
and enterprise computing, in addition to software engineers and pro-
grammers involved in social and mobile computing.
TK5105 2011-277738 978-1-118-00417-3
Semantic web and model-driven engineering.
Parreiras, Fernando Silva.
IEEE/Wiley, ©2012 236 p. $69.95 (pa)
For graduate students, researchers, and practitioners in computer science
and software engineering, Parreiras (information systems, FUMEC U,
Brazil) describes how model-driven engineering and ontology engi-
neering can complement each other in creating applications for the
semantic web. His topics include foundations of the two approaches,
marrying ontology and model-driven engineering, the two-use toolkit,
model-driven specification of ontology translations, and using templates
on ontology web language ontologies.
TK5105 2011-034777 978-0-13-701251-0
SOA with REST; principles, patterns & constraints for
building enterprise solutions with REST.
Title main entry. Ed. by Thomas Erl et al.
Prentice Hall, ©2013 577 p. $49.99
This tutorial explains how REST can be used in conjunction with service-
oriented architecture (SOA), service-orientation design principles, and
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
associated design patterns. It maintains a focus on modeling, design, and
architecture in relation to principles, patterns, and constraints. A supple-
mental section collects design patterns for SOA with REST, service
visioning with REST, and uniform contract profiles. About 150 pages of
appendices offer industry standards and other REST and SOA reference
material. The tutorial provides many cases, including an ongoing case
throughout the book, plus checklists, summary points, and code. The
book’s inside cover offers a color key to symbols used in the book’s many
process diagrams. The book’s readership includes architects who design
services and distributed solution architectures; developers interested in
working with REST technologies to build service-oriented solutions; and
enterprise architects, analysts, and REST and SOA specialists. Editor Erl
has written other books on SOA and computing.
TK5981 978-0-12-391421-7
Acoustics; sound fields and transducers.
Beranek, Leo L. and Tim J. Mellow.
Academic Press, ©2012 704 p. $119.95
Beranek (Massachusetts Institute of Technology) and Mellow, with a
British acoustics company, offer engineering students a textbook on
acoustics, that can also serve as a reference for experimenters and con-
sultants. They assume knowledge of electric circuit theory. Their 1954
Acoustics was widely used by designers of loudspeakers, but the science
has grown so tremendously over the past half century that they limit
their discussion here to electroacoustics—essentially an update of the first
half of the earlier text. The topics include the wave equation and solu-
tions, acoustic components, electrodynamic loudspeakers, cellphone
acoustics, sound in enclosures, room design for loudspeaker listening,
and analyzing the radiation and scattering of sound by the boundary
integral method. Academic Press is an imprint of Elsevier.
TK6560 2012-010709 978-1-118-12849-7
RF circuit design, 2d ed.
Li, Richard Chi-Hsi. (Information and communication technology series;
102)
John Wiley & Sons, ©2012 840 p. $160.00
A radio-frequency circuit designer at several large companies over the
years as well as a lecturer, Li introduces individual radio-frequency
circuit block design, summarizes skills and technology in the field, and
sets out basic parameters of a radio frequency system and the funda-
mentals of system design. His topics include reflection and self-inter-
ference, equipotentiality and current coupling on the ground surface, the
manufacturability of product design, differential pairs, and voltage-con-
trolled oscillators.
TK6570 2012-013148 978-1-4666-2080-3
Advanced RFID systems, security, and applications.
Title main entry. Ed. by Nemai Chandra Karmakar.
Information Science Reference, ©2013 392 p. $190.00
Radio frequency identification (RFID) is most often used to keep people
from stealing items from stores, and for that the tag only needs to tell the
door that it has or has not been deactivated at the counter—a one-bit tag.
The focus here is on more complex tags that can contain much more
information, though at this point such tags and systems are too expensive
except for high-value applications. Scientists and engineers from
Australia, Europe, Asia, and the Americas look at security, middleware,
anti-collision protocol, and applications. Among the applications are
vehicle identification, tracing the integrity of drugs, detecting sleep
apnea, and monitoring the condition of high voltage.
TK6680 978-0-12-415760-6
Digital video processing for engineers; a foundation for
embedded systems design.
Parker, Michael and Suhel Dhanani.
Newnes, ©2013 224 p. $54.95 (pa)
Parker and Dhanani, both with a California hardware company, explain
basic concepts and applications of video technology so engineers can
either build their own video systems or integrate third-party video tech-
nology into their products. Their treatment might also be useful to people
who need to know the basics but not the details for technical marketing
and sales, and to executives in the many business that require video tech-
nology. Among the topics are sampling and aliasing, video deinterlacing,
sensor processing for image sensors, frequency domain representation,
and video compression fundamentals. Newnes is an imprint of Elsevier.
TK7018 978-0-7864-6552-1
The vacuum cleaner; a history.
Gantz, Carroll.
McFarland & Co., ©2012 230 p. $45.00 (pa)
Offering the first comprehensive book on the history of the vacuum
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
cleaner, Gantz (industrial design, Carnegie Mellon U.) details the evo-
lution of mechanical floor devices and how they revolutionized home
cleaning. Full of interesting facts and figures, this engaging book focuses
on the men and women involved in inventing and improving vacuum
cleaners as well as the changing social, economic, political, health, tech-
nical, and environmental climate surrounding them. Includes industrial
designers Dreyfuss, Lurrele Guild, Loewy, George Walker, James Dyson,
and the author.
TK7868 2012-001531 978-1-118-16263-7
Nanometer frequency synthesis beyond phase-locked loop.
Xiu, Liming.
IEEE/Wiley, ©2012 324 p. $125.00
The chief clock architect at a microelectronics company, Xiu draws on
number theory and Fourier analysis to investigate how to improve the
relationship between time and number in very large integrated circuits.
In particular, he asks whether it is possible to represent information with
time—a transistor’s rate of switching—as well as with level of voltage or
current, as is now the case. He covers clock signal in electronic systems,
existing frequency synthesis techniques, time-average-frequency, flying-
adder direct period synthesis architecture, digital-to-frequency converter,
the new frontier in electronic system design, and the future era of time.
TK7870 2012-014005 978-1-936504-28-2
Datacom equipment power trends and cooling
applications, 2d ed.
Title main entry. (ASHRAE datacom series; bk.2)
ASHRAE Publications, ©2012 132 p. $54.00 (pa)
This guide estimates hardware growth patterns for data center planning
and describes systems for cooling computer equipment in datacom
rooms through airflow and liquid transport. A handy glossary and b&w
images are provided. The second edition updates power consumption
data for server categories and adds a chapter on component power
trends.
TK7871 2011-277826 978-0-470-90005-5
Advanced circuits for emerging technologies.
Title main entry. Ed. by Krzysztof Iniewski.
John Wiley & Sons, ©2012 615 p. $145.00
Body area networks, wireless communication, data networking, and
optical imaging are the areas for which scientists and engineers explore
emerging techniques of designing integrated circuits. The topics include
sub-threshold source-coupled logic, frequency generation and control
with self-reference complementary metal oxide semiconductor (CMOS)
oscillators, radio frequency transceivers for wireless applications, on-chip
spiral inductors with integrated magnetic materials, and checkers for
online self-testing of analog circuits.
TK7871 2012-014571 978-1-4398-4632-2
Circuit design; techniques for non-crystalline
semiconductors.
Sambandan, Sanjiv.
CRC Press, ©2013 243 p. $179.95
Disordered semiconductors have attracted the interest of researchers due
to their promise of low temperature fabrication over large areas, explains
Sambandan (flexible electronics, Indian Institute of Science, Bangalore),
but what has been missing are a circuit theory and system design
approach to help designers synthesize circuits without worrying about
the details of the physics in the device. He describes the problems,
provides models, and suggests solutions to circuit synthesis with these
materials, emphasizing the problem of threshold voltage shift and
designing electronic circuits around it. In sections on fundamentals, non-
crystalline semiconductors, and thin film transistor circuits and
applications, he discusses such topics as resistor-capacitor circuits,
modeling threshold voltage shift for circuit design, a transistor as a
switch, compensation circuits for displays, and a case study of a pseudo
PMOS field effect transistor.
TK7871 978-3-527-33032-4
High-k gate dielectrics for CMOS technology.
Title main entry. Ed. by Gang He and Zhaoq Sun.
Wiley-VCH, ©2012 558 p. $200.00
In an effort to overcome limitations on the further miniaturization of
complementary metal oxide semiconductor (CMOS) field-effect
transistors, researchers have developed high dielectric constant (k) gate
stacks that match the performance of conventional gate dielectrics based
on silicon dioxide. Materials scientists and physicists review the problem,
solutions to date, remaining challenges, and prospects. Their topics
include the ultraviolet engineering of high-k thin films, structural and
electrical characteristics of alternative high-k dielectrics for CMOS
–302–
applications, interfacial dipole effects on high-k gate stacks, high-k
dielectrics in ferroelectric gate field effect transistors for nonvolatile
memory applications, and the interaction challenges with novel materials
in developing high-performance and low-leakage high-k/metal gate CMOS
transistors.
TK7871 2011-046036 978-1-119-99319-3
Space antenna handbook.
Title main entry. Ed. by William A. Imbriale et al.
John Wiley & Sons, ©2012 744 p. $200.00
The requirements for antennas used in space are far different from those
for terrestrial antennas. This reference offers a comprehensive review of
space antenna technology, design and modeling, and their varied appli-
cations—from satellites to deep space exploration. A sampling of specific
topics includes: space environment and materials, mechanical and
thermal design of space antennas, testing, development, deployable mesh
reflector antennas, microstrip array technologies, emerging technologies,
communications and other applications, and challenges anticipated in
the future. While of course technical, the book is clearly written and sup-
ported with informative graphics. Extensive references and a helpful and
detailed list of acronyms also are included. Editors are Imbriale (Jet
Propulsion Laboratory, California Institute of Technology), Gao (Surrey
Space Centre, U. of Surrey, UK), and Boccia, (U. of Calabria, Italy).
TK7871 978-0-12-415907-5
Switchmode RF and microwave power amplifiers, 2d ed.
Grebennikov, Andrei et al.
Academic Press, ©2012 677 p. $119.95
Intended for RF circuit designers and engineers, this work covers both
theory and practical implementation via design examples and practical
schematics. Regular circuit diagrams and graphs appear, along with
computer screens in the computer-aided design chapter. This 2nd edition
includes expanded attention to Doherty architectures, a new chapter on
analog and digital predistortion techniques, and greater coverage of
Class-F power amplifiers.
TK7872 2011-051663 978-0-470-66124-6
Distributed sensor systems; practice and applications.
Rashvand, Habib F. and Jose M. Alcaraz Calero.
John Wiley & Sons, ©2012 341 p. $105.00
Rashvand (U. of Warwick) and Calero, with a multinational computer
company, describe the use of smart sensors as the nucleus of an appli-
cation-based intelligent networking concept. They cover distributed
sensors, smart sensing devices, smart sensing architectures, monitoring
well being, clinical applications, smart home and office, public safety
applications, and geographical applications.
TK7872 978-3-03785-431-0
Ferroics and multiferroics; special topics volume with
invited peer reviewed papers only.
Title main entry. Ed. by Hardev Singh Virk and Wolfgang Kleemann.
(Solid state phenomena; v.189)
Trans Tech Publications, ©2012 266 p. $138.00 (pa)
Multiferroics—which simultaneously display ferromagnetism and ferro-
electricity and often ferroplasticity—are attracting considerable attention
because of the interesting physics involved and the promise of important
practical applications. Balancing theory and experiment, 12 invited, peer-
reviewed papers explore the materials from such perspectives as combing
magnetism and ferroelectricity towards multiferroicity, intrinsic free elec-
trons/holes at polarization discontinuities and their implications for the
basics of ferroelectricity and its origin, molecular spintronics, recent
applications of Landau-Ginzburg theory to ferroelectric superlattices, fer-
romagnetic shape memory Heusler alloys, and dielectric relaxation phe-
nomena in some lead and non-lead based ferroelectric relaxor materials.
TK7872 2012-028853 978-1-118-16810-3
Frequency acquisition techniques for phase locked loop.
Talbot, Daniel.
John Wiley & Sons, ©2012 212 p. $120.00
Talbot, who develops radio-frequency and analog engineering products,
explains the frequency acquisition assistance techniques necessary
and/or available for phase-locked loops (PLL) at a mathematical level
suitable to engineers and technicians—that is, an occasional and optional
formula rather than pages and pages of dense equations. His topics
include simulating the PLL linear operational mode, phase noise and
other spurious interferers, carrier recovery applications and acquisition,
interfacing the frequency discriminator to the PLL, and frequency syn-
thesis applications.
–303–
TK7872 2011-048135 978-1-118-15912-5
Frequency stability; introduction and applications.
Kroupa, Venceslav F. (IEEE Press series on digital and mobile commu-
nication; 15. )
IEEE/Wiley, ©2012 302 p. $99.95
Kroupa (photonics and electronics, Academy of Sciences of the Czech
Republic) refreshes memory from student days about time and frequency
in electronic—especially communication—systems, and introduces the
field to researchers and practitioners in neighboring fields, all without
recourse to complicated mathematics. He covers noise and frequency sta-
bility, noise in resonators and oscillators, noise properties of practical
oscillators, noise of building elements, time domain measurements, and
phase-locked loops.
TK7872 2012-016094 978-1-4398-8786-8
Piezoelectric materials and devices; applications in
engineering and medical sciences.
Vijaya, M.S.
CRC Press, ©2013 171 p. $139.95
Piezoelectric materials convert mechanical energy into electrical energy
and vice versa, so have attracted interest in recent decades as potential
sensors and actuators. Vijaya (M.S. Ramaiah School of Advanced Studies,
Bangalore, India) surveys the application of devices based on them in
engineering and medicine. He covers piezoelectric characteristics, mate-
rials, engineering applications, medical applications, and modeling and
virtual prototyping piezoelectric devices using finite element software
tools.
TK7872 2012-938839 978-1-84569-988-8
Printed films; materials science and applications in
sensors, electronics and photonics.
Title main entry. Ed. by Maria Prudenziati and Jacob Hormadaly.
(Woodhead Publishing series in electronic and optical materials; no.26)
Woodhead Publishing, ©2012 586 p. $290.00
Materials scientists, electronic engineers, and other contributors
introduce the basic process of printing electronic circuits to readers who
have not encountered it before, and survey applications to describe some
of the more elaborate forms. Among the topics are materials science con-
cepts for printed films, multilayer low-temperature co-fired ceramic
systems incorporating a thick-film printing process, printed thick-film
mechanical microsystems, printed heater elements, and printed polymer
solar cells.
TK7872 2012-025220 978-1-4398-5277-4
Wireless sensor networks; a cognitive perspective.
Ibnkahla, Mohamed. (Adaptation in wireless communications)
CRC Press, ©2013 263 p. $149.95
Research into cognitive approaches in telecommunications have been
scattered over a large number of conference and journal papers, says
Ibnkahla (Queen’s U., Ontario, Canada), and in the process of gathering
and synthesizing it, he also proposes a unifying view of the different cog-
nitive approaches and methodologies. He intends this account to be a
foundation for further study in cognitive telecommunications. Readers
should have a general background in telecommunications at the level of
an undergraduate course in digital telecommunications; a basic
knowledge of wireless telecommunications would be helpful but is not
required. He covers cognitive approaches to wireless sensor networks;
cognitive radio networks and dynamic spectrum access; adaptive modu-
lation, power allocation, and medium access; cross-layer approaches to
Quality of Service routing in wireless multi-hop networks; cognitive
diversity routing; enabling cognition through weighed cognitive maps;
and hardware architecture for wireless censor networks enabled by
global positioning systems (GPS) and inertial navigation systems (INS).
TK7874 978-3-527-41191-7
Frontiers in electronic materials; proceedings.
Nature Conference Frontiers in Electronic Materials (2012: Aachen,
Germany) Ed. by Jörg Heber et al. (Nature conferences)
Wiley-VCH, ©2012 692 p. $165.00 (pa)
Extended abstracts of one to two pages document the 27 invited papers,
over 200 presentations at topical sessions, and nearly as many poster
papers. Among the areas studied are topological effects, advanced spec-
troscopy and scattering, phase change materials, scanning probe
microscopy on oxides, logic devices and circuit design, neuromorphic
concepts, valence change memories, magnetic interfaces and surfaces,
spin dynamics, multiferroic thin films and heterostructures, interplay
between strain and electronic structure in metal oxides, nanotechno-
logical fabrication strategies, and carbon-based molecular systems. There
is no index.
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
TK7876 2012-011804 978-1-119-97955-5
Handbook of microwave component measurements; with
advanced VNA techniques.
Dunsmore, Joel P.
John Wiley & Sons, ©2012 611 p. $135.00
Dunsmore characterizes the book as a mixture of basic and advanced
and theoretical and practical, with the dividing lines not always clear. He
primarily deals with measurement techniques, but also provides consid-
erable information about device attributes that will be useful to both
designers and test engineers. The principle instrument for testing
microwave components is the vector network analyzer (VNA), he says,
which he has been designing for 30 years. He covers VNA measurement
systems, calibration and vector error correction, time domain transforms,
measuring linear passive devices, measuring amplifiers, mixer and fre-
quency converter measurements, VNA balanced measurements, and
advanced measurement techniques.
TK7881 2012-008107 978-1-118-26682-3
An introduction to audio content analysis; applications in
signal processing and music informatics.
Lerch, Alexander.
IEEE/Wiley, ©2012 248 p. $125.00
Lerch (audio content analysis, Technical U. of Berlin) designs technology
for audio signal processing for the music software business and for audio
content distributors. Audio content analysis, he explains, extracts musical
and perceptual properties directly from audio signals on the Internet or
in databases; knowledge of those properties can be used to improve the
interaction of humans or machines with digital audio signals and enable
new ways of assessing, processing, and visualizing music. He focuses on
music, though the field considers speech recognition and other areas as
well. Among his topics are fundamentals, instantaneous features, tonal
and temporal analysis, alignment, and music performance analysis.
TK7881 2012-016109 978-1-61593-120-0
The location sound bible; how to record professional
dialog for film and TV.
Viers, Ric.
Michael Wiese Productions, ©2012 354 p. $29.95 (pa)
Viers, an independent audio producer with 15 years of experience
working for major film and TV production companies, presents a guide
to producing high quality audio-recording in a TV and film-context. He
argues that it’s easy to relegate sound to a postproduction priority, but
that quality is really determined by what you get “on location.” He
reviews several basic areas of audio-production, including sound and mic
basics, types of microphones, microphone technique, wireless systems
and signal flow issues, recorders, mixers, building a sound package, and
in later chapters he covers more vocation topics related to being an audio-
production professional. He makes use of images, break-away sections
and other non-written devices to organize the book. He doesn’t tell you
what to do in every situation, but offers a formula for figuring it out
yourself. Though focused on television and film, it may also be of interest
to anyone involved in audio-production.
TK7881 2010-939135 978-1-4354-5880-2
Pro Tools 101; official courseware, version 9.0. (DVD-ROM
included)
Avid Technology, Inc. and Frank D. Cook.
Course Technology PTR, ©2011 288 p. $49.99 (pa)
This edition of a book/DVD package has been updated for version 9 of
Pro Tools, and now corresponds to changes in the larger training
program called The Digidesign Training Partner Program, which is now
part of the new Avid Authorized Training Partner program. Focusing on
basic principles needed to complete a Pro Tools project, from initial set
up to final mixdown, the book is for the audio enthusiast with relatively
little Pro Tools experience. It can be completed through self-study;
however, an instructor-led class through an authorized training partner
is recommended. Cook is affiliated with Avid Technology.
TK7882 2012-027056 978-1-4665-5509-9
Introduction to surveillance studies.
Petersen, J. K.
CRC Press, ©2013 406 p. $69.95
This introductory, plain-language text/reference is accessible to new stu-
dents and general readers. Highlighting recent technologies and trends in
surveillance, such as data mining and social networks, it weighs the pros
and cons of surveillance technologies in applications such as law
enforcement, medicine, and wildlife management. The book can be used
as an intro to surveillance and privacy by journalists, urban planners,
public servants, and those in law enforcement, forensics, and technology.
It can also be used as a supplementary text for those studying sociology,
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
constitutional freedoms, privacy, and the impact of technology on society.
Sections cover technologies and techniques, practical considerations
related to effectiveness, and privacy and legislation. The book also offers
a list of references in categories such as online journal articles, gov-
ernment and private sector web sites, and selected online videos on DNA
profiling, robotics, and smart cameras. The book is illustrated
throughout with b&w photos and images.
TK7882 2012-009481 978-1-119-94070-8
Using LEDs, LCDs, and GLCDs in microcontroller projects.
Ibrahim, Dogan.
John Wiley & Sons, ©2012 479 p. $110.00
Microcontrollers are single chip microprocessor systems that are used in
devices such as laser printers, smartphones, musical equipment, washing
machines, and cookers, explains Ibrahim (Near East U., Cyprus).
Typically inputs are buttons, keypads, or sensors and outputs are display
lights, motors, actuators, buzzers, and so on. He explains the theory and
applications of display devices in microcontroller based systems to
students, engineers, and hobbyists developing display-based projects
using the PIC series of microcontrollers and the most popular display
technologies.
TK7882.I6 978-1-4398-7572-8
High performance visualization; enabling extreme-scale
scientific insight.
Title main entry. Ed. by E. Wes Bethel, Hank Childs and Charles
Hansen. (Computational science)
CRC Press, ©2013 446 p. $99.95
The focus here in on the subset of scientific visualization that is con-
cerned with algorithm design, implementation, and optimization for use
on today’s largest computational platforms. Many of the contributors
describe and explain the algorithms they themselves developed, all of
which are now actively being used on the largest scientific data sets.
They cover distributed memory parallel concepts and systems, advanced
processing techniques, advanced architectural challenges and solutions,
and high performance visualization implementations.
TK7895 2011-278467 978-0-07-163948-4
Embedded systems hardware for software engineers.
Lipiansky, Ed.
McGraw-Hill, ©2012 298 p. $100.00
After introducing the functional blocks of an embedded computer
system, this book describes the operation of memory devices, memory
address decoding, data converters, input/output chip drivers and
receivers, programmable logic devices, and electronic test instrumen-
tation. Lipiansky, who works at Google, explains how input and output
ports interface with the microcontroller or microprocessor, commonly
used interfacing standards, transmission lines in pulsed regimes, and the
effect of a printed circuit board on high speed design. The practical
examples draw on the specifications of actual devices available on the
market and eschew mathematical complexity.
TK8305 2012-008717 978-1-119-97451-2
Nanostructured and subwavelength waveguides;
fundamentals and applications.
Skorobogatiy, Maksim. (Wiley series in materials for electronic & opto-
electronic applications)
John Wiley & Sons, ©2012 318 p. $155.00
Skorobogatiy (engineering physics, École Polytechnique de Montréal)
presents semi-analytical theory and practical applications of a large
number of subwavelength and nanostructured optical waveguides. His
focus is on waveguides made of non-magnetic materials, including
dielectrics, metal, polar materials, and combinations thereof. Writing for
graduate students researchers, and technologists he discusses such
aspects as the Hamiltonian formulation of Maxwell equations for the
modes of anisotropic waveguides, circular fibers made of isotopic mate-
rials, modes at the interface between two materials, planar
metal/dielectric metamaterials, and semi-analytical methods of solving
nonlinear equations of two variables.
TK8320 2012-013971 978-1-118-33694-6
Design of integrated circuits for optical communications,
2d ed.
Razavi, Behzad.
John Wiley & Sons, ©2012 424 p. $120.00
For graduate students and practicing engineers with a solid under-
standing of analog design, Razavi (electrical engineering, U. of California-
Los Angeles) presents a tutorial on analyzing and designing integrated
circuits for optical communications systems. He updates the 2002 first
edition, retaining the fundamentals while incorporating changes in the
–304–
field such as passive optical networks with their burst-mode circuits and
the many new circuit techniques for broadband applications. Among the
topics are optical devices, limiting amplifiers and output buffers, oscil-
lator fundamentals, phase-locked loops, and multiplexers and laser
drivers.
TK8322 2012-357276 978-3-527-31459-1
Chalcogenide photovoltaics; physics, technologies, and
thin film devices.
Scheer, Roland and Hans-Werner Schock.
Wiley-VCH, ©2011 368 p. $130.00
Scheer (photovoltaics, Martin-Luther-U., Halle-Wittenberg) and Schock, a
pioneer in chalcogenide solar cells, discuss thin film solar cells based on
sulfide, selenide, or telluride—the chalcogenides—semiconductors.
Commercial production of these cells began at the dawn of the 21st
century and has been growing rapidly, they say, but research on them
began four decades ago. They focus on the physics and technology,
paying special attention to the stacks of different semiconductor mate-
rials—heterostructures—that form the core of the solar cell. Their topics
are thin film heterostructures, design rules for heterostructure solar cells
and modules, thin film material properties, thin film technology, and
photovoltaic properties of standard devices.
TK9152 2011-935983 978-0-85709-398-1
Probabilistic safety assessment for optimum nuclear
power plant life management (PLim); theory and
application of reliability analysis methods for major
power plant components.
Arkadov, Gennadij et al. (Woodhead Publishing series in energy; no.49)
Woodhead Publishing, ©2012 352 p. $245.00
Whether it’s ensuring the reliability of nuclear power plant components
or setting up a schedule for preventive maintenance, probability analysis
plays a key role. With regular graphs, equations and drawings of key
plant parts, this work thoroughly covers the use of probability safety
assessment. A substantial first chapter not only outlines the terminology,
acronyms, and symbols used throughout, but presents in mathematical
form some of the key aspects of reliability and probability theory.
Appendixes cover Markov models and the software used for reliability
analysis in Russia. The authors are based at nuclear power institutes in
Russia and France.
TK9185 2012-020723 978-0-8031-7536-5
Reactor dosimetry; proceedings.
International Symposium on Reactor Dosimetry (14th: Bretton Woods,
NH) Ed. by David W. Vehar et al. (Journal of ASTM International
selected technical papers; 1550)
ASTM International, ©2012 762 p. $174.00 (pa)
The symposium is held about every three years, sponsored jointly by
ASTM International Committee E10 on Nuclear Technology and
Applications, and the European Working Group on Reactor Dosimetry.
The 14th, held in May 2011, heard 57 oral presentations on reactor sur-
veillance and plant life; nuclear data, uncertainties, and sensitivity
studies; reactor surveillance and retrospective dosimetry; benchmarks
and intercomparisons; research/test reactors and accelerator dosimetry;
neutron and gamma-ray transport calculations and modeling; and exper-
imental techniques, new developments, and optical methods. Among the
topics are dosimetry assessments for the reactor pressure vessel and core
barrel in British pressurized water reactor plants, the sensitivity of
adjustment to parameter correlations and to response-parameter correla-
tions, Los Alamos National Laboratory fission basis, reactor pulse-
repeatability studies at the Annular Core Research Reactor, and
developing neutron measurement in intense gamma fields using a new
type of nuclear emulsion. Neither the plenary lectures nor the poster
papers are contained in the proceedings.
TK9204 2011-278249 978-0-309-25457-1
Interim report-status of the study; “An assessment of the
prospects for inertial fusion energy”.
National Research Council of the National Academies.
National Academies Press, ©2012 47 p. $35.00 (pa)
The US Department of Energy’s Office of the Under Secretary for Science
asked the National Research Council to assess the prospects for inertial
fusion energy, and to provide advice on preparing a research and devel-
opment roadmap leading to a demonstration plant. Part of the request
was for an interim report to help the Department formulate its budget
request for future budget cycles. This is that interim report, providing the
sponsor with a status report on the committee’s progress and a summary
of its preliminary conclusions and recommendations based on its first
four meetings. It is not indexed.
–305–
TK9360 2012946144 978-0-85709-073-7
Nuclear fuel cycle science and engineering.
Title main entry. Ed. by Ian Crossland. (Woodhead Publishing in
energy; no. 37)
Woodhead Publishing, ©2012 626 p. $300.00
Consultants and professionals in academic and government laboratories
walk readers through stages of the nuclear fuel cycle: uranium and
thorium mining, enrichment, fuel element design, and fabrication; the
impact of nuclear reactor design and operation on fuel element irradi-
ation; and spent nuclear fuel and radioactive waste management, radio-
logical protection, the economics of nuclear power, uranium conversion
and enrichment, water cooled thermal reactor designs and operation,
understanding and modeling fuel behavior under irradiation, and dis-
posing of radioactive waste.
TK9363 2011-278398 978-0-309-25320-8
Progress, challenges, and opportunities for converting U.S.
and Russian research reactors; a workshop report.
National Research Council of the National Academies.
National Academies Press, ©2012 115 p. $43.00 (pa)
The goal is to convert research nuclear reactors from highly enriched to
low enriched uranium fuel, both because the highly enriched fuel is
more dangerous and harder to handle, and to keep terrorists from
making bombs. The report is based on a June 2011 symposium in
Moscow. After the introduction and background, it covers challenges and
opportunities associated with conversion, reactor conversion case studies,
and managing proliferation risks and maintaining missions. It is not
indexed.
MOTOR VEHICLES, AERONAUTICS,
ASTRONAUTICS
TL214 2012935885 978-0-85709-209-0
Turbochargers and turbocharging; proceedings.
International Conference on Turbochargers and Turbocharging (10th:
2012: London, UK). (IMechE conference proceedings)
Professional Engineering Pub., ©2012 439 p. $595.00
Academic and practicing scientists and engineers describe recent efforts
to make internal combustion engines comply with legislation and envi-
ronmental trends for reducing both carbon dioxide emissions and fuel
consumption. The 34 papers cover novel applications, high-boost and two-
stage systems, turbine fatigue and structural analysis, compressor and
aero-design optimization, rotor dynamics and vibrations, advanced sim-
ulation and validation, turbine development trends, systems and tran-
sient response, compressor development trends, novel pressure charging
and high efficiency systems, and turbine unsteady flow. There is no
subject index. Distributed in the US by ASME.
TL220 2012-006649 978-1-119-94273-3
Electric vehicle technology explained, 2d ed.
John Larminie and John Lowry.
John Wiley & Sons, ©2012 314 p. $120.00
Intended for engineers, scientists, and students in automotive,
mechanical, and electrical engineering, this book explains the technology
of electric vehicles, looks at how they affect the environment, and eval-
uates engineering elements of electric scooters, cars, buses, and trains.
This second edition is updated to reflect current research, technology,
and applications, with new material on types of electric vehicles and
expanded material on battery technology, fuel cells, hydrogen supply, and
modeling. There are new examples and case studies of the environmental
benefits of electric vehicles. A new final chapter presents future models
of high-speed electric trains. The book is illustrated with many b&w
photos of vehicles old and new in various states of development. About
10 pages of appendices offer MATLAB examples, which can also be found
on a companion website. Larminie is affiliated with Oxford Brookes
University, UK. Lowry is an engineering consultant in the UK.
TL229 978-0-85709-210-6
Fuel systems for IC engines; proceedings.
IMechE’s Fuel Systems for IC Engines Conference (2012: London, UK)
Woodhead Publishing, ©2012 335 p. $535.00 (pa)
Engineers share their latest thoughts and findings concerning fuel
injection systems for internal combustion engines, taking particular note
of the increasing cost of fuel and the ever more stringent regulation of
emissions. Indeed the keynote address looks at energy prognosis until
2030, reserves, and transport fuels. Another 23 papers cover systems
architecture, gasoline direct injection systems, medium and heavy-duty
diesel, light-duty diesel, gasoline direct-injection spray generation, diesel
spray, and development and methodology. Among the topics are the
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
significance of droplet size when injecting aqueous urea into a selective
catalytic reduction after-treatment systems in a light-duty diesel exhaust,
diesel common rail fuel systems technology for high efficiency ultra-low
emissions medium duty engines, fuel economy and emission potential of
spray-guided combustion in gasoline engines, and an instrument for
testing injectors based on measuring spray momentum.
TL240 2012940635 978-1-61503-849-7
Lightweight materials; understanding the basics.
Title main entry. Ed. by F.C. Campbell.
ASM International, ©2012 709 p. $180.00
Aluminum, magnesium, beryllium, titanium, titanium aluminides, engi-
neering plastics, structural ceramics, and composites are the materials
for which the book provides information on the properties, processing,
and applications. A history of lightweight materials begins, pointing out
that, except ceramics, none of them existed in a usable form until the
20th century. The chapters on metals describe the basic metallurgy, prop-
erties of the available alloys, processing, and applications. The chapter on
engineering plastics points out how they differ from garden variety
plastic, and the precautions that must be taken when they are used struc-
turally. Composites are considered with polymer, metal, and ceramic
matrices. A final chapter sets out selection guidelines.
TL243 2012-025212 978-1-4665-1527-7
Dynamics of wheel-soil systems; a soil stress and
deformation-based approach.
Pytka, Jaroslaw A. (Ground vehicle engineering series)
CRC Press, ©2013 313 p. $139.95
Pytka (automotive technology, Lublin U. of Technology, Poland) investi-
gates the relationship between load and stress deformation state for struc-
tured and disturbed soils and for tillage variants, and reports the results
of field studies on soil response under wheeled vehicle loads and tracked
vehicle loads. A stress state transducer group incorporating a three-axis
accelerometer to identify the moment of aircraft touchdown is proposed
for evaluating grassy airfields. The opening chapters introduce tech-
niques for measuring soil stress and deformation during experiments
and factors to consider when designing sensor systems.
TL250 2012-012861 978-1-4398-9425-5
Automotive ergonomics; driver-vehicle interaction.
Title main entry. Ed. by Nikolaos Gkikas.
CRC Press, ©2013 182 p. $119.95
The authors here focus on developments in automotive ergonomics and
driver-vehicle interaction standards, and illustrate the importance of
socioeconomic and technological issues that have emerged in thepast two
decades. They address current advances in the field of ergonomics and
human factors and how they will influence the vehicles of the future.
Subjects include: digital human modeling in the automotive industry,
ergonomics issues with advanced driver assistance systems, human
response to vehicle vibration, thermal environments and vehicles, driving
posture and healthy design, driving simulators, and human-machine
interaction in electric vehicles. Editor is Gkikas (consultant, development
engineer, and human factors engineer/ergonomist).
TL272 2010-925095 978-1-4180-6080-0
Classroom manual for advanced automotive electronic
systems.
Hollembeak, Barry. (Today’s technician)
Delmar, ©2011 408 p. $121.95 (pa)
Most of the volumes in the series are focused on one of the areas of the
National Institute for Automotive Service Excellence’s (ASE) areas of cer-
tification. This new title, however allows students a chance to develop the
same skills and knowledge about automotive electronics as working tech-
nicians have. The areas discussed include practical theories and laws,
computer systems, supplemental air bag systems, electronic stability and
rollover mitigation systems, and alternative propulsion systems.
TL507 978-1-60086-897-9
Advances in intelligent and autonomous aerospace
systems.
Title main entry. Ed. by John Valasek (Progress in astronautics and
aeronautics; v.241)
Amer. Inst. of Aeronautics & Astronautics, ©2012 489 p. $119.95
Aerospace engineers provide their research and practicing colleagues an
exposition on the latest innovative methods and approaches to aerospace
systems that can react to the environment and learn from experience. In
sections on flight control, propulsion and health management, and
planning and multi-agent systems, they consider such topics as the
neural network-based optimal control of an unmanned helicopter, the
intelligent constrained optimal control of aerospace vehicles with model
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
uncertainties, integrated systems health management for intelligent
systems, genetic fuzzy controller for a gas-turbine fuel system, motion
planning under uncertainty, and protocol utilization in intelligent
systems to facilitate exploration missions.
TL540 2012-002919 978-0-8061-4264-7
Quest for flight; John J. Montgomery and the dawn of
aviation in the West.
Harwood, Craig S. and Gary B. Fogel.
U. of Oklahoma Press, ©2012 241 p. $29.95
Re-examining the history of aviation in America, Fogel, author of Wind
and Wings: The history of Soaring in San Diego and Harwood (engineering
geologist) detail the accomplishments of John J. Montgomery and his role
as an aeronautical pioneer. This comprehensive biography exposes many
of the fabrications surrounding Montgomery and the Wright Brothers
and shifts the attention of aviation history from the East to the West, cel-
ebrating California’s often over-looked achievements and contributions to
air flight. Thoroughly researched and full of extensive documentation,
this is an engaging read for aviation enthusiasts and historians.
TL551 2012-020127 978-1-60086-912-9
AIAA aerospace design engineers guide, 6th ed.
Title main entry. (Library of flight)
Amer. Inst. of Aeronautics & Astronautics, ©2012 --p. $54.95 (pa)
This sixth edition reference for aerospace design engineers provides
updates and changes that have occurred since the previous edition was
published in 2003. Specifically, it is intended to help design engineers in
the design planning and development stages. Topics include: mathe-
matics, conversion factors, materials and specifications, section prop-
erties, structural and mechanical design, aircraft and helicopter design,
and spacecraft and launch vehicle design. Information in the guide was
taken primarily from design manuals and handbooks. Editors are the
Design Guide Subcommittee of the AIAA Design Engineering Technical
Committee, Dauwalter (retired consultant, Draper Laboratories), and
Althof (Raytheon Company).
TL570 978-1-60086-922-8
The aerodynamic design of aircraft.
Küchemann, Dietrich.
Amer. Inst. of Aeronautics & Astronautics, ©2012 564 p. $74.95
Küchemann died in 1976, and this book based on his teaching at
Imperial College London was published posthumously in 1978. Its repu-
tation has remained high throughout the many years it was out of print,
and here is a facsimile of the original typescript. The topics include the
treatment of airflows, properties of classical and swept aircraft, prop-
erties and design of slender aircraft for supersonic flight, and waverider
aircraft.
TL570 2012-020128 978-1-60086-916-7
Aerodynamic principles of flight vehicles.
Panaras, Argyris G. (Library of flight)
Amer. Inst. of Aeronautics & Astronautics, ©2012 319 p. $49.95
Based on a seminar taught at Cranfield University, this advanced text
examines air flow around a flight vehicle at transonic and supersonic
speed and introduces the calculation of shock wave properties in a super-
sonic flow. The final chapter addresses hypersonic flow, assessing the
accuracy of numerical simulation through NATO RTO hypersonic
research findings. The appendix reviews flow conservation equations,
formulation of vortex particle methods, one-dimensional inviscid rela-
tions, and Prandtl’s lifting line theory.
TL574 2012-004735 978-1-119-95228-2
Theory of lift; introductory computational aerodynamics
with MATLAB/OCTAVE.
McBain, G.D. (Aerospace)
John Wiley & Sons, ©2012 317 p. $105.00
McBain (aeronautical engineering, U. of Sydney) presents an advanced
undergraduate aerodynamics textbook explaining how to use the popular
software to do the necessary calculations, thus freeing students—and later
engineers—to focus on theoretical and conceptual aspects. He includes
some approaches that were dropped out of the curriculum some decades
ago as too difficult, but are as easy as the alternatives for modern com-
puters. He covers plane ideal aerodynamics, three-dimensional ideal aero-
dynamics, and non-ideal flow in aerodynamics.
–306–
TL626 2012-001384 978-1-61608-715-9
Balloon flying handbook, rev. ed.
Title main entry. Ed. by Federal Aviation Administration.
Skyhorse Pub. Co., ©2012 256 p. $16.95 (pa)
This handbook introduces student pilots and pilots preparing additional
balloon ratings to basic pilot knowledge and skills necessary for piloting
balloons. The discussions and explanation reflect the most commonly
used practices and principles. Among the topics are hot air balloon
design, systems, and theory; weather theory and reports; layout to
launch; in-flight maneuvers; aeromedical factors; and the gas balloon.
This edition supersedes the 2001 edition.
TL714 2012-011955 978-1-60086-820-7
Aircraft and rotorcraft system identification; engineering
methods with flight test examples, 2d ed.
Tischler, Mark B. and Robert K. Remple (AIAA education series)
Amer. Inst. of Aeronautics & Astronautics, ©2012 761 p. $119.95
Tischler (aeroflightdynamics, Ames Research Center) and Remple (tech-
nical writing, U. of California-Santa Cruz) present the frequency-response
method for identifying aircraft systems that was developed over the
course of 25 years by the US Army and the National Aeronautics and
Space Administration. The book is suitable for a graduate or advanced
undergraduate course in system identification. Among the topics are col-
lecting time-history data, data consistency and reconstruction, bare-air-
frame identification from data with feedback regulation active,
transfer-function modeling, the time-domain verification of identification
models, and extended models of large flexible transport aircraft.
TL725 2012-007592 978-1-4665-1087-6
General aviation security; aircraft, hangars, fixed-base
operations, flight schools, and airports.
Benny, Daniel J.
CRC Press, ©2013 325 p. $79.95
Benny (aeronautics, Embry-Riddle Aeronautical U. Worldwide) presents a
general guide for all the areas in the book’s subtitle that is appropriate
for professionals or students. Due to the focus on US regulations and
departments, this book is most appropriate for American readers.
Appendixes take up 188 pages, covering subjects like global terrorist
groups and the measured impact of the Airport Watch Program. There
are no footnotes, but chapters end with a short bibliography.
TL788 2010-940988 978-0-7643-3776-5
From space to Earth; laboratory and marketplace.
Feuerbacher, Berndt and Ernst Messerschmid.
Schiffer Publishing Ltd., ©2011 320 p. $39.99
Offering a total of 400 illustrations, this visually appealing reference for
students and general readers features plain-language explanations of the
history, development, and everyday applications of space exploration and
space technology. The book is illustrated throughout with exciting, high-
quality color photos and computer images, including many images taken
from space, plus diagrams of rockets and other space equipment, and
maps based on satellite images. Explanations of space technology, space
imagery, and environmental processes related to global warming are
accessible to students in high school or even late middle school, with
mathematical and science sidebars offering more depth. The first part of
the book describes how we depend in everyday life on innovations
gained from space exploration, while the second section goes into detail
on how satellite and radar imagery help us chart natural disasters and
climate change. The third section overviews the origins of the universe,
traces the history of astronomy, and describes the solar system, with a
chapter devoted to our neighbor Mars. The fourth looks at how space
exploration has resulted in technologies used on Earth, such as satellite
communication and global positioning and navigation systems, and the
fifth section describes the work of international space stations. A final
section looks to the future of space stations and the possibility of plan-
etary exploration. The book was first published in German under the
title Vom All in den Alltag and was translated into English in 2010.
Feuerbacher is founder of the German Aerospace Center’s Institute for
Space Systems. Messerschmid, one of the early astronauts of Spacelab, is
affiliated with the Institute of Space Systems at the University of
Stuttgart.
TL789 2012-371861 978-1-84816-795-7
A vertical empire; history of the British rocketry
programme, 2d ed.
Hill, C.N.
Imperial College Press, ©2012 379 p. $88.00
Author Hill provides a second edition of his history of the British
rocketry program from the 1950s and into the 1970s. In addition to
providing historical information regarding the program’s origins and
–307–
evolution, the author also addresses specific projects, the variety of
motors and propulsion technologies used, design, successes and failures,
and alternative histories. Numerous illustrations and period photographs
are included. The book will interest readers who want to know more
about the program and those with a more general interest in rocketry,
its development, and technologies. Distributed by World Scientific.
TL858 2011-275703 978-0-309-16384-2
Recapturing a future for space exploration; life and
physical sciences research for a new era.
National Research Council (U.S.). Committee for the Decadal Survey on
Biological and Physical Sciences in Space.
National Academies Press, ©2011 444 p. $85.75 (pa)
This report outlines the findings of the Decadal Survey on Biological and
Physical Sciences in Space, which aimed to identify key research imper-
atives for the life and physical sciences in the context of space travel to
be addressed in the next ten years. In turn, these research imperatives
are posed as drivers for further human exploration into space. After an
introduction to the report and the history of research in space, the bulk
of the chapters are organized around a scientific field of research—plant
and microbial biology, animal and human biology, behavior and mental
health, physical science in space, and space exploration systems. The last
few chapters consider the role of the International Space Station, pro-
grammatic issues for strengthening the research enterprise, and an inte-
grated microgravity research portfolio. The contributors are members of
The National Academies of science, medicine and engineering, as well as
the National Research Council. Most are distinguished professors in their
respective fields.
MINING ENGINEERING
TN5 978-0-415-66174-4
Geomechanical processes during underground mining;
proceedings.
School of Underground Mining (2012: Dnipropetrovs’k/Yalta, Ukraine)
Ed. by Genadiy Pivnyak et al.
CRC Press/Balkema, ©2012 230 p. $139.95
Thirty-seven papers from the National Mining University of the Ukraine
present research on mineral deposit development techniques, modeling
mine workings with rock massif, methane extraction during coal mining,
geomechanical processes during plow mining, and massif strain-stress
management. Other topics include the ecological impact of closing mines,
helium receivers recommended for solar heating systems, the quality of
dust respirators, and possible uses of fallen leaves collected in cities. Four
papers from Poland propose an underground brown coal gasification
plant, discuss mergers among mining companies and the need for more
geological data, and analyze deposition irregularities in thin hard coal
seams. No index is provided.
TN153 2012-937385 978-1-78100-728-0
World statistics on mining and utilities 2012.
Title main entry.
Edward Elgar Publishing, ©2012 153 p. $145.00
Feedback and comments from various national and international bodies
on the first issue, in 2010, were taken into account when compiling this
second issue. The data is collected by the United National Industrial
Development Organization from the National Statistical Offices and
through the Organisation for Economic Cooperation and Development
(OECD) for its member countries. The areas covered are mining and
quarrying; manufacturing; electricity, gas, steam, and air conditioning
supply; and water supply, sewerage, waste management, and remedi-
ation activities. For each of 66 countries, a two-page table presents the sta-
tistics, making them easy to compare from country to country. There is
no index.
TN291 978-0-444-53784-3
Energy potential of the Russian Arctic seas; choice of
development strategy.
Title main entry. Ed. by Alexey Piskarev and Mikhail Shkatov.
(Developments in petroleum science; v.58)
Elsevier, ©2012 425 p. $170.00
Since the mid-1980s, geophysicists have become increasingly convinced
that a major portion of the world’s undiscovered oil and gas reserves lie
in sedimentary basins under the Russian arctic shelf. The Russian
Federation, however, is currently going full scale toward the construction
of an East Siberia-Pacific trunk pipeline. Piskarev (VNIIOkeangeologia)
and Shkatov (Sevmorgeo) recommend here that development of the con-
tinental shelf take on a higher priority and make extensive use of infor-
mation analytical systems (IASs). This volume is primarily oriented
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
toward a scientific and technical audience, but also touches upon eco-
nomic and legal concerns. Sketch maps, graphs and other figures, many
of which are available in color on the Web, appear regularly.
TN345 2012-026378 978-0-87335-360-1
Controlling exposure to diesel emissions in underground
mines.
Bugarski, Aleksandar D. et al.
Soc./Mining, Metallurgy & Expl, ©2012 493 p. $129.00
This study was generated by researchers at the National Institute for
Occupational Safety and Health, Office of Mine Safety and Health
Research who have been conducting diesel-relate research for many
years. It gathers and reconciles information fragmented throughout the
literature to provide a compact reference for developing comprehensive
mine-specific programs for reducing the exposure of underground
miners to aerosols and gases emitted by diesel engines. It could also be
used in teaching. It covers exposure to diesel pollutants; integrated mul-
tifaceted approach to controlling exposure; curtailing emissions; con-
trolling airborne pollutants; administrative controls for reducing
exposure; measuring, characterizing, and monitoring emissions and
gases; and training. The binding is of high quality.
TN490 978-3-527-33147-5
Cobalt oxides; from crystal chemistry to physics.
Raveau, Bernard and Md. Motin Seikh.
Wiley-VCH, ©2012 333 p. $165.00
Raveau (emeritus, crystallography, U. of Caen, France) and Seikh (chem-
istry, Visva-Bharati U., India) provide the chemistry and physics com-
munities a broad reference to the complex transition metal oxide. After
reviewing the crystal chemistry of cobalt oxides, they detail the electronic
and magnetic properties of stoichiometric perovskite cobaltites, oxygen-
deficient perovskite cobaltites Sr1-xLnxCoO3-delta and SrCo1-xMxO3-
delta, Ruddlesden-Poepper-type cobaltites, cobaltites with a TN773
three-dimensional triangular lattice, and triangular layered cobaltites,
and unidimensional cobaltite Ca3Co206.
TN605 978-3-03785-481-5
Semi-solid processing of alloys and composites XII;
proceedings.
International Conference on Semi-Solid Processing of Alloys and
Composites (S2P 2012) (2012: Cape Town, South Africa) Ed. by Heinrich
Möller and Gonasagren Govender. (Solid state phenomena; v.192-193 )
Trans Tech Publications, ©2013 581 p. $414.00 (pa)
This proceedings volume collects selected, peer-reviewed papers from an
October 2012 conference held in South Africa. The papers concentrate on
the advancement of fundamental knowledge and the development of
materials and industrial processes for semi-solid manufacturing of high
performance metal components. Work is grouped in sections on
microstructure and properties, process development, modeling and sim-
ulation, rheology, material development and alloy design, and industrial
applications. Some specific topics include industrial applications of rhe-
oforming technology in China, manufacturing of composite and hybrid
materials by semi-solid forming, and squeeze flow of semi-solid slurries.
Other subjects include numerical simulation on rheo-diecasting of mag-
nesium matrix composites, high-temperature flow behavior of semi-solid
steel alloys, and production of titanium alloy components by semi-solid
forming. The book includes b&w images.
TN665 978-3-03785-471-6
Metallurgy technology and materials; proceedings.
International Conference on Metallurgy Technology and Materials
(ICMTM 2012) (2012: Jeju Island, South Korea). Ed. by Tony Sun.
(Advanced materials research; v.567 )
Trans Tech Publications, ©2012 293 p. $138.00 (pa)
The 59 papers in this collection were selected for presentation on the
basis of their originality, clarity, and relevance to the conference themes
of metallurgy, mining engineering, advanced materials science, and
materials processing technology. Among the topics are synthesizing zinc
oxide nanoparticles by solid state reactions and its influence on a zinc
electrode, the effect of isothermal treatment on the microstructure and
properties of high performance steel, simulation and casting processes
for ductile iron wind generator rotor shaft, effects of additives on semi-
conduction transformation in lead zirconate titanate ceramic induced by
atomic hydrogen, tungsten cathodes doped with rare earth for pulsed
xenon lamps, and the shielding effect in the sacrificial anode cathodic
protection system.
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
TN672 2012-013747 978-0-8031-7518-1
International federation for heat treatment and surface
engineering; proceedings.
International Federation for Heat Treatment and Surface Engineering.
Congress (18th: 2010: Rio de Janeiro, Brazil). (STP; 1532)
ASTM International, ©2012 597 p. $139.00 (pa)
The Federation’s first congress in Brazil gathered engineers and scientists
from international business, research institutes, and universities around
the world. The 40 papers in the proceedings cover corrosion, cryogenics,
diffusion processes, equipment, materials characterization, modeling and
simulation, new materials, plasma technology, polyvinyl chloride (PVC)
and chemical vapor deposition (CVD), quenching and quenchants,
surface hardening, and tribology.
TN690 978-3-527-33122-2
Solidification of containerless undercooled melts.
Title main entry. Ed. by Dieter M Herlach and Douglas M. Matson.
Wiley-VCH, ©2012 553 p. $200.00
Novel characteristics of metallic material can be attained by keeping it at
various stages of phase change between melt and solid for various
lengths of time. A major impediment to the process is thermal interaction
with a container wall, so electromagnetic and electrostatic levitation tech-
niques have been developed for containerless undercooling and solidifi-
cation of molten metals and alloys. Metallurgists and materials scientists
discuss aspects of the theory and technology. Their topics include com-
puter-aided experiments in containerless processing of materials, effects
of transient heat and mass transfer on competitive nucleation and phase
selection in drop tube processing of multicomponent alloys, the contain-
erless crystallization of semiconductors, atomistic simulation of solute
trapping and solute drag, coupled growth structures in univariant and
invariant eutectic solidification.
978-3-03785-465-5
Light metals and their alloys II; technology,
microstructure and properties.
Title main entry. Ed. by Anna J. Dolata and Maciej Dyzia. (Solid state
phenomena; v.191 )
Trans Tech Publications, ©2012 256 p. $138.00 (pa)
This collection of 30 invited, peer-reviewed papers presents the results of
research on new and conventional casting magnesium alloys, plastic
deformation of Mg alloys, welding technologies, and magnesium matrix
composites. There is also research on the microstructure, properties, heat
treatment, and diffusion brazing of the new generation of titanium
alloys. Papers are organized in sections on manufacture of aluminum
alloys, grain refinement, welding joints, and aluminum matrix com-
posites. Some specific topics include the machinability of aluminum
matrix composites, creep resistance of WE43 magnesium alloy joints, and
characteristics of corrosion resistance of Ti-C alloys. The book is illus-
trated with b&w photos and images.
TN816 2012-035131 978-0-87335-363-2
Challenges in fine coal processing, dewatering, and
disposal.
Title main entry. Ed. by Mark S. Klima, Barbara J. Arnold, and Peter
J. Bethell.
Soc./Mining, Metallurgy & Expl, ©2012 394 p. $119.00
Scholars of mining and minerals engineering and professionals from coal
and equipment companies compile information presented at the 2012
Fine Coal Symposium, sponsored by trade groups. It could be useful for
plant designers, engineers, and other practitioners and students. The
overall themes are perspectives on coal fines, technology developments
and plant installations, beneficiation technologies, and moisture
reduction and special topics. The topics include coal properties and chal-
lenges for fines processing, fine coal processing with dense-medium
cyclones, deep cone thickener at Lone Mountain processing plant, fine
coal drying and plant profitability, and the development of a fine coal
recover operation at the Centralia Mine coal slurry impoundment struc-
tures.
TN859 978-0-12-401721-4
Shale oil production processes.
Speight, James G.
Gulf Professional Publishing, ©2012 192 p. $35.00 (pa)
Speight, who is with a Wyoming company, discusses the origin and prop-
erties of oil shale, oil shale resources by country, the chemical and
physical nature of the oil-shale precursor kerogen, mining and reporting
oil shale, in situ retorting, refining shale oil, and environmental aspects
of shale oil production. He includes a glossary but no index.
–308–
TN871 2012-014421 978-0-12-397030-5
Common well control hazards; identification and
countermeasures.
Xiaozhen, Sun.
Gulf Professional Publishing, ©2013 280 p. $99.95
Director of safety and environmental protection at a Chinese oilfield
company, Xiaozhen summarizes problems he and other inspectors com-
monly find regarding safety and control systems in oil drilling opera-
tions. Because the standards are insufficiently known, he says, hidden
dangers may or may not be identified depending on who is looking, and
some of the remedies applied lack pertinence and feasibility. He
describes common hidden dangers and remedies for blowout prevention
systems, choke lines, choke and kill manifolds, drilling fluid recovery
pipeline, relief pipe installation, inside blowout preventers, liquid-gas sep-
arators, vacuum degassing, fireproofing and explosion-proofing, and
preventing hydrogen sulfide. Gulf Professional Publishing is an imprint
of Elsevier.
TN871 2012-020486 978-0-12-391914-4
Gas and oil reliability engineering; modeling and
analysis.
Calixto, Eduardo.
Gulf Professional Publishing, ©2013 528 p. $99.95
Certified reliability engineer Calixto explains both to managers and to
other engineers how the principles and techniques of reliability engi-
neering are applied in the gas and oil business. He covers life cycle
analysis, accelerated test and reliability growth analysis models; mainte-
nance, availability and maintainability analysis, human reliability
analysis, safety processes, and reliability management. Gulf Publishing in
an imprint of Elsevier.
TN871 978-0-12-404572-9
Oil sand production processes.
Speight, James G.
Gulf Professional Publishing, ©2013 175 p. $35.00 (pa)
Speight, with a Wyoming company, outlines methods for recovering
bitumen from oil sands, drawing mostly on evidence from Alberta,
Canada, where most of the experience has been. Writing for graduate
and undergraduate students and professionals in the petroleum business,
he covers definitions, occurrence and properties, oil sand mining,
thermal and non-thermal recovery methods, upgrading the bitumen
during recovery, and the environmental impact. He has not prepared an
index. Gulf Professional Publishing is an imprint of Elsevier.
TN871 2012-014866 978-0-7844-1209-1
Spar platforms; technology and analysis methods.
Title main entry. Ed. by Moo-Hyun Kim.
Am. Society of Civil Engineers, ©2012 233 p. $96.00 (pa)
The chapters have been commissioned and assembled by the Society’s
Ocean and Offshore Engineering Committee to provide a guide to a form
of offshore drilling platform that was first built in 1996 and has since
become popular for oil production in deep and remote areas of the Gulf
of Mexico. It covers the history and concept, mooring and anchor design,
global motion analysis and numerical model, vortex induced motion, and
model testing and field data.
CHEMICAL TECHNOLOGY
TP5 978-3-03785-454-9
Chemical engineering and material properties II;
proceedings.
International Symposium on Chemical Engineering and Material
Properties (ISCEMP 2012) (2d: 2012: Taiyuan, Shanxi, China) Ed. by Bin
Li. (Advanced materials research; v.549 )
Trans Tech Publications, ©2012 1092 p. $303.00 (pa)
This volume collects 235 papers by scientists and engineers mostly from
China who attended the 2012 Second International Symposium on
Chemical Engineering and Material Properties (ISCEMP 2012), held in
June 2012, in Taiyuan, China. In the first part, papers cover topics in
chemical engineering, including the synthesis and properties, per-
formance, preparation and characterization, modification, kinetics,
refining process, polymorphic changes, thermal decomposition, effects,
determination, activation, structure and stability, refining, fabrication,
growth and measurement, adsorption behavior, crystallization prop-
erties, electrochemical behavior, extraction, gasification, and other
aspects of various materials. The second part covers materials science
and engineering topics, such as the printing performance of different
pigment coated paper, applications of phase change materials for energy
saving, preparation methods of nanofibers, the properties of physical
–309–
and chemical foaming concrete, and the influences of hydrogenation on
tensile properties of Ti40 alloy. Other sections address mechanics engi-
neering and applied mechanics; industrial safety and environment; and
other topics, such as the study and application of cutting technology of
underground drifting blasting, the development mode of a mechanical
and electrical products 3D part library, and the application analysis of
crude ricin in terrorism.
TP149 978-3-03785-482-2
Advances in engineering design and optimization III;
proceedings; 2v.
International Conference on Engineering Design and Optimization
(2012: Shaoxing, China) Ed. by Guofu Li and Valery Ya. Shchukin.
(Applied mechanics and materials; v.201-202)
Trans Tech Publications, ©2012 1228 p. $414.00 (pa)
These proceedings collect 278 papers written by researchers in engi-
neering, technology, and other areas primarily from China for the Third
International Conference on Engineering Design and Optimization
(ICEDO 2012), held in May 2012 in Shaoxing, China. Addressing a range
of products and materials, they discuss topics in engineering design,
theory, and practice; product design and development; manufacturing
systems modeling and optimization; and advanced machining and mate-
rials processing technology.
TP149 978-0-12-397189-0
Lee’s loss prevention in the process industries; hazard
identification, assessment and control, 4th ed; 3v.
Mannan, Sam. (IChemE)
Butterworth-Heinemann, ©2012 3642 p. $800.00
The idea is to combine the best science with highly focused intention and
attention and to put this combination behind efforts to anticipate,
prevent, and deal with hazards in the oil and gas industries. Gas
engineer Frank P. Lees’ enduring reference was originally published in
1980, and, not surprisingly, it has almost tripled in size since then. Sam
Mannan (chemical engineering, Texas A&M U.) updated the work for a
1994 second edition, and Lees’ name went to the head of the title.
Presented in three volumes, the fourth edition maintains the organization
of the 2004 third edition while featuring five new chapters and seven
new appendices. New coverage includes safety culture, metrics and per-
formance management, benchmarking, safety concerns related to
liquified natural gas (LNG), and engineering for sustainable devel-
opment. The new material in the appendices includes information on
hurricanesKatrina and Rita, the BP Texas City incident, the Buncefield
incident, the Columbia space shuttle disaster, tank farm incidents, and
the Macondo oil spill. Also appended is a summary of CHEMSAFE, a
safety characteristics database, which is a joint project of two German
institutes and has been online since 1989.
TP155 2012-015433 978-1-4665-1420-1
Fundamentals of automatic process control.
Chaudhuri, Uttam Ray and Utpal Ray Chaudhuri. (Chemical industries;
134 )
CRC Press, ©2013 287 p. $139.95
Uttam (chemical technology, Calcutta U.) and Utpal (food technology and
biochemical engineering, Jadvpur U., Kolkata) explain in great detail the
theoretical analysis of process dynamics and control that are a necessary
foundation for engineers who operate and supervise the control system
of a modern chemical processing plant. They cover open-loop process
dynamics and transfer functions, disturbances and responses, the
process control loop system and analysis, control loop analysis, tuning
proportional-integral-derivative (PID) controllers, advanced control
strategies, the virtual laboratory on the accompanying disk, computer
control, and selected problems and solutions of GATE (Graduate Aptitude
Test in Engineering) examinations from 2002 to 2012.
TP155 978-1-4665-5998-1
Green chemistry; environmentally benign reactions, 2d ed.
Ahluwalia, V.K.
CRC Press, ©2012 312 p. $99.95
Ahluwalia (biomedical research, U. of Delhi, India) surveys more benign
chemical reactions that can be substituted for reactions that harm the
environment or human health. He also includes ways of conducting reac-
tions that are less harmful, such as making them in aqueous phase,
using phase transfer catalysts, using sonication and microwave tech-
nologies, and performing reactions enzymatically and photochemically.
Among the reactions are Aldol condensation, the Dakin reaction, the
Knoevengagel condensation, the Prins reaction, and the Wittig reaction.
The first edition was published in 2009; the second adds reactions that
have been developed since.
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
TP156 978-3-527-33077-5
Complex-shaped metal nanoparticles; bottom-up syntheses
and applications.
Title main entry. Ed. by Tapan K. Sau and Andrey L. Rogach.
Wiley-VCH, ©2012 558 p. $200.00
Contributors from the physical sciences offer tutorial reviews on the
various techniques for preparing and characterizing metal nanoparticles
of different morphologies and architectures; the details of the basic
principles involved in such techniques; and why, how, and where these
novel nanomaterials are being used. Among the topics are the colloidal
synthesis of noble metal nanoparticles of complex morphologies,
experiment and history in structural aspects of anisotropic metal
nanoparticle growth, a soft chemistry approach to controlling the shape
of platinum and palladium nanocrystals from individual particles to
their self-assembled superlattices, localized surface plasmons of
multifaceted metal nanoparticles, surface-enhanced Raman scattering
using complex-shaped metal nanostructures, and metal nanoparticles in
biomedical applications.
TP156 2012-016476 978-0-12-385013-3
Essentials in modern HPLC separations.
Moldoveanu, Serban C. and Victor David.
Elsevier, ©2013 532 p. $149.95
Moldoveanu, with a North Carolina tobacco company, and David (U. of
Bucharest, Romania) synthesize recent developments with established
principles to offer a practical guide to the separation technique high per-
formance liquid chromatography (HPLC). They emphasize criteria for
selecting columns, mobile phases, separation conditions for different
types of HPLC, and the specific methods. Throughout the book they con-
sistently apply the octanol/water partition coefficient of the analyte,
which is readily available for many molecules and is used in pharma-
ceuticals and tracing the environment fate of compounds. The topics
include parameters that characterize HPLC analysis, intermolecular inter-
actions, stationary phases and their performance, solutes, and analysis.
TP156 978-3-527-32586-3
Industrial high pressure applications; processes,
equipment and safety.
Title main entry. Ed. by Rudolf Eggers.
Wiley-VCH, ©2013 404 p. $185.00
Most of the many scientific accounts of high-pressure processes are
limited to a single application. Here the processes are explored in general
with specific examples provided. Scientists and engineers from a range
of disciplines begin with the history and the basic engineering aspects of
high-pressure processes. Then they survey various types and applications
of processes, among them low-density polyethylene high-pressure
process, high-pressure-high-temperature power plant processes, and the
impact of high pressure on enzymes. A final section looks at such
process and safety measures as high-pressure measuring devices and test
equipment, and sizing high-pressure safety valves for gas service.
TP156 2011-017490 978-1-4398-1083-5
Nuclear hydrogen production handbook.
Title main entry. Ed. by Xing L. Yan and Ryutaro Hino. (Green chem-
istry and chemical engineering)
CRC Press, ©2011 921 p. $229.95
Contributors from the Japan Atomic Energy Agency, the Idaho National
Laboratory, and other institutions concerned with nuclear energy in
various countries explain how hydrogen can be produced on an
economy-wide scale using nuclear energy. They cover methods, systems,
applied science and technology, and worldwide research and devel-
opment. Among specific topics are the thermochemical decomposition of
water, high-temperature gas reactors, the sodium fast reactor, the hybrid
sulfur cycle, nuclear coal gasification, European Union activities
regarding using nuclear power for producing hydrogen, nuclear
hydrogen production development in China, and the international devel-
opment of fusion energy.
TP157 978-0-12-396959-0
Chemical process equipment; selection and design, 3d ed.
Couper, James R. et al. (IChemE)
Butterworth-Heinemann, ©2012 838 p. $150.00
Chemical engineers Couper (emeritus), W. Roy Penney (both U. of
Arkansas-Fayetteville), James R. Fair (emeritus, U. of Texas-Austin) and
Stanley M. Walas (emeritus, U. of Kansas) have revised and updated
information from the 2005 second edition and the 2010 revised second
edition and incorporated information too new even for them. They guide
especially new engineers in the design and specification of equipment in
preparation for buying it, providing only the material they and their
collaborators have found of practical use. The topics include process
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
control, fluid transport equipment, solid-liquid separation, crystallization
from solutions and melts, and costs of individual equipment.
TP157 2012-028122 978-1-4398-6700-6
Introduction to chemical reactor analysis, 2d ed.
Hayes, R. E. and J. P. Mmbaga.
CRC Press, ©2013 532 p. $99.95 (pa)
Finding most of the chemical engineering textbooks too comprehensive
to be grasped easily, Hayes and Mmbaga (both chemical engineering, U.
of Alberta, Canada) take a narrow path. They introduce reactor analysis,
providing enough material for a two-term senior undergraduate course
of about 35-50 minute lectures. After reading the text and working the
problems and examples, they say, readers should have a good basic
knowledge sufficient to perform most of the common reaction engi-
neering calculations that are required for the typical practicing engineer.
It is the future generalist chemical engineer they have in mind, not the
specialist in reactor design. The first edition appeared about 10 years ago,
and this one is expanded with five new chapters on catalytic reaction
engineering.
TP235 978-0-85709-813-9
Coal science and engineering.
Mazumder, B.
Woodhead Publishing, ©2012 459 p. $195.00
The cheapness and abundance of petroleum has led to neglect in the
study of coal over the past half century, says Mazumder (emeritus,
Institute of Minerals and Materials Technology, India), but for a number
of reasons, coal may soon become important again as a primary source
of energy, especially in India. He reviews the current understanding of
what coal is; coal deposits, mining, and benefits; coal structure and clas-
sification; the analysis of coal; coal cleaning processes; coal conversion;
coal-derived industrial carbons; the utilization of coal wastes; and pol-
lution generation by coal and its abatement.
TP247 978-1-895198-50-8
Handbook of plasticizers, 2d ed.
Title main entry. Ed. by George Wypych.
Chem Tec Publishing, ©2012 748 p. $345.00
A plasticizer is a material used to make another material malleable, an
early example being water added to clay in order to shape pottery.
Chemists, chemical engineers, and related contributors provide a ref-
erence on modern versions. Their topics include plastizer types, mecha-
nisms of plasticizer action, effects of plasticizers on properties of
plasticized materials, plasticizers in various processing methods, and the
environmental fate of plasticizers. First published in 2004. Distributed in
the US by William Andrew, Incorporated.
TP248 978-3-527-33029-4
Biopharmaceutical production technology; 2v.
Title main entry. Ed. by Ganapathy Subramanian.
Wiley-VCH, ©2012 883 p. $470.00
Researchers from pharmaceuticals and biotechnology survey drugs
developed using biotechnology, and explore the technology itself. They
cover upstream technologies, protein recovery, advances in process devel-
opment, analytical technologies, quality control, process design and
management, and the changing face of processing. Among the topics are
strategies for plasmid DNA production in Escherichia coli, virus-like par-
ticle bioprocessing, membrane chromatography for biopharmaceutical
manufacturing, consistency of scale-up from bioprocess development to
production, a systematic approach to the optimization and comparability
of biopharmaceutical glycosylation throughout the drug life cycle, evalu-
ating and visualizing the cost-effectiveness and robustness of biophar-
maceutical manufacturing strategies, and opportunities for single-use
technology in biopharmaceutical processes. The two volumes are paged
and indexed together.
TP248 2012-010996 978-0-470-96009-7
Fungi and lignocellulosic biomass.
Kubicek, Christian P. (Biomass and biofuels)
Wiley-Blackwell, ©2013 290 p. $199.95
This book is a detailed exploration of plant biomass as a viable sus-
tainable carbon-based energy source, with a focus on fungal enzymes
required for lignocellulose hydrolysis. Writing not only for professionals
in the field of biomass and biofuels but also for academic audiences such
as graduate and postgraduate students and researchers, Kubicek (biotech-
nology and microbiology, Vienna U of Technology) examines particulars
of plant biomass such as structural, physical, and physicochemical prop-
erties of plant cell walls; plant biomass degradation by fungi; the enzy-
mologies of cellulose, hemicellulose, and lignan degradation; catabolic
pathways of soluble degradation products; enzyme formation regulation;
–310–
the correlation between fungal secretory pathways and lignocellulose
degradation; the production of cellulases and hemicellulases by fungi
and the production of fermentable sugars from lignocelluloses; and lig-
nocellulose biorefinery. Tables, charts, and figures feature heavily
throughout, and an extensive reference section is provided.
TP248 978-1-4557-2834-3
Handbook of biopolymers and biodegradable plastics;
properties, processing, and applications.
Title main entry. Ed. by Sina Ebnesajjad. (PDL handbook series)
Elsevier Saunders, ©2013 462 p. $249.00
Contributors identified only by name provide information on plant-
derived polymers, methods of manufacture, applications, and disposal,
Among the topics are applications of poly(lactic acid), the state of the art
in polymers from renewable resources, cellulose-based composites and
nanocomposites, testing the biodegradability of compostable polymer
materials, biopolymers in controlled-release drug delivery systems, and
natural polymers in tissue engineering applications.
TP248 2012-010233 978-1-4398-1839-8
Introduction to bioMEMS.
Folch, Albert.
CRC Press, ©2013 492 p. $89.95
For 11 consecutive years, Folch (bioengineering, U. of Washington-Seattle)
has taught a course on biological microelectronic and mechanical
systems (bioMEMS) and in two of those years students used early drafts
of this textbook. In it, he introduces students to a set of problems in
biology and medicine that benefit from—ideally require—the miniatur-
ization of a certain device. He covers how we make small things,
micropatterning of substrates and cells, microfluidics, molecular biology
on a chip, cell-based chips for biotechnology, bioMEMS for cell biology,
tissue microengineering, and implantable microdevices. The illustration
is profuse, mostly in color, and the paper and binding are of very high
quality.
TP248 2012-005816 978-1-119-99139-7
Practical methods for biocatalysis and biotransformations
2.
Title main entry. Ed. by John Whittall and Peter W. Sutton.
John Wiley & Sons, ©2012 360 p. $160.00
Following upon the 2010 publication of this title, the second volume con-
tinues the service of providing postgraduate students and researchers in
academia and industry with up-to-date information in the field,
describing in detail developments that have arisen since Vol. 1.
International contributors to a dozen chapters describe processes of
reductive amination, enoate reductases for reduction of electron deficient
alkenes, selective oxidation, and industrial carbonyl reduction, with indi-
vidual sections on specific practices for each. An introductory section
details the use of biocatalysis in the fine chemical and pharmaceutical
industries.
TP248 2012-009762 978-1-4051-9826-4
Tissue and cell processing; an essential guide.
Title main entry. Ed. by Deirdre Fehily et al.
Wiley-Blackwell, ©2012 345 p. $130.00
A pioneer in performing pulmonary allographs in the 1960s introduces
this text as a comprehensive guide to developments in clinical applica-
tions involving donated tissues or cells (including stem cells). Fehily
(National Transplant Centre, Rome) and other specialists working with
tissue and blood banks worldwide treat techniques to preserve and
process donated tissues and cells of various kinds. In historical and
global contexts, they discuss regulations; risk management;
principles/phases from cell and tissue collection to decontamination; bio-
compatibility testing for transplantation; coding for therapeutic products;
and training of tissue bank personnel. Chapters include case studies with
lessons learned, preservation methodologies, discussions of recovery and
processing related issues and future R&D efforts, illustrations, further
reading, and a color plate gallery.
TP270 2012-001628 978-3-11-027358-8
Chemistry of high-energy materials, 2d ed.
Klapötke, Thomas M. (De Gruyter graduate)
De Gruyter, ©2012 257 p. $49.95 (pa)
Klapötke (inorganic chemistry, Ludwig-Maximilian U., Munich, Germany)
presents a textbook based on a course he taught for over a decade intro-
ducing graduate chemistry students to the chemistry of high-energy
materials. He focuses on the basics of chemical explosives and recent
research into them, rather than the history or deep mathematics. The
–311–
first German edition appeared in 2009, and the first English edition in
2011. For this edition, he has added short chapters on co-crystallization
and future energetic materials.
TP339 2012-021353 978-1-4200-8955-4
Biofuels and bioenergy; processes and technologies.
Lee, Sunggyu and Y.T. Shah. (Green chemistry and chemical engi-
neering)
CRC Press, ©2013 323 p. $149.95
Lee (Ohio U., Athens) and Shah (Norfolk State U., Virginia) set out the
background science and technology for fuels and energy from living or
recently living biological sources, in contrast to fossils. They cover crop
oils, biodiesel, and algae fuels; ethanol from corn; ethanol from ligno-
cellulose; fast pyrolysis and gasification of biomass; converting waste to
biofuels, bioproducts, and bioenergy; and mixed feedstock. Readers
should need no more than a college-level knowledge of chemistry,
biology, physics, and engineering. The book could be used in a one-
semester undergraduate course, or as a desk reference for professionals
involved in renewable energy.
TP359 2012-014456 978-1-4665-0743-2
Practical handbook on biodiesel production and
properties.
Ahmad, Mushtaq et al. (Chemical industries; 133)
CRC Press, ©2013 151 p. $89.95 (pa)
Four plant scientists from Quaid-i-Azam University in Pakistan assemble
and analyze practical research information about making biodiesel fuel
from oil seed plants. They consider the history of biodiesel and its
market, advantages, and impacts. Then they look at sources, the chem-
istry, extracting oil at laboratory and commercial scales, biodiesel syn-
thesis, factors affecting the transesterification reaction, fuel properties,
and technical aspects. A final section surveys 18 plants that yield
biodiesel and properties of that oil as fuel.
TP360 978-2-7108-0983-8
Biofuels; meeting the energy and environmental
challenges of the transportation sector.
Ballerini, D. (Energies nouvelles publications)
Editions Technip, ©2012 355 p. $86.00 (pa)
Ballerini (biotechnology and biomass chemistry, IFP Energies nouvelles,
France) presents an updated edition of a work first published in January
2006 as Les biocarburants. État des lieux, perspectives et enjeux du
développement. It addresses the global situation of biofuels as a resource
for transport, reviews the state of the art in proven production processes
and technologies, and addresses economic and environmental aspects.
Reducing competition between agriculture as a food source versus for
energy purposes is a key objective of the proceedings. Distributed in the
US by Atlas Books.
TP370 2012-004157 978-0-8138-0894-9
Handbook of fruits and fruit processing, 2d ed.
Title main entry. Ed. by Nirmal K. Sinha et al.
Wiley-Blackwell, ©2012 694 p. $229.95
This second edition handbook (first edition, 2006) offers a clearly
organized, thorough presentation of information important to fruit
growers, handlers, processors, and marketers. Edited by five food tech-
nology experts based in five countries, the 35 chapters were written by
an international roster of contributors based in several European coun-
tries (many from Hungary and Spain); several Asian countries (India,
Pakistan, Bangladesh, Taiwan); Africa; the Middle East (Kuwait); and the
US. Organization of chapters is according to the broad themes of biology,
biochemistry, nutrition, and microbiology; postharvest handling and
preservation technologies; processed fruit products and packaging; pro-
cessing plant safety and regulation; and commodity processing. Each
chapter begins with an outline, an abstract, and an introduction and con-
cludes with extensive references.
TP370 2012-009138 978-1-4398-6267-4
Innovation in healthy and functional foods.
Title main entry. Ed. by Dilip Ghosh et al.
CRC Press, ©2013 598 p. $139.95
Noting that today’s consumers are interested in foods that promote health
and prevent disease, Ghosh, a biomedical scientist, et al. assemble 34
chapters by specialists in biology, food science, engineering, marketing,
regulation, law, finance, sustainability, and management from Europe,
Asia, North America, Australia, and New Zealand, who examine inno-
vation processes in healthy and functional foods, consumer insights and
trends, and technological developments in foods and ingredients, as well
as the drivers of affordability, sustainability, and government regulation.
They focus on functional foods in which a component has been added to
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
provide benefits, such as omega-3, protein, or iron, and their delivery
techniques into foods. After an overview of innovation in the food
industry, they discuss the characteristics of markets in different countries
in terms of functional and healthy foods; consumer perceptions; techno-
logical aspects; innovations in processing, packaging, and functional
ingredient delivery technology; ingredients like milk protein, probiotics,
and polyphenol-rich foods and beverages; commercial feasibility and the
connection between innovation and other business areas, such as mar-
keting, sales, regulation, and finance; and future trends in food tourism,
nanotechnology, sustainability, and globalization. The book is aimed at
professionals in academia and food, nutraceutical, and pharmaceutical
industries, and students in food technology and food business.
TP421 2012-010720 978-0-470-65968-7
Sweeteners and sugar alternatives in food technology, 2d
ed.
Title main entry. Ed. by Kay O’Donnell and Malcolm K. Kearsley.
Wiley-Blackwell, ©2012 484 p. $199.95
This second edition of Sweeteners and Sugar Alternatives in Food
Technology offers a comprehensive technical survey of sugars and other
industrially manufactured sweeteners. Organized into five sections, the
work presents information on the private and public health impact that
sugars pose; the properties and applications of commonly used low-bulk
sweeteners (e.g. aspartame, sucralose, saccharin); the properties and
applications of reduced calorie bulk-sweeteners, like polyols, polyglycitols,
and hydrogenated glucose syrups; new developments in sweeteners,
research into how they elicit their sweet taste, and new sweeteners like
isomalthulose and trehalose; and a focused chapter on oligo- and poly-
saccharide that offer the greatest flexibility in replacing sugar. New to
this edition are sections on isomalthulose and trehalose, as well as devel-
opments in sweetness research. The chapters are highly organized with
labeled and numbered sub-sections on applications, various properties,
chemical structure, legal and health statuses, production, commercial
application. Each chapter ends with a conclusion and reference section
as well. The contributors are mostly nutrition scientists and regulatory
experts employed by private organizations (largely DuPont), as well as
academic chemists and private consultants.
TP453 2012-031352 978-1-4398-8762-2
Structure and properties of fat crystal networks, 2d ed.
Marangoni, Alejandro G. and Leendert H. Wesdorp.
CRC Press, ©2013 500 p. $139.95
The plasticity of fats is due to crystallized material that forms a crystal
network that entraps liquid oil, and many of the sensory attributes of fat
and fat-structured food products—for example spreadability, mouth-feel,
texture, and flavor—are strongly influenced by the physical characteristics
of this fat crystal network. Marangoni (U. of Guelph, Canada) and
Wesdorp, with a large Dutch chemical company, synthesize the research
on the networks, updating from the first edition (no date noted) to incor-
porate new findings on intermolecular interactions and other matters.
The topics include crystallography and polymorphism, the rheology of
fats, viscoelastic properties of fats, yield stress and the elastic modulus of
a fat crystal network, and liquid-multiple solid phase equilibria in fats.
TP548 978-0-12-388438-1
Enological chemistry.
Moreno, Juan and Rafael Peinado. Trans. by Anne Murray and Iain
Patten.
Academic Press, ©2012 429 p. $119.95
Moreno and Peinado (both agricultural and soil chemistry, U. of Cordova,
Spain) draw material from lectures and laboratory sessions in a course
on wine chemistry they have taught to enology students for over 10 years.
The textbook synthesizes the considerable scientific knowledge that has
been acquired about making wine, much of which has not been widely
disseminated. The topics include the composition of grape must, grape
acids, the transformation of must into wine, the colloidal state, and
chemical and biological aging. Química Enológia was first published by
A. Madrid Vicente, Ediciones in 2010. Academic Press is an imprint of
Elsevier.
TP553 978-1-84533-707-0
The complete Bordeaux; the wines, the châteaux, the
people. rev. ed.
Brook, Stephen. (Mitchell Beazley wine library)
Mitchell Beazley, ©2013 720 p. $60.00
This revised edition of the sumptuously illustrated bible for wine lovers
reflects the latest trends and new and emerging estates. Brook, an award-
winning wine writer, surveys the wines and wineries of the Bordeaux
region of France. He offers a history of the region and the rise of its
wines, describes winemaking styles in different parts of the region,
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
reports on producers and wine vintages of the last 40 years, and looks
at current issues and important people involved in producing wine.
Coverage encompasses 13,000 wineries, 54 appellations, and 1,000 wine
properties. The attractive book features full-page color photos of vine-
yards, proprietors, and festivals, plus several b&w maps and a color
map. It even comes with a built-in cloth bookmark. The book is dis-
tributed in the US by Octopus Books USA.
TP815 978-3-03785-439-6
Eco-materials processing and design XIII; proceedings.
International Symposium on Eco-Materials Processing and Design (13th:
2012: Guilin, China) Ed. by Jing Sun et al. (Materials science forum;
v.724)
Trans Tech Publications, ©2012 496 p. $276.00 (pa)
The current status and trends in creating, processes sing, and using envi-
ronmentally friendly material are examined in 112 selected and peer-
reviewed papers. They cover materials and photocatalysts related to the
environment; multifunctional materials; nano-structured, hybrid, and
porous materials; high performance materials; biomaterials; and energy
related and carbon materials. Among specific topics are removing iso-
propyl alcohol using an anodized photocatalytic metal membrane
reactor, properties of artificial aggregate made using magnetically sepa-
rated bottom ash from a coal power plant, measuring the porosity of
copper by unidirectional solidification, effects of sintering condition and
additives on translucent silicon nitride ceramics, predicting the flow
stress of a highly alloyed austenitic stainless steel using artificial neural
network, and the effects of catchment materials and treatment train on
water quality in a rainwater harvesting system.
TP884 2012-021573 978-1-4398-1792-6
Mineral admixtures in cement and concrete.
Bapat, Jayant D.
CRC Press, ©2013 290 p. $129.95
Indian engineer Bapat has worked with, researched, and taught about
cement, concrete, and construction for over 40 years. Here he discusses
the physical, mineralogical, and chemical characteristics of mineral
admixtures to help structural engineers and concrete manufacturers
produce and use more durable concrete, that is, with fewer microcracks.
He covers pulverized fuel ash, blast furnace slag, silica fume, rice husk
ash, metakaolin, hydration, strength and durability, and new mineral
admixtures.
TP1150 2012-023638 978-0-470-63922-1
Handbook of troubleshooting plastics processes; a
practical guide.
Title main entry. Ed. by John Wagner. (Polymer science and plastics
engineering)
Scrivener/Wiley, ©2012 479 p. $249.00
Practitioners mostly in packaging offer a guide to troubleshooting the
most commonly used polymer processing operations, including injection
molding, extrusion, and films. They explain how to identify proximate
and ultimate causes, how to fix the problem, and preventative measures.
Among the topics are troubleshooting philosophy, blown film, trou-
bleshooting the thermoforming process, adhesion and thermal lami-
nation, plastics calendering, and pultrusion process troubleshooting.
TP1180 978-1-4557-3110-7
Chemical resistance of specialty thermoplastics. (online
access included)
Title main entry. Ed. by William Woishnis and Sina Ebnesajjad. (PDL
handbook series; chemical resistance; v.3)
Elsevier Saunders, ©2012 1666 p. $299.00
First published in the 1990s, the PDL handbook series continues to serve
professionals in the broad range of industries where plastics and elas-
tomers proliferate. In some respects, convenient access to this infor-
mation has become even more crucial given that the number of fields
where evaluating and selecting plastics must occur has increased while
the number of plastics specialists has declined. This volume comprises
tabular presentation of data from the 2008 CD-ROM edition pertaining to
exposure test conditions and results and including a PDL Rating in a
system devised by William Andrew Publishing. Introductory chapters
address the basics of polymer chemistry, physics, and engineering as
well as the effect of different classes of chemicals on polymers.
Purchasers of the print edition have access to the online edition.
TP1180 978-3-527-31710-3
Polyolefin reaction engineering.
Soares, Joao B.P. and Timothy F.L. McKenna.
Wiley-VCH, ©2012 327 p. $170.00
Soares (chemical engineering, U. of Waterloo, Canada) and McKenna
–312–
(chemistry and polymers, National Center of Scientific Research-
Villeurbanne, France) share their own perspectives on the manufacture
of polyolefins with coordinating catalysts within the synthetic plastic
business, based on their long experience with it. Their topics include
characterizing polyolefin microstructure, polymerization catalysis and
mechanisms, polyolefin reactors and processes, particle growth and mod-
eling single particles, and developing models for commercial reactors.
TP1180 2012-911034 978-0-85709-086-7
Thermosets; structure, properties and applications.
Title main entry. Ed. by Qipeng Guo.
Woodhead Publishing, ©2012 314 p. $230.00
Chemists and mechanical engineers explore the relationship between
structure and properties in a range of plastics that solidify—rather than
melt—when they are heated, and how those properties affect the final
material and its applications. They discuss mechanical and thermal prop-
erties, using chemorheology to characterize and model thermoset flow
behavior, nanostructures and the toughening of thermosets, applications
in building and construction, aerospace applications, adhesives, insu-
lation materials, and electrical applications.
PHOTOGRAPHY
TR140 2012-009803 978-0-8130-4187-2
Picturing black New Orleans; a Creole photographer’s
view of the early twentieth century.
Anthony, Arthé A.
U. Press of Florida, ©2012 129 p. $34.95
In early-20th-century New Orleans, Creole photographer Florestine
Perrault Collins was able to pass as white in order to learn photography.
The portraits she took in her studio in New Orleans’ black business dis-
trict enabled her to support herself and her family, even through the
Great Depression, and have since been exhibited in museums as a
window on the social and cultural history of New Orleans. For this book,
Collins’s great-niece collects a wealth of high-quality, b&w historical
studio portraits taken by Collins, portraying Creole and African-
American couples, children, families, graduates, clubs, and debutantes in
New Orleans from 1920 to 1949. Author Anthony (American studies,
Occidental College) reviews Collins’s life and traces the impact of his-
torical changes on the lives of Creoles and African-Americans in New
Orleans in the first half of the 20th century, drawing on social theory,
oral histories, family records, and of course the photos.
TR250 2012-009973 978-1-937538-02-6
Great photos, simple cameras; from Holga to pinhole; an
alternative approach to creative photography.
Daub, Bernd.
Rocky Nook, ©2012 293 p. $34.95 (pa)
Forget high-tech camera equipment and perfect focus. This book is for
students and hobbyists who want to achieve artistic effects with the sim-
plest cameras, including the Holga, Diana, Blackbird, and Cerrtina
cameras, single use cameras, the Kodak Brownie, the Canomatic, and the
pinhole camera. Also covered are lenses, filters, and films for these
cameras, with a chapter devoted to loading 35mm and roll film. In
addition, the book covers simple digital cameras and explains how to use
digital equipment to edit images from simple cameras. Techniques are
illustrated with color examples and color photos of equipment on every
page. The book also provides a list of web sites and info on prices and
sources for cameras and film. Distribution is by O’Reilly Media.
TR256 2010-925131 978-1-4354-5738-6
David Busch’s Panasonic Lumix DMC-GF1 guide to digital
photography.
Busch, David D. and Dan Simon.
Course Technology PTR, ©2011 322 p. $29.99 (pa)
Written for pros and hobbyists, especially those migrating from film to
digital photography, this guide explains how to use Panasonic’s Lumix
DMC-GF1. Early chapters cover initial set up, shooting and metering
modes, and features and functions of the camera, followed by material
on playing back images, using various set up menus, and fine-tuning
exposure. Close-up photos identify parts of the camera and screenshots
show menus in detail. The guide also offers advanced shooting tips and
advice on working with lenses, basics of electronic flash and other types
of lightning, using software for the Lumix DMC-GF1, and trou-
bleshooting. Color photos and screenshots show examples of effects and
techniques. A detailed glossary is included. Busch has written many
books on photography. Simon teaches at Drexel University.
–313–
TR263 2010-925132 978-1-4354-5740-9
David Busch’s Olympus Pen E-P2; guide to digital
photography.
Busch, David D. and Dan Simon.
Course Technology PTR, ©2011 350 p. $29.99 (pa)
This guide explains how to create outstanding digital photos with the
Olympus Pen E-P2, covering basic controls, how to use them, and why,
as well as advanced techniques for special autofocus modes, working
with lenses, and using software for the Olympus Pen E-P2. There is also
information on file formats, resolution, and exposure, and a final chapter
on troubleshooting. Color photos show examples of effects and tech-
niques, and close-up photos and screenshots identify parts of the camera
and its menus. The book also includes a detailed glossary. The guide is
for digital newcomers and for more experienced amateur and profes-
sional photographers. Busch, a photojournalist, has written many books
on photography. Simon teaches at Drexel University.
TR263 2011-923936 978-1-4354-5946-5
David Busch’s Sony [alpha] DSLR-A580/A560 guide to
digital photography.
Busch, David D. and Alexander S. White.
Course Technology PTR, ©2012 330 p. $29.99 (pa)
This guide for amateur and professional photographers details the func-
tions and controls of the Sony Alpha DSLR-A580/A560. The most
important info is summarized in early chapters on components and fea-
tures, set up, and exposure, so that readers can start shooting right away.
Later chapters explore advanced techniques for live view and movie
making, working with lenses, downloading and editing images, and pre-
venting problems. Close-up photos identify parts of the camera and
screenshots show menus in detail, while color photos give examples of
effects and techniques. An extensive glossary is also included. Readers
should understand what digital SLR is and how digital photography
differs from film; they should also be familiar with basic tools of correct
exposure. Busch is a photojournalist. White has written other books on
photography
TR263 978-0-321-86443-7
Nikon D3200; from snapshots to great shots.
Sylvan, Rob.
Peachpit Press, Inc., ©2013 275 p. $24.99 (pa)
In this complement to the Nikon D3200 owner’s manual, Sylvan, a free-
lance photographer/instructor, presents tips on how to improve one’s
photographs using this digital single-lens reflex camera. Following an
introduction to the SLR camera’s features, adjustments, and the RAW file
format, he offers advice on basic and advanced techniques in auto,
manual, and professional modes. A chapter is devoted to video functions.
The guide includes sample photos, chapter assignments, and a Flickr
group for sharing photos.
TR263 978-0-321-84074-5
Nikon D800; from snapshots to great shots.
Revell, Jeff.
Peachpit Press, Inc., ©2013 299 p. $29.99 (pa)
In this complement to the Nikon D800 owner’s manual, Revell, a profes-
sional photographer and early adopter of digital technology, presents tips
on how to improve one’s photographs using this digital single-lens reflex
(SLR) camera. Following an introduction to the camera’s features and
adjustments, he gives tips on how to “read” and improve photos. The
guide includes a chapter devoted to video functions, sample photos,
chapter assignments, and a Flickr group for sharing photos.
TR267 978-0-321-83957-2
The digital negative; raw image processing in Lightroom,
Camera Raw, and Photoshop.
Schewe, Jeff.
Peachpit Press, Inc., ©2013 299 p. $49.95 (pa)
Schewe, a professional advertising photographer who teaches and leads
workshops, explains the raw image processing of digital camera captures
and how to use Adobe Lightroom and Camera Raw to extract the best
raw rendering of that digital negative. He explains what a digital negative
is and summarizes Adobe raw image processing, then discusses the fun-
damentals of Lightroom and Camera Raw; advanced raw processing,
including tone mapping, color correction, color to b&w conversion, and
maximizing image detail; using Photoshop to perfect digital negatives,
including retouching, editing, and compositing multiple images; and cre-
ating an efficient workflow.
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
TR267 2011-018758 978-0-316-02074-9
Digital photography; a basic manual.
Horenstein, Henry.
Little, Brown, ©2011 239 p. $29.99 (pa)
Covering everything from choosing the right camera to post production,
Horenstein (photography, Rhode Island School of Design) details each
step of digital capture in this basic guide. Easily understood but sophis-
ticated in content, this comprehensive manual includes chapters on the
uses and advantages of different lens, the basics of lighting, shutter
speeds, scanning, editing, and printing as well as solutions for common
problems. Gorgeous images by notable photographers and instructional
sidebars are included to illustrate the various techniques and tips dis-
cussed. The guide is intended for both novice photographers, as well as
those transitioning from film to the digital medium.
TR270 2012-001393 978-1-933952-97-0
The lens; a practical guide for the creative photographer.
Guy, NK.
Rocky Nook, ©2012 310 p. $44.95 (pa)
Guy, a writer and photographer who specializes in travel photography
and event portraiture, offers a guide for new photographers who use
interchangeable lens cameras that explains how to choose a lens based
on needs, priorities, and budget. Providing photos of lenses and examples
throughout, he covers single-lens reflex (SLR) cameras, mirrorless inter-
changeable-lens digital cameras, and rangefinders. He describes optics,
how a lens captures light, lens mechanisms, choosing the right lens for
a project or by focal length, accessories, buying lenses, advanced topics
like distortion and infrared photography, and options beyond the
standard lens, including pinhole cameras and homemade lenses.
Medium and large format camera systems are not addressed. Distributed
by O’Reilly Media.
TR573 978-0-321-86269-3
Shooting in sh*tty light; the top ten worst photography
situations and how to conquer them.
Adler, Lindsay and Erik Valind.
Peachpit Press, Inc., ©2013 223 p. $34.99 (pa)
Focusing on ten different poor lighting situations, professional photogra-
phers Adler and Valind offer a variety of solutions for getting the best
shot under less than desirable circumstances. Organized in ten chapters,
this survival guide includes tips for dealing with direct sunlight, fluo-
rescents, mixed lights, low lights, backlights, deep contrast and nighttime
shooting. With accessible terms, helpful tips and visual examples, this is
a must have for beginning photographers trying to master the delicate
art of lighting. Includes a glossary and equipment appendix.
TR575 978-0-321-81433-3
Photographing women; 1,000 poses.
Siegel, Eliot.
Peachpit Press, Inc., ©2013 319 p. $54.99
Following an introductory chapter offering technical advice on key
aspects of photography from putting the subject at ease to digital photo
editing, a veteran fashion photographer focuses on poses including
variants of standing, sitting, reclining, kneeling, and movement. A
lighting diagram and explanation of how the photo was made
accompany each pose. The book also includes other photographers’ com-
ments on their approach, influences, camera and lighting used, and gear
they consider essential.
TR575 978-0-321-80414-3
Secrets of great portrait photography; photographs of the
famous and infamous.
Smith, Brian.
New Riders Publishing, ©2013 255 p. $49.99 (pa)
Smith is a Pulitzer Prize-winning photographer whose Art & Soul: Stars
Unite to Celebrate and Support the Arts features his photographs of
celebrities. Whether photographing holy men of Nepal, Richard Branson
suited up for Virgin Galactic space flights, or nudists playing golf, he
stresses that “nothing is more important to portrait photography than
connecting with the person you’re photographing....” The guide includes
tips, a list of the lighting gear used in the book, assignments, and an
interview with the author.
TR590 978-0-321-83275-7
Lighting for digital photography; from snapshots to great
shots.
Arena, Syl.
Peachpit Press, Inc., ©2013 277 p. $24.99 (pa)
Regarding photography as “writing with light,” Arena (Speedlighters
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
Handbook), who has taught lighting and photography worldwide, begins
with the advice to become obsessed with light. With sample photographs,
critiques, and camera specifications, he explains the fundamental char-
acteristics of light, shooting in natural and artificial light, and advanced
techniques for portraits. Chapters include assignments. The appendix
specifies the gear he uses and recommends.
TR647 978-90-209-9213-7
Bieke Depoorter; Ou Menya.
Depoorter, Bieke.
Lannoo Publishers, ©2012 128 p. $55.00 (pa)
Photographer Bieke Depoorter produced her graduate thesis by travelling
three times in one-month segments on the Trans-Siberian Express.
Knowing no Russian, she would get off each day at random stops,
present women with a note in Russian asking them if she could sleep in
their homes, and then photograph the rooms and their inhabitants. The
resulting show won her the HP Magnum Expression Award, and this
book of her pictures. They are color photographs printed in an inten-
tionally grainy style, as if enlargements of low-resolution snapshots.
Dark, flat, and in surrealistically saturated color, they are almost exclu-
sively rural and small-town Siberian interiors, in which barrenness
coexists with high-contrast visual riot, and in which the inhabitants are
simultaneously fragmentary and perfectly at home.
TR647 2011-942459 978-0-500-54415-0
Masterclass: Arnold Newman.
Ewing, William A.
Thames & Hudson, ©2012 272 p. $60.00
Arnold Newman was one of the most productive and respected portrait
photographers of the latter half of the 20th century. His portraits feature
many powerful and influential figures of the time, captured in
Newman’s innovative “environmental” style. This collection of mostly
black-and-white photos from across the span of Newman’s career offers
images which are rarely seen in other books. It includes portraits of busi-
nessmen, abstractions, architectural details, cityscapes, and group por-
traits. The book opens with a biography of Newman placing him in the
context of his time and community, and closes with an essay on his
involvement in the FACES project. It also includes a list of subject biog-
raphies, and selected exhibitions and publications.
TR654 978-90-209-9493-3
Beyond the document.
Pool, Andries et al.
Lannoo Publishers, ©2011 240 p. $60.00
The work of contemporary Belgian photographers is showcased in this
book. The work here is generally in color, with the exception of Thomas
Chable’s evocative black-and-white images, and focuses often on land-
scape. The book is formatted to allow for the printing of images in a
fairly large scale, and white space is used strategically in the page design.
Thematically, the idea that holds the collection together is evoked by the
book’s title; these pictures reference in some way the idea or experience
of documentary photography, while staking a place in the genre of fine-
art photography rather than photojournalism. Arno Roncada stages the
illusion of an illegal border-crossing from Mexico to the US; Gilbert
Fastenaekens photographs books printed with his photographs; Vincen
Beekman manipulates snapshots and goes behind-the-scenes in Chinese
restaurants. Some of the other photographer’s connections to documen-
tation are more abstract. The majority of the artists represented here are
men. The introductory text is in French, Dutch, and English. Distributed
in North America by ACC Distribution.
TR656 978-0-321-84073-8
Food photography & lighting; a commercial
photographer’s guide to creating irresistible images.
Campbell, Teri.
New Riders Publishing, ©2013 273 p. $44.99 (pa)
Campell, a professional photographer for over 25 years, shares his
expertise on proper lighting and shooting techniques for food and drink
while offering practical advice on setting up a studio, finding clients,
marketing your work, and locating the right tools for the job. Containing
various assignments, detailed lighting diagrams, and straightforward
solutions to typical challenges, this practical guide is full of delectable
images and is intended for students and professionals as well as art
directors. Includes three bonus assignment chapters that can be
downloaded.
–314–
TR656 2012-934301 978-1-4354-5418-7 from hundreds of thousands in the database by the author. This is an
More digital food photography. art book; the text is confined to a brief introduction about the Survey,
Brady, Bill. and a short and cogent afterward by Terry Tempest Williams. The rest
Course Technology PTR, ©2013 238 p. $39.99 (pa) is photographs in full color. On single-page or double-page spreads, they
strike the eye with such power, and appeal with such subtlety, that
Brady, a professional food and beverage photographer, provides
viewers could scarcely imagine such epic materials and landscapes could
beginners and advanced photographers with a guide explaining how to
disappear. Balog may hope readers will choose to protect something so
approach, compose, and light food and drink images. Along with exer-
extraordinary, or that photographs vivid and skillful enough, presented
cises, tutorials, and color illustrations, he covers the digital workflow;
in a high enough quality format, can replace the originals. This book
photography basics like camera angles, lighting, and telling a story; food
comes as close as anything can. A short index in the back offers small
styling from the perspectives of a food stylist and photographer; studio
portraits of the varied personnel of the Survey: individuals, teams, and
equipment; advanced lighting; taking photography to the next level, with
families at work and play on the ice. General readers, artists, nature or
discussion of fixing images on set and shooting with layouts; and
geology fans, people who live or play in winter landscapes, and photog-
business and artistic aspects.
raphers, regardless of scientific or political bent, will all value this book.
Oversize: 13x12”.
TR680 2012-033655 978-0-7611-7170-6
Dancers among us; a celebration of joy in the everyday. TR882 2012938245 978-0-12-386543-4
Matter, Jordan. Introduction to crime scene photography.
Workman Pub. Co. Inc., ©2012 229 p. $17.95 (pa) Robinson, Edward M.
This book showcases color photographs of dancers (mostly but not Academic Press, ©2013 415 p. $79.95
entirely from ballet) showing off their moves while posed in everyday set-
Especially designed for use in community college and high school
tings. They perch on roadsigns, leap on sidewalks, shoot pool from
courses, this color-illustrated text is a scaled-down, concise version of the
impossible angles, and are often caught by the camera of photographer
author’s 2007 text, Crime Scene Photography. Author Robinson (forensic
Jordan Matter at heights that seem either impossible to survive or
science, the George Washington University) has based the text on the
immune to gravity. All know how to put to good use the professional
guidelines set out by the three Scientific Working Groups on best photo-
dancer’s ability to seem effortless in the most effortful positions. The
graphic practices for imaging technology, shoe prints, tire tracks, and fin-
effect is sometimes inspiring and sometimes funny. In short explanations
gerprints. After a detailed overview of crime scene photography and
of most shoots at the end of the book, the author proves none of the
photo documentation, chapters cover exposure, focus and depth of field,
photos are doctored. The pictures are divided by theme: dreaming,
lenses, electronic flash, energy filters and sensors, and digital processing
loving, playing, exploring, and so on, captioned for commercial appeal,
of evidentiary photography. The final chapter explores legal issues related
and separated by short essays in the inspirational-writing category by the
to photographs and digital images. The book includes color photos on
author about being the parent of a young son. There is kitsch here, but
every page, along with detailed chapter summaries, discussion questions,
also amazing images, as well as unexpected mischief: Michelle Fleet mul-
and a glossary. Academic Press is an imprint of Elsevier.
titasks upside down in a cubicle, Charles-Louis Yoshiyama flies busily to
NASA, Paul Busch orders coffee en pointe in a gray flannel suit and toe TR897 2012-019339 978-1-56881-724-8
shoes.
Production volume rendering; design and implementation.
TR683 2012-005042 978-1-937538-04-0 Wrenninge, Magnus.
Tabletop photography; using compact flashes and low-cost CRC Press, ©2013 339 p. $49.95
tricks to create professional-looking studio shots. Wrenninge, with a major motion picture company, explains how to
Harnischmacher, Cyrill. model and create computer images that look three-dimensional for film
Rocky Nook, ©2012 135 p. $24.95 or animation production—images such as virtual smoke, fire, dust, and
clouds. He outlines all the different techniques and ideas that are used
Based in southern Germany, Harnischmacher is a professional photog- for volume-rendering in the largest production facilities, details the steps
rapher and designer, and has authored four previous books published by to implement them, and provides many examples to illustrate.
Rocky Nook. His latest work provides a guide for amateur photographers
interested in learning how to do the area of studio photography known
as “tabletop,” and who don’t already own studio lighting systems. The MANUFACTURES, ARTS & CRAFTS
text covers the basics of tabletop photography; flashes, lenses, cameras,
and other technology considerations; setting up a studio; detailed expla-
TS23 978-3-03785-479-2
nations of various techniques used in practice; and do-it-yourself solu-
tions to some professional photography gear. Illustrated with b&w and Progress in advanced manufacturing technologies; special
color photographs. Distributed by O’Reilly Media. topic volume.
Title main entry. Ed. by Guanglin Wang et al. (Key engineering mate-
TR692.5 978-3-527-41047-7 rials; v.522)
Handbook of biophotonics; v.1: Basics and techniques. Trans Tech Publications, ©2012 947 p. $345.00 (pa)
Title main entry. Ed. by Jürgen Popp et al. Mechanical and other engineers share recent developments in the theory,
Wiley-VCH, ©2012 665 p. $315.00 technology, method, and equipment in materials processing and manu-
facturing automation. They cover machining technologies and materials
Mostly German scientists introduce the branch of photonics that images
engineering, mechanical engineering and engineering design, industrial
biological tissues. This first of three volumes sets out the property of light
robot technology, computer integrated manufacturing systems and con-
and its interaction with biological matter, the necessary optical instru-
temporary integrated manufacturing systems, and related topics. Among
mentation to induce and monitor the linear and non-linear interactions
the topics are the physical simulation of the cutting process and opti-
between light and biological matter, and the molecular and cellular prop-
mizing cutting parameters, the blade pitch control of wind power with
erties of living organisms. It can serve as a prerequisite for the recent
gain scheduling, buffer material used as hip protectors for the elderly
developments in research and application that are covered in the other
against falling down, designing and simulating a tobacco harvesting
two volumes, but can also stand as a brief reference for readers in related
system based on virtual manufacturing technology, and the material
fields who do not need details.
mechanical performance of femurs cured by Uyghur sand therapy,
TR786 2012-931974 978-0-8478-3886-8
TS155 978-3-03785-462-4
Ice; portraits of vanishing glaciers.
Digital manufacturing and automations III; proceedings;
Balog, James.
2v.
Rizzoli Intl. Pub. Inc., ©2013 287 p. $50.00
International Conference on Digital Manufacturing & Automation
This astonishing book is a production of James Balog and the Extreme (ICDMA2012) (2012: 3d: Guangxi, China) Ed. by Yonghong Tan.
Ice Survey, which sets up automatic cameras around the world to pho- (Applied mechanics and materials; vs.190-191)
tograph arctic features daily over a period of years. The Survey works to Trans Tech Publications, ©2012 1397 p. $276.00 (pa)
document the movement of glaciers, the speed of winter ice-over and
This two-volume set contains about 290 papers from the Third
spring break-up in arctic climates, and the seasonal round, as a baseline
International Conference on Digital Manufacturing and Automation
for scientific study. It has also discovered the world’s glaciers, snowcaps,
(ICDMA2012), held in August 2012 in Guangxi, China. Contributed by
and arctic ice are rapidly disappearing. Photographs from the same
engineers and materials, computer, and other scientists mainly based in
location on the same day a few years apart show large natural features
China and Taiwan (but also Canada, Sweden, Hong Kong, the US, and
have simply evaporated. However, the book’s focus is not on these
Australia), papers relate to the topics of digital and advanced
findings but the breathtaking beauty of Survey photographs, selected

–315– Reference & Research Book News December 2012

manufacturing; materials science and its application; mechatronics and
robot technology; deep sea mining equipment, complex equipment
design, and extreme manufacturing; control and detection technology;
and applied mechanics and mechanical engineering.
TS155 2012-017891 978-1-4665-0537-7
Lean management system LMS:2012; a framework for
continual lean improvement.
Levinson, William A.
CRC Press, ©2013 203 p. $39.95
Levinson outlines a system that involves a set of Lean key performance
indicators to identify and measure all forms of waste, a proactive con-
tinuous improvement cycle that seeks out waste instead of reacting to it,
and an unofficial standard that organizations can use to structure a com-
prehensive set of activities to remove all forms of waste from their oper-
ations and supply chain and ensure systematic continuity of future
improvement activities. He addresses concepts like kaizen events, work-
place rearrangement to improve efficiencies, visual controls, pull pro-
duction systems, and heijunka or production leveling. Material and
energy considerations are integrated by implementing the key elements
of ISO (International Standards Organization) 14001 environmental man-
agement system and ISO 50001 energy management system standards.
He describes the need for a Lean management standard; the system’s
provisions, assessment questions, and supplemental information; recom-
mended key performance indicators; the continuous improvement cycle;
a structure and framework around which internal auditors can assess
the system, which follows the organization of ISO 9001:2008 and applies
the recommended key performance indicators to management responsi-
bility, resource management, product or service realization, meas-
urement and analysis, and environmental and energy considerations;
and the details of each provision, including the rationale, and methods,
techniques, and thought processes for implementation.
TS155 2012-015724 978-1-4398-7779-1
Lean production for the small company. (CD-ROM
included)
Elbert, Mike.
CRC Press, ©2013 279 p. $49.95 (pa)
Elbert, who has worked in manufacturing and is a consultant who helps
businesses eliminate waste, guides small businesses through the imple-
mentation of Lean manufacturing based on the Toyota Production
System, beginning with the basics, then detailing the tools and processes
needed to implement it. He explains how to determine and calculate the
waste in business and manufacturing systems, how to use continuous
improvement to implement changes needed to eliminate waste, and how
to remove variations within business and manufacturing processes to
achieve a continuous flow of product through a system that more effi-
ciently delivers products on time to customers. He describes how to
design factories for Lean manufacturing, focusing on how to use cus-
tomer order demands to schedule the production floor instead of esti-
mated production schedules, and details new methods and tools that
focus on reducing inventory, improving inventory turns, and improving
raw material flow through the factory. Included is a chapter on the
accounting process and improving the cash-to-cash cycle time. A CD-ROM
is provided.
TS156 2012-027602 978-0-87389-845-4
The certified quality inspector handbook, 2d ed.
Title main entry. Ed. by H. Fred Walker, Ahmad Elshennawy, Bhisham
C. Gupta and Mary McShane Vaughn.
ASQ Quality Press, ©2012 453 p. $142.00
Written for practicing quality inspectors and quality inspectors in
training, this reference book includes algebra-based problems and
examples with real life application and may also be used as a study
guide by those preparing to take the ASQ CQI examination. Section one
details technical mathematics, including basic shop math, algebra,
geometry, and trigonometry. It also addresses measurements and
numeric conversions. Section two addresses metrology, the science of pre-
cision measurements, and discusses gauges and measurement instru-
ments, surface plate tools and techniques, specialized inspection
equipment, calibration, and measurement system analysis. Section three
deals with inspection and testing, including blueprints, drawings, GD&T,
sampling, planning and processes, and software. Section four details
aspects of quality assurance. The final section consists of appendices.
This book makes extensive use of tables and figures and a CD-ROM is
included.
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
TS156 978-1-60807-557-7
Designing control loops for linear and switching power
supplies; a tutorial guide.
Basso, Christophe. (Power engineering)
Artech House, ©2012 593 p. $139.00
An application engineering director with a French semiconductor
company, Basso explains how compensation theory could apply to elec-
tronic circuits different than op amps. He intends the book to be a com-
panion that engineers look at then they need to stabilize a power
converter, so goes light on theory and heavy on practical measures.
Among his topics are the basics of loop control, stability criteria of a
control system, operational transconductance amplifier-based compen-
sators, shunt regulator-based compensators, and measures and design
examples.
TS183 978-3-03785-448-8
Automatic manufacturing systems; proceedings; 2v.
Int’l Conference on Advanced Engineering Materials and Technology
(2d: 2012: Zhuhai, China) Ed. by Runhua Tan et al. (Advanced mate-
rials research; vs.542-543)
Trans Tech Publications, ©2012 1487 p. $276.00 (pa)
Volume one of the two-volume set from the July 2012 conference collects
recent research on virtual manufacturing, supply chain systems, com-
puter-aided design, quality monitoring, and mechatronics. Two papers
from Guangdong University of Technology study a four polynomial
acceleration and deceleration control method for numerical control
systems and an algorithm for calculating space tool compensation vectors
in five-axis CNC machines. The second volume explores transmission and
control of fluid, information processing technology, micro-electronic
packaging equipment, and computer software. Ten papers from the
Beijing Information Science and Technology University investigate the
signal processing circuit in fluidic gyroscopes, the signal extraction
circuit in nozzle array structure fluidic gyroscopes, and the influence of
the outlet aperture on the stability of fluidic gyroscopes.
TS183 2012-009796 978-1-118-11125-3
Improving profitability through green manufacturing;
creating a profitable and environmentally compliant
manufacturing facility.
Hillis, David R. and J. Barry DuVall
John Wiley & Sons, ©2012 227 p. $59.95
Hillis, an industry consultant on productivity and sustainability, and
DuVall (technology systems, East Carolina U.) argue that profits don’t
have to be sacrificed for the sake of environmental responsibility and we
don’t have to destroy the earth to make a profit. They focus on pro-
duction techniques that increase output efficiency and reduce waste, but
also staffing models that make use of worker flexibility to respond to
changing demands. Everything has a life-cycle, they point out, and when
businesses violate this by either using obsolete or inefficient technology,
designs, or staffing models they harm the earth and their bottom-line.
The material is presented in a structured format with introductions,
defined sections and summaries with bibliographies. The chapters con-
sider building decision-making models, environmental regulations and
standards, case studies, engineering considerations for improved manu-
facturing operations, life cycle cost analysis in facility design. In the end
the authors present a “profitable and compliant process chart” for
assessing for profitable green manufacturing standards. The book is of
high quality with excellent binding.
TS183 2012-001845 978-1-936007-53-0
Start-up; a technician’s guide, 2d ed.
Barkin, Diane R. (ISA technician series)
ISA, ©2012 286 p. $79.00 (pa)
This guide explains the role of the control systems technician in starting
a new plant or a portion of a manufacturing facility which has had a
process change requiring new equipment or controls. The guide
addresses the entire process from the first start-up team meeting to the
last round of tuning and loop checking with chapters on safety practices,
documentation, communicating within the organization, assisting opera-
tions and site personnel, and tuning control loops. Appendices provide
sample job descriptions, material safety data sheets and factory
acceptance tests.
–316–
TS183 2011-278829 978-0-07-178855-7
Strategic lean mapping; blending improvement processes
for the perfect solution.
Borris, Steven.
McGraw-Hill, ©2012 186 p. $50.00
This book for those in both large and small companies explains how to
use visual charts of organizational processes, such as process mapping,
capacity mapping, and value-stream mapping, to diagnose and anticipate
problems in business processes. It also recommends Lean Manufacturing
techniques to solve identified problems, outlining methodologies such as
theory of constraints, reliability-centered maintenance, total productive
maintenance, and overall equipment efficiency. Case studies illustrate
how to create the maps and how to find the right methods to solve
problems. Borris is a manufacturing consultant.
TS195 978-3-03785-478-5
Packaging science and technology; proceedings.
International Conference on Packaging Technology and Science (ICPTS
2012) (2012: Ningbo, China). Ed. by Dechang Xi et al. (Applied
mechanics and materials; v.200 )
Trans Tech Publications, ©2012 770 p. $276.00 (pa)
This volume contains 161 papers from the International Conference on
Packaging Technology and Sciences (ICPTS 2012), held in Ningbo, China,
in October 2012. Engineers and other scientists working mainly in China
focus on applied mechanics of packaging, from cushioning to energy
absorption properties; packaging materials, such as corrugated composite
paperboard, plastics, corn straw cushion packaging material, corn starch
films, composites, particleboard, and paper; packaging technology and
equipment for various products, from bamboo shoots to hazel nuts to
chilled fresh pork; design methods; printing aspects and methods; and
management.
TS198 978-1-4377-3526-0
Bottles, preforms and closures, 2d ed.
Title main entry. Ed. by Ottmar Brandau. (Plastics Design lLbrary
series)
William Andrew Publishing, ©2013 170 p. $149.00
The 2005 edition was intended to be just a design guide, but readers com-
plained that it said little about the practical aspects of injecting molding
PET (polyethylene terephthalate) preforms. Therefore, a new chapter on
all aspects of preform molding has been added here. Other areas covered
are beverage bottles, preforms, and closures for bottles. Among specific
topics are determining bottle properties, verifying the three-dimensional
design through finite element simulation, behavior in the blow mold,
optimizing the injection settings, closure types, and test procedures.
William Andrew Publishing in an imprint of Elsevier.
TS1309 978-1-84569-791-4
Theory of structure and mechanics of fibrous assemblies.
Neckár, Bohuslav and Dipayan Das. (Woodhead Publishing India in tex-
tiles)
Woodhead Publishing, ©2012 324 p. $180.00
Scholars of textile technology Neckár (Technical U. of Liverec, Czech
Republic) and Das (Indian Institute of Technology, Delhi) share the
results of theoretical research into the formulation of the internal
structure of textile materials and the mathematical modeling of the
behavior of textiles. The material is for researchers and advanced
graduate students, though some of it would be accessible to undergrad-
uates as well. They cover basic properties of single fibers and fibrous
assemblies, pores in fibrous assemblies, arrangements of fibers—fiber
orientation, fiber-to-fiber contacts, the compression behavior of fibrous
assemblies, and the mechanics of parallel and non-parallel fiber bundles.
TS1540 2012-947683 978-1-84569-697-9
Handbook of natural fibres; v.1: Types, properties and
factors affecting breeding and cultivation.
Title main entry. Ed. by Ryszard M. Kozlowski. (Woodhead Publishing
series in textiles; no.118)
Woodhead Publishing, ©2012 620 p. $300.00
Scientists and engineers in textiles, fibers, dyeing, botany, and zoology
explore types of fiber, properties, identification, and testing and
improving natural fiber production through breeding and cultivation.
The topics include cotton fibers, ramie, hemp cultivation and production,
wool fibers, bioengineered natural textile fibers, testing natural textile
fibers, developments in fibrous flax breeding and cultivation, preventing
fungal growth in natural fibers, and wild silk enterprise programs to
alleviate poverty and protect habitats.
–317–
TS1548 2012-942047 978-0-85709-087-4
Understanding and improving the durability of textiles.
Title main entry. Ed. by Patricia A. Annis. (Woodhead Publishing series
in textiles; no.132)
Woodhead Publishing, ©2012 272 p. $230.00
How long a textile maintains its innate characteristics in use is deter-
mined by a combination of the nature of the textile, the amount and kind
of use, and the environment. Researchers here look at what textile science
has to say about textile durability, and present case studies of the dura-
bility of particular types of textiles. The topics include understanding,
testing, and enhancing fabric strength; durable press treatments to
improve the durability and wrinkle resistance of cotton and other fabrics;
effects of light exposure on textile durability; types, finishes, and appli-
cations of durable anti-microbial textiles; the durability of historic textiles;
and silk durability and degradation.
TT504 978-3-89790-363-0
Cairo fashion design; young tendencies.
Title main entry. Ed. by Susanne Kümper.
Arnoldsche Art Publishers, ©2012 219 p. $60.00 (pa)
West meets East in Cairo, the largest city of the Arab world, in fashion
as well as politically. Kümper, who established a course in modern
fashion design at Cairo’s Helwan University, showcases fashions designed
by students that incorporate inter-cultural dialog (e.g., about women
wearing veils) and traditional and contemporary design for global
markets. Texts by specialists in cultural history, fashion and politics are
in English, German, and/or Arabic. The volume features fashion photo-
graphs and sketches. Distributed in North America by ACC Distribution.
TT550 2011945991 978-0-500-51632-4
Remake it; clothes.
Thompson, Henrietta. Illustrations by Neal Whittington.
Thames & Hudson, ©2012 272 p. $29.95
This book is designed for women interested in the do-it-yourself
movement who enjoy innovative clothing and accessories made from
recycled and industrial materials. While the book’s design is referential
to a 1950’s craft sewing book, the hardcover format is small and the
visual design is chosen more for style than ease of use. Young people
with good eyesight will not find this a problem as long as they are sitting
down and have both hands free. The book is best understood not as a
how-to book but as a very small coffee-table book referential to how-to
books. The organization is magazine style, to encourage browsing. There
are many sections of fashion tips. There is a section on high fashion and
tailoring basics, but those interested in either will need additional
resources. The book shines in its photographs of innovative wearable art
pieces made from recycled and industrial materials. As long as readers
do not think they will be able to use this book and a home sewing
machine to make a stunning bustier from recycled leather athletic
footwear, these images truly inspire.
TT852 978-0-500-51644-7
Digital visions for fashion + textiles; made in code.
Clarke, Sarah E. Braddock and Jane Harris.
Thames & Hudson, ©2012 240 p. $60.00
After the invention of the Jacquard Loom in the 18th century, the
process of manufacturing textiles was transformed. This was the first
machine to use punched cards and was considered a crucial step in the
history of computing hardware. Clarke (fashion design, U. of Falmouth,
UK) and Harris (digital imaging design, Kingston U., UK) explore the
ways in which computing has revolutionized the creative fields— partic-
ularly the fashion and textile industries— and celebrates the partnership
between artist and machine. An inspiring resource for both students and
industry professionals, this hardback features bibliographic information,
a reference section, 429 color illustrations and focuses on twenty-two
innovative practitioners (both established and emerging) who have
embraced digital technologies in their work.
TT958 978-1-937235-03-1
Health challenged skin; the estheticians’ desk reference.
Currin, Morag.
Alluredbooks, ©2012 566 p. $125.00 (pa)
Currin, an esthetician who developed a skin care line and has experience
in the spa industry, including training and management, supplies estheti-
cians working in a spa environment with a guide to diseases that have
skin manifestations and their non-medical management. The conditions
are presented in alphabetical order, and range from allergies to
Parkinson’s disease to psoriasis, and she provides an overview of each
disease and information on how it affects skin cells and appears on the
skin surface, how to recognize and differentiate diseases, how to use spa
and facial treatments, and how to manage the overall health and mental
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
well-being of clients. She includes non-traditional modalities like
auricular therapy, aromatherapy, reflexology, and the Bach Flower
essences. Issues related to cancer are covered in a separate book.
TT958 2011-943910 978-1-111-30689-2
Milady standard esthetics; fundamentals, 11th ed.
Gerson, Joel.
Cengage Learning, ©2013 758 p. $132.50
Gerson, a technical consultant to manufacturers who has been a makeup
artist, executive, and esthetic examiner, offers a textbook for students
preparing to become licensed professional estheticians. It includes the
basic information and procedures for esthetics training courses up to 600
hours and covers the field’s history and career opportunities; aspects of
professional image; communication; and general sciences, including
infection control, anatomy and physiology, basic chemistry, and basic
nutrition. Other topics discussed include skin physiology and histology,
disorders and diseases, analysis, and care products. Esthetics practices,
including facials, facial massage and machines, hair removal, clinical
procedures used with cosmetic surgery, and makeup are covered, along
with business skills, such as career planning, establishing a business,
and selling products and services. This edition is updated to include a
new chapter on life skills like goal setting, time management, study
skills, and ethics. It has been aligned with other texts and has a
redesigned magazine feel. It includes new color photos and illustrations;
a new pre-service procedure section on facial rooms; a new post-service
procedure on cleaning, disinfecting, and organizing after service; new
sections on why content is important in careers; and new chapter
organization.
FOOD SCIENCE
TX349 2012-014375 978-0-7656-8278-9
World food; an encyclopedia of history, culture, and
social influence from hunter-gatherers to the age of
globalization; 2v.
Snodgrass, Mary Ellen.
M.E. Sharpe, Inc., ©2013 630 p. $249.00
The scope is quite broad, and the selection of approximately 300 topics
for this two-volume reference must have been quite an undertaking for
Snodgrass, who also seems to have done all the writing. This reference
will serve students at the high school level and above and other readers
involved with food cultivation or preparation, as well as anyone seeking
a starting place for research on some aspect of this many-faceted subject.
Entries are alphabetically arranged, but a topic finder listing in the front
matter identifies broad themes: additives, flavorings, modifications (e.g.
genetically modified food, hormones, trans fat); agriculture and gar-
dening (greenhouse horticulture, monoculture, organic foods); art, liter-
ature, media (cookbooks, the Food Network); biographies; cooking and
preparation; customs, lore, and religion (the afterlife and food, canni-
balism, kosher food); diets and cuisines of regions and periods; prepared
foods and beverages; foodstuffs (natural products); health, medicine,
nutrition; and about a half dozen other themes. The entries range in
length from less than a page to five or six pages. Each includes references
and cross references. Appended are a chronology, a listing of herbal
foods and uses, and a glossary; indexing is in the second volume. Also
available from Sharpe Online Reference (the Global History & Culture
Collection).
TX361 2012-014814 978-1-4051-5354-6
Nutrition for sport and exercise; a practical guide.
Daries, Hayley.
Wiley-Blackwell, ©2012 270 p. $49.99 (pa)
For athletes at any level, sports physicians, and undergraduate students
of nutrition and sport and exercise, Daries, a registered dietitian who has
experience in nutrition and sport, outlines the basic principles of
nutrition in terms of sport and exercise and includes tools like food and
nutrient lists, recipes, and menu options. She discusses the athlete’s
energy needs, the basis of a good diet, carbohydrates, protein, fats,
vitamins and minerals, fluid balance, and performance-enhancing aids
like nutritional supplements, caffeine, creatine, and sodium bicarbonate,
with discussion of their benefits, scientific evidence, dosage, and side
effects.
TX406 978-0-85709-040-9
Handbook of herbs and spices, 2d ed; v.2.
Title main entry. Ed. by K.V. Peter.
Woodhead Publishing, ©2012 600 p. $290.00
This is a major technical handbook on the properties of herbs and spices,
for food science, manufacturing, and trade professionals. The language is
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
uniformly technical. The first few chapters cover main uses of herbs and
spices as well as safety and efficacy issues, their active components,
health benefits, effect of natural antioxidants in herbs and spices, and
methods of analysis. The remaining twenty-three chapters each cover an
individual herb or spice (primary species in wide international use).
Each chapter is written by a technical specialist from a primary country
of cultivation; the most common trade perspective represented is India.
Each chapter contains a complete chemical breakdown of the spice, along
with a description, technical information on dry identification, culti-
vation, specifications for processing and processing issues (usually the
longest section), and research results into medical or other commercial
uses. A list at the front of the book gives professional contact information
for each author. This is the second of two volumes.
TX531 978-0-12-242352-9
Biochemistry of foods, 3d ed.
Title main entry. Ed. by N.A. Michael Eskin and Fereidoon Shahidi.
Academic Press, ©2013 565 p. $124.95
Eskin (human nutritional sciences, U. of Manitoba) and Shahidi (bio-
chemistry, Memorial U.) present an impressively comprehensive reference
or teachable text on the biochemistry of food. It is written for those with
advanced undergraduate or graduate background with organic and bio-
chemistry. Organized into four major sections, they deal with bio-
chemical changes in raw food that affect quality, the biochemistry of food
processing, selected instances of food spoilage, and an extensive review
of genetic engineering and the use of synthetic compounds in or for pro-
cessing food. They provide highly structured chapters complete with
general introductions, graphical and diagrammatic information, sys-
tematic interrogation of chemical composition and processes, but no
questions. Several new chapters have been added to this edition,
including the switching out of a chapter on food enzymes with one on
recombinant DNA technologies. Academic press is an imprint of Elsevier.
TX531 2012-010719 978-1-4051-9922-3
Food materials science and engineering.
Title main entry. Ed. by Bhesh Bhandari and Yrjö H. Roos.
Wiley-Blackwell, ©2012 401 p. $199.00
Materials science is concerned with the control of a variety of physical,
chemical, mechanical, and dimensional properties in metal, polymer,
and ceramic materials. This book presents a synthesis of materials
science with the more recently developed food science, and is appropriate
for students and food scientists. Each chapter, written by materials and
food scientists, explores in detail aspects of this fusion, including a look
at food materials structures; characterization techniques; interfarcial,
phase, and state transition phenomena; biopolymer gels, microgels, and
nanogels; food design; nutrient delivery; emerging processing tech-
nologies; packaging materials; food texture; and freezing science. Some
b&w images, figures, and charts are included.
TX531 2012-382327 978-0-309-22465-9
The potential consequences of public release of food
safety and inspection service establishment-specific data.
Committee on a Study of Food Safety and Other Consequences of
Publishing Establishment-Specific Data.
National Academies Press, ©2011 97 p. $42.00 (pa)
Some national and state agencies release information about safety
findings at specific companies, and officials at the Food Safety and
Inspection Service—responsible for meat, poultry, and processed egg
products—are considering making their agency one of them. Before doing
so, they asked the National Academy of Sciences to advise them on the
possible consequences. After setting out the background, the report dis-
cusses transparency and food safety and inspection service data-sharing,
experience with public posting of government data, and the public
release of Food Safety and Inspection Service establishment-specific data.
It is not indexed.
TX649 2011-053041 978-0-85785-052-2
Food media; celebrity chefs and the politics of everyday
interference.
Rousseau, Signe.
Berg Publishers, ©2012 195 p. $99.95
Rousseau (critical literacy, U. of Cape Town, South Africa) presents a fas-
cinating account of the modern celebrity chef business, and the evolution
from chef to superstar to social-activist-tackling-obesity over recent
decades. Coverage includes historical and theoretical background on the
phenomenon; the major 20th-century developments that have contributed
to the success and growth of the food media industry, including technical
advances such as television, post-war industrial booms, and transnational
exchanges of information and commodities; individual celebrity chefs
who have found fame through television, including Jamie Oliver, Rachel
–318–
Ray, Heston Blumenthal, and Nigella Lawson; and ways that media rep-
resentations of food and eating can have serious negative consequences
for our capacities for rational and critical thinking. Distributed in the US
by Bloomsbury USA.
TX741 2012-000009 978-0-8166-7628-6
The Spoonriver cookbook.
Langton, Brenda and Margaret Stuart.
U. of Minnesota Press, ©2012 257 p. $34.95
Before sharing recipes from her Spoonriver restaurant menu, Langton
(Center for Spirituality and Healing, U. of Minnesota) describes her back-
ground as an early advocate of the natural and cooperative food move-
ments. She and Stuart coauthored The Café Brenda Cookbook, named
after one of Langton’s previous restaurants. Healthy, innovative recipes
range from sunflower pesto appetizer spread to fruit kantans, a tradi-
tional Asian dessert. Photographs from the Mill City Farmers Market,
which she helped found, complement the text.
TX943 978-1-59237-868-5
Food & beverage market place 2013, 12th ed.; 3v.
Title main entry.
Grey House Pub., Inc., ©2012 6000 p. $695.00 (pa)
The year 2013 sees publication of the 12th edition of this indispensable
industry reference. The three-volume print edition is for users who prefer
ink & paper to the online version. The first volume covers almost 13,000
manufacturers, including contact information, key executives, and
company data (e.g. estimated annual sales, number of employees, and
brands). Access via product category allows users to find the companies
that make the products they seek. In a similar manner, the second
volume covers equipment, supply, and service providers. The third
volume is devoted to logistics, with sections for brokers, importers and
exporters, transportation firms, warehouse companies, and wholesalers
and distributors. Access to the information is via 19 indexes. This is a
highly practical, well-organized standard reference—a presentation
refined over time for clarity and ease of use.
TX950 2012-000652 978-0-87020-498-2
Bottoms up; a toast to Wisconsin’s historic bars and
breweries.
Draeger, Jim and Mark Speltz. (Places along the way)
Wisconsin Historical Society Press, ©2012 256 p. $29.95
With this color illustrated guide, general readers will tour the state’s
quirkiest, kitschiest, and most historic taverns and breweries. Draeger, an
architectural historian at the Wisconsin Historical Society, and Speltz,
who holds a master’s degree in public history at the University of
Wisconsin-Milwaukee, focus on the most intact and unchanged buildings
and on the evolution of architectural styles. The book begins with an
overview history of Wisconsin bars and the state’s brewing industry,
highlighting their symbiotic relationship, and discussion of the impact of
various historical, political, and social trends, especially Prohibition.
Detailed entries on 70 historic bars and breweries are illustrated with
contemporary color photos and b&w historical photos.
MILITARY & NAVAL SCIENCE
U21 2012-031702 978-0-7864-6837-9
The nature of war; origins and evolution of violent
conflict.
Stempel, Jim.
McFarland & Co., ©2012 213 p. $45.00 (pa)
In his preface, author Stempel, who writes on psychology, human devel-
opment, and warfare, presents a simple question as the focus of his book:
“From where has war come, and what drives its persistence?” The
answer, unsurprisingly, is not at all simple. He marvels that the beings
who consider themselves the most intelligent on earth have not, after
12,000 years or so, learned that cooperation and compromise are far
more suitable strategies for longevity than killing each other. He
addresses the origins of war, its motivations, and other issues to point to
the need for understanding war and ourselves, necessary steps to be
taken before a workable peace is possible.
U22 2012-012706 978-1-61770-041-5
Ethics of 21st century military conflict.
Title main entry. Ed. by E.L. Gaston and Patti Tamara Lenard.
Int’l. Debate Educ. Assn. Pr., ©2012 320 p. $24.95 (pa)
Edited by Gaston (US Institute of Peace) and Lenard (applied ethics, U. of
Ottawa, Canada), this reader explores various issues of the ethics of war,
guided thematically by the conflict between two broad moral frame-
works for approaching the question: consequentialism (or utilitarianism),
–319–
which focuses on the consequences that actions produce, and absolutism
(or deontology), the view that some actions are wrong, absolutely,
because they violate the fundamental rights of individuals. Bringing
together writings by such figures as Thomas Nagel, George F. Kennan,
Michael Walzer, Michael Ignatieff, and Alan M. Dershowitz, the 20 selec-
tions are presented in sections on theories of war, justice in going to war,
justice in conducting war, the ethics of the constitution of fighting forces
(e.g. draftees, mercenaries, drones), and terrorism and torture.
Distributed in the US by Books International.
U33 2012-033872 978-0-7864-6973-4
Greek and Macedonian land battles of the 4th century
B.C.; a history and analysis of 187 engagements.
Ray, Fred Eugene.
McFarland & Co., ©2012 236 p. $45.00 (pa)
Following an earlier volume on the fifth century BC, retired geologist Ray
continues his study of ancient Greek warfare, combining the available lit-
erature with some probabilities to present as accurate an account as pos-
sible. He covers Sparta’s overseas battles and the Corinthian War 400-387;
Chalcidian, Boeotian, and Spartan wars around the Mediterranean Sea
386-360; the rise of Macedonia and the conquest of Greece and sacred,
Persian, and Sicilian wars 359-336; battles in the era of Alexander the
Great 335-324; and battles of his successors 323-301.
U33 978-1-61200-119-7
A storm of spears; understanding the Greek Hoplite at
war.
Matthew, Christopher Anthony.
Casemate Publishing, ©2012 314 p. $32.95
This book by Matthew, who recently completed his doctoral thesis on
which the book is based, offers a detailed account of the hoplites
(spearmen) who fought in the classical Greek armies. The author
describes their individual equipment, abilities, and tactics with the aid
of relatively new disciplines such as reconstructive archaeology and re-
enactment. As a result of those sources and attention to minute detail, he
has been able to extract new information on how the hoplites fought. The
book will attract readers interested in the history of the classical world
and those interested in military history and strategy.
U43 2011-501366 978-1-84383-674-2
The soldier experience in the fourteenth century.
Title main entry. Ed. by Adrian R. Bell et al. (Warfare in history)
The Boydell Press, ©2011 232 p. $90.00
Historians specializing in the Middle Ages, military history, or both
gathered in Reading, Britain in July 2009 to report their research using
archives, as opposed to chronicles, and 10 of the papers have been
reviewed, revised, and expanded for publication here. Among the topics
are military service and the dynamics of recruitment in 14th-century
England, gentry enthusiasm for Edward I’s Scottish campaigns 1296-
1307, Welsh knights of the 14th century, Breton soldiers from the Battle
of the Thirty in March 1351 to Nicopolis in September 1396, and the
English reversal of fortunes in the 1370s and the experience of prisoners
of war. The Boydell Press in an imprint of Boydell & Brewer.
U264 978-0-8179-1524-7
The nuclear enterprise; high-consequence accidents; how
to enhance safety and minimize risks in nuclear weapons
and reactors.
Title main entry. Ed. by George P. Shultz and Sidney D. Drell.
Hoover Institution Press, ©2012 370 p. $24.95
The product of an October 2011 conference at Stanford University’s
Hoover Institution, this work is intended for a non-scientific audience,
although many of the contributors come from technical backgrounds.
The pieces cover a wide range of subjects, from civilian and military
safety concerns to whole sections on economic, regulatory, media, and
public policy issues relating to nuclear weapons and reactors. Editor
Schultz was Secretary of State from 1982-1989 and Drell is professor
emeritus of theoretical physics at Stanford University.
UA23 2012-033419 978-0-8157-2382-0
Star spangled security; applying lessons learned over six
decades safeguarding America.
Brown, Harold and Joyce Winslow.
Brookings Institution Press, ©2012 277 p. $28.95
Former Secretary of Defense Harold Brown recounts his experiences
working for President Carter on the cruise missile program, the Iranian
hostage crisis, and treaty negotiations. In addition to documenting his
career, Dr. Brown shares his thoughts on current relations with the
Chinese government, recommends abolishing the separate civilian
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
secretaries in the military department, and voices his opinion on national
issues. A fascinating read for any student of American history and
government affairs.
UB357 2012-013459 978-1-61614-553-8
The invisible wounds of war; coming home from Iraq
and Afghanistan.
Bouvard, Marguerite Guzmán.
Prometheus Books, ©2012 245 p. $18.00 (pa)
Guzmán Bouvard (Women’s Studies Research Center, Brandeis U.)
examines the less-visible effects of war on US soldiers returning from
Iraq and Afghanistan—the psychological and emotional wounds—that
impact their lives and their families. Coverage includes an overview of
the Iraq and Afghanistan wars; adjusting to everyday American life
while also reliving war experiences; challenges for veterans’ families; the
high veteran suicide rates and military-spouse suicide; the lack of
adequate healthcare for combat stress; hidden grief; and bridging the
chasm between military and civilian worlds to enhance societal
understanding of the toll taken on veterans and their families. Academic
but accessible to the general reader, the text takes no position on the wars
themselves. Guzmán Bouvard encourages all Americans to honor and
respect America’s latest veterans by better understanding their unique
challenges.
UB369 2012-025159 978-0-313-38349-6
The Praeger handbook of veterans’ health; history,
challenges, issues, and developments; 4v.
Title main entry. Ed. by Thomas W. Miller.
Praeger, ©2012 1572 p. $257.00
The 100 contributors to this four-volume set are present and past
members of the Department of Veterans Affairs and other veterans’
advocacy organizations, as well as scientists, practitioners, researchers,
and clinicians working at universities and public and private institutions.
Volume 1 traces the history of veterans’ healthcare in various eras and
offers international comparisons on veterans’ healthcare. Volume 2
describes healthcare programs for specific conditions, such as neuro-
logical problems and chiropractic care, and looks at care for veterans
with special needs, such as Native Americans with PTSD, female vet-
erans, and former prisoners of war. Volume 3 reviews mental health and
mental illness research, describes major clinical centers, and surveys best
practices for rehabilitation and treatment of veterans. The final volume
outlines future directions in veterans’ healthcare, looking at areas such
as dedicated centers for veterans’ healthcare, telehealth applications, and
a national suicide hotline. Editor Miller is affiliated with the Lexington
Veterans Affairs Medical Center.
UG485 978-1-4398-9275-6
Design engineer’s handbook.
Richards, Keith L.
CRC Press, ©2013 358 p. $129.95
Retired now after 55 years as a mechanical engineer in a number of dif-
ferent fields from machine tools to aerospace, Richards shares the fruits
of his experience with student design engineers who have left academic
studies and need a handy reference. Some of the topics do not match
standard textbooks and curricula, he says, but they are ones that he has
found useful and in some cases critical. Among the topics are beams,
limits and fits, the design and analysis of helical compression springs
manufactured from round wire, fatigue and fracture, and geared
systems.
UG1103 2011-381124 978-0-309-16275-3
Evaluation of U.S. Air Force preacquisition technology
development.
National Research Council.
National Academies Press, ©2011 134 p. $33.75 (pa)
This volume presents the report of a committee appointed by the
National Research Council to study the optimal ways for the US Air Force
“to utilize existing policies, processes, and resources to properly doc-
ument and execute pre-program of record technology development
efforts, including opportunities to facilitate the rapid acquisition of revo-
lutionary capabilities and the more deliberate acquisition of evolutionary
capabilities.” After reviewing current practices in the Air Force and
current examples of government and industry best practices, they present
recommendations on requirement expectations, the need for an organi-
zation-level science and technology strategy, funding and business prac-
tices, assessment of technology readiness levels, parallel development of
technologies and weapons systems, government-industry collaboration,
and the development planning workforce.
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
UG1242 2012-014112 978-1-119-97866-4
Introduction to UAV systems, 4th ed.
Fahlstrom, Paul Gerin and Thomas James Gleason. (Aerospace)
John Wiley & Sons, ©2012 280 p. $120.00
This introduction is for newcomers to the field of unmanned aerial
vehicle (UAV) systems, but also for experienced specialist members of the
community who would like a broad look at the whole field. The
treatment is based on standard engineering texts and original experience,
and should be accessible to college freshmen and both technical and non-
technical people working in the field. It is not suitable as a text in an
introductory course. After introductory material, it covers the air vehicle,
mission planning and control, payloads, data links, and launch and
recovery.
UG1310 2012-024643 978-1-4200-8313-2
Advances in missile guidance, control, and estimation.
Title main entry. Ed. by S.N. Balakrishnan et al. (Automation and
control engineering)
CRC Press, ©2013 682 p. $159.95
Intended for engineers, the 15 chapters in this collection describe the
design of missile autopilots over the whole flight envelope of Mach
number and altitude, different approaches to homing guidance, and the
practical implementation of guidance laws. An introduction to particle
filters for tracking and guidance describes the principles behind the
basic particle filter algorithm and presents an example involving mul-
tiple spurious objects. Other topics include higher-order sliding modes,
the polynomial eigenstructure assignment approach, differential game-
based interceptor missile guidance, optimal guidance laws with impact
angel control, and a command to line-of-sight (CLOS) guidance system.
UG1310 2012-011953 978-1-60086-908-2
Missile design and systems engineering.
Fleeman, Eugene L. (AIAA education series)
Amer. Inst. of Aeronautics & Astronautics, ©2012879 p. $114.95
Having worked for the US government, for defense contractors, and in
academia, Fleeman now lectures internationally on missile systems. Here
he presents a textbook for aerospace engineering students and
instructors, systems analysts, system engineers, and others engaged in
developing missile systems and technology. He covers aerodynamics,
propulsion, weight, and flight performance considerations in the missile
design and system engineering process; measures of merit and launch
platform integration/system engineering; sizing examples and sizing
tools; and the development process. This is an expansion of his 2006
second edition of his Tactical Missile Design to put more emphasis on
system engineering.
UH33 2012-021386 978-0-87842-593-8
The great bicycle experiment; the army’s historic Black
Bicycle Corps, 1896-97.
Moore, Kay.
Mountain Press, ©2012 86 p. $12.00 (pa)
In this thin volume, Moore (teacher education, California State U.) offers
a brief history of the Army’s experiment in Montana with a bicycle-based
army unit, known as the Black Bicycle Corps. It only lasted a year, even
though it was in many ways considered a success, and ended up proving
people could bicycle across the continental US. The Corps drew on the
segregated Buffalo Soldier units and Moore examines racism in the army
and the Corps’ legacy. Nearly every page presents a large photograph and
the writing is geared toward a younger audience.
VA400 2012-397980 978-1-896440-67-5
Canadian maritime security in an age of climate change;
the away game.
Gillis, Matthew. (New issues in security; no. 6)
Ctr/Foreign Policy Studies, ©2012 128 p. $15.00 (pa)
Gillis, who is not further identified, takes the 2010 centennial of the
Canadian Navy to examine what climate change could mean for security
on and around the world’s oceans, how it will affect Canada’s maritime
security interests beyond those relating to Arctic sovereignty, and how
Canada in general and the Navy in particular should prepare to mitigate
or respond to the impacts. The essay is not indexed. The Centre for
Foreign Policy Studies is at Dalhousie U., Canada.
VA653 2012-010791 978-1-906876-27-2
Maritime strategy and national security in Japan and
Britain; from the first alliance to post-9/11.
Title main entry. Ed. by Alession Patalano.
Global Oriental, ©2012 255 p. $100.00
The international scholars who contributed to this book primarily
–320–
address what it means strategically to be an island nation. Focusing on
the history of Japan and the UK since an initial alliance in 1902 to the
post-911 era, the authors illustrate the importance of sea power to both
countries and the benefits it brought and the actions it enabled. Chapters
are grouped under three headings: strategic partnership and military
rivalry across the oceans, strategic priorities from the Cold War to Iraq,
and maritime strategy in an interdependent world. The book will attract
readers interested in Anglo-Japanese relations, naval military history, and
East Asian defense and security. An extensive listing of abbreviations and
acronyms is included. Editor is Patalano (war studies, Kings College, UK).
Global Oriental is an imprint of Brill.
VD59 978-1-85759-700-4
Royal river; power, pageantry and the Thames.
Starkey, David.
Scala Publishers, ©2012 292 p. $39.95 (pa)
Guest curator Starkey’s text was produced to accompany an exhibition by
the same name, held at the National Maritime Museum, Greenwich,
London, from April to September 2012, in celebration of the 75th
anniversary of the opening of the Museum and as a contribution to the
events in recognition of Queen Elizabeth’s Diamond Jubilee. Together, the
exhibit and catalog explore the many roles the River Thames has played
in royal, national and civic ceremony and celebration, as well as its
everyday role as a working river. The catalog features full-color photo-
graphs of the 240-plus objects from the exhibit with detailed explanatory
captions, and seven essays by ten leading scholars exploring key themes
in depth. Distributed in North America by ACC Distribution. Oversize:
9.5x11”.
VD59 2011-278345 978-1-84383-689-6
The social history of English seamen, 1485-1649.
Title main entry. Ed. by Cheryl A. Fury.
The Boydell Press, ©2012 350 p. $115.00
Only in the past few decades have scholars of British maritime expansion
turned their attention away from the traditional topics of events and par-
ticipants at the top and fully engaged with investigating the social history
of the average seafarers who crewed the vessels that laid the foundations
of the British Empire. This volume is presented by Fury (history, U. of
New Brunswick, Canada) as a stock-taking of those historians’ efforts,
containing nine chapters that provide summaries of current findings in
specific areas of investigation into the social history of Tudor and early
Stuart seamen. Topics discussed include the pioneering work of historian
G.V. Scammell, Tudor merchant seafarers in the early Guinea trade, the
religious shipboard culture of 16th and 17th-century English sailors,
health and health care at sea, the relief of English disabled sailors,
seamen’s wives and widows, and Jacobean piracy. Boydell Press is an
imprint of Boydell & Brewer.
VM395 978-1-84889-151-7
Jeanie Johnston; sailing the Irish famine tall ship.
English, Michael.
The Collins Press, ©2012 272 p. $47.95
The original Jeanie Johnston safely carried 2500-plus Irish emigrants to
the US and Canada in 1847. The Jeanie Johnston replica ship was built in
Kerry and launched in 2000 to commemorate Ireland’s Famine. From
2002 to 2008, it sailed around Ireland to Britain, France, Spain, and the
US and Canada. Dublin-based advertising and design professional
English first sailed on the Jeanie Johnston in 2005. He applies his pho-
tography skills in documenting the replica ship through full-page full-
color and b&w images. The text also includes a historical background
essay by Helen O’Carroll, curator of the Kerry County Museum; an essay
on building the replica by Fred Walker, naval architect to the UK’s
National Maritime Museum; and a captain’s log by Michael Coleman,
former master of the replica, about sailing a tall ship today. Distributed
in the US by Dufour Editions. Oversize: 9x11.25”.
PUBLISHING, LIBRARY SCIENCE, BIBLIOGRAPHY
Z124 2012-932514 978-0-500-51646-1
Graphic design before graphic designers; the printer as
designer and craftsman, 1700-1914.
Jury, David.
Thames & Hudson, ©2013 312 p. $60.00
This beautifully produced book gives readers a vivid awareness of
graphic design (mostly in the English-speaking world) from 1700-1914.
Because this is graphic design before the trade of graphic designers
developed, it has often been ignored by contemporary teachers, students,
–321–
and professionals. The almost 800 illustrations here, most in color,
showcase the design creativity and distinctive styles of print jobbers;
these form a convincing argument that contemporary visual design stu-
dents should study and learn from their work. The book fills a gap for
design education, as well as providing a lavish and thoroughly enjoyable
time for any reader who loves good design or is interested in the history
of the early modern era. The best of the famous fruit-crate labels and
seed packages are here, but so are original and distinctive fonts and
layouts in handbills, posters, and other daily ephemera showing striking
and skillful text and text+graphic combinations, sometimes with a very
modern edge. As the book’s cover cleverly indicates, there’s a lively
diversity behind the William Morris wallpaper of our imagination of
these times. The quality of images and their reproduction here is
excellent. The writer, David Jury, is the editor of the professional journal
TypoGraphic and the author of previous books on typography and let-
terpress printing. Though a design professional, he writes here with a
vivid sense of history, explaining new technologies and political and cul-
tural changes that drove design looks in each era. His prose is clear, jour-
nalistic, and enjoyable for general readers. Professionally, Jury speaks for
the printer as designer, but designers in all areas will benefit by learning
a design vocabulary that is quickly becoming the neo-Victorian cutting
edge.
Z250 978-0-500-24141-7
New modernist type.
Heller, Steven and Gail Anderson.
Thames & Hudson, ©2012 267 p. $50.00
As a book on new typography with a modernist feel, this volume has a
strong design message: postmodernism looks like the 1960’s, only
cleaner. In fact, when it’s not looking like a Saul Bass title sequence, it
often looks a lot like Helvetica. Readers seeking organic looks will not
find them here; when the Blob of psychedelia looms, or a Marimekko
bird might threaten, the 1920s and 1930’s consistently provide construc-
tivist, dadist, or futurist antidotes. These evoke quite different cultural
politics, but all have nice clean edges. For readers whose vision of self-
conscious modernism begins and ends with Andy Warhol or 50’s retro
kitsch, this book will be an eye-opener. Both editors hail from the School
of Visual Arts (NY); Gail Anderson is a former senior art director at
Rolling Stone, and Steven Heller is one of the more influential visual
designers of our era, with more than a hundred published books.
Readers studying or practicing design, particularly typographical design,
advertising, or book arts, will find this book a useful resource. This is a
vital book for visual artists who integrate text in their work; the editors
are interested in the balance of artistic success and readability. There are
hundreds of easy to grasp, successful examples of integrated and
readable image/text in a variety of visual styles. The book’s production
values are high, and general readers interested in visual design will find
it a fun romp through the 20th century.
Z473 2012-028712 978-0-8156-1006-9
Radical chapters; pacifist bookseller Roy Kepler and the
paperback revolution.
Doyle, Michael.
Syracuse U. Press, ©2012 427 p. $29.95
Soon after independent bookstore Kepler’s Books and Magazines opened
in the San Francisco Bay Area in 1955, it became a meeting place for
counterculture figures and a hot bed of radicalism in the 1950s and ‘60s.
This narrative biography for general readers chronicles a generation of
radicalism, resistance, and idealism through the life of the store’s
founder, Roy Kepler. Author Doyle, a reporter in Washington, DC,
describes Kepler’s work with the store and the roots of his pacifism and
antiwar activism, based on the author’s personal interviews with Kepler,
which began in the 1980s, and on interviews with Kepler’s son more
recently. The book includes b&w personal photos and a few historical
photos of civil rights and Vietnam War demonstrations.
Z483 2012-012385 978-1-59403-659-0
A matter of principle.
Black, Conrad.
Encounter Books, ©2012 598 p. $19.99 (pa)
In 2004 Black was the largest shareholder of Ravelston, Argus, and
Hollinger when he was accused of fraud and fired from his position as
chairman of Hollinger Inc., which became the Sun-Times Media Group
in 2005. This autobiographical account describes in Black’s own words
the story of his highly publicized prosecution, conviction, imprisonment,
and appeal and is studded with powerful people, including Margaret
Thatcher, Rupert Murdoch, George W. Bush, and Henry Kissinger. Black
maintains his innocence throughout the book. Two inserts of b&w pic-
tures are included.
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
Z657 978-1-84966-892-7
Expurgating the Classics; editing out in Greek and Latin.
Title main entry. Ed. by Stephen Harrison and Christopher Stray.
Bristol Classical Press, ©2012 224 p. $120.00
British classicists explore the deliberate removal from classical texts of
passages deemed offensive by later editors. The practice was unknown
but to its perpetrators until the Renaissance, when ancient manuscripts
began surfacing and were found to differ from the transmitted versions.
Among the topics are Aristophanic expurgation and its phallacies, Greek
epigram in the late 19th and early 20th centuries, anxiety and expur-
gation in the publication of Lucretius’ De rerum natura, modifying
Martial in 19th-century Britain, and sexual and scatological references in
the Loeb Classical Library. Distributed in the US by International
Publishers Marketing.
Z665 978-1-78190-060-4
Advances in librarianship; contexts for assessment and
outcome evaluation in librarianship.
Title main entry. Ed. by Anne Woodsworth and W. David Pennimnan.
(Advances in librarianship; v.35)
Emerald Group Publishing, ©2012 184 p. $114.95
Administrative, research, teaching, and practicing librarians begin with
broad views of assessment and evaluation in the profession, then turn to
needs analysis and results, and educational case studies. They cover
responding to external pressure in the Institution of Museum and Library
Services’ Measuring Success Initiative for the grants to states, the New York
State Library’s outcome-based evaluation training initiative, applying out-
comes evaluation to library services for children, a successful assessment
in a medium-sized academic library, using needs assessment to develop
research and grant support services, the relationship between collection
strength and student achievement, assessing learning outcomes using
electronic portfolios, and comparing faculty self-assessment and student
opinion in evaluating teaching in online programs. Distributed in North
America by Turpin Distribution.
Z666 2012-016610 978-1-59884-794-9
FRSAD; conceptual modeling of aboutness.
Zumer, Maja et al. (Third millennium cataloging)
Libraries Unlimited, ©2012 121 p. $45.00 (pa)
Library and information scientists Zumer (U. of Ljubljana, Slovenia),
Marcia Lei Zeng, and Athena Salaba (both Kent State U., Ohio) use the
Functional Requirements for Subject Authority Data (FRSAD) model to
provide an overview of modeling of aboutness in general and to compare
the model with other models that have emerged recently, as well as to
demonstrate its applicability for future implementations. They write for
any library and information professional who wants to have a better
understanding of the model and the other two Functional Requirements
for Bibliographic Records (FRBR) family models.
Z666 978-81-7000-664-0
Information architecture; a multidisciplinary text book.
Saravanan, T.
Ess Ess Publications, ©2012 188 p. $33.00
Saravanan (library and information science, Annamalai U., Tamilnadu,
India) explains ways of organizing data, for readers who are familiar
with the UNESCO-developed database WinISIS, which he uses here, or
some other high-level database program. He emphasizes how develop-
ments in information technology can be used in organizing conferences
and seminars. His topics are database structure, data organization,
reports organization, and problem identified. Distributed in the US by
ISBS.
Z668 978-81-7000-676-3
Essays on library and information science education.
Tariang, Bikika Laloo.
Ess Ess Publications, ©2012 82 p. $15.00
Tariang (library and information science, North Eastern Hill U., India)
discusses key aspects of library and information science education, from
teaching methods and tools to teacher qualifications and qualities. She
draws on her experiences to address preparing students for the digital
future, teaching resources and competence, the role of information and
communication technology, the teacher’s role in motivating information
fluency skills, relationships with students, teaching practicum, teaching
vs. research and publication, and bridging theory and practice in librar-
ianship. There is no index. Distributed in the US by ISBS.
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
Z669.7 978-1-78052-832-8
Social information research.
Title main entry. Ed. by Gunilla Widén and Kim Holmberg. (Library
and information science)
Emerald Group Publishing, ©2012 282 p. $114.95
European, Australian, and US information scientists explore social infor-
mation from perspectives of users and social construction, context, and
context. Among the topics are the Shakespearean social sense-making of
theater professionals, students’ group work attitudes and experiences in
collaborative wiki writing, social tagging in support of cancer patients’
information interaction, information phenomena in game-related social
media, using social media to extend and enrich practice in the infor-
mation sector, and recommendations for social networking in academia.
Distributed in North America by Turpin Distribution.
Z672 978-3-11-029275-6
Libraries in the early 21st century; v.2: An international
perspective.
Title main entry. Ed. by Ravindra N. Sharma. (Libraries in the early
21st century; v.2)
De Gruyter, ©2012 551 p. $182.00
This second volume of Libraries in the Early 21st Century reports on the
progress of libraries around the world in delivering 21st century infor-
mation services to their populations. All of the nearly 30 chapters are sep-
arately authored and organized into two sections. The first five look at
librarianship from an international perspective, the online computer
library center, the international federation of library associations and
institutions, and consider the impact of information technology on devel-
oping countries’ library services as well as those of the European Union.
The rest of the text consists of 10-40 page reports on the development of
libraries in countries from all five continents. Many present historical
background on libraries in the country, the context of library devel-
opment, and the specific progress of particular library sectors—public,
academic, special and school libraries. Some chapters focus on or include
sub-sections on information technology. Chapters contain their own bib-
liographies. The contributors are librarians, library and information sci-
entists, government researchers, and academics in related fields with
research-interests in libraries.
Z674 978-81-7000-674-9
Facets of library and information science.
Raju, A.A.N.
Ess Ess Publications, ©2012 249 p. $42.00
This work collects 22 essays written by author Raju (Osmania University,
Hyderabad, India) over a period of 35 years. Some selections are from
journals and some were presented as papers at various conferences and
workshops. Essays in the first part of the book deal with the preservation
of documents and the National Knowledge Commission’s recommenda-
tions on public library services. Part 2 offers an international perspective
of library classification, discussing developments in UDC IME 1993 and
treatment of Fine Arts and Indology in UDC and CC. Part 3 considers the
LIS curriculum in Indian library schools, and part 4 LIS research. Part 5
explains Indian legislation related to bibliographical control over Indian
publications, and part 6 examines other issues. The book is distributed
in the US by ISBS.
Z674 2012-010063 978-0-8389-1162-4
Learning from libraries that use WordPress; content-
management system best practices and case studies.
Jones, Kyle M.L. and Polly-Alida Farrington.
Am. Library Association, ©2013 158 p. $65.00 (pa)
A content management system (CMS) is an application that separates the
tasks of designing and managing a website from the job of adding
content to the website. This guide for library practitioners looks at ben-
efits and drawbacks of WordPress as a web-publishing tool, in the
context of content-management systems. Part 1 explains basics for getting
started with WordPress, and part 2 outlines full-on customization with
themes and plugins. Part 3 presents WordPress ‘recipes’ with tips, tricks,
and plugins. Part 4 offers about 70 pages of real-life experiences by
teachers using WordPress for creating subject guides, first-year seminar
blogs, digital archives, and a virtual school library. In addition to a list
of official WordPress resources, the book also lists blogs, technical books,
user’s guides, community sites, mailing lists, and sources for plugins,
themes, and theme frameworks.
–322–
Z675 978-1-85604-766-1
Digital humanities in practice.
Title main entry. Ed. by Claire Warwick, Melissa Terras and Julianne
Nyhan.
Facet Publishing, ©2012 233 p. $115.00 (pa)
Contributors in information science, library and information studies, and
museum studies offer an introduction to the theory and practice of the
interdisciplinary field of digital humanities: the use of computational or
digital methods in humanities research and the application of human-
ities methods to research into digital objects or phenomena. Special
emphasis is given to the involvement of the public in digital resource cre-
ation and design, and the application of digital technologies to cultural
heritage. Each chapter introduces a thematic area, such as image pro-
cessing or social media, explains why it’s important, considers current
research and practice, and discusses relevant debates and controversies.
International case studies demonstrate partnerships between technical
research and humanities scholarship. Each chapter closes with an
extensive bibliography of print and online resources. Each chapter also
includes QR codes linking to a companion blog with case studies and
other resources. The book includes b&w photos, images, and screenshots
and will be of interest to researchers, librarians, students, and profes-
sionals involved in the digital humanities. The editors are affiliated with
University College London’s Center for Digital Humanities. The book is
distributed in the US by Neal-Schuman.
Z675 2012-019284 978-1-4666-2184-8
Public law librarianship; objectives, challenges, and
solutions.
Selwyn, Laurie and Virgina Eldridge.
Information Science Reference, ©2013 319 p. $175.00
Retired law librarian Selwyn and Eldridge (Grayson County, Texas Law
Library) introduce the little known special library by defining the public
law library, reviewing its history, and discussing its administration and
operations. Unlike, for example general public or academic libraries, they
say, public law libraries do not have a commonly known or clearly stated
duty or obligations, and often find themselves at the whims and mercy
of parent organizations. They cover patron base; governance and organi-
zational structures; general library management; personnel; public rela-
tions; collection development; technology, contracts, and electronic
resources; technical services; and public services.
Z675 2012-016990 978-1-59884-943-1
School library collection development; just the basics.
Stephens, Claire Gatrell and Patricia Franklin. (Just the basics)
Libraries Unlimited, ©2012 70 p. $35.00 (pa)
High school library media specialists Stephens and Franklin focus on the
basic aspects of school library collection development, for new staff
members like aides or clerks, volunteers, technicians, and paraprofes-
sionals. They cover knowing the students, curriculum, and school com-
munity; developing a collection plan; ordering and purchasing; and
maintaining the collection. They include frequently asked questions, lists
of tips, book lists, and sample forms.
Z682 2012-027930 978-1-57387-453-3
The accidental systems librarian, 2d ed.
Engard, Nicole C. and Rachel Singer Gordon.
Information Today, Inc., ©2012 302 p. $29.50 (pa)
This volume, inspired in part by the responses of 192 systems librarians
to a recent online survey, covers a broad picture of the role of the systems
librarian and provides a good foundation to the librarian who may have
just fallen into the role. This second edition covers the latest library uses
of mobile devices, social networks, ebooks and more. Engard (education,
ByWater Solutions) also writes about technology and libraries on her
website, www.web2learning.net.
Z682 978-1-61069-039-3
Adult learners; professional development and the school
librarian.
Harvey, Carl A. II.
Libraries Unlimited, ©2012 77 p. $77.00 (pa)
Harvey, an elementary school librarian, encourages school librarians to
provide professional development to teachers and staff and become
school leaders, in order to thrive in an economy of cutbacks and expand
their visibility. He explains professional development, types, and popular
tools, such as social media; the librarian’s role as a leader; how to align
the library program and professional development with the school
improvement plan; how to identify what to share with teachers; methods
for providing professional development, including groups, virtual tools,
webinars, and instruction; and an example that teaches twenty-first
century tools to educators.
–323–
Z688 2012-022639 978-0-8389-1157-0
Audiobooks for youth; a practical guide to sound
literature.
Burkey, Mary.
Am. Library Association, ©2013 103 p. $45.00 (pa)
Burkey, a Columbus, Ohio teacher, traces the history of talking books
from The Bubble Book series which debuted in 1917. She discusses the
content of these spoken narratives of the written word, their role in
building literacy, production, how to develop and maintain an audiobook
collection that meets users needs, and the digital future (if any) of this
medium. The guide includes reflections by others working in this field,
a lexicon, and recommended reading, but not recommendations for spe-
cific audiobooks.
Z695 2012-020397 978-1-59884-596-9
Demystifying serials cataloging; a book of examples.
Gao, Fang Huang et al. (Third millennium cataloging)
Libraries Unlimited, ©2012 345 p. $65.00 (pa)
This reference for librarians supplies guidelines and examples demon-
strating rules and standards for cataloging serials. Case studies and
chapter practice exercises help librarians understand how to make serials
accessible to users and how the unique features of serials should be
reflected in serials bibliographic descriptions. Illustrated with b&w book
covers and screenshots, the exercises (and answers) illustrate important
concepts such as title changes, corporate body as main entry, serials pub-
lished in different formats, serial uniform titles, and standard numbers
and control numbers.
Z699 2012-023140 978-1-4666-2491-7
Information systems research and exploring social
artifacts; approaches and methodologies.
Title main entry. Ed. by Pedro Isaias and Miguel Baptista Nunes.
Information Science Reference, ©2013 471 p. $165.00
International contributors in industrial design, information and
knowledge management, educational technology, and software engi-
neering look at five approaches for research on information systems: pos-
itivist and deductive approaches, interpretivist and social constructivist
approaches, case study approaches, mixed-methods approaches, and eval-
uation research approaches. Specific topics explored include the role of
national culture in e-commerce trust beliefs, the design of personalized
learning resources for disabled students, online ethnographies, and com-
bining research paradigms to improve poor student performance. Isaias
is affiliated with Portuguese Open University. Nunes is affiliated with the
University of Sheffield.
Z699 2012-005382 978-1-4666-1912-8
Library automation and OPAC 2.0; information access
and services in the 2.0 landscape.
Title main entry. Ed. by Jesus Tramullas and Piedad Garrido.
Information Science Reference, ©2013 228 p. $175.00
Noting the increased importance of Web 2.0 in library services and the
need to move beyond the classic model of library computerization,
Tramullas and Garrido (information science and computers and systems
engineering, U. of Zaragoza, Spain) assemble 10 articles by a group of
scholars from Europe, South Africa, the US, and Singapore. The articles
examine different aspects of the automation of libraries and OPACs 2.0
and the need to address the role, functions, and activities librarians
should perform in the social digital library environment. Including
chapters on tool applications, prototypes, interface analyses, proposals for
analytic indicators, training environments, and XML, contributors discuss
a new model for searching bibliographic information, a prototype for an
OPAC that increases the user’s interaction, the management of metadata
tags in XML, integrating the Solr search engine into VuFind, the evolution
of OPACs in Latin American countries towards 2.0 models, the possibil-
ities of the semantic web, the difficulty of assessing the activity of users
in Web 2.0, personal information management and Web 2.0, and edu-
cation in the 2.0 environment.
Z711 2012-003524 978-0-8389-1084-9
Making sense of business reference; a guide for librarians
and research professionals.
Ross, Celia.
Am. Library Association, ©2013 186 p. $52.00 (pa)
Serving as a primer or refresher, this guide will help readers overcome
business reference phobia. The book assumes familiarity with basic
general reference resources and research strategies, but no previous
knowledge of business terms is required. The book begins with
overviews of the business reference process and the types of free and fee-
based resources used when dealing with business reference questions.
Later chapters delve into specific business areas, offering annotated
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
entries on websites with information for company and industry research,
company finance, investment research, consumer research and mar-
keting/advertising, business and other statistics, international business,
and small businesses. A 50-page Q&A section addresses difficult ques-
tions. Chapter exercises are included. Ross is past chair of the Business
Reference and Services Section of ALA’s Reference and User Services
Association.
Z716 2012-016969 978-0-8389-1134-1
Grassroots library advocacy.
Comito, Lauren et al. (Special reports)
Am. Library Association, ©2012 62 p. $36.00 (pa)
Noting that libraries have been subject to increasing budget cuts since the
2008 economic crisis, Comito, an outreach librarian, et al., who are all
associated with an urban library advocacy organization, show public
librarians how to organize their community to save their libraries and
advocate for support and funding. They explain identifying professional
and organizational limitations and understanding organizational
structure and identity, leadership, and non-profit status. They discuss
defining the organization to the public and communicating, with dis-
cussion of creating a message, connecting with the public online,
working with the press, writing a press release, interviews, marketing,
virtual tools, video, graphics, and social media. Other issues explored
include working with library administration, the board of trustees,
elected officials, and staff and professional groups, and using Web 2.0
tools and e-mail marketing. They also offer strategies for getting active
through events, protests, marches, parties, concerts, town meetings,
speaking engagements, and street art and theater.
Z989 2012-358110 978-1-85607-733-0
Adventures of a bookcollector.
Murray, Philip.
Currach Press, ©2011 154 p. $26.95 (pa)
Irish novelist Dermot Healy introduces this memoir of a bibliophile who
actually reads all the books that he collects. Dr. Murray’s insights into the
book collecting passion are enlivened by anecdotes of his bookstore
jaunts and how he obtained his collection of signed first editions by
sending books to their authors, some of whom became friends.
Distributed in the US by Dufour.
Z1033 2012-010059 978-0-8389-1126-6
Picturing the world; informational picture books for
children.
Isaacs, Kathleen T.
Am. Library Association, ©2013 206 p. $50.00 (pa)
This guide for librarians and teachers begins with background on infor-
mational picture books for children and provides general advice on
choosing them. Annotated entries focus on books for ages 3-10 and offer
a synopses and descriptions. Entries are grouped in categories of home
and school, the natural world, things we make, things we do, the world
of faith and festivals, history, and people around the world today. An
appendix offers a list of awards and best-of-the-year lists mentioned in
the annotations.
Z1037 2012-030256 978-1-61069-332-5
A to zoo; subject access to children’s picture books;
supplement to the 8th ed.
Thomas, Rebecca L. (Children’s and young adult literature reference
series)
Libraries Unlimited, ©2012 198 p. $48.00
Thomas, a retired elementary school librarian who has taught college
courses on literature for children and adolescents, provides public and
school librarians with a supplement to the Eighth Edition of A to Zoo
that lists the most recent fiction and nonfiction picture books for
children in pre-kindergarten to second grade, followed by a bibliographic
guide and title and illustrator indexes. The supplement contains about
1,790 books published in 2010 and 2011 in about 700 subjects. Books are
arranged like the main text, with an alphabetical listing of subjects, fol-
lowed by a guide listing books alphabetically by subject heading and
subheading, then by author and title, and a bibliographic guide to books,
which are presented alphabetically by author and include bibliographic
information.
Z1037 2012-017309 978-0-325-03144-6
Choosing to read; connecting middle schoolers to books.
Kindig, Joan Schroeder.
Heinemann, ©2012 138 p. $23.13 (pa)
Kindig (reading and children’s and adolescent literature, James Madison
U.) shows middle school teachers how to integrate student choice into a
reading program. She outlines principles for identifying books kids will
Reference & Research Book News December 2012
read, why choice will help them meet state standards and developmental
needs, and how to make reading social and meaningful, match books to
kids, prompt discussions, and help develop readers. She includes anno-
tated book lists, such as picture books for older readers, graphic novels,
novels in verse, nonfiction, and books aimed at girls or boys, as well as
short reflections on reading by young adult authors. There is no index.
Z1037 2012-020232 978-1-59884-790-1
Reality rules II; a guide to teen nonfiction reading
interests.
Fraser, Elizabeth. (Genreflecting advisory series)
Libraries Unlimited, ©2012 230 p. $48.00
Fraser, a public librarian in Canada, lists and describes about 450 non-
fiction titles that address the reading interests of teens, to help librarians,
teachers, and media specialists find materials for those interested in non-
fiction. She covers books published since 2007 that were not included in
the first volume and includes the definition of each genre or literature
type (true adventure, true crime, memoirs and autobiographies, biog-
raphy, history, science, math, the environment, sports, personal growth
and identity, how-to books, the arts, and understanding the changing
world), a description of subgenres or themes, and annotations for the
titles, which are arranged alphabetically by author and include publi-
cation information, suggested reading level, awards, keywords, and some
read-alikes. Each chapter includes sections on books to start with and
fiction read-alikes. Books used for schoolwork and those that have been
replaced by online sources, such as dictionaries and encyclopedias, are
excluded.
Z1225 978-0-404-64634-9
Resources for American literary study; v.34.
Title main entry. Ed. by Jackson R. Bryer et al.
AMS Press, ©2011 311 p. $187.50
Scholars of American literature analyze archival material. The topics
include images of Phillis Wheatley, W. D. Howell’s unpublished letters to
J. Harvey Greene, sources and texts of early poems by Edith Wharton,
new information on Hemingway’s “3 very fine weeks” in Constantinople
in 1922, Thomas Wolfe’s revisions of From Death to Morning, and
Tennessee Williams’ unpublished one-act play The Magic Tower. Review
essays look at new releases from the Willa Cather edition, William Carlos
Williams’ correspondence with his brother, and reconsidering Allen
Ginsberg at the end of an epistolary era. Also included are 21 reviews of
recently published books.
Z6621 2001372669 978-90-04-22190-1
Catalogue of Turkish manuscripts in the library of Leiden
University and other collections in the Netherlands; minor
collections.
Schmidt, Jan. (Islamic manuscripts and books; v.3)
BRILL, ©2012 410 p. $196.00
Schmidt (Ottoman studies, Leiden U., the Netherlands) offers a thorough,
and engaging catalog of Turkish manuscripts, fragments, and related
materials in the fourth and final volume cataloging Turkish writings in
the Netherlands. Each collection is presented in a separate chapter, with
an introduction describing its history, and a detailed description of each
work of the collection. Included among the historic fragments in Turkish
are numerous archives, including those of 20th-century figures held in
the International Institute of Social History in Amsterdam, miscellaneous
fragments in the university library in Groningen, and the collections of
the museum of ethnology (Museum Volkenkunde) in Leiden. Of par-
ticular interest is Schmidt’s lengthy summary of the life of Fritz Rudolf
Kraus garnered from the letters of the Kraus archive of the Leiden U.
Library. The volume includes numerous color and b&w plates of
excellent quality.
Z8013 2012-029676 978-0-7864-4984-2
The Forrest J. Ackerman oeuvre; a comprehensive catalog
of the fiction, nonfiction, poetry, screenplays, film
appearances, speeches and other works, with a concise
biography.
O’Brien, Christopher M.
McFarland & Co., ©2012 234 p. $45.00 (pa)
Ray Bradbury eulogized Ackerman in 2008 as “the most important
fan/collector/human being in the history of science-fantasy fiction.” In a
reprinted introductory essay, Stephen King relates the early impact that
Ackerman’s magazine, Famous Monsters of Filmland, had on him. Denis
Billows, a fantasy film archivist, provides further insights on
Ackerman’s contribution to the genre. A researcher on early science
fiction and its fans presents a biographical sketch and extensive
bibliography covering works he published, his published/unpublished
writings, and fanzine tributes. Images include photos of him with genre
–324–
luminaries and pulp magazines covers.

Z8368 2011-037166 978-1-4411-9995-9

The works of Graham Greene; a reader’s bibliography
and guide.
Wise, Jon and Mike Hill.
Continuum Publishing Group, ©2012 404 p. $140.00
Wise, a freelance British researcher, and Hill, editor of the newsletter
Greene Quarterly provide a thorough reference to popular British author
Greene (1904-91) incorporating and updating previous ones. It includes
the first full, accurate catalogue of his published writings. The
arrangement is by genre: books; contributions to books; contributions to
newspapers, journals, and magazines; letters; published interviews; films
made of his fiction and films he wrote; and unpublished works.

ZA3075 2010-940312 978-0-495-91377-1

100% information literacy success, 2d ed.
Solomon, Amy et al. (100% success )
Wadsworth Publishing Co., ©2012 232 p. $47.95 (pa)
Solomon, who has experience in career schools, community colleges, and
clinical occupational therapy settings and is an accreditation evaluator, et
al. help college students develop the information literacy skills needed to
succeed in college and the workplace. After discussing the concept of
information literacy and why it is important, they explain determining
the information needed; finding, accessing, evaluating, and organizing it;
and legal, ethical, and communication issues. This edition has updated
case sections and an added review of cases in each chapter; chapter sum-
maries; bulleted highlights in each chapter; links to assessment; new sec-
tions on the components of information literacy, Prezi as an alternative
to PowerPoint, Wikipedia, and digital libraries; revised discussion of
Bloom’s Taxonomy; a revised section on media literacy; an updated dic-
tionary section; new success steps; and updated sections on evaluating
resources, authority, organizing web pages, the use of plagiarism
detection software, and drawing tools.

ZA3075 2012-009915 978-1-4666-1975-3

Design, performance, and analysis of innovative
information retrieval.
Title main entry. Ed. by Joan Lu.
Information Science Reference, ©2013 482 p. $195.00
This work is aimed at researchers, academics, advanced students, and
practitioners using XML stream data processing and concerned with the
design of information retrieval systems in higher education and industry.
International contributors in computer science, software engineering, and
information science report on research in key word search in XML and
XML stream processing technologies, then describe methods for dealing
with large amounts of XML documents generated by legend systems,
focusing on compression without decompression through a system called
XCVQ-QP. Section 3 presents work on automatic mapping of XML docu-
ments into relational databases, focusing on the system MAXDOR, and
section 4 investigates multi-feature query-language-based classification in
image retrieval. Section 5 presents collaborative approaches in business
process management in information retrieval, concentrating on these
methods: Petri-net for analysis of business process modeling methods, pi-
calculus for advanced branching, rule based approaches for process mod-
eling, and WS-CDL. Lu is affiliated with the University of Huddersfield,
UK.

We're always delighted to hear from our readers.

Contact us at (503) 281-9230 or booknews@booknews.com.

–325– Reference & Research Book News December 2012